Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2010 with funding from University of Toronto http://www.archive.org/details/reportsofsurveybO02geol co EDITED BY CONWAY MACMILLAN BULLETIN NO, 9 OF THE SURVEY (BOTANICAL SERIES » 1804-1898 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 4 * POLIS, NIX NEA LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL. The University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn. November Ist, 1897. a Hox. Joux S. PILusBuRY, Sun 1 have the honor to present . vou to the Board of Regents of the University of Minnesota, the first | Sof the Survey and the second volume ofthe Rotana series I am, sir, your obedient servant, Conway MacMILLaN, State Botanist. BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY The HON. JOHN S. PILLSBURY, Minneapolis, The HON. DAVID M. CLouGH, Minneapolis, The Hon The HON The HON The HON The Hon The HON The HON The HON The HON The HON The Governor of the State. Cyrus NORTHROP, LL. D., Minneapolis, The President of the University. . W. W. PENDERGAST, M. A., Hutchinson, The State Superintendent of Public Instruction. . GREENLEAF CLARK, M. A., St. Paul, .S. G. SMITH, St. Paul, Sy . STEPHEN MAHONEY, B. A., Minneapolis, . SIDNEY M. OWEN, Minneapolis, . ALPHONSO BARTO, St. Cloud, . M. R. Topp, Preston, : : . WILLIAM M. LIGGETT, Benson, . A. E. Rick, Willmar, 5 : . ELMER ADAMS, Fergus Falls, - Regent for Life Ex-Officio Ex-Officio Ex-Officio TABLE OF CONTENTS Prefatory note, by THE EDI Ton. On the occurrence of sphagnum atolls in central Minnesota, by CONWAY MACMILLAN..........+.-- Some extensions of plant ranges, by E. P. SHetpon. On the nomenclature of some North American species of Astragalus, by E. P. SHELDON.............+++- List of fresh water algae collected in Minnesota dur- ing 1893, by JOSEPHINE E. TII b ... On the poisonous influence of Cypripedium spectabile and Cypripedium pubescens, by D. T. MAcCDouUGAL, Nitrogen assimilation by Isopyrum biternatum, by F „eee On the morphology of hepatic elaters, with special reference to branching elaters of Conocephalus conicus, by JOSEPHINE E. TIIE JF. Revised descriptions of the Minnesota Astragali, by Synonymy of the North American species of Juncodes, with further nomenclatural notes on Astragalus, ( obo Gaines bce c oe ccntnanesccegsoes Further extensions of plant ranges, by E. P. SHELDON. Determinations of some Minnesota lichens, by W. D. , »» A revision of the Mucoraceae with especial reference to species reported from North America, by RoscoE 1 orc thd tied Sued ae ain bua eee cancacwse nats Revision of the Minnesota grasses of the tribe Hor- deae, by FRANCIS RAMALEY........ . A prelimary list of the North American species of Astragalus, by E. P. SEL DoDo 88s On a new registering balance, by A. P. ANDERSON. On a new electrical auxanometer and continuous „ WE ~ BPe ROBT ccs cw cnckwcncnccvecccess Titles of literature concerning the fixation of free nitrogen by plants, by D. T. MACDOUGAL......... Compilation of records of some Minnesota flowering 1 AVV List of fresh-water algae collected in Minnesota dur- ing 1894, by JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN..............++ vi XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. XXVIII. XXIX. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XXXIX. XL. XLI. XLII. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. The grand period of growth in a fruit of Cucurbita pepo determined by weight, by ALEX. P. ANDERSON... A preliminary list of the mosses of Minnesota, by JOR M. Hormon... evdversanierdaccccccrs A contribution to the bibliography of American algae, by JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN....... Pine was ee a On the genus Cypripedium L., with reference to Min- * nesota species, by HENRIETTA G. Fock Poisonous influence of various species of Cypripedium, DF Di... MA ODIOU GAM cacnd in Lͤ—m„G.x Tree temperatures, recorded by Roy W. SQUIRES.... Some Hepaticae of Minnesota, by JonN M. Howz- Gn . bates > On the distribution of the North American Helvel- lales, by LUCIEN M. UNDER WO A contribution to the physiology of the root tubers of Isopyrum biternatum (RAF.) Torr. and GRAY, by D. T. MaACDOUGARii 6c „„ „ Determinations of plants collected by DR. J. H. SANDBERG, in Northern Minnesota, during 1891, by J. NM. HOLSINGMR ia icine its sab ce devakes +euyeweael Estimation of the changes in dry weight of leaves of Helianthus, by S. THompson and W. W. PEN- TRG AGRE: «onc nan nk cheek peunenee tabdas kaadaees aan - Some Muscineae of the northern boundary of Minne- sota, collected by Conway MacMillan, during 1896, by J. M. HOUZINGRR eo V Additional extensions of 8 ranges, by E. P. %% d ĩͤð— . ͤ Ä List of fresh-water algae collected in Minnesota during 1895, by JOSEPHINE E. TILDE XW... 6 A contribution to the life-history of Pilinia diluta Wood and Stigeoclonium flagelliferum Kg., by JosE- eee nee Pollination and reproduction of Lycopersicum escu- 1é6gtam, by BRUCE Pi Reco ²] ]QüĩB seas sy A re-arrangement of the North American Hyphomy- cetes I, by Roscozk Pounp and FREDERIC E. M e os ane clap ak Me csne sd emicaecuseeiee On the stem-anatomy of certain Onagraceae, by ene wus bucine de \on ep uel seemed A new Hypnum of the section Caliergon, by JoRN M. PL GEZIN GMI. 627 d co eine Contributions to a knowledge of the lichens of Minnesota. I. Lichens of Lake of the Woods, by BRUOW) PERK coos C/ . 8 517 Pe —— =F XLV. a ELV, 1 XIV. XIII. XI vIn. XLIX. LI. TABLE OF CONTENTS. Contributions to a knowledge of the lichens of Minne- sota. II. Lichens of Minneapolis and vicinity, by Bruce FINK... A re-arrangement of the North American Hyphomy- cetes. II, by Roscok Pounp and FrREpDERICc E. CLEMENTS...... V 8 On some mosses at high altitudes, by J. M, Holz- INGER.. TOP eee ee eee eee „„ “see The forces determining the position of dorsiventral leaves, by R. N. Day.. On the genus Coscinodon in Minnesota, by J. M. / 1 Observations on the ferns and flowering plants of the Hawaiian Islands, by A. A. HELUER.............. The phenomena of symbiosis, by ALBERT SCHNEI- ‚—(ͤ—— ? B * 4 Observations on ‘the “distribution of plants along shore at Lake of the Woods, by Conway Mac- ff ̃ —T———— m ˙ 0... The alkaloids of Veratrum, by Gro. B. FRANK- FokrER. 1 „% „% „ „„ 3 323252 „ „%„%%j%%%„ê„ç%V—ẽ r) „„ „„ 1024 LIST OF AUTHORS — —— Anderson, A. P. Ou a new registering balance Anderson, A. P. The grand period of growth in a fruit of Cucur- bita pepo, determined by weight... ; Clements, Frederic E. See Pound, R., and Clements, * E. Day, R. N. The forces determining the position of dorsiventral LOAVES. : iso cecnces . ͤ „ Fink, Bruce. Pollination and reproduction of Lycopersicum es- endet . ̃ . O ievsccike Fink, Bruce, Contributions to a knowledge of the lichens of Minnesota, I. Licheus of the Lake of the Woods. Fink, Bruce. Contributions to the knowledge of the lichens of Minnesota, II. Lichens of Minneapolis and vi- oni. vss sed cdoneccdsodecverded die teakewereduaiun Fox, Henrietta G. On the genus Oypripedium, L., with refer- ence to Minnesota species. ...........-6eeceee otes Frankforter, Geo. B. The alkaloids of Veratrum............ oes Frost, W. D. Determinations of some Minnesota lichens....... * Frost, W. D. On a new electrical auxanometer and continuous een .es e cs capheeenbenaatenae Heller, A. A Observations on the ferns and flowering plants of the Hawatlian Ia. „e Holzinger, John M. A preliminary list of the mosses of Minne- / ˖ ˙ A d ² A ˙ A saenaee Holzinger. John M. Some Hepaticae of Minnesota. Holzinger, John M. Determinations of plants collected by Dr. J. H Sandberg in nortbern Minnesota, during 1891. Hlozinger, John M. Some Muscineae of the northern boundary of Minnesota, collected by Conway MacMillan, RGritig 1G0G. 5 ass „ eee Molzinger, John M. Notes on the moss flora of Minnesota ‘ Holzinger, John M. A new Hypnum of the section Caliergon... Holzinger, John M. On some mosses at high a!titudes......... Holzinger, Joha M. On the genus Coscinodon in Minnesota.... , MacDougal, D. T. On the poisonous influence of Cypripedium spectabile and Cypripedium pubescens............ MacDougal, D. T. Nitrogen assimilation by Isopyrum biterna- MacDougal, D. T. Titles of literature concerning the fixation of free nitrogen by plants.. MacDougal, D. T. Poisonous influenceof various species of Cypri- n A caepeeeene eee MacDougal, D. T. A contribution to the physiology of the root tubers of Isopyrum biternatum, (RAF.) ToRR. and 703 423 1024 81 181 760 TABLE OF CONTENTS. - MacMillan, Conway. Prefatory note Mae Mulan, Conway. On the occurrence of sphagnum atolls in a: . „4 MaclMillau, Conway. Observations on the distribution of plants along shore at Lake of the Woods. Pendergast, W. W. See Thompson, S., and Pendergast, W. Pound, Roscoe. A revision of the Mucoraceae with especial refer- 3 ence to species reported from North America Pound, Roscoe, and Clements, Frederic E. A rearrangement ; of the North American Hyphomycetes, I......... Pound, Roscoe, and Clements, Frederic E. A rearrangement of the North American Hyphomycetes, I. Ramaley, Francis. Revision of the Minnesota grasses of the AEA. Jc aa ink pooped sabendbesvesonseces Ramaley, Francis, On the stem anatomy of certain Onograceae. Schneider, Albert. The phenomena of symbiosis.............-- Sheldon, Edmund P. Some extensions of plant ranges......... Sheldon. Edmund P. On the nomenclature of some North American species of Astragalus Sheldon, Edmund P. Revised descriptions of the Minnesota Astragall .....csccccccccrcsccseceassesesceerecscs 8 Sheldon, Edmund P. Synonymy of the North American species of Juncodes, with further nomenclatural! notes on - Sheldon, Edmund P. Further extensions of plant ranges. Sheldon, Edmund P. A preliminary list of the North American species of Astragalus. Sheldon, Edmund P. Compilation of records of some Minoceota flowering plants.. Sheldon, Edmund P. A study of some Minnesota Mycetozoa... Sheldon, Edmund P. Additional extensions of plant ranges.... Squires, Roy W. Tree temperatures. Thompson, S., and Pendergast, W. W. Estimation of the changes in dry weight of leaves of Helianthus. . Tilden, Josephine E. List of fresh water algae collected in . Minnesota during 18333 Tilden, Josephine E. On the morphology ‘of hepatic elaters, N. with special reference to branching elaters of SS Conocephalus eonicuhunnss cece ee eeees Tilden, Josephine E. List of fresh water algae collected ia N Minnesota during 18911iiui . Tilden, Josephine E. A contribution to the bibliography of BA . „4 * nesota during 1898 q Tilden, Josephine E A contribution to the life history of Pili- F nia diluta Wood and Stigeoclonium flagelliferum a ., . — __- Underwood, Lucien M. On the distribution of North American . %é( mn TH 597 601 XXXI-XXXYV. XXXVI. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XXXIX. LIST OF PLATES Sheldon, E. P. Polygonum rigidulam Swern. Sheldon, E. . Aster longulus Suetp. MacDougal, D. T. Hairs of Cypripedium Tilden, J. E. Elaters of Conocephalus, Tilden, J. E. Elaters of Conocephalus. Sheldon, E P. Laciniaria scariosa (L.) Hitt, var corymbulosa SHELD. Anderson, A, P. A registering balance. Frost, W. D. Ao electric auxanometer. Frost, W. D. A time recorder. Frost, W. D. Auxanometer and time recorder. Anderson, A. P. Growth curves of Cucurbita pepo (Graphic method). Fox, H. G. Distribution of Cypripedium in North America. (Map). Fox, H. G. Cypripedium arietinum R. Br. Fox, H. G. Cypripedium reginae WALT. Fox, H. G. Cypripediom candidum Mön. Fox, H. G. Cypripedium hirsutum MILL. Fox, H. G. Cypripedium parviflorum SALiss. Fox, H. G. Cypripedium acaule Arr. MacDougal, D. T. Isopyrum biternatum. MacDougal), D. T. Anatomy of Isopyrum biter- natum. Sheldon, E. P. Scirpus lacustris LI XN. var. tenui- culmis SHELD. Tilden, J. E. Anatomy and development of Pilinia diluta Wood and Stigeocloniun flagilliferum Ke. Ramaley, F. Anatomy of stem, anogra pallida, Gal- pinsia hartwegii, Kneiffia fruticosa, Kneiffia glauca, Kneiffia pumila, Megapterium missouriensis, Oenoth- era humifusa. ; Ramaley, F. Anatomy of stem, Oenothera humifusa, Oenothera rhombipetala, Oenothera biennis. Ramatey, F. Anatomy of stew, Onagra biennis. Holzinger, J. M. Hypnum cyclophyllotum HolzNekR. Day, R. N. Taraxacum, normal and inverted. Holzinger, J. M. Coscinodon raui, C. wrightii and C. wrightii var. brevis. Heller, A. A. Acrostichum Helleri UNDER W. Heller, A. A. Gymnogramma sadlerioides UNDERW. Heller, A. A. Syntheriama Helleri NASE. Heller, A. A. Astelia menziesiana Su. * LXXVIII, LXXIX, LXXX. LXXXI. TABLE OF CONTENTS. . Heller, A. A. Heller, X. A. Heller, A. A. Heller, A. A. Heller, A. A. Heller, A. * Heller, A. X. MacMillan, C. xi Pipturus Kaualensis HELLEx. Pipturus ruber, HELLER. Pelea cruciata HELLER. Pelea microcarpa HELLER. Euphorbia atrococca, HELLER. Euphorbia rivularis HELLER. Euphorbia sparsifiora HELIxx. Hibiscus waimeae HLLan. Isodendrion subsessilitollum HeLier. Nani(a) pumila HeLien. Nani(a) tremuloides Hetier. Lysimachiopsis daphnoides (A. Gray) Lysimachiopsis Hillebrandii (Hoox.) Cyrtandra Gayana Hever. Gouldia elongata HLLEM . Gouldia sambucina Heiter. Straussia pubiflora HiLvesa. Straussia psychotrioides HeELLer. Cyanea coriacea (A. Gray) HELLER. . Cyanea spathulata HiLLEIR.) HELLER. Cyanea sylvestris HeLien. Lobeliatortuosa HeELLer. Map of the Hawallan Islands. Map of Oahu and Kauai. Strand vegetation on Garden island. Strand vegetation on Oak point. Strand vegetation on Isle aux Sables. Dune vegetation on Isle aux Sables. Dune vegetation on Isle aux Sables. Dune-pool, Isle aux Sables. Morassic shore, Echo bay. Azonal boulder-slope on MacPherson’s Creviced rock and talus formations near Rat Portage, Ont. MacMillan, C. Irregular surfaced-rock formation, near Keewatin, Ont. Mac Millau, C. Island point. Rock and talus formations on Flag MaeMülan, C. Map of Lake of the Woods. 2% ak ee oe 8 ae * Part I, pp. 1-38, Pl. LITT e II. pp. 30-06, Pl. IV. VI. . . . e e in ny bods Ake 5 0 IV, pp. 127-282, H. V- X. seccus eave resnceSene ‘Ve Dp. 228-904, PL XI-XX.. .. . . „ e VI. pp. 205-422....... ee ery ye VII, pp. 423-482, Pl. XXI-XXVII.............. pare VII, pp. 483-600, Pl. XXVIIL XX. . . Apr. 30, 1 IX. pp. 601-702, Pl. XXXI-XXXIXꝝx ............Nov. 30, I X- XI, pp. 703-1044, Pl. XL-LXXXI. ..... . .... Mar u. 18 Sts I. PREFATORY NOTE. ä—ĩT——— — we Bulletins of the I Geological and Natural History Survey olf Minnesota were established under an act of the state legis- @ e approved March 8th, 1887, and entitled An act to extend the work of the geological and natural history survey of the . oF > ra a Pik tte regular report of the Board of Regents, but shall be issued from time to time under the direction of the said state geolo- a Professor N. H. Winchell, state geologist, and was passed in accordance with his recommendations. Later, with the * division of the work of the survey was authorized by the Board of Regents, and in accordance with such action the series of bulletins is opened to botanical and zoological papers which are published under the direction of the respective officers of the survey. It is the intention of the state botanist to publish Bulletin No. 9 in occasional parts until a volume is completed. These parts will be paged continuously and issued in the form of an octavo serial. It is hoped in this way that a regular and speedy means of publishing important preliminary papers bear- ng upon the botanical work of the survey may be provided. 1 ee Pillsbury: A compilation of national and state laws relating to the Univer- | of Manet, op Minneapolis. 1802. II. ON THE OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS | IN CENTRAL MINNESOTA. CONWAY MACMILLAN. Location of the atolls, While at the Gull lake Bio logical Station during the summer of 1893 two interesting 8 ‘4 2 4 . „ es ha) . examples of a peculiar and, I believe, hitherto unrecorded aa peat-moss formation were noted and studied somewhat in de- tail. From their position in the middle of ponds of consider- able size and from their annular shape I have named them sphagnum atolls. Both of the atolls were discovered in the wil- derness of western Cass county, in small lakes or ponds tribu- tary to larger bodies of water. The larger atoll of the two is situated in a pond tributary to lake Whitman. in the n. w. fof — sec. 17, T. 135, R. 29 w. of the 5th meridian. This will be known here as Ballard’satoll. Thesmaller lies in a pond of somewhat less extent, tributary indirectly to the north bay of lower Gull lake, in sec. 22 of the same township. This will be referred to as Anderson’s atoll. From its proximity to the buildings of the biological station, Ballard’s atoll was examined somewhat more particularly and may receive the more extended description. Description of Ballard’s atoll. The pond in which this atoll has been formed is about one hundred and fifty 5 across and almost circular in shape. It is surrounded ex cept for a short distance on the west. by rather n morainic hills, 5075 feet in height. On the west two low bars jut out, leaving a short channel not more than six feetin width, be tate Jdko Whitman: ‘The chakosl Sa choked sith Carex, : 1 ~~ =. ae 1 Typha and Scirpus. The bars and the hills are clothed with an 8 i abundant growth of young hardwood timber, intermixed with coniferous trees and a sparse underbrush. The latter reaches, a on all sides, the edges of the pond. From the tops of the sur- rounding hills, as one looks down upon the pond, Ballard's atoll 5 7 —a ring of green is at once conspicuous and very sharply de- limited. It is about seventy-five feet in diameter and of a uni- ea 5 ian: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 3 2 munication between the waters of the intra- insular lagoon and tmose of the pond outside of the atoll. Measurements of Ballard’s atoll and pond. Measure- ments of the pond in which Ballard’s atoll is situated showed its dimensions to be as given above. The depth of the water is nowhere great. The greatest depth is about twelve feet and this maximum of depth. as is usually the case with the glacial lakes and ponds of Minnesota! is in the middle, __ consequently within the lagoon. At the shore there is no definite beach line. From it the water increases gradually in depth until within about six feet of the outer aspect of the atoll-ring. At this point it measures but about four and one half feet. The transition to the emergent surface of the atoll is therefore somewhat abrupt, but in this character not equaling the still more abrupt shelving off from the inner aspect of the atoll to the maximum depth of the lagoon. No- where outside of the atoll, so far as our measurements indi- cated, was the depth of water half so great as within the - lagoon. The bottom from shore to atoll is very soft, consist- ing of black vegetable muck with a considerable intermixture of decaying sphagnum. Within the lagoon, the decayed _ sphagnum is not so abundantly present. Vegetation of the pond outside of Ballard’s atoll. When observed in the early part of July the waters of the pond pre- sented a considerable though not luxuriant growth of aquatic and semi-aquatic vegetation. The following plants were most - conspicuous: Carex pseudocyperus Linn. var. americana Hochst.—Sedge. Carex lupulina Muhl.—Sedge. Carex retrorsa Schwein.—Sedge. Scirpus fluviatilis (Torr. ) Gray.—Bulrush. IJunceus effusus Lian.—Rush. Tris versicolor Linn.—Fleur de Lis. Potentilla palustris (Linn.) Scop.—Marsh Five finger. Utricularia vulgaris Linn.—Bladderwort. Utricularia intermedia Hayne.—Bladderwort. At one . in the pond a small island had been formed on a a ee 8 fs 4- MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. lished itself, and here and there patches of sphagnum the size. of a dinner-plate were floating on the surface of the water. Three species of sphagnum were present, but these have not yet been specifically determined. In the channel through when 8 the pond drains into lake Whitman, as noted above, Typha lati- folia Linn. (cat-tail) was observed, but elsewhere it was want — ee ; ing in this pond, though a very common aquatic of the region * in general. ig Vegetation of Ballard’s atoll. The plants established upon the atoll itself were, however, very different, and in the case ot 6 one plant highly remarkable. When seen from the shore, early — * in July, the atoll was aflame with the crimson flowers of Sar- a racenia purpurea Linn.—the side-saddle flower, or as more ey. commonly termed in Minnesota, the pitcher-plant. Mingled 12 with the red, and scarcely less abundant, were the white and cottony inflorescences of three different species of Eriophorum (cotton-grass). A careful examination of the atoll, close at hand, showed that the following Anges were established upon it: : cn Scheuchzeria palustris Linn. Carex tenuiflora Wahl.—Sedge. Carex tenella Schkr.—Sedge. oe ae Carex intumescens Rudge.—Sedge. vr te Eriophorum polystachion Linn.—Cotton-grass, Eriophorum gracile Koch.—Cotton-grass. ae Eriophorum vaginatum Linn.—Cotton-grass. 2 * Pogonia ophioglossoides (Linn.) Ker.—Adder's tongue orchis. Limodorum tuberosum Linn. Purple orchis. ae Lyonia calyculata (Linn.) Reich. Kalmia glauca Ait.—Pale laurel. Andromeda polifolia Linn.—Andromeda. Oxycoccus oxycoccus (Linn.) MacM.— Small cranberry. Menyanthes trifoliata Linn.—Buckbean. ie Sarracenia purpurea Linn.—Pitchér-plant. 3 Pe. a sphagnum which had been found in small patches on,, 9 : the atoll. The general texture of the atoll was loose so that one standing anywhere upon it soon sank into the soft and spongy moss up to the knees, Compared with that of 2 surrounding pond it will be seen that the atoll vege is entirely distinct. The most notable plant, from diss a point of view of the plant geographer, is Kalmia glauca Ait. This lo- 15 * 2 vy * 8 5 MacMillan: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 5 . and as yet the only one for 9 this plant, in central Minnesota. It has previously been re- _ ported from the north shore of lake Superior by Messrs. Sandberg. Aiton and Schmidt. The two orchids—Pogonia aud Limodorum—are rare plants in central Minnesota and Eriopho rum vaginatum Linn. is comparatively infrequent. On the atoll there was a distinct arrangement of species which is of interest. Menyanthes trifoliata Linn. was most abundant on _ the outer and inner edges. Kalmia occupied five distinct patches, being abundant in these areas, but not between. The _ Sarracenia and Eriophorum occupied the central position in the a toll-ribbon and sought apparently the firmer substratmu. _ Oxycoccus and Andromeda were sparingly represented. Only a dozen or so plants of Lyonia were observed. 1 General description of Anderson’s atoll. This atoll oc. curs in a small pond tributary to the north bay of lower Gull lake. The pond is barely fifty yards across, with high banks, and the atoll ring is within a foot or two of twenty yards in di- ameter. Its breadth, however, is greater than that of Bal larcd's atoll, being twelve feet on the average from the outer to tte inner aspect. The lagoon, then, is slightly less than fifty _ feet across. The pond-waters outside are clothed with a luxu- riant growth of Panicularia fluitans (Linn.) OK. mingled with _ the following in less abundance: Typha latifolia Linn.—Cat-tail. Potamogeton zosteraefolius Schum.—Pondweed. Sagittaria sagittaefolia Linn.—Arrow-head. Phragmites phragmites ( Linn.)Karst.—Reed grass. _ Polygonum emersum ( Mx.) Britt.—Smartweed. Utricularia intermedia Hayne. —Bladderwort. __. The water of the pond was shallow, averaging four feet, just outside of the atoll-ring. The vegetation of the atoll itself, except for the presence of the same three species of Sphagnum and a very abundant growth of Limodorum, differed entirely from that of Ballard’s atoll. The most conspicuous plant was Picea mariana (Mill.) BS. P. Twenty-seven young trees of this species—the black spruce—had established themselves upon the atoll. The largest was but four and one-half feet in height, while the smallest noted was not over eight inches. These trees, evenly distributed, occupied the middle of the _ ribbon of sphagnum and presented a most attractive and unusual appearance, forming as they did an almost perfect * 8 about the open, placid and central lagoon. Next in im- r d 6 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. portance, as giving character to the atoll, was a dense growth of Ledum latifolium Ait.—Labrador tea—which covered almost the entire island. A complete list of plants observed on An- derson’s atoll is as follows: Sphagnum, three undetermined species. Peat- moss. Panicum: crus galli var. hispidum (Muhl.) Torr.—Cock’s- comb grass, (four plants, only.) Gyrostachys romanzowiana (Cham.) MacM.—Tress orchis. Limodorum tuberosum Linn.— Purple orchis. Cornus canadensis Linn.—Dwarf cornel. Ledum latifolium Ait——Labrador tea. Andromeda polifolia Liun.— Andromeda. Gentiana sp. und.—Gentian. Campanula aparinoides Pursh.—Bellflower. Picea mariana ( Mill.) B.S.P.—Black spruce. Curiously, Sarracenia and Oxycoceus, very commonly found in peat-bogs, did not appear on this atoll—or, at least were not observed. In general the texture of the atoll mass was much firmer than that of Ballard’s atoll. One could stand anywhere upon it without sinking in above the insteps. This was doubt- less due to the firmer interknitting of the roots of Picea and Ledum. The lagoon of this atoll, unlike that of the other, was somewhat invaded with floating vegetation—mostly Utricularia intermedia Hayne, with a few plants of Panicularia. Origin of the atolls. To frame a reasonable explanation of the way in which these sphagnum atolls have developed is not altogether easy, Various hypotheses present themselves, some of which will not be discussed here. That the ponds in which the atolls are formed are certainly not fed by springs indicates that no connection between these peculiar ring-formed masses of sphagnum and the domed or raised peat bogs ? can be as- sumed. Were the atoll-lagoons fed by springs from the bottom it might be supposed that the original form of the sphagnum mass was that of a dome and that through pressure or variation in water level the dome had been broken and thus a depression, occupied by the lagoon, had appeared. This hypothesis would, however, be rendered untenable by the greater depth of the lagoon than of the surrounding pond. Nor would it be clearly apparent why the submergence of the region outside of the atoll—postulated by such an hypothesis—should have taken place. 2. Ganong, W. F. On raised peat-bogs in New Brunswick. Bot. Gaz. 16: 1232 1891. . a N r a a 5 # am a f 3 ere Teal ; » MacMillan: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 7 2 3 of changes in pond level. The explanation of i the presence of sphagnum atolls may be derived from assumed Changes in level of the pond water, and indeed their presenee may, conversely, be held to indicate or to demonstrate fluctua tons in the pond level. If it be possible to conceive that in tmese two atoll-producing ponds there has been, during the Course of years, a gradual diminution in size followed by a rather rapid increase in diameter and depth, I believe the for- mation of the atolls would become a phenomenon readily com- prehensible. It might be shown that the sequence of events Was somewhat as follows: The ponds through those gradual and rather complicated changes in drainage, rate of silt-depo- N sition, annual rain fall, bottom physiognomy and evaporation Which are known to affect the dimensions of bodies of fresh __-water in a glacial area, slowly diminished in size until their Sghore lines were approximately coincident in position with the ' immer aspect of the modern atoll ring. The whole diameter of the pond, at this stage of its development as a geographical r teature, would have been approximately equal to the diameter pot the present intra insular lagoon. Concomitantly with such diminution in size, doubtless extending over a term of years, vegetation of the shoreward area would have established itself im characteristic zones*. The littoral flora and the submerged plants just outside the shores would have formed a loose turf Uning the edges of the pond. This turf would have become gradually more solid as it extended farther landward and would at a little distance from the water's edge have become modified in character and in vegetation, giving a foot- hold for plwKants of larger growth. It is not imperative to assume that tis shore-lining formation was necessarily of a sphagnum type, although in fact it might very well have been of such a nature. When, subsequently to this epoch of gradual diminu- tion, the ponds began to increase again, the effect of the rise in level of the water was to detach from the shore a ring of the Ioose littoral turf and this mass of vegetation with its attend- ant soil, buoyed up at first as a circular floating bog, appears 23 do. day as the characteristic sphagnum-atoll. That the atolls ‘a should be of such regular width, varying but a foot or two on ule any line from outer to inner aspect, indicates the regularity of slope, on all sides, of the pond-bottom towards the shore. Ap- a8 parently the line along which the floatable portion of the shore- 3. Magntn, Ant. Recherch. sur la vegetation des Lacs du Jura. Rev. Gen. de Botan. 8 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. vegetation separated from the firmly anchored portion was very nearly concentric with the shore line itself. Having, by — its rise, thus detached a floating bog differing from the innu- merable other floating bogs of the Minnesota lakes only in its regular and annular outline, the pond continued to increaseand _ spread over the greater part of its original bed. This increases in size left the annular bog far out in the waters of the pond which had formed it by its fluctuations in level, and as the mass of vegetation and soil became thoroughly saturated with the water below, its character may gradually have changed until only the sphagnum plants retained vitality, Generations of these, succeeding each other contributed to the weight of the ring and finally pressed it down upon the bottom of the pond, forming the anchored atoll of the present. As the texture of the atoll became firmmer—at first along a line about equi-distant from its outer and inner faces—new plants estab- lished themselves, their seeds and fruits having been carried there by the winds and by birds, or having perhaps lain dor- mant a long time after the original detachment of the bog. Ballard’s atoll. with its Sarracenia, Eriophorum and Kalmia vegetation and its spongy texture appears to be less fully de- veloped than Anderson's with its firmer structure and its growth of Ledum and Picea. Both. however, might have been formed synchronously, but the smaller, situated in the shallower pond might be supposed to have developed its peculiarities more rapidly than the larger. Fluctuations in lake and pond levels. Such fluctuations in the level of ponds and lakes are by no means unknown“, and may very properly be assumed in the case of the two ponds in question. Mr. Warren Upham very kindly calls my attention to the remarkable case of Stump lake in North Dakota as evi- dence, and with his permission I offer here, from his forth- coming work on the glacial lake Agassiz, a somewhat extended quotation, the whole of which has direct bearing on the mea r discussed in the present paper: „Devil's lake and Stump lake, situated near together in North Dakota, were found by my levelling in August, 1887, re-. aoe spectively 1,432 and 1,417 feet above the sea. Devil's lake at - tains a maximum depth of 75 or 80 feet in the eastern portion of its broadest area, and the northeast arm of Stump lake is said to be in some places 100 feet deep. Both lakes are noc 4. Whittesly, Charles. On Fluctuations of Level in the North American La kes ae Smithson. Contr. Knowl. 12: pp. 25. 1860. 4 * nac llllan: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 9 Vithout outlets, but distinct beach lines show that since the re- cession of the ice of the Glacial period they have been raised nearly 25 feet above the present level of Devils lake, being then confluent, with an outlet from the southwestern area of Stump lake, southward to the Sheyenne. Devil's lake shows evidence of having attained about the year 1830, a level sixteen feet higher than its low stage in 1559, reaching at or near the former date to the line that limits the large and dense timber of its bordering groves. Below that Une are only smaller and seattered trees, of which Captain E. E. Heerman informed me that the largest found by bim and cut a few years ago had fifty-seven rings of annual growth. Within the twenty-five years since the building of Fort Totten, this laue has fallen nine or ten feet; and it has fluctuated four feet, under the influence of the changes in the average precipitation ot rain and snow during the past dozen years. 7 It is also known that these lakes have stood continuously lower than now, at least by several feet, during a long period, gufficient for the growth of large forests on the shores of Stump lake, and of the north and south Washington lakes and lake Ooe, in T. 149, R. 63, for this is proved by submerged logs and _ stumps, the latter standing rooted in the soil where they grew. Many of these logs and stumps have been hauled out of the _ southeastern bay of Stump lake by the neighboring farmers tor use as fuel. This prolonged epoch of comparative desicca- tion may have coincided with the more arid conditions in the Great Basin, which as shown by Professor I. C. Russell, ap- pear to have entirely dried up Pyramid, Winnemucca and other lakes of Nevada about three hundred years ago“ From the case of Stump lake an analogy may be derived for wee ponds in Cass county where the atolls have been noted. It is probable, however, that no such lapse of years need be de- maanded for the periodic diminution and increase of these ponds, as is indicated by the Stump lake and Devil's lake phe- - nomena described above. Indeed, I am not clear that the sud. den rise in the water was not coincident with the completion of mee lumbermen's dam across Gull river, the outlet of Gull lake. _ This I am informed was built about fourteen years ago. By itt the level of the water in Gull lake itself has been maintained Sometimes as much as eight feet above its original and normal level. It is a question, however, whether the time that has 1 Russell: Geological History of Lake Lahontan. U. S. Geol. Surv. Monog. xi. . pp. 223-237, 52. Compare also G. K. Gilbert: Lake Bonneville, Monog i p. 258. 10 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. elapsed since the completion of this dam would be at all sum. cient for the development of such an atoll as that of Anderson. The growth of Picea would perhaps indicate a greater age 3 than this hypothesis would permit. I was at first inclined to think that the fact of lake Whitman being not directly con- = nected with the Gull lake chain, but emptying into a rapid in- 5 let stream of Gull lake, was sufficient to disprove the hypothe. __ sis that the dam on Gull river could have at all effected — aration of the atoll-rings, but Mr. Upham in conversation expresses the opinion that even a disconnected lake in the neighborhood of one, the level of which had been increased by a dam across its outlet, might vary in level through changes in the saturation plane of the surrounding soil. Ballard's atoll ey could scarcely be connected with the changes in level of Gall lake except upon the assumption of such modifications in the general saturation plane of the district. From the facts at hand neither Mr. Warren Upham nor the writer is inclined to % attribute the atoll-formations to the artificial increase in the level of Gull lake and its tributaries. It is however a tenable hypothesis and should it be the correct one furnishes a new oi and highly interesting example of a method of plant-distribu- tion and the appearance of a unique plant-physiognomie feature 7 through the modification of natural conditions, as a result of human activity. Particular conditions of atoll formation. It is evident that the mere fact of decrease in the level of a pond, followed by increase, does not explain fully the formation of the sphagnum va atolls which have been described in this paper. Were these the only factors, apparently such atolls would be much more 1 common phenomena. Instead of being, so far as known, lim: ted to two obscure ponds, they might be looked for in most of the small bodies of fresh water in central Minnesota. The rarity of atoll-producing ponds indicates that there must be a 4 concurrence of several favorable conditions else the atoll will not be formed. A few of these probably necessary conditions . will be noted here. 1 Height and regularity of pond banks. Both atolls studied were situated in small ponds with high and regular hills sur- rounding them. They were thus sheltered from the winds and this, I believe, is an important condition for the formation of a sphagnum atoll. Had the winds free sweep across the * it is evident that the atoll in process of formation would, , ne Faye : ; MacMillan: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 11 3 be seriously distorted in shape, and very probably broken in pieces. The regularity and central PPP! force tad have eon permit F Szheltered from such a destructive force and have been permit ct ted to anchor themselves firmly and permanently. l ‘Size and shape of the ponds. Another important condition tor the successful development of an atoll may be the limited Size and regular shape of the parent ponds. In a pond large enough for the excitation of considerable wave movement this f destruction of the atoll would be readily brought about; and in a long or irregular pond the floating, littoral bog, after separa- tion from shore would by slight pressure of the wind tend to break at the ends or corners and would become disintegrated. A regularly annular and not too large bog might however, upon _ the principle of, the arch retain its shape although subjected to considerable lateral pressure by the wind. In this connection P of the two and perfectly sheltered by high forest - clad hills on every side, is perfect in outline, without a break. Ballard's Atoll, on the other hand, situated in a considerably larger pond, less adequately sheltered, is not perfect in outline but is broken } stone point end slightly irregular at others. : Regular slope of the pond bottom. Another condition of 8 ee atoll formation would seem to be the regularity of tme slant of the pond bottom on all sides. Were it not for such very perfect regularity around the pond, the detachment of an annular bog would not be easy. At some point where the deep Water came closer to the shore than at others it is probable _ that the atoll ring would be broken in detachment; and at an- other point where the water was much shallower than else- where, the littoral zone of vegetation would perhaps be too _ firmly attached to be removed by the rising of the pond. Original character of littoral vegetation. Still another and _ probably a very important condition of atoll formation would de the original distinctive character of the shore vegetation of the pond. If plants of robust growth, sending their roots deep into the ground had early established themselves by the wa- : ter's edge, they might have served to anchor the whole area about them to such an extent that no floating bog could have * been formed, or if formed it must have been fragmentary in _ character, being derived from areas where such strong plants had * not become established. Therefore great homogeneity of vege- a 12 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. tation around the shore line of the pond at its season of low water must be postulated as a condition of atoll formation. As stated above the shore plants may have been largely sphagnous, but they might, too, have consisted of small sedges, Campanula a 4 and slender grasses—such as are important components of 80 many shore-floras and floating-bog floras in the lakes of Minnesota. Slight lateral tension of winter ice. A not unimportant condition of atoll formation and persistence is to be looked for in the absence of strong lateral, shoreward ice-pressure, caused = by the expansion of ice as formed in winter upon the pond surface. In ponds of considerable size and depth this is sum. cient to modify the shore vegetation and its distribution to a very marked degree. It would evidently, too, exertadistort- — ing and destructive influence upon an annular floating bog if it were of sufficient size, enclosing a lagoon of sufficient diameter for such a force to become considerable. The depth, surface area, contour and cubic contents of the basin would, if an atoll — were to be formed, have to be of such a nature that this force, when acting, should be distributed regularly and should roman at a minimum. Rapid anchoring of the atoll. It cannot be G that the condition of a floating bog should persist for a long term of years in the atoll-forming turf. Even if all the disturbing causes acted at the minimum demanded by the hypothesis, and under the favorable conditions outlined above, the persistence through many decades of the floating position of the turf would ve give opportunity for cumulative effects, slight in themselves, 7 but in the aggregate sufficient to distort or disrupt the ring. A necessary condition of permanence in the atoll must be looked for, then, in the comparatively rapid substitution of a grounded or anchored position for the plastic, mobile, easily disturbed position of the floating bog. It could have been for but a fer : years at the most that the bog remained as a buoyant formation. Through increase in mass and weight it must rapidly hale sunken and anchored itself firmly upon the bottom. Here again a definite and not too great size and depth of the parent pond 5 appears as one of the essentials of atoll formation. Summary and conclusion. A consideration of all the facts catalogued upon the preceding pages permits a brief summary as follows: 1. Atolls of sphagnum with various adventitious va established upon them have been observed in central Minnesota. . MacMillan: OCCURRENCE OF SPHAGNUM ATOLLS. 13 . 2. The vegetation of the atolls differs from that of the pond “outside and the inner lagoon. It varies with the development and desiccation of the atoll. 3. The origin of the sphagnum atolls in the cases studied — a season of gradual recession of the waters ot the pond, followed by e season of comparatively rapid in- erease in area and level. 7 4. The atolls first appeared as annular floating bogs separa- | oat ted from the shoreward turf as a result of the original zonal distribution of littoral plants and the rise of the waters together 1 with the favorable concurrence of a group of special and ; (Recessary conditions. | 5. Some of the apparent conditions of atoll formation are | (a) a definite maximum size and depth of the parent pond; (5) | considerable height and regularity of the banks of the parent bond; (c) a regular and gentle slope of the pond bottom from shore to center; (d) a definite original character of littoral veg- cetation when the pond was at low level; (e) a reduction within minimum limits of the lateral pressure and tension of winter doe: (/) a comparatively prompt anchoring of the atoll upon the bottom. A number of special problems present themselves at the close ot the general investigation, but in this connection it will be unnecessary to enter into them in detail. For example, there * noted the conditions which determine the average width of the atoll, its distance from shore, the ratio between the size of the intra-insular lagoon and of the pond as a whole, the 1 particular causes of the appearance of given species of plants 3 upon a given atoll, the relation between the vegetation of the - atoll and of the pond and between the pond and the lagoon and _ a numberof other matters, the full consideration of which would prolong the discussion beyond bounds. The purpose of this paper has been indicative rather than exhaustive, and having 13 described an unusual plant- formation with such hypotheses of 1 us origin as the facts would seem to warrant, it may properly 2 close. In conelusion it may be not immaterial to note the in- teresting condition that would prevail should such circular „ peat islands become fossilized subsequent to the complete ob- eee by invading vegetation. I am not aware that such circular depositions of peat have been encountered, but apparently their formation is not impossible and I should presume that under favorable conditions they might be den . 4 4 4 n rs, 5 ae er July, 1892.) Found also in Page lake, Carver county, Minn. ‘intermediate between the above and forma minima Morong, ' clustered floating leaves of the latter. . „ ee ge ee ae a ee ee a ge 0 * . es 9 * a 4 M., 8 K * ey * a Nes — * . ‘fi 8 Da a : * 1 . 14 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. * 3 1 . 1 7 “ 4 4 III. SOME EXTENSIONS OF PLANT RANGES, — 1 EpMUND P. SHELDON. Potamogeton heterophyllus Scures. 1 forma myriophyllus (Rossins). Morone. Naiad. N. Am. 1 1893. 1 Not previously reported from Minnesota. Abundant in lake Mora, Kanabec county, Minn. (. P. PBs, (C. A. Ballard, August, 1892). A form which seems to be was found in a pond near Milaca, Mille Lacs county, Minn. ( 25 P. S., July, 1892). It has the dichotomously branched „eme . 4 of the former and the small, one nerved, submerged leaves and Juncus greenii Oakes & TuckEeRM. Am. Jour. Sci. I. 14:87. 1843. 0 Not previously reported from Minnesota. Sandy soil near Zumbrota, Goodhue county, Minn. (C. A. Ballard, August, 1892). I am indebted to Mr. F. V. Coville for the determination of this plant. oe Polygonum rigidulum n.sp. (Plate I). Perennial, aquatic, stout, somewhat rigid, 3—6 feet high; branching above the base, immersed portions of the stem much swollen, geniculate, rooting at the nodes, tapering upward from 2 each node, glabrous below, minutely scabrous above with short a appressed hairs; leaves 3—7 inches in length, erect, not floating, 8 — obliquely attached: to the petioles, the lower ovate or roundlix obcuneate, with petioles as long as the blade, mostly glabrous or with short, appressed hairs on the veins underneath, the upper oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, glabrous or finely pubes- — cent; spikes elongated, in pairs; flowers pale rose color; fruit orbicular, smooth and shining. ee tumid stems and the obcuneate, almost glabrous. | acta ir The proposed species prefers shal- e bottoms in clear water, which is in contrast to _ the muddy edges of sloughs and swamps, the ordinary habitat ot Polygonum emersum. Lake Mora, Kauabec county, Minn. (E. E &. July, 1892); " Lakeville lake, Dakota county, Minn, (E P. &. August, 1893); Bis Stone lake, Grant county, South Dakota (E F &. Sept. 1893); small lakes near Willmar, Kandiyohi county, Minn. (. . Prost, July, 1892); near Nicollet, Nicollet county, Minn, ( 4. Bullard, July, 1892). 3 Clay tonla latifolia (Socanpen). re _ Claytonia virginica Linn. var. latifolia Sotanpes in Ait. Hort. a Ve Kew, 1: 284. 1789. 1 Cilaptonta carolinjana Micux. Fi. 1 100 1803. Hitherto the only Minnesota collections of thi» species have ern state. It is - abundant in copses at Highland Park, near Duluth, Tower and _, Eacampment, Minn. (Z. F &., June, 1893). 1 Iuxehnis drummondii (Rupr.) Wars. King’s Rep. 5 : 37. a ee Not previously reported from Minnesota, although occurring 2 _ in Winnipeg and south in the Rocky mountains. It was found . on sandy, sterile ground near Princeton, Mille Lacs county. = Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1892). } ; a Ranunculus cireinatus Starn. Fl Oxon. 1794. _. Hitherto Minnesota collections of this species have been 4 made only at Vermilion lake (L. H. Bailey, July, 1886). It was found in abundance at Silver lake, Otter Tail county, Minn. (E. BS., August, 1892). The plant has the habit of recurving the _flower-peduncles after flowering, thus withdrawing the fruit under water to ripen; (carpotropische Bewegung). Nasturtium amphibium (Lryx.) R. Br. in Ait. f. Hort. Kew. 4:110. 1814, Not previously reported from the United States, although collected by Dr. John Macoun, at Fort William, Lake Superior. t was found in ditches and borders of small lakes near Milaca, ag N county, Minn. (E. P. S. July, 1892). 16 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Potentilla nicolletii (Wars. ). . Potentilla supina Linn. var. nicolletii Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 8 663. 1873, i Stems erect, 10-15 inches long, leafy, pubescence close with short appressed hairs; leaves ternate; inflorescence elongated, — leafy and falsely racemose; achenes but little gibbous on the ventral side; otherwise as in Polentilla supina Lixx., which * most resembles. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected by Nicollet at Devil's lake, North Dakota, (not Minnesota, as given by Gray and Watson). ia Near Fergus Falls and Pelican lake, Otter Tail county, Minn. 4 ( P. S, August, 1892). a a Lespedeza angustifolia (Pons). Ect. Sk. Bot. 8. om 2206. 1824. a | Not previously reported from Minnesota. ‘ Specimens of this plant were found on dry, sandy hillsides 1 near Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (MacMillan and n, August, 1890). had 1 Astragalus convallarius GRRENE, Erythea. 1 207. 1508. Not previously reported from Minnesota or South — Abundant near Graceville, Big Stone, Browu's Valley, Traverse county, Minn., and near Wilmot, South Dakota (E. F. S., Sept. 1893). Euphorbia hexagona Nurr. in Spreng. Syst. 3 : 791. 1826. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected near Vasa, Goodhue county, Minn. (Dr. J. H. Sand- berg, July, 1882). g Callitriche autumnalis Liny. Syst. Nat. 2:52. 1767. Not previously reported from Minnesota, although mentioned x ao in Upham’s Flora of Minnesota, as to be looked for in the northern part of the state. It was found in abundance on the ct banks of the Mustinka river, near Wheaton, Traverse county, Minn. (E. P. S., Sept., 1893). Elatine triandra Scuxunr, Bot. Handb. n. 1023. ‘don? Not previously reported from Minnesota. Zo: This rare plant was collected in pools near Cannon river, 4 Burnside township, Goodhue county, Minn. (4. P. math: 2 August, 1893). | Fy. “Highland and Encampment, Minn. (E P. &. June, 1893). Viola sylvestris Lan, var. puberula (Wars) Viola canina Linn. var. puberula Wars. in Gray's Man. 6 ed. 51. ae 1890, se Not previously reported from Minnesota. * s near Two Harbors, Knife river and Marmata Minn. (E F S. 1 June, 1893). Viola longipes Nurr. in T. & G. Fl. 1174. 1838. wia debilis Nurr. Journ. Acad. Philad. 8 18. 1834. not Viola debilis Mienx. Fl. Bor. Amer. 2 10 1803, _ which is a synonym of Viola striata Arr. Hort. Kew, 3:29. 1789. . Viola canina Lawn. var. longipes Wars. FI. Calif. 1:56. 1880, but this latter probably refers to Viola adunca Smrru. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Growing abundantly on the pine barrens near Brainerd, Crow Wing county, Aitkin and Nichols, Aitkin county, Minn. (Z. F. &. June, 1892). Cuseuta indecora Cuorsy, Cusc. 152. 1841. Not previously reported from Minnesota. _ Abundant on Vieckia foenicula (PURSH) Rar., Fergus Falls, ee Minn. (E. P. &., August, 1892); on Solidago and Lycopus, East Battle lake, Otter Tail county, Minn. (Z. F. K. August, 1892); on Solidago latifolia LIxx., Spicer, Kandiyohi county. Minn. (W. D. Frost, August, 1892), and Center City, _ Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, July, 1892). Cuscuta coryli Excl. Am. Journ. Sci. L 43 : 337. 1842. Rs "Hitherto Minnesota collections of this species have been made 3 * in the southeastern corner of the state. It was found on Solidago latifolia LIx x., near Spicer, Kandiyohi county, Minn. ( D. Frost, August, 1892); Glencoe, McLeod county, Minn. (. J. McEltigott, June, 1890). | 4 18 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIRG. Solanum triforum Nurr. Gen. 1:128 1818, Not previously reported from Minnesota, 7 Collected near Sabin, Clay county, Minn. ( Mise Ida M. Piper, June, 1891). 6 Veronica serpyllifolia Lien, Spee. 15. 1758. Not previously reported from Minnesota, Ditches and roadsides near Knife river and Two Harbors, Minn. (£. P. &, June, 1898). Lonicera caerulea Linn. Spee. 174. 1758. Not previously reported from Minnesota, bat collected 4 Port Arthur, Canada, by Dr. John Macoun. In a bog near Highland, St. Louis county, Minn. (F. V &, Jane, 1898). Aster longulus n. sp. (Plate I). Stem strict, branching above, 2—5 feet high, hispid with - jointed hairs; leaves linear, 1—4 inches in length, sessile, the cauline with auriculate-clasping insertion, scabrous above, but = smooth beneath, margins scabrous-ciliolate; heads open panicu- Aa late, small, }—4 inches in height, singly terminating the ere t or slightly spreading branches; involucre 2—2 lines high; bracts linear, loose, approximately equal, outer herbaceous; rays } inch in length, lilac-purple to white; achenes compressed, 8—5 nerved, slightly pubescent when young as in Aster puniceus LINN. The auriculate-clasping cauline leaves and loose, herbaceous — involucral bracts of this plant seem to suggest its relationship 8 ee to Aster tardiflorus LINN. and Aster puniceus LINN., but in aspect it most nearly resembles Aster longifolius LAM. 2 It was found in low swampy ground near Milaca, Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1892), and in marshy grounds by roadsides near Center City, Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Tay- lor, August, 1892). Aster turbinellus Luvpt. in Hook. Com. Bot. Mag. 1. 98. ia Ae 1835. ee Not previously reported from Minnesota. Near Prospect Park, Minneapolis, Minn. (E. P. S., Oct., 1892). The ‘‘scabrous-ciliolate” leaves are characteristic. Cacalia suaveolens Linn. Spec. 835. 1753. Not previously reported from Minnesota. At the junction of the two branches of the Root river, near Lanesboro, Fillmore county, Minn. (J. C. Hvoslef, Sept., 1893. W nm tas * 12 — * * oS * - se 2 * vse eS » Raa 2 * 1 = 1 Ie " * * * . * ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF SOME NORTH _ AMERICAN SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. Evwexp P. SHELDON. 3 14 conduplicatus Bextou. in 2 5 231. — ems mmr. fs . r 188. Bores. Diag. I. 2 HK. 1548, . — The variety is named for Mr. ot Salt Lake City, Utah, whose description fully the plant ceramleus u u. var. imperfectus n. 0. . 1 pictus A- Gua x, var. be A. Guar, Proc. Am Acad. le 214. 1866 ava — A. Guay, Pac. K Rep. 12:42 1800. —— itm thes ix'0. Gee, Pi cba. 2: 111. 1846, which is an accepted name. - Peoralea longifolia Punsn, Flor. Amer. Sept. 2 1. 1514. dne longifoliua Nutr. Gen. 2:95. 1818. ey Phaca longifolia Nort. in T. & G. Fi. N. Am. 1 346. 1°. 5 ‘Bot Astragalus longifolius Lax. Ency. Meth. 1 2 1783, Which is an Armenian species. 42 b a 20 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 12.9 Acad. G, 200. 1866. ax not Astragalus brachypus Scurenk, Kaum. Fl. Nov. 66. 1841, * 7 ears 4 .. 7 or in some forms obtuse or rarely retuse, pubescent with white, _ appressed hairs beneath, slightly so above, stipules 2-3 lines long. ovate-acuminate; peduncles elongating after the pod has ‘matured, becoming as long or slightly longer than the leaves, . 4 * . r — ee * ** We: Bes 2 ¥¥ * * 2 N f | ö i dor its rank as a „pedunculis brevissimis vel nullis I have found that this is true for the early stages of the plant, the flower-peduncles after the maturity of the fruit, _ elongate and thus raise the ripened pod from the sand or gravel * ome 1 2 * > z= “oe rar Py of 3 40 fon” 0 uin which the plant grows to a height equal to or exceeding that grat the So far as I have been able to determine, this _ phenomenon is unusual in Astragalus. Plants in which it oc 7 ere Tue range of this species js from Colorado and Wyoming to | — Minnesota and Hudson bay. 2 0 Are procumbens Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 20. 361. 1885. vo Astragalus procumbens HOOK. & Aux. Bot. Beech. Voy. 18. 180. which is the accepted name for a Chilean species. not Astragalus procumbens MIL. Gard. Dict. Ed. 8. No. 18. 1768, which is a synonym of Astragalus pentaglottis Linn. Mant. 247. _ 1767, a native of southern Europe and northern Africa. 5 4 RS id 1 : Astragalus oblatus u. u. | 1 Astragalus nudus Wars. | ot. King. 5:4. W271. — Cun a 6 Ga 2 115, 1806, 0 lean species. —— veniitiees » | Astragalus pavcifiores Hibox, Fi. Bor, Am. 1: 148. 1838, got Adragahes paweifiorus Pat. Asurag. 81. 1800, } C Norr. jo T. 4 d. N K. A . 1638. ayn Deere im Hook. Fl. Bor. "1888, 9 native of the Columbia river valley. 1 . 4 ) nigrescens Nurr. Pl. Gambell. 168. 1848. As } nigrescens Panu Astrag. . 1800, m of Oxytropis nigrescens DC. Prod. 2:278. 1825, e Siberian species. 2 4 Am. Joara. Sei. II. 33: 410. 1862, Phaca nigrescens Hook. Fi. Bor. Am. 1: 143, 1833, N 1 89 * 22 | MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. : Astragalus apilosus n. u. eee 9:68. 1803. te a synonym of dec, glabra DC. Astrag. 0. 1802, a Siber- ian plant K not Astragalus glaber DO. Asteag. 118, 1802, r e eee ; | Astragalas spatulates u u. „ Acad. G 0 1806. a ye n Seeber Nutr. in T. & G. FI. N. AW. 1.4. 1838. Pall Astrag. 70 1800. Astragalus caespiiosus . hes is a poh scar’ ot. Oxytropis caespitosa Witt. Sp. Pi 1804. 1808, occurring in Dahuria. 2 mention sebdoga Bere i T. & G. Hl N. Am, 12 1838, Soran. in Lowe, 1a Trans. Camb, Phil. Soc 5 — ie „ Astragalus selandri Lows, in Hook. Kew. Yours. 8: 294. 1856, A api — Murr. ta T&G. N M. Am 172 1 I vont Astragalus brachycarpus Bren, Fl. Taur. 2 l. 180, ~~ 8 ect — _ Astragalus eyrticolus 2. 0 oP Astragalus thompsonae Wars. Proc. Atber. Acad. 10: 345. 1875. E . Basra in Hook Thom. Lad. Z ee a . PL Bong. 241. 1842, « native of Thibet and Sooogaria Ax tragalus jepsoni u. u. felt Astragalus demissus GENE. Erythea, 1:221. 1893. not Astragaius demissus Bors. & HND. in Boles. Diag. I. 2: 50. 1849 ‘ ‘@synonym of Astragalus amoenus FENZL. Pugil. Pl. Nov. Syr. 4. 1842, a Cilician plant. | 5 _ The species is named for Mr. Willis L. Jepson, of the Uni- versity of California ae NOMENCLATURE OF ASTRAGALOR 2 1 Astragalus criocarpus Wars. King. Rep. 871. 1871. Astragalus eriocarpus DO, Astrag. 231. 1802, found in Persia and Caucasia " intonsus n. u eee Micux. Fi, Bor. Am. 2:67. 1803. tiles GuELDENST. It, 2 187. 1791, LL Astrag. 183. 1802, „ lies T. & C. N. N. Am. 0 a Hoox. & Au. Bot. Beech. Voy. 333. 1840. » Satregetus foun Wurd. Sp. Pi. 3: 1331. 1603, lich ie a synonym of Astragalus angustifolius Lam. Ency. u 11821. —A rene nt Ae " 7 9 5 ** . . ” . Proc. An: Acad. 2: 2471. 1887. ot Astragalus hendersoni Bak ER. ia Hoox. FI. Brit. Ind. 2 120. 1579, 0 N name for a species growing in British India. | Astragalus praciongus a . 8 Astragalus procerus A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 369. 1878. ae Boiss. Fl. Orient. 2: 464. fe Acoptad mame of Persian specin — West. Am. Sel. . J. 1863. Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 18 370. 1882 grandifiorus PALL. Astrag. 57. 1800, is a synonym of Orytropis grandifora DC. Astrag. 71. Astragalus hypoglettis Lows. var. Ar Kxiioee, Proc. Calif. > Astragalus strigos Cour, & Pum. Bot. Gaz 15/200, ses. : es Ot Astragalus strigoeus (KxLLood) SHIELD. “prs. — i al 2 4 2 Bes é 1 ö ‘ys > a * N= 4 : y - ‘ 3 5 ‘ ar xe 4 — ‘ 6 : : 2 1 A = °' * 5 2 — ~ 2 we * 4 - ‘ 2 * 4 a ‘ „n . ois * „ = 75 8 Ae . é os — 7 1 * 1 3 ox * — — Nn SEE Wil te tha wrath ee sob Ds . ene Pride cues ek ee Bes „CCT ry J “sy a ee * 1 V. LIST OF FRESH-WATER ALGAE COLLECTED IN MINNESOTA DURING 1893. JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN. Most of the algae in the accompanying list were collected near the Gull lake Biological Station in Cass county, during the month of July, 1893. A few were gathered later in the vicinity | of Minneapolis. The nomenclature is provisional and is based upon that of De Toni, in his Sylloge Algarum, so far as that work has been published. BATRACHOSPERMEAE Sirop. Batrach. 1554. 1. Batrachospermum vagum (Rors). Ac. Syst. Alg. 52. 1824. Lake Kilpatrick. June 21, 1893. COLEOCHAETACEAE (Nagc.) PINS. Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 2:33. 1860. 2. Coleochaete pulvinata A. Bk. Kg. Spec. Alg. 245. u. 2. . 1849. Stagnant pool near Stony brook. June 20, 1893. OEDOGONIACEAE (De By.) Wirrr. Pr. Mon. Oedog. 6. 1874. 8. Oedogonium braunii Kc. Spec. Alg. 366. 1549. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 10, 1893. 4. Oedogonium grande Kc. Phyc. Germ. 200. 1545. | Irving Chase lake. July 19, 1893. 5. Bulbochaete brebissonii Ke. Tab. Phyc. 4 : 19. 1849-69. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 19, 1893. 6. Bulbochaete mirabilis Wirrr. Dispos. Oedog. Suec. 137. 1870. ‘ Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 26, 1893. 7. Bulbochaete polyandra CLeve. Wittr. Dispos. Oedog. Suec. 140. 1870. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 27, 1893. 26 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. CLADOPHORACEAE (Hassatv) Wirrr. em. De Ton: Syll. Alg. 1: 264. 1889. 8. Draparnaldia glomerata (Vaucu.) Ac. Syst. Alg. 50. 9. Draparnaldia plumosa (Vavucn.) Ac. Syst. Alg. 58. 1824. 10. N. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 1824. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 23, 1893. Springs near the University, Minneapolis. Sept. 14. 1893, Stigeoclonium nanum (Dictw.) Ko. Spec. Alg. 852. 1849. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 24, 1893, Bridal-veil falls, Minneapolis. Sept. 27, 1893. Stigeoclonium nudiuseulum Ko. Tab. Phye. 3:4. 1849-69. Mud lake. June 30, 1893. Chaetophora elegans (Roru.) AG. Syst. Alg. 27. 1824. Pool near Gull lake. June 28, 1893. Aphanochaete globosa (NorD.) WoLLE. Freshw. Alg. U. S. 119. 1887. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 20, 1893. Herposteiron confervicolum NAEG. Kg. Spec. Alg. 424. 1849. Near Mud lake. June 28, 1893. Cladophora crispata (RorH) Kc. Phyc. Gener. 264. 1843. Lake Kilpatrick. June 24, 1893. Shadow falls, St. Paul. Sept. 6, 1893. Cladophora glomerata (Linn.) Ke, Phyc. Germ. 212. 1845. Stony brook. June 25, 1893. 7 Cladophora glomerata (LI XR.) Ke. var. rivularis RAB. 5 Alg. Exs. n. 147. 1850-1867. Shadow falls, St. Paul. Sept. 6, 1893. Microspora vulgaris Ras. Krypt. Flor. v. Sachs. 245. 1863. Two Harbors, Minn. June 24, 1893. Coll. E. P. Sheldon. Microspora amoena (KG.) Ras. Fl. Eur. Algar. 3: 321. a 1864-68. Shadow falls, St. Paul. Sept. 6, 1893. 427 W ie ee CA ene a ee we F a 4 Tilden: LIST OF FRESH WATER ALGAE. 27 20. Microspora fugacissima (ROTH) Ras. Fl. Eur. Algar. 3:321. 1864-68. Shadow falls, St. Paul. Sept. 6, 1893. 21. Rhizoclonium hieroglyphieum (Ac.) Ka. Phyc. Gener, 205. 1843. . Taylor's Falls. Sept. 16, 1893. _ YAUCHERIACEAE (Gray) Dumorr. Comm. Bot. 71. 1822. | | 22. Vaucheria ornithocephala AG. Spec. 407. 1521-1525. Shadow falls, St. Paul, Sept. 6, 1893. 23. Vaucheria hamata (Vaucs.) DC. Fl. Fr. 2:68. 1815. Stone quarry, Minneapolis. Sept. 13, 1893. 24. Vaucheria geminata (Vaucu.) DC. Fl. Fr. 2 02. 1815. Taylor's Falls. Sept. 16, 1893. VOLVOCACEAE (Conn) Kircuy. Alg. Schles. 85. 1878. 2585. volvox globator (LAxx.) EHRENB. Infus. 68. 1838. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 7, 1893. PALMELLACEAE (Decne.) Nagc. em. De Toni, Syl Alg. 1:559. 1889. 26, Pediastrum boryanum (TURPIN) MeneGcH. Linnaea. 11210. 1840. Mud lake. June 29, 1893. 27. Hydrodietyon reticulatum (Liyy.) Lacers. Bidr. Svrg. Algfl. n. 2. 71. 1883. Minneapolis. Oct. 25, 1893. 28. Scenedesmus quadricauda (Tun pid) BRes. Alg. Falais. g 66. 1835. Marsh near Stony brook. July 11, 1893. Minneapolis. October 5, 1893. 29. Ophiocytium ? capitatum WoLLE, Freshw. U. S. 176. 1887. Monroe. July 12, 18938. 30. Reinschiella:? euspidata (Barter) De Tost, Syll. Alg. : 1:614. 1889. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 13, 1893. 31. Characium ambiguum Herm. Rabenh. Beitr. 26 n. 10. 1862-65. Marsh near Gull lake. June 28, 1893. 28 32. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Characium heteromorphum Russen. Contrib. 60. 4 1874. Fish hatcheries, St. Paul. Oct. 1, 189g. ZYGNEMACEAE (Menecu.) Ras. Fl. Eur. Alg. 3 228. 1868. 33. 34. 41. 42. 43. Spirogyra weberi Ka. Phyc. gener. 270. 1543. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 5, 189g. Spirogyra longata (Vaucu.) Ka. Spec. Alg. 489. 1849 Marsh near Stony brook. July 11; 1803. Spirogyra gracilis (Hass.) Ko. Spec. Alg. 438. 1849. Marsh near Stony brook. July 11, 1893. Spirogyra varlans (Hass.) Kd. Spec, Alg. 439. 1849. Lake Kilpatrick. July 15, 1893. Spirogyra bellis (Hass.) CROUAN. Fl. Finist. 121. 1867. Gull lake. July 17, 1893. Spirogyra neglecta (Hass.) Kd. Spec. Alg. 441. 1549. Home brook. July 22, 1893. Spirogyra majuscula KG. Spec. Alg. 441. 1849. Minneapolis. Sept. 5, 1893. Zygnema leiospermum De By. Rabenh. Alg. Exs. u. 638. 1850-67. Lake Sibley. July 22, 1893. Zygnema cruciatum (VAucH.) AG. Syst. Alg. 77, n. 5. 1824. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 10, 1893. Zygnema aequale Kd.) DE Toi. Syl. Alg. 1 : 739. 1889. Pool south of lake Kilpatrick. July 5, 1893. Mougeotia genuflexa (DiLLw.) AG. Syst. Alg. 83. 1824. : Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 16, 1893. DESMIDIACEAE (Ka.) DR By. Conjug. 1858. Desmidium baileyi (RaLrs.) DE. By. Conjug. 70. 1858. * 44. 45. 46. Marsh near Monroe. July 12, 1893. Spirotaenia condensata Barn. Ralfs. Brit. Desm. 179. 1848. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 24. 1893. Penium interruptum BREB. Ralfs. Brit. Desm. 151. 1848. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 5, 1893. 49. . 60 52. 53. 54. 55. 85. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 47. 48. Tilden: LIST OF FRESH WATER ALGAE. 29 Penium polymorphum Perry. Kleinste. Lebensf. 207. 1852. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 13, 1893. Closterium strigosum Bres. Liste. Desm. 153. 1550. Lake Kilpatrick. July 3, 1893. Closterium macilentum BREB. Liste. Desm. 153. 1856. Lake Kilpatrick. July 3, 1893. Closterium kuetzingii Bann. Liste. Desm. 156. 1556. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 10, 1893. . Closterium parvulum NagG. Einz. Alg. 106. 1849. Marsh near lake Kilpatrick. July 11, 1893. Closterium ensis DeLp. Spec. Desm. subalp. 219. 1873. Minneapolis. Oct. 5, 1893. Pleurotaenium trabecula (Emrenn.) NAEG. Hinz. Alg. 104. 1849. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 8, 1893. Cosmarium tumidum Lunp. Desm. Suec. 45. 1871. Mud lake. June 29, 1893. Cosmarium brebissoni MeNneGH. Linnaea 14 : 210. 1840. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 14, 1893. Disphinctium notabile (BRE. ?) HANSG. Prodr. Alg. 186. n. 358. 1886-88, Stony brook. July 14. 1893. Cosmarium ansatum (EuRENB.) KG. Spec. Alg. 174. 1849. Home brook. July 22, 1893. Xanthidium torreyi WoLLE. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 12 : 3. 1885. Pool south of lake Kilpatrick. July 5, 1893. Xanthidium fasciculatum EuRENB. Infus. 146 U. 169. 1838. Marsh near Monroe. July 12, 1893. Anthrodesmus ineus (BREB.) Hass. Freshw. Alg. 357. n. 2. 1852. Pool near Monroe. July 12, 1898. Micrasterias radiosa Ac. Flora 10 643. 1827. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 26, 1893 80 62. 67. 68. 69. 3 3 * iy MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Micrasterias truncata (CorpA) Bann. Ralfs, Brit. Desm. 75. n. 9. 1848. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 27, 1893. Staurastrum odontatum WoLLE. Desm. U.S. 184. 1884. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 19, 1893. Staurastrum tohopecaligense WoLLe. Freshw. Alg. U. S. 45. 1887. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. June 26, 1893. Staurastrum dejectum Bres. var. convergens WOLLE. Desm. U. S. 121. 1884. Lake Kilpatrick. July 3, 1893. Staurastrum ravenelii Woop. Freshw. Alg. U. S. 158. 1872. ; Marsh north of Stony brook. July 11, 1893. Staurastrum furcatum (Earens. Ag ges Liste. Desm. 136. 1856. 6 Peat bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 14, 1893. Staurastrum hirsutum (EARENR.) Bres. Ralfs. Brit. Desm. 127. 1848. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 19, 1893. Staurastrum tricornutum Wolz. Desm. U.S. 145. 1884. Home brook. July 22, 1893. NOSTOCEAE (MENEGH.) THURET. Am. Sci. Nat. Bot. III. 71. 72. 73. 74. 2: 319. 1844. Mastigonema elongatum Woop. Prodr. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 128. 1869. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 20, 1893. Mastigonema aerugineum ( Ka.) KRCR. Pool near lake Kilpatrick. June 20, 1893. Mastigonema sejunctum Woop. Freshw. Alg. U. S. 33. 1872. ' Lake Harriet, Minneapolis. Sept. 19, 1893. Coll. C. A. Ballard. N Seytonema intertextum (Kg.) Ras. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 13, 1893. Hapalosiphon fuscescens Ke. Lake Kilpatrick. June 21. 1893. Bier a, ata ee! OE ee . >» F ra 2. = Tilden: LIST OF FRESH WATER ALGAE. 81 Nostoc pruniforme (Rorn) Ac. Disp. Alg. 45. 1810- 1812. Lake Kilpatrick. June 30, 1893. 76. Cylindrospermum limnicola Ko. Irving Chase lake. July 19, 1893. 77. Lyngbya aestuarii LIE. Danske. Alg. 1841. Gull lake. July 18, 1893. 78. Oscillaria antliaria Jud. Alg. Exs. n. 14. Gull lake. July 17, 1893. 79. Spirulina jenneri Kc. Tab. Phyc. 1849-69. Home brook. July 22, 1893. CHROOCOCCEAE (Naxza.) Wrrrr.? 80. Merismopedia glauca (Eurs.) NAEG. Einz. Alg. 55. 1849 Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 13, 1593. 81. Merismopedia conyoluta Bres. in Kg. Spec. Alg. 472. . 1849. Peat-bog near lake Kilpatrick. July 13, 1893. 82. Merismopedia violacea (BA RU.) Ka. Spec. Alg. 472. 1849. Trout-mere, Osceola. Oct. 5, 1893. Coll. Conway MacMillan. 83. Gomphosphaeria aponina Kc. Tab. Phyc. I. t. 31. f. 3. 1845, Pool near lake Kilpatrick. July 10, 1893. BACILLARIEAE Nrrzsch. Beitr. Infus. 1817. 84. Navicula sphaerophora Ke. Alg. Exs. n. 84. 1845. Cullen lake. July 7, 1893. 85. Navicula tuscula ERB. Ber. 21. 1840. Lake Sibley. June 22, 1893. 86. Coeconeis pediculus Exes. Infus. 194. 1838. ied | Near Mud lake. June 28, 1893. 87. Pleurosigma spencerii (QUEK.) W. Sm. var. kuetzingii GRUN. V. H. Syn. 118. 1880-81. Lake Sibley. June 22, 1893. 88. Epithemia turgida (Exes. ) Ke. Bac. Pl. 5. 1844. Gull lake. June 16, 1893. 89. Fragilaria capucina DesmMaz. Crypt. France ed. I. n. 453. 1825. Pool near Stony brook. June 21, 1893. pee, ee ee oe f ay 82 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. VI. ON THE POISONOUS INFLUENCE ot CYPRIPEDIUM SPECTABILE AND CYPRIPEDIUM PUBESCENS. ' D. T. MacDOUGAL. — — The plants which are poisonous to the skin, in a more or less degree, include a large number, many of which are common and well known species. In this connection reference is had only to those plants which, during some stage of their exist- ence, will produce poisoning by contact, or by means of a volatile principle, which acts upon the skin of any person ap- proaching them, and is exclusive of those which are injurious — either in the form of extracts or preparations, or in their lengthened application, or in their manipulation in the manu- a factures. am Without doubt the larger percentage of the common oleate known to be poisonous, is due to the fact that they offer much more numerous opportunities for observation than do the rarer forms. For it is by no means to be understood, that there are many plants which are always and invariably poisonous. So far as can be learned there are no plants, except perhaps the urticaceous forms, which are injurious to every one handling them. Probably the most virulent of the class of plants refer- red to, are the species of Rhus; yet many persons can handle them without danger at all times, and others are only injured — by plants in a certain stage of growth. On the other hand. many of the plants in this category are injurious only to a very small percentage of the persons touching them, so that their irritating qualities might remain undiscovered altogether un- less tested by a large number. As an example, it may be cited that the hop plant, in the limited handling it receives in the domestic garden, is ordinarily regarded as innocuous; yet in extensive hop gardens of California, among the thousands of pickers in the fields, are many who are severely irritated by iat 1. A preliminary notice was read before the Indiana et of Science, be- 2 cember, 1893. ’ 4 d x =a 4 a ak 8 ne ‘a: 5 1 Bal kes K N * 7 1 4 = a iy Ske Pe ee N n c a ier age Tere ey =. ? ; bos a MacDougal: POISONOUS INFLUENCE OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 88 The poisoning may be due to mechanical injury, as the pierc- ing of the skin by stiff hairs of special poison organs, such as the glandular hairs of the nettles, or to a volatile substance, Such as the toxicodendrie acid of the poison ivy. The follow- ing list includes some native plants of Minnesota, which have been definitely ascertained to be more or less poisonous, in the manner indicated.“ Rhus vernix Linn. Poison ivy. Rhus radicans Lrxn. Poison oak. Spathyema foetida (Lix x.) Rar, Skunk cabbage. Bidens frondosa Linn. Beggar's ticks. Erigeron canadense LINN. Fleabane. Xanthium canadense MILL. Cockleburr. Polygonum hydropiper Linn. Smartweed. Polygonum acre HRK. Water pepper. Actaea spicata alba LIx x.) MILI. Baneberry. Anemone quinquefolia LIx x. Wind flower. Anemone hirsutissima PUnsn) MACM, Pasque flower. Euphorbia corollata LIx Xx. Spurge. Euphorbia marginata PUnsu. Snow on the mountain.” Ranunculus septentrionalis Porn. Crowfoot. Ranunculus seeleratus Linn. Cursed crowfoot. Urtica gracilis Arr. Nettle. Laportea canadensis (Linn.) GAuDICH. Wood nettle. The above list includes only the plants of the state which are known to be poisonous to the touch, and is not inclusive of a large number which are more or less suspected of being so. The present article contemplates the addition of two species of Cypripedium to the list. r On many different occasions, and from widely separated localities, unconfirmed reports have been made of the poison ous effects of Cypripedium spectabile and C. pubescens. In the Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club for February, 1875, is found the following note.“ be „Prof. H. H. Babcock, in a communication to The Pharmacist, Chicago, January, 1875, states that, being especially susceptible to poisoning by Rhus Toxicodendron, he for several years took every precaution against it. He not only was careful to avoid contact with the plants, but would not collect specimens of other plants growing near the Rhus, and went so far as to avoid handling fresh specimens gathered by others for fear these had been in contact with it. Notwithstanding all this, he found that Aate in May or early in June of each of several successive years he was so . severely poisoned as to be confined to his room for several days, his face 2 9 presenting the appearance usual in poisoning by Rhus. Upon referring to 94 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. his fleld notes, he found that each season the pulson manifested itself the day after he had collected either Cypripedium spectabile or C. pubescens, and feels quite convinced that in his case the unpleasant effects were due to these heretofore unsuspected plants. Prof. B. asks for experiment to determine if his view is correct. Have any of the readers of the Bulletin any observations bearing upon the matter ?—@, T.“ In the succeeding number of the same journal is the following note to the contrary.‘ None of our Oypripediums are poisonous plants, applied elther exters- ally or internally. They are much employed by eclectic physicians ot this country, and though tons of these plants are annually brought to this market to be manufactured into extract, tincture, or ‘cried 1 a I have yet to be informed of the first case of poisoning, the result of — 1 handling the fresh plant or otherwise. I am very susceptible to the effects of Rhus, even from contact of i stems in winter or when quite dry. Others are liable to be polsoned from — the emanations of the plant at long distances without coming into con- tact with it. Some others still have a periodical return of the sym of such poisoning recurring for a number of years thereafter. — R. Kunze, M. D. [We have, ourselves, known cases of the periodical return of the Rhus * irritation in persons who had handled the plant when brought into the city, but who avoided doing so a second time, and were not o * *. where it grew. — Hds.]“ yh In the editorial columns of the Botanical Gazette® is found the following comment upon the matter: The most unexpected and harmless plants may be brought into this catagory (of poisonous plants). An instance within the writer’sknow- ledge was that of a clear-minded lady of a botany class, who found the a large. white lady’s slipper (Cypripedium spectabile), a plant to be avoided; 9 and the absurdity of the notion, in the opinion of the other members of the class, did not in the least change her assertion of its poisonous quali- es ties. The subject has considerable of the indefiniteness and evasiveness of the ghost, haunted house, and mesmeric questions now being investigated by the society for psychical research, etc. * * * Aa Even a knowledge of the extent of the subject would be of value.” 5 Contemporaneously with this notice there appeared the 2 manuals. Des Plantes Vénéneuses” 5 descrip- 5 tions of nearly two hundred and fifty, and Dermatitis Fenenata - of more than a hundred plants, poisonous in vari- so ous ways. In the latter work the supposition of Prof. Babcock ; concerning the poisonous qualities of Cypripedium pubescens is 5 credited in the following paragraph.“ I. * * * and was greatly surprised to be informed by Prof. J. Nerins Hyde, of Chicago, that his friend, the late Prof. H. H. Babcock, k.. found the C. pubescens, which grows from Canada to Georgia, sami die 0 4. vol. 6, p. 2. 1875. 5 5. vol. 12, p. 275. 1887. 6. 1. e., p. 113. 1887. MacDougal: POISONOUS INFLUENCE OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 35 q irritating to him as Rhus toxicodendron, * * 8 SS SH Other but more indefinite reports sustain the character of this plant.” — Prof. H. G. Jesup reviews the statements, brought together in the Bulletin of the Torrey Club, and offers the following cir- cCumstantial evidence on the subject.’ AA lady near whose home grew a fine clump of Cypripedium spectabile had been in the habit of gathering it when in bloom. At such times for four Or five successive seasons she suffered from symptoms of _ Rhus poisoning, but on careful examination no Rhus could be found where the Cypripedium grew. These symptoms invariably appeared whenever the - Cypripedium was in the house and disappeared with its removal, and on _ _-her removal to another part of the country never reappeared. In fact, when she ceased collecting the plant she escaped entirely. One of my own students had been in the habit of handling _ Rhus with impunity, and had done so for years. Not long since he was severely poisoned immediately after having gathered and handled a large quantity of C. spectadile, and, in view of the above facts, very naturally attributes his trouble to this plant.” ue latter article was brought to the author's attention when he and other members of the botanical staff of the University of Minnesota were themselves objects in circumstantial evi- dence, and it was determined to secure some positive evidence on the matter. The author, while in the field at Twin lakes, near Minneapolis, September 7th, 1893, met with several well grown plants of C. spectabile, with newly formed seed pods. A robust specimen was broken off near the base of the stem, and tutle leaves were brushed lightly across the biceps muscle of the bared left arm. A slight tingling sensation was felt at the time, and fourteen hours later the arm was greatly swollen _ from the shoulder to the finger tips. The portion touched by _ the plant—covering an area of 50 sq. em. was violently in- _ flamed and covered with macules, accompanied by the usual Symptoms of dermatitis, and constitutional disturbances. By treatment of the most approved kind the arm was reduced to its normal size in ten days, but the effects were perceptible a month later. The severity of the test has prevented its repeti- tion. The facts obtained are certainly conclusive as to the pPoisonous qualities of this plant. They are, at least so far as dhe author is concerned, who would have been satisfied with a much less pronounced result. An examination of the two species reveals the presence of . two forms of hairs in great abundance. (See Plate III.) One is a curved-pointed septate hair, the apical cell of which has hard, brittle walls, and is easily detachable from the basal 7. Botanical Gazette, 48: 142. April. 1893. 3 ae 86 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 9 portion of the organ. The other form is a septate glandular 1 tipped hair. The glandular cell is filled with a licht brown substance, of which the chemical nature remains unknown. The contents of both hairs show a decided acid reaction, but were not observed to exert any harmful influence on infusoria placed under the cover glass with them. Both are invested by — a filamentous fungus, apparently one of the Dematiese, Which sends its hyphae into all the cells, but ramifies most abentane ly in the glandular tip. The hairs of G spectabile are .5—2mm, and those of G pubes cens are from .5—1.5mm in length. q The poisonous effects may be due to the piercing of the sicin 7 by the pointed hair and the consequent action of the acid con- tents, or to the surface irritation by the contents of the glandu- lar hairs, or it is remotely possible that they are due in some way to the presence of the fungus. The demonstration of the poisonous effect of G spectabile is conclusive, and since C pubescens is furnished with similar ap- paratus, together with the large amount of evidence brought together, there is every reason to believe that it is equally injurious. Whether the plants of these species are poisonous to man persons or not—and the author suspects that they may be handled by the majority without danger — yet it is easily ap- parent that these species, as well as others of the genus, ars protected in a manner that renders them unpleasant to grazing — 4 animals. It has been repeatedly noticed that large numbers of these plants growing in woodland pastures have been found intact, While the surrounding herbage would be very n, cropped. a The poisonous action of C. pubescens should not in any way ad affect the value of the extract as a medicine, since this sub- 4 stance is derived from the roots, which have no un, 4 4 with the effects described. ag Neither should anything presented in this paper detractin the least from the use of these plants for ornamental or dec. a orative purposes, although it might be well for susceptible persons to handle mature plants with some care. The subject derives additional interest at this place — the University of Minnesota— since the two species are widely dis- es 3 tributed in the state, and the Cypripedium pubescens (the Mocca- sin Flower) has been formally adopted as the state flower” of = Minnesota. 2 ; . ae x 9 payee ‘Glandular alr d & pubesoons 8 nee Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. January, 894 PLATE |. * Bulletin No g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. January, 834 3° PLATE Il. a a — 1 2 Bulletin No.g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. January, 834 JET at PLATE til. > ¢ 5 yu. NITROGEN ASSIMILATION BY ISOPYRUM BITERNATUM. A PRELIMINARY NOTICE. D. T. MacDOUGAL. Probably the most abstract problem confronting the plant physiologist at the present time is the determination of the manner in which the higher plants acquire their supply of nitrogen. Until within the last sixteen years all plants were _ supposed to be entirely dependent upon the fixed nitrates of the soil. About 1880 began an era of investigation remarkable for its important results in the discovery of many of the essen- _ tial features of this phase of plant nutrition. Since the above date more than three hundred memoirs and double the number ol lesser papers on the subject have made their appearance from the laboratories of the world, and it continues to absorb the attention of a large number of the foremost investigators. Tue results so far attained show that bacterial forms, fungi,” algae, hepatics, and to a limited extent the higher plants may make use of free nitrogen. The conditions of the absorption of free nitrogen by the higher plants are not understood farther than the fact that they are under no circumstances independent 4 of the fixed nitrates. The delimitation of this capability of the higher plants to assimilate free nitrogen will doubtless claim much attention for some time to come. It seems probable in the light of the most recent researches that this capability will de found to be more highly developed in certain groups than in others, and that within these groups individual species will _ exhibit marked maxima. A large part of the attention to the general subject during the last decade has been paid to the correlations by which the products of the nitrogen assimilation of the lower forms are made available to the higher plants—a series of facts of the _ widest biological significance. As types of these correlations, may be mentioned the activity of the soil bacteria resulting in a 8 maintenance of the supply of fixed nitrates, while bacteria, 40 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. fungi, and algae grow within or upon the tissues of other plants, to which the product of their assimilation of free nitrogen are directly available. Symbioses of the latter form are exhibited in the tubercles of the leguminous and a few other plants, by the endophytic mycorhiza of a large number of herbaceous present time more than one hundred species of algae! are known to be found within the tissues of other plants with which they sustain certain mutual relations. Ss Many additions to these forms of mutualism and symbiosis. i may be expected, while the nature of the interchanges which . take place between the higher and lower plants have not bon made out in any case, with any degree of accuracy. = For several years the author has had under observation Isopyrum biternatum, a small plant of the ———— a which inhabits North America northward from Kentucky, and eastward from the Rocky mountains. Attention was called — a the tuberous thickenings of the fibrous roots, by Dr. O. P. Jen- kins, in 1888, and they were found to exhibit such peculiar — features of structure and behavior as to be only explainable in the light of recent research on the assimilation of nitrogen in a the higher plants. ie These tubers are apparently a constant feature of the rookies since they are mentioned in nearly all systematic works con- taining descriptions of the roots and were present in all speci- — mens examined since 1888. In the plants which have come under observation the tubers are present in all stages from barely perceptible swellings to irregular cylindrical, or 2 4 shaped enlargements, 6mm. in diameter, and 2em. in length. — As many as 30 or 40 may be found on a single plant 1 a total volume of 1—2 cu. ems. These tubers are formed con- temporaneously with, or previously to the secondary thicken- ing of the roots, and show a glistening silvery-white surface in - contrast to the normal brown color of the roots. The Silber- glanz” is apparent even at the beginning of their formation, and by this appearance the tuber-forming portion of the root may be known before any enlargement has taken place. With age, however, the tuber takes on a brownish tinge. 8 The structure of the normal root is typical of this group ot the Ranunculaceae. In the formation of the tubers, the camb- jum at points opposite two or sometimes three of the xylem — 1. Moebius. Oonspectus algarum endophyticum. La Notarisia 6: 1221. 1279. 1291. 1893. „„ 3 3 ; 2 J 0 4 - * * J A 1 * MacDougal: NITROGEN ASSIMILATION. 41 groups, is developed in the form of radial wedge-shaped ex- tensions reaching half the distance to the corky layer. Toa marked development of the parenchyma surrounding the central _ ¢ylinder is due the size of the tubercle. The corky layer is _ strongly developed in mature tubercles, but apparently retains its power of growth during the entire life of the tubercle. Pro- fessor C. W. Hargitt read a note on the structure of the tubers, before the American Association for the Advancement of Sei- once, at Indianapolis, in 1890, which was afterward published =, and the results of his work are not entirely confirmed by the observations recorded here. Numerous examinations, with a view to determining the Chemical nature of the cell contents of the tubers, have been made in the laboratories of the De Pauw and Purdue univers- __ ities, and at the University of Minnesota. Such examinations Show uniformly an entire absence of starch, and sugar in its ordinary forms. The presence of inulin is noted by Professor Hlargitt, but, although all known tests were made for this sub Stance, including Green's *, using alcohol. orcin or phloro- - glucin and hydrochloric acid, yet not even a trace of this sub- Stance could be detected. As a control the reagents were tested on the tubers of Syndesmon thalictroides ( Anemonella), which contain large quantities of inulin. In the parenchyma _ tous tissue and inner layers of the cork of the Isopyrum tuber are large numbers of bodies which give some of the reactions of protein globoids together with others of a fatty or waxy na- ture. Intermingled with these bodies are numerous organisms of a bacterial nature whose morphology is yet undetermined. _ The infection of the root by these organisms takes place before the corky layer is strongly developed, and since the formation of the tuber begins before the secondary thickening of the root, it is surmised that the extraordinary growth of the cCambium and parenchyma is due to their irritant action. A number of healthy plants, which had begun a secoad growth of the stems, were received from Dr. L. M. Underwood, of _ Greencastle, Indiana. October 31, 1893, and were immediately plwaced in pots in the plant house. The condition of the tubers Was noted at the time, and two weeks later, when the stems and leaves were strongly developed, a second examination re- vealed the fact that the tubers, instead of showing a shrinkage, had actually increased in size at a time when the plant was to 2. Hargitt, C. W. Botanical Gazette 15 : 235, 1890. ‘ A. Green. Ann. Bot. 1:233, 1888. ak eee triment of the plant. 42 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, all intents drawing on its reserve food Plants grown in soils free from nitrates have grown in such manner as to indicate a capability of the absorption of free nitrogen. A 1 .- ical tests on this point are now in operation. Ac of the data at hand suggests the following e ions: 1. The tubers are not essentially storage organs, alth they may function in part as such. This is demonstrated their formation before the secondary thickening of the root has begun, and their behavior during active ores of u stems and leaves. ’ a 2. The tubers are, so far as known, found on all u . plants, and, if pathological formations, do not act to the ¢ 2 8. Pending critical culture tests, the incomplete e rv tions point to an assimilation of free nitrogen by , N 2 VIII. ON THE MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS, WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO BRANCHING ELATERS OF CONOCEPHALUS CONICUS. JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN. The peculiar spring-like, strongly hygroscopic elater cells Which are mixed with the spores in the capsules of most spec- ies of Hepaticae have long been known. To their comparative ‘morphology little attention, however, has been given. Com- monly in the systematic works on the liverworts, after a brief description of the most obvious characteristics, the further consideration of the elater is neglected. It would appear, nevertheless, that the elaters might properly receive extended study, both on account of their remarkable mechanical function and on account of their considerable range of variation in the different genera. This paper is preliminary to a more extended developmental study of elaters. Historical. It seems that the older writers conceived the use of the elater to be that of a pedicel for the spores. One of ttme earliest references at hand is that of Dillenius' in which he shows a figure of the elaters of Targionia and refers to the _ Novus Genus of Michelius* where elaters are descr bed as slender _ filaments covered with dust. Linnaeus describes Marchantia, using the phrase farina crinulo affixa.”* Ventenat,‘ in his 3 statement that the seeds of Marchantia are inserted upon elastic filaments,” quotes directly from Marchant,° for whom the genus was named. St. Hilaire also refers to Marchant as his authority for the same observation.“ Withering’ makes the general statement, with regard to the various genera of the . Hepaticae. that they have elastic cords, formed of one or two I. Dillenius, Hist. Muse. 532. Tab. LXX VIII. 9 B. 1741. 2. Michelius, Nov. Gen. 3. Tab. 3, fig. b. 1729. 3. Linnaeus, Gen. Pl. Ed. II. 508. 1742. 4.᷑. Ventenat, Tab. du Regne Veg. 2:42. An. VII.“ 1799. 5. Marchant, Mem. de l Acad. des Sc. 230. Pl. 3. 1713. 8. St. Hilaire, Expos. des Fam. Nat. 1:26. “An. XIII.“ 1805. Aas 7. Withering, Syst. Ar. of Brit. Pl. 1:363. Pl. XIV, fig. 41,51. Pl. XV, fig. 64. 1801. e ae 9 Se 44 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. spiral threads to which the seeds adhere, and shows figures of two-spiraled elaters without the membrane. In his specific description of Targionia and Anthoceros he states that ‘are many seeds, each fixed to an elastic twisted thread.“ 4 The presence of starch-grains in elaters has been known tor some time. Von Mohle speaks of the starch- grains in the young elaters of Jungermannia multifida and says that the starch disappears as the spiral bands are formed and the elater — ripens, and again" states that the starch in the elaters of liverworts vanishes when the spiral fibre is developed in them. Kienitz-Gerloff observes that he has never seen starch in the elaters of Marchantia polymorpha," but that those of Junger mannia bicuspidata™ are filled with starch-grains which later | on yield material for the double spiral band. * Perhaps more attention has been devoted to the ieee 1 of the walls of the elater and the number and arrangement of the bands than to any other particular. A great deal of this information, however, is inaccurate. Hedwig illustrates seven different types of elaters with spiral thickenings, of which — those of Conocephalus alone are entirely correct.“ He de- scribes™ the elaters as varying much in the different species as 5 to composition and length, and &s having two, three or tour inter woven filaments which seem to be contained in the very thin membrane. Kny, in connection with an article on the Hepaticae, * shows a figure of Aneura palmata drawn as if the thickening band were external. The subject seems to have 5 been thoroughly studied by Kutzing“ who states that „the elaters of Marchantia are composed in their early stages of a gelatinous substance and contain a few chlorophyll grains = which are more or less scattered about. Soon one notices that the chlorophyll grains become associated by means of very fine and delicate colorless bands, which gradually develop into the spiral bands lying on the inner wall of the cell. By further 1 development these spiral bands lose their chlorophyll , 8. Withering, loc. cit. 390. ‘4 9. Von Mohl, Einige Bemerk. u. d. Entw. u. d. Bau d. Sporen. d. crypt. Gew. Pra 4 . Grundz. d. Anat. und. Phys. d. veg. Zelle in Rud. Wagner. Handw. a. cy Phys. 207. 1851. 7 11. Kienitz-Gerloff, Vergl. Untersuch. u. d. Entw. d. Leber. Sporog. Bot. Zeit. 32: m. 23 13. Hedwig, Theoria Gen. et. Fruct. Tab. XXVIII. INS. I 14. Hedwig, loc. cit. 184. oS 15. Kny, Beitr. z. Entw. d. laub. Leberm. Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot. Pringsh. 4: Taf. VIL. 1865 1 16. Kutzing, Grundz. d. Phil. Bot. 2:54. Pl. 21, fig. 13 a. 1852. a a oa = Tilden: MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS. 45 and the cell membrane, which until this time has surrounded them, dissolves so that finally the spiral band alone is left. These bands are very elastic, and it is by means of them that the sporogonium is opened. On staining with iodine and sul- _ phuric acid they become first yellow, then red and at last green. They appear, therefore, to be composed of a mixture of muci- laginous and protein substances.” Leitgeb also takes up this question quite exhaustively through the different genera. Blasia pusilla" is described as having generally two-spiraled _ @laters. But near the middle of the cell each (or only one) of _ these spirals divides into two branches which run along paral- lel to each other. So that in the middle of the elater cell four bor three) separate fibres run beside one another. Sometimes one of these branches becomes split again, so that frequently three pairs of spiral bands are observed. Again he states that ttme elaters of Blyttia* possess two spiral bands; those of Petal- ophyllum® have mostly two, light-colored, small spiral bands; and those of Cyathodium in most cases have three spirals.” He shows a figure of one-spiraled and annular elaters of Husch. Underwood states that in rare cases elaters contain annular bands. Schiffner specifies that the elaters of Bamania pecti- nata had two spiral bands present but that he was unable to _ find any trace of cell wall!“ He also gives a figure of an elater of Anthoceros grandis which has but one spiral baud. 2. Tue origin and development of the elater cells has been taken up in detail by Schacht.» Hofmeister describes the method of development of elaters in Pe/lia epiphylla,™ and in Targionia™ _ likens the arrangement of elaters and spore mother-cells to _ that of the chlorophyllose and vesicular cells in the leaf of 4 Sphagnum. Leitgeb“ mentions elater-like cells with irregu- 1 1 found on the bottom of the capsule in the + Marchantiacee, and believes them probably to be rudimentary elaters. On another page he describes the method of forma- A ik. «0: takarec sie Wk nda 3 I. fig 16. 1879. a 22. Underwood, Bull. Illinois Lab. Nat. Hist. 8: 11. 1884. 2. Sehiffaer, Ueber exot. Hep. 260. 1883. s 24. Schiffner, loc. cit. Taf. 13. 23, Schaent, Beitr. z. Entw.-Ges. d. Frucht u. Spore v. Anthoceros laevis. Bot. Zeit. 8 3 Taf. VI. fig. 52. 1850. Tons a Hofmeister, Vergl. Untersuch. d. Keim. Entw. u. Frucht. Hoberer Krypt. 20. 1851. 46 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. tion of spores and elaters in Frullania, Lejeunia and Blaxia. — Goebel states: In the majority of the Hepaticae a number of sterile cells occur, and these figure either as nourishing cells of the spore mother-cells, which last gradually absorb the ma- terial stored up in the first; or they become spindle-shaped — elaters provided with spiral thickenings to which belong in the sowing the loosening of the complex spores.” And again: „But not all become spore mother-cells: a part remain sterile a and at first are filled with starch-grains which are consumed — during the growth of the spore mother cells.“ He goes on to say that also in Riel/a sterile cells are found in the sporogonia — among the spore mother-cells, which remain with thin walls, the so-called nourishing cells of the spore. Insignificant spin- — dle forms are found in Corsinia. Boschia has undoubted elaters — —long cells mostly with brown ringed or spiral thickenings — which are hygroscopic and have the function of loosening the spore mass when ripe and thus releasing the spores." Leclere du Sablon gives a very complete description of the relative 4 arrangement of the spores and elaters in a number of genera. In Frullania dilatata he states that the disposition of the 4 spores is not less regular than that of the elaters, and there are as many vertical rows of spore tetrads as there are t elaters. The sporogonium being somewhat spherical, it is evi- 5 dent that all the elaters are not of equal length; those which 4 are near the central part are the longest, and their length di- 1 minishes as they depart from the axis.“ In the case of Fella faa epiphylla he observes that the elaters upon the periphery are “sie disposed irregularly; towards the interior a felting of spores 3 and elaters is formed, and in the center there is a sort of col- umella made up exclusively of vertical elaters. In Targionia 4 hypophylla the disposition of spores with relation to elaters is very irregular and appears always the same whatever section + is considered. On the periphery of the sporogonium there is found a continuous bed of elaters. Sterile cells are present in 2 Sphaerocarpus terrestris. The role which one generally at- 2 tributes to them is that of nourishing the spores. It is, how 5 ever, more exact to compare them to spore mother - cells i arrested in their development. The same writer has thorough- ly investigated the development of the spores and elaters. In it 29. Leitgeb, loc. cit. Heft III. 30. 1874. i 30. Goebel, Die Muse. in Schenck Handb. Bot. 2: 317. 1882. * Ht} 31. Goebel, loc. cit. 2: 353. 1882. one pr 32. Leclere du Sablon, Rechr. sur le dev. du Sporog. des Hep. Ann, Set. Nat. er. < 11. 130. 1885. 7 : Truden. “MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS. 47 1 8 sections cut from young sporogonia of Frullania _ dilatata he states; The cells with dense protoplasm are al- ready divided into two categories; some elongate simply with- out dividing, the others elongate in the same manner, but divide. The first form the elaters, while the others give birth co spore mother-cells.” And farther on: It is interesting to remark in the case of Frullania that each elater is equivalent not q only to a spore mother-cell but to a row of them.” He gives the following account of the development of the elater cells of Frullania dilatata“; At first the elaters have a thin mem- brane of cellulose. But from this moment the evolution of the membrane from two sorts of elements is essentially different. While the protoplasm of the spores condenses and becomes re- Serve material, the contents of the elaters are seen to diminish, employed partially at least in the formation of the spiral, which, as is said, is an internal ornament of the membrane. This role of nourishing the spore mother cells is generally attributed to the protoplasm of the elaters. The formation of this spiral appears to be comparable to that which has been described by Strasburger in spiral vessels. One _ observes at a certain moment, while the elater is still com _ pletely filled with protoplasm, that it forms upon the mem- brane a thin, colorless, granular line, which is the first index of the formation of the spiral. Little by little this band thick- ens, its outline becomes distinct, ard one sees the spiral appear, still delicate and colorless, but with the form which it must preserve. During this time the interior protoplasm diminishes in volume, it falls away, so to speak, while the spiral thickens. _ Afterwards the protoplasm completely disappears; the spiral is formed and the elater arrived at its definite state, finds itself 2 reduced to the state of a cellular skeleton of which the role _ henceforth is known to be only of a purely mechanical order. As quoted by Bennett aud Murray.“ Leclere du Sablon found the sporogonium of the typical Hepaticae to be composed at an _ arly stage of sixty-four cells, each of which subsequently _ divides into four. These cells elongate in the direction of the axis of the epokogontun and then become differentiated into two kinds. In the one kind the nucleus undergoes repeated _ bipartitions, and these give rise to the spore mother-cells; in _ the other kind the nucleus does not divide, and the protoplasm 33. Leclere du Sablon, loc. cit. 134. 384. Leelere du Sablon, loc. cit. 138. wee W. Bennett and Murray, Handb. of Crypt. Bot. 158 1889. 48 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. forms spiral granulations; these become the elaters. Ra (as in Riella) they are replaced by barren cells filled with foc material for the nutrition of the growing spores. The two kinds of cell are equal in number, each alternating with the other.“ Kienitz-Gerloff found the measurement of ripe elaters of N Marchantia polymorpha to be .55 mm.” Leitgeb gives the length of elaters in Oyathodium™ as n mm. Schiffner™ states that the elaters of Radula protensa Ldnb., var. irrectilobule are 7 .2 mm. long and .0048 mm. thick. y Erroneous figures of Marchantia elaters are shown in Le 7 Maout et Decaisne, Traité de Botanique. 704 (1876), and re- arg noes a Botany for High Schools and Colleges. Ed. VI. (1889), and Bastin, College Botany. 341. (1589). = Correct figures of Marchantia elaters are shown in Sachs, 4 Text-book of Botany. Ed. II. 355. (1882), and repeated in Go bel, Outlines. Eng. Trans. 159. (1887), and Van — a Traité de Botanique. 2: 1343. (1891). Also, correct figures are shown in Leitgeb. loc. cit. Heft V. Tu,. III. fig. 8. | : The branching of elaters of any kind has scarcely been 5 touched upon. In the Micrographic Dictionary it is stated that Targionia has branched elaters“ and a figure of a branche elater is given.“ Branched elaters of Trichia, one of the m * moulds, are shown in Pringsheim's Jahrbiécher, which resemble somewhat those of Conocephalus... Underwood states that Anthoceros has simple or branched elaters. Schiffner“ notes that the elaters of Radula protensa Ldnb. are often dung and a representation of one is given. original investigations. The fact that branching occurs in the elaters of Conocephalus conicus was noticed by Mr. A. M. Mur- fin in specimens of this plant brought into the morphological © laboratory of the University of Minnesota for class work. It was then too late in the season to obtain other material for compar- ison, so that it is not known whether or not the same thing o curs in other Minnesota genera of the Marchantiacee. 1 36. Kienitz-Gerloff, loc. cit. 171. 1874. i 37. Leitgeb, loc. cit. Heft VI. 138. 1879. 233 38. Schiffmer, loc. cit. 27. 1808. 1 39. Griffith and Henfrey, Microg. Dict. Ed. II. 1: 348. 1860. 40. Griffith and Henfrey, Microg. Dict. Ed. II. 1: 677. figs. 720. 723, 724. 1860. 41. Wigand, Zur Morph. u Syst. d. Gatt. Trichia u. Areyria. Jahrb. F. wies. Bat. Pringsh. 3: Taf. I. fig. 10. 1863. 42. Underwood, Gray's Man. Ed. VI. 726. 1889. 43. Schiffner, loc. cit. 247. Taf. VII. 1888. ac Dougal: MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS. 49 In Conocephalus each receptacle or head contains a cluster of _ from seven to nine sporogonia. These are conical in shape and are filled with spores and radially arranged elaters. The _ sporogonia of the material investigated at this time were mostly in rather advanced stages of development, but a few younger specimens were found. The method employed in working upon the material was as follows: The entire contents of a single sporogonium were mounted in water and with a low power an estimate was made of the proportion of branched to unbranched elaters in the en- tire mount. The most peculiar forms were then selected and examined under higher power. Measurements were taken with the micrometer and careful drawings made, giving special at- _ tention to (1) the contents of the elater cell, (2) the thicken- ing of the wall of the elaters, (3) abnormalities in branching. Observations were made in this manner upon two or three _ sporogonia in each head, and also upon several receptacles on the same plant. The normal elater cell (Pi. IV. figs. 1, 2. 7) of Conocephalus is comparatively short, thick and geniculate. It secretes on its inner surface a thickened band of a brownish color which winds Spirally around the cell. This band generally branches shortly after leaving the end of the elater. One or both of these strands may branch a second time. In most cases the branches fuse again at the opposite end, so that in general each end of an elater is occupied by a single loop, while its middle portion Contains three, four or sometimes five strands running parallel With each other. According to citations already given, young elaters have been observed to contain starch. But in all these instances the _ writers assert that with the appearance of the spiral bands all trace of the starch passes away. But in the youngest recep- tacle examined, the spiral bands of the elaters (PI. V. figs. 8, 9, 11), though only faintly colored, were clearly distinguishable in outline, showing that they were quite well advanced in age. These elaters were very abundantly furnished with starch- grains. This circumstance may have been due to an overplus of starch after the necessary amount had been used in the building up of the thickene1 bands. It also suggests the orig- inal nutritive function of the elater. In the elaters of the other ¥ _ receptacles examined there was no visible trace of cell-contents of any kind. In attempting to ascertain the character of the q ‘secretion, the best result was obtained from treating with sul- 50 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. phuric acid. This caused a decided swelling of the = bends and indicated them to be lignified. A superficial observation of these elavers would probably give one no idea of any law governing their mode of b — ~ ing. The budding has the appearance of taking placed . criminately from the ends or from the middle portion of t cell. But a more careful study shows that there is a disti tion between the two ends, that one is bifurcated, the other simple. What appears then to be a branch erm — intermediate portion becomes a simple case of diche branching from the end, with one member more vigorously | developed than the other. In one instance only (1 I. tig. 9) an elater was observed in which both ends were bifurcate. This distal branching of the elaters may be explained as be- ing due to their radial arrangement within the sporogonium. — They grow upwards from the base in all directions. This causes the two ends to develop under different conditions, and hence they come to be different in character and in capability. The basal ends are crowded and pressed together, and there- fore become attenuated, while the apper ends, from the shape of their enclosure, have more than enough room in which to grow, and as a result they first assume a truncate form and then, subsequent to the loosening up of the contents of the 4 sporogonium, they begin putting forth buds to fill up the unoc- — cupied space. This fact was shown conclusively in the case of the sporogonium mentioned above, which, though the youngest one examined, could not be said to be in an early stage of devel- opment. Yet in this entire mount there were not more than six or seven branched elaters, and in these the protuberances — were very rudimentary, as shown in the figures. Some recep- 4 tacles did not contain a single branched elater, and often Some of the sporogonia in a receptacle would furnish branched 5 elaters While others would not. As a further instance of this tendency to branch at the upper ends, it may be noted that Sullivant“ speaks of the upper ends of the elaters of Lejeunia as being truncate-dilated. This phenomenon, then, is but another example of the incli- nation of cells to enter upon a new period of growth, under conditions of relief from pressure, or in other words, of their ’ tendency to fill space. The analogy is thus apparent between the branching of elater cells and (1) the budding of the Least plant and of Vaucheria or Botrydium, (2) the formation of armed 44 Sullivant, Gray’s Manual, Ed. I. 685. 1848. 0 MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS. 51 eas an the stalks of many water plants, e. g. 4 Eriophorum and Scirpus lacustris and of stellate hairs in the petiole 3 ‘of Nuphar, (3) the occurrence of thyloses in the trachez of many Dicotyledonous woody plants (Quercus, Sambucus, Cucurbita, ete.) and some Monocotyledons (Canna, Palms, etc.). In connection with this matter an interesting paragraph is found in Goebel’s _ Outlines where he observes: In parenchyma of the funda- - mental tissue of the leaves (Marattia, Angiopteris, Danaea, and _ Kaulfussia), Lurssen“ found outgrowths on the walls of the cells bounding the intercellular spaces; these outgrowths pro- _ ject into the spaces, and where these are small. they take the form of bosses or conical projections, but in larger ones they become long, slender filaments, which are quite solid and con- _ sist of cuticularized substance; large intercellular spaces are quite filled with a web of these filaments.” In this case the cell wall alone undertakes the space-filling function. As to the point at which the bud appears, this may depend upon several things: (1) There may be slight differences in the _ thickness of the wall of the elater, and if so, the protuberance will occur at a thinner rather than ata thicker part, for that will have the greater extensibility. (2) There may be variable areas of maximum turgescence in an unsymmetrical cell, and as a matter of course, a bulging or swelling out would be caused _ where there was the greatest pressure. (3) Again, it is readily _ conceived that there may be and probably is some relation be- tween the branching of the elater cell and the distribution of bands; but this relation is not easily defined. Whether the Spiral band is principally concerned in the process and by its more vigorous growth stretches out the cell membrane, or _ whether the impulse is given to the membrane itself, and the band merely keeps pace with it in growth, or is formed some- What more tardily, is a matter which will require much more Study before a conclusion can be reached. In general, the bud, from its earliest appearance, is seen to be encircled by one or more loops (Pl. IV. fig. 8, ö; fig. 13, a; Pl. V. fig. 12, a. b.). but ' exceptions to this rule occur (Pl. IV. fig. 6, c; Pl. V. fig. 4, d.). _ (4) Perhaps, also, the varying thickness or width of the bands may exert some influence. The branching of the elater itself necessarily leads to pecul- _ iarities and complexities in the branching of the spiral bands. S. Goebel, Outlines. 255. 1887. 46. Lirssen, Handb. d. Syst. Bot. 1: T. 1879. + 52 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. after leaving the end of the elater. One of these strands di- vides again (6) and the other at a point still farther on(c). One of the branches from h and one from meet the second one from » at d. while the second one from ¢ returns the length of the elater and fuses with the original fibre at a. 4 Sometimes the spiral band splits into three or four divisions y (Pt. „ figs. 2. a; 6, a; Pl. JU. fig. 18, a). This generally occurs — with the throwing out of a branch (Pt. IV. fig. 8. a; fig. 14. % The general rule appears to be that the two spiral threads start from the end of the elater, divide once or twice near the — middle, part going directly into each branch of the elater, but sometimes a strand will traverse, in turn, two parallel branches without extending into the body of the elater at all (. IV fig. — 4, a; fig. 15, b; H. U. fig. 7, a). * It seems generally to happen that the most interesting speci- mens are found near the edge of the coverglass where ovapora- — 5 tion takes place very rapidly. When the water is renewed such a disturbance is caused that it is almost impossible to keep the object in view until it comes to rest again, and even then it is likely to be in an entirely different position so that the first — drawing cannot be finished; so it is necessary to be very expe- ditious in the work. However, in one or two cases, I succeeded __ in getting two drawings of the same elater from different views (Pl. V. figs. 4 and 5). This brings out the manner of branching in the spirals much more clearly. Two bands are observed to coalesce (a) and immediately separate again, one 4 of the latter branches dividing a second time () to form a loop around the end of the tube. The other branch joins with a2 third (c) band which has traversed the length of the elater, * forming likewise a loop which appears from one view (fig. 4) rf to lie upon a flat surface of the wall, while in the other position 2 (fig. 5) a bulging out is apparent. evidently the beginning of a2 new branch. In a single case (Pl. IV. fig. 6) the spiral systems of Ws N developed branches of an elater were entirely independent ot 4 each other. This, perhaps, might seem to have the Rate of being due to fusion between two elaters, but if we follow the above mentioned view that the wall and not the fibre takes the initiative in growth, it becomes a simple case of branching. | In Pl. IV., figs. 4, 8 and 9 and in Pl. V., fig. 13 were all taken from the same sporogonium. Pi. IV. figs. 3 and 11 were from the same head. The first five elaters represented in Pl. P J. were taken from the same sporogonium. About one fourth 1 1 7 4 5 MacDougal: MORPHOLOGY OF HEPATIC ELATERS. 33 ot the whole number were branched. Figs. 6, 7 and 10 were 4 _ from another sporogonium in the same head. Figs. 8 and 9 were from the youngest receptacle studied. Figs. 12 and 14 were from an older head on the same plant as that from which a. mae Sand 9 were drawn. Although some of the sporogonia were fully ripe when . studied. in no instance was an elater observed which had lost its membrane. Summary and conclusions. The above statements may be summarized as follows: N 1. So far as known the young elaters of Liverworts always ‘contain starch. In most cases it disappears as the spiral bands are formed, but it may also be present in mature elaters. _ Aside from this substance no cell-contents have been observed. 2. The branching of elaters is known to take place in Targ- _ fonia, Anthoceros, Radula and Conocephalus. It is probably more 3. In the case of Conocephalus, at least, the branching follows a adichotomous order. It may be explained as due to the radial arrangement of the elaters within the sporogonium, from which the two ends of the elater come to have different capabilities. _ 4 The conditions of branching may be said to depend upon ' three circumstances: (1) The shape of the sporogonium, (2) the arrangement of the elaters with reference to their mutual Pressure, (3) the structure of the elater. 5. The branching does not take place until the pressure within the sporogonium is relieved by the loosening up of the Spores and elaters, preparatory to their being set free. There- _ fore the branching is analogous to the phenomena of thyloses. 6. The number of spiral bands in the walls of elaters varies from one to five. These undergo branching and fusion. T7. The normal elater of Conocephalus conicus, as a rule, con- _ tains two spiral threads, one or both of which generally branch. 8. The abnormal branching of the elater causes abnormal branching of the spiral threads Tue data on which this paper is based were gathered in the _ morphological laboratory of the University of Minnesota. 54 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. IX. REVISED DESCRIPTIONS OF THE MINNESOTA ASTRAGALL EpMUND P. SHELDON. The varied types of Astragalus descriptions in the manuals have made it seem necessary that a beginning be made in the way of revision. The following diagnoses are made not from any type specimens, but from a study of the species as I have been able to observe them in the field and from the characters shown by the specimens in the Herbarium of the University ot Minnesota, and of the Missouri Botanical Gardens. For the use of the latter I am indebted to Dr. William Trelease, Who has kindly loaned me the specimens for study. 1. Astragalus crassicarpus Nort. in Fras. Cat. 1. 1813. A. carnosus PUnsu Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 740. 1814. A. caryocarpus KER. Bot. Reg. 2: 176. 1816. A. succulentus Rich. Frankl. Journ. 18. 1823. A. pachycurpus T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 332. 1838. ae Perennial, with minute, appressed pubescence, pena glabrate; stem 1} to 4 dm. in length, decumbent or rarely ey simple or branching only at the base, thick, striate; leaves 6 to 10 em. in length, rachis grooved; /eajlets 10 to 20 mm. in leokthi | in eight to fourteen pairs, narrowly oblong or obovate, usually — glabrous above but with close, appressed pubescence beneath; stipules ovate-acuminate, divaricate or rarely reflexed; peduncles — * 7 to 12 mm. in length, bearing six to ten flowers in a short, ple like raceme; jlowers 15 to 25 mm. in length, slender, ped- icelled, erect spreading; calyx cylindrical, often tinged with purple, the subulate teeth one-third to one-half the length of 2 the tube; corolla violet- purple; legume 1.5 to 2.5 cm. in length, fer globose or ovate, glabrous, succulent, thick and fleshy, becom- 4 ing cellular, bilocular, when mature becoming dull purplish — tinged. North America: Saskatchewan to S. W. Texas; from Colo. ba Minn., Nebr. and Iowa. Minnesota: Throughout the prairie portion of the state. Ln 4 nnn ee l * 2 ‘ Sheldon: DESCRIPTIONS OF ASTRAGALI. 55 Minn. specimens in herb: Clark 1, Minneapolis; Seward 1, Minneapolis; Cross 1, Minneapolis; Pomeroy 1, Minneapolis; Sandberg 276, Minneapolis; Kassube 51, Minneapolis; Sheldon 1068, Minneapolis; Ankeny 1, Minneapolis; Sandberg 132, Red Wing; Sheldon 3729, Fergus Falls; Sheldon 3446, Lake Christ- ina, Douglas county; Ballard 341, Jordan, Scott county; Aiton 1, Minneapolis; Sheldon 3844, Dalton, Otter Tail county; Shel- don 3498, Lake Christina, Douglas county. Astragalus plattensis Nurr. in T. & G. Fl. 1332. 1838. A. caryocurpus Torr. in Ann. Lye. N. T. 3: 0. 1828. not A. caryocarpus KER. Bot. Reg. 2: 76. 1816. A. mericunus A. Gray, Pl. Lindh. 176, 1845. Perennial, loosely villous throughout; stems 1.5 to 3 dm. in 4 length, erect or ascending, striate, often contorted; leaves 5 to 10 cm. in length, rachis grooved above; leaflets 8 to 10 mm. in length, in six to ten pairs, obovate, oblong or elliptical, obtuse, often glabrous above; stipules foliaceous, ovate-acuminate, some- times clasping but not connate, becoming reflexed; peduncles 6 to 8 cm. in length, subcapitate; flowers 12 to 16 mm. in length, crowded, short-pedicelled, spreading; calyx cylindrical, loosely villous, the filiform, spreading teeth one-third to one-half the length of the tube; corol/a ochroleucous, tinged or tipped with purple; legume 14 to 20 mm. in length, ovate-acuminate or ob- long, slightly curved, sulcate, minutely pubescent, finely trans- _ versely rugose-veined, completely bilocular, 10 to 12 seeded. North America: Minn. to Ind. and N. Alabama; west to Kan. Nebr., Colo. and Texas. This species has been reported from western and southwest- ern Minnesota, but no specimens purporting to eome from the localities named have been seen by the writer. Astragalus tennesseensis A. GRAY has heretofore been referred to the above, but it seems to be a valid species. It has been found from northern Ills. to Tenn. and Alabama. Astralagus carolinianus Linn. Spec. 757, N. 9. 1753. A. canadensis LINN. 757, N. 10. 1753. Perennial, slightly puberulent or glabrate; stems 3 to 12 dm. high, erect, usually striate, especially above and in the more pubescent forms; leaves .5 to 3 dm. in length, the rachis striate; _leaylets 10—40 mm. in length, in five to fourteen pairs, elliptical or oblong, usually glabrous above but white pubescent beneath, acute, obtuse or retuse; stipules triangular-acuminate, connate 56 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, below; peduncles 6 to 20 em. in length, bearing long, spikes; flowers 10 to 15 mm. in length, numerous, becom} horizontal or reflexed; calyx cylindrical, with short, subulate — teeth; corolla greenish cream-color; legume 10 to 15 mm. in length, nearly erect, 13 or elliptical, 3 rarely t 1 ‘membrane lining the cavities. a ; A polymorphous species varying much in the size and shape. 2 of the leaflets. 1 North America: Quebec, Ont., Hudson bay and Rocky mts. = to N. V., Ga. and Fla.; W. to the headwaters of the Columbia river and the Saskatchewan; S. in mountains to the Great Basin region; through Colo., Minn., Nebr., Kan. and Ark, = Minnesota: Throughout the state. 25 Minn. specimens in herb: Sheldon 3415, Eagle lake, o 1 Tail county; Pomeroy 2, Hennepin county; Kassube 52, Minne- 3 apolis; Holtz 15, Hennepin county; Taylor 685, Minnesota lake? Taylor 715, Minnesota lake; Ballard 488, Prior's lake, Scott county; Sheldon 1587, Lake Benton; Taylor 912, Glenwood; Bal. lard 767, Waconia; Sheldon 3786, Sand lake, Otter Tail county; Herrick 75, Minneapolis; Sandberg 133, Goodhue county; Holz- — inger 56, Winona county; Holzinger 57, Winona county; Burgle- — baste haus 1, Hennepin county; Sheldon 3275, Bridgman, Mille Lacs 7 county; Sheldon 3852, Dalton, Otter Tail county; Sheldon 8737, Fergus Falls. Otter Tail county; Sheldon 7212, Graceville, (a 2 form with elliptical-ovate leaflets, 4 to 5 mm. in length). 7“ Astragalus laxmanni Jaog. Hort Vindob 8:22. 177) A, adsurgens PALL. Astrag. 40. 1800. „ A. syriacus PALL. Reise, 2: 559. 1771, na not A. syriacus LINN. Spec. 759. 1753. 5 ae A. semibilocularis DC. Astrag. 136. 1802. rai A. adsurgens PALL. var. prostratus Fisch. Hort. Gar. ex DC. Pet a 2: 287, 1825. ; a A. microphyllus GEORGI, Beschr. Russ. Nachtr. 296. 1802. Pa A. laæmanni Nutr. Gen. 2:99. 1818. ie A. striatus Nutt. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1:330. 1838. A. adsurgens PALL. var. lacmanni TRAU Tv. in Bull. Mosq. 1 507. 2 1860. A. hypoglottis LIN N. var. robustus Hoox. in Lond. Journ. Bot. =. G:210. 1854. eS Perennial, cinereous with minute, 3 pubescence, | or 25 glabrate; stems 1 to 4 dm. high, ascending or decumbent, branch- ing only at the base, striate or nearly terete; leaves 4 to 12 cm. 3 i 5 8 aan ae Be. 7 3 =. 4! 2 3 "Sheldon: DESCRIPTIONS or ASTRAGALI. 57 x _ feng leaflets 8 to 30 mm. in length, in four toten pairs, nar- rowly or linear-oblong, acute or obtuse, the margins becoming revolute: stipules triangular-acuminate, scarious, often reflexed, D aupatly connate below and free above; peduncles 8 to 10 cm. in length, usually exceeding the leaves, striate, bearing a dense, oval spike; Homers 10 to 18 mm. in length, slender; calyx cylin- drical, the tube equalling or exceeding the setaceous teeth, sub- _ villous with appressed white or black and white hairs inter- mixed; corolla purple or ochroleucous tipped with purple; _ legume 10 to 15 mm. in length, coriaceous, pubescent, sessile, 7 ‘aeoending, straight, usually triangular-compressed, with a dorsal sulcus, bilocular by the intruded dorsal suture, usually -many-seeded. 3 * North America: Minn. and the Saskatchewan to British jr Columbia and Washington; S. to Oregon and W. Kan. Minnesota: Infrequent in the prairie region of the southern and western portions of the state. Minn. specimens in herb: Sheldon 2019, Brainerd; Oecestlund 208, Minneapolis; Moyer 1, Montevideo; Holzinger 298, Hau- cock; Taylor 872, Glenwood; Sheldon 1381, Lake Benton; Sheldon 3402, Lake Christina, Douglas county; Sheldon 5278, Lakeville lake, Dakota county. Astragalus hypoglottis Lixx. Mant. 2: 274. 1771. A. glaux PALL. Reise, 2: 464. 1771. A. arenarius PALL. Reise, 2: 464. 1771. A. agrestis Dou. in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard. & Bot. 2:257. 1832. A. goniatus Nurv. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1:330. 1838. Perennial, loosely pubescent or glabrous; stems 8 to 25 cm. in length, diffusely procumbent or ascending, nearly terete; leaves 4 to 8 cm. in length, the rachis channelled; leaflets 6 to 15 mm. in length, in seven to ten pairs, oblong or linear-oblong, _ obtuse or retuse; stipules subfoliaceous, ovate, acute or obtuse, _ Sheathing; peduncles thick, striate, capitate or subspicate; _ flowers 15 to 22 mm. in length, erect; calyx cylindrical, loosely pubescent with nigrescent hairs, especially the linear teeth Which are equal to or shorter than the tube; corolla violet or yellowish purple tinged with green; legume 7 to 10 mm. in length. coriaceous, silky-villous with white, usually appressed hairs, sessile, erect or ascending, straight, triangular-com- Pressed. with a deep dorsal sulcus, completely bilocular by the intruded dorsal suture, usually many seeded. 58 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. North America: Hudson bay to Alaska; S. in U. 8. trom Mont. to Minn., Nebr. and S. Colo. Minnesota: Infrequent in the prairie region of the southern al and western portions of the state. Minn. specimens in herb: Taylor 743, Glenwood; Sheldon — 8664, Fergus Falls; Moyer 252, Montevideo; Moyer 258, Mont video; Sheldon 7217, Graceville, Big Stone county; Sheldon 7 7 7418, Lake Traverse, Traverse county. _ Astragalus gracilis Nurr. Gen. 2:100. 1818. Dalea parvifora Punsn. Fl. Amer. Sept. 474. 1814. Psoralea parviflora Poin, Suppl. 4.50. 1816. Phaca parvifolia Nurr. in T. & G. Fl. 1348. 1838, A. parviflorus MacM. Metasp. Minn. Val. 325. 1892. not A. parviflorus Lam. Eocy. Meth. 1: 310. 1743. Perennial, with fine, hoary pubescence, or glabrate; stems g to 5 dm. in length, virgate, erector ascending, sparsely branch- ing; leaves 3 to 4 cm. in length, rarely reduced to the filiform rachis; laflets 8 to 20 mm. in length, in two to four pairs, nar- rowly linear or filiform, obtuse or retuse; stipules minute, tri- 5 angular- acute, often connate below; peduncles 6 to 12 cm. in length, bearing a slender, many-flowered raceme; flowers small. 4 to 6 mm. in length, on very short pedicels; calyx campanu- late, with short, triangular teeth; corolla pale purple or whit- ish; legume 5 to 7 mm. in length, reflexed-spreading, elliptic- ovate, pointed, coriaceous, transversely rugose-veined, slightly _ pubescent at first, becoming glabrous, concave dorsally, the ventral suture prominent, unilocular, two or three seeded. North America: Colorado to Kan., Nebr., Mo. and Minn. Reported from southwestern Minnesota, Watson. Astragalus lotiflorus Hoox. FL Bor—Am. 1:152. 1833. ' Phaca lotiflora Nutt. in T & G. FL 1: 349. 1838. A, lotiflorus Hoox. forma pedunculosus A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 209. 1838. Perennial, caespitose with short, thick, woody, branching 5 1 1 7 n * * „ — . ‘ 5 0 hie on be 7 22 ae oe r r * re . stems, cinereously pubescent throughout with appressed hairs; x 5 2 leaves 4 to 8 cm. in length, erect spreading, rachis pubescent with white, spreading hairs; leaflets 5 to 15 mm. in length, in five to ten pairs, oblong-elliptical, obtuse; stipules ovate, acute or acuminate, persistent; peduncles 6 to S em. inlength, usually exceeding the. leaves, capitately six to ten flowered; flowers 8 to 12 mm. in length; calyx campanulate, the teeth 2 ea: longer than the tube; corolla yellow or ochroleucous; legume 15 to 20 mm. in length, coriaceous, inflated, turgid. oblong-ovate, Straight. appressed-pubescent, sessile, erect spreading, dorsal suture impressed, cross-section obcordate, unilocular, few to many seeded. North America: Saskatchewan and Brit. Colo., to Minn., Dak., Wyo., Nebr., Kan., Ind. Ter. and Texas. Minnesota: Chippewa county, Minn. — in Dero) Moyer 257, Montevideo; Moyer 258, Montevideo. Astragalus elatiocarpus Seip. Bull. Minn. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9, 20. 1894. A. lotiflorus Hook. forma brachypus A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad 6: 209. 1866. Perennial, acaulescent or somewhat caespitose with short, thick, woody, rarely branching stems, covered with white, ap- pressed hairs; leaves 5 to 13 cm. in length, erect. pubescent with long appressed hairs; /ea/lets 6 to 16 mm. in length, usually in four pairs, rarely five or six, broadly lanceolate, acute or in some forms obtuse or rarely retuse, pubescent with white, appressed hairs beneath, slightly so above; stipules 3 to 5 mm. in length, ovate acuminate; peduncles elongating after the fruit has ma- tured, becoming as long or slightly longer than the leaves; flowers 3 to 5 mm. in length, sessile, few, usually three or four; calyr short campanulate, the teeth longer than the tube; corolla yellow, the keel inflexed; /egume 18 to 25 mm. in length, ovate- acuminate, incurved, sessile, woody, pubescent with white, _ somewhat spreading hairs, dorsal suture rarely very slightly impressed. unilocular, few to many seeded. North America: From Colo. and Wyo., to Tex, Minn. and Hudson bay. Minnesota: Otter Tail, Big Stone and Traverse counties. Minn. specimens in herb: Sheldon 3809, Silver lake, Otter Dal county; Sheldon 3423, Eagle lake, Otter Tail county; Shel- daun 3728, Fergus Falls; Sheldon 7293, Graceville; Sheldon 7433, lake Traverse, Traverse county; Sheldon 7210, Brown’s Val- ley. Traverse county. Astragalus neglectus (T. & G.) Phaca neglecta T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 344. 1838. not A. neglectus Fisch. in Srxup. Nom. 1: 162. 1840. A. cooperi A. GRAY, Man. Bot. Ed. II. 98. 1856. 60 MINNESOTA BUTANICAL STUDIES. Perennial, many stemmed from the thick root; stems 8 to „ dm. high, rigid, erect spreading, glabrous; leaves A to 10 em. in length, rachis grooved above, slightly keeled below; leaflets 10 to 20 mm. in length, in five to ten pairs, elliptical or narrowly oblong, obtuse or retuse, smooth above, but minutely rough- ened with flat, appressed hairs beneath; stipules triangular- acute, reflexed; peduncles as long as the leaves, subcapitately a eight to fifteen flowered; slowers 15 to 17 mm. in length, becom- ing reflexed; calyx short-cylindrical, grayish pubescent, often purplish when fresh, the subulate teeth shorter than the tube; corolla white or ochroleucous; legume 2 to 2.5 cm. in length, coriaceous, inflated, ovate-globose, acute, glabrous, reticulated and minutely transversely rugose-veined, unilocular, but both sutures becoming intruded with age, lined within with cob- webby hairs which traverse the cavity, many seeded. North America: Western Quebec, Ont., N. Y. and along the Great Lakes to Wisc., lowa and N. Minn. Minnesota: Otter Tail, Itasca and Goodhue counties. Minn. specimens in herb: Sandberg 1100, Itasea lake; Sheldon 8826, Dalton, Otter Tail county; Sheldon 3414, Eagle lake, Otter Tail county; Sheldon 3534, Lake Belmont, Otter Tail 9 a Sheldon 3800, Fergus Falls. ; Astragalus flexuosus DovGt. in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard. & Bot. 2:256. 1832. Phaca flexuosa Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am, 1:140. 1833. ’ Phaca elongata Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1:140, 1833. Perennial, ashy-puberulent; stems 3 to 6 dm. in length, ascend- N ing or decumbent, often branching; leaves 4 to 6 em. in lengtn. in five to ten pairs, oblong or linear-obovate, obtuse or retuse; stipules connate below but triangular-acuminate and often re- 1 8 flexed above; peduncles 8 to 16 cm. in length, often striate. loosely racemed; flowers 8 to 10 mm. in length, pedicelled, be- coming reflexed; calyx campanulate, with short, triangular — teeth; corolla white or purplish; legume 15 to 20 mm. in length. coriaceous, Jinear-oblong, flattish, becoming cylindric and arcuate with age, slightly puberulent, very short-stipitate with- in the calyx, unilocular, six to ten seeded. North America: Saskatchewan, Brit. Col., N. W. T., Assini- boia and lat. 50° N. to Minn., W. to Mont, S. to Colo. and Nebr. Minnesota: Chippewa, Big Stone and Traverse counties. Minn. specimens in herb: Moyer 254, Montevideo; Sheldon 72844 Graceville; Sheldon 7169, Brown's Valley. The two latter bik fn SY K 1. Sheldon: DESCRIPTIONS OF ASTRAGALI 61 . 7 e were in a preceding paper“ inaccurately referred to A. convallarius Greene. Astragalus tenellus Pursn. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2:473. 1814. A, multi ſlorus A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. @:226, 1864. Errum muliiforum Punsn. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2:739. 1814. Orobus dispar NUrr. Gen. 2:95, 1818. Phaca nigrescens Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am, 1143. 1833. Homalobus multi ſlur us T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 350. 1838, A. nigrescens A. Gray, Am. Journ, Sel, II. 38.410. 1862, Perennial, slightly puberulent throughout with usually scat- _ tered hairs, becoming glabrous with age; stems 1.5 to 4.5 dm. in length, rigid. erect-spreading, branched, slender, numerous, often growing in clumps 3 to 9 dm. in diameter; leaves 2 to 6 em. in length, the rachis usually slightly curved; leaslets 6 to 15 mm. in length, in five to twelve pairs, linear or narrowly _ oblong, acute or obtuse; stipules connate below but free above, . acuminate, erect, becoming dark-colored with age; peduncles as long as or often exceeding the leaves, with a loosely, seven to _ twelve flowered raceme; flowers 6 to 8 mm. in length, becoming reflexed with age, each borne on a short pedicel, which equals in length the linear-subulate, reflexed bract which subtends it; calyx campanulate, the teeth shorter than the tube; corolla ochroleucous, sometimes tinged with purple; legume 10 to 17 mm. in length, including the short stipe which slightly exceeds mme calyx, chartaceous, oblong, flat, glabrous, coarsely reticu- lated, becoming black, unilocular, two to four seeded. North America: W. Minn. to Mont., S. to Kan. and Colo., W. to Utah, Nev. and S. Calif. Minnesota: Otter Tail county. Minn. specimens in herb: Sheldon 3535, Lake Belmont, Otter Tail county; Sheldon 3429, Eagle lake, Otter Tail county. i Geol. and Nat. Hist, Surv. of Afinn, 9. 16, 1994. F e ote. * aA = U B J aA 62 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. X. SYNONYMY OF THE NORTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF JUNCODES WITH FURTHER NOMENCLATURAL NOTES ON ASTRAGALUS. EDMUND P. SHELDON. The genus Juncodes was founded by Moehring in his Prima . 4 Line Horti Privati in 1736. It was employed by Sabbati in 1745 and adopted by Adanson in 1763, Dr. Otto Kuntze ro- stored the genus in I891.! The confusion, however, in which Dr. Kuntze has left 43 1 synonymy of the American species has led the writer to pre- pare this list as preliminary to a more extended study and en- numeration of the North American species of Juncodes. Juncodes pilosum (LIxx.) O. K. Rev. Gen. 2:725. 1891. Juncus pilosus Lunn. Spec. 329. 1753. Juncus vernalis REICHARD, Fl. Moen. Fr. 2:182. 1778. Juncus luzula Krack. Fl. Sil. 1:569. 1787. Juncus nemorosus LA. Ency. Meth. 3:272. 1789. Juncus pilosus LINN. var. cymosus FR. Scur. Bair. Fl. 1:622. 1789. = Luzula vernalis Lam. & DC. Fl. Fr. 3: 160. 1805. Luzula pilosa WILLD. Eoum Berol. 393. 1809. Juncodes caroline (Wars.) O. K. Rev. Gen. 2:724. 1891. Luzula caroline WATs. Proc. Am. Acad. 14:302. 1879. Juncodes giganteum (Desv. ) Luzula gigantea Desv. in Journ. de Botanique 1:145. 1808. Luzula paniculata Desv. in Journ. de Botanique 1:147. 1808 ? Luzula letevirens LIERu. in Vid Medd. Nat. For. 46. 1850. Luzula denticulata LIERu. in Vid Medd Nat. For. 46. 1850. Luzula latifolia LIERu. in Vid. Medd. Nat. For. 47. 1850. Juncodes spadiceum O. K. var. giganteum O. K. Rev. Gen. 2: 724. Be: 1891. 1. Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:722. 1891. hed — oe a eae aT Fee 2 me 3 Juncus glabratus Horre in Sched. et in Fr. Rostk. de junco. 1801. Juncus intermedius Host. Icones Gram. Austr. 3:65. 1805. Luzula spadicea DC. var glabrata E. Meyer. Syn. Luz. 8. 1823. Lugulu glabrata Ds v. in Journ. de Botanique 1:145. 1808. Luzula glabrata Desy. var vera BUCHEN. in Eugl. Jahrb. 12: 107. 1890. Juncodes spadiceum O. K. Rev. Gen. 2:724. 1891 in pt. Juncodes parviflorum (Ears. ) Juncus parviflorus Enn. in Bietrag. 6:139. 1781. Luzula parviflora Dxsv. in Journ. de Botanique 1-144. 1808. Luzula spadicea DC, var. laxiflora E. Meyer, Syn. Luz. 8. 1823, Luzula spadicea DC. var parviflora R Mevex. Luz. Sp. in Linn. 22: 402. 1849. Juncodes parviflorum (Enru.) var. melanocarpum (Micnx. ) Juncus melanocarpus Micux. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 100. 1802. Luzula melanocarpus DEV. in Journ.de Rotauique 1:142. 1808. Luzula melanocarpa Desv. var. pallida Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 188. 1840, Luzula spadieea DC, var. melanocarpa E. Meven, Luz Sp. in Linn. 22: 188. 1849. Juncodes parviflorum (Euun.) var. subcongestum (Wars.) Luzula spadicea DC. var. subcongesta Wars. Bot. Calif. 2: 202. 1880. Luzula parviflora Desv. var. subcongesta BucHEN. in Engl. Jahrb. 12: 110. 1890. Juncodes caricinum (E. Meyer) O. K. Rey. Gen. 2724. 1891. Luzula caricina E. Meyer. Luz, Sp. in Linn. 22: 418. 1849. TLusuld barbata LIEnX. in Vid. Medd. Nat. For. 45. 1850. Juncodes arcuatum (WAHLENB.) O. K. Rey. Gen. 2:724. 1891. in pt. Juncus arcuatus WAHLENB. Fl. Lapp. 87. 1812 Luzula arcuata WAHLENB. Fl. Suec. 1:218. 1824. Juncodes hyperboreum (R. Br). Lutula hyperborea R. Br. Chi. Melv. n. 49. 1823. Luzula confusa LIND ERB. in Nya. Bot. Not. 9. 1855. Juncodes arcuatum O. K. var. hyperboreaO.K. Rev. Gen. 2: 724. 1891. Juncodes arcuatum O. K. var. confusum O. K. Rev. Gen. 2: 724. 1891. Juncodes hyperborea (R. Br.) var. major (Hook. ) Luzula hyperborea R. Br. var. major Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 188. 1840. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, — Juncodes hyperborea (R. Bae.) var. minor Hoon. — hyperborea R. Bu. var. minor Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 8: * — arctica Rv rr. Norg. Fl. 1 200. 1861, a Lusula arcuata WAULEND, var. hookeriana TKAUTY. in Act. Hort. 3 Potrop. 1:79, 1871. l Juncodes spieatam (LAN.) O. K. Rev. Gen. 2728. 1 ‘a Juncus spicatus Line. Spee. 40. 1753, 7 Lusula spicata DO, Fl. Fr. 3: 161. 1806. “4 Lusula nigricans DUV. in Journ, de Botanique 1: 154. ute 3 Juncus thyraifiorus V ext. in R. & S. Syst. Veg. 1: 277. 1829. ae Lurula obtusata Srevup, Syn Pi. Glam. 2:204. 1855. a, Lusulu spicata DC. var. vera Buconen. In Engl. Jahrb. 12.1. 7 1890, ‘ Juncodes racemosum (Desy.) O. K. Rey. Gen. 2: 725. 4 1891. * Lusula racemosa Desv. in Journ. de Botanique 3: 162. 1808, Luzula interrupta Desv. in Journ. de Botanique 3:163, 1808, — Luzula alopecurus Dxxv. in H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 1:238 1818. 4 Lurula alopecurus E. Meveu in Presl. Reliq. Haenk. 1: 145. 1827. Luzula spicata DC. var. interrupta E. Meyven Laz. Sp. in Linn. a 22:415. 1840. "eae Luzula vuleanica Lies. Vid. Medd. Nat. For. 44. 1850. 9 Juncodes comosum (E. MEYER). Luzula comosa E. Meyer Syn. Luz n. 18. 1823. 94 Luzula cupellaris Srxub. Syn. Pl. Glum. 2: 208. 1855. “ee Juncodes campestre O. K. var. comosum O. K. Rev. Gen. 2:724. 1891. | roe Juncodes comosum (E. MEYER) var. congestum (Ton 3 Juncus congestus THUILL. Fl. Par. Env. u. 179. 1799. e Luzula campestris DC. var. congesta E. Meyer. Syn. Luz. 17. 1823, Luzula comosa E. MEYER. var. congesta Wars. Bot. Calif. 2: 2. 77 1880. ane Juncodes comosum (E. MEYER). var. subsessilis (ars). . Luzula comosd E. MEYER, var. subsessilis Wats. Bot. Calif. 2: 203. os 1880. a 3 a Juncodes campestre (Lrvn.) O. K. Rev. Gen. 2:724. 1891. a var. vulgaris (J. GAUDIN). | 5 Luzula campestris DC. var. vulgaris J. GAUDIN, Fl. Helv. 2762 8 1828. Luzula vulgaris BUCHEN. in Engl. Jahrb. 6:175. 1885. 3 campestre i ‘O.K. var. multifiorum (Euru. ). Juncus multiforus Euru. Calam. Exsice. 1791. Juncus intermedius Thus. Fi, Par. Euv. 178. 1799. Juncus erectus Pers. Syn. 1:386, 188. Juncus nemorosus Host. Icon. Gram. 97, 1505. Luzula erecta Desy. in Journ, de Botanique 1 186. 1808. Luzula multiflora Les. Fl. Env. Spa. 169. 1811. Luzula intermedia var. multifiora Spex. Fl. Frib. 177. 1825. Luzula palescens Horre, Sturm, Deutsch Fl. 18: TT. 1839. 1 . Luzula campestris DC. var. multiflora L. Cecaxoyv. Prodr. Bohm. - 85. 1869. a campestris (LIx x.] MACM., var. multiflora (Eunu.) Mac. Metasp. Mino. Val. 143. 1892. Juncodes divaricatum (Wars). eee i Luzula divavicata Wars. Proc, Am, Acad. 14; 302. 1579. | Astragalus alpinus (LIN N.). Phaca alpina LIX X. Spec. 763. ma Fhacu frigida LIx x. Fl. Suec. Ed. II. n. 7. 1788. Astragalus frigidus A. Guay. Proc. Am. Acad. 6.216. 1864. Astragalus astragalinus (DC. ). ‘Ss Phaca astragalina DC. Astrag. 64. 1802. Ss Astragalus alpivus LIx N. Spec. 760. 1753. a A. alpinus PALL. Reise 2: 446. 1771-78. not A. alpinus (LINN.) SHELD. supra. A. montanus PALL. Reise 2:568. 1771-76. A. montanus JACQ Fl. Austr. 3: 131. 1775. not A. montanus Linn. Spec. 760. 1753. Oolorado and Labrador are the only North American locali- ties from which I have seen specimens of this plant. Astragalus giganteus (PALL.). Astragalus alpinus Linn. var. giganteus PALL. Astrag. 42. 1800. Nearly all the North American plants hitherto referred to Astragalus alpinus Linn., W instead to this species. Astragalus texanus n. n. * Astragalus giganteus WATS. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 370. 1882. a not Astragalus giganteus (PALL.) SHELD. supra. a a 66 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XI. FURTHER EXTENSIONS OF PLANT HAN GES. EpMUND P. SHELDON. Potamogeton heterophyllus Scures. forma myriophyl- q lus (Rospsins) Monoxd. Naiad. N. Am. 24. 1893. 4 The following localities are to be added to those reported on page 14 of this BULLETIN: Ponds near the tracks of the Brain - erd and Northern Minn. R. R. about five miles north of Stony Brook, and in a small lake east of Upper Gull lake, remains Minn. (C. A. Ballard, July and Aug., 1893). Potamogeton rutilus Word. in R. & S. Mant. 3: 202 1827. ; - First reported in Minnesota by Morong in his Naiadacesw “<2 North America as collected by L. H. Bailey in Vermilion lake. Collected also in lake Edna, Cass county, Minn. (A. P. Ander- son, Aug., 1893. ) Potamogeton major (FR.) Morone. Naiad. N. Am. 41. 1893. 4 Collected in Martin county, Cratty. Found also in Gull vali | Cass county, Minn. (A. P. Anderson and C. 4. Ballard, July, 1893. a Naias marina Linn. Spec. 1015. 1753. oe Not previously reported from Minnesota. The localities given for this plant by Morong in his Naiad- ace of North America are as follows: The species is rare in North America. Canoga Marshes and Cayuga lake, N. . (Morong, Dudley); Florida (Chap. Fl.); Utah (Parry); Lower a Calif. (Palmer). Attributed by Watson in Bot. Calif. to Clear lake (Bolander) aud Huntington Valley, Nev. ( Wheeler). Cuba. Occurs in Europe and Asia.” It was found submerged in about one foot of water in a pond ~ near lake Minnewaska, Pope county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1891). s : Sheldon: FURTHER EXTENSIONS OF PLANT RANGES. 67 Sagittaria cristata ENGLM. in Anrnun Proc. Dav. Acad. Sci. 4:29. 1886. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected near Minneapolis, Minn. (J. C. Kassube, July, _ 1878); White Bear lake, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1891); Prior's | lake, Scott county, Minn. (G. A. Ballard, July, 1891); Minne- apolis, Minn. (C. L. Herrick, June, 1878). I am indebted to Mr. Jared G. Smith of the Missouri Botanic Gardens for the iden- _ tification of the above specimens. He also informs me that he haas specimens of the same species from Minneapolis and Min- g netonka, Minn. Muhlenbergla diffusa ScnnEn. Gram. 2 t. 51. 1772. The only previous report of this species known to the writer is that in the Metaspermae of the Minnesota valley. This was based upon a specimen now in the Minnesota State Herbarium, collected in Blue Earth county, Minn. (J. B. Leiberg, 1883). It was found also on the sandy shores of lake Lida, Otter Tail county, Waun. (E. P. &. Aug., 1892). eee campestris TRIN. in Bull. Sc. Acad. Petersb. 1:70. 1836. Not previously reported from Minnesota. This species was collected at St. Anthony Park, Ramsey county. Minn. (Dr. Otto Lugger, Sept.. 1893). The plant is _ probably of recent introduction, but is now becoming thor- _ oughly established. Scolochloa arundinacea (Lila.) MacM. Metasp. Minn. Val. 79. 1892. Not previously reported from Minnesota, although collected _ in Emmet county, Iowa, (Cratty), determined by Dr. Asa Gray and conjectured by him to occur in northern and western Min- nesota. 0 Collected in Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (C. A. Ballard, July, 1893), and noted by him as “very common.” Mr. R. I. Cratty, of Armstrong, Iowa, has in a recent letter reported this species as occurring locally in Martin county, dre, Bot, Gaz. 5:27. 1884. 68 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Distichlis spicata (LIN N.) Greene, Ball. Calif „ 21415. 1887. u Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected near Morton, Renville county, Minn. (Conway MacMillan, June, 1890). Scirpus sylvaticus Linn. Spec. 51. 175g. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Typical specimens. ‘ of this plant were found near Milaca, Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. P. S., July. 1892). is) Scirpus sylvaticus Livy. forma cephaloideus u. f. Erect, rigid, growing in clumps of from fifteen to twenty — plants, 9 to 15 dm. in height, with narrow leaves; the panicle — contracted into a glomerate head; bristles 4 or 6, not down- — wardly barbed, but twice exceeding the triangular achene. Collected in sandy clearings between Milaca and Sie Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. F. &, June, 1892). Seirpus torreyi OLNey, Proc. Prov. Frankl, Soc. 1: 32. 1847. This plant was reported by Lapham as occurring in Minue- sota. It was collected at White Bear lake, Washington county, © Minn. (L. H. Bailey, July 1886); low swampy ground, border- ing Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, July, 1892). Scirpus nanus SPRENG. Pag. 1:4. 1815. Not previously reported from central Minnesota. The only reported Minnesota collection of this species of which I know is that of L. H. Bailey, at Vermilion lake, in 1886. It. was collected at Taylor’s Falls, Minn., on the rocks oe springy places (E. P. S., Sept., 1891); and in wet, boggy pe near the ‘‘narrows”, Center city, Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892). at Carex lupulina MURAL. var. polystachya Torr. & Schw. Monogr. 337. 1825. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected on te banks of Cannon river, Burnside township, Goodhue county, Minn. (A. P. Anderson, Aug, 1893). — e ees eee ee . * u W We, Poa ee). er ae ee OL * a + , att eee . Sheldon: FURTHER EXTENSION OF PLANT RANGES. 69 Eriocaulon septangulare Wrru. Bot. Arr. 184. 1776. Collected at Burntside lake, (L. H. Bailey, 1882); reported _ from lake Agnes, Douglas county, Minn. (Mrs. Terry), Common 1 along the shores and in shallow water at Linn lake, Chisago 1 county, Minn, (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892); rare in about two or _ three inches of water near the shores of Little lake, Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892). Tofieldia palustris Hubs. Fl. Angl. 157. 1762. This species was first collected in Minnesota by Mr. L. S. Cheney, in July, 1891." It was collected at Two Harbors, Lake county, Minn. (E. F. S., June, 1893). oe oe a DU . N eh, * n ee ae ee ee 1 R 4 4 5 * . = a Allium tricoecum SoLanp. in Arr. Hort. Kew. 1: 428. 1789. A sylvicolus form of this species with leaves often 2. 5 to 3 inches broad was found near Garrison, Crow Wing county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1892). Salix nigra Marsa. var, faleata Torr. FL N. v. 2:209 1843. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Frequent on open ground on the northwest shore of Mille Lacs lake, Aitkin county, Minn. (E. P. S. June. 1892). Betula lenta Linn. Spec. 983, 1783. Although collected by Dr. J. H. Sandberg at Northern Pa- cific Junction in 1885, this plant was not reported from Minne- sota until the publication by L. S Cheney# It was collected near Encampment, Lake county, Minn. (EZ. P. S., June, 1893), and on the west shore of Mille Lacs lake, Crow Wing county, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1892). Polygonum cilinode Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1:241. 1803. Heretofore reported in Minnesota from the north shore of Superior (Juni, Roberts); Upper Mississppi (Garrison); Stearns county, (Mrs. Blaisdell). Collected at Nichols, Aitkin county. Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1892); and on the Mille Lacs Indian Reservation, Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1892). x 2. 7 L. S. Flora of the Lake Superlori Region, in Trans. Wise. Acad. Sci, 9:24. i 3 L. S. loc. cit. 9: 211. 1893. 70 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a Polygonum microspermum (Esai). P. tenue Micurx. var. microspermum RN LM. In Proc. Acad. Phil 4 15:75. 1863. : Polygonum engelmanni Guexwne, Bull. Calif. Acad. 1:26. 1886, Not previously reported from Minnesota. 4 Crevices of rocks near Montevideo, Chippewa county, Minn. (L. . Moyer, Oct., 1893). 4 The plants collected differ from the published deseription only in having a tubular portion to the sheath, which is some. 4 times lacerated above. This may probably be due to the late- 4 ness of its gathering as other portions of some of the plants show the effects of weathering. The inaccessibility of the pub- lication of this species has induced me to include Green's 1 original description herewith.“ Monolepis chenopodioides (Nr.) Mog. in DOC. prod. 13, pt. 2:35. 1849. Not previously reported from Minnesota, although cations by Mr. Warren Upham in his list of western plants mn ; into the basin of the Red river.“ It was found to be abundant in low, swampy ground near Brown's Valley, Traverse county, Minn. (E. P. 8. Sept., 1893). 9 1 Amarantus spinosus Livy. Spec. 901. 1753. 2 : Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected in Good- hue county, Minn. (Dr. J. H. Sandberg, July, 1886); Minnesota 7 Point on lake Superior (T. S. Roberts, Sept., 1879); lake Chris- tina, Douglas county, Minn. (E. P. S., Aug., 1892). Silene armeria Linn. Spec. 420. 1753. ee Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected near 1 4 Grand Marais, Cook county, Minn. (H. V. Stack, July, 1892). Ranunculus macounii Brirr. ce a N. Y. Acad. Se. 12:2. 1892. This species was first . W by L. 8. a Cheney, un under the name of Ranunculus hispidus HooK.® oF 4. 1 “Erect-spreading, diffusely branched from the base, a span or more high, reddish, — very minutely scabrous-puberulent throughout; branches slender and somewhat flexuous; stipules sparingly lacerate, short, with no tubular or herbaceous portion: i i leaves lanceolate, acute, with revolute margins, g inch or more long, the upper much smaller and remote; flowers in all the axils, solitary in twos or threes, very small; 5 f pedicels strongly deflexed; sepals obtuse, shorter than the very small, ovate, shining akene, and but loosely investing it. Rocky mountains of Colorado. Remarkable in the minuteness of the flowers and fruit, erect-spreading habitat, and flowering from 1 the very base of the stems and branches.“ 1 5. Upham, Geographic Limits of the Species of Plants in the Basin of the Red River of the North, in Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 25:149 and 156. 1890. 6. Cheney, L. S. loc, cit. 235. 1893. Sheldon: FURTHER EXTENSIONS OF PLANT RANGES. 71 „%„ Oelthe backs of the: Sake river “near Mora, Kanabec county, Minn. (Z. F. . July, 1892); on the banks of the Little Stewart river, near Waldo, Lake county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1893); north of Gull lake, and peat bog, near lake Kilpatrick, Cass county, Minn. (C. A. Ballard, July, 1893). Nasturtium obtusum Norv. in T. & G. Fl. 174. 1838. Uitherto reported from Minnesota as occurring at Fergus | Falls, Otter Tail county, Minn. (ZE. P. 8. Aug., 1892). Col- _ lected also near Poplar Island lake, Ramsey county, Minn. (E. P. S., Sept. 1893). Erysimum syrticolum Suunto. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 20:185. 1893. This species was collected on the 8 hills northeast of ö l and contiguous to the recently built Belt Line R. R. tracks (E. P. S. Aug. 1893). a Saxifraga virginiensis Micux. Fl. Bor. Am. 1:269. 1803. Not previously reported from northern Minnesota, but re- 7 from Minnesota (Lapham) and from Hastings, Dakota county, Minn. (Mrs. Ray). Collected in abundance in the crevices of rocks near Two Harbors, Lake county, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1893). Ribes hudsonianum Ricuagps in Frankl. Journ. 734. 1823. 5 This has recently been reported from Grand Marais, Cook county, Minn., by L. S. Cheney.” It was collected near Milaca, Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. 85 S., July, 1892); and at Tower, St. Louis county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1893). Potentilla gracilis DouGL, var. nuttallii (Les.) * Potentilla nuttallii LU. Ind. Sem. Hort. Hamb. Add 12. 1851. 3 F. chrysantha Lena. in Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 183. 1833. not P. chrysantha Trev. Semin. Vrat. 1818. H. vigide Nurr. in Journ. Acad. Philad. 7:20. 1833. “4 not P. rigida WALL. List. E. Ind. Mus. n. 1009. 1828. ' HP. gracilis Dove. var. rigida Warts. Proc. Am. Acad. $:557. 1873. 4 > e. previously reported from Minnesota. Collected in grass 8 near Mound City, Hennepin county, Minn. (F. H. 5 glehaus, Sept., 1892). “ 8 1893. r eee oes BO . . fe? Poa Oe oe 3 * N ‘ 3 NN 72 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Waldsteinia fragarioides (Micux.) Trarr. Ros. Mon 1:107. 1828-24. a Reported from Stearns county, Minn. (Garrison); St. Croix Falls and Stillwater (Miss Field). a It was found in abundance along the Duluth and Iron Range a R. R. tracks north of Two Harbors, Lake county, Minn. (E. Ps S., June, 1893). = : 3 a Vicia americana Linn. var. linearis (Nur.) Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 11: 134. 1876. 4 Not previously reported from Minnesota or South Dakota. : Collected near White Rock, S. Dak., near Wheaton, — county, on the shores of lake Traverse, Traverse county. 2 1 4 near Graceville, Big Stone county, Minn. (E. P. 8. — 1893). At the last two localities mentioned the plant was found on the summer fallow. thus appearing as if of recent introdue- tion. a. Meibomia canadensis (Linn.) O. K. Rev. Gen. PL 1: 105. a 1891. A white-flowered, proliferated form of this species was cual on high banks near lake Mora, Kanabec county, Minn. (E. V. 8. a July, 1892). N sae Pe. Amorpha fruticosa LIx x. forma albiflora u. f. a 3 Bushy, 3-9 dm. in height; bearing sparse, nearly oval „ and elongated spikes of pure white flowers; legumes one-seeded. _ Collected on the banks of the Rum river, three miles north of Milaca, Mille Lacs county, Minn. (E. P. S. July, 1892). a 7 Dales dalea (LIN R.) Mac M. Metasp. Minn. Val. 230. 1892. Heretofore Minnesota collections of this species have been a reported only from the southern border of the state. 3 Collected near Minneapolis (H. C. Carel, Sept., 1892); Mor- ton, Renville county, Minn. (Conway MacMillan, June, 1200); Graceville, Big Stone county, Minn., and Brown’s Valley, Traverse county, Minn. (E. P. S., Sept., 1893). Psoralea tenuiflora PursH, Fl. Am. 475. 1814. Previously reported in Minnesota from Cottonwood county, (Holzinger). Collected on the banks of the Minnesota river, between Mos ton and Granite Falls, Minn. (Conway MacMillan, July, 1890). | Sheldon: FURTHER EXTENSIONS OF PLANT RANGES. 78 Lotus americanus (Nurr.) Biscu. Hort. Heid. 1839. nis species was first reported in Minnesota from Swan lake, Redwood county, Minn. (Upham). It has been collected at the State line near Elkton, S. Dak. (ZE. P. S, Aug., 1591); Pipestone * City, Pipestone county, Minn. (Max Menzel, July, 1891); be- _ tween Morton and Granite Falls, Minn. (Conway Mae Millan, June, 1890); Brown’s Valley, Traverse county, Minn. (Z. F. S. Sept., 1893); Graceville, Big Stone county, Minn. (Z. P. S. Sept., 1893). _ Polygala eruelata Lixx. Spec. 706. 1783. To the Minnesota localities for this plant are to be added: ; near North Branch, Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892); Green lake, near Princeton, Mille Lacs county, Minn. * P. S., July, 1892). Ceanothus ovatus Dxsv. Arb. 2881. 1809. 3 Previously reported in Minnesota from the St. Croix (Parry), New Ulm (Juni) and near Brainerd (MacM. & Sheld., Aug., 1890). Although observed by the writer and Professor MacMillan in the summer of 1890, no specimens of this species were pre. served. The present season, however, an abundant supply was obtained near Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (Miss J. E. Tilden, + Sune, 1893); near Stony Brook, Cass county, Minn. (C. A. Bal- ard, June, 1893); Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (A. P. Ander- son, June, 1893). Also collected near Brainerd, Minn. (ZE. F. 8. June, 1892). Viola longipes Nutr. in T. & G. Fl. 1:174. 1838. 1 the only reported Minnesota localities for this dien Yave been on the sandy pine-barrens near Brainerd and 2 ‘ille Lacs lake. _ It was found in the crevices of rocks on the lake shore near 25 Wo Harbors, Lake county, Minn. (Z. P. S. June, 1893). KRotala ramosior (Lixx.) KoRRNR, in Engl. Jahrb. 1: 146. i: 1880. ia _ Reported in the appendix to Upham's Catalogue as occurring a Lake City, (Gibson). Collected near North Branch, Chisago 3 Minn. (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892); near Richfield Center, nepin county, Minn. (F. L. Couillard, 1892); on the shores 74 um HOTANICAL STUDIES. of Poplar Island lake, 8 county, Minn. (F. P. S. Bert, 1893). Ammania coccinea Rorrs. Pl. Hort. Univ. Deser. 7. m Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collected in abundance on the shores of Bie ica alee lake Traverse, near Brown's Valley, Traverse county, Minn. (E. F. S. Sept., 1893. at 5 Vaccinium cespitosum Micex. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 234. 1808, Not previously reported from Minnesota. a Collected on the sandy banks of lake Kilpatrick, Cass coun: ty, Minn. (Mies Josephine E. Tilden, July. 1893). Kalmia glauca Ait. Hort. Kew. 2:64. 1789. To the Minnesota localities already reported for this species — the following are to be added. In cold bogs near Bay lake, Crow Wing county, Minn., and in marshes near Farm Island — i 4 lake, Aitkin county, Minn. (Z. J. S. June, 1892). a Steironema lanceolatum (Ware. ) Gray, Proc. Am. 4 12:63. 1877. — 5 Although the Watson and Coulter edition of Gray's 2 the var. — (Micux.) Gray. of. Collected near Chisago lake, Chisago county, Minn. ae 4 : Taylor, July, 1892); at Taylor’s Falls, Minn. (Z. F. S. 9 1892); and at Osceola, Wisc. (Z. F. S. Sept.. 1891). Convolvulus arvensis Linn. Spec. 153. 1753. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Sept., 1893). Lithospermum linearifolium Gol biz in Edinb. Phil 4 Journ. 319. 1822. * L. angustifolium Micux. Fl. Bor. Amer. 1: 130. 1803. 8 not L. angustifolium Forsk. Fl. Aegypt. 1775., nr L. breviforum ENGLM. & Gray var. 2 Am. Phil. Soc. 12: 203. 1861. : Minnesota specimens in herb: ~~ . Brown county, Minn. (F. P. S., July, 1892); Pelican lake, Otter Tail county, Minn. (Z. P. &. Aug., 1892); Jordan. Scott county, Minn. (C. A. Ballard, July, 1891); Brown's Valley, Traverse county, Minn. (F. P. S. Sept., ee bee a Stone county, Minn. (Z. F. &. Sept., 16898). a lithospermum longiflorum (Pours) Spreno. Syst. 1: 544. . Batechia longiflora Punsn, Fl. Amer. Sept. 1 12. 1814. a Batschia longifiora NUrr. Gen, 2: 113. 1818. . Batschva decumbens NUTT. Gen 1: 114, 1818. L. incisum LUNA. Asp. 2:303, 1818, L. mandanense SPRENG, Syst. 1: 544. 1825. Pentalophus longifiorus A DC. Prod. 10:87. 1846. Pentalophus mandanensis A. DO, Prod. 10:87. 18446. Minnesota specimens in herb: Winona county, Minn. (J. M. Holzinger,) Goodhue county, Minn. Dr. J. H. Sandberg, June, 1886); Idlewild, Lincoln county, Minn. ( Wm. J. Wickersheim, May, 1891); Cannon Falls, - Goodhue county, Minn. (Dr. J. H. Sandberg, May, 1882); Min- neapolis, Minn. (J. G Kasswhe, May, 1878); Pipestone City, _ Pipestone county, Minn. (Mar Menzel, June, 1892); Minneapolis, Minn. (G. IL. Herrick, June, 1878); Litehfield, Meeker county, 4 Minn. (V. D. Frost, June, 1892). The above separation of these much referred species is a a and while based on my own observation of these plants in the course of field study and subsequent comparison with a view of calling attention to these perplexing plants and. itt possible, procuring more material for study. 4 The plants referred to as Lithospermum loagiflorum Goldie are slender, branching, becoming procumbent, with narrowly _ linear leaves, usually about one inch in length, and with a short, _ whitish corolla, equalling in length the upper leaves or foli- aceous bracts which surround the flowers. mz On the other hand the plants referred to as Lithospermum » Tongiftorum (PursH) SPRENG, are stout, erect, very rarely _ branching above, with linear-lanceolate leaves from one and a halt to three inches in length. and with a long, yellow corolla, normally one inch to an inch and a half in length, producing 11 2 Ss oe * es ~ 8 * = = 2 4 82 * . in the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota, is made _ ¢leistogenous flowers with short, inconspicuous corollas later 76 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Lappula deflexa (Want.) Gancke. var. americana (G MAcM. Metasp. Minn. Val. 440. 1892, Hitherto Minnesota collections of this species have, to . writer's knowledge, been made only at Janesville, Waseca county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, June, 1891). Collected at Center City, Chisago county, Minn. (A G Taylor, June, 1891). 4 2 3 Cynoglossum virginlanum Li. Spec. 14. 178g. Reported from Stearns county, Minn. (Upham); St. Louis river (Mrs. Herrick); Goodhue county, Minn. (Dr. J. H. S.. berg), but this latter reference if based upon the plant so called by Dr. Sandberg and deposited in the University herbarium * questionable. Collected in edges of woods near Farm Island lake, Aitkin county, Minn. (Z. P. S. June, 1892); Gull lake, Cass county. Minn. (A. P. Anderson, June, 1893); lake Kilpatrick, Cans 1 county, Minn. C. A. Ballard, June, 1893). N Echium vulgare Linn. Spec. 139. 1758. Not previously reported from Minnesota. “ Collected near Grand Marais, Cook county, Minn. 0 * 4 Stack, July, 1892). | ee q i 9 J Salvia azurea Law. var. piteheri (Torn) ie Salvia pitcheri Tonk. in Benth. Lab. 274. 1833. 2 S. azurea LA. var. grundiſtoru BN TH. in DC. Prod. 12: . bs. S. elongata Torr. in Ann. Lye. N. T. 2:231. 1828. ion not S. elongata KN in H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 2:287. 1817. oa S. longifolia Nutr. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 5: 185. 1834. a Not previously reported from Minnesota. Plt Collected near Morton, Renville county, Minn. (Conway Mac. 2 millan, June, 1890. ae Isanthus brachiatus (LIxx.) B. S. P. Cat. N. V. 1888. This species has been reported as occurring in . Lake City (Ars. Ray); Blue Earth county (Leiberg); Minne- apolis (Winchell, Roberts). Sra 4 It was collected near Brainerd, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1892); ‘a * 9 a scl sa = N HIDEI Nyv. | "Graphs serpta a) Aca. vr ete (cn) Nv 1 nak a 1892). . * E Se MS. 1814. n Acer saccharinum Linn . Osceola, Wis. (. D. F. , ‘Sept, 1892). * — On Celastrus scandens LINN. Osceola, Wis. (. D. F. 5 i Sept., 1892). ö N 0. r grec. mag 271. 1810 county (W. D. F., Aug., 1892). DESCRIPTION OF PLATES Pirate IV. J. Elater showing dichotomous branching; length 200 mm. 4. Elater with two well developed branches, the spiral bands of which are connected by a single re (A) which extends from une to the other = but not through the body of the cell; length 210 mm. 7 5. Elater giving example of the branching of each of the two original” fibers and a second branching of one of them (A), (B)and(c); length 150mm, — 6. Shows the spiral bands of two branches separate from each other; length .200 mm. 33 7. Normal elater; length . 180 mm. 2 8. Shows an example of a spiral band branching B af length .077 mm. ta .t 9. Shows elater with two branches ateach end; length 187 m m. 10, 11 and 12. flr mun een. ; length .162 mm., .112 mm., .170 mm, ; length .150 mm. oe 14. Elater in which two threads fuse (A) and then branch again 15 three divisions, two of which (») again faust; length h mm. ss 15. Elater possessing same peculiarity (un as in fig. 4; length 225 mm, Plarn V. 1 1. 2 and 3. Wos of branching of elaters and bands; length .125 a. .135 mm. and . 110 mm. 4. 5. Two views of the same elater; length IZ mm. 6. Common example of the manner in mich the spiral bands are distributed in the branches of the elater: length .150 mm. 7. Another form resembling fig. 4, plate iv; length. 150 mm. ny 8, 9. Young elaters containing starchclength ih mm. and 112 mm. 7 10. Elater having a length of .217 mm. ee 11. Young elater containing starch; length .112 mm. on. % 12, 13 and 14 .Peculiar forms of branching and arrangement of bands; aan length .110 mm. and . 012 mm. and. I mm. 5 15. Unusual form; length .207 mm. : PLArR VI Laciniaria seariosa (LIN N.] HILL. var corymbulosa SHELD. . Involucral scale, 2. 3. 4. Hairs from axis of inflorescence. 5 6. Fruit with pappus and corolla. PLATE v. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. PLATE Vi. March, 1894 un. A REVISION OF THE MUCORACEAE WITH * ESPECIAL REFERENCE TO SPECIES RE- 5 PORTED FROM NORTH AMERICA. Roscok Pounp. . The greater part of the systematic | portion of this article was writen for te forthcoming Port 7 the Flora of Nebraska, but on account of limited space, only a den of the descriptions and a small partof the synopsis will ind a place in that work. The number of excellent revisions of this group! which have appeared recently make any further attempt of doubtful utility. But as none of them are in the English language, and as the forms described from North America by the older authors have not been subjected to the examination they still sadly need, this survey of the group may not be out | et place. The Mucoraceae are quite a coherent and well marked group. : | ‘Thoro is no great dificulty in tracing the relationship of the » several genera, and the groups into which it is subdivided set themselves off quite readily. Nor is it unwieldly in point of 3 numbers. In the Sylloge Fungorum 29 genera are given and 199 ee Nine of these genera, however, must be totally rejected. They are genera described by Corda, Preuss, Berke- ley, and other early mycologists, partly from insect eggs, partly 4 from slime moulds, and partly, perhaps, from Hyphomycetes. Fischer recognizes 20 genera, rejecting Tieghemella of Berlese : and DeToni in the Sylloge, but adding Dicranophora Schroeter, since described. Schroeter has united with some freedom, and _ recognizes but 15 genera, including one not in Fischer's range. One more has recently been described, so that to follow Schroeter we should have 16, and to follow Fischer 22 genera. I think we may well follow Schroeter in all but two cases, and my conclusion is that there are 18 valid genera, if we accept a 3 — Carnoya, which is not yet sufficiently described. 1. A. Fischer in Krypt. Flor. v. Deutschl. ete.; the (unfinished) sketch by ; in Engler u. Prantl. Pilanzenfamilien; A. Dewevre. Contr. i I’ Etude des —— 186, and Mr. 1894. 88 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Of the 199 species enumerated in the Sylloge Fu Fischer has shown that 70 are to be excluded. Fischer deseri 100 species for Europe, and Schroeter estimates 130 for t whole world. I regard this as a very liberal estimate. species described for other parts of the world, if sub the examination which Fischer has given the European sf would doubtless yield a large proportion of synonyms. 8 species are described from North America, chiefly by E ley and Curtis, These were named at a time when, as says, every form of Mucor mucedo on a new substratum rec a new name, and most of them will have to be assigned to Mus mucedo or Ascophora mucedo, if one can be sure that thera scribe anything. Van Tieghem, who was the first to treat the group e: ively, and to whom we owe most of our knowledge of its fe divided the family in 1875* into five tribes. Dewevre followin him, and adding the Choanephorene, mot in te eee Tieghem's work, arranges them thus: 5 1. Piloboleae; 2. Mucoreae; 3. Chaetocladieae; 4. C phoreae; 5. Mortierelleae; 6. Cephalideae. aa Other authors agree with this substantially, except that i bey unite the Piloboleae and Mucoreae. — Fischer divides the group, which he terms an order (1 vr inge), into four families (the Choanephoreae being without his range); Mucoraceae, Chaetocladiaceae, Mortiereliacene; ail, n lidaceae. The first he subdivides into three sub- families: Mucoreae, Piloboleae, and Thamnidicae. Schroeter divides in 0 five families: Mucoraceae, Mortierellaceae, Choa „ Chaetocladiaceae, Piptocephalidaceae, and subdivides the frst i Mucoreae and Piloboleae. ce. I propose the following arrangement, the reasons for will be explained presently: Family MUCORACEAE. (Order Mucorineae of German authors. ) Sub-family 1. MUCOREAE. Tribe Eumucoreae. Tribe Rhizopeae. Tribe Piloboleae. 2. Van Tieghem. Ann. Se. Nat. vi, 1:41. 1875. bedi . Pound: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 80 Sub- family 2. MORTIERELLEAE. Sub-family 3. CHOANEPHOREAE. Sub family 4. CHAEBTOCLADIEAE. Sub family 5. CePHALIDIEAE. ie thet ail sequences, this one is open to the objection that it r unrelated ones in juxtaposi- lion. No lineal arrangement is possible which will not do this 3 or less. Juxtaposition can only partially represent _ relationship in a lineal disposition. The relationship of the several groups may be indicated by 3 he following diagram: E 8 Aa.. — ee Hilal ulcuc. There can be no doubt. as M. Dewevre points out, that the nner are to be derived. The conidia, which characterize the 3 _ Choanephoreae and Chaetocladieae, are evidently but reduced _ Sporangia, and Thamnidivm links them with Mucor, which indeed sometimes produces sporangiola under proper condi- dee r ee eee Their ec with the rest of the group admits of some doubt. : e of conidia formed by simultaneous division, which characterize this sub family, are to be regarded as sporangia. But the analogy is somewhat obscure. Von Tavel* remarks the absence of anything cor- to the sterile side branches or separate sporangio- and says significantly: ‘‘duch hier errinnert nichts * _ Tt the Cephatidene are derived from the Mucoreae, it is proba- ly through the Mortierelleae, with which they have some points t resemblance, especially the anastomosing rial mycelium. a this view, we may regard the conidiophores as equivalent to s fertile mycelium of the latter, and the several conidia chains s each representing a sporangium. The septa formed in the 3 aidiophores of Piptocephalis may tend to confirm this, but it 7 - de Tavel: Vergleich. Morphol. 2. of i * Wyrm Ä 0 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. seems a trifle far fetched. More probably the whole head o conidia chains is to be held equivalent to a sporangium. : Another thing to be considered in this connection is the f ‘ that the Cephalideae are set off from all other Mucoraceae by the © manner in which they form zygospores. All the other groups form the zygospore directly by the union of the contents of the two conjugating cells. In the Cephalideae there is a further process. After the tips of the conjugating branches have each cut off by a wall and their contents have united, they do not once form a zygospore, but the contents contract, separate e from the rest of the new cell by a new wall, and then dees zygospore. Von Tavel remarks, what is not at first app * that while the former process is like the conjugation in the Zygnemeae, the latter resembles conjugation in the Mesocarpeae. — The relationship of the Cephalideae to the rest of the Mucoraceae must be regarded as somewhat doubtful as far as direct deriva- tive relationship is concerned. There can be no doubt, however, that, wherever their origin is to be found, it will not be tar 7 from that of the other groups. Nomenclature. The nomenclature of the group is in a somewhat uncertain state. The names applied by the — mycologists are often of doubtful application, owing to the extreme vagueness and generality of their descriptions. Fischer says: The laconic brevity of diagnoses formerly favored, — makes it often impossible to identify the old forms with those now known, and yet this is necessary, in order that the heavy 7 4 ballast of doubtful species may be finally thrown off.” Dr. Fischer has delivered us from some seventy species of the old authors, and most of the eight American species of Mucor must eventually receive like treatment. But while Fischer's work in disposing of the species of the old authors in their proper place has been excellent, he has paid little or no atten- tion to the claims of the names they imposed. The investiga- tors, such as Van Tieghem, often took little pains to ascertain — the identity of the forms they worked upon with those named 3 ‘ by the earlier writers who only described, and imposed names now current upon several forms which had already received — more than one name. Mycologists have differed on the question of the respect 0 be paid to priority quite as much as phanerogamists. Winter : in Part Tof the Pilze in the Kryptogamen Flora r. Deutschland. etc., applied the rule of priority vigorously, but somewhat capriciously. Schroeter has consistently adhered to it. Sac- Pound: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 91 car r te exception to Dr. Kuntze’s changes in the nomenclature of the fungi, and leaves his position somewhat in doubt. There ind ms to be no reason, however, why the Rochester rules, as n endeavored to adhere un them here 5 Systematic. Family MUCORACEAE. ‘Mycelium well developed. thread - like (i, e. with hyphae), branched, up to the ume of fructification unicellular (i. e. without septa). Asexual reproduction by internal spore formation in terminal cells _ (sporangia) or by reduced sporangia which resemble one celled - conidia or conidia chains. Sexual reproduction by zygospores, 1 that is by the union of two undifferentiated, or scarcely differ- entiated cells to form a zygospore. All spores germinating by * tube; no swarm spore formation.” (Schroeter) Synopsis. e be —— with a columella. MUCOREAE. Mycelium and sporangia of one kind only. Eumucoreae. = Sporangiophores simple or branched, but not * dichotomous. Mucor. = unbranched, bright me- talic in color, Phycomyces. Vegetative mycelium colorless, aerial brown : and thorny (approaches — Spinellus. 1 Sporangiophores dichotomously branched. Syzygites. __ Mycelium of two kinds,—vegetative and fertile. Rhizopeae. 3 Sporangiophores borne at the nodes of the Sjpsporanglophores borne on the tips of the arched 1 internodes. Zygospores covered by outgrowths of the suspensors. Absidia. * Sporangia of two kinds,—principal sporangia and sporangiola. Principal sporangia with a columella, spor- angiola without a columella. Thamnidium. Principal and secondary sporangia with a col- umella. . Membrane of sporangium of two parts, above E cuticularized and permanent, below thio and quickly disappearing. Piloboleae. » Sporangiophores evenly cylindrical, sporangia Ag not thrown off at maturity. Pilaira. Sßporangiophores swollen below the sporangia; ee: sporangia thrown oft at maturity. Hydrogera. distinct from the 5 MORTIERELLEAE. 92 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. | Sporanglophores always terminating insporangia Mortierella, Sporanglophores ending in sterile points. [Not yet sufficiently characterized), Curnoyu. Sporangia represented by conidia,—either singly or in chains. Sporangia and conidia both present. MOANEPHOR: Choanephora, Conidia only,—-produced singly. 7 OLA DIEAR Conidia In chains. CErHALIDEAR, Conidiophores septate at maturity, dichoto- 5 a? age og not septate, simple or once 9 Syncephalia, G cotymbosely branched. 2 yy Sub-family 1. MUCOREAE. 1 4 Asexual spores formed in sporangia; sporangia with a cc m. ella (except sporangiola in forms having them). Zygospores naked, or surrounded by loose, simple, or simply branc 4 Tribe EUMUCOREAE. Be Mycelium and sporangia typically of one kind. 1 This is the stem group from which all the others appear 9 be derived. 3 1. MUCOR Luxné. Spec. Pl. 2:1185. 1753.* _. Hydrophora Tope. 1701. ‘ Pleurocystis BonoxnpeN. 1551. Circinella VAN Trecrem and LeMonier. 1872. Pirella Barster. 1881. Chlamydomucor BREFELD. 1890. Saprophytic; mycelium spreading in and upon thes tu sporangiophores simple or branched, but if e ö dichotomous. Zygospores borne on the mycelium; the pensors without outgrowths. a This was the name of one of the eleven genera under which Linné in his Genera Plantarum included all fungi. — Sub- genus EUMUCOR Schroeter. 1 Flor. v. Schlesien, I 1 u. 5 1:203. 1886. a. Sp erect, always with terminal 8 *T have talon ths starting patat of the Rochester rales ; 1 5 . eens i ee R T 3 4 J Found: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 93 | Uucor mucedo Linné I. c. 2 __ Fischer gives as synonyms the following names to be found mn the Sylloge Fungorum: M. caninus Pers. M. aquosus MART. * M. . WALLE. ‘ . subtilis (Compa) Bex. and De Tot. 5 (Cpa.) Bun. and De Ton! . M. rhizepogonis DA.) Bent, aod De Tont . M. candalabrum (Cpa.) BANL. and DE Tox ¥ M. bifudus Fres. vg M. ciliatus Box. ss M. dimiaei Scuvizer. Tue rest of the intricate synonymy need not be given. Sporangiophores erect, rigid, simple, 2-15 cm. high; spor- angia large, round 100-200 mikrons in diam., the membrane quickly disappearing leaving a small collar-like fragment at the base; columella high arched, cylindrical or truncate conical, 70.140 50-80 mikrons; spores rounded eylindrical or long ellip- Soid. 6-12 3-6 mikrons, or sometimes larger, colorless or light ‘a yellow. on excrement of animals and various organic substances the In specimens I have examined the spores are regularly 5-10 _ mikrons about half as wide and rather strongly tinged with Fischer gives as synonyms the following names which are q in the Sylloge Fungorum: X meren Lx. } M. Juglandis LX. M. carnis LK. i M. pygmaeus LR. M. fungicola CDA.) BERL. and De Tont. M. rue (CDA. BERL. and De Tont. M. cinereus (Prevss.) Bert. and De Tont. XN. griseus Bon. M. juglandis Lk. 1809. is the earliest name which can with some certainty be referred to this species. According to A . sits Se 94 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Fischer, also, old material in the Berlin herbarium marked . juglandis goes here. We may, therefore, be compelled to — this name instead of M. racemosus. 2 Sporangiophores erect, of various sizes, 5-40 mm. high, 6 small and frail, richly and irregularly branched, each b terminating in asporangium; sporangia small, round, of sizes (depending on the nourishment), 20-70 mikrons in diam. t membrane not dissolving but splitting; columella pie, or obovate; spores round or short ellipsoid, singly e yellowish in mass, 6-10x 5-8 mikrons. ce When grown in a solution it forms septa rapidly and grows t budding, and in this state it is a ferment. Under poor e 1. tions it forms round, oblong or ellipsoid chlamydospores and there in the hyphae and even in the s None of the other well described European species are recorded for this country. Other species reported from North America are: 4 Mucor inequalis Peck, 26 Rep. N. V. St. Mus. 79. 1674. Fertile flocci simple or once or twice divided, white; spor. ° angia globose, at first white, then bluish black or brown! black; spores somewhat angular, subglobose, very unequal in size, .0002—.0005 in. in diameter.” (Peck, I. c.) On decaying squashes. The size and shape of the spores agree well with — mucedo. It may represent a young specimen of this fungus. But the description seems to indicate a Mucor, as branched, — white sporangiophores are mentioned. As to the shape of 7 spores, compare M. heterosporus Fischer. Mucor curtus BERKELEY and Curtis, N. A. F. No. 703. Spores fusiform, subappendiculate at each end, 11x 2 mikrons. ; ; On decaying muskmelon, South Carolina. 4 The shape of the spores is peculiar and makes it 3 this is a Mucor. Mucor echinophila Scnwzixtrz. North Am. Fungi. No. 2742, p. 285. 4 On spines of the involucre of Castanea sativa, Bethlehem, Pa The very meager description baffles identification. Mucor tenerrimus BERKELEY. Outlines. 407. Reported from North America in the Sylloge Fungorum. Ace- 5 cording to Fischer may be a Myxomycete, but cerfainly is * 8 a Mucor. 2 Pound: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 95 - Mucor subtilissimus Berxetey. Hort. Journ. 3:95. - Reported from North America in the Sylloge Fungorum. Of . mis and other Berkeleyan species, Fischer says: “The short es ace . I think that no one of these five species is a Mucor, but they all belong to the Hyphomycetes.” See under Syzygites and Ascophora for other species described from North America. , Subgenus CIRCINELLA Van TrecHEem and Le MOoNIeR. ae 1872, ut genus. Sporangia formed on side branches of a branched sporangio- phore, the branches arched or curved and often produced in regular groups; the main branch continuing and bearing new Side branches, but no terminal sporangium. Vo species are reported for this country. Tuis group, made a genus by Van Tieghem and Le Monier, and generally so recognized, was reduced to a subgenus by Schroeter in 1886. It is only a further development of the 4 branched sporangiophore, and leads to the fertile mycelium of _. Subgenus PIRELLA Barnier. 1882, ut genus. * Similar to Circinella; sporangia pear shaped, columella very large, hour-glass shaped. . There is but one species, which is not reported for this country. It is closely allied to Cireinella, and is made a sub- genus of Mucor by Schroeter in Engler u. Prantl, Pfanzen- familien. 1893. 2. PHYCOMYCES Kunze. Mykol. Hefte. 2: 113. 1828. Sporangiophores simple, arising singly, bronze green, a strongly metalic, terminated by a large sporangium; sporangia round, many spored. the membrane dissolving; columella pear eo shaped. Conjugating branches tong shaped, the suspensors Producing dichotomously branched, dark brown projections. : Phycomyces nitens (AGARDH.) Kunze, | e. ; Ulva nitens AGARDH. 1817. The characters of the genus: Sporangiophores 7-30 cm. 2 sporangia very large, about 1 mm.; spores ellipsoid 7 Ae 8-15 mikrons. 06 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. On greasy, oily substances. Found also on a decaying a at Lincoln. A beautiful species, quickly recognized by its metalic app ance. The sporangiophores have the look of email 4 wires. 3. SPINELLUS Van Tiecuem. Ann. Sc. Nat. vi. 1:66. en. Aerial mycelium more or less developed, several times branched, with short, thorn like side branches. Sporangio- phores simple. Zygospores formed on the aerial mycelium. — United with Mucor by Schroeter. The aerial mycelium, which the zygospores are formed, connects with Syzygites, — a Spinellus rliombosporus (Euns.) 4 Mucor rhombosporus Enun. 1818. Sylv. Myc. Berol. 25 (ex. Link.) Mucor fusiger LK. Sp. Pl. VI, 1; 08. 1824. 4 Spinellus fusiger (LK.) VAN Timon. I. . 1875. Aerial mycelium formed of richly divided branches beset with single or 2-4 verticillate, pointed, thorn-like branches; sporangiophores borne only on the thorny serial mycelium, © single, unbranched, rigid, erect, below bulbous-inflated, taper- — ing to about half the breadth, blue gray, chocolate brown at = maturity; sporangia spherical, black at maturity, membrane quickly disappearing, 180-300 mikrons in diam.; columella large; a, spores spindle shaped, rounded at the ends, sometimes ti or spirally curled, brown, 30-40 K 9-12 mikrons. On Agarics. Reported from the United States by — and Curtis. According to Link I. c. N. rhombosporus Ehrb. is his M. fusiger, and Fischer cites Ehrenberg's own opinion pide the same effect. 4. SYZYGITES Exsrenserc. Sylv. Myc. Berol. 25. 1018. a Sporodinia LK. Sp. Pl. VI. 1: 94. 1824. ; Sporangiophores erect, repeatedly dichotomously W forming septa at maturity; sporangia on the ends of the branches. Zygospores borne on a specially developed, — dichotomously branched mycelium. Ehrenberg named the zygospore bearing mycelium 2 Link gave the name of Sporodinia to the asexual reiben, Six years later. Syzygites aspergillus (ScoPoLt.) Mucor aspergillus Scop. Flor. Carniol 494. 1772. S. megalocarpus EXRB. I. c. 1818. 7 - = — * 0 9 2 . y tS 9 cn Pound: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 97 Sporodinia grandis Lx. I. C. 1824. Fiscuen, 1892. Sporodinia aspergillus (Scor.) Scunogeren. Engler u. Prantl. Planzenfam. I. I: 127. 1893. ? Mucor capitato-ramosus Scuwernirz. N. A. F. 285. 1531. Characters of the genus: Sporangia spherical, many spored. 3 r red or orange, at maturity brownish or blackish brown; spores round or ellipsoid, quite variable in form, 11-40 mikrons. Zygospore-mycelium septate, brown, the ; ben ote: Not reported for this country. But the description of M. capitato-ramosus Schw., reported also by Berkeley and Curtis, 11 Z species. Tribe Ruizopzax. . 1 of two sorts, the vegetative growing in the sub- Stratum, and the fertile or aerial mycelium, which grows by stolons, and upon which the sporangiophores are borne. S⸗chroeter unites Ascophora, one of the two genera placed here, win Mucor, with which it is connected by the subgenus Circin- _ ella, The sporangiophores of the latter, if prostrate and _ forming rhizoids at points where the branches which bear the sporangia are produced, would be exactly what we have in the . fertile mycelium of Ascophora. Ascophora and therelated genus Absidia form a small group well set off from the other Mucoreae; quite as much so, it seems to me, as Thamnidiwm, which no one now unites with Mucor. I have, therefore, following Von Tavel _ (Vergleich, Morphol, 1892), set them off under the name of 4 Rhizopeae. 8. ASCOPHORA Tope. Fung. Meckleb. 1:13. 1790. Rhizopus Enns. Nov. Act. Acad. Leopold X. 1: 168. 1820(ex. Fischer.) Fertile mycelium at first white, then brown, or brownish - black, growing in all directions by stolons, which fasten here 3 and there by rhizoids, and at these points produce one or more __ sporangiophores and other stolons; sporangiophores swollen just below the sporangia; sporangia hemispherical, the mem- _ brane entirely disappearing; columella hemispherical, forming with the terminal swelling of the sporangiophore a club shaped bead. which collapses, and has the appearance of an umbrella. ee TP 98 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Ascophora mucedo Tope. lc. 1790. Mucor stolonifer Bunn. Sylv, Myc, Berol, 28. R. nigricans EKunn. 1820, ut supra. Mucor clarutus Lk. Sp. Pl. vt. 1:02. 1824. Mucor amethysteus Bunk. Engl. Flor. B: A. 1832. 4 ? Mucor fuseus (H. and C.) Bear. and m B. and C. N. A. F. No. 661, 4 ? Mucor cucurbitarum I. and C. N. A. F. No. 701. Mucur beaumontii B. and C. N. A. F. No, 702. 3 The last three are apparently to be placed here. The de- scriptions, particularly of Ascophora fusca, indicate Ascophora — mucedo and M. beaumontii is said by the authors to differ . M. clavatus principally in the spores. 1 Stolons creeping here and there over the substratum, e a covering it, at first colorless, then brown; rhizoids more or less branched; sporangiopbores rarely single, usually in clustersof — 3.5 or more on each node, }~4 mm. high; columella broad hem- _ ispherical, with the terminal swelling of the sporangiophore _ forming a clavate cylindrical head reaching almost to the tip of the sporangium, usually collapsing after the dissolution of the sporangium membrane and remaining a long time covered with spores; spores of various sizes and shapes, irregular globoseor oval, with one or two truncated corners, somewhat longer than broad, thick walled, finely striate, averaging 6-17 mikrons. On all kinds of decaying organic matter; one of the me monest of fungi. 7 6. ABSIDIA Vax TiecHEM. Ann. Se. Nat. vi. 4: 350, 1876. Tieghemella BERLESK. and De Tont 1888, Syl. Fung. VIL, 1: 215. 4 Fertile mycelium as in Ascophora; sporangiophores in groups, produced only on the tips of the arched internodes; n cuticularized, blue-black; sporangia pear-shaped. Zygospores ; enveloped by unicellular, curved, cuticularized threads, CO 4 ing out oppositely from the suspensors. * No species are reported for this country. Tribe THAMNIDIEAE. 8 of two kinds; principal sporangia many spored. with a columella, terminal on the main branches; secondary — sporangia (sporangiola) on side branches, few spored. with or Without a columella. 4 This group is closely related to Mucor, the phenomenon of sporangiola on side branches being occasionally met with im M. mucedo. The typical Thamnidium elegans makes this rela- 54 a * tionship quite evident. Other forms, showing a tendency to lose the terminal sporangia and producing side branches with 3 sterile tips, connect with the Chaetocladieae. . THAMNEDIUM Li. Obs, 1:31, 1809. * Chaetostylum Vax Trwan. and Le Mow. Aan. Sc. Nat. v. 172. “A 1873. * Helicostylum Conpa. Ie. Fung. &: 18. 1842. Sßporangiophores erect: principal sporangia terminal on the main branches, with a columella; sporangiola on side branches, without a columella. Schroeter unites Thamnidium, Chaetostylum, and Helicostylum, calling the two latter subgenera. In Euthamnidium the side branches are simple or dichotom- te ously branched, the ends bearing sporangiola. The type is T. elegans Lk. - Thamnidium paradozcum (B. and C.) Bert. and De Tow. Syl. Fiung. vu. 1:211—dfucor paradorus B. and C. N. A. F. No. 377, if 3 a Thamnidium, probably belongs to this species as the size and Shape of the spores and the habitat agree with it fairly well. Blut it seems more likely that it is only a form of Mucor mucedo, a as the description states that the smaller sporangia are borne on hyphae arising from the mycelium. M. mfwedo often at first produces small dwarfed sporangia which are followed by the larger normal ones. Fischer observes that the abnormalities of M. mucedo have been freely described as species by the earlier mycologists. In the subgenus Chactostylum the principal sporangia are Otten wanting, and sporangiola are produced on small branch- lets arising from the swelling below the tip. The only species a is T. fresenii (Van Tiegh. and Le Mon.) Schroet. In the subgenus Helicostylum the side branches terminate in Sterile tips and bear sporangiola on spirally coiled branchlets. The type species is: Thamnidium helicostylum (BoNORDEN.) Helicostylum elegans ConDA. 1842. I. g. Pleurocystis helicostylum Bon. Hbk. Alg. Myc. 124. 1851. Ascophora amena Prevss. Linnaea 24:77. 1852. Thamnidium amenum (Preuss.) ScHroer. Pflanzenfam. I. 3: 128. ‘ 2 * ea Aes en 7 R 100 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. nN s. DICRANOPHORA Scuroerer. Jahresb. Schles. Ges. Vaterl. Cultur. 64: 198, 1886. (ex. Fischer.) Sporangiophores richly branched, ending in principal spor: angia or in dichotomous branches which bear secondary sporangia. Secondary sporangia one or two spored, with a two or three pronged columella. The only species, D. fulva Schroet. is known only m Schroeter’s description and his figure in Engler u. Prantl, — Phanzenfam. é 4 Tribe PlLOohOLNAE. 2 Membrane of sporangium of two parts; the upper Ge ized and permanent, the lower thin and quickly disappearing. 9. PILAIRA Van Tiecuem. Ann. Sc. Nat. vi. 1:51, — Mycelium without swellings; sporangiophores simple, arising; singly from the mycelium, terminating in a sporangium with- out a subsporangial swelling; sporangia round, with a broad ~ columella, many spored, the membrane above cuticularized, — black, not dissolving or splitting, below colorless, — up and setting the upper portion free from the columella. a No species are rbported for this country. The most widely distributed species is: Pilaira fimetaria (Lx) Mucor fimetarius LK. Obs. 1: 30 1800. Hydrophora fimetaria Fries, 1829. Pilobolus anom tus CESATI. 1871. Pilaira cesatii VAN TreGHem. 1878. Pilaira anomala (Cesati) SCHROETER. 1888. 10. HYDROGERA WiccGeks Fl. Holsat. 110. 1780 (ex. Kuntze) 3 Pilobolus Tope. 1874. Schr. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 5: 46, (ex. Fischer.) Sporangiophores simple, arising singly from swellings in 6 mycelium, colorless or orange, above expanding into a large ellipsoid swelling; sporangia hemispherical or lens shaped. many spored. the membrane above black and cuticularized, — 1 lower half quickly disappearing and leaving the upper part q resting on the conical columella, thrown off at maturity by ten- sion of the terminal swelling of the sporangiophore. sd ¥ spores naked, borne on tong shaped branches. . 2 mund: REVISION o MUCORACEAE. 101 Hydrogera obliqua (Scopo.). O. Kunrze. Mucor obliquus Scor. Flor. Carniol. 2: 494. 1772. Hydrogera crystalina Wiookus. 1780. 1. c. Pilobolus crystalinus Tope. 1784. l. e. ey H. obliqua OK. Rev. Gen. 2: 855. 1891. Sporangiophores arising singly from bladder like swellings in the mycelium, 5-10 mm. long, the terminal swelling 85 1.25 60-85 mm; sporangia plano-convex, resting on the side e 300-400 x 100-150 mikrons; columella 7 conical: spores elliptical, 5-10x3-6 mikrons, colorless, but greenish yellow in mass. On dung. Found also on moist earth in greenhouse, Lincoln. Hydrogera rorida (Bouron) OK. Mucor vroridus BoLrox. Hist. Fung. : 168, Pilobolus roridus Pexsoon. Syn. Fung. 17. 1801. H vorida OK. I. c. 1891. Mycelial swellings pale yellow, hidden in the substratum, 3 pond with a sterile swelling on each side; sporangiophores arising singly from the swellings from which they are not ‘separated by a septum, erect, 1-2 cm. high, the terminal swel- ling short ellipsoid, almost spherical, sp»rangia compressed, very small, blue black, about one-third as wide as the terminal swelling of the sporangiophore; columella bluish black, round, shallow, projecting but a short distance into the sporangium; spores ellipsoid, 6-8x3-4 mikrons, colorless, pale yellow in * 2 i.’ 3 S On dung. Hydrogera oedipus MONTANA OK. Pilobolus cedipus Mont. Mem. Soc. Linn. Lyon. 1828, (ex. Grove.) H. cedipus OK. 1891. I. e. Mycelial swelling of two parts separated by a septum, the upper part thick, projecting from the substratum and forming the swollen base of the sporangiophore; sporangiophores 4 short (not to exceed 5 mm. usually 1-3 mm), erect, the terminal swelling ovoid, 600-800 x 450-650 mikrons, contents of sporan- _ giophore orange red; sporangia compressed, hemispherical, almost as wide as the terminal swelling, black; columella conical, _ obtuse, reaching almost or quite to the summit of the sporan- 4 gium; spores round, rather unequal 10-14 mikrons, orange, with a thick exospore. On excrement of animals, on mud, on decaying algae. 102 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . ary 1 Subfamily 2. MORTIERELLEAE. Fertile mycelium distinct from the vegetative; eR without a columella; zygospores enclosed in a thick mass of — hyphae growing out from the suspensors and the branches from which they arise. q This group appears to be connected with the Rhizopeae, having a distinct, well develuped fertile mycelium. In baila in the latter group we have the beginnings of the thick cover- ing of the zygospore by outgrowths from the suspensors. 85 11. MORTIERELLA Coemans. Bull. Acad. Belg. u, 1% 536. 1863. Fertile mycelium growing over the substratum and extending to other substances, richly branched with thin, stolon-like — branches, which by fusion with neighboring hyphae form a — 4 g work, when old forming septa; sporangiophores single or in tufts, swollen at the base, with or without lobed rhizoids, im- ple or branched, all branches terminating in sporangia. — Round, echinulate stylospores are produced on the fertile mycelium. Chlamydospores are produced in the substratum. 4 Mortierella polycephala Coemans lL. c. Sporangiophores in groups of 5-20, erect, without septa, with | or without short lobed rhizoids, swollen at the base, tapering strongly. above filiform, terminating in a large sporangium. on the upper portion bearing 2-10 short, simple, single or ver- 4 ticillate side branches, terminating in small sporangia; spor- angia round, white, 4-20 spored, with a very small basal collar; spores round or ovate, colorless, differing in size, commonly 10-12 mikrons, with a large glistening oil drop. 4 On dung, decaying fungi, etc. Reported from cee . G. Farlow. 7 12. HERPOCLADIUM Scuroeter. Krypt. Flor. v. Sehles. m1.1:213. 1886. 4 Sporangiophores not terminating in sporangia, sympodially y branched, bearing sporangia on curved or spirally curled side branches. The only species, H. circinans Schroet., is knows 7 only from the author's description. [Carnoya Dewevre, Grevillea September 1893, is not yet tally described, and little can be gathered from the meager data given in his synopsis. a i Found: REVISION OF MUCORACEAE. 108 Subfamily 3. CHOANEPHOREAE. 1 and conidia both produced; sporangia few spored: ij e branched, with thick clavate 1 ups, upon which numerous conidia are formed singly (i. e. not in chains.) 18, CHOANEPHORA Currey. 1873, is represented by one Species, G. cunninghamiana Currey. Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 137334, as Cunninghamia infundibulifera. On page 5578 the name Choanephora cunninghamiane is substituted z= on account of Cunninghamia in the Coniferae. It is found a on the flowers of Hibiscus in India. Subfamily 4. CHAETOCLADIEAE. 3 eee by conidia only, which are borne singly dd. e. not in chains) in groups on the swollen middle portion of ioe mrenehes of the covl@iophores, the ends of which are sterile. The gradations shown by other forms and produced by cul- tivation make it evident that the conidia are to be regarded as reduced, one celled sporangiola. The manner in which they » Ste formed suggests strongly Thomaidium fresenii. 14. CHAETOCLADIUM Fresenius Beitraege. 97. 1863. Parasitie upon other Mucoraceae; mycelium thin, colorless, * forming clusters of short, thick haustoria at the points of attachment with the hyphae of the host; sporangiophores _ creeping, verticillately branched, ending in a long, sterile. pointed tip, the branches short, with sterile tips, bearing on te swollen portion large numbers of single conidia. * Chaetocladium jonesii (BexxeLey & Broome) Fresenius. Botrytis jonesii B & Br. Ann. Mag. N. H. 2 Ser. 13. 1854. C. jonesis Fres. 1863 l. e. Characters of the genus, conidia round, 64-10 mikrons, with a finely verrucose, dark colored exospore; singly colorless, but blue in mass. . 4 On dung with other Muoraceae, saprophytic and for the most part parasitic. a Chaetocladium brefeldii Van Tick. & LE Mon. Ann. Se. Nat. v. 17:342. 1873. - ‘Oonidia globose or globose-elliptical. smooth, colorless, 2-5 : 133 Parasitie on Mucor mucedo and Ascophora mucedo. _ Found by me at Lincoln in 1888, on an onion, growing upon 175 mucedo g N e ee U * 9 i r 4 ; 2 ea ae ee ee * N R eee ie id ah, we “ . * an | N . * 104 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL 3 Subfamily 5. CEPHALIDEAE. Asexual reproduction by means of conidia formed in e y on the swollen ends of simple or branched conidiophores. * — 15. PIPTOUEPHALIS De Bany. Abhandl. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 5: 356. 18065. (ex. Fischer.) a . Parasitic on other Mucoraceae; conidiophores dendroid, seve eral times dichotomously branched, with age septate and with a brown cuticularized membrane; branches terminating in 4 round swelling separated by a septum (basidial cell) Which bears chains of conidia, usually in large numbers, and falls of with them. 3 No species reported for North America. * a 16. SYNCEPHALIS Van Tann and Le Monten. 2 a Sc. Nat. v. 17:72. 1873. * Parasitic on other Mucoraceae or saprophytic; conidiophores — simple or once divided, without septa, attached to substratum — by a tuft of short, thick, forked rhizoids, terminating in a round or clavate head; the lowest conidium (basidial conidium) — with one or more, usually two, protuberances each bearing & «chain of conidia. 1 The basidial conidium falls off with the chains, loving mall warty processes on the head of the sporangiophore. . No species reported from North America. 18. SYNCEPHALASTRUM Scuaoerex. Krypt. Flor. v. Schles. 11. 1:217. 1886. ee” Saprophytic; conidiophores without rhizoids at the base, . branched, swollen at the ends; conidia chains in one row. 3 No species reported from North America. ee = 4 1 XIV. REVISION OF THE MINNESOTA SPECIES OF GRASSES OF THE TRIBE HoRDEAE. Francis RaMALey. The great economic value and historic interest of the tribe |. Hordeae make it one of the most noteworthy groups in the Whole vegetable kingdom. Containing as it does the wheat, q rye and barley of cultivation it thus furnishes a very consider- able portion of the food supply of man. Our own native _ grasses of this group are of great importance to the stockman known as Blue Stem or Blue Joint among the ranchmen of the west is highly prized for grazing purposes. Experiments made with it in various parts of this country show that it is especially valuable in localities subject to drouth. The root stocks running out in every direction and taking root, make it a grass very easily introduced. These rootstocks are said to ve particularly acceptable to horses and cattle and are greedily _ devoured by them. Agropyron tenerum, also a valuable hay and meadow grass, is abundant in some places in the western pearance. In view of the importance of the tribe in general it has _ seemed worth while to make careful and systematic descrip- tions of the Minnesota species together with as complete _ Synonomy as possible. The descriptions have been written after comparison of specimens from various parts of the country, while constant reference has been made to the ac- 1 cepted authorities on the subject. W 106 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. AGROPYRON J. Gagrr. in Nov. Comm. Petrop. 14. . 1770. — Elytrigia Desv. in Bull. Soc, Philom. 2: 100, 1810. Eremopyrum Len. Fi. Alt. 1: 112. 1829, Braconotia Gopr Fl. Lorr. Ed. I. 3: 101. 1844. Roegneria C. Kocu. in Linnaea 21; 413, 1848. Heterantheliam Hocner. ex. Jaub. & Spach. PL. Or. 4:2. 1800, Eremopyrum Jaun. & Sracn. Pi. Or. 4: 2, 1850-58. Secalidiam Scuben. ia Verh. Slebenb. Ver Naturw. 4: 91. 1869. Anthosachne Srevup. Syn, Pl. Gram, 277. 1855. Crithopyrum Horr. Prag, ex. Steud. Syn. Pl. Gram. 44. 16. Costia WILLK. in Bot. Zelt. 377, 1858. Cremopyrum Scuvur. Enum. Pl. Trans. 607. 1866. Haynaldia senen. |. . Agropyron caninum (Liny.) Beavy. Essai Agrost. 102. 1812. Dog's Couch Grass. a Triticum caninum Line. Sp. Pl. 8. 1753. Elymus caninus Lix N. Fl. Suec. ed. II 112 1755, Triticum caninum Hubs. Fl. Ang. 58. 1762. Triticum caninum Scunes. Spicil. Fl. Lips. 51. 1771. Triticum sepium LAM. Ene. Meth. 2:53. 1786. Festuca nutans Mok xen. Meth. 191. 1794. Agropyrum caninum R. and 8. Syst. 2: 756. 1817. 2 Agropyrum caninum RetcHens. Icon. Fl. Germ. t. 119. 151 Braconotia elymoides GopR. Fl. Lorr. 3: 103. 1844. Agropyrum pseudo-caninum Schun. in Verh. Siebenb. Ver. Ba turw. 4:91. 1853. a Triticum egilopoides A.Gray. Proc. Acad. Philad. I. ori. non Linn. Perennial, from a fibrous root; stems 4 to 12 dm. in length, smooth, geniculate below; leaves 2 to 4 dm. in length; sheaths — shiny and glabrous or somewhat roughened, nearly as tong as the blades; blades 5 to 10 mm. broad. flat or rarely some- — what involute, scabrous both above and below or the lower ones nearly glabrous below; inflorescence 8 to 20 cm. in length, — narrow, curved or somewhat nodding; spikelets 12 to 20 mm. in length, 3 to 6 flowered; empty giumes N to 12 mos, in length, $60.9 5 nerved, scabrous or somewhat roughened, lanceolate, acum- inated or short awned; flowering glumes almost as long, Ey smooth or 5 nerved at the tip with awns 2, or more often 10 % 2 20 mm. in length. : Europe and Northern Asia. 2 North America: N. Br., O., Ont., Saskatchewan, Rocky Mts. 1 and B. C.; S. to N. Eng. and N. J.; W. to Mian., Colo. Nev. and Cal. f ee 4 a 1 25 Ramaley: REVISION OF MINNESOTA HORDEAE. 107 f Minnesota: Probably throughout; infrequent; waste or dry Places. Minn. specimen in herb.: Bailey 42, Vermilion Lake Agropyron caninum (Linn.) Beauv. forma violacescens < u. u. Bearded Wheat Grass. A4. unilaterale Cass Dx. Bull. Col. Agr. Exp. Sta. 12: 63, 1890. A. caninum (Linn.) R. & S var. unilaterale VAS. Cont. U. S. Nat. Herb. 1: 279, 1893 Not A, unilaterale Beavuy. Essai Agrost. 102. 1812. which is a synonym of Festuea tenuiflora Scumap. Fi. Ger. 1:345. 1806. a Mediterranean species. This 3 is described by Dr. Vasey as usually stouter than ee. spike rigid, erect, not nodding or curved as in _ the type, the spikelets 3 to 6 flowered more or less one sided on the rachis. From this description and from an examination of specimens "distributed by the Department of Agriculture it appears that this plant is very near to 4. violaceum (HORNEM.) LANGE, forma caninoides described below; it is probable that through these forme the two species are related. North America: Minn., Neb. and Col.; N. in the Rocky Mts. to B. C. Minnesota: Reported from southwestern part of the state; probably rare on hillsides and waste places. Agropyron violaceum (HoRNeEM.) Lance. Consp. FL Ger. 155. 1880. Wheat Grass. Triticum violaceum HoRNEM, Fl. Dau. 2044. 1827? Perennial, stems smooth, erect or geniculate below; leaves 1.5 E to 2.5 dm. in length; sheaths glabrous as long as the blades; blades 2 to 5 mm. broad, commonly involute, scabrous above nearly smooth below; injlorescence 5 to 12 cm. in length, strict, a narrow; spikelets 8 to 15 mm. in length, 3 to 5 or 7 flowered, 1 tinged; empty glumes 6 to 12 mm. in length with 300 5 rough nerves, elliptical-lanceolate, cuspidate acuminate or short awned; jlowering glumes 5 to 10 mm. in length, smooth at ; base, 3 to 5 nerved at the tips with awns from 1 to 10 mm. in 3 Europe: Scandinavia. x North America: Q., Man., Assin. to N. W. T. and Grinnell _ land; S. to N. Eng.; W. to Lake Superior region, Minn., Dak., Rocky Mts. and Sierra Nevada. 108 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Minnesota: Frequent throughout the northern and central parts of the state; forest openings, hillsides and meadows, —__ Minn? specimens in herb.: Bailey 494, Agate Bay; Sheldon 2933, Milaca; Sheldon 4299, Mille Lacs county; Mac and Shed. 2, Brainerd. 4 Agropyron violaceum (Hornem.) Lance, forma eaninoldes n. f. Awned Wheat Grass, Stems 5 to 8 dm. in length; leaves 1, 5 to 3 dm. in length; sheaths smooth, about the same length as the blades; blades 3 to 6 mm. broad, involute or almost flat; inflorescence 1 to 2 dm. in length, cylindrical, dense; spikelets 10 to 20 mm. in length, somewhat pale or at least but slightly purple tinged; empty — glumes 8 to 16 mm. in length, 3 to 5 nerved, with awns 2 to 10 mm. in length; flowering glumes armed with long, somewhat curved or spreading awns 10 to 25 mm. in length. 1 The large size, pale spikes and long awns of this forma give it much the general appearance of A. caninum (LINN. ) Beacy. . and still more of forma violacescens, supra. 4 North America: N. B., White Mts. N. H., Penn. Lake Superior, Minn., Iowa and W. to the Rocky Mts. Minnesota: Infrequent; hillsides, embankments and forest openings. Minn. specimen in herb.: Mac,. and Sheld 84, Brainerd. Agropyron tenerum Vasey. Bot. Gaz. 10: 258. 1688. Wheat Grass.“ 4 Perennial, growing in tufts, without root-stocks; stems 5 to We dm. in length, erect; /eaves 1 to 3 dm. in length; sheaths striate, nearly smooth; blades 2 to 4 or 6 mm. broad, flat or e involute; inflorescence 1 to 2 dm. in length, virgate, narrow, with 4 the spikelets about 1 cm. apart or sometimes closer; spikelets 2 to 5 flowered; empty glumes 9 to 12 mm. in length, somewhat scabrous, rigid, lanceolate, acute or awn pointed, 5 nerved; jlowering glumes 8 to 10 mm. in length, lanceolate, acute, pe on the back, smooth or nearly so, conspicuously 5 nerved at a tips, with straight awns 1 to 5 or 10 mm. 3 North America: Man. to Edmonton, N. W. T. and Rocky's Mts.; S. through Minn, Dak., Neb. and Kan.; W. to Colo, and Utah. Minnesota: Red river valley and southward along the west ern border of the state; dry slopes and * 75 - Ramaley: REVISION OF MINNESOTA HORDEAE. 109 7 5 Agropyron glaueum (Desr.) R. and S. Syst. 2: 752. 16817. var oeeidentale Vas. and Scrip. ex. Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 22 242. 1888. Blue Stem or Blue Joint. 2 A. repens Ar. PLUR. Not A, repens (Lixx.) Beauv. Essai Agrost. 102. 1812, which le an 8 old world species, Perennial, root stock creeping; stems 3 to 10 dm. in length, ascending or somewhat geniculate, smooth or somewhat roughened; leaves 1 to 3 dm. in length; sheaths roughened or pubescent, or the lower ones often hairy; Wades 2 to 6 mm. broad. acute, or acuminate, usually involute, generally glaucous below, scabrous above, margins scabrous; inflorescence 5 to 15 Cm. in length, strict or slightly curved, never nodding; spikelets 1 * 25 mm. in length, 4 to 10 flowered; empty glumes 5 to 12 mm. in length, lanceolate, acuminate or short awned, — or minutely pubescent, conspicuously 5 (sometimes 3-7) nerved flowering glumes nearly as long, less conspicuously nerved. A form with bluish-green flat leaves 4 to 8 mm. broad with 3 tod flowered spikelets approaches 4. tenerum Vasey. Another form has very long flat bluish leaves and spreading 5 to 12 flowered spikelets, Numerous forms of 4. repens (Linn.) BRAU. are introduced nearly everywhere, and are easily confounded with this plant. North America: N. S., d., Ont., to Man. and far northward; B. C., Cal.; S. to N. J. and Va.; W. to Kan. Neb. and Utah. Minnesota: Throughout; frequent; fields and dry places. q Minn. specimens in herb: Ballard 316, Belle Plaine; Sheldon Ia, Lake Benton; Sheldon 463, Blue Earth county; MacM. and Sheld, 17, Brainerd; Bailey 511, Agate Bay; Sandberg 587, Red Wing: 288, Red Wing; Sandberg 340, Cannon Falls. Agropyron dasystachyum (Hook,) Scris. in Ball. Torr. x Bot. Club 10:78. 1883. Wheat Grass. 3 Triticum repens LIxx. var. dasystachyum Hoox. Fl. Bor-Am. * 21284. 1840. „Trüsteun dasystachyum A. Gray. Mau. ed. I. 602. 1648. B A. dasystachyem Vasey. Deser. Cat. Gr. U. S. 88. 1885. VNVorth America: Ont. Hudson Bay; W. to N. W. T. and Rocky Mts.; S. to Lake Superior, Minn. and Man. q Minnesota: Infrequent along the northern border of the 4 State. 110 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . HORDEUM Linn, Syst. ed. I. 1785. Cuviera Kor., Gram. 324. 1802. Zeocriton Beauv, Essal Agtost. 116. 1812. Critesion Rar. in Journ. Phys. 80: 103, 1819. Critho E. Mey. Ind. Sem. Hort. Regiom.5. 1648. Hordeum nodosum Linn. Sp. Pl. Ed. II. 126, 1762, wild Barley. 5 H. murinum var, B. Lown, Sp. PI. 85, 1753. , H. secalinum Sounen., Spicil. Fl. Lips. 148. 1771. I. pratense Hupson. Fl. Angi. Ed. II. 56. 1778, I. maximum VI. Fl. Delphin. 10. 1785. H. maritimum Rorn. Tent. Fl. Germ. 2. pt. 1: 150, 1789, Zeocriton secalinum Beauv, Essal Agrost. 115, 1812. H. pusillum Nort. Gen. 1: 87, 1818. H. sibiricum Linx. ex. Steud. Nom. Ed. II. 1: 7756. 1840. H. brevisubulatum LI x Kk. In Linnwa 17: 391, 1843. H. nodosum C. Kocn. in Linnea 21: 432. 1848. H. pratense Linn. var. nodosum Led. Fl. Ross. 4: 320, 1853. „ Perennial or biennial; stems 2 to 9 dm. in length, erect or 4 geniculate below; leaves 8 to 20 cm. in length; sheaths varying from nearly glabrous to hairy; blades 2 to 7 mm. broad, scabrous — or roughened both above and below, flat or involute, often shorter than the sheaths; inflorescence 2 to 6 em. in length. dense, fragile when mature; spikelets in threes, 1 flowered, the 2 lateral ones aborted; empty glumes all capillary or setaceous, 6 to 15 mm. in length; flowering glumes of the aborted flowers 2 to 5 — mm. in length. subulate, acuminate or short awned, those of the perfect flowers lanceolate 5 to 10 mm. in length, 1 . nerved, scabrous at the tip, with awns 6 to 15 mm. in length. Europe and Asia; ON ET North ‘America: Ohio, III., Minn., Neb., Nev., Colo., Utah; N. to Or., Wash. and B. C.; S. to southern Cal. and Tex. 2 Minnesota: Reported from Blue Earth county, rare or local along the southern border of the state. > a Hordeum jubatum Linn. Sp. Pl. 85. 1753. Squirrel Tal Grass. - Critesium geniculatum Rar. Jour. Phys. 89: 103. 1819. Elymus jubatus Linx. Eoum. Hort. Berol. 1: 19. 1821. Elymus lechleri Srxup. Syn. Pl. Gl. 430. 1855. * Biennial; stems 3 to 6 dm. in length, smooth. „ or ra somewhat prostrate; leaves 1 to 2 dm. in length; sheaths smooth, 1 as long as the blades; blades 2 to 3 mm. broad, smooth or some- what roughened, scabrous on the margins; injlorescence 4 to 10 — 5 — 8 . ame: REVISION or MINNESOTA HORDEAE. 111 em. in length, not including the awns and capillary empty glumes, pale green, very fragile when mature, spikelets in threes, 1 flowered, the lateral ones aborted, placed on pedicels 1 to 2 mm. in length; empty glumes capillary, 3 to 6 cm. in length, scabrous, curved or spreading; flowering glumes of the perfect flowers lanceolate, 3 to 6mm. in length, with spread- ing capillary awns as long as the empty glumes, the flowering glumes of the aborted flowers subulate 5 to 10 mm. in length. Europe and Asia; S. Russia; E. Siberia. North America: N. S., Q., Ont, Saskatchewan to B. C.; N. to Mackenzie and Yukon rivers; S. to Great Lakes and Minn; W. to Neb., Colo. and Northern Cal. : Minnesota: Abundant along roadsides, waste and sandy Minn. specimens in herb.; Sheldon 176, Madison lake, Blue Earth county; Ballard 155, Chaska; Foote 6, Worthington; est lund 336, Minneapolis; Kassube 274, Minneapolis; Bailey 129, Ver- milion lake. Sandberg 529, Red Wing. ° ELYMUS Lixx. Hort. Upsal. 22. 1748. Sitospelos ApANs. Fam. 2: 36, 1763. Orthostachys Eunnu. Beitr, 4: 146, 1789. Sitanion Rar. in Journ. Phys. 80: 103, 1819 Polyantherix Nees. io Ann. Nat. Hist. Ser. I. 1:284. 1538. Leymus Hocusr, in Flora 31: 118. 1848 in adaot. Elymus elymoides (Rar.) Sweezey CM. Neb. Pl. 13. 1891. Lyme Grass or Wild Rye. Sitanion elymoides Rar. Jour. Phys. 89: 103. 1819. hystriz Nurr. Gen. 1: 86, 1818. * Aegilops Not Elymus hystrix Linn. Sp. Pl. 560. 1734. ; Elymus sitanion R. & S. Mart 2: 426. 1821. Polyantherix hystrix Nees. Mart. Bras. 1829. Annual or short lived perennial; stems 1.5 to 5 dm. in length, S stout, erect or nearly so, covered at the base with numerous membranaceous scales or sheaths, giving a bulbous appearance; leaves 1 to 2.5 dm. in length; sheaths striate, varying from _ glabrous to pubescent; blades 2 to 5 mm. broad, scabrous above and more or less pubescent below; inflorescence 3 to 10 cm. in length, rather loose, fragile when mature, often purple tinged; spikelets 9 to 12 mm. in length, not including the awns, in pairs, 1 to ö flowered; empty glumes subulate, entire or parted even to _ the base and these divisions often unequally 2 cleft, termin- _ ating in scabrous, divergent awns, the whole 4 to 10 cm. in & length; flowering glumes 6 to 12 mm. in length, ovate- lanceolate, 112 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. em merely ridged or else tmconapionoualy 8 to 6 We brisilill hairy at the tip, terminating in awns as long as the empty glumes. * North America: Minn, Dak. and Neb.; W. to Or.; 8. to Ark., Tex., N. M. and Cal. The typical habitat for this plant is the arid plains of the west. a Minnesota: Reported from near the southern boundary ot the state, probably local. 4 Elymus mollle Tain. in Spreng. Neu. Entdeck. 272. 1821. Wild Rye. 1 F. arenarius Mur. in Linowa 5161. 1890. Asia: Northern Siberia. a North America: Northern and eastern British America, — Labr.; S. to Me. and the St. Lawrence; W. to L. Superior and the Saakatchewan. 4 Minnesota: Reported from the portheastern part of the 4 statb and the northern part of the Red River valley. 1 Elymus sibirieus Lovn. var. glaueus (BucKt.) Wild Rye. — E. glaucus BuCKL. in Proc. Acad. Philad. u. 6: . 1862. E. americanus Vas. and Scrip. ex. Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2: 245. 188686. E. sibiricus Linn. var. americanus Wats. and Corte. Grays Man. ed. vi. & 1890. 1 E. sibiricus Auer. Plur. non Lian. Perennial; stems 5 to 10 dm. in length, erect; leaves2to3dm. in length; sheaths smooth and glabrous, seldom somewhat pubescent; blades 9 to 15 mm. broad, flat, smooth, or somewhat scabroys above; inflorescence 5 to 20 cm. in length, 5 to 10 mm. thick, virgate, curved or slightly nodding; spikeletsin pairs 3 to several flowered, closely appressed to the rachis;empty glumes 8 to 12 mm. in length. lanceolate or linear-lanceolate,3 _ to 5 nerved, smooth or somewhat roughened, the awns gener- ally shorter than the glumes; flowering glumes nearly as long, 5 nerved, rough or setulose, with erect capillary awns 10 to 25 mm. in length. 2 North America: Ont., Lake Superior; W. to Wash. and B. C.; S. to Minn., Idaho and Cal. 1 Minnesota: Occurs sparingly along the northern border of the state in the Red river valley. 5 Elymus striatus WILLD. Sp. 1: 470. 1797. Wild Rye. E. villosus Mul. Willd. Enum. 131. 1809. fo E. striatus WILLD. var. villosus A. GRAY. Man. Ed. v. 639. 1868. J 2 eg vs i. . REVISION OF MINNESOTA HORDEAE. 113 . ä— . eakcbooes tronghowt; sens’ to 0am. in length, slender, smooth, erect, or geniculate below; leaves 2 to 4 dm. in length; sheaths varying from glabrous to somewhat t; blades 6 to 12 mm. broad, flat somewhat scabrous both above and below; inflorescence 5 to 12 cm. in length, erect a or slightly nodding, long peduncled; spikelets usually in pairs 1 to 2 or 3 flowered; empty glumes linear-subulate, 15 to 25 mm. in length including the setaceous awns, spreading, hispid or hispid ciliate; fowering glumes to 10 mm. in length, ovate or __ ovate-lanceolate usually somewhat hispid, 1 to 3 nerved at the tip, armed with setaceous awns 2 to 3 mm. in length. North America: Ont. to N. V., N. J. and N. C.; W. to Minn. Neb, and Ark. Minnesota: Infrequent throughout the state; roadsides and borders of lakes and streams. Minn. specimens in herb: an £19, Sleepy Rye: 9764 Sleepy Eye. Dy Elymus canadensis Lixx. Sp. Pl 83. 1753. Nodding a FE. philadelphicus Lins. Amoen. Acad. 4: 288. 1759. Bo Hordeum patulum Moencn. Meth. 199. 1764. - E. glaucifolius Mun. in Willd. Enum. Hort. Berol. 131. 1809. c cy aera Fi. Am. 3: 137. 1 E. canadensis LIxN. var. glaucifolius A. Gray Man. ed. v. 639. 1868. Perennial, stout, often somewhat glaucous throughout; stems 8 to 12 dm, in length, smooth, erect or suberect; leaves 3 to 5 dm. in length; sheaths mostly smooth, somewhat pubescent, nearly as long as the blades; blades 6 to 15 mm. broad, abruptly contracted at the base, scabrous above and often also below; inflorescence 1 to 2 dm. in length, stout, nodding or curved; spikelets 12 to 18 mm. in length, 3 to 5 flowered; empty glumes sub- ulate, long awned, scabrous, 1 to 3 nerved; flowering glumes 10 to 15 mm. in length, mostly 3 nerved, bristly hairy, lanceolate, acuminate, with awns 3 to 7 cm. in length, more or less _ curved or spreading. This species shows considerable variation. Some of the specimens bear a somewhat close resemblance to E. striatus North America: N. S, Q., Ont., Man., to Rocky Mts. to B. C. and Or.; S. to N. E., N. J. and mts. of Ga; W. to Minn. Neb., Colo., Tex. and N. M. 114 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Minnesota: Throughout; frequent; roadsides and banks. Minn. specimens in herb. Taylor 762, Glenwood; Dele’ 678, Crystal Lake, Scott county; Ballard 766, Waconia; Sand berg 601, Red Wing; Ocstlund das, 389, Minneapolis. Elymus canadensis Luxx, forma crescendus u t. Nodding — Wild Rye. 1 Robust, glaucous or pubescent throughout; stems 8 to 12 dm. in length, erect or nearly 80; leaves 4 to 6 dm. in length; sheatha — striate, ridged; blades coarse and thick, 10 to 20 mm. broad; inflorescence 2 to 8 dm. in length, dense, thick, nodding or flex- 4 uous; glumes all hairy with long awns 5 to {> em. in length. curved or spreading. North America: Minn., S. D. to western Neb. : Minnesota: Southwestern part of the state; abundant; road- sides and meadows. 27 Minn. specimen in herb.: Sheldon 1120, Springfield. Elymus virginicus Linn. Sp. Pl. 84. 1758. Wild Kye. Hordeum cartilagineum Moxmxcn. Meth. 190. 1704. Elymus durus Hepw. ex. Steud. Nom. Ed. l. 1: 80. 1840. . Perennial; stems 5 to 12 dm. in length, smooth, erect; leaves _ 2.5 to 4 dm. in length; sheaths smooth or somewhat roughened, — generally shorter than the blades; blades 6 to 12 mm. broad, flat, scabrous both above and below; inflorescence 7 to Ii em. in length, strict, dense, the lower spikelets often included inthe sheath of the uppermost leaf; spikelets 1 to 2 cm. in length. 2 r 3 flowered; empty glumes 3 to 5 nerved, scabrous, linear-lan ceolate, acuminate, with awus 1 to 5 or 10 mm. in length; flowering glumes lanceolate, rounded on the back, usually some- what 3 nerved at the tip, rough or scabrous, with awns 5 to 10 and occasionally even 25 mm. in length. a North America: N. S., N. Br., Q., Ont., L. Superior to Man; S. to N. E., N. J. and Fla.; W. to Minn., Neb. Kan., Mo. and Ark. 1 Minnesota: Throughout; frequent, borders of lakes an streams. a Minn. specimens in-herb.: Oestlund 337, Minneapolis; Baile? 265, St. Louis River; Ballard 389, Jordan, Scott county; Shel- a don 3690, Fergus Falls; Sandberg, Red Wing; Foote 7, Wort. ington. 4 Elymus virginieus Linn. forma jejunus n. f. Small Wild Rye. Se stems 3 to 6 dm. in length, erect; leaves 103 a in length; blades 2 to 5 mm. broad, flat, scabrous or rough otal ¢ 4 -" ‘ Pe | Ramatey: "REVISION OF MINNESOTA HORDEAE. 115 . inflorescence 2 to 6 cm. in length, strict, 3 narrow, empty glumes scabrous or setulose, acuminate or short awned; Jlowering glumes generally inconspicuously 3 nerved at the tip, rough or scabrous, with awns 3 to 10 mm. in length. _ ‘This plant has been distributed from the national herbarium as var. minor but has apparently not been described. North America: Minnesota to Tex. Minnesota: With the species, infrequent. Minn. specimen in herb: Sheldon 1735, Lake Benton. HYSTRIX Moencn. Meth, 24. 1794. Asperelia Hume in Roem. & Ust. Mag. 3: wi. 5. 1700, Not Asprella Scaxes, Gen, 45. 1789. Not Asprelia Hosr. Gram. Austr. 4:17. 1809. Asprelia WILLD. Eoum. Hort. Berul. 132. 1809. Gymnosticham Scnaes. Reschr. Gras. 2: 127. 1810. : rete hystrix (Linn.) MacM. Metasp. Minn. Val. 59. 1 1592. Bottle Brush Grass. hystrix hgstrie WiLLD. Eaum. Hort. Berol. 132. 1809. Gymnostichum hystriz Scuges. Beschr. Gris. 2: 127, 1810. Elymus pseudo-hystriz ScnutT, Mant. 2: 427. 1824. Asprella angustifolia Nurr. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 8: 131. 1534. Asprelia mejor Fres. ex. Stead. Nom. ed. l. 1:150. 1840. Perennial; stems 7 to 12 dm. in length, erect or nearly so; leaves 2.5 to 45 dm. in length; sheaths smooth; blades 8 to 20 mm. broad, occasionally narrower, scabrous below, roughened above, sometimes glaucous, flat or somewhat involute; inflores- cence 1 to 2 dm. in length, straight or somewhat curved, loose; spikelets spreading, 2 to 4 flowered, in twos or threes (seldom Solitary) at each joint of the rachis, 5 to 10 mm. apart; empty glumes setaceous, deciduous or entirely wanting, flowering 1 glumes 6 to 12 mm. in length; lanceolate, 3 to 5 nerved at the tip, smoothish, or more often bristly hairy or pubescent, with awns 2 to 4 cm. in length. North America: N. Br., Q., Ont., Man. to the Saskatchewan; S. to N. V., N. J., and Ga,; W. to III. Minn., Dak, Neb. and Ark. Minnesota: Throughout. frequent. Minn. specimens in herb.: Sheldon 459, Madison Lake, Blue _ Earth county; Ballard 128, Chaska; Sandberg 592, Red Wing; _ 698, Chisago county; 594, Red Wing. =e 3 a XV. A PRELIMINARY LIST OF THE NORTH. AMERICAN SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. EpmunND P. SHELDON. The care and arrangement of the growing collection of .. tragali in the herbarium of the Geological and Natural History — Survey of Minnesota and the large number of new species pub- ‘lished since the synopsis by Dr. Sereno Watson in the appen- dix of the Botany of the King Expedition, has shown the q necesssity for a list of the North American species including those published since Dr. Watson's careful work on the genus. The work of the writer has been in the hope of providing such a list and at the same time laying the foundation of a systematic, morphological and distributional study of the North American species of Astragalus, No departure has been made from the method of sectioning the species adopted by Drs. Gray and Watson. The old section names have been 4 used whenever they do not conflict with heretofore published generic names. A division into Phaca and Huastrugalus is used. but it should not be considered a definite limitation, as most students of the genus admit, when they take into consideration the large number of species intermediate in their characters and conveniently to be referred neither to Astragalus nor to a Phaca as these genera have been limited. In the preparation of this paper the writer has been much aided by the kindness and generosity of a large number of a L American botanists. To Dr. B. L. Robinson I am especially — 4 indebted for the privilege of examining the collections in his charge, including the types of most of the species described by Dr. Asa Gray and Dr. Sereno Watson. The following are yu a some of the American botanists who have loaned me the col- lections owned by them or entrusted to their care: Dr. William Trelease of the Missouri Botanical Garden, Dr. Charles E. Bessey of the University of Nebraska, Professor A. H. Hitch cock of Manhattan, Kansas, Mr. P. A. Rydberg of Lincoln. Nebraska, Professor G. D. Swezey of Doane College, Crete, ui Bact Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 117 "Nebraska, Mr. S. B. Parish of San Bernardino, California, Mr. . R. Oreutt of Orcutt, California, and Dr. H. E Hasse of Soldiers Home, Los Angeles county, California. I have been also much aided by many botanists and collectors who have 3 FFF 5 The types of the new species proposed are deposited in the 0 i | . * bet i Series I. PHACA. § 1. SPresiopes. Rit atest ~~ . Astragalus acutirostris Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20300 * 1888. 1 California. As tragalus nothoxys A Gray. Proc, Am Acad. 6: 232. Tragacantha notheazys OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2 846. 1891. hm * 52. TRIPHYLLUS. Astragalus sericoleueus A. Gray. Am. Journ. Sei u. 33:410. 1862. ' Phaca sericea Nurt.in T. and 6. Fi. 1343. 1438. co sericea OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 8842. 1891. ; Not A rie DC. Astrag. 147. 1802. a synonym of A. globosus Vani. Symb. Bot 1:60. 1790, an | Armenian species Nebraska, South Dakota, Colorado and Wyoming. ‘Astragalus tridactylieus A. Gaay. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:527. 1866. Tragacantha tridactyliea OK. Rev. Gen. Fl. 2:948. 1891. Colorado and Wyoming. Astragalus gilviflorus Sugo. Ball Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9.19. 1894. PursH. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 740. 1814. triphylla Ear. & Weteur. N. Am. Bot. 1. 1840. triphylla OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 848. 1891. Not Astragalus triphyllus PaLL. Astrag. 68. 1800, a synonym of Orytropis triphylla DC. Astrag. 77. 1502, a native of Siberia. * a 2 F te * a * ee ee „ 2 * N a aay hae U 3 — e 8 ae 7 41 118 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES, ve Phaca caeapitosa NUrr. Gen, 2:08. 1818, Not Astragalus cacapitosus PALL. Astrag. 70. 1800, a synonym of Oxytropis caepitosa Pers. Syn. Pl. 2; 333. an Oriental species. Phaca argophylla Nutr.in T. and 6. Fl. 1368. 1838 Not Astrogalus argophyllus NV. in T. aud G. Fl. N. Am. 1:331. 18 a synonym of Astragalus glareosus DovGt. in Hook, Fl. Bor. Am. 1:152. 1888, a native of the Columbia river valley. 7 Kansas and Nebraska to Colorado, Wyoming, Montana, North and South Dakota and the Saskatchewan, thence west 0 the Rocky mts. a 83. HoMALOBUS. Astragalus viridis (Novr.) Kentrophyta viridis Nur. in T. & G. Fl. 0: 353. 1838. Not A. viridis Bunox. Astrag. Sp. Geront. 2: 231. 1860." A. kentrophyta A. Guay. Proc. Acad. Philad. u. 7:60. 1863. _ Kentrophyta montana Nutr. in T. & G. Fi. 1 353, * Tragacantha montana OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 661. 1801. Not A. montanus Linn. Spee. 760. 1753, a New Mexico, Colorado. Utah, Nevada, Kansas, Nebraska. South Dakota, Wyoming, Montana and British America. 3 Astragalus viridis (Nor?.) Saeco. var. impensus u. n. A. kentrophyta A. Gray, var. latus Wars. Bot. King. Rep. Br 7. 1871. Not A. elatus Boss & BAL. Diog. u. 9:45. 1848, a species found in Cappadocia. New Mexico and Nevada. ‘Astragalus simplicifolius (Nurr.) A. Gray. Proc. Am. 4 Acad. 6:231. 1866. , “a Phaca simplicifolia N rr. in T. & G. Fl. 1: 350. 1838. Tragacantha simplicifolia OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948. 1891. Colorado and Utah. Astragalus lingulatus n. sp. Sy Perennial, caespitose, minutely short pubescent becoming 1 glabrate, each plant growing in the form of a cl ose, compe semi-globose bunch; sfems very short, branching, almost com- pletely hidden by the abundant leaves and large — leaves 2 to 3.5 cm. in length, numerous, reduced to a narrowiy- 1. This species having as a synonym only A. nitens BuRsx. in Nouv. ee a Mosc. 12:61. 1860, which is preoccupied by A. nitens Boss & Hepes, Blob 9:51. 1849, may now take the name Astragalus praesignis u. n. 9 vue 119 13 — sition the margins of which are involute; stipules large, sheathing, hyaline, truncate, ciliate; * slender, shorter than the leaves, one or two flowered; 7 10 mm. in length; calyx campanulate, glabrous, the subulate- spreading rigid teeth one-half the length of the striate tube; corolla probably ochroleucous or purplish, the color not preserved in the type specimen; legume not mature, put show- ing characters similar to other species of this —Col- lected at the foot of Big Horn mts., Wyoming, August, 1559; also on Red Buttes on North Platte river, Wyoming, May, 1860, dy Mr. F. V. Hayden on the expedition of Capt. W. F. Ray nolds, U. S. A., to the head waters of the Missouri and Yellow- 7 stone rivers, 1859-60. This species is most nearly related to Astragalus spatulatus Sukl. b. and Astragalus simplicifolius eee The leaf and stipule characters will suffice to distinguish it until specimens bearing mature legumes are found. . herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Astragalus spatulatus Suetp. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9:19. 1896. Astragalus caeapitosus A.GRAY. Proc, Am. Acad. 6:230. 1866. Homalobus caespitosus NUrr. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1:2. 1838. . Tragacantha caespitoesa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. 3 Not Astragalus caespitosus PALI. Astrag. 70. 1890, Which is a synonym of Oxytropis caespifosa WILLD. Sp. Pl. 1 +3: 1804, 1803, occurring in Dahuria. ; Homalobus canescens Nutr. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1:22. 1838. Not Astragalus canescens DC. Astrag. 114. 1802, au Armenian species. Not Astragalus canescens SOLAND. in Lowe, in Trans. Camb. Phil. 4 Soe. 4:34. 1831, Which is a synonym of Astragalus solandri Lowe, in Hook. Kew. Journ. 8:294. 1856, a species occurring in Morocco and . Homalobus brachycarpus NUrr. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1:32. 1838. Not Astragalus brachyearpus BEB. Fl. Taur. 2: 201. 1809, which is the accepted name for a Caucasian plant. _ Kansas and Nebraska to Colorado, Wyoming, Montana and * wef en W R A r 21 ee as 6 120 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ee Astragalus palmeri A. Gray. Proc, Am. Acad. 771 - 1808. Tragacantha palmert OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 217. 1851. Arizona. Astragalus episcopus Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 10: e 1875. Tragacantha episcopa OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2; 044. 1801. Utah. Astragalus diversifolius A. Gray. Proc. Am. 6:280. u. 102, 1866. Homalobua orthocarpus NUrr. in T. and G. Fl. 1:1. 1838. Not A. orthocarpus Bows. Diag. I. 0: 68. A. junceus A.Gnay. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 230, 0,103. 1866, Homalobus junceus NUrr. in T. and G. Fl. 1:1. 1838, Tragacantha juncea OK. Rex. Gen. Pl. 2:045, 1891, Not A. junceus Lepen. in Spreng. Syst. 3: 297. Colorado, Utah, Wyoming and Nevada. Astragalus decumbens (Nut?T.) Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:229. 1866. Homatobus decumbens Nutt in T. and 6. Fl. 1:352 1 Tragacantna decumbens OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. Colorado, Wyoming, Montana and British Columbia. Astragalus serotinus A. Gray. Pac. R. Rep. 12:51. 1860. © Tragacantha serotina OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:948. 1891. Washington. Astragalus convallarius GREENE. Erythea. 1: 207. 1898, A. campestris A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 229. 1866. = Homalobus campestris Nutt. in T. & G. Fl. 1:351. 1838. << Tragacantha campestris OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. ; Not A. campestris Linn. Spec. 761. 1753, which is a synonym of Spiesia campestris OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 1: 206. 1891, a European species. a Homalobus tenuifolius Nutt. in T. & G. Fl. 1:351. 1838. Not A. tenuifolius Linn. Spec. Ed. u. 1065. 1763, a synonym of ‘ A. onobrychis LINN. Spec. 760. 1753, a species of Eastern Europe, Siberia and the Orient. Not A. tenuifolius DesF. Fl. Atlant. 2: 186. 1800, 5 = 121 | which is a synonym of A. algeriqnus Sheld. ined. an Algerian * species. 7 Homalobus decumbens A. GuaY. Proc. Acad. Philad. u. 7: 60. 1863. Not A. decumbens A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:229. 1864, which ic: was based on Homalobus decumbens Nurr. in T. & G. FE. 1:352. 1838. mm Colorado, Wyoming and Montana. 4 Astragalus miser Doubt in Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1:153. 1833. Tragacantha misera OK. Rev. Gen, Pi. 2: 946. 1891. . Astragalus tegetarius Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:76 | 1871 4 Tragacantha tegetaria OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948. 1891. ; Nevada, Idaho, Wyoming and Montana. A Astragalus tegetarius Wars. var. implexus Canny, in es Porter and Coulter. Syn. Fl. Colo. 26. 1874. Colorado. ia 1 Astragalus sesquifloras Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 10:84. = 1875. 1 Tragacantha sesquifora OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 27648. 1891. Utah. 4 Astragalus yexilliflexus SHeLp. Bull. Minn. Geol and „ Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9: 19. 1894. K Astragalus paucifiorus Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 148. 1838. Tragacantha pauecifiora OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 947. 1291. Not Astragalus paucifiorus PaLL. Astrag. 81. 1800, Which is a synonym of Gueldenstaedtia pauciflora DC. Prod. 2: 307. 1825, a native of the Alps. Wyoming and Montana, northward in the mountains of British North America. Astragalus porreetus Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:75. 1871. Tragacantha porrecta OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 1891. Nevada. - 8 wiehd teteann: Astragalus algerianus op. . A. tenutfolius Desr. Fl. Atlant. 2:186 1800. Not A, tenuifolius Lins. Spec. Ed. u. 065. 176, se supra mmm 2 6 88 * 122 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Astragalus palliserl A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 227. 1866. Tragacantha palliseri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 047. 1801. Rocky mountains of British America. Astragalus bourgovil Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:227, 18 0 * Tragacantha bourgovtt OK. Rev. Gen. Pi, 22043, 1891, Rocky mountains of British America and Oregon. Astragalus wingatanus Warts. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 192 a 1883. New Mexico. Astragalus bodini n. #p. a Perennial, slender, nearly glabrate; stems 2.5 to 6 dm. high, flexuous, branched, striate, erect spreading, becoming ¢ 1 bent; leaves 3 to 5 cm. in length, the rachis striate; leaflets 7 U i 10 mm. in length, in five to eight pairs, narrowly obovate ¢ lanceolate, abruptly acute; stipules ovate-acuminate, erect, not sheathing; peduncles 6 to 7 cm. in length, finely striate, wag minute, appressed blackish pubescence, loosely subspicate, & 7 to five flowered; flowers8to 10mm. in length. loosely e ing becoming reflexed; calyx campanulate, varplish Haged: nigros- cent, the teeth nearly the length of the tube; corolla ¢ 3 legume 8 to 10 mm. in length, shortly stipitate, charteceous, oblong, flat, nigrescent with a few short hairs, becoming glabrate, unilocular, two to four seeded. 4 Collected in low ground near Cheyenne, Wyoming. July, 1889, “ by J. E. Bodin for whom the species is named and to whom 1 am indebted for a good series of the Astragali collected by himself in Kansas, Nebraska, Colorado and Wyoming. a collected near Laramie, July 1889, by Dr. Edw. L. Greene. The species is nearest to Astragalus tenellus PURSH, but the habit is more nearly that of Astragalus fleruosus DOUGL. a Astragalus tenellus PursH. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 473. 1814 2 A. multiflorus A. Gunar. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 228. 1864. Ervum multi lorum PURsEl. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 739. 1814. Orobus dispar Nutr. Gen. 2:95. 1818. Phaca nigrescens Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1:143. 1833. Homalobus multifiorus T. &. G. Fl. N. Am. I: 350. 1838. A. nigrescens A.Gray. Am. Journ. Sci. U. 33: 410. 1862. Tragacantha tenella OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 942. 159). Not A. tenellue BuNor. Syn. Astrag. Geront. 2: 206. 1888.“ Sarai atuinciota —— to Kanees and Col- 3 west to Utah, Nevada and southern California; north _ from British Columbia and the Saskatchewan. Astragalus acerbus . sp. _ Perennial, minutely white-appressed pubescent throughout: 1 ten like taste; stems 3 to 3.5 dm. high, erect spreading, diffuse branching, slender, numerous, growing in _ clumps, finely striate below. becoming nearly terete above; e cn te Saath, the tactile pebety terete or alightly sulcate above, leafllels 4 to 8 mm. in length, the odd terminal one 1.5 to 2 cm. in length, in two or three pairs, linear, erect; _ stipules triangular-ovate, very minute or absent above, larger and sheathing below; peduncles 1 to 2 dm. in length, slender- E Gliform, with five to fourteen scattered flowers; flowers 4 to 5 mm. in length, spreading, becoming reflexed; calyx campanu- late, with short, triangular-acute teeth; corolla whitish, tinged _ With bluish green; lequme 10 to 12 mm. in length, including the _ stipe which is shorter than the calyx, chartaceous, oblong, flat. _ glabrous, not reticulated, becoming straw-colored. unilocular, im the type maturing but one seed. Collected near Glenwood Springs. Coiorado, June, 1°93, by Mx. DeAlton Saunders of the University of Nebraska The i ieecien fa naaaast (0 Asivigalus melee Ponsu. _ Astragalus inversus Jones. Zoe. 4:276. 1593. California. 3 stenophyllus T. & G. Fl. 1:329. 1838. . A. leptaphyllus Norv. in Journ. Acad. Philad. 7:18. 1834. a Not A. leptaphyllus Desr. Fl. Atlant. 2: 188. 1800, — f N Tragacantha stenophylla OK. Rex. Gen. Fi. 2: 848. 1891 Montana. 1 Astragalus coltoni Jones. Zoe. 2227. 1891. Dan. . Au Astragalus kuntzei o. 2. a. A. tenellus Buses. Syn. Astrag. Geront. 2:26. 1503. ‘oa Not A. teneltus PuRsH. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 473. 1814. Sa Tragacantha belangert OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:80. 1881. Not A. belangerianus Fiscu. in Bull. Soc. Nat. Mose, 24: . 1555, „ Diag. IL 2: . 1843, a Persian species. : 9 . W e „ f * 9 , . , 1 ae e 3 * . 88 e 124 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Astragalus lancelarius A. Gaay. Proc. Am. Acad. 18 370. 1878. 7 Arizona and Colorado. Astragalus forwoodi Wars. Proc. Am. Acad, 25; 1890. South Dakota. Astragalus fllipes Torrey. Bot. Wilkes. 172278. 1802. Tragacantha flipes OK. Rev, Gen. Pi, 2: . 1801, Washington, Oregon and Nevada. Astragalus hasseanus , sp. Perennial, minutely pubescent throughout but not cee stems 8 to 10 dm. high, erect, branching, nearly terete but finely striate, minutely roughened; leaves 6 to 8 cm. in length, — der, the rachis terete; leaflets 4 toS mm. in length, in ten to thirteen pairs, often scattered, narrowly obovate-oblong, obtuse; stipules deltoid acuminate, persistent, reflexed; peduneles 8 to 20 cm. in length, elatiocarpic, striate, loosely eight to thirty flowered; flowers 10 to 12 mm. in length, spreading, becoming reflexed on a slender pedicel three or four mm. in length; calyx — short campanulate, the short, triangular teeth inconsplenceas | persistent even after the maturing and decay of the N : corolla narrow, ochroleucous; legume 3 cm. in length. including the filiform, slender stipe which is 1.5 cm. in length, charta- ceous, body of the legume oblong tapering at both ende, glabrous, flat, unilocular, six to twelve seeded. Collected near San Bonaventura, California, September, 1888, by Dr. H. E. Hasse, for whom the species is named. Nearest to Astragalus antiselli Gray, with which it was collected. 4 Astragalus antiselli A. Gray. Bot. Calif. 1: 152. 1980. Homalobus multiflorus Torr. Pac. R. Rep. 7:10. 1855. — Not A. multitorus A. Gunar. Proc. Am. Acad. &: 228. 1866. 4 California. an Astragalus tweedyi Cansy. Bot. Gaz. 15:150. 1890. Washington and Oregon. a Astragalus collinus DouGL. in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard & Bot. 2:256. 1832. Me. Phaca collina Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 140. 1833. yee 125 collina OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:6. 1891. ee . Not A, collinus Borss. FI. Orient. 2: 438. 1872. 7 Oregon. Washington and British Columbia. _ Astragalus californicus (Gray) Greene. Bull. Calif. q Acad. Sci. 1: n. 3. 157. 1888. A. collinus DovGL. var, californieus A.Gaay. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 54. 1878. ' Californi § 4. PODOSCLEROCARPUS. _ Astragalus bieristatus A. Gray. Proc. Am Acad. 19: 1 75. 1883. Astragalus gibbsii KLLOd. Proc. Calif. Acad. 2: 161. q A. eyrtoides A. GRAY. Proc. Am. Acad. G:201. 1866. x Tragacantha gibbsii OK. Rev. Gen. Fl. 2: 945. 1891. Idaho, Washington and British Columbia. Astragalus speirocarpus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:225. 1866. Tragacantha spetrocarpa OK. Rev. Gen. Fl. 2:948. 1891. eee ee Astragalus speirocarpus A. Gray. var. curvicarpus n. n. A speirocarpus A. Gray, var. falerformis A. Gray. Bot. Calif 1 1: 152. 1880, Not A. faleiformis Desr. Emend. Atl. ex. DC. Astrag. 176. 1802, a Algerian species. Nevada, Washington and British Columbia. 3 eee eee Gray. Proc. Am. Acad 6: 225. a BoD Ai ee Fl. Bor.-Am, 1: 142. 1833. Not A. podocarpus Mxxkn. Verz. Pil. Cauc. 142 1831, a Caucasian and Persian species. oY * Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948. 1891. Ba 4 The synonymy of this species will be: Astragalus zonarius au x A. collinus Bows. Fl. Orient. 2: 438. 1872. ae Not A. collinus Dovat. in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard. & Bot. 2: 24. 152. 126 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. §5. FAMeLicts. Astragalus griseopubescens Sugo, Bull. Minn. Geol. 6 | Nat. Hist. Surv. 9:19. 1894. a Astragalus strigosus CO. & Fisn. Bot. Gaz. 18: 200. 1803, Not Astragalus strigosus (KeLLOGG) SHELD. “= Montana Astragalus scalaris Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 23: 270. Mexico. Astragalus flex uosus Doug in G. Don. Gen. Syst. G & Bot. 2: 256. 18382. Phaca flexuosa Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 140, 1833. Tragacantha flexuosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 045. 1891. a Phaca elongata Hoox. Fl. Bor-Am. 1: 140. 1833 1 Saskatchewan, British Columbia, Northwest Territory, Assiniboia and lat. 50° north to Minnesota, west to Manne south to Colorado and Nebraska. 4 Astragalus richardsoni . n. 1 A. vaginatus Ricnanpson, in Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 140. 198. 1 Not A. vaginatus PALL. Astrag. 46. 1800. Northern British America. Astragalus debilis (NuTT.) Gray. Proc. Acad. Philad. II. 7:60. 1863. q Phaca debilis Nutr. in Torr. and Gray. Fl. 1:345. 1838. Tragacantha debilis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. Plains of the Rocky mountains. ‘Astragalus sabulosus Jones. Zoe. 2:239. 1891. Utah. | Astragalus limatus n. sp. Perennial, robust, bushy but not woody, minutely N with sparse, ascending hairs; stems 3 to 6 dm. high, erect, thick, striate: leaves 10 to 12 cm. in length, numerous, rachis — channelled; leaflets 1 to 3.5 cm. in length, in five to nine pairs, orbicular, obovate or oblong, rarely obcordate, obtuse or retuse stipules triangular-ovate, foliaceous, reflexed; peduncles thick, striate, exceeding in length the leaves, loosely subspicate; jlowers 10 to 15 mm. in length, spreading or reflexed; calyx — cylindrical, appressed pubescent with nigrescent bairs, the teeth unequal, much shorter than the tube; corolla magenta colored when fresh, becoming violet when dried; legume 2 ‘Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 127 gz 2.5 em. in length, chartaceous, horizontal or ascending, ovate, with a long, incurved tip, finely short-pubescent, minutely raeticulate-veined, unilocular, many seeded. Collected near Indian wells on the Colorado desert in soutb- western California, C. R. Orcutt, February, 1890. Also near _ Camiso creek, California, C. R. Orcutt, April. 1890. The char- acters of the legume connect this species with Astragalus SHELD., but the habit, pubescence, numerous leaves and large stipules characterize it. Astragalus praelongus SHeLp. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. Astragalus procerus A. Graft. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 369. 1878. Not Astragalus procerus Bors, and Haves. in Boles. Fl. Orient. 2: 464, 1872, the accepted name of a Persian species. California and Nevada. Astragalus reventus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 15:46. 1880. Oregon and Washington. Astragalus pattersoni A. Gray in Brandegee. Fl. S. W. Colo. 285. 1876. Tragacantha pattersoni OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 47. 1891. Colorado and Utah. Astragalus halli A. Gray. Proc, Am. Acad. 6: 224. 1866. Tragacantha halli OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. Colorado, New Mexico and Arizona. Astragalus famelicus SHecp. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. . - Astragalus fallax Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20: 362. 1885. 4 Not Astragalus fallax Fiscuer. Syn. Astrag. Tragac. 27. 1853, a synonym of Astragalus mesoleios Boiss. and HOHEN. in Boiss. Diag. I, 2:91. 1849, a Persian species. New Mexico and Arizona. Astragalus greenei A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 16: 105. 1881. New Mexico. °C 2 1 „ a Astragalus fendleri A. Gray. Pl. Wright. 2:44. 18 Phaca ſendleri A. Guay. Pi. Fendl. . 1840. Tragacantha fendleri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 044. 1891. Colorado and New Mexico. Astragalus gracilentus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 223. 1866. Phaca gracilenta A. Gray. FI. Fendl. . 1840. Tragacantha gracilenta OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 21 646. 1801. New Mexico. Astragalus albatus . sp. Annual or perhaps biennial, whitened throughout with el fine, dense pubescence; slems-9 to 20 cm. high, erect, simple, thick, one to four from the yellowish root, finely striate; leaves — 4 to6cm. in length, the rachis striate; leajlels 8 to15 mm. in length, in four or five pairs, oblong, obtuse; stipules — h acuminate, free, erect; peduncles 3 to 5 cm. in length, terete, — loosely four to six flowered; flowers 5 to 6 mm. in length; areata spreading, becoming deflexed; calyx broadly campanulate, the abruptly pointed triangular teeth one-third to one-half the a length of the tube; corolla whitish or ochroleucous; legume 11 to © 12 mm. in length, membranceous-inflated, ovate-oblong, acumi- q nate pointed, the ventral suture straight, the dorsal curved, _ softly white-pubescent, unilocular, with neither suture intro- flexed, two to six seeded. a Collected on the Colorado desert in southeastern California, Ap. 1889, by C. R. Orcutt. r sonorae A. GRAY, and Astragalus vaseyi Wars. Astragalus sonorae A. Gray. Pl. Wr. 2:44. 1853. Tragacantha sonorae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:948. 1891. Astragalus coriaceus HeMsL. Biol. Centr. Am. Bot. 18 a 263. 1879. 2 ee Oe Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. Mexico. Astragalus antoninus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 343. 1882. i Mexico. oe eh ‘Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 129 Astragalus pyenostachyus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 527. 1866. Tragacantha pyenostachya OK. Rev. Gen. Fl. 2: 947. 1891. Astragalus aridus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 223. 1806. og Tragacantha arida OK. Rev. Gen, Pl. 2:43. 1891, . Southern California. Astragalus troglodytus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20: 362. 1885. Arizona, Astragalus virgineus Sutz. Contrib. Nat. Herb. 4:58. 3 1893. Nevada. Astragalus eastanseformls Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20: 361. 1885. Arizona. Astragalus tephrodes A.Gray. Pl. Wright. 2:45. 1853. Tragacantha tephrodes OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2648. 1891. New Mexico. Recently collected specimens of this species : Sent to me by Professor E. O. Wooton show the purple color of the corolla which was doubted by Dr. Gray. Astragalus newberryi A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 55. 1877. Utah and Arizona. Astragalus chamaeluce A. Gray. Ives. Rep. 10. 1561. in pt Phaca Nurr. in T. and G. Fl. 1349. 1838. ö pygmaea OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 841. 1891. ‘ Not A. pygmaeus PALL. Astrag. 66. 1800, a synonym of Spiesia nigrescens (PALL.) OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 12207. 1891, a Siberian species. Arizona and New Mexico to southern Idaho. Astragalus eastwoodi Jones. Zoe. 4:368. 1594. A. preussii A. Gray var. sulcatus JONES. Zoe. 4:37. 1593. Not A. suleatus LINN. Spec. 756. 1753, 2 Siberian species. Colorado and Utah. ee ; Yi, * 99 ä * n a * » 7 N W 2 8 * . N 7 180 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ae Astragalus preussii A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6.22 1866 a a Tragacantha pre OK. Rev, Gen. Pl. 2: 047, 1801. Utah and Nevada. Astragalus preussii A. Gray. var. laxispleatus ». 9 a A. preuasti A. Guar, var, laxwiforus A. Guay. Proc. Am. 18: 360. 1878. Not A. lavifiorus Boiss. Fi. Orient. 22413. 1872, a a synonym of A. bracteosus Boiss. and Nog. in Boss. Diag. II. 2:31. 1849, a species found in Anatolia. | Northern Arizona and California. Astragalus preussii A. Gray. var. aretas n. x. A. preussii A. Guay. var. latus Jones. Zoe. 4:34. 1903. Not A. latus Jones. Zoe. 4: 272. 1893, which is based on A. diphysus A. Gray. var. latus Jones. Zeal 3:287. 1893. This variety includes most of the Utah collec — tions of A. preussii A. Gray, recently reported. It is charac-— terized by the low habit, narrower and smaller leaves and subulate pointed, cylindrical or oblong-ovate legumes. § 6. Prorixarus Astragalus serenoi OK.) Tragacantha serenoi OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 041. 1891. A. nudus Wars. Bot. King Rep. 5:74 171. Not A. nudus Cros. in C. Gay. Fl. Chil. 2:115. 1846, a Chilean species. A. oblatus Suetp. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. a. 9:19. 1894. 4 Nevada. = Astragalus toanus Jones. Zoe. 3:296. 1593. Nevada. a a Astragalus grayi Parry, in Wats. Am. Nat. 8: 212. 1873. ‘ Tragacantha grayi OK. Rev. Geo. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. Wyoming. Astragalus pectinatus DoucL. in G. Don. Gen. Syst, a Gard. and Bot. 2: 257. 1832. ; Phaca pectinata Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 149. 1833. Tragacantha pectinata OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 1891. + Sheldon: SPECIES or ASTRAGALUS. 131 all Bots. Diag. I. 2:54. 1843.“ . south in the United States to Montana, Wyoming, Kansas, Nebraska iy §7. BisuLcatus. Astragalus jepsoni Suecp. Bull. Minn. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9: 19. 1894. ae Astragalus demissus Gueene. Erythea, 1 221. 1893. Not Astragalus demissus Bows, & IHZLDR. in Boiss. Diag. 1.2: 50. 1549, 7 a synonym of Astragalus amoenus Fenzu. Pugil. Pl. Nov. Syr. 4. 1842, a Cilician plant. Nevada. Astragalus scobinatulus Sugt. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1594. om haydentanus A. GRAN. var major JONES. Zoe. 22241. mr ‘Wot Astrogahss eres A. Guar. var. major A. Gua. Proc. Am. 55 Acad. G: 201. 1806. haydenianus A. Guay. var. nevadensis Jones. Zoe. 2: 241. 1891: Not 4. nevadensis Bows, Diag. I. 2:63. 1849. Nevada. Astragalus haydenianus A. Gaay. ia Baannpeces. FL S. W. Colo. 235. 1876. Tragacantha haydeniana OK. Rev. Gen. Fl. 27 943. 1891. New Mexico, Colorado and Utah. Astragalus bisuleatus Hook.) A. Gray. Pac. R. Rep. 12:42. 1860. Phaca bisuleata Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 143. 1833. Trayacantha bisuleata OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. . Nebraska, Colorado, Wyoming, Montana and the Saskatche- za § 8. MICROCYSTIS. Astragalus humillimas A. Gray. in Branpecese. FI. S. W. Colo. 235. 1876. Tragacantha humillima OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 8486. 1591. A. pectinatus Borss. Diag. 1.2: 54. 1843. A. elegantulus Gueexe. Erythea. I:. 188. 182 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Astragalus jejunus Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:73. Tragacantha jejuna OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2: 045, 1801. a Wyoming and Utah. | 4 Astragalus thurberi A. Gray. Pl. Thurb, 312. 1554. Tragacantha thurberi OK. Rev. Gen. Pi, 2: 048. 1801. 1 Arizona. 4 Astragalus leptaleus A. Gaay. Proc. Am. Acad. en. 1866. § Tragacantha leptalea OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 27 046. 1801. A. paucifiorus A.GRay. Proc. Acad. Philad. u. 7:00. 1863. Phaca paucifiora Nutr. in T. and G. FL 1:3. 1838, Not A. paucifiorus Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 149. 1833, which is a synonym of A. vevilliflexus Suevv. Bull. Minn, Geol. and Nat. Surv. n. 9:21. 1894. a Nebraska, Colorado and Utah. 4 3 Astragalus microcystis A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6 220. 1866. microcystia OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 046. 1891. Tragacantha 1 Not A. microcystis BUNGR. Astrag. F edesch. 306. ex. Ind. Kew. * 15 234. 1893. Wyoming, Montana, Idaho and Washington; north to Methy a 2 river. British America. : $9. CLAVOCARPUS. Astragalus lonchocarpus Torr. Pac. R. Rep. 4:50 Tragacantha lonchocarpa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946. 1891. Phaca macrocarpa A. GRAY. Pl. Fendl. 36. 1849. Not A. macrocarpus DC. Astrag. 143. 1802, a Syrian species. Utah, Colorado and New Mexico. § 10. INFLATUS. 4 Astragalus alpinus (Linn.) SHELD. Bull. Minn. Geol. 2 and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9: 65. 1894. oe Phaca alpina Linn. Spec. 755. 1753. Phaca frigida LINN. Fl. Suec. Ed. II. n. 657. 1785. 6. This species may take the name Astragalus centralis u. n. Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 133 Astragalus alpinus (LIx x.) SHELD. var. americanus (Hook.) Phaca frigida L. var. americana Hook. Fl. Bor -Am. 1: 140. 1833. A. frigidus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:219. 1864. A. frigidus A. GAV. var. americanus Wats. Bib. Ind. 193, 1875 Tragacantha frigida OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. Northern Colorado, Wyoming and Montana; north in British North America to Hudson bay, Slave lake and northern British Columbia. Astragalus alpinus ( Linn.) SEL. var. littoralis (Hoox.) Phaca frigida L. var. litteralis Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am.1:140. 1833. A, frigidus A. Gray. var. littoralis Wars. Bib. Ind. 193, 1878. Alaska. Astragalus desperatus Jones. Zoe, 2:243. 1591. Utah and Colorado. g Astragalus ampullarius Wars. Am. Nat. 7:300. 1872. Tragacantha ampullaria OK. Rev, Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. ** Southern Utah. Astragalus oxyphysus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 62218. 1866. Tragacantha oxyphysus OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2267. 1891. California. Astragalus trichopodus (Nurr.) A. Garay. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:218. 1866. 8 4 ' Phaca trichopoda Nutr. in T. and G. Fi. 1:43. 1838. 4 Tragacantha trichopoda OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948 1891. California. Astragalus asymmetricus SRELD. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9:19. 1894. Astragalus leucophyllus T. and G. Fl. N. Am. 1:336. 1838. Phaca leucophylla HOOK. and ARN. Bot. Beech. Voy. 333. 1840. Tragacantha leucophylla OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:40. 1891. Not Astragalus leucophyllus WILLD. Sp. Pl. 3:1331. 1803. Which is a synonym of Astragalus angustifolins Lam. Ency. Meth. 1:321. 1783, a species occurring in Greece and Asia Minor. 134 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Astagalus leucopsis (T. and G.) Torr. Bot, Mex. Hou 56. 1859. Phaca leucopsis T. and G. Fi. 1.606. 1840, Tragacantha leucopsia OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2.246. 1891. Phaca canescens Nutt. in T. and G. Fi. 1:344. 1838. = Not Astragalus canescens DO. Astrag. 114. 1802. 1 California. Astragalus leucopsis (T. and G.) Torr. var. eurtus u . A. leucopsis T. and G. var. brachypus nk. Pitt. 1:33. Not A. brachypus Scunenk. Enum. Pl. Nov, 60. 1841. a soongarian species. Island of San Miguel off California. Astragalus curtipes A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:217. 1866, 2 Tragacantha curtipes OR. Rev. Gen. Pl. 3: 944. 1891. 4 California. ; Astragalus anemophilus Greeee. Bull Calif. Acad. Le 4. 186. 1886. A. vestitus Wats. Bib. Ind. 202. 1878. Phaca vestita BENTH. Bot. Sulph. 13. 184. Tragacantia vestita OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 949. 1891. Not A. vestitus Borss. Diag. I. 1:49. 1842, a Mesopotamian species. Lower California. Astragalus fastidiosus (KELLOGG) Greene. Bull. q Acad. Sci. I: n. 4. 136. 1885. ( Phaca fastida KeLLoee. Hesperian. 1860. Cedros islands off California. Astragalus magdalenae GREENE. Pitt. 1: 162. 1888. A. candidissimus Wats. Bib. Ind. 191. 1878. Phaca candidissima BENTH. Bot.Sulph. 12. 1844. Not A. candidissimus LEDERB. Fl. Alt. 3: 309. 1829, a Siberian species. Tragacantha californica OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:940. 1891. Lower California. Astragalus miguelensis GRRRN RE. Pitt. 1:33. 1887. Island of San Miguel, off California. Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 135 Astragalus menziesii A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 217 1866. * Phaca densifolia Sm. in Rees’ Cyc. 28: 0.9. 1817. Phaca nuttallii T. aud G. Fl. 1:343. 1838, Pee Tragacantha nuttallii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 941. 1891. Not A. nuttallianus DC. Prod. 2: 289. 1825. 8 A. densifolius Torr. Pac. R. Rep. 7: 10. 1860. Not A. densifolius Lam. Ency. Meth. 1:3T. 1783, % an Armenian species. California. Astragalus franciscanas u. . d A. erotulariae A. GRaYy. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 216. 1866, excl. syn. * Tragacantha erotalariae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. in pt. * Not A. erotalariae (BENTH.) SHELD. infra. . Phaca densifolia Torr. Pac. R. R. Rep. 4: 31. Not A. densifolia Lax. Eney. Meth. 1:37. 1783. ‘California. Astragalus franciscanus . u. var. longulus a. n. j A. crotalariae A. GRAY var. virgatus A.Gmay. Bot. Calif. 1: 149. ae 1880. Not A. virgatus PALL. Astrag. 20. 1800. California. Astragalus crotalariae (Benrs.) Phaca erotalariae BENTU. Pl. Hartw. 307. 1839-57. Tragacantha crotalariae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891, in pt. Near Monterey, Calif. Recent collection at the type locality ot this species confirm Dr. Gray's suspicion that it is not his 4. crotalariae. 4 1 Astragalus proriferus JONEs. “Zoe. 4: 275. 1893. Bower California. a . Astragalus vaseyi Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 17370. 1882 = California. | Astragalus hornii A.Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 398. 1868. * Tragacantha horn OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. eee ee eee a Oe Se 136 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, as: Astragalus macrodon (H. and A.) A. Gray. Proe. Al | Acad. 6:216. 1866. 7 Phaca macrodon II. and A. Hot. Deechey, 333. 1840. Tragacantha macrodon OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22046. 1801, California. : Astragalus wardi A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. ts: 1877. . Utah. Astragalus diurnus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 21: 1886. Oregon. Astragalus subeinereus A.Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 366. 1878. 7 § Arizona and Utah. 4 Astragalus allochrous A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13 866. 1878. = Arizona. ae Astragalus douglasii (T. and G.) A. Gray. Proe. m Acad. 6: 215. 1866. Phaca douglasii T. aud G. Fl. 1: 346. 1838. *Tragacantha douglasii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:64. 1891. California. f Astragalus cicadae JONES. Zoe. 4:35. 1893. Colorado. Astragalus megacarpus (Nurr.) A. Gray. Proc. Acad. 6:215. 1866. Phaca megacarpa Nutt. in T. and G. Fl. 1:343. 1838. Tragacantha megacarpa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:946. 1891. Utah. Astragalus megacarpus (Norr.) A. Gray. var. igus n. n. A. megacarpus (NutT.) A. GRAY. var. parryi A. Guay. Bot. Calif, 3 1:148. 1880. - Not A. parryi A. Gray. Am. Journ. Sci. 0. 33: 410. 1862. a Southwestern Utah. 2 „„ ee et ee | __ Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 137 Astragalus artipes A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13 :370. 1878. Arizona. Astragalus oophorus Wats. Bot. King. Rep. 5:73. 1871. N Tragacantha oophora OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 1891. California and Nevada. Astragalus whitneyi A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 526. 1866, | Tragacantha whitneyi OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2. 949. 1891. California, _ Astragalus hookerianus (T. and G.) A. Gray. Proc. : Am. Acad. 6:215. 1866. ij Phaca hookeriana T. and G. Fl. 1:693. 1840, Tragacantha hookeriana OK. Rev. Gen Pl. 2: 945. 1891. in pt. Not A. hookerianus Dierr. Syn. Pl. 4: 1086. 1850, a synonym of A. fepicus SHELD. ined., a Mexican species. Oregon, Nevada and California. Astragalus cusickii A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 370. 1878. Oregon. Astragalus ceramicus Sugo. Bull Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. excl. syn. Phaca picta. A. Gray. Astragatus pictus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:214. 1866. Tragacantha picta OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 947. 1891. Not Astragalus pictus Sreup. Nom. Ed. 11. 1: 163. 1840, which is the accepted name for a Chilean species. : Not Astragalus pictus Rolss. Diag. 11. 6:55. 1853, ; which is a synonym of Astragalus conduplicatus Bertol in Nov. Comm. Bonon. 6: 231. 1844, which is a plant of Syria and Mesopotamia. Astragalus pictus A. Gray. var. filifolius A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6:214. 1868. Astragalus filfolius A.Gray. Pac. R. Rep. 12: 42. 1860. Not Astragalus filfolius CLOs. in C. Gay. Fl. Chil. 2: 111. 1846, which is an accepted name. l Psoralea longifolia Pons. Flor. Amer. Sept. 2: 741. 1814. Orobus longifolius Nutr. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 346. 1838. Not Astragalus longifolius Lam. Ency. Meth 1:322 1783, _ which is an Armenian species. 188 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ceramicus SHELD. var impertectus Sunt.b. Bull. fine. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv, u. U: 19. 1864, g From Kansas and Nebraska to Utah and New Mexico. Astragalus wootoni n. sp. Perennial, minutely sparsely pubescent, becoming stems 10 to 12 em. in length, erect-spreading, simple or t - ing only from the base, smooth or finely striate; leaves 5 to 8 , cm. in length, the rachis striate; leajlels 9 to 15 mm. in | in four to eight pairs, linear-oblong, obtuse, minutely apy hairy beneath. glabrous above; stipules small, membrar triangular-deltoid, deciduous, peduncles 6 to 8 cm. in subterete, loosely seven to eleven flowered; flowers 7 to 8 2 in length, erect-spreading, becoming horizontal; calyx short. campanulate, the linear-filiform teeth as long as the tube: corolla purplish; legume 2 to 2.5 cm. in length, 1 to 1. 5 em. broad, thin, membranaceous, inflated, ovate, glabrous or very finely short pubescent, diaphanous, unilocular, three to seven © seeded. ; Collected near Las Cruces, New Mexico, May, 1892, by Pro- ‘ fessor E. O. Wooton, of the A. and M. College of New Mexico, to whom this species is respectfully dedicated. This species is nearest to Astragalus foliolasus (Gray) SHELD., but the leaflets are well developed and the “eee * not painted nor mottled. 5 Astragalus foliolosus (G RAV) A. pictus A. GRAY var. foliolosuws A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: ° 215. 1866. a Not A. foliolosus BUNGE. Gen. Astrag. Geront. 2:125. 1886.* — Placa picta A. GRAY. Pl. Fendl. 37. 1849. a A. pictus var. angustatus JONES. Zoe. 4.37. 1893. a Not A. angustatus Botss. Diag. 1. 2:47 1840. ‘ A. ceramicus SHELD. var. jonesii SHELD. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9: 19. 1894. New Mexico, Colorado and Utah. 4 Astragalus geyeri A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 214. 1866. 8 Tragacantha geyeri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. Phaca annua GEYER. in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. 6: 213. a. Not A. annuus DC. Astrag. 127. 1802. - Southern Montana, Wyoming, southern Idaho, Nevada eastern California. *This species being heretofore considered valid and having no synonyms may t the name Astragalus se apc ci n. n. from its original locality. - Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 139 8 sabulonum A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 368, 1878. Nevada. Astragalus suksdorfii How zt. Erythea. 1111. 1893. Washington. Astragalus cerussatus n. sp. - Perennial, sparsely pubescent throughout with white, loose hairs; stems 2 to 3 dm. high, erect-spreading, striate; aves 4 _ to5cm. in length, the rachis channelled; leaflets 5 to 12 mm. in length, in five to eight pairs, narrowly oblong, emarginate; stipules triangular-acuminate, becoming reflexed; peduneles x slender, exceeding the leaves, finely striate, loosely three to _ five flowered; flowers 4 to 5 mm. in length, spreading or reflexed; calyx campanulate, slightly pubescent, the spreading, filiform teeth longer than the tube; corolla ochroleucous tipped with purple; legume 12 to 20 mm. in length, horizontal or ascending, _ thin-chartaceous, inflated, ovate-oblong, pointed, finely reticu- lated, often purplish colored, but not mottled, nearly glabrous, + _ unilocular, but with the ventral suture intruded nearly to the center of the cavity, eight to ten seeded. Collected on the mountain sides near Canon City, Fremont county. Colorado, by J. E. Bodin, June and July, 1890; also q near Royal Gorge, Colorado, by Miss Alice Eastwood, June, 18891. This species is nearly related to Astragalus suksdorfii q 11 Astragalus wetherilli JONES, and may be regarded 3 ; e pulsiferae A. Gkay. Proc. Am. Acad. 10: 69. California. as intermediate between the two. Astragalus wetherilli Jones. Zoe. 4:34. Colorado. Astragalus inyoensis SHELD. Contrib. Nat. Herb. 4:86. 1893. 1875. Tragacantha pulsiferae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 947. 1891. oe vee 9 * 5 oat a 2 140 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a Astragalus pondii Greene. Pitt. 4: 288. 1889. 7 Lower California. Astragalus eremicus Suecv, Contrib. Nat. Herb. 14 1893. | = California. =)? Astragalus coulteri Benra. Pl. Hartw. 307. 1857. 8 A. arthu-schottii A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad, 6:20. 1865. Tragacantha coulteri OK. Rev. Gen, Pi. 2: 044. 1801. California, Astragalus peabodianus Jones. Zoe. $:295. 1898. ° Utah. Astragalus candollianus (II. B. K.) Phaca candoliiana II. B. K. Nov. Gen, et Sp. 6: 408. 1622. Not A. candollianus Bots. Diag. f. 2:0. 1843, * 4 a Persian species.“ Not A. candollianus ROLLE. III. Bot. Himal. 199. 1839, which is A. royleanus BUNGE. Astrag. 2:34. 1869, a Himalayan species. * A. triſtorus A. Gray. Pl. Wr. 2:45. 1853. excl. syn. Phaca trifora DC. Astrag. 62. 1802. * California, Arizona and Mexico. 7. The synoncumy of this species will be: Astragalus supervises (OK.) yj Tragacantha supervisa OK. Rev. Gen. PL 2:98. 1301. A. candollianus Borss. Diag. I. 2: . 1843. Not A. candollianus (H. B. K.) SHecup. supra. 8. The synonomy of this species will be: Astragalus vexillilongus mn. n. A. candollianus Royxe. III. Bot. Himal. 199. 1839. 4 Not A. candolliana (H. B. K.) Snob. supra. A. royleanus Bux an, Astrag. 2:34. 1869, Not A. royleanus Dierr. Syn. Pl. 4: 1090. 1880, a synonym of, 4. strobutrerus ROYLE. III. Bot. Himal. 199. 1839, a Himalayan species. f A strayalus strobiliferus LINDL. Bot. Reg. Misc. 33. 1849, =e preoccupied by the preceding may take thename of Astragains lindleyanus ait is a native of Armenia. 9. This may now take the name of Astragalus triflorus (DC.) SEI. It is a Peruvian species. ae Sheldon: SPECIES or ASTRAGALUS. 141 5 “Astragalus parishil A. Grav. Proc. Am. Acad. 19: a 75. 1883. California. Astragalus oocarpus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6213. x3 1866. Ta A. crotalariae Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 56, 1859. ee Not A. crotalariae (BENTH.) SHELD, supra, which is founded on Phaca crotalariae Bents. Pl. Hartw. 307. 1839-57. 1 Tragacantha oocarpa OK, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946. 1891. California. $11. ARANEOCARPUS. Astragalus neglectus (T. and G.) Suzi. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9:59. 1894. Phaca neglecta T. and G. Fl. 1:344. 1828. 3 Tuyugacunthæ neglecta OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 241. 1891. Not A, neglectus Fisch. in Steud. Nom. 1: 102. 1840, a name for which no specific description was ever published. * A. cooperi A. Gar. Man. Bot. Ed. 1. 98 1856. Western Quebec, Ontario, New York, and along the Great _ Lakes to Wisconsin, Iowa and northern Minnesota. q Astragalus texanus SHELD. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. . Hist. Surv. n. 9:65. 1894. giganteus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 17:370. 1882. Astragalus Not Astragalus giganteus (PALL.) Sul. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9:65. 1894. Western Texas. q 812. LanocaRPus. Astragalus lectulus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad, 22:471. 1887. ore Astragalus allanaris u. sp. Perennial, caespitose, nearly acauleséent or with very short, _ erect, simple, hidden stems, pubescent throughout with white loose hairs; leaves 3 to 4.5 cm. in length, erect, pubescent with _ sparse, spreading hairs, the rachis slightly channelled, but Bt 3. ; 8 8 n 142 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. nearly terete; leaflels 5 to 8 mm. in length, in three to five pairs, elliptical to lanceolate, acute, pubescent both sides stipules ovate-lanceolate, long-acuminate, usually closely im- bricated; peduncles 1.5 to 2 cm. in length, two-flowered; 2.5 to 2.75 cm, in length, narrow, each subtended by a black. bordered bract; calyx 12 to 15 mm. in length, tubular-cylindri- cal, oblique at base, spreading pubescent, striate, the lanceolat teeth nigrescent-margined and from one-fifth to one-fourth length of the tube; corolla purplish, tinged with green; 10 to 12 mm. in length, ovate-arcuate, acute or shortly ate pointed, incurved, coriaceous, sessile, white pub nt. unilocular, but the dorsal suture slightly impressed, few seede Ls Collected on the Rattlesnake mountain, Yakima county, Washington, June, 1884, also near Walula, Walla Walla county Washington, April, 1891, by Mr. W. N. Suksdorf. The f collection furnished the stemless and carpological characters of the description and the second the floral and short-stemmed characters. The species is near to Astragalus candelarius SHELD., but is very dwarf as compared with it and the p cence is white-woolly throughout, even to the legumes. Astragalus candelarius . sp. Perennial, erect spreading, woolly-pubescent with „ white hairs; stems 10 to 13 em in length, diffusely branching. striate, with somewhat spreading pubescence; leaves 6 to 8 © cm. in length, the rachis sulcate; leaflets 10 to 14 mm. in length. in four to five pairs, absent from the lower half of the rachis, — broadly obovate, obtuse or.retuse; stipules narrowly triangular- q acuminate, erect, persistent slightly sheathing; peduncles . equalling the leaves, loosely four to six flowered; flowers 2.5 to 3 cm. in length, slender, erect; calyx narrowly cylindrical, — becoming expanded and at length broken by the enlarging © legume, persistent, thin chartaceous, lavender-purple, sparcely — soft-pubescent, the triangular-acuminate teeth one-sixth the length of the tube; corolla ochroleucous tipped with purple—in 4 dried specimens; legume 2 to 3 cm. in length, coriaceous, pubescent with yellowish hairs, sessile, expanding the calyx, | oblong or ovate, not arcuate, completely unilocular, not obcompressed, and neither suture intruded, cavity smooth, — lined with a brownish membrane, few to many seeded. — Collected on open sand and among rocks near Candelaria. Esmeralda county, Nevada, April and May, 1888, by W. * a Shockley. ss Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 143 Astragalus. candelarius n. sp. var. exiguus u. var. Dwarfish, caespitose, with less pubescence than in the type of the species, but of the same character; stems short, procum- bent, matted, not striate, with white, close, woolly pubescence; leaves 2 to 3:5 em. in length, numerous; leaflets 4 to 6 mm. in length, narrowly obovate, in five or six pairs, absent from the lower half or two thirds of the rachis; peduncles shorter than the leaves; flowers 2 to 2.5 em. in length; calyx not colored, the teeth unequal, one-fourth the length of the tube; corolla * ochroleucous, tinged with purple; legume 2 om. in length, cavity not lined with a brownish membrane. Collected beside road to Sierra Valley, Nevada county, California, May, 1886, by C. F. Sonne; also near Candelaria, Esmeralda county, Nevada, May, 1888, by W. H. Shockley; Yreka, Siskiyou county, Cali- _ fornia, April and May, 1876, by Edward L. Greene; Mulford, Utah, June, 1880, by M. E. Jones. This species and its variety are no doubt near to Astragalus lectulus Wats, and may be regarded as a Scunaeteg link between it and Astragalus consectus SHELD. Astragalus consectus u. sp. Perennial, woolly-pubescent with long, white hairs; stems _ short, branching at the bose, woody; leaves 4 to 8 em. in length, the rachis sulcate above; leaflets 5 to 10 mm. in length. in five to eight pairs, absent from the lower half of the rachis, _ obovate to elliptical, obtuse or retuse; sfipules falcate, acumi- nate, not sheathing; peduncles exceeding the leaves, subcapi- tately six to eight flowered; flowers 2 cm. in length, narrow, spreading; calyx long-cylindrical, with equal, subulate teeth one-fourth the length of the tube; corolla cchroleucous, some- times tipped with purple; legume 2 to 2.5 cm. in length, coria- ceous., pubescent with yellowish-white hairs, sessile, ovate- _ arcuate, obcompressed, bisulcate, both sutures intruded so as to form a nearly two-celled pod, breaking at the tip when mature, cavity smooth within, few to many seeded. Collected in California, 1846, Fremont; Carson Valley, Utah, 1859, Henry Engelman; Utah, 1874. C. C. Parry; and at Tejon Pass, southern California, June, 1887, S. B. Parish. This Species is nearest to Astralagus watsonianus (OK.) SHELD., 8 it is the most nearly two-celled species of the section. The last specimen being the most perfect one yet found of this species, may be taken as the type. ” -)) 144 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. __ Astragalus watsonianus (OK). Tragacantha watseoniana OK. Rev. Geo. Pl. 2:942. 1801, A. eriocarpus Wats. Hot. King. Rep. %:71. 1871. Not A. eriocarpus DC. Astrag. 237. 1802, a species found in Persia and Caucasia. 4 A. suturalis Sul b. Hull. Minn. Geol. & Nat. Hist. u. Ur 16. 1866, Utah and Nevada. Astragalus leucolobus Jones. Zoe. 4:270. 1898, A. leucolobua Wars. in herb. California. 1 Astragalus utahensis (Torr.) T. and G. Pac R. Rep. 2120. 1855. N Phaca mollissima Torn. var. utalensis Torn. Cat. Stansb. Ex 385. 1852, Tragacantha utahensia OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:949. 1891. Utah and Nevada. Astragalus eben (PARRY) BRANDEGEE. Zoe. 2:72. 1891. = Astragalus purshii DouGL. var. coceineus Panny, West. Am. 8 6:10. 1890, A Astragalus grandiflorus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 370. 1862. q Not Astragalus grandiflorus PALL. Astrag. 57. 1800. which is a synonym of Orytropis grandiflora DC. Astrag. 1. 1802. a Siberian species. California. Astragalus . n. Sp. Perennial, caespitose. woolly-pubescent with long, fine. white hairs; stems very short, branching, forming a close ma leaves 3 to 5 em. in length, the rachis channelled; leaflets 5 to 10 mm. in length, in three to five pairs, usually absent from the lower half of the rachis, narrowly obovate to oblong, acute or obtuse; stipules triangular ovate, acuminate, sheathin 5 peduncles equalling the leaves, three to five flowered; flowers 12 to 15 mm. in length, erect; calyx narrowly cylindrical, with unequal teeth one-fifth the length of the tube; corolla ochole = cous, tipped with purple; legume 12 to 15 mm. in length, coria- ceous, white pubescent with long stiff hairs, sessile, oblong, — i . ee dy arcuate, unilocular, but with ventral suture somewhat - intruded, lined within with cobwebby hairs which traverse the cavity, few to many seeded. Collected at Klikitat Prairie, Washington, June, 1880, by Thomas J. Howell; also at Reno, Nevada. Communicated by Miss Alice Eastwood. The species is near to Astragalus _ purshii DOUGL., but the narrow leaves and peculiar pods char- acterize it. These latter resemble very closely the galls pro- duced on leaves of Quercus by Andricus lande Fron. Astragalus purshii DovGt. in Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 152. 1833. . Phaca mollissima Nur. iu T. and 6. Fl. 1: 30. 1838, Zz Tragacantha purschii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 917. 1891. N British Columbia, Montana and Wyoming to Utah, Nevada, E and eastern California. Astragalus purshii Dove. var. tinetus. Jones. Zoe. California. Astragalus purshii Do bat, var. longilobus. Jones. Zoe. 4:269. 1893. California and Nevada. Astragalus doryenioides Doug in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard. and. Bot 2:258. 1832. Washington and Idaho. The difficulty which many botanists seem to have had in determining the limits of Astragalus inflerus DOUGL. and _ Astragalus purshii DOUGL. has probably arisen from the non- consideration of this species which is intermediate between dne two. * Astragalus inflexus DouGL. in G. Don. Gen. Syst. Gard. . and Bot. 2:256. 1832. Tragacantha infexwa OK. Rey. Gen. Pl. 2: 945. 1891. N “Montana, Idaho and Washington. _ Astragalus syrticolus SHELD. Bull. Minn. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. u 9:19. 1894. Astragalus thompsonae Warts. Proc. Amer. Acad. 10:345. 1875. Tragacantha thomsonae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:948. 1891. 9 i ee * ee . 1 gis - r * 1 3 e * — „ to 145. n * 8 * i > 5 2 7 5 N 146 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. — Not Astragalus thomsonianus Buxtu. In Hook. t. & Thom. Fl. 1 1 which is a synonym of Astragalus nivalis Kar. and K Enum. Pl. Song. 341. 1542, a native of Thibet and Soong Southern Utah. Series II. EUASTRAGALUS. § 138. SERICOPHYLLUS. Astragalus glareosus Dove. in Hook. Fl. Bor. ‘Am I 152. 18383. 7 Tragacantha glareosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2 18. 1901, 4a A. argophyllus Nutt. in T. and 6. Fl. 121. 183% el. sya Wyoming and southern Idaho. ; Astragalus pephragmenus Jones. Zoe. 4: 207. “= a Arizona. 4 Astragalus triquetrus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 367. 1878. Nevada and southern Idaho. Astragalus beckwithii T. and G. Pac. R. Rep. 2:12 1855. * Tragacantha beckwithii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:943. 1801. = British Columbia. southern Idaho, Utah, Nevada and Cali- fornia. a Astragalus artemisiarum Jones. Zoe. 4:369. 1594. A. beckwithii Torr. var. purpureus Jones. Zoe. 3: 258. * Not A. purpureus Lam. Eucy. Meth. 1: 314. 1783, a synonym of A. hypoglottis LIx x. Mant. 2: 27. 1771. * Utah. Astragalus webberi A. Gray. Bot. Calif. 1: 154. Tragacantha webberi OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 949. 1891. California. Astragalus casei A. Gray. Bot. Calif. 1:154. 1880. Tragacantha casei OK. Rer. Gen. Pl. 2:943. 1891. Nevada. 147 Astragalus mokiacensis A.Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13 at 367. 1878. | Utah and northern Arizona, Astragalus ursinus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 307. 1878. q _ Astragalus lodanthus Wars. Bot King. Rep. 5:70. 1871. oe Tragacantha iodautha OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2248. 1891. A. adsurgens Tonk. Cat. Stausb Exped. 385. 1852 ay Wot A. adeurgens Pall. As trag. 40. 1800. 3 Colorado, Nevada, California and Montana. Astragalus parryi A.Gray. Am. Journ. Sei. ll. 33: 410. 1862. —s« Fragacantha parryi OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22947, 1891. * Colorado to northwestern Texas. Astragalus amphioxys A. Gray. Proc. Au. Acad. 13: q 366, 1878. Texas and Colorado to Arizona and eastern California. Astragalus cuspidocarpus . sp. _ Perennial, cinereous with minute, appressed pubescence or glabrate: stems 12 to 18 cm, in length. erect-spreading, becom- ing decumbent, terete, simple, six or ten from the knotted root; leaves 4 to S cm. in length, the rachis terete or nearly so; "leaflets 8 to 12 mm. in length. 4 to 8 mm. in breadth, in five to eight poten, obovate, oblong or nearly orbicular, retuse or -emarginate; stipules large, membranaceous, purplish-tinged, 3 abruptly short-pointed below, acuminate above, erect, 7 thing; peduneles 5 to 8 cm. in length, terete, subcapitately seven oe or flowered; flowers 15 to 20 mm. in length, erect- 1 spreading: calyx narrowly campanulate, strigose with nigres- ant hairs, the filiform teeth one-third the length of the tube; olla lemon-yellow and ochroleucous tinged with purple; le: e 2.5 to 3 em. in length, coriaceous, glabrous, reticulately veined, straight, oblong-ovate, with a long, abruptly filiform — strongly ob compressed. the sutures prominent externally, unilocular, few to many seeded Collected near Grafton, Montana, June, 1892, R. S. Williams; 1 also on dry. rocky ground near Mammoth Hot Springs in — Lh, : e nie . * 0 n 5 * a n = on 148 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 8 Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, May and June, Mr. F. H. Burglehaus. The species is near to Asire shortianus N Ur., but the absence of pubescence and carpok gical characters easily distinguish it, 4 : Astragalus shortianes Norr in T. and G. Fl 1 1838. a A. humilis Guy en, in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot 6: 211. 1% A. cyaneus A. Guay. Proc. Acad, Philad. Nl. 7:00. 1863. | Tragacantha shortiana OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2018. 1801. 1 Western Texas and New Mexico to Utah, Colorado, braska, Wyoming and southern Montana. 4 Astragalus missouriensis Nuvr. Gen 2:99, 1518. A, melanocarpus Nutt in Fras. Cat. I. 1813, without deser. Pheca evctacea BUCKLEY. Proc. Acad. Philad. u. 5: 452. 1061. Tragacantha missuriensis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 046. 1891, 4 Saskatchewan and southern Montana to Kansas, Colorado and northern New Mexico. Astragalus gilensis Greene. Ball. Torr. Bot. Club. | . 97. 1881. New Mexico. Astragalus reverchoni A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 10 . 74. 1883. 4 Phaca cretacea BUCKLEY. Proc. Acad. Philad. 11. 6: 1861. Not A. cretaceus Borss. Diag. 11. 5:84. 1853. ' an Oriental species. Texas. Astragalus eyaneus A. Gray. Pl. Fendl. 34. 1854, A. shortianus Nur. var. (?) minor A.GRAY. Proc. Am. Acad € 5 211. 1866. * A. shortianus WATS. Pl. Wheeler Exped. 7. 1878. Tragacantha cyanea OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. New Mexico and western Texas to Nebraska and Colc Astragalus crescenticarpus n. sp. Annual, pubescent throughout with appressed, white, ve: cose hairs; stems short, 2 to 3 cm. in length, erect or proct Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 149 bent, nearly terete, simple, three to four from a straight. slen- der root; leaves 4 to 5 cm. in length, the rachis slightly striate or rectangular; leaflets 8 to 10 mm. in four to six pairs, obovate or oblong-lanceolate, abruptly pointed; stipules deltoid-acumi- nate, erect; peduncles 3 to 5 em. in length, subcapitately four to six flowered; flowers 2 to 2.5 cm. in length, narrow, erect- spreading; calya cylindricai, unequal and slightly gibbous at the base, the linear teeth one-fourth the length of the tube; corolla ochroleucous, tipped with purple; legume 4 to 5 cm. in length, coriaceous, appressed pubescent, narrowly crescenti- _ form, incurved, transversely rugulose, compressed, the dorsal suture intruded so as to make the cross-section V-shaped, few seeded. Collected on sandy plains north of sulphur springs, New Mexico, June, 1883, by G. R. Vasey, and near Winslow, Arizona, June, 1892, by Professor E. O. Wooton. This species is remarkable in its verrucose hairs, which are easily noticable by the naked eye, and in the crescent-shaped pods, which are Astragalus pubentissimus T. and G. if Astragalus pubentissimus T. and G. Fl. 1663. 1540. A. multicaulis Nutrr.in T. and G. Fl. 1283. 1838. gi Not A. multicaulis Lepes, FI. Alt. 3:295. 1831, a Siberian species. 1 Tragacantha pubentissima OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2,7. 1891. 1 Astragalus cibarius . sp. _ Perennial, sparsely pubescent or glabrate; stems 1.5 to 2.25 dm. in length decumbent or erect-spreading, thick, simple. striate, minutely rough-pubescent or glabrate; leaves 6 to 9 em. in length, the rachis channelled; leaflets 5 to 10 mm. in length. in five to eight pairs, obovate oblong to orbicular. _. obtuse or retuse; stipules large, subfoliaceous, ovate, obtuse or acute ciliate, purplish tinged, erect, persistent; peduncles 8 to 11 em. in length, terete, capitately or subcapitately, eight to twelve flowered; flowers 12 to 15 mm. in length, nearly erect, - calyx oblong-campanulate, oblique at the base, black-strigose _ pubescent, the narrow, acuminate teeth one-third the length ot the tube or shorter; corolla ochroleucous and purple; legume . 2.5 to 3.5 cm. in length, coriaceous, narrowly oblong, arcuate when young, becoming straighter when old, pointed at both ends, finely appressed pubescent when young, becoming So strongly incurved as to nearly meet at the tips. Nearest to + ity. a 150 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. glabrous and transversely rugose-veined when old, uniloc but the ventral suture strongly introflexed so as to make t cavity two-lobed, eight to ten seeded. a Collected in the Utah valley, Utah, May, 1880, by M. 6 : Jones; also west side of Johnston Pass, south fork of Hum. boldt river and Great Desert, Utah, May. 1889, by Engelmann, and in gravelly bottoms, Gros Ventres fork, Jackson's Hole, valley of Snake river, Wyoming, June, by F. V. Hayden. This species is most nearly related to Astragalus veaperti SHELD., but the habit most nearly resembles that of Astraga amphiowys A. GRay. Astragalus vespertinus n. ep. Perennial, subcaespitose, white-appressed pubescent through. out with appressed, dolabraform hairs: sfems 4 to 6 em. it length, several from the branching base, decumbent or sub- erect, striate; leaves 2 to 10 om. in length, the rachis chant leaflets 4 to 12 mm. in length, in five or six pairs, ot oblong, obtuse; stipules deltoid-falcate, acute, erect, 7 sheathing below; peduncles 5 to 12 cm. in length, 2 N subcapitately three to six flowered; flowers 2.5 to 3.5 cm. in length, slender, loosely spreading; calyx cylindrical, pink tinged, subtended by a large acuminate bract, the erect linear-acuminate, one-fifth the length of the tube; corolla : row, large, purplish tinged with magenta or green, the ban prominently notched; legume 2.5 to 3 cm. in length, ec 20us, oblong, pointed at both ends, obcompressed so as to become nearly two-celled, minutely appressed pubescent, finely reticu- lated, bilocular by the obcompression, the cavities with leone membranaceous tissue, eight to ten seeded. Collected near Grand Junction, Colorado, May, 1803, by 7 Miss Alice Eastwood. raf This species has been referred to Astragalus 1 Gray. which it resembles in habit. The legumes, boweve mark it as a distinct species intermediate between Astragal . us pubentissimus T. and G. and Astragalus pterocarpus Wass: -3 a § 14. ScurTICARPUS. a Astragalus pterocarpus Wats. Bot. King. Rep. a: 1871. Tragacantha pterocarpa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 1891. Nevada. 3 * R 25 5 Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 151 Astragalus tetrapterus Ar Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13 369. 1878. § 15. LoTIrLorus. R Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. u. 9:20. 1894. 4 A. lotiflorus Hook. forma brackypus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. Colorado and Wyoming to Texas, Minnesota and Hudson bay. The large number of specimens of this species in the her- “barium of the Missouri Botanical Garden, collected through a lon series of years show very clearly the characters upon 8 separated from Astragalus lotiflorus, br. William Trelease has recently referred to me acard from „B. F. Bush, of Independence, Mo,, dated April 20, 1994, n which the writer states that in a recent visit to Atchison unty, Mo., he noticed that in this species the early flowers are long-peduncled and fruitless,” while the later ones are very short peduncled and fertile.” Astragalus lotiflorus Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1:152. 1833. 5 Phaca lotifora NVrr in T. and G. Fl. 1:3 1838. ‘ A. lotiferus Hook. forma pedunculosus A. Guay. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 209. 1838. Tragacantha lotifora OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946 1891. _ Saskatchewan and British Columbia to Minnesota, Dakota, ming, Nebraska, Kansas, Indian Territory and Texas. 1 * | Astragalus tatonsns Sg, Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. . Fi. Bor - Am. 2:67. 1803. ot Astragalus villosus GUELDENST. It. 2: 187. 1791. _ . Traygacantha villosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:949. 1891, of Astragalus pubiflorus DC. Astrag. 183. 1802, a species. : da to South Carolina. Se 152 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. $16. Orenorpevs. Astragalus apilosus Suecpo. Ball. Minn. Geol. and S Hist. Surv. u. 9:19. 1804, = Astragalus glaber Micux. Fi, Bor. Am. 2:66, 1803, Not Astragalus glaber Lam. Ency. Meth. 1233. 1783. a synonym of Orytropis glabra DO. Astrag. 95. 1802, a Siber lan plant. Not Astragalus glaber DC. Astrag. 118, 1802, which is a synonym of Astragalus fragrans WILLD. Sp. P %:1294. 1808. a native of the Orient. | Tragacantha mechaurii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 941, 1801. Not A. michauxvianus Bows, Diag. 1. 2: 62. 1843, a species found in Kurdistan. Florida to North Carolina. Astragalus obcordatus Ext. Sk. Bot. S. Car. 2:227 1824. 1 A, elhottii Durr. Syn. PI. 4: 1080. 1850. obcordata OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:046. 1801. Not A. obcordatus Rows. Diagn. 1. 6:38, 1856. which is a synonym of | A. anacardius Bw Syn. Ae Geront. 2: 106. 1868, a Persian species. Georgia and Florida. Astragalus palaus Jones. Zoe. 4:37. 1893. Utah. Astragalus engelmanni n. sp. A. flagellaris ENGLM. in herb. Perennial, glabrous throughout; stems S to 30 cm. in diffusely procumbent, terete, branching at the base; leaves 3 t 6 cm. in length, the rachis finely channelled above; /eajlets 3 te 7 mm.in length, in seven to eleven pairs, ovate to oblong, obtuse or retuse; stipules triangular-lanceolate, connate b peduncles slender, twice or three times exceeding the leave subcapitately four to eight flowered; flowers 8 to 10 mm. } length, erect-spreading; calyx short-cylindrical, unsymmet at the base, finely pubescent with short, appressed, hairs, teeth short-triangular, spreading; corolla ochroleucous t : - spectes O ASTRAGALUS. 153 le aoe vith 3 PW glab- 4 rous, sessile, incurved, both sutures intruded, unilocular, few to many seeded, cavity webby. Collected on the Brazos, Texas, April, 1839, February, 1844. Also in open woods near Houston, Texas, March. 1842, by Ferdinand Lindheimer. Near to A. distortus T. and G., but the plant has a more reclining or procumbent posture. I take pleasure in dedicating this species to Dr. George Enge!mann, whose collections of Astragalus I have been permitted to study, and who, while he left no manuscript description of the species, _ evidently recognized it as new, for he marked it A. #agellaris n. sp.“ Type specimen in the herbarium of the Missouri“ Botanical Astragalus distortus T. and G. Fl. 1: 333. 1838. Teragacantha distorta OK. Rev. Gen. Pi, 2:944, 1891. Illinois, Missouri, Arkansas, Indian Territory and Texas. Astragalus sileranus Jones. Zoe. 2:243. 1891. Utah. Astragalus lindheimeri Exam, in A.Gray. Pl. Wr. I: 7 52. 1852. 4 Tragacantha tindheimeri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:96. 1891. ; ) s _ Astragalus lentiformis A. Gray. Bot) Calif. 1: 156. 1880, 4 _ Tragacantha lentiformisOK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 848. 1891. 5 California and Nevada. 2 _ Astragalus lemmoni A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. S: 626. . 1873. 5 * Trugacantha lemmoni OK. Rev. Geb. 2: 948. 1891. California. Astragalus breweri A. Gray. Proc. Am Acad. 6 207. 1866. Tragacantha breweri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:943. 1891. a ve a ae Re * a oe oe 2 * * ide ty 2 8 2 2 * an N etx i ; os ee e ; 4 „ F n Ge hes * 2 154 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ‘ Astragalus sparsifiorus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. ¢ 205. 1866. * Tragacantha sparsifiora OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. Bt 046, 1801. Colorado, Astragalus sparsifiorus A. Gray, var. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 6:206. 1866. A. sparsiflorus n. sp. var. major A. Guay. Proc. Acad. 1. 7:00, 1863. 1 Not A. enbulatus Brus. var. major DC. Prodr. 2: 284. 1805. og Astragalus giganteus (PAL) Suecp. Bull. Minn. Geol, and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:65. 1804. Astragalus alpinus Lx x. var. gigantews PALL. Astrag. 42. 2000. Newfoundland, Maine and northern Vermont; Colorado, Wyoming: Montana and north to Hudson bay, British Colam- bia and Alaska. 4 Astragalus astragalinus (DC.) Suetp. Bull. Minn. — a and Nat Hist. Surv. n. 9:65. 1894. Phaca astragalina DC. Astrag. 64. 1802. Astragalus alpinus Linn. Spec. 760. 1753. A. alpinus PALL Reise 2:446. 1771-76. Tragacantha alpina OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:942. 1891. Not A. alpinus (Lrixw.) Suetp. Ball. Mino. Geol. and Nat. Mist. Surv. u. 9:65. 1894. ae A. montanus PAL. Reise 2: 568, 1771-76, s 2 . montanys JAcd. Fl. Austr. 3: 131. 1778. 1 Not A. montanus Linn. Spec. 760. 1753. Colorado and Labrador. Astragalus elegans (HooK.) Phaca elegans Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 144. 1833. Not A. elegans BUNGE. Sp. Astrag. Geront. 2:89. 1889. Phaca parvifora Nutr. in T. and G. Fl. 1: 348. 1838. | A. oroboides HuRNEM. var. americanus A. GRAY. Proc. Am. | Acad. 6: 205. 1866. Not A. alpinus (L) SHELD. var. americanus (HOOK.) SHELD. infra, which is based on Phaca frigida L. var. americanus Hook. FL Bor.-Am. 1:140. 1833. Labrador, western British America, and south to the Re mountains. 10. This species may be designated as Astragalus tabrisianus n. . - Sheldon: SPECIES OP ASTRAGALUS. 155 N ibapensis Jones. Zoe. 3:290. 1893. - Utah. Astragalus robbinsii (Oakes) A. Gray. Man. Bot. ed. II. 98. 1856. é Phaca robbinsii Oakes in A. Gray. Man. Bot. ed. I. 108. 1848. A. robbinsii (Oakes) A. Guay. var. occidentalis Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:70. 1871. . Tragacantha robbinsii OK. Rey. Gen. Pi. 27648. 1891. Perennial, many.stemmed from a fibrous, knotty root, _ minutely, sparsely pubescent, becoming glabrate; sfem 2 to 5 dm,, high, erect, simple, nearly terete, twisted striate; leaves _ 4to5cm. in length; leosets 9 to 13 mm. in length, in four to * six pairs, oblong oval, obtuse or rarely slightly retuse, glab- rous above, nearly pubescent beneath with white, appressed hairs when young, becoming nearly glabrous: stipules erect, - connate below, but ovate-acuminate above; peduncles 9 to 20cm. iu length, slender, terete or very finely striate, bearing a sub- _ spicate raceme; flowers 6 mm. in length, short-pedicellate; ca/yx eampanulate, slightly puberulent, but not nigrescent except the linear teeth which are one-fifth the length of the tube; corolla white; legume 14 to 18 mm. in length, oblong, dorsally straight, ventrally arcuate, born on a stipe equalling the calyx, _ minutely pubescent with appressed, nigrescent hairs, broadly _ reticulate-veined, becoming diaphanous, unilocular, the dorsal _ Suture projecting into the cavity as a thin membrane, 4-to 6 1 4 Vermont and Colorado. 3 Astragalus robbinsii (Oakes) A. Gray. var. jesupi a EGGLESTON and SHELDON. 1 Perennial. many stemmed from a fibrous, knotty root, nearly lat ; stem 3 to 6 dm., high, less spreading than typical specimens of the species; leaves 4 to 8 cm. in length; leaflets 5- 22 mm. in length, in five to eight pairs, oblong, oval or lance- ee, obtuse or slightly retuse, glabrous above, puberulent below with midrib and sometimes margin slightly hairy; stip- ules deflexed; peduncles 8 to 25 em. in length, bearing a subcap- itate raceme; flowers 10 mm. in length; corolla dark purple; 18 to 25 mm. in length, oblong, elongated, slightly ent, strongly nigrescent when young, becoming nearly e, Six to ten seeded. 156 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. | Collected on old ledges above high water of the Connectict river near Hartland, Vt., July, 1891, and on ledges near Sum- ner's Falls, near Plainfield, N. H., August, 1893, by W. W. Huntington, and at Hartland, Vt., by H. G. Jesup and G. Leland. Also near Fort Fairfield, Aroostook county, ne, July, 1898, by M. L. Fernald, at least as to specimen in He 8 Mo. Bot. Garden; and on the Winooski river, near Burlingte Vit., June, 1878, by C. G. Pringle. a The type specimens were collected by Mr. Eggleston, who has aided me much in the study of this and other in ing Vermont Astragali. The variety is named for Professor H. G. Jesup of Hanover, 4 Mass. Astragalus dodgianus JONES. Zoe. 3:289. 1893. Utah. Astragalus glabriusculus (Hook.) A.Gray. Proc. Am * Acad. 6: 204. 1866. Phaca glabriuscula Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 144. 1833, Tragacantha glabriuscula OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22 uf. 1891. Colorado and western British America. a Astragalus glabriusculus Hook.) A. Gray var. ve. 7 sus n. n. 8 A. glabriusculus (Hook.] A. is oak var. major A. Gmay. N Acad. Philad. u. 7: 60 1863. Not A. subulatus Buen. var. major DC. Prodr. 2284. 1825. Colorado. Astragalus Nane RICHARDS in Frankl. Journ. 736. 1823. 1 Phaca aboriginem Hoox. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 143. 1833. Tragacantha aborwinorum OK. Rey. Gen. Pl. 2: 912. 1891. ‘ Colorado, Wyoming and Montana, northward in central and western British America. 4 $17. RuGocaRPws. Astragalus microlobus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. or 203. 1866. 2 A. gracilis JAMEs. in Am. Phil. Soc. Trans. 2: 186. 1825. Not A. gracilis Nutr. Gen. 2: 100. 1818. Tragacantha microloba OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946. 1891. Missouri, Kansas, Nebraska and Colorado. : ee = . 3 7 (PS Cs, ee 4 3 1 f ae SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 157 3 gracilis Nutr. Gen. 2: 100. 1818. Dalea parviflora Pursu. Fl. Am. Sept. 474. 1814. Psoralea parvifora Porn. Suppl. 4: 50. 1816. Phaca parvifora N rr. in T. and 6. Fl. 1:38. 1838. n Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:941. 1891. A, parviflorus MACM, Metasp. Minu. Val. 325. 1892. ; ee Euey. Meth 1:310. 1783. Colorado to Kansas, Nebraska, Missouri and Minnesota. § 18. OcREATUS. __ Astragalus oreganus Nurr. in T. and G. Fl. 1:335. q 1838, Western slope of the Rocky mountains. Astragalus den bens SHELD. Bull Minn. Geol. and % Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. ae Astragalus procumbens Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20;361. 1885. Not Astragalus procumbens Hook. and ARN. Bot. Beech. Voy. 18. 1830.1 Not Astragalus procumbens MILI. Gard. Diet. Ed. 8. No. 18. 1768. K ien is a synonym of Astragalus pentaglotlis Linn. Mant. 247. 1767, a native of southern Europe and northern Africa. Astragalus mohavensis Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20: 361. Astragalus humistratus A. Gray. Pl. Wr. 2:43. 1853. Tragacantha humistrata OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 945, 1891. Ver Mexico and Arizona. 3 Astragalus argillosus Jones. Zoe. 2:241. 1891. Vieh. 3 confertiflorus A.Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 368. 1878. A. flavus Nutr. var. candicans A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 13. 3 54. 1878. * Fot 4. candicans PALL. Astrag. 61. 1800, whi h is a synonym of Spiesia candicans (PALL.) OK. Savi Ge are 206. 1891. . This may receive the specific name Astragalus chilensis n ee oe ee a 158 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, — Astragalus flaviflorus (OK.) Tragacantha flaviflora OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 4: 041. 1891. A. Huvus NUrr. in T. and G. Fl. 1: 335, 1838, Not A. flavus H. and A.) Sueip. ined.“ “ Colorado and western Wyoming. — sq $19. GALEGIFORMIS. Astragalus racemosus Purse. FL Amer. — 740 1814, ; A. galegioides Nutr. Gen. 2: 100. 1818. Tragacantha racemosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 047, 1801. * Kansas, Nebraska, Colorado, Utah, Idaho and the North west Territory. Astragalus atropubescens Covirer and Fisner. F&F Gaz. 18:300. 1893. Montana. f Astragalus misellus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 21:4 „ 1886. Astragalus howelli A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 15:4 ; 1880. P. ' _ Astragalus scopulorum PorTer and Courter. Syn. Fl. ' Colo. 24. 1874. a A. subcompressus A. GRAY in Brandegee. Fl. S. W. Colo. 2 1876. Tragacantha scopulorum OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 648. 1891. Tragacantha subcompressa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:948. 1891. Colorado. Astragalus rasus n. sp. Perennial, glabrous throughout, or very slightly pubescent on the young leaves and stems; stems 3 to 4.5 dm. high, erect, simple or once or twice branching, striate, often purplish — tinged; leaves 4 to 7 cm. in length, the rachis slightly chan- nelled; leaſtets 7 to 10 mm. in length, in ten to thirteen pairs, 12. The synonymy of this species will be: Astragalus flavus (H.and A.) Phaca fava H. and A. in Hook. Bot. Misc. 3: 186. 1833. Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 159 _ obovate oblong, obtuse or retuse, subcarnose; stipules counate and membranaceous below, free, reflexed, obovate-acuminate and persistent above; peduncles 8 to 12 cm. in length, striate, smooth, subcapitately ten or twelve flowered; flowers 10 to 15 mm. in length, spreading, becoming reflexed; calyr narrowly 7 eee to cylindrical, slightly unequal at the base, the spreading, filiform teeth one-fourth to one-third the length of the tube; corolla ochroleucous, slightly tinged with green; legume 4 2.5 to 3.5 em. in length, including the stipe which is 6 to 7 mm. in length, coriaceous, oblong, straight or very slightly curved, _ glabrous, rarely mottled, very finely transversely veined, _ bilocular by the intrusion of the ventral suture, trigonal or „ flattened and sulcate dorsally, eight to twelve seeded. Collected near Durango, Colo., June, 1891. by Miss Alice x “Bastwood, also on the Mesa Verde, southeast Colo., June, 1892, by Miss Alice Eastwood; and at Grand Junction, Colo., June, 1893. by De Alton Saunders. This species is nearest to Astragalus drummondii DOUGL., and Astragalus scopulorum PorTerR and CovuLtTer, but is readily distinguished by the absence of pubescence. a Astragalus drummondii Dovuct. in Hook. Fi. Bor. Am. ¥ . I: 153. 1833. a Tragacantha drummondii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. Colorado, Wyoming and Montana; north to the Saskatchewan i the Northwest Territory. § 20. SUCCUMBENS. Astragalus succumbens DouGL. in Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1:151. 1833. Trͤrragacantha succumbens DK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948. 1891 Oregon. 8 § 21. ASCLEPIADODES. D Astrageles asclepladeldes Jour. Zoe. 2:239. 1891. ve and Colorado. § 22. EREMITICUS. 4 “Astragalus diphacus Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 343. .. 1.0883. ae * „ my — N ua * * * rae K a = | ith yg ö . ee * 5 5 160 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. Astragalus strigosus (KeLLoce) Suso. Bull. M Geol, & Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1804. a Astrogalus hypoglottia Linn. var. strigua Keitooe, Proce. C Acad, 1. 2: 115, 1863 Astragalus tener A. Guay. Proce. Am, Acad 6:3. 1868. Tragacantha tenera OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22044. 1891. California, Astragalus obseurus Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:60. | 5 Tragacantha obseyra OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2 646. 1601. | Nevada and California. Astragalus panamintensis Suey. Contrib. Nat E 4:87. 1808. California. Astragalus recurvus Greene. Bull. Calif. Acad Sei, I ö n. 3. 155. 1885. N Arizona. Astragalus atratus Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5:09. 1871. Tragacantha atrata OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22643. 1801. Nevada and California. > Astragalus atratus Wats. var. aretus u. . a A. atratus WATS. var. stenophyllus JONES. Zoe. 3: 297. 1803. Nevada. ; Astragalus pachypus Greene. Bull. Calif. Acad. Sei. 1 ( 3. 157. 1885. 3 California. Astragalus umbraticus Suzrlp. Bull. Minn. Geol. an Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1894. Astragalus sylvaticus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 20:362. 1885. a Not Astragalus sylvaticus WILLD. Sp. Pl. 3: 1300. 1803, a which is a synonym of Orytropis sylvatica DC. 9 82. 1802, a Siberian species. ee Oregon. Astragalus tricarinatus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 56. 1877. ahr ae. California. 161 Fe eremiticus n. sp. ene glabrous throughout; stems 2 to à dm. high, erect, strict, solitary, simple, terete, purplish tinged, smooth and shining; leaves 6 to 12 cm. in length, the rachis nearly _ terete; leaflets 10 to 12 mm. in length, in six to nine pairs, oblong - lanceolate, with a cuneate base, obtuse; stipules ovate, obtuse or acute, small and deciduous, the lower large, sub- foliaceous, sheathing, persistent; peduncles 12 to 15 cm. in length, striate, loosely five to ten flowered; flowers 13 to 15 . in length, erect; calyx narrowly campanulate, slightly : t with short, black, appressed hairs, with short, black. filiform incurved teeth; corolla ochroleucous, the banner narrow and prominently spreading; legume 3 em. in length, in- . filiform stipe which is 1.5 cm. in length. cc 20us, body of the legume oblong, with a filiform, in- ¢ i tip, geniculate at the point of juncture, with the stipe, gi minutely cross-reticulated, unilocular, but with the ventral suture intruded so as to make the cross section Y . Collected in the Beaverdam mountains, southern Utah. May. 874, by Dr. C. C. Parry; also near Sprucemont, Nevada, July, 391, by M. E. Jones. itis — soar to Astragalus arrectus A. GRAY. 5 the Mis- uri Botanical Garden. - Astragalus arrectus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. §:289. FR 1873. 4 A. leucophyllus Hoox. Lond. Journ. Bot. @:211. 1873. * Astragalus brandegei PorTer and Coutter. Fl. Colo. 24. 1874. Tragacantha brandegei OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. Astragalus drepanolobus . Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 2 75. 1883. trage, bolanderi A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 337. N 1868. Tuugacanthd bolanderi OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 643. 1801. ee 162 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 Astragalus malacus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Aead. a8 1868, A. parryi ANDEnsON. Cat. Pl. Nev, 120. 1871, Tragacantha malaca OK. Rev. Gen. Pi, 2:046. 1801. California and Nevada. Astragalus congdoni Wars. Proc, Am. Acad. 20: 00 1885. California. 4 Astragalus andersonii A. Gray. Proc. Am. 2 524. 1800. 9 Tragacantha andersonti OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 64. 16. Nevada and California. Astragalus orcuttianus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 0 861. 1885. Lower California. 4 7 Astragalus rusbyi Greene. Bull. Calif. Acad. Sci. u. 1 8. 1884. = Arizona. = Astragalus arizonicus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 898. 1868. 1 A. sonore Torr. Bot. U. S. and Mex. Bound. 56. 1888. Tragacantha arizonica OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:43. 1891. Arizona. Astragalus leptocarpus T. and G. Fl. 1:334. 1838. Tragacantha leptocarpa OK, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:946. 1891. Texas. Astragalus streptopus GREENE. Bull. Calif. Acad. § 1: n. 3.155. 1885. California. Astragalus nuttallianus DC. Prod. 2: 289. 1825. A. micranthus Nutr. Journ. Acad. Philad. 3: 122. 1821. Tragacantha micrantha OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:941. 1891. Not A. micranthus DESV. Journ. de Botanique 3:78. 1814. A. nuttallianus DC. var. trichocarpus T. and G. Fl. 1: 334. A. trichocarpus TON. Fl. Tex. 228. 1873. N — A. nuttallianus DC. var. canescens T. and G. Pac. R. Rep. 2: 163. 1855. ree Arkansas and Texas to Arizona and southern California. — e. 0 163 1 wrightii A. Gray in Engilm. and Gray. Pl. Lindh, 176. 1850. a Tragacantha wrightii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 949 1891. Astragalus albens Greene. Bull. Calif. Acad. Sci..1: „ n. 3.156. 1885. Calitornia 4 Astragalus daleae Greene. Pitt. 1: 153. 1888. Mexico. „ Astragalus hypoxylus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 18; 192. a 1883. 4 Astragalus cobrensis A. Gray. PL Wright 2:43. 1853. . Tragacantha cobrensis K. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:944. 1891. New Mexico. Astragalus 3 Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 21: 449. 1886. Mexico. Astragalus hartwegi Benrs. Pl. Hartw. 10. 1839. Tragacantha hartwegit OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. ona and Mexico. ; Astragalus vacearum A. Gray. Pl. Wright 2:43. 1553. Tragacantha vaccarum OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 919. 1891. § 23. DISPERMUS. | Astragalus eatalinensis Nürr. Pl Gamb. 152. 1548. des of Catalina, upper Califoraia, also at Tehachapi, Cal- “Astragalus brazoensis Buckuey. Proc. Acad. Philad. II. | 52452. 1861. 5 Tragacantha brazeensis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:913. 1891. 7 * 8 N * 8 : b Astragalus dispermus A. Gray. Proce, Am. Acad. 1 304. 1878. : . 1 3 California and Arizona. J a Astragalus gambellianus Sun, Bull. Minn. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. n. 9:19. 1804. = Astragalus nigrescens Nevr. Pi. Gambell. 182, 1848. Not Astragalus nigrescens Paty. Astrag. . 1900, a synonym of Orytropis nigrescens DC. Prod. 2:278, which is a Siberian species. : Not Astragalus nigrescens A. Gay. Am. Journ. Sel, u. BB: 410 Nor Phaca nigrescens Hook. Fi, BorAm. 1: 143, 1853, which are synonyms of Astragalus mulliflorus A. GAV. Am. Acad. 6; 226. 1866, which was fouuded on Errum forum Porsu. Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 789. 1814. * Professor E. L. Greene has pointed out very clearly ! * difference between this species and Astragalus d Hook. and Ax. = California. Astragalus n Hook. and Arn. Bot. E 534. ag ea MBB Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:044. 1801. California. § 24. REFLEXUS. Astragalus reflexus T. and G. Fl. 1:84. 1838. Tragacantha refexa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 1891. Texas. $25. HYPOGLOTTIDENS. Astragalus ventorum A. Gray. Am. Nat. 8: 212. 1874 a Tragacantha ventorum OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:949. 1891. Western Wyoming. Astragalus terminalis Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 1 ¢ 70. 1882. ; Montana. 13. Greene. Flora Franciscana 1:7. 1891. 165 Astragalus laxmanni Jacq. Hort. Vindob. 3:22. 1776. A. adsurgens PALL. Astrag. 40. 1800. A. syriacus PALL. Reise. 2:559. 1771. pee ee lave. Spec. 759. 1753. A. semibilocularis DC. Astrag. 136. 1802. 55 A. adsurgens PALL. var. prostratus Fiscu. Hort. Gar. ex. DO Prod. 1 2127. 1825. A. microphyllus GOL. Beschr. Russ. Nachtr. 296. 1802. = A. larmanmi Nurr. Gen. 2:9. 1818, A, striatus Nurr.in T. and G. Fl. N. Am. 1:330. 1838, A. adsurgens PALL. var. lazmauntd Travutv. in Bull. Mosq. 1: 507. 1860. A. hypoglottis LIxN. var. robustus Hock. in Lond. Journ. Bot. 6. 210. 1854, Tragacantha adsurgens OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2:12. 1891, Minnesota and the Saskatchewan to British Columbia and Washington. south to Oregon and western Kansas. . Astragalus hypoglottis Lixx. Mant. 2274. 1771. ; A. glauz PALL. Reise. 2: 464. 1771. A. arenarius Patt. Reise. 2: 464. 1771. A. agrestis Dovet. in G. Don. Gen. Syst.Gard. and Bot. 2: 257. 1832. A, goniatus Nutr. in T. aod 6. Fl. N. Am. 2; 330. 1838, Tragacantha hypoglottis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 22648. 1891. Hudson bay to Alaska, south in the United States from — — and Montana to Minnesota, Nebraska and southern Colorado. Astragalus virgultulus u. sp. - Perennial, bushy, branching from the base, nearly glabrous; stems 15 to 20 cm. in length, erect, forming a somewhat dense, _ obconical bush, white at the top, 13-18 em. broad, striate. angled; leaves 5 to 6 om. in length, rachig trisulcate; lea/lets 5 to 8 mm. in length, in seven to nine pairs, oblong-lanceolate, _ obtuse or acute, smooth above, but with scattered, appressed hairs beneath; stipules foliaceous, oblong lanceolate from a deltoid clasping base: peduncles striate, not thicker than the _ stems, abruptly capitate; flowers 10 to 15 mm. in length, erect; short-campanulate, the tube slightly pubescent with “white hairs, the linear teeth equalling in length the tube and plack- pubescent; corolla ochroleucous, tipped with purple; _ legume 10 to 12 mm. in length, elliptic-ovate, strigulose pubes- cent with white, spreading hairs, concave dorsally, bilocular, four to eight seeded. via 166 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. = Collected on the plains near Boulder, Colorado, H. N. > terson, July, 1892. This species has been referred to Astrag lus hypoglotlis LIx x., but the bushy habit and strigulose, d. 0 sally concave legume are distinctive. 7 § 26. UtaaixosUs. Ss Astragalus apertus „. . A. ervoides H. and A. Bot, Beechey. 417. 1841. Tragacantha ervedes OK. Rev. Gen. Pl, 2:044. 1801, Not A. ervoides Tu ncz. in Ball. Soc. Nat. Mose, 00. 1438, Pr A. hookerianus Dir. Syn. Pl. 4: 1086, 1800. & Not A. hookerianus (T. and G.) A. Guay, Pree. Am. Acad. 62 216, 1866, a Mexico. Astragalus mortoni Nutr. Journ. Acad. Philad. 7210 1834. A. tristis Nutr io T. aud 6. Fl. 1:2. 1838, A, spicatua NUrr. ia T. and G. Fl. 1:3. 1838, 7 A. canadensis L. var. mortoni Wats. Rot. King Rep. 5:68 Tragacantha mortont OK. Rev. Gen. PL 2:16. 1891. Wyoming, Montana, Idaho and Washington; south to Ute b and Nevada. _ ‘_ 9 Astragalus accidens Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 22: 471 1 1887. Lag Oregon. 14 Astragalus earolinianus Lixx. Spec. 757. n. 9. 1753. A. eanadensis LINN. 756. n. 10. 1783. J Tragacantha cangdensis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 1:210. 1891. 8 Quebec, Ontario, Hudson bay and Rocky mountains, to New York, Georgia and Florida; west to the headwaters of t e Columbia river and the Saskatchewan; south in the mountains to the Great Basin region; through Colorado, Minnesota, Ne- braska, Kansas and Arkansas. 1 8 27. MOLLIsSSIMUS. Astragalus anisus Jones. Zoe. 4:34. 1893. Colorado. a Oe ee A ee „ eee ee es ee ee 4 oe. * ey es . r é ae oy : 4 le. Sheldon: SPECIES Oo ASTRAGALUS. 167 Astragalus layneae Greene, Bull. Calif. Acad. I: u. 3. i 156. 1885. California. Astragalus yaquinus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 23: 270. . 1888. Mexico. Astragalus orizabae Seaton. Proc. Am. Acad. 282117. Es 1893. = Astragalus humboldtii A. Gaay. in Proc. Am. Acad. 6: x 195. 1864, Phaca mollis H. B. K. Nov. Gen. et. Sp. G: 468. 1823. Tragacantha mollis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 641. 1891. Not A. mollis Bren, Fl. Taur. 3: 495. 1819, a Persian species. Astragalus orthanthus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 195. 1866, . _ Tragacantha orthantha OK. Rev. Gen, Pl. 2: 847. 1891, _ Astragalus mogollonieus Greene. Bull. Torr. Bot. : Club 8:97. 1881. 3 New Mexico. 7 Astragalus bigelovii A. Gray. Pl. Wr. 2:42. 1853. Tragucantha bigelowii OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 943. 1891. Colorado Kansas, Texas and New Mexico. = Astragalus matthewsii Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 18:192. | 1883. ~~ | Astragalus moltissimus ‘Tous Ann. Lye. N. v. 1828. Phaca villosa Jawes. Am. Phil. Soc Trans. 2: 188. 1823. Not A. villosus GueLpENST. It. 2: 187. 1791, a synonym of Astragalus pubiflorus DC. Astrag. 183. 1802. a species. Tragacantha mollissima OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:946. 1891. lo to Nebraska, Kansas and western Texas. Femme ̃ T 168 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES, $25. CHAEBTODONTUS. Astragalus seaposus A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. If 380. 1878. 1 A. candicans Gueene. Bull, Calif. Acad. Scl. I u. 4 166. A. calycosus Tonk. var. scaposus Jones. Zoe. 4 . 1893. Utah and Arizona, Astragalus calycosus Wats. Bot, King. Rep 5:66. . N Tragacantha calycosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2 648. 1801. 5 Utah, Nevada and California. - Astragalus austinw A. Gray. Bot, Calif. 1: 156. Tragacantha austinae OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2 943, 1891. California. * Astragalus lyallii A. Gray. Proc Am. Acad. 6:1 95 1866. Tragacantha lyallii OK. Rev. Gen. Pi. 2: 046, 1891. British Columbia and Washington. Astragalus spaldingii A. Gray. Pros. Am. Acad. 6:55 1866. A. chaetodon Tonk. lu A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 194. 1808. Not A. chaetodom BUNdE in Mem. Sav. Extr. Acad. Petersb. 8. 1851, 4 a species found in Turkestan. Tragacantha spaldingii OK. Rev. Gen: Pl. 2: 648. 1891. Idaho and Washington. § 29. LENTIGINOSUS. a Astragalus platytropis A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. | 526. 1866. + Tragacantha platytropis OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:947. 18. California and Nevada. Astragalus diaphanus DovuGL. in Hook. FL Bor. 1:151. 1833. Washington. Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 169 Astragalus salinus Howztu. Erythea. 1:111. 1893. Oregon and Washington. Astragalus latus Jones. Zoe. 4:272. 1893. A. diphysus A. Gray, var. latus, Jones. Zoe. 3: 287, 1893. Nevada. . Astragalus bajaensis n. sp. _ Perennial, glabrous throughout or slightly puberulent; slems 3 to 5 dm. in length, decumbent or semi-erect and supported, _ striate, rarely very slightly soft-pubescent with soft hairs, - diffusely branching: leaves 7 to 10 cm. in length, the rachis _ sulcate; leaflets 8 to 15 mm. in length, in fourteen or fifteen pairs, narrowly obovate-oblong, emarginate; stipules small, _ deltoid acuminate, reflexed; peduncles small. 3 cm. in length, _ slender, subcapitately four to six flowered; flowers small. 6 to 7 mm. in length, suberect; calyx narrowly campanulate, the _ teeth nearly one-half the length of the tube; corolla ochroleucous ; legume 8 to 10 mm. in length, membranaceous, glabrous, ovate with along, filiform tip, straight or slightly incurved, * * sutures meeting and uniting nearest the ventral, six nt seeded. Collected near San Gregano, Lower California, February, 1579. by Mr. T. S. Brandegee, and communicated by Miss Alice Eastwood of the California Academy of Sciences. The species : nearest to Astragalus fremontii T. and G. Astragalus fremontii T. and G. Pac R. Rep. 4:80. A. ineptua A. Gnav. Proc. Am. Acad. 7:525. 1868. 4 4. yt panel Dove. var. fremontii Wars. Bot. King. Rep. 5: - Nevada, Arizona and California _ Astragalus macdougali u. sp. 13 glabrous or slightly pubescent when young; stems men. erect or decumbent, striate, six to many from a stout root, not branching; leaves 7 to 9 cm. in length, th rachis striate, appressed pubescent; leaflets 10 to 12 mm. in length, in six to nine pairs, narrowly obovate, obtuse or retuse; stipules triangular falcate, acuminate, subsheathing, becoming reflexed; peduncles 8 to 10 cm. in length, exceeding the leaves, * 9 er oe > n 4 9 1 ee 8 r * r 3 N „„ 170 MINNESOTA HorANICAL STUDIES, striate, racemosely six to sixteen flowered; flowers 18 to 16 mm in length, loosely spreading; calyx cylindrical, the nde subulate teeth one-third to one-half the length of the tube corolla ochroleucous, tinged with purple; legume 10 to 14 mm. in length, coriaceous, glabrous, sessile, ovate, slightly arcuate, strongly obcompressed, bilocular, few to many seeded. 7 Collected among rock debris near the “eh of Walnut e near Flagstaff, Arizona, June, 1891, by D. T. MacDougal; at Bougharts Ranch, Arizona, June, 1893, in flower o Henry H. Rasby. This species has heretofore been referred to A yalus diphsus GRA, and Astragalus lentiginosus Dove... It ma be considered as intermediate between the former and As alus fremontii T. and G. The type specimen is in the Herbarium of the nes Geological and Natural History Survey, having been distrib- uted by the U. S. National Herbarium as Astragalus diphysus A. Gray. The species is named for the collector, Mr. D. 7. Macdougal of the University of Minnesota. a Astragalus lentiginosus Doug, in G. Don. Gen. 8 1 Gard. and Bot. 2: 257. 1832. . = A, lentiginosus Dove. var. floribundus A. Gray. Proc. Acad. G: 524. 1866. Tragacantha lentiginosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946. 1891. 1 British Columbia, Washington, Oregon, Nevada and Cali- fornia. Astragalus araneosus u. sp. Perennial, glabrous throughout or slighty pubescent young; stems 1.5 to 3.4 dm. high, erect, very finely striate, simple, ten to many from a thick root; leaves 5 to 7 mm. in length, rachis slightly winged, not channelled or but slightly so; leaflets 7 to 10 mm. in length, in seven or eight pairs fleshy, orbicular or obcordate, obtuse, retuse or emarginate; stipules deltoid-acuminate, semi-sheathing below, reflexed; peduncles 6 to 9 mm. in length, striate. capitately or subspi- cately ten to twelve flowered; flowers 12 to 15 mm. in nee erect-spreading or horizontal; calyx short-cylindrical, with | few scattered, blackish hairs, the linear-spreading eames > 2 ; third to one-half the length of the tube; corolla whitish, tippe with purple; ien ooeeenedl D- rous, minutely reticulated, sessile, ovate-lanceolate, arc at 155 peel SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 171 incurved with a long, acuminate incurved tip, both sutures _ intruded so as to form a nearly bilocular cavity which is lined throughout with fine cobwebby hairs, becoming smooth, eight to ten seeded. Collected near Frisco, Utah, June, 1880, by M. E. Jones; also at Muddy station, John Day valley, Oregon, May, 1585, by Thomas Howell. Inis species is related to Astragalus diphysus A*GRay, but the resemblance is rather to Astragalus beckwithii Torr. It may be taken as a good example of the impossibility of sepa- rating the species on the invariability of the one or two celled _ legume. Astragalus diphysus A.Gray. Pl Fendl. 34. 1549. Tragacantha diphysa OK, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 944. 1891. New Mexico, Colorado and Utah. § 30. CARNOSOCARPUS. Astragalus tennesseensis A. Gray in CuapM. Fl. 8 Sts. 98. 1860. A. plattensis Nur. var. tennesseensis A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 6: 193. 1866. Illinois to Tennessee and Alabama. Astragalus plattensis Nurr. in T. and G. Fl. 1: 332. 1838. A. caryocarpus Tonk. in Ann. Lye N. V. 2: 179. 1828. Not A. caryocarpus Ker. Bot. Reg. 2: 176. 1816. A. mewicanus A.GRAY. Pl. Lindh. 176. 1845. Tragacantha plattensis OK. Rev. Gen, Pl. 2:947. 1891. Minnesota to Indiana and northern Alabama; west to Kansas, _ Nebraska, Colorado and Texas. Astragalus mexieanus A. DC. Pl. Rar. Gen. 4:16. 1827. 4. trichocalye Nutr. in T. aud G. Fl. 1: 322. 1838. Not A. triehoculyr Trauty. in Act. Hort. Petrop. 4: 302. 1876. 3 Tragacantha mexicana OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 946. 1871. _ Colorado to Missouri and eastern Illinois; south to Texas and New Mexico. 4 14. This species may now be designated as: Astragalus petropolitanus n. 1. a * 172 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Astragalus crassicarpus Nutt. in Fras. Cat. J. 181 A. carnosus Punsn Fl. Amer. Sept, 2: 740, 1814. A. caryocarpus Ken. Bot. Reg. 2: 176. 1816. A. succulentus Rien. Frankl. Journ, 18. 1823. A. pachycarpus T and 6. Fl. N. Am, 1: 332. 1838, Tragacantha caryocarpa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl, 2: 943. 1801. Sasketchewan to southwestern Texas; from Colorado Minnesota, Nebraska and Lowa. § OBSCURE SPECIES, THE RELATIONSHIPS OF WHICH ARE Yet UNDETERMINED. a Astragalus tepicus n. n. A. ervoides H. and A. Bot. Beechey. Voy. 417. 1841, Not A. ervoides Tuncz. Bull. Soc. Nat. Mose. 90. 1838, a Mongolian species. A. hookerianus Dierr. Syn. Pl. 4: 1086. 1850. a Tiapasauthe heckeriant OR: Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 045. — y 7 Not A. hookerianus (T. and G.) A. Gray. Proc. Am. ne 1866, which is based on Phaca hookeriana T. and G. Fl. 1: 693. 1840. Mexico: San Blas to Tepic. Astragalus hosackiae GREENE. Bull. Calif. Acad. 125 a 8. 157. 1885. 1 Arizona. Astragalus clevelandi GREREXE. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 121. 1882. California. Astragalus hoodianus HowELt. Erythea, 1: 111. Oregon. Astragalus conjunctus Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: :371 . 1883. ss Oregon. Astragalus sophoroides Jones. Zoe. 2:12. 1591. Arizona. oe 22 r R — Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. 173 . 5 id Astragalus grallator Wars. Zoe. 3:52. 1892. Colorado. 3 Astragalus greggii Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 17343. 1882. Mexico. Astragalus helleri FENZL. Bonplandia. 8:56. 1860. 3 Tragacantha helleri OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 048. 1891, Mexico. Astragalus hypoleucus Schau. Linn. 202747. 1847. Tragacantha hypoleuea OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2:45. 1891. Mexico. Astragalus insularis KLLOodd. Bull. Calif. Acad. Sci. | n. 1:6. 1884. ODeedros island off California. Astragalus eireumnudatus Greene. Pitt. 1173. 1888. F. Lower California. Astragalus moencoppensis Jones. Zoe. 2:12. 1591. Arizona. g Astragalus nevini Wars. Proc. Am. Acad. 21:412. 1886. ____ Tsland of San Clemente, off southern California. Astragalus parvus HxusL. Biol. Centr. Am. Bot. 1: 266. 1878. . Tragacantha parva OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 1:97. 1891. Mexico. 1 Astragalus oxyrhynchus Hemst. Biol. Centr: Am Bot. 1:265. 1878. Mexico. * Astragalus polaris Bento. in Hook. Trans. Linn. Soc. Pe 14:323. 1824. Oxytropis polaris SEEMAN. Bot. Voy. Herald. 45. 1852-57. Tragacantha polaris OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 947. 1891. Eschscholtz bay, northern British America. 174 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Astragalus quinquefloras Warts. Proc Am. heeds! 450. Mexico. Astragalus rattani A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 19%: b. 1883. 1 California. Astragalus reptans WIL o. Hort. Berol, 2:58. 1816, Tragacantha reptans OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 947, 1891. Mexico, Astragalus strigulosus H. B. k. Nov. Gen. et. Sp. 6: 494. — Tragacantha strigulosa OK. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 948. 1891. Astragalus tolucanus Ros. and Sear. Proc, Am. Acad. 28: 104. 189g. Mexico. Astragalus pacificus u. n. A. hendersoni Wats. Proc. Am. Acad, 22:471. 1887. Not A. hendersoni BAKER in Hook. Fl. Brit. Ind. 2: 120. 1879. 1 A. watsoni SuxLp. Bull. Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. n. * ; 19. 1894. : Not A. watsoniana (OK.) SHELD. supra. Oregon. Astragalus supervacaneus GREENE. Erythea. 1221. 1893. California. Astragalus breweri A. Gray. Proe. Calif. Acad. 3. 103. Astragalus lindheimeri A. Gray. Pl. Wright 1:52. al Bigs 1 928 n Astragalus rothrockii u. sp. . Perennial, glabrous throughout; stems 5 to 6 dm. high, erect, diffusely branching, striate, sometimes purplish mottled or ; i striate; leaves 6 to 10 cm. in length, the rachis nearly terete: leaflets 5 to 18 mm. in length, in nine to 12 pairs, elliptical, — oblong or oblong-lanceolate, obtuse or rarely slightly retuse; — stipules triangular-acuminate, reflexed, becoming deciduons; = f 175 Sheldon: SPECIES OF ASTRAGALUS. | _ peduncles 10 to 15 em. in length, loosely subspicately twelve to _ fifteen flowered; flowers 12 to 15 mm. in length becoming deflexed; calyx broadly campanulate, the filiform, spreading _ teeth three fourths the length of the tube; corolla ochroleucous, tinged with green: legume 2 to 2.75 em. in length, short-ovate, __ sessile, coriaceous, glabrous, finely transversely rugose veined, Aunilocular, with both sutures intruded, so as to become nearly bilocular, eight to ten seeded. Collected in New Mexico, 1877, by Professor J. T. Rothrock; also at Wabash ranch, eastern 8 July, 1892, by Pro- fessor E. O. Wooton. A. rothrocłii is most peculiar among North American species _ of the genus. In size and general appearance it is like A. fer- anus SHELD., but its more minute characters seem to place it with A. diphysus A. Gray, although that species is completely bilocular. It would form a good connecting link between the two above species in a diagrammatic classification of the species _ of Astragalus, The species is named for Professor J. T. Roth- rock of the University of Pennsylvania, who first collected the 5 5 plant. La <.s +!) . we os r 7 * * 1 7 i 4 XVI. ON A NEW REGISTERING BALANCE, q ALEX. P. ANDERSON. In the course of certain experiments on transpiration lately conducted in the laboratories for plant physiology of the University of Minnesota it became apparent that to ascertain the rate of transpiration for some length of time some self registering mechanism that could be used to record the increase in the weight of the absorber was necessary. With such an appliance the periodicity (if any) in transpiration could be determined. and a true transpiration curve plotted. After repeated trials and alterations, such a registering balance has been designed consisting essentially of a balance, one arm of the beam of which is lowered by the increase in weight of the calcium chloride absorber. As this arm is lowered a circuit is closed and an electro- magnetic mechanism releases a weight which falls on the other arm of the scale beam, or rather into its scale pan. Thus the scale is balanced automatically, after an increase equal to the weight used has taken place. At the same instant that the weight is released it is recorded on the registering cylinder of the recorder, which can be at any distance from the balance itself. The scale and balancing mechanism are enclosed in a case which entirely protects the whole from fall- ing moisture. The following detailed description will serve to illustrate the action: The weighing apparatus consists of a platform scale made especially for the purpose, and to fit the registering me chanism. This scale is sensitive to one-fifteenth of a gram, em a capacity of five kilograms. It has a beam eleven inches , the supports of which are screwed to an iron plate in the bo ottom of the case, thus making the scale and case practically Or and both can be leveled and adjusted together. The brass ale pans are seven inches in diameter and are carried by ass supports, attached to the arms of the scale beam. The scale bearings are of diamond steel. 178 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. The electro-magnetic balancing mechanism consists ¢ weight holder and an electro-magnet, together with ‘the e point on the scale beam, mercury cup, wiring, batteries and necessary fittings. * The weight holder is acoiled brass tube that holds aboub él ö hundred and twenty-five weights. At the lower end of 0 brass coil is a lever that can turn back and forth on piv One end of this lever is connected by a link to the armature o the magnet, and the other end; which is held in place by a spring. when the circuit is open, has a weight pocket that t one weight from the weight tube each time the circuit is e and carries it laterally about five-sixteenths of an inch pir it drop, through a hole in the brass plate, on to the scale pan. As soon as the circuit is opened again by the readjustment of the scale beam the lever returns to its position and another weight from the tube, and is again ready to drop it into the scale pan as soon as the necessary increase in weig to close the circuit at the other end of the beam has place, The weight holder has a calibre one-sixteenth of an inch larger than the diameter of the weights used. It is screwed to the frame of the electro-magnet and extends upward and ° N the outside of the case for the reception of the new weights a its exterior end. It is made air and water tight from the e. < terior by means of a rubber stopper that fits into the case. The weight holder can therefore be taken out and replacet one of greater or less calibre, depending upon the size pe weights used, thus if two tubes, five-sixteenths and one-f inch respectively, are used, two sets of weights can be prs viz.: one-fourth inch weighing about one gram, and — 5 teenth: inch weighing about one half a gram. Larger o smaller sizes could be used, but for growth or transpiration th above sizes are sufficiently delicate to give a good curve. 2 2 The weights used are steel balls, the same make and size as are used in bicycle bearings. These are perfectly accurate. not varying in diameter more than one two thousandths of an inch, and in weight on an average not more than one chime! andth of a gram. Sets of these balls can of course be weighed and verified by the experimenter himself. a The electro-magnet has a single coil, and one end of ies is joined with the frame of the magnet which forms the 8 1 magnetic cireuit. The other end of the core is contracted in the form of a paraboloid. a 5 8 REGISTERING BALANCE. 179 4 —T. esaciel eabirianted with this para- bpoloid, is placed between the two sides of the frame, being pivoted at one end; the other end has a lever communicating with the weight dropping mechanism by a connecting link. This construction of the magnet gives a double magnetic cir- _ cuit of low resistance, and also a maximum pull and greater range of movement of the armature. The current from a sin- _ gle good carbon-zinc cell is sufficient to operate the weight dropping mechanism. The current from the battery passes through the magnet to a mercury cup, thence through a pla- tinum contact point on the scale beam to the binding post on the case and back to the battery. The case is twelve by eighteen inches and is made of ena- melled sheet iron riveted to a frame work of wrought iron. The edges of the sheet iron are turned in so as to make with the frame work a groove on each side for two sliding glass doors. Thus the whole inside of the registering balance can be seen and watched from without, and either side of the case opened as desired. The case is leveled by means of four milled headed brass screws. A circular spirit level is placed on the iron plate immediately in front of the scale beam supports and thus the entire apparatus can be leveled in a few moments. The Whole case is made so that it can be used in a green-house or in the open air without interference from moisture or rain. The registering balance can be used for registering any con- _ tinuous increase in weight. For transpiration a combined calcium chloride and sulphuric acid absorber is placed on one . scale pan, and the previously dried air that takes up the trans- pired moisture from the plant chamber (bell glass) is forced through the absorber by means of an aspirator. Two light pieces of rubber tubing connect the absorber with the plant chamber and aspirator, by means of pieces of glass tubing in rubber stoppers fitted into the case. The rubber tubes are thus inside of the case and can not be disturbed by any outward influence. They buoy up and down with the scale pan and absorber. In balancing the scale for the beginning of an ex- q periment these pieces of rubber tubing are partly weighed and q continue to be a part of the weight on the absorber pan, but as 3 their weight is approximately constant no error results. An attachment is made to the balance when used for weigh- 3 . large fruits, which necessarily must be grown outside of sabe case. This is made by elongating the scale pan support to . 7 15 wae ; 5 aa * it 9 * * eh 8 id wy . a K 1 1 ~ P J - EAN. q 4) 4 3 7 0 MS wa We 45 bete e One s will then be on the outside of the case and can be used f growing fruit. In the preliminary experiments on transpiration this a ratus has been found to eliminate a large proportion 0 errors usually attending this work, while it is of equal work on growth increase of weight. See Plate VII. * * 5 — — a - ‘ 9 1 . 4 — A * ‘ — ~ * e XVII. ON A NEW ELECTRIC AUXANOMETER AND CONTINUOUS RECORDER. W. D. Frost. TRE ELECTRIC AUXANOMETER. In undertaking recently some work on growth in thickness it was found that there was no available auxanometer suitable for the exact needs of the line of experiments designed. Pfeffer's auxanometer was the best instrument within reach of the writer, and while this is adapted for work with moderately large plants it is too cumbersome for delicate ones, as the counter-weight required to overcome the friction of the pulleys is sufficient to produce abnormal conditions. In the measure nent of growth in thickness of stems, fruits, eto. it seemed psolutely necessary that the whole instrument used should be ' i to, and suspended from the plant, to avoid any error d by movements, such as twisting or bending, due to hel- jotropism or geotropism. “To meet these conditions the only contrivance which seemed ossible was one in which a very small increment of growth she uld momentarily close an electric circuit by means of me easily adjustable mechanism. The increment of growth necessary to close the circuit being constant, successive closures of the circuit could, of course, easily be registered. 4 working model was constructed upon this principle, and it oved so successful that it has been put in permanent shape by the instrument maker of the laboratory. It has further- mo 2 seemed advisable to print here a description of it in ad- vance of the results from its use in investigations now in pro- 81 * s in the laboratories for plant physiology of the University f Minnesota. Wnile it was originally intended for measuring growth in thickness, yet it is equally efficient in measuring growth in length. Its extreme lightness and delicacy make it especially useful in measuring the growth of small plants, and since it is } es: 1 eh i ( 8 182 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL srubEs. constructed of aluminum, it can be used on plants while t are under normal conditions of moisture, without injury tot instrument. The auxanometer proper can be separated an definite distance from the registering apparatus. Registration have already been made in the laboratory of the growth ¢ plants under natural conditions, 400 yards distant and another building. J The auxanometer consists of a ratchet-wheel on a axis which also bears a series of small grooved wheels 84 and 6 mm. in diameter, and a somewhat larger whet upon which is wound a thread bearing a counter-weight. diameter of the larger wheel, is about 5 cm. and the cireu ference contains 144 notches. A ratchet which fits in th notches of this wheel, is mounted on an axis similar to that o the others, and has a long horizontal arm. This arm has: platinum tip. As the large wheel turns, the ratchet ¢ into the notches in its circumference and the platinum tip l lowered so that it touches a drop of mercury which is held ft a small cup on the arm of the frame. This arm is 0 from the rest of the instrument and is connected by means ¢ 4 small wire, to one pole of an electric battery. The other part of the instrument is connected with the other pole of t battery. The screw underneath enables the height of the mercury to be regulated, and consequently the length of t which the current remains closed or open. 4 The frame work of the instrument is made of aluminum, and entire weighs 15 gms. It may be attached to the arm of @ tripod support, and in this position can be used for measuri growth in length, (as shown in Plate x). For measuring e in thickness the instrument can be fastened to the apna held against the stem, or fruit, which is to be measured, or i can be removed from the support and attached to the pla When attached directly it is held in place by a clamp. 1 can be entirely removed and placed around the plant. It is roughly adjusted in place by means of a catch, which fits into the notches on the clamp. The fine adjustment is ac- complished by a screw. When the apparatus is in place a silk thread is fastened to the hook on the frame, passed — the plant in the direction opposite the hands of a clock, s that the thread may be in contact with the entire circumference of the plant. The thread is then passed through a hole in 8 axis of the auxanometer where it is securely fastened and t Frost. AUXANOMETER AND CONTINUOUS RECORDER. 183 cCounter-weight on the wheel is made sufficient to keep taut the thread which passes around the plant. As the plant increases in thickness the thread is unwound from the pulley upon which it was previously wound; and as this turns, and the teeth of the large wheel pass the ratchet, the electric current is alternately opened and closed. In! measuring growth in length the instrument is supported above the plant and the thread passed from the growing part to the small wheels. If the smallest wheel is used, during the growth of a millimeter, 46 registrations are made, that is to say one-forty-sixth of a mm. in length causes the circuit to be closed, while the largest wheel registers a growth of one- seventh of a millimeter. . See Plate VIII. THE CONTINUOUS RECORDER. 4 This part of the apparatus consists essentially of two rollers, one of which is attached to a clock train, and as it revolves Winds upon itself a ribbon of paper on the other roller, and an electro-magnet, to the armature of which is at- tached a pen that presses against the paper on the second roller. While the circuit remains open a continuous line is _ traced near one edge of the paper ribbon. When the circuit is closed the pen is drawn to the other side of the paper and the length of the line traced there denotes directly the length of time that the circuit is closed. The clock train is an eight day lever movement with strong double springs. The case which is seven inches in diameter is finished in brass, and is so attached to the base that it can be ' easily removed. Projecting through the front of the case is the pinion by which the rollers are turned. This pinion re- volves once in twelve hours, carrying with it the roller made of brass carefully turned and balanced. It is _ slightly less than four inches in diameter; thus the paper moves at a rate of one inch per hour. It has quarter inch flanges, and an arrangement by which the end of the paper is 2 ald in place. On the outer surface of this roller is a dial te with the lettering opposite to that on an ordinary clock. pon the support is a pointer. By means of this arrangement we time indicated by the clock can be read within a few min- utes. The second roller, with the exception of the dial, is exactly - similar to the first. Both are mounted on steel shafts, turned 1 oe ee nh Fe oe are ern 184 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. to fit the bearings. The supports are made of brass and d to a black walnut base, which is built of narrow strips to prevent warping. 9 The paper ribbon on which the record is obtained is thirds of an inch in width and made in two lengths, one ciently long to run four and the other eight days. Across tl upper surface of the paper ribbon is printed a series of that divide the ribbon into hour spaces, which are nur consecutively. These hour spaces are so ruled that the of registration can be read to one minute directly from ribbon. A source of error arising from the fact that the paper a it is wound on the first roller increases the circumference ol pear eee increased as the paper continues to be wound up, is avoided by havi each successive hour-space longer than the preceding one, correction, however, is very slight on account of the thir of the paper used, and would amount to only six ines at tam end of the eighth day. 4 The time marker consists of a pen made of brass, and large : enough to hold an amount of aniline ink sufficient for two weeks registration. This pen is attached by means of a rolled brass strip to the armature of an electro-magnet, which is hung on a hinge close to the base. Thus, as the armature moves in response to the attraction of the magnet, or the pull of a tension spring, the pen is drawn through a short hori- zontal distance. The rod simply serves as a support to the pen. The pen presses against the paper on the roller, and by means of the milled nut it can be kept at any required pressure, or can be withdrawn from the paper entirely when the lattes a is to be removed or replaced. 4 When the circuit is open the armature is held back by the tension spring, and the length of the brass strip is so arranged that the pen then traces a line near the right hand side of the ribbon, as it is shown in the plate. When the circuit is closed the armature is attracted and the pen is pushed to the other side of the paper ribbon, thus making a short line at right angles to the length of the paper. If the circuit is immediately opened the time of registration is marked simply by a single cross mark. If, however. the circuit remains closed for some time a line is traced on the left side of the paper. In reading the record in this case the length of timeelaps- ing between two successive closures of the circuit, is indicated > + 7 “nl ens 4 distance between the e eee forward movements _ of the pen, or, what is the same thing, the length of the line traced while the circuit is closed, plus the length of the line made while the circuit is open, as any one notch passes the 3 The auxanometer is connected with the registering appa- ~ ratus and an electric battery. The battery is of a type suited for a closed circuit. The two instruments may be placed upon r ang distanct, as is most convenient for the operator. This recorder may also be used with many other kinds of r See Plate IX. (Oe Vide ae XVIII. TITLES OF LITERATURE CONCERN NG. THE FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN BY PLANTS. D. T. Mac Doug“ The relations sustained by plants to the nitrogen c of the soil and water, and to the free nitrogen of the air form 8 subject of great biological import, and since aside from i purely scientific aspect certain phases of the main ö are of vast practical interest they have attracted the attention” of the agriculturist and chemist as well as of the botanist. 7 The results of the investigations, from these various points of view, which have been in progress for a century, form a mass of literature which is scattered through the journals and pro- ceedings of the various branches of natural science in such manner as to be very difficult of access to the student with ordinary facilities. 1 Among this rich and withal unwieldy mass of literature 4. part of especial interest to the botanist is that which concerus : the fixation of free nitrogen by the leguminous plants and the — organism found in the tubercles which characterize this group, and the fixation of free nitrogen by green plants which do not sustain mutualistic relations to the lower organisms. * The large number of controversies resulting from the attain- ment of radically different conclusions from similar experiments along certain lines of the work, in the hands of various investi- gators, leads to the belief that safe generalizations can be W from the restricted groups of facts thus obtained only 2 : confirmed by extended and parallel researches. To meet tis idea the references given below concern the points of central interest to the botanist, beside a number of titles to nitrifica- tion,” and to cases of mutualism and symbiosis which may offer a comparison however distant with the relations existing between the leguminous plant and the tubercle organism. _ _ Mae Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 187 The list is composed of titles which have been incidentally collected by Professor MacMillan and the writer, and are com- prised in the card catalogue of the botanical department of the University of Minnesota. Their presentation in this form is for the purpose of making them still more readily available to students and investigators in connection with this department, and wherever this line of work is carried forward. It is pur- posed to bring out a second installment of titles which the writer in the limited time at his disposal was not able to prepare for this number. Allen E. W. Leguminous plants for green manuring and for feeding. U. S. Dept. Ag. Farm. Bull. No. 16. 1894. Alpe and Menozzi. Bull. d. notize agrarie d. Ministere d' Agric. No. 14. 1892. Andre. See Berthelot. Areangeli. Sopra i tubercoli radicali delle Leguminose. Atti del. real. Accad. d. Lincei, 7: Fase. 6, 223. 1891. Atkinson G. F. Science Cont. Ala. Ex. Sta. 1:1. 1889. Atkinson G. F. The genus Frankia in the United States. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 19:171 1892. Atkinson d. F. Tubercles of Ceanothus. Bot. Gazette 16: 262. 1891. Atkinson G. F. Contributions to the biology of the organism causing leguminous tubercles. Bot. Gazette 18: 157, 2 226, 257. 1893. Atkinson G. F. Symbiosis in the roots of the Ophioglossacez. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 20:356. 1893. Atwater and Rockwood. On the loss of nitrogen during germ- ination and growth. Am. Chem. Jour. 8:327. 1868. _ Atwater W. 0. On the assimilation of atmospheric nitrogen 1 by plants. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 685. 1884. Atwater W. 0. Absorption of atmospheric nitrogen by plants. * Am. Chem. Jour. 6: 365. 1885; also, 12: 526. 1891; 4 also, 13:42. 1891. _ Atwater and Woods. Atmospheric nitrogen as plant food. Conn, Storrs Ag. Ex. Sta Rep. 2:11. 1889; also, za 3:12. 1890. Atwater and Woods. The fixation of free nitrogen by plants. r Conn. Storrs Ag. Ex. Sta. Rep. 5:17. 1892. _ Atwater W. 0. On the liberation of nitrogen from its com- b pounds, and the acquisition of atmospheric nitrogen by plants. Am. Chem. Jour. 8: 398. 1868. 188 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES... Atwater and Woods. Absorption of atmospheric nitroget plants. Am. Chem. Jour. 13:42. 1891. a Babes, Cornil et. Bacteries du sol. Les Bacteries, 1: 218, 1890. 1 Bary A. de Morphologie und Physiologie der Pilze, Flechten und Myxomyceten. 1566, a” Bary A. de Die Erscheinung der Symbiose. 1879. a Benecke F. Ueber die Mykorhiza. Biol. Centralb. 4: 753, 781. 1888, g Benecke F. Ueber die Knollchen an den Leguminosen- Wort eln. Bot. Centralb. 29:58. 1887. Pe Berg F. Das nitrificierende Ferment des Bodens. Sitzungsb. Naturf. Ges, Dorpat. 10: No. 1. 1892. Berggren 8. Om rotbildningen hos australa Coniferer. Bot. Notiser. 144. 1887. Berthelot. Sur absorption de Fazote libre par les principes. immédiats des végétaux sous influence de Velectricité. Jour. f. Pharm. 24:483. 1876, Berthelot. Sur absorption de Fazote libre par les 1 imme diats des végétaux sous influence de Velectricité — atmospherique. Compt. rend. 83:677. 1876. Berthelot. Sur habsorption de l’azote libre par les prineipes immédiats des végétaux sous l'influence de! 2 Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 10:55. 1877. 9 Berthelot and Andre. Vitrates in plants.“ Jour. f. Pharm. et Chim. 1884. “i Berthelot. Fixation directe de l'azote atmospherique libre par certaines terrains argileux. Compt. rend. 101: 1885. Berthelot and Andre. Sur les principles azoteés de la terre vegstale. Compt. rend. 103: 1101. 1886. Berthelot. Sur la fixation directe de l’azote gazeux de l’atmos- phere par les terres végétales. Compt. rend. 104:205. : 1887. o> Berthelot. Sur la fixation de l'azote gazeux de l'atmosphere par les terres végétales, avec le concours de la végé- tation. Compt. rend. 104:625. 1887. 2 Berthelot. Experiences nouvelles sur la fixation de Lazote et par certaines terres végétales et par certaines plantes. Compt. rend. 106: 372. 1888. a Berthelot. Sur quelques conditions generales de la fixation de l’azote par la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 106:569- 1888. 2 a a 1 = hoe 2 * —— rr 8 = a? rere * * 2 n * 9 * 7 * , . 4 I : | Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 189 _ Berthelot. Sur la transformation dans le sol des azotates en ss composes organiques azotes. Compt. rend. 106: 638. = 1888. Berthelot. Observations sur la fixation de lazote par certaines 4 sols et terres végétales. Compt. rend. 106: 1049. 1888. Berthelot. Sur la fixation de Lazote par la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 106:1214. 1888. Berthelot. Experiences nouvelles sur la fixation de lazote par certaines terres végétales et par certaines plantes. Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 16. 1889. Berthelot and Andre. Faits pour servir a l'histoire des prin- _ cipes azotes renfermes dans la terre végétale. Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 6 ser. 25:314. 1892. _ Berthelot. Sur la fixation de Lasote dans les oxydation len- q tes. Compt. rend. 108:543. 1889. Berthelot. Fixation de |'azote par la terre végétale nue ou avec le concours des Leguminéuses. Compt. rend. 108; 700. 1889. ' Berthelot. Recherches nouvelles sur la fixation de |'azote par la terre végétale. Influence del electricité. Compt. rend, 109:281. 1889. Berthelot. Sur les relations de Lazote atmospherique avec la | terre végétale. Compt. rend. 109:345. 1889. _ Berthelot. Sur la fixation de Lazote atmospherique. Compt. rend. 109:417. 1889. Berthelot. Observations sur la formation de l'ammoniaque et de composes azotes volatils aux dépens de la terre a végétale et des plantes. Compt. rend. 109 419. 1889. Berthelot. Remarques sur la formation des azotates daus les végétaux. Compt. rend. 110: 109. 1890. HBierthelot. Observations sur la note precedente de Schloesing 4 fils et Em. Laurent. Compt. rend. 111:753. 1890. Berthelot. Observations sur les reactions entre la terre végé- tale et l'ammoniaque atmospherique. Compt. rend. . 111:558. 1890. Berthelot and Andre. Faits pour servir a Thistoire des prin- cipes azotes renfermes dans la terre végétale. Compt. 3 rend. 112: 189. 1891. Bierthelot. Nouvelles recherches sur la fixation de l’azote par les microbes. Compt. rend. 115:569. 1892. Berthelot. Recherches nouvelles sur les micro-organismes , fixateurs de l’azote. Compt. rend, 116:842. 1893, e * r ae . a ee. Lv 7 e * n * * * 18 3 iT. ae 9 1 . 1 * 5 a n 7 * 3 a 190 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1 Berthelot. Observations relativus a une note de Wine sky Sur l'assimilation de l'azote gazeux de! par les microbes. Compt. rend. 116: 1388. 1893. Berthelot. Nouvelles recherches sur les micro organismes fixateurs de l’azote. Ann. d. Chim, et Phys, 30: 410. 4 1898, Berthelot. Nouvelles recherches sur la fixation de e : atmospherique par les micro-organismes. Ann. 4 Chim. et Phys. 30.411. 1898. Berthelot. Sur une methode destinee a étudier les 1 gazeux entre les (tres vivants et Vatmosphere que les y entoure, Compt. rend. 118:112. 1894. Berthelot. Nouvelles observations sur les composes “azotes = volatils emis par la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 118: 195. 1894. Beyerinck M. W. Die Bacterien der Papilionaceen-kndllehen. Bot. Ztg. 46:725, 741, 757, 780, 797. 1888. 7 Beyerinck M. W. Wurzelknospen. Verh. d. koninkl. Akad v. q Wetensch. te Amsterdam, 25:—. 1887. See also 1890, Beyerinck I. W. Kunstliche Infektion von Vicia faba mit Bacillus radicicola: Ernthrungsbedingungen dieser Bacterie. Bot. Ztg. 48: 888. 1890. 4 Beyerinck M. W. Over ophooping van atmospherische Stick,“ stoff in culturen van Bacillus radicicola. Vers. en Meded. der koninkl. Akad. van Wetensch. te Amster- __ dam. Afd. Natuurkunde, Hft. 3:460. 1891. * Bohme 7 Stickstoft-ernthrung der Leguminosen. Separat Dresden. e Boley H. B. Notes on root tubercles of indigenous and exotic Legumes in virgin soil of Northwest. Ag-Science .- 7336. 180s. Bonnier G. La Constitution des Lichens. Jour. d. Bot. 1:1. 1887. Bonnier G. Germination des spores de Lichens sur les proto- __ némas des Mousses. Rev. Gen. d. Bot. 1:165. 1889. Bonnier G. Recherches sur la synthese des Lichens. Ann. d. Sc. Nat 7ser. 9:1. 1889. Ss Bonorden H. F. Handbuch der Allgemeinen Mykologie. 1851. Bordier I. H. VNitrification.“ Mem. Sc. Phys. et Nat. Bor- deaux 5:185. 1890. “3 Borgreve. Zusatz zu: Braun zur Mycorhiza Frage. Forstl — Bl. 13:205. 1889 92 — ae “Mae Dowgal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 191 4 "Bouche. Zur Unterscheidung des Phaseolus vulgaris und Ph. . multifiorus Lam. Bot. Ztg. 10:735. 1852. - Boudier. Du parasitisme probable de quelques espéces du genre Elaphomyces et de la recherche de ces Tubér- acés. Bull. d. Soc. Bot. d. France, 23:—. 1876. Bouquet. Eine neue Hypotheses des Absorptions der Stick- stoff durch Pflanzen. Jour. Ag. Practique. 1888. Boussingault J. B. Recherches chimiques sur la végétation ) enteprises dans le but d'examiner si les plantes pren- nent de Lazote de |’atmosphere. Ann. Sc. Nat. 10: 257. 1837. Boussingault J. B. Recherches chimiques sur la végétation enterprises dans le but d’examiner si les plantes pren- nent de azote de l'atmosphere, Compt. rend. 6: 102. 1838 and 7:138. 1838. Boussingault J. B. Recherches chimiques sur la végétation enteprises dans le but d’examiner si les plantes pren- nent de Lazote de batmosphere, Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 67:35. 1838 and 69:353. 1838. Boussingault J. B. Recherches chimiques sur la végétation enteprises dans le but d'examiner si les plantes pren- nent de l'azote de |’atmosphere, Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 14:193. 1838, and 16:385. 1839. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation, ete. Ann. d. Chim. 41:5. 1854, and 43:149. 1888. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation, etc. Ann. -* Sc. Nat. 1:241. 1854. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation, ete. Jour. d. Pharm. 26:127. 1854. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation. SP rend. 38: 580, 607. 1854, and 39: 601. 1854. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation. Ann. d. Chim. 46:5. 1856. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur la végétation. Ann. Se. Nat. 2: 357. 1854. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur i végétation. Jour f. Prakt. Chem. 62:108, 181. 1854, and 63:418. 1854. re J. B. Recherches sur influence que |’azote assimilable des engrais exerce sur la production de la matiere vegetale. Compt. rend. 41: 940. 1857, and 45:833. 1857. b ee Pe a a 8 — * ii = 7 id 3 ves 1 192 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Boussingault J. B. Recherches sur influence que lazot assimilable des engrais exerce sur la production de la matiere vegetale. Ann. Sc. Nat. 7:5. 1857. = Boussingault J. B. Agronomie, Chemie, Agricole et Phy- siologie 1:198. 1860, and 2.840. 1861. Boussingault J. B. Sur la nitrification de la terre Compt. rend. 76.22. 1878. Boussingault J. B. Sur la nitrification de la terre ve Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 29:186. 1873. Boussingault J. B. Sur l'influence que la terre végétale exerce sur la nitrification des substances azotes d'origine or- ganique employees comme engrais. Compt. 82:477. 1876. Also, Ann. d. Chim. 8:5, 1876. 1 Boutin. Note sur origine des nitrates dans ! Amarantus bi- tum. Compt. rend. 82: No. 25. 1870. 9 Boutroux L. Sur la fermentation panaire. Compt. 112:203. 1891. See also Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 1892. Boutroux L. Reveux des travaux sur les bacteries et les fer- mentations. Rev. Gen. d. Bot. 16:30. 1894. 3 Bowman J. E. On the parasitical connection of 5 squamaria and the peculiar structure of the subter- ranean leaves. Trans. Linn. Soc. 16:399. 1833. Braun. Zur Mycorhiza Frage. Forstl. BL 13:204. 1889. Breal E. Ann. Agron. 1888. f 4 Breal E. Observations sur la fixation de l'azote 88 pherique par les Légumineuses dont les racines 1 des nodosités. Compt. rend. 107: 872. 1888. 1 Breal E. Fixation de Fazote par les Légumineuses. Compt. rend. 109: 670. 1889. 110: 670. 1890. 4 Breal E. Bindung des Luftstickstoffs durch Kresse (rrops. olum). Ann. Agron. 18: 369. 1893. ; 4 Brefeld 0. Bot. Untersuchungen. 1883. a Brefeld 0. Untersuchungen auz dem Gesammtgebiete a. Mykologie, 3. 1877. And 7. 1888. g Bruchmann H. Ueber Anlage und Wachstum der waren von Lycopodium und Isoetes. Jen. Zeitschr. meg New Ser. 1: 522. 1874. 3 Bruchmann H. Die Dichotomie der Wurzel von Pinus tris. Jen. Zeitschr. f. Naturw. New Ser. 1: 572. 14 : Bruchmann H. Das Prothallium von Lycopodium. Bot. Cen- tralb. 21:23, 309. 1885. eS lac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 193 _Brunchorst B. Ueber die Knollchen an der Wurzeln von “an Alnus und den Eleagnaceen. Bot. Centra lb. 24: 222. 1 1885. Brunchorst B. Ueber die Knéllchen an den Leguminosen 3 wurzeln. Ber. d. deut Bot. Ges. 3: Hft. 7, 241. 1585. Brunchorst B. Ueber einige Wurzelanschwellungen, besond- a ers diejenigen von Alnus and Elaeagnaceen. Unter- Biss such. Bot. Inst. z. Tubingen, 2:151. 1886. _ Brunehorst B. Die Struktur der Inhaltskürper in den Zellen a einiger Wurzelanschwellungen. Sep. a Bergens Mus. Arsberetning. 235. 1887. _ Busealioni, Si contengono bacteri nei tubercoli radieati delle q Leguminose. Malphigia 1:21, 464. 1887. _ Cloez 8. Recherches experimentales sur la nitrification et sur : la source de l'azote dans les plantes. Compt. rend 1 41:935, 1855. (does 8. Lettre a M. Chevreul concernant les experiences de mes M. Ville sur la question de |'assimilation de |'azote de 4 Lair par les végétaux. Compt. rend. 41 775. 1855. Cloe 8. Recherches experimentales sur la nitrification et sur 4 la source de l'azote dans les plantes. L Institute 23: 1 417. 1855. a Cloes 8. Recherches experimentales sur la nitrification et sur la source de l’azote dans les plantes. Jour. f. Prakt. , Chem. 68: 138. 1856. obe 8. See Gratiolet. 4 Ne D. Ebauche de la rhizotaxie 1848. Paris. Clos D. Du collet dans les plantes et de la nature de quelque 3 tubercles. Ann. d. Sc. Bot. 3:13. 1849. (los D. Du collet dans les plantes et de la nature de quelques tubercules. Ann. Sc. Nat. 13:5. 1850. See also Soc. Philom. Proc. Verb. 34. 1850. Clos D. Revision des tubercles des plantes et des tuberculoides = des Légumineuses, Mem. d. I'Acad. d. Toulouse 9 ser. 1. 1808. Janevari A. La nutrizione delle piante il terreno e la conci- 7 = . mazione, LItalia agricolia 19. 1887. 8 E. Sur le role de l’azote atmosphérique dans Veconomie végétale. Compt. rend. 107:1460. 1888. E. Sur I existence de phénoménes de nitrification dans les mileux riches en substance organiques et a reaction acids. Compt. rend. 114:181. 1892. . 194 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Cohn F. Ueber parasitic Algen. Beitr. 2. Biol, 1: Hft. 2:87, 1872. a Cohn F. Zur Geschichte der Leguminosenkn®lichen Cent f. Bakt. u. Par- Kunde. 10: No 6, 190. 1891. Coignet J. De absorption de l'azote par les végétaux. d. I. Soc. d'agr. d. Lyon, 5 Ser. 2: 283, 1888. Condamy A. Etude sur l'histoire naturelle de la Truffe. Conn H. W. Nature of the root tubercles of un f plants. U. S. Ex. Sta. Rec. 2: 686. 1800 and 1801, and 3:56, 1891 and 1802. 1 Conn H. W. Free nitrogen assimilation. Bull. Torr. Be 1 Club 20: 148. 1898. 4 Corda A. K. J. Icones Fungorum hucusque cognitorum. 1887, 1854. q Cornil et Babes. Bacteries du sol. Les Bacteries 1: 218. 1890. Cornu. Commission du Phylloxéra. 1876. Cornu. Etudes sur le Phylloxéra vastatrix. 1878. Coudon Muntz. and La fermentation ammoniacale de la terre, Ann. Agron. 19:209. 1893. “a Crochetelle et Dumont. Sur la nitrification des terre de prairie, Compt. rend. 117:670. 1893. — Dangeard. Note sur les Mycorhizes endtropiques. Le E iste Ser. 2, 223. 1891 _ De Candolle. Prodromus Syst. Nat. Reg. Veg. 2: 312. 1525. 4 Deherain P. P. Sur l'absorption de l’'azote par les plantes. Bull. Soc. Chim. 16:2. 1871. Deherain P. P. Sur intervention de l'azote N dans la vegetation. Compt. rend. 73: 1352. And 76:1390. 1873. : Deherain P. P. Sur intervention de l’azote atmosp dans la vegetation Bull. Soc. Chim. 19: 538. 1873. Deherain P. P. Sur intervention de Vazote atmosphe: dans la vegetation. Jour. d. Pharm. 18: 95. 1573. Deherain P. P. Sur intervention de l’azote atmosp dans la vegetation. Ann. Sci. Nat. 5 Ser. 18:1 1873. Deherain P. P. Sur intervention de l’azote atmospb dans la vegetation. Chem. News. 29: 271. 1874. Deherain P. P. Sur l’enrichessement en azote d'un sol r tenu en prairie. Compt. rend. 101. 1885. Deherain P. P. Le travail du sol et la nitrification. Agron. 19: 401. 1893. Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 195 Deherain P. P. Le travail de la terre et la nitrification. i. Compt. rend. 116:1091. 1893. _ Delpino. Osservazioni sopra batteriocecidii la sorgente l'azote in una piante-Galegs officinalis. Malphigia 2: 385. 1888. be Saussure. Recherches sur la vegetation. 206. 1504. _ Detmer. Physiol. Chem. Unters. uber Keimung 68. 1875. - Devaux. Circulation passive de l’azote dans les végétaux. f Jour. d. Bot. 5: 130. 1891. q Devaux. Les echanges gazeux d'un tubercle, representes 4 schematiquement par un appareil physique, Bull. } Soc. Bot. d. France, 37:257. 1891. _ Devaux. Atmosphere interne des tubercules et racines tuber- culeuses. Bull. d. Soc. Bot. d. France. 37:272. 1890. De Vogue. Fixation de l’azote ammoniacal sur la paille. F. Compt. rend. 115: 25. 1892. De Vries. Wachstumgeschichte des roten Klees. Landw. Jahrb. 6: 933. 1877. Douliot et van Tieghem. Recherches comparatives sur lorigine des membres endogenes dans les plantes vas culaires. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 7 Ser. 8:1. 1888. Drouin. See Gautier. Duchartre P. Note sur!'Hypopitys multifiora Scop. Ann. d. Se. Nat. 3 Ser. 6:29. 1846. Duclaux. La distribution de la matiere organique et des : microbes dans le sol. Ann. Inst. Past. 7:823. 1893. Duhamel du Monceau. La Physique des Arbres. 1758. Dumont et Crochetelle. Sur la nitrification des terres de B prairie. Compt. rend. 117:670. 1893, Drobnig. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Wurzelknollen. Inaug. a Diss. 1892. Rostock. q Drude 0. Die Biologie von Monotropa Hypopitys L. und Neot- tia Nidus avis L. 1873. Gottingen. 7 Ehrenberg A. Weitere Untersuchungen tieber die Frage nach q dem Freiwerden von gasformigen Stickstoff bei Faul niss-processen. Zeitschr. f. phys. Chem. 11: Hft. 5. ee 1887. : _ Eidam E. Ueber Pilzenentwickelung in den Wurzeln der 3 Orchidaceen. Jahresber. d. schles. Ges. f. vater!. a Cultur. 57: 297. 1879. . Emmerling A. Untersuchungen uber die Stickstoffernthrung SS der Pflanzen. Mitt. a. d. Lab. d. Versuch. Sta. i. Kiel. Hft. 1. 1879. eo oe er ee pei r . 4 a 0 4 . n n Wa e N a nl 196 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Emmerling A. Studien uber die Eiweissbildung in der E Landw. Vers. Sta. Abh. 1. 1879. Eriksson J. Studier sfver Luguminosernas ritknoler. tordiss. Lund. 1874. Also, Acta Univ. Lund. 10. 1878. oS Farlow. Tubercles on Leguminous Roots. Garden and est 1:185, 1888. 1 Fink K. Die Mikroorganismen in der Ackerkrume. Ft Landw. Ztg. 43:48, 853. 1893. 1 Fitz A. Stickstoffquelle fur Mucor. Deut. Chem. Rev. 8:15 1876. a Fisch Rees. und Untersuchungen uber den Bau und Lebe 1S geschichte der -Hirschtruffel-Elaphomyces. Biblioth Bot. Hft. 7.1. 1887. 7 Frank. Ueber die biologische Verhaltnisse des Th us f einiger Krustenflechten. Cohn's Beitr. z. — Pflanzen. 2: 123. 1876. 0 Frank. Leber die Parasiten in den Wurzelanschwellung der Leguminosen. Bot. Ztg. 37: 377, 393. 1879. Frank. Handbuch der Pflanzenkrankheiten. 131, 9 748. 1880. Frank. Ueber die auf Wurzelsymbiose beruhende Ernub gewisser Buume durch unterirdische Pilze. Ber. ¢ deut. Bot. Ges. 3: 128. 1885. - Frank. Neue Mittheilungen fiber die Mycorhiza der Baume und der Monotropa hypopitys. Ber. d. deut. Bot N Ges. 3: ——. 1885. ZF Frank. Mikroorganismen des Erdbodens Ber, d. deut. Bot. Ges. 4: Hft. 8. 1886. ig Frank. Ueber die Quellung der Stickstoffnahrung de Pflanzen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 4: 293. 1886. “a Frank. Sind die Wurzelanschwellungen der Erlen und E . agnaceen Pilzgallen? Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 5:5 0. 1887. in Frank. Ueber neue Mykorhiza Formen. Ber. d. deut. E Ges. 5: 395. 1887. ‘a Frank. Ursprung und Schicksal der Saltpetersaure in ¢ Pflanze. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 5.472. 1887. Frank. Ernihrung der Pflanzen mit Stickstoff, und ueber ¢ Kreislauf desselben in der Landwirtschaft. Se p. 1888. Berlin. : Bey - Frank. d Frank. Frank. | Frank. Frank. Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF PREE NITROGEN. 197 Ueber den Einfluss welche das Sterilisiren des Erd- boden auf die Pflanzenentwickelung austibt. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 6:—. 1888. Ueber die physiologische Bedeutung der Mycorhiza. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 6:248. 1888. Untersuchungen über die Erndhrung der Pflanze mit Stickstoff. Landw. Jahrb. 18419. 496. 1888. i Was nutzen den Waldbaumen die Wurzelpilze. Forst. Bl. Jan. 1. 1889. Ueber den Experimental Nachweis der Assimilation freien Stickstoffs durch erdboden bewahnenden Algen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 7:34. 1889. Ueber die gegenwartige Stamm unserer Kenntnisse der Assimilation elementaren Stickstoffs durch die Pflanze. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 7: 234. 1889. Pilzsymbiose der Leguminosen. Sep. 1890. Berlin. Pflanzenphysiologie, 120. 1890. Berlin. Ueber Assimilation von Stickstoff aus Luft durch Robinia Pseudacacia. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 8292. 1890. , Frank und Otto. Untersuchungen uber Stickstoffsassimila- — tion in der Pflanze. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 8: 331. 1890. Frank und Otto. Untersuchungen uber Stickstoffassimila- Frank. tion in der Pflanze. Naturw. Wochen Schr. 6: 215. 1891. Neue Stimmen uber die Stickstofffrage. Deut. Landw. Presse, 21:119. 1894. Inwieweit ist der freie Luft-Stickstoff fur den Er- nihrung der Pflanzen verwerthbar? Deut. Landw. Presse, 18:779. 1891. Ueber einege neue Versuche betreffs der Stickstoffs- assimilation in der Pflanze. Deut. Landw. Presse. 18:403. 1891. Ueber die auf Verdauung von Pilze abzielende Sym- biose der mit endotropic Mykorhizen begabten Pflan- zen sowie, der Leguminosen und Erlen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 9:244. 1891. Ueber die auf den Gasaustausch beziiglichen Einrich- tungen und Thitigkeiten der Wurzelknellchen der Leguminosen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 10:271. 1892. Lehrbuch der Botanik 1:574. 1892. * YS 14 7 4 7 ¥ 7 | 198 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Frank, Die Assimilation freien Stickstoffs bei den Pfanzen in ihrer Abhängigkeit von Species, von — * Verhaltnissen und von Bodenarten. Landw. Jahrb. 210 * Hft. 1 and 2. 1892. Frank. Noch ein Wort zur Stickstoff- Frage. Deut. Landw. : Presse, 20:183. 1593. Frank. Die Assimilation des freien Stickstoffs durch d Pflanzenwelt. Bot. Ztg. 51: Abth 1. 138. 1893. Frank. Sur l'importance des Mycorhizes dans la nutrition des plantes humicoles. Rev. Eaux et Forets 38: 122, 7 1894. , Frank. Die Bedeutung der Mycorhiza die gemeine Kioter. 1 Forstwiss. Centralb. April. 1894. J Frankland E. Chemical changes in their relations to Micro organisms. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 681. 1884. * Frankland P. and G. C. The nitrifying process and its spe- cific ferment. Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond. 47:296. 1890. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. 181:107. 1891. Frankland P. Micro-organisms in their relation to cher cal change. Nature 46:135. 1892. Fries E. Sclerotium. Systema Mycologicae 2: 250. 1823. Fries Th. M. Om Vaxtbolag. Sartryck ur Svensk Tidskrift. 1892. | q Fromberg P. F. H. On the source of carbon and nitrogen m plants as derived from the soil. Jour. Ag. 2:41. 1847. Gain. Influence de l’humidité sur le development des nodosités — des Leguminosae. Compt: rend. 116:1394. 18938. Gasparini G. Osservazioni sulla struttura dei en 1 di alcune piante leguminose. Lette all. Ac. di. Napolli. 1851. 4 Gasparini G. Richercha sulla natura dei succiatoria „ 4 escrezione delle radici. 1856. 5 Gautier et Drouin. Recherches sur la fixation de Lazote par le sol et les végétaux. Compt. rend. 106: 754, 82 5 944, 1098, 1174, 1232, 1460, 1605. 1888. Gautier und Drouin. Fixirung von Stickstoff durch a 4 Boden und die Gewasser. Chem. Centralb. 1: No. es : 1892. Gautier et Drouin. Remarques sur le mecanisme de la fixa- 7 .G rend. 114:19. 1892. Mac Dougal: FIXATION’ OF FREE NITROGEN. 199 Gautier und Drouin. Fixirung des atmosphireschen Stick- stoffes durch Boden und Pflanze. Chem. Centralb. 1: No. 11. 1892. Gipeln 6. La malattia del castagno, ozzervazioni esperiene. 1879. Gibelli d. Nouvelles etudes sur la maladie du Chataignier dite maladie de l'encre. Arch. d. Biol. Ital. 3: 122. 4 Gibelli G. Nuova studi sulla malattia del castagno detta dell’ inchiostre. 1883. Bologna. Gilbert. See Laws. Gilbert. Einige neue Ergebnisse betr. d. Stickstoff Quelle d. Pflanze. Chem. Centralb. No. 46. 1886. Godlewski E. Zur Kenntniss der Nitrification. Anzeig. Akad. Wiss. in Krakau. 1892. Goebel K. Ueber Prothallium und Keimpflanzen von Lycopo- dium inundatum. Bot. Ztg. 45: 161. 1887. Goebel K. Zur Keimungsgeschichte der Farne. Ann. d. Jard. Bot. d. Buitenzorg. 7:74. 1888. Goebel K. Morphologische und Biologische Studien. 4. Ueber Javanische Lebermoose. Ann. d. Jardin. Bot. d. Bui- tenzorg 9:6. 1891. Gottsche C. M. Anatomischphysiologische Untersuchungen uber Haplomitrium Hookeri. Verh. d. kais. Leop. Car. Akad. d. Naturf. 12: Abth. 1. 265. 1843. Gottsche C. M. Ueber das Genus Monoclea. Bot. Ztg. 15: 281. 1857. Gottsche C. M. Uebersicht und kritische Wurdigung der seit dem Erscheinen der Synopsis Hepoticorum bekannt gewordenen Leistrungen in der Hepoticologie. Bot. Ztg. Beilage 16: 140. 1858. Gratiolet et Cloez. Recherches experimentales sur la végéta- tion des plantes, submergees. Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 32:41. 1851. Gratiolet et Cloez. Recherches experimentales sur la végé- tation des plantes submergees. Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 52: 275. 1851, and 53: 181. 1851. Gravis A. Observationes anatomiques sur les excroissances des racines de l'aume. Bull. d. I. Soc. d. Bot. d. Belgique. 18:Pt. 1. 50. 1879. Gravis A. Note sur les excroissances des racines de laune. Compt. rend. d. I. seance men. d. I. Soc. roy. d. bot. Belgique. 1880. 200 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Gregory E. Notes on some botanical reading done 1 laboratory of Professor Schwendener in Berlin, i June and July, 1889. Ball. Torr. Bot. Club 46: 1889, Grosglik 8. Die Mycorhiza. Wszechswiat 4:725. Warschau. Halsted B. D. Nitrogen assimilation in clover: A hint. Bull. Bot. Dept. Ag. Coll. Iowa. Feb., 1888. ay Hariot P. Sur une Algue qui vit dans les racine d. Cycad. Compt. rend. 115: 325. 1892. Hartig R. Ueber die symbiotische Erscheinungen im F zenleben. Bot. Centralb. 25:350. 1886. a Hartig R. Die pflanzliche Wurzelparasiten. Allg. Forst = Jagdztg. April. 118, 1888. 5 Hartig R. Die pflanzliche Wurzelparasiten. Centralb. f. B tt. u. Par.-kunde. 3:1, 19, 58, 91, 118. 1888. me Hartig R. Lehrbuch der Anatomie und Physiologie de! Pflanzen. 1891. 1 Hartig R. Lehrbuch der Baum krankheiten. 2Ed. 1889. Hartig Th. Jahresberichte uber die Fortschritte der Fe wissenschaft und forstliche Naturkunde. 1837. Hartig Th. Vollstahdige Naturgeschichte der Forstlic Kultur- Pflanzen. 365. 1851. Hartig Th. Luft-Boden und Pflanzenkunde in ihrer An dung auf Forstwissenschaft (und Gartenbau). r- buch der Forster. 8th Ed. 1: 1840. 9th Ed. 1851. 11th Ed. 1877. “a Hartig Th. Ueber das . Absterben der E zeln (racines chevelues Duham.) Bot. Ztg. 21: 289. Hartig Th. Anatomie und Physiologie der Holzpf 1878. Harting P. und Gunning. Onderzoekingen over de bron d Stickstoff voor de Planten en het ammoniak g N der damp-kringslucht. Amsterdam 1 3:38. 1855. a Harting P. Tegenbedenkingen op het betoog von der Herr G. J. Mulder van Waar pekomen de niet ben . Planten hare Stickstoff? Amsterdam Verslag. 4 3:89. 1855. Harting P. Recherches concernant l’assimilation de I’ de Pair par les végétaux. Compt. rend. 41: 924. 18: Harz C. 0. Ueber vergleichende Stickstoffdungungsve such a Bot. Centralb. 33:218. 1888. 201 Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 4 Heiden E. Ueber das Absorptions-Vermigen des Bodens und die Aufnahme der Pflanzen Nahrstoffe in der Pflanze. Ann. Landw. 41:111, 227, 343. 1863. Hellriegel and Wilfarth. Absorption of nitrogen by plants. Bied. Centralb. 228. 1888. Hellriegel. Welche Stickstoff Quellen stehen den Pflanzen zu Gebote? Tageblatt d. Naturforscher Versamml. z. Berlin 290. 1886. Hellriegel und Wilfarth. Untersuchungen uber die Stickstoft- nahrung der Gramineen und Leguminoseen. 1888. Berlin, Hellriegel. Ueber die Beziehungen der Bakterien zu der Stick- stoffernihrung der Leguminosen. Zeitschr. f. d. Ver. j t. Rubenzucker Industrie d. deut Reiches. 241. 1886. q Also, Nov. 1888. Hellriegel. Ueber die Stickstoffukhrung laud wirtschaftliche 3 Cultur gewuchse. Bericht. Wien. 1890. Hellriegel und Wilfarth. Erfolgt die Assimilation des freien N Stickstoffs durch die Leguminosen unter Mitwirkung * niederer Organismen? Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 7138. * 1889. Hellriegel H. Bemerkungen zu dem Aufsatze von B. Frank Ueber den Einfluss welchen das Sterilisiren der Erd- bodens auf die Pflanzenentwickelung ausubt. Ber. d. . deut. Bot. Ges. 7: 131. 1889. Henschel G. Ist die zu Mycorhizabildungen fuhrende Sym- biose an jungen Fichtenpflanzen schädlich? Oest. . Vierteljahrschr. f. Forstwesen. 113. 1887. Utner. See Nobbe, Schmid and Hotter. Hoffman H. Ueber Bacterien. Bot. Ztg. 27: 265. 1869. Hofmeister W. Allgemeine Morphologie der Gewachse. 1868. Hotter. See Nobbe, Schmid and Hiltner. 77 Houzeau A. Faits pour servir a Thistoire de la nitrification. Compt. rend. 68:821. 1869. Houzeau A. Faits pour servir a Thistoire de la nitrification. Ann. d. Chim. 25:161. 1872. Immendorf. Beitrage zur Lisung der Stickstoff frage. Landw. a Jahrb. 21: Hft 1 and 2. 1892. * Irmisch. Beitrage zur Biologie und Morphologie der Orch- ; ideen. Leipzig. 1853. _ Jackson C. T. Existence of nitrogen in plants; its origin in animals. Boston Med. and Sc. Jour. 63:289. 1860. 202 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Jager G. Ueber eine krankhafte Veranderung der Blu Organe der Weintraube. Flora 43:49. 1800. Janezewski E. V. Zur parasitische Lebensweise des Ne lichenoides. Bot. Ztg. 30:78. 1872. Janczewski E. V. Das Spitzenwachstum der Phanerc wurzeln. Bot. Ztg. Vorl. Mitth. 32:113, 1874, Jodin F. V. Du role physiologique de l’azote. Compt. 55:912. 1892. a Johow F. Die Chlorophylifreien Humusbewohner West a diens, biologisch-morphologisch dargestellt. Pring- sheim's Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot. 16: 445. 1885. Johow F. Die chlorophylifreien Humus pflanzen nachi hren biologischen und anatomischen entwickelungsge- schichten Verhiltnissen. Pringsheim's Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot. 20: 475. 1889. Jounson. Studier ofver algaparasitism hos Gunnera Le Bot. Notiser. Hft. 1:1 1894. } Joergensen A. Bidrag til Rodens Naturhistorie. Bot. Tidsskr. 10:144. 1878. y Joergensen A. Korkdanelsen paa Roden. Bot. Tidsskr. 1. 135. 1879. Jumelle H. Recherches physiologiques sur les Lichens. Rev. Gen. d. Bot, 4:49, 103, 159, 220, 259, 320. 1892. a Kamienski Fr. Die Vegetationsorgane der aug . hypopitys. Bot. Ztg. 39:457. 1881. q Kamienski Fr. Les organs vegetatifs du Monotropa bypopi-l . tys Mem. d. I. Soc. Nat. d. Sc. Nat. mer 24: 1882. Kamienski Fr. Ueber symbiotische Vereinigung von Pilzmy- celium mit den Wurzeln höherer Pflanzen. Arbeit. d. St. Petersb. Naturf. Ges. 17:34. 1886. = 4 Keller. Die Wurzelknollchen der Leguminosen. Biol. Cen- tralb. 9:97. 1889. x Kellner 0. Ueber den Gehalt einiger Wurzelgewichse an Stickstoffhaltigen Nicht-Proteinstoffen. Deut. Landw. Presse No. 82. 1880. AS Kellner und Yoshii. Ueber die Entbindung freien Stickstoffs bei der Faulniss und Nitrification. Zeitschr. f. Phys. N Chem. 12:95. 1888. f Kerner von Marilaun A. Schmarotzer. etc. Pflanzenleben 1: 4 52, 59, 147, 224, 553, 556, 695, 711, 728, 729, 730. 1890. Also 2:77, 83, 445. 1891. a Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 203 4 Kionka H. Die Wurzelknüllchen der Leguminosen. Biol. Centralb. 11: 282. 1891. Klebahn H. Die neuesten Untersuchungen uber die Wurzel- 1 ² ͤéͤ ½ 7. ⁰ͥſr...7’7—?¼½j⏑,.˙ʃ— . ᷑ ˙— mꝛ⅛t , ]˙ ˙wu w- ’ ſͤſ vuUUſ — 2 2 ae a knöllchen. Humboldt 148. 1890. Klein und Szabo. Zur Kenntniss der Wurzeln von Aesculus hippocastaneum L. Flora 63: 147, 163. 1880. Kny L. Ueber parasitische Algen. Bot. Ztg. 31: 139. 1873. Kny L. Ueber die Wurzelanschwellungen der Leguminosen und ihre Erzeugung durch Einfluss von Parasiten. Sitzungsber. d. bot. Ver. d. Prov. Brandenburg 21:55. 1879. Kny L. Zu dem Aufsatze des Herrn Prof. B. Frank Ueber Parasiten in den Wurzelnanschwellungen der Papil- ionaceen.” Bot. Ztg. 37:57. 1879. Kny L. Ueber eigenthumlich Durchwachsungen an den Wur- zelhaaren zweier Marchantiaceen, untersucht von Dr. Bottger. Sitzungsber. d. Prov. Brand. Jan. 1879. Koch und Mayer. Ueber die Aufnahme von Ammoniak durch oberirdische Pflanzentheile. Bied. Centralb. f. Landw- Sept. Hft 1873. Koch A. Zur Kenntniss der Faden in den Wurzelkn®lichen der Leguminoséen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 5: 111. 1887. | Koch A. Zur Kenntniss der Faden in den Wurzelknollchen der Leguminoseen. Bot. Ztg. 48: 597. 1890. Koch und Kossowitsch. Ueber die assimilatio von freien Stickstoff durch Algen. Bot. Ztg. 61:321. 1893. Koenig. Stickstoff Vorrat. 1887. Kolaezek. Lehrbuch der Botanik. 3741. 1856. Kossowiez. Die Herkunft des Stickstoffs in den Pflanzen. Mitth. Landw. Akad. zu Petrowsky 13:61. 1890. Kossowitsch P. Durch welche Organe nehmen die Legumi- nosen den freien Sticksotff auf. Bot. Ztg. 50: 697, 713, 729, 745, 771. 1892. Kossowitsch P. Untersuchungen ueber die Frage ob die Algen freien Stickstoff fixiren. Bot. Zig. 52:97. 1894. Kostycheff. The formation and properties of vegetable mould.” St. Petersburg Soc. Nat. Bot. 20:123. 1889. Kuhn V. R. Untersuchungen uber die Anatomie der Marattia- aceen und andere Gefiiss-Kryptogamen. Flora 72: 457. 1889. Lachmann J. Ueber Knöllchen der Leguminosen. Landw. Mittheil. Zeitschr. d. K. Lehranstalt und Versucht sta. 37. 1856. ON a Mera te eee LES. a eee 2 * aa i d a a, = 9 + * bad 3 4 r * E . ir 4 a, A n 204 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Lachmann J. Knollen an den Wurzeln der Legum Chem. Centralb. No. 18. 1892. Laurent E. Sur le microbe des nodosités des Legumir Compt. rend. 111:750. 1890. 4 Laurent E. Experiences sur la production des nodosités chen. le pois a la suite d'inoculations. Bull. d. I. Acad. Re d. Belgique 3 Ser. 1: No. 6.764. 1890. - Laurent E. Expériences sur la réduction des nitrates par végétaux. Ann. Inst. Past. No. 7:22. 1890. Laurent E. Recherches sur les nodosites radicles. un. Inst. Past. 5: 105. 1891. 4 Laurent E. Experiences sur la reduction des nitrates par les vegetaux. Rev..Mycol. 16:25. 1894. 7 Laurent. See Schloesing. © Lawes and Gilbert. On the present position of the question o the sources of nitrogen in vegetation, with some r results, and preliminary notice of new lines of in : gation. Proc. Roy. Soc. 42: No. 256. 1886. * Lawes, Gilbert and Pugh. Assimilation of nitrogen by plants. 7 Rep. Brit A. A. S. 51. 1852. a Lawes and Gilbert. On the sources of the nitrogen of E tion, with special reference to the question wh 2 plants assimilate free or uncombined nitrogen. Proc. Roy. Soc. 10:544. 1859-60. “9 Lawes and GiJbert. On the sources of thie ee of wae tion, with special reference to the question whether plants assimilate free or uncombined nitrogen. Phil. Prans. 431. 1861. Chem. Soc. Journ. 1:100. 1863. Lawes and Gilbert. On assimilation of nitrogen. Chests News, 6:127. 1863. ; Lawes and Gilbert. Assimilation of nitrogen by plants. Journ. d. Pharm. 44:281. 1863. Lawes and Gilbert. Sources of nitrogen in vegetation. Proe. Roy. Soc. 43: 108. 1887. 2 Lawes and Gilbert. On the present question of the sources ¢ f= nitrogen in vegetation, etc. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, 180:1-107. 1888. 2 Lawes and Gilbert. Fixation of free nitrogen. Proc. Roy. Soc — i 47: No. 1, 85. 1890. Lawes and Gilbert. New experiments on the question of . fixation of free ane e Proc. as Soc. Lond. * a 85. 1890. : Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 205 Laawes and Gilbert. Experiments on root tubercles and the 4 fixation of atmospheric nitrogen. Abth. f. Ag. Chem. u. Landw. Ver. d. Ges. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte. Halle Sept. 1891. Lawes and Gilbert. Sources of nitrogen in leguminous plants. Jour. Rev. Ag. Soc. 3 Ser. 2:657. 1892. > LeComte H. Note sur le Mycorhiza, Bull. d. Soc. Bot. d. France 34:30. 1887. Leone und Magnanimi. Nitrification des organischen Stick- stoffs. Chem. Centralb. 1: No. 5. 1891. Leone T. Nitrificazione e denitrificazione nella terra végétale. Gaz. Chim. ital. 20: 149. 1890. Leplay H. Sur la formation des aides organiques, des matieres organiques, azotées, et du nitrate de potasse. etc: Compt. rend. 106: 1020. 1888. Levy J. Beitrag zur Lehre von d. Stickstoffaufnahme der Pflanzen, Dissertation. 1889. Halle. Lehman C. Origin of nitrogen in plants. Physiol. Chem. 3: 184. 1854. Liebig J. von. Die organische Chemie in ihrer Anwendung auf Agricultur und Physiologie. 4.164. 1842. Braun- schweig. Liebig J. von. Die Pflanze, Liebig Annalen 121165. 1862. Liebig J. von. Ueber die Stickstoff-haltigen Nahrungsmittel 5 des Pflanzenreichs. Liebig Annalen 39:129. 1841. Liebig J. von. Ueber die Stickstoff-haltigen Nahrungsmittel des Pflanzenreichs Ann. d. Chem. 4:186. 1842. Liebig J. von. Ueber die Stickstoff-haltigen Nahrungsmittel des Pflanzenreichs. Sturgeon Ann. Electr. 10: 483. 1843. Liebig J. von. Ueber die Stickstoff-haltigen Nahrungsmittel des Pflanzenreichs. Taylor Se. Mem. 3:244. 1843. Liebscher. Assimilation of nitrogen by leguminous and non- : leguminous plants.” Deut. landw. Presse No. 104. 1080. 1892. Liebscher. A contribution to the nitrogen question.” Deut. 3 landw. Presse 419. 1893, and Jour. Landw. 41:139. 8 1893. a 4 Liebscher. Nochmals die Stickstoff- frage. Deut. Landw. F Presse. 20: 1037. 1893. Link H. F. Grundlehre der Anatomie und Physiologie der 4a : Pflanzen. 1807. Link H. F. Grundlehre der Krauterkunde. 1837. : = 2 = 8 nenn Pe ae eee ee Oe n f 1 bee ue yw * 206 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Loew 0. Ueber die Ernthrungsweise des nitrificirenden 8 pilzes Nitromonas, Bot. Centratb. 46.222. 1891. 4 Loew 0. ‘Nitrification by a Schizomycete. Bot. Ver. = ne 4 chen. April 20. 1891. Loew 0. The synthetical powers of micro-organisms, 8 23:144. 1894. Lonay A. La question de |'azote et culture les Liguminéasen, 1889. Nivelles. . Lotsy J. P. A contribution to the investigation of the ilation of free atmospheric nitrogen by White Black Mustard. Dept. Ag. Bull. 18. 1894. Lotsy J. P. On the assimilation of free nitrogen by plants Johns Hopkins Univ. Cir. 13: No. 101, 30. 1894. Lundstroem A. N. Om mycodomatier pa papilionscernads — rötter. Bot. Notiser No. 5. 1887. Lundstroem A. N. Ueber symbiotische Bildungen bei den Pflanzen. Bot. Centralb. 28: 282. 1886. Lundstroem A. N. Ueber Mycodomatien in den Wurzeln 4 Papilionaceen. Bot. Centralb. 33: 159, 187. 1888. Also Naturv. Studentsullsk. April 28, 1887. Upsala. Lundstroem A. NV. Vort. Pflanzen biologische Studien 2:71. — Lundstroem A. N. Einige Beobdachtungen ueber ove borealis. Bot. Centralb. 38:697. 1889. MacDougal D. T. Nitrogen assimilation by Isopyrum ben natum. Minn. Bot. Stud. Pt. 2. 39. 1894. Magnanimi, Leon und. Nitrification des organischen suck. stoffs. Chem. Centralb. 2: No. 5. 1891. Magnus P. Nostoc lichenoides nicht parasitic. Bot. Ztg. 21.˙ 251. 1873. 4 Magnus P. Durch Parasiten veranlasste Wurzelauswachse.. Sitzber. d. Bot. Ver. d. Prov. Brand. 79. 1877. a Magnus P. Ueber Schinzia cypericola in d. Wurzeln von Cy- perus flavescens und Juncus bufonius. Verhandl. 4. Bot. Ver. d. Prov. Brand 21. 1879. Magnus P. Drei neue Pilze. Ver. d. bot. Ver. f. d. Pros : Brand. 20: 50. 1878. Also 22:119. 1880. 3 Magnus P, Wurzelanschwellungen des Rubus Idaeus. Ber. a. l d. Hauptversamml. d. Bot. Ver. d. Prov. Brand. 2g Berlin October 29, 1881. F a Magnus P. Ueber einige Arten der Gatt. Schinzia Ber 4. deut. Bot. Ges. 6: 100. 1888. n „ r * * ks 8 al Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 207 _ Magnus P. Das Auftreten der Schinzia cypericola P. Magn. in 5 Bayern und einiges uber deren Verbreitung in Europa. 5 Separat. 1893. Berlin. 4 Malphigi. Anatomie plantarum pars sec. de Gallis. Op. 2: 126. 8 1687. Leiden. i 5 Marcano et Muntz. Sur la formation des terres nitreés dans les regions tropicales. Jour. d. Pharm. et. Chem. 5 Ser. 12: No. 6 1885. Harchal E. Sur la production de bammoniaque dans le sol 15 par les microbes; also Ann. d. I. Soc. Belg. d. Mic. 18: i 69. 1893. Marchand L. Sur une Nostochineé parasiteé. Bull. Soc. bot. d. France 26: 336. 1879. Hasse d. On the structure and functions of the subterranean 5 parts of Lathraea squamaria. Jour. Bot. 24:257. 1887. Mattei. Ancora sull origine della Vicia faba. 1887. Bologna. Mattirolo 0. Sul parassitismo dei Tartuffe sulla quistione delle Mycorhizae. Malphigia 1: Fasc. 8, 9. 1887. Mattirolo 0. Si contengono bacteri nei tubercoli radicali delle Leguminose. Malphigia 1: Fasc. 10. 464 and 11, 536. 1887. Mattirolo 0. Sur le parasitisme des truffes et sur la question des Mycorhiza. Arch. Ital. Biol. 9:218. 1888. Mattirolo 0. Sur le parasitisme des truffes et sur la question des mycorhizes. Arch. Ital.d. Biol. 9. 1888. Mayer A. Lehrbuch der Agriculturchem. 3rd Ed. 1: 163. ——. MecMurtrie. Notes on absorption of nitrogenous nutriment by ‘ the roots of plants. Proc. Brit. A. A. S. 139. 1887. Mene C. Experiences sur l’influence d. gaz dans la végéta- tion, Dingler polytech. Jour. 119:453. 1851. Mene C. Experiences sur influence du gaz azote dans la végé - tation. Compt. rend. 32:180. 1891. Menozzi. See Alpe. Merker P. Gunnera macrophylla Blum. Inaug. Diss. Mar- burg, 1888. Flora 72: 211. 1889. Meyen J. Ueber das Hervorwachsen parasitischer Gebilde aus den Wurzeln anderer Pflanzen. Flora 12: 49. 1829. Meyer A. Ueber die Knollen der 3 Orchideen. Archiv. d. Pharmacie 24. 1886. Milde. Notizen zur Kenntniss von Anthoceros und Blasia. Bot. Ztg. 9. 629. 1851. 8 — * 3 5 a 2 * f * 5 ia 1 208 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1 bh Miles. Die nitrilzirenden Mikroben, Chem. Centralb. Ne 47. 1887. Miles. Biological factors in the nutrition of farm crops. A. A. A. S. 483. 1890. Millon E. Nitrification. Chem. News 2:No. 56. 268, 887. See also Compt. rend. 17: 452, 470. Millon E. Theorie chimique de la nitrification. Jour. d. F $8:825. 1860. Millon E. Note sur la nitrification, ete. Compt. rend. 61:6 1860. Millon E. De la nitrification en la Algerie. Jour. de F $8:246. 1860. Millon E. Theorie chimique de la nitrification. Compt. 51:548. 1860. Millon E. Theorie chimique de la nitrification. Chem. } 2:337. 1860. a Millon E. Nitrification. Chem. News. 82. 1864. = Moebius. Ueber endophytic Algen. Biol. Centralb. 11: 246. 1891. Moebius. Conspectus algarum endophyticum. La Notarisia 6 1221, 1279, 1291. 1891. Moeller H. Plasmodiophora Alni. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 3 102, 1885. Moeller H. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Frankia subt Brunch. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 8: 215. 1890. Moeller H. Bemerkungen zu Frank's Mittheilung urber den Dimorphismus der Wurzelknöllchen der Erbse. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 10: 242. 1892. “a. Moeller A. Ueber die Cultur flechtenbildener Ascomyceten ohne Algen. Inaug. Diss. Munster. 1887. Morck. Ueber die Formen der Bakterioiden bei der ein spezies der Leguminosen. Inaug. Dissert. Leipzig. Morren C. Experiences sur absorption de |’azote par les ani- malcules et les algues. Compt. rend. 38:932. 1854. Morren C. Experiences sur l’absorption de l’azote p= ae ni- malcules et les algues. Ann. Soc. Nat. (Zool. ) 1:3 1854. : Mulder G. H. Ueber die condensation des Stickstoffs aus der’ Atmosphire in der Ackererde und ueber das Erni a4 rungsvermigen der organische Bestandtheile Bodens fur die Pflanze. Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 32: 8 1844. Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 209 Mulder G. H. Ueber die Quelle des Stickstoffs in den Pflanzen. * Flora 28: 239. 1845. Mulder G. H. Van Waar bekommen die niet bemeste planten 4 hare Stickstoffs. Amsterdam. Verslag. 3:61. 1855. _ Mulder G. H. Versuch einer Phys. Chem. 751. Muller P. E. Bemerkungen ueber die Mycorhiza der Buche. Bot. Centralb. 26:22. 1886. Muntz, See Schloesing. _ Muntz A. De quelques faits d oxydation et de reduction, os produits par les organismes microse. du sol. Journ. d. Pharm. et d. Chem. 5 Ser. 12:No. 6. 1885. _ Muntz and Marcano. Sur la formation des terres nitreés dans les regions tropicales. Journ. d. Pharm. et d. Chem. 5 | Ser. 12: No. 6. 1885. Muntz A. Ueber einige Oxidation und Reduction durch Mik- roorganismen im Boden. Chem. Centralb. No. 37. ; 1885. Muntz A. Ueber d. Bildung d. saltpeterhaltigen Erden in den „ Tropen. Chem. Centralb. No. 37. 1885. _Muntz A. Sur la decomposition des engrais organiques dans P le sol. Compt. rend. 110: 1206. 1890. Uunt⸗ A. Sur la decomposition des engrais organiques dans 3 le sol. Compt. rend. 110: 10286. 1890. _ Muntz A. Du role des engrais verts comme furnures azoteés. es Compt. rend. 110:972. 1890. Hunt A. Sur la formation des nitrates dans la terre. Compt. 3 rend. 112:1142. 1891. -Muntz A. Sur la formation des nitrates dans la terre. Compt. 3 rend. 112:11438. 1591. _Muntz and Coudon. La fermentation ammoniacale de la terre. Ann. Agron. 19: 209. 1893. : v. H. J. I. The fixation of free nitrogen. Nature, 24:41. 1890. : Vagel! Botanische Beitrage: Pilze im Innern von Zellen Linnaea 16: 278. 1842. Vuegell. Ernihrungsmechanismus der niederen Organismen. Sitaber. d. Munch. Akad. July, 1879. Naegell. Ernahrung der niederer Pilze durch Kohlen und 2 Stickstoffverbindungen. Bot. Mittheil. 3: 395. 1881. Nathusius. Symbiose der Waldbaume mit Mycorhiza. Zeit- schr. f. Naturw. 62: Hft. 6 1890. “Nicolai. Das Wachstum der Wurzel. Schr. d. phys.-dkon. a Ges. z. Koenigsberg. 7:35, 78. 1875. 210 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. + ia Noack F. Ueber Micorhizende-bildende Pilze. Bot. Zt 47:889. 1889. Nobbe F. Vegetationsversuche in Boden mit lok Nathrstoffen. Landw. Ver. Sta. 6:98. 1568. Nobbe F. Ueber die Stickstoffernthrung der Legum Verhandl. d. Ges. Deut. Naturf. und Aerzte. Ver samml z. Bremen, 2:55), 1890. 4g Nobbe F. Stickstoffernthrung der Leguminosen. Chem. Cen tralb. 1: No. 6. 1891. 0 Nobbe, Schmid, Hiltner and Hotter. Versuche ueber die 8 stoffassimilation der Leguminosen. Landw. Ver. | Sta. 39: 3827. 1891 8 Nobbe, Schmid, Hiltner and Hotter. Ueber die physiole Bedeutung den Wurzelknélichen von Eleagnus tifolius. Landw. Ver. Sta. 41:138. 1892. Nobbe, Schmid, Hiltner and Hotter. Ueber die Verbreit fihigkeit der Leguminosen Bacterien im E Landw. Ver. Sta. 41: 137. 1892. N Nobbe and Hiltner. The interchange between leguminow plants and the bacteria causing root tuberc Suchss. Landw. Zeitschr. 165. 1893. Oliver F. W. On Sarcodes sanguinea. Ann. Bot. 4: 1890. Otto R. Die Assimalation des freien atmospharischen St stoffes durch die Pflanze. Bot. Centralb. 46: 387. 1890. Also, 47:62, 123, 175. 1891. E Otto. See Frank. Penzig 0. Die Krankheit der Edelkastanien und B. nk’ Mykorhiza. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 3:301. 1885. Persoon. Traité sur les champignons comestibles. 1818. Petermann A. Contribution a la question de l’azote. d. I Acad. Roy. d. Belg. 1891. 2 Petermann A. Beitrage zur Stickstoffrage. Abstract. Chem. Centralb. 1:988. 1893. Ibid. 2:889. 1892. Ibid. 3: No. 20. 1892. = Petermann A. Contribution a la question de l'azote. Mem. d l Acad. roy. d. Belg. 47. 1892. Petermann A. Contribution a la question de L'azote. Acad. Roy. Belg. 3, Ser. 25: 267. 1893. 2 Pfeffer W. Ueber Fleischfressende Pflanzen und 2 Ernahrung durch Aufnahme organischer Stic be ueberhaupt. Landw. Jahrb. 6:969. 1877. Aa Pfeffer W. Pflanzenphysiologie 1:239. 1880. Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 211 a “Pfeiffer A. Die Beziehungen der Boden Capillaritat zum 7 Transport von Bacterien. Zeitschr f. Hyg. 1: 394. 1886. Pfeiffer A. Antwort auf die Entgegnung des Herrn Dr. Soyka. ete. Zeitschr. f. Hyg. 2: 239. 1887. Pfeil W. Wunschenwerthe Abbildung der Baumwurzeln wie a sie sich nach dem Alter des Baumes in verschiedenen Boden andern. Krit. Bl. f. Forst. u. Jagdwiss. 25: 255 1848. ö Prell W. Recension von Schacht's Beitrage zur Anatomie | und Physiologie der Gewiichse.” Krit. BL f. Forst. u. 4 Jagdwiss. 35:51. 1855. _ Pichard P. Influence dans les terres neues des propor- tions d'argile et d'azote organique sur la fixation d’azote atmospherique, sur la conservation de |’azote , et sur la nitrification. Compt. rend. 114:81. 1892. Pichi. Alcuue osservazione sui tubercoli radicali delle Leg- | uminose. Atti della Soc. Tose. di Sc. nat. 1888. bott. Untersuchungen uber Wachstumisverhaltnisse der Leg- 7 uminoseen. Landwirtsch. Versuchssta. 25: Hft. 1 and 2. Poulsen V. A. Bidrag til Triuridaceernes. 1886. q eee V. A. Triuris major n. sp. Et Bidrag til Triurida- ceernes Naturhistorie. Bot, Tiddskr. 17: 293. 1890. “Prantl K. Untersuchungen ueber die Regeneration des Veg- ; etationspunktes an Angiospermwurzeln. Arbeitld. q bot. Inst. 2. Wurzburg. 1:546. 1874. : | Prantl K. Die Assimilation freien Stickstoff und der Parasitis- | mus von Nostoc. Hedw. 28:1385. 1889. . Ueber die Wurzelknöllchen der Leguminosen. 4 Bot. Cent ralb..36:215, 248, 280. 1888. Prazmowski. Das Wesen und die biologische Bedeutung der q Wurzelknélichen der Erbse. Ber. a. d. Sitz. d. Akad. i. Krakau. 1889. Prazmowski. Die Wurzelknollchen der Erbse. die Aetiologie 1 und Entwickelungsgeschichte der Knillchen. Landw. Vers. Sta. 37: Hft. 3 and 4, 104, 161. 1890. See also ss 38: Hft. 5. 1890. Prillieux E. De la structure anatomique et du mode de veg- a etation du Neottia nidus. avis. Ann. d. Se. Nat. Bot. 1 4 Ser. 5: 267. 1856. eux E. Sur la nature et la cause de la formation des tubercles qui nassent sur les racines des Leguminéuses. Bull. Soc. Bot. d. France. 26:98. 1879. ie 212 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. | Prillleux E. Anciennes observations sur les tubercles de racines des Leguminéuses. Compt. rend. 111: 924 1890. . Prillieux E. Anciennes observations sur les tubercules ; rucines des Leguminéuses. Bull. d. I. Soe. Bot. | France. 13: No. 1. 1891. 4 Prove. Untersuchungen ueber die Stickstoffnahrung der i. sen. Zeitschr. Landw. Ver. Bayern. 82:85. 1892. Pugh, Lawes and Gilbert. Assimilation of nitrogen by plan 4 Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 51. 1852. Rabuteau. Recherches sur les metamorphoses et I’ elimi tion des azotites. Compt. rend. Soc, d. Biol. 5 Ser 1:66. 1870. a Raulin. Etudes chimiques sur la végétation des Mv Compt. rend. 57: 229. 1868. Rees M. Entstehung der Flechte-Collema glaucescens. atsber. d. Berl. Akad. Oct. 1871. sl Rees M. Ueber den Parasitismus von Elaphomyces grant latus. Sitzungs- Ber. der Physik.-Med. Soc. z Er langen. May. 1880. st Rees M. Ueber Elaphomyces und sonstige Wurzelpilze. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 3: 293. 1885. Rees und Fisch. Untersuchungen ueber den Bau und geschichte der Hirschtruffel-Elaphomyces. Bibl Bot. Hft. 7:1. 1887. Reinke J. Ueber gonidienartige Bildungen in einer ¢ lischer Pflanze. Nach. v. d. konigl Ges. d Wiss. a Univ. z. Göttingen, 100. 1871. 1872. Reinke J. Andeutungen ueber den bau der Wurzel von F Pinea. Bot. Ztg. 30:49. 1872. Reinke J. Morphologische Abhandlungen. 1873. r Reinke J. Zur Kenntniss der Rhizome von Corallorhiza t N Epipogon. Flora. 56: 145, 161. 177. 1873. a Reinke J. Zwei parasitische Algen. Bot. Ztg. 37:473. 1879 Reinsch H. Ueber eigenthumlichen Stoff in der Monot hypopitys. Jahrb. f. prakt. Pharm. u. verw. F 25:193. 1852. Reissek 8. Endophyten der Pflanzenzelle. 1846. Uren. Resa F. Ueber die Periode der Wurzelbildung. Inaug. D 1877. a Resa F. Untersuchungen ueber die Periode der Wu — | dung, insbesondere bei den Holzgewachse. Forstl. ! 321. 1878. . "Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 218 . A. Pflanzen- Physiologie. 1835. Reuss H. Der Waldfeldbau im Dienste des Forstkulturbe- c triebs. Centralb. f. d. gesamm. Fortstw. 289. 354. 0 ‘Rockwood, s« see Atwater. _ Rossmassier. Der Wald. 418. 1863. _ Rostrop E. Sygdomme hos Skovtraeerne, foraarsagede af Tg ikkerustatige Snyltesvampe. Tidsskr. f. Skovbrog. 4 4.113. 1880. Russel H. L. The fixation of free nitrogen by plants Bot. * Gazette. 19: 284. 1894. - Russow. Vergleichende Untersuchungen der Leitbundelkryp- 7 togamen. 122. 1872. St. Petersburg. Bylands T. G. On the nature of the byssoid substance found 2 investing the roots of Monotropa Hypopitys. The 3 Phytologist 1:341. 1842. Sarauw F. L. Ueber die Mykorhizen unserer Waldbaume. Bot. Centralb. 53:343. 1893. Sarauw F. L. Rodsymbiose og my korhizer saerlig hos 4 skovtraerne, 1893. Sachs J. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte d. Collema bulbosa. . Bot. Ztg. 13:1. 1855. Sachsse,. Keimung von Pisum sativum. 1872. _ Serno, Ueber das Auftreten und des Verhalten der Salpeter- i: saure in den Pflanze. Landw. Jahrb. 18:877. 1889. Schacht H. Physiologische Botanik. die Pflanzenzelle. 1852. Schacht H. Beitrag zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Wur- „ zel. Flora 46. 201. 1883. Schacht H. Ueber Pilzfaden im innern der Zellen und der f Starkemehlkorner. Ber. u. d. Verh. d. königl. preuss. a Akad. d. Wiss. z Berlin. 377. 1854. Schacht H. Beitrag zur Anatomie und Physiologie der Ge 2 wiichse. 160. 1854. , Schacht H. Lehrbuch d. Anatomie und Physiologie. 2: 147. = 1859. Schacht H. Der Baum 172. 1860. Pak. Symbiose einer Ericaceae und Mycorhiza. Zeitschr. oe f. Naturw. 62:Hft. 6. 1890. "Schenk. Ueber Cycas Wurzeln mit Algencolonien. Tagebl. d. 45 Versamml. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte z. Leipzig. 1872. Schindler. Ueber die biologische Bedeutung der Wurzelknoll- * chen bei der Papilionaceen. Jour. f. Landw. 33: 325. a 1885. R . 214 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 5 Schindler. Ueber die Bedeutung die sogenannten Wars knolichen bei der Papilionaceen. Oester. Wochenb. 11: No. 34. 1885. Schindler. Zur Kenntniss der Wurzelkn®lichen der F aceen. Bot. Centralb. 18:86. 1888. Schlechtendal. Phaseolus multiflorus. Bot. Zig. 10:5 1852. Schleiden M. J. Grundzuge der wissenschaftliche Be 1842-43. 1845-46. 1849-50, Schlicht A. Ueber neve Fille von Symbiose der F wurzeln mit Pilzen. Ber. d. deut. Bot Ges. 269. 1886 Schlicht A. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Verbreitung und 0 Bedeutung der Mykorhizen. Inaug. Diss. Univ. Er- langen. 1889. i Schloesing and Muntz. Sur la nitrification par les ferm organises. Compt. rend. 80: 1250, 1873; 84:301, 85: 1018, 1878, and 86: 891, 1879. Schloesing Th. Sur les relations de l’azote osphéric avec la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 106: 805, 8 982, 1123. 1888; also 107:290. 1888. 4 Schloesing Th. Sur la nitrification de Lammoniaque. Comp’ rend. 109: 423, 883. 1889. Schloesing Th. Sur les relations de l'azote abe avec la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 109: 210, 2 1889. Schloesing and Laurent. Sur la fixation de l'azote gazeux p les Legumineuses. Compt. rend. 111:750, 1800; 115: 659, 732. 1892. 1 Schloesing Th. Remarques au sujet des observations de M. Berthelot, ete. Compt. rend. 110: 612. 1890. ye Schloesing Th. Sur absorption l’ammoniaque de atm phere par la terre végétale. Compt. rend. 110: 499. 1890. Schloesing and Laurent. Sur la fixation de l’azote libre p les plantes. Compt. rend. 113:776. 1891. 4 Schloesing Th. Observations sur la communication de M. Berthelot. Compt. rend. 115:636. 1892. ii Schloesing and Laurent. Recherches sur la fixation de l’azote libre par les plantes. Ann. Inst. Past. 6: 65. 1892. Schmid. See Nobbe, Hiltner and Hotter. Schmitter. New experiraents in soil inoculation.” Woe enschr. ökön. Ges. 251. 1891. 5 “a 72 ro 2 5 1 mae 2 FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 215 Sehmitz r Phylicelphtm: Arioeal. Bot. Zig. 40:523, 539, N ‘ 566, 579. 1882. Schneider A. Observations on some American Rhizobia. . Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 19:205. 1892. Schneider A. Recent investigations concerning rhizobia and 2 free nitrogen assimilation. Ag. Science 7:549. 1893. Schneider A. A new factor in Agriculture. University of Illi- 4 nois. Ag. Ex. Sta. Bull. No. 29, December, 273. 1893. Schneider A. Morphology of the root tubercles of the Le- 4 guminosae. Am. Naturalist 27 782. 1893. Schneider A. Beitrag zur Keuntniss der Rhizobien. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 12:11. 1894. Solms-Laubach. Der Aufbau des Stockes von Psilotum tri- £ quetrum und dessen Entwickelung aus der Brutknospe. Ann. d. Jard. Bot. d. Buitenzorg. 4:139. 1884. Sorauer P. Wurzelknollen. Pflanzenkrankheiten 1: 743. . 1886. Sorauer P. Die Hernie der Erlenwurzeln. Pflanzenkrank- heiten 2:73. 1886. Sorauer P. Zusammenstellung der neuern Arbeiten ueber die N Wurzelkndllchen und deren als Bakterien ausgespro- chene Inhaltskorperchen. Bot. Centralb. 31: 308. 343, 1887. Schuetzler J. B. Sur les germes organises de la nitrification. _ Bull. Soc. vand. d. Sc. Nat. Lausanne. 22:213. 1886. Schulze E. Ueber die Processe durch welche in der Natur ein freier Stickstoff in Stickstoffverbindungen tiberge- hy gefuhrt wird. Landw. Jahrb. 6: Hft. 4 and 5. 1877. Schwarz F. Die Wurzelhaare der Pflanzen. Unters. a. b. bot. 8 Inst. z Tub. 1: Hft. 1. 135. 1883. _ Schwendener 8. Ueber die wahre Natur der Flechten. Verh. 3 d. schweiz. naturf, Ges. z. Rheinfelden. Sept. 1867. Schwendener 8. Untersuchungen ueber den Flechtenthallus. Nachtrag Nageli, Beitrag zur wiss. Bot. 4: 195. 1868. Saöchwendener 8. Die Algentypen der Flechtengonidien. 1869. Soyka J. Der Boden. Handbuch d. Hygiene u. d. Gewerb- 3 krankheiten. 1: Abt. 2 Hft. 3. 1887. Soyka J. Entgegnung auf Herrn Dr. A. Pfleiffer's Aufsatz om »Die Beziehungen der Boden Capillaritat.” Zeitschr. ss &.- Hyg. 2:96. 1887. Storer. Agriculture, 1:33,309, 420, 467, ete. 1892. Boston. Tacke B. Ueber die Entwickelung von Stickstoff bei Faulniss. Landw. Jahrb. 16: 917. 1887. 1 = a we 9 * 7 ig ad eis * * * r J f J a * 80 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Tacke B. Ueber den Stickstoffverlust bei der vars Hs nd den Stickstoffgewinn im vegetations freien Erdbe Landw. Jahrb. 18: 439. 1889. Thomae K. Bildung der Elweisskörper in der Pflanze. turw. Wochenschr. 8: 409. 1892. a ; Thomas M. B. TheGenusCorallorhiza. Bot. Gazette 18: 16 3. 1892. , Treviranus L. C. Ueber die Neigung der Halsengewichse 7 unterirdischen Knollenbildung. Bot. Zig. 11: 1853. Thumen von. Les Mycorhizes et les théoriés nouvelles de a 5 vie complexe biologie. Rev. gen. d. Sc. Pures et Appl. 1: 326. a Tieghem P. van. Recherches sur la symmetrie de la des plantes vasculaires. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. Bot. 5& 13:5. 1871. ; 7 Tieghem P. van. Sur le reseau de soutien de l’eeorce de la racine. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. Bot. 7 Ser. 7:375. 1888. Tieghem van and Douliot. Recherches comparatives sur l'or- igine des membres endogenes dans les plantes 1 culaires. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 7 Ser. 8:1. 1888. 4 Treub M. Korte bot. aanteekenimgen II; Nostoccolonien in Gunnera macrophylla Blum. Nederland. Kruidkrund. 4 Archief. 2 Ser. 3:407. 1882. | Treub M. Etudes sur les Lycopodiaceés. Ann. d. Jard. 4. 1 Bot. Buitenzorg 5:87. 1886. Troschke. Ueber der Kultur der Lupin im wasserige Nahr losung und ueber der Wurzelanschwellungen der Lu- pine. Mittheil a. d. Vers. Sta. Regenw. 1884. Troschke. Die gegenwirtigen stand der Stickstoffrage. Woch. enschr. d. pühmmerschen Skon. Ges. 24:4. 1884. 90 Tschirch. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Wurzelknüllchen ¢ Leguminosen. Ber. d Bot. Ges. 5:58. 1887. 1 Tschirch. Ueber der Wurzelknüllchen der Leguminosen. Ges. Naturw. Freunde z. Berlin No. 4. 1887. 5 Pe Tschirch. Ueber den Einfluss des Sterilisirens des Erbodens auf die darin wachsenden Pflanzen. Tagebl. d. 60 Ve samml. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte i. Wiesbaden, Sept. 1887. Tschirch. Ueber die Untersuchungen des Herrn Frank: Ueber die Wurzelsymbiose der Ericaceen. Tagebl. d. 60 Ver- samml. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte i. Wiesbaden. N 4 1887. ia pk he i Ue he a ee ta A Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 217 Tecntreh. Ueber die Entwickelungsgeschichte der Bakterioid - en in der Wurzeln der Leguminosen. Tagebl. d. 60 Versamml. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte i. Wiesbaden, Sept. 1887. Tubeuf C. V. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Baumkrankheiten. 1888. Berlin. Tulasue L. Observations sur le genre Elaphomyces. Ann. 3 Tulasne L. Fungi Hypogaei. 1857. d. Sc. Nat. Bot. 2 Ser. 16:5. 1841. Unger F. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der parasitischer Pflanzen. Ann. e. Wien. Mus. d. Naturgesch. 2:13. 1840. 2 Unger F. Versuche ueber die Ernährung der Pflanzen. Flora 25:2, 241. 1842. Unger F. Ursprung des von den Pflanzen ausgeschiedenen Stickstoffgas. Wien Sitzungsbar. 10414. 1853. Unger F. Die Pflanze und die Luft. Skofitz. Bot. Wochenbl. $:187. 1854. vyannucelni G. Sull' assorbimento e diffusione dell azoto e dei nitrati nel terreno privo di vegetazione. Anghiari. 1891. Ville d. Note sur Passimilation de Pazote de Pair par les plantes. Compt. rend. 31:578. 1851. Vine d. Note sur l’assimilation de Tazote de l'air par les plantes. Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 52:60. 1851. Ville G. Recherches experimentales sur la végétation. Compt. rend. 35:464, 650. 1852. Vine G. Recherches experimentales sur la végétation. Cos : mos. 1:669. 1852. Also 2:309,. 1853. vine G. Recherches experimentales sur la végétation. Ann. Nat. Hist. 12:68. 1853. vine d. Recherches experimentales sur la végétation. Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 58: 10,368. 1853. Ville G. Recherches experimentales sur la végétation. Proc. Roy. Soc. 6:307. 1853. vine G. ae de l’azote de Fair par les plantes. Compt. rend. 38: 705, 723. 1859. i Ville G. Absorption de l’azote de Pair par les plantes. Jour. f. Prakt. Chem. 62:121, 183. 1854. 4 Ville G. Sur lassimilation du gaz azote de Pair par les végé- a taux. Bibl. Univ. Arch. 30:305. 1855. a vie G. Quel est le role des nitrates dans l’oconomie des = plantes? Compt. rend. 41:987. 1855. Also 43:85, 612. 1856. „ 4 Dee rs Mo Fe Se ees ou : n 2 od hy * — Su ye oe ee ee aD ste Mies i, 218 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Ville G. De l'etat auquelse trouve quand il est absorbe l'azote quiles plantes tirent de air. Compt. rend. 43:148, 1856. a Ville G. Quel est le role des nitrates dans l’oconomie ¢ plantes? Ann. d. Chim. et Phys. 49:168. 1887. Ville d. Nouvelles recherches sur le role des principes ganiques dans l'oconomie de la nutrition ve Compt. rend. 47:438. 1858, ¥ Ville G. De lumportance compareé des agents de la produe- tion végétale. Compt. rend. 51:874. 1860. 4 Ville G. ‘‘ Nitrification.” Mem. Novorossian Soc. Nat. 17: 1. 1892. 3 Vines 8. H. Note on the Nitrogenons nutrition of the E 3 Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 741. 1888. a Vines S. H. On the relation between the formation of tuber- 4 cles on the roots of Leguminosae and the presence of nitrogen in the soil. Ann. Bot. 2: 386. 1888-89. * Vittadini C. Monographia Lycoperdineorum. Mem. d. Accad. d. Se d. Torino. 2 Ser. §:145. 1843. Vonhoene H. Ueber das Hervorbrechen endogener Organe dem Mutterorgane. Flora. 6:227, 243, 268. 1880, Vuillemin P. Les tubercles radicaux dés Légumineuses. 4 d. Sc. Agron. franc. et “trang. 1: 121. 1888. 7 Vuillemin P. Remarques sur la memoire de Lundstroem. Jour. d. Bot. April. 1888, 4 Vuillemin P. Antibiose et Symbiose. Ass 'n. fr. pour Tavan. 4 d. Sc. 18. 1889. 4 Vuillemin P. Les tubercles des Légumineuses et leurs habi- * tants. Bull. Soc. I. Sc. d. Nancy 2 Ser. 9. dase. 22. 1887. Also Separate. Paris, 1889. a Vuillemin P. Les Mycorhizes. Rev. Gen. d. Sc. pures et app. 1: 326. 1890. 2 Ward M. On the tubercular swellings on the roots of Vici faba. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. 178:139. 1887. an Ward M. Some recent publications bearing on the source of nitrogen in plants. Ann. Bot. 1:325. 1887-88. Zz Ward M. On the tubercles of leguminous plants with special reference to the pea and bean. Proc. Roy. Soc. 46: 431. Ward H. Symbiose und Symbiotische Gihrungen. Che 1 Centralb. 1: No. 18. 1892. r Ward M. Recent investigations and ideas on the fixation ¢ nitrogen by plants. eres 49:511. 1894. Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 219 Waage Th. Ueber haubenlose Wurzeln der Hippocastanien Bi is und Sapindaceen. Ber. d. deut. Bot. Ges. 9: 139. 1891. Wagner P. Ist es wahr das der weisse Senf den freien Stick- . stoff der atmospharischen Luft aufnimmt und nach Art 5 7 der Leguminosen Stickstoffbereichenden wirkt? Deut. Landw. Presse, 20:901. 1893. Wagner P. Einige Zeit und Streitfragen aus dem Gebiet der Dingungslehre. Deut. Landw. Presse, 20:913, 933, } 1004, 1893. Wahrlich W. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Orchideenwurzel- pilze. Bot. Zig. 44:481. 1886. Warington. Alterations in the properties of the nitric fer- i ments by cultivation. Chem. News, 43. 1881. Warington. On alterations in the properties of the nitric fer- ment by cultivation. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 393. 1881. Warington. Some practical aspects of recent investigations 4 on nitrification. Jour. Soc. Arts. Lond. 30:532. 1881-2. ; Also Nature, 30:644. 1884. ‘ Warington. On nitrates in the soil. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 469. 1883. Warington. On nitrification. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 682. 1884. Warington. On nitrification. Jour. Chem. Soc. Lond. 45: 537. N 1884. Also Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 54: 682. 1885. Warington. On the distribution of the nitrifying organism in the soil. Chem. News. 54:228. 1886. Warington. On the distribution of the nitrifying organism ia the soil. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. 582. 1886. _ Warington. On the power of certain bacteria to form organic 5 compounds from inorganic matter. Rep. Brit. A. A. S. . 866. 1890. Warington. Recent investigations on nitrification. Ag. Sci- ence 7:34. 1893. Warming. Hippophat rhamnoides. Smaabiologiske og rmor- fologiske Bidrag. Bot. Tidsskrift 9: 108. 1876. Weber C. Ueber den Pilz der Wurzelanschwellungen Juncus bufonius. Bot. Ztg. 42: 369. 1884. Wieke. Beobdachtungen an Chenopodium vulvularia uber die Ausscheidung von Trimethylamin. Bot. Ztg. 20: 393. 3 1862. Wiesner. Biologie der Pflanzen. 1889. Wien. — 220 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Wigand. Bacterien innerhalb der geschlossenen gewebes d knollenartigen anschwellungen der Papilic Wurzeln. Bot. Heft. Forsch. a. d. Bot. Gart. z. burg. Hft. 2. 88. 1887. Willtarth. Ueber Stickstoffaufnahme der Pflanzen. d. 60 Versamml. deut. Naturf. u. Aerzte i. W Sept. 1887. Willfarth. Ueber die Stickstoffaufnahme der n Verhandl. d. Ges. Deut. Naturf. und Aerzte. Ver samml, z. Bremen. 2:549. 1890. Willfarth. Stickstoffaufnahme der Pflanzen. Chem. Cent 1:No. 14. 1891. Willfarth. *‘ New experiments with plants collecting nitro- gen, and their employment in agricultural practice.” Deut. Landw. Rundschau Nos. 8. 9, 10, 11, 12. 1882. Willfarth, see Hellriegel. Winogradsky. Sur les organismes de la nitrification. Compt. rend. 110: 1013. 1890. 7 Winogradsky. Recherches sur les organismes de la nitrifica- tion. Ann. Inst. Pasteur No. 4, 213. 1890. No. 5, 257. 1890. No. 12, 760. 1890. No. 2, 92. 1891. No. 9, 577. 1891. a. Winogradsky. Sur la formation et l'oxydation des nitrites pendant la nitrification. Compt. rend. 113:89. 1891. Winogradsky. Contributions ala morphologie des Organismes de la nitrification. Arch. d. Sc. Biol. St. Petersb. 87. 1892. Winogradsky. Sur l'assimilation de l'azote gazeux de l’atmos- _ phere par les microbes. Compt. rend. 116: 15. 1893. Winogradsky. Sur l’assimilation de l'azote gazeux de Vatmos- phere par les microbes. Compt. rend. 118:353. 1894. Wolff und Zimmermann. Beitrag zur Chemie und Physiologie der Pilze. Bot. Ztg. 29:280. 1871. Wollny. Ueber die Thitigkeit niederer Organismen in Boden. 1883. Braunschweig. 1 Wollny. Ueber die Thitigkeit niederer organismen in der Ackererde. Deut. Landw. Presse, Nos. 47, 84, 85, 87, 89. 1883. Nos. 23, 24, 27, 28, 29, 31. 1884. a Wollny. Untersuchungen ueber die Zersetzung der organischen 3 Substanzen. Jour. f. Landw. 34:213. 1886. 1 ; | Mac Dougal: FIXATION OF FREE NITROGEN. 221 vou. Ueber die Beziehungen der Mikroorganismen zur : 2338 Centralb. f. Bakt. und. Par-Kunde 1: 4 Wonny. The relation of the physical properties of the soil to the cultivation of plants. Ex. Sta. Rec. 4:525, 627. 13 1892. 2 Woods. See Atwater. Woods C. D. The acquisition of nitrogen by growing plants. ss Conn. Storrs Ex. Sta. Rep. 4:17. 1891. Woronin. Ueber die bei der Schwarzerle und der gewoehn- . lichen Garten-Lupine auftretenden Wurzel anschwel- lungen. Mem. d. Acad. d. St. Petersbourg, 7, Ser. 3 10: No. 6. 1866. Woronin. Observations sur certaines excroissances que pre- 1 sentant les racines d. Paune et d. lupin des jardin. 7 Ann. d. Sc. Nat. Bot. 5, Ser. 7:73. 1867. Woronin. Plasmodiophora Brassicae. Pringsheim's Jahrb. Se 11:548. 1878. Woronin. Ueber d. Pilzwurzel v. B. Frank. Ber. d. deut. 4 Bot, Ges. 3: Hft. 6. 1888. _ Wortman. Ueber die neuesten Untersuchungen bezuglich der * organismen der Nitrifikation und ihre physiologische 85 Bedeutung. Landw. Jahrb. 20: Hft. 1. 175. 1891. Wydler H. Kleinere Beitrige zur Kenntniss einheimischer Gewiichse: Papilionaceen. Flora 43:17, 51. 83. 1860. Yoshii, Kellner und. Ueber die Entbindung freien Sticktoffs bei der Faulniss und Nitrification. Ztschr. f. physiol. Chem. 12:95. 1887-88. Zimmermann und Wolff. Beitrag zur Chemie und Physiologie der Pilze. Bot. Ztg. 29: 280. 1871. i > ( eee DeSCKIPTION OF PLATES. r Pirate VII. The Anderson registering balance set up to welgh transpired wi > _ The Frost electric auxanometer in use to determine growth in le .” PLarE X. : pt The Frost auxanometer connected with recorder. * a 1 N * 1 k From photographs by Professor Wm. R. Appleby, 1 on : iz 24 * * E * * : - . 8 ö 7 9 ta * « 2 4 . 4 + 1 > — ‘ 1 * 3 wt ; ; f hor * - ‘ * * 4 — > ; * : ~ 5 Ay 8 3 8 : * : * Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Sept. 84. PLATE Vil. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL ST eier — — ES Sept Bulletin No. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES — —- 0 r * . 2 * Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Sept 894 PLATE X. XIX. COMPILATION OF RECORDS OF SOME MINNESOTA FLOWERING PLANTS. EDMUND P. SHELDON. The following is a record of the additions to the Minnesota N taspermic flora, which have not hitherto been reported in the eee of the Geological and Natural History Survey of the state: 2 Potamogeton yaseyi Ropsrys in A. Gray Man. Ed. 5. 485. 1867. __ Specimens of the fruiting form with floating leaves were in Chisago lake, Chisago county, Minn., (B. C. Taylor, ily, 1803). "Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20 : 283. 1893. Potamogeton robbinsii Oakes in Hovey’s Mag. p. 2. Ma. 1841. — isago lake, Chisago county, Minn. (E. J. Hill, 1890). Reported by Mr. E. J. Hill in Bot. Gaz. 16 : 127. 1891. 2 Potamogeton illinoensis MoroncG Bot. Gaz. 5: 50. 1880. Collected at Lake Minnewaska, Polk county, Minn.,(B. C Tay- „Aug., 1891) and at Green lake, Chisago county, Minn., . C Taylor, Aug., 1892). K. sorted by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 283. 1893. * auen cuneata SHELDON in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 258. 1893. Collected in shallow water of East Battle lake, Otter Tail . Minn., from which locality the type specimen is de- crit ed. Found also in Mollie Stark lake and Blanche lake of e same county, (E. P. S., July, 1892). 3 Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 0: 283. 1893. 224 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Poa debilis Torr. Fl. N. V. 2 459. 1843. Abundant in open, sandy soil near Mora, Kanabec county Minn., (E. P. S., July, 1892). 1 erie by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Ob 05 20: 283. 1893. 7 Eriophorum virginicum Linn. Spee. 52. 1753. Swamps and peat-bogs near Little lake, Chisago cow Minn., (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 1892). 4 Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot, lub 20: 283. 1893. a Scirpus maritimus Linn. Spec. 50. 1753. Found growing in saline marshes and around edges | swamps near Willmar, Kandiyohi county, Minn., (W. D. ost July, 1892). 4 Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. om 0 284. 189g. a: Carex norvegica WILLD, Spec. 4: 227. 1804. Collected in marshy ground near Irving Chase lake, C as 8 county, Minn, (MacM. and Sheld., Aug., 1890). 1 In specimens from this collection the terminal spike is d lis- tinctly long-contracted below with staminate flowers. It is 5 remarkable that this plant, which has hitherto been repc for North America as occurring only in Maine and northward, should be found in the heart of the Minnesota forest. ae Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Ball. Torr. Bot. Ch b. 20: 283. 1893. . Carex stricta Lam. var. decora BaILEXY Bot. Gaz. 13: 85. 1888. 4 Common in sandy soil near Brainerd, Crow Wing count; 7 Minn., and near Nichols, Aitkin county, Minn., (E. P. S., June, 1892). a This variety seems to prefer upland, sandy places. It i frequently seen on the pine-barrens near the two above le ties. Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. © 20: 283. 1893). g : Sheldon: RECORDS OF FLOWERING PLANTS. 295 Carex exilis Dewey Am. Journ. Sci. IL 14: 35. 1828. Collected in tamarack swamp near Twin lake, Hennepin county. Minn., (E. P. S., Sept., 1890), and in low, swampy ground west of Brainerd, Crow Wing county, Minn., (Z. F. S. June, 1892). Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 283. 1893. Carex supina WiLLD in Wahl. Koengl. Acad. Handl. II. 24: 158. 1803. C. obesa ALL. var. minor Boorr III. 162. 1867. Collected upon high bluffs at South Fow! lake, Northern Minn., (F. F. Wood, July, 1891). Reported by L. H. Bailey in Bot. Gaz. 17: 148. 1892. Carex abbreviata Prescort, in Boott. Trans. Linn. Soc. 20: 141. 1846. ; C. torreyi TUCKM. Enum. Meth. 21. 1843. Was found in abundance upon a small area in the suburbs of Minneapolis, Minn., (J. H. Sandberg, 1890). Reported by L. H. Bailey in Bot. Gaz. 17: 149. 1892. Carex flava Linn. Spec. 975. 1753. . Typical specimens of this species were found in abundance ou the shores of many of the lakes of Otter Tail county, Minn. ( .. P. S., Aug., 1892. Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 284. 1893. Carex albursina SHELD. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 284. 1893. Abundant near Wilton, Waseca county, Minn., (E. P. S., June, 1891), and in the neighborhood of Mahtomedi, on the shore of White Bear lake, Washington county, Minn., (E. F. _ &., July 1892), _ Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 284. 1893. Arenaria patula Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 273. 1803. _ Collected on the north shore of White Sand lake, Cass County, Minn., (Conway MacMillan and E. P. Sheldon) Aug., 1890. Reported by Conway MacMillan in Bot. Gaz. 15: 332. 1891. 226 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. Caltha natans PALv. Reise Russ. 3: 284. 1776. Collected near Tower, Minn. (ZE. J. Hill, 1889), also 60 . lected in the same locality (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1891). ; Reported by E. J. Hill in Bot. Gaz. 15: 307, 1890. Erysimum syrticolum Sue.pon Bull. Torr. Bot. Club.! 0 285. 1893. a The locality of the type is on the high, sandy banks 0 Lake Benton, Lincoln county, Minn., where I collected it in August, 1891. During August, 1892, I found it sparingly or on the gravelly shores of Pelican lake Otter Tail county, Mi u. This species resembles E. inconspicuum (S. Wars) oM., but the glaucous, strict aspect and short pods characterize it. 3 Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 285. 1893. ic Nasturtium obtusum Nort. in T. and G. Fl. 1:74 183 4 . Frequent in low marshy ground near Fergus Falls, Ot Tail county, Minn., (F. P. S., Aug., 1892). Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 2 285. 1893. Crataegus punctata Jacg. Hort. Vindob. 1:10. 1770. A number of scattered bushes were found growing on open hillsides near Center City, Chisago county, Minn., (8. 0 N Taylor, June, 1892). Wy Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Clut . a 20: 285. 1893. 5 g Elatine americana (PurRsSH) ARN. Edin. Journ. Nat. 2 Geogr. 1: 430. 1830. This was found in abundance, growing in 2-6 irches of at Linn lake, Chisago county, Minn., (B. C. Taylor, Aug., 2 Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20 : 285. 1893. Myriophyllum humile (Rar.) Morone Bull. Torr. Club. 18 :242. 1891. : - i. M. ambiguum Nutt. var. limosum NUrr. Gen. 2: 212. 1818. . It was found rooting in the mud about Irving Chase lake, Cass county, and near the water line of other neighboring forest lakes. (Conway MacMillan and Edmund P. Sheldon, Aug., 1892 Reported by Conway MacMillanin Bot. Gaz. 15 : 332. 1 Sheldon: RECORDS OF FLOWERING PLANTS. 227 Bartonia virginica (LI x N). B. S. P. Prel. Cat. N. V. 1888. Found growing among moss in a peat bog near Zumbrota, Goodhue county, Minn., (C. A. Ballard. Aug., 1892). _ Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. ; 120 :286. 1893. Utricularia gibba Linn, Spec. 18. © 1753. Found growing in the mud at the water's edge in Irving Chase lake, Cass county, Minn., (Conway MacMillan and Ed- mund F. Sheldon, Aug., 1890). Reported by Conway MacMillan in Bot, Gaz. 15 : 333. 1890. Aster lateriflorus (Livy). Brrrr. var thyrsoideus (A. Gray) SHELD. in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20 288. 1593. A. diffusus Arr. var. thyrsoideus A. GRAY, Syn. Fl. 1 187. 1888. It is abundant near lakes Belmont and Eagle, in the Leaf Fill district of Otter Tail county, Minn., (E. F. Sheldon, Aug. 1892). _ Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 286. 1893. Aster incanopilosus (LI x DL.) SEL. in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20 : 286. 1893. A, ramulosus LINDL. var. enen LINDL. in DC. Prodr. 5: 243. 1836. A. multiflorus Arr. var. commutatus T. and G. Fl. 2: 121. 1541. A. commutatus A, GRAY, Syn. Fl. 1: 185. 1888. This large capitate species of the section Squarrosa is com- mon on the dry prairie hills of Otter Tail county, Minn., (EZ. . 8. Aug., 1892). Reported by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 200 286. 1893. 5 Echinops sphabrocephalas Linn. Spec. 814. 1753. This European composite has been introduced in the neigh- Bhorhosa of St. Anthony Park, Ramsey county. Minn., (Dr. | al Lugger, Sept., 1891, and Oct., 1892). It is becoming thor- ‘oughly established. To my knowledge this is the first record- i occurrence of the plant in North America. ed by Edmund P. Sheldon in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 26: 287. 1893. e > age 10 XX. LIST OF FRESH-WATER ALGAE COLLE IN MINNESOTA DURING 1894. JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN. The accompanying list is a continuation of the one publish in MINNESOTA BOTANICAL Stuptes, Part I, p. 25, 1894. includes all new species collected during the intervene and those of the former list found in new localities. Alle ings were made within a radius of seventy miles of Minr 5— lis. The nomenclature for the most part is based upon the Sylloge Algarum of De Toni, the Monographie des Oscillariées ¢ Gomont and the Essai de Classification des Name Thuret. OEDOGONIACEAE (De By.) Wirrr. Pr. Mon. Ovdog. ¢ 1 1874. a 90. Oedogonium huntii Woov, Freshw. Alg. U. S. 197. 1862. Bush lake, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 10 1894. 91. Oedogonium franklinianum WirrR. in Wittr. 4 " Nordst. Alg. Aq. Dulce. Exsicc. n. 309. 1880. 1 Minneapolis. August 7, 1894. Coll. A. P. Ande 92. Oedogonium obtruncatum WIrrR. var. oblatum 4 5 Am. Alg. no. 3. 1894. a In tanks in greenhouse, Minneapolis. Novena 1894. a 93. Oedogonium princeps (Hass.) Witrr. Prodr. Mond a Oedog. 42. 1874. a Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 9, 1894. ee SPHAEROPLEACEAE (KG.) Coun in Monat. Koen. Wiss. in Berl. 335. 1855. Tilden: LIST OF FRESH-WATER ALGAE. 229 94. Sphaeroplea annulina (Rorn) Ac. Syst. Alg. 76. 1824. Bass lake, Hennepin county. April 23, 1894. Coll. Conway MacMillan and D. T. MacDougal. ULOTRICHIACEAE (Ka.) Bonzi em. De Toni, Syll. Alg. 1: 151. 1889. 95. Hormiseia flaccida (KG.) LAGER. var nitens (MENEGH. ) HANSG. Prodr. 61. 1886-88. Minneapolis. October 26, 1894. 96. Hormiscia zonata (Wen. and Monn) ARescH. in Acta. Soc. Upsala. 12. 1866. University springs, Minneapolis. April 7, 1894. 97. Aphanochaete repens Benrn. Unters. ueber d. Verz- weig. einig. Suesswasseralg. 1878. Minneapolis. April 28, 1894. 98. Chaetophora pisiformis (Rorn) Ac. Syst. Alg. 27. 1824. Minneapolis. April 2. 1894. 99. Chaetophora tubereulosa (Rors) Hook. in Ag. Syst. Alg. 27. 1824. Taylor's Falls, Chisago county. August 11, 1894. 100. Chaetophora monilifera Kc. Spec. Alg. 896. 1849. Osceola, Wisconsin. September 24, 1894. 101. Chaetophora cornu-damae (ROTH) AG. var genuina De Toni Syll. Alg. 1:187. 1889. Marsh, St. Louis Park, Hennepin county. May 29, 1894. Coll. Conway MacMillan and D. T. MacDougal. 102. Chaetophora ¢alearea TILD. Am. Alg. no. 11. 1894, Forming a calcareous crust 4.5 mm. in thickness. Lower cells 9 mik. in diameter, 3-5 times as long; upper cells 8-12.5 mik. in diameter, twice as long. Articulations distinctly contracted at joints. Ter- minal cells usually rather blunt. sometimes ending in very long, articulated setae. Completely cover- ing sides of old wooden tank as far up as water line. Minneapolis. September 28, 1894. Coll. E. P. Sheldon. 103. Draparnaudia plumosa (Vaucn.) Ac. Syst. Alg. 58. 1824. 1 Washburn Park, Minneapolis. August 18, 1894. ~ CLADOPHORACEAE HAssaL) Wirrr. em. De Tost Syll. 230 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 104. Draparnandia glomerata (VaucH.) Ac. Syst. Alg. 5 1824. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. September 17, 105. Draparnaudia opposita Ac. Syst. Alg. 59. 1824. Twin lakes, Hennepin county. October 15, 1894. 106. Stigeoclonium tenue (AG) Rasesn. Fl. Eur. Alkar. 3: 377. 1868. 4 Minneapolis. June 20, 1894. ; 107. Stigeoclonium flagelliferum Ko. Phyc. Germ. 198, 1845. : Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 9, 1894. 108. Stigeoclonium amoenum Ka. Spec. Alg. 855. 1849. Minneapolis, June 27, 1894. Coll. Henry Tilden. 109. Stigeoclonium nanum (Ditiw.) Ka. Spee. Alg. 352. 1849. 4 Osceola, Wisconsin. October 8, 1894. * 110. Stigeoclonium fastiglatum Ko. Spec. Alg. 356. 1849. Minneapolis. August 16, 1894. 4 111. Stigeoclonium faseiculare Ka. Bot. Zig. 177. 1847. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. September 17, 1504. 112. Conferva bombyeina (Ad.) LAGerH. var. ele * RaBENH. Krypt. Fl. Sachs. 1: 246. 1863. a Minnesota river, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 16, 1894. 113. Microspora vulgaris RaBenu. Krypt. Fl. Sachs. 16 245. 1863. 1 State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. Se 8. 1894. 114. Urospora penicilliformis (Rorn) AREscH. Observ. Phyc. 1:15. 1866. — Minneapolis. June 20, 1894. Alg. 1: 264. 1889. 115. Cladophora fracta (DlLLwWw.) Ke. Pnyc. Gener. 2 1843. Bridal-veil falls, Minneapolis. June 26, 1894. 116. Cladophora fracta (DiLLw.) Kd. var. genuina KigcH Alg. Schles. 12. 1878. Parker’s lake, Hennepin county. J uly 28, 1894. Tilden: LIST OF FRESH-WATER ALGAE. 231 117. Cladophora fracta (DILLw.) Ke. var. patens Ac. Syst. Alg. 110. n. 83. 1824. Rest Island, Lake Pepin, Wabasha county. September 2, 1894. 118. Cladophora fracta (DILLW.) Kd. var. rigidula ( Kc.) RABENH. Fl. Eur. Algar. 3: 335. 1868. Minneapolis. August 25, 1894. 119. Cladophora fracta (DiLuw.) Ka. var. setiformis ( Kc.) TiILp. Am. Alg. No. 28. 1894. Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 14, 1894. 120. Cladophora oligoclona Ko. Phyc. Germ. 218. n. 98. 1845. Near Shadow Falls, St. Paul. August 3, 1894. 121. Cladophora oligoclona KG. var. flotowiana (Kc.) Hansa. Prodr. 81. 1886-88. Wood lake, Hennepin county. May 21, 1894. . Cladophora erispata (Rorn) Ka. var. brachyelados Ka. Alg. Exsicc. 4-67 (sub Conferva) 1833-36. Lake City, Wabasha county. September 2, 1894. . Cladophora crispata (Rorn) Ka, var. vitrea (Kc.) RABENH. Fl. Eur. Algar. 3: 336. 1868. Minneapolis. June 27, 1894. . Cladophora glomerata (Luyy.) Ka. var. faseieulata RaBENH. Fl. Eur. Algar. 3: 339. 1868. Minneapolis. July 6, 1894. . Cladophora glomerata (Liyy.) Ko. var. rivularis RABENH, Fl. Alg. n. 147. 1861-78. Lake City, Wabasha county. September 4, 1894. . Cladophora glomerata (LIN N.) Ko. var. clavata WOoLLE Freshw. U. S. 128. 1887. Riley's coulie, Lake Pepin, Wabasha county. Septem- ber 4, 1894. . Cladophora callicoma AG. in Phyc. Gener. 257. 1843 Minnesota river, Fort Snelling. October 1, 1894. . Cladophora declinata Kc. Spec. Alg. 406. 1849. Minneapolis. August 3, 1894. . Cladophora declinata Ke. var. pumila (BarL.) KIRCHN. Alg. Schles. 75. 1878. Bridal-veil falls, Minneapolis. June 26, 1894. 282 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 180. Cladophora declinata Ko. var. fluitans (Ko. nase, Prodr. n. 115. 1886-88. Minneapolis. August 7, 1894. Coll. A. P. Anderson 181. Cladophora canicularis (Roru) Ka. Phyc, germ, 210. 1845. Minneapolis. July 6, 1894. 182. Pithophora kewensis Wirrn. On the Devel. and Syst. Arrang. of the Pithoph. 52. 1877. In tanks in greenhouse, Minneapolis. November 23, 1894. 4 VAUCHERIACEAE (Gray) Dumort. Comm. Bot. 71. 1522. 183. Vaucheria dichotoma (IAN N.) Ac. Syn. Alg. ni 47. 1817. i Minneapolis. August 3, 1894. 4 8 184. Vaucheria ornithocephala Ac. Spec. Alg. 467. 1821. Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin n July 11. 1894. 135. Vaucheria dillwynii (Wes. and Mohn) Ac. Syst. Ale. 173. 1824. Near Lake Calhoun, Hennepin county. May 7, 1894. 136. Vaucheria sessilis (Vaucn) DO. Fl. Fr. 2:63. 1805. Second creek, Lake City, Wabasha county. Septem- ber 4, 1894. 1 137. Vaucheria geminata (Vaucu.) DC. var. racemosa WALz. in Pringsh. Jahrb. 5: 147. 1866. Minneapolis. May 28, 1894. a Purgatory Creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin County. July 11, 1894. 2 138. Vaucheria terrestris LxN GB. Hydroph. 77. 1819. Minneapolis. August 3, 1894. Coll. A. P. Anderson. HYDROGASTRACEAE (Exp.) RABENH. Fl. Eur. Alger. 3: 265. 1868. a 139. Botrydium granulatum (LI x RN.) GREV, ai Brit. 1830. Lake City, Wabasha county. Sept. 4 1894. “a Twin lakes, Hennepin county. Oe: 15, 1894. . 4 PALMELLACEAE (DEcNE.) NAEG. em. De Tont, SylI. Alg. 1: 559. 1889. a Tilden: LIST OF FnESH- WATER ALGAE. 233 140. Coelastrum microporum NAEG. in A. Braun. Alg. Unie. 70. 1855. Minneapolis. April 2. 1894. 141. Tetraspora bullosa (RorH) AG. Spec. Alg. 1: 414. 1821. 5 Boston coulie, Lake City, Wabasha county. Septem- ber 3, 1894. 142. Tetraspora extensa TI. Db. Am. Alg. no. 48. 1894. Thallus 3-35 metres in length, narrow and ribbon-like, measuring not more thgn 10 millimetres across, or irregularly expanded with a diameter of 3 em., gela tinous, verrucose, vivid green; cells spherical, ar- ranged in groups of four, 10-12.5 mik. in diameter. In tanks, current rather sluggish, temperature of water 10 C. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. August 8, 1894. 148. Dictyosphaerium ehrenbergianum N AE. Einz. Alg. 73. 1849. Minneapolis. September 13. 1894. Coll. W. D. Frost. 144 Palmella uvaeformis Kd. Alg. Exsice. u. 102. 1833-36. Minneapolis. August 10, 1894. 145. Protococeus viridis AG. Syst. Alg. 13. 1824. Minneapolis. November 23, 1894. 146. Protococeus cinnamomeus KG. Spec. Alg. 202. 1828. Minneapolis. November 17, 1894. 147. Protococeus infusionum (ScHRANK) KIRCHN. Alg. Schles. 103. 1878. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. August 8, 1894. 148. Protococeus infusionum (SCHRANK) KIRCHN. var. roemerianum (KG.) HansG. Prodr. 143. 1886-88. Bass lake, Hennepin county. Apr. 23, 1894. Coll. Conway MacMillan and D. T. MacDougal. 149. Euglena viridis (ScHRANK) EHRENB. in Leun. Syn. Thierkunde 2:1121. 1886. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. August &, 1894. 3 ZYGNEMACEAE (MEneEGH.) RaBennu. Fl. Eur. Algar. 2: 228 2 1868. 1850. Spirogyra porticalis (MUELL.) CLEVE. Svensk. Zyg- nem. 22. 1868. Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 9, i894. 234 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 151. Spirogyra decimina (Mot.) Ko. Phyec. Germ. 28 1845. “ Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 11, 1894. 152. Spirogyra rivularis Rapenn. Fl. Eur. Algar. 2.20. 1868. Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county, July 18, 1894. 153. Spirogyra rivularis Rangxn, var. minor Hines 4 Prodr. 161, 1889-88. 1 Stone quarry, Minneapolis. October 9, 1594. ae j 154. Spirogyra setiformis (Rorm) Ka. Spec. Alg. 442. 1849. Minneapolis. July 5, 1894. 155. Spirogyra crassa Ko. Alg. Etsicc. n. 98. 1833-86. Near Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 14, 1894. 156. Spirogyra mirabilis (Hass) Ko. Spec. Alg. 438. 1849, Shadow falls, St. Paul. August 3, 1894. 157. Spirogyra bellis (Hass.)Crovan. Fl. Finist. 121. 1507. Eden Prairie, Hennepin county. July 14. 1894. 158. Spirogyra subsalsa Kd. Phyc. Germ. 222. 1845. a Purgatory creek, Eden Prairie, Hennepin om" July 13, 1894. 159. ade quadrata (Hass.) Petit in Bull. Soc. Botan. . 21: 41. 1874. cag October 11, 1894. 160. Spirogyra grevilleana (Hass.) Kc. Spec. Alg. 2 q 1849. ae Minneapolis. Apr. 30, 1894. a ae = DESMIDIACEAE (K.) De By. Conjug. 1858. 161. Closterium acerosum (ScHRANK) ER. Abh. Berl. Akad. 1831. a Minneapolis, Sept. 13, 1894. Coll. W. D. Frost. 162. Cosmarium suberenatum HantTzscu. in Rabenh. Alg n. 1213. 1850-67. Osceola, Wisconsin. September 24, 1894. HORMOGONEAE Tuvrer. Essai de class. des Nostochinées. | Ann. des Sc. Nat Bot vi. 12 875: 187 1 5 9 7 n » =e — a ae en” Sa i ie * — . r . 2 1 = — * 8 ee ‘Tilden: LIST OF FRESH WATER ALGAE. 235 2 163. Porphyrosiphon notarisii Kd. Tab. Phyc. 2:7. 1850-52. , Minneapolis, August 7, 1894. Coll. A. P. Anderson. 164. Symploca muscorum GoMonrT in Morot Jour. de Bot. 4: 354. 1890. In greenhouse, Minneapolis. November 23, 1894. 165. Symploca muscorum Gomon’ var. rivalaris (WoLLE) TILp. Am. Alg. no. 67. 1894. Minneapolis, November 27, 1894. 166. Lyngbya ochracea TauretT in Ann. des Sc. Nat. Bot. vi. 1: 279. 1875. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. September 17, 1894. 167. Lyngbya hinnulea (WoLLE) TiLp. Am. Alg. no. 69. 1894, In tank in Zoological laboratory, University of Min- nesota, Minneapolis. November 27, 1894. 168. Phormidium retzii (Ad) GomMont in Morot Jour. de Bot. 4: 355. 1890. Osceola, Wisconsin. September 24, 1894. 1.09. Oseillatoria princeps VaucH. Hist. d. Conferves d’eau 4 douce. 190. 1803. Bridal-veil falls, Minneapolis. June 26, 1894. 170. Oseillatoria limosa AG. Disp. Alg. Suec. 35. 1812. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. September 17, 1894. Minnesota river, Fort Snelling. October 1, 1894. In greenhouse, St. Paul. November 26, 1894. 171. Oseillatoria anguina Bory Dict. class. d' Hist. nat. : 12:467. 1827. a State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. August 8, 1894. 1 Second creek, Lake City, Wabasha county. Septem- ber 4, 1894. a 172. Oscillatoria tenuis Ac. Alg. Dec. 2: 25. 1813. E. In tanks in Zoological Laboratory, University of Min- nesota, Minneapolis. November 27, 1894. 173. Oseillatoria tenuis Ac. var. natans (KG.) Gom. Ann. 1 Sc. Nat. vii. 16: 221. 1892. Trout mere, Osceola, Wisconsin. October 8, 1894. 174. Oseillatoria brevis Kd. Phyc. Gener. 186. 1843. : St. Paul. November, 26, 1894. 236 MINNESOTA HMOTANICAL STUDIES, 4 1 175. Oscillatoria numidica Gomont Ann. Sc. Nat. vil 16: 281. 1892. * Minneapolis. In greenhouse, November 28, 1806. 176. Spirulina subsalsa Oerstep Beret. in Nat, Tidskr. 17. 1845. 4 Twin lakes, Hennepin county. October 15, 1894. 177. Rivularia echinulata Suter,. q Lake Chisago, Chisago county. July 26, 1804. Coll. D. T. MacDougal and A. P. Anderson 3 178. Gloeotrichia natans Ranzen. Deutsch. Krypt. 90. 1847. Minneapolis, August 17. 1594. 179. Gloeotrichia inerustata Woop Prodr. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc, 128. 1869. q Lake Minnetonka, Hennepin county. August 25, 1804. Coll. D. T. MacDougal. 180. Tolypothrix distorta (Mot.) Ko. Phye. Gener. 7 228. 1843. = Minneapolis. August 17, 1894. 181. Nostoc spongiaeforme Ad. Syst. Alg. 22. 1824. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. September 17, 1804. 182. Nostoc caeruleum Lyncs. Hydroph. Dan. 201. 1819. 4 Parker's Lake, Hennepin county. July 28, 1894. 4 153. Nostoe pruniforme (Ror) Ad. Disp. Algar. Suse. 45. ; 1812. a Minneapolis. August 17, 1894. 184. Anabaena circinalis RaBENH. Alg. n. 209. 1852. . Lake Calhoun, Hennepin county. October 22, 1894. 185. Anabaena oscillarioides Bory Dict. class. d’Hist. nat. 308. 1822. 1 Second creek, Lake City, Wabasha county. Septem- ber 4, 1894. = ae BACILLARIEAE Nirzscs. Beitr. Infus. 1817. 186. Navicula cuspidata Ke. Bac. 94. 1844. Minneapolis. November 14. 1894. 187. Navicula gibberula KG. Bac. 101. 1844. Minneapolis. September 13, 1894. Coll. W. D. eros. — Tilden: LIST OF FRESH-WATER ALGAE. 237 188. Pleurosigma spencerii (QUEK.) W. Su. in Ann. Nat. Hist. 12. 1852. Mississippi river. August 23, 1893. Coll. A. P. An- derson. 189. Gomphonema constrictum Exrens. Abh. 63. 1531. Minneapolis. August 3, 1894. 190. Gomphonema olivaceum (LynGs.) Ka. Bac. 85. 1544. Upper Mississippi river. August 17, 1892. Coll. A. P. Anderson. 191. Coeconeis pedicalus Earens. Infus. 194. 18306. Fort Snelling. October 1, 1594. 192. Nitzschla vitrea Norm. var. reeta (Hanrzscu) V. H. Syn. 182. 1880-1885. Osceola, Wisconsin. September 24, 1894. 193. Odontidium mutabile W. Sm. Br. Diat. 2:17, 1856. Minneapolis, November 23, 1894. 194. Meridion cireulare (GRev.) AG. Consp. 40. 1830-32. Second creek, Lake City, Wabasha county. Sept. 4, 1894. 195. Synedra pulchella (RaLrs) Ka. var. minutissima (W. Su.) Gnu. in Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. 107. 1880. Minneapolis. November 15, 1894. 196. Synedra ulna (Nrrzscn) Exrens. Inf. 211. 1836. Minneapolis. September 24, 1894. 197. Fragilaria capucina DesmMaz. Crypt. de France ed. i. n. 453. 1825. Osceola, Wisconsin. September 24, 1894. 198. Raphoneis (?) archeri O'Meara in Micr. Jour. 247. 1867. Minneapolis. Sept. 13, 1894. Coll. W. D. Frost. 199. Cystopleura sorex (KG.) Kuntze Revis. Gen. Plantar. 2:891, 1891. Mississippi river. August 29, 1892. Coll. A. P. An- derson. 200. Arachnoidiseus ehrenbergii Bart. and Harv. Diat. 174. 1862-74. Minneapolis. September 13, 1194. Coll. W. D. Frost. 201. Lysigonium varians (Ad.) DT. Alg. Abyss. 1891. State Fish Hatcheries, St. Paul. October 13, 1894. 4 W 7 ae a, e W XXI. THE GRAND PERIOD OF GROWTH IN A FRUIT OF CUCURBITA PEPO DETERMINED BY WEIGHT. ALEX. P. ANDERSON. Method of experimentation. Almost all of the available i information concerning the factors in the grand period ot growth has been obtained by experiments in which the rapidity — of growth has been determined by measurements of change in form and size of the organs under observation. The work in this direction abounds in results of great accuracy and in mauyx cases of extreme delicacy. These have been attained by the use of the auxanometers of Baranetzky and Sachs, and the perfected forms of such apparatus devised in the labora — tories of Pfeffer and Wiesner. Length-extensions have been determined by use of the horizontal microscope (Detmer) 7 telescope (Sachs), and increase in thickness, or in the shorter diameter of ‘organs by the micrometer apparatus of Darwin, and the delicate auxanometers of Golden and Frost. az From the great mass of material obtained by the expecta a ments in which these pieces of apparatus have been chiefly — employed, the influence of the principal external conditions on growth-extension has been quite approximately ascertained. It remains yet to be seen however what correspon exists between growth-extension and increase in weight of an organ, and how far the changes in weight may be taken in e delineation of the curve of the grand period of growth. = The use of weight as a means of measurement of growth has been very limited because of the difficulty of obtaining the necessary data at short intervals by reason of the con- nection of the plant with the substratum, and the mechanical difficulties in the way of obtaining the correct weight of organs while attached to the plant. The work is still further compli- — 5 cated by the constant changes in weight due to excretion and E transpiration. 0 he Mest es 1 . * 5 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 239 In the following experiments the first difficulty was overcome by the use of the registering balance which I have described in a previous number of this bulletin.“ In order to lessen the mechanical difficulty of obtaining the correct weight of a portion of a plant while still in organic union, the fruit of Cucurbita pepo was selected because of its rapid growth and relatively large size and weight, and the slender somewhat pliant stem on which it is borne. By reason of this latter fact the weight of the fruit could be ascertained, while the error resulting from the bending of the stem remained the same in the swing of the scale pan through an are of two centimeters, and was so nearly constant throughout the experi- ment that it offered no disturbing factor in the general results. A still further reason for the selection of this material was the fact that F. Darwin had made a series of observations on the fruit of Cucurbita in asimilar manner. His experiments were begun when the fruit had nearly reached the maximum rate of growth and included only a portion of the grand period.“ f In the experiments detailed on the following pages it was purposed to follow the changes in the weight of the fruit from the time when its mass was first appreciable by the balance, through its stages of growth to maturity, with attention to its changes during the ‘‘ripening” period. An effort was made to analyze the relations between the changes in weight of the fruit with the transpiration from its own surface as well as “from the remainder of the plant. This latter purpose en- tailed numerous and frequent observations of the light and humidity as well as other atmospheric conditions. To obtain suitable material under normal conditions, seeds of Cucurbita pepo were placed in a plot of sandy loam immed- _ iately on the south side of Pillsbury Hall, May 24, 1894. On September 20 several plants had obtained the length of 9 meters with a strong development of leaf surface. The terminal portion of one of these vines, 1.5 meters in length was taken into a laboratory room by an aperture in the Sash at a point 7 meters from the root. The part of the vine remaining in the open air carried a leaf surface of about 3.5 Square meters and branched somewhat profusely. The labor- atory was fitted with a solid wall table next the windows ona 1. Minn. Bot. Stud. Part 4. 177. 1894. 2. On the growth of the fruit of Cucurbita. Ann. Bot. 7: 459. 1893. 240 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. level with the surface of the ground outside. On this was placed the registering balance connected with a Fre time recorder.“ ; The laboratory received the sunlight from 8 a. m. to 5 p. u, and was ventilated in such a manner that the conditions e moisture and humidity were practically the same as those c the outside air. Access to this room was allowed only to per sons immediately concerned in the experiments, to avoid ¢ turbance of balances. A recently formed fruit at a distance of 60 em. from th ; tip of the vine was placed on the scale pan on the extend 4 upright from one arm of the beam outside of the case of th "7 balance.“ |? The scale plan was covered with cotton wool to afford 44 suitable resting place for the fruit. In this position the fruit was a few centimeters distant and directly in front of a large window with southern exposure. At a distance of 25 cm. from the scale pan toward the root the vine was firmly fastened. on a level with the fruit, to an upright support. In this position the flexibility of the stem was very great and was moreover quite constant. The scale pans were allowed to swing through — a vertical arc of nearly 2 cm. and very delicate registrations — could be secured. The terminal portion of the vine as well as two or three side shoots was cut away ata distance of 12 em beyond the fruit. The cut surfaces were sealed to prevent 1 undue exudation of water. Attached to the vine near the point of support were two leaves whose weight did not fall upon the scale pan. At points, one beyond and one near the fruit, were : also two leaves which had attained their full size before the experiment began, as was demonstrated by measurements of their superficial extent. Thus the scale pan was freed from the weight of all rapidly growing organs except the fruit, and 3 besides its weight variations, only those due to the transpira- tion from the surface of two leaves and a portion of the stem about 40 cm. in length were recorded by the apparatus. 2 The fruit at the beginning of the experiment was 6 cm. in a diameter and weighed 138 grams. The latter fact was deter- 5 mined by weighing several fruits of equal size and also by subtracting the net increase from the final weight at the e of the experiment. 3. Minn. Bot. Stud. Pt. 4. 181. 1894. 4 Minn. Bot. Stud. Pt. 4. 179. 1894. e ee 5 r 5 * 3 = — ag Ms 7 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 241 A record was kept of the temperature and relative humidity by means of dry and wet bulb thermometers. The method followed was that of the U. S. Signal Service. Tables of this institution were also used in the determination of the relative humidity. ® A record was also kept of the barometric pressure. A second registering balance was used from time to time for determining the rate of transpiration of the leaves and for taking the de- crease of fruit no.2. For measuring the rate and amount of transpiration of the leaves and internodes this balance was set up as previously described.* A branch of the same vine bearing the fruit on the first registering balance, was taken through an aperture in the sash of another window. The second register- ing balance had previously been arranged and placed near this window. A portion of the tip of this branch, 35 cm. in length bearing five small leaves was extended through a piece of rubber cloth tied and sealed to the bottom of an 8 liter bell glass. The aper- ture in the rubber cloth was sealed and all connections with the open air and absorber were the same as figured in a pre- vious number of this bulletin.“ An aspirator was connected with the city water supply, the pressure of which varied somewhat from time to time. This variation, however, could be guarded against since the aspira- tor had an index and could be regulated. By keeping an equal flow of water a constant current of dried air could be drawn through the bell glass containing a part of the Cucurbita vine and leaves. In the arrangement ofan absorber in the transpir- ation chamber, it was found after repeated experiments that calcium chloride alone would not take up all the moisture from a current of air passing rapidly through it. When the per cent. of moisture was small the error was slight and inappreciable, but _ when transpiration was rapid and it was necessary that the air in the bell glass should be entirely renewed every five minutes, - the calcium chloride soon lost its power of absorption and Some of the water passed through. This error was guarded against by using an absorber charged with calcium chloride and sulphuric acid in separate vessels.* The absorber con- - sists essentially of two low flasks. The first one, containing about 20 C. e. of concentrated sulphuric acid receives the cur- 5. Signal Service, War Dept., Annual Rep. 277, 301, 308, 1888. 6. Minn. Bot. Stud. Pt. 4. 179, 1894. 7. Plate vu. Minn. Bot. Stud. Pt. 4. 222. 1891. 8. Minn. Bot. Stud. pt. 4. 179. 1894. c en — ? cre J Po eS 242 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. rent of air from the plant chamber. From the first the cu passes into the second flask containing about 30 C. c. of the acid. From the second flask the current passes on through @ 16 cm. U tube filled with calcium chloride. Rubber stops and glass connections are used in each case. The acid in the first” flask was found to take up nearly all the moisture for the first four hours of an experiment. What passed over was taken up in the second. Repeated experiments were made and even where a large leaf surface was used the calcium chloride in t U tube after twenty-four hours was found almost as dry as when it was putin. The calcium chloride and sulphuric were renewed every twelve hours. After several observations had been made on the trans pirations of the leaves and internodes another fruit (No. ir was taken to determine its rate of transpiration or loss in weight after it had been cut from the vine. One of the stage of development as the one on the first balance was lected and its stem cut 6 cm. from the fruit. This portion of the stem attached to the fruit was immediately immersed i water in a test tube and the test tube sealed around it to pro. vent evaporation of the water. The fruit and test tuk with water were now placed on the decrease pan of the regis- tering balance. = The registering balance was arranged to record decrease by placing the fruit on the pan receiving the weights from the holder. At the beginning of an experiment for taking decrease the scale was balanced by weights in the other pan. Whenever a decrease of such amount as to close the circuit took place the equilibrium was restored bya weight dropping on the decrease pan. The observations on the decrease of Fruit no. 2 were carried on during ten days during five of which the stem was immersed in water as described above. During the remaining time observations were made on the decrease of the fruit after it had been cut off from all supply of moisture. At the beginning of the experiments, September 22, 1 gram 9 weights were used in the registering balance, but with t rapid rise of the increase to 1 gram per minute, it was on necessary to substitute 2 gram weights, to allow time for the balance to come to rest in the intervals. a It was found convenient to begin and end the day at 8 a: m 4 since this usually marked a period of equilibrium in the plant: a increase had ceased and decrease would set in shortly after e that hour. 1 1 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 243 The readings from the psychrometer and other non-record- _ ing apparatus were taken every hour from S a. m. to S p. m. and every four hours during the remainder of the day. Dur- certain periods however it was found necessary to make such readings once in 15 or 30 minutes. At the beginning of the experiments, September 27, four days after pollination, the fruit weighed 138 grams and at the end of the experiment, November 7, 47 days later, 5,216 grams. At the end of 30 days the fruit was completely ripened but still continued to show marked changes in weight. At the close of the observations an examination of the fruit demonstrated that in size, structure and weight, it had - undergone a normal development. It contained 575 seeds which weighed when taken out 95.3 grams. Of 100 of these seeds placed in a Geneva germinator, 96 germinated. The data concerning the growth of the internode were obtained by use of a Baranetzky auxanometer on a terminal in- ternode of a vine 5 m. in length in the plant house. The inter- node was firmly fixed at its base to an iron post and attached to the auxanometer in the usual manner. The entire plant re- _ ceived the daily course of the sun, and while the actual con- _ ditions of temperature and moisture were much different from those surrounding the plant bearing the fruit, yet the daily variations of these conditions corresponded quite exactly. All of the more important data bearing on the growth of the fruit, changes in weight of the ripened fruit, growth of an in- ternode, transpiration of the leaves and accompanying condi- tions are given in the following tables and graphically repre- _ sented in Plates XI to XX inclusive. Each table with the ex- ception of the first and last covers a period of 50 hours. The former extends over the entire period of observation, 47 days, and the latter over four days. e oe e ue . al ‘ 7 244 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1 TABLE I. Data of Grand Period. (See Plate xi) r —— — — Time. Increase. | Decrease. Remarks. 8A. Mu. to g A.M. | Grams, Gams. Sep. p-23} 129 “93 „2 176 2 “24 25 215 a „ 25 26 303 a „% „23537 2 e 4 | Sunshine on fruit at time ot decrease, „ 28 20 732 12 | Sunshine on fruit at dme ofdecresse. * 3 46 Rain, clouds and cold wind. 4 „ 30—Oct. 1 406 14 | Sunshine on leaves at time of deere Oct da % „„ Rain and cold wind. 4 ee 4 Rain with sunshine at the time of decrease. „ 3 „ 4! 22 f. . .. Ratm and clouds. + “ 4 © § 144 ... . Rain and clouds. 7 “5 6 120 4 | Clouds, sunshine at decrease. 1 4% Mile Sa | 150 16 | Sunshine at time of decrease. 1 „ 12 | Rain, sunshine at time of decrease. 1 N 92 26 Sunshine all day. 2 og ey 96 40 | Sunshine all day. 2 ! 86 32 sunshine all day. x „1 12 25 20 | Frait beginbing to tar yellow. 2 * 2 1 64 58 Warm. sunshine all day. rs * 13 14 62 64 Cold wind, sunshine all day. ; a 14 “ 15] 52 70 | Warmer. a ae pes 16 74 58 Sunshine all day. - Total. 568 434 3 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. TABLE I. Data of Grand Period. —_— et ee Sa = a ey 1 N 245 ( Continued. ) (See Plate x1.) — —— == Time. Increase. | Decrease. Remarks. 8a.mM.to8A™M.| Grams. | Grams. Oct. 16 Oct. 17 58 84 | Sunshine and warm all day. N 62 72 Sunshine and warm al! day 184 YO 50 56 | Fruit almost ripe. n 68 54 Clouds and rain, sunshine at time of decrease. r 94 62 Clouds and rain, sunshine at time of decrease. 1 I 56 60 | Sunshine all day. “oo 42 42 decrease in morning. Rain all ree -** 52 64 eee ee “ 94 25 52 70 | Sunshine and decrease all day. 25 “ 20 30 30 Fruit ripe. ea“ 58 68 | Sunshine all day. * 42 60 | Sunshine all day. n : 12 2 Clouds and rain. rah Bice 8 12 | Clouds and rain. aa | Shee) | eeerrees 12 Cold, elouds and fog. „ 31—-Nov. 11. 12 | Cold, clouds and fog. A K F 12 | Rain and Sunshine. wg * ...... 4 Vine cut’ feet from feat and immersed in water. Sunshine and w cui Hiya: | RPO rere 18 Z a ad os a Ea Seay SENOS Bieeany ee “Showed s dau e Pica tgs n 12 684 830 . 5658 434 Totals .. 6342 1264 | Weight at end of Exp. 5216 Grams. . Weight at beginning of Exp. 138 Grams. = Net increase. 50709. eee ae: eae oe 246 TABLE IJ. S & m. Sep. 25 to 8 a. m. Sep. 27. MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. (See Plate xu.) ————_—_— . — — — — Time. 8 fi i 4 Remarks. Date, Hour. 28 8 5 Sep. 25. | 8-9 a. m. 6 4. 40 14 Sunshine. 9—10 os 8 — 16 Clear. 4 * 10—11 * Se Sunshine. 11—12 m. 4 — 19 12—1 P. III. 6 „„ 20 Clouds. 1—2 50 10 —— * 21 232 ee be er Raa fruit in b 34 n Clouds. 5 5 * 1B 1 „„ @ |) 1 5—6 15 18 were 21 6—7 “ 16 „ „„ „45 19 7—8 es 15 eee ee 19 8—9 50 15 „„ 18 9-10 * 18 seek Cae 10-11 ‘“* A Pree ab | 11—12 1 Cold wind. Sep. 26. 12—1 a. m. 18. 16 122 IS Boas FUE) | 2—23 1: 16 3—4 8 14 . „ „ ~ | 4—5 10. 1E 16 5-6 * 1 8 6—7 * 15 1 8 : 78 * 17. [16 E Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 247 “TABLE 11 8 a.m. Sep. 25 to 8 a. m. Sep. 27. (Cont.) : (See Plate xm.) 1 n r pees Se Time. y 8 3 5 E Remarks. | Date. Hour. 8 j Sep. 26. | 8-9 a.m 7 .. 16 | Cold wind. 9-10 * . 18 }) 10—11 * 3 — * 20 Sunshine. * 11—12 m 1 mA’ 23 4 12—1 P. In. | „ > 24 Vines sprinkled and root 8 18 ——. 2 — 12 1:10 p. m. N 4 . 25 F 24 2 Sunshine. „„ n 6—7 6s . 23 En . ae | ‘sp 2 |...) 22 —10 ~ 33 “* * 21 10—11 * 38 „„ 21 0 11—12 7 42 see. 21 Sep. N. 12—1 a.m. 33 —— 21 4 1—2 0 35 eee 21 4 3 Warm and sultry nights. 2 23 — ol aes 20 3 „ 20 4 — “ | 2 |......] 20 4 be “ |} 19 1..... 1 05 3 6—7 1 6 i 1.8 . n 537 248 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. | 1 TABLE II. Data of Short Interval taken from Table Il (See Plate xl“ Time at which one gram ef. 2 1 = 1 welghts fell on scale 1 5 4 Remarks. 3 DERG aS CS B. OBI. iv, .d. Oat. ‘JL cthoes tol. sae elengeasl Pane „ 03... | Sunshine. Maximum rate of incre: se 10:065 l aoe «5+ —ͤ—ͤ— . September 5. 72 Sept 0 m...... „„ „ 0 KK Cold wind. * S vi Ae a = Bos inv: ale Fe = poet Gh GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 249 2 IIL. Data of Short Interval taken from Table IT. ( Cont.) a (See Plate XII.) — Tune at which one gram — N ‘weights fell on scale E Remarks. | 55 | : A Increase. |Decrease. . Sept. 26. 8:10 a. m.... ee 4 oy Se 7 16 Sunshine. 1 „ 2 — Beans wats clessacs Ws! „ 05 19 i 10:38 46 S #1 eee ww lee ee. * “ q 11:42 — * „„ „„ „ „„ „„ „„ Sunshine. Ss 12:43 p. m... 016) 23 enn 10 p. m. . ö Sudden n h which continued all day 1 and night. 1 „„ bet m. 1018. .. a C a Abs Pokey: 50 21 . D . 8 60 ay eee . 20 Coes Doe ae a7 a fo. 1 250 TABLE IV. s a.m. Sept. 27 to S 4. m. Sept. 29. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Increase, grams. grams. (See Plate XIII Sept. 28. 8—9 a. m. 9—10 * 10—11 * 1112 m. 12-1 p. m. 1—2 p. m. 2—3 3—4 “ 4-5 * 6—7 “ 7-8 “ BERERE 8 & 2 8 8 S S 8 8 & ES Baw so co w @ @ 8 e e 2 b k e e e K NS SS SSR BE SE sS Temperate, 8 8 8 7 88 8 & S N 3 3 88 888 8 38 8 _ Ist decrease of grand Leaves and fruit in st 7 23 fruit in si 1 * Maximum increase. e sultry night. Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 251 TABLE IV. S a. m. Sept. 27 to 8 a. m. Sept. 29. ( Continued.) (See Plate XIII.) 8 * 1 3 Time. i 1 : 8 Day. Hour. B Sept. 28. | 8—9 a. m. 20 |...) 22 85 pe 9-10 | 2 |...) 23 | 80 | 0—-11"* | 0 [2 4 70 11—12m. 0 8626 | 70 |} Fruit’and vines in sunlight 12—1 p. m. 0 4 29 | 60 12. 9 0 20 00 23 6 30 | 58 |) 3-4 30 30 | 57 45 [42 30 | 538 5-6 “ | 50 l. 30 | 58 8 6—7 46 29 | 67 i 3 78 “ | 52 28 | 72 4 8—9 64 27 75 Cloudy. 1 9—10 50 26 75 Grand maximum increase. 10-11“ | 46 26 | 75 11—12 | 42 2 | 74 Sept. 29. 12—1 a. m.] 44 25 74 . 12 [4 . . 24 70 3 23 * | 4 24 | 79 4 3-4 42 2 | 7 |) 4—5 “ | 32 24 | 80 . .. 80 ö 6—7 “ | 32 23 | 84 : 7-8 “ | 22 ( . 2384 732 12 2 7 N 8 — 9 ~~ i - * * i a ccm 3 2 r * 8 0 — — a 7 & ei 2 252 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. TABLE V. Data of Short Interval taken from Table IV. Time at which two gram weights 2 : on scale pes. i Remarks. Increase. Decrease. Sep. N. 8:11 a. m...... 1 0 se — 17 e 9% „ . ee ee 948 q 068 21 75 11:05 a. m. 12:05 p. m.|.033) 23 | 70 | ... „% 7:02 “ 7:045 * ä — * 8 26 75 7 07 “ 7:095 “ * Sep. 28. 1:12 a. m. F 1. 1:16 W 1. 22 88 ae 1 a i. | 2:03 6 „ 66 . 8 22 88 5 E 7 7700 . 5 :. Poe oe 5 | 21 | 86 | Strong diffuse light. ie Aiea A+ | 5 Sep. 28. 8:30 a. m.. 3 . 1 866 ð „ : 4 W 1 roa y 10:45 a. in 11:10 4.08 en f 1 iS 12:80 Pp. m.. 047 N 1 2:10 p. m. . . | „ ia 30 — 03 a l q eee BSE 4.8 eres 5:90 p. m. : 5:324 ** 4 · 7 5:348 1 N 5 24 E . +++ 83 S. 1 e 1 8 4230⁴ ꝗ ⁴ 41 348 a. m. . — 66 . SSR aaa: * . 66 75 crowra or cucursrrs. 3 ABLE V. Data of Short Interval taken from Table IV. (Con: ) (See plate XIII. > Sunshine. Leaves near fruit insua- r light. — ae Leaves and fruit tn shade. Clouds, warm night, .Grand maximum increase. ere N 8 a Ja 8 J * 9 * — * " = 8 a ‘ + oe ae f * me 5 254 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 5 TABLE VI. SA. X. Sep. 30 to 8 A. M. Oct. 2. (See Plate xiv.) 288 : i | s| . (eet | | 1 Day. Hour. 1 i 2 i g 5 Sept. 30 8-9 a. m. 6 16 78 1. ! Sunshine 9—10 * . ae 7% 1.1 10—11 „ . . 68 1.5 ö 11—12 wu. 4 4 50 3. 12—1 p. m... 4 57 3.4 W — ee 71 3.2 la . ere 76 2. 5 | 18 rome 4 | 1.5 | Pl a W 4 E „ 718 1.5 61 *. | 8 pene n | 1+ |) Balance and 1—s “ | 32 . . 6 79 | 1+ disturbed. % ee ee 910 „ 26 l. 4186 79 | .5 10—11 ** | 26 . 8 78 | .5 n Nn U Oct. 1. |12-1a.m| 211. Ria | E 16 7% | .3 „ „ Gude 34 [2 s 7 | <3 5 6% 3 gee 14 80 3 F 14 80 .4 . 15 78 7 E W „ 406 14 rt 8 a, 2 4 Anderson: Lane O or cucURBITA. tabu ＋ 8 A. A. Sep. 30 to 8 A.M. bet. 2. ( Continued.) (See Plate x1v.) x Day. Hour. = i E 3 Oet. I. - . m.] 12. 16 f 0 9-10 „ 10 . 16 6 10—11 * 10 16 6 u-. 8 |...... 16 88 12—1 p. m.] 12 |......| 16 818. 12 8 . 16 9 a—3 “| 0 . . . 16 4 3-4 [ 10 |......} 16 6% .4 4—5 * | 90 |,..... 16 84 4 3-0 10 10 Rain. u. 16 4 au 15 3 s—o | 32 /...... 15 3 9-10 | 13 |......] 15 es 3 10-11. | 13 |..... 15 86 .3 ! 11—12 * | 14 |......] 15 8 .3 Dot. 2. 121. m.] 1. 18 0 3 3 .. 14 88 27 Clouds, rain at in- ne a—4 “ | „ „„ 14 2 * „ | 90°}. 15 86 .3 5—6 [0 15 4 e . 16 4 8 16 87 8 334 * n Wiese , 2 De en ee, * e we ee eee 3 r ie tn 5 N — 1 7 = N a 5 . = x ae 256 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. | 5 . Wi TABLE VI. Data of Short Interval taken from Table (See Plate ——— eee — — — — Time at which two gram weights fe on scale pan. 5 244 1 1 f Remarks. ; Tacrease, Decrease. ay 5 Sep. 30. 8:12 a. m. 8:24 50 „„ „„ 16 15 78 3 B40 | uenereveses 12 9:05 ee ee erereree 08 83 45 Sunshine. 10:02 ck > > „ N 1% 0e 16 | % 1 [08a 1 12:10 p. m.. 00 Fruit and leaves near 120 1 im sunlight. 118 „ 4.05 1s 0 16 70 705 „ a ess N 2171 { Leaves and frutin va 6:34 b. m. 8 R 66 18 | 77 6:43 * a 7:02 m. eee ewww 800 22 1. 179 [J Clouds vi „ 1. ‘ez me Oct. 1. | 6:01 a. m. 1 ot ee y ta : oe: oy Se 66 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 237 TABLE VU. Data of Short Interval taken from Table VI. (cht) 5 (See Plate xiv.) . F . Time uttwhich two gram weights 2 8 4 Lact — 45 Reiarks. 111 — 4— . 2 7 e n 9 . 4.14 P. m. ä 2255**V?ꝛꝛ % | 17 80 7—— 2 16 16 84 — ũ 2 7 15 86 > Rain. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES: _ i ™~e, TABLE VIII. s A.M. Oct. 7 to S A. M. Oct. v. (See Plate xv) * 5 vag + 5 1 Time. . Day. Hour. BY Oct, 7. 8-9 a.m. x 9—10 Oct. 8. 10—11 “ 11—12 m. 12—1 p. m. 2 3—3 “ 3—4 4 4—5 “ee 9—10 * 10-11 5 11—12 * 12—1 a. m. 12 2—3 “ 3-4 *! “a 5-6 * 6—7 “ —— — —— — eee ee —— ee —— we —— ee * K K 2 2 * 8 8 8 8 8 288 3 33 A2 23 38 r Sunshine. Cold wind. . * 259 * * * TAERLE VIII. 8 A. M. Oct. 7 to 8 A. I. Vet. 9. (Continued.) ees (See Plate xv.) 4 — ee 8 2 5 Increase grams. Decrease grams. Temp. 0°. Hour. Oct. 8. 8-9 a. m.. 9 * 10% . 2 fn a e 6 . coo 87 . -im. . . 6 78 | 2. hein 4 . . J. . . 0 Nasr A all day. 2 |...) 4 f 4 A „„ 4 nee. 4“ eee 4 . o. „ o eee 610 [ . . . . . l. 0 10—]1 “* (eee f u °°7 |..... 12 88 | .8 > Oct.9, la-. m. G . . . . . 8 7 1-2 * 3 23 4 3—4 * 4—5 * Cold. 6-1 « 8 “ om; — „ % 0 : „ . * * n ; 2 ta ** 1 b 9 F me ¥ pe . | * *. ail > N — 1 * a 8 4 74 é N Re 7 2 5 ‘ 7 WEF oe * 21 aA 260 MINNESOTA HOTANICAL STUDIES. — is TABLE IX. S A. M. Oct. 11 to 8 A. M. Oct, 13. 4 mS: AE ay AA a a Ss 1 nd (See Plate v. Be: ad b| 5 11 — 15 Day. Hour. : ay Oct, 11. | 8-0 4. m.... . 2 fi 80 : „„ 8 n oe * 11—12 m.. 12—1 p. m.... 8 1—2 * 232 7 72 . 18 70 te - e HS 3 8 56 [24 % 7% 4 4 6 - „ 0-10 i 10-1 [8 . . 46 78 1-125 Oct, 12. 12—1 a. m. 1 : . yu 2 vi e 231 i r 45“) 2 Se, 5-6 “ | 3 : 6a" | 1 : 18 4. 4 IT] 80 eae Pere -u ee ee ee e e SE eee 2 R * 2 i 8 ee — 8 oy eee Soe =! a ; 1 . 5 2 Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 261 ARE IX. 8 A. M. Oct. 11 to 8 A. M. Oct. 13. (Continued). (See Plate xvi.) 1 Day. Hour. Decrease. grams. Temp. Oe Psychr. Oct, 12. 8-9 a. m.. . 10 r 80 d 9—10 “ |......| 14 10—11 * |......| 8 20 78 11—12 mm. 10 12—1 p. m. 10 a ate es at Tea ee 4 ‘ Sta: 25 65 4-5 * 5 a 4 6—7 “ 83 18 70 * * 8 10—11 * * 11—12 “ 1 16 78 Oct. 13. 12—1 a. m.] 5 7 : rT 6 Cold night. 1-2 a3 “ | 4 aT fs Oe We eres 12 81 Se 5—6 Lge ten Ree Meee 13 80 — n 262 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL a TABLE X. S A.M. Oct. 13 to 8 A. H. Oct. 15. 5 (See Plate , Os — 3 ee 114 UI 15 Day. Hour. . a Oct. 13. | S—9 . m.... 6 oa 9—10 * |......] 10 “Mig SY OC Ree a N 11412 m.|......| 6 12—1 p. m... 8 21 . e N 2-3 “ 1 . 2 (28 1 „„ * 1 Ss 5 & | Tempc. eee ee ee 7 x 6 6 4 Saane 8— 9 Saane 5 6 6 5 : 9-10 N 4 12 “ Pe Hs B® 3 Oct. 14. 121 a. m. a ee 7 ‘ 1—2 15 3 G—U ee : aa eee ee 4 6 8⁵ 8-0 a. m... 9—10 * |...... 10—11 ** |..... u- um.. 12—1 p. m. 12 4 yo a Pore a4 “ 4 4—5 * 7 oe 7 6—7 * 6 18 * 1 8— 9 * 3 9-10 * 3 10—11 * 2 11—12 ** 2 12—1 a. m.] 2 1-2 * 2 2-3 2 3—4 2 5 “* 2 5—6 * 2 e—7 1 7—8 * 52 i 2 0 80 4 |t0| 78 8 4 78 20 22 6 18 22 65 10 20 67 6 lis 68 2 lun @ 1 2 J 73 een — . 12 80 N 80 ——ũ——ö— 4 ‚ 70 15 | Sunshine all day. > Leaves and fruit in -8 |} Cold night. hee ae le ee oe ee n yo ork, oo ae an ae —— 1 a ot ge 1 52 2 * ¢ Ps 5 * N 7 8 * a a * 5 P * —— , 264 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, TABLE XI. Data of Short Interval taken from Table x. | | Ntt st.. 1. 4 sie Time at which two gram weights fell 233 Increase. Decrease. Oct, 13, eee eee enee 8:00 a. M. ener 13 80 } 5 620 ost 00..." 1 . om. * IJ. 1 wD | 100 Sunshine. 8 11:20 ne * 1180 1:15 p. m. 130 “™ 1.131 28) 00 1:45 = ; 300.. * 2:30 “ |.06| 22) @ K. —— p. m. Leaves and fruit ins 33838 4 4 122% 420 * 8 Oct. 14. Mn . mn. 1 a „ | Becoming colder. on: 4 e 8 28 ve 11 Cold morni 20 „00 ‘Tips ‘of leaves ou 4:00 o A : 40 + 5:00 * 1.07 | 6 80 6:00 oe 7:00 a. m. -03 | 16 80 7 7:30 88 «am 800 -06 10 80 Warmer; leaves thawe = 8:48 a. m. a f 9:30 4.06 ao eR Se OS ee TABLE XI. Data of Short Interval taken from Table X. ( Continued. ) (See Plate xvii.) ; 5 5 Time at which two gram weights fell ° Increase. Decrease. 77 . 8:45 a. m 9:30 * 1,05 1375 323 323 J. Sunshine. 10540 1 J. 13 . 1112 1.33 Sunshine on fruit. im. 3 2:20 2 2:50 Me 06 3:25 * 1.55 18 70 q . 05 Fruthand leaves in shade a 4: „ PEE SO 1 5 . 12 | 16 | 75 28 f . . 08 14 77 ben., ea — | 085) 12:30 a. m. “css anal Fea ae — 035) $=". * ee ee ee OD 3:30 es ie ae aa 03 42. .* X . n 2 16 9 1 8:10 a. m. betes 604 f TABLE XI. s A. M. Oct. 18 to 8 A.M. Oct. 17. at (Bee Plate xvi.) 5 x. Oct, 15. ae Oct. 16. Sa. m. 9—10 * 10—11 * 12-1 p. m. 12 2 4 4656 5—6 * 6-7 „ 6 8—9 “ 9-10 * 12 a 34 53 2 6—7 * ae “eee ee 16 17 2 228 38838 48 83er. 74 Sunshine. (See Plate XVIII) TABLE xi 8 A. M. Oet. 15 to 8 A.M. Cet. 17. (Continued. ) Remarks. Oct. 16, 8—9 a. m.. . 5 16] 82 | .6 J) ; 9-10 |......]) 9 [17] 75 4 1-1 * . 1 . 11—12m. |......| 16 86 7 12—1 p. m. .. 10 70 87 rn % 1.0 be e nene 34“ |... : 6t | 75 — nines vies. 5 * WO 1 66 9 ; 5&6 * 94 65 9 q 6—7 r a q 128 6 . . 1 0 | 9 © rh ee ae ee 7 a PO as eo , 6+ “So Re a, 6 . 8 . 2 ea „ 1 * 2 1 2 „4 „6% 64 . 4 8 48 5 Ee Stee a Sear 6 te * . { Warmer daylight. 58 84 16.5 — — TABLE XIII s A.M. Oct. 20 to 8 A. M. Oct. 22. (See Plate xl 9—10 “ 10—11 * 11-12 “ 12—1 a. m. ee “ 2-3 34 * 4—5 5—6 Pad = 7-8 * — ee “eee — E % te eye „ W W U G G G W W 2 — d 8 8 8 8 2 2 83 8 r. —— — i Vine sprinkled. > Rain. Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 269 * ‘TABLE XIII. 8 A. M. Oct. 20 to 8 A. M. Oct, 22. (Cont) (See Plate xx.) 8 Time. S 2 A Oct. 21. 8-9 a. w. . 1 | 17) 89) 9—10 “ |...,...) 2 |. .|...|[Clonds, 1-15 * |......) 3 | 27 871, Ir 6 24 12—1 P. In. —— — 11 12 JJ 4 33 | 22) 76 . > Sunshine. base) © 125.) 129. in AS ya. mae . 1 r 5-6 eK... : : 6—7. 1 inf 11 3 18087 a 5 ae . 9-10 * 4 gers 2 , w- “ | 4 Cee en We 11—12% 1 i Ce 3 Oct. 21, 12—1 a.m, 2 ee, . 1 N e. * 12 24 . 17] 84 | 3 “ 1 44 Es) Fee 3 | 45 . 4 6 1 1 . 3 J 4 oy A ha 1 |.....-] 16) 81 56 | 60 ‘ a 8 2 N 8 pe’ “3.409 oe ~“& r 4 CCC 1 ra on . a 7) “ea .* ooo. hee en Cr an oem OF Su 4 8 5 7 eae Cael n g 4 8 „ . 5 i ae r e N 15 270 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. = 71 TABLE XIV. 12:30 A. M. Nov. 2 to 10 A. M. Nov. (See Plate x ; h Time. 8 Day. Hour. i 7 4 . 72 = : a 5 Nov. 2. 127804 a. m. 0 Ran. No change. 1 4-10 " 1 6:12—7:20 “ 1 7:20—8:30 *“* 1 Le Ra ee, ee ere. F — 3 g 8 5 Nov. 3. 12:30 —4:30 p. m. — o Oo Ves — © bo No increase 48 hours previous to data given in this table. —— — — — 8 i Pr = = x 1 a: ‘= ‘ i 2 = The —— * 8 2 one it 5 — > ‘ or am 1 2 — 5 bie . . i ee . : GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. TABLE XIV. 12:30 4. M. Nov. 2, 10:00 A. M. Nov. 7.(Cont.) 5 (See Plate xIv.) „ Time at which one gram weights fell. | Temp. oO. 10:35 6:15 19 16 15 14 61 72 Atmosphere clear, dry and cool, only slight variations in the relative humidity. 272 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Comment on the preceding tables. Table J. The weight of the fruit at the time of the grand maximum, 8 tember 27-28, was approximately equal to one-half of its fi weight, October 30, when increase had ceased. The development of the fruit can be divided into t periods: 1. Period of active and continuous increase; from the of pollination, September 18, to the grand maximum, Sey ber 27-28. 2. Period of decline in the daily increase and rise in t daily decrease; from the grand maximum, September 27 to the beginning of ripening, October 10-12. 4 E 8. Ripening period, October 10-12 to October 22-24. 1 The grand maximum decrease occurred about the middle o the ripening period. The daily decrease was Sau time of ripening. The daily increase and decrease continue until October 31, when increase ceased, followed by a cont ous loss in weight. 7 Tables II and III. On the morning of September 25, the infl * ence of light and moisture on the young fruit was demonstrated. From 2-3 P. u., when the leaves and fruit were in bright sun light, the increase was at the rate of one gram per hour, while from 1-2 P. M., when the sun was clouded, the increase was ten grams per hour. 3 September 26, from 11 A. M. to 1 P. M., an increase of one gram per hour occurred. At 1:10 P. u. the vines were sprinkled and the root watered. Two minutes later, at 1:12 P. M., the increase was at the rate of thirty grams per hour, while the fruit was still in the sunshine. These results agree with those of F. Darwin®. Syringing the leaves and watering the soil causes a rapid increase in growth.” Tables IV. and V. The grand maximum increase had been reached and the first decrease occurred when the leaves, fi uit 5 t and plant were in direct sunlight, temperature high and rela- tive humidity low. “4 The grand maximum increase occurred between 1-2 a. 1. and 8-10 P. M., September 28. The rate of increase at night at the time of the grand maximum was quite uniform and con- stant, the daily maximum occurring between 8 P. M. and 6 A. 1. Tables VI. and III. The lessened daily maximum increase following the grand maximum is demonstrated. 9. Ann. Bot. 7: 485. 1893. Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA. 273 Decrease occurred at the time of sunshine, high temperature, low relative humidity and rapid transpiration of the leaves. From 8 A. M., October 1, to 8 A. M., October 2, there were only slight variations in temperature, humidity and rate of transpiration of the leaves. No decrease was exhibited. This was due to the cloudy and rainy weather. fable VIII. The complete cessation of growth from 10-12 Pi. M., October 7, was due to a cold wind. The vines were _ sprinkled for one minute at 12:20 P. ., October 8; an increase immediately occurred, but as soon as the leaves were dry, decrease began. The effect of sprinkling vines at this stage of the fruits’ development was not so marked as at the grand maximum. Table IX. This table is inclusive of the time at the begin- ning of the ripening period. The daily increase and decrease are nearly equal. There was a cessation in growth from 8 P. u., October 11, to I A. M., October 12, when the temperature was low and trans- piration rapid, as indicated by the psychrometer. Tables X and XI. At the ripening period the two leaves near the fruit had been cut away so that only the weight of the fruit remained on the balance. October 13 there was a decrease from 8 A. M. to 3:20 P. M. From 2-6 A. M., October 14. the temperature outside of the laboratory fell to 0, and the tips of a few of the leaves were frosted. During the time of the low temperature a decrease of sixteen grams occurred. This points conclusively to the fact that the decrease in weight was due largely to the transpiration of the fruit itself. At the time of the low temperature it may be assumed that there was scarcely any movement of sap. With the rise in temperature from 6-8 A. M. a slow increase occurred. This was again followed by the daily decrease as soon as the sun began to shine on the leaves. The transpiration of fruit No. 2 is given in this table, and shows the same periodicity of decrease as the fruit attached to the vine, being greatest at the time of least relative humidity and highest temperature. Tube XII. At the time of ripening and completion of the _ ripening period, the daily maximum increase occurred during the first two hours of the increase, which began as soon as the leaves and fruit were shaded, This occurred from October 13-24. inclusive. The probable reason for this position of the 274 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, maximum daily increase, inasmuch as it occurred later in the evening and during the night at other stages of develop of the fruit, is that the translocation of the carbohydrates ai proteid substances that go to make up the seed, occurred ai this time of day. Further, following a cloudy and rainy day when there had been no decrease nor sunshine, this maxi increase did not occur. 7 The grand maximum of daily decrease occurred b 8 A. M. and 4 F. M. October 15. The increase following decrease from 4:30-7:30 P. M. was thirty-six grams, or one h of the total increase from 4:30 b. M., October 15, to 7 A. & October 16. a Table XIII. The maximum daily decrease occurred b 11 A. Mu. and 12 M., October 20. The plant was sprinkled at 1:28 F. M. when decrease : the rate of one gram in four minutes. At 1:32, four minute later, the fruit increased at the rate of one gram in tw minutes. This increase, however, continued only minutes, and at 1:35 P. M. there was a standstill, immed followed by a decrease which continued until the regular dail increase began, as soon as the leaves were shaded at 3:30 P. 3 From 8 A. M., October 15, to 8 A. M., October 22, the te increase exceeded the total decrease by sixteen grams. Ff 8 A. M., October 22, to 8 A. M., October 30, when all had ceased, the total decrease was fifty-two grams more t the increase. ‘Table XIV. In this table are given data obtained after § crease in the weight of the fruit had ceased. The object o the prolongation of the experiment was to demonstrate th the daily decrease that had taken place since the grand m mum was chiefly and directly due to the transpiration of t fruit itself, but indirectly to the amount of the transpiratior current to the leaves. a On November 2 the fruit was still in connection with t n vine, and showed a daily periodicity in its decrease, which ¥ greatest at the time of highest temperature and least re * humidity. At times when the atmosphere was almost sa 1 rated, as during rain from 12:30-4:00 A. M., November 2. 1 decrease took place. With the rise in 1 the relative humidity, decrease began. At 10 a. M., November 2, the vine was cut eighty e meters from the fruit and the end of portion attached to it vas immersed in a beaker of water. The fruit still remained ¢ Anderson: GROWTH OF CUCURBITA, 275 1 the balance, and the position of the stem between the fruit and the point of support remained as before. Te leaves near the fruit had been cut away so that the fruit formed the only weight on the balance. From 10 a. M. to 2.30 p. M. a decrease of three grams occurred. From _ 2:30 P. M., November 2, to 4:30 P. M., November 3, there was no change in the weight of the fruit. All this time, however, as shown by the psychrometer, transpiration was rapid. The stem in the beaker absorbed twenty-three cubic centimeters of water, which must have been taken up by osmotie action and _ transpired by the fruit. At 4:30 P. M., November 3, the fruit was separated from its stem and placed on the decrease pan of the registering bal- - ance, where it remained until 10 a, u., November 7. While on the decrease pan the fruit showed a daily periodicity in its loss of weight, this being greatest at the time of least relative humidity. The amount of daily loss in weight became less each day with the drying of the rind and the cuticularization of the epidermis. The use of weight as a means of measurement of the rapidity and amount of growth of massive organs is found to be a fairly efficient method in the determination of the features of the daily period and the grand period. The changes in weight due to conditions of transpiration and accession of food mater- ial are such that their periodicity corresponds to that of The conditions of transpiration and their effect in such ex- periments are easily controlled and analyzed, and a curve of the growth may be plotted, which would be entirely free from error arising from this source. The curve representing the growth of a plant, determined dy weight, will be found approximately correct, although of course both the upper and lower apices of such a curve will be somewhat extended. On the other hand, in auxanometric measurements of length-extension only one dimension of an organ is taken into account, and the error in such instance must be equally great, and is, moreover, incapable of elimin- ation. * SUMMARY. 1. The grand period of growth of the fruit of Cucurbita under observation occupied 34 days. 2. The growth of this fruit took place in a temperature varying from 4°C. to 28°C., and in a humidity from 50 to 98 per Cent. Te eae Et ee ee , oa Fis 5 f ; : SE eee Te ae 7 * * R 0 276 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. © 3. The grand maximum of daily increase occurred 110 after pollination, and 11 days previous to the beginning oft ripening period, which occupied 12 days. 4. The maximum daily increase occurred at times be 8 p. M. and 8 a. M. The maximum daily decrease occu between 9 A. M. and 5 P. M. 7 5. During “ripening” an extended decrease ing throughout the daylight hours, was quickly followed by the maximum increase. This was not true during the growing period, The rapid flow of sap to the ripe fruit was perhaps promoted by the high endosmotic equivalent of the cell sap in the fruit. 6. At the time of the grand maximum increase, the gained 1 gram per minute. At the time of the greatest e crease it lost 0.4 grams per minute. 7. At the time of the grand maximum the fruit g 732 grams in 24 hours. 8. No actual loss in weight of the fruit occurred before it l reached the maximum of the grand period. 9. Immediately following the grand maximum, the ¢ decrease rose in amount until the middle of the ripenin period, when it fell. The lessening of the amountof decre was due to the cuticularization of the epidermis. ; 10. The weight of the fruit at the time of the grand maxi- mum was approximately one-half its final weight. 11. Increase and decrease may occur at any hour of the day. 12. The greatest decrease occurred at the time of the le 4 relative humidity, and consequent greatest transpiration of leaves and fruit. 13. The fruit responded much more readily, by changes in weight, to variations in temperature, humidity and other atmospheric conditions, in the earlier stages of development. 14. Decrease in weight was due directly to the transpiration of the fruit, and indirectly to the transpiration of the leaves. 4 15. The fruit showed an increase at any time when trans- piration was checked by increased humidity of the air. E. 16. Low temperature and frost established an equilibriame arresting growth and checking the transpiration stream. 1 4 17. The ‘‘ripened” fruit, or one severed from the plant, ex hibited a daily periodicity in loss of weight corresponding % that of a growing fruit. 18. In the ripened fruit attached to the plant, the daily loss in the morning by transpiration, was nearly balanced by we gain at night by osmose. 3 . 4 19. The variations in length of the internodes occured simul- - taneously with corresponding increase and decrease of the weight of the fruit. 20. The percentage of variation of weight of a fleshy fruit _ attendant on growth, was much more marked than variations in measurement of internodes. In the former instance, the fruit consisted of a mass of parenchymatous cells whose contents are highly endosmotic, and in the latter instance, the internode consists only in a small proportion of such cells, while it con- tains a strong development of mechanical tissue which offers a marked resistance to changes in size. 278 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Pirate XI. (See Table I). Ourve of grand period of growth. Portions of curve above toe show net increase; below, net decrease. Broken line at left probable course of growth from time of pollination to begin: record. Fruit completely ripened October 22. 1 mm, vertical—10 grams increase or decrease. 5 mm. horizontal I day. PLATe XII. (See Tables II and II). Curves of growth and temperature during fifty hours immediatly p ceding the grand maximum. A rise in the daily maximum increase, also the effect of sprinkling v is demonstrated. 3 mm. vertical“ C. 3 mm. vertical -I gram of increase. 5 mm. horizontal 1 hour. Pirate XIII. (See Tables IV and V. Curves of growth, temperature and humidity, during fifty hours, clusive of the grand maximum. First daily decrease. 2 mm. vertical I gram increase or decrease. 2 mm. vertical—1°C. 2 mm. vertical—1 per cent. variation of humidity. 5 mm. horizontal1 hour. PLatTe XIV. (See Tables VI and VII). 8 of growth, temperature, barometric pressure, transpiration © the leaves and humidity during fifty hours . een grand maximum. Demonstrates lessened daily maximum increase. 3 mm. vertical—1 gram increase or decrease. 5 mm. vertical—0.1 inch variation in barometric pressure. 2 mm. vertical] per cent. variation of humidity. 3 mm. vertical—0.23 grams (approximately) of transpiration. 5 mm. horizontal—1 hour. PLATE XV. (See Table VIIL) Curves of growth, relative humidity and transpiration of the le during fifty hours, ending three days before the beginning of the “ripe ing” period. Indicates the effect of rain, cold wind and sprinkling vine on growth. 3 mm. vertical gram of increase or decrease. 2 mm. vertical I per cent. variation of humidity. 3 mm. vertical—0 23 grams (approximately) of transpiration. 5 mm horizontal—1 hour. ina * Anderson: “Grown | OF CUCURBITA. 279 PLATE XVI. (See Table IX.) ren of growth and relative humidity, fifty hours inclusive of the beginning of the “ripening period.” Daily increase and decrease nearly equal. 2 mm. vertical-I1 gram of increase or decrease. 2 mm. vertical! per cent. variation of humidity. 5 mm. horizonta]==1 hour. PLATE XVII. (See Tables X and XI.) Curves of growth, temperature, and of the transpiration of fruit No. 2, with stem in a sealed test tube of water, fruit and test tube with water resting on the decrease pan of the registering balance. . Fifty hours during the time of “ripening period.” Indicates the effect of cold (decrease at night.) Daily increase and de- cCrease nearly equal. Z mm. vertical I gram of increase or decrease. 3 mm. vertical=1°C. 3 mm. vertical=0.13 grams (approximately) of transpiration. 5 mm. horizontal=! hour. PLATE XVIII. (See Table XII). _ Curves of growth, relative humidity and of the transpiration of fruit No. 2 on the decrease pan of the registering balance, stem not in water, but cut from fruit. Fifty hours preceding the completion of the “ripen- ing period.“ Indicates grand maximum of daily decrease, also maximum daily in- crease immediately following an entire day of decrease. 3 mm. vertical I gram of increase or decrease. 2mm. vertical=1 per cent. variation of humidity. 3 mm. vertical=0.13 grams (approximately) of transpiration. 5 mm. horizontal=1 hour. Piare XIX. (See Table XIII.) Curves of growth, relative humidity, temperature and growth of inter- nodes, during fifty hours after the fruit had ripened. Indicates the effect of sprinkling at the time of rapid decrease. * (The temperature and growth of internodes plotted on this plate are results obtained by Mr. D. T. MacDougal, by observationscarried on in the plant house at the same time. The observations were made on another plant of the same genus, using a Baranetzky’s auxanometer. } 3 mm. vertical=1 gram of increase or decrease. 2 mm. vertical=1 per cent. variation of humidity. 3mm. vertical=1°C. _ mm. vertical mm. actual growth elongation or shortening of internode. 5mm. horizontal=1 hour. 1 PLATE XX. (See Table XIV). Curves of relative humidity, and variations in weight of the fruit, be- _ ginning eleven days after the close of the “ripening period.” Increase at an end. Fruit losing weight by transpiration. 10 mm. vertical=1 gram of decrease. 2 mm. vertical—!] per cent. variation of humidity. 5 mm. horizontal=2 hours. vo Sete. ed ta 8 as ro wh fe ee ee 9 7 280 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XXII. A PRELIMINARY LIST OF THE MOS OF MINNESOTA, JoHN M. HOLZINGER. Prefatory note. In offering this preliminary list first aim is to stimulate all interested to more energ and systematic work. In view of this fact, the qu of nomenclature has been set aside for the present. In a paper on Minnesota Mosses, material for which has been col. lected for a number of years, and is in process of prep: ; a number of changes will be made, principally under Bart Cynodontium, Leptotrichum, Atrichum, Racomitrium, and Platygy- rium. Whether Encalypta, Mnium, Tetraphis, Webera, We ia, and some other generic names should be changed seems stil an open question. The able historical reviews under these eral generic names, by Limpricht, in his Laubmoose, command the respectful attention of modern doctors of nomenclature. So far the principal effect of this author has been to counter act the radical course of Lindberg in changing Baie and t K base the procedure of making changes on a more cons ive, though still progressive basis. It is chiefly with a view to temporary convenience that t writer has based his list on Musci Americae Septentrionalis by F. Renauld and J. Cardot, 1893. The material which forms 4 basis of this list was collected by the writer, unless otherwise stated. In its elaboration, especially during the earlier years of effort, invaluable aid has been rendered by counsel,-v : cation, correction, and determination of a large majority of the species reported, by Professor C. R. Barnes, of the University of Wisconsin. Mrs. E. G. Britton, of Columbia College, has kindly reviewed ihe species of Orthotrichum. Mr. J. Cardot has examined critically a number of Minnesota mosses, which passed into his hands by exchange, and has kindly communi- cated his determinations. He also determined Fontinalis. Dr. Warnstorf determined the two species of Sphagnum. It is witn pleasure that the kind service of all these able bryologists here recognized. . c tt 228 Fon 4 x „ 3 . 5 4 * — Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 281 Dr. J. H. Sandberg and Mr. F. F. Wood collected in 1891, in Northern Minnesota, for the National Herbarium, where most of the material is deposited. Mr. Wood’s mosses were deter- - mined by Mrs. Britton. Later the collector sent a little of those species which the writer found he had not yet on his list. And only these are embodied in this report. 3 Bulletin No. 3 of the Geological and Natural History Survey of Minnesota, pp. 25-26, 1887, reports a list of 33 species of mosses from Minnesota. Five of these are embodied in the present report, not having been found by the author. Refer- ence to localities of the other species is omitted. It will be considered a favor if all who are interested in the Minnesota Natural History Survey, and especially those who collect and study mosses, will submit to the writer material from different parts of the state. All such material will become the property of the University Herbarium, and will be fully recognized in the final report. SPHAGNACEAE. 1, Sphagnum recurvum P. B. var. amblyphyllum Russ. (Dr. J. H. Sandberg, Chisago City, July, 1891.) Dr. Warnstorf det. 2. Sphagnum warnstorfii Russ. var. viride Russ. Marine Mills, (J. M. H., July 20. 1891.) Dr. Warnstorf det. Sphagnum acutifolium Exnre., Sphagnum cymbi- folium Enn, and Sphagnum squarrosum PERs., are also reported, all from Vermilion lake, by Pro- fessor C. R. Barnes, in Bull. 3, of Minn. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. 25. 1887. BRYINEAE ACROCARPAE. 3. Gymnostomum caleareum NEES E HORNSCH. Marine Mills, on the St. Croix river, (J. M. H., July 21, 1890). Moist shaded sand cliff over Laird’s spring, near Winona, (J. M. H., March 31, 1894); Bear Creek, near Winona, (J. M. H., May 10, 1890.) 4. Gymnostomum curvirostrum Hepw. var. scabrum (LINDB.) Cannon Falls, (J. H. Sandberg, July 3, 1891); entrance to a lime cave between Lewiston and Rollingstone, (J. M. H., Sept. 21, 1889). po” Al we 5 nnen 1 — E Ped Ne a een ties ae ee N 8 e N 8 5 er ev eo i 282 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 5. Gymnostomum rupestre Scuw. Franconia on the St. Croix river, (J. M. II., July 1 1890). 6. Weisia viridula Baro. Cave near Stockton, (J. M. H., Aug. 9, 1890); W M. H., Aug. 2, 1890); Bear Creek, (J. M. H., 9, 1894). 7. Cynodontium polycarpum B. S. var. strumiferam B.S Two Harbors, (J. H. Sandberg, July 9, 1891). 8. Cynodontium wahlenbergii (B. S.) R. and C. Northern Minnesota, (F. F. Wood, 1891). 9. Dicranella heteromalla Son. a Thompson and Two Harbors, (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 10. Dieranella varia Sen. 3 Bear Creek, near Winona (J. M. H., April 19, 1890) Homer (J. M. H., June 17, 1890); Franconia on the St. Croix river (J. M. H., July 16, 1890); } Arcola, July 21, 1890; Thompson (J. H. Sandberg July 9, 1891); Winona (J. M. H., May, 1894). 11. Dieranum congestum Brip. 1 This may be Dicranum scopariforme KIN DBR. Can. Muse. 28. Material for comparison not being at hand, the plant is referred to D. congestum with which it agrees in the isodiametric cells in the upper part of the leaf, and the serrate margin. But it differs from typical D. congestum in the narrower, longer cells in the lower part of the leaf being thin- ner walled, the lamina broader near apex, and the ridges on the back of the costa being stronger and coarsely serrate above the middle. aa Marine Mills on the St. Croix River (J. V. H., July, 1890). 12. Dieranum drummondii C. MUELL. a St. Croix Falls (Miss E. A. Ross, July, 1891). 13. Dicranum flagellare HeDw. 7 Marine Mills on the St. Croix river (J. M H., July 20, 1890); also Franconia. July 16, 1890, and Tremp sa- leau Mountain, Wis., June 26, 1890. 5 14. Dicranum fuseescens TuRN. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). 2 a Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 283 15. Dicranum montanum How. Northern Minnesota (I. F. Wood, 1891. 16. Dieranum bergeri BLAND. D. schraderi W. and M. D. rugosum KINDB. Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July 16, 1891). 17. Dieranum scoparium Hepw. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 18. Dieranum strictum SCHLEICH. Carleton county, (. B. Ayres, June, 1892). 19. Dieranum undulatum Ess. Two Harbors, (J. H. Sandberg, July 16, 1891). 20. Dieranum viride B. S. Decaying log, on bluffs near Winona, (J. M. H, April 21, 1894). 21. Fissidens decipiens De Nor. Franconia, (J. M. H., July 16, 1890); Northern Minne- sota, (V. F. Wood, 1891); bluffs south of Lake Wino- na, (J. M. H., May, 1894). 22. Fissidens minutulus SULL. Franconia, (J. M. H., July 16, 1890); Osceola Mills, (J. M. H., July 17, 1890); Bear Creek, (J. M. H., May, 1894); bluffs near Winona, (J. M. H., Aug. 7, 1894); entrance to Indian inscription cave, a little way be- low Lamoille, (J. M. H., August, 1894). 23. Leucobryum glaucum Sen. Marshland, Wis. (J. M. H., Aug. 19, 1890). 24. Ceratodon purpureus BRIp, Winona prairie, (J. M. H., Sept. 14, 1889); Bear Creek, (J. M. H., June 18, 1890); Homer, (J. M. H., June 7, 1890); Trempealeau mountain, (J. M. H., May 17, 1890); Mankato, (J. M. H., Nov. 16, 1894). Very common in dry situations. Two Harbors, (J. . Sandberg, June 3, 1891). 25. Distichium capillaceum B. S. On a perpendicular sand cliff, in a dense carpet, Winona bluffs, (J. M. H., May 14, 1890); Northern Minnesota, (F. F. Wood, 1891. With Myvrella Julacea. 3 ii ee” ee =e | oe PEFC ü ͤͤ ö 26. 30. 31. 32. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Eustichia norvegiea C. MUBLL. Entrance to Indian inscription cave below (J. M. H., Oct. 30, 1893 and August, 1894). found around Trempealeau mountain, but in case only sterile. Seligeria pusilla B. 8. Bear Creek, (J. M. H., May, 1890). Blindia acuta B. 8. Northern Minnesota, (F. F. Wood, 1891). Didymodon eylindricus B. 8. St. Croix Falls, (J. M. H., July 10, 1890). Since Lesquereaux and James’ Manual D. luridus to Minnesota (see p. 105), the plant was carefully compared with Reinsch's mens of D. luridus in the National Herbarium, and was excluded from the species because its leaf base is hyaline nearly a third up. In this respect it was found to agree better with Schimper's specimens of D. cylindricus, though the leaves in the Minnesota plant are shorter. a Leptotrichum glaucescens HAMPE. Winona bluffs, (J. M. H., September, 1594). Leptotrichum tortile C. Muss. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. H., April 26, 1890); Osce- ola Mills, Wis. (J. M. H., July 18, 1890). a Desmatodon obtusifolius Son. 4 Winona bluffs and Laird's spring (J. M. H., May, 1894); Trempealeau Mountain, Wis. (J. M. H., May 17, 1890). This moss is very common around Winona. It occurs always on perpendicular shaded sand cliffs. Its fugacious peristome, which falls almost uniformly with the operculum, makes it a very perplexing 1 to the beginner. Barbula fallax Hepw. Bluffs near Winona (J. M. H., Sept. 28, 1889). Barbula mucronifolia B. S. Franconia (J. M. H., July 16, 1890); Mankato (J. * E. Nov. 16, 1894). 4 ore i ~ Oe ee „ tte — ˙· ee 9 * Le 1 2 1 4 ace, N : = ar ae 3 \~ a i= Be . Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 285 Barbula ruralis Hepw. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. H., May 4, 1893). This moss has been collected for five years in the same locality, but has always been found sterile. Barbula tortuosa W. and M. var dicranoides (Fence. ). Mrs. E. G. Britton, det. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. II., May 4, 1893). Like the preceding, quite common in the sand on top of the bluff, but like it only sterile Barbula unguiculata Hepw. Winona (J. M. H., Sept. 21, 1889); Bear Creek (J. M. II., May 10, 1890). The most common of the Barbulas around Winona. Grimmia ambigua Soz. Sand rocks on Winona bluffs (J. M. H., May 14, 1890). Grimmia apocarpa Hepw. : Lime rocks near Winona (J. M. H., May 26, 1890); also near Fountain City, Minn. (J. M. H.. June 21, 1890). Grimmia calyptrata Hook. St. Croix Falls (J. . H., July 12, 1890). Grimmia conferta FunckK. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. H., June 11, 1890). On sand rock. Grimmia unicolor Grey. North shore of Lake Superior (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891); Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Racomitrium fasciculare Brin. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Hedwigia ciliata Exnru. St. Croix Falls and Marine Mills (J. M. H., July, 1890); Trempealeau Mountain (J. M. H., May 17, 1890); Lanesboro (J. M. H., Aug., 1894); Virginia City ( Thomas Rowley, Sept., 1893). Coscinodon rani AUSTIN. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. H., Sept., 1890). This moss is not settled. I referred it first, doubt- fully, to C. wrightii. Professor C. R. Barnes, after careful comparison at Cambridge with typical material, pronounced it C. rani. Some of it came by exchange _ 286 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. species! Until it is again compared with the types of r ee eee oe ee fe 2 en n MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. * into the hands of M. Jules Cardot, and he pronounces it C wrightii, finding with it also C. renauldi, his own the three species of Coscinodon, for which there is 0 immediate opportunity, I cannot divest myself of th suspicion that the line may be too closely drawn b tween these three species. Orthotrichum affine ScuHRap. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). yg Orthotrichum anomalum How, 1 Winona bluffs, on lime rocks (J. M. H., Aug. 7, 150% Orthotrichum braunii Scu. As O. strangulatum (Beauv) Vermilion lake (C. 2. Barnes). * Orthotrichum leseurii AUSTIN. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Aug. 7, 1890 and later); E Creek (J. M. H., May, 1894). * This moss is found always on limestone boulders, and is frequently mixed with Grimmia apocarpa. 4 Orthotrichum pumilum Sw. a Hammond’s farm, near Winona (J. M. H., June 11, 1890). 4 Orthotrichum speciosum NEEs. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Encalypta ciliata How. Stockton (J. M. H., April 24, 1890); Winona (J. K. May 16, 1890, May 6, 1893); Marine Mills (J. M. H., July 19, 1890); Arcola (J. M. H., July 21, 1890). a Tetraphis pellucida Hepw. = Osceola Mills on the St. Croix river (J. H. M., July 18, 1890); near Indian inscription cave, below Lamoille (J. M. H., August, 1894). a Physcomitrium hookeri HE. Moist meadow, on Hamilton's farm near Winona 6 H., June 7, 1890). Physcomitrium immersum SULL. 2 Sandy clay bank of Mississippi river, near Wine na (J. M. H., Oct., 19, 1889). — Physcomitrium pyriforme BRm. eet Bear Creek 8 M. H., April 19, arr Fide Cardot Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 287 b. Physcomitrium turbinatum (Micux.) Barro. Winona (J. M. I., May 5. 1894). 58. Funaria hygrometrica Hepw. Beck's farm, near Winona (J. M. H., May 29, 1890) Very common. 59. Bartramia oederi Schw. Winona (J. M. H., May 15, 1888); Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct 12, 1889); Lamoille cave (J. M. H., August, 1894). 60. Bartramia pomiformis Heow. Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1891). 61. Philonotis fontana Brin. Beck's farm, near Winona (J. M. H., June 6, 1890); Osceola, on the St. Croix river (J. M. H., July 17, 1890); Floodwood bay, north shore of Lake Super- ior (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1891). 62. Amblyodon dealbatus * B. var americanus R. and C. n. var ined. Osceola Mills, on the St. Croix river (a. M. H., July 17, 1890). 63. Aulacomnium palustre Scuwascr. Vermilion lake (C. R. Barnes). 64. Leptobryum pyriforme Scu. Franconia (J. M. H., July 16, 1890); Winona (J. M. H. Sept., 1889); Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 20, 1894). 058. Webera albieans Sch. 1 Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 66. Webera carnea Sch. 1 Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891.) 7 67. Webern elongata Schw. 1 Spring near Laird's mill, S. E. of Winona (J. M. E. June, 1894). 8. webera nutans Hepw. 4 Trempealeau, Wis. (J. M. H., June 26, 1890); Cannon Falls (J. H. Sandberg, July 2 and 3, 1891). Bryum arcticum B. S. Stockton bluffs (J. M. H., Sept. 21, 1889). 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 78. 79. 81. 82. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Bryum argenteum L. i Winona (J. M. I., Sept. 14, 1879); Bear Creek (J. 1 1 Aug. 30, 1889). A very common moss. Bryum bimum Semen. Catholic cemetery bluff (J. M. H., June Il, Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891, also Forks, same coll., July 9, 1891). Bryum caespiticium L. 1 Bear Oreek (J. M. II., April 19, 1890); Winona 61 H., Sept. 14, 1889). Bryum cirrhatum H. & H. Beck's farm near Winona (J. M. H., May 29, Stockton cave (J. M. H., Aug. 9, 1890). Bryum intermedium B. S. Homer (J. M. H., June, 1890); Winona (J. M. H., Jal. 8, 1890); Trempealeau, Wis. (J. M. H., May 17, 188 Bryum ontariense Kinps. Bear Creek (J. M. . Aug. 30, 1889); nomr (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). Bryum pallescens SCHLEICH. Bear Creek (J. M. H., Sept. 21, 1889). Bryum pendulum Son. f Winona bluffs (J. M. H., May, 1890, and Nov., 1800). ; Bryum torquescens B. S. McAlister (J. M. H., August 24, 1889). Bryum uliginosum B. S. a Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889); Stockton 5 0 H., April 24, 1890); Franconia and Arcola (J. a July 16 and 21, 1890). Mnium affine Schw. Bear Creek (J. M. H., May 3, 1890). Mnium cinclidioides Hus. Vermilion lake (C. E. Barnes). Mnium cuspidatum HEDW. Winona (J. M. H., June 5, 1889); Homer (J. M. 2 June 7, 1890); Thompson (J. E. Sandberg, Jun 1 1891). * a a Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 289 Mnium hornum L. : Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Apri} 1, 1894). Mnium lycopodioides ScawakGR. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Mnium orthorhynchum B. S. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). Mnium punctatum Heow. Isle Royal (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1889); Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). Mnium serratum Bib. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., May 6, 1893). Timmia bayarica Hessv. var. eucullata (MIcHX.). Bear Creek (J. M. H., April 28, 1894); Winona (J. M. H., May, 1894); Lanesboro (J. M. H., July 15, 1894). Atrichum angustatum B. and 8. Winona (J. M. H., June, 1889); Cannon Falls (J. H. Sandberg, July 2, 1891). Atrichum undulatum Beavy. Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889); Marine Mills (J. M. H., July 20, 1890). Pogonatum alpinum Roch. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). ; Polytrichum commune L. Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July 16, 1891); Marsh- land, Wis. (J. M. H., Aug. 19, 1890). Polytrichum gracile MENz. Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July 9, 1891). Polytrichum juniperinum WILLD. Winona (J. M. H., June, 1886, and July 3, 1890); La- moille (J. M. H., June 7, 1890). Polytrichum piliferum ScHREB. Trempealeau mountain, Wis. (J. M. H., May 14. 1890); Lamoille (J. M. H., Aug., 1894); Rochester (C. F. Ainslie, 1894). Polytrichum strictum BANKs. Trempealeau Mt. (J. M. H.. May 17, 1890). ee ee tf [Ae eee ey 2 W 8 3 290 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. BRYINEAE PLEUROCARPAE., 97. Fontinalis hypnoides Harr. Forma foliis apice denticulatis Fide Cardot. 2. Near Lamoile cave, on an old log (J. M. V. Au 1894). 98. Fontinalis leseurii SuLL., var. gracilescens SULL.. q Vermilion lake (C. A. Barnes). a 99. Leptodon trichomitrion Mour. Lanesboro (J. M. H., Aug. 1894). 100. Neckera oligocarpa Br. and Son. Vermilion lake (C. H. Barnes). 10). Neckera pennata Hepw. Carleton county (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 102. Leucodon julaceus Suttiy. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., May 6 and Dec., 1894). 103. Fabronia octoblepharis Scuw. Shady ravine, near Winona (J. M. H., Sept., 1880). Found only on one oak tree. 104. Thelia asprella Suztuv. a Lanesboro (J. M. H., July 24, 1894); Mankato (J. M. H., Nov. 16, 1894). ; 105. Myurella careyana SuLLIv. Moist shaded limestone cliff, Winona bluffs (J. M. May 6, 1893); Bear Creek (J. M. H. sage 1894). 106. Myurella julacea Sch. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, coll., 1891); Distichium capillaceum. 107. Leskea austini SuLLIv. Winona bluffs (J. M H., Aug. 7, 1890). 108. Leskea obscura HEDW. Base of trees in Mississippi bottoms, Winona (J. M. 4. Sept., 1894). 109. Leskea polycarpa ERHRE. Marine Mills (J. M. H., July 20, 1890). 110. Anomodon attenuatus HARTX. Winona bluffs, covering lime rocks (J. M. H., May. 188 Abundant, but rarely fertile. : 7 Uolæinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 291 111. Anomodon obtusifolius Sch. if ‘Winona bluffs, covering lime rocks like the last, 2 but requiring a more moist situation (J. M. H.) Be, Abundant, but also mostly sterile. a 112. Anomodon rostratus Scu. 8 Bear Creek (J. M. H., May 10, 1890); Winona bluffs with the last two species (J. M. H., May, 1894); Lanesboro (J. M. H., July 26, 1894). Occurs mostly at the base of trees. 113. Platygyrium repens Son. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Dec., 1894); Bear Creek (J. M. H. Oct. 12, 1889). 114. Pylaisia intricata Sch. , * Winona (J. M. H., May, 1890); Franconia and Osceola (J. M. H., July, 1890); Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 20, 1894); Mankato (J. M. H., Nov. 16, 1894). 115. Pylaisia velutina Son. Pokegama lake (J. H. Sandberg, July 16, 1891); North- ern Minn. (F. F. Wood, 1891). 116. Cylindrothecium cladorrhizans Sch. Winona (J. M. H. June 8, 1889); Mankato (J. M. H. Nov. 16, 1894). 117. Cylindrothecium seductrix SuLLrv. Trempealeau Mountain (J. M. H., Nov. 11, 1893). 118. Climacium americanum Brip. Devil's cave, Winona (J. M. H., Oet., 1894); St. Croix Falls (Miss E. A. Ross, July, 1891); Bear Creek (J. M. H., April 28, 1894); LaMoille cave (J. M. H.. August, 1894). 119. Climacium dendroides W. and M. Laird’s spring, Winona (J. M. H., Aug. 16, 1889, and Oct. 6, 1894). 120. Thuidium abictinum Sen. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Sept., 1893). In large cushions covering rocks in an old quarry. 121. Thuidium delicatulum LIN DB. 3 Bear Oreek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889); St. Croix Falls 1 (Miss E. A. Ross, July 23, 1891). 3 292 122, Thuidium gracile Scu. 123, 124. 125. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136 . Braehythecium rutabulum Sen. . Eurhynchium strigosum Son. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 7 Bear Creek (J. M. H., May 3. 1890). Thuidium minutulum Sen. Bear Creek (J. M. I., Oct, 12, 1889). Thuidium pygmaeum Seu. Bear Creek (J. M. H., April 19, 1890. Brachythecium acuminatum L. and J. ‘ Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889); Winona bluff (J. M. H., May 4, 1898). Brachytheciam laetum B. and S. Bear Creek (J. M. H., Aug, 1889); Thompson (J. *. Sandberg, June, 1891). a 1 Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889). Brachythecium salebrosum Sen. Bear Creek (J. M. H., Aug. and Oct., 1889). Eurhynchium hians L. and J. . ‘ Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 12, 1889). As Professor Barnes remarks, this plant varies from the type in that the leaves are serrulate to the bead! Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). Raphidostegium jamesii L. and J. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Rhynchostegium serrulatum L. and J. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1891). Thammium alleghaniense Sch. Winona (J. M. H., June, 1888). Plagiothecium denticulatum Scu. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Amblystegium adnatum L. and J. On trees and stones, Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Apr, 1894), Amblystegium fluviatile Sch. Lanesboro (J. N. H., May, 1894). Holzinger: MOSSES OF MINNESOTA. 293 187. Amblystegium noterophilum S. and L. Lanesboro (J. M. H., Aug., 1894). This very distinct species stands in L. and J. Man- ual as asynonym of Amblystegium irriguum var. spini- folium. Cardot, to whom I submitted it, makes it a new variety of Amblystegium fluviatile. But the un- equally greater size of the plant and texture of the leaves seem to entitle this moss to specific rank. Its remarkable occurrence; in large, dark green cushions, on limestones covered the year around with swiftly flowing water from a large spring, is worthy of note. It has been collected by Geo. W. Clinton, at Caledonia, N. V., by C. F. Parker, at York, Pa, by J. C. Porter, at Lancaster, Pa, and by Dr. Sereno Watson, in the Uintah mountains, in the latter locality at 7,000 feet altitute, as is shown by a series of specimens kindly communicated by Mrs. Elizabeth G. Britton. With Dr. Porter's specimen is found some Amblystegium Jluviatile, and A. jluviatile also was found in company with the moss at Lanesboro; not, however, in flowing water, but only in a moist situation. Are these two mosses habitually companions? If so, their close affinity, based on leaf areolation, coupled with this fact, suggests that the view of varietal relation has some ground, in spite of the striking difference in appear- ance. 138. Amblystegium orthocladon L. and J. Winona (J. M H., June, 1889, and May 29, 1890). 139. Amblystegium riparium Son. Winona (J. M. H., Oct. 26, 1889); Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 140. Amblystegium serpens Scu. McAlister (J. M. H., Aug. 24, 1889); Stockton (J. M. H., Sept. 21, 1889); Winona (J. M. H., May 31, 1890); Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1891); Poke- gama lake (J. H. Sandberg, June 16, 1891). 141. Amblystegium varium Linps. Trempealeau Mt., Wis. (J. M. H. May 11, 1890). 142. Hypnum chrysophyllum Bap. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June, 1891). 146. 147. 148. 149. 150. 151. 152. 155. 156. . Hypnum cordifollum Heow. . Hypnum erista-castrensis L. . Hypnum cupressiforme L. . Hypnum schreberi WILLo. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1991). Thompson, and Pokegama lake (J. H. Sandberg, J 0 , and July, 1891). f Hypnum curvifollum Uno, Winona bluffs (J. M. H., June, 1894); Bear C (J. M. H., May 8, 1890). Hypnum haldanianum Grey. 4 Bear Creek (J. M. H., Oct. 10, 1889); Thompson (J Hj Sandberg, June 9, 1891); St. Croix Falls (Miss E A. Ross, July, 1891). 1 Hypnum hamifoliam Scn. H. aduncum var. hamatum Scu. Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July, 1591). Hypnum hispidulum Barn. Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June 10, 1591). Hypnum paticutiae Liyps. Hypnum arcuatum LINDB. Pokegama lake (J. H. Sandberg, June 16, 1891). Hypnum plicatile Mirr. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., Sept. 14, 1594). Hypnum reptile Rick. j f Thompson (J. H. Sandberg, June 9, 1891. : ~ Two Harbors (J. H. Sandberg, July 16, 1891); Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Hypnum uncinatum Hepw. Northern Minnesota (F. F. Wood, 1891). Hylocomium rugosum DERNor. Winona bluffs (J. M. H., May, 1894). Hylocomium triquetrum Sc. om Winona bluffs (J. M. E., June 26, 1889); Rear Creek (J. M. H., April 19, 1890); Thompson (J. E. Sand. berg, June 10, 1891). 1 . oe Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, + i 7, fe / au . | / \ 7 ye N ed 12 U Sept elm er tob Aa 18\/7 2021222324252 O27 9130, /\2\3\ 4/516 wih. 3 ‘ ar . by ä We A November Oe 7 /\2 312 PLATE XI. ae Bulletin No g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 1895 N — 4244 —2—4— - 12 oF, — 8 1 5 — Ss = 2 = — TAN. Lz is A A_\\ — a K * ‘ 1 1 — 7 a fae | — — — — a = — 1-7 4 ed * ag (Se PLATE XI.. * a - \ Bulletin No, 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 18s. ee. i \ ; 2 XIII g e a / \ 7 * : x | \. yok } 1 * D 5 es St 2 7 0 \ 93 7 Ces “Sepb.27 : PLATE XIII. A ae er 2 | ge FA \ x A | 4 ä * \ af : | 8 a” — T 8 / \, N ad 27 Bulletin No, 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 189s. ~ 8 = “4 — ~ eT “Pew * 1 4 1 5 * \ 7 — * . * 8 i * * oe Se OY — a US ES : fed bea } 8 \ ’ / | 1 * 0 1 7 i [ | } 1 ' : . / 1 ' ö f x ; * 4 * 7 N ‘ N Ae ae PLATE XIV. Bulletin No. g MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 8 Z iN \ 4 wa 2 aes 4 a . | . \ . * 77 * Br oe ‘ 5 a 5 By EAI N \ a — “- -T TA „ 4 2 3 Octi7 ] * 7 La a "PRESS STREETS * ‘ * + N N X be , . > | i N 1 1 2 | i 5 j N 7 N 4 3 N q N — 1 S A my os 1 E —— * : I : 1 * -T 7 7 1 i T } 2 4 — 3 — — * * PLATE XV. „n N 3 * Bulletin No. g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, March, 1393, 7 4 — —— 70 e tort 7 8 * — — 4 an-T 5 — ~ 7 Dr / —4 tb. 4 . 2 3 TOT : Ys a 4 — PLATE XVI. i . + * 1 1 7 Fs 2 Bulletin Mo, q. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 1895, 1 — / * 11 8 7 * 8 aK — ; ~ 7 % “P< — 4 134 te Reet ed nt ~ i> — W A 7 T 2 9 V * At L K el 8 ge i * — —— — 46 — rH A, 7 1 — * \ 1 2 * * } = — yf > a Yo . + — — 4 h 7 > / — 2 2 * * ‘ 5 ‘ * 5 — * 2 5 . . * => — * >. <3 Pies 7 — — 1 — 4 1 — 4 — 2 * sh PLATE XVII. “ 0 — oe — — 12442 — -4- 1 4 8 8 147 — 1 PLATE XVIII. ye 8 2 N 7 7 5 n 4 = ' 1 ¥ r K ¢ ie * om, . ; : a WA : 4 f Mink E Ls | ° 4 5 * 7 * * - 7 - ; na 7 . Bulletin No, 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Po 2 1 3 S — ; NECA ' * mike \ Ne ees pt . ms — —— * * —— te mT lf 2 . 7 | 4 — \ — >~ 1 FY 2 3 7 * 2 \ 2 * 2 — 982. ais | — adden tela cid . che: ter wr omg = VT N 1 \ 4 2228 PLATE XIX. ort ae = Bulletin No, 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. March, 89. 1 V 2 1285 \ \ ‘ Z ~~ / Sake x * . ** * 4 an * Noy. * r. N 47 N 4 A 74 . ey = a ‘4 - Nov. PLATE XX. K x) XII. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE BIBLIOGRAPHY . _ OF AMERICAN ALGAE. JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN. 1 bis the purpose of this paper to collect titles of articles rring to the algae of America. Since the study of this oup has now reached a point where it can be made of great fit itis thought that it may be well toconstruct a guide to ng together the information that has been accumulating during 6 past In accordance with the law of development of any ural science, the first work done on the algae consisted ‘i ine nally in determining the species found in different | lities. An investigation of life-histories followed, out W grew the study of the morphological, physiological a paleontological relations of the group. An important of to-day is that of the cause and effect of algal in water, since the supplying of cities and towns with ir e drinking water is of vital consequence, and whatever 2 m may be used, the influence of algal organisms in the a r is at once detected and must be met with scientific as well practical treatment, The recent adoption of the reservoir stem in the city of Minneapolis makes this of peculiar aterest at the present time. But it is not in cities alone that le good and bad effects of algal growths are to be observed. . yas only a few years ago that Le Sueur county, Minnesota, e n was believed to be due to their drinking the water of a infested with certain kinds of algae n several states of the Union the study of minute forms of A in rivers and other bodies of water used to supply eitie has been begun, but what has been done is as yet very at compared with what should and must be done. It is od that the list of titles here presented will facilitate study his kind in North America. te Ee ee Fe Ae DS ee eee 296 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, = The list has been compiled for the most part from the ori nal sources, but some titles have been admitted on the authorit of such works as the Roya Society CaTaLoGcue, Borax CHES CENTRALBLATT, BOTANISCHER JAHRESBERICHT, BOTA} ISCHE ZEITUNG, and BOTANISCHE JAHRBUECHER. The lis not put forward as a complete one, but is hoped to be accurat as far as it goes. Later, additions may be made. 1 The titles have been arranged in chronological order aud 0 „Rules for Citation” of the Madison Botanical Congress have been kept in mind. The following libraries have been of assistance: The b ical, zoological, geological and general libraries * University of Minnesota; the libraries of the State Ge Survey, Hamline University and the State Board of Health; th private libraries of Professor N. H. Winchell of the University of Minnesota, and Dr. H. L. Osborn of Hamline University. I take pleasure in thanking the following gentlemen for tt great kindness they have in all cases shown me while in this work: Professor Conway MacMillan, Professor N. H. Winchell, Dr. H. L. Osborn, Dr. U. S. Grant, Professor C. * Hall, Professor H. F. Nachtrieb, Mr. C. P. Berkey and Mr. H. Elftman. 1. Acheson, G. Biological study of the Tap-water in the School of Practical Science, Toronto. (1883.) Proc. Can. Inst. 1:413. 1884. 2. Adams, J. M. Motion of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour 4:59. Mr18s83. 4 3. Adan, H. P. Extract from Le Microscope.”—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:10, 11. Jal881.) 4. Agardh, C. A. Systema Algarum. xi—xxxviii. 1-3 1824. Several species of algae from North America are included. 5—6. Agardh, J. G. In J naea. 15:1-50. 443-457. 1841. ; * In the first paper are included 11 species, of which 10 are new to science, from different parts of North and South America. In the or second paper Endocladia vernicata is given as a new species f . a Brazil. 2 1 Nya Alger fran Mexico. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 4:5-17. 1847. ee a From Mexico and South America are given 25 species, with 41 genera including 17 additional species. — 9 4 5 3 nee me * a) : Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 297 8. Agardh, J. G. Species Genera et Ordines Algarum, s. deseriptiones succinctae specierum generum et ordinum quibus 1 regnum constituitur. I. 1848, 2. 1852, 3. 1876. 9. ———-. Algologiska Bidrag. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 6:79-89. 1849. Several species from California. 10. . Om de under Korvetten Josephines expedition insamlade Algerne. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. & 17 859-366. 1870. _ Laminaria longicruris Delapyl. From Boston harbor. 11. . Alger insamlade pa Groenland (1870.) Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 27 :1080, 1081. 1870. 12. . Bidrag till Kannedomen af Groenlands Lamina- rieer och Fucaceer. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 28: No. 8. 10. 1871. . Till Algernes Systematik. Parts I, II. III. Acta. Univ. Lund. 9: (Math.) No. 8. 1872. Monostroma groenlandicus and M. vahlii are noted. a Till Algernes Systematik. Part VI. Ulvaceae. 2 ad. Univ. Aarskrift. 19:1882.— (Science. 2:831. 2801883.) Enteromorpha erecta is credited to New York on the authority of = J. Hooper. 2 . Analecta algologica. 1 de speci- Algarum minus cognitis earumque dispositione. Contin- 0 II. Lund. Univ. Aarskrift. 30:98. J pl. 1894. . species of Ceramium from America are included. 16. Agassiz, A. Notes from the Bermudas. Am. Jour. 2 III. 47:411-416. Je1s94. 0 3 * that the so-called Serpulae reefs” might be as correctly named ‘Algae atolls,” since algae play as large a part in covering their : . . surface as do the Serpulae. 7. Agassiz, L. The Vegetable Character of Xanthidium. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 89-91. (154 g 1849.) 1850. 8. . On the relation between Coloration and Struc- ture in the Higher Animals. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 194. * 81850.) 1851. a on the color of Algae. 10. Report upon Deep sea Dredgings in the Gulf stream during the Third Cruise of the U. S. Steamer Bibb; iressed to Professor B. Pierce, Supt. U. S. Coast Survey. |. Mus. Comp. Zool. No. 13. 363-386. 1869.—(Am. Nat. 4:38- Mr1870. 298 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 20. A(llen), T. F. Characeae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 2:9, 10. Mr1871. eT 5 Nine species of Nitella and 5 of Chara are reported from Eastern United States. 21. Allen, T. F. Characeae Americanae, illustrated and described. Part I and II. 1879.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 6:315. My1879.) (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 17:488,489. — Je1879. . 22. Similarity between the Characeae of America — ‘and Asia. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 7:105-107. 01880. 4 23. Notes. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:98. My1881. — The preparation of a solution for mounting algae. 1 24. Development of the Cortex in Chara. IIlus- trated by a series of American species. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. a 9:37-47. pl. 15-22. Ap1882.—(Jour. of Bot. 20: 349. 1882.) (Bot Centralb. 14:33. 1883.) 25. Observations on some American forms of chars coronata. Am. Nat. 16:355-369. pl. 4 and JO cuts. My1882. Nine American forms of C. coronata are described and figured. 26. Notes on the American Species of Tolypella. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 10:109-117. pl. 37-42. ON1883. 27. Characeae. N. V. St. Mus. Nat. Hist. 88th Ann. Rep. 16. 15Jal1885. Ten species, 4 of them new to the state, were presented to the State museum. 28. 11:141. Jel886. 4 Dire:ztions for collecting. ? 29. Some Notes on Characeae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14:211-215. pl. 71-75. 401887.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Sc “4 1888:90,91. F 1888. ) 144 A new Nitella from Feejee Islands, 1 from Nantucket, and a new 5 species of Tolypella from the shore of Niagara river described. a 30. Dredge for Chara. Bot. Gaz. 12 :297. 1 J. P1887. A figure and description. a Si Nitella (not Tolypella) Macounii. Bull. Torn Bot. Club. 15:11. 5Ja 1888. 32. The Characeae of America. Part I. 1-64. J. 1-54. 1888. : (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15:90,91. 2Mr1888.) (Am. Nat. 22:455- 457. My1i888.) (Jour. Roy. Mic, Soc. 1888:461. Je1888.) Part II. Fasc. 1. 1-8. pl. 1-74. (1892.) not dated. (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20:130, 131. 15 Mur 1893.) (Jour. of Bot. 31:156. 1 12 Charas or Stoneworts (Characeae). Bot. Gaz. 4 Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE, 299 (Am. Nat. 27:570 Je1893.) Part II. Fasc. 2. 9-17. pl. 15-22. 1894. Part I treats of the morphology and classification, with analytical key to the North American species. Part II includes descriptions a of species of Nitella. 33. Allen, T. F. Characeae. In N. L. Britton's Catalogue of Plants found in New Jersey. Geol. Surv. N. J. Final Rep. St. Geol. 2:356, 357. 1889. Nine species of Nitella and 7 of Chara are listed. 34. . The Characeae.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:16. 9M y 1890.) a A lecture given before the Club, April 8, 1890. 35. Note on some Characeae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 19:230. 1311892. 36. Notes on New Characeae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20 119. 120. 15Mr1893. 5 Notes on 2 new species of Nitella from the Valley of Mexico and from 2 Japan, and 2 new varieties of Chara from Mexico and New York. 337. Note on some Characeae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20:258. 17Je1893. States that Fasc. 1 of Part II, The Characeae of America, should have = been dated 1892. 238. Remarks on Chara gymnopus A. Br., with descriptions of New Species of Chara and Nitella. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 21:162-167. pl. 185-192, 25Ap1894. _ Describes 3 new species and 1 new variety of Chara, and 3 of Nitella. 39. Japanese Characeae I. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. -21:523-526. 24D1894. Japanese Characeae II. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 22:68-71. 26F'1895. In the first article are included 2 species of Chara and 5 of Nitella, of which latter 2 are new. In the second 2 new species and I new va- riety of Nitella are described. 40. Note on Chara sejuncta A. Br. Bull. Torr. Bot. 0 Club. 212526. 2401894. . Anderson, C. L. List of California Marine Algae, with . notes. Zoe. 2:217-225. 01891. A list of 228 species. : 42. Some new and some old Algae but recently recognized on the California coast. Zoe. 4:358-362. 7 J. Jal894. Puncetaria winstonii and Callithamnion rupicolum described as new. 43. Anderson, F. W. and Kelsey, F. D. Common and Con- Spicuous Algae of Montana. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 18.137 1 1My1891. 7 2 Forty-two species and varieties of Algae are described, of which 3 * varieties and 1 species are new to science. 24 Diatoms are named. * rs , 2 * W 800 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 7 4 44, Angel, M. Diatomaceous earth. Cal. St. Mining Bur. 10th Ann. Report St. Mineralogist for 1890. 583, 584. 1890, A deposit in San Luis Obispo county. | 45. Archer, W. A word more on the Ague Plant.” Gre- villea. 2:166-169. My 1874. — (Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:81,82. 1J11874.) A discussion of Botrydium argillaceum. 46. New Closterium of New Jersey. Quart. Jour, Micr. Sei. 19:120. 1879. 47. Ard, J. Fucoides alleghaniensis. Proc. Phil. Acad. §:256. (19Ag1851.) 1852. Three specimens presented to the Society from Lewistown, Pa. F 48. Ardissone, F. Alghe della Terra del Fuego raccolte del Prof. Spegazzini. Rendiconta Reale Instit. Lombardo IL 21:208-215.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:158. 9Je1890.) A list of 45 species with 3 new, 49. Arechavaleta, J. Los Vaucheria montevideanos. An- ales del Ateneo del Uruguay. 4:18. pl. 5,6. 1883.—(Bot. Zeit. 41:627, 2181883.) 50. Areschoug, J. E. Algarum (Phycearum) minus rite — cognitarum pugillus secundus, Linnaea. 17 :257-269. 1843. A specimen of Padina deusta Hook. from Greenland, is described. | 51. Virginia, ett nytt algslaegte. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 10:145, 146. 1853.—( Bot. Zeit. 13:562. 1855. ae on the coast of California. Stated to be the Postelsia palmaeformis of Ruprecht. , 52. Phyceae novae et minus cognitae in maribus extra-europaeis collectae quas descriptionibus atque observa- tionibus adumbravit. Act. Reg. Soc. Sci. III. 1:329-872. 1854. Upsala.—( Bull. Soc. Bot. France. 3:204-205. 1856.) 1 Some species from South America. 53. Observationes phycologicae particula quarta: De Laminariaceis nonnullis. Act. Reg. Soc. Sci. III. 11:1883. Upsala.—(Science. 2:21. 6J11883.) Includes several forms of Laminariae found in the United States. 54. Arthur, J. C. History of Floyd county, lowa.—(Bot. Gaz. 7:127. N1882.) j Description of some algal forms. 7 5 Some Algae of Minnesota supposed to be Poisonous. Bull. Minn. Acad. Nat. Sci. 2: (App.) 112. 31 My1883.— (Fourth Bien. Rep. Bd. Regents Univ. of Minn. Suppl. I. Rep. Dept. Agric. Univ. of Minn. 95-104. 1887.) Second Rep. on Some Algae of Minnesota supposed to be Poisonous. Fourth Bien. Rep. Bd. Regents Uuiv. of Minn. Suppl. I. Rep. Dept. Agric. Univ. of Minn. 109-114. 1887. — (Bull. Minn. Acad. Nat. Sci. 3: 97-103. 1889) a Mi ¥ Tilden: BIBII1OGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 301 56. Arthur, J. C. A supposed Poisonous Sea-weed in the Lakes of Minnesota.—(Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 32:305. ( Ag1883.) 1884.) (Science. 2333. 781888.) 57. Arthur, J. C., Upham, W., Bailey, L. H., Jr., Holway, E. W. D. and others. Algae. Report on Botanical Work in Minnesota for the year 1886. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. F Bull. No. 3. 36-39. 101887. Fifty-seven species are listed. e 58. Ashburner, Diatomaceous earth from Santa Monica bay.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:58. Mr1887.) ö Read before San Francisco Microscopical Society, Feb. 23, 1887. 59. Ashmead, 8. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 6147, 148. (148) 1852. 1 A collection of 40 specimens from Beesley’s Point, N. J., donated to the Museum and a few remarks concerning their habitat. 860. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. G:Ixxii. (110) 1853. Thirty-six specimens from Newport and New Haven. 61. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 7:xxxili. (901855.) 1856. Twenty. nine species from Beesley’s Point, N. J. are added to the Museum. 1 1 . 62. Catalogue of Marine Algae discovered at Bees- ley’ s Point during the past summer, with some remarks thereon. Proc. Phil. Acad. 7:410-413. (3001855.) 1856. 3 Thirty species embraced in this list. 4 63. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 8:i. (19 F 1856.) 857. Six species from Florida presented to the Museum. 64. ——. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 8:v. (22Ap- . 856.) 1857. Sisxty-six specimens presented, which were collected at Key West, Florida, during the winter of 1855-56. 805. Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1857:74. (17Mr1857. ) 1858. A verbal discussion of the specimens presented upon a former occasion and of some additional ones involving a correction of some of the names. eS 8 Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1857 :ii. Mr 1857.) 1858. Ten specimens including 9 species from Key West, Florida. A list of Plants and a Catalogue of Marine ae collected on the coast of Egg Harbor, at and near Bees- 's Point. Geol. Report Cape May county, N. J. 149-154. Je 7. Trenton. 802 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. — 68. Ashmead, 8. A doubtful Alga. Proc. Phil Acad, 4 1858:8. (16F 1858.) 1859. 4 One of the species found at Beesley’s Point, N. J. and supposed to be 3 either Callithamnion or Griffithsia. : 69. Catalogus Plantarum in Nova Caesarea Reper- tarum by O. R. Willis with a supplement concerning marine algae. i-xxviii. 1-88. 1878. N. V. and Chicago. A. S. Barnes & Co. (Bot. Gaz. 3:8. Jal878.) a Twenty-eight species of marine algae are enumerated. 3 . See Durand, E., James, T. P. and Ashmead, 8. 70. Askenasy, E. Ueber eine neue Meeresalge. Bot-morph — Studien. 1872. Heidelberg. Rhodopeltis scyleri collected from the coast of Peru. 2 71. Algen. Mit Unterstuetzung der Herren Bornet, E., Grunow, A., Hariot, P., Moebius, M., Nordstedt, O, bearbeitet. Forschungsreise S. M. S. Gazelle.“ P. IV. Bot. red. von A. Engler. 4to. 1-58. 12 pl. 1888. Berlin. q Species from America. 4 72. Atkinson, G. F. Preliminary note on the synonomy of Entothrix grande Wolle. Bot. Gaz. 14:292. N1889. 73. Monograph of the Lemaneaceae of the United q States. Ann. Bot. 4:177-226. pl. 7-9. My1890.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:184. 111890.) (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. ieee 641, 642. 01890.) 3 74. Intelligence manifested by the swarmspores ol 5 Rhizophidium globosum (A. Br.) Schroeter. Bot. Gaz. 19:503, 504. 26D1894. ‘ 75. Atwell, C. B. A phase of Conjugation in Spirogyra. 4 Bot. Gaz. 14:154. if. Jel889.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:208. 81889.) (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889:786. 01889. 76. A deep-water Nostoc. Bot. Gaz. 14:291, 292. N1889. Description of-a Nostoc found in Lake Michigan. See Johnson, L. N. and Atwell, C. B. 77. Atwood, H. F. Mounting Algae. Am. Jour. Mic. 2: 154, 155. N1877.—(Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 3:72, 73. 01887.) Volvox globator. Am. Jour. Mic. 3 :116, 117. 4 78: My1878. 7 79.

é c r 14 e F AA vy a _. R ac : a * * - 3 Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 339 542. Goddard, P. B. Dried specimens of Hydrodyctum pentagonum. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1:209. (20 S.) ie, Donated to Museum. 543. Gould, A. A. An Address in commemoration of Pro- fessor J. W. Bailey, President of the Association, delivered before the Association August 19, 1857. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 1-8. (19 Ag 1857.) 1858.— (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 25:153- 158. Mr 1858.) 544. Grabendoerfer, J. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Tange. Bot. Ztg. 43: 609-618. 25 S. 43:625-636. 2 0. 43: 641-648. 90. 43: 657-664. pl. 6. 1885.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 6.290. Ap1886.) Description of 2 algae from South Brazil. 545. Grahn, E.G. Microscopical Notes. Bull. Brookville Soc. Nat. Hist. No. 1. 39-41. 1885. List of 46 diatoms and 2 desmids from the vicinity of Brookville. 546. Gratacap, L. P. and Woodward, A. The Freshwater Flora and Fauna of Central Park. Sci. Am. Suppl. 18: (No. 468.) 7480, 7481. 20D1884.—Repr. as pamphlet. 1-19. 27D1884. —(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 12:12. Jal885.) - A list of 55 species of algae. 547. Gray, A. Letter on Mr. Wolle’s papers on Algae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 6: 202, 203. F 1878. Criticisms mostly typographical, on Mr. Wolle’s preceeding papers. 548. Greenleaf, R. C. On a new species of Nitzschia: N. mitchelliana. (1865.) Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 10: 107. 1866. 549. List of Diatomaceae found in a peat swamp near Lake Winisquam in Laconia, N. H. (1866.) Proc. Boston. Nat. Hist. Soc. 11:75. 1868. 550. On the Diatoms and other Microscopic Objects found in Soundings from the Gulf of Mexico, between Sand Key and El Moro made by Henry Mitchell of U. S. Coast Survey. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 11:79. 1868. 551. Remarks on the double Plate of Aulacodiscus. oreganus. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 12:361. 1869. 552. List of Diatoms from South Carolina. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 12:362. 1869. See Stodder, C. and Greenleaf, R. C. 553. Gregory, Emily L. Probable discovery of Zoospores in Oscillaria announced, and remarks made on Vaucheria galls in Meeting of Club.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:112. 10Ap1890.) CT TS ed oe ee eo a ee ee gah ny eg of a th ial t pa * 3 i al! * oe 89 2 ie = a. lil * e 4 Sy ’ * cal N „ 2 1 8 ‘ a ‘ 1 ; : oy ix + * 7 * ¢ N l 5 vA we yer eee a ae g * * \ n * 2 ; 7 2 340 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 554. Gregory, Emily L. Abnormal Growth of Spirogyra — Cells. Bull. Torr, Bot. Club. 19:75-79, 5Mr1892.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1892: 647, 648. 01892.) 4 555. What are Diatoms? Pop. Sci. Mo. 41: 200203. J. 1-8. Jel892. 1 556. Gregory, W. On the Presence of Diatomaceae, Phytolitharia and Sponge Spicules, in Soils which sup- port Vegetation. Am. Jour. Sei. Arts. II. 21: 434-437. My 1856. Soils were examined from the Andes, Brazil, North America, West 4 Indies and foreign countries. 4 557. Greville, R. K. Description of some New Diatomaceous Forms from the West Indies. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 57-12. pl. 3. 1857. ; 558. Descriptions of Diatomaceae observed in Californian Guano. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 7:155-166. pil. 7, 8 1859.—(Edinb. New Phil. Jour. 10:25-30. 1859.)—(Trans. Edinb. Bot. Soc. 6:245-249. 1860.) 559. On the Asterolamprae of the Barbadoes De- posit. Trans. Roy. Mic. Soc. 10:41-55. pl. 7, S. 1862. 560. Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Diatoms from the South Pacific. Trans. Edinb. Bot. Soc. 7: 534-543. 574-580. 1863.—(Edinb. New Phil. Jour. 18:35-43. 181-187. 1863.) 561. Descriptions of new and rare Diatoms from the Tropics and Southern Hemisphere. Trans. Edinb. Bot. Soc.*8:436-441. 1866.— (Trans. Mic. Soc. 11:8. 7 pl. 12:81- 94. 1864. 13:1-10. 24-34. 43-75. 97-105. 1865. 14:1-9. 77- 86. 121-130. 1866.) 562. Grey, E. Glycerin in Mounting. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:140. 1884.—(Zeits. wiss. Mik. 2:81. 1885.) 563. Griffen, A. R. An Essay on the Botanical, Chemical and Medical properties of the Fucus edulis of Linnaeus. Van Winkle and Wiley. 8vo. 1-36. pl. 1. 1816. New York. a 564. Griffin, A. W. On the Collection and Preparation of the Diatomaceae. Jour. Mic. Nat. Sci.: Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. 3: 188-146. JI. 3:229-236. 01884.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:6-8. Jal885.) oe Much use made of American material. a 565. Griffith, E. H. Diatoms: Howto Find and How to Prepare them Am. Jour. Mic. 5:87-90. Ap1880. oe Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 341 566. Griffith, E. H. Arranging Diatoms. The Microscope. 3: 205, 206. 1883 — (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 4: 807. 1884.) 567. Grote, A. R. and Pitt, W. H. New Fucoid from the Water-lime Group of Western New York. Bull. Buff. Soc. Nat. Sci. 3:88. (7Ja.) 1876.—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 11: 150. F1876.) 568. Grove, E. Diatomaceous Remains observed in Prepara- tions of Calcareous Algae from a Pond in Michigan. Phyc. Mem. Part III. 78-80. Ap1895. Ninety species listed. 569. Grunow, A. Diatomeen auf Sargassum von Honduras. (Hedwigia. 6:1-8. 17-32. 1867.) 570, Novara Diatoms. Descriptions of New Genera and species of Diatoms obtained by the Austrian Imperial Frigate Novara, during her voyage round the World. (Transl.) Grevillea. 1:80-32. pl. 2. Ag. 1:41-438. S. 1:76-80. pl. 3. N. 1: 91-94. pl. 6. D1872. 571. Some remarks concerning P. T. Cleve and Moeller’s Diatoms. Am. Jour. Mic. 3:101-105. My1878.— (Brebissonia, 1: 98-102. 31Ja1879.) 572. Die Diatomeen von Franz Josefs-Land. Denk- schr. math.-naturwiss. Cl. K. Akad. Wiss. 48: 1884.—( Bot. Centralb. 19:65-67. 1884.) 573. Diatomees in A. Piccone’s Algae del Viaggio di Circumnavigazione della Vettor Pisani. 1-97. 2 pl. 1886 — (Notarisia. 2:255, 259, 283. 1887.) Diatoms from Brazil, Peru and Magellan Straits. See Bornet, E. and Grunow, A. ———. See Cleve, P. T. and Grunow, A. 574. Grunow, A. and Kitton, F. New Diatoms from Hon- duras. Mo. Mic. Jour. 18: 165-186. 193-196. 101877. 575. . On some New Species of Nitzschia. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 3: pl. 12-18. 1880. 576. G., A. P. B. Wilson’s ‘‘Diatoms in Wheat Straw.” Am. Jour. Sei. Arts. III. 12:232. $1876. 577. Habirshaw, F. Catalogue of the Diatomaceae, with reference to the various published descriptions and figures. Edited and published by Romyn Hitchcock. Part J. i-xxii 1-58. (Edit. 1877.) 1881. New York. Reproduced by the Edison Electric Pen Process. New York. 1877.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:15, 16. Jal880.)—Ed. II. Edited and published by H. H. F 342 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 7 4 + Chase. 4to. 1885. Geneva, N. V. - Ed. III. Prepared by E H. Chase. 4to. Bound in 4 volumes. Typewritten to order for Julien Deby. Unique. N. Y. wi 578. Habirshaw, F. Collection of Diatomaceae. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 21: 451. 452. (15M r1882.) 188g. a A collection consisting of 1,678 species presented to the Society. 4 579. Hall, F. W. List of the Marine Algae growing in Long Island Sound within 20 miles of New Haven. Bull Torr. Bot. Club. 6: 109-112. 81876. a Ninety-five species and varieties mentioned. 4 580. Hall, J. Fossil Plants of the Calciferous Sandstone. - Pal N.Y. 17, 8 pl . 1687. 4 Palaeophycus tubularis, P. irregularis and Buthotrephis antiquata described as new. . 1 581. Fossil Plants (?) of the Birdseye Limestone. Pal. N. V. 1:37-40. pl. 8-9. 1847. a Phytopsis tubulosum and P. cellulosum described as new. 582. Fossil Plants of the Trenton Limestone. Pal. N. V. 1:62, 63. pl. 21, 22. 1847. 4 Buthotrephis gracilis, B. succulens, Palaeophycus rugosus, and P. simplex described as new species. 583. Fossil Plants of the Utica Slate and Hudson River Group. Pal. N. V. 1:261-264. pl. 68-70. 1847. a Sphenothallus angustifolius, S. latifolius, Buthotrephis subnodosa, Palaeophycus virgatus given as a new species. a 584. Fossil Plants of the Medina Sandstone. Pal. N. V. 2:4-7. pl. 1-3. 1852. * Arthrophycus harlani, Palaeophyeus tortuosus described, the latter as new. 585. Fossil Plants of the Clinton Group. Pal. N. V. 2: 18-26. pl. 5-10. 1852. Species in Buthotrephis. Palaeophycus, Rusophycus and Lennophreus are described, with 8 new species. 586. Note on some Obscure Organisms in the Roof- ing Slates of Washington county, New York. 39th Ann. Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. Nat. Hist. for 1885. 160. pl. 11. 1886. a Dactyloides bulbosus Hall.—The organism possibly related to th ; } marine algae. a 587. Hallock, C. Occurrence of Red Snow. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:42, 43. Mr1886. 588. Halsted, B. D. Reproduction in Fresh Water wend f Am. Nat. 11. 513-524. S1877.—GBot. Gaz, 2:147. 01877.) 4 ‘Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 343 589. Halsted, B. D. Classification and Description of the American Species of Characeae. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 20: 169-190. 5Mr1879.—(Bot. Gaz. 5:20, 21. F 1880.) Eight species of Nitella, 1 of Tolypella, 14 species and varieties of ; Chara described. 590. Hamlin, F.M. Bermuda Earth. Am. Jour. Mic. 2: 141. 142. 01877. 591. Hanks, H. G. Diatoms and Diatomaceous Earths. 2d Rep. St. Miner. Cal. from Dec. 1, 1880 to Oct. 1, 1882. 266-270. A list of 100 diatoms found in the Santa Monica Earth. 592. A fossil Diatomaceous Earth. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:117. Je1887.) Remarks before the San Francisco Microscopical Society at the meet- ing of Apr. 13, 1887. 593. Diatomaceous Earth. —(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12.190. Ag1891.) _ Specimens of fossil diatoms from Santa Barbara county, California, Presented to the San Francisco Microscopical Society June 1, 1891. 594. Hariot, P. Algues Magellaniques Nouvelles. Jour. de Bot. 1:55-59. 3 /. IAp. 1:72-74. 3f. 15Ap1887. Six species new to science figured and described from Orange Harbor and Falkland Isles. ; Algues. Mission scientifique du Cap Horn. 1882-88. Botanique. 5:1-109. 9 pl. 1888.—(Bull. Soc. Bot. France. 37: II. 12:122, 123. 1890) 596. ———. Le Genre Bulbotrichia Notarisia. 5: 993-996. 30. 21890. 1 597. —. Quelques Algues du Bresil et du Congo. * 6: 1217-1220. 30Ap1891. Twenty species collected by Wainio in Brazil. 595. Complement a la flore algologique de la Terre e Feu. Notarisia. 7: 1427-1435. 31Ja1892. 5599. Nouvelle contribution a l’etude des Algues de a region Magellanique. Jour. de Bot. 9:95-99. 1Mr1895. 4 600. Algues du Golfe de Californie recueillies par Diguet. Jour. de Bot. 9: 167-170. 16Ap. and IMy 1895. 4 Seven species described. 601. Harkness, H. W. Chlamydococcus pluvialis.--(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:118. Jel1887.) * Speeimens sent to San Francisco Microscopical Society and statement 2 a made upon its habits compared with C. nivalis. a * 7 344 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. “| 602. Harvey, F. L. The Fresh Water Algae of Maine, I, 4 II, III. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15:155-161. 2Je1888. 16: 181, 4 188. 6J11889. 19: 118-125. pl. 126. 5Ap1892. 4 One hundred and ninety species listed with 4 new species and 7 new | varieties. 4 603. Harvey, W. H. Descriptions of Seventeen New Species of Algae collected by the United States Exploring Expedition. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 3: 371-374. 1848-51. 604. Observations on the Marine Flora of the Atlantic States. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 1850: 79-80. 14Mr1850. 1 605. Nereis Boreali- Americana: or, Contributions to a History of the Marine Algae of North America. Part I. Melanospermeae. Part II. Rhodospermeae. Part III. Chloro- spermeae. Smiths. Contr. Knowl. 3“ 1-144. pl. 7-12. (J11851.) 1852. 55: 1-247. pl. 13-36. (O1852.) 1853. 105: 1-119. pl, 37-50. (S1857.) 1858. Supplement No. 1. Additional Species discov- ered since the publication of the First and Second Parts. No. 2. List of Arctic Algae, chiefly compiled from Collections brought home by Officers of the recent Searching Expeditions. 4 < 10?: 121-134, (S1857.) 1858. (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 13: 42-53. My. II. 14:1-8. N1852. II. 16: 422-424. N1853. II. 27: 142-146. My1859.) 4 Brought together into one volume and published by the Smithsonian Institution, May, 1858. : 606. Lectures on Marine Algae. 1856. Washington. 3 607. Characters of New Algae chiefly from Japan and adjacent regions, collected by Charles Wright in the North Pacific Exploring Expedition under Capt. John Rodgers. Proc. Am. Acad. 4: 327-335. 1857-60. ; 608. —. Notice of a Collection of Algae made on the northwest Coast of North America, chiefly at Vaucouver's Island, by David Lyall, in the years 1859-61. Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 6:157-177. 1862. One hundred and seven species listed. = 609. Harvey, W. H. and Bailey, J. W. New Species of Diatomaceae, collected by the United States Exploring Expe- dition, under the command of Capt. Wilkes, U.S.N. Proc. Phil. Acad. 6:480, 431. 2501853—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 3:93, 94. 1855.) a. Short descriptions of 14 species. 610. Harvey, W. H. and Hooker, J. D. Algae Antarcticae, being Characters and Descriptions of the hitherto Unpublished 1 4 ‘ ' 3 4 2 Tilden; BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 345 Species of Algae, discovered in Lord Auckland’s Group. Camp- bell's Island, Kerguelen’s Land, Falkland Islands, Cape Horn, and other Southern Circumpolar regions, during the voyage of H. M. Discovery Ships, Erebus and Terror. Hook, Jour. Bot. London. 4: 249-276. 293-298. 1845. 611. Haskins, B. W. Observation on the Movements of a Diatom. The Microscope. 10:272, 273. 81890. Examination of a Lake Erie form. 612. Hastings, W. N. A Proposed New Desmid. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:29. 1/. F 1892. Gonatozygon aculeatum is the name proposed for a new desmid from New Hampshire. ; 613. How to Collect Desmids. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. _ 18:118-116. My1892.—(The Microscope. 12:147. 1892.) 614. New Desmids from New Hampshire. I. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:153-155. 7 pl. JI1892. N New species and varieties in 4 genera described. 615. Hauck, F. Meeresalgen von Puerto-Rico. Engler's Bot. Jahrb. 9: 457-470. 1888. 8 Ninety-two species, of which 2 are new, are listed with observations. 616. Hay, G. U. Preliminary List of New Brunswick Algae. Bull. N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. No. 5. 1886. 617. Marine Algae of the Maritime Provinces. Bull. N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. 6: 62-68. 1893.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14: 220. 401887.) Lists 84 species. 618. Hay, G. U. and MacKay, A. H. Marine Algae of New Brunswick. With an Appendix containing a List of the Marine Algae of the Maritime Provinces of the Dominion of Canada, with notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada. 5‘: 167-174. (1887.) 1888. 619. Helm, S. Note on the Binary Subdivision of Micra- sterias denticulata (Breb.) Ralfs. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 5:93, 94. pl. 20. 401889.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890: 217. Ap1890.) 620. Hemsley, W. B. Report on the Botany of the Ber- mudas and various other Islands of the Atlantic and Southern — Part I. Rep. Sci. Results Voyage H. M. S. Chal- er 1873-76. (Bot.) 1: 1-128. (Algae 104-128.) (4 Mr1884.) 1885. Part II. Rep. Sci. Results Voyage H. M. S. Challenger. 1873-76. (Bot.) 1: 1281. (16Ap1884.) 1885. Tze numberof species of Bermudan algae given in this work is stated to be 132 and a list of them is furnished in Part I. Seventeen species from St. Paul’s Rocks; 31 from Fernando Noronha and con- * tiguous islets; 4 from Ascension; 19 from St. Helena; 17 from Pristan da Cunha Group listed. eee ion Fy ee ak! PL 2 e * r . ois el - Pah Oe 14 * * J ee av a 8 5 is * ti, 846 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 621. Hemsley, W. B. Report on the Botany of J Fernandez, the Southeastern Moluccas, and the Admiralty 1. lands. Rep. Sci. Results Voyage H. M. S. Challenger 1878-70. a Bot.) 1:1-812. (19g 1884. 261888.) 1885. Twenty-six species from Juan Fernandez. 622. H(erriek), E. C. Ancient Meteorological Notices. am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 43: 398, 399. JIAgS142. 2 Notice of Red Snow near Boston in 1688. a 623. Hervey, A. B. The Classification of the Algae. am. Quart. Mic. Jour. 1: 116-122. pl. 71. Jal879. 624. Sea Mosses: A Collector's Guide and an 118 duction to the Study of Marine Algae. 1-276. pl. 1-20. 1881. S. E. Cassino. Boston.—(Am. Nat. 15:890. N1881.) 7 1 625. Arthrocladia villosa Duby. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 9:126, 127. O1882. 626. Translation of Behren’s Work with Additions _ from the Experience of American Investigators. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:38. F 1884. 4 627. Marine Algae. Bot. Gaz. 11: 147, 148. 4 Je1886. ? 7 Directions for collecting. 628. Hess, R. J. Report of the Biological and Microscopical Section. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1889: 432, 433. (31 01889.) 1890. Diatoms from Mobile Bay from Dr. Hall, Feb. 18, 1889. 629. Heurek, H. van. Recherche des Diatomees. Le Mi- croscope. 1878.—(Brebissonia. 1:19-21. 31Ag. 1: 4-37. 288. 1:83-88. 28D1878.) A number of American localities given. 630. Les Apochromatiques Juges en Amerique, Jour. Microg. 12:489. 1888. 4 631. H(ieks), L. E. Diatomaceous Earth in Nebraska. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 35:86. J1888. 2 Six species noted. AS 632. Hilgard, T. C. Synopsis of a New Classification ¢ » of the Vegetable Kingdom. Proc. Phil. Acad. 8: 304-306 80D1856. * 8 a 2 — 9 633. Infusorial Circuit of Generations. Am. J. Sci. Arts. III. 2:20-25. J11871.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 6: 227-2 1N1871.) l 634. The Fresh Water Algae as the Spawns Mosses. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 20:352-384. 1872. | Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 347 685, Hilgard, T. C. The Old Haarlem and the L atest Brussels Microscopical Prize-Questions. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 21:199-208. 1873. 636. Hill, J. W. Is our Drinking Water Dangerous? Am Water Works Ass. 1893. j Hinde, G. J. See Dawson, J. W. and Hinde, G. J. 637. Hirst, G. D. Method of Intensifying the Resolving power of Microscopic Objectives. (Amphipleura pellucida and Pleurosigma angulatum.) Mic. Bull. 5:36. 1888. 638. Hitchcock, C. H. Geology of Maine. 2d Ann. Rep. Nat. Hist. Geol. St. Maine. 331, 332. D182. 5 Fucoides cauda-galli found on an island in Moosehead lake. a 639. Hitchcock, R. Euglena and Trachelomonas. Trans. N. V. Mic. Soc. 1: 18-20. Jal879. 640. G. Winter's On a Natural System of the N Thallophytes. Am. Quart. Mic. Jour. 1: 234, 235. Ap1879. 641. Spring Collections. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1: 52-54. Mr 1880. - 3 642. The Preparation and Mounting of Microscopic Objects. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:64-66. Ap. 1:95, 96. My. 1: 149, 150. Agl880. 2:28. 3188). 648. About Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:84. 3 644. Directions for Cleaning Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 1: 107-110. Je. 1: 146-148. Ag 1880. 645. Movement of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2 75, 76. Apl881. 646. Preservative Solutions for Botanical Prepara- tions. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2: 149, 150. Ag1881. Reeipes for preserving algae. 647. Red Snow in Colorado. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:155. Ag1881.) ¥ Reprint of a paragraph from the New York Times. 648. Croton Water in August. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2156, 157. Ag1881. 2 Twenty-four species of algae named. a 649. Deby’s Terrestial Diatoms.—(Am. Mo. Mic. f our. 2: 167. 168. $1881.) 650. ——. Croton Water. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2: 172. 8 81881. 3 Names 7 species of algae. 348 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 651. Hitcheock, C. H. Pond Life. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2 198, 199. O1881. 9 Notes Chaetophora and Volvox from Plainfleld, N. J. 652. Striae of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2: 200 3 D1881. 3 653. The Phenomena of Growth among the Micro- scopic Forms of Life. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3: 28-84. F882. 654. Swarm spores of Closterium. Am. Mo, Mic. Jour. 3: 76, 77. Ap1882. 4 Notes correction by Mr. W. Trelease. 655. Collecting. Am. Mo, Mic. Jour. 3:77. Apls82. 4 656. ———. Water colored by Algae. Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 3:94, 95. My1882. 7 657. ———. Life in a jar of Water. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:97, 98. My1882. 1 Note on Tolypothrix muscicola. 52 47 4 658. Plant Cells in Animals. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4 3133. J11982. : 659. Aquaria for Microscopists. Am. Mo. Mie. J Jour. 3: 148-150. Ag 1882. 660. Selecting and arranging Diatoms. Am. Mo. ; Mic. Jour. 3:236. D1882. Describes method of J. Chalon. 2 661. Note on Aulacodiscus kittoni. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:238. D1882. a 662. E. W. Wilton's Pond Life in Winter.” Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:3, 4. Jai883. a 663. . N. E. Brown's Volvox globator.”—(Am. Mo. Jour. Mic. 4:11. Jal883.) . 664. Unicellular Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4: 21 24. F 1883. a 665. Some minute Plants. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4. 26-28. F1883. 7 Notes Scenedesmus and Dictyosphaerium from New Jersey. = 666. J. Hogg’s The Movements of Diatoms. "(Am Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:57. Mr1883.) 4 667. Prinz and Grunow's The Punctations * ; Diatoms.” Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:141-143. Ag1883. a 668. Mounting Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4: 156, a 157. Agiss3. . Notes G. Berthold's methods. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 849 669. Hitchcock, C. H. Spirogyra. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:176 $1883. 670. N The Development of Pleurococcus. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour, 4:191. 01883. 671. The Structure of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. §:58-55. Mr1884.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 11. 4:474. 1884.) 672. ———. Spring Collections. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:77, 78. Ap18s4. 1 673, ———. Photographs showing the Structure of Diatom Shells. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5: 112. Jel884. 674. Filamentous Projections on Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:176, 177. 81884. 675. Colored Rains. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:27, 28. F1885. Memoranda of colored rains taken from a newspaper clipping. 676. Beading of Amphipleura. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:32. F 1885. 677. ———. The Genera of Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:35. 771885. 678. ———. Examination of Dried Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:36, 37. F1885. 679. Beading of Amphipleura and Photo-Micro- graphy. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:42-45. Mrl885. 680. Provisional Key of Algae of Fresh Water. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:68-74. Ap. 6: 109-114. Je. 6: 129, 130. Jl. 6: 170-174. S. 6: 231-233. 01885. * 681. Prof. Smith's New Mounting Medium. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:157. Ag1885. 682. The Red Snow. — (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:221- 224. 01885.) (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 12: 131. 132. D1885.) Review of a paper on Red Snow read before the Biological Society of Washington. 683. Fixing Arranged Diatoms and Sections. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:233. D1885. 684. The Striae of Diatoms on the Moeller Probe- Platte. Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 6: 234. 1885. Pe ¥ 2 = 685. Provisional Key to Classification of Algae of Fresh Water. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:30, 31. F. 7:50-53. Mr. 795-97. My. 7: 133, 134. Jl. 7: 142-144. Ag. 7:170, 171. $1886. 850 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 686. Hitcheock, C. H. On Mounting certain Diatoms. 2 Mo. Mic. Jour. 7: 148, 149. Ag1886.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 6: 1079. 1886.) 4 687. Resolution of Pearls of Amphipleura. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8: 105, 106. Jel887. 688. Reminiscences and Notes on recent Progress. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8: 205-207. N1887. Refers to the author's observations upon the development of Ulothrix from Pleurococcus described in the American Monthly Mieroscopi- cal Journal, 4:191. O1883. 4 689. Diatoms from New Localities. Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 13:42, 43. F892. Mention of New Vork and Alabama Forms. 690. Notice of Rev. Francis Wolle. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14: 181, 182. J11893. (With frontispiece.) 691. Hobby C. M. List of Species of Fresh Water Algae found in Iowa. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 1875-1880. 28. 1880. : Twenty-seven genera represented. | 692. Holland, F. Reproduction of Closterium by Swarm — . Spores. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:41, 42. Mr1882. Mistakes Chytridium parasite for desmid structures. 693. Holm, T. Beitrage zur Flora West Groenlands. Engler’s Bot. Jahrb. 8:283-320. 1887. Lists 55 species of algae. “ 694. Holstein, G. W. Gyroiithes holsteini (Alga) from the Carboniferous of Texas. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1887:436. — (1887.) 1888. Specimen presented to the Museum. | 695. Hooker, J. D. The Botany of the Antarctic Voyage of H. M. Discovery Ships Erebus and Terror, in the years 1839-43. Flora Antarctica. I: Part II. Botany of Fuegia, — the Falklands, Kerguelen’s Land, etc. Algae. 454-519. pl. 165-194. 1847. E 696. On the Diatomaceous Vegetation of the Ant- 1 arctic Ocean. Rep. 17th meeting Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci. Notices and Abstracts of Communications. 83-85. (Je.) 1847. n 4 Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 4: 424. N1847.) ‘ 697. Outlines of the Distribution of Arctic Plants. 4 (1860.)—Trans. Linn. Soc. 23: 251-348. 1862.—(Can. Nat. N. S. ] 3: 325-362. 1868.) Two species of Characeae and 100 species of other algae have been found within the Arctic circle. See Harvey, W. H. and Hooker, J. D. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 351 ; 698. Hooper, J. Twenty-two Species of Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 5:230. 10Je1851. Presented to the Museum. 699. Hopkins, F. V. Report upon the Specimens obtained from Borings made in 1874, between the Mississippi River and Lake Borgne, at the site proposed for an outlet for flood Waters. Suppl. to Rep. Comm. Engineers. 1-42. 2 pi. 16 Ja1875. Appendix 4. 1878. Washington.—Appendix to Report of the Secretary of War. 1878. Washington. 700. Horseford, E. N. and Jackson, C. T. Report on the Disagreeable Tastes and Odors in the Cochituate Water Sup- _ ply. Ann. Rep. Cochituate Water Board for 1854. 32-59. 1855. Boston. 701, Howe, M. A. Miscellaneous Notes. Pittonia. 2: 291. 1892. g Notes on seaweeds from the coast of California. ‘ 702. A month on the shores of Monterey Bay. _ Erythea. 1:62-68, 1893. Remarks upon a number of algae. 703. Humphrey, J. E. On the Anatomy and Development of Agarum turneri Post and Rupr. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts. Sci. N. S. 14: 195-204. pl. J. 2. (16Je1886.) 1887.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887:441. Je1887.) 704. Hunt, J. G Specimen of Algae that po!luted the Camden (N. J.) Drinking Water, summer of 1873. Philadelphia Morning Times. 4:72. 1873. a Hyatt, A. See Remsen, I., Hyatt, A. and Farlow, W. G. 705. Hyatt, J. D. Sporadic Growth of Certain Diatoms and the Relations thereof to Impurities in the Water Supply of Cities. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 197-199. 1882. 706. Hyde, H. C. Shdes of Naviculae mounted in Styrax. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:236, 237. 01891.) A few remarks made before the meeting of the San Francisco Micro- a scopical Society Aug. 19, 1891, with exhibition of specimens. 707. - The Santa Monica Diatomaceous Deposit. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:270-272. 1892.) aS seo read before the San Francisco Microscopical Society Aug. 17, ae Jackson, C. T. See Horseford, E. N. and Jackson, 0. T. 7 * * = 852 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 7:124-182. (28.) 01884. 7: 151-166. (701884.) Ja1885. 711. Studies in Problematic Organisms: The Genus Scolithus. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am. 3:32-44. J. 1-15. 1892. 712. On Problematic Organisms and the Preserva- tion of Algae as Fossils. Am. Nat. 26:5-10. Jal892,.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 19:166. 5My1892.)—(Proc. Am. Ass. Ady. Sci. 40:284. (Agi891.) 1892.) : 713. Studies in Problematic Organisms. No. II! The genus Fucoides. Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 16:62-81. l. 3-5. Jl-O1893.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20:452. NI893.) Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 42:173. (Ag1893.) 1894.) 714. Remarks on the Genus Arthrophycus Hall. Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 16:82-86. Jl-O1893. ; 715. On the Value of Supposed Algae as Geological Guides. Am. Geol. 13:95-101. F1894.—(Proc. Am. Ass, Ady. Sci. 42:172, 173. (Ag1893.) 1894.) James, T. P. See Durand, E., James, T. P. and Ashmead. S. . 716. Janisch, C. The Diatoms of the Gazelle“ Expedition. 17 pl. photographed. With MS index to the plates. Not pub- lished but distributed to several Diatomists by the author. 717. Jelliffe, S. E. A Preliminary List of the Plants found in the Ridgewood Water Supply of the City of Brooklyn, King’s County, N. V. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 243-246. 17Je1893. a Lists 32 desmids, 34 diatoms and 18 species and varieties of other algae. ¥ 718. A Preliminary Report upon the Microscopical — Organisms found in the Brooklyn Water Supply. Brooklyn Med. Jour. 7:593-617. pl. 1-3. O1893. 719. The Chicago Water Supply in the World’s 4 3 /. 708. Jackson, E. E. Letter on Mounting Desmids. The Microscope. 4:117. My1884. q 709. James, J. F. Catalogue of the Flowering Plants, ] Ferns and Fungi, growing in the vicinity of Cincinnati. Jour. 7 Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 2: 42-68. (1-27.) Ap1879. q Chara flexilis Willd. noted. 3 710. The Fucoids of the Cincinnati Group. Jour. F w Fair Grounds. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14: 310, 311. N1898. Twenty-six algal forms found. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 853 720. Jelliffe, S. E. A Further Contribution to the Micro- scopical Examination of the Brooklyn Water Supply. Brook lyn Med. Jour. 8: 588-604. 01894. 121. Cryptogamic Notes from Long Island. III. Diatomaceae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 22: 274. 275. 25Je1895. Seventy-four diatoms listed. 722. Johnson, L. N. Observations on the Zoospores of Draparnaldia. Bot. Gaz. 18:294-298. pl. 32. Ag1893. 723. On some Species of Micrasterias. Bot. Gaz 19: 56-60. pl. 6. 16F1894. Notes on 3 species. 724. Some New and hae Desmids of the United States. I. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 21: 285-291. pl. 217. 20J11894. Remarks upon 50 desmids of which 5 are new to science. 725. Johnson, L. N. and Atwell, C. B. Fresh Water Algae of Cook county, Illinois. Rep. Dept. Nat. Hist. Northwestern Univ. 18-21. 1890. 726. Johnson, S. W. Seaweed asa Fertilizer. Am. Chem- ist. 2:297. 1872. 727. Johnson, T. Shell-boring Algae. Nat. Sci. 5: 17-20. J11894. Statement made that algae of this kind are found at Cape Horn. 728. Johnston, C. Improved mode of preparing Diatoma- ceae. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II: 28:448, 449. N1859. 729. Description of Diatomaceae chiefly of those found in Elide“ (Lower California) Guano. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8: 11-21. pl. J. J. 10-14. 1860. 730. Upon a Diatomaceous Earth from Nottingham, Calvert county, Maryland. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 14: 159- 161. 1861. A list of 36 diatoms is given, determined by Charles Stodder. * 731. The Preparation of Diatomaceae. The Lens. 1197. 1872. 732. How to Pick Out Diatoms in Mounting. (Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 86. 1 F. 1873.) 783. A Monstrous Form of Aulacodiscus. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:98. 14g 1875. 734. Aulacodiscus oregonus with two centres. Am. Jour. Mic. 1:82. 1. 1876. 7ę35. The Preparation of Diatomaceae. B. W. | q Thomas' Diatomaceae of Minnesota Inter-Glacial Peat.” Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. 20th Ann. Rep. for 1891. 307-316. 1893. : Same article as No. 731. 854 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Johnston, C. See Edwards, A. M., Johnston, C. ona Smith, H. L. “oF 736. Jones, H. L. List of Algae, Bull. Sci. Lab. 1 Denison Univ. 2: 115, 116. Ap1887. a ponds near Granville, Ohio. 737. Jones, J. M. On Ocean Drifts and Currents. cn. Nat. Geol. II. 1:87-45. F864. A note on Fucus natans. 4 738. Jordan, D. S. A Key to the Higher Algae of the Atlantic Coast, between Newfoundland and Florida. Am. Nat. 8: 398-403. JI. 479-493. Ag 1874. 4 3 739. ————. Fucus serratus and Fucus anceps. Am. Nat. 9: 309, 310. My1875. Notes on specimens from Nova Scotia and Peak’s Island. 740. Joshua, W. On some New and Rare Desmideae. No. III. Jour. of Bot. 23:33. 7 pl. 1885. 4 A desmid from Jamaica. 741. Julien, A. A. Lithological Descriptions, etc., of 259 ö Specimens of the Huronian and Laurentian Rocks of the r Peninsula. Geol. Surv. Mich. Upper Pen. (1869-1873.) 2: 1-5. 127. 210. (JI.) 1873. Fucoidal impressions discovered in Carbonaceous shale and hemitite ochre. 742. Julien, J. Diatomees trouvees dans |’ appareil 29 de la Flustra spinosa. Rap. sur les Bryozoaires. Miss. Sci. du Cap Horn. 92. pl. 15. f. 5. 1888. Paris. 743. Kain, C. H. Photographic copy of A. Schmidt's „Atlas i der Diatomaceenkunde.“ (Jour. Mic. Nat. Sci.: Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. 3: 254. O1884.) 2 744. Diatoms Mounted in Canada Balsam and Balsam of Tolu. Jour. Mic. Nat. Sci.: Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. 3: 259. O1884. a 745. ——. Notes on Diatoms. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14: 4 25-32. F1887.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:54. Mr1887.) 4 Names of 84 species of diatoms collected in Shark river, New Jerseys 3 during a period of 6 or 7 years. 3 746, New Fossil Deposits of Diatomaceae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14:57, 58. Mr1887. 4 Several species found in an artesian well at Cambridge, Maryland. 747. Notes on Diatoms. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14: 141. J11887. = Lists 21 species collected by Dr. Geo. H. Taylor, from Tampa Bay, 2 Florida. a ; re: 1 zs . Pe ye ee ee a 5 Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15: 128-131. pl. 81. 2My1888.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 105, 106. Je1888.) Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 355 748. Kain, C. H. Diatoms of Atlantic City and Vicinity. Lists 72 species commonly observed in this vicinity. 749. Fresh Water Diatomaceae. N. L. Britton's An Enumeration of the Plants Collected by Dr. H. H. Rusby in South America.” 1885, 1886. 1. Bull. Torr. Bot, Club. 15: 177-184. 2J11888. Twenty-one species and varieties from Sorato, Bolivia. 750. Surirella ovata Kuetzing. Bull. Torr. Bot. . Club, 15:220. 2Ag 1888. Added to the list of diatoms from Sorata collected by Dr. H. H. Rusby. 751. Diatomaceae. N. L. Britton’s ‘‘Catalogue of Plants found in New Jersey.” Geol. Surv. N. J. Final Rep. St. Geol. 2:481-467. 1889. 752. Collecting Diatoms.—(Jour. Mic. Nat. Sci.: | Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. O. S. 8: N. S. 2:32. 1889.) 753. Recent Contributions to the Literature of the Diatomaceae. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 18: 11-13. 20Ja. 18: 156, 157. IMy 1891. 754. Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:71. Mrl892. A criticism on F. B. Carter’s articles. 755. Kain, C. H. and Schultze, E. A. On a Fossil Marine Diatomaceous Deposit from Atlantic City, N. J. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 16: 71-76. pl. 89. SMr. 16: 207-210. pl. 92-93. Ig 1889. The first article gives 107 species and varieties, of which 8 species and 1 variety are new to science. The second paper makes an addition of 32 species of which 6 species and 1 variety are new to science. 756. Kean, A. L. A New Method for the Microscopical . Examination of Water. Science. 132. 15F1889. NiI878. 757. Kellicott, D. 8. Notes on Microscopic Life in the Buffalo Water Supply. Am. Jour. Mic. Pop. Sci. 3: 250-252. 758. Forms of Life observed in Well Water. The Microscope. 2 192-195. F1883. — —— ——— — . — N * Causes. (The Microscope. 8: 110. Ap1888.) a One or two algae reported. 759. ———. The Coloration of Native Waters and the A paper read before the Buffalo Microscopical Club, Jan. 10, 1888. Kelsey, F. D. See Anderson, F. W. and Kelsey, F. D. 356 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 760. Kemp, A. F. Notes on the Bermudas and their Nat ural History, with special reference to their Marine Algae. Can. Nat. Geol, 2:145-156. My1857. 761, The Fresh Water Algae of Canada. Can. Nat. Geol. 3:331-845. O. 3:450-466. D1858. Eleven species described in the first paper and 7 in the second. 762. A Classified List of Marine Algae from me Lower St. Lawrence, with an Introduction for Amateur Cols lectors. Can. Nat. Geol. 5: 30-42. F1860. 763. On the Shore Zones and Limits of Marine Plants on the North-Eastern Coast of the United States. Can. Nat. Geol. 7: 20-34. F 1862. The tidal coast of the United States is divided into six zones and “ species of algae are noted as being found in them. 764. Address before the Natural History Society ot Montreal. Can. Nat. Geol. 8: 68-71. F 1863. 765. Notice of Fucus serratus found in Pictou Har bour. Can. Nat. Quart. Jour. Sci. N. S. 5:349, 350. 81870. 766. Kingsley, J. 8. The Cause of the Green Color of the European Oyster. Am. Nat. 20:297, 298. Mr1886. 767. Kitton, F. Exotic Diatoms in British Localities. Sci. Gossip. 140. 1Je1865. Suggests that the forms found in the British Isles were brought there in the Peruvian guano used for manuring. 768. List of Diatomaceae collected by Dr. David Lyall, R. N., of the Northwest Coast of British North America, Boundary Commission. 1858-59. Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 9: 416, 417. 1867. 769. Monmouth Deposit. Sci.-Gossip. 133, 134. 1Je. 156-158. 1JI. 180, 181. 1Ag 1867. q Description of diatoms from Maine, U. S. ie 770. Maine Deposits. Sci.-Gossip. 85-87. f. 6# 71. " 1Ap1868. 4 771. Perley's Meadow” Deposit. Sci.-Gossip. — ; 131-188. F. 125-137. 1Je1868. Description of some diatoms from Maine, U. S. f 772. Notes on New York Diatoms. Sci Gossip. 0 109, 110. 7. 79-81. 1My1869. 5 Describes Fragilaria crotonensis as new to science. c 773. New Diatoms. Sci. ee 61-63. f. 58-65. 1Mr1870. The forms in Grunow’s ‘‘Diatomaceae of the Novara Expedition.” 28 Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 357 774. Kitton, F. Remarks on Aulacodiscus formosus, Omphalopelta versicolor, etc., with Description of a New Species of Navicula. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:6-9. 1J11873. Diatoms from Peru and Bolivia. N. perryana given as new. 775. A Description of some New Species of Diatomaceae. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10: 205-207. 1N1573. Six new species from Barbadoes. 776. Nitzschia curvula. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10: 241. 1N1873. Note on confusion of specific names. 777. New Diatoms. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12: 218-220. pl. 81, 82, N1874.—(Grevillea. 3:72. D1874.) A new genus of diatoms described, specimens of which were collected from Navy Bay, Panama, Campeche Bay. 778. Number of Striae on the Diatoms on Moeller’s Probe-Platte.— (Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:45, 46. 1Ag1875.) A paper read before the Royal Microscopical Society. ay 4} . Diatomaceae in Slides of Santa Monica Deposit. (Mo. Mic. Jour. 16:232. 1N1876.) Read before the Royal Microscopical Society, October 4, 1876. 780. Note on the Rey. G. L. Mill’s paper on Diatoms in Peruvian Guano. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 2:476. 1882. 781. ———. The Preparation of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:153. Agl1882. 782. Description of some New Diatomaceae found in the Stomachs of Japanese Oysters. Jour. Quek. Mic. Club. 2:16. 1884.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 4:791. 1884.) -———. See Cleve, P. T. and Kitton, F. See Grunow, A. and Kitton, F. 783. Kitton, F. and Smith, H. L. Hyalodiscus subtilis and H. californicus. Am. Jour. Mic. 3: 247-250. sf. NI878. _—(Brebissonia. 1117-121 28F 1879.) 784. Kjellman, F. R. Nova Ishafvets Algflora. (Die Al- genflora des noerdlichen Eismeers.) Vega-Expeditionens Vetensk. Jakttagelser. 3: 1430. 37 pl. 1883. Stockholm. 4 This work contains a complete account of the literature relating to the algae of Greenland and the American shores. 785. Om Beringhafvets algflora. (Ueber die Algen- flora des Beringmeeres.) Bihang. Kongl. Svensk. Vet. Akad. Handl. 238:1-58. 7 pl. 1889.— (Bot. Centralb. 44:150. 1890.) our. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1891:74. F 1891.) Re EG ee eee ¢ a F o 358 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES) 786. Kjellman, F. R. Undersoekning af Nigra till S Adenocystis Hook. fil. et Harv. Hunfoerda Alger. ang Kongl. Svensk. Vet. Akad. Handl. 15: Afd. 31. 1-20. 7 1 (13F 1889.) 1890. e 787. Knowlton, F. H. A Resume of the Algo-Liel Hypothesis. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7 101-103. Je1886. 788. Description of a New Fossil Species of th Genus Chara. Bot. Gaz. 13:156, 157. / Jel88s. Specimen obtained in Utah by Dr. White. 789. Description of a Problematic Organism fro the Devonian at the Falls of the Ohio. Am. Jour. Sci. 37: 202-209, Mr1889. 790. ———. Botany for 1887 and 1888. Ann. Rep. Bd. Regents Smiths. Inst. 1888':475-496. 1890. 4 791. ———. Directions for collecting Recent and Fossil Plants. Smiths. Inst. Part B. Bull. 39. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1-46. 1891. 4 Directions given for collecting and mounting fresh water and marine | . algae. 792. Description of a New Fossil Species of Chara. F Bot. Gaz. 18:141,142. 37. Ap1893. 7938. A Review of the Fossil Flora of Alaska, with: Descriptions of New Species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 17: 207 240. 1894. 4 _ Chondrites filiciformis Lesquereux. Pc 794. Kny, L. Method of Studying Minute Forms of bond Life.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:38. F 1885.) 3 795. Koenig, A. Diatoms from Railway Cutting near Gray's 3 Ferry Road.—(Am. Nat. 20:754. 1886.) “s 796. Kuntze, 0. Revision von Sargassum und das soge- nannte Sargasso-Meer. Engler's Bot. Jahrb. 1: 191-239. 1 pl. 1 map. 1881. eo 797. K, A. F. Letter to the Editor concerning Growth of 2 Algae in a vase of River Water. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:78. 1 Ap1881. = 798. Lagerheim, G. de. Bidrag till Amerikas Deamidie f Flora. (Beitrage zur Desmidieen-Flora Amerikas.) Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. (1885.) 225-255. pl. 27. 1886. Am. Jour. Sci. III. 31:478, 479. Je1886.)—(Bot. Centralb. 27:88, 84. 1886.)—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887:279. Ap1887. 5 * y Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 859 799. Lagerheim, G. de. Algologiska Bidrag. II. Ueber einige Algen aus Cuba, Jamaica und Puerto-Rico. Bot. Notiser. 193-199. 1887. A list composed mostly of desmids. 800. Kritische Bermerkungen zu einigen in den ; letzten Jahren beschriebenen Arten und Varietaten von Desmidiaceen. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 535- 541. 1887. 801. - Contribuciones a la flora algologica del Ecuador. I-II. Ann. Univ. de Quito. No. 27. 31. 1890. ; Forty-two fresh water algae from the region of Quito. 802. La Tuyucha.“ Notarisia. 7: 1376, 1377. 21 Jal892. The native name in Quito for Nostoe ellipsosporum. 803. Neue Arten der Gattung Phyllosiphon Kuhn. La Nuova Notarisia. 3:120-124. 1 pl. 1892.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1892:830. D1892) Descriptions of 3 new species from Ecuador. 804. Ueber das Sammeln von Suesswasser-Algen in den Tropen. Zeits. wiss. Mik. 9: 51-58. (26F.) 1892. 805. Notiz ueber phycochromhaltige Spirochaeten, Perichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 10: 364. 365. (23 JI.) 1892.— Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1893: 224, 225. Ap1893.) Two species of a new genus, Glaucospira, from Quite (Ecuador) are described. Ueber die Fortpflanzung von Prasiola (Ag.) 806. Menegh. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 10: 866-374. pl. 20. (23 JI.) 1892. 807. Trichophilus neniae Lagerh. n. sp., eine neue epizoische Alge. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 10: 514-517. (30S.) 1892.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1893: 219. Ap1893.)—(Zoe. 4308, 309. O1893.) A new species from Ecuador found growing upon the shell of Nenia. 808. Die Schneeflora des Pichincha. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntniss der nivalen Algen und Pilze. Berichte Deutsch. 8 Bot Gesell. 10: 517-534. pl. 28. (70.) 1892.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1893:219. Ap1893.) 4 809. Rhodochytrium nov. gen., eine Uebergangs- form von den Protococcaceen zu den Chytridiaceen. Bot. Ztg. 51 Abt. 1. 438-52. pl. 2. 1893. From Quito, Ecuador. 860 ‘ MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 810. Lanzi, M. Le Thalle des Diatomees. Ann. Soc, E Ig. Mic, 4: 1878—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 2:38. 1879.)—(Am. Jour. Mic. 4: 134-136. Je1879.) — 811. Lattimore, S. A. Report on the Recent Peculiar Co vi dition of the Hemlock Lake Water Supply. Ann. Rep. I a Bd. City Rochester for 1876. Continued in Ann, Rep. 1577. 1 1 812. Lawson, G. Botanical Society of Canada. Abs eh, of Recent Discoveries in Botany and the Chemistry of Plants. Seaweed as a Manure. Can. Nat. Geol. 6: 70-73. F1861. : 818. Gulf-weed at Cape Sable, Can. Nat. Geol. II. 1:3. F 1864. a 814. ———. Diatoms of the South Pacific. Can. Nat. Geol. II. 1:14. F1864. * 815. On the Laminariaceae of the Dominion of Canada and adjacent Parts of British America. Trans. Nov: Scotian Inst. Nat. Sci. 24:109-111. (10Ja.) 1870. 7 4 Notes on 14 species. 1 816. North American Laminariaceae.— (Can. Nat. 4 Quart. Jour. Sci. N. S. 5:99-101. Mr1870.) 1 Read at meeting of Nova Scotian Institute. . 817. Le Conte, L. J. Liquid from the Fountain of Blood, near Virtud, Honduras. Proc. Phil. Acad. Donations to Mu 6 seum. 1858: ii. (20Ap1858.) 1859. 1 A vial of the liquid is donated to the Museum. . 818. Contamination of Water in Certain Sto Reservoirs on the Pacific Coast, and the Palliations resc to. Proc. Am. W. W. Ass. 10th Ann. Meeting. Chicago, May 20-22. 1890. 2 819. Some Facts and Conclusions Bearing upon t Relations existing between Vegetable and Animal growths and Offensive Tastes and Odors in Certain Water Supplies. Am. W. W. Ass. 11th Ann. Meeting. e e Penn. Api 14-16. 1891. 820. Leeds, A. Reports on Water Supply of Philadelph a 5 Rep. Water Supt. 1883-1885. 821. The American System of Purification of Water Supplies of Cities. Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 6:42- 1886-1887. a Describes condition of water supply of Hoboken in 1884. toriae covered surface in the reservoir. 822. Report of the Committee on Animas Vegetable Growths affecting Water Supplies. Proc. Am. W. Ass. llth Ann. Meeting. Philadelphia, Penn. April 14 2 ¥ * Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 361 1889. Second Report of the Committee. Proc. Am. W. W. Ass. 12th Ann. Meeting. 823. Leffmann and Bean. Examination of Water for Sani- tary and Technical Purposes. P. Blackiston & Co. 1889. Philadelphia. 824. Le Froy, J. H. The Botany of Bermuda. Contr. Nat. Hist. Bermudas I: Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 25:35-121. 1884. Chara foetida A. Br. noted from Mount Langton. 825. Leidy, J. On the Existence of Entophyta within healthy Animals as a Natural Condition. Proc. Phil. Acad. 4: 225-233. 901849.—(Ann. Nat. Hist. 5:71-76. 1850.) 826. Descriptions (accompanied by drawings) of New Genera and Species of Entophyta. Proc. Phil. Acad. 4: 249, 250. 2501849. 827. Report of the Curators. Proc. Phil. Acad. 5:355, 3001851. States that 64 species of fresh water and marine algae have been added to the Botanical Collection of the Society by Mr. John Hooper of New York. 828. Red Snow. Proc. Phil. Acad. 6:59. 20Ap 1852. A specimen exhibited brought from the Arctic regions by Dr. E. K. Kane. 829. Report of the Curators for 1864. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1864: 289-291. 27D1864. The collection of algae of Leo Lesquereux, comprising 700 species, purchased from the Central Sanitary Fair. 830. Euglena viridis. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 1868:10, 11. 501868. 7 831. Report of the Curators. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1870:151, 152. 271870. A small collection of marine algae from Washington Territory donated by Mrs. S. Stork. 832. On Circulatory Movement in Vaucheria. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1873:420. 23D1873.—(Am. Nat. 8:444. J11874.) (Nature. 10:218. 16J11874.)—(Grevillea. 3:31. $1874.) 833. On the Mode of Growth of Desmids. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1874:15. 17F1874.— (Nature. 10:298. 13Ag1874.) _ —(Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:25. 1Ja1875.) 834. On the Motive Power of Diatoms. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1874:143, 144. 1581874.—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 9:156. F1875.)—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:168. 1Ap1875.) 362 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 885. Leldy. Report of the Curators. Proc. Phil. Acad. ] 1874: 230-233. 29D1874. a Fucoid remains on sandstone from Dauphin county, Pennsylvania, 4 presented by Allen Walton, 836. Report of the Curators for 1875. Proc. run. 5 Acad. 1875: 508-514. 281875. a A collection of 11 species of Californian algae presented by Miss 8. . 8 Monks. 837. Remarks on Pond Life. Proc, Phil. Acad. 1880: 156-158. (18Ap1880.) 1881. a Volvox globator noted. 838. Foraminifera in the Drift of Minnesota. Pree, : Phil. Acad. 1884:22, 23. (29Jal884.) 1885. 4 Fragments of marine diatoms reported. a 889. Lesley, J. P. On Cambrian Fossil Life as Known. Geol. Surv. Penn. A Summary Description of the Geology aa Pennsylvania. 1: 192-198. 1892. A few remarks upon sea-weeds. 3 840. Palaeophycus and Phytopsis. Geol. Surv. Penn. A Summary Description of the Geology of Penn sylvania. 1: 507. d. pl. 26, 31,32, 1892. 2 841. Utica and Hudson River Slate. Geol. Surv Penn. A Summary Description of the Geology of Penn sylvania. 1:525-556. 1892. Remarks on marine plants. 842. . The Fossils of No. III. (The Utica Slate) Geol. Surv. Penn. A Summary Description of the Geek 01 Pennsylvania. 1: 617-624. pl. 70, 71, 111. 1892. Remarks on Peach bottom roofing slate fossil sea-weeds. 1 843. Lesquereux, L. Description of the Fossil Plants found in the Anthracitic and Bituminous Coal-Measures of . Pennsylvania. Geol. Penn. 2:847-884. 1858. A number of Fucoid forms are discussed and figured. ‘ 844. On Fucoides in the Coal Formations. (1866.) ‘Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 13:313-328. 1869.—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 42: 264. 81866.) 845. Fossil Plants. Geol. Surv. III. 4: 377-508. 18 New species of Fucoides.—Chondrites colletti. _ pr 846. Species of Fossil Marine Plants from the Carboniferous Measures. 7th Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ind. for 1875. 184-145. pl. 7,2. 1876.— (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 12: 222. S1876.) (Bot. Gaz. 2:65. D1876.) Ey Three new species of Palaeophycus, 1 of Asterophycus and 1 of on- stichus described. * 4 * 5 ? a so Mee F * Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 363 847. Lesquereux, L. Principles of Paleozoic Botany. Ind. Dept. Geol. Nat. Hist. 13th Ann Rep. Part II. Paleontology. 1883:7-106. 1884. 848. Marine Algae. Second Geol. Surv. Penn. Report of Progress P. Description of the Coal Flora of the Carboniferous Formation in Pennsylvania and throughout the U.S. 3%:699-701. 827, 828. pl. 88 f. 1. 1884. Dendrophycus desorii and Dictyophytum ramosum described as new. 849. Remarks on some Fossil Remains considered as Peculiar Kinds of Marine Plants. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 13:5-12. pl. J. 1890. Discussion of the “problematic organisms;” 3 new species described. 850. Levick, J. Volvox globator. Rep. and Trans. Birm. Nat. Hist. Mic. Soc, 1882.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 11:10. Jal884. ) Levi-Morenos, D. See Toni, G. B. de and Levi-More- nos, D. 851. Lewis, F. W. Notes on new and rarer species of Diatomaceae of the United States. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1861: 61-71. pl. 1, 2. 26Mr1862 —(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 2: 155-161. 1862.) 852. On some New and Singular Intermediate Forms of Diatomaceae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1863: 336-346. 1 pl. 29D1864. Six new species named and described. 853. On Extreme and Exceptional Variation of Diatoms, in some White Mountain Localities, ete. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1865:7-18. pl. J. 2. 31Ja1865. 854. Lewis, H.C. On a New Fucoidal Plant from the Trias. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1880: 293, 294. (24N1879.) 1881. 855. Lewis, W. J. Report on the Microscopical Examina- tion of the Croton and Ridgewood Waters. 4th Ann. Rep. Metrop. Bd. Health. New York. 1869. 856. -———. Microscopical Examination of Potable Waters in the State of Connecticut. 5th Ann. Rep. Conn. St. Bd. Health for 1882. 215-232. 1883. Samples of water from different towns examined. Algal contents discussed. a J. E. See Mallow, M. L., Rafter, G. W. and Line, J. E. 857. Lockwood, S. The Life of a Diatom. Jour. N. Y. Mie. Soc. 2: 135-142. D1886.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 626. 1887.) 864 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 858. Lockwood, S. Raising Diatoms in the Laboratory. Jour. N.Y. Mic. Soc, 2: 153-166. pl. 6,7. D1886.—(Bot. Ge 1 12:118. My 1887.) — (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887:626. Ag © 1887.)—(TheMicroscope. 7:815, 316. 1887.) A 859. Aberrant Forms in Cultivated Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:269-273. 7 pl. 01893. 1 860. Long, Emma de. Crimson Snow. The Voyage of the Jeannette. The Ship and Ice Journals of George W. de Lone 2:447. 1883. 861. Lord, J. K. The Naturalist in Vancouver Islands and British Columbia. The Appendix contains a list of 119 diatoms. 862. Lyngbye, H. C. Tentamen Hydrophytologiae danicaei continens omnia hydrophyta cryptogama Daniae, Holsatiae, — Faeroae, Islandiae, Groenlandiae, hujusque cognita, system- atice disposita, descripta et iconibus illustrata, adjectis — speciebus norwegicis. Opus praemio ab universitate regia Havniensi ornatum, sumtu regio editum. Havniae, Gyldendal. 4. i-xxxii. 1-248. pl I-70. 1819. Hafniae. f 863. MacDougal, D. T. Titles of Literature Concerning the Fixation of Free Nitrogen by Plants. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. Bull. No. 9. 186-221. 2781894. 864. McKay, A. H. Organic Silicious Remains in the Lakes Deposits of Nova Scotia. Can. Rec. Sci. 1:236-244. 1885. A list of 104 diatoms is given. x : See Hay, G. U. and MacKay, A. H. 4 865. MacKenzie, J.J. A Preliminary List of Algae col. lected in the Neighborhood of Toronto. Proc. Can. Inst. III. 5 7: 270-274. Ap1890. “ One hundred and seven species enumerated. + 866. MacMillan, C. Sexual Immobility as a cause of the development of the Sporophyte. Am. Nat. 25:22-25. J al891. 867. The Limitation of the term Spore.“ Bot. Gaz. 18: 130-134. Ap1893. 868. ————. Archenema, Protonema and Metanema, Bot. Gaz. 19: 19-24. 17Ja1894. 869. Sphaeroplea annulina (Roth) Ag. in Min nesota. Bot. Gaz. 19:246, 247. 20Je1894. _ 870. Maddox, R. L. Cleaning Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 6: 188. Mr1872. ) 871. Magnus, P. Sulla diffusions geografica della Spies 4 lea annulina (Roth) Ag. Notarisia. 5:1014-1016. 30Je1890. ey OU RG Ca pm 5 Ae pees Seal AS iat eee Tilden: BIBIIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 365 872. Magnus, P. Nuova contribuzione alla conoscenza dell' area geografica della Sphaeroplea annulina Roth. No- tarisia. 6: 1215, 1216. 30Ap1891. 873. Mallet, J. W. Reports I. II. III. on Results of an Investigation made by Direction of the National Board of Health, as to the Chemical Methods in use for the Determina- tion of Organic Matter in Potable Water. University of Virginia. 874. Mallory, M. L., Rafter, G. W. and Line, J. E. On Volvox globator, as the Cause of the Fishy Taste and Odor of the Hemlock Lake Water in 1888. Ann. Rep. Exec. Bd. City of Rochester, N. V. for 2 years ending Apr. Ist, 1889. 1-10. 2 pl. 1889. 875. Mann, 4. Diatoms: Their Classification, Life-History, Gathering and Preparation.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11: 117, 118. My1890.) 876. Mann, A., Jr. Shark River Diatoms. Sea Side Torch. 4:143. 1892. 877. List of Diatomaceae from a Deep Sea Dredg- ing in the Atlantic Ocean off Delaware Bay, by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 16: 303-312. 1893.—(Am. Mo, Mic. Jour. 14:291. 01893.) 878. Marmod, G. Dry Preparations of Diatoms, etc., Jour. Microg. 2: 506. 1879.— (Am. Jour. Mic. 4: 176. 81879.) 879. Martens, G. M. von. Conspectus Algarum. Brasiliae hactenus detectarum. Kjob. Vid. Medd. 2: 297-314. 1870. 880. Algae Brasilienses circa Rio de Janeiro a clar. A. Glaziou, annis 1869 et 1870 collectae. Kjob. Vid. Medd. 3:144-148. (1871.) 1871-1872. 881. Martindale, I. C. Marine Algae of the New Jersey Coast and Adjacent Waters of Staten Island. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 1:87-109. (11Je1889.) 24Ag1889. See Wolle, F. and Martindale, I. C. 882. Martius, K. F. P. von. Nova Genera et Species Plant- arum, quas in itinere per Brasiliam annis 1817-20 suscepto collegit et descripsit, 2:1-148. pl. 101-200, 1826. 883. Martius, K. F. P. von, Eschweiler, F. G. and Nees von Esenbeck, C. G. Algae, Lichenes, Hepaticae exposuerunt in Martius Flora Brasiliensis. II: i- iv. 1-390. 1833. 884. Maskell, W. M. Note on Micrasterias americana Ralfs, eee, ae ne Ee 866 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, and its varieties. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1888:7-10. pl. 2 14D1887.) F1888. a 885. Mason, N. N. Cleaning Diatoms from Sand. N. V. Mic. Soc. 5:116, O1889.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:65, 66. Mr 1890.) Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890112. 1890.) a 886. Massee, George, Life-History of a Stipitate Fresh- — water Alga. Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 27: 457-462. pl. 12. 1891. Describes development of Dictyosphaerium ehrenbergianum. Naeg. 887. Mathew, G. F. Cambrian Organisms in Acadia. ns. Roy. Soc. Can. 74:135-162. 4 pl. 1889.—(Can. Rec. Sci. ; $: 383-887. J11889. ) 9 The flora of this series is stated to consist of sea-weeds, of which group, Palaeochorda is found in the lowest sandstone beds. Five | species of algae, of which 4 are new to science, are described. 888. Illustrations of the Fauna of the St. John Group. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 8*: 123-166. 1891. a New genus Medusichnites includes forms called algae by Schimper. : 889. Mauler, E. Protococcus nivalis.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. | 2:74. Ap1881.) A letter containing facts concerning “red snow” of the Alps. s 890. Mayall, J. Jr. Floegel's Researches on the Structure of the cell walls of Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 18:747. JI1884.) 891. Maze, H. and Schramm, A. Essai de Classification des Algues de la Gaudeloupe. 2nd Ed. 1-283. 1870-77. Ban ; Terre, Gaudeloupe. a 892. MeElroy, S. Organic Life and Matter in Water. Proc. i Am. W. W. Ass. 7th Ann. Meeting held at Minneapolis, Minn. July 13-15, 1887. a 893. Mease, J. Fossil Fucoid Impressions from Mifflin” county, Pennsylvania, Proc. Phil. Acad. 2:8. (13F.) Ja F 8 Donated to Museum. | 894. Meehan, T. Report of the Botanical Section. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1878:436-441. (81D1878.) 1879. 1 Fifty-four species of marine algae from California, collected by Henry Hemphill, presented to the conchological section of t th = Academy. 4 895. (27D1892.) 1898. Two species received from Baron Ferdinand von Mueller added t a the Museum. a 896. Melville, J. C. Notes on the Marine Algae of South Carolina and Florida. Jour. of Bot. 4: 258-265. 1875. 1 2 Marine Algae. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1892: 515 =< . . SS Se a et. Cee se as * i> 70 — 1 * * r * 2 3 . 7 3 ** 3 0 7 - 3 / . ; : ö Tilden; BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 367 897. Merrifield, Mary P. Arctic Marine Vegetation. Na- ture. 12: 55-58. 20 My 1875. 898. ——. Gulf. weed. Nature. IS: 708-711. 3101878. 899. ——. Wittrock's Snow and Ice Flora. Nature. 28:304, 305, 26J11883. 900. Mertens, H. Zwei botanisch-wissenschaftliche Ber- ichte vom Dr. Heinrich Mertens, Naturforscher auf der gegen- wirtigen Russischen Entdeckungsreise am Bord des Siniavin, Capt. v. Leutkens geschrieben im October 1827 in Kamtschatka, mitgetheilt durch den Vater, Prof. Mertens in Bremen, mit einigen Bemerkungen versehen von Dr. Adelbert v. Chamisso. Linnaea. 4: 43-73. 1829. (Smiths. Contr. Knowl. Nereis Boreali-Americana. Part I. 85-87. JI1851.) A letter with remarks by Dr. A. v. Chamisso. 901. Michels, J. The Richmond Diatomaceous Earth. M.ichels' Science. 1: 222. 3001880. 902. Migula, W. Note on how to Prevent the Protoplasm of Algae from Contracting.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7217. N1886.) 903. Miller S. A. and Dyer, C. B. Contributions to Palae- ontology. Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 1: 24-40. pl. 1, 2. Ap1878. A number of new species of fossil algae described. 904. Mills, F. W. An introduction to the Study of the Diatomaceae.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:297, 298. 01893.) 905. Mills, H. Motion of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:8, 9. Jal882.—(Bot. Centralb. 11:43, 44. 1882.) 906. Microscopic Organisms in the Buffalo Water Supply and in the Niagara River. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 165-175. 1882. Buffalo. 907. Mills, H. F. Filtration of Sewage and of Water, and Chemical Precipitation of Sewage at the Experiment Station of the State Board of Health of Massachusetts in 1888 and 1889. Mass. St. Bd. Health. Rep. Water Supply and Sewerage. Part II. 1-704. (Algae 47, 613, 653.) 1890. 908. Mills, L. G. Diatoms from Guano. Sci.—Gossip. 148. 1J11865. 909. ——. Processes and Inflations in Diatoms. Sci.— Gossip. 103. 1My1867. 4 A specimen from Upper Bolivian Guano. 910, On the Manipulation and Preparation of Objects for the Microscope.— (Mo. Mic. Jour. 1: 139, 140. 1F 1869.) 368 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Observations on the treatment of Peruvian guano, given at the ing of the Natural History Society of Armagh, Jan, 13, 1869, 911. Mills, L. G. Guano Diatoms. Sci.—Gossip. f. 52-56. 1Mr1870. 912. Diatoms from Peruvian Guano.—(Jour. Roy, Mic. Soc. II. 1:865. pl. 17. 1881) 913. Minn, C. E. Infusorial Earth. Ann. Rep. Bd. Regents Smiths. Inst. 1873:64. 1874. Specimens from Fort Woodworth, D. T., added to collections, ; 914. Mitchell, G. 0. Volvox globator.—(Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 12:215. $1891.) 1 Specimens exhibited of the plant found for the first time in 12 years, at meeting of the San Francisco Microscopical Society, July Dy 1891. 915. Mitchell, Margaret 0. On the Structure of Hye clathrus Bory. Phyc. Mem. Part IL 53-57. pl. 14, 15. My18§ Specimens collected at Anguilla. 916. Moebius, M. Ueber einige Suesserwasser—und—Luft— algen in Porto-Rico gesammelte. Hedwigia. 27: 221-249. . 1888.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15: 326. 327. 4D1888.)—(Jou Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889: 97. 1889.) A new genus and species Phyllactidium tropicum, and 1 new of Microcoleus. 917. Bearbeitung der von H. Schenck in Brasilien gesammelten Algen. Hedwigia. 28: 309-347. 2 pl. 1889.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 17:19. 15Ja1890.)—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890:216. Ap1890.)—(Notarisia. 5:984-986. Ap1890.) a A description of 64 species. a 918. Algae Brasilienses\a cl. Dr. Glaziou colle Notarisia. 5: 1065-1090. 1 pi. 81Ag1890. 4 Eighty-two species enumerated. . 4 919. Ueber einige brasilianische Algen. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 10: 17-26. pl. 1. (19 Ja.) 1892. wall 920. Ueber einige brasilianische Algen. Hedy 34:173-176. pl. 2. 19Je1895. 921. Moles, J. J. Cleaning Diatoms. Eng. Mechanic. 6D1889.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:86. Ap1890.) 3 922. Moller, Diatom Plates.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jou 14:89. Mr1893.) 3 923. Montagne, J. F. C. Prodromus Florae Fernandesianae. ; Pars prima, sistens enumerationem plantarum cellularium quas in Insula Juan Fernandez à cl. Bertero collectas descri edique curavit. Ann. Sci. Nat. II. 3:347-356. 1835. Four species of algae named. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 869 924. Montagne, J. F. C. Sertum patagonicum. Cryptogames de la Patagonie. 4to. Part I. 7:1-19. pl. 1-7. (Algae.) Paris. 1839. D'Orbigny, A. Voyage dans l’Amerique meridionale, ex- ceeute dans les annees 1826-33. Bot. Part II. Florula Boliviensis. Cryptogames de la Bolivia, recueillies par Alcide D’Orbigny. 410 7:1-119. pl. 1-5. 1889. Paris. 925. . Prodromus generum, specierumque Phycearum novarum, in itinere ad polum antarcticum ab illustri Dumont - @Urville peracto collectarum, notis diagnosticis tantum hac evulgatarum, descriptionibus vero fusioribus nec non iconibus analyticis jam jamque illustrandarum. Gide. Svo. 1-16. 1842. Paris. 926. Plantes cellulaires du Voyage au Pole Sud et dans l'Oceanie sur les corvettes |’Astrolabe et La Zelee, sous le commandement de Monsieur Dumont d'Urville. 1837-40. Gide. vo. i-xiv. 1-349. pl. 1-20. 1845. Paris. 927. Historia fisica politica y natural de laisla de Cuba por D. Ramon de la Sagra. Botanica. Cryptogamia o plantas cellulares. A. Bertrand. 4to. 9: 1-328. pl. 20. 1845. Paris. 928. Plantes cellulaires de l’ile de Cuba. The same work as the preceding, written in the French language. 929. Cryptogamia Guyanensis, seu Plantarum cellularium in Guyana gallica annis 1835-1849 a cl. Leprieur collectarum enumeratio universalis. Note sur la station inso- lite de quelques floridées dans les eaux douces,et courantes des ruisseaux des montagnes a la Guyane. (addressée a Academie des Sciences le 15 mai 1850.) Ann. Sci. Nat. III. 14: 283-309. _ 1850.—(Comptes Rendus. 30: 604-606. 1850.)—(Reprinted 8vo. 1-202. pl. 1-4. 1855. V. Masson. Paris.) Enumerates 76 species. 930. Diagnoses Phycologicae, seu quibus charac- teribus discriminandae sunt species Lichenum Algarumque nonnullae novae, in tomo Florae Chilensis octavo nondum typis mandato descriptae. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. 18: 302-319. 1852. Thirteen species of algae from Chili are described. 931. Moore, A. 1. Resolution of Amphipleura 3 | by Central Light. The Microscope. 3:49, 51. 1882.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 4:143. 1884.) 22 U * a 0 if 2 a 1 932. Coating Diatoms with Silver. The Microscope. 4:157-165. 1884.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 829. 1884.) 870 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, 933. Morehouse, G. W. Amphipleura pellucida in d ta. Am. Nat. 7:316, 317. My1878. §:443, 444. J11874. 934. Resolution of Frustulia saxonica into FE ; 58 of Dots. Am. Nat. 7: 443, 444. J11873. N 935. ——. On the Structure of Diatoms. Am. Nat. $: 809-316. My1874.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:19-25. 1J11874.) 936. Silica films and the Structure of Diatoms. —(Mo. Mic. Jour. 15:88-40. 1Ja1876.) 5 Read before the Memphis Microscopical Society. 937. The Marking of Frustulia saxonica. Med. Jour. Je1876.—(Mo. Mic. Jour 16:92, 93. 1Ag1876.) ‘ 938. Morley, E. W. Measurementof Moeller's Probe P —(Am. Nat. 9: 428-430. Jel875.) Read before the Memphis Microscopical Society, April 15, 1875. a 939. Morris, G. C. How to Arrange Diatoms. Am. Nat. 10: 502, 503. Ag1876.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 16:816. 1D1876.) 940. Letter on Cleaning Diatomaceous F Sea-weeds, etc.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:38. 1880.) 911. Moseley, H. N. On the Marine Algae of St. Thomas and the Bermudas. Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 14:311, 312. E 1878.) 1875. 942. ———. Notes on the Vegetation of Bermuda. Sour. Linn. Soc. (Bot) 14:317-821. (18D1873.) 1875. 1 A few remarks upon the algae of the island. 2 943. Notes on Plants collected at Fernando de 7 Noronha (Sept. 1st and 2d, 1873.) Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 14 359-362. (16Ap1874.) 1875. a States that 24 species of marine algae were obtained. oe 944. Notes on Plants collected in the Islands of the Tristan d’Acunha Group. (1874.) Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 14: 377-384. (7My1874.) 1875. 2 A few observations on algae. a 4 945. Mottier, D. M. Pleodorina in Indiana. Bot. Gaz. 19: 383. 1581894. 946. Mueller, C. Diatoms and how to Collect them. am Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:230, 231. D1885.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 152 1886. a Translation of a private letter. . 1 a 947. Mueller, C. J. Index to Diatoms figured in this Jour- nal from 1853 to 1867. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 10: 10 ae. 4 1870. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 371 948. Murray, G. Valonia ovalis. Jour. of Bot. 25:379 1887. ; Bermudas. 949. Catalogue of the Marine Algae of the West Indian Region. Jour. of Bot. 26: 193-196. 1888. 27: 237242. 257-262. 298-3805. 1889.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890: 217. 1 Ap1890.) 950. Algae. H. N. Ridley's Notes on the Botany of Fernando Noronha.” Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 2775-80. 1891. About 53 species are recorded including those taken from Pro- 3 fessor Dickie’s list in the Journal of the Linnaean Society. 14:363. 951. On New Species of Caulerpa, with Observa- tions on the Position of the Genus. Trans. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) II. 3: 207-213. pl. 53. J. 3-6. (5Mr1891.) 01891.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1892:240. Ap1892. ) 7 C. phyllaphlaston is described as a new species from Yucatan. 952. On the Structure of Dictyosphaeria Decne. Phyc. Mem. Part I. 16-20. pl. 6. Ap1892. Some of the material studied was collected from American localities. 953. On Halicystis and Valonia. Phyc. Mem. Part II. 47-51. pl. 13. My1893. ; Remarks on specimens from Bermuda. 954. A Comparison of the Marine Floras of the Warm Atlantic, Indian Ocean, and the Cape of Good Hope. (Rep. 62nd meeting Brit. Ass. Ag 1892. 775. 1893. )—Phyc. Mem. Part II. 65-70. My1893. American regions include Florida, Bahamas and Bermudas. 955. Fossil Algae. Sci. Progress. 2:37-47. S184. Remarks on American forms. 956. OCalcareous Pebbles formed by Algae. Phyc. Mem. Part III. 74-77. pl. 19. Ap1895. q Pebbles found in a pond on the shore of Lake Michigan. q 957. and Barton, Ethel 8. A Comparison of the _ Arctic and Antarctic Marine Floras. Phyc. Mem. Part III. 88-98. Ap1895. American regions are included. 958. Murray, J. On the Sea-bottom Deposits observed | during the Cruise of the Challenger, in a Report to Prof. | Wyville Thomson. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 12:255-270. 01876. 959. Report on Deep-Sea Deposits based on the Speeimens collected during the Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger 7 1 R * f 1 0 1 iq 5 ie 4 I: i } e * 8 372 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. in the Years 1872-76. Voyage H. M. S. Challenger. orn 4 Deposits. 1-496. 1891. ay Numerous descriptions of diatoms and calcareous algae. 8 960. Murray, J. and Renard, A. On the Nomen Origin, and Distribution of Deep-sea Deposits. U. S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries. Part XIII. Rep. Comm. for 1885. — 1887. ; Diatom ooze discussed. 961. Nathorst, A. G. Fossil Algae. Nature. 28:52, . 17My1883. 7 Eschweiler, F. G. and Nees von Esenbeck, C. G. 962. Neil, J. Cleaning Diatoms with Glycerine. Am. N 11: 121, 122. F1877.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 17: 161. 1Mr1877,) 963. Nelson, R. S. and Duncan, On some points in the Histology of Certain Species of Corallinaceae. an Linu. Soc. (Bot.) II. 1: 197-209. pl. 26, 27. D1876. Some specimens from the Bermudas. * 964. Nevins, R. D. Diatoms from Washington Territory 4 Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 6:97, 98. so Sure 965. Mic. Jour. 15:270, 271. §1894. 7 966. Newberry, J. S8. The Ancient Lakes of Western America: their Deposits and Drainage. Am. Nat. 4: 644-660. Jal871. 9 Fresh-water diatomaceae reported to be found by Professor Bailey in is the chalk-like deposits. 967. Fossil Plants of the Triassic Rocks of New Jersey and the Connecticut Valley. Monographs of the U. 8. 1 Geol. Surv. Dept. Int. 14: 77-95. 1888. a Dendrophycus triassicus is described as new. * 2 968. Devonian Plants from Ohio. Jour. Cin. Song Nat. Hist. 12:48-56. (281889.) 01889. 5 969. Newcomer, F. S. Bleaching Diatoms. Breaking aw m Barbados Earth. The Microscope. 6:—. 1885. 5 970. Cleaning and Arranging Diatoms.— (Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 9th Ann. Meeting 128-130. 1886.)—(Zeits. wiss. Mik. 4:527.. 1887.)—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887: 844. 01887.) g 971. Nichols, Mary A. Abnormal Fruiting of Vaucheria. | 3 Bot. Gaz. 22:269-271. pl. 21. Je1895. Bees Specimens collected near Cayuga lake, New York. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 373 972. Nichols, W. R. Chemical Examinations of water from the Nashua River Basin. C. F. Folsom's Pollution of Streams.” Sth Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 48-51. 1877. Leptothrix found. 978. Water Supply considered mainly from a Chemical and Sanitary Standpoint. J. Wiley & Sons, 1883. New York. . See Farlow, W. G., Nichols, W. R. and Burgess, E. S. 974. Nicholson, T. On the Red Snow of the Arctic Regions. Mag. Nat. Hist. 2: 321-323. 1829. 975. Nordstedt, C. F. O. Fam. Desmidiaceae in Eug. Warm- ing Symbolae ad Floram Brasiliae centralis cognoscendam. Part 5. Vid. Medd. 1: 195-234. 1870. 976. Desmidieae arctoae. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 32: 13-43. 1875.—(Hedwigia. 15:12-15. 19- 25. 1876.) 977. Nonnullae algae aquae dulcis brasilienses. a Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl 34: 15-28. 1877.— \ (Hedwigia. 17:77-79. 84-88. 1878.)—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 15: 225, 226. Mris78.) 978. De Algis et Characeis. I. De Algis nonnullis 3 praecipue Desmidieis, inter Utricularias Musei Lugdun-Batav. Act. Univ. Lund. 16:1-14. 7 pl. 15N1880. . 979. Algas de la republica Argentina. Bol. Acad. ia Nacion Cienc. Repub. Argent. 4:1882. Buenos Ayres. 900. Algologiska Smasaker III. Bot. Notiser. 46 * 81. 1882.— (Bot. Centralb. 11:81. 1882) — (Bot. Jahresb. 10: 304, 305. 1884.) es Algae from Argentine and Patagonia. 981. Physiographische gesellschaft zu Lund. 7 (Leichnungen von 2 neuen abweichenden arten der gattung Bul- bochaete vor.) — (Bot. Centralb. 16:95. 1883.) 0 5 One species collected in Brazil. 92. Desmidieer samlade af Sv. Berggren under Bs artes reel 'ska expeditionen till Groenland 1870. (Die. a von Sv. Berggren auf der Nordenskioeld'schen Expedition nach Groenland 1870 gesammelten Desmidieen.) Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 5-13. pl. 7. 1885. 983. De Algis et Characeis. Acta Univ. Lund. Lunds. Univ. Ars-Skrift. 25: 1-41. pl. 1. 1888. Two new desmids from Erazil and other algae from North and South America. 874 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 984. Nordstedt, C. F.0. Einige Characeen- bestimmungen, 4 Hedwigia. 27:181. 7 pl. 1888. : ; From Cuba. See Wittrock V. B. and Nordstedt, C. F. 0. 4 : 985. Norris, W. Diatomaceous Earth from Santa Mor (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:45. F889.) 7 Specimens exhibited before San Francisco Microscopical Soc Oct. 24, 1888. 986. Photographs of Diatoms from Illinois Califournia.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:190, Agi891.) Presented to San Francisco Microscopical Society at meeting of Jus 1, 1891. 987. Northrop, J. I. and Northrop, Alice B. Plant No from Tadousac and Temiscouata county, Canada. Bull. Tort Bot. Club. 17:27-32. 5F 1890. Two species of Chara. 988. Nott, E. 8. Cleaning Diatoms. Proc. Am. Soc. 11: 149.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:31. F 1890.) 989. Oliver, F. W. On the Obliteration of the Sieve-tuk in Laminarieae. Ann. of Bot. 1:95-117. pl. &, 9. N1887. Discussion of Nereocystis luetkeana and statement that it is fou on the northwest coast of North America. 990. Olney, S. T. Algae Rhodiaceae. A List of Island Algae. 1-13. 1871. Providence, R. I. (The Lens. 1.129135. 1872.) ; 991. Oltmanns, F. Ueber einige parasitische Meeresalg Bot. Ztg. 207-215. pl. 7. f. 1-10 16D1894. 7 Describes Acrochaete parasitica as new. From Greenland. a 992. O’Meara, E. Notes on Bermuda Diatoms.—(Qué Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 14:316. 1874.) Specimens shown at the Dublin Microscopical Club, Jan. 22, 1874. 993. Diatoms from a Fresh-water Deposit found i in Vancouver’s Island:—({Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 15:4 09, 1875. a 3 at Dublin Microscopical Club March 18, 1875. 994. New Aulacodiscus shown.—(Quart. Jour. } Sci. N. S. 18:104. 1878.) Dublin Microscopical Society June 21, 1877. 995. Aulacodiscus sollitianus exhibited —(Qu Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 18:105. 1878.) Dublin Microscopical Society July 19, 1877. 996. Diatoms from the Arctic Seas exhibited. | (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 18:214. 1878.) 2 9 . 8 ata a * „ * * r * ar, S 2 . be . — Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 375 997. O’Meara, E. New Species of Craspedodiscus, C febigeri, exhibited. —(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N.S. 18: 350. 1878.) Dublin Microscopical Society March 21, 1878. 998. Onderdonk, C. Motion of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:61, 62. Ap1883.—(The Microscope. 5:205, 206. 1885.) our. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 6:111, 112. F886.) 999. Movement of Diatoms, The Microscope. May 1887.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14:172. Agi887.) The motion of diatoms is considered to be due to rythmic action of living protoplasm. 1000. The Movements of Diatoms. The Micro- scope. 10:225-229. Agi890.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:283. 1890.) 1001. Notes on the Diatoms of the Florida Coast. The Microscope. 12:78. 1892. Notes 1 new species. 1002. Osborn, H. L. Protococcus—An Elementary Study in Biology. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 183-186. 01888. 1003. Osler, W. Canadian Diatomaceae. Can. Nat. Quart. Jour. Sci. N. S. 5:142-151. Je1870. A list of 110 species is given. 1004. Owen, Maria L. Plants of Nantucket. Svo. 1-87. 1888.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15: 244, 245. 2Ag1888.) Ten Characeae and 110 marine algae. 1005. Packard, A. S. Jr. The Sea-weeds of Salt Lake. Am. Nat. 13:701-703. N1879. Three species of algae determined by W. G. Farlow. 1006. Pammel, L. H. Beggiatoaalba and the Dying of Fish in Iowa. Proc. Iowa. Acad. Sci. 1887, 1888, 1889: 90, 91. [a1890. 1007. Parker, E. W. Infusorial Earth. Miner. Res. U. S. 1893:678, 679. 1894. . 1008. Parker, G. H. Report upon the Organisms, except- g the Bacteria, Found in the Waters of the State, July 1887 0 June 1889. Mass. St. Bd. Health. Rep. Water Supply nd Sewerage. Part I. 581-676. 1890. 1000. Partridge, T. On Diatoms. Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. 1: 2-25. Mr1882. 5 A discussion of the uses of diatomaceous earths. etc., mention being a 1 made of deposits in different parts of America. ; 1010. Payne, C. L. List of Algae from Granville, Ohio. . Denison Univ. 4: 132. 1888. 4 " Aaditions to the list of H. L. Jones (2:115, 116. Apl887.) A — nue species is described—Spirogyra herricki. — c | 376 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . 3 ginia, Diatomaceous Earth. Am. Jour. Mic. 5: 133, 1011. Peck, C. H. Reports of State Botanist of New York. (1869.) 61.—(Grevillea, 1:14, J11872.) N New American Polysiphonia. 5 1012. Pell, R. L. Sea- weed asa Manure. Am. Inst. Trat 320-826, 1860-61. a 4 1013. Pelletan, J. Bibliographie des Diatomees par M. F. Me Habirshaw. Jour. Microg. 3:4:5: 1879-1881. 4 1014. Diatomacees. Mission Boletifique du Oe a Horn. Jour. Microg. 12:54. 1888. 1015. Penhallow, D. P. Notes on Devonian Plants. Roy. Soc. Can. 7“: 19-30. pl. 1,2. 1889.—(Can. Rec. Set 3:430-432, J11889.)—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890: 366. Je1890, Gives a complete revision of the genus Nematophyton. Five sp are probably the entire number in the genus. Penhallow, D. P. See Dawson, W. and Penhallo 1016. Perry, G. W. Arthrocladia villosa Duby. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 10:106. $1883. 1017. Peters, J. E. Arthrocladia villosa Duby. Bull. Tor Bot. Club. 12:62. Jel885. a 1018. Peticolas, C. L. The Richmond Diatomaceous E Am. Jour. Mic. 2:17, 18. F1877.—(Cin. Med. News. Agié (Mo. Mic. Jour. 17: 294. 1Je1877.) 1019. Diatoms. New York Tablet. beben 1020. Some New Slides from the Richmond, =? Je1880. Fifty-two species of diatoms listed. Diatoms. Leonard's Med. Jour, 01883. 1021. 1022. New Slides of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. our 4:234. 01883. a 1023. New Diatoms from the 1 A rtesi: Wells, the most Interesting and Beautiful found since t Discovery of the Celebrated Santa Monica Earth, with Ne 28 0 New Deposits. 1885. Richmond, Va. 2 1024. Two New Preparations of Richmond Di Mic. Bull. F1885. N 1025. Notes on the Diatomaceous Formati Virginia in Connection with some Recent Discoveries made i the Excavation of the Eighth Street Tunnel at Richmond. The Microscope. 8:327-330. N1888.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 16:3: 12Ja1889. ) Z 1026. Peticolas, C. L. Mounted Diatoms.—(The Microscope. 92311. 01889.) (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:42. F 1890.) . Specimens from Santa Monica, Cal., and Richmond, Va. exhibited before the San Francisco Microscopical Society, August 28, 1889. 1027. Notes on the Fossil Marine Diatom Deposit from Artesian Wells at Atlantic City, N. J. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:32, 33. F1890.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17: 106. —10Ap189C.)—( Notarisia. 5:1029, 1030. 30Je1890.) A brief addition to the account given in No. 755. 1028. Petit, P. Spirogyra des Environs de Paris.—{Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:216, 217. N1880.) The Reviewer states that most of the species described are found in America, 10209. Preserving Conferva and Desmids. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:75. Ap1881.)—(Am. Jour. Mic. 6:187. J11881.) 1030. Diatomacees recoltees dans le Voisinage du Cap Horn. Mission Sci. du Cap Horn. (Bot.) 5: 2 pl. (1882, 1883.) 1888. b ‘Thirteen new species. 1031. Pfitzer, E. The Vegetable Nature of Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 6:684, 685. N1872.) 1032. Piecone, A. Notizie preliminairi intorno alle alghe della Vettor Pisani” raccolte dal Sig. C. Marcacci. Revista Ital. Sci. Nat. appl. 1: fasc. 3. 1885.—(Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. ‘17: 185-188. 1885.) Species from Brazil. 1033. Nuove Alghe del viaggio di circumnavi- razione della ‘‘Vettor Pisani’ R. Accad. Line. Anno. cclxxxvi. 1-57. 1889. Rome. 1034. Alcune specie di alghe del Mar di Sargasso. Rend. Linc. 6: 1889. Rome. 1035. Pieters, A. J. On the Study of Fresh-water Algae. Asa Gray Bull. No. 4. 1894. 1036. Pike, N. Check List of Marine Algae, Based on Specimens collected on the Shores of Long Island 1839-1885. gull. Torr. Bot. Club. 13:105-114. (1-10.) J11886. 1037. On Preparing, Preserving and Mounting Mbjects of Natural History for the Microscope. The Micro- cope. 10: 266-268. $1890. Pitt, W. H. See Grote, A. R. and Pitt, W. H. Planchon, J. E. See Triana, J. and Planchon, J. E. 878 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1038. Plummer, J. T. Suburban Geology, or Rocks, 8 and Water, about Richmond, Wayne county, Indiana. A Jour, Sci. Arts. 44: 281-313. /. Jal Mr1848. Four species of Fucoides are figured and discussed, os 1039. Pont, P. R. B. de. J. Brun's Preparation of Diatoms. Jour. of Microg.— (The Microscope. 2: 191. F188.) . 1040. Porter, E. D. Investigations of Supposed Poisonous Vegetation in the Waters of some of the Lakes of Minnesota. Fourth Bien. Rep. Bd. Regents Univ. of Minn: Suppl. LE Dept. Agric. Univ. of Minn. 95, 96. 1887. 1041. Poteat, W. L. A Preliminary List of North Carolina Desmids. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 5:14. 1888. Microscope. 9: 123, 124. Ap1889.) Eighty-one species listed. 1042. Pound, R. The Algae, Fungi and Lichens. Nat. 23:178. F 1889. See Smith, J. G. and Pound, R. 1043. Preston. E. B. Diatomaceous Earth. Cal. St. Bureau. 10th Ann. Rep. St. Miner. 1890: 282. 1890. Mentions a deposit in Lassen county. 1044. Prinz, W. Notes on Manner of obtaining Sections of Diatoms.—(Bot. Gaz. 9:32. F'1884.) 1045. Provancher, L. Flora Canadienne, ou Description de toutes les Plantes des Forets, Champs, Jardins, et Eaux d Canada. 8vo. 2 vol. i-xxix. 1-842. 1862. Quebec. 8 1046. Puiggari, J. J. Noticia sobre algunas Cryptog: nuevas halladas en Apiahy, provincia de San Pablo en el Brasil, Anales Soc. cien. Argentin. II: entr. 4. 116. 1881.—(Bo Centralb. 8: 161. 1881.) 1047. Puysegur, M. and Ryder, J. A. On the cause of the Greening of Oysters. With a Supplementary Note on the Col oration of the Blood Corpuscles of the Oyster. U. S. Ce Fish and Fisheries. Part X. Rep. Comm. 1882. 793-805. 1048. Queen, T. W. Glass Discs for arranging Diz Mic. Bull. 2:24. 1885. 1049. Quekett, E. J. Observations on the Special Fossil Animalcules discovered at Petersburgh in Virg Lond. Phys. Jour. 1: 140. 1846. 4: 1050. Quekett, J. On the presence, in the Norte of Infusorial Animals analogous to those occurring in a F Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 379 State at Richmond in Virginia. Mic. Jour. and Struct. Rec. 2353-360. pl. 12. 1842. London.—(Ann. Nat. Hist. 9:66. 13842.) 1051. Rafinesque-Schmaltz, C. 8. Prospectus of two in- tended Works on North American Botany.— (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 40:221-241. Ap1841.) A number of new genera, among them, Merasperma, which belongs to the Confervaceae, were to be described. 1052. Precis des Decouvertes et Travaux Somio- logiques. 1-55. 1814. Several new American genera and species of algae described. 1053. Rafter, G. W. On the Use of the Microscope in Determining the Sanitary Value of Potable Water, with Special Reference to the Study of the Biology of the Water of Hem- lock lake. Proc. Rochester Acad. Sci. Mic. Section. 1886. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:140. . J11887.) 1054. How to Study the Biology of a Water Supply. Proc. Rochester Acad. Sci. Mic. Section. 1887.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:140. J11887.) 1055. On the Micro-organisms of Hemlock lake Water. Proc. Rochester Acad. Sci. Mic. Section. 1888.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9:87-92. My1888. ) 1056. Photomicrographs.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 113. Jel888.) N Specimens of Pleurosigma and Cymbella. 1057. The Fresh - water Algae and their Relation to the Purity of Public Water Supplies. Trans. Am. Soc. Civ. Eng. 483-557. 9 pl. 1889.—(Eng. and Build. Rec. 20:115, 116. 131. 1889.)—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1890: 489. Ag1890.) 1058. - Deterioration of Water in Reservoirs, its Causes and Prevention. 14th Ann. Rep. N. J. St. Bd. Health. 111-122. 1890. A number of harmful algae are discussed. 1059. Biological Examination of Potable Water. Proc. Rochester Acad. Sci. 1: 34-44. (10 Mkr.) 1890.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13: 55-62. Mr1892.) A description of methods and apparatus with reference to microscopi- cal examination. The Microscopical Examination of Potable D. Van Nostrand & Co. 1892. New York. Some of the Circumstances affecting the Quality of a Water Supply. Proc. Am. W. W. Ass. 12th Ann. Meeting. held at New York. May 17-20. 1892. 880 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1062. Rafter, G. W. On some Recent Advances in W. Analysis and the Use of the Microscope for the Detectic n¢ Sewage Contamination.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14: 197-1 My1893.) ie 1 Read before the Buffalo, N. V., Microscopical Club, Dee. 12, 1 Ninety forms of algae stated to have been found in the te : 0 Hemlock lake. 1 2 See Mallory, M. L., Rafter, G. W. and Line * * 2 rT , 1063. Rand, E. L. Flora of Mount Desert Island, Main Fourth Annual Supplement to the Preliminary List. Heete graph print 1-7. 1892. Includes a list of algae determined by F. S. Collins and I. He 1064. Raud, E. L. and Redfield. J. H. Flora of Desert Island, Maine. A Preliminary Catalogue of the F growing on Mount Desert and the adjacent islands. V Geological Introduction by W. M. Davis and a new m Mount Desert Island. Svo. 1-286.—(Algae. 227-249.) Wilson & Son. 1894. Cambridge. Two species of Nitella and 140 species and 6 varieties of other al 1065. Rattray, J. A Revision of the Genus Aulacc . Ehrb. and of some Allied Genera. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 188! 337-382. pl. 5-7. Je. 1888:861-920. pl. 12-16. D1888. 4 A number of American forms named. a 1066. Diatomaceae. Notes on the Botany ia nando Noronha. Jour. Linn. Soc. 27:81-86. 1891. a Forty-six species from Fernando Noronha and 15 species from g from Rat Island noted. 1 4 1067. Ravenel, H. W. A Catalogue of the Natural Orde of Plants, inhabiting the Vicinity of the Santee Canal, as represented by Genera and Species; with Observat the Meteorological and Topographical Conditions of tion of Country. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. Third } Mar. 1850. 2-17. (12Mr.) 1850. Twenty-five species of algae. . 1068. Nitella praelonga. A. Braun. Bull. Tor Club. 6:82. Mr1876. Notes occurrence in South Carolina. ; 1069. Redfield, J. H. Conservator’s Report for 1888. 4 Phil. Acad. 1888:449, 450. (25D1888.) 1889. Reports that during the past year 229 species of lichens, f. algae have been added to the herbarium. 2 1070. Conservator's Report for 1891. ree E Acad. 1891:500-502. (29D1891.) 1892. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 381 States that 120 species of algae from New England and California have been received during the year from F. 8 Collins, Malden, Massachusetts. Redfield, J. H. See Rand, E. L. and Redfield, J. H. 1071. Rein, J. J. Ueber die Vegetations-Verhaeltnisse der Bermudas-Inseln. (1873.) Nat. Gesell. Bericht. 131-153. 1872-1873. Senckenberg. 1072. Reinsch, P. F. Contributiones ad Algologiam et Fungologiam. 4to. I: I-xii. 1-103. 1875. Leipzig. Contains descriptions of 3 desmids new to the United States and notes on some sea-weeds. 10738. The Microscopic Organic World in the Drink ing Water of Boston. Boston Evening Transcript. 15D1877. 1074. Saprolegniae and Parasites in Desmid Cells. (Am. Nat. 12:318. My1878.) ö Observation on Cochituate water of Boston. 1075. Beobachtungen ueber entophyte und ento- _zoische Pflanzenparasiten. Bot. Zig. 3717-24. 33-43. pl. J. 1879. _ Specimens collected at Cape Cod, North America. 1076. Ein neues Genus der Chroolepideae. Bot. Zig. 37:361-366. pl. 3. (A). 6Je1879. Aoceroblaste is the name given to the new genus. The plant described was collected in Buzzard’s Bay, Masachusetts.s 1077. ————. Ueber das Palmellaceen Genus Acanthococ- eus. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 4:237-244. pl. 11, 12. (22Je.) 1886. Describes forms from the United States. 1078. Species et Genera nova Algarum ex insula Georgia australi. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 6: 144-156. (eMr.) 1888.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:18, 19. 15Ja1890.) Ne species of 11 known genera and 3 new genera each with a single __ Species are described. 1079. Die Suesswasseralgenflora von Sued-Georg- . n. G. Neumayer's Die internationale Polarforschung 1882 s 1883.” Die deutschen Expeditionen. 2:329-365. 4 pl. 1890. _ Seventy-four species listed. 1050. Zur Meeresalgenfiora von Sued- Georgien. 0. Neumayer’s Die international Polarforschung 1882 bis 883.” Die deutschen Expeditionen. 2:366-449. 79 pl. 1890. Sixteen new species described. yg 9 38 ie 882 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1081. Remsen, I., Hyatt, A. and Farlow, W. G. Report on a Peculiar Condition of the Water of Boston, in November, 1881. with notes. Boston City Document. 143. 1881. ag Mo. Mic. Jour. 2: 236-238. 01881.) Note on the “cucumber taste.” a Renard, A. See Murray, J. and Renard, A. a Renauld, F. See Delamare, E., Renauld, F. — Cardot, J. 1082. Richards, H. M. Notes on Zonaria variegata Loan. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts. Sci. N. S. 17: 83-92. 7 pl. (11Je.) 18 —(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1891: 378. Jel891.) A specimen from Bermuda described. 1083. On the Structure and Development of Choreo- colax polysiphoniae Reinsch. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts. Sei. N. S. 18:46-63. 7 pl. (12My.) 1891.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Bos. 1 1891:778. 01891.) f 1084. Richter, P. Note on Minnesota Algae.— (Bot. Gaz. 19.425. 1701894.) The Minnesota alga studied by him and pronounced a form of Gloto- trichia. G. echinulata (Engl. Bot.) P. Richt. 2 1085. Ridley,H.N. Notes on the Botany of Fernando 1 Noronha. Jour. Linn. Soc (Bot.) 27: 1-86. (7Je1888.) 1891. A list of algae is given by G. M. Murray. A list of diatoms by. Rattray. Nitella cernua A. Br. was found in a lake at Caracas. 1086. Ries, H. Diatoms. Clay Industries of New Vork. Bull. N. V. St. Mus. 3:119, 120. 122. 129. 136. 2 pl. Mri895. — A number of species named. N 1087. Riner, W. W. Arranging Diatomaceae. Am. Net. 8: 371-373. f. 79, 50. Je1874. 4 1088. Mounting Diatoms. Am. Nat. 8: 568. 81874. 1089. A Fine Diatom. Am. Jour. Mic. 4: * Mr1879.—(Brebissonia. 2: 33, 34. 2881879.) . 1090. Ringueberg, E. N. S. New Fossils from the Four | Groups of the Niagara Period of Western New York. Proc. 2 Phil. Acad 1884: 144-150. pl. 2. F. 1. (27 My 1884.) 1885. a Sphirophyton archimedes described as new. a 1091. Some New Species of Fossils from the Nag. ara Shales of Western New York. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1888: 131-137. pl.7. F. 1. (27Mri888.) 1889. Fucoid forms described. 5 1092. Ritchie, A. S. Aquaria Studies. Part II. Can. Nat. 1 and Quart. Jour. Sci. N. S. 5: 165-171. Je1870. 4 A few species of algae . 2 7 PCT ORR ee v ne Fee Meee ee en es ae * 1 yon Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 383 1098. Robinson, J. The Flora of Essex county, Massachu- _ setts. Essex Inst. 1-200. 1880. Salem.—(Bot. Gaz. 6: 187, 188. Mri1881.) 1094. Rogers, R. E. Infusorial Earth from Richmond and Rappahannock river, Virginia. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1859: iii. (83My1859.) 1860. Specimens presented. 1095. Rogers, W. B. On the Limits of the Infusorial Stratum in Virginia. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 45:313, 314. JIAgS1843. : 1096. ————. On Fossil Infusoria. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 46 141, 142. OND1843. Fourteen species of diatoms, additional to Professor Bailey's list, noted. 1097. ———.. Geology of the Virginias.— (Am. Jour. Sci. III. 30: 357-374. N1885. 13 1:193-202. Mr1856.)—(Am. Mo, Mic. Jour. 7:115. Jel886.) 1098. Romeo, N. A. Pleurosigma angulatum. Am. Jour. Mic. and Pop. Sci. 5: 137, 138. Jel880. 1099. Rominger, C. Palaeozoic Rocks. Geol. Surv. Mich. Upper Peninsula. (1869-1873.) 15: 1-102. 1873. A number of fucoid forms noted. 1100. Rose, J. N. Nostoc. and Penicillium in NaC, H, O. Bot. Gaz. 10:280. My1885. 1101. ———. Notes on the Conjugation of Spirogyra. Bot. Gaz. 10:304-306. 7 pl. J11885. 1102. Rosenvinge, L. K. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Gattungen Ulothrix und Conferva. Bot. Tidsskr, III. 3114 134. 1879-80. Specimens from Greenland. 1108. Om Spirogyra groenlandica, nov. spec., og dens Parthenosporedannelse. Oefvers. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Foerhandl. 40:n. 8. 37-47. pl. 8. 1834.—(Bot. Centralb. 20: 165. 1884.) (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 5:285. Ap1885.) Desceribes a new species of Spirogyra from Greenland, collected by Fries in 1871. 1101. Les Algues marines du Groenland. Ann. Sei. Nat. VII. 19: 53-164. f 1-57. 1894. 1105. Rothpletz, A. Ueber die Bildung der Oolithe. Bot. Oentralb. 51: 265-268. 1892.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1892: 839. D1892.) O.alcareous stones from the shore of Great Salt Lake in Utah found to be covered with Gloeocapsa and Gloeotheca. 884 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1106. Russell, J. L. Sea-weeds. Am. Nat. 2: 28-205, J11868. A popular discussion. 1107. The Sea-weeds at Home and Abroad. Nat. 4: 274-297. J. 69-75. 11870. 1 1108. Ryder. J. 4A. The Protozoa and Protophytes con- sidered as the Primary or Indirect Source of the Food o of Fishes’ (2d Ed. revised.) U. S. Comm. Fish and Fish- eries. Part IX. Rep. Comm. for 1881. 755-770. 1884. 1109. An Account of Experiments in Oyster 9 5 ure and Observations Relating thereto. Second Series. U. Comm. Fish and Fisheries. Rep. Comm. for 1882. 763-775 1884. 1110. The Polar Differentiation of Volvox, and Specialisation of possible Anterior Sense-organs. Am. Nat 23:218-221. Ap1889. 1111. On the Fore and Aft Poles, the Axial Di ferentiation and a Possible Anterior Sensory 1 a Volvox minor. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1889:138-140. (211 1889.) 1890. 1112. On the cause of the Greening of the o 5. and its presumed Algous Endoparasites. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1892:352. (15N1892.) 1893. Investigations resulted in the finding of desmids, diatoms and % spores of Ulva. a See Puysegur, M. and Ryder, J. A. Saccardo, F. See Toni, G. B. de, and Saccardo, F. 1113. Saccardo, P. A. The Number of Plants. Atti Cong. Bot. Internat. 1892.— (Am. Nat. 28:173-180. F 1894.) Trans- 2 lated by Roscoe Pound. The total number of species of algae known is placed at 12,178. 1114. Sadler, J. List of Arctic Cryptogamous Plants, et Collected by Robert Brown, Esq., during the Summer of 186 on the Islands of Greenland, in Baffin's Bay and Davis Strat Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinb. 7:374, 375. 1863. 1115. Safford, W. E. Botanizing in the Strait of Magell a Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15:15. 5Ja1888. Collected 14 species of marine algae. 2 1116. Sargent, F. L. Guide to the Recognition of the P cipal Orders of Cryptogams and the commoner and more eas distinguished New England Genera, with a Glossary. C. c i a ae ee eS Oe te he a 8 ‘ Sohn 9 N Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 385 1117. Sargent, F. P. On the Schwendener Theory of the Constitution of Lichens. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:21-25. F1887. 1118. Saunders, D. Protophyta-Phycophyta. Univ. of Neb. Fl. Neb. Published by the Botanical Seminar. 1':15- 68. pl. 1-22. 15Ag1894. 1119. Schaarschmidt, J. Specimen Phycologeae Aequa- toriensis. Mag. Noevenytani Lapok. 5:17-24. 1881. Klaus- enburg.—(Hedwigia. 21:93. 1882.) _ Specimens from Ecuador. 1120. Three Desmids new to the United States. Bull. Torr, Bot. Club. 12:51. My1885. Notes descriptions of Desmids in Reinsch’s Cont. Alg. et Fung (No. 1072 above) and names Cosmarium reinschii as new. 1121. Schively, Mary A. Hormactis quoyii. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1890:497. (80D1890.) 1891. Specimens of this marine alga both mounted and in alcohol pre- sented to the museum. 1122. Schmidle, W. von. Einige Algen aus Denver, Col- orado, U. S. A. Hedwigia. 34:84, 85. 17. SAp1895. Thirteen species named including 1 new species and 1 new variety of Cosmarium. 1123. Schmidt, A. Atlas der Diatomaceen- Kunde. 1885.—. The work contains occasional figures of new American species. 1124. Schmitz. F. Die systematische Stellung der Gattung Thorea Bory. Berichte Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 10: 115-142. (I Mr.) 1892. 1125. Schneck, J. Catalogue of the Flora of the Wabash Valley below the Mouth of White river, and Observations _ thereon. 7th Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ind. 1875. 504-576. 1876.— (Bot. Gaz. 2:65. D1876.) be Lists Chara polyphylla from the Wabash river. 1126. Schneider, A. Mutualistic Symbiosis of Algae and Bacteria with Cycas revoluta. Bot. Gaz. 19:25-32. pl. 3, 4. 17Jal894. Eight genera of algae were represented in the greenish coating of the leaves of Cycas and Nostoc in the root tubercles. 1127. Schofield, J. R. Notes on the Flora of the Artesian Well. Publications of the Nebraska Academy of Sciences. 4 2:23. 24. 1892. a Conferva martialis Hanst., Protococeus frustulosus (Carm.) de Toni, Oscillaria gracillima Kg. and 2 diatoms were found in the well at Lincoln, Nebraska. Schramm, A. See Maze, H. and Schramm, A. 886 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1128. Schultze, E. A. Five Species of Triceratium. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 2: 110. pl. J. 6. J11886. Figures of specimens of the Barbadoes material. 1129. A Descriptive List of Staten Island Diatoms. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14:69-73. pl. 66. Ap. 14:109-114. pl. 69. Jel887. 16:98-104. p/. 90. Ap1889. A description of 45 Naviculas and 3 species of Stauroneis. 1130. Note on a Variety of Asteromphalus roperianus Grev. Bull. Torr Bot. Club. 14:96. My 1887. 1131. Synedra pulchella Kuetz. var. abnormis Macchiati. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 16: 164, 165. 77. 8Je1889. See Kain, C. H. and Schultze, E. A. 1132. Scoresby, W. Color of Sea-water. —(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 6:198, 199. 1823.) 1133. Seaman, W. H. Mounting Mediums with High Refractive Indices. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:21-24. F1886. 1134. Remarks on Particular Relations of certain Marine Algae.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8: 19. Jal887.) From paper read before the Washington Microscopical Society at the 52d meeting. 1135. The Microscopic Life of the District (of Columbia.) (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:165. J11890.) Read before the Washington, D. C., Microscopical Society May 13th. 1136. Sedgewick, W. T. Recent progress in Biological Water Analysis. Jour. N. E. W. W. Ass. $1889. 1137. . Utilisation of Surface Water for Drinking —Purposes. Jour. N. E. W. W. Ass. 33-39. 81890.) 1138. Lawrence Experiment Station, including an account of Methods ‘employed and Results obtained in the Microscopical and Bacteriological Investigations of Sewage and of Water. Mass. St. Bd. Health. Rep. Water Supply and Sewerage. Part II. 795-862. 1890. 1139. Seeman, B. The Botany of the Voyage of H. M. S. Herald, under the Command of Capt. Henry Kellett, R. N., during the years 1845-51. Part I. 4to. 1-56. pl. 1-10. London. —(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 14:428. N1852.) Twelve algae recorded from different points in America. 1140. Setchell,W.A. Concerning the Structure and Devel- opment of Tuomeya fluviatilis Harv. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts. Sci. 25: 53-68. 1 pl. (9 Ap.) 1890.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1891: 378. Jel&91.) A Report on the Biological Work of the ee ee N e n Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 387 1141. Setchell, W. A. Concerning the Life History of Saccorhiza dermatodea (De la Pyl.) J.Ag. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts. Sci. 26:177-217. pl. 1, 2. (10Je.) 1891.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1892:829. D1892.) 1142. On the Classification and Geographical Dis- tribution of the Laminariaceae. Trans. Conn. Acad. 9: 333. 1893. Reprint. 1143. Seward, A. C. Algae as Rock Building Organisms. Sci. Progress. 2: 10-26. 81894. Reference to deposits and growths in America. 1144. Seymour, A. B. Marine Algae. St. Nat. Hist. Soc. III. 7J11884.)—(Science. 4:123. 8Ag1884.) 1145. Shaeffer, P. W. Impressions of Algae in Old Red Sandstone. Proc. Phil. Acad. S: iv. (11Mrl1856.) 1857. _ Eleven specimens from Schuyler county, Penn., are donated. 1146. Shaler, N. 8. The Geology of Cape Ann, Massa chusetts. U. S. Geol. Surv. 9th Ann. Rep. 539-611. (20Je1888.) 1889. Discusses the effect of sea-weed on movement of pebbles. 1147. Sharp, H. On Mounting Diatoms in Lines and Pat- terns.—(The Microscope. 3:26-28. Ap1883.)—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4: 132, 133. J11883.) 1148. Shaw, W. R. Pleodorina, a new Genus of Volvo. cineae. Bot. Gaz. 19: 279 283. pl. 27. 1611894. Describes genus and 1 species. 1149. Shultz, C. S. Volvox globator. Am. Jour. Mic. 3:91. Ap18s78. 1150. Note on Peridinium and Asterionella. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 1:190. (19Je.) J11885. 1151. Silliman, B. United States Exploring Expedition. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 44: 393-408. JaFMr1843. Sea-weeds collected. 1152. Slack, H. J. Mr. Stodder’s Remarks on Eupodiscus argus. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9:186, 187. 1Ap1873. See Ernst, A. and Slack, H. J. 1153. Sloane, H. Catalogus plantarum, quae in insula Jamaica sponte proveniunt vel vulgo coluntur cum earundem synonymis et locis natalibus; adjectis aliis quibusdam, quae in insulis Maderae, Barbados, Nieves et St. Christophori nascun- tur, seu Prodromi historiae naturalis Jamaicae. Brown. Part L 1-232. 1696. London. F . F Sede Fite is tye 388 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1154. Sloane, H. An Account of 4 sorts of strange Beans, : frequently cast on shore on the Orkney Isles, with some con- jectures on the Manner of their being brought thither from 4 Jamaica, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. 19: 108-105. 1696. 1155. of the Herbs and Trees, Four footed Beasts, Fishes, Birds, Insects, Reptiles, etc., of the last of those Islands; ete. 2 vol. printed by B. M. for the author. 1707-25. Folio. I: Eeliv. 1 264. pl, 1-156. 1707. 2:i-xviii, 1-499. pl. 157-275. 1725. London. 1156. Smiley, C. W. Rinnbock’s Slide of Arranged Diatoms, Chirodota Wheels, Synapta Plates, Synapta Anchors, ete. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9:199-200. 7 pl. NI888. 1157. The Reddening of Codfish. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:128-130. Jel889. 1158. Note on Diatom Multiplication. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:42. F 1892. 1159. To work the Diatomaceous Earth sent out by this Journal. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:122, 123. My1892. 1160. To mount Diatoms Dry.“ Am. Mo. Mie. Jour. 13:123. My1892. N 1161. Diatoms—A new London Dealer. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:57. F1893. 5 1162. Objects seen under the Microscope. XI. Red Snow. The Microscope. N. S. 2:50, 51. Ap1894. A Voyage to the Islands Madera, Barbados, a Nieves, S. Christophers and Jamaica, with the Natural History © 1163. Smiley, R. W. Reference List of Original Articles Relative to Diatoms Published in the American Monthly Micro- scopical Journal—Volumes LXII. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:270- 272. D1891. 1164. Smith, A. H. The Railway Cutting at Gray’s Ferry Road. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1886: 253, 254. (4My1886.) 1887. States that numerous genera and species of diatoms are contained in the blue clay of this region. 1165. Smith, A. L. and Whitting, Frances 6. Notes on the Sori of Macrocystis and Postelsia. Phyc. Mem. Part III. 84-87. pl. 20. Ap1895. The plant examined was collected at Santa Cruz, California. 1166. Smith, B. B. Additions to the Flora of Kansas. Trans. Kan. Acad. Sci. (1891-92.) 13:96-103. 1893. Three species of Characeae noted. ‘Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 389 1167. Smith, H. E. Report on the Sanitary Condition of 5 e Haven Water Supply, in May, 1894. 17th Ann. Rep. - Conn. St. Bd: Health. 266-268. 1895. ö Statements made concerning odors produced by certain algae. ) 1168. Report of the Investigations of Rivers Pollu- tion and Water Supplies. 17th Ann. Rep. Conn. St. Bd. Health. _ 269-297. 1895. Genera of algae listed. See Williston, S. W. Smith, H. EF. and Lee, T. G. 1169. Smith, H. L. Notes on Diatomaceae found near Gambia, O. Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 833-35. (15N 1859.) 1860. 11170. Spectroscopic examination of the Diatoma- ceae. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 48:83, 84. J11869.—(Can. Nat. N. S. 4: 372, 373. 1869.) 71. The Bailey Collection of Diatomaceae in the Museum of the Boston Society of Natural History. The Lens. > 1:228. 1872. 1172. A Conspectus of the Families and Genera of _ Diatomaceae. The Lens. 1:1. 72. 154. 1872.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 7177. IAp. 8:34, 35. 1311872. 9:35, 36. 1Ja. 9:114-117. IMr, 9: 165-167. IAp. 9: 219-221. I My 1873.) — (Am. Nat. 6318. My1872.)—(Grevillea. 1:63, 64. 01872. 1173. Conspectus of the Diatomaceae: The Genus Amphora. The Lens: 2:63. 3pl. 1873. (Grevillea. 2:24-26. Ag'1873.) ; 1174. Archebiosis and Heterogenesis. The Lens. 2219. Jal873.—(Sci.-Gossip. 9:153. 1873.) 1175. . The Silicious Shelled Bacillaria or Diatoma- ' ceae. The Lens. 2:129. 199. 1873. 1176. On the Preparation of Diatomaceae. The Lens. 2: 209. 1873.— (B. W. Thomas“ Diatomaceae of Minne- i sota Inter-glacial Peat.“ Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. 20th Ann. Rep. 1891. 317-320. 1893.) 3 1177. Who first Examined the Diatomaceae? The Lens. (Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:273. 1D1873.) States that O. F. Mueller in 1773 described and figured a Gomphonema as Vorticella pyraria. 1178. Letter on Frustulia saxonica and other Diatoms.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 15: 278.281. 1 e876.) 1179. A Letter concerning Diatoms written to J. * * —(Hedwigia. 17: 41-44. Mr1878.) * 890 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES 1180. Smith, H. L. Description of New Species of Diatoms. Am. Quart. Mic. Jour. 1:12-18. pl. 3. O1878.—(Grevillea. — 7:54-56. D1878.) Ten new species described. ; 1181 Diatomaceae v. Desmidiaceae. Michel's — Science. 1:7. 3J11880. Note on letter by Dr. J. Hogg, which is also quoted. 1182. A letter written to J. Deby concerning the Movement of Diatoms.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:182. 01880.) 1183. On the Preparation and Cleaning of Diatoms. Am. Jour. Mic. 5: 257, 258. D1880. 1184. Monobromide of Naphthaline and Wax-cells. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:49. Mri881. Extract of a letter from Herr E. Weissflog of Dresden. Mounting methods for diatoms. 1185. Deep Sea Soundings and the Influence of Microscopical Algae on Deep Sea Life, with a few Remarks on Evolution. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 3d Ann. Meeting. 17-87. (18Ag.) 1881. 1186. Fineness of Striation as a Specific Character of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2: 221-223. D1881. 1187. Rhizosolenia eriensis and R. gracilis. Proc. Am. Mic. 4:—. Ap1882. 1188. Desmids and Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:84, 85. My1882.—( Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 2:546. 1882.) 1189. New Mounting Media. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:71. Apl1884. 6:161-163. S1885.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 4: 476. 1884. 5:1097. 1885.) 1190. Mounting Media of High Refractive Index. Proc. Am Soc. Mic. 8th Ann. Meeting 86-90. 1885. 1191. Directions for using the Stannous Chloride Medium in mounting Diatomaceae. Mic. Bull. 2:46. 1885. 1192. . Newest Medium for Mounting Diatoms. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 1:102. (20Mr.) Ap1885. 1193. Fastening of Diatoms by Heat. Jour. N. Y. Mic. Soc. 1:128. 1885. 1194. A new Mounting Medium of high Refractive — Index. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:3, 4. Jal886. : 1195. New High Refractive Media. Jour. N. Y. Mic. Soc. 2:75. 1886. - Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 391 1196. Smith, H. L. A Contribution to the Life History of the Diatomaceae. Part I (Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 30-66. 5 pl. 1886 1887.) Part II (Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 126-167. 6 pl. 1887.) _—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14: 170, 171. Ag 1887.) — (The Micro- scope. 7: 274. $1887.) 1197. List of Species and some Notes upon them. B. W. Thomas’ Diatomaceae of Minnesota Inter-glacial Peat.” 20th Ann. Rep. 1891. 293-306. 1893. 1198. The Study of Difficult“ Diatoms. Am. Nat. 6. 444. J11872. 4 ———. See Edwards, A. M., Johnston, C. and Smith, H. L. 5 ——. See Kitton, F. and Smith, H. L. 1199. Smith, J. G. and Pound, R. Flora of the Sand Hill Region of Sheridan and Cherry counties and List of Plants collected on a Journey through the Sand Hills in July and August, 1892. Bot. Surv. Neb. 2: 5-30. 1893. Flle species of algae named. 1200. Smith, T. Notes on the Biological Examination of Water, with a few Statistics of Potomac Drinking Water. (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:61-64. Ap1886.) Abstract of a communication presented to the Biological Society of ' Washington, Mar. 20, 1886. 1201. Smith, T. F. On the Structure of the Pleurosigma Valve. Jour. N. X. Mic. Soc, 7:61-73. pl. 26, 27. (2Ja.) Ap1891. 1202. Smith, U. C. Hydrodictyon. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1893.1 580. (26D.) OND1893. = Specimen added to Museum. 1203. Sollas, W. J. Cutting Sections of Diatoms. The 4 eroscope. 4:139. 1884.—(Zeit. wiss. Mik. 1:624. 1884.) 1204. Southwick, E. B. Protococcus viridis. Jour. N. V. A Mit. Soc. 2:1-8. pl. 2, 3. (18D1885.) Ja1886. A list of trees affected by P. viridis in Central Park. 1205. Spalding, V. M. Development of the Sporocarp of Griffithsia bornetiana. (Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 39:327. Kg1890.) J11891.) 1204. Spegazzini, C. Characeae platenses. Anal. Soc. Cient. Argent. 15:218-231. 1883. 1 Five new species. 1207. Stalker, M. Report on the Waterville Cattle Disease. F “ourth Bien. Rep. Bd. Regents Univ. of Minn. Suppl. I. Rep. Dept. Agric. Univ. of Minn. 105-108. 1887. 892 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1208. Stanley, F. F. Collection of Photographs of Diatoms. (Moeller’s Diatomaceen Typen Platten. etc.) Swampscott, — Massachusetts. 3 1209. Stearns, F. P. Quality of ground Water, “Presence of Crenothrix.” Mass. St. Bd. Health Rep. 368-871. 1890, 1210. The Pollution and Self Purification of Streams. Report on Water Supply and Sewerage Part L Mass. St. Bd. Health. 785-502. (Algae 801, 802.) 1890, a 1211. Suggestions as to the Selection of Sources of Water Supply. 22nd Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 333-371. © 1891. 1 Remarks upon Crenothrix. “a 1212. Stearns, F. P. and Drown, T. M. Discussion O Special Topics relating to the Quality of Public Water Sup plies. Rep. Water Supply and Sewerage Part I. Mass. 88. Bd. Health. 717-782. (Algae 731. 747. 770.) 1890. 1213. Sternberg, G. M. Motion of Diatoms. Am. Mo, Mic. Jour. 2:227. D1881. 1214. Stodder, C. On Two New Species of Stauroneis, 8. baconiana and S. pellucids. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 75 26-28. 1859-61. 1215. Report on Slides of Diatomaceae. e Mic. Soc. 9: 25-28. 1861.) a Mounted by E. Samuels for the Boston Society of Natural History and presented to the Microscopical Society of London. On the Structure of the we of the Diatom- 1216. aceae. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 9:2-5. 1863.— (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 3:214. 1863.) 4 1217. On Diatomaceous Earth from Randolph, Mass. (1863.) Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 9: 319. 320. 1865. 4 1218. On Specimens of Deep Sea Soundings. (186 Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 10:13. 1866. 2 1219. Note on Rhabdonema mirificum. — Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 10: 101, 102. 1866. 1220. Report upon the Collection of Diatomaceae from the Alpine Summits of the White Mountains of Net Hampshire. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 75. 1867. 4 1221. On Infusorial Earth from Peru. (1866.) Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 11:75-79. 1868. 2a 1222. On a Recent Gathering of Diatomaceous Mud from Pleasant Beach, Cohasset. (1867.) Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 11: 182-184. 1868. 4 pf) oe 7 c 7 n 8 b * . — | Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 393 1223. Stodder, C. Nobert's Test Plate and Modern Micro- scopes. (1867.) Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 11: 338-340. 1868. Am. Nat. 2:93-101. Ap1868.—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8: 131 138. 1868.) 13224. Report of an Investigation of Soundings made in Ten Fathoms of Water off the Coast of Maine, near Mount Desert Island. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 11: 439, 440. 1868. 13225. Presence of Microscopic Bodies in Water. Boston Jour. Chem. Ag. 1870.—( Mo. Mic. Jour. 4: 318, 319. 1D 1870.) 1226. On the Microscopical Contents of the Atmos- phere of Boston. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc. 10:207, 208, 1871. 1227. . The Structure of Eupodiscus argus. The Lens. 2:29. 5f. 1873. 1228. Structure of Diatoms. Am. Nat. 7: 701, 702. NI8S87g. 1229. Remarks on the locality of the Bermuda ‘Tripoli. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14:265, 1875. 1230. Examination of Mud from Oyster Beds, Charleston, S. C. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 17:182. - (11N1874.) 1875. 3 Several species of diatoms found. 1231. Remarks on Frustulia saxonica, Navicula rhomboides and Navicula crassinervis.— (Mo. Mic. Jour. 15: 265. 1Je1876.) Read before the Royal Microscopical Society. 1292. A Contribution to Microgeology. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 18:206-209. (8D1875.) 1875, 1876. (Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 11:493, 494. Je1876.)—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 16:219. 101876.) A list of 50 diatoms from the infusorial deposit at Richmond, Virginia. 1233. Mounting Diatoms in Situ. Am. Jour. Mic. 2142, 143. 01877.— (Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 3:71, 72. 01887.) 1234. Bermuda Diatoms. Am. Jour. Mic. 2: 157. N1877. 1235. ———. A New Diatom.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 2: 937. 1879. ) 1236. Notes on Diatomaceae from Santa Monica, California. Am. Jour. Mic. 4:13-15. Jal879. 3 5 Twenty-six species listed, 3 of which are probably new to science „ * wa ’ - eS 4 = i * 3 r . n ety * oy ‘ ye sl a set 18 vee * N 394 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1237. Stodder, C. About Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jeu 1: 113, 115. Jel880. 1238. A letter on Cleaning Diatoms without 4 ing their Adherence to each other. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:9 8. My1881. 1 1239. ———. Notes on Diatomaceae from Tampa Florida. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:30-33. F188. 1 1240. Stodder, C. and Greenleaf, R. C. Organisms fou in the Mud from the Bottom of Mystic Pond, Medford, nea Boston. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 8:119-121, 1861-62. 1241. Stokes, A. C. Sphagnum, Desmids, Rhizopods Eels. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3: 152, 153. Agl1882. Names 27 species of algae from southern New Jersey. 1242. Key to the Desmidiae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:109-114. Je. 7:125-181. JI. 7:144-148. Ag. 7163-169. - $1886. 1243. Notes on the Study of Algae. The Mic scope. 10:145-148. My. 10:213-217, J11890, a 1244. -—-. Diatoms in Abundance. The Microscope. 10: . 4 N 151-153. My 1890. ; 1245. A Note on Closterium. The Microscop „ 10: 168-171. Jel890. a 1246. Acknowledgement of Slides of Diatoms. ae Microscope. 10: 217, 218. JI1890. 5 1247. Analytical Keys to the Genera and Species of the Fresh Water Algae and the Desmidieae of the Uni . States, founded on the Classification of the Rev. Francis Wolle's Monographs. 1-117. I pl. 1893—(Am. Nat. 27:739, 740 0. Ag 1893.) — (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 14: 297. 01893.) a 1248. Notes on the Chromatophores of Astrophy lum sylvaticum Lindb. (Mnium cuspidatum Hedw.), and 4 some other Plants. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 21: 396-406. 298 1894. 1 Incidental notes on the microscopical appearances of diatoms. 25 1249. Stowell, C. H. Gleanings from the Journal of th Royal Microscopical Society for June. The Microscope. 3:104-106. Ag1s83. — Note on the preparation of marine algae. 2 1250. Mounting the Diatomaceae. The Microscop pe. 4: 280-282. D1884. a 1251. Volvox globator. Keeping Alive and Mount t⸗ ing. The Microscope. 5: 275. D1885. i Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 395 1252. Stowell, C. H. and Stowell, Louisa 4. Beads of Amphipleura pellucida. The Microscope. 5:91. 1885.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 5: 533. 1885.) 1253. Strasburger, G. Moist Chamber.“ (Am. Mo. Mic, Jour. 2:35. F881.) 1254. Sturgis, W. C. On the Carpologic Structure and Development of the Collemaceae and allied Groups. Proc. Am. Acad, Arts. and Sci, 25: 15-52. pl. 1-8. 9Ap1890. Some discussion of the algal members of these groups. 1255. Sullivant, J. Letter concerning the Discovery of Bermuda Tripoli. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 17: 422, 423. 10 F875. 1256. Sullivant, W. 8. and Wormley, T. G. On the Measurement of the Striae of Diatoms. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 27:249-252. My1859. 1257. On Nobert's Test-Plate aud the Striae of Diatoms. Jour, Mic. Soc. 1: 112-117. 1861—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 31: 12-17. My1861.) 1258. Sutton, H. J. Some Schuylkill River Inhabitants. A smalb list of algae is included. 1259. Swan, J. G. Kelp Parchment, prepared for printing. Ann. Rep. Bd. Regents Smiths. Inst. 1886*:715. 1889. A specimen of this material, the first made in the United States, was presented to the National Museum. 1260. Swingle, W. T. Cephaluros mycoidea and Phyllosi- Phon, two species of parasitic algae new to North America. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 42: 260. (Ag 1893.) 1894.) The first form is from central Florida, the second from the Dells of the Wisconsin river. 1261. 8, J. C. Pond Life in Winter. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:62, 63. Ap1883. Names 9 species of algae from Bangor, Maine. 1262. Taylor, G. H. Water-washed Diatoms. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 207, 208. 1885. 1263. Cleaning Diatoms from Marine Muds. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 208-210. 1885. 1264. Marine Diatomaceae.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:95, 96. My1887.) 1265. Diatoms from Tampa Bay. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:96. My1887. A letter to the editor. a 1266. Letter on Method of Cleaning Diatoms. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 14:141-143. J11887.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887 :844. 01887.) Tyra. a Yt a ee oe 396 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1267. Terry, W. A. Cleaning Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:44-46. Mr. 8:69-71. Ap1887.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1887: 676. 1887.) a 1268. Notes on Diatoms and other Algae of Ne- Haven Harbor and Adjacent Waters. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 225-227, D1888.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 16:33, 121889.) 1269. Motions of Certain Diatoms and Oscillaria. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 10:81-83, Ap1889.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889:566. 1889.) 3 1270. A Search for Diatoms in Boston Harbor, in September, 1889. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:35-37. F1890. —(Notarisia. 5: 1030, 1031. 80Je1890.) 2 1271. -. A Letter about Diatoms. The Microscop ; 4 10: 285-287. 81890. ta 1272. A Letter about the Movement of Diatom: „ Oscillaria, etc. The Microscope. 10: 349, 350. N1890. 1273. Diatoms of the Connecticut Shore. I-VIL Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13:185-189. Ag. 13: 230-232. O. 13 :258— 256. N1892. 14:45-48. F. 14:140-143. My1893. 15 :74-88. Mri894. 16:41-47. F895 1274. How to find Diatomaceous Earth. Am.! Mic. Jour. 15:168-171. Je1894.- 1275. Thomas, B. W. Microscopical Examination of the Water of Lake Michigan. 8rd Ann. Rep. Dept. Pub. Works. 1879. Chicago.—(Am. Nat. 13:534, 535. Ag1879.) a 1276. Diatomaceae of Minnesota Inter-glac 2 Peat. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. 20th Ann. Rep. 185 290-820. 1893. — (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 20: 224. 10My a One hundred species listed. 4 1277. Thomas, B. W. and Chase, H. H. Diatomaceae o Lake Michigan as collected during the last 16 years from he ö Water Supply of the City of Chicago. Pamphlet 1-3. 188 Chicago:—(Notarisia. 2:328-330. 1887.) 2 Presented to the State Microscopical Society of Illinois, 18886. 1278. Thomson, W. C. The Challenger Soundings.—( Mic. Jour. 12: 245-250. 1N 1874. 13: 245, 246. 1Je1875.) 1279. The Atlantic. A Preliminary Account of t General Results of the Exploring Voyage of H. M. S. Chi lenger” during the year 1873 and the early part of the year 1876. 1:1-891. (Algae 284.) 2:1-329. (Algae 290.) 1878. Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 397 1280. Tilden, Josephine E. List of Fresh-water Algae collected in Minnesota during 1893. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. Bull, No. 9. 25-31. 16Ja1894. Lists 89 species. 1281. Note on the Development of a Filamentous Form of Protococcus in Entomostracan Appendages. Bot. Gaz. 19:3834, 335. pl 30. 15Ag1894. 1282. List of Fresh water Algae Collected in Minnesota during 1894. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. Bull. No. 9. 228-237. 5Mr1895. Continues the list of No. 1280 to 201 species. 1283. The Study of the Algae. Minn. Mag. 1: 146-152. Jel895. 1284. Toni, J. B. de. Ueber einige Algen aus Feuerland und Patagonien. Hedwigia. 28: 24-26. 1889. A list of 16 species collected by Dr. Carl Spegazzini. 1285. Boodlea Murray et De- Toni nuovo genere di Alghe a fronda reticolata. Malpighia. 3: 14-17. 1889. 13286. Sopra du Alghe Sud Americane. Malpighia. 3:67, 68. 1889. 1287. Toni, G. B. de and Levi-Morenos, D. Algae nonnullae quas in circumnavigationis itinere ad Magellani fretum anno 1884 legit A. Cuboni. Bull. Soc. Ven. Trent. di Padova. 4: No. 1. 1887. 1288. Toni, G. B. de and Saccardo, F. Revisione di alcuni geueri di Cloroficee epifite. La Nuova Notarisia. 1: 3-20. 4 pl. 1890. America-Porto Rico. 1289. Torell, 0. Bidrag till Sparegmitetagens geognosi och paleontologi. Lund Acta Univ. 4: (Math.) No. 13. 1867. Eophy ton. 18290. Torrey, J. Microscopical Examination of the Croton Water. Ann. Rep. Croton Aqueduct. 28-33. (1859.) 1860. New York. 1291. Trelease. W. Biology of the Conjugatae. Bot. Gaz. 10: 256-258. Ap1885. 11292. The Working of the Madison Lakes. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. Art and Letters. 7: 121-129. pl. 10. 1889. _—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17:81. 10Mr1890.) A description of the vegetation included in scum formed upon lakes, comprising some algal forms. 8 a mn = ä W * 4 7 * - _ 2 N 398 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1293. Triana, J. and Planchon, J. E. Prodromus Novo Granatensis ou Enumeration des Plantes de la Nouvelle - Grenade avec Description des Especes Nouvelles. Ann Sei. Nat. IV. 20: 228-300. (Charae 230.) 1563. 3 Chara sejuncta A. Br. described by W. Nylander. sy 1294. Truan y Luard, A. and Witt, 0. N. Die Diatom der Polycystinenkreide von Jérémie in Hayti, Westindien. 1888.—(Zeits. wiss. Mik. 5110-113. 1888.) — (Bot. Cent 36: 225, 226. 1888.) eae Photographs of Diatoms.—(Jour. Mic. Nat. : Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. and Wesley Nat. Soc. O. S. 9: 106. pe 4 Aa of method of photographing in work on the fe * diatoms of Hayti. 1296. Tuomey, M. Notice of the Discovery of a New Locality of the Infusorial Stratum.” Am. Jour. Sci. Aree 44:339-341. JaFMr1843. a 1297. Turner, D. Fuci, sive plantarum Fucorum generi a botanicis adscriptarum icones, descriptiones et historia. 1808-19. 4 vol. gr. 4to. 1:1-164. pl. 1-71. 1808. 2: 1-162. * "Gg 72-134. 1809. 3: 1-148. pl. 135-196. 1811. 4:1-153. pl. 10 258. 1819. | 1298. Turner, W. B. On some New and Rare Desmids. | : Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. IL 5:933-940. pl. 15-16. D1885.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 12:133. D1885.) = Describes 24 algae new to North America of which 20 are new species or varieties. 1299. Staining Desmids. The 1 5: 25. ‘ D1885. 1300. ———-. Process for Mounting Desmids. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc.— (Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 7:58. Mri886.) 2 1301. Twitchell, G. B. Remarks on a variety of No ol pruniforme. 3 Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 9: 253-255. (50.) Jal886. 2 Specimens from Idaho. 1302. Underwood, L. UM. Report of the Botanical Divi of the Indiana State Biological Survey. Proc. Ind. A 1893. 13-19. Ag 1894. a States that about 200 species of algae, represented by about 300 speci- mens, are contained in the Underwood herbarium. - aa 1303. Unger, F. Synopsis Plantarum ee Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 2: 136. J11846.) The number of species of fossil algae then known is given as 10. ag 1304. Veeder, M. A. Organisms in Ice from Ste Water. Am. Nat. 14:388, 389. My1880. 2 ~ 2 Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 399 1805. Verrill, A. E. Brief Contribution to Zoology from the Museum of Yale College. XXVI. Results of Recent _ Dredging Expeditions on the Coast of New England. No. 4. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 7:38-46. Jal874. Twelve species of algae included in reports. 1306. Vorce, C. I. Some Observations on the Minute Forms of Life in the Waters of the Lakes. 1880. Cleveland, Ohio. Read before the Kirtland Society of Natura! Sciences. 1807. Forms observed in Water of Lake Erie. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 51-60. pl. 7. (9Ag.) 1881. 187-196. 1 pl. 1882. The list includes a large number of alga! forms. 1308. The Motion of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 343-45. Mrl1882. 1309. Remarks on Stephanodiscus niagarae. Proc. Am. Soc. Mic. 189-141. 1885.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 6: 660, 661. Ag 1886.) 1310, ———. The Affinitiesof Raphidodiscus. The Micro- scope. 9: 132-138. pl. 6. My1889. 1011. The Classification of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 12:150. .J11891.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 19:67. 10 F 1892.) A criticism of Rev. F. B. Carter’s paper with remarks upon 3 genera. 1312. Wadsworth, M. E. Algae and Spray-markings. Sci- ence. 1:39. 16F 1883. 1313. Wagstaff, E. H. An Unknown Plant Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:220. N1884. 1314. Wahl, W. B. Diatoms in Infusorial Earth being _ Absorbed by Roots of Corn.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 16: 156-160. Pl. 155, 181876.) 5 “Forms of diatoms found in Col. Kunkel's straw.” 1315. Walcott, C. D. Discophycus. Trans. Alb. Inst. 10:19. 1879. 1316. Wales, ——. Observations on Resolution of Amphi- _ pleura pellucida. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soc. 1: 103. (20Mr.) _ Ap1ss5. . Walker, W. C. See Chase, H. H. and Walker, W. C. 1317. Walker, J. A useful Collecting Device. The Micro- scope. 372-374. P1889. 1318. Waller, E. Report on Croton Water during the years 1876-1877. —(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2. 238. D1881.) r eo et le St ie, oe ; „ * 1 i= it % Bay tog art ae 400 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1319. Wallich, G. C. Note on Desmidiaceae of Green Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:180, 171869. Names 27 species. Cosmarium and Staurastrum predominate. 1320. Walmsley, W. H. Photomicrograph of Rinnboecke, The Microscope. 5:181, 1885. 1321. The Preparation of Desmids.—(Jour. Mie. Nat. Sei.: Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. and the Wesley Nat. Soc. O. a 9:188, 1890.) 1322. ———. Preservation of Algae.—(The Microscope. 10:152. My1890.) 1323. Walther, J. The Formation of Structureless Ch by Sea-weeds. Science. 7:575, 576. 25Je1886.—(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. II. 6:1023, 1024. D1886.) States that recent observations on the chalk-secreting algae of the Mediterranean may throw light on the formation of the chalk b % of western Kansas. 1324. Wanner, A. The Discovery of Fossil Tracks, Alaa eto., in the Triassic of York county, Pennsylvania. Geol. ; Surv. Penn. Ann. Rep. for 1887. 21. II pl. 3 1325. Ward, L. F. Guide to the Flora of Washington and Vicinity. 1-237. (144.) 1881. a 1 Lists 2 species of Chara and 2 of Nitella. 1326. The Fossil Flora of the Globe. Bot. das 4 9:169-174. ON1884. a Abstract of paper read by the author before the American Associ- ation for the Advancement of Science. Philadelphia, 1884. 1327. Synopsis of the Flora of the Laramie Group. § U. S. Geol. Surv. 6th Ann. Rep. 399-557. (549.) pl. 31. J. 1, 2. 1885. 4 Fucus lignitum from Montana and Wyoming, noted and figured. a 1328. The Geographical Distribution of Fossil Plants. U.S. Geol. Surv. 8th Ann. Rep. 663-960. 1889. Notes the finding of species of Fucoides, etc., from Quebec, * 7 York State, and other localities in North America, _ 1329. Report on the Department of Fossil F in the United States National Museum, 1888. Ann. Rep. B Regents Smiths. Inst. 18882: 189-190. - 1890. 1330. Report on the Department of Recent P in the United States National Museum. 1888. Ann. Rep. E Regents Smiths. Inst. 18882: 191-193. 1890. 1331. Ward, R. H. Separating Diatoms. Am. Nat. 7:6 F. 188. 01873. * x = %% ˙ · , ee eee Te ee i ae ; a ? Sass Cap ae _ Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 401 1332. Ward, L. F. Handling Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 8:697, 689. N1874.) Notes from “A Useful Hint,” given by Capt. Lang of the Reading Microscopical Society. 1333. ——~+. Fixing Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 8:701, 702. N 1874.) 13834. ————. Coarse Lines on Diatoms.—({Am. Nat. 9: 126. F1875. ) 1335. ————. Preserving Algae.—(Am. Nat. 9:252. Ap 1875.) Mr. T. Palmer's method is given. 1336. Mounting Selected Diatoms.— (Am. Nat. 9: 252. Ap1875.) 1337. ———. Coloring Matter of Red Snow.”—({Am. Nat. 9:575. O1875.) 1338. ————. An Easy Nitzschia. (N. curvula.) Am. Nat. 10: 566, 567. S1876. 1339. ——. Collecting Diatoms.—(Am. Nat. 10:567. $1876.) Mr. J. Redmayne’s method. 1340. ———.. Diatoms as Fertilizers. Am. Nat. 10:754. 51876. 1341. ———-. Organisms in Rochester Hydrant Water. Am. Nat. 11:441, 442. J11877. Notes 10 species of algae. 1342. Warren, R. S. The Preparation of Diatoms. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3: 111-115. Je1882. 1343. . Cleaning Diatoms. Reply to Mr. Kitton. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3:225, 226. D1882. 1344. Watt, A. P. A Provisional Catalogue of Canadian Cryptogams. Can. Nat. and Geol. N. S. 2:390-404. 01865. Chara vulgaris Linn. and C. flexilis Linn. noted. 1345. Webber. H J. The Fresh-water Algae of the Plains. Am. Nat. 23:1011-1013. N1889. A list of algae collected in a day’s trip in the Sand Hill region of Nebraska: 10 species of desmids, 13 of diatoms and 15 of other algae 1346. Catalogue of the Flora of Nebraska. Pro- tophyta—Anthophyta. Report of the Botanist on the Grasses and Forage Plants, and the Catalogue of Plants. [Extracted from the Report of the Nebraska State Board of Agriculture for 1889.] 35-162. (Algae 44-50. 92.) 1890. Lincoln, Nebraska. One hundred and four algae listed including 2 Charas and 1 Nitella. 402 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1347. Webber, H. J. Appendix to the Catalogue of t Flora of Nebraska. Contributions from the Shaw School c Botany. No. 9. Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis. 6:1-47. (8-11. 20.) 12Mr1892., Names 2 species of Chara, 3 of Nitella and 27 of other algae. 1348. Weber van Bosse, A. Etude sur les Algues F des Paresseux. Nat. Verh., Holland, Maatsch. der W schappen Haarlem. 2 pi. 1887.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 15: 5Ja188s. ) 1349. Weed, W. II. Formation of Travertine and Silicious Sinter by the Vegetation of Hot Springs. U. S. Geol. Surv. 9th Ann. Rep. 613-676. pl. 78-87. 1889.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. | 18:27, 28. 20Ja1891.)—(Am. Jour. Sci. III. 41: 158, 1 F891.) States that thermal spring vegetation is entirely algal and in Yellow. stone regions occurs only at a temperature below 185° F. 1350. . The Diatom Marshes and Diatom Beds of hall Yellowstone National Park. Bot. Gaz. 14: 117-120. W —(Mic. Bull. 6:17. 1889.) —(The Microscope. 9217, 218. J11889.) (Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889: 794. 1889.) Enumerates 11 species. The Vegetation of Hot Springs. Am. Nat. 1351. 23:394-400. My1889. 1352. ————. Note on Sinter-forming Algae. Am. Jour. Sci. III. 37:501. Jel889. 1358. The Geological Work of Mosses and Algae. Am. Geol. 7:48-55. Jai891. * 1354. as F. W. Cleaning Recent Diatomaceous Mate- / rial. The Microscope. 9:1-4. Jal889. 1355. A New Diatom Mounting Medium. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 11:86. Api8s90 4 1356. Wells, S. The Structure of Eupodiscus argus. Mo. Mic. Jour. 9: 110, 111. pl. 77, 1Mri1873. * Description of specimens from Buzzard's Bay, Mass. a 1357. The Markings of Frustulia . Mic. Jour. 16: 169, 170. 101876.) Read before the Royal Microscopical Society. os 1358. West, W. Desmids of Maine. Jour. of Bot. 26:33: . 340. N1888. Adds 73 species to Professor Harvey’s list. = Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 403 1359. West, W. List of Desmids from Massachusetts. U. S. A. Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889: 16-21. pl. 2. 3. F889. Enumerates 84 species and 5 varieties and forms, with 2 new species and several new varieties. 1360. The Fresh-water Algae of Maine. Jour. of Bot. 27:205-207. 1889. 29:353-357. 1891.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, 17:41. 5F 1890.) | Describes 1 new species and 2 new varieties, in the first paper, and 3 new species in the second. 1361. West, W. and West, G. 8. On some Fresh-water Algae from the West Indies. Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) 30: 264- 280. pl. 18-16 10J11894. Names 60 species. 1362. New American Algae. Jour. of Bot. 33:52. F 1895. 5 Describes 1 new variety and 2 new species. 1363. Some Recently Published Desmidieae. Jour. of Bot. 32:65-70. Mrl1895, Descriptions of some American forms criticised. 1364. White, C. A. The Invertebrate Fossils collected in _ Portions of Nevada, Utah, Colorado, New Mexico and Arizona, by Parties of the Expeditions of 1871, 1872, 1873, and 1874. Eng. Dept. U.S. Army. Rep. U. S. Geog. Surv. West of the One Hundredth Meridian. (Palaeontology.) 4':32-34, (1874.) 1877. Cruziana linnarssoni White, and C. rustica White are described from Arizona as new to science. 1365. White, M. C. Discovery of Microscopic Organisms in the Silicious Nodules of the Palaeozoic Rocks of New York. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 33:385, 386. My1862. Dlustrated.—(Can. Nat. Geol. 7:281-283. Ag1862.) Desmids and diatoms found. 1366. Whitfield, R. P. Preliminary Report on the Palaeon- _ tology of the Black Hills. U. S. Geog. and Geol. Surv. Rocky Mt. Region. 1-49. J11877. 1367. Preliminary Descriptions of New Species of Fossils from the Lower Geological Formations of Wisconsin. Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Wis. for 1876. 50-89. 1877. Palaeophycus plumosus described as new. 1368. Species from the Potsdam Sandstone. Geol. Wis. Surv. of 1873-1879. 4: 169-193. 1882. Palaeophycus plumosus described from Mendota, Wisconsin. c 404 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES 1369. Whitfield, R. P. List of Wisconsin Fossils. Wis. Surv. of 1873-1879. 1:3862-875. 1883. Thirteen fossil algae listed. 1370. On New Forms of Marine Algae from Trenton Limestone, with Observations on Buthograptus lax Hall. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 6:351-358. pl. 77. D185 —(Am. Geol. 15: 183. 184. Mr1895.) Three new genera and 3 new species described. 1371. Whitman, C. 0. Preparation of Marine Algae. Nat. 17:456, 457. Ap1883. 1372. Whitney, J. D. Ueber Californischen Bacil Gebirge. Berlin, monatsb. Akad. 124-139. 1872. Whitting, Frances G. See Smith, A. L. and Whit. ting, Frances G. a 1373. Wilbur, C. I. Desmid Fishing. The Microscoy 6: 169-171. Ag1886. a 1374. Wildeman, E. de. Trentepohlia. Bull. Soc. R. Belg. 271: 79-83. 272: 22-24. 136-144. 178-182. 1 pl. 185 5 —(Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. 1889: 420, 421. Jel889.) q Two new species from Chile deseribed. 2 1375. Encore quelques mots 4 propos de I’Hans- girgia flabelligera de Toni. Comp. Rend. Soc. Roy. Bot. 4 Belgique. 28:36, 37. 1889. 1376. Trentepohlia pittieri. Notarisia. 9: 6, 7. 180 A new species from Costa Rica. ‘ 1377. Wille, N. Bidrag til Sydamerikas Algflora. I-III. —(Bihang till k. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. 8: 1-61. pl. 1 5. 1884. ) 4 1378. Willey, H. A Sea- weed new to our Coast. Am Nat 4 6767. D1872. * Hildenbrandia rosea Kunze noted as occurring at Mt. Desert, Ma chusetts. 4 1379. Williams, A., Jr. Infusorial Earth. U. S. Geol. Surv. Miner. Res. U. S. 479, 480. 1883. 5 Nevada and California given as localities for the material. 1380. Infusorial Earth. U. S. Geol. Surv. Mir Res. U. S. 1883 and 1884. 720, 721. 1885. g 4 The substance occurs in many places in California and Nevada. | t is of some economical value being used chiefly by soap manu 1 turers. Notes on deposits in Maryland and Virginia. 4 3 2 1381. Williams, T. A. The Status of the Algo-Liche Hypothesis. Am. Nat. 23: 1-8. Jail889. Ae Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 405 1382. Williamson, W. C. On some of the Microscopical _ Objects found in the Mud of the Levant and other Deposits; 4 with Remarks on the Mode of Formation of Calcareous and In- _ fusorial Silicious Rocks. (1845.) Manchester Phil. Soc. Mem, 81128. 1848. Diatoms of Bermuda and Virginia studied. 1383. Deep-sea Researches. Mo. Mic. Jour. 13: 126- 128. 1Mr1875. } Virginia, Bermudas, and West Indies. : 1384. Williston, S. W. Cause of the Bad Smell in the | Meriden (Connecticut) Reservoir. Meriden Daily Jour. IN 1889, 1385. 81. 82. Mr1890. ; 1386. Williston, S. W., Smith, H. E. and Lee, T. G. Report on the Examination of Certain Connecticut Water Supplies. Uroglena volvox Ehr. The Microscope. 10: ' 14th Ann. Rep. St. Bd. Health Conn. for year ending Nov. 30, 1891. 231-406. 1892. R A large number of algae listed. 1387. Willson, L.A. To preserve Algae. The Microscope. ( Smiley.) N. S. 3:44. Mr18s95. 1388. Wilson, G. H. Report on Health of Town of Meri- den, Connecticut. 12th Ann. Rep. St. Bd. Health Conn. for 1889. 68, 69. 1890. Volvox and other algae cause the water from the reservoir to havea “fishy” taste during the fall. 1389. Wilson, P. B. Silica of Grasses and other Plants Carried up as Diatoms or other Silicious Grains, and not in solution or as soluable Silicates. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 11373, 374. My1876.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 16:92. 1Ag1876.)— Am. Jour. Sci, Arts. III. 12:400. N1876.) 1390. Winchell, A. Notice of a Small Collection of Fossils from the Potsdam Sandstone of Wisconsin and the Lake Superior Sandstone of Michigan. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 37: 226-232. Mrl1864. Two new species of Palaeophycus described from the red sand- stone of Lake Superior. Witt, 0. N. See Truan, y Luard, A. and Witt, 0. N. 1391. Witt, W. G. de. Pithophora kewensis. Jour. N. V. Mic. Soe. 1: 218. (20 N.) 1885. 406 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1392. Wittrock. V. B. Oedogoneae Americanae hue cognitae. Bot. Notiser. 133. 1878.—(Hedwigia. 17: 178-16 D1878.) 139g. . Om snoens och isens flora, särskildt id arktiska trakterna. A, E. Nordenskioeld’s Studier o forskningar, foeranledda af mina resor i hoega Norden.” Bot. Gesell. 7Mr1883.—(Bot. Centralb. 14:158, 159. —(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:139. J11884.)—(Nature. 30:¢ 8001884.) 1394. Wolle, F. Fresh-water Algae. Bull. Torr. Club. 6:121-123. N1876. Part II. 6: 137-141. Mr1877. or III. 6:181-189. N1877. Part IV. 7:43-48. Ap1880. Part V 8:37. 1881. Part VI. 9:25-80. pl. 13. Mri882. Part VI 10:13-21. pl. 27. F 1883. Part VIII. 11:13-17. pl. 44. F168 Part IX. 12:1-6. pl. 47. Jal885. Part X. 12: 125-129. * 1885. First paper: Thirty species believed to be new to the United § and 10 new to science. Collected mostly within twenty — Bethlehem, Pennsylvania. Second paper: Addition of 100 specie: to the United States lists. Third paper: Notes 150 forms new 66 the United States and 24 new species. Fourth paper: Lists 90 new to the United States and 18 new to science. Fifth paper: 61 species new to United States, of which 4 are new to science. Sixth paper: 70 species enumerated as being new to United States, J new species and varieties. Seventh paper: 77 species and varieties new to United States, of which 31 are entirely new. Eighth pa 38 species and varieties new to North America, of which 20 are new. Ninth paper: Nearly 50species and varieties new to the flora of th United States, 15 entirely new. Tenth paper: 26 new es and varieties new to United States of which 14 are new toscience. 1395. . A Nostoc the Matrix of Scytonema. Bul Torr. Bot. Club. 6:217, 218. 1 pl. Ap1878. - 2 8 4 1396. Fresh-water Algae. Bot. Gaz. 3: 68-70 Agi878. 2 1397. Fresh- water Algae. Synopsis of Discoverie and Researches in 1878. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 6: 281-288. JaF1879. a Ahout 125 species new to the United States listed. a 1398. Dubious Character of some of the Genera oi Fresh-water Algae. Am. Quart. Mic. Jour. 1: 205-208. pl. 18. (24F.) Api879.—(Brebissonia. 1:185-188. 30Je1879.) 1399. Fallacious Appearances among the Fresl water Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:21, 22. f. 9. F1880. Centralb. 6:37. 1881.) - Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 407 1400. Wolle, F. Cell-multiplication in Chantransia violacea Kg. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:48-45. f. 18. Mr1880. 1401. — Notes on Fresh-water Algae (Cylindrocapsa.) Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1:83, 84. My1880.—(Bot. Centralb. 6:37. 1881.) 1402. Notes on Fresh- water Algae (Bulbochaete.) Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 1: 121. 122. f. 22. JII880.— (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 7: 100. $1880.) 1403. ——. New American Desmids. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 7:91. pl. 3. Ag 1880. Explanation of plate. 1404. Wolle), F. Cooke's Desmids new to Britain.”—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 2:116, 117. Jel881.) Notes on occurrence of same species in America. 1405. Wolle, F. Rotifer Nests. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3: 101, 102. Jel882. Notes occurrence of 3 species of Spirogyra near Harrisburg, Penn., and Vaucheria geminata with rotifer galls. 14406. . Fresh-water Algae. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 3147, 148. Ag1882. Discussion of the synonomy of Mastigocladus laminosus. 1407. Cooke's British Fresh-water Algae.”—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:76. Ap1883.) Notes of species found also in America. 1408. Desmids of the United States and List of American Pediastrums with Eleven Hundred Illustrations on Fifty-Three Colored Plates. 8vo. 1-168. pl. 1-53. 1884. Bethle- hem, Penn.—(Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 5:116. Je1884. 5:129, 130. 1884.) — (Jour. Mic. Nat. Sci.: Jour. Post. Mic. Soc. 3: 254, 255. O1884.)— (Am. Nat. 18: 1042-1044. 01884.) (Nature. 31: 292, 293. 29 Ja 1885.) 1409. ——. First Contribution to the Knowledge of Kansas Algae. Bull. Washburn Lab. Nat. Hist. 1: 17, 18. S 1884. Second Contribution. 1:62-64. Jal885. Third Con- tribution. 1:174, 175. J11886. Fourth Contribution. 2:64. 2 In the first, second and third papers are noted 30 species of algae; in dhe fourth 23 diatoms from Arlington, Reno county are listed. 1410. Fresh- water Algae. Bot. Gaz. 11:148. Je Directions for collecting. 408 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1411. Wolle, F. Fresh-water Algae of the United State (Exclusive of the Diatomaceae) complemental to Desmids o the United States; with 2,300 Illustrations Covering One Hun dred and Fifth-one Plates, a few Colored, Including Nine A tional Plates of Desmids. i-—xix. 21-364. 1887. 2: pl. 6 1887. Bethlehem, Penn. * Desmids of the Pacific Coast. Bull. Cal Acad. Sci. 2:432-437. 16Je1887. Second Paper. Proc. Oa Acad. Sci. II. 1':79, 80. Jel88s. The first article contains a list of 82 desmids and 14 other signet lected by Mrs. Hansen and Miss Haggin near lake Tahoe, August, 1886. The second article gives 17 desmids not contained in pre list, and 7 other algae. Collections made at Donner, Truckee ant Reno, Nevada, September, 1887. 4 1413. Nostoc pruniforme. Bot. Gaz. 15:24. 1890. a 1414. Diatomaceae of North America, Illustra: with Twenty three Hundred Figures from the Author's Draw- ings on One Hundred and Twelve Plates. i-xiii. 15-47, pl. 1-112. 1890. Bethlehem, Penn.—(Am. Nat. 25:484, 485. My1891.) Bethlehem, Penn. ao 1415. Wolle, F. and Martindale, I. C. Algae—Fresh- and Marine Forms. Britton's Catalogue of Plants found ii New Jersey.“ Geol. Surv. N. J. Final Rep. St. Geol. 2: 384-430. and 602-615. 1889.—(Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 17: 159-163. 9Je 1890. A large number of species listed. 1416. Wood, H. C. Observations on the Life- history some Siphonaceous Fresh-water Algae. Proc. Phil. A a 1867:93. (6Ag.) 1867. : 1417. Fresh-water Algae in Hot Springs. Pr Phil. Acad. 1867:125. 1501867. a Remarks upon an alga from Mono county, California, said to 5 in water of a temperature from 120-136° F. 2 1418. A Botanical Excursion in my Office. N Nat. 1: 517-530. sf D1867. = 1419. Notes on some Algae from a Californian B Spring. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 46:31-34. J11868—(Ann. Ma Nat. Hist. 2:231-234. 1868.)—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8: 254. 1868.) 1420. Manner in which Schizomeris leibleinei duces its Zoospores. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 11,12. (190.) 1868. Tuden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 409 1421. Wood, H. C. Description of a new Species of Pal- mella. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 1868:12, 13. (16N.) 1868. Paualmella jesseni described. Remarks also made on a probable Chan- transia found on stones in a creek. 1422. New Species of Sirosiphon. Biol. and Mic, Dept. Phil. Acad. 1869:1, 2. (18Ja.) 1869. Describes 4 species new to North America, and 3 entirely new. 1423. Nostochopsis. A Probable new Genus of Fresh- water Algae. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil, Acad. 1869: 2, 3 (IF.) 1869. 4 One species described. 1424. An Undescribed Species of Oedogonium. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 1869:4. (3My.) 1869. Names the species O. mirabile. 1425. On Oedogonium huntii (1867.) Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 10: 333-335. 1869. 1426. Desmids from the White Mountains. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 1869: 15-19. (15 N.) 1869. Nhe collection embraces 23 species, new and old. 8 new species a ‘described. 1427. Nostoc cristatum. Biol. and Mic. Dept. Phil. Acad. 1869: 20. (20D.) 1869. 1428. ———. Algae. Rep. U. S. Geol. Explor. Fortieth Parallel. (Botany.) 5:415. 1871. Notes concerning 5 species of which one Ulva, merismopedioides, is new to science. . 1429. . Prodromus of a Study of the Fresh- water Algae of Eastern North America. (1869.) Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 11:119-145. 1871.—(Grevillea. 3:43, 44. $1874.) 3 a 1430. A Contribution to the History of the Fresh- water Algae of North America, (1872.) Smiths. Cont. Knowl. 1 tO": i-vili, 1-262. pl. 1-21. 1874.—(Grevillea. 2: 54-57. 1 72-76. N1873. 2: 92-96. 1873.) (Am. Jour. Sei. Arts. 5391. My 18783.) us. Woods, A. F. Notes on the Canon Flora of Sioux county, with List of Plants Collected in July and August, 1892. Bo Surv. Neb. 2:31-46. 1893. Lists 7 species of desmids. 28 of diatoms, and 13 of other algae. ee Coleochaetaceae, Characeae. Univ. of Neb. . Neb. Published by the Botanical Seminar. 12: 119-128. ol. pl, 22-86. 15Ag1894. 7 —— nS r <> 22 n ny i is Sah * 3 ha kes ae Broa Tone re eee 3 ~ 1 410 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1433. Woodward, A. and Thomas, B. W. The Micre cal Fauna of the Cretaceous in Minnesota, with Additions f. Nebraska and Illinois. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. The Geology of Minnesota, Final Rep. Palaeontology. 3: 23-54 (80N1891.) 1895. 2 States that more than 100 species of fresh-water Diatomaceae wet found in samples of interglacial peat from Blue Earth county, Mir n. Woodward, A. See Gratacap, L. P. and phases . 1434. Woodward, J. J. Memorandum on the Angie ur pellucida. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. III. 1: 345, 346. My 1871. Mic. Jour. 6:43, 44. 111871.) a 1435. On the Double Markings of Tricerativ The Lens. 1:100. J pl. 1872. a 1436. Notes on Frustulia saxonica as a Test ¢ High Power Definitions. The Lens. I: 233. 7 pl. 1872. 4 1437. The Use of Amphipleura pellucida as a ae t- object for High Powers. Am. Nat. 6: 193-197. pl. 4. Ap187 (Mo. Mic. Jour. 8:204, 205. 101872.) a. 1438. -———. On the Spurious Lines of Diatoms. Am. Nat 10:60. Jal876.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 15:144. 1Mrl1876.) — a 2 An account given at the Washington Philosophical Society. . al 1439. Observations suggested by the Study c Amphipleura pellucida mounted in Canada Balsam by N light and Sunlight with Various Objectives. Am. Jour. and Pop. Sci. 4: 141-149. JlAgS1879. 8 1440. F N of Diatoms. Jour. N. V. Mie. Soc. 1:123. 1885. 1 1441. Woodworth, W. M. The Apical Cell of Fucus. Ann of Bot. 1:203-211. pl. 10. F1888.— (Jour. Roy. Mic. 8 Soc 1888: 621, 622. Ag 1888.) = The species especially investigated was F. furcatus of the New ing land coast. 2 8 1442. Woolman, L. On the Discovery of Diatoms in Arte sian Wells at Atlantic City, N. J. Mic. Bull. 5: 41. 1888. 1443. Artesian Wells. Atlantic City, N. J. 0 Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. St. Geol. 1889. 89-99. 1889. A discussion of the diatomaceous layers. “a 1444. An Outcrop of Fossil Diatoms near Shik N. J. Mic. Bull. 12. 1890. 5 1445. Communications containing Data with re to Diatomaceous Clays, etc., J. G. Smock’s Artesian and o Bored Wells. Geol. Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. St. Geol. 259-283. 1891. iy . 3 Ra 2 "BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 411 * 1416 Weelhas, L. Geology of Artesian Wells at Atlantic City, N. J. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1890: 132-147. (25 Mr1890.) 1891. 1890444. (30D 1890.) 1891. In first paper 149 species of diatoms were named, determined by C. H. 2 Kain and E. A. Schultze. A description of the various diatoma- ae ceous layers is furnished. The second article gives a list of Navi- a culas accidentally omitted in the former paper. 1447. Marine and Fresh- water Diatoms and Sponge- spicules from the Delaware River Clays of Philadelphia. Proc. Phil. Acad. 1890: 189-191. (17Je1890.) 1891. 1448. A Review of Artesian Well Horizons in Southern New Jersey. Geol. Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. St. Geol. 1891. 223-232. 7 pl. 1892. 1449. Artesian Wells in Southern New Jersey. Geol. Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. St. Geol. 1892. 275-811. 1893. 1450. Artesian Wells and Water Horizons in South- ern New Jersey, with Economical, Geological and Palaeontolo- gical Notes. Geol. Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. St. Geol. 1893. 389-421. 1894. 1 Wormley, T. 6. See Sullivant, W. S. and Wormley, 1. 6. 1451. Wyman, J. Observations and Experiments on Living Organisms in Heated Water. Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. II. 44: 152- 169. $1867. _ Describes a number of hot springs with observations upon the organ- 1 isms inhabiting them. 1452. Fresh water Algae and Diatomaceae of Minne- apolis, Minn. Am. Mo. Mic. Jour. 4:18. Ja1883. Names 21 species. 1453. W., W. A. Mounts of Fresh-water Algae.— (The Microscope 5:12. Jal885.) — Zeller, G. Algae brasilienses circa Rio de Janeiro a . A. Glaziou collectae. Warming's Symbolae ad Flor. Bras. Oe . Cognos. 22: 426-432. Vidensk. Medd. Nat. (1876.) 376-77. 4 de Anonymous. Sargasso Weeds. Phil. Mag. and Ann. 21830—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 20:181. J11831.) 1486 Where to search for Diatoms. The Lens. 1: 1 106. 1872. 1457. The Diatom Hoax. (Pleurosigma angulatum.) (Am. Nat. 6: 121. F 1872.) ae aaa a 3 7 * 5 r . 8 Ly * * th * * * \e $3 2 * — . | * n er — h n 1 * A n r ö * 5 5 a 8 ia = * 412 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . 1458. Anonymous. Diatoms as Food for Plants wit of Forms of Diatoms found in Col. Kunkel's Straw. Am. Jou Mic. 1:105. 1876. 1459. Typical Specimens of the Diatomaceae, Jour. Mic. 2:7, 8. Jal877. 1460. The Fossil Earth of Richmond, U. 8. J Am. Nat. D1877.—(Mo. Mic. Jour. 17: 100, 171877.) 4 1461. A Roundabout Walk to Church. Am. Jou . Mic. 3: 157, 158. J11878. Nine species of algae reported from Chicago. 1462. Volvox globator.—(Am. Jour. Mic. 4: 20, 2 Jal879. 1463. The Effect on Health of certain Algae in # Mystic Water Supply. Ist Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. He Ith a Lunacy and Charity. 1879. Supp. Cont. Rept. and Fang n Pub. Health. 155-160. 1880. 4 1464. Catalogue of the Cryptogams of the Vicinity of Buffalo. Bull. Buff. Soc. Nat. Sci. 1883. a 1465. St. Thomas, Virgin Islands. The Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger. Narrative. 11: (Algae 127.) 1888. Calcareous sea-weeds described. 29 1466. Gigantic Sea-weeds.—(The Microscope. 6:259. N1886. 2 A specimen more than 1.500 feet long brought to Montevideo from ti 10 Atlantic near the Equator. 1467. The Diatom, Heliopelta. Jour. N. V. Soc. 3:24. Ap1887. Description of a specimen contained in the Society’s cabinet. 1468. . Algae Growing on Animals.—(Am. Nat. 22:1028. N1888.)—(The Microscope. 9:60. F1889.) 3 . Three species of algae stated to have been recently found on the N : of sloths. ue 2 1469. Examinations of Water Supplies and Ri 1 rs Report on Water Supply and Sewerage. Part I. Mass. 8 Bd. Health. 1-383. 1890. 4 1470. A Classification of the Drinking Waters the State. Report on Water Supply and Sewerage. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 679-716. (Algae. 686.) 1890. 1471. Examinations of Water Supplies and Ri 22nd Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 67-331. 1891. — 413 ‘Tilden: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 1472. Anonymous. Examinations of Water Supplies and i Rivers: Water Supplies. 28rd Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 61-252. 1892. 4 The algal forms are classified under three groups: Diatomaceae, 1 Cyanophyceae and Algae. 1473. Examinations of Water Supplies and Rivers. ' 28rd Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 255-836. 1892. _ Algae are listed. 1474. „ Water Supply and Sewerage. Advice to Cities and Towns. 24th Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 1-71. 1893. Note on Anabaena. 1478. Examination of Water Supplies. 25th Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 93-337. 1894. The algae found in each locality listed. 1476. Examination of Rivers. 25th Ann. Rep. Mass. St. Bd. Health. 341-366. 1894. Algae listed from the different localities. 1477. Additious to the Reported Flora of Nebraska made during 1893. Univ. of Neb. Botanical Survey of Nebraska. Conducted by the Botanical Seminar. III. Report for 1893. 5-20. 18Je1894. Lincoln, Nebraska. ADDENDA. 1478. Ardissone, F. Le Alghe cosmopolite. Rendiconti del Instito (Reale) Lombardo di scienze e lettere II. 27: Fasc. 19. 1894. 1479. Aruott, G. A. W. What are Marine Diatoms? Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 7: 170-178. 1859. x One of Ehrenberg’s species from Oregon alluded to. 1480. Bermuda Tripoli. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 254. 1859. Notes upon its history. See Hooker, W. J. aud Arnott, G. A. W. 1481. Bailey, J. W. Microscopical Examination of Deep oundings from the Atlantic Ocean. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 89-91. 1855. 482. Barber, C. 4. Nematophycus storriei, nov. sp. Ann. Bot. 6:329-338. pl. 19, 20. (14Mr 1892.) D1892. 1483. Barker, . Petalonema alatum, Berkeley, from the alls of Niagara, exhibited.—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 7:561. 1877.) Dublin Microscopical Club, Mar. 15, 1877. 414 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. = Sa 1484. Boergesen, T. Desmidieae brasiliae: Symbolae 8 Fl. Bras. Centr. cognosc. ed. E. Warming particula xxxiv. Vid. * Medd. Nat. For. 920-958. (24-583.) pl. 2-0. 1800. iW Bory de St. Vincent, J. B. G. M. See B * A. and Bory de St. Vincent, J. B. G. M. 1 4 1485. Briggs, S. A. Rhizosolenia eriensis H. L. Smith 7 The Lens. Jal872.—(Grevillea. 1:14. J11872.) . & 1486. Brightwell, T. On the genus Triceratium, 5 Descriptions and Figures of the Species. Quart. Jour. Mie Sci. 1:245-252. pl. 4. (Je) 1853. 1 1487. On the Filamentous, Long-horned Diator n. aceae, with a Description of Two New Species. Quart. Jour Mic. Sci. 4: 105-109. pl. 7. 1856. : Br Chaetoceros peruvianum from Callao, Peru, is described as new. Bari. 1488. ———. Further Observations on the Genus oF atium, with Descriptions and Figures of New Species. Qt Jour. Mic. Sci. 4: 272-276. pl. 17. 1856. — Material from Barbadoes earth. Other American localities. “a > 1489. Remarks on the Genus Rhizosolenia of me Ehrenberg. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 6:93-95. pl. 6. 1858. 5 1490. Further Observations on the Genera Trice ‘ — a tum and Chaetoceros. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 6:158-155. 1880 ; 1491. ———. On some of the Rarer or Undescribed Species a of Diatomaceae. Part I. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 7: 179-181. . . 9. 1859. Part II. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8: 93-96. pl. 4, 6. 2 . Several American localities. 5 ae 1492. On the Rarer and Undescribed Species ae of Diatomaceae. Errata et Corrigenda. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sei. 8:139. 1860. N N * 1493. Brongniart, A. Exposition Chronologique des Pe ri . odes de Vegetation et des Flores Diverses qui se sont succede la surface de la Terre. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. II: 285-338. 18 1494. Brongniart, A. and Bory de St. Vincent, J. B. 6.5 x. Botanique du Voyage autour du monde sur la Coquille e par Duperry. Cryptogames. 2: pl. 1-100. 1829. Paris. 1495. Dawson, W. The Genus Prototaxites. Geol. Sury ; Can. Fossil Plants. 16-20. 1871. a = 1496. De La Pylaie, A. J. M. Bernard Quelques observa 5 tions sur les productions de l’ile de Terre Neuve, et sur que Algues de la cote de France appartenant an genre Laminaire Ann. Sci. Nat. 4: 174-184. pl. 9. 1824. Bie 7 „ BIBLIOGRAPHY. OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 415 1497. elde, R. L. and Mirbel, C. F. Rapport sur la _ Flore des Malouines de M. D'Urville.—(Ann. Sci. Nat. 6: 469- 4 476. 1825.) Read before the Royal Academy of Sciences, Oct. 24, 1825. 1498. Du Petit-Thouars, A. Melanges de Botanique et de Voyages. Premier Receuil. 1811. Paris. Twenty-one species of algae collected at Tristan da Cunha. 1499. Edwards, A.M. Different Diatoms on the same Stipes. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 15:63, 64. 1875. 13500. Ehrenberg, C. G. Ueber die weitere Entwicklung der Kenntniss des Gruensandes als gruener Poly thalamien- Steinkerne, ueber braunrothe und corallrothe Steinkerne der Polythalamien Kreide in Nordamerika, und ueber den Meeres- grund aus 12900 Fuss tiese. Mb. Berl. Akad. 172. 8Mr1855. 7 1501. De la toba fitolitaria del valle de Toluca por el Senor Ehrenberg. Traduccion communicada por el Senor Doctor Burkart a Don Antonio del Castillo con encargo de corregirla para su publicacion en Mexico. La Naturaleza. ES: 118. (1 Lam.) 1874. q 1502. Forbes, 8. A. The Food of Fishes. Studies of the Food of Birds, Insects and Fishes, made at the Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History at Normal, Illinois. 18-65. NI880. 1503. On the Food of Young Fishes. Studies of the Food of Birds, Insects and Fishes, made at the Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History, at Normal, Illinois. 66-79. _ N1880. 1504. The Food of Illinois Fishes. III. St. Lab. Nat. Hist. The Natural History of Illinois. Bull. No. 2. 71-86. 1505. Gaudichaud, C. Rapport sur la Flore des iles Malouines.— (Ann. Sci. Nat. 5: 89-110. pl. 2-3. 1825.) Read before the Academy of Sciences, May 16. 1506. Greville, R. KA. Note on a Structure observed in n. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 7: 116, 117. 17. 1859. A specimen from Californian guano. 1507. On Plagiogramma. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 207-211. pl. 10. 1859. 4 Californian guano furnished specimens. 1508. On Campylodiscus, &c. Trans. Mic. Soc. 5 J. S. 8:29-32. pl. 7. 1860. Several new species from Jamaica. 4 > 416 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . 1509. Greville, R. K. A Monograph of the Genus Asterolan * pra, including Asteromphalus and Spatangidium. Trans. Mie. Soc. N. S. 8: 102-124. pl. 3, 4. and , I. 2. (14Mr.) 1860, Material obtained from a deposit in the United States. ys 1510. Descriptions of New and Rare L Series I. Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 9:39-45. (12Mr.) pl. 1861. Series II. N. S. 9:67-78. pl. C. (12 Je.) 1861. Series IIL I S. 973-77. pl. 9. (12 Je.) 1861. Series IV. N. S. 9: 79-87. pl. 10 (12 Je.) 1861. Series V. N. S. 10: 18-29. pl. 2. 3. (1101801. 1862. Series VI. N. S. 10: 89-98. pl. 9. 1862. Series VII. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 2231-236. pl. 70. 1862. Series VIII. Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 11:13-21. pl. J. 1863. Series IX. N. 8. * 1163-76. pl. J. . (13 My.) 1863. Series X. Quart. Jour. Mic, * Sci. N. S. 3: 227-237. pl. 9, 10. 1863. Series XI. N. S. 18:8 Ps) 14. pl. J. 2. 1864. Series XII. N. S. 12:81-86. (10F.) pl. 10, e 11. 1864. Series XIII. N. S. 12:87-94. pl. 12, 18. (IM) 1864. Series XIV. N. S. 13: 1-10. pl. J. 2. (9 N 1864.) 16 Series XV. N. S. 13: 24-34. pl. 3, 4. (8Mr.) 1865. 8 XVI. N. S. 13:43-75. pl. 3, 6. (10My.) 1865. Series 3 . y I. 1 N. S. 13: 97-105. pl. 8, 9. (14 Je.) 1865. Series XVIII. N. 8. ie 14:1-9. pl. 1,2. (8N1865.) 1866. Series XIX. N.S. 14: 7 1 Bs. 86. pl. 8,9. (14Mr.) 1866. Series XX. N. S. 14: 121-130, S&S pl. 11,12. (9My.) 1866. ce - =. Description of new species from Barbadoes deposit, slides of wh icl : a were supplied by Mr. J. T. Norman, and also material ob = from different localities in North and South America. a 1511. A Monograph of the Genus Auliscus. Mic. Soc. N. S. 11: 36-53. pl. 2, 3. (11Mr.) 1863. 1512. Hooker, W. J. and Arnott, G. A. W. The Bots of Captain Beechey’s Voyage; comprising an Account of tk 2 Plants collected by Messrs. Lay and Collie, and other Officers of the Expedition, during the Voyage to the Pacific and Behring’s Strait, performed in his Majesty’s ship Blossor m. under the command of Captain F. W. Beechey, R. N., F. R., A. S., in the Years 1825, 26, 27 and 28. 1-485. (Algae: She 77. 78. 110. 134. 163-165. 406-409.) 1841. Two species of algae from Chili; 2 from Society Islands; 1 from 8 wich Islands; 1 from Kotzebue’s Sound; 24 from California; 25 2 id 5 tional from California. e Tilden: "BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 417 1513. Kitton, F. New Diatoms from Panama. (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N.S. 15:99. 1875.) Given before the Microscopical Society, Oct. 7, 1874. 1514. Kjellman, F. R. Ueber die Beziehungen der Flora F des Bering-Meeres zu der des Ochotskischen Meeres. Bot. 7 Sekt. Naturvet. Studentsallsk. i Upsala, 2501888. (Bot. Cen- tralb. 41: 167-170. 198, 199. 1890.) 1515. Lamouroux, C. V. F. Memoire sur la Geographie dies plantes marines.— (Ann. Sci. Nat. 7:60. 1826.) 1 Read before the Royal Academy of Sciences, Feb. 21, 1825. 1516. Lapham, I. A. Plants of Wisconsin. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. Second Meeting. Agi849, 19-59. 1850. 5 Chara vulgaris Willd. reported. 1517. Leidy, J. A Flora and Fauna within Living Animals. Smiths. Cont. Knowl. 5?:1-54. pl. 7-70. (D1851.) 1853. Mirbel, C. F. See Desfontaines, R. L. and Mirbel, C. F. 1518. Montagne, J. F. C. Crytogamae brasilienses seu Plantae cellulares quas in itinere per Brasiliam a celeb. Au- _ guste de Saint-Hilaire collectas recensuit observationibusque nonnullis illustravit. Ann. Sci. Nat. II. 12:42-55. 1839. L.ists 46 species of algae. 1519. Description de plusieurs nouvelles especes de Cryptogames decouvertes par M. Gaudichaud dans |’Amer- _ ique meridionale. Ann. Sci. Nat. II. 2:73-79. 1834. rr Describes Ceramium dasytrichum. 18520. Centurie de Plantes cellulaires exotiques nouvelles. Ann. Sci. Nat. II. 8345-370. 1887. * Twenty-six species of algae described from American localities. 1521. Seconde centurie de Plantes cellulaires exot- _ iques nouvelles. Decades 1 et II. Ann. Sci. Nat. IL 13:193- 207. 1840. 8 Nine species of algae described. 1522. Sixieme Centurie de Plantes cellulaires nou- velles, tant indigenes qu’exotiques. Decades III. a VI. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. 11:33-66. 1849. 4 Algae nos. 53-60. habitat: Labrador, United States, Yucatan, ete. 1523. Huitieme Centurie de Plantes cellulaires nouvelles. tant indigenes qu’exotiques, Decades IV et V. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 7: 134-153. 1857. Decades IX et X. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 12:167-192. 1859. South American localities. 1524. Neuvieme Centurie de Plantes cellulaires nouvelles tant indigenes qu’exotiques. Decades Let II. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 14:167-185. 1860. 3 e ye e N oe A * r n Sb, filer may Sede ps ya 3 7 Fo . 1 7 7 * 1 N in hal Ae E. * 7 * W a a ee 2 eels Pie ass A n 1 ö * 418 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES __ We » Sao 1525. Norman, G. On some Undeseribed Species of Diatot aceae, Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 9:5-9. pl. 2. (14N1860.) 18€ Aulacodiscus sollittianus from Nottingham, Maryland, deserit new. 1526. O’Meara, E. On Stauroneis phyllodes (E Kuetz., Rabenh.—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 17: 102. Exhibited before the Dublin Microscopical Club, July 13, 1876. 1527. Undescribed Species of Oraspedodi —(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 17:106. 1877.) Example from fossil earth from Delaware and Maryland shown t the Dublin Microscopical Club, Sept. 21, 1876. 9 1528. Brightwellia johnsoni exhibited. — (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 17: 304, 1877.) Before the Dublin Microscopical Club, Feb. 15, 1877. 1529. Characters of Oraspedodiscus ele —(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 17:465. 1877.) Specimen from Maryland deposit shown before the Dublin Mie scopical Club, May 24, 1877. 1530. Navicula mossiana. n. s., O'M., exhibite —(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 18:346. 1848.) Dredged from Discovery Bay, 81° 43’ N. Dublin Microscopical C Jan. 17, 1878. 1531. phia balaena, which appears rather to be a Triceratit (Quart. Jour. Mic Sei. N. S. 18: 349. 1878.) ae Shown before Dublin Microscopical Club, Feb. 27, 1878. 1 1532. Docidium nodosum, American example exhibited.— (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 18: 350. 1878.) Before the Dublin Microscopical Club, March 21, 1878. > 1533. Palmer, J. L. Colour of the Sea. Quart. Jour. lie. Sci. N. S. 8: 178, 179. 1868. a) 1534. Roper, F. C. S. On the Genus Biddulphia and its Affinities. Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 7:1-24. 1859. * American localities. 1535. On Triceratium arcticum. Trans. Mic. S N. S. 8:55-58. if. 1860. Specimens from Vancouver's Island. 1536. Rylands, T. G. On the Markings of Diatomace Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8:25-28. 1860. 2 Remarks concerning Dr. Greville’s Article on Diatomaceae in Cali- fornian Guano.” Some Arctic Diatoms, amongst which Bade l ots unt A Y OF AMERICAN ALGAE. 419 9 2 1537. Seymour, A. B. Herbarium Indexes for all the 3 ane. Masa. — (Bot. Centralb. 53: 144. 1893.) 1538. Sollitt, J. D. On the Measurement of the Striae of x PDiatoms. Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 8:48-51. 1860. Criticisms of the observations of W. S. Sullivant and T. G. Wormley. 18539. Suhr, J. N. von. Beitrage Zur Algen-Kunde Flora. 19: 337-350. 14 Je1836.— (Ann. Sci. Nat. II. 7171-176. 1837.) ; American localities, 1540. Wallich, G. C. On the Silicious Organisms found in the Digestive Cavities of the Salpae, and their Relation to the Flint Nodules of the Chalk Formation. Trans. Mic. Soc. N. S. 8 86-55. pl. 2. (14D1859.) 1860. Fe Remarks upon the Triceratium semicirculare of Mr. Brightwell obtained from the Bermuda deposit. 13541. Webber, H. J. On the Antheridia of Lomentaria. | Ann. of Bot. 5:226, 227. J. 2,3. Ap1891, A study at Woods Holl, Massachusetts of materia! collected in Vine- > yard Sound. 4 1542. Webster, W. H. B. Account of the Natural Produc- tions of Staten Land and Cape Horn. Edinb. Jour. Sci. 1:26 31. Jal830.—(Am. Jour. Sci. Arts. 18:188-190. 1830.) 3 States that the sea-weeds about Staten Land are very large and con- 1 tain iodine, while those of the Shetland Isles are extremely meagre a in amount and variety. 1543. West, T. Remarks on some Diatomaceae, new or _ imperfectly described, and a new Desmid. Trans. Mic. Soe. N. S. 8: 147-153. pl. 7. 1860. 5 American localities. 1544. Wolle, F. Turner's New Desmids of the United States.“ — (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 13: 56-60. Ap1886.) 4 Reviews Mr. Turner’s paper in the Journal of the Royal Microscopical! Society, 1885. 1 ers. 1 EXSICCATAE. 1. Allen, T. F. Characeae Americanae exsiccatae. Fascicle I-IV. No. 1—. 1880—. New York. 2. Areschoug, J. E. Phyceae extra-europeae exsicc Fascicle I-III. No. 1-90. 1854-1856. Upsala, Sweden. 8. Collins, F. S., Holden, I. and Setehell, W. A. theca Boreali-Americana. A collection of Dried Specimens o the Algae of North America. Fascicle I. No. 1-50. F189 Fascicle II. No. 50-100. Mri895. Malden, Mass. me 4. Farlow, W. G., Anderson, C. L. and Eaton, D. C. Alga Exsiccatae Americae Borealis curantibus. Fascicle I- V. N. 1-230. 1877-1889. Boston, Mass. 5. Hauck, F. and Richter, F. Phycotheca univer is, Sammlung getrockneter Algen simmtlicher Ordnungen un aller Gebiete. Fascicle LV. No. 1-250. 1885-1889. Leipz! Specimens from California, Massachusetts, New Jersey and e American localities. 6. Rabenhorst, L. Die Algen Europas. Dec. 1-257. 1878. Dresden, Germany. 5 _ Contains collections made by Francis Wolle. 7. Sintenis, P. Plantae Portoricenses. (1884-87.) Six species of Characeae. 8. Smith, H. L. Species Diatomacearum Typicae St 1874—. Geneva, New York. 9. Tilden, Josephine E. American Algae. Century I No. 1-100. D1894. Minneapolis, Minn. Algae from Minnesota. a 10. Wittrock V. B. and Nordstedt, C. F.0. Algae A 9 Dulcis Exsiccatae Praecipue Scandinavicae, Quas ae Marinis Chlorophyllaceis et Phycochromaceis Distribu Fascicle 1-25. No. 1-1200. 1877-1893. Stockholm, — Specimens from Greenland, United States, West Indies, Braz Uruguay and Argentine. CORRECTIONS. 108. ———. Add—(Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 2: 288-290. 1854. 393, 94. 1855.) 110. ——. Add Quart. Jour. Mie. Sci. 3:91, 92. 1855.) 7 3 115. 1850.) Add — (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. 4: 302, 303. Duncan. See Nelson, R. S. and Duncan, ——. Add (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 12:71. —— For Hitcheock, C. H. read Hiteheock, R. 669. ———. For Hitchcock, C. H. read Hitchcock, R. 686. For Hitchcock, C. H. read Hitchcock, R. 774. Add (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 14101. 1874. Read before the Royal Microscopical Society, June 4, 1873. 7 sy „T. G. See Williston, S. W., Smith, H. E. and “Sar Lee, T. G. a 1174. Add (Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci. N. S. 13:357- ie 366. 1873.) 2 Reprinted with some corrections from the Lens, Jau,, 1873. 2 A XXIV. ON THE GENUS CYPRIPEDIUM L. WITH REFERENCE TO MINNESOTA SPECIES. HENRIETTA G. Fox. \ Orchidaceae. Diandrae—Cypripedinae. 1 CYPRIPEDIUM Linn. Flowers zygomorphic, simple, subtended by a bract; calyx 8 parted, inferior sepals often united; corolla 3 parted, lateral petals usually patent; third petal, large, inflated, saccate, diff- ering in color from the paired petals; sterile stamen 1, mem- branous, partially closing orifice of lip; fertile stamens 2, in- trorse, attached to fleshy, deflexed column; ovary long, inferior. Cypripedium L. Sp. Pl. 951. 1753. Calceolus ADANS. Fam. 2: 70. 1763. Criosanthes RAFIN. Journ. Phys. 89: 102. 1819. Cordula RAFIN. Fl. Tellur. 4: 46. 1836. Menephora RAFIN. Fl. Tellur. 4: 46. 1836. Sacodon RAFIN. I. c. 45. 1836. Stimegas RAFIN. I. c. 1836. Corisanthes STEUD. Nom. Ed. 2: 1: 474. 1840. Hypodema Reicus. Nom. 56. 1841. * Cypripedilum ASCHERSON. Fl. Brandenb. 1864. * - Perennial herbs ranging from one to seven decimeters in height. Rhizomes, cylindrical, bearing old scars or cicatrices nd fibrous roots, often persisting for years. Leaves, from two to several in number, alternate, sheathing the plant axes; veins parallel, frequently prominent, leading to plication in species of temperate regions. Peduncle, erect, terete, sur- mounted by an ovate to ovate lanceolate bract. Flowers resu- pinate by reason of the torsion of the ovary, terminal; when more than one, seldom three to seven in number, arranged in a simple raceme. Perianth, persistent, six-parted, the three livisions of the outer whorl appearing as unpaired sepals, the nner whorl forming the petals. Sepals three, the upper mem- (i) Hooker and Jackson. Index Kew. 1: 701. 1893. (2) Rolfe, R. A. Nat. Sei. 3: 327. 1893, N 2 3 ee fe 424 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 13 ber usually erect, the inferior sepals frequently, prety of imperfectly united into one. Petals three in number, the paired — members being free, narrower or broader than the sepals and ö generally extended. Labellum or third petal, inflated saccate, or egg-shaped, slightly pendulous, somewhat different in color from the other petals, with an auricular orifice formed by the J inflection of the edges of the labellum on its horizontal surface. i Sterile stamen or staminodium, leaflike, membranous, or trulli- form, often modelled, partially closing the orifice of the ub: the single representative of the outer whorl of stamens as com- pared with the Liliaceae, answers to the fertile stamen of other Orchids. Column short, thick, terete, recurved, the geniculate { portion shielded by the staminodium, which is attached to the column. Stigma, moist, roughish, leathery, broad, more or less distinctly tri-lobed, parallel to the base of the labellum through the curvature of the column. Two fertile stamens, oblique, anterior members of the inner whorl, adnate to the column, one on each side. Anthers, bilocular, on short, strongly introrse filaments, upon dehiscence exposing the pollen in vis cid masses. Ovary, long, inferior, arcuate, unilocular with f parietal placentae. Ovules, numerous, anatropous, minute, fusiform, without endosperm, the testa or seed - coat thin and membranous. ‘4 Representatives are found in the forest areas, swamps, and bogs and occasionally on high, dry ground. | The rhizomes of two American species, Cypripedium hirsu- tum Mill, and Cypripedium parviflorum Salisb are probably collected by the ‘‘cracker class and by Indians, since they collect many of the other roots which are used for medicinal purposes. f The rhizomes vary in length from ten to fifty contimetaall are brittle, light brown in color and show a short, white frac- ture when broken.“ The odor is faint and heavy, while the rhizome of Cypripedium arietinum R. Br., an American and Asiatic form, is said to afford a musky smell. ae The principal constituents found in the rhizomes of the two first named species are oil, resin and tannin. The drug, when manufactured in the form of powder, infusion or extract + somewhat sweetish, bitter and pungent, temporarily exciting and increases the vital action of the patient. It is also used to allay spasms. § (3) Mausch, J. M. Man. Org. Mat. Med. 124. 1885. (4) Baldwin. Orchids of N. E. Fig. S. 1884. (5) Wright. J. S. Guide to Org. Drugs of U. S. Pharmacop. 27. 1890. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 425 The drug is little used and in 1885, the exportations were in amounts ranging from fifty to one hundred pounds.* While statistics are not easily obtainable, the conclusion is drawn by competent authority that the yearly outputs of the drug are in the hundreds of pounds rather than in the thousands or tons.“ The leaves of the tropical species are usually thick and ap- parently veinless, the plicate leaved forms being more charac- teristic of the temperate regions. With the plication of the boreal representatives, is associated a pubescence more or less marked. In the young plant, as of Cypripedium calceolus L., this downy or villous growth does not appear until the first foliage leaf unfolds. The number of these foliage leaves is as variable as that of the sheathing leaves, generally five or six and seldom nine in number.“ In the eastern division of North America, two species, Cy- pripedium reginae Walt. (C. spectabile Sw.) and Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. (C. pubescens Willd.) are notably leafy and villous. The former, at certain stages in its growth, especially when with newly formed seed pods” is found to create a sensation and an effect very similar to cases of poisoning with Rhus vernix Linn, and other plants placed in the same list with the poison ivy. This phenomenon does not appear in the case of every individual handling the specimens but reports of such instances are numerous enough to warrant placing Cypri- pedium reginae Walt. in the list of plants poisonous to some persons. Since the hairs of Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. are not found to vary much from those of Cypripedium regine Walt., and since both are invested by a filamentous fungus, the conclu- sion may easily be drawn, strengthened, indeed, by a few re- ports, that Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. possesses like proper- ties. The poisonous effects may be due to the piercing of the skin by the pointed hair, and the consequent action of the acid contents, or to the surface irritation by the contents of the glandular tip, or itis remotely possible that they are due in some way to the presence of the fungus.”"* Whatever may be ttne ultimate cause, the result is not always uniform, and some individuals are found to be sensitive to contact with the plants while others are not at all affected. (6) Heber, L. A. Rept. Am. Pharm. Ass. 33: 494. 1886. (7) Irmisch, Thilo. Beiträge zur Biolog. und Morph. Orchid. 35. 1853. (8) Mac Dougal, D. T. Minn. Bot. Stud. 1: 35. 1894. (9) MacDougal, D. T. Loc. cit. 36. Pl. III. (10) MacDougal, D. T. Loc. cit. 36. 1894, 426 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Puccinia Cypri pedii’' Arth. and Holw., one of the rusts, af- fects Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. The record of the period of persistence of individual flowers in this genus is not extensive. A noteworthy instance is that of Cypripedium villosum Lindl. “? (Burma) in which they were observed to last for ten days. This duration of flowering © is probably closely related to the peculiar method of pollination — which is characteristic of this genus. Mueller, Darwin'* and Gray are among the more recent ob- servers on this point. One of the earliest workers to discover that insects were necessary to remove the pollen masses in Or- chids was Christian Konrad Sprengel, who published a valuable work in 1793. Robert Brown also believed that insects were the principal agents assisting in this process.“! According to Darwin, many Orchids seem to be adapted for insects’ visits, especially such insects as possess a long proboscis.'* While this was true of other Orchids, Cypripedium seemed to be the exception, and A. Gray was instrumental in pointing out this circumstance;'* he offered the suggestion that the action of flies would better explain the mode of pollination. In the case of Cypripedium, no nectar was in the drops adhering to the hairs lining the base of the labellum, and the self-evident con- clusion remained that the flowers were not visited for the sake of the nectar. The flowers, indeed, are attractive in color, and insects of various kinds have been found within the labellum of some of the species. Sir John Lubbock’s investigations relating to the color motive of insects, has added interest in this case. He tested bees for their appreciation of color by placing honey on glass over colored paper. Beginning with the single color blue, other colors were introduced and transposed. Yellow and blue were interchanged, and the bees were found to leave untouched ~ the honey over the yellow color and would fiy to the blue. Flowers of yellow or fleshy color were most attractive to flies.” 18 He also found that bee flowers have generally bright, clear colors, while fly flowers are usually reddish or yellowish brown... (11) Farlow and Seymour. Host. Index N. Am. Fungi, 1-3: 135. 1888, 1891. (12) Kerner and Oliver. Nat. Hist. Pl. 253. 1893. (13) Darwin, C. Fertilization of Orchids. Ed. 2. 1877. (14) Darwin C. Loc. cit. 3. (15) Darwin, C. Am. Jour. Sci. 34: 428, 1862. (16) A. Gray. Papers 1862-1873. (17) Lubbock J. Flowers, Fruits and Leaves. 13. 1894. (18) Lubbock, J. Loc. cit. 14. (19) Lubbock J. Lee. cit. 43. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 427 The question as to the insects being instrumental in the pol- lination of this genus seems yet to be an open one by reason of the noted observation of Darwin and H. Muller. The latter studied Cypripedium calceolus L. American forms closely related to this, Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. and Cypripedium acaule Ait. were studied by Darwin and Gray. Of the insects observed by Muller, five species of bees were found to frequent the flowers of C. calceolus L. and aid in pol- lination. He writes that Andrewa fulvierus K., A. albicans R., A. atriceps R., and A. pratensis,?° with others were attracted by the flower and flew into the lip through the orifice, landing upon the hairs lining the floor of the labellum. Then they sought to escape by climbing up the sides, and finally ended by creeping beneath the stigma and escaping through one of the two small lateral openings at the base of the lip. By this act- ion one shoulder of the bee was smeared with the sticky pollen from the anther above. When the bee visits another flower, it again creeps under the stigma and is relieved of some of the pollen by the papillae borne on the stigma. Other methods of pollination are quite probable for other species, and Miller quotes Delpino as believing that Cypripedium caudatum Lindl. is pollinated by the aid of snails. That pollination is effected solely by insects is doubted and although Orchids seem to be adapted only for cross-pollination, yet the suggestion is made by Morong that some may be capable of close-pollination.** This has been deemed worthy of serious consideration in spite of the fact that Darwin found that some Orchids when pollinated with their own pollen seemed to be poisoned rather than bene- fitted,?* The same thing is quoted from F. Muller by Sir John _ Lubbock. 2 Two factors seem to offer an explanation for the comparative rarity of Orchids, first, their dependence upon external aid, and second, the period of time elapsing between pollination and fecundation.*5 Indeed, some instances have been found in Which a period of one to four weeks has intervened between pollination and fecundation.** The attendant remarkably slow development, therefore, seems to be a check upon the unlimited - multiplication of individuals. (20) Maller. H. Fertilization of Flowers, 530. 1883. (21) Müller, H. Loc. cit. 540. (22) Morong, T. Contrib. Herb. Columb. Coll. 1: 281. 1892. (23) Darwin, O. Fertiliz. of Orchids. Ed. 2: 289. 1877. (24) Lubbock, J. Flowers, Fruits and Leaves. 3: 1894. (25) Guignard. Annales Sci. Nat. Bot. VII. 4. 202. (26) Hildebrand, F. Bot. Zeit. 44: 331. 1863. 2 =a — (i ia [ee ee 428 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Various characteristics have been used as the basis of iden- tification of species; the leaves, their venation, their number, the arrangement of the parts of the perianth, the colors, the form of the essential organs and the divisions of the capsule have all been considered. The seeds of native Orchids have been examined and the forms found to possess distinguishing features in each species. A number of the American Orchids, including Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. have been studied by Curtiss. By reason of the facts observed, he arrives at the conclusion ‘‘that the ovules would by no means be an uncertain element in the determination of species.“ It is quite probable that they would be less variable than other parts of the plants, and holding, as they do, the germ of the plant, variations and relationships might be more accurately determined. The embryo of Cypripedium calceolus L.** has been found to be of an inverted conical shape, the upper surface being green- ish or brownish. As the embryo develops, two delicate roots appear at one side near the insertion of the first leaves which closely sheath the germ axis. These primary roots are followed by others which perform the usual function. A perennial axis is formed in the first vegetative period, and an axillary bud is developed. This is the bud which in the following year sends up the flowering axis of the plant. Many propositions regarding the origin and relationship of the genus have been brought forward, and the arrangement of the parts has been worked out along this line. Although Rob- ert Brown? was the first to propose the theory of the fifteen parts of the flower, other workers have more thoroughly sys- tematized the matter. Darwin has given adiagrammatic repre- sentation of the parts; the sepals forming the outer whorl of the perianth, the petals, the inner whorl, the staminodium, the only remaining part of the outer whorl of stamens, the two — fertile stamens in the inner whorl, and the three styles and stigmas united into one. Mastersse has worked upon the floral conformation of Cy- pripedium, and has traced the nerves from the stalk of the flower upward through the ovary and into the column.” The arrangement was seen to be as follows: Six vascular bundles were found in one ring in the peduncle. Following these up- ward, three were found to correspond to dorsal sutures of the (27) Curtiss, C. C. Contrib. Herb. Columb. Coll. 1:281. 1892. (28) Irmisch. T. Beiträge zür Biolog. ind Morph. Orchid. 35. 1853. (29) Darwin. Fertilization of Orchids. 236: 1877. (30) Masters, M. T. Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 22: 402. 1827. — W ils 0 an ‘en tis =. ee . ˙· a www Nn ee a 2 h . 7 ‘ 1 . a ee. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 429 carpels and three to ventral or placenta bearing margins. Al- though these bundles are at first in one ring, they form two rings, one within the other at the level of the emergence of the perianth into segments.” By microscopic sections, it was proved, that the stigmatic lobe, composed of thick walled poly- gonal cells, many with nuclei and nucleoli, far from being sin- gle, is certainly twofold, and perhaps in some species, three- fold.” The two or three styles thus seem to be united at their uppermost ends in a median plane. The column of Cypripe- dium is therefore made up of three stamens and three styles.” Of the three stamens, the upper median belongs to the outer row and is developed as the staminode; the other two lateral ones are fertile and belong to the inner row. Of the three ovaries and styles, all remain, but of the three stigmas, the up- per or median one, becomes abortive, while the two lateral ones are joined into one compound lobe.” Plate XXIII illustrating Cypripedium reginae Walt. shows a distinctly trilobed stigma which was more marked in this spe- cies than in any of the other species examined. Monstrosities in this genus have been studied with a view to obtain some light on the question of relationship. Oligom- ery does not offer so great a field, since reduction of the parts _ of the flower is hardly as frequent as cases of pleomery. An interesting teratological specimen of Cypripedium reginae *! Walt. was found by Bastin. The plant had two flowers on a single stem, one flower was normal, the other presented curi- ous features. The sepals were distinct, there were three nearly equal petals, all shaped like the sepals, no slipper of course, three anthers, a three lobed stigma and a straight ovary. In- stead of a triangular fleshy body hitherto supposed to represent a third stamen, three stamens were found. This seemed to show a tendency to revert to an ancestral form in which two or three stamens was a typical feature. The theoretical antiquity of the genus is apparently based upon the presence of the paired anthers. Darwin quotes Lind- ley as thinking that between the Cypripedinae and the other tribes of the Orchidaceae, a multitude of forms must have been swept away.*? To him, the proposition seemed tenable that these plants are the record of a former and more simple state N among the Orchids,” and adduces a number of reasons. He ; bases the argument upon the idea that the rostellum among (31) Bastin, E. S. Bot. Gaz. 6: 269. 1881. (32) Darwin, C. Fertilization of Orchids, 226: 1871. 1 ihe ae 480 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Orchids is an indication of higher development and is a part not found in the Cypripedinae, The essential point of differ- — ence is found in the column which is composed of three conflu- ent stigmas all the other parts being to all purposes similar to those of the other Orchids. The same conclusion is reached by S. LeM. Moore, Who thinks the diandrous type an earlier one than the monan- drous.“ 34 f Rolfe has exhaustively considered the subject in connection with the Apostasiae.** He believes that the Diandrae and Monandrae evidently represent the two great diverging — branches along which the order has evolved, the more ancest- ral Diandrae having developed but two marked tribes while the highly specialized Monandrae have multiplied enormously and given rise to several well marked tribes and a large number of genera, all connected by a strong thread of affinity. The genus Selenipedium has retained the ovarian characters of the more ancestral Apostasiae while Cypripedium has a unilocular ovary — with parietal placentation as in the Monandrae. This cannot of course be held to constitute any affinity with the Mon- andrae, as Cypripedium clearly represents the culminating © point of development of the Diandrae. The trilocular ovary — obviously represents the ancestral condition of the order, and the development of the unilocular ovary with parietal placen- tation in each of the two diverging branches may possibly be an adaptation for saving room to accommodate the enormous number of seeds produced.” In discussing the arrangement of the parts of the perianth, he makes Cypripedium arietinum R. Br. the solitary exception in the genus, having all of the sepals F free to the base.“ q An additional point bearing on this question, is the singu- lar fact, that though Cypripedium is one of the few tropical genera of Orchids that inhabit both the eastern and western hemispheres, it has not hitherto been found in Africa or Mada- gascar, countries which have on plausible grounds been held to have been the most recently peopled with plants.“ “ 1 Yet species have been reported from regions near the same J isotherm. C. Rothschildianum Reichb. is one of these forms, being listed from the Malay peninsula and from New Guinea,: (33) Moore, S. LeM. Bot. Jahresb. 72: 6. 1883. (34) Rolfe, R. A. Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 25: 227. 1890. (35) Rolfe, R. A. Loc. cit. 230. (36) Hooker, J. D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 116: 7102. 1890. (37) Hooker, J. D. Loc. cit, 7102. 1890. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 431 with many other species. Other forms have also been found in British India** and the islands of the East Indies“ which ex- hibit numerous remarkable characters. They are also found on the Phillipine Islands“ though none have yet been found in Australia.“! None have been reported from the Hawaiian Islands*? nor from the West Indies and the Bahamas.“ The genus is represented in Russia,“ Germany“ and other portions of Europe, ““ temperate and tropical Asia, especially among the Himalayas,“ in the East Indies and in the western continent. There the greatest concentration of Orchids!“ is from southern Mexico to Columbia” but this is not co-incident with the area of distribution for the genus Cypripedium since one species only is found ranging from Guatemala to Pan- ama. ““ A few species are reported from British Guiana“ and from Peru, si but North America is the home of the plicate leaved Cypripedia which are confined to the temperate regions. The estimate as to the number of species varies with the writer upon the subject, fifty-seven being listed in the Kew. In- dex, ss while Pfitzer notes twenty species in all, mostly reported as found in northern zones.“ Another list of forty species is accepted by Bentham and Hooker, s while Durand cites the following: ‘‘Cypripedium L. (Criosanthes Raf.) sp. deser. ultra 50, Eur., Asia, temp. and trop., Am. bor., Mexic., Guatemala.“ Of this indefinite number, thirteen, which form a large pro- portion in comparison with those distributed over the remain- ing area, are found in North America. Two species, 7 Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. and Cypripedium parviflorum Salisb. are found to cross the continent from east (38) Stiles, W. A. Scrib. Mag. 15: 190, 1894. (39) Reichenbach. Bot. Jahresb. 8: 814. 1883. (40) Rolfe, R. A. Trans, Linn. Soc. Bot. 21: 301. 1886. (41) Hooker, J. D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 116: 7102. 1890. (42) Hillebrand. W. F. Fl. Hawaii. Is. 1888. - (48) Grisebach, A. H. R. Fl. W. Ind. Is. 1864. (44) Ledebour. Fl. Rossica. 4: 86. 1853. (45) Waldgebiet, D. Botan. Jahresb. S2: 414. 1883. (46) De Puydt. Botan. Jahresb. 82: 815. 1883. (47) Reichenbach. Bot. Jahresb. 82: 514. 1883. _ (48) Hemsley, W. B. Biolog. Cent. Am. 4:271. 1888. _ (4) Hemsley, W. B. Loc. cit. 5. (850) Hooker, J. D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 117 :7178. 1891. 51) Watson. Geol. Surv. Cal. Bot. 2:38, 1880. ee Hooker and Jackson. Index Kew. 1:701. 1808. (4) Pfitzer. Engler and Prantl. Nat. Pflanz. 2: 6. 682. 1889. * (55) Bentham and Hooker. Gen. Pl. 3:634. 1883. (58) Durand, T. Index Gener. Phanerog. 404. 1888. 1 (57) See Plate XXI. 482 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 n to west. A third, Cypripedium acaule Ait., seems to be able to exist under various thermal conditions since it is found near the Arctic circle and extending southward appears in regions but a few degrees north of the tropic of Cancer. Seven are found east of the twentieth meridian, the area of greatest con- centration apparently finding its western limit in Minnesota. while the remaining species appear most prominently on the western coast. Five have a general range there, between the fortieth and fiftieth parallels and extend eastward through Mon tana. Another species is found in Alaska and one of the west- ern forms ranges from New Mexico and Texas down to Panama. Such an arrangement is best explained when itis remem- bered that these plants are essentially forest dwellers. The areas may then be considered similar to the forest areas as di- vided by Sargent. By this writer, the continent is separated into two regions, the Atlantic and the Pacific. ‘‘Both regions are more or less dissimilar, but united at the north by a broad belt of sub-arctic forests extending across the continent.“ The trans continental belt of Cypripedium is not so wide as the forest belt but extends a few degrees north of the fiftieth par allel. The peninsular tract formed by Cypripedium acaule Ait in reaching almost to the limits of the forest areas is the most pronounced departure from the general distribution of the American species. On the south, the two main divisions are united by a narrow strip of the flora peculiar to northern Mexico, here extending northward into the United States. Typical North American species, peculiar to the forests of the Atlantic or of the Pacific mingle upon the Black Hills of Da- kota, and upon the Guadalupe and other mountains of western Texas, and the outposts between the Atlantic and Pacific re- gions.” The two species forming, the trans-continental belt and C y- pripedium candidum Muhl., one of the species of the Atlantic — region appear upon the plains of North America. This por- tion of the continent is considered to be debatable ground where a. continuous struggle between forest and plain takes place.” There is a sufficient precipitation of moisture to cause, under normal conditions, a growth of forest but so nicely bal- anced is the struggle that any interference quickly turns the scale.” The following conclusion is then drawn, that it is not improbable that the forests of the Atlantic region once extend- ed continuously as far west at least, as the ninety-fifth meridian ** (58) Sargent, C. S. Rept. Forests N. Am. Census Rept. 10:4. 1884. F 4 ' 4 a 1 a Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 433 although circumstantial evidence for such a theory does not exist. Exception is taken to this statement especially in regard to Nebraska.“ Webber affirms that the appearance of the flora and the other constituents of the region, warrant the conclu- sion that ‘‘the eastern border of the treeless region at one time extended farther westward, possibly into and through Nebraska to the Rocky Mountains.” The first record of a Cypripedium was that of Cypripedium calceolus L. which was found in a wood called the Helkes in Lancashire near the border of Yorkshire (Parkinson Theatr., 218. 1640.) The same species is figured as Calceolus by Tour- nefort.*! Since that time such a number of species have been discov- ered, and their characteristics so studied as to permit of their systematic arrangement. Aside from the emendation of the generic name which is not adopted, the following arrangement of the genus is as given by Pfitzer.°* . DIANDRAE CYPRIPEDINAE. Cypripedium. A. Arietina. B. Foliosa. C. Diphylla. The American forms may be distributed in these series ac- cording to their more salient features, while the most nearly related members are placed together. A. Arietina.—C. arietinum R. Br. B. Foliosa. — C. reginae WALT. C. candidum Mun. C. montanum Dove. OC. Diphylla.—C. acaule Arr. C. guttatum Sw. C. fasciculatum WATS. C. pusillum RoLFe. _ The single species of the Atlantic region, not found in Min- nesota is Cypripedium pusillum Rolfe, es reported from Florida. (59) Webber. Cat. Fl. Neb. 38. 1890. (60) Clarke. W. A. Journ. Bot. Brit, and For. 33: 17. 1895. (61) Tournf. Instit. Rei Herbariae 2: Tab. 249. 1700. (62) Pfitzer. Engler and Prantl. Nat. Pflanz. 26:81. 1889. (63) Clarke, J. A. Contrib. Nat. Herb. 1: 7245. 1893. 434 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. It is not ranked as a distinct species by Hooker who has given it the following name, Cypripedium fasciculatum Kell., var. pusillum Hook. He even questions the existence of this spe- cies in Florida, although acknowledging it as an American plant. The leaves of C. pusillum Rolfe, are thicker than — of C. fasciculatum Wats.,** the nerves are obscure, and the flowers are fragrant. The other parts are not clearly distin- N guished. Both species are members of the two-leaved section q but C. fasciculatum Wats.,bears more than one flower. This was discovered in Washington in 1880, by W. N. Suksdorff,** and has since been found in California. Another closely related 1 species is Cypripedium guttatum Sw.,** which ranges through — Alaska to Fort Franklin.“ It is one of the few species found in more than one continent, since it is a native of Alaska, north- ern Canada, Europe““ and northern Asia.“ Cypripedium irapeanum is the representative which binds the two main divisions on the south and, as C. molle Lindl., is given a range from New Mexico to Santa Maria 7° and as far down as Panama. In general appearance it approaches most nearly to Cypripedium reginae Walt., and is frequently found with three or four flowers.*? 5 Cypripedium californicum Dougl. “s is a more slender form than the previous one. From three to twelve flowers are pro- duced in a simple raceme,7* all emerging from the axils of leafy bracts. The sepals are pale, brownish yellow and the lip is obovoid globose, white with a little pink on the inverted edges and obscurely spotted with brown. The staminodium is sub-sessile, broader than long, uniformly obcordate and rather longer than the small quadrate stigma.7* It is found in California, and Oregon, and probably in the adjoining states. Cypripedium passerinum Rich. is single flowered and ac- cording to Hooker much resembles C. californicum Dougl. The principal point of difference is found in the oblong staminodium of C. passerinum Rich. This species was collected, fifty years (64) Watson. S. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 380. 1882. (65) Hooker, J.D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 119: 7275. 1893. (66) Rothrock, J. D. Fl. Alaska, 456. 1867. (67) Macoun J. Cat. Can. Pl. 2: 20. 1888. (68) Ledebour. Fl. Rossica, 4: 86. 1853. (69) De Puydt. Botan. Jahresb. S: 814. 1883. (70) Bentham, G. Plant. Hartweg, 72. 1839. (71) Hemsley, W. B. Biolog. Cent. Am. 245. 1888. (72) Watson, S. Proc. Ani. Acad. 18: 159. 1882. (73) Gray. A. Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 389. 1867. (74) Watson. S. Geol. Surv. Cal. Bot. 2: 484. 1880. (75) Hooker, J. D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 117: 7188. 1891. (76) Hooker, J. D. Loc. eit. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 435 ago, by Sir John Richardson who found it in a district 58° N. latitude.?? It has been found in California, Oregon and in Canada.“ A white sweet-scented relative of Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. of the Atlantic region is found in Cypripedium montanum Dougl.“ of the Pacific division. C. occidentale Wats. is a synonym for this species.“ It was first found in 1830 by Douglas*! and has since been reported from Idaho, Montana, Washington, *! Oregon, Canada, the western slopes of British Columbia and also from Vancouver's Island *? The remaining six species, C. reginae Walt., C. candidum Muhl., C hirsutum Mill., C. parviflorum Salisb., C. arietinum R. Br. and C. acaule Ait., are all found in Minnesota. As this state seems to be the western boundary for the species only found east of the sub humid plains and also has the three which are more liberally distributed on the continent, it is quite fitting that the Cypripedium flower should be named as the floral emblem of the state. This was done when a resolution brought before the legislature previous to the World’s Fair, was passed, in which the adoption of this flower for the state of Minnesota was authorized. The frontispiece in the Manual is a drawing of Cypripedium reginae Walt.** No particular species was designated in this action although general reference was made to the Lady’s Slipper or Moccasin Flower. Both terms are indiscriminately applied to any of the species, although, historically, the name _ Moccasin Flower would seem to indicate one of the yellow species. The first species known, C. calceolus L. a yellow form, was given the name of Lady's Slipper or Venus’ Shoe. Among the Germans, it is called the Frauen-schuh, while the French speak of it as the ‘‘Sabot de la Vierge or Soulier de Notre Dame. In parts of Pennsylvania, children call any species ‘‘ducks” because of the appearance of the flowers when partially filled with sand and then placed upon the water.“? Many of the species have distinctive common names, more or less appro- ' priate, but any and all are usually designated as Lady's Slippers. ; (77) Hall, E. Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 403. 1872. (78) Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2: 20. 1888. 1 (79) Loe. eit. (80) Hooker, J. D. Curt. Bot. Mag. 117: 7319. 1891. 61) Watson, S. Geol. Surv. Cal. Bot. 2: 484. 1880. (82) NMacoun, J. Cat. Can. Pl. 2: 20. 1888. (8s) Legislative Manual Minn. 606. 1893. (84) St. Hilaire. Expos. et Germ. des Pl. 1: 167. 1805. (85) Bergen, F. D. Bot. Gaz. 19:440. 1894, 4 2 2 436 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a Conspectus of Species of Cypripedium in Atlantic Region of North America. I. Leaves numerous. A. Sepals free. 4 ARIETINA. 4 Labellum conical. g 1 „0. reien Sonn II. Leaves numerous. B. Sepals united. 4 FOLIOSA. q Sepals ovate. Labellum large, pink. j Leaves with setulose marginal vein, 12 . . 0. regina Inferior sepals imperfectly united. Label- lum small, ovate,white, dull, sepals brownish, — Stigmatic area, quadrangular. Leaves crowd- ed, erect, with marginal vein, S. „„ mea ... C. eandidum Muhl. Inferior sepals united imperfectly. Label lum rough, dull yellow. Stigmatic area with j distinct border. Nodal areas strongly pube- scent, 4. % Tan C. hirsutum Mill. Superior sepals broadly ovate. Petals lan- ceolate, wavy, glossy, brown. Labellum bright yellow. Stigmatic area, ovate, con- cave. Fragrant, 4 8. 8 C. parviflorum Sun, III. Leaves tibo. C. sepals united. b DIPHYLLA. 1 Superior sepal inclined. Labellum bilobed f ruddy. Staminodium rhomboidal, 4 6. ieee enen C. acaule Ait. Cypripedium eristin R. BR. Flower small, sepals free to the base, labellum conical. Cryosanthes borealis RAF. Jour. Phys. 89:102. 1819. Arietinum americanum BECK. Bot. 352. 1833. C. arietinum R. BR. Ait. Hort. Kew. ed. 2. 5:222. 1813. 7 Nuttall. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 2:199. 1818; Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2:22 1880; Pursh. Fl. N. Am. Septen. 595. 1814; Dame and Collins. Fl. M’dsex Co. Mass. 104. 1888; Torrey, J. Fl. N. V. 2:286. 1843; Beal and Wheeler. Mich. Fl. 138. 1891; Bull. Me. Coll. Lab. 1893; Fernald. Port. Cat. Me. Pl. 64. 1892; Loudon, Hort. Brit. 373. 1830; Loddiges, C. Bot. Cal. Pl. 13:1240; Pl. 1240. 1827; Gray, A. Man. Bot. 510. 1890; Meehan, T. U.S. Fl. and Ferns, Ser. 11 2:25: Pl. 6. 1880; Upham, W. Minn. Phan. 142. 1884; MacMillan. Metasp. Minn. Val. 164. 1892. 2 r A slender perennial, slightly puberulent, which is usually about two and one-half dm. high. The rhizome of this species Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 437 has a musky odor. The stem is one and one-half dm. high, erect and occasionally somewhat twisted. The three or four leaves are seven to ten cm. long, obtusely ovate, scattered and tending to become glabrous. The peduncle is eight to ten cm. high, slender, ultimately hexagonal and minutely brown pube- scent, The ovate-lanceolate bract is four or five cm. long. The flower is small and dull in color. The three sepals are all free, one and one-half to two cm. long, linear to ovate-lanceolate for the superior member which is as wide as the other two would be if united, greenish brown in color and slightly longer than the lip. The paired petals resemble the sepals, in color and shape, but are somewhat longer. The small labellum is conical, blunt anteriorly, pinkish white in color with dull reddish veins. The anterior, horizontal portion of the lip is lighter in color and is covered with long, silky hairs. The ovate staminodium is one cm. long, with a membranous fold serving as a mid-rib. The bilocular anthers are closely attached to the deflexed column. The fruit capsule is brown, inflated and prominently ridged. . Cypripedium arietinum R. Br. is one of the rarest of the North American species. It is found in bloom in May and fre- quents swamps and wet forests. In North America, it ranges from Maine to Minnesota and between the fortieth and fiftieth parallels. In Minnesota it is reported from the central portion of the state to the Lake Superior region. Its area of distribu- tion seems to be more restricted than that of any of the other Atlantic species, since the Great Lake region is its home. The plants which most distinctly indicate an ancestral type are Cypripedium reginae Walt. with its tri-lobed stigma, and Cypripedium arietinum R. Br. having all the sepals free.** An- other interesting point is added when these species are found associated together in the provinces of China.*? C. arietinum R. Br. was introduced into England from Amer- ica in 1808 by Chandler and Buckingham®® and was for some- time known as Chandler's Cypripedium.” Later it was given its present name, because, when viewed in certain positions it suggested a ram’s head, hence the name, Ram's Head Cypri- pedium.” This species is rarely found in cultivation®® and was first discovered near Montreal.“ (86) Hemsley, W. B. Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 33: 206. 1892. (8%) Bot. Gaz. 9:286. 1886. (88) Ait. Hort. Kew. 5:222. 1813. (89) Watson, W. Orchids, Cult. and Manage. 518. 1890. (90) Baldwin. Orchids of N. E. Fig. S. 1884. 438 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. An unusual form of Cypripedium arietinum R. Br. was found near Mt. Pleasant, Mich. The flower “ was not fully ex- panded when found, but the parts were fully grown and soon unfolded. It was remarkable in having the side petals, which are linear and of a brownish color in the normal flower, trans- formed into saclike inflated bodies, closely resembling the lip, but differing from it in being smaller, with wider and rounder openings, and in not having the edges rolled in. The coloring of these side petals was like that of the lip, pinkish with lines of deep red. The tip of the lip was pushed in upon itself, un- til it was half inverted, partly filling the cavity of the liv. The lip was also flattened and broadened more than usual. The other floral organs were normal.” HERB: Taylor 1122, Glenwood, Minn. Cypripedium reginae WALT. Flower large, showy, pink. Sepals ovate. Leaves large, crowded. C. calceolus var. g. LUNN. Sp. Pl. 1346. 1762. C. album Ait. Hort. Kew. 3:303. 1789. O. spectabile Sw. Act. Holm. 250. 1800. Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2:20. 1888; Fl. Mt. Desert Is. Me. 153. 1894; Fern- ald. Portl. Cat. Me. Pl. 64. 1892; Torrey, J. Fl. N. V. 2:286. 1843; Gordimer and House, Fl. Renss Co. N. V. 1894; Geol. Surv. N. J. 2:236. 1889; Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. Fl. Wash. 22:13. 1881; Chapman, Fl. S. U. S. 464. 1887; Wood. Bot, and Flor. 326. 1874; Tracy. Fl. Miss. 1885; Gattinger. Tenn Fl. 84. 1887; Jones H. L. Phan. and Ferns, Licking Co. O. 82. 1892; Beal and Wheeler, Mich. Fl. 138. 1892; Bull. Chic. Acad. Sci. 2:113; Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. 9:648. 1893; Arthur Fl. Ia. 31. 1876; Brendel. Fl. Peoriana 60. 1887; Gray, Man. Bot. 511. 1890; Gray. A. How Pl. Behave, 31. 1872; Baldwin H. Orchids of N. E. Fig. 1. 1884; Loudon Hort. Brit. 373, Fig. 597. 1830; Hitchcock, A. S. Cat. Anthoph. and Pterid. Ia. St. Louis Acad. Sci. 5:518. 1891; Trans. Minn. State Hort. Soc. 112. 1875; Upham, W. Minn. Phan. 142. 1884; Mac Millan, C. Metasp. Minn. Val. 162. 1892; Gray, A, Man. Bot. 511. 1890. C. canadense MICHX. Fl. N. Am. 2:161. 1803. C. reginae WALT. Fl. Car. 222. 1788. A perennial, which is strongly pubescent throughout, gen- erally very stout and robust and is from three to seven dm. high. The rhizomes are very large, cylindrical and when of some age, show hollow cicatrices and bear fibrous roots. The stem is from two to six dm. high, erect and somewhat setulose. The crowded leaves vary in number from five to seven and are one and one-half to two and one-half dm. long and broadly — ovate lanceolate. The ten to thirteen prominent nerves of the (91) Davis, C. A. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. $:339. 1893. rr Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 439 leaves are strongly pubescent, the remaining portions being _ strigosely hairy to sub-glabrous, while the characteristic mar- _ ginal vein is strongly ciliate. The peduncle, nine to fifteen em. high is stout and somewhat costate. The erect bract is eight to ten cm. long, lanceolate to elliptico-lanceolate. The flowers, one or two, rarely three are large and showy. The _ sepals, three to four cm. long are greenish white, broadly ovate, pointed, the two lower sepals completely united, while the upper sepal is erect. The two lateral petals are white, narrower than the sepals, one-half as wide as long and patent. The labellum is four to five cm. long, slightly drooping, hori- zontally flattened, the margin of the orifice being deeply in- flected. The color is pinkish white to rose pink, with deep wine markings about the opening, shading into delicate veins toward the base, along the interior of which is a heavy, hairy ridge from the column round to the orifice. The sterile stam- en, two cm. long is broadly spatulate with a strong mid rib and spotted with brown. ‘The pollen of the fertile stamens is powdery.*? The column is but slightly declined, and the broad. fleshy stigma is often distinctiy tri-lobed. The ovary is large, four cm. long, one to one and one-half cm. in diameter, strongly ribbed, the ridges bearing glandular red-tipped hairs. _ Cypripedium reginae Walt. is found in peat-bogs and tama- rack swamps from Nova Scotia to Minnesota, on the northern line and in all the states east of the Mississippi River. Iowa is the only other state west of this boundary, at present, report- ing this form. It flowers in June and July. It is said to have been cultivated in England before 1731 by Ph. Miller.“ It is known as the White petal'd Lady's Slipper“ and as the Showy or Pink Lady's Slipper.” s The poisonous properties of this species are discussed by MacDougal®* and the fact brought out that on some individuals the result after handling is similar to that produced with 90ison ivy. _ Cypripedium reginae Walt. is remarkable in its embryonic levelopment®*? since the cellular structure shows no pro- embryo or suspensor. (92) Gray, A. How Plants Behave, 31. 1872. (98) Ait. Hort. Kew. 5: 220. 1812. 00.) Loc. cit. (9) Gray, A. Man. Bot. 511. 1890. (000) MacDougal, J. Minn. Bot. Studies, 1:32. 1894. () Van Tieghem, Ph. Traite de Botanique, 1:909. 1891. 440 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Cypripedium reginae Walt. is remarkable, also, by reason of its distribution. It is not only a native of North America but has been found in the western provinces of China““ in company with C. arietinum R. Br.“ This fact is of especial interest when the antiquity of the species of the genus is considered. Like many of the native Orchids, C. reginae Walt. has been found somewhat difficult to force. HERB: Holzinger, Winona Co.; Sandberg, Cannon Falls; Bal — lard, Zumbrota; Sheldon, Waseca Co.; Frost, Kandiyohi Co.; Sandberg, Hennepin Co.; Herrick, Minneapolis; Oestlund, Ram- sey Co.; Aiton, Nicollet Co-; Kassube, Minneapolis; Hammond, Lake City; Aiton, Lake Itasca; Taylor, Chisago Co.; Maite, Minnesota City. Cypripedium candidum Mun. Flower small, labellum dull white, ovate; leaves crowded. C. candidum Mun. Willd. Spec. 4:142. 1805. Geol. Surv. N. J. 2.236. 1889; Persoon, Synop. Plant. 2:525. 1807 Nuttall. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 2:199. 1818; Brendel. Fl. Peoriana 60. 1887; Mich. Fl. 138. 1892; Bull. Chic. Acad. Sci. 2:113; Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. 9:102. 1893; Lapham. Trans. Minn. State Hort. Soc. 112. 1875; MacMillan. sa Minn. Val. 164. 1892; Upham, W. Minn. Phan. 142. 1884; Arthur, J. C. Fl. la. 31. 1876; Bessey and Webber, Rept. Bot. Neb. 109. 1890; Wood, A. Bot. and Flor. E. of Miss. 386. 1874 Gray, A. Man. Bot. 510. 1890; Hitchcock, A. L. Bull. Ia. Agric. Coll. 50. 1887; Hitchcock, A. L. Anthoph. and Pterid. Ia. 519. 1891. 4 A small perennial, sparingly pubescent, two and one-half to three dm. high, single flowered and having a small rhizome with few fibrous rootlets. The three or four crowded, erect narrow, oblong lanceolate leaves are twelve to thirteen cm. long, prominently seven to nine nerved, and the under side is more setulose than the upper. The stem is slender, fifteen em. high, terete and well sheathed by the leaves. The ped seven cm. high, is slender and compressed slightly at the J of the green bract. The bract is frequently four to six em. long and one and one-half em. wide. The flower is small and not showy. The sepals are two or three cm. long, nz wly ovate lanceolate, greenish, the two inferior sepals incompletely united into one. The petals are lanceolate, equalling the leng tk 1 of the sepals, and longer than the labellum, greenish brown in color ‘and slightly wavy. The lip is an obovoid sac, with small horizontal orifice, leading to the interior which is (98) Rolfe, R. A. Nat. Sci. 3: 327. 1893. (99) Hemsley, W. B. Journ. Linn. Soc. 29: 300. 1893. (100) Paxton, Mag. Bot. 2: 1586. 1847. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 441 with long silky hairs, and is of a dull white color with delicate wine tinted veins ramifying from the base of the labellum for- ward. The staminodium is membranous, slightly carinate, modelled, and ovate lanceolate in form. The fertile stamens are closely attached to the column. The stigma is somewhat quadrangular, slightly roughened and not indented. Cypripedium candidum Muhl. is often found in bloom in May and June, in bogs and frequently on higher ground. Accord- ing to Meehan, C. candidum is the only one at home on the open prairies.“ 10 This species has been found ‘on the driest kind of a rocky hill % and is also found in open boggy places % in the state of Nebraska. By reason of the data at hand regarding its presence in the ‘‘sub-humid” region and its ability to exist under very different conditions of moisture the conclusion may easily be drawn that it is not strictly a bog plant. C. candidum ranges from New York and Pennsylvania west- ward to Nebraska, and from Canada to Illinois. It was first found in Pennsylvania™ although other author- ities date the discovery of this species from 1826. The name of the Small White Lady's Slipper” or White Frau- enschuh” is frequently given this form which seems to be closely related to Cypripedium reginae Walt. in general appear- ance. In 1876, Burgess’ reported the discovery of two forms of C. candidum Muhl. the larger of which seemed to be allied to C. reginae. This kinship can best be determined by exam- ination of the ovules and by a study of the embryological de- velopment. The floral conformation was studied and fifteen organs made out by Asa Gray in 1886, Hers: Leiberg, Blue Earth Co.; Payne, Appleton; Kassube, Minneapolis; Ramaley, F., Ramsey Co. (101) Meehan, T. U.S. Fl. and Ferns, 22:121. Pl. 30. 1880. (102) Holway, E. W. Bot. Gaz. 5:243, 1881. (103) Copeland. H. E. Bot. Gaz. 1:34. 1875. (104) Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 142. 1865. (105) Loudon, Hort. Brit. 373. 1830. (106) Ait. Hort. Kew. 5: 220. 1812. (107) Burgess, R. Bot. Gaz. 2: 115. 1877. (108) Gray, A. Am Journ. Sei. July. 1888. 442 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Cypripedium hirsutum MIL, ie Flower large, labellum rough, dull yellow, inferior sepals united. C. calceolus L. Sp. Pl. 951. 1753, in part. 1 C. caleeolus WALr. Fl. Car. 222. 1788. C. pubescens WiLLD. Sp. Pl. 4: 143. 1805. Persoon, Synop. Plant. 2: 525. 1807; Nuttall. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 221. 1818; Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2: 20. 1880; Bull. Me. Coll. Lab. 1893; Fern- ald. Port. Cat. Me. Pl. 64. 1892; Dame and Collins, Fl. M’dsex Co. Mass. 104. 1888; Torrey, Fl. N. V. 2.288. 1843; Geol. Surv. N. J. 2:236. 1889; Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. Fl. Wash. 223120. 1881; Vail, A.M. Contrib. Bot. Va. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 2:32. 1890; Small and Hel- ler. Fl. W. N. Car. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 3:2. 1892; Chapman, Fl. 8. U. S. 404. 1887; Wood. Bot. and Flor. 326. 1874; Tracy. Fl. Miss. 1888 Gattinger. Fl. Tenn. 84. 1887; Price, S. F. Warren Co. Ken. 1893; Jones. Cat. Phan. and Ferns, Lick Co. O. 82. 1892; Mich. Fl. 138. 1892; Bull. Chic. Acad. Sci. 2:113; Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci. 9: 648. 1893; Lap- ham, Trans. Minn. State Hort. Soc. 112. 1875; Upham, W. Minn. Phan. 142. 1884; MacMillan. Metasp. Minn. Val. 162. 1892; Arthur. Fl. Ia. 31. 1876; Eggert. Cat. Phan. and Vase. Crypt. St. Louis. 7. 1891; Brendel. Fl. Peoriana 60, 1887; Aughey, Sketches Phys. Geog. — and Geol. Neb. 82. 1880; Bessey and Webber, Rept. Grasses and For- age Pl. Neb. 109. 1889; Coulter. Rocky Mt. Fl. 344. 1885; Suksdorff. — Fl. Washingtonensis 12; Loudon, Hort. Brit. 373. 1830; Nichol. Iu. Dict. Gard. and Encycl. 1887; Meehan, T. U. S. Fl. and Ferns. Tab. 18. 1880; Hitchcock, A. S. Anthoph. and Pterid. St. Louis Acad. Sci. 4 Ser. 5:3:519. 1891; Gray, A. Man. Bot. 51i. 1890. 4 C. hirsutum MILL. Gard. Dict. Ed. 8:3. 1768. A stout perennial, prominently leafy, which is found from 7 two and one-half to three dm. high and has stout cylindrical rhizomes. The stem, which is seventeen cm. high, is large, pubescent, noticeably setulose at the nodes and slightly six- — angled. There are usually five, broadly ovate, acuminate leaves, one-half as wide as long and frequently measuring elev- 4 en em. in length and having seven or nine conspicuous nerves. — The peduncle is six or seven cm. high, glandular, glaucous, | with a slight torsion. The ovate bract is twice as long as ** The flower is large, showy and somewhat coarse in texture. The sepals are long lanceolate, greenish brown, veined oa 4 spotted, the inferior sepals being imperfectly united while the upper sepal is slightly inclined. The lateral petals are linear. lanceolate, wavy, colored like the sepals, not glossy and some- what longer than the third petal. The labellum is inflated, 7 very convex above while the pale, dull yellow surface is slight - 4 ly roughened. The oblong lanceolate staminodium is two em. long, yellow, flecked with ferruginous macules and is declined. The column is declined, while the thick, leathery, stigmatic © Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 443 surface is slightly indented and roughened with a distinct marginal area. The capsule is brownish with prominent edges and is four or five cm. long. The ovules are elongated, fusiform and have a very thin testa. Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. is found in bogs and woodlands from Nova Scotia to British Columbia and on the south and southwestern boundary has a range similar to that of C. parvi- florum Salisb. The rhizomes of this species are collected for use in the man- ufacture of Cypripedium extract. In the article cited it is char- acterized as a nerve stimulus,” Contact with the leaves of this species causes, in some per- sons, an irritation quite similar to the effect produced by Rhus _ toxicodendron, poison ivy, or Rhus vernix Linn. The excit- ing property may be due to the peculiar hairs which this form possesses or to the fungus which makes itself at home in the _ cells of the hairs. In either case the result is similar to the effect caused by C. reginae Walt. when taken at certain stages in its growth. C. hirsutum Mill. as a native of North America was intro- _ duced into England in 1790 by Sir Joseph Banks. It is fre- ' quently known as the Large Yellow Lady's Slipper,“ Whip- pPoorwill Shoe,” ‘‘Yellow Downy Lady's Slipper.”!” HERB: Sandberg, Red Wing; Sheldon Aitkin Co.; Sheldon, _ Waseca Co.; Sheldon, Crow Wing Co.; Kassube, Hennepin Co.; Ballard, Scott Co.; Ballard, Prior Lake; Taylor, Janesville; McElligott, McLeod Co.; Aiton, Nicollet Co.; Sandberg, Goodhue Oo.; Ballard, New Ulm; Sandberg, Hennepin Co.; Ramaley, Da- kota Co.; Sheldon, Lake McCasson. 3 Cypripedium parviflorum SALiss. Flower small, fragrant; labellum yellow, lateral petal, glossy brown. O. calceolus Micux. Fl. N. Am. 2:161. 1803. C. parviflorum SALiIsB. Trans. Linn. Soc. 1:77. t. 2. f. 2. 1791. Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2:20. 1888; Nuttall. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 2:199. 1818; Persoon. Synop. Plant. 2:525. 1807; Willden. Sp. Pl. 4:143. 1805; Bot. Gaz. 17. 1892; Bull. Me. Coll. Lab. 1893; Fernald. Port. Cat. Me. Pl. 64. 1892; Dame and Collins. Fl. M’dsex Co. Mass. 104. 1888; Torrey. Fl. N. V. 2:286. 1843; Gordimer, H. C. Fl. Renssa. Co. N. V. 1894; Geol. Surv. N. J. 2:236. 1889; Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. Fl. Wash. 22:120. 000 Nicholson. III. Dict. Gard. and Encycl. Hort. Gard. Kew. 1887. Li (110) MacDougal, D. T. Minn, Bot. Stud. 1:36. 1894. (111) Loudon’s Hortus Britanicus 373. 1830. (112) Meehan, T. U.S. Fl. and Ferns. 2: 2: 75. 1880. 444 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1881; Vail, A. Contrib. Bot. Va. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 2:32. 1890; Michx. Fl. N. Am. 2:161. 1803; Chapman. FI. S. U. S. 464. 1887; Tracy, Fl. of Miss. 1885; Wood, A. Bot. and Fl. E. of Miss. 326. 1874; Gat- tinger, A. Tenn. FI 84 1887; Jones, H. L. Cat. Phan. and Ferns. Lick Co. O. 82. 1892; Wright, A. A. Prelim. List. Fl. Pl. and Ferns. Lor- raine Co, O. 24. 1889; Bull. Chic. Acad. Sci. Cook Co. III., Lake Co. Ind. 2:113. ——; Rept. State Hort. Soc. Mich. 504. 1880; Beal and Wheeler. Mich. Fl. 138. 1892; Trans. Wis. Acad. 9:648. 1893; Brendel. Fr. Fl. Peoriana 60. 1887; Smith, B. B. Fl. Kan. 1892; Cragin. Bull. Wash. Coll. Lab. Kan. 2:57. 1889; Suksdorff. Fl. Wash. 12. ——: Mac- Millan. Metasp. Minn. Val. 163. 1892; Upham, W. Minn. Phanerog. 142. 1884; Dana. How to Know Wild Fl. 124. 1893; Baldwin, H. Orch- ids of N. E. 27. 1884. A perennial, which is minutely pubescent thronghout, slen- der and one and one-half to four dm. high. The rhizomes which are sometimes several cm. long, brown, and carrying tufts of fibrous rootlets, show a white fracture. The stem is one to three dm. high, erect, and rarely somewhat tortuous. The leaves, three to five in number, are eight to sixteen cm. long, lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate, sparingly pubescent to glabrous and have seven or nine prominent nerves. The slen- der, rugose peduncle is five to eleven cm. high, straight or slightly bent, and is sometimes compressed hexagonally. The bract is two and one-half to six cm. long, ovate-lanceolate and usually prominently five-nerved. The flower is small and is agreeably fragrant. The sepals, two to five cm. long, are purplish-brown in color and glossy while the two inferior sepals are anastomosed as shown by the dentate apex, and the upper, broadly, ovate-lanceolate sepal is erect. The lateral petals, two or five cm. long,colored like the sepals, are long, lanceolate, somewhat pendulous and inclined to twist. The basal inner surface of the sepals and paired petals carries long hyaline hairs. The labellum, two to four cm. long, is ovoid, slightly compressed laterally and in color is yellow with delicate brown veins. The sterile stamen is one cm. long, one-half as wide, ovoid, membranous and flecked with macules. The column is short, declined, ane the stigmatic area is ovate with a slight central depression. The capsule is three to five cm. long. brown, strongly ribbed and on the parietal placentae bears the f numerous, dull yellow ovules. 1 Cypripedium parviflorum Salisb. is found in bogs, low woods and on hilly ground, and generally flowering in May or June. It ranges across the continent from Newfoundland to the Rockies, in the Atlantic region and westward into the sub- humid region as far as Kansas and Colorado. i Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 445 As a native of North America, this species! was cultivated by Ph. Miller™ in 1759. It is the only one of the eastern species, known to be fragrant, and is generally known as the „Small- Flowered Lady's Slipper.” Hers: Ballard, Zumbrota; Taylor, Chisago Co.; Hammond, Lake City; Ballard, Carver Co.; Sheldon, Lake Calhoun; Hol- zinger, Winona Co.; Sandberg, Hennepin Co.; Kassube, Minne- apolis; Lugger, St. Anthony Park; Aiton, Nicollet Co. Cypripedium acaule Arr. Flower large; labellum bi-lobed, ruddy, leaves two. C. humile SaLisn. Trans. Linn. Soc. 1:79. t. 2. f. 3. 1791; Nuttall. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 2:199. 1818; Persoon, Synop. Plant. 2:525. 1807. C. acaule Arr. Hort. Kew. 3:30. 1789. Mac. Cat. Can. Pl. 2:20. 1888; Fowler, J. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. Arct, Fi. N. Br. 201, 1887; Bull. Me. Coll. Lab. 1893; Fl. Mt. Des. Is. Me. 153. 1894; Fernald, Port Cat. Me. Pl. 64. 1892; Torrey. Fl. N. Y. 2:286. 1843; Geol. Surv. N. J. 2:236. 1889; Vail, A. M. Bot. Va Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 2:32. 1890; Persoon. Synop. Plaut. 2:525. 1807; Small and Heller, Fl. N. C. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 3;2. 1792; Meehan, T. Fl. and Ferns. U. S. 2:2:64. Pl. 15. 1880; Baldwin. Orchids of N. E. Fig. 8. 1884; Goodale, G L. Am. Wild Fl. Pl. XI; Dana. How to Keow Wild Fl. 180. Pl. 64. 1893; Chapman. Fl. S. U. S. 464. 1887; Wood, Bot. and Flor. E. of Miss. 326. 1874; Gattinger A. Tenn. Fl. 84. 1887; Jones, H. L. Cat. Phan. and Ferns. O. 82. 1892. Bull Chic. Acad. Sci. 2:113; Mich. Fl. 138, 1892. Trans. Minn. State Hort. Soc. 112. 1875; Upham, W. Minn. Phan. 142. 1884; Gray, A Man. Bot. 511. 1890; MacMillan. Metasp. Minn. Val. 162. 1892. A perennial, two and one-half to four dm. high, slightly downy with two leaves sheathing the base of the peduncle. The roots are long and fibrous. The stem is very short, erect, and quite obscured by the leaves. The two leaves are obovate to oblanceolate, prominently three to five nerved and long, somewhat hirsute and thickened. The peduncle which lengthens greatly after anthesis, is from two to three and - one-half dm. high, cylindrical, erect, sometimes flexuous and covered with a glandular pubescence. The bract is from two to three dm. long. The flower is single and quite notice- able in color. The sepals are oblanceolate the two lower por- tions of the perianth being united into one. All are nearly one-half as long as the lip and brownish in color. The paired petals are lanceolate, three cm. long, patent and similar in Color to the sepals. The lip is obovoid, decumbent with an (113) Ait. Hort. Kew. 5:220. 1812. (114) Nicholson, III. Dict. Gard. and Encycl. Hort. Bot. Gard. Kew. 1887. 446 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. horizontal orifice, and is bilobed because of an anterior fissure forming another opening to the flower. In color itis a deep rose and is irregularly roughened. The staminodium is acu- tely rhomboidal with a prominent midrib. The two fertile stamens are large, adnate to the column and bilocular. The body of the deflexed column is slender with a thick, fleshy, concave, triangular stigmatic area which has minute projec- tions and is indistinctly three-parted. The ovary is inflated, arcuate and coarsely ribbed. Cypripedium acaule Ait. is found in bloom in May and June, in dry or wet ground under deciduous and evergreen trees from Newfoundland to Fort Franklin and through the entire Atlantic region. It is prominent among the North American species as being the only one nearly reaching the Arctic circle and extend- ing well toward the Tropic of Cancer. In Minnesota it is fre- quently found in tamarack swamps. According to Aiton'® Cypripedium acaule was introduced into England in 1786, from North America, by Sir William Hamilton. It was then known as the Two leaved Lady's Slipper.” It is also called the Stemless Lady's Slipper,” 18 Dwarf Umbil” 17 and ‘‘Noah’s Ark” "8. In New Hampshire it is called Valerian“ owing to an imaginary curative qual- ity. It is also given the name of Whip poor-will Shoe“ ™ and in Connecticut, the flowers are called Squirrel Shoes. Since C. acaule Ait. has an anterior entrance in addition to the usual orifice, Gray™! concluded that flies might have two means of ingress as well as the two lateral ones, each side of the column, for exit. When the insect does enter, it ultimately brushes under the stigma and upon emerging, carries with it some of the pollen from the stamens. This pollen Darwin ™ found to be immersed in a viscid fluid, which is capable of being drawn out into filaments. The leaves of the species are large, indeed, they are the largest of any of the Diphylla in America. The suggestion has been made, that the leaves are large because the plant is lowly and meets with less competition! than do the taller plants. (115) Ait. Hort. Kew. 5: 220. 1812. (116) Gray, A. Man. Bot. 6 ed. 510. 1892. (117) Meehan, T. U.S. Fl. and Ferns 2. 2:61. Pl. 15. 1880. (118) Torrey. J. Fl. N. Y. 2: 286. 1843. (119) Bergen, F. D. Bot. Gaz. 19:440. 1894. (120) Bergen, F. D. Loc. cit. (121) Gray, A. How Plants Behave. 31. 1872. (122) Darwin, C. Fertilization of Orchids. 226. 1877. (123) Allen, G. Nature. Mch. 1883. F wanne Fox; SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 447 A more reasonable argument would be that the leaves are large because its favorite localities are shady and usually well supplied with moisture. Some of the American species of Cypripedium are used for forcing but C. acaule Ait. % is found to be a difficult plant to handle although its habitat! has been well studied. HERB: Sheldon, Lake Calhoun; Taylor, Glenwood; Sandberg. Hennepin Co, Aiton, Hennepin Co., Taylor, Chisago Co., Oest- lund, Detroit, Sheldon, Aitkin Co., Sandberg, Center City. The following gentlemen, Professor Conway MacMillan, Mr, E. P. Sheldon, Mr. John S. Wright, Mr. V. K. Chestnut and Mr. O. W. Oestlund, have kindly assisted me in the work on this article and I wish to extend to them my sincere thanks (124) Meehan, T. U.S. Fl. and Ferns. 2:2: 64. 1880. (125) Watson. W. Orchids, Cult. and Manage, 518. 1890. 448 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Genetic connection of American Cypripedia, Cypripedium L. Fox: SPECIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 449 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Plate XXI. Map of North America, showing distribution of the genus Oyp- ripedium. Plate XXII. 3 n Br. General aspect. Arrangement of essential parts. Ovate staminodium. Quadrangular stigma. Bilocular anther. Ovary with distinct ridges. Basa! portion of plant, rhizome and fibrous rootlets. Plate XXIII. Cypripedium reginae WALT. Leaves and inflorescence. Obovate staminodium. Lateral view of column and anther. Distinctly trilobed stigma and pair of anthers. Anther. Large angular capsule. Rhizome with cicatrices and rootlets. Plate XXIV. Cypripedium candidum Mun. a. Foliar and floral appearance. b. Closely united staminodium, column, and anther. e. Ovate lanceolate staminodium. d. Quadrangular stigma. e. Cylindrical rhizome. Plate XXV. 2 hirsutum MILL. Aérial portion of plant. Horizontal staminodium and reflexed stigmatic area. Ovate-lanceolate staminodium. Slightly concave stigma with distinct margin. Dorsal view of column and extrorse stamens. Magnified view of anther. Capsule. Sheathing leaves and dark colored rhizome. Plate XX VI. Cypripedium parviflorum SALIsB. Flower and foliage. Lateral view of deflexed staminodium and column. Ovate-lanceolate staminodium. Geniculate column attached to ovary. Long obovate stigma. Small capsule. Rhizome showing numerous scars. Plate XXVII. Cypripedium acaule AIT. General appearance of plant. Strongly deflexed column. Acutely rhomboidal staminodium. Triangular stigma with hoiry projections. Lateral view of anther. Magnified view of anther. Indistinctly ridged ovary. Fibrous rootlets of young plant. Seas oes S Legege N g 8 83 9 8 g oe XXV. POISONOUS INFLUENCE OF VARIOUS SPE- CIES OF CYPRIPEDIUM., D. T. MACDOUGAL. In a brief note published in a previous number of this bulletin (Part I. p. 32. 1894.) the writer detailed the results of some observations tending to show that the leaves and stems of adult plants of Cypripedium spectabile and C. pubescens exert a pois- onous influence on the human skin. The experiments from which this conclusion was derived were performed in the open air, in the localities in which the plants grew. Although no specimens of Rhus or other poisonous plant were known to occur within a mile of the scene of the experiments, it was determined that they should be repeated under circumstances in which every possible source of error should be eliminated. — In order to accomplish this, a number of root-clumps of C. spectabile, C. pubescens and C. parviflorum were procured from a reliable dealer and placed in the plant-houseun der such con- ditions that leafy stems could be obtained during a period from February 1, to May 10, 1894. During the earlier part of this time the temperature of the outside air was such as to preclude any interference from plants growing in a state of nature, and the plant house contained no known poisonous plants. Careful tests were made with C. spectabile on nine persons, six of whom were poisoned in a degree corresponding to the manner of application of the plants to the skin. Asimilar percentage of the students in the department were reported to be susceptible — to the action of various species of Rhus. Tests with the stems and leaves of C. pubescens gave about the same results as CO. spectabile. Although these tests were a severe drain on the enthusiasm of the subjects they were repeated with C. parvi- — florum, which also exhibited a dermatitic action. These tests were also repeated in April, 1895, and the poisonous influence of the three species named may be considered as established — beyond all doubt. Specimens of the pointed and glandular hairs, which are found in abundance over the entire plant, and were de- scribed in the previous note, were taken from the plant and touched separately to the skin. It was shown that the irritant — action was due to the secretion of the glandular hairs only. If the development of the glandular hairs is followed it will be r F ²˙Ou5¹j.‚..¹ͤͤtl! ⅛ ù⁰ d ̃ ² ; . ůmũnm — em ̃²ůæiÄ̃ ̃ L! ̃vlwLßT ;dmꝛͤsd̃ ⁵ ͤwr MacDougal; POISONOUS INFLUENCE OF CYPRIPEDIUM. 451 found that the secretion begins to accumulate in the distal end of the cell shortly before it reaches maturity, and filters through the wall forming a reservoir between the wall and the outer cuticular layer. As the amount of the secretion increases, since the cuticular layer is capable of only a slight distension, the wall is pushed backward into the cell-cavity, finally the glandular cell is in the form of a double walled cup with the protoplasm occupying the space between the parallel walls, and the secretion filling the bowl of the cup, and covered by the arched cuticle. In the advanced stages the cuticle is easily torn and it may be found ruptured with the secretion escaping in the form of an an irregular mass. On account of the extremely small quantity of the secretion its exact chemical nature could not be ascertained. It was found to be soluble in alcohol, and gave the reactions of an oily substance. This is of especial interest in view of the recent researches of Pfafl and Orr, which have demonstrated that the poisonous action of Rhus is due to an oil, cardol.* It was found further that the irritant action of the plants on the skin increased with the development of the plant, and reached a maximum effect during the formation of the seed capsules. This corresponds with the activity of the glandular cells and the amount of secretion present. While this poison- ous property of the plant serves as a partial protection for the vegetative organs, yet it is in all probability a device primarily for the security of the reproductive bodies. It is to be noted in this connection that the glandular secretions do not form the sole means of protection of plants of this genus. It has been noted by Stahl,’ Mobius? and others* that the peripheral layers over the entire body of plants of this group are fur- nished with a large number of cells containing raphides, which serve as a more or less effective protection against the ravages of animals. *Science. New. Ser. 1:119, 1895. 1. Stahl. Pflanzen-und Schnecken. p. 91. 1888. 2. Moebius. Ueber den anatomischen Bau den Orch deenblitter und dessen Bedeutung fuer das System dieser Familie. 1887. 38. Frank. Ueber die anatomische Bedeutung und die Entstehung der vegeta- Diullscher Schleim. Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot. 5:161. 1807. K Hilgers. Ueber das Auftreten der Krystalle von oxalsaure Kalk im Parenchyma elniger Monocotylen. Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot. 6:28. 1867. Meyer. Ueber die Knollen der einheimischen Orchideen. Arch. d. Pharm. 224: 81. 1888. Schimper. Ueber Kalkoxalatbildung in den Laubblätter. Bot. Ztg. 65, 81, 67, 113 1129, 145. 1888. XXVI. TREE TEMPERATURES. Recorded by Roy W. SQUIRES. During a period lasting from January 15, to June 3, 1894, Mr. Squires made continuous observations on the temperature | of a trunk of the Box-elder (Acer negundo) and the surround- — ing air. Owing to the press of other duties he has been unable to prepare the results for publication, and the detailed record is presented below with a scanty comment wholly incommen- surate with the importance of the work. The data obtained were desirable as testing the current con- clusions concerning the influence of the different factors in the determination of the relative temperatures of massive organs and the air, as well as the changes in the absolute temperature of the trunk itself. The period of observation included the season of long con- tinued cold, the spring season, and the early part of the sum- mer when the thermometer had reached nearly its maximum limit. The locality is in 45° north latitude, and lies about equi- distant from the January isotherms of 0°C. and -18°C. Rec- ords were made three times daily during the entire period, except in the few instances when the temperature fell below the range of the instruments used. The tree upon which the observations were made is a pistillate specimen about twenty years old. The trunk and its branches reach a height of ten meters. The trunk at breast height is 28cm. in diameter, and at a distance of 2.5 meters from the ground is divided into two main branches. The bark is dark brown in color and only slightly roughened. The soil in which the tree is fixed is a gla- cial sand through which run thin layers of clay and shale, and is underlaid at some depth with limestone. The tree stands midway between two dwelling houses, 14 meters apart north and south of it; it is thus sheltered from the extreme violence of storms while it receives the entire daily course of the sun. The temperature of the air was read from an ordinary naked — Ss. te 1 r Squires: TREE TEMPERATURES. 453 bulb mercurial thermometer hung within a few meters of the trunk. This instrument was sheltered from the direct rays of the sun except for two or three hours in the middle of the after- noon. In order to obtain the temperature of the tree a cavity lcm. in diameter and Sem. in depth was bored into the trunk at breast height, on the north side. The inner end of the cavity was slightly higher to prevent accumulation of liquid either from precipitation or sap. In this cavity was inserted the bulb of a mercurial thermometer designed for the purpose. The bulb of this thermometer was cylindrical in shape, 2.3cm. long and .7cm. in diameter. The tube was 32cm. in length and was bent at right angles at a distance of gem. from the bulb. The long arm of the tube was graduated from 10 C. to 100°C. The entire length of the mercurial tube was enclosed in a sheathing tube fused to the upper end of the bulb and sealed at its upper end. The portion of the sheathing tube around the short arm of the mercury tube was lcm. and that around the long arm was zem. in diameter. By this arrangement the entire mercury col- umn was shielded from outside variations and the bulb alone was in direct contact with the wood of the tree. As astill further protection from precipitation and variations of the air, a tight wooden box with a glass front was fastened over the thermom- eter to the trunk, by means of rubber cloth and tar in such manner as to be water tight.” The records were made at 6 to 7 A. M., 12 to 1 P. u., and 6 to 7 P. M., and are given in this order opposite each date in the following tables: 454 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Date.] Air. Tree. [pe Air. 15 100. sel 19 4.85% 25 — 5 — 1.5 2 — 3120 1 16 1.5 — 5 23 22 — 5 — 8. 25 — 5 21 1. 17 3 10. 5.5 — 5 19. 2 - 52 |-17. 18 |-10. — 6 22. „„ ed Te ee 5 23 |. 19 — 9. |-3 Average Temperature of Air, Tree. At 6-7a.m. 10.84 9.37 At 12-1 P. M. 6.6 8.9 At 6-7 P. . 9.2. J For entire day 8.88 8.57 Squires: TREE TEMPERATURES. TABLE I.—TEMPERATURE OF AIR AND TREE FOR FEBRUARY, 1891 Date] Air. | Tree. Date. Air. ave, ate Air. | Tree. Date. Air. | Tree. 1 |-18.2°¢|—18.°c|| 8 -4.1°cl-2.5°eI 15 idee -14 e 22 —11.°c|—11.°c — 6.7 13.1 24 — 24 — 7.5 10. — 7. 104 13.5 10. — 2 — 8 —13. — 82 14. — 0. 2E 75 C1020 E 26 — 1.16 - 97 102 23 106 |-16. 0 |-67 22 —1. 4 |-5 — 6.5 |- 3.1 — 3. —1. 0 1. —18. 118 3 1.2 123 10 12 3. u - 4 1 24 108 18. — 0. 12. — 6.2 |- 63 — 5.4 — 1.5 — 5 |-12 22 |-14 u |-13. “13. — 63 10 |- 75 4-18. |-20. 11 |-22 20. 18 18. 13 || 25 122 102 8. 16. 14. |-18. —11.3 .. 15 — 5. — 7.5 - 7.5 —13. 14.4 ~17.2 27 | -~4 2. 5 12 |-10. 12 C % 12 10 |-25 - 28 . 4 1. 12 — 80 11.3 172 |-16.1 & — 3 — 27 |- 27 10. 12. 24. 19.7 — 3 5b 6 — 9.6 |-5. 13 13. |-11.5 || 20 1 — 21 5 1. 4 — 35 - 95 : 1. 3 — 1. 2. — 9.5 11.1 . 7-7. Es. 4 12 10. 21 21. - 20. 28 — 43 5 2 4 — 5. | 8 — 9.1 |-15. 15 5 — 2. 1 10.5 — 7. — 9. —9. 12 — 5 At 6-7 A. u. At 12-1 P. . At 6-7 P.M. For entire day 11.93 4.35 : Average Temperature of Air, Tree. 10.46 7.55 456 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. TABLE III.—TeMPERaTURE OF AIR AND TREE FOR MARCH, 1804, Date. Air | Tree. Date.] Air. | Tree. Date. Air. | Tree. Date Alx. 1 | 1.5%|- Sees 9 - 4% 050 17 | 8.6°c| bo 25 1 105 |- 5 12. | 48 2 16 - 3 12 — 5 3. 41 18. 201 —12 2 2 3810 22 3 |38 47 18. | 26 16 12. 0 10. | 6 4. | 12 — 7. 41 5 — 111 4 3. | 8 — 85 3 3. E 5/1] 1] 0 |i | 2] 4 [E n. 0 67| 1 é ice — 5 10.2 | 10.2 2| 4 Nig a gs — 2 412 10 12 1.2 % 3] 3 fete 15. 11 10s 4. 8 2 0 10. 11 32 7.6 || 4. | 37 —8. 5 25 6. 13 22 45 21 3 [42 5 15. 7. | 45 ae Aa 25 —6 | 0 — 21 45 ibe € 2 6 - 82 — 5 14 «| 23 2215 1. 0 3 41 E 5 5 21 1 25 8. — 5 12 14 ai. 10. 1 E15 E 51617] 1568 ba E sits] 2 4. E 5 31] 15 2 5 3. 5 — 17 27 4 1. Stee sii | eee 32 0 1 (a) Fees 0 | o 105 | 11. 1 Average Temperature of Air. Tree. At 6 A. u. 5% 615 At 12-1 P. M. 6.1 ° 1.92° At 67 P. M. 1.430 2.52 For entire day 2.68 1.69 Squires: TREE TEMPERATURES. 457 TABLE IV.—TEMPERATURE OF AIR AND TREE FOR APRIL, 1894. Date. Air. tree [Date Air. | Tree. Date. Air. | Tree. Date. Air. | Tree. 1 - 10 00 8 2% 4.6 16 16 e 10. 24 6. 120 1 ＋E 350 5 25 13.1 8.9 235 14.8 — 1. — 5 | 1 | & Ha | 125] 125- 10. | 16. 2 bi 5 oh. 166 | 126 25 | 12 14. 1. | 4 10 — 1.0 16. 14.5 23. | 165 * 35 2 || 18 | 164] 14 15. | 178 3 | 67) 15 11 225 17. || 26 | 16 | 14. ice Fit Fe 5 142 20. || 25. | 16. 4. [s. 4 2 19} & | 17. | 23 4 2.5 65| 42 6 | i. | 27 | 12 | 18 3% 1.512 | 42] 62 4 | a7 18. 16. 15| 15 & | 9% 2048 & 22. | 175 ti 6 | 9 47} 83212 | 20 11.5 4 13 65 85 23 43 21. 16. “ah ae 12 . la | 2) 4 17. | 20. e 85 10. 9 [48 20 | 207) 18. 16.5 8. 14 | 7% | 85] Ty GE 8 23. | 19. 10. | 12 1. | 8.522 46 | 3 20. | 18 st & | 6 1 16. 8 30 | 17. 1 Uu. | 66415 85 85 6. | 12. 22. 138. 6. | 10. Oe ee er 18 | 20. r 8.5 8.5 23.5 14. 6.5. 1688 89 . 1. Average Temperature of Air, Tree. At 6-7 A. M. 6.06 8.56° At 12-1 P. . 10.31° 9.61° At 6-7 P.M. 857° 9.33° For entire day 8.312 9.16° 458 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. TABLE V.—TEMPERATURE OF AIR AND TREE FOR MAY AND JUNE, 1. Date. Air, | Tree. | pa Air. | Tree. Date Air, | Teee. [on Air. Tree. 1 | 14%] 1666 9 ure 10° | 27 135° 11. 12 10 iat u. 4915 o. s. 2 22 18. 11. 116 1 6.5 122 125 n. 10. 10. 12 | 1. 4 3 6.11256 1. 125] 13.5 16.2 | 13. 12 u. | 18. 1 10.1 | 13.5 9.8 | 94 u. 412.1 105 19.2 | 18.5 n. | 12. 1. n.1 13.5 |] 13 188 18. „ ln. 16. 13, | 14. 28.1 n. 22 8. | 102} 45 5 14.3 15.5 21.7 | 18. 12.1 | 10.2) 122 10.1 12.7 14 20. | 18. 10.5 10. 1 11. 12. 28 2 10. 23 102 | 10. | 6 10% 12.7 21. | 20, 12.5 | 12. | 16. | 13. 15 22. 21. u. | 13] 9 1. 126 20. | 19.8 2 13. 12 | 7 | 10 | 11.5 18.2 | 19.5 21. 13. 15. 14.4 16 17. 1. 12 14. uu. 13.2 28.3 10. 25 13. 13. 8 | 10. 10. 21.5 | 18.7 20. 15. 17.5| 126 17 17. 131 12. 14 17. 13.5 15. 10. 11. 26 a. 13.316 9 13. 13.7 7. 122 20.9 | 15.3 24. 26.5 16.1 18 4.8 95 10. | 35. 16. Average Temperature (for May) of Air, Tree. At 6-7 A. X. 12.37 12.96 At 1-1 P. . 19.4 14.02 At 2-7 P. M. 12.97 14.40 For entire day 14.91 13.78 Squires: TREE TEMPERATURES. 459 REMARKS.—During the entire period it may be noticed that the temperature of the tree is lower than the air in the morn- ing, and at noon, and is higher in the evening. On four days in January the temperature of the air and the tree fell below _ ~25°C. and beyond the range of the instruments. The lowest temperature of the tree recorded in February was 21.1. The lowest temperature records of this character accessible to the writer are those made by Bourgeau in 1858 at Fort Carleton, Canada, in latitude 50° N.* Bourgeau noted temper- atures of 25 (F. 2) in the trunk of a species of Populus. The mean temperature of the tree observed by Mr. Squires, for January, was 1.31°C. higher than the air. In February the mean temperatures of the tree and air were practically identical. In March the mean temperature of the tree was nearly 1°C. lower than the air; in April .85°C. higher; and in May 1.13°C. lower than the air. The difference between the mean temper- ature of the tree for January and May was 22.33 C. The mean temperature for January of the tree was 8.57 C., of the air _-9.88°C. For February the mean temperature of the tree was _ -8.34°C., for the air -8.34°C. For March the mean tempera- ture of the tree was 1.69°C., of the air 2.68°C. For April the mean temperature of the tree was 9.16°C., of the air 8.31°C- For May the mean temperature of the tree was 13.78°C., of the air 14.91°C. The relatively high temperature of the tree during April was _ doubtless due in part to the heightened metabolic activity pre- vailing at this time, in the formation and development of the ‘reproductive organs. To determine the actual influence of this factor in the absolute temperature of the body of the tree, more extended experiments and a careful analysis of the results al- ready in hand would be necessary. Proc. Linn. Soc. 4:1, 1860. 1 XXVII. SOME HEPATICAE OF MINNESOTA, JoHN M. HOLZINGER. In connection with the survey of the state for mosses a num ber of Hepaticae have been collected, and have been determined by Professor L. M. Underwood. In the hope that it may stim- ulatea closer search, the following list is published. . 1. Anthoceros laevis LINN. 1 Marshland, Wis., Aug. 18, 1890. Trempealeau Mountain, Nov. 11, 1893. 4 2. Asterella hemispherica Beavy. Winona, June 8, 1889; May 14. 1890, and Nov. 4, 1893. Stockton, April 23. 1890. Trempealeau Mountain, Wis., May 17, 1890. . 3. Blasia pusilla LI NN. St. Croix Falls, July 12, 1890. 4. Chiloseyphus polyanthus Corba. Winona, May 26, 1890. 5. Conocephalus conicus DumMorT. Bear Creek, April, May, June 1890. 6. Frullania aeolitis NEEs. St. Croix Falls, July 12, 1890. Marine Mills, July 1890. 7. Frullania dilatata NEEs. a Winona, near Laird’s mill, May 31, 1890; and near Beck's. June 6, 1890. 8. Frullania eboracensis GOTTSCHE. =a Winona, May 31, June 6, June 12, August 7, 1890. Hom- er, June 7, 1890. Bear Creek, June 18, 1890. St. Croix Falls, July 12, 1890. Marine Mills, July 19 and 20, 1890. Trempealeau Mountain, July 31, 1890. 9. Geocalyx graveolens NEEs. Bear Creek, May 10, 1890. Holzinger: SOME HEPATICAE OF MINNESOTA. 461 Grimmaldia barbifrons BIS. Winona, June 19, 1888. ‘ Jungermannia excisa Dicks. Stillwater, July 22, 1890. Jungermannia incisa SCHRAD. Lamoille, Oct. 30, 1893. Jungermannia schraderi Marr. Winona, May 14 and 31, 1890. Bear Creek, May 10, 1890. Homer, June 7, 1890. Franconia, July 16, 1890. Jungermannia ventricosa Dicks. Stillwater, July 22, 1890. Kantia trichomanis S. F. Gray. Franconia, July 16, 1890. Lophocolea heterophylla NEES. Winona, May 26 and August 22, 1890, and May 4, 1893. Lophocolea minor NEEs. Marine Mills, July 19, 1890. Winona, Sept. 10, 1890. May 4 and Oct. 27, 1893. Marchantia polymorpha Linn. Winona, near Beck’s, May 29, 1890. Bear Creek, June 26 and August 30, 1889. Homer, June 7, 1890. Nardia crenulata LIN DB. Lamoille, Oct. 30, 1893. Porella pinnata ScHWAEGR. St. Croix Falls, July 14, 1890. Porella platyphylla Linps. Winona, April 26 and May 31, 1890. Bear Creek, May 3, 1890. Trempealeau Mountain, May 17, 1890. Lamoille, June 7, 1890. Preissia hemispherica Coen. Winona, June 8, 1889, and May 31. 1890. Lamoille, June 7, 1890. Ptilidium ciliare NRES. Homer, June 7, 1890. Marine Mills, July 19, 20 and 21, 1890. Riceia lutescens SCHWEIN. Winona, Oct. 19, 1889. Riecia natans LINN. Winona, April 30, 1899. XXVIII. A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA, EDMUND P. SHELDON. In the course of an extended study of a number of specimens of Mycetozoa collected by the members of the field staff of the Geological and Natural History Survey of Minnesota, several facts have been noted which tend to show the importance of | 3 a systematic examination of these organisms. 4 The delicate and beautiful characters of both the plasmodial and sporangial stages of the slime-moulds have attracted the attention of botanists and zoologists. Some writers have class- ified them as plants, others as animals, and by still others they — have been placed outside both the animal and vegetable king- — doms. Just what position they should occupy in a natural system of classification is hard to determine; but it is probable © that the more study is given to the morphology of this and related groups, the less tendency either botanists or zoologists will have to include them in either the animal or vegetables ; kingdom. a A knowledge of the life cycle of a slime-mould is necessary 4 to a good understanding of both the plasmodial and fruiting ~ stages. A spore, when surrounded by the requisite conditions of temperature, moisture, etc., will germinate; the contents will ooze out and take the form of a small, irregular-shaped. often ciliated mass of protoplasm. The result of the germina- tion of several such spores is a number of small bits of naked protoplasm. These are the swarm-cells. Soon a number of them fuse together forming the plasmodium. These plasmodia, which 7 vary much in size and color in the different species, are merely — masses of protoplasm which increase in size by taking up all sorts of bodies, both organic and inorganic. This is the vegeta- + tive or plasmodial stage of the slime-mould, a study of the devel- 3 opment of which is much needed, even in the more common species. Rex has contributed somewhat to the knowledge of Tu- Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 463 bulina and allied species.! Durand has observed the germination of the spores and subsequent fusion of the swarm-cells of En- teridium.? But it is to Lister that we are indebted for knowl - edge of the development of the plasmodium. In his paper on Badhamia and Brefeldia,* and in his later paper on the divis- ion of nuclei in the Mycetezoa,“ this author has set forth the recently discovered facts regarding the physiology and morph. ology of the multi-nuclear plasmodium. Sooner or later this form heaps itself up and becomes trans- formed into the fruiting or sporangial stage in which it is most commonly found. The shape of the individual sporangium varies greatly, although it is usually constant for a given species. It may form a flat cake-like mass or aethalium as in Lycogala or Fuligo. The latter is very abundantly distributed and is commonly known as the flower of tan. In other cases the plasmodium may be transformed into a net. One species which takes this form is Hemiarcyria serpula. Or the mass may break up into globose or irregularly-shaped heaps which are _ sessile on the substratum, as in Trichia inconspicua or Diderma globosa. The latter species belongs to a group which is char- _ acterized by the presence of minute crystals of carbonate of lime. The presence or absence of such crystals is a useful character in grouping the genera of these organisms. Some- times these tiny globose masses are lifted on slender stalks Which rest upon a common residue of the protoplasm beneath them; this is usually termed the hypothallus. This is seen in such forms as Dictydium, Stemonitis, Clathrodes, Lampro derma and Cribraria. Other forms which in the plasmodial stage are often noticed as spittle-like masses clinging to stems of grasses and other meadow plants, are transformed into a White, fluffy, feathery, fragile mass as in Mucilago. Tue color of the little sporangia, of their tiny stems and of the hypothallus beneath them is as various as the colors when in the plasmodial state. The sporangium is found to contain numerous spores and with these occur other modified portions of protoplasm in the form of elaters or capillitial threads which vary much in shape, external markings and color in the differ- ent species. .) Rex, Geo. A. Bot. Gaz. 15:315. 1890. 2) Durand, E. J. Bot. Gaz. 19:89. 1894. (3) Lister, Arthur, Ann. Bot. 2:1. 1888. 1 (4) Lister, Arthur, Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 29: 529. 1893. 464 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Something remains to be said regarding the habits of these interesting organisms. Living as they do on all kinds of decaying organic substances, the slime-moulds when in the plasmodial state creep along over the substratum absorbing © all sorts of substances into their mass merely by putting out projections or pseudopodia and laying hold of whatever hap- — pens to be in their way. From this creeping, oozing condition the organism when it has become surrounded by the proper conditions of temperature, moisture etc., will creep out and climb up upon the highest point possible and there become transformed into sporangia filled with minute spores. It would surprise one beginning the study of the Mycetozoa to become acquainted with the various localities in which an acute observer might find them. Railroad ties, under sidewalks, on the branches of trees, under eaves, under logs in deep woods, on decaying vegetables, on toadstools, grass-stems, old leaves, twigs, stems and decaying leather are a few of their favorit habitats. The Mycetozoa are well distributed over the regions of the world, and while the number of species is r great (about 500 have been described) the number of specim of each species is often large in favorable localities. 4 on account of the large number of spores produced by a single individual they will multiply rapidly if conditions are favors able. It might be said that the slime-moulds are chiefly remarkable for the beautiful and graceful forms and structures which they present, varying from almost colorless to any color conceivable except green. And these forms and colors may often be without the aid of the microscope; the naked eye in m cases, or at most an ordinary lens, sufficing to reveal most 0 the points of color and structure. In the accompanying list of species it will be noted that I have departed from the usual custom of accepting the g 1 and specific names of Rostafinski under which the principle priority in the nomenclature of this group is ignored. a i 1 ny ra iG TUBIFERA J. G. GMELIN in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 1472 1791. 3 Tubulina Pers. Disp. Fung. 11. 1797. Licea ScHRAD. Nov. Pl. Gen. 17. 1791, in part. 4 1. Tubifera cylindrica GMEL. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. XIII. 1472. 1791. N Tubulina cylindrica Rost. Mon. 220. 1875. Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 465 On old logs among mosses, lichens, etc,, near Center City, Chisago county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, July, 1892); St. Louis river, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July, 1886). 2. Tubifera stipitata (Berk. & Rav.) Licea stipitata Berx. & Ray. Journ. Linn. Soc. 10:350, 1869. Tubulina stipitata Rost. Mon. 223, 1875. A rare slime-mould on old decaying stumps in woods near lake Ballantyne, Blue Earth county, Minn. (E. F. S., June, 1891).5 CLATHROPTYCHIUM Rost. Mon. 225. 1875. 3. Clathroptychium plumbeum (F'RIgs). Reticularia plumbea FRIES, Syst. Myc. 3:88. 1829. Licea rugulosa WALLR. Fl. Germ. 2107. 1833. Licea applanata Berk. in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. 1845. Lycogala lenticulare D. R. & M. Fl. Alg. 401. 1846. Dictydiaethalium applanatum Rost. in Fekl. Symb. 2:69. 1874. Clathroptychium ruqulosum Rost. Mon. 225. 1875. Vermilion Lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886). DICTYDIUM Scurap. Nov. Gen. 1:11. 1797. 4. Dictydium ecancellatum (GmeLin). Stemonitis cancellata J. G. GMELIN in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 1468. 1791. Oribraria cernua Pers. Obs. Myc. 1:9]. 1796. (5) The nomenclature of the remaining species might be indicated as follows: Tubifera speciosa (Srra.) Tubulina speciosa SpeG. Nov. Add. Myc. Ven. u. 123. 1875. Tubifera minima (Fares). Licea minima Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:199, 1822. Tubulina minima Mass. Mon. Myxog. 36, 1892. Tubifera flexuosa (Pers.) Licea flexuosa RRRS. Syn. Fung. 197. 1801. Tubulina flexuosa Polin. Ency. Meth. $:n.8, 1808. Tubifera spermoides B. & ©.) Licea spermoides B. & C. Grev. 2:68. 1873. Tubulina spermoides Mass. Mon. Myxog. 37. 1892. Tubifera gauranitica (Syd. Licea gauranitica Sed. Fl. Gauran. Pug. 1. n. 322. 1886. Tubulina gauranitica Rouurd. Fung. Selec. Exsice. n. 5196. 1887. Tubifera spumaroidea CK. & Mass.) Licea spumaroidea Cxe. & Mass. Grev. 16:74. 1888. Tubulina spumaroidea Cxe. & Mass. in Mass. Mon. Myxog. 42. 1892. Tubifera brunnea (PReEuvss). 4L.icea brunnea PRxuss in Linnaea, 26:709. 1853. Tubulina brunnea Mass. Mon. Myxog. 42. 1892. Tubifera lindheimeri BRRR. Licea lindheimeri BERK. Grev. 2:65. 1873. Tubulina lindheimeri Mass. Mon. Myxog. 42. 1892. 466 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 Trichia cernua Porn. Ency. Meth. 8:n. 25. 1808. Dictydium cernuum Nees. Syst. Pilze. f. 117. 1816, Dictydium trichioides Curvy. Fl. Par. 327. 1827. 4 On decaying logs of the wild black cherry (Prunus serotina Ehrh.) in the woods at Woodhull's Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (F. P. S., July, 1898); near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893); Vermilion lake, Minn. (F. V. D. q Holway, July, 1886.) 4 CRIBRARIA Scurap. in Linn. Syst Nat. Ed. xiii, 1471. 4 1791. a 5. Cribraria sphaerocarpa (Scur.) Stemonitis sphaerocarpa Senn. Bot. Mag. 12:20. 1790. Stemonitis argillacea Pens. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. XIII. 1460. i 1796. 1 Oribruriu argillacea Pers. Obs. Myc. 1:90. 1796. a Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886). CLATHRODES Apans. Fam. Pl. 2:8. 1763.“ Arcyria HILL. Nat. Hist. 47. 1751. 6. Clathrodes denudatum (Linn. )’ a Clathrus denudatus LINN. Sp. Pl. 1179. 17653. Mucor clathroides Scop. Carr. 2:492. 1772. Mucor pyriformis Leers. Fl. Herb. 1135. 1775. 4 Clathrus pedunculatus BaTscH. Fl. 141. 1783. 4 Lycoperdon rufum Dicks. Crypt. Pl. Britt. fase. 1, 25. 1788. a Stemonitis denudata Renu. Fl. Cant. 1786. Stemonitis crocata WILLD. Fl. Ber. 1189. 1787. Stemonitis coccinea RoTH. Fl. Germ. 1:548. 1788. Trichia denudata VILL. Fl. Dauph. 1060. 1789. (6) This was first used by Micheli. Nov. Gen. 214, 1729. (7) The nomenclature of the remaining species might be indicated as follows: Clathrodes ferrugineum (SAUTER). Arcyria ferruginea SAUTER in Flora. 24:316. 1841. Arcyria lateritia DEBARY, Mycet. 24. 1859. Arcyria intricata Rost. Mon, Suppl. 72. 1875. Clathrodes adnatum (BATSCcH). Clathrus adnatus Batsca Elench. Fung. 141. 1783. i Stemonitis trichia Rota. Fl. Germ. 1:549. 1788. 2 Stemonitis lilacina Scar, Fl. Ba v. 2. 1784. a Stemonitis incarnata Pers. in Gmelin. Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 14467. 1791. Arcyria incarnata Pers. Obs. Myc. t. 5, f. 4. 5. 1796. Clathrodes irregulare ( RAcrs.) ? Arcyria irregularis RaclB. Myx. Krak. 15. 1885. Clathrodes umbrinum (ScHuUmM.) Arcyria umbrina ScHumM. Saell. 1479. 1803. Clathrodes insigne (Kaccus. & CKE.) Arcyria insignis KALCHB. & CKE. in Grev. 10:143. 1882. Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 467 Trichia graniformis Horrm. Veg. Crypt. 1:3. 1790. Trichia cinnabaris BULL. Herb. Fr. t. 502, f. 1. 1791. Stemonitis croceaGMEL. Syst. 1467. 1791. Trichia rufa WitH. Arr. Brit. Pl. 3:478. 1791. Arcyria punicea Pers, Disp. 10. 1797. Arcyria rufa Shun. Saell. 1486. 1803. Trichia purpurea SCHUM. Saell. 1472. 1803. Arcyria melanocephala ScuuM. Saell. 1484. 1803. Arcyria conjugata Scoum. Saell. 1485. 1803. Arcyria cincta Sen uu. Saell. 1480. 1803. Arcyria cylindrica ScuumM. Saell. 1488. 1803. Trichia cinnabaris DC. Fl. Fr. no. 688. 1808. Arcyria fusca Fr. Gast. 17. 1818. Arcyria punicea Rost. Mon. 268, 1875. Arcyria vernicosa Rost. Mon. Suppl. 69, 1875. On decaying logs of Quercus at Prospect Park, Minneapolis, Minn. (. P. S., June, 1890); Duluth, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July, 1886); on decaying logs of the wild black cherry (Prunus serotina Ehrh.) in the woods at Woodhull’s Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (. P. S., July, 1893); near Minneapolis, Minn. ( (E. P. S., May, 1891); in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. &, July. 1893); St. Paul, Minn. (E. P. S. July, 1893). 7. Clathrodes nutans (GMELIN). Arcyria nutans GREY. Fl. Ed. 455. 1824. Stemonitis nutans GMELIN. Syst. 1467. 1791. Arcyria flava Pers. Obs. 1:85. 1796. Trichia nutans BULL. Champ. Fr. t. 502, f. 3. 1798 Trichia elongata ScuuM. Saell. 1464. 1803. Arcyria alutacea ScHUM. Saell. 1474. 1803. Arcyria straminea WALLR. Crypt. Fl. Germ. 2232. 1833. Clathrodes fuseum (Fries). Areyria fusea FRIES, Symb. Gast. 17. 1817. Areyrta punicea Rost. Mon. 268, 1875, in part. Clathrodes vitellinum (PHILL.) Arcyria vitellina PIIL. Grev. 5:115. 1876. Arcyria versicolor PHitu. Grev. 5:115. 1876. Clathrodes digitatum (Scuw.) Stemonitis digitata Scaw. Syn Amer. n. 2350. 1834. Arcyria digitata Rosr. Mon. 274. 1875. Clathrodes cookei ( Mass.) Arcyria cookei Mass. Mon. Myxog. 154. 1892. Clathrodes dictyonema (Rost.) Arcyria dictyonema Rost. Mon. 279. 1875. Clathredes hariotii (Mass.) Areyria hariotii Mass. Mon. Myxog. 135. 1892. Clathrodes auraniticum (RAuNK.) Arcyria auranitica RaUNK. Myx. Dan. 109. 1888. 468 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. On decaying logs of the wild black cherry (Prunus serotina Ehrh.) in the woods at Woodhull’s Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (Z. P. &., July, 1898); Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886); in the woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (L. P. &., July, 1893). 4 8. Clathrodes oerstedtit (Rosr.) Arcyria oerstedtii Rost, Mon. 278, 1875. Vermilion lake, Minn. (F. W. D. Holway, July. 1886). 9. Clathrodes recutitum (IAN N.) Clathrus recutitus LINN. Spec. 1649. 1763. Stemonitis recutita Gmev. in Linn, Syst. Nat. 1467. 1791. Stemonitis cinerea GMEL. in Linn. Syst. Nat. 1467. 1791. Trichia cinerea BULL. Champ. Fr. t. 477, f. 3. 1791. Arcyria albida Pers. Disp. t. I, f. 2. 1797. Arcyria carnea WALL. Fl. Germ. 2234. 1838. Arcyria pallida B. & C. Grev. 2:67. 1873. Stemonitis grisea Ortz. in Lotos, 215. 1855. Arcyria stricta Rost. Mon. 271. 1875. meee tien eineru Mass. Mon. Myxog. 151. 1892. (Z. P. S. July, 1893); on logs at Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886); on the ground in moist plant cases in the greenhouses of the University at Minneapolis, Minn. (E. 4. Cuzner, Feb., 1893); in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E P. S., July, 1893). 7 Clathrodes simile (Racrs.) Areyria similis Racts. Myx. Krak. 13. 1885. Clathrodes raciborskii (Bertese). Arcyria raciborskii BERLESE in Sacc. Syll. Fung. 7:430. 1888. Clathrodes inerme (Racrs. Arcyria inermis Racts. Myx. Krak. 14. 1885. Clathrodes bonariense Spa. Arcyria bonariensis Spec. Fung. Arg. Pug. 3:n. 90. 1880-82. Clathrodes vermiculare (Scuum.) Arcyria vermicularis Scaum. Saell. n. 1495. 1801-3. Arcyria agfinis Rost. Mon. 276. 1875. Clathrodes cinnamomeum (HAZst.) Arcyria cinnamomea HAzsL. in Just. Bot. Jahrb. 156. 1877. Clathrodes decipiens (Berk.) Arcyria decipiens BERK. Ana. Nat. Hist. 10:47. 1842. Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 469 LYCOGALA Rerz. Ac. Holms. 254. 1769.“ 10. Lycogala sphericum (GLED. ) Lycoperdon sphericum GLED. Meth. 161. 1753. Lycogula sessile Retz. Ac. Holms. 154. 1769. Mucor lycogala Scop. Fl. Carn, 2:1645. 1772. Mucor fragiformis Scurry. Bar. n. 283, 1774. Lycoperdon variolosum Hubs. Fl. Ang. 645. 1778. Lycoperdon epiphyllum Hups. Fl. Ang. 645. 1778. Lycoperdon pysiforme JACQ. Misc. t. 7. 1788. Galeperdon epidendron WiaG. Fl. Hols. 108. 1780. Lycaperdon chalybeum Batscu, Elench. Fung. 155. 1781. Lycoperdon verrucosum Barscu. Elench. Fung. 155. 1781. Reticularia rosea DC. Bullet. Phil. f. 8, abe. 1798. Lycogala miniata Pers. Obs. 2:26. 1790. Lycogala punctata Pers. Syn. Meth. Fung. 158. 1801. Lycogala plumbea Scuum. Fl. Saell. 1408. 1803. Lycogala ferruginea Scuum. Fl. Saell. 1406. 1803. Reticularia miniata Polin. Ency. meth. 8:22. 1808. Reticularia punctata Pork. Ency. meth. 8:21. 1803. Reticularia rosea Porn. Ency. meth. u. 4. 1803. Lyeogala epidendrum Fries Syst. Myc. 3:80 1829. On decaying wood at Big Island, Lake Minnetonka, Minn. (Conway MacMillan, 1889); on stumps near Minneapolis, Minn. (E. P. S., Sept., 1889); on decaying stumps and logs near Nichols, Aitkin county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1892); on de- cayed wood, Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July. 1886); on old logs in the woods near Two Harbors, Minn. (Z. E. S., June, 1898); near Minnehaha Falls, Minn. (E. P. S., May, 1898); on under side of logs in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893); in the woods at Woodhull's Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (Z. P. S., July, 1893). 11. Lyeogala flavo-fuscum (EHRENB.) Rost. Mon. 288. 1875. Diptherium flavo-fuscum EHRENB. Sylv. Myc. Berl. 27. 1818. On stumps in woods near Minnehaha creek, Minnehaha Falls, Minn. (E. P. S., April, 1891). TRICHIA Hater, Hist. Stirp. Helv. 3:114. 1768. 12. Trichia miniata (Jacq.) Mucor miniatus Jacg. Misc. Aust. Bot. t. 299. 1778. Lycoperdon aggregatum LILJEB. Fl. Scand. 460. 1792. Lycoperdon pusilum Hepw. Abh. t. 3, f. 2. 1793. Trichia fallax Pers. Obs. Myc. 3:t. 4, 5. 1797. Physarum pyriforme Scoum. Saell. 1448. 1803. Trichia virescens ScouM. Saell. 1459. 1803. Trichia fulva PuRT. Mid. Fl. 1534. 1817. 5 (8) The genus Lycogala was first described by Micheli, Nov. Gen. Pl. 215, 1729, but __ Subsequent to 1753 it was first used by Retzius. 470 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. On old logs in the glen at Osceola, Wis. (. P. &, 1898); on decaying logs in the woods at Two Harbors, Minn. (E. F. K., June, 1893); on old dead logs, Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (A. P. Anderson, July, 1898). = 13. Trichia bombacina (BATSCH. ) Lycoperdon bombacinum Barscn. Elench. Fung. 153, 1763. Stemonitis botrytis Pers. in Gmelin in Linn, Syst. Nat 1568. 1791. Trichia botrytis Pers. Disp. Fung. 9. 1797. 4 Trichia serotina Scurap. Journ. t. 3, f. 1. 1790. Sphaerocarpus fragilis Sow. Eng. Bot. t. 279. 1803. Trichia badia Fares. Stirp. Fems). 83. 1825. Trichia pyriformis Fries, Syst. Myc. 3:184. 1829. Trichia fragilis Rost. Mon. 246, 1875. On decaying logs at ren Park, Minneapolis, Minn. C P. S., Sept., 1889). 14. Trichia affinis DEB. in Fuckel. Symb. Myc. 336. Trichia chrysosperma DO. Fl. Fr. 2: 250. 1805, in pt. On decaying logs in the woods near Lakeville, Dakota count; Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893). 15. Trichia gregaria (RRHTzZ.) Lycoperdon gregaria Retz. Obs. Bot. 1:33. 1779. Lycoperdon favogineum Batscu. Elench. Fung. f. 173. 1786. Stemonitis pyriformis RorH. Fl. Germ. 1:548. 1788. Sphaerocarpus chrysospermus BULL. Hist. Champ. t. 417, f. 4. 179 Stemonitis favoginea GMELIN. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 14 1791. Trichia nitens Pers. Obs. Myc. 1:62. 1796. Trichia favoginea Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 10. 1797. Trichia turbinata PurtT. Brit. 2:1115. 1817. Lycoperdon aggregatum Retz. Fl. Scand. 1627. 1769. Lycoperdon epiphyllum Ligut. Fl. Sc. 1069. 1777. Clathrus turbinatus Hups Fl. Ang. 632. 1778. Trichia pyriformis VILL. Fl. Dauph. 1060. 1789. Ss Stemonitis pyriformis Pers. in Gmelin in Linn. Syst. Nat. 1 = xiii. 1468. 1791. 5 Trichia turbinata WIrH. Arr. Br. Pl. 4:480. 1792 = Trichia pyriformis Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 10. 1797. Trichia olivacea PERS. Obs Myc. 1:62. 1796, in pt. Trichia ovata Pers. Obs. Myc. 2:35. 1799. Trichia vulgaris Pers. Obs. Myc. 2:32. 1799. On old stumps and logs near Bay lake, Crow Wing cour ty, Minn. (Z. P. S, June, 1892); Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. Ww. } Holway, July, 1886). Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 471 16. Trichia pyriformis (Scop.) Mucor pyriformis Scor. Fl. Carn, 492. 1772. Mucor pomiſormis LEER. Fl. Herb. 1132. 1775. Stemonitis pyriformis WILLD. Fl. Berol. 409. 1787. Embolus lacteus Horr. Veg. Cr. t. 2, f. 3. 1790. Trichia olivacea Pers. Obs. Myc. 1:62. 1796, in pt. Trichia cylindrica Pers. Obs. Myc, 2:33. 1799. Trichia cordata Pers, Obs. Myc. 2:33. 1799. Trichia nigripes Pers. Syn. Fung. 178. 1801. Stemonitis varia Pers. in Gmelin in Linn Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 1470. 1791. Stemonitis vesiculosa GukLix in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii, 1470. 1791. Trichia varia Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 10. 1797. Trichia favoginea ScuuM. Saell. 1455. 1803. Trichia applanata HDW. in DC. Organ. t. 60, f. 1. 1827. On under side of decaying logs near Allen Junction, St. Louis county, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1893); on logs near White Bear lake, Minn. (E. P. S. August, 1893). HEMIARCYRIA Rost. Mon. 261. 1875. 17. Hemiareyria serpula (Scop.) Rost. Mon. 267. 1875. Mucor serpula Scor. Fl. Carn, 65. 1772. Lycoperdon lumbricale Barsch. Elench. Fung f. 174. 1786. Trichia spongioides VILL. Fl. Dauph. 1061. 1789. Stemonitis lumbricalis GukLiN in Linn. Syst Nat. Ed. xiii. 1470. 1791. Trichia reticulata Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 10. 1797. Trichia serpula Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 10. 1797. Trichia venosa Schu. Saell. 1456. 1803. On decaying leaves in woods near lake Calhoun, Hennepin county, Minn. (Z. P. S., August, 1893). 18. Hemiarcyria pedata (Scum. ) Clathrus pedatus Scum. Ie. t. 33, f. 1, 17. 1776. Sphaerocarpus pyriformis BULL. Champ. Fr. t. 417, f. 2. 1791. Stemonitis pyriformis GMELIN in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 1469. 1791. Trichia pyriformis Sinrn. Fl. Ox 406. 1794. Trichia clavata Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 11. 1797. Trichia citrina ScHuM. Saell. 1460. 1803. Arcyria trichioides RUDOLPH in Linnaea 4:120. 1829. Hemiarcyria clavata Rost. Mon. 264. 1875. Arcyria clavata Mass. Mon. Myxog. 166. 1892. On decaying maple logs near Groveland Park, Ramsey coun- ty. Minn. (E. P. S., 1890); Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. V. D. Hol- 1 wa. July. 1886); on decaying logs near Lakeville, Dakota ai a 472 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ij 3 _ county, Minn. (. F. S., July, 1893); near Osceola, Wis. (L. P. Sept., 1892); near Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. . &, Sept., 1893) in woods near Minnehaha, Minn. (F. F. &. May, 1898); woods near St. Paul, Minn. (Z. P. S., July, 1898); on decayir logs of Populus in woods at Woodhull's Grove, Dakota county Minn. (. P. S., July, 1893). i 19. Hemiareyria vesparia (Barsch). 1 Lycoperdon vesparium BAT CH. Elench. Fung t. 30, f. 172. 1786, Stemonitis cinnabarina Roru. Fl. Germ 347, 1788. 1 Lycoperdon favaceum Scur, Fl. Bay. 2:667, 1789. a Trichia pyriformis Horrm. Veg. Crypt. t. 1, f. 1. 1790. Stemonitis fasciculata Pers. in Gmelin in Linn. Syst. Nat. 9. 4 by a xiii. 1468. 1791. 4 Stemonitis vesparia GMELIN in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xi. 1070. 1791. 3 Trichia rubiformis Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. t. 1, f. 3, t. 4, t. 3. 1797. a Trichia chalybea Cuev. Fl. Par. t. 9, f. 24. 1827. Hemiarcyria rubiformis Rost. Mon. 262. 1875. Arcyria rubiformis Mass. Mon. Myxog. 158. 1892. A Vermilion lake, Minn. (ZE. V. D. Holway, July, 1886); on logs” in the woods at Groveland Park, Ramsey county, Minn. (E. P. S., August, 1893); on old fallen logs near Minnehaha Falls, Minn. (E. P. S., April, 1891); St. Paul, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893); on logs in woods at Woodhull's Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1898). = 20. Hemiareyria vesparia (Barsch). 7 var. sessilis (Mass.) a Arcyria rubiformis Rost. var. sessilis Mass. Mon. Myxog. 1892. On logs in woods near Minneapolis, Minn. (ZE. P. S., Aug 1893). RETICULARIA But. Hist. Champ. Fr. 85. 1791. 21. Reticularia fusea (Hubs. ) Lycoperdon fuscum Hups. Fl. Engl. 645. 1778. 2 Reticularia lycoperdon BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 446, f. 4, t. 476 f. 1-3. 1791. a Lycogala argentea PERS. Disp. Meth. Fung. 7. 1797. Lycogala turbinatum Pers, Syn. Fung. 157. 1801. Fuligo lycoperdon Schum. Saell. 1409. 1803. Reticularia argentea Porn. Ency. Meth. 6:20. 1806. Reticularia umbrina Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:87. 1829. Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 473 On railroad ties near Two Harbors, Minn. (Z. FP. S., June, 1893). The plasmodium of this species was found climbing up the sides of ties. At first it has a white, curdled appearance. Later on it assumes a drab and finally a brown color and is covered with a thin, papery peridium. LAMPRODERMA Rost. Vers. Syst. Mycet. 7. 1873. 22. Lamproderma areyrioides (Sommr.) Rost. Mon. 206. N 1875. Stemonitis arcyrioides Sou. in Tidsk. f. Natur. Vid. Christ. 1827. Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886); on leaves and stems at Prospect Park, Minneapolis, Minn. (E. . S., April, 1895. COMATRICHA Preuss in Liaonaea, 24:140. 1851. 23. Comatricha pulchella (BAB.) Rost. Mon. Suppl. 27. 1875 Stemonitis pulchella BAB. Trans. Linn. Soc. 1839. Stemonitis tenerrima M. A. Curtiss in Am. Journ. Sci. Ser. II. 352. 1848. Stemonitis tenerrima B. & C in Grev. 2:69. 1873. Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. W. D. Holway, July, 1886). 24. Comatricha aequalis Peck. Rep. N. Y. State Mus. Nat. Hist. 31:42. 1879. Stemonitis aequalis Mass. Mon. Myxog. 80. 1892. On decaying logs in the woods at Woodhull’s Grove, Dakota county. Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893.) 25. Comatricha stemonitis (Scop.)“ var. pumila (CoRDA). Stemonitis pumila CorDA. Ic. 5:37. 1842. Stemonitis typhina Mass. var. pumila Mass. Mon. Myxog. 75. 1892. (9) The synonomy of the species might be indicated as follows: Comatricha stemonitis (Scor.) Mucor stemonitis Scop. Fl. Carn. 493. 1772. Embolus lacteus JacQ. Musc. 1:t.8. 1778: Clathrus fertusus BarscH. Elench. Fung. f. 176. 1783. Stemonitis typhina Rota. Fl. Germ. 1:547, 1788. Stemonitis filicina Scuxr. Fl. Bav. 1782. 1789. Trichia typhoides Buti. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 447. 1791. Stemonitis typhoides D. O. Fl. Fr. 2:257. 1805. Stemonitis leucopoda Fr. Gast. 16. 1817. Comatricha typhina Rost. Mon. 198. 1875. Stemonitis typhina Mass. Mon. Myxog. 74. 1892. 474 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1 ee — be TORT The variety was found on dead stumps in clearings near Up- q per Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. (C. A. Ballard, July, 1898); on logs near Gull lake, Cass county, Minn. ( Alex. P. Anderson, ‘i July, 1893). 5 STEMONITIS Guiep. Meth. Fung. 140. 17538. 26. Stemonitis dictyospora Rost. Mon. 195. 1875. Vermilion lake, Minn. (Z. V. D. Holway, July, 1886). 27. Stemonitis morgani Peck. Bot. Gaz. 5:38. 1880. On decaying elm stumps near banks of river near Iberia, Brown county, Minn. (Z. P. S., July, 1891); on stumps in woods near St. Paul, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893). 28. Stemonitis maxima Schwein. Syn. Amer. Fung. n. wall 1834. J On decaying logs of the wild black cherry (Prunus serotina Ehrh.) in the woods at Woodhull's Grove, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1893); on old stumps of Quercus near Lake ** lantyne, Blue Earth county, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1891); in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. 8, Je 1893). 29. Stemonitis typhina WILLD. Pl. Berol. 408. 1787. Clathrus nudus Bott. Hist. Fung. Halif. t. 93, f. 1. 1789. Trichia axifera BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 447, f. 1. 1791. Stemonitis fasculata Pers. Syng. Fung. 187. 1801. Stemonitis violacea Sonux. Saell. 1491. 1803. Stemonitis fusciculata D. C. Fl. Fr. 2:256. 1805. a Stemonitis ferruginea EHRENB. Sylv. Myc. Berl. f. 6, ab. 1818. Stemonitis decipiens NEES. Nov. Act. Leop. 16:95. 1821. 4 Stemonitis heterospora OUDEM. Ned. Kr. Arch. 1:167. 1872. On decaying logs of Quercus at Prospect Park, Minneapolis (E. P. S., June, 1890); Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July, 1886); on grass stems in fields at Groveland Park, Ram sey county, Minn. (E. P. S., Aug., 1893). BREFELDIA Rost. Vers. Syst. Mycet. S. 1873. 30. Brefeldia inquinans (LIN RK.) Dermodium inquinans LINK. Diss. Bot. 1:25. 1795. = Lycoperdon epidendrum SowERB. Fig. Eng. Fung. 400. f. 2, 3. 1809. Reticularia maxima Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:85. 1829. Licea perreptuns BORK. in Gard. Chron. 451. 1848. Brefeldia maxima Rost. Mon. 213. 1875. On logs at Prospect Park, Minneapolis Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1890). 3 ae * = 8 3 11 8 ay ne 2 E Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 475 DIACHAEA Fries. Syst. Veg. Orb. 1:148. 1825. 31. Diachaea leucopoda (BULL. ) Rost. Mon. 190 1875. Trichia leucopoda BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 502, f. 2. 1791. Stemonitis elegans TRENT. in Roth. Cat. Bot. 220. 1797. Stemonitis leucostyla Pers. Syn. Fung. 186. 1801. Diachaea elegans FRIES. Stirp. Femsj. 84. 1825. On decaying leaves, sticks and stems under trees of Quercus and bushes of Corylus at Prospect Park, Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1890); near Duluth, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July, 1886). MUCILAGO Barr. Fung. Arim. Hist. 1755." Spumaria Pers. in Gmelin in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 2466. 1791. 32. Mucilago alba (BAT.) Mucilago crustacea var. alba. Barr. Fung. Arim. Hist. t. 40, f. 9. 1755. Byssus bombycina Retz. V. Haudl. 251. 1769. Reticularia alba BuLL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 328. 1791. Spumaria mucilago Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. t. I, f. a be. 1797. Didymium spumarioides FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:95. 1829. Diderma spumariaeforme WALLR. Fl. Germ. 2208. 1833. Spumaria alba DC, Fl. Fr. 2:261. 1805. On stems of Cornus near Janesville, Waseca county, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, June, 1891); near Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. F. S., May, 1891). DIDYMIUM Scurap. Nov. Gen. 20. 1797. 33. Didymium sphaerocephalum (Barsck.) Mucor sphaerocephalus BATscH. Elench. Fung. 157. 1783. Trichia globosa VILL. Fl. Dauph. 1061. 1789. Reticularia hemispherica BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 446, f. 1. 1791 Physarum melanospermum Pers Disp Meth. Fung. 8. 1797. Didymium farinaceum SCHRAD. Nov. Gen. Pl. t. 3, f. 6. 1797. Trichia farinacea Porn. Ency. Meth. 8:53. 1804. Physarum furinuceum PERs. Syn. Fung. 174. 1801. Physarum cinerascens Shun. Saell. 1426. 1803. Physarum depressum ScouM. Saell. 1439. 1803. Physarum globosum Schu. Saell. 1442. 1803. Physarum oxyacanthae Schu. Saell. 1427. 1803. Physarum clavus LINK. Diss. Bot. 1:27. 1809. Physarum sinuosum Link. Diss. Bot. 1:27. 1809. (10) The genus Mucilago was first used by Micheli,Gen. 217. 1729. Later writers adopted it as follows: Hall. En. Stirp. Helv. 1:5. 1742; Adanson Nat. Pl. Fam. 2:7; 1763; Scop. Intr. 363. 1777; Wigg. Fl. Hols. 112. 1780. 476 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Physarum capitatum Link. Diss. Bot 1:27, 1809. Diderma muscicola Link. Diss. Bot. 1:27, 1809, Didymium capitatum Link. Diss. Bot. %:27. 1816. Didymium lobatum Nees, Syst. 112, f. 104, 1816. Strongylium minor Fries. Gast. 9. 1817. Physarum melanopus Fries, Gast. 23. 1817. Cionium lobatum Srrene. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. XVI, 4 1827. Didymium marginatum Fuiks. Syst. Myc. 3:116. 1829, Didymium melanopus Fries. Syst Myc. 3.114. 1829. Didymium hemisphericum Fries. Syst. Myc. 3.115. 1829. Physarum nigrum Fries. Syst. Lyc. 3:146. 1820. Cionium farinaceuem Link. Handb. 3.416. 1833. Didymium filamentosum WALLR. 2187. 1833. On decaying elm stumps near banks of river at Iberia, Bre county, Minn. (Z. J. S., July, 1891); on fallen logs of Qu near Minneapolis, Minn. (E. F. &, April, 1891). 34. Didymium stipitatum (Revz. ) Lycoperdon stipitatum Retz. Vet. de Handl. 1769. Physarum nigripes LINK. Diss. Bot. 1:27. 180%. Trichia alba Purr. Midl. Fl. 3:1113. 1817. Physarum microcarpon Fries. Symb. Gast. 23. 1818. Didymium nigripes Fries. Syst Myc. 3:119. 1812. Didyminm zanthopus Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:120. 1829. Didymium iridis Fries. Syst. Myc. 3.120. 1829. Didymium microcephalum CRV. Byss. f. 11. 1837. Didymium melanopus WALLR. Fl. Germ. 2184. 1837. Didymium wallrothii Rasy. Fl. Cr. 2289. 1844. Didymium porphyropus D. R. & M. Fl. Alg. 409. 1846. Didymium megalosporum B. & C. in Grev. 2:53. 1873. Didymium microcarpon Rost. Mon. 157. 1875. a On old decaying beans in the plant house of the University at Minneapolis, Minn. (E. P. S., April, 1891). 9 DIDERMA PRS. in Usteri. n. Ann. 9:134. 1795. Chondrioderma Rost. Mon. 167. 1875 in pt. 35. Diderma sphaeroidalis (BULL. ) = Reticularia sphaeroidalis Butt. Hist. Champ. Fr. 446, f. 2. 171 1— Diderma globosum Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. t. 17, f. 4, 5. 1797. Didymium candidum SCHRAD. Nov. Gen. 25. 1797. 2 Didymium globosum CHEV. Fl. Par. t. 9, f. 28. 1827. Physarum sphaeroides CHEVY. Fl. Par. 339. 1827. Cionium globosum SPRENG. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi, 1827. Chondrioderma globosum Rost. Mon. 180. 1875. Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 477 On decaying sticks and stems near Osceola, Wisconsin (E. F. S., Sept., 1892); in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (E. P. S., July, 1898); near Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. FP. S., May, 1891). 36. Diderma contortum Horr. Deutschl. Fl. t. 9, f. 2a. 1795. Reticularia hemispherica Sowers. Fig. Eng. Fung. t. 12. 1797. Physarum depressum Scuum. Saell. n. 1439. 1803. (11) The nomenclature of the remaining species of this genus might be indicated as follows: Diderma niveum ( Rost.) Chondrioderma niveum Rost. Mon. 170. 1875. Diderma virgineum (Mass.) Chondrioderma virgineum Mass. Mon. Myxog. 207. 188. Diderma subdictyospermum (Rost. Chondrioderma subdictyospermum Rost. Mon. Append. 16. 1875. Chondrioderma dealbata Mass. Mon. Myxog. 207. 1892. Diderma friesianum Ros.) Chondrioderma friesianum Rost. in Fuckel Symb. Mye. Nachtr. 2. 76. 1(73. Diderma diforme Sommr. Fl. Lap. 217. 1826, not Pers, 1797. Diderma albescens Pn, in Grey, 57114. 1877. Chondrioderma albescens Mass. Mon. Myxog. 209. 1892. Diderma simulans ( Rost.) Chondrioderma simulans Rost. Mon. Append’ 20. 1875. Diderma saundersii ( Mass.) Chondrioderma saundersii Mass. Mon. Myxog, 209. 1892. Diderma affine (Rosr.) Chondrioderma afine Rost. Mon. Append. 18. 1875. Diderma testaceum (Scurap.) Pers. Syn. Fung. 167. 1801. Didymium testaceum ScHRAD. Nov. Gen. Pl. 25. 1797. Cionium testaceum SPRENG. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi, @:529. 1827. Chondrioderma testaceum Rost. Mon. Fo. 1875. _ Diderma sublateritium B. & Br, in Journ. Linn. Soc, 14:33. 1875. Chondrioderma sublateritium Rost. Mon. Append.19. 1875. Diderma mutabile (ScHRoer.) Chondrioderma mutabile Scoroer. Krypt. Fl. Schles. 3:123. 1889. Diderma fallax (Rosr.) Chondrioderma fallax Rost. Mon. 171. 1875. Diderma angulatum (Perrs.) Reticularia angulata Pers. in Gmelin in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii, 1472. 1781. Diderma difforme Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 9. 1797. Physarum difforme Link. Diss. Bot. 1:27. 1809. Amphisportum versicolor Fzres. Symb. Gost. 19. 1818 Licea alba Nees. In Kze, Myk. 2:66. 1823. Lycogala minutum Grey. S. C. Fl. t. 40. 1823. Reticularia pusilla FRI RS. Syst. Orb. Veg. 1:17. 1825. Diderma cyanescens FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:109. 1829. Physarum caesium FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:147. 1829. Physarum album FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:17. 1829. 478 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Reticularia contorta Poin. Ency. 6.182. 1806. Diderma depressum Fries. Syst. Myc. 3.108. 1829. Didymium michelii Lin. Exs. 2:180. 1832. Didymium hemisphericum Beak. Engl. Fl. 8.812. 1826. a Chondrioderma michelii Rowr. in Fuckel Symb. Myc. Nachtr. a4, 5 1873. A Vermilion lake, Minn. (Z. W. D. Holway, July, 1886). Didymtum diforme Dury. Bot. Gall, 2:38, 180. Diderma neesti Conva. Ie. t. . 1808. Leocarpus cyaneacens Fus. Samm. Veg. Scand. 0, 1840. Leocarpus nitens Fairs. Samm. Veg. Scand. 40. 1840, Diderma libertianum Fries. Belt, t. 4, f. 16-27, 1800. Didymtum libertianum DeBary. Mycetozoa. 1864, Diderma pezizoideum (Benx.) Trichamphora pestzotdes Bank. Intr. Or. Bot. 8. 1887. Chondrioderma berkeleyanum Rost. Mon. Append. 16. 1875. Diderma physaroides . 0.) Spumaria physaroides D. O. FI. Fr. @:101. 1815. Chondrtoderma physarotdes Rost. Mon. 170. 1875. Diderma deplanatum Fares. Syst. Myc. 7110. 18%. Chondrioderma deplanatum Rost. Mon. Append. 17. 1875. Diderma crustaceum Peck. Rep. N. V. State Mus, Nat. Hist. 26:74. 1874. Chondrioderma crustaceum Ben. in Sace. Syll. Pung. 78. 1888, Diderma liceoides Pers. Syst. Myc. B:107. 1829. Licea macrosperma Scuwetsitz. Am. Fung. u. 3317. 1834. Ligynota nigra Eres. Summ. Veg. Scand. 450. 1840. Chondrioderma licesides Rost. Mon. Append. 7. 1875. Diderma reticulatum (Rosr.) Chondrioderma reticulatum Rost. Mon. 170. 1875. Diderma ochraceum (ScHRoer.) Chondrioderma ochraceum Scnroet. Krypt. Fl. Schles. 3:124. 1880. Diderma sauteri ( Rost.) sauteri Rost. Mon. 181. 1875. Diderma vaccinum Dur. & Most. Fl. Alg. 407. 1847-9. Chondrioderma vaccinum Rust. Mon.180. 1875. Diderma simplex (ScHROET.) Chondrioderma simplex Scuroet. Krypt. Fl. Schles. 3:123. 1889. Diderma calcareum Link) Leocarpus caleareus Link. Diss. Bot. 1:23. 1809. Diderma liceoides Frres. Syst. Myc. 3:107. 1829. Diderma chalybeum Wetnm. Prod. Fl. Ross. 592. 1836. Diderma deplanatum FuckeL. Symb. Myc. 341. 1870. Chondrioderma calcareum Rost. in Fuckel Symb. Myc. Nachtr. 2, 74. 1873. Diderma stahlii (Rost.) Chondrioderma stahlii Rost. Mon. 185. 1875. Diderma muelleri (ROsr.) Chondrioderma muelleri Rost. - Mon. Append. 15. 1875. 2 Diderma ramosum (Scucm.) Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:105. 1820. a Spumaria ramosa ScHum. Saell. 2:95. 1803. Leocarpus ramosus FRIES. Summ. Veg. Scand. 450. 1849. Diderma stipitatum (Bmz.) Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:104. 1829, Reticularia stipitata Bull. Hist. Champ. Fr. 89. 1791. Diderma ramosum Pers. Syn. Fung. 166. 1808. Sheldon; A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 479 LEANGIUM Link. Diss. Bot. 1:25. 1795. Chondrioderma Rosr. Mon. 167. 1875, in pt. 37. Leangium floriforme (BULL. ) Link. Diss. Bot. t. 3. 1795." Sphaerocarpus foriformis Buti. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 371. 1791. Stemonitis floriformis GMELIN. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii. 1469. 1891. Lycoperdon foriforme Wirn. Arr. Brit. Pl. 4:379. 1792. Didymium floriforme Sonnab. Nov. Gen, 25. 1797. Diderma spurium Scuum. Saell. 1422. 1803. Leangium lepidotum Dirm. in Schrad. N. Journ. t. 21. 1809. Cionium lepidotum Sprena. in Lion. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi. 4:529. 1827. Cionium floriforme SraxxNd. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi, 4.329. 1827. Diderma lepidotum Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:100 1829. Diderma concinnum B. & C. in Grey. 2:69. 1873. On logs in woods near Lakeville, Dakota county, Minn. (L. B. S., July, 1893). (12) The nomenclature of the remaining species of this genus might be indicated as follows: Leangium radiatum Lixx.) Lycoperdon radiatum Linn. Sp. Pl. 1645. 1753. Didymium stellare Seunkab. Nov. Gen. t. 5, f. 3-4. 1797. Diderma stellare Pers. Syn. Fung. 166. 1801. Diderma umbiticatnm Pers. Syn, Fung. 165. 1801. Diderma erussipes ScuuM. Saell. 1421. 1803. Didymium geaster Link. Diss. Bot. 2:42. 1809. Leangium stellare Link. Diss. Bot. 2:42. 1809. Cionium stellare Senkxxd. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi, 4:29. 1827. Cionium umbilicatum SprenG. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi, 4:529. 1827. Leangium umbilicatum Rasa. Fl. Crypt. 285. 1844. Didymium complanatum Fucker. Symb. Mye. 341. 1869. Leangium geasteriodes Puts.) Diderma geasteroides PII. in Grev. 5:113. 1877. Diderma laciniatum PHIL. in Grev. 5:113. 1877. Chondrioderma geasteroides Mass. Mon. Myxog. 201. 1892. Leangium lyallii ( Mass.) Chondrioderma lyallii Mass. Mon. Myxog. 201. 1892. Leangium carmichaeliauum ( Berk.) f Diderma carmichaelianum Berk. in Hook, British Flora 5:34. 1836. Chondriod-rma radiatum Rost. Mon. Append. 40. 1875. in pt. Chondrioderma carmichaclianum Cooke. Myx. Gr. Brit. 42. 1877. Leangium trevelyana Grev. Scot. Cr. Fl. 132 t. 132. 1823-9. Chondrioderma trevelyana Rost. Mon. 182. 1875. Leangium oerstedtii (Rosr.) Chondrioderma oerstedtii Rost. Mon. 184. 1875. Leancium lucidum B & Br.) Diderma lucidum B. & BR. Ann. Nat. Hist. n. 988. t. 15, f. 9. 1848-61. Chondrioderma lucidum Cooke. Myx. Gt. Brit. 42. 1877. 480 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. TILMADOCHE Fries. Summ. Veg. Scand, 454. 1849. 38. Tilmadoche alba ( BULL.) Ba Sphaerocarpus albus BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 407, f. 3, cg. 1701. Stemonitis albu GMELIN. in Linn, Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii, 1469. 1 Mucor albus SOBOLEN. Petr. 324. 1779. Physarum nutans Pers. Syn. 171. 1801. Trichia cernua Scuum. Saell. 1432, 1803. Physarum bulbiforme ScnuM, Savll. 1432. 1803. Physurum marginatum Scuum. Saell. 1440. 1803. Physarum didymium Scrum, Saell. 1441, 1803. Physarum albopunctatum Scuum. Saell. 1433. 1803. Trichia alba D. C. Fl. Fr. 2:202.. 1805. . Physarum albipes Link, Diss. Bot. 1:27. 1809. Physarum sulcatum Link. Diss. Bot. 1:27. 1809. Didymium marginatum Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:116. 1829. Tilmadoche cernua Fries. Summ. Veg. Scand. 454. 1849. Tilmadoche nutans Rost. Mon. 127. 1875. On decaying logs of Quercus at Prospect Park, Minneapo s Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1890); Vermilion lake, Minn. (E. V. D. Holway, July, 1886). a 7 PHYSARUM Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 8. 1797. 39. Physarum cinereum (BArsch.) Pers. Syn. Fung. 1170, 1801. 5 Lycoperdon cinereum BAT SCH. Elench. Fung f. 169. 1783. a Lycoperdon alni Byer. in Vet. Handl. 39. 1789. a Physarum violaceum Schux. Saell. 1428. 1803. Physarum conglobatum Fries. Symb. Gast. 21. 1818. Didymium cinereum FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:126. 1829. Physerum plumbeum FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:142. 1829. On fallen limbs of Quercus velutina Lam. in the woods r Waseca, Waseca county, Minn. (ZE. P. S., June, 1891). 40. Physarum filamentosum (TRENT. ) Trichia filamentosa TRENT. in Roth. Cat. Bot. 227. 1797. Physarum confluens LINK. Diss. Bot. 2:42. 1809. Physarum connexum LINK. Diss. Bot. 2:42. 1809. Physarum hypnorum Link. Diss. Bot. 2:42. 1809. Physarum leucophueum FRIES. Symb. Gast. 24. 1818. Physarum striatum FUCKEL. Symb. Myc. 342. 1869. a Didymium hemisphericum FUCKEL. Symb. Myc. 341. 1869. On standing stubs of hard maple near Osceola, Wisconsin (E. P. S., Sept., 1892); on old fallen logs near Minnehaha Falls, Minn. (Z. P. S., April, 1891). 4 Sheldon: A STUDY OF SOME MINNESOTA MYCETOZOA. 481 41. Physarum sinuosum (BuLL.) Rost. Mon. 112. 1875. Reticularia sinuosa BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 446, f. 3. 1791. Physarum bivalve Pers. Obs. Myc.t.1,f.2. 1796. Angioridium sinuosum GREV. Scot. Cr. Fl. t. 310. 1828. Diderma valvatum Fries. Syst. Myc. 3:109. 1829. Didymium sinuosum D. R. & M. Fl. Alg. 411. 1846. Carcerina valvata FRIES. Summ. Veg. Scand. 451. 1849. Leocarpus melaleucus GAY. in Mont. Syll. 1072. 1055. Diderma contortum FuckEeL. Symb. Myce. 341. 1869. Diderma pallidum B. & C. in Grev. 3:59. 1873. Physarum sinuosum Rost. Mon. 112. 1875. On fallen leaves of Quercus at Prospect Park, Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1890). FULIGO HALL. Hist. Stirp. Helvet. 3:110. 1768. 42. Fuligo septica (LI NN.) GMELIN in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xiii, 1466. 1791. Mucor septica LINN. Sp. Pl. 1656. 1753. Mucor mucilago Scop. Fl. Carn. 2:1638. 1772. Lycoperdon luteum Scur. Fl. Bay. 2:629. 1789. Reticuluria carnosa BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 424, f. 1. 1791. Reticularia hortensis BULL. Hist. Champ. Fr. t. 424, f. 2. 1791. Reticularia lutea BULL.. t. 380, f. 1. 1791. Fuligo candida Pers. Obs. Myc, 1:154. 1791. Fuligo vaporaria Pers. Obs. 1.155. 1796. Fuligo flava Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 8. 1797. Fuligo rufa Pers. Disp. Meth. Fung. 8. 1797. Fuligo pallida Pers. Obs. Myc. 2:36. 1799. Fuligo laevis Pers. Syn. Fung. 161. 1801. Fuligo violacea Pers. Syn. Fung. 160. 1801. Reticularia septica WITH. Arr. Br. Pl. 4:463. 1801. Fuligo flavescens ScHuM. Saell. 1413. 1803. Aethalium flavum LINK. Diss. Bot. 1:42. 1809. Fuligo varians Sommr. Fl. Lapp. 231. 1826. Reticularia vaporaria Cuev. Fl. Par. 1:342. 1827. Aethalium violaceum SPRENG. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi. 4:533. 1827. Aethalium candidum ScHLEcHT. in Spreng. in Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. xvi. 4:533. 1827. Aethalium septicum FRIES. Syst. Myc. 3:91. 1829. Fuligo carnosa Duby. Bot. Gall. 2:863. 1830. Fuligo hortensis Dux. Bot Gall. 2:863. 1830. Aethalium rufum WALLR. Fl. Germ. 2097. 1833. Aethalium ferrincola SCHWEIN. Syn. Am. 2372. 1834. Reticularia rufa ScHWEIN. Syn. Am. 2377. 1834. Aethalium vaporareum BERK. in Gard. Chron. 409. 1860. 482 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. On decaying stumps and logs of Quercus at Prospect F Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. P. S., Sept, 1889); in woods Janesville, Minn. (B. C. Taylor, June, 1891); on old logs ii clearings near Waldo, Lake county, Minn. (Z. F. S., June, on logs in swamps near upper Gull lake, Cass county, in. (C. A. Ballard. Aug., ee - - ee ake. Blue Earth county, Minn. (Z. P. S., June, 1891); in e near the river at Springfield, Minn. (Z. P. S., July, 1891); n¢ Duck lake, Blue Earth county, Minn. (E. F. S., June, 18% on the ground at Mille Lacs Indian Reservation, Mille county, Minn. (E. P. S., June, 1892); near Milwaukee short- line bridge, Ramsey county, Minn. (Z. P. S.. June, 1890); on sidewalks in the suburbs of Minneapolis, Minn. (Z. F. S., J 1895). V. 6 ; * *S6gi “sequUieAON SA TWIINVLOG VLOSINNIN „ ‘ON uneſing IX 3LV 1d o „* 2 —— 2 0 = * * 1 * 8 i anvyrywnuvadva OS PAROS OED oy O ES 49 sit ene * IHti- lege Nd 9 * * ae bm O.. eber 7 heh ug 2 20% 2 i „ eM 9 AY „ Oo — i} 4 h Mus 9 een yo42uarybumoyc Vea 57500 Jo doy f uNgmemyoymb :n III. % u MUD) OW “C) ; : Y ge ee ee —7* 07 % — — “S6gi ‘sequeAoN SO TVYOINVLOS VLOSINNIN ‘© ‘ON UREING XX 3LV1d “Se “ON UHAING eg zw o “S3IGNLS IWIINVLOG VLOSANNIN 6 “S6gi ‘zequeronN “SZIONLS TVIINVLOS VLOSINNIN “© ‘ON UREIING PLATE XXIV. ‘S6gi zm SO IVDINVLOS YLOS3NNIN ‘© ‘ON UeLING — eg eqWeAON S IVOINVLOS V.LOSINNIN 6 ox uneſng PLATE XXV. 0 eg ‘uequieroN S TVDINVLOG VLOSINNIN ‘6 ‘ON uneſsſng PLATE XXVil, et X. ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE NORTH AMERICAN HELVELLALES. LuciEN M. UNDERWOOD. The Helvellales with mostly a stalked ascoma open from the commencement of its development, form a somewhat natural group of fleshy fungi, with a few outlying members which are allied to several other discomycetous families and genera. obably the most familiar form is the more] which is known n many parts of the country as the spring mushroom,” and in certain parts is even called the mushroom” to the exclusion of other species of edible fungi. Several other species of the are edible, but in this country little attention is paid to 2 delicacies and few of the possibilities of the group have n tested. The main object of the present paper is to show little is known of the distribution of the group even among blogists. Three well marked families constitute the order. Of these e GEOGLOSSACEAE are mostly slender, stalked, club- shaped ‘capitate fungi varying in consistency from fleshy to gelatin- us or waxy. Their asci open by means ofa terminal pore. 9st of the species are small, an inch or two high, and grow 1 various situations, more commonly on old decaying wood or e: ves in rather moist places. In color they vary from black o light yellow or even white. Superficially they resemble the ub-fungi (Clavariaceae) with which group, indeed, Fries aited some of them as late even as 1838.1 Some of the black orms also resemble some species of Xylaria, but the woody haracter of the latter genus will readily distinguish them. d Epicrisis Systematis Mycologici, 582-534. 1836-1838, 484 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Twelve genera are recognized, nine of which are found in this country. They may be distinguished by the following table: Ascoma clavate or subcapitate, continuous with the stipe. Spores one-celled, colorless. Light colored, usually yellowish or light brown; ascoma sharply separated from the stipe .. .... Mitrula. Bright or dark colored; ascoma not clearly separated rom the stipe... .sscsvakeimeak te usardcaemiee Microglossum, Spores 2—many-celled by cross septae. MAOEOE BOIOTIO“S... 00000 „ Sh saan Leptoglossum. ore brenn. „eee Geoglossum. Ascoma flat, decurrent on both sides of the stipe; rod - shaped... „ Spathularia. Ascoma capitate or hollow-discoid usually with a free margin. Spores ellipsoid. Gaelatinous-gristly p „i Leotia. „„ . Kemp Uhee Leen Cudoniella. Spores elongate-filiform. Fleshy; ascoma concave, hat-shaped, the margin Tres) incurved. . is. — 7 7 — 0 4 — S 2 SS >< eas ae, ex ees . 4 Cc Se — ** — ie staec —— SG — &: r a a Se ee SETS 3 —̃ K— — — — — cs ZIG o gase ö — J. E. TILDEN, det. AL STUDIES. March, 1896 6° MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. April, 896. PLATE XXX. Bulletin No. 9. — XXXVI. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE LIFE US. TORY OF PILINIA DILUTA WOOD AND --STIGEOCLONIUM FLAGELLIFERUM KG. JOSEPHINE E. TILDEN. mts „ 4 Wulle engaged in studying some species of lime-secreting 4 lgae, the following paragraph in Dr. Wood's (I) History of the Fresh- Water Algae of North America,” came under my notice: 3 Bellefonte, Centre county, Pennsylvania, there issues a the limestone rocks the largest spring I have ever seen, giv ving rise to a creek-like torrent, which supplies the city with i Biter, and passes on scarcely diminished in volume. In this spring grows the curious alga under consideration, forming a newhat lubricous and stony stratum on the stones and rocks e basin. This stratum is of a grayish-green color, and is nite friable, breaking in the direction of the filaments with 1 possible readiness. When placed under the mic- cope it is seen to be composed of filaments whose course is on act one from the under to the upper surface. They are ntly rigid, preserving their courses, and not being in- natted. They are composed of cylindrical, confervoid cells, a nd are dichotomously branched, and yet when viewed as a whole the filament and its branches form a sort of fasciculus. Th Sada cell or cells appear to be globular. When I collected 1 is plant I was forced by circumstances to put the specimens a carbolic-acid water for future study, and, therefore, I have had no opportunity of studying their method of reproduction. hap not altogether satisfied in referring this plant to the Pili- , and yet all the most important of the characters given by Re Ra denhorst are preserved by it. It certainly, however, differs y greatly from P. rimosa Ktz.” "Dr, Wood names the plant Pilinia diluta. His description of it will be given later. : a Tunis promised interesting matter for investigation. and though it seemed improbable that a plant which grew in a spot mor > than twenty years ago should have been able to maintain — 60 602 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. its foothold until the present time, a letter was sent to the postmaster at Bellefonte, Mr. David F. Fortney, asking his aid in procuring some specimens. He replied that the spring was thoroughly cleaned at intervals and for that reason it might not be possible to find the plant, but that if it existed, it should be sent me. Upon his recommendation I then communicated — with Miss Ella Levy, the teacher of Botany in the Belle- fonte High School, explaining as well as possible the probable — nature and appearance of the growth. It was feared that even ‘ if it were still in existence there would be a difficulty in recog- nizing the Pilinia among the many other algal forms which would naturally be its neighbors, since from the frequency of the cleaning process, it could scarcely have time to form che 4 crust which would have distinguished it. 5 Miss Levy forwarded two pebbles taken from the bed of the 5 spring, without very much hope that the Pilinia would be found on them. However, they proved to be covered with an algal | growth unmistakably identical with that described by Dr. Wood. The question of whether the plant was a Pilinia or 0 a called for further investigation. Later an abundance of the material was secured. 4 6 Some of these pebbles were kept in tanks during a period of two months, the water being changed frequently. By the end of that time, the plant itself had solved the problem of its iden- a tity in the most effectual manner possible by simply transform ing itself into a common Stigeoclonium. When this fact was proved, an effort was made to look up the literature concern- ing this genus. Finding that, though of long standing, it had not been made the subject of much research, it was thought that it might be well in giving the results of these in- vestigations upon the Pilinia stage, to include whatever fz ots sf had come under observation relating to the Stigeoclonium and Palmella stages. The microscopic structure and developme! of the plant will therefore be considered under three heads: Pilinia stage. 2. Stigeoclonium stage. 3. Palmella stage. S in the first named stage there is certainly a distinct adhere to Pilinia characteristics, as furnished by Kuetzing, a bri history of this genus is given with the idea of showing the possibility of truth in the theory offered by Wille (I) viz: That the genus Pilinia is made up of species which represe! stages of other algae. It is not so easy to accept his further statement that these are of the Phycochromaceae. * Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 603 History of the genus Pilinia. Upon a comparison of the literature the greatest diversity of opinion concerning the nature of the genus Pilinia, was found to prevail, and, indeed, according to some authors no such genus should be maintained. The genus was created in 1843 by Kuetzing (I), and in it he placed the species P. rimosa. His specimens were gathered near Cuxhaven, in July, 1839. The earliest description at hand is that of Rabenhorst (I), published in 1868. Pilinia Ktz. (1843): Fila articulata erecta, simplicia vel parce ramosa, basi callosa quasi radicata affixa, in stratum crustaceum tenue spongiosum olivascens coales- centia. Propagatio ignota. P. rimosa Ktz. (Phycol. gener. p. 273,) P. lignicola, crus- tacea, olivaceo-viridis, initio porosa, postea rimosa, mucosa; filis ramisque fasciculatis; articulis diametro (0.00029-0.00038 '’) aequalibus vel duplo longioribus. v. v. Hab. in postibus lignisque aestu maris continuo irroratis in- sSulae Suelt, Norderney (L. R.), prope Cuxhaven, ubi frustra Juaesivi, detexit 1839 mense Jolio cl. Kuetzing.“ f Dr. Wood (I) was the next contributor to the genus. He, rather hesitatingly, however, offers a new species. The de- scription is as follows: _ “Genus PiLIxIA Kriz, Filaments articulate, erect, dichoto- mously branched, fixed by the base, aggregated into a some- What spongy fragile crustaceous stratum. Method of propa- _ gation unknown. _ Pilinia diluta Woop (sp. nov.) Growing on stones and _ rocks, forming a grayish-green stratum; filaments and branches fasciculate, with the apices obtuse; joints 14-3} times longer than broad. Diam. Max. 0.0004". Hab. In a large fountain, near Bellefonte, Centre county, Pennsylvania; Wood.” No more attention was paid to the genus until 1888, when De- Toni (I) in comparing the genera of the Trentepohliaceae, notes that the genus Pilinia Kuetz. seems to him identical with the genus Acroblaste Reinsch (Reinsch I). A year later he makes a more extended exposition of this belief (De- Tont II) and quotes Hansgirg (II) as agreeing with him on this point and also referring Chaetophora pellicula Kjellm. (Kjellman I) to the same genus. Accordingly in his Sylloge Algarum (De-Toni III) he places both Acroblaste and Chaetophora pellicula under Pilinia rimosa. Wille (I) holds a different view, he retains Acroblaste as an authentic genus, but removes Pilinia to the unsichere gat- 5 a SE AACN ETON T Se SN 604 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. tungen” on the ground that upon investigation of the original specimens they are proved to be young stages of various algae, but particularly of the Phycochromaceae. In a later work Hansgirg (IV) quotes his own remarks con- cerning Pilinia from his paper in Flora and mentions a new species of Pilinia (P. minor) as described by himself (III). The same species is given as new in a review of an article by the same author (V). As access cannot be had to these two descriptions, further discussion of them will be omitted. Description of the Bellefonte Spring. This spring is famous both for its size and the purity of its water. It is sixty-five feet in width, eighty-five feet in length, and eight ; feet in depth. Year after year, without variation, it dis-. charges 14,600 gallons of water per minute. Not only does it supply the town of Bellefonte with water, but its power is used to pump water up a hill to a distributing reservoir, and then the quantity going to waste is large, making a stream like a mill tail.“ Its temperature remains nearly unchanged during the different seasons, being in winter 51° F. and in summer 52 F. Through the kindness of Mr. Fortney, the following extract from the report of an analysis of the water was obtained: 4 Total solid residue. 152.3 parts . million. Of which was lost in ignition......... 36.3 Leaving freed residue 116.0 d Degree of hardn es. 11. — Poisonous metals ah ee Absent. WWW „„ beens ee bastaaues None GOR... 2.0 ss co veseedvaen ses Pabengey None. 4 ree. Ammonis... :s for the purpose of finding this condition. The mother-c Is in the figure given, were 12-15 mic. in diameter in the main; some were very much smaller—4—mic. in diameter. se from which the zoospores had not yet escaped were generally spherical and swollen. The empty ones were more angular and collapsed. Around the edges of the large plates and al from cells in the interior, there grew out branches of Pilinia type the cells of which varied from 4-10 mic. in di ter. These filaments did not stand upright, as is usual, but occupied the same plane as the plate. A portion of a N shown (Pl. XXXIV, fig. 4) in which appear a vegetative p ipheral plate cell with its large central pyrenoid,embedded in chlorophyll and granule-bearing protoplasm. From its outer side extends a filament in all respects like an ordinary Pilinia 4% 3 Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 627 filament, except that it does not stand upright, with cells in healthy growing condition. On the interior its neighbor consists of asimilar cell through more mature which through the swelling of its contents has attained a globose form. The pro- cess of division is far enough along to allow four portions to be clearly discerned and four eyespots are perfectly apparent. They are seen to lie as far from the center as possible. On one side lies a very angular cell, nearly twice as long as wide, containing six zoospores. They are 3.5-4 mic. in diam eter; their eyespots are distinct. A faint though quite dis- tinct movement of the zoospores within the cell was percepti- ble, but though this and other material was watched during the remainder of the afternoon, no spores were seen to escape from acell. This probably was due to two reasons: first the afternoon is not the natural time for the escape of motile spores, the best time for observing them being from 8-12, A. M.; second, the material had lain already for some time under the coverglass, so that the poor supply of air and lack of fresh water very likely weakened the natural liveliness of the spores On the opposite side from this was an empty cell from which the spores had escaped probably during the morning hours. These empty cells were very abundant throughout all the plates examined. In the same drawing can be seen such a cell occurring as the basal cell of a filament proving that a basal cell may also be a reproductive cell. However this may be, _ the combination of, or the relation between, basal cell and filament, in this case is not the same as in the Pilinia basal cell and filament. For this filament is either a Pilinia filament not yet transformed into Palmella cells, or it is the product of a Palmella cell, while the basal cell is certainly a Palmella cell. On the other hand a Pilinia filament as well as the Pilinia basal cell may be the product of germination of a spore. It was expected on the following morning to make a more _ thorough study of the spores and secure other drawings. But when this examination was made the material seemed to be _ disorganised in great part, though the conditions to all appear- _ ance remained unchanged. Although for the reason stated above, the subsequent be- ___ havior of the microzoospores has not been so closely studied as _ that of the megazoospores, yet by means of staining, the fact bas been clearly brought out that a number of small spores closely resembling those in the plate and solitary cells, are 1 : ö present in nearly every mount of the material containing these 628 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES cells. The spores agree in size. They are possessed of only tu Mn cilia (Pl. XXXIV, fig. 5). In several mounts a zygote was seen. The first one noticed contained two distinct pigment spots and was bilobed at the lower end, showing conclusively _ that it was a case of fusion (Pl. XXXIV, fig.6a). The number of cilia could not be determined but was supposed to be four. In another mount in which many of the plate cells were empty, a spore with two eyespots was seen (fig. 6 b). Near by was an elongated body, its shape giving it the appearance of being made up of two spores placed end to end. In each end there appeared an eyespot, (fig. 6c). 1 One permanent slide shows a microzoospore 4.2 mic. in width, 5 mic. in length, with two cilia. Another spore is 2.5 in width, 6.25 mic. in length and with two cilia. Another is 45 mic. in diameter and has two cilia. Still another, 4 mic. in ain a ameter, 7.5 mic. in length, is biciliated. Since the material is remarkably pure, containing as far as seen, only the Stigeoclonium, Pilinia and Palmella stages of — main plant, together with a few Pediastrums and Diatoms dur- ing the last of the period of cultivation, it seems proper to connect these biciliated spores with the microzoospores devel- z oped in the plate cells. a In addition to this there is a further demonstration of * supposition. Pebbles 6“ and 7“ were kept in a tank by them selves during the entire time. They wereat first discovered to be 4 coated with very extensive layers of the plate cells which looked very much like Coleochaete plates. Several times the: 7 after a microscopic examination was made, but nothing new was noted. On the morning of April 27th, while changing th water in the tank, an elongated streak of bright green colo: r was noticed on the side of the dish facing the light which fe lowed the surface of the water. It was caused by the p n of young Pilinia thalli. No material in the Pilinia or Sti lo- | nium stage could be found in the tank. This seemed to 5 0 ore that the young Pilinia thalli resulted from the germination of the microzoospores developed in the palmelloid cell Cienkowsky’s observations brought him to the conclusion thi the microgonidia of the Palmella cells developed into the origi nal filamentous alga, but he was unable to determine whe’ the germination always followed the same course. Com also in this point Reinhart (D. Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 629 Stigeoclonium flagelliferum Ko.—Pilinia diluta Woop Cont. F. W. Alg. N. A. 211. 1872.—Floccose caespitose, pale yellowish green, 5-30 mm. in length; filaments somewhat fasciculately branched, rarely almost naked, 9-15 mic. in diam- eter, with articulations more or less swollen, 14-8 times longer than the diameter; chlorophores narrow, light green; branches in lower portions in groups of 2-5 on special short cells, rarely opposite, flagelliform, somewhat erect, with very long bristles, in upper portions generally solitary, short, with terminal cells either subulate or piliferous. During Pilinia stage, encrusted with calcium carbonate. In quiet spring water, Bellefonte, Pennsylvania. Coll. Miss Ella Levy. 21 Jan., 3 April. 1896. REMARKS: To avoid adding to the confusion already exist- ing in the genus Stigeoclonium, it is thought best to place the plant which has been undergoing investigation in the above species, although it is not entirely in agreement with it. It does agree in one of the main points, that of forming groups of short, branch-bearing cells. This is, as I understand it, the meaning of the phrases: ramis inferioribus 2-5 approxi- matis“ of De-Toni (iii,200)and Rabenhorst (ii,379 ) aud branches kflagelliform, opposite, on distinct cells, shorter and more oval than the others of the filaments” of Wolle (ii, 113). As this isa _ characteristic of no other species, to my knowledge. it seems necessary to connect it with that name. General Considerations :—It must be explained that the term Pilinia stage” has been used merely asa matter of convenience. The first stage may be understood to be simply a modification of the second. The development of the individual into the one or the other form depends, it would seem, merely upon sur- _ rounding conditions. When living in the waters of the spring. a low Chaetophora-like habit is retained which with the ac- _ companying secretion of carbonate of lime results in the form- ation of a crust. A removal from this water causes the plant to assume the ordinary Stigeoclonium appearance. There is no regularly recurrent spontaneous change from one into the bother. Thhat the life-history of Stigeoclonium includes a true Stigeo- _ clonium stage and Palmelloid stage is a fact that has been known Since the time of Cienkowsky’s investigations. The observa- tions recorded in the present paper show the Stigeoclonium 1 stage in itself to be in a marked degree subject to variation. 680 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. With this fact in view it is not difficult to account for some of the ‘‘new species” among the genera related to Stigeoclonium In particular it is believed that Pilinia diluta Wood, Chaetoph- __ ora pellicula Kjellman, and perhaps some of the species of Endoclonium are forms of Stigeoclonium. Stigeoclonium pygmaeum of Hansgirg (I) approaches the Bellefonte plant more nearly than any other species in that it is coated with — lime, its branches sometimes 2-3 approximate and its trichomes _ altogether similar in character. But this is an epiphyte or a endophyte living on Ranunculus, Lemna, and other aquatic plants. This belief is strengthened by various observations found in descriptions of this genus. Dr. Wood (ii. 206. Pl. 19, fig. L) : himself states that a Stigeoclonium, which he watched for several seasons, in its earlier state appears at times to possess the characters of a young Chaetophora, forming a small gelatinous base out of which the threads soon escape as they lengthen.” His figure might well be taken as a repre. 1 sentation of a Pilinia developing Stigeoclonium filaments. 4 A paragraph from Wolle's (J) notes upon S. fastigiatum Kg. „ as follows: Some of the species of Stigeoclonium are very closely related to species of Chaetophora, as is evident trom 4 personal observation. Referring to Plate CIII, figs. 1, 2, two . thalli of Chaetophora pisiformis magnified about 250 ¢ aes These show a few of the radial filaments, normally imbedded a in a firm gelatinous mucus, extending beyond the — a tegument; this figure, (1, 2,) is such a filament more fully developed, drawn with all of its branches; it is one of many ki which occurred in the same pool; Chaetophora also was pre- valent in quantity. This observation may open the inquiry, 1 ‘is this a normal process of development? Is the plant Stigeoclonium or a Chaetophora? Or is the latter a mere con- q dition of development of the former? ie „Plate CII, figs. 1-3 and 5-8. Other forms developing from Chaetophora, comp. Stigeo. longipilus, and Stigeo. radians.” — 15 In the following description, that of S. longipilus Kg., l again touches upon this point. There are two distinct forms of this species, the one 8-10 mm. long, represented plate G 8 figs. 1, 2, 3, with long bare stems and bushy tops. Kirchner remarks that the species may represent a transition state, go- ing over to Chaetophora. Personal observations prove the reverse, Chaetophora developing Stigeoclonium.” * * * 4 Plate CII, figs. 5-9, are very much elongated filaments of Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 631 Chaetophora, evidently going over to or developing Stigeoclo- nium.” Wolle also suggests that his specimen of S. radians Kg. is _ “evidently related to Chaetophora.” Many of his illustrations show interesting resemblances to the Pilinia growth. See his Pl. 100, fig. 1. Pl. 102, figs. 5-8. Pl. 103, figs 4, 5, 8, 9, 10. In describing the species S. tenue, Cook (I) quotes from Har- vey, At first the filaments are enclosed, in the manner of a _ Chaetophora, in a common, somewhat definite gelatine; after- | wards, on its bursting, they issue from it like a Conferva, but are at all times very gelatinous.” It is certain that a study of Stigeoclonium and Chaetophora plants during the entire time of their vegetative and dormant periods would be productive of facts which it is necessary to know before the determination of the species can be put upon a firm basis. I wish to express my gratitude to Professor Conway MacMil- lan, Mr. David F. Fortney, and, in particular, to Miss Ella Levy, who by her quick insight and untiring efforts to attain satisfactory results, has enabled me to make a study of this plant. ; SUMMARY. 1. Pilinia is a form genus but its connection with the Phyeo- chromaceae is not apparent. 2. Pilinia diluta Wood is a stage of Stigeoclonium flagelliferum Kg. Its development is due to local conditions. 3. Calcareous secretions are peculiar to the Pilinia stage of J ‘this species and perforated crystals together with amorphous particles of Ca CO, are distinctive. 4. The formistion of bristles seems to be uncharacteristic of the normal Pilinia but arises under culture. g 5. Zoospores of two sorts are present in the life history. megazoospores common to the Pilinia and Stigeoclonium stages 3 ‘and microzoospores developed by the Palmella stage. 6. Upright filaments grow from the convex rather than from the concave side of the germinal plate. 7. Conjugation between microzoogametes results in the pro- - duction of a planozygote. 8. In the Pilinia stage the number of megazoospores does not exceed four in a gonidangium, while in Stigeoclonium the number goes as high as sixteen. 9. The Palmella stage may be developed either from basal or erect Pilinia filaments or from Stigeoclonium filaments. I. De-Tonl, J. B. Pilinia Kuetz. ed Acroblaste Reinsch. Not MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a BILIOGRAPHY. N Cienkowski, L. Ueber Palmellen-Zustand bei Stygeceiontum. Bot. Zeit. 34: 17-26. 70. Fl. J. J. 1-19, 1876. Cienkowski, L. Zur. Morphologie der Ulothricheen. Melanges biologiques tires du Bullet. de l’acad. de St. Petersb. 9: 631-572, Cooke, M.C. British Fresh-Water Algae. Exclusive of Desmi- diene and Diatomaceae, 1: 189. 1882-84. . De-Toni, J. B. Sopra un Nuovo Genere di Trentepohliacee, a Notarisia. 3: 581-584. 0 1888. risia, 4:653-655. Ja 1889. De-Toni, J. B. Sylloge Algarum Omnium Hucusque Cc tarum. 1:259. 1889. Frank, M. Endoclonium polymorphum. Cohn's Beitr. z. E d. Pflanz. 3: 365-376. Pl. 18. 1883. Hansgirg, A. Beiträge zur Kenotniss d Bergalgenflora Boh Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschrift. No. 4. 1887. Hansgirg, A. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Algengattungen En- tocladia Reinke (Entonema Reinsch ex. p., Entoderma Lagrh., Reinkia Bzi.? Periplegmatium Ktz.) und Pilinia Ktz. (Ae blaste Reinsch) mit eineu Nachtrage zu meiner in dieser Z schrift (Flora 1888, No. 14) veroeffentlichten Abhandlung. 71: 504. N. 1888. 1 Hansgirg, A. Neue Beiträge z. Kenntn. der Meeresalgen u. s. a Sitzb. k. Boehm. Ges. d. Wiss. 212-249. 1892. a Hansgirg, A. Physiologische und Phycophytologische Un suchungen. 241. 1893. Hansgirg, A. Tromsoe Museums Aarshefter,” 13: 146, Pla, Sig. 17-22. Harvey, W. H. A Manual of the British Algae. 1841. Huber, J. Observations sur la valeur morphologique et b logique des poils et des sois dans les Chaetophor¢es. Journ. d e Bot. 6: 322. 1892. * Huber, J. Contributions a la Connaissance des Chaetophorée: Epiphytes et Endophytes et de leurs Affinites. Ann. Sei. N ut. Bot. VII. 16: 265-359. Pl. 8-18. 1892. = Haber, J. Sur un Etat Particulier du Chaetonema irre Nowakowski. Bull. Herb. Boiss. 2: 163-166, Pl. 1. 1894. Kjellman, F. R. The Algae of the ArcticSea, 286. Pl. 29, fig. 4 Kuetzing, F.T. Phycologia generalis 273. 1843. Moebius, M. Morphologie der haarartigen Organe bei den Alget Biol. Centr. 12: 84, 15 F. 1892. d 2 Rabenhorst, L. Flora Europaea Algarum Aquae Dulcis ts Sub- marinae. 3: 386, F. 111. 1868. ee Reinhardt, L. Die Copulation der Zoosporen bei Chlamydc nas pulvisculus Ehrb. und Stigeoclonium sp. Arbeiten der ! turforsch-Gesell. an der Univers. zu Charkoff. 10: 2 Plates. 187 Reinsch, P. F. Ein neues Genus der Chrooiepideae. Bot. Z 37: 361-366, Pl. 3 A., 6 Je 1879. Schenk, A. Handbuch der Botanik. 2:235. 1882. Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 633 I; Wille, N. Englerand Prantl's Die Naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien. I Teil. 2 Abteilung. 46 Lieferung. 101 1890. I. Wolle, F. Fresh Water Algue of the United States. 114. 1887. I. Wood, H. C. Jr. A Contribution to the History of the Fresh- Water-Algae of North America. 211. 1872. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE XXXI. Fig. 1. Pebble 1“ from Bellefonte spring, two-thirds natural size. Thalli forming an almost continuous stratum. Fig. 2. Pebble “2”. Thalli forming isolated dises. PLATE XXXII. Fig. 1. Portion of mature thallus in Pilinia stage. Row of plate cells bearing upright filaments the terminal! cells of which are de- veloping gonidangia. (X 300). Fig. 2. End of branch showing dichotomous branching like that of a Chaetophora. (X 300). Fig. 3. Another example of dichotomous branching. (X 300). 4. Bristle terminating upright filament. (X 300). Fig. 5. Bristle developed directly from basal cell. (X 300). Fig. 6. Branch showing how vegetative cells taper down to width of bristle. (X 300). Fig. 7. Branch showing cells with contents dividing up into megazoo- q spores. (X 300). Fig. 8. Reproductive cell given off from upper portion of filamentary 7 : cell at right angles to filament. (X 300). Fig. 9. Similar cell given off from lower portion of filamentary cell. . (X 300). 8 Fig. 10. Cell containing but one megazoospore. (X 300). 3 Cell containing two megazoospores. (X 300). Cells showing spores crowded together. (X 300). 4 Fig. 13. Cell containing four megazoospores. (X 300). Fig. 14 and 15. Gonidangia appearing large and roomy. (X 300). Fig. 16. Gonidangium appearing crowded. & 300). Fig. 17. Megazoospores. (X 300). Fi. 18 and 19. Sporiferous branches. (X 300). 5 20. A crystal plate of calcium carbonate showing apertures made 21 555 by Pilinia fllaments around which the lime is secreted. (X 300). . A transverse section of crystal plate. (X 300). 22. Branch with crystal fragment in natural position. (X 300). 23. Branch showing enlarged terminal cells. (X 300). 24. A group of cells,terminated by a bristle,which may be a sporife- rous branch. (X 300). PLATE XXXIII. 1. Portion of mature thallus in Stigeoclonium stage. (X 287). . 2. Upper portion of primary filament showing ordinary elongated cylindrical cells alternating with groups of branch-bearing short cells. (X 160). 634 Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. 12, 13. Vegetative cells in the act of developing into Palmella e * 10. 11. . 13. 14. us . 15 and 16, 17 and 18, 19 and 20. First appearance of branching. 2. N . 22 and 23. Showing thallus developed from a single spore. . 24, . 25. . 26. . 27 and 28. Prostrate branches forming upright filaments. 9 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Filament showing general aspect of plant with characteristic — mode of branching. (X 29). i Group of short, branch-bearing cells in detail. (X 300), Cells with five spores having pigment spots facing in same di- rection. (X 300). 1 Megazoospores moving actively in the cells thereby causing the a walls to become distended. (X 300). Showing spores in early stages of development. (X 300). Spores lying with their longest diameter r OF; of the f ment. (X 300). A cell through the end wall of which the spores 3 out through a second cell. (X 300). Cell containing zoospores in motion the wall irregularly ¢ tended according as the spores changed their position. (X 3000. Detached branch of Pilinia thallus, showing one branchlet u dergoing transformation into Palmella state. (X 300). (X 300). PLATE XXXIV. Further transformation of cells shown in Plate III, fig. 13. (X 300). a Isolated cells becoming connected by means of the thick tinous coatings. (X 300). Bis Isolated cells dividing into two and four parts. a. Division of contents into two portions accompanied by the separation of the pyrenoid. b. Division into four portions of contents and pyrenoids. (X 300). Plate cell developing zoospores. (X 300). Microzoospores. (X 300). Zygotes. (X 300), Megazoospores of Stigeoclonium. The following are all developmental pare of meg forming thalli: Spore in the act of withdrawing cilia. Spores showing pigment spot in posterior portion due to 0 elongation of hyaline end. . Further growth accompanied by division into two cells. Showing recent division with pyrenoids lying close ogee opposite sides of the new wall. Division of pyrenoid into two portions preparatory to fo tion of wall. 5 Filament with hyaline end of spore still visible. Filament of three cells showing the tendency to curve. Three unbranched filaments becoming connected into one tł Thallus building up a somewhat circular plate. Two fllaments combined into one thallus. Cells very large cylindrical for the most part, instead of globose. Filament with numerous branches. Tilden: PILINIA AND STIGEOCLONIUM. 635 s. 29. Side view of prostrate filament showing upright branches 3 borne on convex side. Fig. 30. Copy of Cienkowski’s figure 19, pl. 1. Bot. Ztg. 34, 1876. Side * view of prostrate filament showing upright branches borne on concave side. PLATE XXXV. . 1, Creeping filament showing characteristic “bow-shape.” 2 and 3. Pilinia plants, the latter ee arrived at the fruiting stage. 4, 5 and 6. Showing an example of different growth in young thalli. . 7. Under surface view of a plate (in diagram). Showing position of a single branch. 2 8. Same branch from nature. 636 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XXXVIII. POLLINATION AND REPRODUCTION OF 4 LYCOPERSICUM ESCULENTUM. a S Bruce FINK. The experiments presented in this paper were nearly al performed three years ago, and it was then the purpose of the writer to carry on the work through several years so as to in- clude experiments on reciprocal crossing, close- -pollination, — atavism and the prepotency of foreign pollen. It has not been 3 possible for me to carry on such experiments during the inter- vening years because not permanently located during the | 4 season where such work must be done. Hence, since there 19 1 much of interest in the single year's work, it is thought best to publish it, hoping that the experiments which could not be completed in a single year may be brought to a conclusion at some future time. = I shall not attempt to enumerate the various papers consulted - 4 in this work. Though a few of the experiments den a below have been tried before with tomatoes and some of the remaining ones with other plants, I need not give reference; 1 4 to the published accounts, which are well known to botanist generally. So far as I can ascertain, others of the experim cil 2 have never been performed before. Of those that have been tried, the results here recorded are not all in accord with those published previously. 1 During experiments in pollination, the plant operated on must be covered while being used, and it is an advantage to know just how long the plant must be under the screen, in order to be certain that it is neither exposed to wind and in- sects too soon nor kept covered longer than is necessary to The experiment to ascertain the time necessary was conducted as follows. Nine tomato flowers were castrated by removing the stamens and marked (1), after twenty-four hours another nine were castrated and marked (2), and after another twenty four hours a third nine were treated in the same way and marked (3). The twenty-seven were pollinated at once so that one third were pollinated forty-eight hours, another third Fink: LYCOPERSICUM ESCULENTUM. 637 twenty-four hours and the last third immediately after castra- tion. At the end of twelve hours the styles were removed from one third of each lot; at the end of eighteen hours the second third were treated in the same way; and at the end of twenty-four hours the remaining third. The number of hours intervening between pollination and removing the style was marked on each card. The markings on the cards were 1-12, 1-18, 1-24, 2-12, 2-18, 2-24, and 3-12, 3-18, 3-24, and there were of course three cards for each marking. The tomatoes which matured bore the following cards; 1-12, 1-12, 1-18, 1-18, 1-24, 1-24 1-24, 2-24, 2-24. 3-24. Thus twelye hours was found to be long enough for the pollen-tube to pass through the style in most cases when the stigma was mature when pollinated. Later, I tried six and nine hours, allowing forty-eight hours to inter- vene between castration and pollination. No fruit developed in the last two experiments. Some very interesting experiments were tried to ascertain how much care must be used in order to get the pollen on the stigma at the proper time. Two questions of interest arise. One is the length of time that the stigma is in such condition _ that pollen placed on it will be effective. I found the time to . be longer in large flowers than in smaller ones and longer in monstrous flowers than in normal ones. I suppose this is be- cause it takes the large pistils longer to reach maturity aud begin to wither, The time must be counted from the moment the bud opens enough to expose the pistil, which is usually a protruded somewhat beyond the stigma. The stigma is not in the best condition for holding the pollen at this time, but a 4 sufficient amount adheres, is more effective and passes through the style sooner than when placed on the stigma later. This Was very evident in a case in which the stigmas were pollinated as soon as the flowers had been castrated and before the an- ther- cells had opened. The number of tomatoes produced was larger than from flowers pollinated when the stigma was more 4 mature, and the ovaries began to enlarge sooner than in cases in ͤ which flowers of the same age were allowed to stand longer | 4 for the stigmas to get in better condition for pollination. Pol- 13 len placed on the stigma past prime makes very slow work if 1 effective at all. Counting in the way indicated above, the time is from four to eight days, and during the first day or two the flowers cannot be close-pollinated as the pollen-sacs are not yet open—an arrangement favoring cross-pollination. 638 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. N E E 25 The other part of this experiment is to find about the same facts for the pollen. I found beyond doubt that it is not effec- tive so soon as the stigma of the flower will hold the pollen- grains. To ascertain this, I castrated several flowers just opening and used their pollen to pollinate other castrated — flowers. I also pollinated the former castrated flowers with mature pollen. At this stage the pollen-grains were not effec- _ tive in a single instance. But the stigmas were acted on by — the mature pollen, producing fruit. To ascertain how long the pollen retains its vitality, I placed some in a box and pollinated castrated flowers with it for seven days in succes- sion. It had lost none of its potency on the seventh day. Seven days is surely long enough to give every chance for cross-pollination by the pollen carried by the bees, and also the pollen may remain on the stigma seven days while the latter is developing if necessary. After the seventh day the pollen begins to lose its vitality and after the fourteenth n not germinate. 4 Another experiment was the study of the anthers to ascer- tain when and how the pollen sacs shed the pollen. When the corolla begins to open the stamens are of a greenish-xyellocw color, and the sacs are completely closed. In about two days the stamens have assumed a bright yellow color, and the sacs _ 3 are beginning to open. The best time to get pollen for arti- fical pollination is soon after or just before the sacs begin to open, when it is easily scraped out ona knife-blade and trans- ferred to the stigma of another flower. The average time re- quired for sacs to begin to open after the corolla has started to expand is two days, but there is a considerable amount of varia- tion in the time due to the size of the flower and to the uygro- metric state of the atmosphere. The pollen-sacs open soone in small than in large flowers, and sooner in dry than in weather. In very dry weather while castrating small fic as those of the Red Cherry tomato, or the Yellow Plum tom as soon as the corolla has begun to open, the anthers occasi ally snapped open, and the pollen could be seen flying ab like dust. It will be seen that the safest time to castrate is o a rainy day or while the dew is on, and that the best time to pollinate artificially is in the dryest part of the day. Seventy-five flowers were castrated and left to the influer of wind and insects. Some were castrated just as the calyx was beginning to open, others as soon as the corolla had begun to open, and the rest after the latter had fully expanded. All Fink: LYCOPERSICUM ESCULENTUM. 639 the stigmas came to best condition for pollination; but of the seventy-five flowers only one produced fruit, and this was a flower of the Yellow Plum tomato that had been castrated just after the corolla had expanded. I cannot be certain that this small flower was not accidently pollinated in castrating. Besides the one matured fruit three ovaries started to grow and aborted at about one-fourth the size of a pea. The failure to get better results from castrated flowers, taken with the fact that flowers confined alone under a screen are as uniformly pollinated as those not confined, seemed to indicate that tomatoes are usually close-pollinated; but later results tend to prove that they are not in so many instances as was supposed at first. It was thought that the flowers might have been consider- ably injured in castration and that the exposed pistil might have suffered from the heat of the sun. To ascertain the facts as nearly as possible all but one stamen were removed from about fifty flowers. They were nearly as uniformly pollinated as those not treated. This experiment, as well as the fact brought out later that castrated flowers, when pollinated by hand, pro- _ duce fruit as uniformly as those left to nature, proves that _ the injury is not considerable. The study of the relation of insects to cross-pollination of - tomatoes was a very interesting one. Various kinds of Coleo- _ ptera, Diptera and Hymenoptera were observed, but none visited the flowers more than other parts of the plants. I _ watched for Lepidoptera at various portions of the day, but did not find a single species at work on the tomatoes. I watched the humble-bees repeatedly at work. One or more were in the patch at almost any moment of the day, and sometimes as many as a dozen were working at once. They go from flower to flower, visiting about six in a minute. This slowness as wellas the rapid movements of their maxillae and limbs, show that they are gathering pollen. In the work they stand over the top of the stigma, turning themselves about upon it. As the stigma usually extends beyond the stamens it is the more probable that _ the bees must pollinate some of the flowers. To make sure that they get the pollen I examined different portions of the body under the microscope and found the pollen-grains on every part examined, so that any part of the body coming in contact With the stigma might effect a cross. Besides the pollen scat- __ tered over the body large masses were found on the posterior tarsi and tibiz. To make certain that this pollen was not in- _ jured by the bees I gathered the pollen from the posterior * 640 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. limbs of one and placed it on castrated flowers, which produced fruit. 9 Cucumbers were growing beside the tomatoes, and the hum ble bees preferred the flowers of the latter though occasionally — seen in the cucumber patch. In no instance did I see a bee pass from one kind of plant to the other. A bee working on tomato flowers when disturbed went to another tomato flower, and it driven from the patch, did not stop for other kinds of flowers growing in the vicinity. Red clover was growing along one side of the patch and even this did not tempt a bee that had been working on the tomatoes. Of course the fact that the bees do not pass from one kind of flowers to another helps cross-pollin- — ation very materially. My seventy-five castrated flowers left exposed were not bol. linated by bees for the reason that they do not visit e N flowers. I purposely castrated part of the flowers of a vine by removing both stamens and corolla, another part by removi the stamens only and left the remaining flowers uncastrat I found that the bees pay no attention to flowers castrated in the first way, approach those castrated in the second way, but seldom so much as touch them before they find the stamens gone and pass on. Tomatoes are seldom, if ever, crossed by the wind. If tk were, I should certainly have gotten more tomatoes from castra- ted flowers. Mr. C. J. Pennock writes of shaking the pollen off, into a wooden vessel of his own make, to use for pollinating flowers grown in doors in winter. In flowers grown out of doors, the pollen escapes from the pollen-sacs as fast as the: open; and large amounts of it must blow about as pollen cannot be gathered from garden grown plants in the way described above in any considerable quantity. Some of this pollen in he atmosphere must fall on the stigmas, and I can only account for the fact that fertilization is not effected in this way by sup- posing that more pollen is required to produce fruit t finds its way to the stigma by being blown about in the air. Experiments were carried on to find the causes of one s fruit. Tomatoes with this defect noticeable are not common garden-grown vines except in those which develop from 1 strous flowers, though Prof. L. H. Bailey finds it quite com in winter-grown fruit. Suspecting the cause to be that the len is not deposited on all parts of the stigma, I tried euttir off one side. The result is usually a one-sided tomato, but ne always. Later I got fruit in about one case in ten where I he * — Fink: LYCOPERSICUM ESCULENTUM. 641 cut off the stigma entirely just as the bud was opening. It ap- pears from this that the pollen will occasionally germinate on the cut end of the style after the stigmatic surface is removed, hence my failure to get one-sided fruit in some instances when one side of the stigma had been removed. I also tried pollin- ating on one side only and got one-sided fruit as a result. The Handsomest and Best tomato was experimented with as follows: Twenty-five flowers were castrated as fast as they began to open and were pollinated with pollen from as many different varieties of tomatoes. Fifteen mature tomatoes re- sulted and four more aborted after beginning to grow, proba- bly from insufficient pollination. The other six severed their connection with the vine at the joint of the pedicel. The number of failures was no greater than in flower clusters that _ were marked and left to natural processes of pollination. In the experiments each stigma was pollinated only once. Later I tried crossing the Tree tomato, pollinating each castrated flower three days in succession. The result was fifteen toma- toes from sixteen castrations. For the purpose of studying the offspring of a cross the Tree tomato was-crossed with the Plum-shaped Yellow, the Pear- Shaped, the Red Cherry and Yellow Cherry varieties, as these represent the principal differences between the Tree tomato and other varieties as to shape and size of vine, fruit and leaves. The seeds were planted the next year, and I could not see that the vines, leaves or fruit showed a tendency to imitate the plants bearing them more than that from which the pollen was taken for pollination. The fruit was about intermediate be- _ tween the two plants crossed. However, more observation than I was able to make is necessary to settle this point. It has been supposed that crossing produces a difference in the size, shape and color of the tomato resulting from the cross. The largest tomato produced by crossing the Handsomest and Best was from across with the yellow Cherry tomato, which was my smallest variety. The crosses with the Large Yellow, Fellow Cherry and Yellow Plum-shaped varieties produced fruit as deep red as those not crossed. A cross with the Yel- low Plum-shaped tomato produced a tomato which happened to be more flattened than the Handsomest and Best tomatoes F usually are instead of a longer one. Close observation of a large number of tomatoes from crosses seems to show that the Size of the fruit is slightly increased and that the crossed 642 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 fruits have a greater tendency to be irregular than those not a crossed. 4 It has already been stated that flowers confined under a screen pollinate themselves. In these experiments only one bud was allowed to open under the screen during the time ot the experiment, and the cover was left over the planta week because the flowers were not castrated and were therefore more likely to be crossed. The first tomato produced in this way was one-half the usual size of the variety and contained forty eight seeds, the average number of seeds for the variety — being more than two hundred. The results were not always so marked, but on the whole, the fruits produced in this 7 are below the average size and usually contain fewer than the average number of seeds. The results as to the vines and fruits from such seeds could not be obtained the first year. I tried the effects of using large and small amounts of pollen with the following results. My tomatoes produced from large amounts were large and regular, produced a large number of seeds and did not fail to come to maturity in a single inst while those from small amounts were smaller in size, had fewer seeds, were not so regular in shape and several stopped growing at about the size of a pea. 4 I tried pollinating the castrated flowers of the Red Che: tomato with the pollen of Physalis pubescens, Datura stramo- nium and Solanum nigrum, making about fifty pollinations for each. With the last two, the ovary started to grow in two or three flowers, but they invariably aborted. With the first, 1 thought I was getting a fruit to develop fully. I got a fruit about two-thirds the usual size of the Red Cherry tomato, which contained only six seeds. I planted two of the seeds the next year and got the Red Cherry tomato, so this must have been a n instance of accidental and insufficient pollination in cast. . It is very probable that the instances in which the v ies started to grow were also cases of insufficient pollination by ac- cident and that the pollen of the other species mentioned abo had no effect whatever. 7 Of two flowers pollinated at about the same time, one is son times half grown before the other makes more than e growth to make certain the fact that fertilization has 2 place. The one that makes this rapid growth from the st ripens nearly as much in advance and is larger than the o that stops growing for a time. Other ovaries become aborted at about one-fourth the size of a pea, but hang on the vines Fink. LYCOPERSICUM ESCULENTUM. 643 a month or two. It is certain that these have been pollinated because flowers castrated and not pollinated always drop off in a week or ten days from the time of castration. I think there are two causes for this difference in development, i.e. insufficient pollination and lack of sufficient nourishment. The first, I think, is proven by the fact that in trying the effect of different amounts of pollen it was those flowers which received small amounts that aborted. As to the second, it is usually the 4 flowers farthest from the base of the cluster that stop growing for a time or abort. The fruits nearer the base begin to grow flrst and take most of the nourishment till fully grown. The process of castration was used so frequently in the ex- _ periments that a description of it will be in order. The best a time to castrate is just when the flowers are beginning to ex- pand. When the flower is fully expanded there is danger of 1 accidental pollination in castration, or that it has been already _ pollinated. Also the tissues are much softer just as the corolla begins to expand so that the stamens are easier to remove at this time. One way to castrate is to pull off the corolla as the stamens come with it. Another is to pull off the stamens one at a time with small forceps. By the first method the stamens : are pulled past the stigma, and in some small tomato flowers there may be remote possibility of accidental pollination even at this time. By the second method the stamens are pulled directly away from the stigma, and the danger of accidental _ pollination is thus largely avoided. The frames on which the screens were spread in these ex- _ periments were three and one-half feet square on the ground, and four feet high. This was large enough so that the vines did not touch them during the early part of the season when _ the experiments were performed. I made my first screen of _ Mosquito bar, but threw it aside for others made of cheese- cloth, on account of the smaller meshes. I do not know that the change was necessary, and could not see that the plants a were influenced in the least even by the latter kind of screen. - 644 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XXXIX. A RE-ARRANGEMENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES, Roscok PounD and FEDERICO E. CLEMENTS. In working over the Hyphomycetes of Nebraska for the forth- coming part 8 of the Flora of Nebraska, we were at once con- fronted with the question how to arrange the group. In deal- ing with the species reported from Nebraska we have been compelled to go over all the genera and a large number of the species reported from North America, and in so doing have become aware of many grounds for dissatisfaction with the prevailing arrangement. a We might indeed have been content to follow the arrange- ment of the Sylloge Fungorum, which has come into general use. This system is admirably adapted to finding forms and locating them in their proper place in the system. As a prae- tical key, its utility is not to be questioned. But such an arrangement does not commend itself, even in a group like the Hyphomycetes. Moreover, in practice, the Saccardian system is often somewhat unsatisfactory, so that it seemed to us at least worth the while to make a further attempt to bring order from the chaos prevailing in the group. When species have to be q ‘‘sought patiently under many genera,”* it would seem that further labors to define the genera are not misspent. In no group, indeed, are the genera more in need of thorough revis- ion. Being composed solely of form-génera—conidial and chlamydosporous forms of Ascomycetes, with a few stray mem- bers of autonomous groups such as Gymnoascaceae, Exobasidia- = ceae, etc.,—the Hyphomycetes are properly enough left to drift for themselves, and receive attention chiefly from collectors. The diverse forms which the same fungus often assumes , e of defining genera or even species. Fungi closely related ial 4 their mature fructification differ widely in their conidial — a *Syl. Fung. 4:1. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 645 forms, and even the conidial forms of the same genus differ so greatly as to be placed in the most diverse groups when found only by themselves. It is practically impossible to arrange the form-genera of the Hyphomycetes according to the mature forms. A considerable number are now known in all stages. For many species the perfect forms may be guessed at with more or less certainty. For more, they cannot be stated at all. In the case of a large part of the re- ported species the perfect forms are wholly unknown, if there are any. Such an arrangement being out of the question, the only plan would seem to be to arrange the forms according to their apparent structural relationship, as we would do in an autonomous group. This we have attempted todo. When we speak of relationship we must be understood as referring solely to structural similarity. In the case of autonomous forms this would be taken as an index to genetic relationship. In such a group as the Hyphomycetes it can only be used as a basis of arrangement in dealing with forms with which collectors must constantly have to do. * . It may be asked whether in such a group as the Imperfect Fungi, an artificial arrangement after the manner of a key, such as that adopted by Saccardo, is not the best. In a certain _ sense there can be no natural arrangement of such a group. But on the other hand a large portion of the Hyphomycetes have _ certain autonomy. They are constant, and they develop and - reproduce themselves indefinitely without attaining any differ- ent form. Besides, the Saccardian arrangement is by no means as easy of application as it may appear. Phragmosporous _ genera with species having continuous conidia are not uncom- mon, the line between Didymosporeae and Phragmosporeae is always shadowy, and Dictyosporeae are very apt not to have _ uniformly muriform spores. Experience with this arrange- ment soon convinces one that unless he knows a genus, the - neatly planned system will often do little towards enabling him do identify it. For such reasons we have determined to attempt a re- arrange: ment of the genera based on structural similarity and relation _ ship, endeavoring to treat the form-genera in the same manner in which one would deal with autonomous groups. __In the Saccardian arrangement the Hyphomycetes are divided into four families, the Mucedineae in which the sporophores are free and always hyaline or light-colored, the Dematieae in _ which the sporophores are free and hyphae and conidia are 646 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. dark-colored or black, the Stilbeae in which the sporophores are collected into a stipe, and the T'ubercularieae in which the sporophores are collected in a waxy or gelatinous wart-like head or tuft. The last two groups are very natural ones, and have been retained with some internal alterations. But the two former are often so difficult to distinguish, even by Sac- cardo's characters, and do such violence to obvious relation- ships, many times splitting up genera solely because of color, that they cannot be accepted as he has constituted them. So, also, his subdivision of the families according to the septation of the spores does too much violence to plain relationships to be maintainable, even if entirely reliable as a key. The forms included in the Mucedineae and Dematieae of Sac- cardo fall readily into a number of what may be called tribes, based upon the sporophores. These fall into two higher groups, in one of which the sporophore is well developed and usually much-branched, while in the other it is less developed, and either scarcely to be distinguished from the conidia or at most simple and rigid. If objection be m&de to this arrangement as making it more difficult for one unfamiliar with the genera to place them readily, it may be answered that the latter function belongs not to a systematic arrangement, but to an artificial key or synopsis. The best current dispositions of the larger groups,—such as the Black-fungi, e. g. - are open to the same objection. For the former of the two groups last mentioned we have retained the name Mucedinaceae. For the latter we should have been glad to use the name Dematiaceae. But, as Dematium cannot be included in the group, we could not well do so. The nomenclature of families and other groups above genera is not settled. In the absence of rule or authoritative usage to determine such matters, we have employed the first name used to designate a group corresponding to the one in question in some degree, altering the termination to conform to prevailing usage. In the nomenclature of genera and species we have followed the Rochester Rules. Where forms commonly included in the Hyphomycetes have “4 been shown to belong to autonomous groups, we have omitted them, so that the reader will miss Microstroma, Myxotrichum, Ceratium, and many other familiar genera. In the same way we have omitted Aspergillus and Penicillium. They have a proper place elsewhere, and we see no reason why those forms ia which ascus fructification is yet unknown should not be Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 647 placed as a sort of appendix after the perfectly known species in the same manner in which Aecidium follows Puccinia. The following scheme will show the groups we propose and their relationship: SPORODESMIACEAE. : TORULEAE. CHALAREAE, RAMULARIBAE. HELMINTHOSPORIEAE. DIPLOSPORIBAE. HELICOSPORIEBAE. SPORODESMIEAE. MYXOTRICHELLEAE. MUCEDINACEAE, TRICHOTHECIBAE. ARTHROBOTRYTEAE. TRICHODERMEAE. BOTRYTEAE. VERTICILLIEAE, PERICONIEAE. POLYACTIDEAE. DEMATIEAE. STACHYBOTRYTEAE. STILBACEAE. COREMIBAE. ISARIEBAE. TUBERCULARIACEAE. TUBERCULARIBAE. VOLUTELLEAE. FUSARIEAE. CYLINDROCOLLEAE. Order HY PHOMYCETEAE. | Family SPORODESMIACEAE (Fr.) Sporodesmiacei Fr. Syst. Myc. 3:489. 1829. bores free, short and scarcely distinct from the con- dals, or if distinct, simple or subsimple, and rigid. Tribe Toruleae (FR.} : Torulei Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand. 2:504. 1849. _ Mycelium wanting or but slightly developed, sporophore either entirely wanting or breaking up into chains of conidia, conidia catenulate, not enclosed in a sheath. Torula and Alysidium are quite closely related, perhaps the 1 most substantial difference being in the color. But from this _ point the group falls readily into two series, the one composed 648 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES light-colored ones. This is one of the few groups in which the distinction between the light-colored and the dark-colored — forms may be maintained without necessitating the separation of nearly related forms. a 1. TORULA Pers. Syn. Fung, 693. 1801 (as a sub- genus). Including Hormiscium Kunze, Sac. Syl. Fung. 4: 206. 1886. Vegetative hyphae decumbent or none; sporophore very | short and scarcely distinct from the chains of conidia; conidia — uniform black or brown, continuous, oblong, fusoid, globose, : or cuboid. All gradations are met with between species with oblong and : fusoid and those with cuboid conidia. Hence it does not a possible to maintain Hormiscium which is only distinguishes by its cuboid conidia. About 30 species are described or reported from the Unite States. 2. SPEIRA CoRDA. Ic. Fung. 1:9. 1887. q Botryosporium Schw. Syn. Am. Bor. 306. 1834, not CorpA 1831. 4 Symphragmidium Strauss, Sturm D. C. Fl. III. 34.41. 1853, Vegetative hyphae creeping, sparingly branched, subh — 3 line, or in some species apparently wanting; sporophores very — short, making the conidia appear subsessile or short-stipitate; conidia fuliginous, catenulate, in two or more series from each sporophore, the chains at first cohering and producing the ap- pearance of a single muriform-septate spore, but separating: . maturity. a 5 species are reported from the United States. 3. DICTYOSPORIUM Corpa. Ic. Fung. 2:87. 1838. Hyphae none, conidia ovate or subcordate, composed of 4 glutinated parallel series of septate filaments. 0 Differs from Speira in that the chains of cells do not separ at maturity and in being without a sporophore. . 3 species are reported from the United States. 4. BISPORA Corba. Ic. Fung. 1:9. 1837. Sporophores very short; conidia oblong, one-septate, ous, catenulate, the chains simple or branched. 3 species are reported from the United States. * Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 649 5. SEPTONEMA Corba. Ic. Fung.1:9 1887. Vegetative hyphae creeping, often obsolete; sporophores very short and scarcely distinct from the conidia or wanting; conidia oblong, many-septate, brown, catenulate, the chains simple or branched. As here limited contains 20 species reported from the United States. Stigmina liriodendri E. & E. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1893: 171. 1893, goes here. 6. SIRODESMIUM DENor. Micromyc. It. Decas 5:16. 1845. Vegetative hyphae creeping, few or none; sporophores short or very short so that the chains of conidia are subsessile; con- idia ovate-oblong, clathrate-septate, often echinulate, catenu- late, constricted more or less at the articulations, the chains simple or branched. 8 species are reported from the United States. 7. ALTERNARIA Nxxs. Syst. 2:72. 1816. Sporophores fasciculate, more or less erect, simple or sub- simple, short; conidia clavate flask-shaped, muriform-septate, olivaceous, catenulate. The conidia are connected by narrow isthmus-like contractions which are quite characteristic. 8 species are reported from the United States. They are, like the species of Macrosporium, conidial forms of Pleospora, | chiefly of P. herbarum. Fumago Pers. Myc. Eur. 1:9. 1822, must be used instead of Capnodium Mont. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. III. 11: 233. 1848, for a genus of Perisporiaceae. As almost all the species generally included under this name are stages of various species belong- | ing to the other genus, and the only one reported for North America which is retained by Saccardo (F. vagans) is of that Sort, a new name is unnecessary. 8. ALYSIDIUM Kunze, Myk. Heft. 1:18. 1817. Oospora WALLR. Fl. Crypt. Germ. 2:182. 1833. Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:11. 1886. Cespitose; sporophores short, simple or sparingly branched; . a _ conidia concatenate, globose or broadly elliptical, hyaline or 9 a light-colored. Acrosporium NEES. 1816 was founded on Oidium monilioides and applied to this group by Persoon in 1822. Alysidium was 3 4 founded for A. fulvum KUNZE, QOospora fulva Sacc. & Vod. * Bonorden, Handb. 35. 1851, took up Alysidium and described 650 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. several species, one a Torula, but the rest included in © by Saccardo, There would seem to be no reason why / should not be preferred even by those who would restrict ti rule of priority by a year-limitation. The species reported from the United States to be inclu in the genus as here limited are: ALYSIDIUM ALBIPES (K.) Oidium albipes Px. Rep. N. 7. Mus. 30: — (57). 1878. ALYSIDIUM CANDIDULU™M (SACC.) Ooapora candidula Sac. Mich, 2: 545, 1882. ALysipiumM Compactum (C. & E.) Oidtum compactum C. & E. Grev. 678, 1877. ALysiprum cunorpreum (S8acc. & Ext.) Oospora cuboidea Sacc. & Ect. Mich, 2: 576. 1882. ALYSIDIUM CUCUMERIS (PK.) Oospora cucumeris Px. Rep. N. V. Mus, 41:—(80), 1888 ALYSIDIUM FASCICULATUM (Grev.) Pound & Clements Bot, Surv. Nebr. 4:37. Acrosportum fasciculatum Guev. Fl. Ed. 469. 1824, Oidium fasciculatum Berx. Smith's Engl. FI. 3: 30. 1836. Oospora fasciculata Saco. & Voou. Syl. Fung. 4: 11. 1886. ALYSIDIUM FULVUM Kunze, Myk. Heft. 1:18. 1817. ALYSIDIUM HYALINULUM (SACC.) Torula hyalinula Sac. Mich. 1: 538. 1879. Oospora hyalinula Sacc. Mich. 2: 453. 1882. ALYSIDIUM INSULARE (THUEM.) Torula insularis Tavuem. Flora 61:—(6). 1878. ALYSIDIUM LACTIS (F RES.) Oidium lactis Fres. Beitraege 23. Pl. 3. 41. 1850. ALYSIDIUM OVALISPORUM ( BERK.) Torula ovalispora Berk. Smith's Engl. Fl. &: 350, 1836. ALYSIDIUM PALLIDUM (B. & Ray.) Torula pallida B. & Rav. Grev. 3:14. 1873. ALYSIDIUM PULVINATUM (B. & C.) Oidium pulvinatum B. & C. Grev. 3: 112. 1875. ALYSIDIUM TULIPIFERAE (E. & M. Oospora tulipiferae E. & M. Am. Nat. 18: 1004. 1882. 9. FUSIDIUM Lx. Obs. 1:6. 1809. Sporophores short, simple; conidia fusiform, concat hyaline or light-colored. 2 species are reported from the United States. 10. CYLINDRIUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 34. 1851. Mycelium scanty or none; sporophores very short, sc. or not at all distinct from the conidia; conidia long-cylin obtuse at the ends, concatenate, the chains of conidia simp branched, hyaline or light-colored. 2 species are reported from the United States. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 651 II. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 34. 1851. Sjporophores very short and scarcely distinct from the con- idia, or in parasitic species distinct but short and inflated or _ denticulately sub-lobate at the apex; conidia oblong or cylin- _ drical, one to many septate, concatenate, the chains often branched. Me have followed Dr. Halsted in including in this genus the species of Ramularia with short simple sporophores and chains of conidia, usually branched. 4 s here limited, contains 14 species reported from the United States. Of the saprophytic species the type is: — seprarom (BoN,) Pounp Am, Nat. 23: 163. 1890. Cylindrium septatum Box. Handb. Alg. Myk. B. 1851, Septorylindrium bonordentt Sacc. Mich. 2:15. 1880. The parasitic species, including those brought over from _ Ramularia, are: , SEPTOOYLINDRIUM AREOLA (ATKINSON). Ramularia areola Arkinson. Bot. Gaz. 15; 168. 1800. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM CANADENSE (E. & E.) Ramularia canadensis E. & EK. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1891: 84. 1801. SEPTOCYLINORLUM CONCOMITANS (EUV. & Houw.) Harsrep, Seymour & Earle Ee. Fung. No. 200. 1893, Ramularia concomitans ELL. & How. Journ. Myc, 4:2. 1888. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM EUONYMI (E. & K.) Ramularia ewonymi E. & K. Journ. Myc. 1:3. 1888. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM RANUNCULI PK. Rep. N. V. Mus. 34:--(46). 1883. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM REPENS (E. & E.) Ramularia repens E. & E. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1891: 88. 1801. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM RUFO-MACULANS (PR.) Ramularia rufo-maculans Px. Rep. N. V. Mus 34:—(46). 1883. SEPTOCYLINDRIUM SCIRPINUM Px. Rep. N. V. Mus. 45:—(93). 1993. _ SEPTOCYIANDRIUM SPIRAEAE (PR.) 4 Ramularia spiraeae Px. Rep. N. V. Mus. 34:—(46). 1888. 4 Ellis and Everhart (Journ. Myc. 1:79) include this under _Ramularia ulmariae CKE., but in the absence of further 9 data we retain the name spiraeae. R. ulmariae seems a true Ramularia S SProcyLINDRIUM sTOLONIFeRUM (E. & E.) Ramularia stolunifera E. & E. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1891: 88. 1801. ss SgprocyniNDRIUM sUBRUFUM (ELL. & Holw.) i Ramularia subrufa ELL. & Houw. Journ. Mye. 4:2. 1888. we 171 * 12. POLYSCYTALUM Riess, Bor. Zeit. 11: 138. 1853. __ Sporophore rigid, simple or slightly branched, hyaline or 3 fuliginous; conidia cylindrical, truncate at both ends, conca- 4 tenate, resembling joints of the sporophores. 2 species are reported from the United States. 652 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 18. HELICOCEPHALUM Tuaxt. Bot. Gaz. 16:201. 1891. 4 Vegetative hyphae small, creeping over the substratum; — sporophores erect, simple, continuous, spirally coiled at the apex, the spiral portions becoming septate and constricted at intervals, forming at maturity a chain of large, nm thick-walled spores. Contains but one species. D 14. MONILIA Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung 40. 1797. A Sporophores erect, septate, irregularly branched, here nd there minutely denticulate, each projection giving rise to a chain of conidia; conidia globose, elliptical, or lemon shaped. The sporophores are long and well developed, and in some species at first appear to attain such size as to distinguish th vs from the rest of the Toruleae. But the hyphae break up into long chains of conidia at maturity, and in many other species the sporophore is not to be distinguished from a much branck chain of conidia. Between these types all gradations are to t found, even in the same species. Like Alysidium, a somewhat heterogeneous group. The p sitic forms belong to Sclerotinia. 15 species are reported from the United States. Oospora similis Sacc. is the same as Monilia aureo-fulva C&E which must become: MONILIA SIMILIS ( BERK.) : Oidtum simile Berk. Lond. Journ. Bot. 4:310. Pl. 12 f. 4. 1845. Monilia aureo-fulva C. & E. Grev. 8: 12. 1886. Oidium Lk., as now limited, contains nothing but cor — stages of Erysipheae. Most of the species are now well e 4 known in all stages, and it does not seem necessary to burden this group with them longer. a Tribe Chalareae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:33. 1886. Including Sporoschismeae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:486. Sporophore erect, simple, scarcely distinct from the con: hyaline or fuscous, surrounded by a sheath; conidia ca ulate, continuous or septate, hyaline or fuscous. : 15. CHALARA CORDA. Ic. Fung. 2:9. 1838. Sporophore simple, erect, hyaline; sheath more or less s¥ len, fuscous; conidia continuous, cylindrical, truncate, by i 5 species are reported from the United States. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 653 16. SPOROSCHISMA B. & Br. Gard. Chron. 1847: 540. 1847. Sporophore simple, erect, fuscous; sheath cylindrical, fusc- ous; conidia many-septate, oblong-cylindrical, fuscous. Contains one species. 17. SPORENDONEMA Desm. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. I. II: 246. 1827, Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect; conidia formed within the sporophores and pushing out in chains, _ hyaline, becoming fuscous, globose or ellipsoid, continous. Sporendonema casei DESM. is an Alysidium. The genus as now limited, was defined by Oudemans, Ver. Acad. Amsterd. 1885: 115. I species is described from the United States. Tribe Ramularieae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:196. 1886. Parasites; sporophores distinct from the conidia, attaining some length, simple or sub-simple; conidia solitary, or in Ram- _ ularia sometimes sub-catenulate, acrogenous or acro-pleuroge- nous on flexuose or nodulose sporophores. 18. OVULARIA Sacc. Mich. 2:17. 1880. Sporophores erect, hyaline, sometimes slightly branched, nodulose or subdenticulate towards the apex, or entire; conidia globose or ovoid, continuous, hyaline, acro-pleurogenous or in some species acrogenous, sometimes sub-catenulate. Mlassee has removed to this genus all of the species of Ramu- _ laria with continuous spores, as a consistent following of Sac- _ eardo’s arrangement requires. We have preferred to limit it to those species with ovoid spores, though inclined to think it Still better to unite Ovularia and Didymaria with Ramularia. As here limited, contains 9 species reported from the United States. The most common is: ss OVULARIA MONOSPORIA (WEsT.) Oidium monosporium West. Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg. 2:252, 1863. Peronospora obliqua COOKE. Micr. Fung. 160. 1865. Ramularia obovata FK. Symb. Myc. 108. 1869. Ovularia obovata Sacc. Fung. Ital. 972. 1881. Ovularia obliqua Ovp. Hedw. 22:85, 1883. 4 10 HADOTRICHUM FEL. Symb. Mye. 221. 1869. Sporophores short, simple, rather thick and stout or in some species sub-nodulose or flexuose, fuscous, fasciculate at the base; conidia black or fuscous, continuous, globose, elliptical, or ovoid, solitary acrogenous. ‘ee. 3 4 species are reported from the United States. Some of the Species are conidial forms of Scirrhia. 654 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 20. DIDYMARIA Corba. Ic. Fung. 6:8. 1854. Sporophores simple or sub-simple, fasciculate, hyaline; con idia acrogenous or acro-pleurogenous on nodulose sporophores, 4 hyaline, elliptical-ovate or broad-oblong, one-septate. 5 4 species reported from the United States. The type is: 1 DipYMARIA DiIpyMA (UNd) Pounp. Am. Nat. 23:163, 1880, 7 Ramularta didyma Unoer Exanth. 160, 1833. Didymarta ungert Cornva Anlelt. PL B. J. 9, J. 1842. Bostrichonema CkS., with simple, erect, spirally flexuous spo- rophores, belongs here. No species are reported for this country. : 4 4 21. RAMULARIA Uncer. Exanth. 169. 1838. ‘3 Sporophores fasciculate, simple or with short, tene branchlets, often flexuous, nodulose, or denticulate towards the apex, hyaline or light colored; conidia acrogenous or aro- pleu- rogenous on the denticulations, hyaline, sometimes sub caten- ulate, oblong-cylindrical, typically many-septate, sometimes one-septate or continuous. * Ovularia and Didymaria are separated from this genus by tk shape of the spores. All three, as well as Cercospora are m up of conidial forms of Sphaerella. About 60 species are reported for the United States. 5 ia 22. CERCOSPORA FRERS. Beitraege 90. 1863. Virgasporium CKE. Grev. 3:182. 1875. Cercosporella Sacc. Mich. 2:20. 1880. Sporophores fasciculate, simple, or sometimes sp branched, typically fuliginous, but in the sub- genus Cercospo rella hyaline, flexuous and nodulose or denticulate towards the apex; conidia acrogenous or pleurogenous from tooth-like p- jections below the apex of the sporophore, pale fuliginous o hyaline, vermiform or elongated cylindrical, usually attenuate above, many-septate. ‘¥ Cercospora is closely allied to Ramularia, but is well distin; uished by the shape of the conidia. The conidia are also mu 10 longer than in Ramularia. Some species might well be place in either genus. Including Cercosporella, about 400 species a reported from this country, and more are being described co tinually. Among the species which we think should be trans- ferred from Ramularia to Cercospora is R. virgaureae THUEM. Journ. Myc. 1:80. 1885. This would become Cercospora virg- aureae (THUEM.) E. & E. Journ. Myc. 5:69. 1889. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 655 23. SCOLECOTRICHUM Kunze & Scum. Myk. Heft. 1:10. 1817. Sporophores short, simple, subfasciculate, olivaceous or fuli- ginous, nodulose; conidia oblong or ovate, pleurogenous and acrogenous, olivaceous or green, one-septate. Resembles Ramularia ia the sporophores and shape of the conidia, but is well distinguished by the color. Differs from Passalora in the pleurogenous conidia. 8 species are reported from the United States. 24. PASSALORA Fries. Summ. Veg. Scand. 500. 1849. Fusicladium Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 80. 1851. Sporophores simple, subfasciculate, variable in length; co- nidia acrogenous, oblong, ovoid, subfusoid or subclavate, oli- vaceous or fuliginous, one:septate. While in typical forms Passalora and Fusicladium may be dis- tinguished by the long, filiform, septate sporophores of the former, and the short, straight, continuous sporophores of the latter, a large number of forms, ascribed to Fusicladtium, with long, septate sporophores render it difficult and useless to main- n the distinction. About 12 species are reported from the United States, includ- ing Fusicladium. ‘ Polythrincium Kze. & Scum. Myk. Heft. 1:13. 1817, has only one species, the conidial stage of Phyllachora trifolii. The sporophores are black, fasciculate, short and thick, and regu- _ larly flexuose or torulose, and the conidia are acrogenous and one: septate. 25. NAPICLADIUM Tavem. Hedw. 14:3. 1878. Sporophores fasciculate, short but not rigid, olivaceous or _ brown; conidia acrogenous, rather large, oblong, many-septate, dark colored or hyaline. Differs from Passalora in having many-septate conidia. 2 species are reported from the United States. 26. PIRICULARIA Sacc. Mich. 2:20. 1880. Sporophores erect, simple or sub simple, rather long, gray- ish or hyaline; conidia acrogenous, obclavate pyriform, 2— many septate. Our common species and the one other described from this ; 3 country seem to be connected with Phyllachora graminis. Tribe Helminthosporieae (Corba). Helminthosporiacei CORDA. Anleit. 1839. 656 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Vegetative hyphae creeping or obsolete; sporophores erect _ or ascending, elongated, typically much longer than the con- dia; 3 or branched, scarcely acervulate, hyaline or fuscous; ia single, rarely catenulate, solitary, hyaline or a acrogenous or pleurogenous. . 2 Most of the genera contain both saprogenous and phyllogen- ous species. The genera are very hard to limit satisfactorily, — though well marked in typical forms, and many species need to be transferred. The group is one of the most difficult 2 the Imperfect Fungi. a 27. CLADOSPORIUM LX. Obs. 2:37. 18138. 4 Sporophores erect or ascending, branched, elongated, tus. cous; conidia single, sometimes catenulate, acrogenous or 3 pleurogenous, oblong or ovoid to globose, fuscous, typic 7 one-septate, rarely 2-3-septate. = Many of the species need further examination. About ? are reported for the United States. a 28. HETEROSPORIUM Krorscn. Herb. Myc. 1: No. * 1832. K. Sporophores erect or ascending, sub acervulate, simple c ramulose, short, fuscous; conidia single, very rarely catenu- late, acrogenous or acro-pleurogenous, oblong, echinulate ¢ verrucose, many-septate. Well distinguished by the echinulate or verrucose conidia. — 18 species are reported from the United States. 775 rium sarraceniae MacMillan Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 18 214.1 having echinulate conidia, must be placed here. 29. HELMINTHOSPORIUM LX. Obs. 1:10. 1809. Including Brachysporium Sacc. Mich. 2:28. 1880. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores erect or ascendi often branched, elongated, septate, fuscous; conidia si acrogenous or acro-pleurogenous, smooth, en to c many-septate. As here limited, contains 70 species reported from this e try. The following changes are required by our Enie of the genus: 5 HELMINTHOSPORIUM CANADENSE (E. & E.) Brachysporium canadense E. & E. Journ. Myc. 7: 134. 1892. HELMINTHOSPORIUM PEDUNCULATUM (PECK). Clasterosporium pedunculatum Peck. Rep. N. T. Mus. 23:—(93). yor 4 Heiminthosporium attenuatum C.& P. Rep. N. Y. Mus. 29:—(50). Brachysporium gracile Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:430. 1 is the a same as Heterosporium gracile Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4: 480. 1886. 4 4 Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 657 30. STEMPHLYIUM Wa tir. Flor. Crypt. Germ. 2:300. 1833, Vegetative hyphae intricate, creeping; sporophores ascend- ing, irregularly branched, elongated, hyaline or fuscous; con- idia single, acrogenous, typically smooth, fuscous, globose to ovoid, muriform-septate. 6 species are reported from North America. 31. MACROSPORIUM Fr. Syst. Myc, 3:373. 1832. "i Including Mystrosporium Cornpa. Ic. Fung. 1:12. 1837. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores erect or ascending, Simple or sub-ramose, elongate, fuscous; conidia single, acro- genous, sometimes acro- pleurogenous, fuscous, oblong to clavate, muriform-septate. Including Mystrosporium, about 80 species are reported from this country. The larger part of them belongs to Pleospora her- barum. C The following changes are necessitated * our limitation of the genus: MACROSPORIUM ATERRIMUM (B. & CC.) Mystrosporium aterrimum B. & C. Cooke Black Moulds Pt. 2 f. 18. 1877. MACROSPORIUM CURTISII ( BERK.) Mystrosporium curtisii Buuk. Grev. 3708. 1878. Mystrosporium spraguei Cooke. Black Moulds. Pl. f 17. 1877. MACROSPORIUM ERECTUM (E. & E.) erectum E. & E. Journ. Myc. 4:53. 1888. MACROSPORIUM MELANOSPORUM (B. & C. Helminthasportum melanosporum B. & C. Grev. 37104. 1875, Myst rosportum melanosporum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:540. 1886. MACROSPORIUM ORBICULARE (C. & E.) Mystrosporium orbiculare C. & E. Grev. 7:40. 1878. MACROSPORIUM TURBINATUM (CK R. & HARKEN.) Mystrosporium turbinatum Cxe. & HARKN. Grev. 12:95, 1884. _ 82, TRICHAEGUM Corpa. Ic. Fung. 1:15. 1837. Vegetative hyphae obsolescent; sporophores erect, subsim- pile, septate, acervulate, fuscous; conidia pleurogenous near the base of the sporophore, conglobate, muriform-septate, of ten asperate, globose to elliptical, fuscous. 4 species reported from the United States. _ 33. TRIPOSPORIUM Corpa. Ic. Fung. 1:16. 1837. Vegetative hyphae little developed; sporophore erect, simple or subramose, septate, fuscous; conidia acrogenous, staurospo- _ rous, fuscous. 2 species reported from the United States. 658 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 34. CAMPOSPORIUM HARKN. Bull. Cal. Acad. Sei. 1:—(17). 1884. a Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores simple, erect, fuse- 4 ous; conidia acrogenous, solitary or in twos, pedicillate, 18 4 ciliate at the apex, many-septate, cylindrical, fuscous. 1 One species described. 2 Blodgettia Wricur. Trans. Ir. Acad. 28:25. 1881. is so 1 1 dently a Phycomycete, that it seems improper to include t. Tribe Helicosporieae (Sacc.) Mucedineae Helicosporeae and Dematieae Helicosporeae 8 Syl. Fung. 4:233 and 557. 1886. ) Vegetative hyphae present or obsolete; sporophore erect o r ascending, more rarely procumbent, typically 3 4 simple or branched, hyaline or fuscous; conidia elongate, more or less filiform, uncinately curled or spirally coiled, m septate or at least guttulate, hyaline or fuscous. we The Helicosporieae of North America have recently been monographed by Morgan, whose arrangement is followed. separation of the hyaline from the dark-colored forms, required by the Saccardian arrangement which puts them in differe n 7 families, makes some change in generic limitation necessary in a grouping in which that arbitrary distinction is not made use of. 35. HELICOMYCES LX. Obs. Myc. 1:19. 1809. Helicosporium NEES. Syst. 68. 1816. Helicopsis Karst. Rev. Myc. 11:96. 1889. Vegetative hyphae present or obsolescent; sporophores sk 4 5 or elongate, more or less branched, hyaline or fuscous; conidia elongate-filiform or linear, loosely uncinate-convolute, hygr scopic, hyaline or fuscous. or Contains 18 species reported from the United States. Th 4 following species reported from this country, not transferred to this genus by Morgan, should be included: HELICOMYCES BRUNNEOLUS (B. & C.) Helicosporium brunneolum B. & C. Grev. 3:51. 1874. \HELICOMYCES CURTISII (BERK,) Aelicoma curtisii BERK. Grev. 3:106. 1875. Helicosporium curtisii Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:560. 1886. HELICOMYCES DIPLOSPORUS (E. & E.) Helicosporium diplosporum E. & E. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1891:93. 1891. HELICOMYCES FASCICULATUS (B. & C.) Helicoma fasciculatum B. & C. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci 4:18. 1858. Helicosporium fasciculatum Sacc Syl. Fung. 4:560. 1886. HELICOMYCES LEPTOSPORUS (SACC.) Helicosporium leptosporum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:559. 1886 Helicosporium griseum B. & C. Grev. 3:51. 1874. not Bon. 1851. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 659 HELICOMYCES MICROSCOPICUS ( ELL.) Helicosporium microscopicum EL. Bull. Torr. Bot, Club. 9:98. 1882. HELICOMYCES MUELLERI (CORDA). Helicoma muellert CorpA. Ie, Fung. 1:15. Pl. 4. f. 219. 1837. Helicosporium muelleri Sacc. Mich. 2:129, 1880. HELICOMYCES VEGETUS ( NEES.) Helicosporium vegetum Nees. Syst. 68. f.69. 1816. 36. HELICOMA Corba. Ic. Fung. 1:15. 1837. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores short, ascending, subsimple, hyaline or fuscous; conidia thick, rigid, elongate- oblong or linear, closely and firmly uncinate convolute, hyaline or fuscous, not hygroscopic. 9 species are reported from this country. 37. HELICOON Mora. N. Am. Helicosporae, 49. 1894. Vegetative hyphae present or obsolete; sporophore short and erect or obsolescent, septate, hyaline or fuscous; conidia elon- gate-filamentous, coiled into a conic-elliptical body, hyaline or fuscous. 4 species reported. Tribe Diplosporieae. Sporophores erect, rigid, more or less inflated at the joints, _ branched; conidia acrogenous on the ends of the branchlets, cCatenulate. 38. DIPLOSPORIUM LX. Sp. Pl. 1:64. 1824. Cladotrichum CORDA. Sturm Deutschl. Fl. UI. 3:39. 1837. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect, black, some- _ what rigid, more or less inflated at the joints, branched; con- ſidliia acrogenous, short catenulate, or apparently single, one- ___ septate, fuscous. 3 species are reported from the United States. Tribe Sporodesmieae (FR.) Sporodesmiei FR. Summ. Veg. Scand. 2:505. 1849. Vegetative hyphae obsolescent or obsolete; sporophores erect, micronemeous, typically simple, much shorter than the _ conidia or at most scarcely equalling them, often unicellular, Sometimes even entirely obsolete, usually forming more or less distinct capitula, hyaline or fuscous; conidia single, i. e., never cCatenulate, solitary, acrogenous, rarely acro-pleurogenous, hyaline or fuscous, continuous or septate. 660 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 89. CONIOSPORIUM LX. Obs. Myc. 1:8. 1809. Chromosporium Corpa, Sturm. Deutschl. Crypt. FI. Il. 9:19, 1829. E Corpa, Sturm. Deutschl. Crypt. Fl. ut. 13:00, Papua Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand. 2:509. 1849. 4 Sporophore obsolescent or altogether wanting; conidia sim- ple, hyaline or fuscous, inappendiculate, globose to oblong. __ Chromosporium, differing only in color, has been included. 21 species contained in the genus thus limited are reported from the United States. The following are transferred from G. mosporium: : OCONIOSPORIUM FULVUM (B. & ©.) Gymnosportum fulvum B. & C. Journ. Linn. Soc, 10: 355. 1860. Chromosportum fulcum Sac. Syl. Fung. 4:6. 1888. OONLOSPORIUM LATERITIOM (CKx. & HARKN.) Chromosportum laterittum Ox. & Hanks. Grev. 12:64. 1884. Chromosporium cooket Sac. Syl. Fung. 4:7. 1886. CONIOSPORIUM PACTOLINUM (CKE. & HARKN.) Cortictum pactolinum CKR. & HARKS. Grev. 9:81. 1881. Chromosportum pactolinum Oke. Grey, 16:72. 1888. CONIOSPORIUM VITELLINUM (Sacc. & Ett.) Chromosporium vitellinum Saco. & ELL. Mise. Myc. 2: 18. 1884. 40. DICOCCUM Con DA. Sturm. Deutschl. Crypt. FL mL 117. 1829. 1 Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores short, obsolescent; g conidia one-septate, hyaline or fuscous, inappendiculate, ob- long to clavate. 3 species are described from the United States. 41. CERATOPHORUM Sacc. Mich. 2:22. 1880. 1 Vegetative hyphae creeping, obsolescent; sporophores sk ort, erect; conidia 2—several-septate, fuscous, appendiculate, fu s- oid to cylindrical. 2 42. TETRAPLOA B. & BR. Ann. Mag. N. H. No. 547. Sporophores obsolete; conidia muriform-septate, fuligi pluri-corniculate at the apex, ovate-oblong. 2 species are reported from this country. 43. CLASTEROSPORIUM Scuw. Syn. Fung. Am. Bor. 3 1834. Vegetative hyphae creeping, ramose, fuscous; sporopho: obsolete; conidia erect or ascending, solitary, short pedicelled. many-septate, inappendiculate, fuscous, fusoid to cylindrical saprogenous. ; Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 661 Contains 14 species reported from the United States, as here limited. Clasterosporium olivaceum E. & E. Proc. Acad. Phil. 1893: 463. 1893, not C. olivaceum (WALLR.) Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:390. 1886, must be altered. We suggest the name Clasterosporium elaeodes. 44. CERATOSPORIUM Scuw. Syn. Fung. Am. Bor. 300. 1834. Vegetative hyphae creeping or obsolescent; sporophores ob- solete; conidia many-septate, hyaline or fuscous, digitately fas- ciculate, more or less united at the base, clavate cylindrical. 1 species is reported from the United States. 45. SEPTOSPORIUM Corba. Sturm. Deutsch. Crypt. Flor. III. 12:33. 1831. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sterile hyphae simple, elongate, fuscous, erect, intermingled with the sporophores; sporophores short, simple, pedicel-like, concolorous; conidia muriform-sep- tate, fuscous, ovate to limoniform. 7 species are reported from this country. 46. STIGMINA Sacc. Mich. 2:22. 1880. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophore simple, short, 1—2 celled, often reduced to a mere pedicel or rarely wanting; con- idia acervulate or discrete, erect, many-septate, inappendiculate, ovoid, elliptical-oblong, or fusoid; saprogenous or phyllogen- ous. As here limited, contains 10 species reported from the United States. Several species described under Sporodesmium and placed in Clasterosporium by Saccardo are to be placed here: STIGMINA ATRA (LK.) Sporodesmium atrum Lx. Obs. Myc. 1: 39. 1809. Clasterosporium atrum Sacco. Syl. Fung. 4: 386. 1886. STIGMINA CAESPITULOSA (E. & E.) Clasterosporium caespitulosum E. & E. Journ. Mye. 5: 70. 1889. STIGMINA CAPSULARUM (THUEM.) Sporidesmium capsularum TuuEeM. Flora 61: ‘177. 1878. Clasterosporium capsularum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4: 388. 1886. SrTIGMINA CLAVULATA (CKe. & HARKN.) Bactrodesmium clavulatum Cxe. & HARKN. Grev. 12:95. 1884. Clasterosporium clavulatum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:390. 1886, STIGMINA LARVATA (C. & E.) ; larvatum C. & E. Grev. 6:86. Pl. 99. f. 12. 1878. Clasterosporium larvatum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4: 388. 1886, STIGMINA MACLURAE (THUEM.) Sporidesmium maclurae THuEM. Mycotheca Universalis No. 2074. 1881. Clasterosporium maclurae PounD. Rep. Nebr. St. Board Agr. 1889: 223. 1890. 662 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. STIGMINA OBCLAVATA (CKE.) Sportdesmium obelaratum Cxn. Grev. 6: 1387. 1878. Clasterosportum obclavatum SAC. Syl. Fung. 4: 386. 1886. STIGMINA POPULI (E. & E.) Clasteroaportum populi E. & E. Journ, Mye. 7: 18. 1802, STIGMINA STICTICA (B. & C.) sticticum B. & O. Grev. 3:50, 1876. Clasterosportum st iet icum Sac. Sy l. Fung. 4.88. 1886. 47. SPORODESMIUM LX Obs. Myc. 1:39. 1809. Including Stigmella Ley. Demidoff. Voy. 111. 1842. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophore simple, 1—2 ce pedicel-like; conidia discrete or acervulate, muriform or clath- rate-septate inappendiculate, fuliginous or fuscous, ovate oblong; saprogenous or phyllogenous. 7. We have placed in Stigmina all forms which would belong here but for the septation of the spores. This restores the original limitation of Clasterosporium, but restricts Sporodesmium — to species with muriform-septate conidia, as limited by Sac- cardo. 1 43 species are reported from the United States. The follow- ing changes are required by our arrangement, or for other reasons. a SPORODESMIUM BICOLOR (PK.) Septonema bicolor Px. Rep. N. V. Mus. 28:—(60.) 1876. Sporodesmium peziza C. & E. Grev. 4:178. 1876. SPORODESMIUM PITHYOPHILA (CKE.) Stigmelia pithyophila Cxe. Grev. 16: 71. 1888. SPORODESMIUM VERSISPORUM PouND & CLEMENTS. Sporodesmium toruloides E. & E. Proc. Roch. Acad. Sci. 1: 51. 1890, not nor COOKE. 48. CONIOTHECIUM Corpa. Ic Fung. 1:2. 1837. = Vegetative hyphae and sporophores obsolete; conidia acer- 22 Sign vulate, inappendiculate, fuscous, muriform-sarcinate, cruciate, or radiate, irregularly globose or oblong; saprogenous or phy yl 8 logenous. ida 4 species are reported from the United States. We me ake one change: are CONIOTHECIUM SARCOSPORIOIDES (ELt. & ANDER.) = Sporodesmium sarcosporioides ELL. & ANDER. Bot. Gaz. 16: 47. Pl. 10f. 8-10.18 Sr Myxotrichum Kzx. is one of the Gymnoasceae and should not be kept with the Imperfect Fungi. For those forms which properly Imperfect Fungi Saccardo has proposed the na Myzxotrichelia. Myzxotrichella is somewhat anomalous, and wo have to be placed in a tribe by itself, which might be cal Myxotrichelleae. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 663 Ellisiella Sacc, which would be placed in the family Sporodes- miaceae if retained, and would doubtless require a tribe by it- self, does not seem sufficiently distinct from Colletotrichum in the Melanconieae. 1 Family MUCEDINACEAE (L«.) : Mucedines Lk. Berl. Mag. 3:10. 1809. (Obs. Myc. 1:10.) 4 Sporophores entirely distinct from the conidia, well devel. oped, typically long and much branched. Tribe Trichothecieae. ; Vegetative hyphae creeping or obsolescent; sporophores erect, simple, hyaline or fuscous; conidia acrogenous, solitary or clustered, 1—several septate, hyaline, the diameter much greater than that of the sporophore; saprogenous. 1. TRICHOTHECIUM LX. Obs. 1:16. 1809. Sporophores erect, simple, hyaline; conidia solitary, 1-sep- tate, hyaline or bright-colored, ovate to ellipsoid. 4 species are reported from the United States. 2 DACTYLELLA Grove. Journ. Bot. 22:199. 1884. Sporophores erect, simple, hyaline; conidia solitary, 2— _ many-septate, hyaline, fusoid to cylindrical. D. ellipsospora (PREUSS) GROVE has recently been reported. 8. DACTYLARIA Sacc. Mich. 2:20. 1880. _ Sporophores erect, simple, hyaline; conidia acrogenous, _ clustered, 2—many-septate, hyaline, clavate to cylindrical. 2 species are reported from the United States. _ 4 CORDANA Preuss. Linn. 24: 129. 1851, not Sacc. Syl. 1 Fung. 4: 195. 1886. 1 Acrothecium Preuss. Linn. 24: 120. 1851, not Compa. — S)ßporophores erect, simple, fuscous; conida acrogenous, clust- 1 ered, 2—many-septate, sub-hyaline or fuscous, oblong to cylin- Aurical. g species are reported from this country. Tribe Arthrobotrytae Con DA. Prachtfl. 43. 1839. * Gonatobotrtede Sa cc. Syl. Fung. 4: 168. 1886. * Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect, typically Simple; conidia borne upon the more or less swollen, denticu- late nodes and usually also upon an apical swelling, simple, 4 clustered, hyaline or fuscous. 664 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 5. GONATOBOTRYUM Sacc. Mich. 2:24. 1880. Sporophores simple, erect, fuscous, nodose-inflated; conidia: 4 clustered, ovoid to elliptical, fuscous. 1 species is reported from this country. 6. ARTHROBOTRYS Corpa. Prachtfl. 43. 1839. Sporophores erect, simple, hyaline, nodose: inflated, the n verrucose; conida I septate. hyaline, ovoid. 1 species reported. 7. SPONDYLOCLADIUM Marr. Flor. Crypt. Erlang. 388. 1817. l Sporophores erect, simple, rigid, fuscous; conidia 1—m septate, verticillate-clustered at the septa of the sporopb fuscous, clavate-fusoid. Gonatorrhodiella THAXT. Bot. Gaz. 16: 202. 1891, in its mode of conidia-formation closely resembles Gonatorrhodum, a Euro- pean genus which is to be placed here. We know Gonatorrho- diella only from Dr. Thaxter's figure and description. Judgi from them, we cannot forbear to think that the genus is related to Aspergillus and its allies, and that its resemblance to-the forms here in question arises from proliferation of the y si- culae. Tribe Trichodermeae Frisrs. Syst. Myc. 3:203. 1829. Sporophores erect, irregularly branched, hyaline or light- colored; conidia single, acrogenous, simple or one-septate. * 8. TRICHODERMA Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 12. 17 Vegetative hyphae decumbent, forming loosely compac plane cespituli; sporophores erect, loosely branched, commonly dichotomous or trichotomous; conidia acrogenous, globose, single, forming small heads. J. lignorum, the type is the conidial stage of Hypocrea The other so-called species are doubtful, most of them hz been insufficiently characterized by the older mycologists. 9. JACOBASCHELLA O. Kuntze. Rev. Gen Pl. 1:280. Diplosporium Bon. Handb. 98. 1851, not LR. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect, i branched; conidia solitary acrogenous, one-septate, ovoid oblong. 1 species is reported from the United States. Jacobaschel: brevis (Pk.), Diplosporium breve Pk. Rep. N. V. Mus. 44 (26 1893. Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 665 Fusiporium LK., now generally included in Fusarium, if kept separate, should be placed here. The propriety of the present disposition of Fusiporium is discussed under Fusarium. Tribe Verticillieae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:149. 1886. Sporophores erect or ascending, verticillately branched, or the ultimate branches verticillately disposed or at least dicho- tomous, hyaline or fuscous; conidia acrogenous, solitary, rarely capitate, never catenulate, simple or septate, hyaline or fus- cous. 10. VERTICILLIUM NRES. Syst. Pilz. 57. 1816. Sporophores oppositely or verticillately branched or the ulti- mate branches verticillate, hyaline or bright colored; conidia solitary, simple, concolorous. 18 species are reported from the United States. The species are conidial stages of Hypocreaceae, e. g. Hypomyces. 11. VERTICICLADIUM Preuss. Linn. 24:127. 1851. Sporophores oppositely or verticillately branched, fuscous; _ conidia solitary, simple, hyaline or fuscous. 2 species are reported from the United States. 12. DIPLOCLADIUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 98. 1851. Sßporophores verticillately branched; conidia typically soli- _ tary, one-septate, hyaline. I species reported from the United States. Like Verticillium Contains conidial forms of Hypomyces. 13. DACTYLIUM Nezs. Syst. Pilz. 58. 1816. Sßporophores verticillately branched, rarely simply verticil- late; conidia solitary, 2—many-septate, hyaline. 2 species are reported from this country. The genus con- tains conidial stages of Hypocreaceae (Hypomyces). 1 q 14. MONOSPORIUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 95. 1851. Sporophores irregularly or oppositely branched, the ultimate branches typically dichotomous or pseudo-verticillate, hya- line; conidia simple, hyaline or bright-colored. 1 1 species is reported from the United States. 15. ACROSTALAGMUS Corpa. Ic. Fung. 2:15. 1838. Sporophores verticillately branched, hyaline or bright-col- ored; conidia simple, hyaline, capitate, involved in mucus. 1 species is reported from the United States. Contains con- idial stages of Nectria. 666 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 16. STACHYLIDIUM LX. Obs. Myc. 1:13. 1809. Sporophores verticillately branched, fuscous; conidia capi- tate, globose or elliptical. 2 species are described from this country. 17. CHAETOPSIS GRV. Scot. Crypt. Fl. 358. Mesobotrys Sacc. Mich. 2:27. 1880. Sporophores simply verticillate in the middle, the upper portion sterile, simple or branched, fuscous; conidia solitary, hyaline, ovoid or cylindrical. og 1 species is reported from the United States. 18. GONYTRICHUM Nees. Act. Acad. Leop. 9.244. 1818. Sporophores irregularly branched, fuscous; conidia solitary, simple, borne upon verticillate sterigmata (basidia)arising at the nodes of the sporophores. 4 1 species reported. Tribe Dematieae (FR.) Dematiei Fr. Syst. Myc. 3:335. 1832. Haplographieae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4:303. 1886. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect or ascend- 4 1 ing, verticillately or irregularly branched, or simple, the branches being reduced to mere denticulations at the ape, hyaline or fuscous; conidia catenulate, simple, hyaline or fuse- ous, catenulae acrogenous, single on the ultimate branches or 4 sterigmata (basidia). * 19. DEMATIUM Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 41. 17897. Sporophores ascending, irregularly branched, fuscous; con- idia simple, fuscous, globose or ovoid, catenulae scattered. 3 species are reported from the United States. 20. SCHIZOCEPHALUM Preuss. Linn. 25:77. 1852. Hormodendron Bon. Bot. Zeit. 1853:286. 1853. oe Haplographium B. & Br. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. III no. 281 1859 p. p. ‘ Sporophores erect, more or less verticillately branched at 7 0 the apex, fuscous; conidia fuscous, globose to oblong, caten- ulae approximate. As here limited, contains 3 North American species: SCHIZOCEPHALUM ATRO-BRUNNEUM (CKE.) Penicillium atro-brunneum CKE. Grev. 6:139. 1878. Haplographium atro-brunneum Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4: 305. 1886. SCHIZOCEPHALUM DIVARICATUM (ELL. & LANGL.) Hormodendron divaricatum ELL. X LANGL. Journ. Myc. 6:35. 1890. SCHIZOCEPHALUM GRISEUM (ELL. & LANGL.) Haplographium griseum ELL. & LANGL. Journ. Myc. 4: 124. 1888, Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 667 21. SPICARIA Harz. Hyphom. 50. 1871. Sporophores erect, hyaline, branches perfectly verticillate; conidia hyaline, ovoid or oblong. 1 species is reported from this country. 22. HAPLOGRAPHIUM B. & Br. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. no. 818. 1859. Sporophores erect, fuscous, the apex inflated, denticulate; conidia fuscous, simple, globose to oblong, catenulate, the catenulae arising from the terminal denticulations of the spor- ophore. The species in which the sporophores are branched at the apex are referred to Schizocephalum. We retain here only those in which the branches are reduced to mere denticula- tions. But one species is reported from the United States, which may be included in the genus as here limited, -H. apicu- latum PR. Tribe Stachybotryteae, Vegetative hyphae present, creeping; sporophores erect, branched or simple, bearing verticillate sterigmata (basidia) at the apex, fuscous or hyaline; conidia single, solitary, acrogen- ous or acropleurogenous. 23. STACHYBOTRYS Corva. Ic. Fung. 1:21. 1837. _ Sporophores erect, elongate, branched, rarely simple, crown- ed at the apex with heterogeneous, verticillate sterigmata which are connate at the base, fuscous; conidia acrogenous, globose or ovoid, fuscous, simple, rarely 1-septate. 5 species are reported from this country. Several of the species are stages of Chaetomium. 24. STERIGMATOBOTRYS OupEM. Contr. Myc. Pays Bas. 11:48. Sporophores erect, typically simple, crowned at the apex with free, heterogeneoussterigmata, fuscous; conidia acropleu- rogenous, globose or ovoid, fuscous, simple. 1 species is reported from the United States: STERIGMATOBOTRYS ELONGATA (PR.) Stachybotrys elongata Px. Rep. N. V. Mus. 43:—(29). Pl. 3. f. 10-13. 1890. 25. CYLINDROCLADIUM Mond. Bot. Gaz. 17:191. 1892. Sporophores erect, di- or trichotomously branched, the tips crowned with 2—3 verticillate sterigmata, hyaline; conidia acrogenous elongate-cylindrical, 1-septate, hyaline. * 668 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1 species is described. Tribe Botryteae (Fr.) Botrytidei Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand, 2: 490. 1849. Sporophores erect, ascending, or decumbent, not rigid, gen- erally much branched; conidia pleurogenous, acropleurogenous, or solitary acrogenous on short lateral branches. 26. BOTRYTIS Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 40. 1797. Sporophores erect, irregularly much branched, tips of the branchlets acute or sub-acute; conidia simple, clustered, acro- pleurogenous or pleurogenous on the upper portions of the branchlets. Saccardo includes Polyactis and Phymatotrichum in this genus, But, while the latter resemble Botrytis in bearing clusters of conidia at or near the tips of the branchlets, they appear more closely related to Botryosporium and the Cephalosporieae. The typical Botrytis forms for the most part belong to various Sphae- riaceae. Some are stages of Hypoxylon, one belongs to Melan 3 ospora. Polyactis for the most part contains conidial forms of Sclerotinia. Even with Polyactis and Phymatotrichum removed, the group is very heterogeneous and unsatisfactory. The spe- a cies with pleurogenous conidia are not readily separable from Haplaria and Sporotrichum. About 35 species are reported from the United States. 27. HAPLARIA LX. Obs. Myc. 1:9. 1809. Acladium LK. Obs. Myc. 1:9. 1809. Virgaria NEES. Syst. Pilz. 2: 14. 1816. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect, branched or simple, light colored or fuscous; conidia pleurogenous, simple. Acladium differs only in having unbranched sporophores. Virgaria is composed of forms which may well be referred to Haplaria—differing only in color and in the somewhat more rigid sporophore—and of a few dark colored species of Botrytis. 11 species are reported from the United States. 28. SPOROTRICHUM LX. Obs. Myc. 1:9. 1809. Trichosporium Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand. 2:492. 1849. =a Vegetative hyphae and sporophores decumbent, sporophores irregularly much branched or simple; conidia pleurogenous or acro-pleurogenous upon the branchlets, sub-solitary, simple. Differs from Botrytis in the decumbent sporophores and sub- solitary conidia. Saccardo separates the dark-colored forms under Trichosporium. : Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 669 About 25 species are reported from the United States. Some of the species are stages of Chaetomium. 29. CAMPSOTRICHUM Enns. Sylv. Myc. Berol. 11. 1818. Vegetative hyphae and sporophores sub-decumbent, dark- colored, intricately branched, the branches divaricate, hamate, or flagelliform; conidia pleurogenous, borne in clusters near the tips of the branchlets, hyaline or dark-colored, simple. 8 species are reported from the United States. 30. GLENOSPORA B. & C. Grey. 4:161. 1876. Parasitic; hyphae interwoven into a black crust; sporo- phores ascending, forked or with short branches; conidia acro- pleurogenous, or acrogenous on the tips of short lateral branch- es, simple. 2 species are reported from the United States. 31. STREPTOTHRIX Corba. Prachtfl. 23. 1839. Sporophores erect, dark colored. virgate - branched, the branches and branchlets spirally flexuous; conidia pleurogen- ous, solitary acrogenous, or borne on short filiform processes at the ends of the branchlets, simple. 4 species are reported from this country. 32. RHINOTRICHUM Corpa. Ie. Fung. 1:17. 1837. Sporophores erect, light-colored, simple or sub-simple, the tips denticulate; conidia borne on the denticulations, simple. 21 species are reported from the United States. 33. OLPITRICHUM ArxINSON. Bot. Gaz. 19:244. 1894. Mycelium creeping; sporophores erect, simple or little branched, near the apex provided with flask-shaped, fusoid, or enlarged sterigmata, each bearing a single, simple, con- idium. Differs from Rhinotrichum in the inflated denticulations or sterigmata. 1 species only is described. In Physospora the denticulations are borne on swellings of the sporophore. No species are reported from North Amer- ica. 34. ACREMONIUM LX. Obs. Myc. 1:13. 1809. Acremoniella Sacc. Fung. Ital. f. 713. 1881. Hyphae creeping, simple or sparingly branched; conidia solitary on the ends of scattered, slender, simple, sub-erect branches, simple. 670 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Saccardo separates the dark-colored forms under Acremon- della, 5 species are reported from this country. 85. ZYGODESMUS Corba. Ic. Fung. 1:11. 1887. Hyphae creeping, irregularly branched, with numerous later- al swellings at the septa (‘‘clamp-joints”); conidia muriculate, rarely smooth, simple, borne on denticulations, or solitary on short lateral branches. Many of the described species are Basidiomycetes e. g. Z. fus- cus CORDA is Tomentella ferruginea Pers. About 14 species are repo? ted from the United States, excluding those that certainly belong elsewhere. 36. SEPEDONIUM LX. Obs. Myc. 1:16. 1809. Light - colored, hyphae all decumbent, branching; spores borne singly or in clusters of 2-3 on the ends of branchlets, echinulate, simple. ö The species which are parasitic on fungi are stages of Hypo- myces. 4 species are reported from the United States. 37. MYCOGONE Lk. Obs. Myc. 1:16. 1809. Like the preceding, but spores 1-septate, the upper cell the larger and usually echinulate. 2 species reported from the United States; stages of Hypo- myces, except M. anceps Sacc., which is the chlamydosporous state of Hydrogera oedipus and should be excluded. 38. SYNTHETOSPORA Mora. Bot. Gaz. 17:192. 1892. Hyphae all decumbent, branched, intricate; spores borne on the ends of short lateral branchlets, each spore consisting of a large opaque central cell with several smaller hyaline cells sunk part way into its surface. 1 species described; ‘‘a compound Mycogone.” (MORGAN). Tribe Periconieae Sacc. Syl. Fung. 4: 269. 1886. . Vegetative mycelium sparse or none; sporophores erect, rigid, dark-colored, simple or sub-simple; conidia pleurogenous, or borne along the tips of the sporophores on denticulations, simple. 39. CHLORIDIUM Lx. Obs. Myc, 1:11. 1809. Sporophores sub-simple, fuscous; conidia oblong or globose, © pleurogenous on the upper portion of the sporophores. 2 species are reported from the United States. Pound and Clements: NoRTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 671 40. PERICONIA Tope. Fung. Mecklenb. 2:2. 1791. Vegetative hyphae creeping, generally obsolete; sporophores simple, fuscous; conidia borne upon denticulations or short sterigmata at and near the apex in a dense head. 7 species are reported from the United States. 41. CAMPTOUM Lx. Sp. Pl. 1:44. 1824. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores simple, hyaline with fuscous bands at regular intervals, at and near the apex verrucolose-sporigerous; conidia fuscous, boat-shaped, curved or inequilateral. 1 species is reported from the United States. 42. OEDEMIUM LX. Sp. Pl. 1:42. 1824. Sporophores erect, rigid, opaque, simple or sub-simple, at the apex or laterally here and there bearing rather large, sub- globose swellings; conidia globose, pleurogenous upon the lat- eral or apical swellings. 2 species are reported from the United States. Tribe Polyactideae (COR DA) Polyactidei ConDbA. Prachtfl. 33. 1842. Sporophores erect, light - colored or grayish, very long, much branched; branchlets obtuse or inflated near the apex, bearing simple, single conidia in dense capitula. The conidia are sessile pleurogenous or borne on denticula- tions at or near the tips of the branchlets. 43. POLYACTIS LX. Obs. Myc. 1:14. 1809. Sporophores grayish or fuscescent, rather rigid, the branch- lets thickened towards the tip, but not lobed or much swollen, the thickened portion denticulate; conidia racemose upon the denticulations. About 10 species are reported from the United States. 44. PHYMATOTRICHUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk. 116. 1851. Sporophores hyaline or light-colored, the tips of the bran- ches inflated and somewhat lobed or crenate or digitate with- out inflation; conidia borne in heads upon the denticulate or muriculate lobes and inflations. 4 species are reported from the United States. 672 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, 45. BOTRYOSPORIUM Corba. Sturm. Deutsch. Crypt. FI. III. 11:9. 1831, not Schw. 1834. Sporophores hyaline, simple or furcate, with alternate or opposite lateral branchlets, branchlets simple, at the apex bearing 3-5 spicules upon which the conidia are borne in heads; ecnidia hyaline, globose or ovoid. 2 species are reported from the United States. Botryosporium prorumpens Schw. is a Speira. Saccardo gives it under Botry- osporium and also as Speira erumpens (Schw.), evidently an error for prorumpens. Tribe Cephalosporieae Sacc, Sy). Fung. 4:47. 1886, Vegetative hyphae either creeping or rhizoid-like; sporo- phores erect or ascending, usually simple, generally somewhat 4 a inflated above, hyaline; conidia simple, single, i. e. not catenu- late, capitate-clustered, typically on the apex of the sporo- phore, hyaline or light-colored. 46. HAPLOTRICHUM LX. Sp. Pl. 1:52. 1824. Hyalopus ConDA. Anleit. 58. 1842. Cephalosporium Corpa. Auleit. 61. 1842. Sporophore simple, erect, slightly or not at all inflated at the 4 apex; conidia capitate-clustered, sessile, globose to elliptical. The three genera, usually distinguished, do not seem suf- ficiently well marked to be maintained. Haplotrichum has 6 species reported from the United States, including the follow- 4 ing, brought over with Cephalosporium and Hyalopus : HAPLOTRICHUM ACREMONIUM (CORDA). Cephalosporium acremonium Corba. Ic. Fung. 3:11. Pl. 2. f. 29. 1838. HAPLOTRICHUM GRISEUM (B. & C.) 4 , 5 Hyalopus griseus B. & C. Grev. 3:64. 1874. HAPLOTRICHUM MUCORINUM (B. & C.) Hyalopus mucorinus B. & C. Grev. 3: 64. 1874. HAPLOTRICHUM PARASITANS (B. & C.) Hyalopus parasitans B. & C. Grev. 3:64. 1874. 47. CYLINDROCEPHALUM Bon. Handb. Alg. Myk 103. 1851 Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores simple, erect, hya- | 4 line; conidia capitate, sessile, cylindrical, hyaline. 1 species is reported from the United States. 48. OEDOCEPHALUM Preuss. Linn. 24:31. 1851. Vegetative hyphae creeping; sporophores erect, simple, hya- 2 q line, vesiculose-inflated at the apex, vesiculae scarcely areolate; conidia capitate, sub-stipitate, globose to oblong, hyaline. 4 species are reported from the United States. U Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 673 49. RHOPALOMYCES Corba. Prachtfl. 3. 1839 Vegetative hyphae rhizoid-like; sporophores erect, gener- ally simple, vesiculose-inflated, vesiculae areolate; conidia stipitate, ellipsoid to oblong, hyaline. 2 species are reported from the United States. 50. SIGMOIDEOMYCES Taaxr. Bot. Gaz. 16:22. 1891. Sporophores erect, much-branched, bearing sub-dichotom- ous sigmoid vesiculae on short lateral branches; conidia stipi- tate, hyaline. 1 species described. [To be Continued. | 674 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XL. ON THE STEM ANATOMY OF CERTAIN ONAGRACEAE, FRANCIS RAMALEY. Introduction.—During the past year a comparative study has been made of the minute anatomy of the stem in a considerable number of genera of Onagraceae. The plants investigated are all of the tribe Onagreae, a group, the members of which show strong natural affinities. 3 The chief purpose of the paper is to give an accurate account of the stem anatomy in the plants examined, together witha brief historical summary of the literature bearing upon the points of greatest interest. For the sake of simplicity this historical account has been greatly compressed and divided into separate sections. References to text books have not been given. 5 The nomenclature used is that of the Check List.! This has been followed merely for convenience and because it has seemed best, in a purely morphological paper, to avoid nomenclatural difficulties. Only plants enumerated in the check list have been examined. These are all indigenous, and, as a rule, restricted 4 to North America, although Onagra biennis was, according to a Raimann, 2 introduced into Europe at the beginning of the sev- enteenth century and is now a common roadside weed. Taxonomic value of anatomical characters. — The import- ance of histological characters in drawing specific descriptions has been discussed at some length by Vesque.“ “ In his mono- graph on the Guttiferae® he makes continual use of microscopic differences for purposes of classification. Weiss,“ in an article 1. Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 5: 233-236. 1894. 2. Onagraceae in Engler and Prantl, Nat. Pfl. Fam. 3: Abt. 7. 199. 1893. AS 3. Vesque, J. De la concomitance des charactéres anatomiques et organograph- _ ‘ iques des plantes.—Comptes rendus. 96: 1866-1868. 1883. : 4 4. Vesque, J. L’anatomie des tissus appliquée a la classification des plantes— Mem. II, Nouv. Arch. du Mus. d'hist. natur. II. 5: 291-387. 1883 3 5. Vesque, J. Guttiferae. — DeCandolle. Monographiae Phanerogamarum a ie 1893. 6. Weiss, J. E. Beitraege zur Kenntniss der Kork-bildang. Denkschriften der Kgl- Bayerischen Botan. Ges. zu Regensburg. 6: 1890. Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 675 on the growth of cork, shows how cork is of some taxonomic value, for, in its formation, it is noted as always having its origin in the same cell zone, in any given species. Solereder,“ in 1885, published an extended work on the systematic value of the structure of wood. In Peterson’s work.“ on bicollateral vascular bundles, some little attention is given to the import- ance of this character for purposes of systematic description. The pharmacologists have for a long time distinguished vari- ous cellular vegetable drugs by the microscopic appearance of their cross sections. As a rule, however, the descriptions are not sufficiently accurate or minute to serve for the discrimina- tion of closely allied species. Im the case of Cinchona barks elaborate classifications have been formulated, based largely upon the size and arrangement of the bast fibres and of latici- ferous vessels. One of the best of these is given by Maish.“ The present writer has not found this classification of any very great value. Gibson," in studying the stem anatomy of Selaginella, found marked histological differences in the species; but his group- ing of the species, on these characters—and to this he calls special attention—does not agree with the usual grouping of the systematists. He says (p. 201), How far comparative anatomy may serve as a basis for a revision of the established classification of the Selaginellaceae, and how far it supports or otherwise, external morphology can only be determined _ after extended observation on all the members, and not the Stem alone.” This last statement might be made with equal _ propriety, concerning those Onagraceae discussed in this paper. ‘ HBicollateral vascular bundles.—As is well known, the exist- once of bicollateral bundles was first announced by Hartig. 11 _ who discovered them in Cucurbita. Von Mohl,” and numer- _ ous other writers have contributed to our knowledge of the E subject. The following review of researches on bicollateral vas- _ cular bundles, especially in Onragraceae will serve to point out the progress of investigation in this direction. a car ici Ueber den systematischen Werth der Holzstructur bei den Dicotyle- E 1885. 8. Peterson. Ueber das Auftreten bicollateraler Gefässbündel u. s. w. Engler’s Bo- tanische Jahrbücher 3: 359. 1882. 9. Maish, J. M. Organic Materia Medica, Ed. VI. 1888. 10. Gibson. Contributions towards a Knowledge of the Anatomy of the Genus Selagi- nella, Spr.—Annals of Botany 8: 133. 1894. 11. Hartig. Ueber die Querscheidewinde zwischen den einzelnen Gliedern der Sieb- röhren in Cucurbita pepo.— Bot. Ztg. 12: 51. 1854. 12. Von Mohl. Einige Andeutungen über den Bau des Bastes.—Bot. Ztg. 889. 1855. 676 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Russow, in 1875, published an account of what was at mat ; time known concerning the vascular tissue of plants. In this work the author discusses the evolution of the vascular bind * upward from the lowest type. In a classification of plants according to their bundles, he places the Onagraceae — among those in which there are two protophloem and one proto- xylem group in each vascular bundle. a Bicollateral vascular bundles in the root of Onagra bie N were discovered by Weiss“ in 1880. Incidentally, this au states that in the medullary phloem of the stem there are « found thick walled bast cells and that these are not found it the intra-xylar phloem of the roots. 2 Peterson, in discussing the bicollateral character of bundles in Onagraceae speaks of Oenothera odorata, and st that the outer bast is but slightly developed while there i good development of inner bast which early forms an continuous ring of tissue. Upon the border near the p > bark is a nearly unbroken ring of bast fibres. Oe. gauroides and Oe. longiflora are of like structure except that there ; also bast fibres in the inner phloem. According to Weiss same is the case with Oe. biennis (Onagra biennis). Most o the Oenothera species have bundles of bast fibres in the oute 4 portion of the bast, and when cork formation takes place, which occurs very often, the cork is developed internally to the fibres. Scott, is in an article in the Annals of Botany, devotes some a space to the consideration of internal phloem. This, he ares characteristic of a large number of dicotyledonous orders, usu 3 ally, though not always very highly organized ones; Myrtac Onagraceae and all allied orders, Campanulaceae, Composita Cucurbitaceae, etc. This internal phloem may occur as dist phloem strands or as a part of complete medullary bu Internal phloem very often has cambial increase like the n mal tissues. The article is followed by a good bibliography Mlle. Fremont" found sieve tubes in the pith of the root ¢ Oenothera fraseri and Oe. riparia. She also found them in 5 secondary wood of the roots of Oe. parviflora, cruciata, macrc s+ 13 Russow. E. Betrachtungen über das Leitbündel und Grundgewebe aus verglei- chend morphologischen und phylogenetischen Standpunkt. Dorpat. 1875. 14 Weiss, J. E. Anatomie und Physiologie fleishig verdickten Wurzeln. Flora. 63: 1880. 15 Peterson, O. G. loc. cit. 5 16 Sevtt. On some recent Progress in our Knowledge of the Anatomy of Plants. Au- nals of Botany. 4: 147. 1889. — 17 Fremont, Sur les tubes criblés extralibériens, dans la racine des Ocenoth¢racées. ee Morot. Journ. de Bot. 5: 191. 1891. : Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 677 carpa, sellowi and fraseri. These, she considers to be devel- oped by a differentiation of the wood parenchyma. The first part of her paper is devoted to an historical review of investi- gations on the sieve tubes in roots occurring outside the usual bast area. In an article on internal phloem in roots and stems, Messrs. Scott and Brebner,'* enumerate the various plant families in which bicollaterality of the vascular tissue has been noted. Among them is the family Onagraceae. The authors state that, in general, this character is constant in each family named with the occasional exception of a divergent tribe. A review of Lamounette’s work is given in a postscript. This investi- gator found, in the Onagraceae, internal phloem to be entirely absent from the hypocotyl, cotyledons, and even the earlier formed leaves. So far as the hypocoty! is concerned. Messrs. Scott and Brebner say it can only be true of very young plants. We know from Weiss's observations that the internal phloem is continued into the root where it forms the innermost inter- xylar phloem strands. Intra-xylar phloem.—The presence of strands of thin walled cells in the secondary wood of certain stems and roots seems to have been first described by Fritz Muller“ in 1866. This author made no extended observations; he simply announced his dis- covery and made a diagrammatic figure of a cross section of the stem of Strychnos, a plant in which the islands are numer- ous and well marked. These strands of thin walled cells, from their appearance in a transverse section of the member came to be spoken of as islands.“ In some cases, at least, they con- tain sieve tubes and so the name intra xylar phloem island,” or briefly phloem island’ was applied and is now in general use. ig In DeBary’s Comparative Anatomy, à the intra xylar phloem in Strychnos is discussed, and it is definitely stated that the tissue of the phloem islands is developed internally to the cam- _ bium. A diagrammatic figure to illustrate this point is given. One of the earliest investigations on intra-xylar phloem, was made by Weiss.” He found that the parenchymatous xylem of 2 18 Scott and Brebner. On internal Phloem in the Root and Stem of Dicotyledons. Annals of Botany 5: 259. 1891. 19 Lamounette. Recherches sur lorigin morphol. du liber interne. Ann. Sc. Nat. VII. 11: 193-278. 20 Mueller. Uber das Holz einiger um Desterro wachsenden Kletterpfianzen.—Bot. : Ztg. 24:65. 1866. 21 DeBary. Comparative Anatomy of the Vegetative Organs of the Phanerogam and Ferns. (English Translation.) 75 22 Weiss. loc. eit. 678 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. fleshy roots of plants with bicollateral stem structure contains strands of phloem produced iaternally by the cambium. This was found in various Onagraceae, Gentianaceae and Solanaceae. In Oenothera longiflora Jacq., he found centrifugally formed intra-xylar phloem in the root. Of this tissue the larger part was seen to be parenchyma containing small groups of sieve tubes. Solereders made extended observations of phloem islands i in a large number of plants belonging to various families; the Onagraceae were, however, not investigated. The re ches of Hérail* and Kolderup-Rosenvinges* have also added to our knowledge of these structures in certain genera. 1 The investigations of Messrs. Scott and Brebner,™ at first or Strychnos, and afterward on numerous other plants” are of in- terest. The writers criticize the work of DeBary, and find h statement that the intra-xylar phloem in Strychnos is ¢ oped centrifugally to be incorrect. They find that there are masses of crushed tissue at the outside of the islands, that the islands grow from an internal cambium and that this growth gradually crushes the older effete cells, farther out. In some 7 cases medullary rays may be seen extending through ; phloem islands. Thirteen plant families are enumerated in which phloem islands occur. J * The subject has been investigated by Scott, 2 Fremor Van Tieghem,*! Leonhard® and others. A good drawing of a island is given in Taf. 11, jig. 3, in connection with Leonk work, Chodat*: 3 has made a study of the different modes 0 Solereder. loc. cit. Herail. Recherches sur l’anatomie comparée de la tige des Dicotylédones. des Sc. Nat. VII. 2: 1885. Kolderup-Rosenvinge. Anatomisk Ondersdgelse af Vegetationsorganerne Salvadora.—Oversigt K. Dansk. Selskats. 1880-1881. * Scott and Brebner. On the Anatomy and Histogeny of Strychnos.—Annals o Botany 3: 275. 1889. ; Scott and Brebner. On internal Phloem in the Root and Stem of Dicotyleé Annals of Botany 5: 259. 1891. Scott. On some recent progress in our knowledge of the anatomy of plan nals of Botany 4: 147. 1889. ; Scott. On some Peculiarities in the Anatomy of Ipomoea versicolor Meissn.—An- nals of Botany 5: 173. 1891. 05 Fremont. loc. eit. a Van Tieghem. Sur les tubes criblés extra-libériens, etc. Morot. Journ. de bota- nique 5: 117. 1891. me, Leonard. Beiträge zur Anatomie der Apocynaceen. Bot. Centtraibl. 45. 1901. Chodat, R. Contribution a l’ttude des anomalies du bois. Atti del congresso bo- tanico internazionale diGenova. 144-156. 1893. 1 Chodat, R. Nouvelles recherches sur l’origine des tubes criblés dans le bole. 8 Archives des sciences physiques et naturelles, 1892. This and the foregoing : article are reviewed by Schimper in Bot. Centralbl. 55: 277. 1893. £S 8 8 8 BR LB = 88 Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 679 origin of the islands. In the majority of cases, according to this investigator, the intra-xylar islands have their origin in the cambium, and are developed exclusively in a centrifugal manner. Oenothera furnishes an example of this method of formation. He states that there are but three genera known at the present time, in which the phloem islands are developed centripetally. These are Strychnos, Memecylon, Guiera. The latest contribution to the subject is by Perrott.“ who has made a careful study of the development of the phloem is- lands in Strychnos. He confirms, in general, the observations of Scott and Brebner, though disagreeing in some points. No reference is made to any species of Onagraceae. Methods.—For most of the work carefully determined herb- arium material was employed. Of the Minnesota species sec- tions from fresh material were also examined. Whenever pos- sible a number of specimens of each species from different localities were used. Portions of the stem were taken at dif- ferent heights. Some of these pieces were placed in 2 per cent. potassium hydrate solution for twelve hours and, after being thoroughly washed in water, were put through the usual process preparatory to section cutting. Other pieces were put at once into 10 per cent. alcohol and from that carried up through the higher grades of alcohol in the ordinary manner. Various stains were used. The most satisfactory ones tried were a watery solution of fuchsin and methyl blue, and a solu- tion of fuchsin and iodine green in 40 per cent. alcohol. Both these combination stains give good differentiation. The best results were obtained by employing the stains in very dilute form, allowing them to act from twelve to twenty-four hours. By using an eosin-haematoxlin stain some excellent prepara- tions were also made. Permanent mounts in Canada balsam were preserved of all the sections examined. In order to dissociate the separate elements for careful study pieces of stem previously soaked in water were treated with Schulze’s macerating mixture. When diluted with an equa) quantity of water this mixture was found to be sufficiently strong. Only in macerated material could the length of stere- ids and wood fibres be at all accurately determined. For examination of the epidermis it was merely necessary to place thin portions of the cortex in water for from one to two hours, when the desired tissue could be peeled off with little 35 Perrot. Sur les ilots libériens intraligneux des Strychnos.—Morot, Journ. de Bot. 9:90. 1896. 680 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. difficulty. No permanent mounts were made. To insure ac- curacy, most of the drawings were made with the aid of a cam- era lucida. List of plants investigated.—The following plants were ex- amined: Anogra pallida (LiNDL.) Brirron, Galpinsia hart- 1 wegii (BUN TH.) BRITTON, Kneiffla fruticosa (LI x N.) RAIMA Xx. Kneiffia glauca (Michx.) Spacu, Kneiffia linearis (Mienx.) Spacu, Kneiffia linifolia (NUTT.) SPACH, Kneiffia pumila (Linn.) Spacu, Megapterium missouriensis (Sims) Spacu, Meriolix 4 serrulata (Nurr.) WaLp., Oenothera humifusa Nurr., Oeno- thera sinuata LIN N., Onagra biennis (Lixx.) Scop. Epidermis. — The cells of the epidermis are similar in all the q species examined. In cross section they are square or more often oblong, the walls are rather thick, the outer wall is bulged. In surface view the cells appear more or less oblong, _ narrowed at the ends, or they may be described as elongated hexagonal in outline. 1 The dimensions of the epidermal cells are by no means con- stant even throughout the same plant. Perhaps an average q cell is 100mik. in length, with its tangential and radial diameters _ 25mik. and 20mik. respectively. As a rule no definite layer of eu- ticle is to be recognized, nor is there any considerable thicken- 3 f ing of the outer walls of the cells. In some cases, however, the outer wall is somewhat noticeably thickened and occasion- ally shows, on a properly stained section, a distinctively strat- ified structure (Kneiffia glauca). The chief differences notice- 4 able in the epidermis are in the length of the cells, the num- ber, shape and size of trichome structures and the numberof stomata. This last character is, however, of no considerable taxonomic importance since the number of stomata varies with __ the particular plant and in any given plant with the part ex- amined. “a The epidermis and the cortical layer are absent in older parts of the stem, being pushed out by the developing cork. Incer- tain species the cork begins growth very early; notable for this peculiarity are Anogra pallida, Kneiffia fruticosa and lini- folia and Galpinsia hartwegii. The first named is particularly remarkable in this respect, and it is only in the very youngest parts that the epidermis remains. The epidermal hairs are never branched. As a rule they are straight or slightly curved, pointed at the end and commonly g unicellular. The hairs vary considerably in length, averaging, — a Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 681 perhaps, 100 or 200mik.; sometimes they are 1 to 2mm. In Oenothera humifusa many of the hairs are placed upon large multicellular emergences. This occurs occasionally also in some of the other species. Besides the usual long, straight or slightly curved hairs there are often present short clavate ones, not much longer than the epidermal cells, e. g, Galpinsia hartwegii and Oenothera sinuata. Sub-epidermis.—This consists usually of a narrow zone of collenchyma enclosing a greater or less amount of parenchyma. In some cases the cells of the first one or two rows below the epidermis might, perhaps, be best described as sclerenchyma. They resemble very much, when seen in cross section, the epidermal cells. Occasionally there is but ope such row, so that the epidermis appears two-layered. In no case is the col- lenchyma greatly thickened at the angles. The collenchyma usually, though not always, shades gradually into parenchyma. In Oenothera humifusa, and, at times, in other species, there is but a single layer of thick-walled cells within the epidermis. This species is also remarkable for its numerous large emerg- ences, at the bases of which are often situated crystal sacs. Emergences commonly, however of smaller size and fewer in number, are found in all the species examined. These, as a rule, seem not to offer communication with the outside world, but are simply irregular thickenings of the cortical layer. The cells in both the collenchymatous and parenchymatous portions are somewhat flattened in the plane parallel to the epidermis. When seen in cross section they are often twice as long as broad. There is considerable difference in the thick- ness of the parenchymatous zone, depending upon the species and the particular plant examined. Sometimes this zone is but a very few cells broad, e. g., in Kneiffia fruticosa, where the whole sub-epidermal area is, for the most part, poorly developed. Cells containing raphides of calcium oxalate are commonly _ abundant in the parenchymatous tissue. This is especially the ease in those stems in which the cortical parenchyma is well _ developed. It is to be noted that the crystal sacs are not dis- _ tributed evenly along all parts of the stem, but are very irreg- _ ular as to their occurence. A cross section of the stem taken at a certain height may contain but a few crystallogenous cells, While one taken a millimeter above or below it may show them in great abundance. These cells are commonly of considerable Size, nearly circular, in cross section about 30 to 40mik. in diam- 682 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, eter. In longitudinal section they are seen to be — 4 elongated, often from 100 to 250mik. in length. In Kneiffia — glauca and Kneiffia pumila no crystal sacs were observed. A> The differences of different stems shown in the sub-epider- — mis are in the relative amounts of sclerenchyma and col- 4 lenchyma, the thickness of the parenchymatous zone and me presence or absence of crystal bearing cells. In some cases the same species will afford as marked differences, in different — plants, as are found in the most widely separated species whet were examined. 7 1 Endodermis. — This is, at least in herbarium material of any, considerable age, very indistinctly differentiated from the ad- jacent cells. It cannot ordinarily be distinguished except from its position as just outside the groups of pericyclic stereome. — The cells, seen in cross section, appear elliptical or flattened © in outline, | 4 Pericycle.—This is in all cases heterogeneous and a number of cells in thickness. The cells are usually somewhat flatter 5 ellipsoidal in shape, the longitudinal diameter mug longest, the radial the shortest. Toward the outer bouné of the pericycle are groups of thick-walled fibrous cells. cells are often 200 to 400mik. long; they have a narrow lu . In cross section they appear five or six-sided. The mid lamella is usually quite distinct. The cell walls are ordir of unmodified cellulose. In some of the sections they pre a somewhat marked lignin reaction. Apparently this lignifi tion is not confined to or characteristic of any one or g number of species. The stereome cells occur, in most cas in patches of considerable size, three or four rows broad in a radial direction, the patches separated from each other > by parenchyma (e. g., Onagra biennis, Anogra pallida, Oenothera rhombipetala). Sometimes this stereome area is very nz but a single cell broad, and forms a continuous or nearly cc ! tinuous closed ring. a i?! The cork is of pericyclic origin, OORT IT similar in all t the species examined. It is made up of flattened rectangular pris- matic cells of two sizes, arranged in alternating layers. Th large cells have a radial diameter about four times as great have the small ones. The latter commonly carry a browni pigment. In Anogra pallida this pigment is, for the most pz absent; this is also the case occasionally in other species. the species named the cork in older parts shows a tendency Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 683 split and become shreddy.“ as it is described in the manuals. It is smooth and white in color. All the cell walls are extremely thin, and it is only in the outer layers of cells, i. e. those at or near the surface that they are to any extent suberized. In this respect there can often be noticed a gradual transition from phellogen to mature cork. The large cells are usually somewhat bulged at the expense of the smaller ones. These latter may be so greatly compressed that their presence can only with difficulty be demonstrated. ; | The radial walls of the large, as well as the small cells, when viewed in transverse section are mostly curved or wavy, seldom i straight. In the younger portions of the stem where the cortical tis- _ sues are still present the phellogen can be recognized as a few layers of thin walled cells having the shape of mature cork ele- ments. 4 ee most of the species the early development of the cork hes out the overlaying tissues causing them to peel off. . is not always the case. In Megapterium missouriensis 4 ‘none of the sections examined showed any great development of cork; the cortex was in all cases present. Only three or four layers of immature cork cells could be seen; the inner ones . 7 were compressed and not of full size. A peculiarity in the cork of Meriolix serrulata deserves mention. In some of the sec- tions examined numerous sclerotic cells are present, or rather some of the cork cells have very much thickened walls show- bite lamellation. This characteristic is, in many preparations, quite noticeable. The average size of the large cells in cross section is perhaps 6mik. x 22mik. This oblong character is occasionally not strictly adhered to; in Kneiffia glauca the cells are in outline . nearly square. In Galpinsia hartwegii, they are often of quite 1 shape. Whatever differences may be noted in the size of cork cells are not to be regarded as of any taxonomic import- a _ ance, since considerable variation in this respect often occurs even in different parts of the same plant. q 1 In nearly all cases erystallogenous cells are present in the pericycle; these are usually considerably larger than the ordi- nary parenchymatous elements; their longitudinal diameter is 1 not infrequently 100 to 200 mik. or even 280mik., e. g., Megap- = C * 3ͤ2— A rather remarkable feature to be noted in Anogra pallida is the presence of crystal sacs, horizontally placed; i. e. with the 684 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. raphides lying parallel with the radial diameter of the cells. These are, however, far less numerous than the usual variety of crystal sacs. 1 Anatomically no sharp line can be drawn between pericycle — and phloem; they shade imperceptibly into one another. Phloem. In cross section the phloem is not definitely marked off from the pericycle. Its cells, however, are usually some- — what smaller, and when crystal sacs are present they too are smaller than are those in the pericycle. In Kneiffia linearis and Kneiffia pumila no crystal sacs were observed. The cells of the normal phloem are mostly parenchymatous. | a In cross section they are circular or elliptical. The long dia- meter of the cells of the phloem parenchyma is seldom — a 25mik., as a rule not over 20mik. The cell walls are quite thin, and any investigation of the tissue in herbarium material is alto- gether unsatisfactory. Sieve tubes could not be demonstrated fa with certainty except in fresh material. In cross section they _ appear scattered in small groups through the paronchy aay There are no bast fibres. Some of the species which grow to a considerable size have — the phloem area fairly well developed, however, in most cases, 3 it is but a few cells broad, usually six to twelve, occasionally — even narrower. It may be forty cells or even more in breadth, (Onagra biennis, Megapterium missouriensis.) The cells of the phloem, though sometimes, for a part of the way irregularly — 4 placed are more often arranged in radiating rows. The med- ullary rays can often be distinctly traced as single rows of cells : radially elongated. 5 compensated for by the presence of phloem elements in me 4 pith, and in some species in small patches in the xylem. a Medullary phloem.—Apparently the vascular bundles of all the species may be described as bicollateral, whether or not this bicollaterality exists from the first or is the result of a sec- ondary growth of tissue within the medulla can, of course, only a be determined by an examination of very young material, show- ing the developmental stages. In Onagra biennis, the medul- lary phloem is developed in the hypocotyl of quite young seed . lings. The cells of the medullary phloem usually form distinete groups arranged with greater or less regularity in a circle toward the outside of the pith. Usually the cells are quite small, and are a Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 685 easily distinguished from the fundamental tissue. There may or may not be parenchymatous cells between these phloem groups and the primary wood. The thick walled bast cells found by Weiss in the medullary phloem of Onagra biennis were not seen. Intra-xylar phloem.—The intra-xylar phloem islands,as their name indicates, appear in transverse section, as isolated groups ot phloem tissue. The cells of which they are composed have thin cellulose walls which are usually somewhat crushed and _ distorted. Some sections show these islands partly formed with the wood beginning to close in around them. The sym- metry of the wood cells for some little distance just outside of . one of these islands is in nearly every instance somewhat dis- turbed. In cross sections of fresh material the sieve tubes are distinctly seen. It is a matter in which there is room for doubt as to whether or not all these islands contain, in reality, phloem tissue. In 3 few longitudinal sections obtained, which showed these groups at all well, the cells did not present the characteristics of vascular tissue. They areirregularly cylindrical or roughly bi-conical, not greatly elongated. As a rule the longitudinal diameter is not more than two or three times as great as the q others. a These islands are not present in very young parts of the stem, nor do they occur in stems which attain only a slight thickness. They usually appear in cross sections as patches _ having a width of from three to eight cells in a radial direction q and extending, in the direction parallel to the circumference of _ the section, from a distance of half a dozen cells to an eighth or a sixth of acircle. Commonly they are so arranged that they form more or less interrupted circles within the woody zone. In sections of thick portions of the stem, these circles are usually placed at about equal distances apart, and are read- _ ily distinguished if the preparations be stained with some ap- _ propriate mixture as fuchsin and methyl blue or iodine green. _ Phloem islands were found in the following plants: Anogra pallida, Megapterium missouriensis, Oenothera rhombipetala, Oe. sinuata and Onagra biennis. In the first named species they are apparently not always present even in stems of some thickness. In Megapterium missouriensis small patches of phloem are to be seen in sections of stems which are 3mm. or more in thickness. Much larger patches are found in Oeno- thera rhombipetala. The islands in this species sometimes ex- 4 + r 686 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. tend five to six cells in a radial direction and twenty or more in the direction parallel to the surface of the stem. In old por- tions of the stem of Oenothera sinuata the islands present a peculiarity in their arrangement. They are not disposed in in- terrupted circles as they are in the various other species, but appear to be scattered at random. In Onagra biennis the intra- xylar phloem islands are well developed in old parts. Some of these islands show in cross section but four or five cells, and many but seven or eight; still others consist of very consider- _ able masses of tissue. The cells of this intra-xylar phloem in cross section are commonly small, not differing greatly in size from the smaller wood fibres. The islands first make their ap- pearance about 0.5mm. from the pith. There is, however, con- siderable variation in this respect. Cambium.—The cells of this tissue can, as a rule, only with difficulty, be recognized. They present no peculiarities inform and structure. In cross section the cambium, when discernible at all, appears as a narrow zone of thin-walled compressed or flattened cells, the long diameter generally between 10 and 15mik. — 3 In some cases the travsition from wood to cambium and from cambium to phloem is quite abrupt; more usually a gradual — transition occurs, at least between phloem and cambium. The different species present ro characteristic peculiarities as to a the development of cambial tissue. This seems rather tobe dependent upon external conditions favorable or ane 4 to rapid growth. 924 Xylem.— The primary wood is composed of spiral vessel 5 fibres and parenchyma, usually in groups projecting into the 4 pith. As a rule, the elements are not greatly lignified, though i. complete lignification sometimes occurs. The vessels are, in cross section, circular or elliptical in outline, not irregularly 4 polygonal, as are often the pitted vessels of the secondary a wood. The spiral thickening is sometimes in a siugle band; 8 again it may be in two bands running in opposite directions; 8 and in still other cases in two, three or four bands winding in the same direction. The average diameter of the spiral vessels E varies from about 12mik. in Kneiffia fruticosa to nearly 25mik. a in Onagra biennis. 7 f The secondary wood is divided by the medullary rays into very many narrow wedges; these wedges, even at their widest portions, are seldom half a dozen cells broad. The wood usu- ally shows considerable regularity in the arrangement of its . “ho ea Ramaley: ANATOMY OF ONAGRACEAE. 687 elements, the cells being placed in rather definite radiating rows. In those species where intra-xylar phloem islands occur this regularity is, however, broken in the parts just exterior to the islands. At these points the cells may be quite irregularly placed. The vessels of the secondary xylem are usually pitted, though occasionally reticulated. They are often in groups of three, flour or five, extended in a radial direction. In cross section _ the vessels appear irregularly polygonal or elliptical; the long axis, sometimes placed in a direction parallel to the circumfer- ence of the section, at other times at right angles toit. Ina few cases it is somewhat oblique. The partially absorbed trans- verse septa are readily seen in longitudinal section. The indi- vidual elements are seen to be, as a rule, about three times as long as thick. The largest vessels noted in the secondary wood were 100mik. in diameter (Onagra biennis, Oenothera sinuata). Of the last named species a section 2mm. in diameter showed no vessels over 37mik., while one 4mm. in diameter from another plant has vessels of the size above stated. As a rule, species with slender stems have smaller vessels than those with robust stems. There is considerable variety in the number of vessels seen in different cross sections. Apparently the proportion of vessels to wood fibres is by no means constant. The wood fibres are elongated fusiform elements, sharp- _ pointed at the ends. No branched fibres were observed. The Walls are often of considerable thickness. In size the fibres average, perhaps, 200mik.in length and 10 or 15mik. in thickness at their widest part. In transverse section they appear more or less hexagonal in outline, fitting into each other without in- tercellular spaces. Occasionally some of the fibres are more or less triangular in cross section (Oenothera humifusa), or small, somewhat diamond-shaped cells may be found between those of hexagonal form (Oenothera rhombipetala). The fibres seen in cross section are commonly elongated in a tangential direction, but in some sections they are found to be at times radially elongated (Galpinsia hartwegii). The middle lamella is, in nearly all cases, distinctly discernible. It shows thickenings. at the angles. Medullary rays.—The medullary rays extending from the pith to the phloem are very numerous. There are also many secondary rays which take their origin at some distance from the pith. Some of the rays are traceable the whole distance through the phloem to the pericycle. More often, however, 688 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the rays cannot be at all easily distinguished in the phloem. The separate elements of the rays are usually rectangular in outline. In cross section they appear elongated in a radial direction. In radial longitudinal section the cells are seen to be vertically elongated. All these cells, so far as observed, have pitted walls. Some show marked reticulations and irregular thickenings. An in- considerable amount of lignification is in some cases to be ob- served. Starch is occasionally present in the cell cavities. 692 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. much smaller, the basal auricles less excavate, the costa faint, not extended into the obtuse apex. Antheridial buds numer- ous along the middle part of the stem, shorter than the leaves, in their axils, with few paraphyses, and perichaetial bracts ecostate. Fruiting plants were not found. This plant is near Hypnum cordifolium, but differs from this species in having its leaves much more closely set on the stem, costate to apex, and much wider in proportion to length; also in having the larger cells of the auricles abruptly enlarged, and the leaf cells proper smaller. a It is also near Hypnum giganteum, but differs from it by 1 * unusually broad leaves, its smaller size, dark green color, and f fewer branches shorter. a M. Cardot has kindly compared it with the type of Rypam orbicularecordatum R. & C., and pronounces it a distinct and new species. 1 Dr. Best has also examined the plant with care, and hag 4 aided me by kindly sending, for comparison, specimens of a Macoun's Hypnum giganteum, of typical H. cordifolium, and of his own H. cordifolium var. ramosum MS. I cannot, at this a time, enter into a detailed criticism of these species and how variously they seem to be understood by different students. 15 only wish to state, in closing, that, as a result of my study of the number of specimens of Caliergon of North America to which I have had access, I concluded that it would be best to publish the plant under consideration provisionally as a species, 5 rather than as a variety of one of the established species. a There is at hand an abundance of material of this plant, which will be distributed shortly in my third fascicle, Nos. 101-150, of Mosses of Minnesota, so that all interested may a study it. PLATE XXXIX. Hypnum cyclophyllotum, Section Caliergon. ; Figs. 1, 2, 3. Plants, natural size. a Fig. Piece of stem, enlarged, to show phyllotaxy. 1 ¥ Stem leaf. x 56. = Branch leaf, x 56. 1 Lower part of stem leaf, x 56. Antheridial bud, opened, x 56. * Cross section of leaf, x 96. Leaf of Hypnum cordifolium, x 22. RiP Loe Pm XLII. CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA,—I. LICHENS OF THE LAKE OF THE WOODS. BRvucE FINE. It was at first thought best to present in a single paper a full list of all the lichens hitherto collected in the state,—about 200 species, But after looking through these collections it became evident that the state is divided, as regards its lichen-flora, into three or more distinct regions. To give all together would cover up to some extent the distinctive features of each region, and this is not desirable. The lichen-flora of the portion of the state south of Minne- apolis is essentially the same as that of Iowa. But when one examines the lichens found at Taylors Falls, only forty-five miles northeast of Minneapolis, he wonders at the great change in species caused by the peculiar geological formation. The lichens of the Lake of the Woods are, many of them, quite strangers to both of the regions named above. Whether the transition in lichen-flora in passing from Minneapolis to the Lake of the Woods is a gradual one, or occurs quite abruptly at or near the shores of the lake, must be ascertained by a further study of the lichens of the intervening territory. The lichens of the Lake Superior region remain to be studied, and are likely to furnish much that will be interesting. This paper is an account of collections made during the sum- mer of 1894, by Professor Conway MacMillan and Mr. E. P. Sheldon, and that made by Professor MacMillan in July, 1896, on the American islands. The former collections are the more complete as to localities, but the latter is the more complete in number of species. The number of species listed is not large, but furnishes sev- oral that are interesting because not reported from this portion of the United States before. The genera, Cladonia, Stereo- 694 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. caulon, Umbilicaria and Physcia furnish these interesting species, and notes concerning them will be found in the list below. The collection seems to indicate that the species of of Cladonia are particularly abundant, and the finding of four = Umbilicarias in this region is not less surprising. It is also worthy of note that two species of Parmelia truit here which do not further south. The notes concerning this fact will also 4 be found below in the list. In arrangement and sy nonomy I have followed Tuckerman's . Synopsis, which is likely to be the standard for some time in the study of American lichens. 4 LIST OF SPECIES AND VARIETIES. 1. Ramalina calicaris (L) Fe. var. fastigiata Pr. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 24. 2. Evernia prunastri (L.) Ach. 1 On wood. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2895. Ameri can islands, July, 1896, no. 25. ‘ 3. Usnea barbata (L.) Fr. var. florida Fr. On trees. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1694, no. a 1575. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no 28950. 7 4. Usnea barbata (L.) Fr. var. hirta Fr. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 27. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 5. Usnea barbata (L.) Fr. var. plicata Fr. On trees. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2895c. 6. Theloschistes chrysopthalmus (L.) Norm. On trees. Garden island, June, 1894, no. 401. 7. Theloschistes polycarpus (Enru.) Tuck. On trees and dead wood. War Road river, June. 1894, no. 500. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2245. Americ: islands, July, 1896, nos. 10 and 11. Two distinct forms are placed here, one having a green ish-yellow thallus and yellow apothecia, and the other having fulvous thallus and apothecia. The tc tends > toward the next. 8. Theloschistes lychneus (NL.) Tuck. 80 On trees. American islands, July, 1894, no. 227 American islands, July, 1896, no. 9. g Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 695 Theloschistes concolor (Dicks.) Tuck. On trees. War Road river, June, 1894, no 500a. Gar- den island, June, 1894, no. 644a. Parmelia borreri Turn. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 5. Parmelia borreri Turn. var. rudecta Tuck. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 50. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Parmelia saxatilis (L.) Fr. On trees. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1894, no. 1538. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2622. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2895a. American island, July, 1896, no. 3. The plants are frequently fruited, as are several ob- tained by the writer at Taylors Falls. Further south in Minnesota and Iowa the plant seldom, if ever, fruits. Parmelia olivacea (L.) ACH. On trees. Big island, July, 1894, no. 22455. American islands, July, 1896, no. 6. Parmelia caperata (L.) ACH. On trees. Shoal Lake island, July, 1894, no. 1040 American islands, July 1896, no. 4. Parmelia conspersa (Eure.) ACH. On granitic rocks. Big island, July, 1894, nos. 2156 and 2182. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2616. Island near Northwest angle, Aug., 1894, no. 3224. American islands, July, 1896, no. 2. Finely fruited here and at Taylors Falls. Further south in Minnesota and Iowa seldom fruited. . Physcia pulverulenta (ScHReB.) NYL. On wood. American islands, July, 1896, no. 19. Not previously reported from Minnesota. . Physcia stellaris (L.) Fr. . On trees and dead wood. War Road river, June, 1894. no. 500b. Garden island, June, 1894, no. 644. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2245a. American islands, July, 1894, no. 2273a. American islands, July, 1896, no. 21. Physcia tribacia (Ach.) Tuck. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 20. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 19. 21. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Physcia hispida (ScuReEB., FR.) Tuck. On trees, sterile. American islands, July, 1896, no. 17. This northern species has not been reported before from central-northern United States. It occurs com- monly in New England, and Hall has reported it from Oregon. = Physcia csia (HorrM.) NVL. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 51. Physcia obscura (EHRH.) NYL. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 18. Umbilicaria muhlenbergii (Acu.) Tuck, “a On granitic rocks. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2619. American islands, July, 1896, no. 30. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Umbilicaria vellea (L.) NVL. 3 On granitic rocks. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2597. Not previously reported Hon Minnesota. Umbilicaria dillenii Tuck. © q On granitic rocks. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2619a. American islands, July, 1896, no. 31. Umbilicaria pustulata (L.) Horr. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 42. The last two were listed by the writer as from Wiscon sin or Minnesota in Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 1894. Other- wise, these four Umbilicarias have not been reported be- 4 fore from central-northern United States. 3 oe Peltigera canina (L.) HoFrM. On earth. Elmer point, Aug., 1894, no. 2800. Amer- _ ican islands, July, 1896, no. 28. ie Varying from pretty good forms to the first variety below. Peltigera canina (L.) HOF FM. var. spuria ACH. “4 On earth. Shoal lake island, July, 1894, no. 1038. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2618. Island near North- west angle, Aug., 1894, no. 3227. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 208 31. 3 > . 32 at 0 q 288. Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 697 Peltigera canina (L.) Horr. var. sorediata Scu =r. On earth. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2210. This plant was often observed by the writer at Minne apolis, where it frequently fruits, as does the plant here listed from the Lake of the Woods. It is rare and usu- ally sterile in Iowa. The plant is nearly as fibrillose beneath as Pelligera canina (L.) HorrM., with shorter always white fibrils, those of the latter frequently be- coming brown. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Collema crispum Borr. On earth. American islands, July, 1896, no 22. The margins of the apothecia are crenate, in which the plant is nearer Collema tenaxw (Sw.) Ach. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Placodium elegans (LIN K.) D. C. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 56 Placodium cerinum (Hepw.) Nase. and Hepp. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, nos. 8 and 16. Placodium vitellinum (EnRH.) NAgG. and Hepp. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 55. Spores 20 to 30 in asci. Thallus rather deficient, and some of the apothecia have entire margins. In the last two characters the plant approaches var. aurellum ACH. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecanora rubina ( VILL.) ACH. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 57. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Leeanora varia (EHRH.) NL. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 52. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecanora varia (EHRH.) NVL. var. symmicta AcH. On dead wood. American islands, July, 1894, no. 2273c. American islands, July, 1896, no. 29. The spores are not so wide in proportion to the length as Tuckerman’s measurements, as is frequently the case with specimens of various forms of the species from Min- nesota and Iowa. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 698 36. 37. 88. 39. 40. 41. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Lecanora cinerea (L.) SOMMERP. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 53. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecanora cinerea (L.) SOMMERP. var. gibbosa NVL. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 54. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecanora muralis (SCHREB.) ScHzer. On granitic rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 51. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Rinodina sophodes (AcH.) NYL. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 15. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Gyalecta lutea ( Dicks.) Tuck, On wood and moss. American islands, July, 1896, no.1. Spores rarely three or even four-celled, in which the plant tends toward Gyalecta friesii KOERB. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Stereocaulon paschale (L.) Fr. On earth among rocks. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 1730. Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2109. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2154. Elmer point, Aug., 1894, no. 2803. American islands, July, 1896, no. 23. Not before reported from central northern United States, except by the writer, in Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 1894. The number of collections above prove that the plant is common. 42. Cladonia cariosa (ACH.) SPRENG. On wood. Small island south of Little Oak island. July, 1894, no.1726a. Island near Massacre island, July, 1894, nos. 2437c and 2485. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 43. Cladonia pyxidata (L.) Fr. On earth among rocks. Garden island, July, 1894, no. 430. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2153. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2603. Island near Northwest angle, Aug., 1894, nos. 3227 and 3287. Flag island, Aug., 1894, nos. 2896 and 2900. American islands, July, 1896, no. 33. 44. 45, 46. 1 47. 49. * Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 699 Cladonia fimbriata (L.) Fr. var. tubeformis Fr. On earth among rocks and on wood. Sweetheart is- land, July, 1894, no. 299. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 1729. Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2110. Massacre island, July, 1894, nos. 2602 and 2668a. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 289660. American islands, July, 1896, no 47. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Cladonia degenerans FLOERK. On wood. Garden island, June, 1894, uo. 427. Amer- ican islands, July, 1896, no. 41. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Cladonia gracilis (L.) NVL. On earth among rocks. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, nos. 1723, 1725) and 1726. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2243. Island near Massacre island, July, 1894, nos. 2437 and 2484. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2896a. American islands, July, 1896, nos. 43 and 45. Cladonia gracilis (L.) NVL. var. verticillata Fe. On earth among rocks. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1894, no. 1599. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, nos. 1724 and 1728. Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2108. Flag island, Aug., 1894, nos. 2894 and 2899. Island near Massacre island, Aug., 1894. no. 24374. American islands, July, 1896, no. 44. Cladonia gracilis (L.) NVL. var. hybrida Scu=r. On earth among rocks. Shoal lake island, July, 1894, no. 1041. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 1723b. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2598. American islands, July, 1896, no. 40. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Cladonia gracilis (L.) NVL. var. elongata Fr. On earth among rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 48. Cladonia furcata (Hups.) FR. var. crispata FL. On earth among rocks. American islands, July, 1896, no. 39. This variety has not been reported before from the in- terior of the United States. * 700 N MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, 51. Cladonia fureata (Hups.) FR. var. pungens Fr. On earth among rocks. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1894, no. 1597. Apparently a rare form in America. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 52. Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Horr, On earth among rocks. Sweetheart island, June, 1894, no. 351. Hill near Rat Portage, July, 1894, no. 920. IS. land north of Hay island, July, 1894, no. 1961. Big island, July, 1894, nos. 2156 and 2157. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, nos. 1725 and 1727. Lit- tle Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2106. Massacre island, July, 1894, nos. 2568 and 2601. Island near Northwest angle, July, 1894, nos. 3222, 3286 and 3289. Elmer point, Aug., 1894, no. 2805. American islands, July, 1896, no. 37. 53. Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Horrm. var. alpestris L. On earth among rocks. Sweetheart island, July, 1894, no. 350. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, nos. 1725a and 1729a. Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2107. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2600. Elmer point, Aug., 1894, no. 2804. Island near Northwest an- gle, Aug., 1894, no. 3223. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2898. American islands, July, 1896, no. 35. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 54. Cladonia uncialis (L.) FR. On earth among rocks. Island north of Hay island, July, 1894, no. 1962. Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 2111. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2599. Big island, July, 1894, no, 2155. Flag island, Aug., 1894, no. 2897. American islands, July, 1896, nos. 34 and 36. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 55. Cladonia cornucopioides (L.) FR. On earth among rocks. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1894, no. 1599. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 56. Cladonia macilenta (ERREH.) HorrM. On dead wood. American islands, July 1896, no. 46. Not previously reported from Minnesota. r 57. 58. 59. 61. 62. Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. : 701 Cladonia cristatella Tuck. On dead wood. Sweetheart island, June, 1894, no. 298. Main land, Huggins landing, July, 1894, no 1593. Small island south of Little Oak island, July, 1894, no. 1726b. Big island, July, 1894, no. 2213. Flag island, Aug., 1894, nos. 2893, 28944 and 28966. American islands, July, 1896, no. 38. Biatora atropurpurea (Mass.) Hepp. On bark of Populus. American islands, July, 1896, no, 13. Thallus thin, membranous, whitish, becoming scurfy; apothecia rather small, adnate, disk a little convex and becoming somewhat rough, pale within. Spores ellip- soid, simple, = mik, 8 in asci. The plant is placed here provisionally. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Biatora rubella (EHRH.) RABENH. On trees and dead wood. American islands, July, 1896, no, 12. Spores = mik, the longest being 10 mik. longer than Tuckerman’s measurements, as are those of the Eu- ropean plant. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecidea enteroleuca FR. On trees. American islands, July, 1894, no. 2273b. Buellia parasema (Ach.) TH. FR. On trees. American islands, July, 1896, no. 14. Endocarpon fluviatile DC. On submerged rocks. Massacre island, July, 1894, no. 2622a. American islands, July, 1896, no. 26. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Bulletin No. g., MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, November, 1896. PLATE XXXI. Bulletin No. 9, MINNESOTA 1896. AL STUDIES. November, . Bulletin No. 9, MINNESOTA £ 00 7 Z CONSIDERATIONS OF DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT. This paper is based upon collections made by me during the a mmer of 1896 in the outskirts of Minneapolis, or within six m mne of the city limits. As stated in the preceding paper, 2 lichen-flora of that portion of Minnesota from Minneapolis 80 uth is essentially similar to that of northern Iowa. After aving worked over portions of this latter area thoroughly, I was quite as much interested while collecting at Minneapolis o ascertain how the two regions bordering on the Mississippi ‘iver compared with reference to their lichen-floras as in ques- t ions purely local. Indeed, in no way can plant-distribution be 8 tudied better than by comparing different areas, and I shall : tempt to draw some conclusions, from my study of certain J Mities, concerning lichen-distribution in the region now un- der consideration. The first thing that impressed me in the study of the region out Minneapolis is that lichens are not so numerous there her as regards species or individuals as in some other parts Minnesota, or in certain equal areas in northern Iowa. I made a collection of about 220 species at Fayette, Iowa, hich 180 species were listed in my paper upon the lichens Iowa. These numbers are given for the whole county of ette, but, for purposes*of comparison, all species not with- ve miles of the city of Fayette are cut out, as will appear table to follow. ie only noteworthy differences between the vicinities of neapolis and Fayette as regards substrata suited to lichen- lopment are the presence of the Saint Peter sandstone at 704 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the former place, which does not occur at the latter, and the fact that the paleozoic limestones outcrop at the surface much more frequently at the latter. The first difference isin favor of the lichen-flora about Minneapolis, and the second favors that about Fayette, as each of these substrata bears its character- istic lichens. As will be especially noted toward the close of — these notes, these two differences about offset each other. The tamarack swamps about Minneapolis have no parallel about Fayette and furnish lichens not found, or rare, in other parts of the region considered in this paper. Yet all of these lichens: 8 occur about Fayette on one substratum or another, so that, in the comparison, the former region will gain nothing. Minne a apolis has the larger river and the lakes, but not a single lichen has occurred near these bodies of water that is especially char- acteristic of such localities. However, these bodies of water give the region a peculiarity of lichen distribution which can scarcely escape the notice of an experienced collector. It is that the number, both of individuals and species, is noticeably — greater about the lakes and river than in places ein a remote from them. 1 The following table, giving the genera and the number ot species in each for the Minneapolis and Fayette vicinities, willl be instructive and will form the basis for some further com- parisons of the two regions. No. of No. of No. of No. of a species, species, species, species, GENERA. Mpls. Fayette. GENERA. Mpls. Fayette. s 1 1 Opegrapha 1 / A 8 5— 1 Pannaria 2 Alectoria............. 1 1 Farmelia 8 3 13— 3 Peltiger a 6 P 3 5— 1 Pertusaria. 3 ; G A 55.55 1 1 Physeia 10 10— 1 Cladonia. 9 16 Placodium... 10 12 1 Collema 2 7— 1 Pyrenula... 3 1 Conioeyj be 0 1 Pyxine..... | ee Endocarpon............ 5 6 Ramalin a 3 c 1 1 Rinodin a 3 e 0 0O—1 | Staurothele 0 r 1 2— 1 Theloschistes 4 .. ˙ 2c. 0 1 Ureeolaria 1 F 16— 2 Usnea.. 5 CTT 1 2— 1 Venrucaria 3 Leptogium.. 1 5 — — omphalaria 1 1 1 Totals.. 113 157-23 The N at Fayette extended over “ra years, and that at Minneapolis only over two months. Yet the collecting at the former place was my first extended work on lichens, a l the best part of the work was confined to a single summer. Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 705 The Fayette column I have divided into two parts, the first containing 157 species, which, with present experience, I should expect to find in a region as favorable for lichen- development as Fayette and in the time spent in collecting at Minneapolis. The second part of the Fayette column contains 23 species, so rare that one would not be so likely to find them in the short time, or which are not found within five miles of Fayette. The 113 species found at Minneapolis are about 272 per cent of the 157 species of Fayette lichens, and it will be nan approximately correct estimate to say that lichens are one- _ fourth more numerous at the latter place than at the former. N The cause of the smaller number of lichens about Minne apolis is evidently to be sought mainly in its dryer climate. Several considerations have conspired to cause me to arrive at _ this conclusion. First, most species of lichens here are more disposed to confine themselves to moist situations, as about the a bodies of water mentioned above, in heavy woods, or when in dry places near the ground. The last tendency is noticeable a in Graphis scripta (L.) ACH., which in dry places most fre- . quently grows low down on the trunks of the trees. In pass - ing up from the Mississippi river banks 50 to 100 feet to the level ground just above the bluffs the decrease in number of 4 species and individuals, whether on rocks, earth or trees, is very striking. In one place within or near the city limits the _ granitic boulders just above the bluffs are well covered with lichens, while twenty rods back from the river in open ground * the rocks of the same kind are nearly bare of them. The de- erease is not so marked in lichens growing on trees as in those growing on rocks, but is noticeable. I am not referring now to change in species in passing to the dryer locality, which also occurs here as elsewhere, and is due to stress caused by environment. Further, it may be said that a decrease’ would _ occur in numbers in other regions, but observation shows it to be more marked in dry climates. In parts of northern Iowa no such noticeable decrease occurs. Here 15 or more species of lichens may easily be found on a single tree in moderately 3 ar situations, and nearly all the species commonly occurring 2 u the boulders in the vicinity of Fayette may be found on a Single one in an open dry field far removed from any stream. a HBecond, the gelatinous lichens, which thrive.in moist places, re rare at Minneapolis. The first table will show that the era Collema and Leptogium show 3 species at Minneapolis nd 12 at Fayette. I took special pains to investigate this ee * e 1 2 7 8 — a 706 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, peculiarity of distribution at the former place, searching deep wooded ravines where these species should abound. It may be added that two of the three species given for the one locality are much rarer than any one of the 12 given for the other. This adds to the evidence in a way not shown in the table. 4 Third, the genus Peltigera, the species of which grow on the ground where they can get an abundance of moisture, is repre- q sented by an equal number of species in the two localities com pared, as will appear upon examining the first table. The individual Peltigeras are also about equally numerous in the two regions, the genus Peltigera being probably the best developed one of the flora about Minneapolis, though several other genera __ are represented by more species. f A thorough exploration of three or four selected areas along the Mississippi river, between the two localities compared above would, if made by one well acquainted with lichens and their habits of growth, bring out some very interesting and instructive information regarding lichen- distribution. The first and second questions considered just above could thus be traced. As to where the gelatinous lichens decrease in num- ber most rapidly in passing northward; and where the change 1 from comparative uniformity of distribution, so far as influ- enced by the moisture or dryness of small adjacent areas, to greater lack of uniformity in this regard takes place most a rapidly, are questions of interest. * The difference in number of species of lichens for the two localities compared is a greater per cent of the larger total than is the difference in number of genera. Fayette has 34 4 genera and Minneapolis 29. The difference in favor of the former place for genera is only 15 per cent, while for species a it is about 28 per cent, or nearly twice as great. Reference to the table will show that the five Fayette genera (Coniocybe, Gyalecta, Heppia, Pyxine and Staurothele), not thus far found at a Minneapolis, are each represented at the former place by a@ single species Hence, the 15 per cent has not the significance that it would have if it stood for genera well represented at one place and wanting at the other. On the whole, the less favorable conditions for lichen development have affected the number of species vastly more than the number of genera. J 4 Further knowledge of the distribution of the lichens about Minneapolis can be gained by the consideration of the table below, in which I have given numbers of lichens for 3 various substrata for Minneapolis and Fayette with the per Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 707 cents which these numbers represent of the whole number of lichens found in each locality on the substrata considered. * SUBSTRATA. bang er = 8 Pw K 58 or 58.5 per cent.... .... 90 or 57 per cent. Calcareous rocks N or HT- 2.31 or 19.33 per cent. eee, cect ores or 10.66 * St. Peter sandstone.......... Gi cacksstasauapaasabecasysas 0 4 Barth. .....:.csececcsseceeese | 12 or 12+ per cent.........| 22 or 13.75 per cent. Wood and rocks 5. ee e e e | 0 3 Wood and earth............. 1 2 i Rocks and earth,..... .....- 3 3 1 Total numbers 1 180 The table shows very little difference in the per cents of species on different substrata for the two localities, and this would seem to indicate that, though the dryer climate of the Minnesota region has caused a poorer development of lichens than is found at the Iowa locality, it has not caused these plants to seek substrata éspecially favorable for their development. Other factors enter in to compensate differences which would otherwise occur to such an extent that the table shows in this respect just what it would not show were it not for these fac- tors, —similarity as to number of lichens on different substrata for the two regions. These other factors have prevented the development of a larger per cent of earth and rock lichens. As climate becomes dryer the relative per cent of these lichens should increase because nearer the earth there is more moisture. First as to the lichens on calcareous rocks, the per cent for Fayette is a little higher than that for Minneapolis, while the opposite condition should follow the difference in climatic conditions between the two places. This apparent difficulty is easily explained since the calcareous rocks outcrop at the surface much more frequently at the former locality. The lichen-spe- cies on calcareous rocks at Minneapolis are those confined in both places to perpendicular exposures, while one-third of the species found at Fayette are characteristic of surface outcrops. 4 Deducting one-third of the 19.33 per cent given in the table for Fayette leaves less than 12.7 per cent and gives Minneapolis an advantage of more than 3 per cent for conditions as to sub- ‘Strata existing at both places. This is given as the true rela- tion so far as influenced by the difference in hygrometric con- ditions. 708 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Next as to the lichens on granitic rocks, the difference of 1.3 per cent in favor of Minneapolis is not so great as might be expected. This is due to the fact that so many of the granitic boulders are in dry open places. The few in moist or shaded places are reasonably well covered with lichens, but those not thus protected are not, as has been stated elsewhere. The lime- stone exposures are usually shaded along the wooded river banks, hence the advantage for these rocks would be greater than for the granitic rocks were it not for the lack of surface outcrops of the limestone rocks. 1 As to the earth lichens, the region including Minneapolis lacks the calcareous-earth lichens of the Iowa region, because the calcareous rocks are more deeply covered by drift and have not been so frequently exposed to help in soil formation. Of the 22 earth lichens found at Fayette 7 occur on calcareous — earth, while of the 12 found at Minneapolis only 2 occur on calcareous earth. Reducing the first number to 15 and the third to 10 gives Minneapolis an advantage of .3 per cent. This. 3 per cent does not show the effect of atmospheric difler- ences between the two places compared, because of the Minne apolis Cladonias only one-third occur on the earth, while of those at Fayette about two-thirds grow on the ground. Since I shall be able to present no very satisfactory explanation of this difference in distribution of the Cladonias, it might be fair to throw the earth Cladonias out of the calculation; and, if this were done, the advantage in favor of Minneapolis in the per cents would be about 2.5. =, As to the wood lichens about Minneapolis, it will be seen that if the per cents of rock and earth lichens were what we should expect from hygrometric conditions alone, the per cent of these would rise and that of the wood lichens would fall in compara- tive proportion. In other words, conditions other than atmos- pheric have tended to decrease the rock and the earth lichens, but not the wood lichens. Scarcity of lichens on trees removed from the large bodies of water and not in heavy forests has been noted elsewhere in this paper. As to lichens on dead ag wood, especially old boards, the Minneapolis region furnishes 8 and Fayette 14. The per cent of the whole lichen-fiorasin favor of the latter region is about one. In the Minneapolis region the lichens on old boards are common enough in damp __ places, but in dry ones old boards are frequently quite bare f them. In the Iowa region the old boards are abundantly sup- plied with lichens, even in dry places. se Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 709 The reconstructed table below (which leaves the numbers of lichens for the substrata considered unchanged in the Minne- apolis column except that for the earth lichens all calcareous. earth lichens plus all earth Cladonias are omitted, treats the Fayette earth lichens in the same way and also deducts from the latter column all the calcareous-rock lichens found on sur- face exposures) gives the relative per cents for all the sub- Strata considered as influenced by atmospheric conditions alone. No. and per cent, No. and per cent, SubsTRata. Minneapolis. Payette. JJ . 58 or 62.3+ per cent Dor per cent. Calcareous rocks Nah e 20 or 15+ o Granite rocks Borla. “ * re —8 „ eee , ee icecae 5 or4— 2 This table simply places the per cents that would result from atmospheric conditions where they may be easily compared. However, by the reduction of the numbers representing earth 3 and calcareous-rock lichens to eliminate other causes, it re- _ duces the advantage for the Minneapolis vicinity in granitic rock species to a very small fraction. A somewhat larger number of such rocks were examined about Fayette, and pos- Sibly the larger number increases the number of species of lichens on them, which once established may now al! be found on a few of the rocks. However, if the smaller number about Minneapolis is due to removal of the rocks, this argument loses much of its value. This table shows the relation between the wood lichens, as influenced by climate alone by per cents, which has not been done before. : I have already stated that the comparative numbers of lich- ens for Minneapolis and Fayette apply for individuals as well as for species. Now, it must not be supposed that earth and rock lichens are comparatively common at the former place because the per cents are higher. A careful inspection of the tables will show that this does not follow. There are only a te lichen species which may be regarded as comparatively common about Minneapolis, such as most of those occurring on the Saint Peter sandstone, some of the Peltigeras, one or two Endocarpons, Rinodina sophodes (ACH.) NYL., Physcia stellaris (L.) Tuck. and perhaps two or three others. I have attempted to State in the list whether the species are common, frequent, or rare, and it seems to me that the number of rare lichens is 4 large. This is very noticeable in the Lecanoras where only one Species of 15 listed is given as common. 710 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. The Saint Peter sandstone along the Mississippi river near Minneapolis, and that along the same river in northeast- ern lowa near McGregor, may be compared as to lichen-floras by use of the following table, which gives the species charac- teristic of these rocks in both places, and also those found on them in each place and not in the other. 4 Species found in both places. In northeastern lowa only. About Minneapolis only. Ramalina calicaris (. Fr. var. frinacea SCHAER. Urceolaria seruposa (L.) NVL. Cladonia cornucopiol- Pannaria microphylla (8w.) DeLos. Cladonia = rangiferina (L.) Horrm. var, syl- vatieca L. Cladonia uncialis (L.) Cladonia crwspiticia ( Pens.) Fu. Fa, Biatora granulosa (Eunn.) Porrson. des (L.) Fr. Usnea barbata L.) Pr. var. rabiginea Micnx. This table affects comparisons thus far made in no way since the Iowa locality, now under consideration, is a different one than that previously used. In all the comparisons thus far made, the lichens on the Saint Peter sandstone have been elim- inated with those of other substrata occurring in only one of 4 the localities. Now, in the above table it will be noticed that the Iowa region has the advantage in the number of species not common to both. Knowing what occurs in Iowa, I examined the Minnesota locality very carefully, and the advantage is ap- parently due to the more favorable conditions for lichen growth in northern Iowa. The four species common to both regions 4 : are doubtless distributed along the river between the twolocal- __ ities wherever these rocks are exposed. How far north the four species found only in the Iowa locality extend, and how far south that found only in the Minnesota locality extends, are questions of interest. Knowledge on this point might lead toa 4 modification of views just stated. Usnea barbata (L.) FR. var. hirta Ph., is also confined to the Saint Peter sandstone at the Minnesota locality, but not at the a Iowa one, though occurring on this formation there also. This rock is apparently its most natural habitat in the regions con- sidered, to which habitat it is confined in the one less favorable to lichen development. Though, as in this instance, I have omitted from the last table the species found on these rocks 2 and also on other substrata near by in one or both regions, ab- ruptness in floral change due to stress caused by change in sub- strata is seldom better illustrated than in comparing the lichens Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 711 of the Saint Peter sandstone with those of other substrata that happen to lie adjacent. The distribution of lichens on this rock formation in Minnesota, Wisconsin, Iowa and Illinois is worthy of careful study. Other questions of distribution would be brought to light, illustrated by the species here considered and doubtless by several others not yet collected on these rocks. The statements thus far made will surely lead to some wrong conclusions on the part of readers if not somewhat explained. A perusal of the foregoing comparisons might lead to the con- clusion that the region covered by this paper is poorer in lichen-species than it really is. It has been compared with a region probably as much above the average for the part of the upper Mississippi valley near the river as it is below as to number of lichens, and yet the per cent of difference in favor of the Iowa locality is only 28. On the other hand, comparison with some other lists of lichen- floras about large cities might cause one to conclude that I have omitted certain factors that tend to decrease the number of species for such regions and have been at error in asserting that the locality treated in this paper is not naturally up to the average in number of lichens. For instance, the recent list by Mr. W. W. Calkins, for Chicago and vicinity, covering a much larger area than the one treated in this paper, only contains 12 more species. Probably Mr. Calkins’ collecting was as well done as mine, but from personal knowledge, as well as from the statement of Mr. Calkins in his introduction, I know that the Chicago region, naturally not a rich lichen-area, is now not so rich as formerly because of the inroads of civilization destroy- ing substrata. Destruction of substrata need scarcely be con- sidered in the area about Minneapolis, for, excepting perhaps the granitic boulders, one can find as great an abundance of substrata about Minneapolis as about Fayette, the locality with which the former region is compared. Concerning the list of lichens in Deane and Collins’ ‘‘ Flora of Middlesex Co., Mass.,“ in which Boston is located, little need be written. Though the lichen-flora treated in that list is much richer than that of either Chicago or Minneapolis, the number of species and varieties listed is only 146. After some experience in collecting about Boston, I know that this list for the large county of Middlesex is so incomplete that any conclu- sion as to the richness of the Minneapolis lichen-flora drawn from a comparison with this list would not be at all trust- worthy, especially after making allowance for the much larger area covered by the latter list. 712 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Also, from scattered statements in this paper, the inference might be drawn that I should have given more prominence to difference of substrata in accounting for the difference in num ber of lichens in the localities compared. Minneapolis gains 6 species on the Saint Peter sandstone, which is not found at Fayette, and lacks 6 species, occurring at Fayette, because the calcareous rocks seldom outcrop at the surface, and 5 species because of scarcity of calcareous earth. Possibly some allow ance should be made for a probable slight advantage for Fay- — ette in number of granitic rocks, though Minneapolis has the advantage in the per cent of species on these rocks. Of the 5 species gain for Fayette in the figures given above, 3 or 4. about 75 per cent, could be expected to occur at Minneapolis if the substrata were present. We could add as many more species for the possible advantage of Fayette in granitic rocks 4 as substrata and still only have a total difference of 7 species resulting from difference in substrata. This would reduce the advantage of Fayette to be accounted for by difference in at- 1 mospheric conditions to 37 species, or 24 per cent. Subtract- ing this from the total difference of 28 per cent, leaves a doubtful 4 per cent to be accounted for by lack of substrata at id ‘Minneapolis. a It may also be thought that I have not taken into account the usual decrease in number of species in passing from warmer to f colder regions. The distance of about 150 miles from south to north between the two localities compared is so small that lit- tle difference in number of species could result, the difference in mean annual temperature being between 2° F. and 3° F. The smaller number of individuals at Minneapolis also tends to 2 prove that the difference in latitude has not helped to produce the difference in number of species, as the decrease in number of species, caused by colder climate, usually gives place to an increase in number of individuals. If the difference in lichen; floras were due to the above cause, northern species should come in, to some extent, at Minneapolis, to take the place of those found at Fayette, and not at the former place. Parmelia — olivacea (L.) ACH., Evernia prunastri (L.) ACH., Cetraria ciliaris (Acc.) TucK., and possibly Alectoria jubata (L.) Tuck var. chalybeiformis ACH. are more numerous, and occur on more substrata at Minneapolis as a result of more northern location. but not a species has come in. So far as moisture influences distribution of lichens, the 5. = region along the Mississippi river should increase in richness of species as we pass south in the state from Minneapolis. Yet Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 713 so many factors influence distribution of species that one can- not predict with certainty the conditions in an unexplored region, even when adjacent to one already well studied. Further. the inference must not be hastily drawn that Minne- sota as a state is comparatively poor in lichen-species, for, while no one locality may finally yield so large a number of species as Fayette, Iowa, with 220 already collected, yet within the borders of the former state are included some areas which are veritable gardens for certain species. As examples may be mentioned the Cladonias and Umbilicarias of the Lake of the Woods, listed in the first paper of this series, and the rock lichens of Taylors Falls already collected. The list of species to follow certainly contains all or nearly all the species and varieties of lichens commonly occurring about Minneapolis, as well as a large portion of rare ones. It represents the lichen-flora of the area considered fairly well, so that notes and comparisons on distribution may be safely dran from the list and observations made while collecting the plants. However, a continued search should in time add 30 or perhaps 40 species to the number here given for this area. It is worth while to note the difference in precipitation of moisture for the two localities compared. This may be done buy a consideration of the following table, which gives the yearly precipitation for St. Paul, Dubuque and Fayette, since reliable records have been kept at these places. TABLE OF PRECIPITATION. YEAR, Sr. PAUL. DUBUQUE. FAYETTE. —— Pee. ea eee 35.50 Inches, 30.76 inches I , iene NITE hnpdieibeaiie . 28. S0 b . WEL eee 22.718 C © e eee 32.39 32.40 * eee 29.76 40. 32 e . 39.08 g 55.10 ee EE RE OR nnn 39.57 . C 26.11 42.88 eee . 25.83 1 5.5 F n oo “ pS EER eee P 25. 88 33.31 * . 4 16.96 10 24.25 a 26.37 inches RU REPO ae c cas « : 23.38 : 43.16 * 46.74 15 . 21.79 2.55 32.64 P 32.55 48. 47 40. 34 neee 25. 95 30.77 29. 41 C 25.80 19.35 21.64 . 24.26 1 19.79 “ 21.97 * ccc 2 a 8 8 34.49 5 enn 2.12 o Average last 8 years 3 2.68 3 2.8 * 714 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES A comparison of the figures for St. Paul and Fayette for the eight years since the record has been kept for the latter place, shows a difference in annual precipitation of 6.77 inches in favor of Fayette. Comparison of St. Paul and Dubuque for the whole twenty-three years shows a difference of 9.31 inches per annum in favor of Dubuque. Now, comparison of Fayette and Dubuque for the eight years shows a difference of .50 inches per annum in favor of Fayette. Thus these last two places, only about fifty five miles apart, show so little difference in amount of precipitation that the Dubuque figures may be sub- stituted for Fayette without great error. Also, a glance at the table shows that St. Paul suffered less from the drouth of recent years than Dubuque, and hence than Fayette, so that 4 the figures for the smaller number of years cannot be relied on, and 9.31 inches per annum doubtless is nearer the average difference between Minneapolis and Fayette in precipitation than is 6.77 inches. The use of St. Paul figures for Minne- apolis can, of course, give rise to no appreciable error, and this difference of abuut 9.31 inches, with the accompanying dif-. ference of humidity of the atmosphere, seems to account very _ largely for the differencé of 28 per cent in number of species of E. lichens. No reliable figures as to relative or absolute humidity _ could be obtained. Though dealing with a small area, it will be seen that this 4 paper may be regarded as preliminary to a study of the dis- ; tribution of lichens all along the upper Mississippi river. Some of the questions that would arise in such a study have been briefly stated in this paper, and others have been sug- = gested to me which I have not stated. The principal conclusions as to distribution and habitat of E the lichens about Minneapolis may be given as follows: (1) The lichen-flora of Minneapolis and vicinity is not a rich one, being about 25 per cent poorer than some portions of northern Iowa, and doubtless also than southeastern Minnesota. (2) The difference in number of lichens for the two areas com- pared affects species, but scarcely extends to genera to any appreciable extent. It also affects individuals, giv- ing a large number of rare or infrequent species for Minneapolis. s (3) The cause of the comparatively smaller number of species and individuals for Minneapolis and vicinity is its dryer climate. Other causes act, as stated elsewhere, to a very mited extent. Fink : THE LICHENS OF MINBESOTA. 715 pee scene ars the principal cause is dryer climate are as fol- os The lichens about Minneapolis are more inclined to confine themselves to moist places in denser woods, or about bodies of water (b) The gelatinous lichens, which thrive best in moist | places, are rare about Minneapolis. (c) The genus Peltigera, whose species grow on the ground, where moisture is plentiful, is the best represented genus at Minneapolis when we take into account both species and individuals. (d) Were it not for other than atmospheric conditions the number of species of rock and earth lichens would be somewhat large when compared with those on trees. (e) Even the Saint Peter sandstone, usually occurring in moist places, bears fewer species of lichens about Minneapolis than in a region near Mc- . 55 Gregor, in northeastern Iowa. a (5) The most interesting portion of the lichen-flora of the a region is that of the Saint Peter sandstone, which has yielded the characteristic species given in the fourth ; table. q (6) The tamarack swamps furnish floral elements somewhat distinct from those of other portions of the area studied. (7) It seems that there is somewhat of a reduction of the num- ber of habitats of certain species as compared with the other region better adapted to the development of lich- ‘ens. This has been noted for Usnea barbata (L.) Fr. var. hirta FR., and a comparison of the number of species of lichens found both on wood and rocks at Minneapolis and Fayette, as shown in the second table, is further evi- dence. Other instances could be drawn from a compari- son of the lists for the two places. Yet, for the species Furmelia olivacea (L.) ACH., Evernia prunastri (L.) ACH. and Cetraria eiliaris (Acu.) TUCK., the number of habi- tats is larger than for northernlowa. These are species that occur abundantly to the north of the United States, and the region about Minneapolis is better adapted to their development than the one with which it is com- _ pared. 716 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. (8) The scarcity of Cladonias, as regards individuals and earth g growing species, I have not yet attempted to explain. IT general scarcity is due to dry climate, one would suppose that the earth forms should predominate. Yet, I suspect that the old stumps and the Saint Peter sandstone fur- nish more moisture than does the earth, so that two- — thirds of the species are confined to the first two sub. strata on this account. If so, the cause of scarcity, even of earth forms, may, after all, be dry climate. LIST OF SPECIES AND VARIETIES. 1. Ramalina calicaris (L.) FR. var. fraxinea Fr. On trees, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 89. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 2. Ramalina calicaris (L.) Fr. var. fastigiata Fr. ~* On trees, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 89a. 3. Ramalina calicaris (L.) FR. var. farinacea SCHAER. On Saint Peter sandstone, common. July 11, 1896, no. 170. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 4. Cetraria ciliaris (Ach.) Tuck. On tamaracks, old fences and Saint Peter sandstone, fre- quent. June 19, 1896, no. 96; July 10, 1896, no. 158. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 5. Evernia prunastri (L.) Ach. On tamaracks, old fences and Saint Peter sandstone, fre- quent. June 19, 1896, no. 19. Rare further south, the only other state from which it is re- ported in the Mississippi valley being Iowa, where the writer has collected it twice. 6. Usnea barbata (L.) FR. var. florida FR. On trees, rare. July 4, 1896, no. 92. 7. Usnea barbata (L.) FR. var. hirta FR. On Saint Peter sandstone, rare. July 4. 1896, no. 92a; July 11. 1896, no. 169. Passes into the next. . 8. Usnea barbata (L.) FR. var. rubiginea MIcRX. On Saint Peter sandstone, common. July 11, 1896, no. 169a. Not previously reported from Minnesota: 9. Usnea angulata ACH. On tamarack, very rare. June 19, 1896, no. 21. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 717 10. Alectoria jubata (L.) Tuck. var. chalybeiformis Ack. On old fences, frequent. July 10, 1896, no. 218. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 11. Theloschistes chrysopthalmus (L.) Norm. 1 On tamaracks, very rare. June 19. 1896. no. 20. 12. Theloschistes polycarpus (EAHRAH.) Tuck. On dead wood and occasionally on living trees. Preferring Populus, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 108; July 9, 1896, no. 129. 13. Theloschistes lychneus (DyL.) Tuck. e On trees, infrequent and me capa fruited. June 26, 1896, no. 32. 14. Theloschistes concolor (Dicks.) Tuck. On trees, common. June 28, 1896, no. 29. 15. Parmelia erinita Ach. On trees, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 102; July 13, 1896, 0. 202. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 16. Parmelia tiliacea (HorrM.) FLOERK. On trees, common. July 4, 1896, no. 93. 17. Parmelia borreri TURN. On trees, common. June 24, 1896, no. 4. 18. Parmelia borreri TuRN. var. hypomela Tuck. On trees, rare. July 4, 1896, no. 74. Sterile, hence not quite certain. : : Not previously reported from Minnesota. 19. Parmelia saxatilis (L.) Fr. On trees, frequent. July 4. 1896, no. 79. . Parmelia olivacea (L.) Ach. On trees, especially tamarack, also on old fences and Saint Peler sandstone, frequent. June 19, 1896, no. 17; July 9, 1896. vo. 131 2 Parmelia caperata (L.) Ach. On trees, common. June 28, 1896, no. 47. Parmelia conspersa (EHRIH.) ACH. 3. 1896, no. 77; July 13, 1896, no. 115. 25. Physeia speciosa (WuLF., Ach.) Nyx. 718 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. * 24. Physcia hypoleuca (Mont.) Tuck. On trees, rare. July 4, 1896, no. 86, 25. Physcia granulifera (Acu.) Tuck. On trees, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 95. Not previously reported from Minnesota, 26. Physcia pulverulenta (Scures.) Nyv. On wood, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. Sla. 27. Physcia stellaris (L.) Tuck. On trees, abundant. June 25, 1896, no. 23. 28. Physeia stellaris (L.) Tuck. var. apiola Nyv. On granitic rocks, rare. July 9, 1896, no. 184. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 29. Physcia tribacia (Acu.) Tuck. On trees near the base, infrequent. June 28, 1896, no. 41. 30. Physeia csia (Horrm.) Nyt. On granitic rocks, infrequent. July 3, 1896, no. 72. 31. Physcia obscura (Exru.) NYL. On trees, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 75. 32. Physcia adglutinata (FLOERK.) NYL. On trees, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 90. 33. Peltigera polydactyla (NecK.) Horr. On earth, rare. Aug. 16, 1896, no. 226. 34. Peltigera pulverulenta (TAYL.) NYL. On earth, infrequent. June 30, 1896, no. 39. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 35. Peltigera rufescens (NecK.) Ho. On earth, infrequent. June 30, 1896, no. 40. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 36. Peltigera canina (L.) Horr. On earth, very common. June 30, 1896, no. 44. 37. Peltigera canina (L.) Horr. var. spuria ACH. On earth, frequent. July 9, 1896, no. 124. 38. Peltigera canina (L.) Horr. var. sorediata Scu =R. E On earth and Saint Peter sandstone, frequent. July 9, 1896, no. 142; July 14, 1896, no. 165. See note under no. 28 of first paper of this series. . But the plant from the sandstone shows scarcely fibrillose a forms like var. spuria ACH. except for the soredia. ; Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 719 89. Pannaria languinosa (AcH.) Kars. On shaded rocks and mosses, common. June 30, 1896, no. 51; 9 July 11, 1896, no. 157. The pale sulphur- colored form common in Europe, but not before reported for the American lichen, occurs on the Saint Per sandstone. It has also been collected by the writer on the same rock formation in Iowa. Not previously reported from Minnesota. | 40." Pannaria nigra (Hups.) NYL. On calcareous rocks, rare. July 13. 1896, no. 138. Not previously reported from Minnesota, 5 . Omphalaria sp. * calcareous rocks, rare. July 30, 1896, no. 196. Thallus small black fronds, rounded above, and the larger ones be- ming somewhat roughened and lobed. Apothecia innate and 4 “tr quently several in a frond. Spores simple, colorless, => mik, numerous in asci. Gonimia in clusters. Probably a new spe- 4 5 Collema flaccidum Ach. On trees, rare. June 19, 1896, no. 18. 4 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 4 3. Collema pulposum (Bernu.) NYL. a On clayey earth, infrequent. June 28, 1896, no. 98; June 25, 1896, no. 14; July 20, 1896, no. 179. 1 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 44 Leptogium lacerum (Sw.) Fr. On calcareous rocks among mosses, rare. July 20, 1896, ». 139. oo previously reported from Minnesota. Placodium elegans (LI xk.) DC. 1 do calcareous rocks, rare. July 31 1896, no. 225. Placodium cinnabarinum (Ac#.) Ax z. n granitic and calcareous rocks, rare. July 3, 1896, no. 69; 10, 1896, no. 109. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Placodium microphyllinum Tuck. n dead wood, rare. July 11, 1896, no. 182a. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 720 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 48. Placodium citrinum (Hopp) Leicur. On calcareous rocks, probably rare. July II. 1896, no. 150a; © July 30. 1896, no. 204. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 49. Placodium aurantiacum (Lianr.) NAG, and Hepp. On trees and calcareous rocks, frequent. June 26, 1896, no. 80; July 2, 1896, no. 52. 50. Placodium cerinum (Hepw.) Nase. and Hepp. On trees, abundant. July 12, 1896, no. 193. ‘ The usual form occurs, and also another with whitish thalline exciple and sub-pruinose apothecia. The last, usually on Ulmus, is, I think, worthy of a distinct name, though thus far always included with this species. a 51. Placodium cerinum (Hepw.) Naga. and Hepp. var. py racea NYL. On dead wood, frequent. July 12, 1896, no. 193a. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 52. Placodium cerinum (Hepw.) Naga. and Hepp. var. sid- “a eritis TUCK. 4 On granitic rocks, frequent. June 26, 1896, no 11. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 53. Placodium vitellinum (EHRH.) NAEG. and Hepp. On wood, infrequent. July 10, 1896, no. 147. Spores nearly all simple, scarcely exceeding 8 in asci. 54. Placodium vitellinum (EnRH.) NAEd. and Hepp. var. . aurellum Ac. 4 On calcareous and granitic rocks, frequent. June 28, 1890, 4 no. 54; July 3, 1896, no. 73. 1 Spores 8 in asci, and always 2-celled in the specimens on cal. careous rocks. On granitic rocks spores are 8 in asci, but fre- quently simple. ce. Not previously reported from Minnesota. — 55. Leeanora rubina ( VILL.) AcH. On granitic rocks, rare. July 13, 1896, no. 206 56. Lecanora muralis (ScHREB.) SCHR. var. saxicola ScHZP. a On granitic rocks, rare. June 24, 1896, no. 1. 1 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 57. Lecanora subfusea (L.) Acg. On trees, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 94. A common lichen in northern Iowa, but about Minneapolis it q is confined to damp woods—a result of dryer climate. : eee „ +e Fink: THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. . 1 58. Lecanora subfusea (L.) Ach. var. argentata Ach. On trees, rare. July 9. 1896, no 112. Noot previously reported from Minnesota. 59. Leeanora subfusea (L.) Ach. var. coilocarpa Ach. Rarely found on red cedar, but more frequently on Saint Peter sandstone. July 11, 1396, no. 182a; July 30, 1896, no. 227. . The apothecia become large in some of the rock specimens. 60. Leeanora hageni Ach. On calcareous rocks and old boards, common. June 24, 1896, vo. 2; July 10, 1896, no. 147a. Not previously reported from Minnesota. er Leeanora varia (EARH.) NVL. On dead wood and Saint Peter sandstone, frequent. July 4. 1506, no. 84; July 10, 1896, no. 132; July 18, 1896, no. 195. ee 52. Lecanora varia (EARU.) NYL. var. symmicta Ach. On old boards, rare. July 9, 1896, no. 123a. 63. Leeanora erysibe Nyt. On calcareous rocks, rare. July 20, 1896, no. 175. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 61. Lecanora cinerea (L.) SoMMERP. & On granitic rocks, rare. July 9, 1896, no. 135. | 0 Lecanora cinerea (L.) SomMerr. var. gibbosa NL. a On granitic rocks, rare. July 30, 1896, no. 198. 66. Lecanora xanthophana Nyt. On granitic rocks, very rare. July 18, 1896, no. 212. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 5 67. Lecanora cervina (PRRS.) NxL. On granitic rocks, infrequent. July 18, 1896, no. 213. ot previously reported from Minnesota. 68. Lecanora privigna (AcH.) Nyt. On calcareous rocks, rare. June 28, 1896, no. 36. Not previously reported from Minnesota. Lecanora privigna (AcH.) NVL. var. pruinosa Auer. On calcareous rocks, infrequent. July 2, 1896, no. 56; July 1896, no. 209. ot previously reported from Minnesota. Rinodina oreina (Ach.) Mass. granitic rocks, rare. June 26, 1896, no. 27. - RE Gi IO — IT ay 8 ae! * — — 8 c ieee alae 722 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 71. Rinodina sophodes (Acu.) NVL. On old boards and granitic rocks, abundant. July 10, 1896, no. 151; July 10, 1896, no. 144; July 8, 1896. no. 81; July 16, 1896, no. 188a. 72. Rinodina sophodes (Acht.) NVL. var exigua Fr. On trees, where the thalline exciple is usually present, but the spores frequently reach 30 in each ascus. Also on dead wood, where it is more typical externally, but the spores only 10 or 12 ineach ascus. Probably infrequent. July 9, 1896, no. 123; July 9, 1896, no, 145. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 73. Pertusaria velata (TuRN.) NVL. On trees, rare, A single specimen was collected and lost. 74. Pertusaria communis DC. On trees, rare. July 11, 1896, no. 163b. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 75. Pertusaria pustulata (AcH.) NyL. On trees, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 96; July 18, 1896, no. 189. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 76. Ureeolaria seruposa (L.) NL. On Saint Peter sandstone, common. July 11. 1896, no. 154. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 77. Cladonia mitrula Tuck. On earth, frequent. June 30, 1896, no. 37. 78. Cladonia cariosa (ACH.) SPRENG. On earth at base of stumps, rare. July 31, 1896, no. 230. 79. Cladonia pyxidata (L.) Fr. On earth, common. June 28, 1896, no. 33. 80. Cladonia fimbriata (L.) FR. var. tubæformis Fr. On earth and old logs, frequent. June 28, 1896, no. 38. 81. Cladonia gracilis (L.) NVL. On old stumps, rare. July 31, 1896, no. 228. 82 Cladonia gracilis (L.) NL. var. verticellata Fr. On old stumps, rare. July 31. 1896, no. 205. 83. Cladonia cespiticia (PERS.) FL. On Saint Peter sandstone, frequent. July 11, 1896, no. 156. Not previously reported from Minnesota. | Fink. THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 723 f 4 84. Uladonia cornucopioides (L.) Fr. On Saint Peter sandstone, rare. July 14, 1896, no. 220. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 85. Cladonia cristatella Tuck. On old stumps, infrequent. July 31, 1896, no. 229. 86. Biatora hypnophila (TurN.) Tuck. 4 On moss and earth, infrequent. June 30, 1896, no 45; July 10, 1896, no. 159. Not previously reported from Minnesota. qi 87. Biatora rubella (EnRRH.) RABENH. On trees, common. July 4, 1896, nos. 88, 101 and 107. ss. Biatora fusco-rubella (Horr™.) Tuck. On trees, rare. July 20, 1896, no. 194; July 11, 1896, no. 153. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 89. Biatora inundata Fr. On wet rocks, abundant. July 2, 1896, no. 62; July 8, 1896, ud 117; July 9, 1896, no. 126. Not previously reported from Minnesota. . 90. Biatora muscorum (Sw.) Tuck. On earth and Saint Peter sandstone, frequent. July 11, 1896, 3 164; July 20, 1896, no. 207. Not previously reported from Minnesota. en. Biatora umbrina (Ach.) Tuck. 4 On calcareous rocks, probably rare. June 28, 1896, no. 34. _ Spores hamate, broadly u-shaped, slightly s-shaped or little * eu rved a Not previously reported from Minnesota. 92. Lecidea enteroleuca FR. 4 On trees and dead wood, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no 80b; “July 11, 1896, no. 182. os. Buellia parasema (Ach) TH. FR. On trees, infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 104. 4. Buellia myriocarpa (DC.) Mupp. On dead wood, infrequent. July 30, 1896, no. 192. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 95. Buellia myriocarpa (DC.) Mupp. var. polyspora WILLEY. On trees, rare. July 4, 1896, no. 116. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 724. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 96. Opegrapha varia (PERS.) Fr. On trees, frequent. July 4, 1896, no. 107a; July 9, 1896, no. 120. Not previously reported from Minnesota, 97. Graphis seripta (L.) Acu. } On trees, common. June 28, 1896, no. 50; July 2, 1896, no. 61; July 11, 1896, no. 163. 98. Arthonia lecideella NyL. On trees, frequent. July 7, 1896, no. 137. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 99. Arthonia radiata (Pers.) Tu. FR. . 1 On trees, rare. July 2, 1896, no. 66; July 4, 1896, no. 1053 July 11, 1896, no, 168. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 100. Arthonia punctiformis Ach. : On trees, infrequent. July 7, 1896, no. 113. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 101. Acolium tigillare (AcH.) DC. On old fences, infrequent. July 7, 1896, no. 114. 102. Endocarpon miniatum (L.) ScHzr. On calcareous rocks, infrequent. July 31, 1896, no. 203. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 103. Endocarpon miniatum (L.) Schr. var. complicatum SCHR. 3 On calcareous and granitic rocks, rare. July 14, 1896, no. 160; July 14, 1896, no. 161. 7 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 104. Endocarpon hepaticum Ac. On calcareous earth, rare. Specimen lost. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 105. Endocarpon pusillum HEDW. a On calcareous rocks, abundant. June 24, 1896, no. 5; June 25, 1896, no. 9. 1 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 106. Endocarpon pusillum HR DW. var. garovaglii KPH. On calcareous rocks and Saint Peter sandstone, rare. July 18, 1896, no. 215; July 30, 1896, no. 216. Not previously reported from Minnesota. } Fink : THE LICHENS OF MINNESOTA. 725 107. Verrucaria nigrescens Pers. On calcareous and granitic rocks, common. June 25, 1896, no. 25; June 28, 1896, no. 42; July 2, 1896, no. 67. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 108. Verrucaria fuscella Fr. On calcareous rocks, rare. July 8, 1896, no. 124; July 18, 1896, no. 184. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 109. Verrucaria muralis Ach. On calcareous rocks, rare. June 28, 1896, no. 36; July 9. 1896, no. 125. Not previously reported from Minnesota. 3 Pyrenula punctiformis (AcH.) Nazca. On trees, infrequent. June 17, 1896, no. 35; July 16, 1896, 1 “no. 188. Two forms are placed here, one having 2-celled spores and “the other 4-celled ones. Doubtless one will eventually be placed elsewhere. Not previously reported from Minnesota. us 1. Pyrenula leucoplaca (WaLLR.) KER. .* eon trees, probably rare. July 4, 1896, no. 87; July 11, 1896, 0. 158a. 7 Not previously reported from Minnesota. 112 Pyrenula nitida Ach. . infrequent. July 4, 1896, no. 99. 13 Pyrenula thelena Ach. On Betula, rare. July 4, 1896, no. 97. lot previously reported from Minnesota. 726 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XLIV. A RE-ARRANGEMENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. IT.—( Concluded.) Roscoe Pounp and FREDERIOGC E. CLEMENTS. Dendryphium WALLR.,which was omitted in Part I, has been a divided. The catenulate-spored section of which D. comosum — WALLR. is the type has been referred to Schizocephalum — Preuss (Minn. Bot. Stud. 9: 666. 1896). Dendryphium WALLR. has been retained for the section Brachycladium, of which Dendryphium nodulosum Sacc. is the type. Thus constituted, * * it is one of the Diplosporiaeae (I. c. 659). = 51. DENDRYPHIUM Wattr. Fl. Crypt. Germ. 2: 300, 1833. Vegetative hyphae obsolete; sporophores erect, or ascending, septate, swollen at the septa, the stout branches arising pseudo-acrogenously from the swellings, fuscous; conidia — rarely or not at all catenulate, acrogenous, solitary, or 2—3- clustered, oblong to fusoid-cylindrical, phragmosporous. ‘a fuscous. 4 Family STILBACEAE Fr. Syst. Myc. Introd. 1:47. 1821. Sterile hyphae obsolescent; fertile hyphae collected into a dense, stipitoid stroma, hyaline or fuscous; conidiophores either terminal, or lateral, forming a capitulum; spores glo- bose to cylindrical, amero-dictyosporous, hyaline or fuscous. | Subfamily Schaerocybeae. Conidiophores terminal, i. e., apices of the fertile hyphae; _ capitulum more or less globose, or turbiniform generally dis. q tinct from the stipe. a Tribe Stilbeae Fr. Summa Veg. Scand. 2:468. 1849. aa Conidiophores: simple, or sparingly branched; conidia sol- i itary. a Subtribe Hyalostilbeae Sacc. Mich. 2:32. 1882. Stroma hyaline, or bright-colored. * Found and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES, 727 1. STILBUM Tove. Fung. Meckl. 1:10. 1790. Stipe erect, cylindrical, the fertile apices of the hyphae col- lected into a dense globose, or capitate capitulum; hyaline. Strict, but not rigid; conidia simple, hyaline, globose to el- lüpsoid. The number of species reported for the United States is 29. 2. ACTINICEPS B. & Br. Journ. Linn. Soc. 15:85. Pl. 2. J. 3. 1877. Stipe as in Stilbum, but the capitulum composed of two sorts of hyphae, the sterile terminating in stiff projecting, radiating spicules, the fertile thin, branching, bearing the small globose, or ellipsoid conidia. A small genus of but two species, one of which occurs in this country. 3. MARTINDALIA Sacc. & ELL. Miss. Myc. 2:16. 1884. Stipe stilboid; capitulum composed of elongated spiral, nodulose sporophores; conidia globose, hyaline. Contains but a single species, reported for this country. 4. CILICIOPODIUM Corpa. Sturm. DC. Fl. III. 12:75. Stipe erect, or ascending, composed of simple, or branched filaments, clavate-cylindrical, bright-colored; capitulum obso- lescent; conidia acrogenous, hyaline, globose, or ellipsoid. Iwo species of this genus are reported for the United States. . ATRACTIUM Linx. Berl. Mag. 3:10. 1809. _ Stipe cylindrical, erect, capitate; sporophores erect, typic- ally single, parallel; capitulum obsolescent; conidia falcate, hyaline, 2-pluriseptate. This genus contains but a single American representative. Subtribe Sporocybeae FR. Summa Veg. Scand. 2:467. 1849. Stroma fuscous, or dark-colored. 6. SPOROCYBE FR. Syst. Orb. Veg. 1:170. 1825. Stipe composed of rigid, erect, fuscous hyphae capitate bove; capitulum globose to turbiniform; conidia simple, fus- us, globose, or ellipsoid. Represented in the United States by 17 species. / 728 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, 7. GRAPHIUM COR DA. Icon. Fung. 1:18. 1837. Stipe erect, rigid, cylindrical, capitate, or clavate above, fuscous; apices of the hyphae sporiferous, diverging; conidia simple, hyaline, ovoid or ellipsoid. Fifteen species occur in the United States. Graphium is in- termediate between Stilbum and Sporocybe. 8. ARTHROBOTRYUM Ces. Berk. Outl. Brit. Fung. 342. 1860. Arthrosporium Sac. Mich. 2:32, 1880. Didymobotryum Sacc. Syll. Fung. 4. 628. 1886. . Stipe compact, erect, rigid, capitate above, pallid or fuscous; conidia oblong, 2-pluriseptate, fuscous or hyaline, As here limited, Arthrobotryum contains 6 species reported for this country. ARTHROBOTRYUM COMPOSITUM ( ELL.) Arthrosporium compositum Ex... Bull. Torr. Bot. Olub. 8: 64. 1861. ARTHROBOTRYUM DIDYMUM (COOKE.) Stilbum didymum Cooke. Grev. 7:34, 1878. Didymobotryum cookei Saco. Syll. Fung. 4: 626. 1886. ARTHROBOTRYUM PUBESCENS (C. & E.) Graphium pubescens C. & E. Grev. 6:8. 1877. Didymobotryum pubescens (C. & E.) Sacc. Syll. Fung. 4: 627. 1886. 9. ISARIOPSIS Fres. Beitr. Myk. 87. 1863. Stilbomyces E. & E. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1895: 441. 1895. Hyphae erect, loose, cylindrical, scarcely or not at all capi- tate, fuscous, or pallid; conidia oblong, linear or cylindrical, fuscous or hyaline. Represented by 7 species in the United States. Tribe Coremieae. Stipe and capitulum as in Stilbeae, but the sporophore typic- ally verticillate-ramose, and the conidia catenulate. 10. COREMIUM LK. Obs. Myc. 1:19. 1809. Stysanus CoRDA. Icon. Fung. 1:21. 1837. Stipe erect, cylindrical, broadly capitate, or clavate above, fuscous, or bright colored; conidia simple, f. e. non-septate, ovoid to fusoid, fuscous, or bright colored. This genus has 9 representatives in this country. COREMIUM BERKELEYI ( MONT.) Graphium berkeleyi Mont. Pl. Cell. Nouv. S: 303. 1838. Stysanus berkeleyi (Mont.) Sacc. Syll. Fung. 4: 823. 1886. U — n 1 rr aS Ne eae 3 0 1 Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 729 COREMIOM BICOLOR ( WEB.) Embolus bicolor Wes. Prim. Flor. Hols. 1780. Isaria stemonitis Pers. Com. Pung. Olay.111. 1797. Cephalotrichum stemonitis (PERS.) Nees. Syst. 87. 1816. Stysanus stemonitis (Pers.) Corda Icon. Fung. 1:112. Pl. 4. f. 283. 1837. COREMIUM MONILIOIDES (A. & S.) Isaria monilioides A. & 8. Consp. Fung. Lusat, 362. Pl. 12. 7.8. 1805, Cephalotrichum monilioides Lk. Sp, PI. 2 112. 1825. Stysanus monilioides (A. & S.) Corda Icon. Fung. 2: 17. Ph 11. J. 22. 1838. * TRICHURUS CLRuANTS & SHEAR. Rep. Bot. Surv. 4 Nebr. 4:7. 1896. q Stipe and sporophore as in Coremium, but the capitulum _ densely beset with long, strict spines. Oonteins but a single species, found in this country. 12 GRAPHIOTHECIUM Foüc RAL. Symb. Myc. 366. 1869. Stipe erect, cylindrical, capitate clavate above, perithecioid at the base; hyphae parallel, fasciculate; conidia simple, hyal- if * ovoid. 3 in the United States by joe species only. HEYDENIA Fres. Beitr. Myk. 47. 1852. Stipe elongate-cylindrical, rigid, fuscous, pseudoprosen- 3 in texture, dilated above into an irregular disk, 2 which arises the subglobose capitulum; sporophores non- ramose, septate; conidia globose, pleurogenous. _ Represented in this country by a single species. 9 Subfamily Isarieae BroeNn. Essai Champ. 1825. _ Conidiophores lateral, i. e., short branches, or sterigmata yrne laterally upon the stroma, in some cases apices of the fertile hyphae, but then emerging all along the stroma; capit- ulum linear, cylindrical, or clavate, scarcely distinct from the 14. ISARIA Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. 41. 1797. } ‘Stipe erect, rarely branched, everywhere sporophorous ve, sterigmata usually formed by the tips of the fertile N yphae; ao indefinite. or lacking; conidia 8 or 780 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 15. PODOSPORIUM Scuw. Syn. Amer. Bor. 278. 1834. J Podosporella E. & E. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 180488. 1894. Be Stipe erect, strict, black, composed of densely congested, — carbonaceous, rarely soft, hyphae, cylindrical or linear-subu- late; sporophores short, lateral, typically simple; conidia scat- tered, septate, fuscous, cylindrical, or clavate cylindrical. PODOSPORIUM CRUCIGERAE (SCuw.) Dematium crucigerar Scuw. Syn. Car. 128, 1822. Podosporium rigidum Seuw. Syn. Amer. Bor. 278. Fl. 10. f. J. 184. PODOSPORIUM HUMILE (E. & E. Podosporella humilis E. & E. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil. 1804: 85. 1904. Family TUBEROULARIACEAE Eunxxn.) Tuberculariei EHRENB. Sylv. Myc. Berl. 12. 1818. Sporophores collected in a waxy or gelatinous, wart-like head or tuft (sporodochium). a Although they grade into the Stilbaceae to some extent, thei q Tuberculariaceae are well distinguished as a group of the Hyphomycetes.. On the other hand, the black or dark-colored — genera approach so closely to the Melanconieae that many of them are not to be placed with certainty in either group. Sev- — eral genera have been placed at various times first in one and then in the other by the same author. Thus Epiclinium was first put in the Melanconieae as a sub-group of Didymosporium — by Saccardo, who later separated it from Didymosporium and placed it in his Tubercularieae. Some of these genera also ap- proach genera placed in the Sphaeropsideae, especially in 22 only to a fewspecies in a genus, as in Trimmatostroma, in : certain species are clearly of the Melanconieous type, while our T. americana is rather of the Tuberculariaceous a oideae, Dinemasporium and Amerosporium in the Excipulacec * 7 and some species of Leptothyrium in the Leptostromaceae might well be placed with some Melanconieae and with some er. culariaceae. Compare with these genera some vokale J Saccardo has placed Patellina both in Excipulaceae and in Tuberculariaceae, adhering at length to the latter view. It i et apparent, then, that it is largely a matter of personal taste where such groups are placed. 3 Schroeter,* evidently with these difficulties in mind. — 4 * Krypt. Flor. v. Schles. Pilz. 32:8. 1893. Pound and Clements: NORTH ANERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 731 the Tuberculariaceae from the Hyphomycetes, making them co- ordinate with the latter group and the Melanconieae. But this does not relieve the difficulty of separating Tuberculariaceae from Melanconieae and both from some Sphaeropsideae. And the close relation of Stilbum, which needs only to shorten its stipe to become one of the Knyarieae, precludes drawing too great a line between Stilbaceae and Tuberculariaceae. Significant also is the paralellism between some genera and genera clearly Melanconieous, as, for example, between Sphaer- idium and Trullula and Blennoria. Perhaps eventually portions of the Tuberculariaceae, some Excipulaceae, and some Nectrioideae, will have to be united with the Melanconieue to form anew group. But this will be far from satisfactory. The Tuberculariaceae for the most part represent conidial forms of Hypocreaceae. Trichoderma in the Mucedinaceae is at once suggested by this fact as well as by its morphological similarity. Fusisporium, a sub genus of Fusarium, might be placed as well in the Trichodermede, and was long kept separate from Fusarium. But, under varying conditions, the same _ fungus has been found taking on the Fusarium form or the _ Fusisporium form, or both successively. We have removed, not without doubt, Paftellina, and have _ retained Epicoccum, Epiclinium and Trimmatostroma. 5 Tribe Knyarieae PounD & CLEMENTS. Sporodochia not setose or ciliate, sporophores simple or . branched, never verticillate, conidia single, that is, not caten- 1 8 1 KNYARIA O. Kuntze. Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 855. 1891. Tubercularia Tope. Fung. Mecklenb. 1:18. 1790, not Tubercu- 5 laria WIGG. Prim. Fl. Holsat. 87. 1780. ___ Sporodochia wart-like, sessile or subsessile, waxy, usually _ reddish; conidia acrogenous ov acro-pleurogenous, elliptical or - oblong, continuous. The sporodochium consists of a mass of simple or branched conidiophores arising from a pseudoparenchymatous layer, and expanded somewhat above. The conidia form a waxy layer covering the surface. The species are largely conidial forms of Nectria. Several of the remaining genera of this tribe 732 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Eighteen species are reported from North America. The most common is: KNYARIA PURPUREA (L.) Tremella purpurea L. Spec, PI. 1158, 1753, Tubercularia vulgaris Tope. Fung. Mecklenb. 1:18. 1700, The Linnaean description clearly indicates this species, even 4 if Tode did not indirectly refer to the same species as a syn- onym. vg Tuberculina Sacc. containing a number of species para- 4 sitic in Uredineae, is now generally placed in the Ce agineae. Some species, however, are of a different nature from the typical Tuberculina, and are perhaps no more than small Knyariew, e. g. T. solanicola E. & E. Journ. Myc, 7: 278. 1893. a Granularia Sac. Mich. 2:648. 1882. is of a doubtful posi- tion. The sporodochia(?) are globular, and composed of compacted, filiform, hyaline hyphae. The surface of the sporodochia is formed by the compact mass of hyphae, and the interior is composed of hyphae and ovoid spores borne — acrogenously. A form of this character has no place in this group. On account of Granularia Rots (1791), the name cannot well be retained. 1 Illosporium Mart. Fl. Crypt. Erl. 325. 1817. Contains a number of forms growing on lichens, and some growing on 1 wood, dead stems, and even leaves. After investigating some of the lichenicolous species pretty gras we are 4 forms he has discovered.() Several of the xylogenous spe- cies appear to be of the same nature. The phyllogenous forms seem to be of a different character, but we are not concerned with them here. a 2. AEGERITA Pers. Tent. Disp. Meth. Fung. 40. 1797. _ Sporodochia subglobose, sessile, superficial, subfarinaceous (on account of the conidia on the surface); conidiophores hyal. ine or light colored, pallid, short, rather thick, simple or “9 slightly branched, sometimes obsolete; conidia rather large, globose or ovoid, acrogenous or sub-acrogenous, continuous. Five species are reported from North America, of which 5 4 some are rather doubtful. ee (1) Compare also Zukal’s Myxobotrysaceae (Bericht. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 14:340. 1998), 2 which seems to be substantially the same group. 3 Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 733 Sphaerosporium Schw. Syn. Fung. Am. Bor. 303, is not very well characterized. It has plane, pulvinate sporodochia covered with a stratum of ochraceo-rufous, rather large, globose conidia. But one species is described. Spacelia LEV. is composed of conidial stages of Claviceps and Epichloe, and the only species found in our limit are sufficiently known in their maturer stages. 3. HYMENELLA Fr. Syst. Myc. 2: 233. 1823. Hymenula Fr. Elench. Fung. 2:37. 1828. Hymenopsis Sacc. Syll. Fung. 4:744. 1886. Sporodochia disciform, scutellate-disciform, or sub-convex, bright colored or black; conidiophores simple or subsimple; - conidia ovoid or oblong, acrogenous, continuous. _ Eleven species are reported from North America. The species placed in the section Hymenobactron under Hymenopsis by Saccardo, having bacillar conidia, may well be sepa- rated. But it does not seem necessary to retain Hymenopsis, Which is based solely on the dark color of the conidiophores and conidia. 4 ‘THECOSPORA Hanxx. Bull. Cal Acad. Sci. 1:41. 1884 _ Sporodochia white or yellowish, globulose, indurate; conidio- _phores slender, sub-simple or branched; conidia borne here and there on the conidiophores, involved in a hyaline mucous . continuous. a Two species are described. 5 5 STIGMATELLA B. & C. Grev. 3:97. 1875; Berk. Outl. 4 Crypt. Bot. 313. 1857. (Figure and name only.) 3 Sphaerocrea Sac. & ELL, Mich. 2: 582. 1882. _ Sporodochia globose, composed of compacted, fasciculate, continuous simple or furcate conidiophores; conidia large, globose-ellipsoid, continuous, adhering to the conidiophore by a more or less persistent projection. Two species are described. EPIDOCHIUM Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand. 471. 1849. Sporodochia waxy or gelatinous becoming fleshy, sub-glo- se or verruciform, or discoid, often tremelloid, black, olivace- 5 or pallid; conidiophores filiform, equal, simple or branched; S conidia oblong, ellipsoid, or sub-falcate, continuous. 784 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Two species are desbribed from North America. In some of the European forms the conidiophores pass into globose or clavate ‘‘pseudospores.” These forms have been placed by many among the T'remellineae, where, perhaps, some of the species put in Hpidochium belong. The section Hormodochium Sacc. has catenulate conidia and should be separated. None of the North American species are included in it. 7. EPICOCCUM Lx. Obs. Myc. 2:32. 1813. Sporodochia globose or convex, cellular; conidiophore, very short, dark colored; conidia subglobose, minutely verrucose, usually areolate. The species occur on dead, decaying herbaceous stems and leaves, for the most part, where their presence is indicated by a red or purple discoloration. Nine species are reported from North America. 1 * Sn . * < nenn a ee a 8. EPICLINIUM Fr. Summ. Veg. Scand. 475. 1849. Sporodochia applanate, pezizoid or truncate, black; coni- diophores reduced or obsolete; conidia oblong, one-septate, — pedicellate (i. e., on reduced conidiophores), upon a corneous stroma. q The type is a Schweinitzian species described as a Didymo- sporium. 9. BACTRIDIUM Kunze. Myk. Heft. 1:5. 1817. Sporodochia rather thin, hemispherical, convex; conidio- phores short, terete, simple or subsimple; conidialarge, elong- ate oblong-cylindrical, many septate. = Three species are reported from North America. 10. EXOSPORIUM Lk. Obs. Myc. 1:8. 1809. 4 Sporodochia convex, compact; conidiophores short, simple. densely fasciculate, black; conidia acrogenous, oblong or ter- ete, many septate. — Three species are reported from North America. Scoriomyces ELL. and Sacc. Misc. Myc. 2: 18. 1884. is of 2 doubtful position. The sporodochium is composed of the apices of rhizomorpha-like fibres, and is waxy, and amor- phous. The rhizomorpha-like fibers form within a thick net-work in each subhexagonal areola of which a spore is a produced. No sporophores or hyphae have been observed. f Such a form can hardly be placed in this group with pro- priety. Two species are described. § Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 735 11. SPEGAZZINIA Sacc. Mich. 2:37. 1880. S)porodochia convex, rather dense, black; conidiophores sub- terete, fasciculate; conidia terminal, borne on sterigmata, sar- ceiniform, usually cruciate four.celled. One species is described for North America. 12. DICRANIDION Hanky, Bull. Cal. Acad. Sci. 1:163 j 1885. Sßporodochia minute, pulvinate; conidiophores short, branch- ing; conidia acrogenous, subterete, septate, bifurcate, of the shape of a tuning fork. One species is described. 8 5 18. EVERHARTIA Sacc. & ELI. Mich. 2. 580. 1882 Sporodochia verruciform, fuscous; conidiophores septate. subdichotomous or obsolete; conidia densely conglobate, or en- closed in a viscous mass, at first involved in mucus, cylindrical, many septate, once to several times spirally coiled, hyaline. Two species are described. In one species the conidiophores a interwoven with sterile hyphae. 1 TROPOSPORIUM Harxn. Bull. Cal. Acad. Sci. 1:3 1884. 1 Sporodochia applanate, farinaceous; conidiophores elongate, to e, branching; conidia hyaline, continuous, densely spirally onvolute. None species is described. ne Knyarieae might be divided into icons groups, those like 3 2 aria and Hymenella, with well developed conidiophores and small, continuous or septate conidia; second; those genera with er bores greatly reduced or wanting, comprising 7, 8, 9 bead 10, and, finally, those with staurosporous or helicospor- s conidia. But as these groups grade into one another the division has seemed unnecessary. r . IT Tribe Cylindrocolleae. Sporodochium globose, or verruciform, sessile, or substipi- 2; Sporophore thin, elongated, generally much branched, aline, or fuscous; conidia simple, cylindrical, concolorous, 8 the chains often branched. 736 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 15. CYLINDROCOLLA Bon. Handb. 149. 1851. Sporodochium irregularly verruciform, gelatinous, bright- colored; sporophore filiform, multiramose; conidia simple, cylindrical, truncate, acrogenous, hyaline, or bright colored. The species of this genus are for the most part conidial - stages of Calloria; five species occur in this country. 16. SPHAERIDIUM Fres. Beitr. Myk. 46, 1852. Sporodochium globose, subcarneous, not at all gelatinous, substipitate; sporophore as in Cylindrocolla; conidia elongate- cylindrical, hyaline, borne in simple, or branched chains. Conidial stages of Helotieae; two species are reported for the United States. Tribe Volutelleae, Sporodochium disciform, or pulvinate, sessile, or stipitate, margin, rarely the entire sporophore, ciliate or setulose; spor- ophore simple,.or sparingly branched, even obsolete and then, replaced by a stroma, hyaline or fuscous; conidia simple, or septate, single, rarely catenulate, acrogenous, hyaline, or fuscous. 17. VOLUTELLA Tope. Fung. Meckl. 1: 28. 1790. Sporodochium disciform, sessile, or stipitate, ciliate, bright- colored; sporophore typically simple; conidia simple, cc : to ellipsoid, hyaline. Represented in the United States by 12 species. r 18. VOLUTELLARIA S Ac. Syll. Fung. 4: 682. 1884. } 4 Sporodochium ptlvinate, sessile; sporophore obsolete; stroma sub cellular, ciliate; conidia simple, acervulate, ovoid, hyaline. | A monotypic genus, as yet found only in this country. q — 19. CHAETOSTROMA Corpa. Sturm D. C. Fl. 2.122. 1829. Sporodochium disciform, margin ciliate or setulose with stout, septate, fuscous hairs distinct from the sporophores; — sporophore simple, bacillar; conidia simple, typically single, 3 ovate to fusoid, fuscous. A A single species of this genus has been reported for — United States. > Pound and Clements: NORTH AMERICAN HYPHOMYCETES. 737 20. MYROTHECIUM Tope. Fung. Meckl. 1:25. 1790. Sporodochium disciform, or patellate, margined with thin, hyaline, continuous hyphae, similar to the sporophores; the lat- ter usually branched, rarely bacillar; conidia oblong to cylin- _ drical, simple, fuscous, often nearly hyaline. This genus contains 4 American representatives. Tribe Fusarieae. Sporodochia pulvinate, verruciform, or sub-effuse, not setose or ciliate; conidiophores verticillately branched; conidia acro- - genous, oblong, ovoid, fusoid, or falcate, continuous or septate. 21. DENDRODOCHIUM. _ $porodochia pulvinate or verruciform; conidiophores sub- verticillate; conidia elliptical or oblong, continuous. This genus connects with Knyaria on the one hand and with Fusarium on the other. Six species are reported for North America. FUSARIUM LX. Berl. Mag. 3: 10. 1809. . Including Fusisporium Lk. Obs. Myc. 1:17, and Selerosporium CORDA, ° BSporodochia pulvinate, or effused; conidiophores verticil- late; conidia fusoid or falcate, continuous or, usually, many- ‘septate. In Zu-Fusarium the sporodochia are pulvinate, while in Fusis- porium they are effuse and are scarcely to be termed sporo dochia. The latter is in many respects allied to Trichoderma, near which it was long placed. But it has been shown that the same species may assume either the pulvinate or the effuse type under varying conditions, thus rendering it practically impossible to maintain a distinction. fits species are described or reported from North merica. 1 PIONNOTES Fa. Summ. Veg. Scand. 481. 1849. _ Sporodochia gelatinous, becoming rigid, forming a thick, often lobed, mass; sporophores subverticellate, sometimes sim- ple, fasciculate; conidia rather large, elliptical, cylindrical, or usually fusoid, curved, continuous or obsoletely septate. ot very well distinguished from Fusarium. 2 species are ted for North America. 738 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 24. MICROCERA Desm. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. III. 10:359. 1848. Sporodochia conical or pulvinate; conidiophores filiform, subverticellate; conidia narrowly falcate, many-septate. Not very well distinguished from Fusarium. One species is reported from North America. Tribe Trimmatostromeae, Sporodochium pulvinate, or disciform, fuscous; e obsolescent or obsolete; stroma cellular when present, some: times lacking; conidia catenulate, catenulae often branched, acervulate, simple to phragmosporous, fuscous. 25. STRUMELLA Fr. Summa Veg. Scand. 2:482. 1849. Sporodochium irregularly verruciform; sporophore very — short, obsolescent; chains of conidia irregularly multiramose; ‘ conidia ovoid to fusoid, simple. Five species of this anomalous genus occur in the United 3 States. 26. TRIMMATOSTROMA COR DA. Ic. Fung. 1:9. 1837. Sporodochium pulvinate, more or less carbonaceous; sporo- phore obsolete; conidia oblong, phragmosporous. A single species is reported for this country. r i XLV. ON SOME MOSSES AT HIGH ALTITUDES. J. M. HOLZINGER. During a short visit in Colorado, in June of 1896, it was my good fortune to be able to arrange an ascent of Pike’s Peak on foot. On this trip I collected some interesting mosses at un- usualelevations. The object of this note is to call the attention of all botanists who may have the opportunity to collect on top ol this or similar high mountains to the fact that a consider- _ ably varied moss flora is thriving near and at its very top, and under conditions that would hardly warrant the expectation of a single species of moss. So far as the records of altitudes With collecting stations go to show, field workers had hereto- fore not looked for, and so had not collected mosses above 12,000 feet altitude. Indeed, few species are credited with an altitude greater than 8,000—10,000 feet, either in Europe or North America. Yet, my collection from above the Saddle House, altitude 12,502 ft., to the top of the peak, altitude 14,147 feet, has yielded over twenty-five species of mosses, nineteen of which I have been able to determine. My list is appended. 5 1. Andreaea petrophila EHRH. Sterile and fruiting. Phis moss occurs abundantly above 12,000 feet elevation on the red granitic boulders that make up the vast, bleak, convex p e of the top of Pike's Peak. Although I was on the sunny ‘Side of the top, and my visit occurred on June 7, this, and in fact all the rock mosses collected near the top, fre- “quently occurred on the under side of the great rock masses, in close contact with the snow and ice, that finds a peren- 2 nia al home among these cyclopean masses of rock. E Along with what agrees fairly well with typical Andreaea etrophila, and especially near the top of the peak, I found nds that differed considerably from the usual forms, having 4 he leaf margins strongly rolled in, showing in cross-section * : ee t+ y . ¢ . a 740 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. papillae on both sides of the leaf, and two cell layers part way across the leaf. I had already decided to honor this bistratose character with a varietal name, when I came upon and took to heart Limpricht’s remark under this very species. In his Laubmoose. 1:140, he says: In Bryol. eur. Schimper — has afflicted with names a long series of forms (of Andreaea — petrophila), and has figured them on tab. 624, 625; however, the arranging of an abundance of material in accordance there- with is a thankless task, for in this sense the circle of forms is without limit in every common species.” At any rate, until I can have the opportunity of critically examining some of the Old World forms of this species, especially the high altitude forms, it seems best to let the plant rest under its old specific name. 2. Cynodontium virens var. wahlenbergii B. S. Sterile. Collected near the 13,000 feet level, with Pogonatum al- pinum, 3. Dieranum albicans B. S. Sterile. On ground, at an elevation of over 13,000 feet. . ˙ Ü.] ⁰¹1wiñ bt; ̃Ü ͥUCi;!n. ⁵˙JPÑ;Nü./q ͤ—¼em % wm ̃ͥ w 4. Distichium capillaceum (Sw.) Bry. eur. Sterile. 9 This is apparently the high-alpine, short-leafed form named var. brevifolium Bry. Eur. and referred to in Limpr. Laubm. p. 515. Collected above 13,000 feet. Not uncommon. 5 5. Barbula fragilis B. S. Sterile. f This plant is smaller than that occurring near Winona; but in all respects, otherwise, even to the broken leaf points, it agrees with it. Only one small sod was found at 13,000 feet. 6. Barbula mucronifolia B. S. Occurred in two places near 13,000 feet altitude. ie Barbula mülleri B. S. Sterile. a This determination is doubtful. The plants are smaller than usual, if it is this. Common from 13,000 to 14,000 feet. 2 8. Grimmia apocarpa HR DW. Collected near the top of the mountain. 9. Grimmia commutata Hug. An abundant moss from 10,000 to 13, 500 feet. Holzinger MOSSES AT HIGH ALTITUDES. 741 10. Orthotrichum laevigatum Zerr. An abundantly fruiting plant, common from 13,000 to 14,000 feet. I had determined this as O. Kingianum, since there is in this moss a double peristome, the cilia being as long as the teeth, formed frequently of two rows of cells. But Mrs. E.G. Britton, our best authority on Orthotrichum, determined it as O. laevigatum. ll. Orthotrichum sp. Only a small sod was collected of this plant. Mrs. Britton refers the plant to OC. Killiasii . M., with a doubt. 12. Encalypta vulgaris Hepw. Only a little was collected of this species near the 13,000 feet level. But it is quite common from there down the mountain. 13. Weberaelongata Schw. Sterile. At 13,000 feet to 13,500 feet altitude. 14. Webera elongata var, humilis Son. At about the same altitude, less common than the species. 15. Webera nudicaulis Lesa. Above 13,000 feet altitude. Another species of Webera was collected in considerable ‘quantity, but is not identifiable, being sterile. 106. Pogonatum alpinum ROERL. Sterile. On ground at 13,000 feet altitude. 1. Polytrichum strictum MEN Z. Sterile. On ground, alone and mixed with Distichium, at 13,000 to 13,500 feet altitude. = — j a 18. Polytrichum piliferam Scures. Sterile. Mixed with the sterile Webera mentioned under No. 15. At 13,000 feet elevation. 19. Pseudoleskea rigescens LINDB. Sterile. Near the top of the peak, at 14,000 feet altitude. The plant as compared with material from Idaho collected by Dr. J. H. andberg in 1892, and agrees perfectly with it. 742 MINNESOTA noTANICAL STUDIES In addition to these 19 species, there is quite a 8 4 material at hand from my collection, containing some 10 Spe. cies more. So that Pike's Peak, at least, has in the last two thousand feet below its top, not less than 30 species of mosses’ which deserve attention at the hands of future collectors. XLVI. THE FORCES DETERMINING THE POSITION OF DORSIVENTRAL LEAVES. R. N. Day. The work described in the following paper was undertaken for the purpose of determination of the relative value of vari- ous forces operative in the production of the positions of dorsi- ventral leaves, and to what extent the inherited and spontane- ous trophies of these organs might be altered by outward conditions. 5 A paper covering these points and embracing a review of the literature bearing upon the subject was published by Vines in 1890 (V). Vines’ conclusions as given by himself are as fol- lows: ‘*(1) Epinasty, and also hyponasty, are not induced, but are spontaneous movements; (2) dorsiventral members, so far as my experiments go, are not negatively geotropic, the move- ments hitherto described as negative geotropism being due to hyponasty, and altogether independent of gravitation.” 4s may be seen by reference to the results of my experiments, they confirm Vines’ view of the general nature of epinasty and hyponasty, which is in direct opposition to that of Detmer. In the consideration of the second point in the summary given above, I am, of course, unable to comprehend exactly what is meant by movements hitherto ascribed to negative geotrop- _ ism.” It seems reasonable to suppose, however, that reference is here made to the upward movements of leaves in darkness, D conclusion which is not in harmony with the results de- _ scribed below. Since the appearance of Vines’ paper, Czapek (I) has publish- _ edamost valuable contribution to our knowledge of the combin- ed reactions of heliotropism and geotropism. The chief interest of his researches lies in the conclusion that the action of two The work recorded in this paper was performed under the direction and by the aid of Prof. D. T. MacDougal. rr 744 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, stimuli—geotropic and heliotropic—upon an organ simultane- ously in no wise affects the sensibility of the organ to each of these stimuli, in opposition to the theory of ‘‘ Specific energy, of Miller, but that the reaction of one or the other may be me- chanically suppressed, but not physiologically altered. The results of Vines’ (W) and Detmer’s (II) investigations as to the nature of epinasty and hyponasty are so widely diverg- ent, though obtained from the same material, that it was deemed advisable to repeat the detail of their experiments. To this end seeds of Helianthus, Cucurbita, and Phaseolus were germinated in a dark chamber, and subjected to various condi- tions. The cotyledons remained closely pressed together fora period of three to five days, but at the end of this time they began to separate, and about the eighth dayexhibited adiverg- ence of 120° to 135°. This experiment included a large num ber of individuals of each species, and great precautions were ; taken that all possibility of error be excluded. The exposure q of the plants to light during the short time necessary for daily __ examination, was quite insufficient to vitiate the results. The results of this set of experiments verifies Vines’ conclusions that epinasty is not induced by light, but may occur in dark- ness as well. The fact that the cotyledons did not move through an arc of 90° and attain a horizontal position is due to the fact that the plant was not in a phototonic condition. The epinastic growth shown by the cotyledons was clearly inde- pendent of light, and Detmer’s photo-epinasty and hyponasty as such do not exist. Detmer’s conclusions are repeated in the recent edition of his text book, and no reference is made to the contradictory results reached by Vines. * The remaining experiments, extending over a period of four- teen months, were devoted to the study of geotropism, helioo- tropism, and epinasty in dorsiventral members. The materia! used included one or more species of Taraxacum, Helianthus, — 5 Nicotiana, Arisaema, and Lactuca. a In the manipulation of the growing specimens it was found to be much more convenient if they were carefully removed 2 from the pots in which they were grown, and the roots, with “a the adhering mass of, earth wrapped in sphagnum moss. When prepared in this manner space sufficient for the move- ment of the leaves through an arc of 150° was obtained. The plants were allowed to recover from this transplantation before used for experimental purposes. In all of the experiments young, vigorously-growing specimens were used, and care was Day: POSITION OF DORSIVENTRAL LEAVES. 745 exercised that the leaves had assumed their final position and balance of growth. This last precaution is quite essential since many radical leaves are hyponastic in earlier stages, and epinastic in later stages of development. At the end of each experiment the condition of the plant was noted, and if it was unhealthy or flaccid, results were disregarded. In every in- stance duplication of the experiment was made. The dark chamber used was constructed of zinc and was placed in the plant house in such position that the sunlight could not strike it. The temperature varied between 24° and 28° C. DETAIL OF EXPERIMENTS. 1 Experiment 1. — A normal specimen of a rosette of Taraxacum obtained by germination of a seed three months previously was placed in an upright position in adark chamber. Twenty-four hours later the younger leaves had begun to curve upward. Forty-eight hours later all the leaves were pointing upward. The vertical position might be aus to hyponasty, or negative geotropism. Experiment 2. A specimen of Taraxacum, similar to that used in Exp. 1, was attached to the clinostat in a dark chamber in such manner that the axis of the root-stock was rotated _ while held in a horizontal position. Forty-eight hours after the beginning of the experiment, the leaves had assumed a Position parallel to the axis of the root-stock. The position of _ the leaves in this instance was clearly due to hyponasty. Experiment 3.—A specimen of Taraxacum was placed in the dark chamber with the root-stock in a horizontal position. Forty eight hours later all of the leaves were at right angles to the root-stock and pointing upward. At the beginning of the experiment eight leaves held this position, and the same number were pointing in an opposite direction. In order to assume the upright position the last group moved through an are of 180° In this, as well as all other experiments, no ac- q count was taken of torsions. ¥ Experiment 4.—A specimen of Taraxacum was placed in the dark chamber in an inverted position, with the root-stock a pointing upward, and the leaves horizontally with their dorsal surfaces below. Forty-eight hours later all of the leaves had curved upward into a position parallel with the root-stock. 746 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Experiment 6. A plant of Taraxacum in a pot was placed in its normal upright position, where it could receive light from one side only. The leaves of the rosette on the side farthest from the source of light were curved upward at the end of the third day in such a manner as to place themselves perpendicu- lar to the rays of light. Those leaves on the side of the rosette nearest the light remaihed in nearly their normal position. 4 5 9 Experiment 6.—A normal specimen of Taraxacum was placed in an inverted position in a dark chamber with strong sunlight _ thrown in the chamber from below, by means of alarge mirror. The plant was kept in this position for a week, being well wa- tered and cared for during the interval. At the end of seven days a few of the leaves exhibited slight torsions in response to the peculiar conditions of the light received, but the re- mainder held their relative positions as before. : The members of the rosette of Taraxacum are therefore dia- heliotropic as shown by experiments 5 and 6, negatively geo- tropic as shown by experiments 3 and 4, and hyponastic as shown by experiments 1 and 2. The ordinary position of the leaves is therefore due to their diaheliotropism. The diahelio- tropic irritability of the plant so much overbalances the other forms that their reactions are suppressed. When the helio- tropic stimulus is removed the apogeotropic reaction is exhib- ited, and the hyponasty of the leaf is suppressed. If both the heliotropic and geotropic stimuli are removed the leaf assumes a hyponastic position. The result of this set of experiments supports the conclusion reached by Frank (IV), that the rad- ical leaves of Taraxacum are apogeotropic. Iam wholly una- ble to account tor the discordance between the experiment of 4 Vines (V, p. 426.) and experiments 3 and 4 of my own series, which were many times repeated. 2 NICOTIANA. Experiment 7.—A healthy normal specimen of a rosette f Nicotiana growing in a pot was placed in an inverted position in a dark chamber, with the radical leaves horizontal. Forty- 4 eight hours later the leaves were pointing directly upwarxd. 4 Experiment S. A specimen of a rosette of Nicotiana similar to that used in Exp. 7 was placed in an inverted position in a dark chamber, with the radical leaves horizontal and the dorsa! surfaces downward. Sixty hours later the leaves had assumed ; ! Day: POSITION OF DORSIVENTRAL LEAVES. 747 a position parallel to the root-stock and pointing directly up- ward. ’ Experiment 9.—A specimen of a rosette of Nicotiana was placed in a dark chamber, with the root-stock in a horizontal position and the leaves in a vertical plane. Forty-eight hours later all the leaves were pointing upward. Experiment 10.—A specimen of the rosette of Nicotiana, with the roots enclosed in sphagnum, was placed in a chamber in a natural position and light was allowed to enter from above and below, striking the under and upper surfaces of the leaves. Observations from time to time during a period of six days re- vealed no movements except by a few of the leaves in an effort to assume a position more nearly perpendicular to the light. Experiment II. — A specimen of Nicotiana prepared with sphagnum was placed in a dark chamber in an inverted posi- tion, with the root-stock pointing upward and the dorsal sur- faces of the leaves facing downward. One week later no changes had taken place except those indicated in Exp. 10. Experiment 12.—A specimen of Nicotiana prepared with sphagnum was attached to a clinostat, and rotated with the axis of the root stock in horizontal, and the leaves in a vertical plane. Forty-eight hours later the leaves had curved toward the root, in a manner indicative of epinastic growth and exhib- _ iting a behavior exactly contrary to Taraxacum. Experiment 13.—A normal specimen of Nicotiana prepared with sphagnum was attached to a clinostat and rotated with the axis of the root-stock in a horizontal position, and its leaves _ ina vertical plane. Light was allowed to strike the plant at right angles to the root-stock and parallel to the surfaces of the leaves. Forty-eight hours later the leaves had curved to- Ward the root in such manner as to exhibit their dorsal sur- faces to the light as each in turn was brought opposite the re. opening i in the dark chamber. It may be seen by experiments 10, 11, and 13 that the mem- bers of the rosette of Nicotiana are diaheliotropie; by experi- & ment 9 that they are apogeotropic; and by experiments 9 and 12 that they are epinastic. The degree of irritability to the three classes of stimuli decreases in the order named. 748 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. HELIANTHUS, Experiment 14.—A young specimen of Helianthus, 40 em. in height, was placed in the dark chamber in the normal upright position. Twenty-four hours later the leaves were noticeably curved downward, and 72 hours later the apices of all the younger leaves were pointing vertically downward. The change was not so marked in more mature organs. The same result was obtained by Vines (V. p. 422, fig. 8). 1 Experiment 16. A young normal specimen of Helianthus was placed in a horizontal position with the stem bound firmly to a4 stick to prevent curvatures of anything except the leaves. Seventy-two hours later the leaves exhibited epinastic curva- tures, pointing toward the root, in a manner generally similar to that described by Vines (V. p. 429), except that all were pointed in a basipetal direction. All the positions assumed by leaves previously extending horizontally from the stem were such that the dorsal surfaces were uppermost. 4 Experiment 16. The plant used in Exp. 15 was allowed to re- cover normal attitude and condition in sunlight, and then it was placed in an inverted position in the dark chamber. Forty — hours later the leaves began to curve upward toward the roots, 4 and the curvature became more pronounced 20 hours later. Experiment 17.—A young normal plant of Helianthus was at- tached to a clinostat and rotated with its axis in a horizontal 4 1 plane. During its rotation light was admitted at right angles to the stem. Twenty-four hours later the leaves were curved toward the root in such manner that the dorsal surfaces re- ceived the rays at right angles. 4 Experiment 18.—A young plant of Helianthus was placed in 4 normal upright position until the leaves were epinasticallxß curved. The plant was then inverted and illumination was then given from below, with the result that in four days those obtained by Vines. The leaves of Helianthus are dia- 4 heliotropic, diageotropic, and epinastic. 4 Day: POSITION OF DORSIVENTRAL LEAVES. 749 ARISAEMuA. . Experiment 19.—A plant of Arisaema triphyllum, recently - emerged from the bud, was placed in an upright position in the dark chamber. At the end of 48 hours the leaflets had as- - sumed an epinastic position, with the tips pointing downward. Experiment 20.—A specimen of Arisaema was placed in a dark chamber in an inverted position with the laminae horizontal and the stem bound to a stick to prevent curvatures in that or- gan. Forty-eight hours later the tips had moved upward through an arc of 30°-50°. © Experiment 21 —A vigorously growing specimen of Arisaema was attached to a clinostat and rotated with the stem in a hori- zontal plane, and given an illumination from one side only. Ninety hours later all of the leaves had curved through an arc of 90°, and were parallel to the stem with the tips pointing to- ward the roots. Experiment 22.—A young nama of Arisaema was placed in an inverted position in a dark chamber and illuminated from below in such manner that the light struck the dorsal surfaces of the leaflets. At the end of a week no change in position had taken place. Experiment 23.—Two specimens of Arisaema, as nearly alike as possible, were placed in the dark chamber, one in the normal _ upright position and the other inverted. No change in posi- tion except that due to epinasty was noticed in the leaves of either plant inside of a period of three days, and the angle of _ curvature was the same in both. Experiment 24.—A specimen of Arisaema was placed in such a position in a dark chamber that the axis was horizontal and a the leaf-blades in a vertical plane. The tip of one leaflet 1 pointed directly downward, while two others were directly up- Ward, but with the long axis of the leaf directed 20° away from the vertical. Forty-eight hours later the leaflet pointing down- ward had risen through an arc of 75° and lay nearly horizontal, _ while the two remaining leaflets had curved downward to the horizontal position. These ponifions were retained four days peer. Experiment 25.—Etiolated specimens of Arisaema exhibited { a great variety of positions of the leaflets, which seemed to be dependent entirely on the trophies. In such condition the 750 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. adaptive processes interfere in such manner as to n the results difficult of interpretation. The foregoing experiments indicate that the leaflets of Ari- saema are diaheliotropic, epinastic, and diageotropic. LACTUCA. Experiment 26.—A specimen of a rosette of Lactuca scariola was placed in a clinostat in a dark chamber, and rotated with — its root-stock in a horizontal and the rosette members in a vert- ical plane. Illumination was given at right angles to the root- stock. Forty-eight hours later the radical leaves had curved backward and pointed toward the roots, in a manner indicative — of diaheliotropism. ‘ Experiment 27.—A specimen of the rosette of Lactuca was placed in the dark chamber in an inverted position. Twenty- four hours later all the leaves had curved upward toward the roots. * Experiment 28. A specimen of Lactuca was placed in a dark chamber in an inverted position and illuminated from below. Four days later no noticeable change of position had occurred. Many torsions were to be seen, however. Experiment 29.—A specimen of the rosette of Lactuca was attached to a clinostat, with the root-stock horizontal and the leaves in a vertical plane. Forty-eight hours later the leaves had curved toward the root. * „„ ae chamber in a horizontal position. Forty-eight hours later 4 curvatures had begun, and seventy-two hours later all the 5 leaves were pointing upward. a The curvatures of Lactuca are diaheliotropic, epinastic, and q apogeotropic. a RECAPITULATION. A consideration of the results of the foregoing experiments q leads to the following conclusions: I. The prevalence of an epinastic or hyponastic condition of 1 growth in any organ is due entirely to internal causes and may be said to be spontaneous. In many plants leaves are epinas- 4 tic in an earlier stage of growth, and hyponastic in a later one, or vice versa. The balance of the two forces may not be 4 disturbed or initiated by external conditions. Light, there- Day: POSITION OF DORSIVENTRAL LEAVES. 751 fore, cannot induce epinasty or hyponasty. This is in direct support of the position taken by Vines, and the results upon which it is based demonstrate that the photo-epinasty of Detmer does not exist as such. II. All dorsiventral leaves are diaheliotropic. III. Dorsiventral leaves may be diageotropic or apoge- otropic. Radical leaves of Lactuca, Taraxacum and Nicotiana are apogeotropic, and those of Helianthus and Arisaema are diageotropic, a conclusion not in agreement with the results of Vines, who maintains that gravity may exert in such organs a diageotropic effect only. IV. The ultimate position of dorsiventral leaves is a fixed light position, and the geotropic or trophic tendencies find no mechanical expression. The removal of the light stimulus from a plant, allows the unimpeded action of the other two forces. In some instances geotropism, in others, the trophic _ tendency, predominates. In no instance, however, has a re- sultant position, due to a mechanical equivalency of the two reactions, been observed. V. The relative values of the geotropic and trophic tenden- _ cies are such that apogeotropism is generally stronger than _hyponasty and epinasty, while epinasty or hyponasty are in turn stronger than diageotropism when occurring in the same organ. 6 VI. It is not possible to foresee the reaction of dorsiventral organs with reference to their present form or function. The dotropie tendency must have undergone serious alteration during the period of development of the species which resulted in the formation of rosettes, however. In these, as well as in stem leaves, the causes lie beyond the present circle of investi- gation. 752 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, TITLES TO WHICH REFERENCE IS MADE. : J. Czapek: Ueber Zusammenwirkung von Heliotropismus und Geo tropismus. Sept. a. d. Sitzungsber. d. Kalserl. Akad. d. Wies. 2 i, Wien. Math-naturl. Cl. 104: Abth 1. March, 1895. i II. Detmer: Ueber Photo-epinastie der Blatter. Bot. Zig. 1882. 4 III. Detmer: Pflanzenphysiologische Prakticum 2nd ed. p. 427. IV. Frank, A. B.: Die naturliche . Richtung — Pflanzentheilen, etc. 1870. V. Vines: On Epinasty and Hyponasty. Ann. Bot. 3: 415-437. 1890. EXPLANATION OF PLATE. PLATE XL. 1. Tarawacum grown in normal position in darkness. The leaves ure vertical or nearly so. The older leaves have rem in a position variously approximating the horizontal. 2, Taraxacum grown in inverted position in darkness. The younger leaves have curved toward the roots and grown vertically upwa rd a The older leaves hare approximately retained their original posi- tion. a XLVII. ON THE GENUS COSCINODON IN MINNESOTA. J. M. HOLZINGER. In my Preliminary List of Mosses of Minnesota.“ I pub- lished the plant collected by me on the Catholic cemetery bluff at Winona as Coscinodon raui AUSTIN, with a note indicating ‘uncertainty regarding this determination. This was published March 5, 1895. In the Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club * November, 1895, pp. 447-449, under Contributions to Amer- 8 n Bryology, XI. Mrs. E. G. Britton states that the specimens . isllected by me on exposed sand bluffs at Winona, have been a atermined by M. Cardot as C. renauldi,” while she herself aims the determination as C. raui, follofving in this Professor Barnes, who some years before took the pains to compare the moss in question with some authentic Coscinodon material in the Cambridge Herbarium. So far as Mrs. Britton’s reference © M. Cardot's determination is concerned, I desire to make a ection. * I stated in my list that M. Cardot had pronounced s species to be C. wrightit, finding with it also C. renauldi.” The en, under date of March 28, 1895, M. Cardot, after examin- ng my list in Minnesora BoranicaL Srupizs, writes to me n this point: os Coscinodon of Winona which you have sent to me, and vhich I have published in our exsiccati (No. 173), is surely C. rightit, a species very distinct from C. raui and C. renauldi. it there were, in a mixed sod, some specimens of C. renauldi, : ich is, perhaps, not sufficiently distinct from C. raui.” This ot course, different from declaring the plant to be C. enauldi. But the last statement in my quotation from dot's letter has some additional interest, apart from its searing on the plant in question: inasmuch as he here states, ome eight months prior to Mrs. Britton’s published note on Minn. Bot. Studies. 1: 285. 1 754 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 7 ‘* Coscinodon raui and Coscinodon renauldi,” that his C. renauldi is, perhaps, not sufficiently distinct from C. raui.“ The crit- — icism of Cardot’s species would doubtless have taken a different turn had his attitude regarding the plant been generally known. 3 A most helpful feature, however, one for which all interested students owe a debt of gratitude to the writer, is the clearing up of errors made by the authors of the two species, Sullivant J and Austin. In the light of these corrections the plants meas now be thoroughly well understood. From the dilemma regarding the right place of the little Coscinodon I was not extricated even when Mrs. Britton kindly © loaned me type slides prepared from authentic material of C. raui, which I examined and returned to her March 30, 18905. She also kindly favored me with specimens of C. raui and G. wrightii collected near Rapid City, S. Dak., by Mrs. T. A. WII. liams, and G wrightii collected in Nebraska by Mr. H. J. Web- ber. My method of examination was to remove some god leaves from a well soaked plant, make a water mount, and in- spect critically the surface of the leaves with a } in. and a} in. ob- jective. From the appearance of the leaves thus studied I could not arrive at a satisfagtory conclusion. There were uniformly rectangular cells in the lower half of the leaves of all p The cells in the upper half were usually roundish, more thic walled than below, but some leaves could be found on every plant that had the cells in the upper part more or less elong- ated, more so toward the costa, less toward the margin. r was the bleaching of the leaf apex, the erose-dentate m in that part and the rounded leaf apex, a uniform character 0 either species. Some leaves on either species were hardly ¢ colored at the apex, and then had the margin in that part e1 tire; others were discolored in the entire upper third, and tk were usually erose-dentate in that part. To be sure, the leaves of good Coscinodon wrightii were found to be, on the whole, more rounded at the apex, the long subula rising rather ab. ruptly above them; but some of the upper leaves, at 2 C. raut, are occasionally nearly as rounded, though the ay re leaf apex was more acute than in C. wrightii. Not even 7 diagnostic character laid down in Barnes’ Key was found t hold for C. raui, which there has assigned to it a hyaline k a point shorter than the leaf. Mrs. Britton’s correct figure of a leaf taken from type material tends to modify t diagnosis. And it is to be regretted that Barnes’ new Ke . issued January, 1897, has, after two years of tacit refutation o 4 Holzinger ON THE GENUS COSCINODON. 755 this diagnostic character of C. raui, not offered a more distinct- ive diagnosis of the species. In my diagnosis of the plant under consideration I depended on Barnes’ Key. Professor Barnes himself did not recognize the character in his determin- ation of the plant, which has the upper leaves at least furn- ' ished with a slightly rough hyaline hair point much longer than the leaf, which gradually decreases in relative length, till near the rooting base of the stem the leaves are scale-like, _ appressed to the stem, very small, and the costa in the lower leaves cease below the rounded or barely apiculate apex. In this uncertain condition the matter has rested for nearly two years. In May, 1896, I had the good fortune to col- lect some mosses in Colorado, the home of the types of C. _wrightii and C. raui. By the very kind and generous arrange ment of Professor Carl F. Baker, then of Colorado Agricultural College, Fort Collins, I enjoyed the exceptional facility of col- leeting for two days, with his guidance, and the use of a horse, wagon and driver, in some of the side cafions of Poudre river. ‘While we were drenched both days by an incessant rain, ‘and waded for miles up and down steep hills through the stickiest and yellowest Colorado clay, we secured our mosses the more certainly because of the prevailing moisture. Under these favoring conditions a number of species, mostly N small mosses, were found by us on that trip; and among them, fortunately, two species of Coscinodon. Pressure of her duties has prevented me from working out this uzzle till recently. There is no difficulty at all in distinguish- ng the two species from each other with the naked eye, when e is sure of the genus from the presence of the mitrate, bicate calyptra. The gross distinction is as follows: 1. Coscinodon wrightii is silvery green, from the presence 4 of the much lengthened hair points on the upper leaves, which stand erect; and this, with the more crowded condition of the plant, which forms small dense cushions, gives the lighter color. “a Coscinodon raui has a more decided green tinge, there being fewer long hairs; the plants occur also usually less crowded, and in more extended patches. N In order to determine whether there was some tangible dif- ference observable with the pocket lens, I moistened and sep- arated several dozen plants of each species, washed out the sand and clay in which they are uniformly imbedded nearly to et Ba 8 7 756 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the top, laid them out on glass slips, and let them dry. The appearance then, under the hand lens, left no shadow of doubt regarding the distinctness of the two plants. Disregarding the colorless subula of the leaves, which may or may not be longer than the leaf blade in C. raui, the plants are distin- 7 guished with the hand lens as follows: 1. Coscinodon wrightii has the more numerous hair points, on the whole longer, it is true, than in C. raui; is less branched, more delicate; the hair points, while di- 3 minishing in length toward the base of the stem, are distinctly present, and are about the middle of the | new, developed stem still as long as the leaves (Pl. XLII. Jigs. 8, 9); leaves with hair points erect-appressed, the blades distinctly spoon-shaped all along the stem. 4 2. Coscinodon raui has fewer hair points, at least some of which may be twice the length of the leaf blade; is 4 more branching, somewhat coarser plant; the hair points discontinue below the upper third of the new developed stem; the stem leaves are similar tor the base, are simply acute, obliquely ascending, . ing, with a distinct keel projecting on their under side. a These appearances changed my mind completely reg 2 the possible identity of the two species which I had enter- tained; here were two radically distinct plants, distinguishable without the aid of a compound microscope. And, after I care- fully compared the plants with the descriptions in Lesquereux and James’ Manual, giving also Mrs. Britton’s corrections on the recorded observations of the two authors their proper weight, I had no reason to doubt that I had collected typical material of the two species, in their type locality, and in ¢ od. quantity. I was now prepared to recur to the vexing Minne- sota plant. Even before looking at it, I remembered that i gross appearance brought it nearer to C. wrightii than to ¢ raui. This was verified by an inspection. Then I washed out and separated a series of plants, and laid them out to dry on a glass slip. To be sure, the appearance of my plant under the hand lens did not associate it distinctly with either Colorado plant; for the new, developed stems were not leafy to near tk base, and the leaves were not so distinctly spoon-shaped. C . erwise the plant was certainly nearer to C. wrightii than to ( 0. raui, differing from C. wrightii principally in gross appearance Holzinger: ON THE GENUS COSCINODON. 757 f of the more naked lower part of the shorter stem, the leaves being more crowded toward the upper end. I began to think this might be a third species of Coscinodon, after all. But when I had looked up Cardot’s letter, above quoted, in which he insists that this plant is Coscinodon wrightii, | was again at sea. And now I determined upon a critical examination of leaf- cross-sections, the result of which leaves no doubt regarding the relationship of our Minnesota Coscinodons, furnishing also absolutely reliable diagnostic characters of the two species. I first proceeded to make leaf sections of the two Colorado plants, with the following results: 1. Coscinodon wrightii yielded leaf sections uniformly and evenly concave, in which the costa projected nearly evenly above and below the leaf surface; toward the apex the costa is restricted to the outer, under side of the leaf; in both sections a single row of large cells lies across the upper surface, continuous. with the leaf cells. See Pl. XLI, jig. 3. 2. Coscinodon raui has a deeply furrowed costa, as is shown by jig. 12. This form of the costa doubtless gives the rigid divergent appearance to the stem leaves of C. raui under the hand lens. That the furrow extends even some distance into the colorless awn of this species is made apparent under the low power of the microscope by the occasional accumulation of soil in * this groove, a condition frequently observed in this . ; plant. Such an appearance never occurs in C. wrightii, . which, judging from the leaf sections, has probably no such groove in the hair points of its leaves. With this diagnosis worked out, I made a similar examina- n of cross sections of the Minnesota plant. And, judging from this character, there can be no doubt but that it should referred to C. wrightii rather than to G. raui, its leaf sec- tions being exactly like those of C. wrightii from Colorado. B t there was still a recognizable difference in the gross ap- sarance of my Minnesota plant, a difference uniform in all my and which I established by a series of examinations. ‘is, in my judgment, justifies the Minnesota plant to be des- ated as a variety of C. wrightii, for which I propose the Coseinodon wrightii var. brevis n. var. 758 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Monoecious, like the species; simple or branching, one of the branches usually terminating in the antheridial, we other in the archegonial bud; leaves crowded toward the top of the stem into a tumid bud, rapidly reduced to scales, 4 that the stem below the middle is nearly naked; leaves not dis- tinctly spoon-shaped under the hand lens as in the Colorado plant. 1 The examination into the occurrence of the sexual organs 2 the two forms of Coscinodon wrightii shows no essential differ- ences between the two plants. I have made drawings of both organs with adjacent leaves also of the Colorado plant, Which. on comparison with those taken from the Colorado plant, show incidentally that the hair points of the archegonial leaves are developed before the lamina; while the antheridial leaves are principally laminae with only a short costa, or with none at all, and may or may not have an incipient subula, or a short acumen. 1 In closing, I give my diagnosis of the North American species of Coscinodon so far as known at present: 4 Genus Coscrnopon. Leaves appear as in Grimmia; but the capsule is half covered by a mitrate folded calyptra as in Orthotrichum, — | 1. Plantsdioecious, - - - - - J. pulvinatus.— Alaska, British Columbia. P 2. Plants monoecious, a. Costa in cross section deeply furrowed, stem leaves divergin and appearing keeled under a hand lens, — ee — Arizona, Colorada, South Dakota, Minnesota. aa, Costa in cross section not furrowed, either equally projecting > above and below the lamina, or in upper part of the leaf re- stricted to the back, a b. Developed fruiting stems equally leafy to near base, the leaves to below middle of stem pee EONS and under hand Ear a: tinctly spoon-shaped, - C. 1 Colorado, North Dakota. 6b. Developed fruiting stems leafless for some distance above the rooting base, only some closely appressed scales representing the leaves there; hair-pointed leaves all crowded to near the top; no distinct appearance of spoon-shaped leaves, 1 C. wrightii var. brevis. Minnesota. ' Holzinger: ON THE GENUS COSCINODON. 759 Since completing the above paper a note should be ad- ded. Coscinodon raui, it should be stated, has been col- _ lected by me near Winona, but on the Wisconsin side of the Mississippi. My material is dated July 16, 1895. But all the material from the first station, the Catholic cemetery bluff, Which is now in my hands, is unmixed Coscinodon wrightii yar. brevis. Through the kindness of Professor C. R. Barnes I was permit- ted to re-examine a part of his material from near Winona, sent him by me; all of it proved to be Coscinodon wrightii var. brevis. But Mrs. E. G. Britton’s material from the same station, a part of which she also kindly sent me since writing the above, un- doubtedly contains the two. It is therefore very probable that Professor Barnes’ specimen was also mixed, and that, in his certainly very careful examination and comparison with the Cambridge type, he happened to have in hand some Cos- - cinodon raui from the Minnesota material. Finally, a re-ex-) - amination of all of Prof. Barnes’ material disclosed some plants of C. raui growing together with C. wrightii var. brevis. EXPLANATION OF PLATE. PLATE XLI. Enlarged plant of C. raui, calyptra and peristome. X4. Enlarged plant of C. wrightii. X4. Enlarged plant of C. wrightii var. brevis, showing position of fe- male bud and male bud. X4. Leaf of C. ruui from upper portion of stem, front view. X42. Same, side view. X42. Leaf of C. raui from lower portion of stem, front view. X42. Same, side view. X42. Leaf of C. wrightii from upper portion of stem, front view. X42. Fig. Same, side view. X42. Fig. 10. Leaf of C. wrightii from lower portion of stem, front view. X42. Fig. 11. Same, side view. X42. Fig. 12. Cross section of leaf of C. raui. XI20. Fig. 13. Same, C. wrightii. X120. Fig. 14. Leaf of C. wrightii, showing areolation. X112. Fig. 15. Same, C. raui. XII2. Fig. 16. Female flower of C. wrightii var. brevis, with two perichaetial 1 leaves. X42. 4 Fig. 17. Male flower of same, with three perichaetial leaves. X42. S N 760 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. XLVIIL OBSERVATIONS ON THE FERNS AND — FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE | HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.* A. A. HELLER. The Hawaiian group of islands has long been known as pos- sessing peculiar botanical features, and has been visited during the past one hundred years by a number of botanists, the first of whom was David Nelson, who collected there in 1778 and 1779, during the third voyage of Captain Cook. a The principal published accounts of Hawaiian plants are by — Chamisso, in Linnaea; by Gaudichaud, in Botanique du Vo age de l'Uranie, incorrectly cited by Mann and Hillebrand as Bot. Freyc. Voy.; by Meyen, in Nov. Act. Acad. Caes. Leop. Carol. Nat. Cur. ; by Asa Gray, in the Botany of the U. S. E. ploring Eæpedition, and in the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences; by Nuttall, in the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society; by Horace Mann, in the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History, and Pro- ceedings of the American Academy; by Wawra, in Flora, and by Hillebrand, in his Flora of the Hawaiian Islands. Gaudi- chaud also issued a folio atlas, in which are plates of the plants collected on the voyage of the Bonite, but unaccompanied by a descriptions, The Hawaiian plants to which these plates refer have mostly been described by different writers, and credited to Gaudichaud. a The main part of the group, composed of the islands ofa Hawaii, Maui, Kahoolawe, Lanai, Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, and Niihau, is situated between 18° 55! and 22° 20’ N., and 154° 50. “2 low islands, now belonging to the young republic. Of these, | 4 Laysan island is perhaps the largest, though only a narrow 1 strip of land a few miles long. It is of value only on account * A complete series of this collection, amounting to over one thousand specimens a of ferns and flowering plants, and including some sixty type specimens, has been pre- Bs sented by Mr. A. A. Heller to the herbarium of the Geological and Natural History Survey. The whole makes an addition of quite inestimable value to the state col- lections.—C. M. 7 9 Te Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 761 of its large guano deposits The plants found on it are the same as those which occur along the beach on the lee sides of Oahu and Kauai, as Gossypium tomentosum and Scaevola koenigii. Kauai, the third in size, is the oldest in point of formation, and usually considered to be the best botanically. On the lee side, separated by a channel nine miles in width, is Niihau, a small and rather low island, the maximum height not exceed- ing 1,000 feet. In the early part of the century it was of con- siderably more importance than now, as ships were accustomed to put in there to get a supply of yams, which were very abundant. There also the famous Niihau mats were made from Cyperus laevigatus. , Following the trend of formation from northwest to south- east, Oahu, the fourth island in size, comes next, separated from Kauai by a channel sixty miles in width. Next in order is Molokai, fifth in size. It is a long, narrow island. with precipitous cliffs along the windward side. Con- flicting statements are made as to the height of the mountains on this island, some giving 3,500 feet as the maximum, others _ 6,000 feet The highest, and consequently the wettest portion, is toward the eastern end. The western end is composed of the ancient crater of Maunolaa. On a small peninsula, which _ juts out near the middle on the north side of the island, is situ- _ ated the leper settlement. This point of land is cut off from the main portion of the island by a pali, as precipices are there called. This pali is about 3,000 feet high, and practically im- passable, so that the only approach is by sea. Some years ago 4 the lepérs, or as many of them as could be captured, were sent off to Molokai, and now, whenever a case develops, the victim is promptly sent there too. The government provides them with habitations. food and medical attendance, so that many of ; them are really much better off than they were before. This method has undoubtedly done much to check the spread of the dread disease. Immediately south of Molokai, separated by a narrow chan- nel, is Lanai, a small island, with a maximum elevation of per- _ haps 2,500 feet. Lying as it does on the lee side of Molokai and Maui, it receives but a small amount of moisture, and has 3 one permanent stream of water. Just east of Lanai, lies Maui, the second in size of the group. a tt is composed of two mountains, connected by a low, sandy _ isthmus. The western part consists of precipitous mountain _ fridges, while the larger eastern part is occupied by the great 762 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. mountain of Haleakala, 10,000 feet high. The slope of this mountain, at least on the western side, is easy and gradual. — The immense extinct crater of Haleakala House of the Sun” — is the largest in the world. It is triangular in shape, and from 1,000 to 2,000 feet deep. 4 Kahoolawe, southwest of Maui, is a small, barren island. devoted to sheep raising, and has never been considered of — much interest botanically. 4 Last, but not least, for it is the largest, is the island of Hawaii, from which the group derives its name. It is 100 miles long and 90 miles wide. The northern end is oceupied — by the Kohala range of mountains, with a height of 6,000 feet. The remainder of the island is composed of three peaks, Mauna Kea, 18,805 feet high; Mauna Loa, 12,675 feet, and Hualalai, — 8,273 feet. These three mountains form the three points ofan equilateral triangle, with an elevated plateau of from 5,000 to 6,000 feet between them. On the southeastern slope of Mauna Loa, at 4,041 feet, is the famous crater of Kilauea. Ps Considering their proximity to the Equator, the Hawaiian islands enjoy an unusually mild climate, the mean annual tem perature at Honolulu being about 79° F. The minimum is 50 F. and maximum 90° F., but the latter figure is rarely reached. The northeast trade winds, which blow during about three- fourths of the year, are the cause of the pleasant and equitable — a temperature. During the winter months, when the wind shifts — to the south or southeast, bringing with it some of the equa- torial heat and sultriness, is the most disagreeable time of the year. This is the season, too, when the heavy ‘‘Kona” storms q of wind and rain usually make their appearance. a The topography has much to do with the rainfall, as the islands are practically all mountains, with very little low land 4 along the coast. In nearly all cases a mountain barrier being presented to the prevailing wind, the moisture is condensed. and a heavy precipitation follows on the windward side, While the lee side may be comparatively rainless. At Hilo, on Hawaii, and at Hanalei, on Kauai, the average rainfall is 180 inches, while at points opposite on the lee sides of the same islands, the average is about 25 inches. 4 As the soil is composed of disintegrated lava rock, it is very 4 porous, and very little water can be found on and near mount- ain summits, although there are exceptions on Maui and Kauai. where bogs have been formed. Usually the rainfall which is precipitated on the summits and upper slopes, percolates 6a Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 763 through the soil and makes its appearance as streams some- where upon the lower slopes of the mountains, or wells up as _. springs on the beach. Along the beach, between Diamond Head and Koko Head, on Oahu, in a region where rain rarely falls except in winter, are a number of springs of fresh water, covered at high tide by the sea. Just beyond Diamond Head it is a common sight to see cattle go down to the beach, and apparently take a drink of salt water. - Judging from the uniformity of the geological formation, we should expect a great similarity in the vegetation of the several islands, but such is not the case. True, there are many species common to all of the islands, but the bulk of the native species found on any given island, are different from those which occur on the other islands, and when a species is found on two or more islands, it differs somewhat in leaf form, or in some other particular. This is especially true of strictly endemic plants. The introduced species show a much greater uniformity in habit and growth. Isolated from a continental area, and almost equally so from the other islands of the Polynesian system, Hawaiian vegeta- tion has developed independent of extraneous modifying con- ditions. That it has done so in a satisfactory way, is evinced by a summing up of the proportion of endemic species in Hille- brand's Flora. This work, published in 1888, enumerates 999 Species of phanerogams and vascular cryptogams. Of this number, 139 are introduced, and 653 are endemic, leaving 207 native species which are found elsewhere. Of the 653 endemic species, 250 belong to 40 endemic genera. These endemic genera are found principally among the Rubi- - aceae, Compositae, Lobeliaceae, and Labiatae. The dis- _ tribution of the species in the larger of these endemic genera is quite interesting. Sochiedia is represented on all of the islands, but principally on the northern islands of Kauai and Oahu. The same holds good. too, with Pelea and Platydesma. Of the Araliaceae, Cheirodendron is pretty well divided. _ Dipanax is northern, one species out of three being found on Lanai. Triplasandra is confined almost exclusively to Oahu. Of the Rubiaceae, Kadua, Gouldia, Bobea, and Straussia are distributed over all of the islands, but Hawaii has a smaller number than the other islands. In the Compositae, Remya is found on Kauai and Maui, with nao species recorded from the intermediate island of Oahu. oT — 764 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a Tetramolopium ranges over all of the islands, but is most abundant on Maui and Hawaii, only one species finding its way to Kauai. Lipochaeta, which may be considered a Hawaiian. — genus, ranges over all of the islands, but principally from Hawaii to Oahu. The same may be said of Campylotheca. — Argyroxiphium is confined to the high mountains of Maui and Hawaii. Wilkesia is represented by two species, one on Kauai, and one on Maui. Dubautia is confined principally to Kauai, four of the six species being found there, while none occur on Hawaii. Raillardia, on the contrary, is found principally on Hawaii, with one species on Kauai. Hesperomannia is of cen- tral distribution, occurring on Lanai Maui, and Oahu. In the Lobeliaceae, Clermontia is of central distribution, few ‘ species being found on Kauai and Hawaii. Rollandia is found only on Oahu. Dellissed is northern in range, growing prin- ’ cipally on Oahu and Kauai, with one species on Hawaii. — Cyanea, with about thirty species, occurs on all of the islands, but is most abundant on the islands of Maui and Hawaii, thus q being principally of southern distribution. a Of the Labiatae, Haplostachys is central or southern, rang- ing from Molokai to Hawaii, with a form on Kauai. Phyllos- tegia predominates on Hawaii and Maui, with a few species on Molokai, Oahu, and Kauai. The same is true of Sphacele, — except that even fewer species are found on the northern 1 islands. 4 Besides these larger genera, there are smaller ones, which have representatives only on the northern islands, and Wen they are taken into account, the endemic species are found to 4 be pretty evenly distributed over the entire group. But we also find that in the larger and more differentiated genera, the greatest number of species are found on the later formed islands of Maui and Hawaii, where also the greatest elevations are found. a ‘The great number of ferns appeal to the eye of the botanist, — when he ascends to the region of native vegetation, Omittix 4 the lower cryptogams, they comprise one-sixth of the native vegetation. The comparative scarcity of grasses, Compositae, and Leguminosae, in opposition to the unusually large number of Rutaceae, Rubiaceae, Lobeliaceae, and Labiatae, is a matter q of astonishment to the collector from more temperate regions. Jo the student of the lower cryptogams, an immense field i is = open. Near the summits of the mountains, and in other places 2 where there is a large amount of moisture, the trees, bushes 1 Heller; PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 765. and ground are draped and carpeted with mosses and Hepatics. Lichens seem to be most abundant on the trees and rocks of the lower and middle regions, at least on Oahu and Kauai. Aleurites moluccana, the ‘‘Kukui” tree, which flourishes only in the lower forest region, is the host of more species of lichens than perhaps any other tree. Next comes Acacia Koa, the ‘‘Koa” tree, which harbors many interesting species, but, as a rule, different from those which are found on the Kukui tree. Parasitic fungi are common on the leaves and stalks of many plants, but fleshy fungi seem to be scarce. Marine algae are abundant, as one would expect, and fresh water forms are prob- ably plentiful in suitable situations In the remarks concerning the geographical features of the islands, Oahu and Kauai were purposely omitted, or merely mentioned, in order to speak of them later, as they are the only islands which were visited by the writer. 4 Oahu, the fourth island in size, upon which is situated the capital city of Honolulu, is about thirty-five miles long, and twenty five miles wide at the point of its greatest breadth. The eastern portion, beginning at a point just west of Hono- lulu, is only ten or twelve miles wide. Two mountain ranges - traverse the length of the island, the main range skirting the - northeastern coast, and the Wainai range following the north- western coast. Between these two ranges is a stretch of low land, which is often very dry, and hot. Judging from the contour of the main range, the windward side, at least as far north as Ka Oio point, must once have been the rim of a vast crater. It presents a wall with a sheer descent of from 1,000 to 2,500 feet, all along between Makapuu and Ka Oio points. Rock walls like this, or precipices of all sorts, are called pali in the Kanaka, or Hawaiian languge. At the head of Nuuanu valley, is the only pass where it is possible to make a road across the mountain. This point, which is 1,200 feet above sea level, is always spoken of as the Pali. Here a small ridge projects toward the windward side, and by making use of _ this slope, a steep, zigzag road has been cut, which leads to the f 5 plain below. Here, on either side of Nuuanu valley, are the two high peaks of the main range, Konahuanui on the east side, and Waiolani on the west side. The former has an eleva- tion of about 3,500 feet, the latter of 3, 700 feet. On the Kona- _ huanui side, the ridges all have steep slopes, but on the Waio- lani side, especially near the extreme northwestern end, they F spread out and become rather broad. The largest streams on the island rise here. ee nn Tn Brae ele Si ar 766 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. of As mentioned above, the windward side of the range is a precipice, but on the lee side the conditions are different. Here numerous narrow ridges jut out, with deep valleys between. The sides of these ridges are so steep, that they are entirely — inaccessible at most places. The lower ends, however, slope gradually toward the sea, so that by following along the back- — bone, one can ascend to the main ridge, although this is ac- complished only by great labor, difficulty, and danger, as a misstep in some places would mean a plunge of 1,000 feet into the valley below. 4 The Waianae range extends along the shorter western coast. Its highest point is flat-topped Mt. Kaala, which has an eleva: — tion of 4,000 feet, and is the highest point on the island. 4 Although the subterranean fires were extinguished ages since on this island, there is abundant evidence to show that there once was great.volcanic activity. There are four tufa cones in the vicinity of Honolulu. A short distance west of the city is the twin crater of Moanalua, containing a lake of salt water. which does not appear to be connected with the ocean. Punch- bow] stands like a sentinel on the northeastern edge of the city. Diamond Head, the most imposing of the four, is four miles 5 east. It has a height of 700 feet. Four or five miles beyond. a near the extreme eastern end of the island, is Koko Head. short distance beyond Diamond Head, are the remains of an ancient lava flow, where the immense black rocks are piled up in. picturesque confusion. Just opposite, on the heights of Palolo, are the remains of a crater, and probably this flow cinta from thence, although there is not much trace of it n the intervening low ground. u This open country, or ‘‘lowland zone,” as Hillebrand calls it, is almost rainless during the greater part, of the year, ar iy has few native species. It is the home of introduced species, a number of which are annuals, and spring up after the winter rains. In the dry and dusty regions, both east and west of Honolulu, the Algaroba tree, a species of Prosopis, flouris e * as do also large numbers of Acacia farnesiana, which here is always a shrub. Opuntia tuna is a familiar figure of the ar 2 ‘ . 4 a 2 duced plant, yet it must be a native, as it was found on Islands when Captain Cook first touched there. 9 Lantana camara is perhaps the most noxious of all the intro- duced plants. It has spread over all of the islands of the group, and rendered useless many acres of pasture land. Heller ; PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 767 To the 139 introduced species enumerated by Hillebrand, some 20 more have been added by the writer. The bulk of them were collected in.the vicinity of Honolulu. Of the few native trees mentioned as growing in the lowland zone, Erythrina monosperma and Reynoldsia Sandwichensis appear to have become extinct, at least on the eastern side of the island, On this island, the five zones into which Hillebrand divides the flora of the Islands, are not very applicable. The lowland and lower forest zones are distinct enough. The lat- ter, characterized by the Kukui tree, ascends to between 1,500 to 2,000 feet. Polypodium pellucidum, which Hillebrand records as occurring in the fourth, or upper forest zone, I have found only in the lower zone. The other forms of higher elevations, are all referable to new species, described in this paper. The third, or middle forest zone, extends to the summits of the mountains. In this zone it is said that the prevailing trees are indeed Metrosideros polymorpha and Acacia Koa, but, although they reach here their greatest development in size and number, they are not confined to this zone, but extend above, and descend below it.” On the contrary Acacia Koa is here more fully developed within the lower forest, and extends very little above it. Metrosideros is found sparingly in the lower forest, but is nowhere of any size, and higher is inclined to be shrubby. As the summits are approached, it disappears alto- gether. . The upper forest zone, as limited by Hillebrand, and the bog flora seem to be altogether wanting. The flora of Oahu may be divided primarily into two divis- ions, that of the lowland, and that of the mountains. It is pos- sible that the former may again be divided into windward low- land flora and lee side lowland fiora, but as I did not collect on the windward side, this is a mere matter of conjecture. The Mountain flora falls into three divisions. Two of these are found on the main range, and the third is on the Waianae range. The broad, low valley of Nuuanu, with the deep gap at the Pali, prevents the spread of species along the entire length of the main range, thus forming the boundary line of 0 floral areas. Many species grow on the east side of Nu- uanu, which do not occur on the mountains on the west side, and vice versa. Another peculiarity about the distribution of species, is that à Species may occur in any given valley, but is not found in the valleys adjacent. One explanation of this fact may be that 768 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. they are not species which are capable of ascending high — enough to cross the ridge, and the conditions are such that they cannot extend along the sides, and thus work around the ends. 3 The parts explored are only a small proportion of the whole island. »The little valley of Pauoa, back of Honolulu, and the heights above it, received the most attention, especially the slopes of Konahuanui, which overlook upper Pauoa and Monoa valleys. Monoa valley itself was not explored’ Some work was also done on the western slope of Makiki, and on Tauta- lus,” just above, Several trips were made up Nuuanu valley to the Pali, one about half way up Waiolani, one up Kalihi val. ley to its head, and several to the region of Diamond Head. One trip was also made to Pearl river. Marine algae were col lected at Diamond Head and on the coral reef at one side ot Honolulu harbor. : About four months were spent on the island of Kauai, the 4 most northern of the group, and credited with having the most attractions for the botanical collector. This island is almost circular in outline, and enjoys the distinction of often having an annual rainfall of 200 inches at Hanalei, on the windward — side, while Waimea, on the lee side, is one of the hottest and driest places on the group. The highest point is Mt. Waele 4 situated a little east of the centre. It is credited with ane tion of 6,000 feet, but in reality is under 5,000 feet. 7 The configuration of the island is very different from that of Oahu. Instead of a long main ridge, with secondary ridg branching out at right angles there is a central elevation ii Mt. Waialeale, with ridges radiating from it in all directions, something like the spokes of a wheel. These ridges, at] their lower portions, are broad, and easy of ascent. There is usually a good trail along the backbone of each ridge, made b the wild cattle, which are numerous, and range through the forest everywhere. The lower limit of the forest is at mt za greater elevations here than on the island of Oahu. It is about 700 feet in Hanapepe valley, which is situated beneath W a leale, and enjoys considerable rainfall, while above Waimea, it is almost 4,000 feet. The point, then, to which the forest de- scends, depends upon the proximity to the central high poin 5 and to the windward rainy side. a There are three, and perhaps four distinct floral areas on the lee side of the island, but as my explorations did not extend N Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 769 the table land on the west side of the Waimea river, I cannot } vouch for the fourth. Tue deep cafion of the Hanapepe river, which cuts into the heart of the island, constitutes the dividing line between two of these floral areas. To the east of it lies a high, heavily tim- bered tract, with the lower limit of the forest at about 2,000 feet. Back, and a little southeast of Hanapepe falls, at an ele- vation of 3,000 feet, is a bog, situated in an ancient crater, the wall of which is broken down on the west side, and flanked there by wet woods. The Wahiawa river has its source in this bog. The Wahiawa does not cut deep enough in the upper , part of its course to hinder the spread of species in an easterly direction. The flora of this region is essentially different from that on the west side of the Hanapepe canon. The second area is situated between the Hanapepe and the east fork of the Waimea river, which also cuts deeply in to- wards the centre of the island. This tract is somewhat sub- divided by the main tributary of the Hanapepe, which has eroded a deep cafion opposite Gay & Robinson's house. This stream, like the Wahiawa, does not cut deep enough near its sources to make an impassible barrier to the spread of the species, and many species are found in common on the ridges a either side. This second area is, as a whole, much drier nan the first one. The third area is situated between the deep canons of the t and west forks of the Waimea river. Here the forest oper does not begin until an elevation of 4,000 feet is reached. The timbered portion is mostly made up of a broad plateau, which ends abruptly on the southern, or Waimea side, and is sometimes called the tabular summit.” Somewhere on this plateau back towards Waialeale, is located an extensive bog, ail ran makanoe of the natives. Near the edge of the plateau is where we find Wilkesia, Raillardia latifolia, Cyanea leptostegia, and other endemic Hawaiian species. . Cauai gets the credit of being the best botanical ground on the islands, but perhaps it is because collectors have spent less tim > there than on some of the other islands. Mr. Perkins, who has visited the entire group, while collecting birds and insects for the British Museum, tells me that he considers Molokai the best collecting ground. Although not a botanist, he is a keen observer, and as many insects are found only on rtain plants, he has become acquainted with many of the itive species. From my own observation, I would say that Pe 770 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the island of Oahu is perhaps as good collecting ground * Kauai. There is no doubt but that Hillebrand's sum total of 00 q species of flowering plants and ferns is entirely too small. My own explorations covered only a small part of the lee side of Oahu and less than half of the lee side of Kauai, yet these lim- ited areas have yielded 500 species, in round numbers. Taking into consideration that the native flora of any given island of the group is different practically from that of the other islands. it is safe to say that careful study of the flora in the field, will — increase the sum total to at least 2,000 species. 4 In describing the new species, I have taken a certain n N as the type, and described only the specimen under that num ber. When a slightly different form, but undoubtedly the same species was collected, I have not made my description of the type to include that also, but refer it to the same species, and point out in what particulars it differs from the type. Much mischief has been dene by mixed descriptions including several q forms, but it is to be hoped that such a faulty practice will be discarded by every botanist. a I wish to express my thanks to Professor Wm. T. Brigham, — Curator of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum at Honolulu, for many kindnesses which made pleasant my stay in Honolulu. a and also for the privilege of consulting the Mann & Brigham collection, preserved in the Museum. Here I was able to ver- ‘ify many of my specimens, and received much aid in determin- ing others. To Mr. Francis Gay, of Makaweli, Kauai, I much indebted for the privilege of occupying the Gay & Rob- inson house in Hanapepe valley, and the Kaholuamano house on the plateau, above Waimea. a The drawings, for the plates were made by my wife, Mra 1 Gertrude Heller, who has greatly aided in the — 8 this paper. 9 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 771 FILICALES.* OPHIOGLOSSACEAE. OPHIOGLOSSUM L. Sp. Pl. 1062. 1753. Ophioglossum pendulum L. Sp. Pl. 1062. 1753. on reclining tree trunks and protruding roots, never at any distance from the ground, in woods above Manoa, Oahu, at 2000-2500 feet elevation. April to November (2217). POLYPODIACEAE. ACROSTICHUM L. Sp. Pl. 1067. 1783. _ Acrostichum conforme Swz. Syn. Fil. 10:192, pl. 7, J 1. 1806. Hillebrand says this fern is rather rare.” On the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, it is plentiful at 4000 feet elevation, growing either on the ground or on trees. It was not seen at lower elevations, and apparently does not occur on Oahu on the main range. October (2808). Aerostichum gorgoneum Kaur. Enum. Fil. 63, 1824. First collected in wet wood between the Wahiawa and Hana- pepe rivers, at about 2000 feet elevation, where it is rather common, growing on the ground and rotten logs. It is also common at 2000 feet in similar situations above Manoa and Pauoa, Oahu. Above Waimea, Kauai, only a few plants were seen, at 4000 feet elevation. July to November (2622). Aerostichum helleri UNDERW. n. sp. (Plate XLII) _ Rootstock stout, creeping, densely covered with dark brown, erisped scales; petioles of sterile leaves rising at intervals of about 1 em., 2-3 em. long, naked, stramineous; sterile leaves 20-25 cm. long, 38-4 cm. wide, blunt at the apex, tapering to- ward the base, the margin entire; texture coriaceous; veins free, once or occasionally twice forked, about 1 mm. apart; surfaces smooth, glaucous green; petiole of spore bearing leaf 8-10 em. long, gradually margined by the narrow leaf which is about the length of the sterile one but only 2-5 cm. wide, taper- ane ing gradually upwards, the apex somewhat acute and the margin recurved. 8 »The determination and synonomy by Professor Lucien M. Underwood. 772 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 Growing on trees at altitudes of about 3500 to 4000 feet, above Waimea, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, and near the head of the Wahiawa, Kauai. 4 This finely marked species belongs to the § EZlaphoglossum, — but has the texture of A. reticulatum. According to Mr. Heller. it „grows on upright trees, from ten to twenty feet from the ground, and grows around the trees. The thick, hairy root- stocks seem to be an accumulating place for dirt and eventually — a disk is formed completely around the tree, usually extending out at least six inches from it. It does not occur — below 3000 feet and is most plentiful at about 3500 feet.“ August to October (2709). Acrostichum micradenium Ft, Acrost. 43, pl. 8, J. 17. 1844. On logs and tree trunks in damp woods, near the Wahiawa — river, Kauai, at 2500 feet elevation, where it is rather common, though not observed at higher elevations. On Konahuanui and Waiolani, Oahu, it is found at 2500 feet and lower, but * not seen near the summits. Jaly (2621). Acrostichum reticulatum Kaul. Enum. Fil. 64. 1824. 4 On reclining tree trunks. Common near the Wahiawa river. wa Kauai, at 2500 to 3000 feet, and above Manoa and Pauoa, on 7 at 2000 to 2500 feet. July to November (2114, 2567). river, at 3000 feet, and at 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, the banks of streams in the woods. July to October (2688). ADIANTUM L. Sp. Pl. 1094. 1753. Adiantum capillus-veneris L. Sp. Pl. 1096. 1753. Along the Hanapepe river and its tributaries, island of Kauai In upper Pauoa, Oahu, the perpendicular rocks near the fall were covered with the dead fronds of this fern. July 1 (2479). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 773 ASPLENIUM L. Sp. Pl. 1078. 1753. Asplenium diplazioides H. & A. Bot. Beechy Voy. 107. 1532. Diplazium arnotti Brack. Bot, U. S. Expl. Exped. 16: 144. 1854. Asplenium arnotti BAKER, Syn. Fil. Ed. 2, 240. 1874. In wet woods, above Manoa, Oahu, at 2000 feet elevation, just below the edge of the plateau. November 5 (2900). Asplenlum aspidioides Sprenc. Syst. Veg. 4:90. 1828. Very common in upper Pauoa, and on the lower slopes of _ Konahuanui, Oahu, at elevations of 1500-2500 feet. April to November (2073). { Asplenium contiguum Kaur. Enum. Fil. 172. 1824. On a Kukui tree on Tantalus, and on the ground above Manoa, Oahu, at 2000 feet elevation. April (2055, 2115). : : Asplenium cuneatum Lam. Encycl. 2:309. 1786. In rather dry woods, on Kaholuamanoa, above Waimea, Kauai. at 4000 feet, growing on the ground. Oetober (2865). 4 1 deparioides Brack. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16:172. 1854. 7 Along the left bank of the Wahiawa, Kauai, just below the second fall. July 25 (2603). Asplenium deparioides BRack. var. A much smaller plant than A. depnurioides, with shorter pinnae and less falcate segments; found in wet woods near the head of the Wahiawa, at about 3000 feet elevation. August 21 (2760). Asplenium erectum Bory. in Willd. Sp. Pl. 5:328. 1810. Along the banks of a stream shaded by Kukui trees, below the tabular summit above Waimea, Kauai, at about 2500 feet elevation. October 1 (2845). 774 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Asplenium erectum var. subbipinnatum IILLun. El. Haw. — Is. 500. 1888. 4 Not uncommon in the woods of Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet. A delicate fern, with slender fronds, usu- ally about eight inches in length. a September (2764). Asplenium fureatum Taouns. Prodr. Fl. Jap. 172. 1784. Growing on dry, exposed rocks, below the plateau ot Kaho. , luamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at 3000 feet elevation. } October (2872). Asplenium horridum Kaur. Enum. Fil. 173. 1824. Occasional in dry woods on Kaholuamano above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet elevation. Apparently a local fern, as but few plants are ever found in any one locality. It was also no- ticed in upper Pauoa. 7 October (2853). Asplenium horridum KAULP. var. 3 Differs from the preceding in the nearly smooth, bluish rachis 3 and pinnae, the segments being larger, more deeply and less obliquely cut. In damp woods between the Wahiawa and Hanapepe rivers, Kauai. Not uncommon at one place. . July (2588). Asplenium lucidum Forst. Prodr. 427. 1789. 3 Referred by Baker to A. obtusatum, but quite distinct. col. lected on the left bank of the Wahiawa, Kauai, just below <= second fall. July (2692). Asplenium monanthemum Swz. Syn. Fil. 80. 1806. Asplenium monanthes L. Mant. 130. 1771. ag A rather common fern in the woods of Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet, growing on the ground. = September (2771). - Asplenium nidus L. Sp. Pl. 1079. 1753. This fern grows in various situations, and well deserves the! name of Bird's Nest Fern,” the space enclosed by the base „ of the fronds resembling a bird's nest. On the island of Oahu it was found growing on trees, on Tantalus and also above : Manoa, while in Waialae, fine large plants grow on a ae Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 775 i ledge of rocks. In Hanapepe valley, Kauai, it occurs on rocks, on open exposed slopes. ‘ 0 April to August (2056). } Asplenium normale Don. Prodr. Fil. Nep. 7. 1825. In damp woods, lower slopes of Konahuanui, and Kalihi, Oahu. on the ground. Usually proliferous. April (2218). Aspienium obliquum Forsr. Prodr. 429. 1786. On cliffs and in wet woods along the Hanapepe river, Kauai. Baker unites this with A. obtusatum. July (2486). Asplenlum obtusatum Forst. Prodr. 430. 1786. Growing under bushes at 1350 feet elevation, on the steep slope on the Konahuanui side of the Pali, Oahu. May 24 (2361). Aeplenlum resectum Su. Icones Ined. pl. 72; Swz. Syn. Fil. 80. 1806. Below the plateau of Kaholuamano, Kauai, at about 2500 feet polevation, along the bed of a stream, gregarious. It also oc- ‘curs below the edge of the plateau above Manoa and Pauoa, Oahu, in moist ground. Hillebrand records it as common on trees and rocks,“ but I have not seen it except at the places mentioned above, and only on ground where there is consider- hi Able moisture. October (2844). splenium rhizophyllum Kunze, Linnaea, 9:71. 1852. Growing under larger ferns and bushes} on Tantalus, Oahu, 1 dove Honolulu, at 2000 feet elevation. 3 April (2117). plenium scandicinum (WILLD.) PRESL. Tent. Pter. 98. 1836. Aspidium scandicinum WILLD. Sp. Pl. 5:285. 1810. On the ground in wet woods along the Wahiawa, Kauai, at about 2500 feet. Baker unites this with A. aspidioides, but the Island forms, at least, are very distinct plants. Hillebrand. ir astead of using his own judgment and field observations, fol- : s Baker. July (2623). 4 E 4 776 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Asplenium sphenotomum Hitvesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 599. 1888. In the woods@f Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet elevation, growing on the ground and on trees. A hand- | some fern, more plentiful in deep wet woods, than in the dry ; outer forest. September (2765). Asplenium vexans UNDERW. n. sp. Rootstock stout, ascending or erect, covered with the thickly placed bases of the fallen petioles; petioles about 25 cm. long, with a dense tuft of dark brown scales at the base, smooth and pale brown above; leaves membranous, triangnlar-ovate, about 30 cm. long, 20 cm. wide at the base, triquadripinnatifid; pin- nae about 14 pairs, the lower widest in the middle, the upper wider at base, all provided with a winged rachis; pinnules 2 to 3 em. long, oblong-lanceolate, cut almost to the base into decur- rent segments which in the larger pinnules are cut into g or 4 acute divisions, or in the smaller are entire or 2 to 8 toothed at the apex; veins forked, single in each tooth; sori 4 to 6 to each pinnule mostly confined to its upper half. ; On the ground, on Tantalus, and above Pauoa and ue: “ Oahu, in damp woods under larger ferns. 4 Allied to A. cicutarium in texture and habit. It bears a close resémblance to A. scandicinum, and was probably confouné 4 with that plant by Hillebrand. 9 April to November (2058). CIBOTIUM Kaurr. Berl. Jahrb. der Ph. 1820. Cibotium Chamissoi KauLFr. Enum. Fil. 230, pl. J, J. 1. 1824. In moist ground, beneath the edge of the plateau above Manoa, Oahu, at 2000 feet elevation. November (2898). Cibotium menziesii Hook. Sp. Fil. 1:84. Pl. 20 c. 1846. Common in damp woods along the Wahiawa, Kauai, at 2 0 to 2500 feet elevation, and on Kahaluamano above Waimea. This species is easily distinguished from the others by the long brown hair on the stipes, and to an observant person the whole plant presents a different appearance from any of the other species. . August (2693). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 777 Cipotium pruinatum Marr. in Kuhn. Linnaea, 36.150. 1869. Along streams in wet woods, near the Wahiawa, Kauai, and on Kaholuamano (2818). The three forms referred to this species differ materially from each other, and also from the brief description which this plant has received. They are all distinctly wooly-hairy beneath. No. 2600 is nearest to C. glaucum, but differs in its hairy under surface. It is necessary to study these forms in their native woods, before the species can be well understood. August to October (2590, 2600, 2818). 81 DAVALLIA Surrn, Mem. Acad. Turin. 5: 414. pl. 9. 1793. Davallia speluneae (L.) Baker, Syn. Fil. Ed. 2, 100. 1874. _ Common in upper Pauoa, Oahu, at 1500 feet elevation, and in gulches on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at 3000 feet. Also above Waimea, Kauai. Hillebrand seems to have been rather unfamiliar with the vegetation of such an easily accessible place as the heights of Pauoa, for he says: Rare, found by me on the Waianae mountains, Oahu, and near Hilo, Hawaii, only.” 4 April to July (2072 Oahu, 2650 Kauai). Davallia strigosa Swartz, Syn. Fil. 98. 1806. Said to be a very common fern on all of the islands of the Hawaiian group. In Pauoa, Oahu, it was found in sheltered places on grassy slopos, under bushes (2012), and on the out- skirts of the woods at about 1500 feet elevation, in much damper situations (2327). On Kauai, a less hairy form was found in the valley of the main tributary of the Hanapepe river, growing in de under trees (2480). Javallia strigosa SwARTZ, var. fin open places near the edge of the forest above Waimea, 1 aay growing in great profusion, is a form which differs from @ above by having a narrower leaf, narrower and more veiny innae, pinnules and segments. bee 10 (2803). avallia tenuifolia Swartz, Schrader's Journ. 2:88. 1800. "This plant is very common in the lower woods where the timber is thin, and seems to prefer drier situations than many of the other ferns. Collected in Pauoa, Oahu, and on Kaholu- amano, Kauai. f April to October (2328). 778 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. vay DEPARIA H. & G. Icon. Fil. pl. 154. 1828. Deparia prolifera (KaAUuLF.) Hook. Sp. Fil. 1:85. 1846. Dicksonia prolifera KAuLY. Enum. Fil, 225. 1824. 4 In wet woods at an elevation of about 3000 feet, near the best f of the Wahiawa, this fern was occasionally found. Hillebrand united this species with Asplenium deparioides, but apparently without valid reason for the two species are easily distin- guished. a August 21 (2740). 2 Deparia triangularis UNDER. n. sp. Rootstock short and thick; petioles 35 cm. long, bal except for a few ferruginous scales near the base, brownish be. low, lighter above; leaves elongate-triangular, half a metre c more long, bipinnatifid or nearly bipinnate below; lower pinn ‘ 20 em. or more long with somewhat irregular falcate segments 4 to 5 cm. long, 1 cm. or more wide, with irregular jagged mar- gins; upper pinnae narrower, lanceolate, cut nearly to the mid- rib into falcate segments 1.5 cm. long; sori about 8 to each o 1 the upper segments, more numerous below. 4 On the ground. Oahu, (2057). a A peculiar species with very irregular leaves, distinct from D. prolifera, which is the only other species of the genus four 1 in the Hawaiian islands. q DOODIA R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 151. 1810. 4 Doodia media R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 151. 1810. _ Collected at an elevation of 2000 feet on the left per of the Wahiawa, Kauai, below the second fall, where it was gro 8 on open banks. Later it was observed at higher Gesu : the ridges west of the Hanapepe river. The species is also found in Australia and New Zealand. July 22 (2601). DRYOPTERIS Avans. Fam. Pl. 2:20. 1763. 9 _[Aspidium Sw. Schrader’s Journ. Bot. 2:20. 1800. ag Dryopteris coniifolia (WALL.) UNDERW. 4 Aspidium coniifolium WALL. Cat. n. 341. 1828. 4 Growing on the edge of a stream, above Waimea, Kauai, a t 4000 feet elevation. Apparently rare, as only a few plants were found. September 14 (2817). 5 a Pe Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 779 Dryopteris caryotidea (WALL.) UNDERW. Aspidium caryotideum WALL. Cat. n. 376. 1828. This species was first detected at an elevation of about 3000 feet, on the side of a gulch on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai. Later it was noted in a deep valley above Wa- imea, at about 2000 feet elevation. It prefers rather open situ- - ations, and does not appear to be plentiful. It differs, accord- ing to Hillebrand, from Asiatic plants of this species. July 11 (2544). Dryopteris cicutaria (Swartz) Kunrze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 812. 1891. Aspidium cicutarium Swartz, Schrader's Journ. 2:279. 1803. In a deep gulch at the foot of the tabular summit, above Wa- _ imea, Kauai, at about 2000 feet elevation. It was also noticed in upper Pauoa and Kalihi valleys, Oahu, near streams. Oetober 1 (2842). J Dryopteris cyatheoides (KAULF.) KN TZR, Rev. Gen. Pl. 812. 1891. Aspidium cyatheoides KAULF. Enum. Fil. 234. 1823. Common, growing on the ground, in open places in the lower forest Oahu (1991). On Kaholuamano, Kauai, growing along a stream in the woods, a large form was collected, with wider and much more closely imbricate pinnae (2857). ; Dryopteris filix-mas (L.) Schorr. Gen. Fil. 1834. Polypodium filiz-mas L. Sp. Pl. 1090. 1753. Common on Kauai, in damp woods, at elevations of 2000 to 4000 feet. Collected first on the ridge between the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers (2587), and later on Kaholuamano (2746). The specimens referred to this species are quite different from the European or American forms. . Jryopteris filix-mas var. parallelogramma (Kze.) UNDERW. Aspidium li- mas var. parallelogramma Kzk. Linnaea 13: 140. 1857. At an elevation of about 3000 feet, on a dry ridge, west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai. Compared with the ordinary forms of the male fern, this would certainly be a distinct spe- cies. 780 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 Dryopteris latifrons (BRack.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 813. 1891. Lastrea latifrons Brack. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16: 106. 1854. 4 At the base of a large rock, on the edge of the plateau above Manoa, Oahu, at an elevation of about 2000 feet. An endemic — i Hawaiian fern, recorded as occuring on all the islands, but not F 1 a 3 common. October 30 (2899); probably from the type locality, „Oahu, Sandwich Islands; on the high mountains behind Honolulu“ Dryopteris parasitica (L) Kunrze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 811. 1891. Polypodium parasiticum L. Sp. Pl. 1090. 1753. Nephrodium molle Desv. Mem. Soc. Linn. 6: 258. 1 Common on Oahu, in open places, valleys, and slopes, barely reaching to the lower limit of the lower forest. 4 March 26 (2011). Dryopteris nuda UNDERW. n. sp. Rootstock short; petioles caespitose, 20 to 25 em. long, naked throughout, brownish below, lighter above, extending into a stramineous rachis; leaves triangular-ovate, 25 to 30 cm. long, tripinnatifid; lowest pinnae much the largest, 13 cm. long by about 10 cm. or more wide at the base, unequally triangular, — the lower pinnule much larger and more divided; upper pinnae — varying from broad triangular to lanceolate, always widest at base, the uppermost simple; ultimate segments with short, ; somewhat distant, sharp serrations; veins pinnate, the branch- es obscurely forked; sori small, marginal, one at the lower side of each tooth or segment; indusia withering persistent. _ Resembling somewhat small forms of our common D. spinu- - losa, but a much more rigid plant with less pronounced * tions and different habit. The rachises throughout have one sional narrow scale-like hairs of a reddish color. This plant was common on Kauai in rather dry woods. was first collected at an elevation of 2000 feet, on the ridges between the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers, later on the ridge. west of the Hanapepe, at 2000 feet, and also at 4000 feet abov Waimea. | August to October (2750). Dryopteris squamigera (H. & A.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 818. 1891. : Nephrodium squamigerum H. & A. Bot. Beechey, 106. 1833. 1 On the face of a perpendicular rock in a gulch above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 2000 feet, this species was plentiful, — Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 781 but was not seen at at any other place. Being exposed directly to the afternoon sun, many of the plants were withered. The species is said to be rare on the Islands, but is also recorded from the Society and Viti islands. October 1 (2841). Dryopteris truncata (GaupD.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 814. 1891. Aspidium truncatum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie 333, pl. 20. 1830. This is a rather common fern, growing in damp situations at medium elevations. First collected in Kalihi valley, Oahu (2334), and later above Waimea and along the Hanapepe river, Kauai (2843). _ Dryopteris unita (L.) Kunrze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 811. 1891. Polypodium unitum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1548, 1763. Common along streams and wet places, below the forest. The highest place where it was noticed, was on the grassy slope at the head of Pauoa, at about 1000 feet elevation. The plant is stiff and erect, with ascending pinnae. July to October (2594); original locality, in Indiis.” GYMNOGRAMMA Desv. Berl. Mag. 5:304. 1811. - Gymnogramma javanica BLuMe, Fil. Jay. 95, pl. 47. 1830. . Gymnogramma pilosum Brack, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16:22. 1854. Collected at elevations of from 3000 to 4000 feet, on Kauai. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river it was found growing in damp woods among other ferns, but not plentifully. Above Waimea it was more plentiful in deep woods along streams, and was also of a much more luxuriant growth. July to October (2637). Gymnogramma sadlerioides UNDERW. n. sp. (Plate XLII. Rootstock short, rather stout, nearly erect; petioles 12 to 15 em. long, purplish brown, sparingly clothed with long, slender, ; pale brown scales; leaves pinnatifid or nearly bipinnate, lance- olate, 28 to 30 em. long, about 4 cm. wide; pinnae with 3 to 6 pairs of ovate pinnules, the lower smaller, horizontal or slight- ly curved upwards; pinnules 5 to 6 mm. long, blunt, entire, the lateral margins slightly recurved; veins free, producing a branch on either side near the base of the pinnule, each of which bears a short linear sorus which stands on the pinnule N way from the main vein to the margin; sporangia short ced, 12 to 15 in a sorus. 782 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. An unique species, entirely unlike any others in this multi- typical genus, which should properly be divided into a number of genera, as is the practice of almost all pteridologists outside of Kew. If it does not form a section by itself, it will come nearest in character to § Leptogramme, though very different — from any described form of that section. It is named from the resemblance to Sadleria squarrosa in the cutting of the leaf. Hanging from a rock wall, on Kaholuamano above Wang Kauai (2863). HYPOLEPIS Berna. Schrader's Neues Journ. 1: 4 1806. ; Hypolepis tenuifolia (Forst.) Berna. Schrader's Neues y Journ. 1:34. 1806. 4 Lonchites tenuifolia Forst. Prodr. n. 424. 1786. i This species is not uncommon in deep forests, at an elevation — of 4000 feet, above Waimea, Kauai. . August 31 (2778). NEPHROLEPIS Schorr. Gen, Fil. pl. 3. 1834. Nephrolepis acuta (Schk.) PRESL. Lent. Pterid. 79. 1836. Aspidium acutum Scux. Fil. 32, pl. 21. Very common on trees and on the ground in the lower forest. and extending up into the middle forest zone. Specimens were collected in Nuuanu valley, Oahu, at an elevation of 1000 feet. J March 23 (1987). * N exaltata (L.) Schorr. Gen. Fil. 1834. Polypodium exaltatum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1548. 1763. While N acuta is confined to low and medium elevations, species replaces it at high elevations. On Kauai, where ; highest point is somewhat under 5000 feet, M exaltata is plen- tiful at elevations of from 3000-4000 feet. October 11 (2873); original locality, ‘‘in America.” PHEGOPTERIS FRE. Gen. Fil. 242. 1850-52. Phegopteris honolulensis (HooK.) HELLER. Polypodium honolulense Hoox. Sp. Fil. 4: 288. 1862. Polypodium hillebrundii Hook. Sp. Fil. 4:254. 1862, not H. brandii HooK. I. c. 228. Phegopteris hillebrundii HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 566. 1888. : At an elevation of 4000 feet, above Waimea, Kauai, this spe- cies is rather common along streams, somewhat resembling J Asplenium aspidioides at a casual glance. September 14 (2814). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 733 Phegopteris polycarpa (H. & A.) Hicttese. Fl. Haw. Is. 560. 1888, Polypodium polycarpum H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 104. 1832. Stenogramme Sandwicensis BRACK, Bot. U.S. Expl. Exped. 16: 26, J. 4. 1854. Phagoplerte microdendron D. C. EATON in Mann. Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 218. 1867. Holy podium stenogramnioides BAKER. Synop. Fil. 317. This handsome species was collected at an elevation of 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, where the long fronds grew droop- ing over the edge of a stream in the forest. It is probably Hillebrand’s var. Kauaiensis, which was collected by Knudsen on Halemanu, which is separated from Kaholuamano, where my specimens grew, by the deep gorge of the west branch of the Waimea river. Hooker and Arnott’s specimen must have been collected on Oahu, as the Beechy expedition collected only on Oahu and Nihaui, and the latter island is too low to afford favorable situations for the growth of this fern. It was ob served high up on the slopes of Konahuanui, Oahu. It is an _ endemic Hawaiian fern, and said by Hillebrand to be not un- common.“ September 30 (2839). Phegopteris punctata (TaHuNns.) HILLRGAR. Fl. Haw. Is. 562. . 1888. Polypodium pumetutum THUNB. Fl. Jap. 337. 1784. A fern common in the woods on the ridge between the Wahi- awa and Hanapepe rivers, Kauai, and near the former stream. Not reported from Kauai by Hillebrand. Jiuly 18 (2587). Phegopteris spinulosa HiLLEEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 566. 1888. a A tall fern, found growing among a tangle of other large ferns on a stream bank at an elevation of 4000 feet above Wai- mea, Kauai. Very little of it was found, but this is probably due to the fact that it resembles rather closely several other more common species of the same genus, and hence was usu- ally overlooked. A peculiar Hawaiian fern. Hillebrand's types came from Maui and Hawaii. _ October 11 (2874). 784 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, a Phegopteris unidentata (H. & A.) Maxx. Proc. Am. . 7: 218. 1867. 0 Polypodium unidentatum H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 105, 1832. * Collected at an elevation of 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, along a stream in the woods. It is an endemic Hawaiian — said to grow on all the islands of the group, at elevations of from 2000 to 4000 feet. September 30 (2538). POLYPODIUM L. Sp. Pl. 1082. 1753. Polypodium abietinum D. C.Earon, in Mann. Proc. Am. Acad 7: 219. 1867. On moss covered trees, at 3000 feet elevation, in wet woods, near the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai. Hille- brand refers this species to P. tamariscinum, but it is certainly a very distinct species. It is perhaps common in favorable sit- uations, but owing to its small size, and habit of growing o tree limbs among moss, may easily be overlooked. It k been found only on the Hawaiian group. August 21 (2732). Sec, Polypodium hawaiiense UNDERW. n. sp. Rootstock wide creeping, clothed when young with ¢ , cinnamon-colored scales; petioles rising at intervals of 2 10 8 em., stout, olive-brown, 7 to 8 cm. long, smooth; leaves d. aa green, 18 to 20 cm. long, with about 14 pairs of horizontal di ions, 3 to 4.5 cm. long, 1.5 em. wide, crenate, blunt and rounded at the ends, crowded at the base so that the margins often ov: r- lap, not at all decurrent; veins about four times forked; very large, borne on the primary branch of the veins appre mate to the midrib. 5. This species also belongs to the same group as P. pellucidun : and differs from that fern in texture, in the form of the pin ni which are never decurrent, broader, more blunt and appre mate; also in the venation and in the position and size of t sori. Mr. Heller informs me that there were no intermed forms between this species and P. pellucidum, from which i seems to be clearly distinct. a On trees and stumps in damp woods, on Kauai, at elevations of 3500 to 4000 feet. Collected first on the ridge west of t Hanapepe river, and later on Kaholuamano, above Waimea a August to October (2634). a 2 1 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 785 Polypodium helleri UnpERw. n. sp. - Rootstock moderately slender, creeping, clothed especially when young with slender cinnamon-colored scales; petioles rising at intervals of about 1.5 em., stramineous, 10 to 15 cm. long. distinctly pubescent as are the rachises; leaves 20 to 35 em. long, 10 to 12 cm. wide, ovate-lanceolate, parted into about 30 pairs of narrow linear divisions, which are 5 to 7 cm. long, 7 to 10 mm. wide, mostly narrower toward the base and sepa- rated by a broad sinus, crenate especially toward the end; veins with about three forks, occasionally uniting, mostly free; sori on the primary branch of the vein, light colored, small. A very distinct species belonging to the same group as P. pellucidum, but differs from that species in its thinner texture, with sori only half as large, pinnae longer, narrower, more numerous and in every way different in form and habit. On tree trunks and rocks just below the second fall of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at an elevation of 2000 feet. July 22 (2602). ypodium hookeri BRACKk. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16:4. 1856. | This species is not uncommon on wet, moss-covered trees, from an elevation of 2,000 feet to the summit of Konahuanui, © On nu. From its habit it may be easily overlooked. May to November (2245). Pa lypodium lineare THUNB. Fl. Jap. 335, pl. 19. 1784. A common fern, ranging from the lower forests to 3500 feet . On Oahu it was found growing on exposed rocks 5, 2031), and on trees, especially on Acacia Koa (2076). On ‘auai, a large broad form, with undulate margins (2533)! oc- urred on trees, on the ridges west of the Hanapepe river. 0 ly dium pellucidum KauLr. Enum. Fil. 101. 1824. 4 Cc ollected only in upper Fanon, Oahu. On Kukui trees. ch (2054). lium pseudo-grammitis Gaub. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 345. A 1830. A very common fern, growing on rotten logs, stumps, and trunks, at elevations of 2000 to 4000 feet. Collected on = Qahu and Kauai. ern to October (2215). 786 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Polypodium samoense Baker, Syn. Fil. Ed. 2, 821. 1874. This species was found only in wet woods, near the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, growing on moss-covered limbs. In the Hawaiian group, it has been reported only from the island of Kauai. 4 August 12 (2708). Polypodium sarmentosum Brack. Bot. U. S. Expl. Apel 16:8, pl. 2, f. 3. 1854. A Quite common on trees and bushes from an elevation of 2000 feet, to the summit of Konahuanui, Oahu. A Hawaiian fern, common on all of the islands. a May to October (2353) 4 Polypodium serrulatum (Swartz) Mert. Ueber Einige Farn- , gatt J. Polypodium, 32. 1857. ‘a Asplenium serrulatum Swartz, Fl. Ind. Occ. 1607. 1806. Xiphopteris serrulata KAULF. Enum. Fil. 85. 1824. This handsome little species was collected at an elevation of little more than 3000 feet, near the summit of Konahuanui, Oahu. It was also seen in similar situations on Kauai. It grows only on wet, moss-covered trees. = November 2 (2905). Polypodium spectrum Kaur. Enum. Fil. 94. 1824. This singular fern is common in the lower woods, where its long vine-like rootstalks creep and twine over trees and rock: The form from Oahu (2118), has blunt lobes, while in specimens from near the Hanapepe falls, Kauai (2438), there are five sh pointed lobes. It is reported as growing also in Sumatra. Polypodium tamariscinum Kaur. Enum. Fil. 117. 1824. 1 Common on trees and on the ground, but found at its best o the wet summit of Konahuanui (2214). At 4000 feet 3 above Waimea, Kauai, was found a fine form (2855), someti referred to a distinct species (Adenophorus tripinnatifid dus GAUD.). PTERIS L. Sp. Pl. 1073. 1753. Pteris aquilina L. Sp. Pl. 1075. 1753. = This species of world-wide diffusion, was common on grassy slopes below the forest on Kauai. June 22 (2416). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 787 Pteris decipiens Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 209. 1858. The first specimens of this fern were found at 1200 feet, growing in crevices of moist rocks, at the Pali, Oahu, which is probably the original station, as the type came from Oahu. Later it was noticed at the foot of Hanapepe falls, Kauai, and very handsome specimens were obtained in a ravine above Waimea, where it grew on a rock shaded by Kukui trees. It is an endemic species. March to October (1990). Pteris decora (BRACK) Hook. Sp. Fil. 2:210. 1858. Dryopteris decora BRACK. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16: 103, pl. 13, F. J. 1854. On exposed rocks below the forests, on the ridge west of the _ Hanapepe river, and above Waimea, Kauai, both stations at ele- vations of about 2000 feet. Professor Underwood says, It is - doubtful if this species can be maintained as a Pteris.” I cer- tainly had no idea that it was such when the specimens were collected. It has been found only on the Hawaiian group. N Pteris excelsa Gap. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 388. 1830. A fine large fern, which grows in company with Davallia spe- luncde and Asplenium aspidioides, in damp gulches at eleva- 1 Pons of about 3000 feet, on the island of Kauai. July 31 (2649). C Pteris irregularis KAuLy. Enum. Fil. 189. 1824. a Collected in dry open places on the margin of the woods above Waimea, Kauai, at elevations of 3000 to 4000 feet. A handsome species growing in clumps. August 31 (2782). s regularis E. BAILEy, Hawaiian Ferns, 26. 1883. A species of apparently local distribution, found in wet gulches along streams. It was collected in Kalihi valley, Oahu, at about 1200 feet elevation, and was also seen in Pauoa and from the island of Kauai. Professor Underwood says: A species Well characterized in Mr. Bailey’s too modest pamphlet.” 788 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. SADLERIA Kaur. Enum. Fil. 161. 1824. Sadleria pallida H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 75. 1832. On the edge of a hill, in a dry and exposed place, at 400 feet, above Waimea, Kauai. A small species with no app ; able trunk. October 7 (2866). Sadleria souleytiana (Gaup.) Hittese. Fl. Haw. Ia. 1888. Bleechnum souleytiana GAUD. Bot. Voy. Bonite pl. 2 and 194 out description, A tree fern, with short trunk, and stout fleshy leaves, gro ing at an elevation of 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, in ¢ wet woods. The auricles at the base of the stipes are much more prominent in this fern than they are in Marattia, and are quite palatable. September 11 (2807). Sadleria polystichoides (BRACK.) HELLER. 4 Blechnum polystichoides Brack. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 16: 13 * 1854. 4 Blechnum squarrosum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Bon. pl. 2, f. 1-6, with description. Sadleria squarrosa MANN. Proc. Am. Acad. 7:213. 1867. Collected on the slope of Waiolani, at an elevation of about 2000 feet above Hillebrand's Gulch.” It is a small fern, the smallest of this genus on the islands, and can hadly be call 4 a tree fern. Mann says: I have seen specimens not over e foot high including caudex and all, in luxuriant vegetation.” June 10 (2392). ; 4 VITTARIA Sm. Mem. Acad. Turin. 5:413, pl. 9. 1793. Vittaria elongata Swartz. Syn. Fil. 109. 1806. a Growing on trees, usually on the Kukui, at medium eleva tions, and common on both Oahu and Kauai (2054). On Kauai, on the ridge above Gay & Robinson’s house, occurred the fort * known as V. zosteraefolia (2532), which has the lower side of the groove shorter, thus plainly showing the fructification. Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 789 GLEICHENIACEAE. GLEICHENIA Smits. Mem. Acad. Turin. 5. 419, pl. 9. a 1793. Gleichenia dichotoma (WILD) Hook. Sp. Fil. 1:12. 1846. g Mertensia dichotoma WII ID. Act. Holm. 167. 1804. _ This species is common in dry, open situations on the edge of the woods, and also at considerable elevations, in thick wet Woods. It is called Stag Horn.” In many places it forms al- most impassible jungles, the long, vine-like branches interlac- ing with one another and also climbing over bushes. August 23 (2761). Gleichenia longissima BLUE, Enum. 250. 1830. Gn the ridge opposite Gay & Robinson's valley house, at an elevation of 2500 feet. Also at a higher elevation on the ridge West of the Hanapepe river, and at 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, where it was growing along a stream bank. A handsome species, more confined to the ground than G. dichotoma, and much less inclined to spread. July 23 (2613). _ Gleichenia owhyhensis Hook. Sp. Fil. 129. 1846. Only a few specimens of this species were picked up near the summit of Konahuanui, Oahu, growing where the stunted trees are covered with dense growths of dripping mosses and _hepatics. Here it replaces G. dichotoma, which it somewhat ‘resembles, and which is abundant on the lower and drier slopes of the same mountain. There is no authority for changing end emic to the Hawaiian group. SCHIZAEACEAE, SCHIZAEA Surrn, Mem. Acad. Turin. 5:419. 1793. Schizaea robusta Baker, Syn. Fil. Ed. 2, 429. 1874. _ The first specimens of this plant were collected at an eleva- 1 ion of perhaps 2500 feet, on Konahuanui, Oahu, on a little * level spot in clay formation. The plants were small and stunted. It was also found on the opposite side of Nuuanu val- ley, on the slope of Waiolani, at the same elevation. Near the _ Wahiawa bog on Kauai, large and beautiful specimens were PPP 790 MINNESUTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. obtained. Diligent search in situations favorable to its growth. would probably prove it to be much less rare than it is sup: posed to be, as it is a plant easily passed by. May to August (2246). HYMENOPHYLLACEAE. HYMENOPHYLLUM Smrrs, Mem. Acad. Turin. 5: ue ; 1793. Hymenophyllam mein H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 100. 1832. On trees on Konahuanui, oun especially toward the sum mit (2229, 2256). On Kauai, it was collected on trees, near me Wahiawa bog (2750), at 3000 feet elevation. Hymenophyllum obtusum H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 109. 1652. A small fern, usually with brownish fronds. It grows i moss-like tufts on tree trunks. Collected at 2000 feet eleva- tion, above Manoa, Oahu. The type was collected by Lay and Coolie, on Oahu. “a November 5 (2910). = Hymenophyllum recurvum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 5 ae 1830. 1 On trees and rotten logs. Common at medium elevations on Oahu and Kauai. A handsome plant, light green in color. July 25 (2620). a TRICHOMANES L. Sp. Pl. 1097. 1753. Trichomanes apiifolium PRESL. Hymenophyllaceae, 44. 18: A few clumps of this species were found at about 2500 fee elevation, on Konahuanui, above the Nuuanu valley gulch. It , grows on the ground. a April 22 (2179). “a Trichomanes humile Forst. Prodr. n. 464. 1786. On the left bank of the Hanapepe river, above the junction. and near the falls, is a large rock shaded by a thick growth of 4 ‘‘Ohia” trees (Eugenia malaccensis), on which this small fern grows in abundance. It was not observed at any other sta- a tion. 1 July 12 (2556). — Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 791 _ Trichomanes meifolium Bory, in Willd. Sp. Pl. 5:508. 1810. At 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai, there was an abundance . of this fern, growing on perpendicular rocks along the stream. . below Gay & Robinson's Kaholuamano house. However. very few good specimens could be found, as nearly all of the _ fronds were withered. September 14 (2816). _ Trichomanes radicans Swarrz, Fl. Ind. Occ. 1736. 1806. A very common fern on both Oahu and Kauai, where it was found climbing over tree trunks and rocks in the lower and middle woods, April to October (2119). 4 Trichomanes rigidum Swarrz, Fl. Ind. Occ. 1738. 1806. A few plants were collected in wet woods, near the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. August 21 (2741). MARATTIACEAR. MARATTIA SmirH, Mem. Acad. Turin. 5:419. 1793. be Marattia douglasii BAKER, Syn. Fil. Ea. 2, 441. 1874. This is a plant of high elevations, at least on Kauai and Oahu. 0 n Kauai, it was collected at 4000 feet, along the stream near Gay & Robinson’s Kaholuamano house, above Waimea On Oahu, it was seen only near the summit of Konahuanui. It seems to occur only in places where there is a great deal of moisture, and may be found at much lower elevations on the windward sides of the islands. August 30 (2770). 8 * 792 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. LYCOPODIALES. LYCOPODIACEAE. LYCOPODIUM L. Sp. Pl. 1100. 1753. Lycopodium cernuum L. Sp. Pl. 1103. 1758. Very common in open places on the outskirts of the forest, and also at considerable elevations on some of the ridges. — Called ‘‘rat’s foot” by the natives. Specimens were collected near the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at about 2000 feet elevation. July 22 (2596); original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” : 4 Lycopodium phyllanthum H. & A. Bot. Beechey, 103. 1832. A species found only on the Hawaiian Islands, occurring at intervals at medium elevations in the forests. Pendant from moss grown trees, at 2500 feet and more, on both Kauai and Oahu. a April to October (2192). Lycopodium serratum THuNB. Fl. Jap. 341, pl. 88. 1784. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an eleva- tion of about 3000 feet, this species grew abundantly, at one place, on the ground beneath trees (2687). In wet woods near the Wahiawa bog, occasional plants were picked up. On Oahu, it was found growing on the ground under bushes (2904), at any elevation of about 2700 feet, on Konahuanui. Lycopodium verticillatum L. f. Suppl. 448. 1781. * Only two or three plants of this species were found, at 25 0 0 feet elevation, on Konahuanui, Oahu, growing on mossy 7 = It is apparently rare. 7 PSILOTUM Swarrz, Syn. Fil. 187. 1806. 3 Psilotum complanatum Swartz, Syn. Fil. 414. 1806. Not nearly so common as P. nudum, and found only on It was collected on both Oahu and Kauai. April to November (2216). Psilotum nudum (L.) GRIESB. Lycopodium nudum L. Sp. Pl. 1100. 1753. Psilotum triquetrum SWARTZ, Syn. Fil. 414. 1806. a A very common plant, growing on slopes below the fe 7 and at higher elevations on trees. Collected on both Oahu e Kauai. March to September (1989); original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” 5 2 2 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 793 SELAGINELLA Beauv. Prodr. Aetheog, 101. 1805. - Selaginella arbuscula (KAULF.) SPRING. Monog. Fam. Ly- cop. 2:183. 1848. Lycopodium arbuscula KAuLF. Enum. Fil. 19. 1824. On moist rocks, at 1200 feet elevation, at the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu. The plants were small and not very plentiful. March 23 (1998). Selaginella flabellata (L.) SprivG. Monog. Fam. Lycop. 2:174. 3 1848. q Lycopodium flabellatum L. Sp. Pl. 1105. 1753, On the ground; a rather common species, colleted at 2500 feet and more on Konahuanui, Oahu (2180), and at 3000 feet on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai (2499). Original locality, America calidiore.” : Lycopodium menziesii H. & G. Enum. Fil. No. 131. Collected at about 500 feet elevation in Pauoa valley, Oahu, where it grew on rocks. Among the specimens from this place were some of an elongate form (2009). On Kauai, it was col- lected on the stones at the foot of Hanapepe falls, where it was kept continually moist by the spray from the falls (2558). NATADACEAE. POTAMOGETON L. Sp. Pl. 126. 1753. mogeton foliosus Rar. Med. Rep. (II) 5 1808. Potamogeton pauciflorus Puks l, Fl. Am, Sept. ap 1814. m lower Pauoa, Oahu, at about 50 feet elevation, in taro patches (2387), apparently introduced. On Kauai it was col- le a cted in a pool along the Hanapepe river, near the falls, at an elevation of about 700 feet, and in a similar situation at the Second fall of the Wahiawa, elevation 2000 feet. It is certainly native at the Kauai station. This species has always been con- Sidered peculiar to North America, hence its occurrence in the islands is of considerable interest. 3 in Flora Bor. Am. J: 102, doubtfully referred this ecies to P. gramineum L. a June 4 (2387); July 12 (2555); original locality, in rivis af- Huente mari inundatis Carolinae inferioris.” 794 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. GRAMINEAE.* CALAMAGROSTIS Apans. Fam. Pl. 2:31. 1763. Calamagrostis forsteri (R. & S.) Sreup. Nom. Bot. 250. 1841, Agrostis forsteri R. & S. Syst. 2: 359. 1817. Collected in clay soil, at 4000 feet elevation, above Wan Kauai, growing in a small glade in the forest. The mrp is recorded from Molokai, Lanai, and Maui, by Hillebrand. u 1 the name of Dexeuæid forsteri. Its occurrence at such a dis- tance from the other stations is somewhat remarkable. September (2779). CAPRIOLA ApaNns. Fam. Pl. 2:31. 1763. [Cynodon Ricu.; Pers. Syn. 1:85, 1805.) Capriola dactylon (L) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 764. 1891. Panicum dactylon L. Sp. Pl. 58. 1753. Cynodon dactylon Pers. Syn. 1:85. 1805. A common grass on all of the islands, in low ground near the sea. It was introduced about 1835. Collected at Capiolani Park, where it grew along the race track. March 20 (1960); original locality, ‘‘in Europa australi.” CENCHRUS L. Sp. Pl. 1049. 1733. Cenchrus echinatus L. Sp. Pl. 1050. 1753. 4 Common about Honolulu, in yards, waste places, and cult ! vated grounds. Collected at Capiolani Park, along the race track. It was introduced in 1867. a March 20 (1964). CHLORIS Swartz, Prodr. 25. 1788. Chloris radiata (L.) Swarrz, Prodr. Veg. Ind. Occid. 26. 1788. : Agrostis radiaia L. Amoen. Acad. 5: 392. 1759. In dry ground, not far from the sea shore, on the islands 0 Oahu, Kauai, and Hawaii. Specimens were collected at Cz 85 : lani Park, near Honolulu. — March 20 (1963); original locality, Jamaica. * The determinations and citations by Mr. Geo. V. Nash. Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 795 CHRYSOPOGON Trix. Fund. Agrost. 187. 1820. Chrysopogon aciculatus (Rerz.) Tain. Fund. Agrost. 188. 1820. 1 Andropogon aciculatus Rez Obs. 8:22. 1779-91. A common grass on open slopes below the forests, on both Oahu and Kauai. Collected on Kauai, on the ridge west of the _ Hanapepe river. July (2476). COIX L. Sp. Pl. 972. 1753. cCoix lacryma-Jobi L. Sp. Pl. 972. 1753. _ Escaped from cultivation, and plentiful in ditches, about the q — part of Honolulu. (2554). ERAGROSTIS BEavy. Agrost. 70, pl. 14, f. 11. 1812. Eragrostis hawaiiensis Hitcesr, Pl. Haw. Is. 530. 1888. * A tall. handsome grass, collected on the slopes above Wai- mea, Kauai, at about 2000 feet elevation, where occasional clumps are found. Hillebrand’s type came from Kohala, island | * Hawaii. : September 24 (2880). Eragrostis major Host. Gram. Austr. 4:14, pl. 24. 1809. Occasional clumps of this grass are found growing along the streets of Honolulu, and in yards. It is not recorded from the 1 islands by Hillebrand. May 9 (2288); original locality, Europa australi a agrorum versuras.“ E agrostis plumosa (Rerz.) Linx, Hort. Berol. 1: 192. 1827. q Poa plumosa Revz. Obs. 4:20. 1779-91. This species is common about Honolulu, but was not noticed it any distance from the coast. It is undoubtedly introduced. March 20 (1962). be ragrostis variabilis Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 408. 1830. BP Cotlectea on grassy slopes, at 1200 feet elevation, near the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu. Also noticed on the slopes of Konahu- anui. : March 23 (1992); original locality, Oahu. 796 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. HETEROPOGON Pers. Syn, 2:533. 1807. * Heteropogon contortus (L.) Beavy. in R. & 8. Syst. 2.836. 1817. N Andropogon contortus L. Sp. Pl. 1045. 1753. a a A common grass on the dry and hot slopes of the lee olde of the island of Kauai, growing among lava rocks. a July to October (2522); original locality, in Indiis.” ISACHNE R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 196. 1810. Isachne pallens Hittese. Fl. Haw. Is. 504. 1888. 4 This species was collected on rocks at the base of Hanapepe| Falls, but was not seen elsewhere. It hung from the face of a perpendicular rock, where it was continually washed by tt 5 small streams of water which trickle down the sides of the rock. Hillebrand's type came from the woods of eastern Oahu. ; July 2 (2489). CHAETOCHLOA Scrisyn. Bull. No. 4, U. S. Dept. Ag Div. Agrost. 38. 1897. [Setaria Beauv. Agrost. 113. 1812, not Ach. 1789.] Chaetochloa glauca (L.) Scripy. Bull. No. 4, U. S. 1 Div. Agrost. 39. 1897. Panicum glaucum L. Sp. Pl. 56. 1753. Setaria glauca BEAU V. Agrost. 51. 1812. ; Ixophorus glaucus NAsH, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, 22: 423. 1895. 4 Very abundant in the Hanapepe river valley, and on adjoin- ing slopes. It is not recorded by Hillebrand, and if introduce since his time, must have spread rapidly, as it is well estab- lished, covering the hillsides in many places. June 29 (2469); original locality, *‘in Indiis.” Chaetochloa verticillata (L.) Scripn. Bull. No. 4, U. S. Dept. . Ag. Div. Agrost. 39. 1897. a Panicum verticillatum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 82. 1762. a Setaria verticillata BEAUV. Agrost. 51. 1812. a lrophorus verticillatus NASH, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 22: 422. Established along streets, and in waste ground about Hono - lulu. Collected at Waikiki. 7 March 20 (1961). 2 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 797 OPLISMENUS Beavv. Fl. Owar. 2:14, pl. 58, 1807. Oplismenus oahuensis Nees & MEYEN, in Steud. Nom. Bot. Ed. 2, 220. 1841. Common in damp woods, where it grows luxuriantly. Col- lected on both Oahu and Kauai. Hillebrand calls it Oplismenus compositus var. sylvaticus TRIN. April to October (2061). PANICUM L. Sp. Pl. 55, 1753. Panicum colonum L. Syst. Ed. 10, 870, 1789. Plentiful about Honolulu, growing along the streets, and in cultivated ground. It was found growing in very dry, and also in wet places. The forms growing in moist or shaded ground were of a more erect growth than the dry ground forms. March 21 (1978). N Panicum erus-galli L. Sp. Pl. 56. 1783. Two forms of this wide-spread grass were collected on the edge of a taro pond in Pauoa valley, just outside of Honolulu, one (2384) with long awns, and the other (2384a) awuless or * almost so. The latter may be Hillebrand's variety of P. colonum. Panicum nephelophilum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 411. 1830. _ Collected above Waimea, Kauai, at 3000 to 4000 feet eleva- tion. Only a few scattered plants were seen, growing on the ie atskirts of the woods. : October (2850). hicum pruriens TRIN. Gram. Pan 191. 1826. Common on the ridges back of Honolulu, up to about 2000 te at. March 21 (1972). PASPALUM L. Syst. Ed. 10, 2:855. 1759. 8 , spalum conjugatum Bera. in Act. Helv. 7:129, pl. 8. 1772. rue „Hilo grass,“ very common on the lower slopes below 2 forests on Oahu. A large, coarse decumbent grass, which rows in such tangles, that walking through it is very fatiguing. March 21 (1971). spalum orbiculare Forstr. Fl. Ins. Austr. Prodr. 7. 1786. a Common on Oahu, where it has the same range as the pre- vious, except that it extends further up the slopes. March 21 (1971). 7 798 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. POLYPOGON Dusv. Fl. Atl. 1:66. 1798. Polypogon littoralis Sm. Comp. Fl. Brit. 13. 1816. 7 This species was collected at 1200 feet elevation, at the Nuu- anu Pali, six miles from the seashore. It is probably a waif 4 this point as very little of it was found. Hillebrand records it, but is not certain where it was collected. * April 23 (2201). 1 STENOTAPHRUM Trin. Fund. Agrost. 175. 1820. Stenotaphrum secundatum (War.) Kunrze, Rey. Gen. pl. 794. 1891. Ischaemum secundatum WALT. Fl. Car. 249. 1788. ia Stenotaphrum americanum SCHRANK. Hort. Monac. pl. 98. 1816. Abundant on grassy slopes at the Nuuanu Pali, island of Oahu. It is said to be a good forage plant. May 24 (2359). SYNTHERISMA Watr. Fl. Car. 76. 1788. Syntherisma helleri Nasu, n. sp. (Plate XLIV.) Panicum filiforme H1LLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 495. 1888, not L. 175: N Glabrous throughout, with the exception of the spikelets. Culms 2.5 to 4 dm. tall, erect, or decumbent at the base, slen- der, somewhat branched; nodes 5 or less, blackish broy n: sheaths striate, the lower ones short, longer than the short internodes, the uppermost sheath elongated; ligule membran- ous, about 1 mm. long, truncate; inflorescence long exse d. the axis 1 em. long or less; spikes 3 to 8, 4 to 9 cm. long, slender, ascending, approximate at the summit of the cu Um and often with a single one a short distance below; rachis flat, .5 mm. wide, flexuous toward the apex, short hispid on the m gins; spikelets elliptic, 15 mm. long, .7 mm. wide, acute, it pairs, one very short-pediceled, the other with a pedicel equa’ ling or slightly shorter than itself, with frequently an < Adi tional pediceled spikelet present on the same side of the rachis just above the pairs; first scale wanting; second and third scales membranous, hardly as long as the spikelet, the form a a little shorter than the latter, both 7-nerved, the margin: _and first nerve on either side of the midnerve pubescent witl h appressed hairs; fourth scale chartaceous, deep ches a brown, 1.5 mm. long, acute, enclosing a palet of equal lengt . and of similar texture and color. a W 4 $i 89 ; q : ’ N Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 799 Collected on the Island of Oahu, in Pauoa, by Mr. A. A. Hel- e in 1895, No. 2321. By Dr. Hillebrand, in the Flora of the Hawalian Islands, it was considered identical with Panicum Nli- forme L., under which name it there appears. The whole gen- eral aspect of the plant and the flat, not triangular, rachis plainly indicate its dissimilarity to that species. _ Syntherisma sanguinalis (L.) Nass, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, 22:420. 1895. Panicum sanguinale L. Sp. Pl. 57. 1753. Common in cultivated ground about Honolulu. Collected in Pauoa valley, in company with S. Helleri. May 16 (2320); original locality, ‘in America, Europa aus- trali.“ CIPERACEAE.“ BAUMEA GAup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 416, pl. 29. 1830. Baumea meyenii Kuntu, Enum. Pl. 2:314. 1837. A plant referred with some doubt to this species, was first collected at about 3000 feet elevation, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, on an exposed gravelly slope. It was also collected in wet woods along the Wahiawa river, and on the island of Oahu, on the slopes of Konahuanui. July to October (2651). CAREX L. Sp. Pl. 972. 1753. X wahuensis C. A. MEYER, Mem. Sav. Etr. Petersb. 1: 218. pl. 10. 1831. Collected on grassy slopes at 2500 feet elevation, above Wai - ea, Kauai. October 10 (2849). CLADIUM P. Browne, Civ. and Nat. Hist. Jam. 114. 1756. ladium leptostachyum NEES & MEYEN, Beitr. Bot. Gesell. . auf ein Reise, 115. 1843. Noticed at only one locality, on the left bank of the Hana- pe 33 the first ford, where a large clump of it was rowing. It is recorded as occurring on all the islands, but by no means frequent.” July 5 (2509); original locality, in insula Oahu, Sand- wicensium.“ ir * The determinations by Dr. N. L. Britton. 800 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. CYPERUS L. Sp. Pl. 44. 1788. Cyperus difformis L. : Common about taro ponds, in Pauoa valley, near Honolulu. Not before recorded from the Islands. i April to June (2003). Cyperus hawaiiensis Maxx, Proc. Am. Acad. 6 208. 1867. Ex descriptio. 1 On rocks at 1400 feet elevation, at the Nuuanu Pali, where a few plants were collected. This species seems to have been collected only by Mann and Brigham, and by Wawra. > type is Mann and Brigham No. 246, from ‘‘the mountains te Hawaii, Maui, and Kauai.” Cyperus hypochlorus Hittesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 468, 1888. descriptio. 4 The plant referred to this species is not uncommon in Han: 4 pepe valley, Kauai, in wet places near the river bank, and c grassy slopes. A large, handsome species. June 29 (2466). Cyperus laevigatus L. Mant. 2:179. 1771. Common about Honolulu in wet ground. Specimens collected at Waikiki, and at Salt Lake. March to May (19599. Cyperus pennatus Lam. Tabl. Encycl. 1:144. 1791. 2 Common in marshes about Pearl city, Oahu, and also in moist places on slopes in the Hanapepe valley, Kauai. June 10 (2407); original locality, ‘‘ Java.” Cyperus polystachys Rorrs. Descr. et Icones. 39. 1773. Common on grassy slopes on Oahu, up to the edge of he forest. Noticed also near Pearl city, in low ground near the coast. It was plentiful also on Kauai. March to August (1948). Cyperus rotundus L. Sp. Pl. 45. 1753. Collected in cultivated ground near Waikiki, outside of Hon 5 lulu. It was introduced about 1850. May 9 (2286); original locality, India. nt Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 801 Cyperus umbellatus (L.) Benta, Fl. Hongkong. 386. 1861. Kyllingia umbellata L. Suppl. 105. 1781. This plant was collected on a grassy ridge back of Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 2500 feet. It was seen in only this one place. October 1 (2851); original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” ELEOCHARIS R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 1: 224. 1810. Eleocharis ovata (Rors.) R. & S. Syst. 2:152. 1817. Scirpus ovatus ROTH. Catal. 1:5. 1797. Scirpus obtusus WILLD.. Euum. 1:76. 1809. Eleocharis obtusa ScuvuLTes, Mant. 2:89. 1824. Collected at the foot of Hanapepe falls, on the island of Kauai. It does not seem to differ materially from the widely distributed American plant. July 2 (2488). FIMBRISTYLIS Vani. Enum. 2:285. 1806. Fimbristylis polymorpha Bock. Linnaea, 37:14. 1871. Collected in Pauoa, Oahu (2385), and along the Hanapepe river, Kauai (2475). Of the forty synonyms of Boeckler, it is a hard matter to decide which is the proper name for the Hawaiian plant. The coining of a new specific name by Boeck- ler was certainly not admissible, even if there was sufficient ground for uniting all of the species which he cites. It is im- possible for me to obtain the proper name for this plant, hence the use of the meaningless term Frimbristylis polymorpha. _ Fimbristylis umbellato-capitata Sreup. ? Sßpeeimens collected at Waikiki, Oahu within the race track _ enclosure, where there is a pool of brackish water, seem to be- long to the plant which Hillebrand designated as a variety umbellato capitata of F. cymosa, which is F. umbellato-capitata of Mann, Enum. no. 518, but probably not of Steud.” Mann does not state where his specimens were collected. Hillebrand records it from nearly all of the islands, and states that it is found in higher and exposed localities, and more frequent than the first form” (cymosa). Waikiki, where it was collected 4 by me, is practically at sea level. March 20 (1958). 802 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. GAHNIA Forsr. Char. Gen. 51, pil. 26. 1776. Gahnia mannii HiLLERR. Fl. Haw. Is. 482. 1888, Ex de- scriptio. Plants referred to this species, were collected at 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai (2840), in dry gravel, near the edge of the plateau. Later it was again collected in damp woods, on the slope of Konahuanui, Oahu (2912). Hillebrand's type came from Lanai. Pie Gahnia gahniaeformis (GAuD.) HELL. Morelotia gahniacformis Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 416, pl. 28. 1830. Gahnia gaudichaudii Sreup. Synop. Pl. Gl. 2:164. 1855. It is stated in Hillebrand’s Flora, that Cladium quadrangulare _ Nuns, Linnaea, 9:301, is a synonym of this species, but refer- ence to the page cited does not seem to substantiate that view, as Morelotia gahniaefolia is given as quite distinct, near the bot- tom of the page This species was not collected by me. KYLLINGA Rorrts. Descr. et Ic. 12, pl. 4, J. 8-4. 1773. Kyllinga monocephala Rotts. Descr. et Ic. 13, pl. 4, J. 4. 1778. Common, from sea level to 2500 feet elevation, on Oahu. Some of the vigorous plants which grow in rich soil in the for- a ests, present a very different appearance from the low, stunted forms which grow in lower and more exposed places. : March to October (1970). ! RYNCHOSPORA VARL. Enum. 2:229. 1806. Rynchospora lavarum Gavup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 415. 1830. At an elevation of about 2500 feet, on Konahuanui, Oahu, is a flat place only a few yards in extent. where this species is plentiful. The soil is a stiff clay, so that considerable moisture is retained, instead of rapidly sinking, as is usually the case in the light volcanic soil of the islands. Near the centre of this small space a hole has been dug, in which water can always be found, and on the edge of this hole the plants are thickest. — Hillebrand mentions it as growing on the high mountains of East Maui and Hawaii. It must have been collected on Oahu by a Lay and Coolie, as it is enumerated in the Botany Beechy.” — May 23 (2343). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 803 Rynchospora sclerioides H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 99. 1832. thyrosidea Nees & MeyYeEN, in Kunth, Enum. Pl. 2:294. 1837. Not uncommon on the slopes of Konahuanui, Oahu, in damp woods. A handsome species. The later name of Nees & Meyen seems to have been commonly used in botanical books. Their name of H. thyrosidea is used in Linnaea, 9: 297, 1834, but with- out description. It is possible that this name has precedence as a label name, but the first description appeared under R. sclerioides. SCIRPUS L. Sp. Pl. 47. 1753. Scirpus lacustris L. Sp. Pl. 48. 1753. Common about Honolulu, in brackish water along the beach, and also in fresh water. Specimens were collected along the stream in Nuuanu valley, more than a mile from salt water. March 30 (2047); original locality, ‘in Europae aquis puris stagnantibus et fluviatilibus.” Scirpus maritimus L. Sp. Pl. 51. 1753. A form of this species, called variety digynus by Hillebrand, is plentiful in salt marches at Salt Lake, and other places about Honolulu. } April 24 (2208). Seirpus At Waimea, Kauai, a Scirpus was collected in taro ponds, which has not yet been satisfactorily placed. It is probably an introduced plant, allied to Scirpus debilis. Oetober 23 (2891). VINCENTIA Gavup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 417. 1830. Vincentia angustifolia Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 417. 1830. Collected on Konahuanui, Oahn, growing in company with _ Rynchospora lavarum. A large plant with leaves much like those of Acorus calamus. May 23 (2342). 804 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, LEMNA L. Sp. Pl. 970. 1753. Lemna minor L. Sp. Pl. 970. 1753. This species, unrecorded for the Hawaiian flora, is very com- mon about Honolulu, in taro ponds, and other bodies of still water. At Capiolani Park, where the specimens were collect- ed, it is especially plentiful. April 16 (2184); original locality, ‘tin Europae aquis quietis.” * LEMNACEAE. | 7 4 q 4 CONVALLARIACEAE. ASTELIA Banks & Sot. in R. Br. Prodr. FL Nov. Holl. 291. 1810. (Plate XLV.) 1 Astelia menziesiana SMITH, in Rees, Encycl. App. 34. Rhizome thick, creeping, covered with thin brown scales; flowering stem channeled, two feet high or less, clothed through- out with dense, white wool, simple and leafless up to the inflor- escence; leaves closely imbricate at the base of the flowering stalk, which they slightly exceed in length, linear, gradually attenuate, maximum width three-fourths of an inch, clothed on both faces with appressed white hairs, midvein yellowish, prominent beneath, but not noticeable above, the upper side marked with two prominent lateral nerves, and a number of smaller intermediate ones; inflorescence paniculate, the alter- nate branches two to five inches long, each subtended by a sessile, ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, leafy bract, the lowest one * longer than its flowering branch, about equaling the inflores- a cence, the others successively shorter and broader, and each shorter than the branch which it subtends; pedicels at right angles to the peduncle, stout for the size of the flower, nearly a half inch in length, densely white woolly; bractlet at the base a small, shorter than the pedicel; perianth segments purple, ob- long, narrowed at the apex, but hardly acute, white wooly on the outside, the three inner ones less so than the three outer ones, and slightly narrower, all three nerved, the outer ones = tipped with an incurved protuberance; stamens shorter than the perianth segments; stigmas small, sessile on the narrowed apex of the ovary; ovary ovoid, three-celled, glabrous. a Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 805 Hillebrand unites this species with A. veratroides GAuD., but with very little reason, merely saying that ‘‘the forms with more or less glabrate leaves—A. menziesiana SM.—are chiefly found at lower elevations,” thus leaving one under the impres- Sion that the two plants are very similar, when in fact they are i totally unlike in size, habit and habitat. I saw at once that my Plant was neither veratroides nor Waialealae, and distributed it 1 as Astelia argyrocoma n. sp. (No. 2752). Lately upon having access to Wawra's publications in Flora, I find that he has very clearly described A. menziesiana in Flora, 58: 242. 1875, and that my specimens undoubtedly belong there. It was found on the Island of Kauai only, in wet woods, at elevations of 3000 to 4000 feet, growing on the reclining trunks of moss- covered trees. Sometimes hundreds of plants can be found on a single trunk. It is @ommon on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, and on the plateau above Waimea. Wawra records it from Kauai, on moss covered trees in the valley of Hanalei, and on n and Halemanu.” It came into bloom late in Au- gust. A4. veratroides is a large species, with leaves three to four feet long, and from three to six inches wide. The flowering stalk is proportionately large and stout. It is plentiful on the rid- ges back of Honolulu, usually growing on the precipitous edge of a ridge, and only at medium elevations. Very few plants were seen in Kauai, where they grew along the steep banks of a stream in the woods. ; "DIANELLA Lam. Encycl. 2:276. 1786. Dianella sandwicensis H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 97. 1832. 3 tt is altogether probable that Hooker and Arnott's D. sandwi- ee sis is distinct from the Dracaena ensifolia of Linnaeus, an In- dian plant which one would not expect to find in the Hawaiian Islands. On Oahu it appears to grow only on the ground, at elevations of 2000 to 3000 feet. On Kauai it waa found princi- 5 pally on mossy or decayed tree trunks, ranging from elevations Soa to 4000 feet. The Index Kewensis refers it to Dianella * emorosa Lamark, published in 1786, of which the earlier Dra- _ eaena ensifolia L., published in 1767, is said to be a synonym. 4 May to October (2349). 800 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. i. DRACAENA L. Mant. 1:63. 1767. Dracaena aurea MANN, Proc. Amer. Acad. 7: 207. 1867. Hillebrand says this species is *‘ not uncommon on all islands at altitudes of 1000 to 2500 feet, as in Nuuanu, Oahu, near the Pali.“ If it ever was common on Oahu, it has become rather scarce during the intervening years. My first specimens were collected at the Nuuanu Pali, where there are several trees, but it is not at all common. On Kauai, it is plentiful between the Hanapepe and Waimea rivers. Above Waimea, on the edge of the tabular summit, at about 3500 feet elevation it is very abundant. One stunted tree was observed in the forest on Ka- holuamanoa at 4000 feet. Mann's statement that the berry is red, is much more correct than Hillebrand's designation of it as „yellow.“ Red brown is perhaps the proper term. The grace- ful, palm-like habit of this tree, is quite a contrast to the her- baceous Liliaceous plants of more temperate climes. a May 24 (2362); the type number is M. & B. 362, without ex- 1 act locality, but probably from Oahu. 4 SMILACEAE. | 4 SMILAX IL. Sp. Pl. 1028. 1753. Smilax sandwicensis KuntH. Enum. Pl. 5:253. 1850. Pleiosmilax sandwichensis Seem. Journ. Bot. 6:193. 1868. According to Hillebrand this species ranges from Kauai to a Maui. Specimens with fully formed but unripe fruit, were collected on the lower slopes of Konahuanui, back of Pauoa, — island of Oahu, at an elevation of about 2000 feet. The plant usually forms a dense tangle, climbing over bushes and trees. oa May 14 (2312). a DIOSCOREACEAE. a DIOSCOREA L. Sp. Pl. 1032. 1753. 3 * Dioscorea sativa L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1463. 1763. a This species with its peculiar, potato-like rhizome, is com- mon on the heights of Pauoa, Oahu. On Kauai, it is rather common in Hanapepe valley. Although hundreds of plants were seen, only a few were found in flower, but all, except those in flower, bore bulbs which form in the axils of the leaves. These bulbs are often an inch and a half in diameter. 4 August 14 (2728), original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” N — Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 807 ZINGIBERACEAE. CURCUMA L. Sp. Pl. 2. 1753. Curcuma longa L. Sp. Pl. 2. 1753. In the upper part of Nuuanu valley, at an altitude of about 900 feet, this plant is quite plentiful. The large clusters of yellow flowers present a striking appearance. The plant, as a rule, is about five feet high, leafy to near the summit. May 24 (2367); original locality, in Indiis.” ORCHIDACEAE. LEPTORCHIS Du Perir THovars, Nouv. Bull. Soc. Philom. 314. 1808. [Liparis L. C. Rien. Mem. Mus. Paris 4:43. 1818.) __ Leptorehis hawaiiensis (MANN) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 671. 1891. Liparis hawaiiensis MANN, Proc. Amer. Acad. 7: 207. 1867. This plant was found growing in damp places on Konahuanui, at an elevation of about 9500 feet. On Kauai, it was found at from 8000 to 4000 feet, but always growing on trees which were covered with mosses and hepatics. It is not common, but careful search in favorable situations, will generally yield sev- eral specimens. May to October (2706); no locality given, except in mount- 4 ein woods on trees.“ Type number, M. & B. 471. ANOECTOCHILUS Bruun, Bydr. 411, ¢. 10 1825. _ Anoectochilus sandwicensis LIx DL. Gen. and Spec. Orch. 500. ie 1840. Hillebrand credits this species as growing in the lower for- ests of all islands.” On Oahu it was found growing near the ‘Summit of Konahuanui, at 3000 feet elevation in what he desig- ‘nated the middle forest zone,” or what on this island is really the upper forest zone.” On Kauai, where it is plentiful near the head of the Wahiawa river, at about 3000 feet elevation, it ‘is certainly in the middle zone. It grows apparently only in Wet, almost boggy woods, where both ground and trees are cov- ered with a thick mat of mosses and hepatics. The stems are weak and decumbent. a pegust 21 (2742). 1 : ö ; — 808 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. PIPERACEAE. PEPEROMIA Ruiz, & Pav. Fl. Peruv. et Chil. Prod 8. 1794. Specimens of all the numbers of this interesting, but amen genus, were sent to M. Casimir DeCandolle for determination, but, although more than a year has elapsed, no answer has been 4 returned. * By the aid of Hillebrands Flora, and such other works as are at hand, I have endeavored to trace the bi: to their proper places, but not always with success. Peperomia hypoleuca montis-eeka HitLesr. Fl. Haw, Is. 122. 1888. ? This plant, which was seen only near and on the summit of Konahuanui, Oahu does not answer very well to Hillebrand's description, yet it can hardly be placed under any of the other species mentioned. Ordinarily, the under side of the leaf is brirk red, but in some specimens it is whitish. This was more especially true of specimens collected late in the season. May to November (2243). j ‘Peperomia latifolia Mig. Syst. Pip. 128. 1843. F A common plaut at medium elevations on the mountains of Oahu and Kauai. In the living state, the thick, fleshy leavers are often of a red tinge beneath. 7 April to October (2116). a Peperomia leptostachya H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 96. 1832.? The three numbers which may perhaps be referred to this 5 species, grow at low elevations. No. 2010 was collected in 5 Pauoa valley, back of Honolulu. It grew on rocks in expose i ; situations, below the forest, and was noticed at several places. The stems of these specimens are hirsute throughout. The leaves on the young shoots are opposite, but are whorled on the branches. The plants are erect, and usually not more than eight inches high. . No. 2237 was collected at about 1000 feet elevation in Wai valley, on the eastern end of Oahu. It grew on the grout : d 1 8 under the shade of Kukui trees. These plants were weak an procumbent, many of the stems being fifteen or eighteen inch long. The stems are puberulous instead of hirsute, as in No. 5 2010. The leaves are also longer. ie No. 2510 was collected on rocks along the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of perhaps 700 feet. This station is less $ Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 809 exposed than the one in Pauoa, where 2010 was collected, being just on the edge of the forest, and in rich, damp soil. The stems in these specimens are somewhat hirsute, especially on young shoots, where the leaves are in whorls of three or more. It is of erect’ growth, about eight inches high. The leaves, branches, and flowering spikes disarticulate readily in 3 all three numbers. Peperomia macraeana C. DC. Seem. Journ. Bot. 4:145. 1866. Some of the specimens under No. 2338 undoubtedly belong to this species. They were collected at an elevation of about 1500 feet, in wet woods at the head of Kalihi valley, Oahu. Tune species is perhaps rather common in damp woods. Peperomia macraeana C. DC. var. These specimens were collected in wet woods, at an elevation of 3000 feet and more on Kauai, principally on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river. They seem toresemble F. membranacea somewhat, but the character of spikes shorter than the leaves, forbids that disposition of them. 3 ae and August (2612). Peperomia macraeana nervosa HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 421. 1888, Above Waimea, Kauai, where Hillebrand’s type was collected and near the head of the Wahiawa, were collected specimens which answer to the description of this plant, except the clause =! Spurplish underneath, excepting the course of the nerves.’ 25 hey are whitish underneath in my specimens. The plant is lig nt green instead of dark green as in the species, and has thicker leaves and spikes. It appears to be quite distinct. E eperomia membranacea H. & A. Bot, Beechy, 96. 1832. Part of No. 2238, collected at the head of Kalihi valley, Oahu, belongs to this species. It seems to grow only in dense ret woods. The slender spikes, extending much beyond the leaves, the broader and thinner leaves, and the arrangement of the veining of the leaves, distinguish it from F. macracana, specimens of which were collected at the same place, and in- clu ded under number 2338. Collected May 20th. a g eperomia membranacea H. & A. var. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, plants were 0 ollected which seem to be referable to P. wembranacea. The 810 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. — habit is the same, and the leaves very similar in shape. It also has the same long slender spikes extending beyond the leaves. The main stem likewise is glabrous, but the branches are hirsute. There is a difference also in the veining, for in- stead of the ‘‘five conspicuous basal or sub-basal nerves,“ there are but three veins, with faint indications of a fourth and fifth | on some leaves. The under side of the leaves instead of being glabrous, are hirsute, and the upper side bears a line of hairs on the midrib. It may be Hillebrand’s F. hypoleuca var. kauai- ensis, which he says is intermediate between the present species (hypoleuca) and F. membranacea,” but he describes the plant as having oblanceolate or oblong” leaves. The leaves of my plant are ovate. Collected in damp woods at an eleva tion of 3000 feet. : July 29 (2633). Peperomia reflexa (L. f.) A. Dierr. Sp. Pl. 1: Ed. 6, 180, 1831. Piper reflexzum L. f. Suppl. 91. 1781. f Three numbers were collected which seem referable to tis species. The first (2077), was collected on the heights of he uoa, Oahu, where it was growing in the forks of Kukui ti The plants are small and grow in tangled clumps. A secqnd number (2534), is very similar but smaller, and has me thicker spikes. It also grew on Kukui trees, along the Wahi- awa and Hanapepe rivers, Kauai. The third number (2481), ist much larger in every way. It was found growing only on the ground, first along a tributary of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, and later in the woods at 4000 feet elevation above Waimea. 2 = . Peperomia About a mile above the mouth of the main tributary of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, was collected a plant which does not seem to agree with any of the Hawaiian species, although it seems to be close to P. sandwicensis. The plants were growing in wet, muddy ground, at the base of a ledge of rock. They are small, none being over six inches long, including the long spikes. The stems are short, branching from near the decu m- N bent base, somewhat channeled, smooth below, the upper part and the branches, pubescent with short hairs that curve up- ward. The leaves are in whorls of three, or sometimes bee lower ones opposite, on hairy petioles of about one-fourth t eir length. Including the petiole, the largest are about an inch long, obovate, or almost orbicular in outline, thick, three-_ jan : * x 2 E Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 811 nerved, these often obscured, granular punctate and green above, but not pubescent, except sometimes along the margin or at the junction with the petiole, the under side red, pubes- cent, with short curved hairs, or occasionally merely granular; spikes very long and slender, commonly as long or longer than the rest of the plant. July 1 (2478). - Peperomia Another species from Kauai, which cannot be satisfactorily placed, was first collected at about 3000 feet elevation, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, where it was found growing at the base of trees. The plants from this place are small, less than six inches high. The stems are usually simple, but sometimes branched above, slightly channeled, pubescent throughout. The leaves are on short petioles, opposite, or in threes, about an inch in length, thin, lanceolate, with tapering base, three-nerved, or the upper appearing as if one-nerved, hairy on both faces. The spikes are terminal, single, slender, the rachis stfongly angled, glabrous, on sparingly pubescent _ pedicels. Above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet elevation, larger specimens were collected, which also appear to belong here. July to October (2632). CASUARINACEAE, CASUARINA L. Amoen. Acad. 4: 143. 1759. Casuarina equisetifolia L. Amoen. Acad. 4: 143. 1759. _ Introduced, and extensively planted in Capiolani Park, near Honolulu. March 20 (1855). URTICACEAE. ADICEA Rar. Ann. Nat. 179. 1815. [Pilea LinpL. Coll. pl. 4. 1821.] Adicea peploides (Gaup.) Kunrze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 623. 1891. Dubrueilia peploides GAUD. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 495. 1830. = Pilea peploides H. & A. Bot. Beechy Voy. 96. 1832. Collected first at the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu, elevation 1200 feet, * here it was growing in the crevices of wet rocks. The plants here were dwarfed and small. On Kauai, at Hanapepe Falls, 812 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the plants were large and robust, being kept continually mois 4 by the spray from the falls. Here it grew among the boulders — and loose stones which have accumulated at the foot of falls. April to August (2200). BOEHMERIA Jacq. Stirp. Am. 246, pl. 157. 1768, Bochmeria grandis (H. & A.) Urtica grundis H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 95. 1832. Boehmeria stipularis WRDD. in Ann Sc. Nat. (IV) 1: 200. 1884. That a species native to the Hawaiian Islands should identical with an African species, is hardly tenable. H brand, after noting some difference between the Hawaiian plant and Weddell's B. stipularis, thinks it is probable that two dis- tinct species lie concealed in the present one (stipularis), and that thus the difficulty of explaining the occurrence of only one species in two limited areas which are removed from each other by half the circumference of the globe, will find an easy tion.“ Nevertheless, he did not attempt a solution, which i: certainly easy, for in Urtica grandis H. & A., we have a per- fectly valid name to apply to the Hawaiian plant On Oahu, it is credited as occurring only on Mt. Kaala, of the Walanae range. On Konahuanui, back of Honolulu, I obtained speci- mens at an elevation of about 2500 feet (2906), early in Novem- ber. This is the broad-leaved, apparently typical form. a Kauai, specimens of the variety gamma of Hillebrand were col- lected at Hanapepe Falls, where it is rather plentiful. This forr m (2436), which is quite constant on Kauai, was again observed in a branch canon of the Hanapepe, at an elevation of < 5 1500 feet, and also on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, at an ele- vation of 4000 feet. It differs from the Oahu plant in being taller and more slender, with narrower and more pointed leaves, which bear but few scattered pilose hairs on the midveins, in- stead of being markedly hairy on all of the veins. The upper face, too, is merely granular, instead of pilose. * NERAUDIA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 500, pl. 117. 183 Neraudia melastomaefolia Gauß. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 500, Ph, 1¹ 1830. Hillebrand says that this species occurs on all islands, * 4 dry slopes of the lower regions.“ My specimens were collected * on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 4000 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 813 feet, on the banks of astream in the forest. It is a small tree, about ten feet high, with a distinct trunk, loosely branching above, the weak branches curved, glabrous, or somewhat pu- bescent where they merge into the inflorescence. This is pretty certainly Gaudichaud’s plant, as described by Weddell, in DC. Prodromus, 16: part 1, 2351, where the leaves are character- ized as very glabrous on both sides, or appressed pilose be- neath on the nerves,” but what Hillebrand had in view, is not so easy to determine. His description calls for a ‘‘low shrub, 3-5 feet high, branching from the base, the spreading, rather _ nodose branches pubescent with appressed silky hairs.” This would apply much better to N. ovata or N. sericea. He also says that the leaves are on petioles of one half to two lines In all of the three distinct forms in my collection, the leaves are on petioles of an inch or more in length. Hillebrand says: „The presence of a white milksap rests upon Gaudichaud's statement. I do not remember to have observed it.” Gaud- ichaud's statement is quite correct, as the milky juice was ob- served in all of the specimens collected by me. September 24 (2792). | Neraudia sericea Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 500, pl. 717. 1830. Specimens from above Waimea, Kauai, collected at an eleva- tion of about 2000 feet, agree very well with Gaudichaud's fig- ure in the Bot. Voy. Bonite, pl. 133, except that the leaves are a little narrower, and slightly undulate. Wawra's plant, No. 2113, identified as this species, is from the same region. Oetober 1 (2847). 3 Neraudia sericea GAUD. var. Near the base of the tabular summit, above Waimea, Kauai, at about 3000 feet elevation, was found a form which is prob- ably N. ovata Gaud., but for the present is referred to N. sericea. The leaves are broadly ovate, acuminate, with a rounded and slightly cordate base. It may be N. melastomaefolia var. au- - aiensis Hillebr., but his description calls for a leaf ‘‘ovate- _ rhomboidal, slightly contracting but rounded and even retuse at the base.” ; October 12 (2881). 814 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. PIPTURUS Wepp. Ann. Sc. Nat. (IV) 1:196. 1884. Pipturus albidus (H. & A.) A. Gray, in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 201. 1867. Boehmeria albida II. & A. Bot. Beechy 96. 1832. Pipturus taitensis Wepp. Ann. Sc. Nat. (IV) 1107. 18654. i On the mountains back of Honolulu, at elevations of about 2000 feet, this species is rather common, growing on moist and thinly wooded slopes. It is identical with Mann & Brigham’s No. 45, upon which Asa Gray founded Pipturus albidus. As additional evidence, the Hawaiian plants of the Beechey voy- — age, were collected on the islands of Oahu and Niihau, and this is a species which is not likely to occur on the latter island, as there is not sufficient rainfall, or great enough elevation. It is a large bush or small tree, with a distinct trunk and loosely spreading branches. The leaves are broadly ovate, thick, crenate from the shortly pointed apex to near the base. The upper surface is irregularly papillose and rough looking, yet to the touch is almost smooth. The under side is covered be- tween the veins with short, dense, white tomentum. The dark veins and veinlets are hirsute. In DeCondolle’s Prodromus, Weddell has evidently confused at least two distinct species, and Hillebrand has followed him. The variety meyeniana of Weddell is probably nothing more than typical albidus, as no other forms were seen on Oahu. April 11 (2120); probably from the original locality. Pipturus gaudichaudianus WEpp. Ann. Sc. Nat. (IV) I: 196. 2 1854. On Kaholuamano above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 3500 to 4000 feet, is found a plant which answers fairly well to 9 the description of the above species. It is a bush; four to six feet high, with slender, ascending branches. The broadly — eliptic-ovate leaf is usually four inches or more in length, crenate, shortly pointed, the upper side smooth in appearance, but rough to the touch, and under a lense appressed pilose and 1 closely granular The tomentum beneath is very close and not nearly so white as in P. albidus. Wawra has recorded it from „Maui: Waiheeberge, 1814.” September 2 (2786). ce Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 815 Pipturus kauaiensis n. sp. (Plate XLVI) A small tree, eight to twelve feet high with spreading top; branches glabrous, except the growing parts, which are to- mentose; bark close, light brown; leaves ovate-lanceolate, acumi- nate, crenate in the upper two-thirds or half, except the acu- minate tip, of varying size, but the width commonly half the length, base equal sided, narrowing, or sometimes rounded, the upper side dark green, shortly pilose and granular under a lense, the under side densely covered with short and soft white tomentum, except the veins and veinlets; principal veins three, dark; dioecious; flowers very small. glomerate in the axils of the leaves and branches, the female more numerous than the male; fruit clusters white. Easily distinguished from P. albidus by its thinner, narrower and taper pointed leaves, which are of a different texture, and by the smaller and smoother flower clusters. The branches also are more slender and more regular. Weddell, in DC. _ Prodr 16: part 1, 235, as well as Hillebrand, evidently included this very distinct species in their descriptions of HF. albidus. It is not uncommon in thickets along the Hanapepe river, but does not occur at any great elevation. June 24 (2428) Pipturus ruber n. sp. (Plate XL III) A small tree, six to eight feet high, with short trunk, and dense spreading top; branches covered with short, gray or _ tawny hair; leaves alternate, on stout, pubescent petioles, rather thick, ovate or occasionally ovate-lanceolate, acute, _crenate from base to apex, upper surface light green, barely roughened, sparingly hirsute only on the three prominent, im- pressed veins; the under side pale, covered with longer and coarser tomentum than is found on any other species; veins Prominent beneath, bright red, but fading when dry, hirsute; female flowers red, densely pubescent, the clusters large. A handsome species, very distinct from any of the preceding. 4 The numerous clusters of red flowers, and the red veins on the under side of the leaf are very conspicuous in the living plant, but lose their color in the dried specimen. The male plant was not collected. The tomentum on the under surface of the leaves is much darker than in the other species. The flower _* clusters are even larger than those of P. albidus, and the leaves although somewhat similar in texture are much smoother on dhe upper surface and are of a different shape. f 816 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Collected at an elevation of 4000 feet above Waimea, Kauai. It was growing on the banks of a stream in the woods, below Gay & Robinson's Kaholumano house. | October 4 (2852). TOUCHARDIA Gavp. Bot. Voy. Bon. ¢ 94; Wedd. Monog. Urtic. 441. 1856. 1 Touchardia latifolia Gaup. Bot. Voy. Bon. t. 94; Wedd. 1 Monog. Urtic. 442, pl. 18, f. C. 1856. As the plants figured in the Atlas of the Botany of the Voy- 4 age of the Bonite, are unaccompanied by either description or reference to other published species they are all nomina riuda, — All of them however, seem to have been described by later au- thors and credited to Gaudichaud. Weddell seems to have been the first who characterized the genus Touchardia, with its single species. Collected at Hanapepe falls, Kauai, at an elevation of about 700 feet. The leaves are light green on both faces, not ‘‘dark green,” as Hillebrandsays. They are rugose 7 on both faces, especially on the lower. The prominent veins are red. In the dried specimens the leaves become much darker than in the living state, thus perhaps accounting for Hille- brand’s error, but his expression *‘tripli-nerved, the lateral nerves not reaching the middle of the margin,“ is not correct. The fact is, that they are simply pinnately nerved, as is plainly 1 shown in Gaudichaud's plate. 4 July 2 (2485); a Hawaiian genus, said by Hillebrand to occur on all islands. URERA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 496. 1830. Urera glabra (H. & A.) Wepv. Arch. Mus. Paris. 9:149. 1856. Procris glabra H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 96. 1832. a Hillebrand calls this variety gamma, of U. W 8 Wedd. In addition to the differences brought out in the de- scription of the two plants, and the very evident dissimilarity to Gaudichaud’s figure in Bot. Bon. f. 92, we have enough geo- graphical range to separate them. C. sandwicensis is k n only from the island of Hawaii, while U. glabra has a northern range, from Molokai to Kauai. Specimeus were collected on _ Kauai, at the head of the canon opposite Gay and Robinsons Hanapepe valley house, at an elevation of about 1500 feet, and L also at about 3000 feet, at the foot of the tabular summit above Waimea. July to October (1605); original locality, Oahu. Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 817 1 LORANTHACEAE. VISCUM L. Sp. Pl. 1023. 1753. All of the Hawaiian species belong to the section Aspiduzia, which is leafless, and perhaps should represent a distinct genus. Viscum articulatum Boro. f. Fl. Ind. 311. 1768. If true Viscum articulatum, or any other of the species men- - tioned in DeCandolle's Prodromus, occur in the Hawaiian Is- lands, the species with flat and rather broad joints, which I found growing only on Elaeocarpus bifidus and on the island of Oahu, is apparently referable to it (2212). Is 0o this also must be referred two forms somewhat dissimilar in habit. No. 2183, found growing on the ‘‘Ohia ha,” or Eu- genia sandwicensis, is erect, with slender branches, the joints slightly contracting at the base, or of an equal width through- out, the ultimate segments inclined to be pointed. Collected on Konahuanui, Oahu, at an elevation of about 2700 feet. On the island of Kauai, on the main ridge west of the Hana- pepe river, at about 3500 feet elevation, and on Kaholuamano above Waimea, at 4000 feet, occurs a distinct form (2680), much _ resembling F. attenwatum DC. The branches are lax, droop- ing. spreading, and rather weak. The joints are elongated, narrow. and of an almost even width throughout. The ulti- mate segments are also somewhat pointed. It grew in dense elusters on the branches of Elaeocarpus bifidus. On Kaholua- mano it is quite common. The tendency to become disarticu- 4 lated while drying is very slight in this form. viscum pendulum (Wawra). FE Vicum moniliforme Blunk, var. pendula Wawra, Flora (ID 31:140. 1873. The pendulous habit and large size at once distinguish this from all the other forms. It seems to be Hillebrand’s Viscum a ticulatum var. bela. In the mature plants the joints are an 3 ich or more in width. and not contracted at the point of articu- * 3 : aun of 4000 feet. It was aotinad only on an apparentiy undescribed species of Pelea, which grows near streams in the forest. | September to Uctober (2810); from near the original local- ‘ity, Kauai, um Halemanu.” 818 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Viscum salicornioides A. Cunn. Ann. Nat. Hist. (J) 2:208, — 1839. 1 To unite this well-marked plant with V. articulatum, as Hille- brand has done, is certainly not admissible. The slender, terete _ joints readily separate it from all of the forms of that species. On Oahu, it was found at the Pali, growing on Maba sand. wicensis. On Kauai, it occurred only at high elevations, on 4 the ‘‘Lehua” tree. A marked peculiarity is that it is found only on trees which grow on the edges of steep slopes, as on the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. April to October (2194). SANTALACEAE, SANTALUM L. Sp. Pl. 349. 1753. Santalum ellipticum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 442. 1830. This is the plant referred to by Hillebrand as 8. fregeineli- anum var. delta ellipticum, and figured by Mrs. Sinclair, in her illustrations of indigenous Hawaiian plants. Collected on the ridge between the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers, Kauai, at about 2000 feet elevation. It is not uncommon on the plateau above Waimea. It is a small tree, fifteen to twenty feet high. — August 24 (2579). EXOCARPUS LaBILL. Voy. 1: 155, pl. 14. 1798. Exocarpus sandwicensis BAILL. Adansonia, 3:109. 1862. Exocarpus brachystachys HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 391. 1888. 1 Collected on the lower slopes of Waiolani, Oahu, at an eleva- tion of about 2500 feet. A medium sized, much branched shrub, some branches bearing large leaves, others only the small, scale-like ones. In Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 198. Mann cites this as var. beta foliosa GRAY,1 c. Upon following up the devious track of the J. c., which our forefathers were so fond of using, we find that it refers to Bot. Expl. Exped. ined.” As no d tion accompanies the name, it is a nomen nudum. Anyway, it is antedated by Baillon’s name. Very probably E. casuarinae 4 BAILL., is only the leafless form of this species, as his type came from Oahu, and there seems to be but one species on mat island. June 6 (2390); type locality, ‘‘Insulis Sandwicensibus Lanai ; et Oahu.“ Type numbers, Remy, 513, 514. 4g Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 819 POLYGON ACEAE. POLYGONUM L. Sp. Pl. 859. 1753. Polygonum glabrum WILLD. Sp. Pl. 2:447. 1799. Collected along the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of about 400 feet. Also observed on Kaholuamano, above Wa- imea, at an elevation of 4000 feet, growing in a mountain stream in the forest. Hillebrand says the species is common along streams and water courses.” Except the stations mentioned. above, [ have seen it at only one other place. It grows in the stream in upper Nuuanu valley, a mile or two from the Pali. June 24 (2423); original locality, ‘tin India orientali.” RUMEX L. Sp. Pl. 333. 1758. Rumex acetosella L. Sp. Pl. 338. 1753. In the forest on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, this species of Rumer is found growing in open places destitute of underbrush. It is not recorded in Hillebrand’s Flora, and how long it has been on the island I do not know. It is found near _ Gay & Robinson's mountain house, a place which is used only at intervals, and where nothing whatever is cultivated. August 30 (2767); original locality, ‘‘in Europae pascuis et arvis arenosis.” ‘ CHENOPODIACEAE, | CHENOPODIUM L. Sp. Pl. 219. 1783. Chenopodium murale L. Sp. Pl. 219. 1783. _» Specimens were collected at Capiolani Park, within the race- track enclosure, but it is rather common about Honolulu, near the water front. Also was observed at Makaweli, Kauai, near the beach. March 21 (2024); original locality, in Europae muris ag- geribusque.“ 1 Chenopodium sandwicheum Mog. Chenopod. Monogr. Enum. > 28. 1840. Hillebrand cites this species as published in DC. Prod. XIII. Sect. II. p. 67.” Collected on the edge and about the base N of the tabular summit above Waimea, Kauai, at elevations of from 3000 to 3500 feet, where it is plentiful. Woody at the 820 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 4 F base, with lax, spreading branches, from three to five feet long. 7 September 2 (2788); original locality, in insulis Sand. wicheis.” 1 AMARANTHACEAE, AMARANTHUS L. Sp. Pl. 989. 1758. Amaranthus viridis L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1405. 1763, 7 A common plant at Honolulu, in the streets, in gardens, and 4 in waste places. Specimens were collected on Alekea street. and at Capiolani Park. a March to May (2025, 2135); original localities, “Europe Brasilia.“ 5 _ CHARPENTIERA Gavp. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 444, pl 4. 4 1830. a Charpentiera elliptica (HILLEBR.) 4 Charpentiera obovata GAUD. var. elliptica Httitesre. Fl. Haw. Is. 4 375. 1888. a On Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at 4000 feet eleva- — tion, this well-marked species occurs along stream banks in the forest, and on the upper edges of steep slopes. It has thick, dark green, oblong-lanceolate, or elliptical-lanceolate leaves, very different in shape and texture from either of the two other species. It is figured by Mrs. Sinclair, in her illustrations of Hawaiian plants, plate 44. September (2781). ing. Hillebrand makes no mention of its occurrence on Kau 0 July 22 (2598). 2 Charpentiera ovata Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, pl. 47. 1830. On the edge of the plateau above Manoa, Oahu, at an eleva tion of 2000 feet, there are several trees of this species. I did not see it on Kauai. By some writers it is considered a mere form of C. obovata, yet, in all cases observed by me, the living plants could be distinguished at a glance. Ovata is a larger and more regularly branched tree, has larger, differently shaped and thinner leaves, which turn darker in drying than “a do those of C. obovata. = Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 821 NOTOTRICHIUM Hitvtepr. Fl. Haw. Is. 372. 1888. Nototrichium sandwicense (A. Gray) Hituesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 373. 1888. Ptilotus sandwicensis A. GRAY, in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 200. 1867, as regards Remy’s No, 207. Said to be shrubby. The leaves are thick, opposite, on slen- der petioles of about one-fourth the length of the blade, serice- ous on both sides, especially so beneath, ovate or elliptical- ovate, acute or acuminate; inflorescenee corymbose, trichotom- ous; pedicels slender, as long, or the ultimate ones sometimes twice the length of the spikes. The type is Remy’s plant, No. 207. Under this number are two forms, one from Hawaii, with acuminate leaves on slender marginless petioles, the other from Oahu, with bluntish leaves, on margined petioles. On the ridge leading up to Kaholuamano, Kauai, between the forks of the Waimea river, I collected two forms, referable to Remy’s plant. One, an erect, compact bush, three to four feet high, with thick, elliptical, mostly obtuse leaves, grew on the open, ex- posed slope, at an elevation of about 2500 feet. The other grew in the shade, on the banks of a stream in a cafion, at about 2000 feet elevation It is a larger bush, with more spreading branches, the leaves somewhat thinner, elliptical-lanceolate in shape, acute In both of these forms the leaves are on short margined petioles. September 24 (2831); original localities, :‘ Hawaii, near the coast; Oahu.” Nototrichium viride HitLesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 373. 1888. : Ptilotus sandwicensis A. GRAY, in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 200, 1867, in part. There is not the least doubt about Mann & Brigham’s No. 590 being specifically distinct from Remy’s No. 207. The former I have seen in the Herbarium of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, at Honolulu, and the latter in the herbarium _ of Columbia University. In the publication of Pfilotus sand- _ wicensis, the numbers are cited thus: (M. & B. 590; Remy, _ 207).” In Hanapepe valley, Kauai, the type locality for M. & B. 590, it is not uncommon at elevations of 300 to 600 feet, usu- ally growing on steep slopes. It is a small tree about ten feet high. with spreading branches. On the living plants, the foli- age has a rufous tinge. The leaves are thin, elliptical ovate, acute or acuminate, tapering below into a margined petiole, _ glabrous above, shortly pubescent beneath, especially the 822 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, younger ones. The mature flowering spikes are almost an inen in length on long, slender peduncles. Hillebrand's short de- scription is rather faulty, for his statement that the leaves are ‘*glabrous and green on both faces,” is not correct, as evinced — by the abovedescription. However, he did not have specimens in his own collection, which may account for any alen June 24 (2426). 5 PHYTOLACCACEAE. PHYTOLACCA L. Sp. Pl. 441. 1753. Phytolacea brachystachys Mod. in DC. Prodr. 13: part 2, 32. 1 1849. ö In Hillebrand’s Flora, this species is said to be common in the lower forests.” It certainly is not common now on Oahu, for none of it was seen on that island. On Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, it is rather plentiful along streams in the for- est, at an elevation of 4000 feet. It can hardly be called an erect ‘‘undershrub,” as it is woody only at the base, and the herbaceous branches have a decided tendency to droop. a August 30 (2772); original locality, in ins. Oahu Sand- wicensium.” Be BATIDACEAE. BATIS P. Browne. Civ. and Nat. Hist. Jam. 358. es Batis maritima L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1451. 1763. 4 Collected at Waikiki, near Honolulu, growing in wet and l near the beach. It is common along the shore on the lee side, and very abundant about the Palama end of Honolulu. Also o. a curs on Kauai. 1 June 13 (2412); original locality, in Jamaicae maritimis salsis.” P NYCTAGINACEAE. BOERHAVIA L. Sp. Pl. 3. 1753. Boerhavia diffusa L. Sp. Pl. 3. 1753. Specimens were collected near the beach at Diamond Head, a Oahu. Rather common near the coast on the lee side of that island, and was also seen on Kauai. 4 March 29 (2020); original locality, ‘‘in India.” Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 823 PISONIA L. Sp. Pl. 1026. 1753. Pisonia sandwicensis HILL HER. Fl. Haw. Is. 369. 1888. Staminate specimens were collected at the second fall of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, which is at an elevation of about 2000 feet. Pistillate ones were obtained at the base of the plateau above Waimea, at about 3000 feet elevation, This species is a good sized tree, often twenty-five feet or more in height, with a trunk diameter of eight or ten inches. The male flowers are pinkish in color, and sweet scented. The white or pink tinged perigone, and long-exserted stamens, present a very attract- ive appearance. The female flowers are much smaller, and greenish. July to September (2598, 2784). The range is given from Maui to Kauai, but it has not been reported from Oahu. Pisonia umbellifera (Forst.) Seem. Bonplandia 10:154. 1862. Ceodes umbellifera Fonsr. Char. Gen. 71, pl. 7. 1776. Specimens referable to this species were collected on Kauai, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, and on the ridge be- __ tween the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers, at elevations of about 2000 feet. The fruit of these specimens was not at all viscid, and did not stick to the paper. But on Oahu, on the edge of the plateau above Manoa, specimens were seen, the fruit of which was very viscid, sticking tenaciously to anything with Which it came in contact. Hillebrand says: The fruiting perigone of all three species exudes a very viscid glue. * * * It will stick fast to paper in the herbarium for years.” June to October (2453); original locality, island of Tanna, New Zealand. PORTULACACEAE. PORTULACA L. Sp. Pl. 445. 1753. Portulaca oleracea L. Sp. Pl. 445. 1753. Collected at an elevation of about 700 feet, on the hillside op- pPosite Gay & Robinson's Hanapepe valley house. It was also _ seen at other places, especially in dry ground near Honolulu. July 6 (2521); original localities, ‘‘in Europa australis, In- dia, ins. Ascenscionis.” 824 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. CARYOPHYLLACEAE. CERASTIUM L. Sp. Pl. 487, 1753. Cerastium vulgatum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 627. 1762. Cerastium triviale Link. Enum. Hort. Berol. 1: 433. 1821. . Hillebrand records this species from Maui only. I found it on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 4000 feet. It differs from the common American form of C. vulgatum — in being less stout, and more spreading. It is also less pus 4 bescent. September 10 (2804); original locality, in Scaniae et Hu- f ropae australioris pratis, areis.’ : 4 DRYMARIA WILLD. in Roem. & Schultes Syst. Veg. 4 5:406. 1819. 4 Drymaria cordata (L.) WiLLD. in Roem. & Schultes Syst. Veg. 5:406. 1819. a Holosteum cordatum L. Sp. Pl. 88. 1753. a On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, at an elevation of — 3500 feet, and in the depths of the forest, I found a vigorous — growth of this plant. I saw it at this station only, and how it got there, in a place frequented only by wild cattle, is a mys- tery. Introduced it must be, for it is not recorded in Hille-— brand’s Flora, and if it were native, would have a wider range 4 on the island. 4 July 29 (2636); original locality, ‘‘in Jamaica, Surinama.” SCHIEDIA C. & S. Linnaea, 1:46. 1826. A genus found only on the Hawaiian group. Schiedia lychnoides HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 36. 1888. Collected in the forest, on the plateau above Waimea, Kauni, 1 at an elevation of 4000 feet. Occasionally it grew on the ground, 3 but usually on mossy logs or on trees. As suggested by Hille- 4 brand, there may be grounds for uniting this and S. viscosa with 4 the genus Alsinidendron, as their large flowers and general habit somewhat remove them from the other members of the genus. The seeds are minutely roughened, not smooth, as 1 stated by Hillebrand. 3 September 7 (2796); original locality, ‘‘Katai, above wa- 4 imea.“ E Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 825 Schiedia spergulina A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 135. pl. 11. 1854. On dry slopes above the Hanapepe river, at elevations of 300 to 1000 feet, this species is rather plentiful. It grows on basalt outcrops only. Some of my specimens differ from the original description, probably owing to the fact that the flowers are dimorphous, a point which is not brought out by either Gray or Hillebrand. The latter, it seems, did not have a specimen in his collection. In my specimens, the sepals are ovate, acute, smooth, except the margins, which are ciliate. In flowers which have long styles, the staminodia are but half the length of the sepais, while they are about as long as the sepals in flowers which have short styles. The number of styles is vari- able. Sometimes there are three and sometimes four. June 26 (2446); original locality, mountains of Kauai.” Schiedia stellarioides MANN, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 10:153. 1866. This species grows in thick bunches. It has a suffruticose base, but the branches are herbaceous, procumbent, weak and spreading. Collected on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 4000 feet. It is rather plentiful in open places near the edge of the woods. August 30 (2766); from the original locality, ‘‘on the mount- ains above Waimea, Kauai.” SILENE L. Sp. Pl. 416. 1753. _ Silene gallica L. Sp. Pl. 417. 1753. Hillebrand had this species from the northern slope of Kaala, Oahu.” I collected it at the Nuuanu Pali, where it is found growing along the roadside, as well as clinging in crevices, high up on the cliffs. A few plants were also noticed near the edge of the plateau, above Waimea, Kauai. Here it was grow- ing in pasture land, at an elevation of 4000 feet. _ April 23 (2202); original locality, in Gallia.” 826 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, RANUNCULACEAE, RANUNCULUS L. Sp. Pl. 548. 1788. Ranunculus mauiensis A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:11. 1854. Although the Kauai form differ somewhat from the type. collected on Maui, in having narrower and more dissected — leaves, and has more pubescence, it cannot well be separated. The plants are erect, spreading. In general appearance and habit, it is more like A. recurvatus, than the plants which have been promiscuously called A. repens, and to which Hillebrand likened it. Specimens were collected on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, at 3500 feet elevation, where it occurs spar- ingly, and also on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, where it is plentiful in the forest at an elevation of 4000 feet. None of the plants were in good condition, however. It was originally —— 3 inated as var. beta. a July to September ( original locality, ‘‘ mountains of 4 Kauai.” : 4 a q 4 q ; LAURACEAE. CASSYTHA L. Sp. Pl. 35. 1753. Cassytha filiformis L. Sp. Pl. 35. 1753. ‘ This peculiar, leafless plant, with the habit of a Cuscuta, is 4 plentiful on the left bank of the Hanapepe river, just above “4 Gay & Robinson's house. It twines over the grass and Guava ; . bushes in dense tangled masses. By August 14 (2729); original locality, ‘‘in India.“ CRYPTOCARYA R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 402. 1810. Cryptocarya mannii HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 382. 1888. a A small tree, ten to fifteen feet high, which is rather comme n in the woods of Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, at an ele- vation of 4000 feet. The fruit is crowned by the remains of the about 178 Hillebrand was not certain. a October 4 (2854); from the original locality, „mountains above Waimea, Kauai.“ Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 827 CRUCIFERAE. LEPIDIUM L. Sp. Pl. 648. 1753. Lepidium owaihiense C. & S. Linnaea, 1:32. 1826. Collected at the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu. The gnarled and tough woody stems of this species present quite a contrast to the herbaceous species which are found in America. The inflores- cence is pubescent, a fact which Hillebrand does not note. Specimens were collected at an elevation of 1400 feet, growing near the edge of the precipice, on the Konahuanui side. It is said to grow on all of the islands of the group. May 24 (2365). Lepidium serra Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 149. 1867. Neither Mann in his description of the type, nor Hillebrand in his Flora, tell us anything definite about the habit of this species. Both say, a straggling, much-branched shrub, 2-3 feet high,” which is correct, so far as it goes. I have seen the plant at three stations, the first at the original locality, along the Hanapepe river, not far below the falls; along the main tributary of the Hanapepe, and on the edge of the plateau above Waimea. Plants were plentiful enough at all these places, but difficult to collect on account of their growing on the faces of perpendicular rocks, and at some distance from the ground. They usually grow in clumps, and have drooping branches. The stems are simple, and naked for nearly their whole length, only near the end bearing a profusion of linear- lanceolate leaves, and long, drooping, many flowered peduncles. The slender pedicels are puberulent. Speaking of the pods, | Mann says: ‘‘ Maturis oblato-orbiculatus, stylo exemarginatura minima vix exserto,” and Hillebrand gives the character, _ ‘*silicule flat, suborbicular, not emarginate.” In my specimens there are varying degrees of emargination, but the styles are _ decidedly exserted in all cases, when uninjured. There is a specimen of Mann's plant in the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus- eum, at Honolulu. June 24 (2427); from the original locality, ‘‘ Hanapepe, _ Kauai.” 4 / 828 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. CORONOPUS Gaertn. Fr. & Sem. 2:293. 1791. ny Coronopus didymus (L.) J. E. Smira, Fl. Brit. 3:691, 1806. Lepidium didymum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 92. 1767. Senebiera didyma Pers. Syn. 2:185. 1807. A few plants of this species were first seen on the slopes o Makiki, along the Tantalus road. It is rather common about the streets of Honolulu. a March 21 (1974). CAPPARIDACEAE. CLEOME L. Sp. Pl. 671. 1753. Cleome pentaphylla L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 938. 1763. Gynandropsis pentaphylla DC. Prodr. 1:245. 1824. Collected at Honolulu, near a lumber pile at the foot of Ale- - kea street, It is said to be common along roadsides near Hos 4 olulu, but I saw it only at the above mentioned place. Hille- brand says it is a native of Africa, but Linnaeus gives its habitat as in India.” 4 March 27 (2015). SAXIFRAGACEAE. BROUSSAISIA Gavup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 479, pl. 69. 1830. a Broussaisia arguta GAUD. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 479, pl. 69. 1830. A bush or small tree, and common on the slopes of Konahu- anui, back of Honolulu. It was also collected in the forests — of Kauai. Hillebrand says: In the specimens from Kauai. the serratures of the leaves are straight.” In my specimens. from the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, the serratures are smaller than in the Oahu specimens, but are incurved in pred 4 cisely the same manner. May to September (2302). PITTOSPORACEAE. a -PITTOSPORUM BANKS, in Gaertn. Fr. & Sem. 1: 286. 4 pl. 59. 1788. 4 Pittosporum acuminatum MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 152. 1867. 4 Specimens were first collected on the ridge west of the Hana- pepe river, Kauai, but unfortunately were gathered from two 3 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 829 different trees and it is possible that the majority of them may represent a different species, or at least a marked form. They are under No. 2456. Later, specimens were collected at the type locality, ‘‘on the mountains above Waimea, Kauai.” This is No. 2783, and may be considered typical, except that the petioles are slightly shorter than Mann's measurement. It is a beautiful species, with glossy, light green, thick leaves, not thin chartaceous,” as Hillebrand has it. His character of ‘‘spathulate” is not so good either, as Mann's original ob lanceolatis.” The type is M. & B. 603. f Pittosporum glabrum H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 110. 1832. On fruiting specimens, collected in Nuuanu valley, some of the older leaves are rounded, but the younger ones on the same branch are slightly contracted at the apex. None of them are acuminate, nor is there any warrant apparently for Hille- brand’s description of ‘‘acuminate.” Hooker & Arnott say: Foliis oblongo-obovatis obtusis basi attenuatis utrinque gla- berrimis supra nitidis.” In flowering specimens, collected on the lower slope of Konahuanui, and overlooking Nuuanu, the _ pedicels are pubescent. With the exception of this pubescence, which apparently soon disappears, the specimens agree very well with the original description of P. glabrum. March to May (1985); original locality, Oahu. _ Pittosporum kauaiense HILLesR. Fl. Haw. Is. 25. 1888. This striking species was collected on the ridge west of the _ Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of about 2500 feet. It is a good sized tree, and one of the largest species. The pu- __ bescence on the under side of the leaves in my specimens is floc- cose, and seems to disappear on the olderleaves. The capsules are small, not tuberculate, and covered with short, white to- mentum. July 17 (2580); original locality, ‘‘Kauai mountains of _ Waimea.” - ROSACEAE. OSTEOMELES Linpt. Trans. Linn. Soc. 13:98. 1822. 4 Osteomeles anthyllidifolia (Smirs.) LI NDL. Trans. Linn. Soc. 75 13:99. 1822. Pyrus anthyllidifolia Smiru, in Rees Cyc}. 29. No. 2195 was collected April 23d. on the steep, wind swept _ slopes of the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu. Owing to its constant strug- bay | 5 830 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. gle with the strong winds which sweep across this place, the plants have become dwarfed and prostrate, forming a dense, entangled clump, which rises barely a foot above the ground. The branches are several feet long. Perhaps the strangest feature is the black fruit. No. 2233, collected on a sheltered — slope in Waialae valley, eastern Oahu, was an erect shrub, four or five feet high, with white berries, as is ordinary. 4 MIMOSACEAE. ACACIA Apvans. Fam. Pl. 2:319. 1763. Acacia farnesiana WiLLD. Sp. Pl. 4: 1083. 1806. Common on the hot dry slopes of the lee side of Oahu near Honolulu. Here it never attains the size of a tree, but is always shrubby. Specimens were collected at the base of Punchbowl, — back of Honolulu. March 25 (1996); original locality in Domingo.” Acacia koa A. Gray. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:480. 1854. This is the ‘‘Koa” of the natives. It is a large tree, withfar- — spreading branches, but very often has a comparatively short trunk, as the branching begins at a distance of eight or ten feet from the ground. From the trunks of this tree, the na- tives used to make their large war canoes. The wood is sus- ceptible of a high polish, and makes very handsome articles of furniture. The woodwork and cases in the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu, are made of Koa wood. On Oahu and Kauai it is common in the lower forest, the dark green of its foliage contrasting well with the light green of the Kukui — tree. True leaves are rarely seen, as they occur only on young trees, and sometimes as adventitious shoots. Their place is taken on full grown trees by scythe-shaped phyllodia. The | 4 species is found only on the Hawaiian group. March 23 (1984). LEUCAENA BRN TH.; Hook. Journ. Bot. 4:416. 1842. Leucaena glauca (L.) BentH.; Hook. Journ. Bot. 4: 416. 1842. 4 Mimosa glauca L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1504. 1763. 1 Acacia glauca WILLD. Sp. Pl. 4: 1075. 1806. ; Introduced, and very abundant about Honolulu. A small tree, with spreading slender branches, which bear an abun. dance of cream colored flower heads. 4 March 29 (2048); original locality, ‘‘in America.” Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 831 PROSOPIS L. Mant. 10. 1763. Prosopis A species of Prosopis is common about Honolulu, flourishing best in hot, dry situations, and having the same range as Acacia farnesiana, By Hillebrand it is said to be ‘‘ Prosopis julijlora DC. or P. dulcis, Kunth.” It is certainly very distinct from the species called julifora in the southwestern part of the United States, although it has a similar pod. The leaflets are short and pubescent, as compared with the long, smooth ones of the American plant. . dulcis KUNTH, is described as having a torulose pod, which forbids its being a synonym of F. julijlora. March 25 (2001). CAESALPINIACEAE. CAESALPINIA L. Sp. Pl. 380. 1753, Caesalpinia bondue (L.) Roxs. Hort. Beng. 32. 1814. Guilandina bonduc L. Sp. Pl. 381. 1753. Hillebrand unites this with Caesalpinia bonducella Even the most casual examination of dried specimens shows that the two are abundantly distinct. As opposed to bonducella, the branches are more climbing, glabrous, armed with fewer, shorter, and straighter prickles. The leaves are broader, bplunter, and smooth. The inflorescence is naked, and the flowers fewer and much larger. It seems to be rare on the islands. A single vine, for it grows much like, a grape vine, was found _ climbing over the limbs of a fallen Koa tree, on the main ridge West of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of about 2500 feet. July 11 (2541); original locality, in Indiis.” \ Caesalpinia bonducella (L.) FLREMuINd, As. Res. 11: 159. 1810. Guilandina bonducella L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2. 545. 1763. In the valley of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, this species is common. In habit it is trailing rather than climbing. The stems are numerous, twining and interlacing, so as to form an : impenetrable clump three or four feet high. The stems and branches are pubescent, with short, tawny hairs, and provided with numerous prickles, which curve downward. The leaf. lets are comparatively narrow, acute, and pubescent beneath. The inflorescence is heavily bracted, the flowers small and _ crowded. June 26 (2477); original locality, . in Indiis.” 882 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. CASSIA L. Sp. Pl. 874. 1753. Cassia chamaecrista L. Sp. Pl. 379. 1753. Determined as above by Mr. C. L. Pollard. It is plentiful — about Honolulu, and is especially so on the dry slopes of Punchbowl and Makiki. It must have been introduced since 1870, as Hillebrand makes no mention of its occurrence on any — of the islands. | March 21 (1969), Cassia gaudichaudii H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 81. 1832. This, the only native species on the Islands, was first col- lected by me on the dry slopes of Diamond Head, and at the Pali, island of Oahu. On Kauai it was collected along the Hanapepe river, and on the main ridge west of the Hanapepe. — It was not found above 1500 feet elevation, and was nowhere j plentiful. March to July (2022). ; - Cassia occidentalis L. Sp. Pl. 377. 1753. ; Occasionally met with about Honolulu, but apparently not 4 common. Observed also on Kauai, in Hanapepe valley. April to August (2174); original locality, ‘‘in Jamaica.” Cassia laevigata WILLD. Enum. Hort. Berol. 441. 1813. Hillebrand mentions this species as an occasional escape from gardens. Since his departure from Honolulu in 1870, it has spread and become well established at different points. It is common about Honolulu along roadsides, where it climbs — over fences and trees. Near the eastern end of Oahu it is plen- tiful along the road, at some distance from houses. On Kauai it was found at an elevation of 3000 feet, growing in a deep forest. The seeds may have been carried there by wild cattle, — but they rarely range low enongh to get into cultivated raum 4 or even into the pastures of the domesticated cattle. . May to September (2295). — * 3 PAPILIONACEAE. CANAVALIA Apans. Fam. Pl. 2: 325. 1763. Canavalia galeata GauD. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 486. 1830. q Collected on grassy slopes above Waimea, Kauai, at an olay 4 vation of 2500 feet. It is said to grow in forests of all the is- lands of the group, ‘‘twining on trees, often toa great height. At this station it trailed over the ground. 4 September 25 (2827). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 833 CRACCA L. Sp. Pl. 753. 1753. [Tephrosia Pers. Syn. 2:328. 1807.] Cracca purpurea L. Sp. Pl. 752. 1753. Galega piscatoria Arr. Hort. Kew. 3:71. 1789. Tephrosia leptostachya DO. Prodr. 2: 251. 1825. Tephrosia adscendens MACFAD, Fl. Jam. 257. 1837. ephrosia tenella A. GRAY, Pl. Wright. 2:36. 1853. A plant which was formerly of considerable use to the na- tives. It possesses a narcotic property and was used to stupefy fish. It iscommon on the dry western slope of Diamond Head, Oahu, and was also noticed on Kauai, along the road between Waimea and Hanapepe. It is not found far from the coast. March 28 (2023); orignal locality, Ceylon. CROTALARIA L. Sp. Pl. 714. 1753. Crotalaria assamica BENTH.; Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. 2: 481. 1843. Recorded by Hillebrand from Oahu, Pauoa, at the head of the valley.” It is still found there in great abundance, and does not seem to have been carried to other localities. The mature seéds are large, dark olive in color. October 5 (2911); original locality,, ‘‘ Assam.” Crotalaria fulva Roxs. Fl. Ind. 3:266. 1832 This tall, shrubby species, with large, yellow flowers much like those of C. assamica, has a pod very different from the other species which grow on the islands. The plant is plenti- ful along the roadside in Nuuanu valley, but is not recorded by Hillebrand. ; | 5 The Index Kewensis gives Hort. Beng. 54, as the place of publication, but J. G. Baker, in Fl. Brit. India, 2:80. 1879, cites it as given above. March 23 (1983a). Crotalaria incana L. Sp. Pl. 716. 1783. Very common about Honolulu, growing along roadsides, in _ fields, and even on the outskirts of the forest on Tantalus. A _ branching, straggling shrub, the young branches herbaceous and tomentose. Pod short, tomentose, almost black when ma- ture. Seeds olive green when ripe. Not previously recorded from the Hawaiian Islands. It has perhaps been introduced from Australia, as it occurs there. March 21 (1966); original locality, in Jamaica and Cari- 4 baeis.“ 1 a 5 a : 3 884 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Crotalaria longirostrata H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 285. 1841. This handsome species has not spread much during the past thirty-five years. Hillebrand notes it as growing along a2 roadside in Nuuanu valley and on the Waikiki plains near Hon- olulu, escaped from the Agricultural Society’s garden.” I have seen it only at the Nuuanu station. The flowers are rather large, bright orange yellow, the keel marked with red. The seeds are small, blackish. March 29 (2033); original locality, ‘‘ Talisco,”. Mexico. : Crotalaria saltiana ANDR. Bot. Rep. pl. 648. 1811. Crotalaria striata DO, Prodr. 2: 131. 1825. A common weed about the streets of Honolulu, in waste ground, and in fields. It occurs also at an elevation of 2000 feet on Tantalus, growing on the edge of the woods. It has evidently been in the island since 1865, as there is a specimen in the Mann and Brigham collection at the Bernice Pauahi — Bishop Museum, under the name of C longirostrata. The Mann and Brigham plants were collected in 1865. The seeds of this a species are yellowish. This species and C. incana have spread much more rapidly than any of the other species, as they can be found almost anywhere in the neighborhood of Honolulu. It is an East Indian species, not previously recorded as occur. q ring in the Islands. April 4 (2071). Crotalaria spectabilis Roth, Nov. Pl. Sp. 341. 1821. Crotalaria sericea Retz. Obs. Bot. 3:26. 1779-91, not Burm. f. Fl. Ind. 156. 1768. | Collected in Nuuanu valley along the roadside, and in open 4 lots in the northwestern part of Honolulu. It is herbaceous, — with stout, branching, glaucous stems. The flowers are large, an inch or more in length, bright yellow. The seeds are large, 3 blue-black. March 29 (2029); original locality, ‘ India occidentali.” ERYTHRINA L. Sp. Pl. 706. 1753. Erythrina monosperma Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 486, pi. 114. i 1830. 7 This, the. Wiliwili” tree of the natives, is rather a 1 looking object when in full bloom, although very handsome. The large flowers, which grow in dense clusters on the ends of 3 the leafless branches, are either of a brick red or pale yellow - r Nene Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLAx DS. 835 Color. The leaves do not appear, as a rule, until after the flowers have dropped. There are a number of trees on the _ grassy slopes along the Hanapepe river, Kauai. It was not seen on Oahu. June 24 (2445). INDIGOFERA L. Sp. Pl. 751. 17538. Indigofera anil L. Mant. 272. 1767. Common in the valleys and on the slopes back of Honolulu. The specimen in the Mann and Brigham collection, at the Ber- nice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu, is not this species as labeled, but probably J. tinctoria, as it has a straight pod. J. tinctoria, according to Hillebrand, has been introduced but was not seen by me. March 21 (1967); original locality, *‘in Indiis.” MEDICAGO L. Sp. Pl. 778. 1753. § Medicago intertexta MILL. Gard. Dict. Ed. 8. No. 4. 1768. Rather common about Honolulu, in yards, gardens, and grassy places along the streets, but not noticed at any distance from cultivated land. Flowers small, yellow. The creeping stems are often three or four feet long. Not recorded as growing in the Hawaiian Islands. The Index Kewensis says that M. inter- _ texta WILLD. Sp. Pl. 3: 1411, is equal to M. ciliaris CrocKk., a name which has been used four times in the genus. Whatever the latter plant may be, M. intertexta of Willdenow is identical With Miller's plant, and was not published as a new species, as Can readily be seen by referring to the Species Plantarum, where Willdenow says: Medica leguminibus cochleatis spin- _ osissimus, aculeis utrinque tendentibus, Mill. Dict. n. 4.” March 22 (1982). MEIBOMIA Apans. Fam. Pl. 2:509. 1763. [Pleurobolus Sr. HIL. Bull. Soc. Philom. 1812, 192. 1812.] [Desmodium Desy. Journ. Bot. 3:122. 1813. Meibomia triflora (L.) KUNTZE, Rev. Gen. Pl. 197. 1891. Hedysarum triflorum L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1057. 1763. Desmodium triflorum DC. Prodr. 2: 334. 1825. This diminutive species must be much more common than formerly. Hillebrand says that it grows on the Waikiki _ Plains near Honolulu, and probably elsewhere, in spring.” It 836 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. seems to be most abundant on hot, dry slopes, as-around Salt Lake and Diamond Head. Also common in moist ground in Pauoa valley, where specimens were collected. Noticed also on Kauai, near Hanapepe, where it grew along the roadside, — There is a superficial resemblance between it and Bl striata. Map 16 (2323); original locality, in Indiis.” ia Meibomia uncinata (Jacg.) Kunze, Rev. Gen, P. 197. 1891. Hedysarum uncinatum Jacg. Hort. Schoenb. 3: pl. 298, 1798. Desmodium uncinatum DO. Prodr. 2: 331. 1825. Abundant in rich, damp ground, ranging from the valleys near Honolulu, to an elevation of 2000 feet or more, on Tanta- lus. An erect or reclining perennial herb, with white or purple tinged, rather large flowers. March 21 (1968). PHASEOLUS L. Sp. Pl. 723. 1753. Phaseolus semierectus L. Mant. 100. 1767. Common in rich ground about Honolulu, especially at the northern base of Punchbowl. A long stemmed, herbaceous plant, with dark red flowers, which open fully only in the after- noon. A lower and stouter form (2096), was collected onthe beach at Diamond Head. No specimens of P. trusillensis were found, which is recorded as growing at Diamond Head. a March 25 (1997); original locality, ‘‘in America calidiore.” OXALIDACEAE. OXALIS L. Sp. Pl. 433. 1753. Oxalis corymbosa DC. Prodr. 1:696, 1824. Oralis martiana Zucc. Denkschr. Akad. Muench. 9: 144. 1823-23. This handsome species has become well established in the neighborhood of Hcnolulu, and is even found on the outskirts of the forest. In the matter of nomenclature, I have followed : the Index Kewensis, the author of which probably has data to prove that the specific name corymbosa was published previous to the apearance of Zuccarini’s name, which, accepting this view, must have been published during the latter part of 1824. April 9 (2098); original locality, ‘‘in ins. Borboniae et Mau- ritii.” Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 837 Oxalis corniculata L. Sp. Pl. 435. 1753. A common plant in the streets and gardens of Honolulu, but it has also found its way into the lower forest, and grows lux- uriantly in the rich soil. A prostrate, spreading plant, with wirey branches. April 19 (2159); original locality, in Italia, Sicilia.” ZYGOPHYLLACEAE. TRIBULUS L. Sp. Pl. 887. 1753. Tribulus cistoides L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 703. 1763. Abundant in sand at Diamond Head, and at other places near the beach. It is found on all of the islands of the group. A handsome species, but not pleasant to handle, on account of the sharp spines on the fruit. March 28 (2018); original locality, ‘‘in America calidiore.” RUTACEAE. PELEA A Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 339. 1854. In the Index Kewensis, Pelea is united with Melicope, and if rightly so, the latter name has precedence, and must be used. But in Hillebrand’s discussion, which is probably correct, he points out enough differences to keep the Hawaiian plants dis- _ tinct. He says: From Melicope, on the other hand, they are distinguished, aside from the valvate aestivation of the petals, by the terminal style, not basal or lateral as in that genus, and by the stigma, which is capitate in Melicope, but divided into four filiform branches in Pelea.” Pelea anisata Mann, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 10:314. 1866. The leaves of the Mokehana,“ as this species is called by the natives, are used for making a mixture for coughs and _ colds, On the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, a low, shrubby form was collected, which answers very well to the original description: In general appearance resembling P. oblongi- _ folia, but perfectly distinguished by its overpowering anisate odor when the leaves are bruised or the bark peeled off. * * * Leaves elongated oval or olong, obtuse, somewhat attenuate at the base, two to seven inches long, one to two inches wide.” At this place the two species were growing close together, and _ resembled each other very closely. In a cajion at the head of 838 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the main tributary of the Hanapepe river, a somewhat diner 2 ent form was collected. The specimens are from a tree fifteen feet high. The leaves are large, with rounded or retuse apex, the largest four inches wide and six inches long. A number of trees were noticed in the vicinity. The species has been found 4 only on Kauai. July to October (2609). Pelea auriculaefolia A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 543, pl. 86. 1854. Platydesma auriculacfolia Hittesr. Fl. Haw. IS. 72. 1888. Hillebrand has transferred this species to the genus at- desma, but seemingly without good reason. He indicates that he has specimens of this species from the island of Hawall, from the ‘‘Kohala range above Waimea (Hbd,)” and from „woods of Laupahoehoe,” collected by Lydgate. He says, the description of the fruit according to Gray.“ Heevidently — never saw a fruiting specimen, and one would think had never consulted the excellent plate in the atlas of the Botany of the Exploring Expedition, or the original description. Yet, speak- ing of Pelea sandwicensis, he says: In Gray’s figure, the cap- — sule is not correctly given, in fact it hardly differs there from that of P. volcanica on the next plate.” Whatever inaccuracies — there may be in this figure, no one should for an instant con- q sider the two figures very similar, as the shape and size of the capsules is noticeably different. The inflorescence of Platydes- — ma is very different from that of Pelea, and the flowers, so far as I have observed, are much larger. The difference between the fruit of the two genera is so marked, that a blind man 4 could readily distinguish them by the touch. The explanation for this slip on the part of Hillebrand, must be that he had specimens of an undescribed Platydesma, and erroneously ferred it to Pelea auriculaefolia. ‘a Pelea clusiaefolia A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 340. pl. 85. 1854. 5 Clusia sessilis H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 80. 1832, not Forst. 1 A species which is common in the type locality. mountains behind Honolulu, Oahu.“ Usually a small tree, but sometimes shrubby. In my specimens, the leaves are all opposite Some of the specimens, No. 2303, which are in flower only, were dis- tributed as Peleu Sandwicensis.” Comparison with the origi- nal description, and with the plate, convince me that they are 4 P. clusiaefolia. May to November (2308, 2348). 4 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 839 Pelea cruciata n. sp. (Plate XLVIIL) A small tree, ten to fifteen feet high, with stout trunk and rough bark; branches spreading, stout, with rough, grayish bark, the young growing portions pubescent with tawny hairs; leaves opposite, on stout angled petioles of about an inch in length, thick, elliptical, rounded at both ends, or somewhat contracted at the base, often slightly notched at the upper end, three to five inches long, two to three inches wide, shortly pubescent above with scattered hairs, covered below, espe-. cially on the stout midrib, with tawny hairs; secondary veins parallel, at right angles to the midrib, and losing themselves near the margin in the wavy, intramarginal nerve; veinlets prominent; peduncles usually situated below the leaves in the axils of fallen leaves, less than half an inch long, stout, _ grooved, two or three flowered; mature capsule with thick Walls, deeply four parted, the lobes curved, the whole capsule shaped much like a Swiss cross, with a diameter of an inch. The type is No. 2809, collected at 4000 feet on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai. It was growing in the forest along the banks of a stream. At first it was thought referable to E. kau- _ aiensis Mann, but Mann's description calls for a small cap- _ sule,” while these are large. It is doubtful whether Hille- brand's description of P. kauaiensis applies to the true plant, as there is considerable difference between his and Mann's descriptions. Mann's type came from Kauai, on the mount- ains above Waimea, at the elevation of 3000 feet,” but there is nothing to indicate whether it was from the same locality as mine, namely, between the forks of the Waimea river, or on the plateau of Halemanu, west of the Waimea, where Hillebrand's specimens were collected by Knudsen. Hillebrand says that the leaves bear a suspicious resemblance to P. ( Melicope) barbigera, from the same region.” Pelea microcarpa n. sp. (Plate XLIX.) A small tree, about ten feet high, with moderately rough, _ grayish bark; loosely branched above, the slender branches 3 more or less curved upwards, only the short growing ends _ pubescent; leaves in threes, near the ends of the branches, on _plano.convex petioles of almost an inch in length, spatulate- 4 obovate, or merely obovate, obtuse or retuse at the apex, glab- rous above, noticeably pubescent below only on the midrib; flowers all on the naked branches, in the axils of fallen leaves; _ peduncles very short, two to three flowered; pedicels stoutish, 840 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. about twice the length of the peduncle; flowers not seen; cap- sule small, cuboid, not exteeding four lines in diameter, merely — notched or slightly lobed. Type number 2636, collected at an elevation of 4000 feet, on Kaholuamano, above Waimea, Kauai, in damp woods, where it is not uncommon. Also collected on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, at an elevation of 3500 feet; The specimens from the latter place have the leaves shorter, and consequently more obovate than those from Kaholuamano. There is also more pubescence on the under side, and the petioles are some- what ciliate. The increase of pubescence is not constant, as it is more marked on the younger than on the older leaves. Pelea oblongifolia A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:343. 1854. 8 Specimens referable to this species, were collected on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. It is a shrubby plant, with — slender branches, and occurs as scattered individuals near the edge of the plateau. 3 October 2 (2869). Pelea rotundifolia A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:344, pl. 37. 1854. This shrubby species is not uncommon at the type locality, _ Oahu, mountains behind Honolulu,” but only a few speci- — mens were collected. Very few bushes were in either flower or fruit. May 23 (2352). Pelea sapotaefolia Mann, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 10: 312. 1866? 2 Oa the edge of the plateau above Waimea Kauai, were col- lected specimens of the variety beta of Hillebrand. They have been compared with specimens in the Gray herbarium, and pro- nounced identical with specimens from both Mann & Brigham and Hillebrand. That this variety is specifically distinct from P. sapotaefolia, is pretty evident, but as my specimens have only young flowers, and as I have not seen specimens of P sap- — otaefolia, it is deemed best not to propose a specific name until better data are obtained. It is a small tree, freely and regu- larly branching above. The leaves are opposite, compara tively small, thin, broadly obovate, obtuse, abruptly narrowed below, on petioles of a half inch in length. The flowers appear to be smaller than those of P. sapotaefolia. One old capsule + = 2 1 2 a a all 1 1 —· AA ne ee a a ld Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 841 was found on the tree, but unfortunately it dropped to the ground, and could not be found in the dense tangle of ferns and weeds which were growing at the foot of the tree. From what I recollect of it, it was entirely too deeply lobed to belong to the same section as P. sapotaefolia. Pelea waialealae Wawra, Flora, (II) 31:108. 1873. One of the smallest as well as handsomest species. It is a _ shrub, three or four feet high, and grows in clumps. The stems are slender, simple below, corymbosely branching above the branches ascending. The leaves can hardly be called thin - coriaceous,” as Hillebrand translates it. Wawraand the writer appear to be the only botanists who have collected it. In the bog lat the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, it is plentiful. _ Wawra collected his type on the plateau des Waialeale, 2170.“ August 21 (2733). PLATYDESMA MANN, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. | 10317. 1866. 7 Flatydesma campanulata MANN, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 10: 317. 1866. _ Specimens were collected at the type locality, Oahu, on the mountains behind Honolulu, at middle heights. M. & B. 94” Hillebrand's citation of the publication of this species is wrong, and his description is not good. My specimens do not work out well according to his description, but by using the original description of Mann, the plants are found to be quite iden- tical. May 28 (2373). Platydesma rostrata HILLeBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 72. 1888. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, were col- tected two or three specimens which may belong to this species, unless they represent an undescribed one. Hillebrand’s descrip- tion of “ leaves opposite, subsessile, linear-oblong, 12-16“ x 2-3’, of nearly even width from the suddenly rounded base to the bluntly acuminate apex, dark green, glabrous,” applies tolera- bly well. The leaves are crowded on the ends of the branches, and the majority of them are inclined to be pointed. There is 0 uite a difference though, in the size of the flowers. The de- Seription of P. rostrata calls for petals 5'’,” while on my speci- mens they are an inch in length. No more than two or three 842 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a in shortly pedunculate cymose clusters.” The type was col- 4 lected on Kauai by Knudsen, probably on Halemanu, west ot the Hanapepe river. 4 July 23 (2610a). q q MELIACEAE. MELI L. Sp. Pl. 884. 1753. Melia azederach L. Sp. Pl. 384. 1753. A number of trees are found growing in Pauoa valley, bann. and also in Hanapepe valley, Kauai. March to May (2006); original locality, in Syria.” 3 “i EUPHORBIACEAE. ALEURITES Forst. Char. Gen. 3: pl. 56. 1776. Aleurites moluccana (L.) WILLD. Sp. Pl. 4:590. 1805. 4 Jatropha moluecana L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1428. 1763. A This is the Kukui,” one of the largest, as well as the most common tree of the lower forest zore. In fact, it is the indi- cator of the upper limit of this zone, as it is never found above it. It is a large tree, with heavy, far spreading limbs. Th 1 light green leaves make it a very conspicuous object, especially as à number of trees always grow together, usually in ravine 4 It is a very useful tree to the natives of Polynesia, for, acco * ing to Hillebrand, the nuts, strung together on sticks, served the natives for candles to light their houses, whence the Englis 1 name Candle- nut tree. The gum which it exhudes seems also to have been in use. Of the acrid juice contained in the fleshy covering of the fruit, they prepared a black dye, which like- wise served to tattoo their skins. The expressed oil of the nuts, besides being useful for burning in lamps, makes a good paint oil.” 9 June 24 (2481); original locality, ‘‘in Moluccis, Zeylonia.” ANTIDESMA L. Sp. Pl. 1027. 1753. ay 1 Antidesma platyphyllum MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. a 202. 1867. 1 Hillebrand has two leaf characters which do not appear i the specimens of this collection. They are ‘‘punctato-papi 7 lose,” and ‘‘ youngest leaves speckled with a peltato-stellat Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 843 _ pubescence.” Mann's original description says they are ‘‘glab- ris,” and sol find them. Of the paniculis ferrugineo-puberu- lis,” I find traces only in the pistillate specimens, but the inflorescence of the staminate specimens is quite glabrous. A small tree, with grayish bark, collected on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, and also on the ridges above Wai- mea, between the forks of the Waimea river. It occurs on the islands of ‘‘ Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Kauai.” July to October (2497). CLAOXYLON A. Juss. Euph. Tent. 43, pl. 14. 1824. Claoxylonttomentosum (HILLEBR. ) Claozylon sandwicenze var. tomentosum HILLxUn. Fl. Haw. Is. 299. 1888. These Kauai specimens are certainly distinct from C. sand- wicense. The leaves are large, usually elliptical, and slightly notched at each end, or the younger ones obovate. They are very scabrous and papillose above, thickly pubescent beneath, especially along the veins, with appressed, curved, yellow hairs. Collected on the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. Knudsen’s and Wawra’s specimens, which are Hille- brand's type of variety tomentosa, came from the plateau of Halemanu, on the opposite side of the Waimea river. Oetober 15 (2878). Claoxylon. At the head of the valley opposite Gay & Robinson's _ Hanapepe valley house, island of Kauai, were collected speci- mens which perhaps are referable to C. sandwicense, which is described as follows by Hillebrand. A small, soft wooded tree or shrub, 10-12 feet high, with pale, spreading branches, the youngest shoots tomentose but soon glabrate. Leaves _ obovate-oblong, 4-7 X23“, on petioles of 1-2’, shortly acu- minate or obtuse, crenate serrate with callous uncinate teeth, _ contracted at the base, stiff membranaceous, lurid green, _ scabro-papillose but glabrate.” Minor points of difference in my specimens are, shorter petioles, and leaves pubescent be- - neath with scattered white hairs. They are never acuminate, but rounded, or slightly pointed at the apex. The inflores- _ cence seems to be injured, as the flowers are imperfect. July 23 (2604). 844 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. EUPHORBIA L. Sp. Pl. 450. 1783. Euphorbia atrococea n. sp. (Plate L.) = A small tree, about ten feet high, with brownish bark; e branching above; secondary branches numerous, with moder ately long internodes, glabrous; leaves numerous, but not a crowded, narrowly obovate, the largest an inch and a half long, five-sixteenths of an inch wide, dull green, coriaceous, en- tire, midrib prominent, but veins obscure; petioles an eighth of an inch in length; stipules very short, broadly triangular, — slightly fringed; flowers axillary, or a few terminal, numerous on short peduncles; capsule black or dark brown, pubescent, — slightly keeled, on nodding stalks which are slightly longer | than the pedicels; seeds pitted and rugose. , A species obviously related to E. celastroides, but the bre 3 with shorter internodes, and the capsule dark and pubescent, and likewise keeled. It is never found below an elevation c 3000 feet, while E. celastroides is a plant of low elevations. The type is No. 2500, collected July 4th, on the ridge west of me Hauapepe river. Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. 4 On Kaholuamano, above Waimea, was collected a form, No. 2858, which is referable to this species. The leaves are fewer, 4 shorter, broader, darker green, with veins more prominent, but it has the same dark, pubescent capsule. A well marked form, growing at an elevation of 4000 feet, near the edge ot 3 the woods. Euphorbia celastroides Borss. DC. Prodr. 15: Part 2, 1. 1862. ei A small tree, with short trunk; loosely branching. The sec ondary or young branches are stiff, with short internodes. — These specimens, which answer very well to the description E. celastroides, were collected on a sparsely wooded slope z 1 the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of 700 feet. conclusive evidence that it is the same as Boissier's plant, is the fact that the types were collected on Niihau and Kauai oy 7 Remy. Plants which occur on both Kauai and Niihau, must necessarily be only those which grow at low elevations, a = Niihau nowhere has an elevation of more than 1000 feet. Noth- ing like it was seen on Oahu, although Hillebrand records it from the valley of Niu. : June 24 (2429). N 57 * S N Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 845 Euphorbia clusiaefolia H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 95. 1832. Hillebrand says that this species is an ‘‘ erect shrub, 3-6 feet high, with stiff branches.” He is said to have visited all the larger islands, penetrating to the inmost recesses of their deep- est and darkest ravines, and climbing to the summits of their loftiest mountains,” yet it seems strange that he should make such an erroneous statement of a species which is common on the mountains back of Honolulu. It is by no means an erect shrub, but the soft branches are procumbent or reclining, and there is no trace of stiffness about them. To describe them as sarmentose would be much nearer the truth. Collected at 2500 feet elevation, on Konahuanui, Oahu. Also seen on Waiolani, at the same elevation. May 23 (2345); from the original locality. Euphorbia cordata MEYEN, Reise, 2:150. 1843. A low shrub, with short, gnarled stems and branches. The leaves are crowded, thick, orbicular. It appears to grow only in dry, hot places. Collected at Diamond Head, Oahu March 28 (2019); from the original locality. Euphorbia geniculata ORTEGA, Nov. Rar. Pl. Hort. Matr. Dec. 18. 1797. : Collected along the roadside in lower Nuuanu valley, Oahu, and in cultivated ground at Waimea, Kauai. It appears to be well established. Hillebrand says it appeared in gardens be- fore his departure. March to October (2035); original locality, tropical America. Euphorbia multiformis Gaup.; H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 95. 1832. That Gaudichaud had truly a plant of many forms in view, is evinced by these remarks by Hooker & Arnott: If we be right in referring this to the plant alluded to by Gaudichaud, it must be a very variable species; that botanist remarking that in ele- vated situations it forms a small tree, the trunk of which is three or four inches in diameter; but, in descending is found smaller, till at last, in low cultivated places, it is only suffruti- cose, or even herbaceous.” Hooker & Arnott give Gaudichaud the credit of the name, but say ‘‘absque descriptione,” which fact simplifies matters very much, for there can be no doubt about the plant which they describe and credit to Gaudichaud. Their plant came from Oahu, and apparently none of the other 846 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. forms occur there, except E. celastroides, recorded from the re- mote valley of Niu, into which it is hardly possible that Lax a & Coolie penetrated. It is plentiful about the rocky slopes of Nuuanu Pali, and here is where Lay & Coolie probably col- lected their specimens. As described by Hillebrand, it is a ‘glabrous shrub, 2-5 feet high.“ a April 28 (2199). Euphorbia pilulifera L. Sp. Pl. 454. 175g. An introduced species, which is very common in the “‘low- — land zone.” It occurs as a dwarf in the hot and dry regions about Salt Lake and Diamond Head, and is also found growing luxuriantly in moist, cultivated ground. March to August (1980); original locality, ‘*in India.“ Euphorbia rivularis n. sp. (Plate LL) A shrub, five or six feet high, simple below, with a stem al- ; most an inch in diameter; branches loose, spreading, somewhat drooping, with short internodes; leaves regularly opposite. standing at right angles to the branch, except the ultimate ones, which extend forward, oblong, usually slightly curved, 4 two inches long, six-sixteenths of an inch wide, glabrous, pale green above, lighter beneath, blunt and rounded at the end and sometimes slightly retuse, somewhat narrowed and unequal ~ sided at the base; veins not prominent, at acute angles to the midrib; petioles an eighth of an inch in length; stipules low, broadly triangular or lunate, not fringed; inflorescence several flowered; flowers on slender, angled pedicels; capsule very 4 short stalked, erect, glabrous. 5 The type is No. 2441, collected on thé banks of the Hanapepe 4 river, Kauai, at an elevation of about 600 feet. A species ap- 4 parently related to E. celastroides, but of a very different habit. It is much smaller, more simple, and grows on rocks overhang- 2 ing the river. It is unique on account of the long, re. “a opposite leaves. Euphorbia sparsiflora n. sp. (Plate LIZ.) A glabrous shrub, ten inches to two feet high; stems slender, | ig branched, the branches ascending; bark grayish, or light brown; leaves obovate, evenly narrowed to a wedge- shaped b base, rounded and blunt. at the end, an inch or less in eng . conspicuous; Stipules low, broadly ovate, eee frings ; 3 flowers few, solitary in the upper axils; pedicels very short and slender; capsule smooth, nodding, on a short, slender stalk, Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 847 The type is No, 2699, collected at an elevation of 3000 feet, in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai. In some re- spects it resembles E. multiſormis, but appears to be distinct. The erect stems and branches are often partly covered with moss and other swamp vegetation. Specimens were distributed under the name of Euphorbia palustris, but as that name is pre- occupied, the appropriate one of sparsijflora is now substituted. ‘PHYLLANTHUS L. Sp. Pl. 981. 1753. Phyllanthus sand wieensis Mug. Arg. Linnaea, 32:31. 1863. Not uncommon on the grassy slopes of the Pali, Oahu. It is usually decumbent, due, no doubt, to the high winds which are prevalent there. Also collected on the ridge west of the Han- apepe river, Kauai. Here it was growing in the woods, at an elevation of 3000 feet. It is a shrub, ten inches to two feet high. Hillebrand cites this species as published in DC. Prod- romus, 15: Part 2, 389. April to August (2196). ILICACEAE, BYRONIA Expr. Ann. Wien. Mus. 1: 184. 1836. Byronia anomala (H. & A.) Ilex ? anomala H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 111, pl. 25. 1832. Reference to the plate of ler? anomala, in the Botany Beechy, and to that of Byronia sandwicensis in the atlas of the Botany of the U.S. Exploring Expedition, shows that two very distinct plants are figured. The plant here taken up is the only form found on Oahu, and on that island is where Lay & Coolie obtained the type of Hooker & Arnott’s species. I do not know whether Endlicher based his Byronia sandwiscensis upon the same plant or not, but in either case, the specific name of sandwicensis cannot be applied to this Oahu plant, to which the name anomala belongs., It is shrubby rather than arborescent, with short crowded branches. ‘The leaves are thick, broadly obovate-spatulate, or stout, margined petioles, and crowded near the ends of the branches. The inflorescence is practically terminal and compact. Collected on the slopes of Konahuanui, Oahu, at elevations of 2000 to 3000 feet. May to October (2242); from the original locality. 848 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, Byronia sandwicensis Expt. Ann, Mus. Wien. 1:184. 1836. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an eleva- tion of 8000 feet, specimens were collected which seem to bo identical with those of the U. S. Exploring Expedition, plate 26. They were obtained from a small much branched tree. which differs from B. anomala in being more branched, the leaves smaller and more scattered, and the inflorescence is very different. Instead of being almost terminal and ascending, t is axillary, the peduncles and pedicels more widely spreading. and not so stout, The flowers are amaller, and the fruit is narrower and longer. ; June 28 (2455). Byronia sandwicensis ENDL. var. a This form is hardly separable from the above, yet is — enough in localities where it occurs. It differs in being less branched, has more crowded leaves nearly elliptical in out- line, instead of obovate, and a more copious inflorescence. In the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, it is found as a low shrub, with ascending branches, while above Waimea, on the plateau, it is a larger bush, with more spreading branches. August to October (2735). 1 CELASTRACEAE. i - PERROTTETIA H. B. K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 7: 78, 1% 622. 1825. Perrottetia sandwicensis A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. expe, 15: 291, pl. 24. 1854. 4 Collected at the type locality, ‘‘on mountains behind Hono- lulu, Oahu.” It is common on the lower slopes of Konahuanui. and also on the island of Kauai. On the latter island it ranges as high as 4000 feet, but is also found in the lower woods along the Hanapepe river. A small tree, with light green, red - 2 veined shining leaves. . — 7 October 29 (2808). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 849 SAPINDACEAE. CARDIOSPERMUM L. Sp. Pl. 366. 1753. Cardiospermum microcarpum H. B. K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. f 5: 104. 1821. Collected on grassy slopes at au elevation of about 500 feet, in Hanapepe valley, Kauai. All of the plants observed belong to this species, which Hillebrand has united with G. halicac- abum. July 8 (2529); original locality, in humidis prope S. Fer- nando de Atabapo (Missiones des Orinoco).“ 4 DODONAEA L. Systema, Ed. 13, 299. 1774. Dodonaea eriocarpa SmirH, Rees Cyel. 12. On the bare slopes between the forks of the Waimea river, Kauai, is a very common plant, which is referable to this spe- _ cies. The bushes vary in size from two to four feet, with as- _ scending branches. The leaves are thick, elliptical-lanceolate, and more or less pubescent on both sides. Notwithstanding the abundance of bushes, only a few of them were in flower, and so far as can be ascertained without fruit, they answer to the description of D. eriocarpa, as given by Hillebrand. September 30 (2846). Dodonaea viscosa L. Systema, Ed. 13, 299. 1774. As this species is now known, it seems likely that it is an aggregate of several good species. This particular form, which Was collected above Waimea, Kauai, at elevations of 3000 to 4000 feet, is a tree fifteen feet high, with slender, wide-spread- ing branches. The leaves are two to four inches long, ellipti- cCal-lanceolate, on short petioles, thin, shining, and with mar- gins somewhat undulate. The young leaves are viscid. October 8 (2871). RHAMNACEAE. ALPHITONIA RREISSERK.; ENDL. — Pl. 1098. 1840. Alphitonia ponderosa HILLABR. Fl. Haw. Is. 81. 1888. Alphitonia excelsa MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 161. 1867, not Reissek. q Speaking of this species, Hillebrand says: Waimea, Kauai, _ where it attains a greater height than any other tree on that 850 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. island (Knudsen).” It is a conspicuous object in the forest on account of the dense brick-red tomentum, which covers the under sides of the young leaves, as well as the flower buds The mature leaves are rather thick, dark green and shining above, with prominent veins, while below they are covered with short, white hairs, which contain a trace of red along the midrib. It is common on the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, but is by no means the largest tree in that vicinity, as several other species attain a greater height, as well as a greater thickness of trank. August 22 (2748). ELAEOCARPACEAE. ELAEOCARPUS L. Sp. Pl. 515. 1753. Elaeocarpus bifidus H. & A. Bot Beechy, 110, pl. 24. 1832. A common tree in the lower and middle forest regions of Oahu and Kauai. On Kauai, it is found from the lower forest limit in Hanapepe valley, to an elevation of 4000 feet above Waimea. The type was collected by Lay & Coolie on the moun- tains back of Honolulu, where it is abundant. May to July (2374). MALVACEAE. ’ HIBISCUS L. Sp. Pl. 693. 1753. Hibiscus abelmoschus L. Sp. Pl. 696. 1753. The entire leaved form of this species was collected in Han- apepe valley, Kauai, a short distance below the falls. There is no record of its occurrence on the Islands. How it happened = to be brought into such an out of the way place is not known, although the irrigating ditch which leads to the Makaweli plantations, some six or eight miles below, may have some- thing to do with its dispersal. It was found at only one place, in a thick growth of grass, ferns, and other vegetation, under and near the flume where the ditch crosses a littleravine. The seeds must have been carried there in some way while the ditch was being constructed, or during repairs. The long hairs on the herbaceous stems are very Sharp, having somewhat the a nature of those on nettle plants. July to October (2553); original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” Heller; PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 851 Hibiseus arnottianus A. Gray. Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:176. 1854. Gray describes this as a shrubby species, several feet in height, glabrous throughout, especially the leaves,” and says it was collected on the Kaala mountains behind Honolulu, Oahu.” This is a very strange statement, as Mt. Kaalais more than twenty miles northwest of Honolulu. On the heights of Pauoa, just back of Honolulu, where very likely the specimens of Lay & Coolie, as well as those of the Exploring Expedition were collected, I saw what passes for this species in Hille- brand’s Flora. The time was early in November, at the end of the flowering season, when nearly all of the flowers had fallen, and were rotting on the ground beneath the trees. It is asmall tree, or large shrub, with a short trunk, which branches free- ly. The leaves are broadly ovate, entire, obtuse, or slightly pointed, and rather prominently five nerved. Instead of being smooth, the growing parts, at least, are pubescent with ful- vous, stellate hairs. The calyx is broadly cylindrical, of an even width throughout, pubescent. The pubescence is of two kinds, some of the hairs being in short stellate tufts, while others are several times longer, and more like spines. The calyx lobes are short, slender pointed, from a broad triangular base. The seven involucral bracts are more than half the length of the calyx. The large white flowers are decidedly pubescent on the outside. The only thing about this plant, so far as I can find, which answers to the description of H. arnottianus by either Gray or Hillebrand, is the long staminal column. Gray's type is a specimen collected by Diell, presumably at Byron's Bay, island of Hawaii, and the flowers are said to be red. Judging from the literature at hand, Gray, in his description, must have confused this white flowered Oahu form with the red flowered one since described by Hillebrand as Hibiscus Kokio. However matters may be, the type is the plant collected by Diell, and it now seems as though the Oahu plant is an undescribed species. Hibiscus Waimeae n. sp. (Plate LIII.) A tree, twenty or twenty-five feet high, with close gray bark; trunk with a diameter of six inches or more, branched only near the top; branches far spreading and slightly drooping; leaves almost orbicular, with an average diameter of two inches, pale green, crenate, pubescent on both sides, that of the upper side scattered and short, that of the lower side very close and thick, velvety to the touch; petioles pubescent, about half the 852 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. length of the leaves; stipules small, subulate; flowers axil- lary, near the ends of the branches, large, white, or tinged with pink, on pubescent pedicels, which are jointed near the end; involucral bracts seven in number, linear-lanceolate, a half inch in length; calyx broadly tubular, somewhat inflated above, an inch and a half in length, short pubescent on the outside, wooly within, the teeth ovate-lanceolate, a half inch in length; petals five to six inches in length, including an ex- serted claw of two inches, one and a half to two inches wide, prominently veined, pubescent on the outside; staminal column rather stout, long exserted, red; stamens numerous, filaments slender, an inch in length, anthers red; styles five, slender, ascending, the stigmas capitate, red. A well marked species, united by Hillebrand with the Oahu plant which he calls Hibiscus arnottianus. Although closely — related to that plant, it differs in numerous particulars. It is a much larger tree, with smaller leaves, of a different shape and texture. The pubescence is somewhat stellate, as indeed it seems to be in all of the Hawaiian plants. The type is No. 2785, collected at the base of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. “4 Hibiscus youngianus Gaup.; H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 79. 1832. This species is mentioned by Gaudichaud, in Bot. Voy. Uranie, but is not described. The first description appears to be by Hooker & Arnott, who credit the species to Gaudichaud- Its natural habitat is in the marshes at no great distance from the coast, and is described by Hillebrand as an erect, spar- ingly branched undershrub, 2-3 feet high.” Specimens were collected in upper Pauoa valley, Oahu, growing in a little ravine, where it attained a height of ten feet, bearing a few. branches near the top. It was also seen as a bush five or six feet high, in marshes near Pearl City. It is found only on Oahu. April to June (2007). MALVASTRUM A. Gray. Mem. Am. Acad. (II) 4.21. 1848. = Malvastrum americanum (L.) Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. Surv. 38. 1859. a Malva americana L. Sp. Pl. 687. 1753. Malvastrum tricuspidatum A. GRAY, Pl. Wright. 1: 16. 1852. 2 This is one of the most common weeds about dwellings and in cultivated ground. It was seen on both Oahu and Kauai. April to August (2136); original locality, ‘‘in America.” * aS ie ee Ole Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 853 PARITIUM A. Juss.; St. HIL. Fl. Bras. Mer. 1: 255. 1827. Paritium tiliaceum (L.) St. HIL. Fl. Bras. Mer. 1:256. 1827. Hibiscus tiliaceus L. Sp. Pl. 694. 1753. „Hau“ tree, is one of the names which a stranger first hears at Honolulu, when native plants are mentioned. The growth of this plant is rather peculiar. Rarely, at least when growing wild, is it found as a tree with large trunk and ascending branches. Its usual manner of growth is much like that of the banyan tree. The main branches perhaps ascend for a short distance, then turn off at a right angle, and soon descend to the ground, to creep along for some distance, and then again as- cend, or send off smaller branches. The general impression which it gives, is that of a tangle of vine-like branches, with no apparent beginning orend. The flowers are large, and look much like those of a Hibiscus, and are bright yellow, with a dark brown centre. When in full bloom, a Hau thicket is a beautiful sight. The species is common in the valleys and on open slopes on both Oahu and Kauai. April to July (2203); original locality, in Indiis.” SIDA L. Sp. Pl. 683 1753. Sida acuta Burm. f. Fl. Ind. 147. 1768. Sida carpinifolia L. f. Suppl. 307. 1881, fide Index Kewensis. ; In Hanapepe valley, Kauai, grows a plant referable to this species. From the majority of the specimens of S acuta in the herbarium of Columbia University, it differs in having shorter _ pedicels, and more pubescence on the ends of the branches. It is very abundant along the river banks from Gay & Robin- sSon's house to the falls, and apparently extends beyond, along the main branch of the river. It is a rather stiff plant, one to two feet high, with woody stem and branches. June 24 (2424). Sida angustifolia Mitt. Gard. Dict. Ed. 8, No. 3. 1762. This plant is called Sida spinosa by Hillebrand. who says: Near Honolulu, at the base of Punchbowl hill.” It is still 4 very abundant about Punchbowl, but has spread considerably, and now is found in many localities about Honolulu. April 25 (2200). 854 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Sida fallax WaLP. Nov. Act. Nat. Cur. 19: Suppl. 1, 306. aq 1843. ay A species which is common on the lee side of Oahu, spe- cially about Diamond Head, where it was collected by the botanists of the U. S. Exploring Expedition. In none of the descriptions of Sida, so far as I have observed, is there refer- ence to the unequal sided petals which is so characteristic of the Hawaiian plants. They are erosely notched, the sinus be- ing quite broad. The flowers are often over an inch in diam eter, orange yellow. The leaf forms are variable, though gen- erally broadly ovate, and the end either pointed or rounded. — The canescent pubescence is variable too, but always present, 9 ; usually decidedly so. a Sida meyeniana Wap. Nov. Act. Nat. Cur. 19: Suppl. 1, 307. 1843. 8 Plants referable to this species were noticed at various places in Hanapepe valley, Kauai (2717). It is a slender bush, six to eight feet high, with large, orange- colored flowers, and lignjt green leaves. The leaves are broadly ovate, rather large, un- equally serrate, grayish underneath with very short, stellate — hairs. The calyx lobes are ovate, acute, marked for half their length by a broad white rib, and are somewhat pubescent on the outside, with the inside of the tips wooly. The young stems, petioles, and pedicels, are covered with bunches of wok: 4 late hairs. 1 Another very different form, or rather two forms, is No. 2197. The first one was collected at the Nuuanu Pali. Oahu. It is a low, prostrate, much branched shrub, with small. broadly ovate or almost orbicular leaves, which are bright — green on both sides, and only the younger ones pubescent. — Later, specimens were collected in Waialae valley, and includ- ed under this number. These specimens were from an erect, branching bush, four or five feet high. The leaves are also bright green on both sides, broadly lanceolate, with a base somewhat cuneate. None of these specimens agree very well with either Gray or Hillebrand’s descriptions of Sida meyeni- — ana, nor does there seem to be any other described Hawaiian species to which they can be referred. * Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, 855. Sida rhombifolia L. Sp. Pl. 684. 1753. Common about Honolulu, in waste ground. It also occurs on Tantalus, in the forest. The flowers are of medium size, pale yellow. March to June (1973, 2294); original locality, in India utraque.“ STERCULIACEAE. WALTHERIA L. Sp. Pl. 673. 1753. Waltheria americana L. Sp. Pl. 673. 1753. Common on dry slopes of the lee side of Oahu. Also found on Kauai. March 25 (2085); original localities, ‘‘in Bahama, Barbiches, Surinamo. N TILIACEAE. TRIUMFETTA L. Sp. Pl. 444. 1753. Triumfetta An undetermined species of this genus was collected in lower Nuuanu valley, Oahu, growing on the outskirts of Honolulu. The stout stem is woody, three or four feet high, much branched. The leaves are round-ovate, green above, and slightly pubescent, white woolly beneath, with short hairs. The small fruit is covered with echinate prickles. May 10 (2293). BIXACEAE. BIXA L. Sp. Pl. 512. 1753. Bixa orellana L. Sp. Pl. 512. 1753. Scattered trees of this species are found in Hanapepe valley, _ Kauai. It is a low tree, with thick, spreading branches, and when covered with its pink flowers, presents a pleasing sight. Collected in fruit only. July 1 (2477); original locality, ‘‘in America calidiore.” 856 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. MYROXYLON Fonsr. Char. Gen. 125. 1776. [Xylosma Forst.f. Prodr. 72. 1786, Myroxylon hawaiiense (Seem.) Kunrze, Rev. Gen. PL. . ; 1891. j Xylosma hawaiiense Stem. Fl. Vit. 7. 1865-68. A large tree, with heavy branches, and thick, leathery, a leaves. Flowering specimens were collected on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. * is found only on the islands of Oahu and Kauai. 9 July 23 (2611). TERNSTROEMIACEAE. EURYA Tuuns. Nov. Gen. 67. 1788. Eurya sandwicensis A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 200. 1854. 1 Collected at the type locality, „mountains behind the 3 of Honolulu.“ One form (2240), which was distributed as Eurya sessilifolia, n. sp., is apparently only a sessile leaved form, and is mentioned by Gray in the original description. It 0 grew near the summit of Konahuanui, and has larger, more crowded, sessile leaves, which are clasping at the base. No. 2311, the normal form with smaller, petioled leaves, was col- lected on the same mountain, but at much lower elevations— — about 2000 feet. 4 VIOLACEAE. ) ISODENDRION A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 1 15:92. 1854. a Isodendrion subsessilifolium n. sp. (Plate LIV) 4 A slender, wand-like shrub, two to six feet high, simple, or sometimes sparingly branched, the branches ascending; g rous, bark grayish; leaves alternate, scattered along the upp er cA part of the stem, on very short petioles, oblong-obovate, some- what pointed, two to three and a half inches long, an inch to an inch and a half wide, glabrous on both sides, the margins — undulate, or obscurely serrate; stipules small, persistent, nar- rowly lanceolate, from a broad base, furnished with a promi- nent midrib; flowers axillary, solitary, on very short pedicels, — which are subtended by a cluster of short bracts; calyx short. one-fourth the length of the corolla, its lobes lanceolate, con- _Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 857 vex, keeled, slightly ciliate; corolla three-eighths of an inch long, streaked with purple; petals connivent for nearly their entire length, forming a tube, oblong, blunt, the ends some- what dilated, twisted and recurved; stamens five, short, barely - exceeding the ovary, filaments flat, slightly expanded above, anthers broad, with short, curved appendages at the base; style the length of the corolla tube, almost straight, slightly thickened at the apex, stigma minute, Tube type is No. 2828, collected above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 2000 feet. I was growing in a ravine between the forks of the Waimea river. Hillebrand seems to have had _ specimens of this species, collected by Knudsen, probably on the west side of the Waimea river. He referred them, how- ever, to Isodendrion longifolium, specimens of which I have seen in the herbarium of Columbia University, and which is a very different plant, as evinced by the specimens mentioned above, and by the plate, in the atlas of the Botany of the U. S. Ex- _ ploring Expedition. Plate LIV shows a flowering stem, and a flower and stamen enlarged. VIOLA L. Sp. Pl. 933. 1753. _ Viola chamissoniana Ginarns, Linnaea, 1:408. 1826. Hillebrand records a variety of this species from Kauai, _ which has young shoots and inflorescence puberulous.” In specimens collected along the edge of the plateau above Wai- mea, the leaves are pubescent underneath, even the older ones. It is a spreading bush, three or four feet high, with pale violet flowers. The type was collected by Chamisso, on Oahu, in 7 1807. Oetober 12 (2880). Viola kauaensis A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15:85. 1854. These specimens differ considerably from Gray's original description, who, it seems, did not have the early, large flow- ered form. He says: The flowers of the specimens are prob- ably late ones, with the petals smaller than when fully de- _ veloped, as they are not quite so long as the calyx. * * * ‘What strengthens the suspicion that these are only such pre- cociously fertilized and cryptopetalous flowers as produced by 4 many viblets, is that the stamens are scarcely shorter than the petals.” The description calls for ‘peduncles 14 to 2 inches long, nearly the length of the petioles, glabrous, furnished 858 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. * with a pair of linear lanceolate slightly glanduliferous bract- lets a little below the flower.” The peduncles are several times longer than the stem leaves in my specimens, and the bractlets are situated about an inch below the flowers. The caulibus gracilbus repentibus,” is not near so good as Hille- brand’s description: ‘‘ Rhizome creeping, rather thick, 2-3/', scaly near the apex with obtuse stipules, and bearing (besides 3 the remnants of older ones) one or two slender scapes 4-8’ in length, with 1 internode and a single leaf and flower, or with 2 internodes, and a second leaf and flower.” At the top of the rhizome, and springing from the same place as the scape, are usually several leaves with very long petioles. The sepals are scarious margined, and the petals notched. The following note by Hillebrand is also well borne out: Knudsen writes me that the stem is neither creeping nor trailing, but always erect.” Collected in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, * at an elevation of 3000 feet. The type specimens from ug Gray described the plant, came from the great bog of ** Lehuz mankanoe,“ on the plateau above Waimea. August 12 (2701). PASSIFLORACEAE. ; PASSIFLORA L. Sp. Pl. 955. 1733. Passiflora edulis Sims, Bot. Mag. pl. 1989. 1818. ‘Although an introduced plant, this species has all the appeasil ance of being native on Kauai. Specimens were collected 1 the depths of the forest, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, and it was seen at other equally out of the way places. The acid, juicy fruit is very refreshing. It is about the size and shape of a hen's egg, purple when ripe. It is said to have * been described from specimens grown from seeds received from Portugal. 1 July 11 (2542). ; 3 PAPAYACEAE. CARICA L. Sp. Pl. 1036. 1753. Carica papaya L. Sp. Pl. 1036. 1753. The Papaya“ has become well established in Hanapepe 4 valley, Kauai. The fruit is yellow when ripe, and in shape and size very much like that of the egg plant“ oma 1 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 859 found in our markets. The female flowers, and consequently the fruit also, are sessile and clustered at the base of the lowest leaves, while the male flowers are on long peduncles which spring from the axils of the leaves above. It has a palm-like growth, the soft, scarcely woody trunk often six inches in diameter, and thickly studded with the scars of fallen leaves. The milky juice is said to possess properties similar to pepsin. July to October (2618); original locality in Indiis.” THYMELAECEAE, DIPLOMORPHA Meissner, Denkschr. Regensb. Ges. $:289. 1841. [Wikstroemia EN DL. Prodr. Fl. Norf. 47. 1833, not Spreng, 1821.] Diplomorpha elongata (A. Gray). Wikstroemia elongata A. Gray, Seem. Journ. Bot. 3: 303. 1865. This species is common in the forests above Hanapepe val- ley, Kauai, and exceedingly variable. Hillebrand describes it as a ‘‘ sparingly branching shrub, 4-6 feet high,” and says it grows in the lower woods of Kauai, Lanai, Maui.” Near tze lower edge of the woods it is usually of a shrubby nature, but at elevations of 3000 feet and more, in the depths of the forest, where it is also plentiful, itis arborescent. Here it is a small tree, with a symmetrically branched top. The leaves in these arborescent forms are smaller and narrower than in the _- shrubby forms of lower elevations. July (2535, 2631). - Diplomorpha elongata recurva (HILLEBR. ) q * Wikstroemia elongata var. recurva HILL EBER. Fl. Haw. Is. 386. 1888. Among specimens sent to the Gray Herbarium, at Harvard Dniversity for verification, No. 2581 was pronounced to be the variety recurva of Hillebrand, as it matched specimens from Hillebrand and Mann & Brigham. It seems to differ only slightly from the other specimens referred to elongata, and is hardly more than an individual variation. The specimens were taken from a large bush on the lower edge of the forest, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river. No. 2545, collected on the same ridge, but higher, could not be matched at Harvard, and I had decided to describe it as a 860 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. new species, under the name of longepedunculata, but it answers much better to Hillebrand's description of variety recurva, than i does No. 2581. The following is bis description: ‘Spikes on peduncles of 3.10“, much lengthening with growth, and strong ly recurved, the slender, almost filiform and glabrous rachis — often attaining a length of 2} inches, covered with pe at pedicels, but the flowers confined to the apex.” My specimens _ 5 fit this description perfectly, many of the peduncles being over two inches in length, and strongly recurved. It Was found in a single restricted area, but was plentiful there. The bu . were small and slender, only two or three feet high. ; Diplomorpha oahuensis (A. Gray). 1 3 Wikstroemia foetida var. Oahuensis A. Gray, Stem. Journ. Bot. 4 3: 302. 1865. 4 The uniting of this with Wikstroemia foetida, a species not found nearer than Samoa, is not at all satisfactory, especially since the other Hawaiian species are endemic. Another rea- son for considering it as specifically distinct, is that it is a variable plant as it occurs in the Hawaiian Islands, No. 2211, collected on the lower slopes of Konahuanui, back of Honolulu. Oahu, is similar to specimens collected by the botanists of the Exploring Expedition, except that the leaves are broader. The type is Remy, 223, collected on Oahu. Hillebrand arranges © the species under two heads, those with large leaves, and those with small leaves. Under the large leaved group we have two species, oahuensis and elongata, with slender, glabrate spikes. By following this classification, one has the choice of referring 7 all large leaved forms with a smooth inflorescence to one or the other of these two species, or describing new species. The former plan is not satisfactory, and the latter is not a safe one, unless the person who follows it has had an opportunity to study all of the forms in the living state. a In the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, was col- lected a form (2737), which is referable to oahuensis, of which | species it has the leaf characters, but according to Hillebrand’s descriptions, has the flower characters of elongata, for the scales are only half the length of the ovary, which is thick, with a thick K nearly sessile stigma. It is a low bush, the branches usually 1 decumbent and resting on the wet moss and hepatics which e found nearly everywhere on the surface of the bog. Some times the bushes are erect, about two feet in height. Hille. brand gives the habitat of oahuensis as in valleys and 9 the lower skirts of the woods on all islands.“ Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 861 Another troublesome member is No. 2780, collected on the plateau above Waimea, at an elevation of 4000 feet. It is a small tree, growing well back in the forest, on the edge of a ravine. The leaves are usually over two inches in length, elliptical-ovate, thick and leathery, very glaucous above, and pale green underneath. The fruit is very large, almost a half inch in length, and a quarter inch in diameter at the thickest part. Itis referable rather to oahuensis than to elongata, but is probably distinct from either. The following are the remaining Hawaiian species: Diplomorpha bicornuta (HILLEBR. ) Wikstroemia bicornuta HILLEUR. Fl. Haw, IS. 387. 1888. Diplomorpha buxifolia (A. Gray) Wikstroemia buvifolia A. GRAY, Seem. Journ. Bot. 3: 304. 1865. Diplomorpha hanalei (Wawra) Wikstroemia hanalei WaWRA, Flora, II) 33: 183. 1875. Diplomorpha phillyraefolia (A. Gray) Wikstroemia phyllreaefolia A. GRAY, Seem. Journ. Bot. 3: 304. 1865. Diplomorpha sandwicensis (MEISNER) Wikstroemia sandwicensis MEISNER, DC. Prodr. 14:545. 1856. Diplomorpha uva-ursi (A. Gray) j Wikstroemia uva-ursi A. GRAY, Seem. Journ. Bot. 3: 304. 1865. Diplomorpha villosa (HILLERR.) Wikstroemia villosa HILLeBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 386. 1888. LYTHRACEAE, LYTHRUM L. Sp. Pl. 446. 1758. _ Lythrum maritimum H. B. K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6:194. 1823. This species, if indeed the Hawaiian plant is L. maritimum. is usually found in the lower forest. or on the outskirts, in _ damp, grassy places. Collected on the heights of Pauoa, back of Honolulu, at elevations of 800 to 2000 feet. May (2329); original locality, ‘‘in litore Oceani Pacifici, prope q Patibilicam Peruvianorum.” ‘7 a) oe 2 862 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, PARSONSIA P. Br. Civ. and Nat. Hist. Jam. 199, 1756. [Cuphea P. Br. Civ. and Nat. Hist. Jam. 216. 1756.) Parsonsia pinto (V AND.) Balsamona pinto VAND. Fl. Lus. 30, pl. 4. 1788. OCuphea balsamona C. & 8. Linnaea, 2:363, 1827. This species, which Hillebrand refers to the very different Ouphea hyssopifolia, is very common near Honolulu in damp places, and also in the lower forests. It is common, too, on Kauai. If of early accidental introduction,” it has become widely spread on several of the islands of the group. April to October (2004). MYRTACEAE, EUGENIA L. Sp. Pl. 470. 1753. Eugenia malaccensis L. Sp. Pl. 470. 175g. The ‘‘Ohia,” or mountain apple,” is now rare on Oahu, at 4 least near Honolulu, but is plentiful in Hanapepe valley, Kauai. The pear-shaped, bright red-purple fruit is very juicy. The 4 red-purple flowers are abundant, and grow in clusters directly on the large branches and on the trunk, instead of on the ends 4 of young branches. June 29 (2468); original locality, ‘‘in Indiis.” Eugenia (Syzygium) sandwicensis A. Gray, Bot. U. S. Expl. q Exped. 15:519. 1854. This is certainly generically distinct from Eugenia, the type 4 of which is E. malaccensis, if we take the plant first mentioned in the Species Plantarum as the type of the genus. The “*Qhia ha,” as this species is called by the natives, has both 7 fruit and flower characters different from Eugenia malaccensis. Instead of stamens many times longer than the petals, they are only slightly longer. In the description Gray says: Berry globular, as large as a cherry, containing one or two seeds 4 1 By n.. which, as likewise the embryo, accord with those of Eugenia. * * * This is one of the connecting forms between Eugenia, Acmena, and Syzygium, with the habit rather of the latter.” The fruit has a different shape from that of Eugenia malaccensis, for, instead of there being a cavity in which the round, chaff- q covered seeds fit loosely, the thin, fleshy covering fits closely around the smooth, gray seeds. Collected at the original lo- 4 cality, on the mountains behind Honolulu,“ and the speci- B Rox Ling ’ | Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 863 mens appear to be typical, but they were from small shrubs, instead of a tree twenty feet high.” Specimens from Kauai are very different, and probably are specifically distinct. On that island it is one of the largest forest trees, and occurs at elevations of 2500 to 4000 feet The leaves are much smaller, elliptical-lanceolate. I will not attempt to transfer this species toa different genus at present, for Syzygium GAERTN. is not applicable on account of the earlier Suzygium of Peter Browne, Which is a synonym of Chytraculia, Peter Browne. June to November (2241). NANI G) Apans. Fam. Pl. 2:88. 1763. [Metrosideros BANKs; GAERTN. Fr. & Sem. 1:70, pl. 34. 1788.] Intergrading as do the Hawaiian forms of the ‘‘Lehua,” the botanist who carefully studies them in the field, certaily can- not include them all under one polymorphous species. This latter plan is an easy way, and students of the Hawaiian flora have thus far contented themselves by following it, whether it was scientific or not. Even by eliminating the extreme forms, there are troublesome intergrading individuals which must be placed somewhere, and the best way seems to be to refer them to the extremes with which they have the most points in com- mon, even theugh they do not agree well in some particulars. Primarily, there are two divisions, based on the shape of the leaves. The first, of which N polymorpha is the type, has or- bicular or broadly ovate leaves. The second has lanceolate leaves, and its type is N. tremuloides, which represents the ex- treme lanceolate form. Until opportunity for more extended study offers, the following provisional treatment is given: Leaves broadly ovate or orbicular Calyx white wooly Small tree, leaves small, wooly underneath, not rugose above. N. polymorpha. Small tree, leaves small, wooly underneath, ru- gose. N. rugosa. Bush, leaves large, glabrous N. pumila. Calyx glabrous or pubescent, but not wooly Leaves large, glabrous, petioles long N. macropus. Leaves small, glabrous, petioles short N. glabrifolia. Lea ves neither broadly ovate nor orbicular Leaves pointed at both ends, calyx glabrous N. tremuloides. Leaves broader, rounded at one or both ends, calyx tomentose or glabrate N. lutea. 864 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. g Nani(a) polymorpha (Gaup.) Metrosideros polymorpha GAUD. Bot. Voy. Uranie, pl. 108, 109. 1830. This is said by some botanists to be the same as Metrosideros villosa, but it is not likely that precisely the same forms of a genus which is so variable on the Hawaiian group, occur also on islands so far removed as the Society and Viti groups. We have conclusive evidence too, in Hillebrand’s remarks, that they are not the same, for he says: According to Seeman, all Hawaiian forms, except the extreme tomentose with rounded leaves, are represented in the Society Islands.” This extreme tomentose form with round leaves, is exactly the var. a, the type, if there is any, of Metrosideros polymorpha. Hillebrand, who, during his residence of 20 years on the Islands, had an opportunity of bringing this chaotic genus into order, appears to have merely followed the treatment of Gray and Seeman, without attempting to do anything original. Gray had speci- mens of this species from ‘‘Oahu, on the mountains behind Honolulu.” It is still found there, but only as scattered trees, at elevations of 1500 to 1800 feet. Although only a small tree, ten to fifteen feet high, it is a conspicuous object at almost any time of the year. The young leaves, which are closely crowd- ed on the ends of the branches, are of a purplish hue, while before flowering the densely white tomentose buds are almost as showy as the open flowers with their crimson stamens. May 28 (2375). Nani(a) rugosa (A. GRay) KUNTZZ E. Rev. Gen. Pl. 242. 1891. Metrosideros rugosa A. GRAY, Bot. U. S. Expl. Exped. 15: 561, pl. 69 B. 1854. This species I did not collect, but have seen specimens of it in the herbarium of Columbia University, and in the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, at Honolulu. In general appearance it is much like N polymorpha, but quite distinct. It also came : from the ‘‘mountains behind Honolulu.” Nani(a) pumila n. sp. (Plate LV.) A bush, one to two feet high, either simple, or sending out one or two ascending branches; outer bark gray, peeling off in shreds; leaves orbicular, broadly ovate, or sometimes obovate, the largest about twoinches in diameter, thick, glabrous, light green and shining above, dull and glandular underneath, the margin slightly induplicate, midrib impressed above, promi- nent beneath; petioles stout, about a fourth of an inch in length; ee + 2 5 8 a at ae ee we — oo , a, FR Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 865 fully developed cymes large, with densely wooly peduncles an inch in length; calyx very wooly, except the short, triangular lobes, which are almost glabrous, but glandular; petals red, broadly obovate, about a quarter of an inch in length, glandular on the outside, ciliate; stamens numerous, an inch long, dark red; style almost as long, and of the same color as the stamens, not enlarged at the stigmatose apex; ovary deeply immersed in the bottom of the calyx, its disk-like top very glandular and resinous, The type is No. 2738, collected in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. So far as size is concerned, this is near Hillebrand’s var. gamma, but he says n low trailing shrub, with stems only 3-6 feet long.” This is strictly erect, has larger leaves, and more numerous flowers than his plant. The corolla, stamens, and style are deep red, and the growing ends of the branches are usually tomentose, with traces of pubescence occasionally on the midribs of young leaves. It is probably confined to this bog and the large one on the plateau above Waimea. Nani(a) macropus (H. & A.) KN TZR, Rev. Gen. Pl. 242. 1891. Met rosideros macropus H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 83. 1832. Typical trees of this species are not uncommon on the slopes of Waiolani, back of Honolulu, but specimens were not collect- ed from them. Hillebrand has the species from Kauai with leaves contracting at the base.” Of my specimens, No. 2762, which was labeled Metrosideros macropus, has leaves decidedly contracted at the base, and is not good macropus, either accord- ing to specimens or the type description. It was collected on the ridge between the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers. The specimens are from a small, well proportioned tree. The leaves are elliptical-lanceolate, glabrous, thick and shining, the _ largest an inch and a half wide by slightly over two inches in length, on bright yellow petioles of almost an inch in length. __ Metrosideros macropus is described as glabrous throughout, yet the peduncles and calyx in these specimens are tomentose. Perhaps the proper course would be to describe it as a new Species, for leaving out the pubescence on pedicels and calyx, tit is nearer to N tremuloides than to N. macropus, where Hille- brand placed it. 866 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Nani(a) glabrifvlia n. sp. A large tree, thirty to forty feet high, with a trunk diameter of two to five feet; main branches stout and spreading, young branches crowded, angled, with short internodes; leaves nu- merous, broadly ovate, usually cordate at base, on very short petioles, glabrous; the short, stout, peduncles and pedi- cels as well as the calyx, shortly pubescent, but not wooly; fruit three-fourths free; flowers bright red. The type is No. 2821, which is abundant at an elevation of 4000 feet, on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. Specimens ‘with the fruit of the previous season, were collected from a tree which had been blown down during a wind storm. Early in October, when I left this place. the trees were just coming into bloom. No. 2053, collected en Tantalus, back of Honolulu, may per- haps be referred to N. glabrifolia. The specimens were froma small tree. The leaves are on longer petioles, and the flowers are yellowish. Nani(a) tremuloides n. sp. (Plate LVI.) A small tree, ten to twelve feet high, with slender trunk and smooth, grayish bark, glabrous throughout, even the inflfor- escence; branches slender, loosely spreading; leaves narrowly lanceolate, pointed at both ends, coriaceous, shining, bright green above, paler beneath, on flat, slightly winged petioles a fourth of an inch in length, not prominently veined, but midrib — conspicuous; cyme branches divaricate; peduncles three flow- _ ered, slender, of varying length, but always under a half inch) pedicels usually half the length of the peduncles, calyx cam- panulate, a fourth of an inch in length, green, the lobes equal- ing the tube, ovate, blunt, margins scarious; petals bright red, almost orbicular, nearly twice the length of the calyx lobes, — the margins slightly eroded; stamens bright red, barely an inch a in length; styles slightly longer than the stamens, the end . curved; fruit half free. 4 The type is No. 2895. any other place. ‘ May 24 (2366); original locality, ‘tin Europae arvis.” LYSIMACHIOPSIS gen. nov. Shrubs, either loosely branched and spreading, or simple and erect; branches and stems often roughened with the scars of fallen leaves, the growing ends covered with reddish tomen- tum; leaves of medium size, alternate, sometimes appearing as if whorled; flowers in the upper axils, on pedicels nearly as long, or sometimes longer than the leaves, purple or red; calyx — parted to the base or almost so, into five to nine lobes; corolla urceolate, the lobes imbricate, five to nine in number; stamens q united at the base by a granular membrane, which is attached to the base of the corolla, as many as the lobes of the corolla, * . A Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 875 and opposite them, filaments comparatively long, slightly di- lated at the base, anthers oblong, one-third the length of the ' filaments, slightly pointed; capsule ovoid, woody or crustace- ous, breaking from the style atthe top, into as many valves as there are calyx and corolla lobes. A genus hitherto confused with Lysimachia, from which it differs primarily in being composed of shrubs instead of herbs, and by having red or purple, urceolate flowers. Lysimachiopsis daphnoides (A. Gray) Lysimachia Hillebrandti var. daphnoides A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 329. 1862. Lysimachia daphnoides HILLEBR. Fl. Haw, Is, 285. 1888. An erect, simple stemmed shrub, one to three feet high. Oc- casionally there is a tendency to branch, but this seems dué to some injury which the plant has received. On some plants the pedicels are very long and recurved. In flowers which have not matured, the calyx is reflexed, as is shown in Plate LVII. The obovate-oblong, crowded leaves are sessile. Collected in fruit only, at an elevation of 3000 feet, in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, where it is plentiful. Gray’s original came from the large bog on the plateau above Waimea. August 21 (2736). Lysimachiopsis hillebrandii (Hook. f.) Lysimachia hillebrandii Hook. f.; A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 328. 1862. Specimens were collected on the ridges west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at elevations of 3000 feet and more. The plant is rather common, and answers well to the description of this species, as given by Hillebrand, with the exception of ‘‘stamens the length of the corolla or little more.” They are slightly exserted, and therefore longer than the corolla. It is a bush, with rambling branches, which are two or three feet long in. some cases. The calyx is almost half the length of the corolla, the lobes lanceolate, acuminate, scarious margined. The cor- olla is about three-fourths of an inch in length, purple, the _ ovate lobes acutish, with broad greenish or whitish, eroded margins. The filaments are a quarter of an inch in length, and therefore not short,“ as given by Hillebrand, in his generic description of Lysimachia. No. 2614, from which the generic _ description is mostly drawn, and represented by Plate LVIII. 876 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Lysimachiopsis lydgatei (HILLEBR.) Lysimachia lydgatet Hituepr. Fl. Haw. IS. 284. 1888. 4 The type of this species came from Maui, on slopes and in gulches back of Lahaina,” presumably collected by Lydgate. Lysimachiopsis ovata n. n. q Lysimachia rotundifolia HILLAUNn. Fl. Haw. Is, 284, 1888, nob Schmidt. 4 Record from Nuuanu valley, Oahu. Hillebrand's specific — name is not tenable on account of the earlier L. rotundifolia ot Schmidt. Lysimachiopsis remyi (HILLEBR.) _ Lysimachia remyi HILLKUn. Fl. Haw. Is. 284. 1888. This was originally called Lysimachia hillebrandii var. angusti- _ folia, by Asa Gray, but as the name angustifolia had already been used several times in that genus, Hillebrand very prop- erly changed it. OLEACEAE. OLEA L. Sp. Pl. 8. 1753. Olea sandwicensis A. GRA, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 331. 1862. Common in the lower forest of Kauai. Usually a tree of medium size, with large, elliptical-lanceolate leaves, and num- erous axillary racemes of cream-colored flowers. Collected near the Wahiawa river, Kauai, but it is also found on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river. It was not seen above an eleva- tion of 2500 feet. A form with obtuse instead of pointed fruit, is noted from Kauai by Hillebrand. 1 June to August (2415); original locality, Oahu, Sandwich Islands.“ : LOGANIACEAE. LABORDEA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 449, pl. 0. 1830. Labordea pallida Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7:196. 1867.? 3 The type of this species is M. & B. 611, and according to Hil- lebrand, was collected near Kealia, Kauai, although the locality — is not mentioned by Mann. I have specimens from Kaholuam- ano, above Waimea, Kauai, which may belong to this species. They were taken from a small tree, about fifteen feet high, with Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 877 slender trunk, and spreading top. The leaves, as described by Mann, are ovate-oblong and glabrous, but the petioles are four or five lines long, which is somewhat longer than his de- scription calls for. No flowers were seen, but the woody cap- sule is almost an inch in length, rather slender and pointed. September 25 (2868). Labordea tinifolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:322. 1860. Specimens obtained from a medium-sized tree on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, match well with a specimen of this species in the herbarium of Columbia University. Hille- brand records it from Oahu and Maui only. He evidently has this genus badly confused, for itis hardly possible to deter- mine any of the species by using his key and descriptions. July (2579). GENTIANACEAE. ERYTHRAEA Neck. Elem. 2710. 1790. Erythraea sabaeoides (GriseB.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 6:41. 1863. Schenkia sabaeoides GrisEB. Bonplandia, 1: 226. 1853. Collected in low ground near Diamond Head. It was also seen in Kalihi valley. A small, smooth plant with lavender colored flowers. March 20 (2026). APOCYNACEAE. GYNOPOGON Forst. Char. Gen. 35, pl. 18. 1776. [Alyxia Banks; R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 469. 1810] Gynopogon olivaeformis (GAUD.) Alysia olivaeformis GAUD. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 451. 1830. The “Maile” is a favorite plant with the Hawaiian for the making of wreaths and other decorations. It is usually vine like in habit, often forming quite a tangle on bushes and small trees. The dark green, thick and glossy leaves are variable in Shape. but usually ovate or lanceolate. The fruit is black, somewhat spindle-shaped... Collected on both Oahu and Kauai, | ranging from 2,500 to 4,000 feet elevation. May to October (2344). 878 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. RAUWOLFIA L. Sp. Pl. 208. 175g. Rauwolfia sandwicensis A. DC, Prodr. 8:339. 1844. A small tree, with smooth, yellowish bark, and stiff, spread- ing branches. It is rather common in the lower woods on the lee side of Kauai. July 17 (2582). ASCLEPIADACEAE, ASCLEPIAS L. Sp. Pl. 214. 1753. Asclepias curassavicea L. Sp Pl. 215. 1753. 7 An introduced species, which is well established on Oahu and Kauai. On the latter island it has found its way well up into the lower forest, in open, grassy places. ö March to September (1950); original locality, in n “3 CONVOLVULACEAE. CRESSA L. Sp. Pl. 223. 1753. Cressa truxillensis H. B. K. Nov. Gen. 3:119. 1818. Collected at Pearl river, Oahu, east of the inlet,” as men- tioned by Hillebrand. who, however, calls it Cressa cretica. It is identical with specimens of C. truzillensis, collected in Peru by the botanists of the U. S. Exploring Expedition. It is plentiful along Pearl river, and was also collected on Molokai — by Remy. The anthers are violet. “2 June 10 (2410); original locality, ‘‘in arenosis salsis Oceani Pacifici, prope Truxillo Peruvianorum.“ g j JACQUEMONTIA Cuxorsy, Mem. Soc. Phys. Geney. — 6:476. 1833. 4 Jacquemontia sandwicensis A. (aie, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 336. 1862. a When growing in exposed situations, the plants of this spe- , 4 cies are liable to be very small, erect and bushy, but under 0 more favorable conditions, they have stems two to three feet 4 long, which are prostrate and creeping. The pale blue corolla is almost an inch in diameter. Collected on an ancient lava 1 flow beyond Diamond Head, Oahu. 1 April 12 (2095). 15 1 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 879 IPOMOEA L. Sp. Pl. 160. 1753. _ Ipomoea congesta R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 485. 1810. Ipomoea insularis, CHolsv; SteuD. Nomencl. Bot. Ed. 2, 817. 1841. Common on slopes and about the lower edge of the forest on Oahu. The flowers are bright blue when fresh, but turn pink when dried. The rounded, cordate leaves are more or less pubescent on both sides. May 16 (2324). Ipomgea pes-caprae (L.) Sw. Convolvulus pes caprae L. Sp. Pl. 159. 1753. Common along the beach in sand, on all of the islands of the group. Collected at Waikiki, near Honolulu. a April to June (2097); original locality, in India.” Ipomoea palmata Forsk. Fl. Aegypt. Arab. 43. 1775. Hillebrand calls this Zpomoea tuberculata var. trichosperma, but does not state whether it is his own creation, or if he has reduced Jpomoea trichosperma BLUME, to a variety. Horace Mann, who was a very acute botanist, determined it as J. pal- mata. Common on the hot, dry, lower slopes, trailing over lava rocks and bushes. It is somewhat variable in leaf form. The flowers are pale red, or pinkish. March 29 (2045). — ee ee ee ee, HYDROPHYLLACEAE. CONANTHUS S. Wats. Bot. King Surv. 256. 1871. [Nama L. 1759, not L. 1753.] [Marilaunidium Kunrze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 434. 1891.] Conanthus sandwicensis (A. Gray) Nama sandwicensis A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 338. 1862. A few plants were collected at Waikiki, Oahu, and later sev- _ eral more at Mana, Kauai, in low ground near the sea. A small plant, in appearance much like the various species which have until recently been called Nama, and which are found in the southwestern part of the United States. According to Mr. Coville, Cont. U. S. Nat. Herb. 4: 161, Conanthus aretioides can not be separated generically from the plants which we have _ wrongly been calling Nama, and therefore Conanthus is the next available name, a fact which Kuntze was not aware of __ when he proposed Marilaunidium. March to August (1956). 880 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. BORAGINACEAE, BOTHRIOSPERMUM Boor, Enum. Pl, Chin, Bor. 47. 1832, | Bothriospermum tenellum F. & M. Ind. Sem. Hort. Petr. *. 1835. Hillebrand notes this species from along cultivated fields in Pauoa, Oahu. A native of China and India; a recent arrival.“ It does not seem to have spread outside of Pauoa, where it is now rather common. March 26 (2008). HELIOTROPIUM L. Sp. Pl. 130. 1753. a Heliofropium curassavicum L. Sp. Pl. 130. 1753. 4 This widely diffused species is common in low places along the beach, presumably on all of the islands of the group. It is found on Oahu and Kauai, at least. May (2393); original locality, in Americae calidioris mar- itimis.” om 7 VERBENACEAE. CLERODENDRON L. Sp. Pl. 637. 1753. Clerodendron fragrans VENT. Jard. Malm. pl. 70. 1804. 7 A form with double flowers has escaped along the roadside it a Nuuanu valley, Oahu. Hillebrand mentions it as var. pleniſtora. E The large, broadly ovate leaves are pubescent on both sides. The flowers are white, tinged with pink or purple. 1 March 29 (2032). E Ae LANTANA L. Sp. Pl. 626. 1753. Lantana camara L. Sp. Pl. 627. 1753. 2 This species has become the most noxious plant in the Is- lands. Introduced in 1858, it is now abundant, and has ruined hundreds of acres of valuable pasture land. It forms impene- trable thickets on the slopes and in gulches of the lowlands, _ and has even invaded the lower forests. Here it grows in thick clumps, the stems often becoming weak and vine-like, and intertwining in a very intricate manner. The flowers 4 vary in color, some being almost white, others purplish, and some are orange. 1 9 5 (2088); original locality, in America calidiore, 8 Heller-: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 881 STACHYTARPHETA Vane. Enum. 1:205. 1805. Stachytarpheta dichotoma (R & P.) VAL. Enum. 1: 207. 1805. Verbena dichotoma R. & P. Fl. Per. 1;23. 1798. Two forms of this species were collected. One, No. 2091, which is most common in the immediate vicinity of Honolulu, is woody only at the base, the stout, herbaceous branches somewhat weak, about two feet long, almost glabrous, and somewhat glaucous. The other form, No. 1098, is usually found at higher elevations, and even extends to the lower edge of the forest. It is an erect, branching shrub, only the young branches herbaceous, On Kauai, bushes five feet high, with _ stems an inch in diameter were seen in Hanapepe valley. The leaves on this form are brighter green, somewhat smaller, and more sharply serrate. It is possible that the two are distinct species, but No. 2091 would seem to be a young state of the latter. Hillebrand describes it as an “erect herb,” and records it from the island of Hawaii, ‘‘districts of Hilo and Kona,” only. ' VERBENA L. Sp. Pl. 18. 1753. 4 Verben bonariensis L. Sp. Pl. 20. 1753. A widely diffused tropical weed, introduced many years : Bc, and now found on all of the islands of the group. It can be found anywhere from the low, cultivated ground near the 3 coast, to pasture land high up in the mountains; everywhere, in fact, except in the deep forest where introduced plants * rarely find a lodging. March to September (2088); original locality, in agro f _Bonatiensi " 3 VITEX L. Sp. Pl. 638. 1753. a Vitex trifolia L. Sp. Pl. 638. 1753. * The hoary under sides of the leaves, and the blue flowers, 4 male this a showy species. It is plentiful on the “barking _ sands” of Mana, Kauai. The main stems, which are decum- bent and quite long, spread out over the sand, sending up branches at intervals of a half foot or less. Horace Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 194, calls this ‘*Virtex trifolia, LINN., var.? 2 unſfoliolata,“ and Hiilebrand has it war. unifoliata,’ with no indication that he is not the author of the varietal name. However. it is a nomen nudum, as Mann does not describe it, andi if it were distinct, would probably have to be called Vitex ovata THUNB. My specimens show leaves varying from 882 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. three-foliolate to entire, some of them being two-lobed. The ig original spelling in the Species Plantarum is Vitex “trifoliis,” undoubtedly a typographical error, August 20 (2731); original locality, in Indiis.“ LABIATAE. PHYLLOSTEGIA Bentu. DC. Prodr. 12:553. 1848. All authorities cite this genus as published in Lindley’s Bo- tanical Register 15; pl. 1292, 1880. The plant under that fig- — ure is called Lepechinia spicata Willd., and as no reference is anywhere made to this name, it evidently means that the figure is not really that of Lepichina spicata, but represents an unde- scribed genus, and is the type of Phyllostegia, which, so far 2 4 I can ascertain, was first characterized in the Prodromus, as a cited above. Phyllostegia grandiflora (Gaup.) Bento. DC. Prodr. 12:553. “ 1848. * Prasium grandiflorum Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 453, pl. 65, f. 2.4 1830. * Stems often six or eight feet long, woody below, the greater part herbaceous, and leaning for support over other bushes, © 4 thus giving them a vine like habit. In the older plants, the leaves become thick and shining above. In some respects these more mature forms agree with P. glabra, as described by Hillebrand, but the two forms are often found in the same clump. The flowers are large, white, pubescent, with long, a exserted tube. May to November (2299). Phyllostegia waimeae Wawra, Flora (II) 30:531. 1872. A handsome species, with rather small, pink, sweet scen 2¢ 5 flowers. The plant is pubescent throughout, four to five fe a on n above Waimea, Kauai. It grew along tk e banks of a forest stream, in a thick growth{of ferns. Wawra's K. type came from the opposite side of the Waimea river, Hz le- mann (Bezirk Waimea).“ September 25 (2860). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, 883 Phyllostegia Growing with P. waimeae, but a very different plant. The leaves are much larger, thicker, darker green, and have a 4 coarser pubescence. The racemes are much longer, and more _ brdnched, the involucral bracts are shorter, the pedicels much longer and more slender, and the calyx lobes broader at, the base. The flowers are about the same size, but white. It is sitet an undescribed species, but Hillebrand’s treatment of this genus is not satisfactory, hence making it unsafe to describe a new species without a more extensive suite of specimens. Oetober 12 (2875). PLECTRANTHUS L’Her. Stirp. Nov. 84, pl. 42. 1785. Plectranthus australis R. Br. Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 506. a 1810. Plectranthus parviflorus WILLD. Hort. Berol. pl. 65, 1816 not eh: R. Br. Common on rocks in Hanapepe valley, Kauai. Also noticed growing on the ground, in an open space in the woods above | Waimea It is a fleshy plant, and hard to dry. The pale blue flowers are numerous, but small, in a long terminal * ** June 29 (2467). SALVIA L. Sp. Pl. 23. 1753. a bn occidentalis Sw. Nov. Gen. et. Sp. 14. 1788. A common weed on the slopes of Hanapepe valley, Kauai. Also found about Honolulu. The blue flowers are very small. May 9 (2291). tenogyne rotundifolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:347. 1862. _ Hillebrand has taken an unwarranted liberty with this spe- _ cies. In his Flora, he re-names the type as var. montana, and _ chooses another plant for his type of the species. The plant Which he calls S. rotundifolia, is S. macrantha, M. & B. 402, and S8. haliakalae Wawra, according to his citation of synonyms, on page 360. 884 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. STACHYS'L: Sp. Pl. 580. 1753. Stachys arvensis L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 814. 1763. Very common about Honolulu, along the street, and in culti- vated ground, March 29 (2034); original locality, ‘‘ in Europae arvis.” SOLANACEAE, CAPSICUM L. Sp. Pl. 188. 1753. Capsicum frutescens L. Sp. Pl. 189. 1753. ; Cultivated at Honolulu, and occasionally found as an escape. Several bushes were found on the slopes of Makiki. March 29 (2086); original locality, in Indiis.” LYCIUM L. Sp. Pl. 191. 1753. Lycium sandwicense A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 6:44. 1863, Plentiful on an old lava flow beyond Diamond Head, Oahu. It flourishes at a distance of several hundred feet from the sea, but even at that distance the salt spray is brought to it by me 4 wind. It is also found at other places in low ground along the 1 coast. a April 8 (2093); from the original locality, ‘‘Sandwich Is- lands, on Diamond Hill, Oahu, near Honolulu.” 2 LYCOPERSICUM HL. Veg. Syst. 9:32. 1765. Lycopersicum esculentum Mitt. Gard. Dict. Ed. 8, No. 2. 1768. 4 The tomato is found in the wild state on both Oahu and Kauai. It is plentiful about Punchbowl, and was noticed hig, up in pasture land above Waimea, Kauai. The fruit is small. a irregular forms which it does in cultivation. March 25 (1998). NICOTIANA L. Sp. Pl. 180. 1753. 2 - Nicotiana glauca R. GRAH. Edinb. N. Phil. Journ. 175. 1828. a A small, soft-wooded tree, which is not uncommon about Honolulu, especially along the water front. The flowers at 3 numerous, pale yellow. a March 27 (2016). 4 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 885 NOTHOCESTRUM A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 6:48. 1863. ~ Niothocestrum latifolium A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 6:48. 1 1863. The original of this was a ‘shrub about 12 feet high,” and came from Oahu, on the ridge of the Kaala mountains.” It is described as follows by Gray: Leaves membranaceous, about 2 inches long. * * * Calyx 3 lines long. Corolla _ white? its tube half an inch long, the lobes not half the length ol the tube, their margins strongly induplicate, and the sinuses _ -plaited. Anthers two lines long.” Hillebrand records it from Waimea, Kauai, with leaves emarginate at the base, coriace- ous, with ochraceous tomentum.” My specimens are in young fruit, and do not agree with this species in some particulars. It may possibly be an undescribed species. The mature leaves are about four inches in length, and more inclined to be oblong than ovate, densely pubescent underneath. Collected on the N edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, at an elevation of 3 3500 feet. A tree, twenty feet high, with gray bark, aud zig- nag branches. 4 October 16 (2886). * 8 PHYSALIS L. Sp. Pl. 182 1753. | Physalis peruviana L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1671. 1763. ‘Abundant along the lower edges of the forest on Oahu and . and according to Hillebrand, also on Maui and Hawaii. The berry ig gathered and made into jelly and jam. Called _ “Poha,” by t the natives. ; 8 April 2 (2060); original locality. Limae.“ SOLANUM L. Sp. Pl. 184. 1753. lanum nigrum L. Sp. Pl. 186. 1753. Common in Hanapepe valley, Kauai, and on the edge of the Woods above Waimea. It also occurs on Oahu. The small e berries are eaten by the natives. July to October (2509, 28 67). A Solanum sandwicense H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 92. 1832 Collected at an elevation of 3000 feet, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai. It differs somewhat from Hille- brand’s description of Corolla puberulous outside, bluish white, 5-6“ in diameter, 5 fid to the middle, plaited. Anthers 886 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ** almost sessile, scarcely 4 the length of the corolla.” The corolla in my specimens is cream colored, with purple centre, and purple stripes, extending about half way up the petals, the two-thirds the length of the corolla, and have distinct, smooth filaments. ‘ July 29 (2638); original locality, Oahu. Solanum sodomeum L. Sp. Pl. 187. 1753. This African species, although not recorded by Hillebrand, is well established about Honolulu, The flowers are pale pur- ple, and the fruit yellow. The stem and leaves are covered a with stout, yellow spines. June 10 (2409). SCROPHULARIACEAE, MONNIERA P. Browne, Civ. & Nat. Hist. Jam. 269, pl. = 28, F. 8. 1755. 4 [Herpestis GERT. Fr. & Sem. 3:186, pl. 214, f. 6. 1808. 4 Monniera monniera (L.) Brirron, Mem. Torr. Bot. Club. 5:292. 1894. 4 Gratiola monniera L. Centl. Pl. 2: 1756. Herpestis monniera H. B. K. Nov. Gen. 2: 366. 1817. Common in wet places near the coast, as at Waikiki, and 4 Pearl City, Oahu. a June 10 (2408). 4 ‘ : oa GESNERIACEAE. CYRTANDRA Forst. Char. Gen. 5: pl. 3. 1776. Cyrtandra cordifolia Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 446, pl. om 1830. 3 According to Hillebrand, this species is common on me * main range” of Oahu. It was seen at one place on Tantalus, 4 back of Honolulu. The large, broadly ovate, oblique leaves, as well as the inflorescence and young branches, are covered with 2 tawny hair. It is a much more fieshy plant than some of ae 3 other species. April 11 (2112). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 887 Cyrtandra degenerans (WawRA) a Cyrtandra paludosa, var. degenerans WAWRA, Flora (II) 30: 558. 1872. Cyrtandra longifolia, var. degenerans C. B. CLARKE, DC. Monog. Phan. 5:277. 1883. Cyrtandra latebrosa HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 337. 1888. It appears that Hillebrand had also given this the manuscript name of C. paradoxa. He considered it sufficiently distinct for specific rank, and this is made more. probable by the fact that it grows on Oahu, while C. longifolia has been found only on Kauai. Cyrtandra gayana n. sp. (Plate LIX.) A small tree, ten feet high; trunk usually four inches in di- ameter, bark gray; top rounded; secondary branches slender, rough, somewhat quadrangular, studded with the scars of fallen leaves; leaves opposite, confined to the ends of the branches, lanceolate, tapering at both ends, two to three inches long, one- half to three-fourths of an inch wide, entire, bright green above, With impressed midrib and veins, brown beneath, and sparingly pubescent on the prominent, dark midrib and veins; petioles a -. half inch in length; flowers solitary in the axils of the leaves; _ peduncles an inch or less in length, subtended by small, linear, _ deciduous bracts; calyx a half inch in length, somewhat pu- bescent, thin, almost cylindrical, peaked in the bud, unequally _ five-toothed, deciduous from the fruit; corolla white, little ex- _ serted, slender, moderately curved, not quite an inch in length, not strongly bilabiate, the lobes short; stamens two, anthers broad and connected at their tips, as in the genus; style short, _ two-lobed; fruit white, ovate oblong, five lines in length, tipped with the persistent style. The type is No. 2495, which was collected on the ridge west ok the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet. It also occurs on the plateau above Waimea, at 4000 feet eleva- tion. Named in honor of Mr. Francis Gay, of Makaweli, _ Kauai, to whom I am much indebted for hospitalities shown to me while on the island of Kauai. It belongs to the group of _ which C. paludosa is the type. From that species it differs in its arborescent habit, narrower, entire leaves, which are brown _ underneath, instead of pale, and by its smaller flowers and fruit. There is a possibility that it may be Cyrfandra palu- _ dosa, var. arborescens WAWRA, Flora (II) 30: 558, which is de- Sceribed as ‘‘frutex pyramidalis densissimus, foliis ellipticis in petiolum longe attenuatis integris. Folia subcoriacea glabra, 2 888 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. bacca vix 4 pollicem longa; nervis secundariis confertis.” Wawra’s specimen’s were collected on Kauai, but no locality is 5 a mentioned. The name arborecens, however, is antedated by C. arborecens BLUME, which would make my name valid, even if my plants are the same as Wawra's. Cyrtandra grandiflora Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 447 pl. 55. 1 1830. a A few specimens were collected at the head of Kalihi valley, Oahu. In all cases noticed, the large wiite flowers were borne ~ ; : on the branches below the leaves. The bracts in this species are large and foliaceous. The leaves are large, thin, ovate- oblong, on long petioles. Found only on Oahu. May 20 (2836). Cyrtandra kalichii Wawra, Flora (II) 30: 564. 1872. wi Oyrtandra tristis HitLeBR. in C. B. Clarke, DC. Monog. Phan. 5: 227. 1883. 1 This odd-looking species was collected at the type locality, “Oahu, felsschluchten des Kalichithals.“ It is a sbrub, several feet high, simple, or with a few ascending branches. The leaves are often fifteen inches in length, obovate or oblong, with broadly winged petioles which are clasping or united at the base. The whole plant is more or less pubescent with tawny hairs. Under this species Hillebrand, Fl. Haw. Is. 334, 1 cites ‘‘C. tristis, Hbd. in herb.” C. B. Clarke, as cited above, has described it for Hillebrand, quoting ‘‘Hillebrand ms.” May 20 (2337). Cyrtanda kauaiensis Wawra, Flora (II) 30: 566. 1872. a Found in a gulch above Waimea, Kauai, between the forks of the Waimea river, at an elevation of about 2000 feet. Itisa a shrub, with few and slender branches, foliose only at the ends, and somewhat quadrangular. It was rare, as only one or two 5 bushes were seen. a” September 30 (2829); original locality, ‘‘ Kauai, Walder von Halemanu.” = Cyrtandra kealiae Wawra, Flora (II) 30: 565. 1872. Not uncommon on the ridges along the Wahiawa river, Kauai, and also found on the ridges west of the Hanapepe river, at elevations of 2500 to 3000 feet. A freely branching bush, about 1 five feet high, the young branches, inflorescence, and under sides of the leaves tomentose with bright yellow hairs; fruit enclosed in the densely hairy calyx. 7 July to August (2543); original locality, Kauai, um Kealia.” + Heller : PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 889 Cyrtandra lessoniana Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 447, pl. 54 1830. This appears to be a variable species, and forms between it and ©. pickeringii are found. My No. 2300 a has characters which point toward the latter species. The leaves are broader and thicker than in the typical plant, but it has the calyx lobes parted to the base, as is ordinary. No. 2896 appears to be typ- ical. It was collected on Konahuanui, back of Honolulu, at elevations of 1500 to 2000 feet. _ Oyrtandra lessoniana pachyphylla * Fl. Haw. Is. 331, 1888. A form which appears to belong here, was collected on the slopes of Konahuani, at an elevation of about 2500 feet. The leaves are thick and leathery with prominent veins, and are _ densely tomentose on the lower side. The peduncles are one flowered. May 23 (2351). Cyrtandra longifolia (Wawra) HLLABR. in C. B. Clarke, DC. Monog. Phan. 5:276, 1883. Cyrtandra paludosa var. longifolia WAWRA, Flora (II) 30: 558. 1872. Phe following is Wawra's description: Frutex biorgyalis foliis anguste lanceolatis brevissime petiolatis, subtus ad ner- vos brunneo-hirsutis integris. Calyce extus hirsuto. Pauci- ramosus. Folia ad caulis apicem congesta 4 1 ped. longa, 1} Poll. lata, subtus spongioso furfuracea (novella brunneo to- mentosa) subsessilia vel in petiolum semipollicarem hirsutum repentine - rarius sensim contracta. Calyx tener, cylindraceus subaequaliter 5 lobus, lobis lanceolatis acutis 3 lin. longis. Oorollae tubus gracillis pollicaris. Bacca anguste oblonga, pPollicaris. Kauai, Walder von Hanalei; 199la.” To this I must refer my No, 2624, which includes twoforms. The leaves are the same shape in both forms, either lanceolate or spatulate lanceo- late, and always contracted at the base, on petioles of almost a half inch in length. The one form is almost smooth, with leaves inclined to be pale underneath. The flowers are on slender pedicels of nearly two inches in length, and are pro- vided with two folicaeous, ovate bracts. The other form has the under sides of the leaves covered with brown scales, or with brown hairs on the petioles, midribs, pedicels and calyx. ‘There is no evidence of bracts on the pedicels, but they show an articulation near the base. The two forms are similar in habit and appearance, and grow together in wet woods along 890 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the Wahiawa river, Kauai. It is a branching bush, five to 4 5 feet high. The largest leaves are barely six inches in lengths i I have distributed it as Cyrtandra Wahiawae n. Sp., but until there is an opportunity for comparison with Wawra’s speci- mens, which are preserved at Vienna. I cannot be shure that they are distinct from C. longifolia. Wawra states very plainly that the type of his var. longifolia is No. 199la, yet Mr. Clarke cites both 1991a and 1991b as types. The latter number is the 4 type of var. arborescens, according to Wawra, who ought to know his own specimens, while Mr. Clarke says 1991c is the type of that plant. Hillebrand, although his Flora was pub- _ lished five years later than Mr. Clarke’s paper, makes no men- tion of C. longifolia or C. scabrella Clarke, the type of the latter being Hillebrand. n. 324 in h. Kew.” Presumably his 4 5 manuscript was 5 previous to 1883, and not afterwards revised. 4 Cyrtandra oenobarba Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7:189. 1867, A rare species, collected on rocks at the base of a small waterfall in Hanapepe valley, Kauai. The short, herbaceous stems are hidden in the crevices of the rocks, and send out numerous fibrous roots, which give the plant the appearance of being stemless. In my specimens, the lower leaves are on petioles longer than the blade. A few plants were collected at Hanapepe falls, growing on a rock wall, where they were con- tinually kept moist by the dripping water. =a July 5 (2490); original locality, ‘Wahiawa falls, and in Waioli valley, Kauai.” — Cyrtandra oenobarba herbacea (Wawra) ; Cyrtandra paludosa. var. herbacea WAwWRA, Flora (II) 30: 550. 2 1872. 8 Wawra's specimens came from Hanapepe falls, Kauai, and if a they are the same as specimens which I collected there, then they are more nearly related to C. oenobarba than to C. paludosa. They were distributed as C.oenobarba. As described by Wawra, — it is ‘‘herbacea procumbens, foliis succulentis grosse serratis, pedunculis brevissimis plurifloris, pedicellis brevibis.” The leaves are about eight inches in length, including petioles f three to four inches. They are three inches broad, pointed at both ends, coarsely serrate, the petioles, midrib and veins cov- gy ered with coarse, brown hair. 1 July (2490, in part). Heller : PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 891 Cyrtandra paludosa Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 447. 1830. Common on the mountains back of Honolulu. It does not grow in swamps, as the name would seem to indicate, but in woods which acquire considerable moisture from the frequent rains. A low bush, usually glabrous throughout; leaves lan- ceolate, acute at each end, bright green above, pale beneath, _ sharply serrate. Among the specimens are some which appear to be Hillebrand’s var. alnifolia. He describes it as young shoots and inflorescence hirsute with dark ferruginous hairs. Leaves rounded at the base, the strong ribs and veins pubes- cent.” The leaves in these specimens are not rounded at the base, but the other characters are the same. : May to November (2268). : a Cyrtandra pickeringii A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 350. 1862. A few specimens were collected on Tantalus which are refer- able to this species. They were growing with C. cordifolia, but seem to have the characters of the species mentioned above, Provided that Wawra’s C. honoluluensis is not distinct from _ C. pickeringii. In some respects they answer better to the description of Wawra’s plant. The inflorescence, young branches, and under sides of the leaves are clothed with yellow i hairs. April 11 (2113); original locality, mountains of Oahu.” Oyrtandra wawrai C. B. CLARKE, in DC. Monog. Phan. 5: 228. a 1883. Cyrtandra peltata WAWRA, Flora (II) 30: 565. 1872, not Jacq. Cyrtandra wawrae HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 328. 1888. ____ Described by both Wawra and Hillebrand as a branching _ shrub. In no case have I seen it branching. It is not uncom- mon about Hanapepe Falls, and in wet woods along the _ Wahiawa river, Kauai. The large, peltately affixed leaves are _ ¢rowded at the summit of the stem, which is ascending or erect, and rather fleshy. The inflorescence and under sides of _ the leaves are covered with a soft wool, which feels very much _ like fine wool recently taken from a sheep. June 24 (2437); original locality, ‘‘Kauai, wasser fall von _ Hanalei.” 892 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. MYOPORINACEAE. MYOPORUM Banks & Sou.; Forst. f. Prodr. 44. 1786. oe Myoporum sandwicense (A. DC.) A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 4 6:52. 1863. 4 Polycoelium Sandwicense A. DC, Prodr. 11: 706. 1847. 2 In this species, the general order of things is reversed, for it is said to be ‘‘a tree 20 to 80 feet high, in the higher, shrubby in the lower regions.” It is occasionally found in gulches on the lee side of Kauai, below the forest. The wood is fragrant when dry, and was used as a substitute for sandal- wood after that had become almost exhausted. PLANTAGINACEAE. PLANTAGO L. Sp. Pl. 112. 1753. Plantago lanceolata L. Sp. Pl. 113. 1753. 4 Not recorded by Hillebrand, but plentiful on open slopes of the lee side of Kauai, and also on the edge of the forest on the plateau above Waimea. It was not seen at elevations lower than 2000 feet. a June to September (2457); original locality, in Europae campis sterilibus.” E. Plantago major L. Sp. Pl. 112. 1753. Small forms of this species were collected along the road in Pauoa and Nuuanu valleys, Oahu. On the island of Hawaiii 3 the leaves attain large proportions, with petioles of 6-8’, while the spikes reach 14-2 feet,” according to Hillebrand. May (2322); original locality, ‘‘in Europa ad vias.” Plantago princeps C. & S. Linnaea, 1:167. 1826. 1 My specimens, collected at the Nuuauu Pali, Oahu, agree very well with the description of this species as it was origin- ally given, and besides, the type came from ‘‘inclosed valleys at the foot of the mountains, on the island of Oahu.” Wawra's 4 P. princeps var. acaulis Flora (II) 32:564, came from the Pali, and is hardly anything more than the typical plant. He ap- % 9 pears to have based his determination not on the original de- scription in Linnaea, but on the descriptions of Gandichaud and Hooker & Arnott, who had P. queliana in view when ter Wes Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 893 wrote their descriptions, and not the plant described by Cha- misso and Schlechtendahl. April 23 (2198). Plantago queleana Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie. 445 pl. 50. 1830. OCited by Chamisso and Schlechtendahl in Lindaea, 1: 168. 1826, ‘‘Gaudichaud ined.” They say the plant was collected on mountain heights, and ask whether it may not be their P. prin- ceps. All the descriptions show that F. queliana is not pros- trate, but has an erect stem, but that there was uncertainty about its being simple. On the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at an elevation of 3000 feet, were collected specimens from plants with stems which were simple and almost an inch in diameter, up to a height of nearly four feet, at which point they sent out five candelabra-like branches, on the ends of which were borne thick clusters of linear lanceolate long 4 pointed leaves, and long, flowering spikes. It can readily be 7 seen how the earlier botanists, who did not see the living plants, could not be certain about whether the plant branched or not, for only one of the five branches can be used in making a speeimen, and even then part of it must be cut away, so as to make it small enough to go on an ordinary sized sheet of mounting paper. That this and the plant from the Pali, with such a great difference in habit and appearance, can belong to the same species, is hardly possible. July 23 (2610). RUBIACEAE, -BOBEA GAvup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 473, pl. 93. 1830. _ Robeaelatior Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 473, pl. 93. 1830. A slender tree, twenty to thirty feet high, with spreading, _ grayish branches. The leaves are light green, glabrous, and drop off easily. Collected on the heights of Pauoa, back of _ Honolulu, where it is occasionally found. Bobea is a genus found only in the Hawaiian group. October (2897). hoben mannii HILL ABR. Fl. Haw. Is. 173. 1888. The type of this species is M. & B. 621, in the Gray Herbar- ium, Cambridge, Mass. Mann erroneously referred this num- ber to Bobea brevipes A. Gray, being misled perhaps by the 1 which is common to both species. It is not un- 894 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, a common on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, and also in woods near the Wahiawa river. The type was collected ‘i. in the neighborhood of Kealia and Waimea, which indicates that it must be scattered over the entire island of Kauai. The leaves have a reddish or brownish tinge, due tothe pubescence __ on them. 5 July 4 (2498). COFFEA L. Sp. Pl. 172. 1753. Coffea arabica L. Sp. Pl, 172. 1753, 4 The coffee tree was introduced in 1823, and for a time its cultivation was carried on successfully, until the inroads of a fungus threatened to destroy all the trees, when the attention of the planters was directed to the raising of sugar cane. Of late years its culture has been revived, and Kona“ coffee is obtaining quite a reputation. A single tree was noticed in Hanapepe valley. October 21 (2890); original locality, in Arabia felice.” COPROSMA Forst. Char. Gen. 137, pl. 69. 1776. Coprosma kauensis (A. GRAy.) gy Coprosma pubens, var. Kauensis A. Gray. Proc. Am. Acad. 4:49. 1860. : The short description of ‘‘drupis obovatis obtusissimis plur- imis sessilibus in pedunculo communi,” by Gray, is all right so far as it goes, but the plant in question is very different from specimens of C. pubens in the herbarium of Columbia Uni- versity. My specimens are from a small tree, which is loosely branched above, the slender branches covered with whitish bark. The leaves are oblanceolate, attenuate into the petiole, — and acute at the apex, two and a half inches in length, bx nearly an inch in width, dull green above, gray pubescent be- neath. Common on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, and also a on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, at elevations of 3000 to 4000 feet. The fact that it is found on the northern island of Kauai is an argument in favor of its being distinct from CO. pubens, a species which has never been found north of Molo- kai, according to Hillebrand, and the type came from Hawaii. Sometimes the leaves are almost glabrous underneath. 4 August (2681, 2776). * Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 895 Coprosma longifolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:48. 1860. A small tree, ten to fifteen feet high, with slender trunk. It is glabrous throughout, and has ternate leaves, an unusual cCeœcurrence among the Hawaiian species. Said by Hillebrand to occur on Oahu, Hawaii and Kauai. Specimens were collected im young fruit, on the slopes of Konahuanui, Oahu, at 2500 feet elevation. April 25 (2176); original locality, Oahu, Sandwich islan Coprosma waimeae WawRA, Flora, (II) 32327. 1874. Under Coprosma foliosa, Hillebrand remarks as follows: Here must also be placed the imperfectly described G. Waimeae Wawra, I. c. p. 327, from Halemanu, Kauai: drupis ternis in pedunculo axillari, plerumque geminato, petiolo sublongiore, subglobosis, cerasi fere magnitudine, calicis dentibus corona- tis.“ Had he quoted the description in full, instead of picking out a sentence here and there, we could easily see that it is not _ “imperfectly described,” but well characterized, and as valid a species as there is any on the group. The following is Wawra's description in full: Arbuscula ramulis gracilibus parce foliosis e basilate triangulari acuminatis glabris; floribus * drupis ternis in pedunculo axillari plerumque geminato petiolo sublongiore, subglobosis pulposis pro genere majusculis. Biorgyalis a basi ramosa, ramulis erectis ligneis glabris internodiis elongatis. Folia 2-3 poll. Iga ac pollice in univer- sum latiora, oblonga vel obovata, obtusa vel breviter et obtuse acuminata rotundata, basi in petiolum 2-3 lin. longum sensim vel saepius abrupte contracta, glabra. Stipulae coriaceae per- sistentes. Drupae auriantacae, singulae bractea suffultae, ce 8 fere magnitudine. Cal. dentibus coronatae. Semina biculari-oblonga, 2 lin. longa subsemiglobosa.” is addition, there is the following remark in German, which have translated: Has of all the Hawaiian species the larg- est berries. Its stipules indicate an affinity with C. foliosa. In esate it resembles C. rhynchocarpa. It appears to stand retty far apart from all hitherto known Hawaiian species of It is a handsome species, and, as Wawra says, p obably has the largest berries of any Hawaiian species. Col- a ected at elevations of 3000 to 4000 feet, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, and on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. August to October (2751, 2815); original locality, ‘* Kauai, N 3 von Halemanu.” 0 ay 4 : F n 896 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. GOULDIA A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:310. 1860. Gouldia arborescens (WAWRA) Gouldia sandwicensis, var. a arborescens WAWRA, Flora (II) 32: si) 874. idea’ macrocarpa HiLLEUn. Fl. Haw. Is. 170. 1888. 2 After the description of G. macrocarpa, Hillebrand says that | it agrees ‘‘tolerably well with G. sandwicensis, var. a, WAWRA, | a from Hanalei, Kauai.” By comparing the two descriptions, very little difference is found. It is altogether probable that Hillebrand’s specimen of G. macrocarpa, with obovate leaves from Mt. Kaala, Oahu, belong to G. terminalis, which also has very large fruit, but the Kauai specimens, collected by Knud- sen, are likely the same as Wawra's var. arborescens. Speci- mens with both ovate and obovate leaves were collected near the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at an elevation of 2500 feet. A small tree, ten to twenty feet high. The fruit is almost again as large as in any of the other species, except that of G. terminalis, — which, when fully developed, is about as large as that of G. arborescens. ia July 15 (2566, 2568); original locality, ‘‘ Kauai, Thal von Hanalei.” a = Gouldia coriacea (H. & A.) HitteBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 168. 1888. Petesia? coriacea H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 85. 1832. De. Gouldia sandwicensis, var. coriacea A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:310. 1860. ta Kadua affinis C. & S.; A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 4: 310. 1860. a Asa Gray, as cited above, makes Chamisso and Schlechten- N dahl the authors of a Kadua affinis. These botanists, in Lin- naea, 4: 164, after describing five species of Kadud, mention a sixth plant thus: 6. Kaduae affinis.” Then follows a des ’ tion of a plant collected on Oahu. It is pretty evident fror a the ‘‘Kaduae affinis,” that they meant a plant related Kadua, and did not intend to give it a specific name, as it x the custom in early days to mention plants of uncertain — ties in just this way. To cite a similar case: Walter, in Fl. Car. 102, under Anonymos, says Kuhniae affinis, but in ad- dition, gives to the plant the specific name of pinnata, or, in other words, Anonymos pinnata, a plant allied to Kuhnia. = It seems that there is no type of Gray’s ‘‘ Gouldia Sand- wicensis.” It is merely a mythical species, intended to repre- f sent any plant of the genus Gouldia, which may be found in the Hawaiian Islands. He based it upon the two species * Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 897 Hooker and Arnott, Petesia? coriacea and Petesia? terminalis, reducing them to varieties, and added a third variety—zhirtella. G. coriacea is found in the mountains back of Honolulu, at elevations of 2,000 feet and more. My specimens. are from dwarfed trees, and agree with specimens in the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, which were collected by Mann & Brigham. May 23 (2347). Gouldia elongata n. sp. (Plate LX.) _ Shrubby, with long and slender, drooping branches, these _ subherbaceous near the ends and sharply four angled, glab- rous throughout; bark gray, smooth; leaves elliptical-lanceo- late, slightly more contracted at the apex than at the base, two to three inches in length, an inch and a half in width, entire, midvein prominent, impressed above, veins not promi- nent; petioles stout, almost an inch in length; panicles termi- nal, or occasionally axillary, pyramidal, very large and loose, with three or four nodes, trichotomously decompound; pedicels Slender, angled, five lines long; berries small, one line in diameter, bluish. The type is 2606 in part, and was collected July 25, on the ridge between the Wahiawa and Hanapepe rivers, at an eleva- tion of about 2,500 feet. It grew in wet, boggy woods, a large number of the slender, wand-like stems springing from a Single clump. It is evidently part of Hillebrand’s Gouldia _ terminalis, but is very different from true specimens of that species, which is probably confined to the island of Oahu, un- less it can be proved that G. arborescens is merely a more arborescent form of it. No. 2889, collected in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river, must also be referred to G. elongata. These specimens are from a stouter bush, divaricately branched, and bearing much shorter panicles, with larger berries. The leaves are smaller and more obovate in shape, It is perhaps distinct, but appears to have more characters in common with this species than with any other. Gouldia lanceolata (Wawra). F Gouldia sandwicensis, var. c. lanceolata W&wRA, Flora (11) 32: 277. 1874. This is certainly a good species, perfectly distinct from either G. coriacea or G. terminalis, which are the only other _ Species found on the mountains back of Honolulu. My speci- _ Mens are from small trees about ten feet high, with slender 898 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. trunks, and rounded, branching tops. Wawra describes it as “arbuscula a basi ramosa, ramulis abbreviatis, novellis ex, ceptis distortis et torulosis.” His specimens were collected on Waiolani,/Oahu, at an elevation of 8,000 feet, which would ac- count for the difference in the growth of the trunk and branches, as everything is dwarfed and stunted at thateleva- tion on the mountains of Oahu. The leaves are ‘‘coriacea — lanceolata vel oblongo-lanceolata acuta in petiolum subsemi- pollicarem sensim acutata,” as described. Specimens with both long and short corollas were collected on Konahuanui, at q elevations of 2000 to 2500 feet. 3 April to May (2177, 2314, 2315). Gouldia sambucina n. sp. (Plate LXI.) A tree, fifteen to twenty feet high, glabrous throughout, freely branching above, the bark close, grayish; leaves large, elliptical-ovate, three to five inches long, two to three inches wide, dull green on both sides, coriaceous, entire, moderately — pointed, rounded or somewhat narrowed at the base, midrib — and veins prominent; petioles stout, usually an inch in length; 4 stipules about three-sixteenths of an inch long, triangular or 7 ovate, slender pointed; inflorescence usually terminal. pyra- 4 midal in shape, shorter than the leaves, the branches numer- ous, trichotomous; berries small, globular, a line in diameter. Type number, 2879, collected at an elevation of 3500 feet, on the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. The fruiting a clusters bear a marked resemblance to the common American elder, Sambucus canadensis, whence the specific name. to a mistake, specimens were distributed under the name of ‘* Gouldia neriifolia n. sp.” To it are referred No. 2883, which 4 is almost identical, and 2859, with considerably smaller, nar- rower leaves, which are inclined to be contracted at the base. The fruit clusters are smaller, and the peduncles and pedicels slightly pubescent. All three numbers were collected at same place, near the edge of the plateau. Gouldia terminalis (H. & A.) HILLRHBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 169. Petesia? terminalis H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 85. 1832. = Gouldia sandwicensis, var. terminalis A. GRAy, Proc. Am. Acad. a 4:310. 1860. a Hillebrand certainly must have confused two species under 5 this name, for his characters, tall rambling, almost scandent shrub, the long virgate branches subherbaceous,” clearly point b to Gouldia elongata. In the herbarium of Columbia University, * a Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 899 are specimens from Dr. Gray, labeled ‘‘ Gouldia sandwicensis, var. terminalis,” which are identical with my 2301, collected on the heights of Pauoa, back of Honolulu. The original of Hooker and Arnott was also undoubtedly collected in this region. It is a much branched bush, five or six feet high, the _ young branches subherbaceous and terete, with obovate, oblong leaves, which are slightly pointed, narrowed but rounded at the base, three to four inches long, two inches or less in width; panicles terminal, shorter than the leaves, flowers tinged with purple. The fruit is large, bright blue. With the exception of G. arborescens, this species has the largest fruit of any spe- cies in the genus, at least any species which has so far been described. As indicated by Hillebrand, Wawra's G. sandwicen- sis vars. suffruticosa and cordata probably belong here. KADUAC.&S. Linnaea, 4:160. 1829. Kadua acuminata C. & S. Linnaea, 4:163. 1829. Kadua petiolata A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 4. 318. 1860. A shrub, several feet high, with spreading branches. Col- lected on the steep slope on the Konahuanui side of the Nuu- anu Pali, Oahu. . 1 May 24 (2360); original locality, in nemoribus Insulae O-Wahu.” Kadua cordata C. & S. Linnaea, 4:160, 1829. Woody at the base, with weak, spreading, herbaceous branch es. The leaves are ovate-lanceolate, on short petioles, and the _ specific name is not derived from their shape, as might be sup- _ posed, but from the ovate, cordate, foliaceous bracts which * subtend the flower clusters. Abundant on Konahuanui, Oahu, at an elevation of 2500 feet, and also recorded from Kauai. April to November (2181); original locality, ‘‘insula O. Wahu.“ Kadua elatior (Maxx) Kadua cookiana, var. ? elatior MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 172. 1867. _ Specimens of my No. 2440 have been compared with M. & B _ 569, which is the type of var. elatior, and pronounced identical With it. Mann's plant was collected at Hanalei, Kauai, and mine near Hanapepe falls. The type of K. cookiana came from the island of Hawaii, and allowing for geographical range and differences in the plants, the Kauai plant is certainly 4 7 worthy of specific rank. a a 7 r 7 900 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. To this species is also referred No, 2442, collected near the same place, but on a steep bank above the Hanapepe river, while the former grew near the water’s edge. This differs in being a branching shrub, two or three feet high, with broader leaves on longer petioles. The calyx lobes are also shorter and broader. Were it not for the fact that forms intermediate between this and No. 2440 were noticed wherever the two oc- curred, I would not hesitate to describe it as a distinct species. Kadua glomerata H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 85. 1832. a Hillebrand records this species from Oahu, but on the Waianae mountains only. We are not told on what part of Oahu, Lay & Coollie collected their specimens, but one would naturally sup- pose that they did the greater part of it in the neighborhood of Honolulu. My specimens were collected on Konahuanui, back of Honolulu, where it is plentiful at an elevation of 2500 feet. The herbaceous, hollow branches are usually four or five feet long and reclining. The slender tube of the corolla is almost an 4 inch in length. As described by Hooker & Arnott, the calyx and corolla are both strongly pubescent, and ‘‘the teeth of the calyx are Jinear and very rigid ” 4 November 2 (2907); probably from the original locality, Kadua knudsenii Hituesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 162. 1888. ; No. 2606, in part, collected July 23, at the head of the valley — opposite Gay & Robinson's Hanapepe valley house, Kauai. The plants were growing alongside of a small waterfall. The slender, almost vine-like branches were eight or ten feet long, and drooped over the bank. Specimens in both flower and fruit were obtained. The following is Hillebrand’s descrip- tion: Branches slender, bilineate, the longest internode 24’. Stipules triangular. Upper leaves 3x14 inches, on petioles of 2 lines, broad oblong, shortly acuminate, rounded at the base, 2 chartaceous, faintly puberulous beneath. Lowest floral leaf cordate, sessile, 1 inch, the uppermost very small, not over one line long. Panicle pyramidal, ample and open, 8 inches long, with six nodes, the lowest branches again ramifying divari- cately with simple or compound cymes at their ends, the lat- eral flowers on pedicels of 1-14 lines; the ultimate bractlets linear-spatulate to dentiform, about 3 line long. Calyx lobes ovate or lanceolate, shorter than their tube. Corolla glabrous, its tube 3 lines, the spreading lobes more than I that length, with tips inflected in the bud. Anthers sagittate, sessile below the throat. Style $ as long as the tube, with linear lobes, — hairy at the base.” 1 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 901 This is the original No. 2606, and very much resembles Gouldia elongata, which was collected several days later, and included under this number, so much alike are they in appear- ance and habit when only superficially examined. Examination will show that it differs from the Gouldia in having terete stems, a capsule dehiscent at the apex, and an ovate, cordate, sessile floral leaf at the end of the first node. Several specimens were also collected at the base of the plateau above Waimea, not far from the original locality. The type was collected by Knud- sen, on the west side of the Hanapepe river. Kadua waimeae WAWRA, Flora (II) 32: 264. 1874. A glabrous shrub, branching above, the slender branches drooping; leaves sessile, with cordate, clasping base, ovate, shortly acuminate, one to two inches long. The specimens are rather old, and the leaves have turned dark in drying. Col- lected at an elevation of 2500 feet, on the ridge opposite Gay & Robinson’s Hanapepe valley house, Kauai. Originally includ- ed under No. 2615. July 23 (2615a); original locality, ‘‘Kauai, Wilder von Hale- manu.” } MORINDA L. Sp. Pl. 176. 1753. Morinda citrifolia L. Sp. Pl. 176. 1753. . Occasional trees are found in Hanapepe valley, Kauai The Fruit which is the size of an ordinary orange, is ‘insipid and very foetid when decaying,” according to Hillebrand. It is a small tree, ten or fifteen feet high, with spreading branches, and large, ovate, pointed leaves. August 14 (2716); original locality, ‘tin India.“ NERTERA Banks & SoL.; GAERTN. Fr & Sem 1:124, pl. 26. 1788. 3 a Nertera depressa Banks & Sol.; GARRTN. Fr. & Sem. 1: 124, pl. 26, f.1. 1788. a Very common in wet woods, near the head of the Wahiawa river, Kauai, where it creeps over the ground and forms thick mats. The stems root at the nodes. Properly the flowers are terminal, but those of young and short branches have the ap- pearance of being axillary. 5 August 12 (2702); original locality, in regionibus antarc- ticus.“ * . 902 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. PAEDERIA L. Mant. 52. 1767. Paederia foetida L. Mant. 52. 1767. Very abundant in upper Nuuanu valley, Oahu. In many places the interlaced and twining stems cover grass and bushes completely. The tomentose flowers are pale lilac in color. In- troduced about 1854. October 29 (2893); original locality, ‘‘in India.“ PLECTRONIA L. Mant, 52. 1767. Plectronia odorata (Forst.) Hititesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 175. 1888. Coffea odorata Forst. f. Prodr. 16. 1786. Common on the lee side of Kauai, up to an elevation of 2500 feet. Specimens were collected in Hanapepe valley, and in ravines above Waimea. The thick, dark green, glossy leaves, make it conspicuous on the hillsides and gulches. It is a tree ten to twenty feet high. Hillebrand cites ‘‘Benth. & Hook. Gen. Pl. 2:110,” as the authors of Plectronia odorata, but in uniting Canthium with Plectronia, those botanists do not men- q tion species, hence to them does not belong the credit of the combination, unless we grant that Hillebrand published it for them. . June to September (2445). PSYCHOTRIA L. Syst. Ed. 10, 929. 1759. Psychotria hexandra Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7:170. 1867. Specimens collected at an elevation of about 3,500 feet, on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, seem to belong to this species, although in some points they do not agree with the description as given by Mann and Hillebrand. The leaves are acute at both ends, as described, but are not pale beneath. Instead, they are more or less provided with brown- ish hair and scales. The anthers are oblong, slightly narrowed at the apex, but not acute, and not contracted at the base. A small tree, fifteen feet high, with Spreading branches. Per- haps a distinct species. 4 August 6 (2680); original locality, on the mountains above Waimea, Kauai.” 5 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 903 Psychotria hirta (Wawra) Collected in flower only, at an elevation of 4,000 feet, on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. A slender tree, fifteen feet high, with obovate, abruptly pointed leaves, which are pubes- cent underneath on the veins and midrib, and also brown scaly in the spaces between the veins. The flowers are large, lemon yellow, but the cymes are not specially contracted, al- though they are few flowered. October 12 (2876); original locality, Gebirgs walder von Halemanu,” é RICHARDIA L. Sp. Pl. 380. 1753. Richardia scabra L. Sp. Pl. 330. 1753. Common in cane fields on the lee side of Kauai, and also in pastures. Specimens were collected near Hanapepe, in a cane field, and on the plateau above Waimea, where it was growing on the edge of the woods. July to September (2564); original locality, in Vera Cruce.” STRAUSSIA A. Gray, Proc. Am, Acad. 4:42. 1860. It seems that Nuttall had recognized that these plants be- longed to an undescribed genus, and has labeled his specimens Apionema, with three species, obovata, penduliflora and sulcata. Unfortunately he never published a description of them, and Dr. Gray did not take up his name, but substituted Straussia in its stead. Straussia kaduana (C. & S.) A Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:43. 1860. Coffea kaduana C. & S. Linnaea, 4:33. 1829. A variable species, one number of which (2193) I distributed as Straussia parviflora n. sp.“ It is merely a small leaved form, collected on the steep slopes of the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu. On the slopes of Konahuanui, at an elevation of 2,500 feet, an- other form (2350) was collected. This has longer leaves and larger fruit. Another form from the head of Kalihi valley _ (2883), has long, erect, pubescent peduncles. The length of the corolla tube is variable in this species, but it is always supposed to be smooth in the throat. Though the leaves are variable, they are more or less obovate and short peticled in all cases, as in the original description: Folia breviter petio- lata, firmia, opaca, cuneato-obovata, angulo apicali obtuso, 904 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. supra plana, nervo medio, quam crassus latiori.“ The origi- nal locality is in nemorosis montium Insulae O-Wahu.” Straussia mariniana (C. & S.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 4:48. 1860. Coffea mariniana C. & S. Linnaea, 4:35, 1829. This species seems sufficiently distinct from any of the oth- ers by the leaf shape alone, although Mann, in Proc. Am. Acad. 7:170, says ‘‘the only characters upon which this species can be kept distinct from the first (kaduana) are, so far as the specimens now show. the slightly longer tube of the corolla. : which is bearded within.” Itis very likely that some of the specimens which Mann cites are not of this species, but belong to another. The original is clear enough, and one who has ob- served these plants in the field, should have no great difficulty in deciding to which of the two species enumerated above his specimens belong. The original description says: Folia in apicibus conferta, elliptica, utrinque acuta, apice tamen obtusi- uscula * * * maxima 3} poll. longa, 14 poll. lata, petiolo ad summum semipollicari, lamina decurrente marginata.” My No. 2267, from the slopes of Konahuanui, back of Honolulu, has elliptical-lanceolate leaves, acute at both ends. The flow- ering panicles are erect. On Kauai it is common in damp woods on the lee side of the island up to an elevation of 4000 a feet. Here it is larger in every way than on Oahu, and is not typical. The tree is larger, the leaves are broader and some- ' what longer, but preserve the same general shape that they have in the Oahu plant. Petioles two or three times longer than in S. kaduana, is also a constant character in this species. As the types of both species came from Oahu, it is only there that we may expect to find anything like the originals, and specimens from other islands can merely be referred to one or the other with more or less uncertainty, especially since it is a recognized fact that outside of the introduced species, there ‘are very few species common to two or more of the islands. July to September (2267, 2565); original locality, in nemo. 4 rosis montium O-Wahu.” Straussia psychotrioides n. sp. (Plate LXIL) A small tree, ten to fifteen feet high, branching above, the 4a branches loose and spreading, with the young parts more or less angled; bark gray, somewhat ridged; leaves opposite, usu- ally divaricate, or sometimes reflexed, obovate oblong, the 4 Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 905 apex rounded, but often bluntly pointed, gradually narrowed at the base, three and a half inches long, one and a fourth ‘inches wide, coriaceous but thin, entire, the margins slightly inrolled, glabrous and light green on the upper side, brown scaly and shortly pubescent beneath between the veins, midrib and veins yellowish, prominent, especially the midrib; average length of petioles six-sixteenths of an inch; stipules broadly ovate or almost orbicular, not narrowed at the base; peduncles erect, an inch and a quarter in length; inflorescence composed of two or three whorls, three rays springing from each node, each of the lower rays two-flowered, the flowers very shortly pedicelled, the upper rays one-flowered, much longer pedicelled; flowers white, with very short tube, and spreading lobes; fruit obovate, four lines high. slightly swollen at the base, crowned by the short calyx lobes. The type is No. 2885, collected at an elevation of 3500 feet, along the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. Trees of this species were also seen on the ridges west of the Hanapepe river, but specimens were not collected. Unfortunately none of the specimens now at hand show the flowers. It is remark- able as having the largest flowers of any known species in the genus. The corolla is about five lines long, with a tube hardly one-fourth the length of the spreading lobes. The stamens are exserted. In the living plant, the leaves, too, are peculiar. They are thin, and the prominent midrib and veins help to give them an appearance which is hardly describable. They have a2 grayish, semi-transparent aspect, which is not at all brought out in dried specimens. The persistent calyx lobes which crown the fruit, though small, are larger than is usual in Straussia. Althgether, there is a decided leaning toward Psychotria. Straussia pubiflora n. sp. (Plate LXIII.) A small tree, fifteen to twenty feet high, with slender trunk. branching above; bark gray, roughened; young branches slen- der, nodose, the growing parts somewhat quadrangular or flat- tened; leaves opposite, obovate oblong, two to three and a half inches long, one and a half inches wide, thin, glabrous, entire, slightly contracted at the end, light green above, darker be- neath, midrib and veins prominent; petioles a half inch or more in length; stipules ovate, rounded, two lines long; panicles pendulous on puberulous peduncles of two inches in length; in- 1 : Horescence puberulous, composed of three whorls, each, except 906 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the terminal one, bearing four rays, each ray three to five flowered; calyx a line long, with inconspicuous lobes; flowers white, three lines long, the tube pubescent, lobes spreading, as long as the tube, oblong, obtuse; stamens short, slightly ex- serted, inserted at the junction of the corolla lobes with the tube; filaments not longer than the anthers, somewhat pubes- cent; style not exserted, two lobed; ovary glabrous. The type is No. 2300, collected May 18th, on the heights of Pauoa, Oahu. It is possible that this may be Nuttall’s Apio- nema penduliflora, published by Dr. Gray as a synonym of Straussia kaduana. There is apparently no way of determining this, except by comparing it with Nuttall's specimen in herb. Hooker. It seems to be Hillebrand's Straussia kaduana var. gamma from Pauoa and Makiki. To this species must also be referred No. 2210, which differs in having broader leaves on shorter petioles. In texture, though, they are the same as those of No. 2300. It was also collected on the heights of Pauoa. LOBELIACEAE. CLERMONTIA Gavup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 459, pl. 71-78. 1830. Clermontia clermontioides (GAUD. ) Delissea clermontioides GAUD. in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 178. 1867. Clermontia gaudichaudii H1LLEBR. Fl. Haw. IS. 243. 1888. Figured by Gaudichaud, but not described, in the atlas of the Botany of the Voyage of the Bonite, as plate 47. The first description appears to have been drawn up by Mann, and cred- ited to Gaudichaud as cited above. It occurs at intervals in wet woods near the source of the Wahiawa river, Kauai. A much branched bush, eight or ten feet high, with thick, pale green, elliptical-oblong, pointed, crenulate leaves. The yellow fruit is almost an inch in diameter. August 12 (2704). Clermontia kakeana MEYEN, Reise, 358. 1843. Clermontia macrophylla Nutr. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (II) S: 251. 1843. Clermontia macrocarpa GAUD. Bot. Voy. Bon. pl. 49, without de- g seription. Hillebrand takes up the specific name macrocarpa, and re- marks as follows: Meyen's name is older than Gaudichaud's, but, as it was published without description, and the word : (sa Ss * Heller: PLANTS ‘OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 907 Kake is the native rendering of the English name Jack, prob- ably adopted by the travelers guide, I forbear from introducing it.” Meyen's name was published with description, as cited above, and also in Walp. Rep. Bot. Syst. 2:708. 1843, where it is given thus: CL. KAKEANA Meyen, mss. in Hb. Regio Berolin,” followed by a description. It is possible that C. mac- rophylla Nutt., may have precedence of a few months, but it would be a hard matter to find out definitely. At any rate, it was described twice in 1843 under the name kakeana, and C. macrocarpa Gaud., is the name without a description, Hille- brand's statement to the contrary. The species is plentiful on the heights of Pauoa and Tantalus, above Honolulu. A small tree, eight or ten feet high, with branching top and light green leaves, six to eight inches in length. They are elliptical-ob- long, rather thin, finely serrate, puberulous beneath. The flow- ere are large, nearly two inches long, and a half inch broad, yellow green, slightly curved. The anthers are purplish. April 11 (2059); original locality, Oahu. Clermontia oblongifolia Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 459, pl. 77. 1830. A small tree, fifteen to twenty feet high, with straight trunk and spreading top; leaves oblong, on long petioles, thick and leathery, serrate; flowers dull green, tinged with purple, over two inches in length, strongly curved. Collected on Konahu- anui, Oahu, at 2500 feet elevation. May 2 (2239). Clermontia persicaefolia Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, pl. 72. 1830. A branching bush, five or six feet high. The leaves and flowers are shaped like those of C. oblongifolia, but the former are much narrower and shorter, on shorter petioles, with differ- ent serration, and are brighter green and shining above, instead of dull. The flowers are more numerous, smaller, less curved and almost white. Collected at an elevation of 2500 feet, on Waiolani, back of Honolulu. June 6 (2391). CYANEA Gavp. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 457, pl. 75. 1830. Cyanea coriacea (A. GRAY) HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 254. 1888. Delissea coriacea A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:147. 1862. This species is abundant along the banks of the Hanapepe and Wahiawa rivers, and probably also along the Waimea and its 908 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. tributaries, since Hillebrand records it from ‘‘Waimea, at ele- vations of about 2000 feet.” He attributes to it the erroneous . character of ‘‘branching shrub.” It must be remembered that Hillebrand personally knew nothing about the vegetation of Kauai. He received all of his Kauai specimens from Mr. Vlad- mir Knudsen, of Waimea, who owns a large tract of land west of the Waimea river, The plant in question is simple, with a trunk five to ten feet high, an inch or two in diameter, and topped by a dense cluster of long, obovate-oblong leaves on long petioles. The flowers are long peduncled, numerous in the axils of the leaves. They are about an inch in length, al- most white, or purple tinged, somewhat curved. It is figured as Plate LXIV, which shows only a small portion of the top of a plant Cyanea hirtella (MANN) HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 255. 1888. Delissea hirtella MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 179. 1867. In making his key for this genus, Hillebrand appears tohave paid little attention to the original descriptions. To this spe- cies he attributes ‘‘calcyine lobes nearly as long as the tube.” Mann's description is plainly contrary to this, for he says lo- bis calycis lanceolatis ovario multo brevioribus.” The chances ; are that Hillebrand had an entirely different plant. Atan ele- vation of 4000 feet, on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, 1 col- lected specimens which Mr. Fernald has kindly compared with Mann’s type, and pronounced them identical. It is described as ‘‘a large branching shrub, 20 feet high, hirsute with short rusty hairs.” The leaves are oblanceolatis utrinque acuminatis crebre serrulatis, supra glabris petiolatis.” My specimens are from brarching shrubs, eight to ten feet high, which grew only on the banks of a forest stream. The leaves are four to six inches long, on petioles of an inch or moreinlength. The specimens are in fruit only. August 30 (2769); from the original locality, ‘‘mountains above Waimea, Kauai.” Cyanea leptostegia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:149. 1862. The trunk of this species is usually about twenty feet high, although much taller ones are sometimes found. It is three inches or more in diameter, hollow, but here and there closed 4 by a white membrane, simple, and topped by a dense, round crown of leaves, which are slightly drooping. The flowers are crowded at the bases of the lower leaves, and from the remains Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 909 of old ones, it would seem that both corolla and staminal column are somewhat pubescent. The juice is yellowish and thick. Collected at the type locality, upper edge of the for- est, near the tabular summit of Kauai.” September 9 (2793). Cyanea longifolia n. n. Delissea arborea MANN, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 180. "1867, not Presi. 1836, OCyanea arborea HILLeBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 261. 1888. The earlier Delissea arborea of Presl invalidates Mann's later one, and I have assigned to it the name given above. The leaves are described as being two feet long. Cyanea spathulata (HILLEBR.) Cyanea coriacea, var. spathulata HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 254. 1888. This is described as having leaves narrowly spathulate, 4-6 x 4-1 inch, on petioles of 4-1 4 inches, coriaceous, slightly pubescent underneath along the prominent rib and veins.” My 2768, collected at an elevation of 4000 feet, above Waimea, Kauai, seems to belong here. The specimens came from a shrub eight or ten feet high, branching above, the branches ’ slender, and often curved at the ends. Itgrew along the banks of a forest stream on the plateau. The calyx and corolla are the same as those of C. coriacea, and the leaves are of the same gen- eral shape, but much narrower, more acute, and on petioles very much shorter. In that species the racemes, although on long ped- uncles, are only as long as the petioles. while in this theyare half the length of the leaves. The habit of the two plants is also dif- ferent. C.coriacea never branches, except in rare cases where the stem has been broken or injured, while C. spathulata al- ways branches, and grows at much higher elevations, and in deep forests, instead of along river banks in open places on the edge of the woods. The type came from the west side of the Waimea river, at heights of 4000 feet.” C. coriacea has not been found higher than 2000 feet, or, at most, 2500 feet, along the Wahiawa. Figured as Plate LXV, which shows a single branch. August 30 (2768). Gyanea sylvestris n. sp. (Plate LXVI) An unbranched shrub, four to eight feet high, with a trunk one to two inches in diameter; leaves large, disposed at the summit of the erect stem, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, twelve 910 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. to fourteen inches long, three to four inches wide, thin, glab- rous, light green and shining above, paler beneath, serrulate, acute, narrowing below into a stout petiole, veins prominent on both sides, the midrib raised on the upper side, flat and broad on the lower side; petioles one to two inches long; in- florescence somewhat pubescent with short, brownish hairs; flowers mostly in the axils of the upper leaves; peduncles shorter than the petioles, several flowered; calyx somewhat campanulate, the lobes narrowly lanceolate, much shorter than the tube; corolla nearly two inches in length, slender, curved, purple; staminal column glabrous; berry yellow, obovate, nearly three-fourths of an inch in length, with a diameter of nearly a half inch, crowned by the persistent style; seeds brown, very glossy. The type is No. 2691. collected in wet woods near the Wahiawa river, Kauai, at elevations of 2,500 to 8,000 feet. It is always found back in the forest, never in open places, and is rather common. There is a possibility that it may be the same as Cyanea recta (Wawra) Hillebrand, but does not quite agree with the description of that species. Nearly all of my specimens were in fruit, but several had unopened flowers, one of which is shown in the plate, and a few were found which had old, withered flowers attached The fruit is larger than that of any other Cyanea which I have seen. To this species is also referred No. 2494 of which a few specimens were collected on the ridge west of the Hanapepe river. They are in neither flower or fruit, but merely have undeveloped buds. DELISSEA Gavup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 457, pl. 76-78. 1830. Delissea rhytidosperma Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7:180. 1867. Delissea kealiae WAWRA, Flora (II) 31:10. 1873. It is possible that Wawra’s species is distinct from Mann’s and in that case my specimens are not D. rhytidosperma, but D. kealiae, for they were collected on the east side of the Hana- pepe river in wet woods near the source of the Wahiawa, not many miles from the place where Wawra collected his type. Mann's type, on the contrary, came from the mountains above Waimea, Kauai,” in what is practically a different floral area, neither did I see this same plant above Waimea. July to October (2487). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 911 Delissea undulata Gaupb. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 457, pl. 78. 1830. As stated by Dr. Gray, in Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 148, D. subcor- data seems to be nothing but a form of this species, for, as he remarks, ‘‘leaves with the base subcordate, obtuse, or acute, being found on the same stem.” Scattered plants may be found on the grassy slopes west of the Hanapepe river, Kauai, at elevations of about 2000 feet. On an individual plant may be found young leaves which answer to the description of D. . undulata, while the old leaves agree with description of D. sub- cordata, The blades of the mature leaves are often seven inches long, with petioles six inches . The slender, green ish corollas are curved. June 25 (2430). LoBELIA L. Sp. Pl. 929. 1783. Lobelia kauaensis (A. Gray) Lobelia gaudichaudii var. Kauaensis A, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 3: 150. 1862. j Had Dr. Gray seen these two plants in the living state, he _ certainly would not have considered the one a mere form of the bother. worthy of varietal rank only. My specimens were col- lected in the bog at the head of the Wahiawa river. The trunk, three or four inches in diameter, is covered with leaf scars, and _ rises to a height of five or six feet, when it sends out five can- _ delabra-like branches of nearly two feet in length. The upper half of these branches is covered with very large, curved flow- ers, two inches or more in length, usually of a pale purple or pink, with deep purple stripes, and on pedicels of an inch in length. The calyx is slightly over a half inch in length, the _ lobes oblong, blunt, longer than the tube. The oblong-lance- olate leaves are a foot and more in length, sessile, with a broad base, acute. Those on the branches are of the same shape, but gradually decrease in size, until just below the flowers they are only an inch or two long. October 19 (2888). I saw L. gaudichaudii on the summit of Konahuanui, but it Was just out of flower. It is a species of very different growth. a The stems are simple, as a rule, and only an inch or two in di- i 3 ameter. The original description of it in DC. Prodr. 7: 384, Calls for ‘planta 3-pedalis medulla farcta. Folia 3-4 poll. _ longa, 6-12 lin. lata, erectiuscula.” The corolla is described as only three times longer than the calyx. 912 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Lobelia tortuosa n. sp. (Plate LXVII). Woody; stems clustered from a thick mass of roots, the older ones almost an inch in diameter at the base, gnarled and twisted, the young flowering and leaf-bearing ends ascending and spar- ingly branching, closely studded with leaf scars; leaves nar- rowly lanceolate-oblong, slightly cyathiform, acuminate at the apex, tapering at the base into a short winged petiole, six - inches in length, three-fourths of an inch wide, light green and somewhat pubescent above, pale and densely soft pubescent be- neath, with prominent midveins; flowering branch angled; ped- icels a half inch in length, horizontal for half their length, then twisted and curved upward, each subtended by a subulate bract, tomentose; calyx shallow cup-shaped, truncate, shortly pubescent, the lobes linear, almost as long as the tube; corolla an inch and a half in length, garnet colored, somewhat con- tracted near the middle, pubescent, lobes revolute; stamens glabrous, or occasionally with a few scattered hairs; lower an- thers tufted at the ends with white hairs; style with a pubes- cent ring at the base of the stigma. 3 The type is No. 2443, collected on perpendicular cliffs along the Hanapepe river, Kauai. The thick, knotted mass of roots protrude from crevices of the rocks, and from them spring the at first declined and twisted, finally ascending, sparingly branched stems. Its nearest relative seems to be L. neriifolia A. Gray, from east Maui. Mr. Fernald has compared the two, and finds them quite distinct. . ROLLANDIA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 458, pl. 74. 1830. Rollandia lanceolata Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 458, pl. 74. 1830. There seems to be some doubt as to whether R. lanceolata is the proper name since Dr. Gray says it is quoted as R. montana on the plate. Hillebrand has recorded a number of forms and varieties. To one of these belong my specimens, collected on the lower slopes of Konahuanui. Thestems are simple, smooth, nearly an inch in diameter, inclined to be decumbent. The leaves are often two feet long, acute at each end. The flowers are red-purple, over two inches in length, curved. Hollandia 4 is a genus which is found only on the island of Oahu. “a April 25 (2184). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS: 913 GOODENTACEAE. SCAEVOLA L. Mant. 148. 1771. Scaevola chamissoniana Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 461, pl. 82. 1830. A common and variable species. A shrub, six to ten feet high, freely branching, the flowers white, tinged with purple. No. 2052, collected at an elevation of 2,000 feet on Tantalus, back of Honolulu, had rather narrow, oblanceolate leaves, and short cymes. No. 2340, collected at the head of Kalihi valley, Oahu, has broader leaves, more abruptly contracted below, and longer cymes. No. 2569, collected at an elevation of 2,500 feet, near the Wahiawa river, Kauai, has broad leaves on longer petioles, and densely flowered cymes, which are much branched, and extend beyond the leaves. The leaves in all three forms are serrate, and more or less acuminate. Scaevola glabra H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 89. 1832. This seems to be unlike the other species, and perhaps is generically distinct. It was collected in fruit, on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, where it grew far back in wet woods. The linear, persistent calyx lobes are half the length of the fruit. The yellow corolla is thick and leathery, and, judging from illustrations, is very different from the corollas of other Hawaiian species. September 15 (2806); original locality, Oahu. Scaevola koenigii VAL. Symb. Bot. 3:36. 1794. Collected along the seashore at Mana and Waimea, Kauai. Hillebrand, who calls it Scaevola lobelia L., describes it as an erect shrub, 4-6 ft. high, extensively branching from the base, the succulent branches, leaves, and inflorescence generally silky pubescent, rarely glabrate.” Not one of the bushes seen at Mana or Waimea were erect, but decumbent and much branched, the branches somewhat ascending. The berries are white. August to October (2730). Seaevola mollis H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 89. 1832. Collected on Konahuanui, Oahu, at an elevation of 2500 feet; The lanceolate leaves are thick, dark green above, densely to- ; mentose beneath. The flowers are pale purple. May 23 (2346); original locality, Oahu. 914 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Scaevola procera HiLLesr. Fl. Haw. Is. 268. 1888. Concerning this species Hillebrand says: As to shape of leaves and color of flowers, much like S. Chamissoniana, but in the inflorescence and hairiness it approaches S. mollis. It is Remy’s no. 311.” No. 2837, collected on the plateau above Waimea, Kauai, answers well to the description of this species, except the hairiness of the leaves, which are thin, and only slightly pubescent. The cymes are very short, usually not over an inch in length, and many of them scattered on the bare stems below the leaves. No. 2617, collected on the ridge op- posite Gay & Robinsons Hanapepe valley house, has narrower and slightly thicker leaves, which are entire, or somewhat obscurely serrate. On these specimens the pubescence is more P manifest, and the cymes are more crowded, in the axils of the upper leaves. It was collected at an elevation of about 2,800 feet. July to September (2617, 2837). COMPOSITAE. ACANTHOSPERMUM Scurang, Pl. Rar. Hort. Monac. pl. 53. 1819. Acanthospermum brasilum ScHRANK, Pl. Rar. Hort. Monac. 2253. 1819. Hillebrand records this species as occurring only on Kauai. It is plentiful there on pasture lands from sea level to 4.00 ͥ/ . feet, but is also now found along the road in Nuuanu valley, Oahu. 4 March 29 (2030). ADENOSTEMMA Forst. Char. Gen. 90. 1776. Adenostemma yiscosum Forst. Char. Gen. 90. 1776. A species which occurs in wet woods at elevations of 1,200 4 to 3,000 feet. Specimens were collected in Kalibi valley, Oahu, and on the heights of Pauoa. An herbaceous plant with reclining or ascending stems. May 20 (2339). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 915 AGERATUM L. Sp. Pl. 839. 1753: Ageratum conyzoides L. Sp. Pl. 839. 1753. A common weed about the streets of Honolulu, and on the lower slopes near the city. Said to be diffused over the whole group. March 25 (1999); original locality, ‘‘in America.” APHANOPAPPUS Exp. Gen. Pl. Suppl. 2, 43. 1842. (Schizophyllum Nurt, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (II) 7:452. 1841, not Fries.] ? The following is Nutall's original description of this genus, the type of which is Schizophyllum micranthum, collected on „the island of Atooi (Kauai) in shady woods, near Koloa.” Oapitulum few flowered, heterogamous. Rays feminine, two or three bidentate; discal florets subcampanulate, five toothed. Inxolucrum small, oblong, imbricate, about five leaved. Re- ceptacle paleaceous, the scales resembling the involucrum, em- bracing. Discal stigmas hirsute, with a slender conic apex. Achenia of the ray turgid, indurated, three or four sided, ob- tuse and turbinate, those of the disk abortive, subquadrangular. Pappus none, or aslight vestige of an aristate crown. An her- a aceous plant of the Sandwich Islands, with diffusely trailing, _ oppositely branching, quadrangular stems, and opposite pseudo bipinnate leaves. Flowers yellow, usually terminal in threes, nearly sessile.” Aphanopappus micranthus (Nurvr.) Schizophyllum micranthum Nutr. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (II) 7: 452. 1841. Aphanopappus nuttallii WALP. Rep. 2:620. 1843. Lipochueta mierantha A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:131, 1862. Tue leaves of this species are somewhat variable, and one Who sees a branch with young leaves only, might be tempted to suppose that it is a distinct plant from one which has older 5 leaves. The stems are usually five or six feet long, weak and _ somewhat climbing. The leaves are lanceolate, twice or thrice pPinnately parted or divided. The inconspicuous, pale yellow flowers are easily overlooked, as they are almost sessile, and hidden by the numerous, crowded leaves. It is plentiful in _ Hanapepe valley, Kauai, on moist, shaded banks, and was also collected above Waimea, at the base of the plateau. June to September (2439). 916 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ARTEMISIA L. Sp. Pl. 845. 1758. Artemisia australis Less. Linnaea 6:522. 1881. Common at the Nuuanu Pali, Oahu, where it grows on the edge of the precipice, and also in crevices on the faces of per- pendicular rocks, at an elevation of 1400 feet. It was found in similar situations on the edge of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. Hillebrand says that it grows only on the highest ridges.” May to September (2364); original locality, “in O-Wahu Sandvicensium.” BIDENS L. Sp. Pl. 831. 1753. Bidens pilosa L. Sp. Pl. 832. 1758. A common weed on Oahu, from the slopes of Punchbowl to the heights of Tantalus. It is common also on Kauai, ranging from Hanapepe valley to the edge of the plateau above Wai- mea. April to September (2090); original locality, ‘tin America.” CAMPYLOTHECA Cass. Dict. Sci. Nat. 51:476. 1827. Campylotheca cosmoides (A. Gray) HitLesR. Fl. Haw. Is. 218. 1888. Coreopsis cosmoides A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 126. 1862. Ascending, five to eight feet high, the herbaceous branches spreading and somewhat climbing; leaves dark green glabrous; flowers nodding, on peduncles two or three inches in length. It is plentiful in ravines on the edge of the plateau above Wai- mea, Kauai. Hillebrand mentions it from Kauai only, but Gray records the type as having been collected on Hawaii.“ September 2 (2791). Campylotheca mutica ( NUTT.) Bidens mutica Nutt. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (II) 7: 368. 1841. Coreopsis (Campylotheca) macrocarpa A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:126. 1862. Campylotheca macrocarpa HILLEBR. Fl. Haw. Is. 214. 1888. Speaking of this species, Hillebrand says Nuttal's name has precedence, but is inappropriate on account of the strongly barb awned varieties. It is rather unfortunate that a name should be inappriate for later discovered forms, but it is more unfortunate that the original name should be discarded for what appears to be more appropriate. My No. 1988, collected Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 917 at the Nuuanu Pali, appears to be the same as Nuttall's plant, which was probably also collected at the Pali. It is described as less than a foot high.” My specimens are ten to fifteen inches high, branched. The leaves are three foliolate, the lat- eral divisions sessile and oblique, the terminal ones petioled and larger. No. 2894, collected at the Pali, but some two or three hundred feet higher, on the steep slopes, is perhaps Nut- tall's Bidens gracilis, as it answers very well to his description. It is taller, and more slender, with narrower and thinner leaves, but does not seem to be distinct from G mutica. March to October (1988, 2894); probably from the original locality. Campylotheca sandwicensis (Less.) Hintesr. Fl. Haw. Is. i 214. 1888. Bidens sandwicensis Less. Linnaea, 6:508. 1831. Gray evidently confused this with C. mutica, as the two are somewhat similar in appearance, especially when not seen in the living state. This species, however, is much taller, three to five feet high, with larger flowers. It is plentiful on Kona- huanui, Oahu, at an elevation of 2500 feet, and appears to be confined to the forest, while C. mutica flourishes on open, grassy slopes. November 2 (2901); original locality. in O. Wahu.” CENTAUREA L. Sp. Pl. 909. 1753. Centaurea melitensis L. Sp. Pl. 917. 1753. _ Abundant in a grassy field at Waikiki, Oahu. An annual, about two feet high, with small yellow heads. May 9 (2287); original locality, *‘in Melita.” DUBAUTIA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 469, pl. 84. 1830. Dubautia laevigata A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 135. 1862. Originally described from a specimen out of flower, but quite a distinct from D. plantaginea, which it resembles. A shrub, six to eight feet high, with branching top. The bright green, glossy leaves are narrowed into margined, clasping petioles. The panicle, however, is pubescent, and the flowers are yellow. Collected at an elevation of 3,000 feet, on the ridge west of the q Hanapepe river, Kauai. It is not plentiful there, and very few plants were in bloom. July 23 (2616); original locality, Kauai Sandwich Islands.” 918 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Dubautia laxa H. & A. Bot. Beechy, 87. 1832, On Konahuanui, Oahu, this species is not uncommon from an elevation of 2,500 feet to the summit. On and near the summit itis very plentiful, the broad as well as the narrow leaved forms being found side by side. It is smaller and more bushy than D. plantaginea, but this is due to the greater eleva~- — tion, and the fact that it grows only within the limit of scrub vegetation. The inflorescence is hispid, and the flowers purple N November 2 (2902); original locality, Oahu. Dubautia knudsenii HiLLERR. Fl. Haw. Is. 223. 1888. A branched shrub, about six feet high. The branches are slender, glabrous, brownish, and spreading. The leaves are obovate, thin, glabrous, cuspidate, serrate. In my specimens the corymbose inflorescence is not quite as long as the leaves, and drooping, the latter fact not noted by Hillebrand. Col- lected at an elevation of 4,000 feet, on the plateau above Wai- mea, Kauai, on the banks of a forest stream. This is a rare species, as hitherto it has been ‘‘collected only by Knudsen,on the mountains of Waimea, or Halemanu.” September 30 (2856). Dubautia plantaginea Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 468, pl. 84. 1830. Hillebrand says this species grows on ‘‘Oahu on both moun- tain ranges, at elevations of near 3,000 feet.” I have seen it on Konahuanui, at elevations of 1,500 to 2,500 feet, but never higher. Above 2,500 feet, its place is taken by D. lara. It is much larger in every way than that species, and has a panicu- 4 late instead of corymbose inflorescence. The flowers are either yellow or purple. It is a slender tree, often fifteen feet high. November 2 (2909); original locality, Oahu. e ECLIPTA L. Mant. 2:157. 1771. Eclipta alba (L.) Hassk. Pl. Rar. Jav. 528. 1848. Verbesina alba L. Sp. Pl. 902. 1753. 4 Rather common about Honolulu, in old taro ponds and near a streams, but sometimes in dry ground. a March 21 (1979); original locality, ‘‘in Virginia, Surinamo.” Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 919 EMILIA Cass. Bull. Soc. Philom. 68. 1817. Emilia flammea Cass. Dict. Sc. Nat. 14:406. 1819. 1 An introduced plant, and not recorded by Hillebrand. It is most abundant in Nuuanu valley on the outskirts of Honolulu, and a few plants were found on the edge of the woods along the Tantalus road. A thin leaved, glaucous plant, with scarlet flowers. : May to October (2296). ERIGERON L. Sp. Pl. 863. 1753. Erigeron bonariensis L. Sp. Pl. 863. 1753. Erigeron albidum A. GRAY, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:319. 1862. Hillebrand mentions this species as ‘* gregarious in parts of Molokai and Maui.” It is also abundant in pasture land above Waimea, Kauai, at elevations of 1500 to 4000 feet. A simple stemmed, leafy perennial, often six feet high. The leaves are a dull, dark green, coarsely toothed, and the stem hirsute. September 15 (2819); original locality, in America aus- trali.” Erigeron canadensis L. Sp. Pl. 863. 1753. % Growing with the preceding, but a more slender and less leafy plant. In dry ground near Honolulu, it is often oniy two or three inches high. A weed of almost world-wide distribu- tion, and was originally recorded from Canada, Virginia, nunc in Europae australi.” September 15 (2820). GNAPHALIUM L. Sp. Pl. 850. 1753. Gnaphalium purpureum L. Sp. Pl. 854. 1753. Luxuriant forms, freely branching from the base, are found in cultivated ground near Honolulu. I have collected the same _ form in fields in North Carolina. es March to June (2002); originally from Carolina, Virginia, Pennsylvania.“ Gunaphalium sandwicensium Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 464. ae 1880. , Hillebrand refers this to G. lutee album L., and says that it oc- _ curs on all islands, in dry or rocky localities, particularly of _ the upper region.” On Oahu it was collected only a few feet > 920 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. above sea level, at Diamond Head. The leaves are very white wooly. March 20 (1957). LIPOCHAETA DC. Prodr. 5: 610. 1836. Lipochaeta calycosa A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 130. 1862. A suffruticose plant about two feet high, with stiff, almost sessile lanceolate leaves, and yellow flowers almost an inch in diameter. Collected at the original locality, Diamond Hill, Oahu,” where it grows on steep slopes. March 28 (2021). Lipochaeta connata (Gaup.) DC. Prodr. 5:611. 1836. Verbesina connata GAup. Bot. Voy. Uranie, 464. 1830, 4 DeCandolle’s description of ‘‘suffruticosa, foliis sessilibus connatis rhombeo-ovatis argute et grosse duplicato-serratis supra scabris subtus dense hispidis,” can apply only tomy No. 2787, collected at the base of the plateau above Waimea, Kauai. 4 The plants are stout, four to five feet high, with harsh, thick, connate leaves, which are somewhat variable in shape, some of them being very long and linear lanceolate. August 31 (2787). Lipochaeta No. 2563, collected on Kauai near Hanapepe, is one of the numerous plants referred to L. connata. It seems to answer fairly well to Gray’s L. australis var. decurrens. The stiff, . scabrous, ovate-lanceolate leaves are contracted into a broadly _ winged petiole, instead of being connate. The plant is woody. erect, about two feet high, and somewhat branched. It grows along the road, on the edge of the precipitous bank of the Han- apepe river, just outside of the town. Apparently the same thing, but with thinner and sharper serrated leaves, was col- lected in a thicket in Hanapepe valley, some three miles Wan the first station. Here it is more protected, which would ac- count for the difference in growth. If not specifically distinct from L. connata, it is certainly a well marked form. July to August (2563). Heller: PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 921 Lipochaeta integrifolia (Nurr.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5:180. 1862. Microchoeta integrifolia Nutt. Trans. Aw. Phil. Soc. (II) 7: 451. 1841, Hillebrand says branches not over 1 ft. long.” They are really often four feet long. The base is lignescent, and from this spread many prostrate, herbaceous branches, Collected on the old lava flow back of Diamond Head. April 8 (2092). RAILLARDIA Gaup. Bot. Voy. Uranie 469, pl. 83, 1830, Raillardia latifolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 132. 1862. . In the original description this is said to be ‘‘a rambling _ shrub,” and Hillebrand, with his splendid opportunities for ex- ploration of every island of the group, quotes the same expres- sion. It is really a vine. The main stem is often two inches in diameter, and twenty or thirty feet in length. The flower- ing branches are found running and twining over the branches of trees, one tree near Gay & Robinson’s Kaholuamano house, above Waimea, Kauai, having its top completely covered with the vine. The inflorescence is a large panicle, often two feet in length, and is very handsome when covered with the yellow flowers, which bear some resemblance to the flowers of our golden rods. It has been found only on the island of Kauai. October 15 (2887). SIGESBECKIA L. Sp. Pl. 900. 1753. _ Sigesbeckia orientalis L. Sp. Pl. 900. 1753. A common weed along Nuuanu avenue, Honolulu, and also in cultivated ground. The Chinese use it in some manner as a ' remedy for cuts or sores. A pubescent annual, with glands on the slender, club-shaped involucral bracts. March to October (2036); original locality, ‘tin China, media ad pagos.“ VERNONIA Scores. Gen. Pl. 2: 541. 1791. Vernonia cinerea (L.) Less. Linnaea, 4: 291. 1829. ] Conyza cinerea L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 1208. 1763. A slender annual, one to two feet high, very different in ap- pearance from the large, coarse American species. The leaves gare small, about an inch in length, the lower one obovate, and PDascuis.“ 922 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the upper ones lanceolate. The flower heads are small, pale purple. AS April to October (2175); origina) locality, in India.” 8 XANTHIUM L. Sp. Pl. 987, 1753. Xanthium strumarium L. Sp. Pl. 987. 175g. A common weed about Honolulu. On Kauai it has become a a great nuisance in pasture land near the coast, as the burs — become entangled in the manes and tails of horses. It is found only at low elevations. Collected in lower Pauoa valley. a Oahu. It is of wide distribution, originally having been re. corded from Europa, Canada, Virginia, Jamaica, dle, Japonia.” CICHORIACEAE. CREPIS L. Sp. Pl. 805. 1753. Crepis japonica (L.) Bento. Fl. Hongkong. 194 1861. Prenanthes japonica L. Mant. 1: 107. 1767. = Said to be an introduced species. It is found only in the for- ests, and appears to be native. On Konahuanui, Oahu, it is found as high as 2500 feet. Usually a slender plant, eight or ten inches high, but sometimes rather stout, branched a 3 two to three feet high. The thin leaves are lyrate, and heads numerous, yellow flowered. April to June (2074); original locality, ‘‘in Japonia.” HYPOCHAERIS L. Sp. Pl. 810. 1753. Hypochaeris radicata L. Sp. Pl. 811. 1753. a A plant not recorded as growing in the Hawaiian group. It is about twenty inches high, with smooth, slender stem, branch ing above, and destitute of leaves, which are all crowded to- gether as a bunch of prostrate lyrate root leaves. The 1 ow heads are an inch in diameter. Collected on the plateau < Waimea, Kauai. It grows on the edge of the forest, at 400 0 feet elevation, and must have been introduced in some way 4 from Australia, as it grows in that country. 2 ee 30 (2835); re locality, in Europae culto XLIX. THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. ALBERT SCHNEIDER. INTRODUCTION. All living organisms manifest a more or less intimate biolog- ical interdependence and relationship. In fact, their very ex- istence depends upon this condition; therefore no organism, no matter how simple or how complex its structure may be, is the result of a wholly independent phylogenetic development. Upon careful study and investigation it is found that, although this interrelation and interdependence vary greatly as to quality and quantity, there may be found innumerable inter- _ mediae phenomena which make it difficult to draw the divid- ing lines. Such a difficulty is, for instance, encountered in attempting to distinguish between mere ‘‘associations” or so- cCieties (according to Warming and others) and true symbiosis.* Both are evident phenomena of biological interdependence with the general difference that in the former the interdependence is remote, in the latter more close. Great difficulty is encountered in limiting and defining the biological relationships in the animal kingdom. Highly auto- mobile organisms do not permit the ready establishment of symbiotic relationships as we have come to understand them. Symbiosis presupposes a certain relative fixedness of the or- ganisms. Thus it is that we may find clearly defined symbioses between highly automobile organisms and those which are com- _ paratively non-motile. Here it is very essential to keep dis- tinct the difference between auto-mobility and passive motility _ (immobility). The former tends to counteract or reduce the occurrence of symbiosis; the latter favors its occurrence as Well as its modification, as will be explained later in the dis- cussion. The most clearly defined and most highly specialized 1 a forms of symbiosis occur between non-motile organisms. * The term is used throughout in its broader meaning, not in the sense of De Bary. 924 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. i Motility or non-motility of organisms has little or no direct | 4 influence upon the more remote relationships. From the fact that these latter phenomena are most conveniently limited, geographically, it becomes evident that they are largely de- pendent upon the influence of the soil, the climate, moisture, etc. (meteorological influences ) 1 The largest and, at the same time, the most remote associa- tion of organisms is the hemispherical. The faunal and floral differences between the eastern and western hemispheres are considerable, as every naturalist can testify. That the associa- — tion is remote is evident from the numerous exotic plants and animals which have become perfectly habilitated. In each hemisphere we again recognize subdivisions of associations, which may be designated as zonal. Here the interdependence ~ is more marked, and is primarily dependent upon the influence of temperature and light. The fauna and flora of the tropics — are essentially different from those of the temperate zone, and this again is different from the arctic. Each of the zonal areas is again subdivided into numerous larger or smaller geograph- ically limited societies, dependent upon local influences, as soil, elevation, moisture, etc. For example, life in the Mississippi valley is essentially different from that in the Rocky mountain system. In each area the organisms are specially adapted to each other and their environment. In each of these divisions — we find numerous smaller societies. The process of subdivid- ing could be carried on indefinitely. These smaller subdivis- ions may be natural or artificial, as pond, brooklet, meadow, — field, roadside, town, city, etc., each of which has its peculiar — fauna and flora. a Within each of these numerous associations, great and small, we find the organisms acting and reacting upon each other. Here there seems to be a mutualistic association of two or more organisms, while the next-door neighbors may be engaged ina struggle with each other for existence. A single example will suffice to illustrate this. The wood-peckers and trees evidently — form a mutualistic association, while insects and larvae are diligently hunted by the wood-pecker. Weasel and wood- pecker again are antagonistically related. It is not the pur- pose of this paper to enter into the details of biological asso- ciations and societies. It is hoped that these preliminary suggestions will indicate the close relationship existing be- J Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 925 tween what is usually designated as mere association of living things and what constitutes true symbiosis. The nearness of these relationships will become still more evident on attempt- ing to define symbiosis. Definition of symbiosis.—Etymologically the word sym- biosis signifies a living together.” It is therefore pecu- liarly fitted for use in the broader sense, as including all phenomena of living together.” Owing to the mutability and imperfections of a language the etymology of a word is not sufficient to limit its application. A careful definition or ex- planation is always necessary. Symbiosis may be defined as a contiquous association of two or more morphologically distinct organisms, not of the same kind, resulting in a loss or acquisition O assimilated food-substances. This definition is by no means perfect. It will, however, be left to further discussions to point out and explain its deficiency. The origin of symbiosis,—It is self-evident that before a sym- biotic relationship between morphologically distinct organisms could be established it was absolutely necessary that they be brought in close proximity, or in actual contact. It is also clear, from « priori reasoning, that thene could be no inherent tendency within these organisms to attract or repel each other; nor could the first contact have been co-incident with morpho- logical and physiological adaptations. The very conception of symbiosis implies something secondary, and in a certain Sense something abnormal. The establishment of marked _ symbioses required long periods of time; just when they began is impossible to determine. It is, no doubt, justifiable to as- sume that a number of lowly organized organisms existed in a natural state, manifesting no symbiotic phenomena, because competition (for space) had not yet resulted from over-pro- _ ductiveness. It may also be assumed that symbiotic phenom- ena began to manifest themselves during the earliest geologic ages. All the multitudinous phenomena of antagonistic sym- biosis, and of mutualistic symbiosis, are highly specialized biological conditions which were initiated by the first contact of morphologically distinct organisms. This contact produced 2 change in the environment. An unforseen struggle was the result, since it is reasonable to assume that the first relation- Ship of contiguous organisms was antagonistic rather than mutualistic. As already indicated, organisms are not primar- 926 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, ily adapted to form symbiotic relationships; therefore the or- a ganisms, during their first contact, had the same relation to each other that they had to their substrata, or more correctly to their entire environment. The changes in the substrata are destructive (disintegrative), due to the food requiring and re- productive life-action of the organism. The antagonism in the : incipient symbiosis is, however, so slight as to be incapable of detection. Subsequently antagonism may be increased or be converted into nutricism or mutualism; this depending 1 upon the nature of the symbionts. It becomes very evident q that the question of the origin of symbiosis is directly con- cerned with the questions of the ‘‘struggle for existence,” „survival of the fittest,” as well as with the problems of gen- eral evolution. We may cite the case of parasitic fungi for the purpose of explaining the probable origin of antagonistic sym- biosis. Most fungi are, no doubt, derived from algae, as cer- 4 tain morphological similarities would lead us to believe. Owing to lack of space, or over productiveness, certain algae fre- quently came in contact with more highly organized plants and animals from which they absorbed (by osmotic action) various organic food-substances, thereby reducing the necessary activ- ity of chlorophyllian Assimilation. Co-incident with the first contact and resultant change in function, there was a corre- sponding change in structure. As the opportunities for the symbiotic association continued (perhaps more or less inter- ruptedly ), the morpho-physiological changes progressed in the q diréction of parasitism and away from independence. Finally — the originally independent chlorophyll- bearing and carbon 4 . assimilating organism became wholly dependent upon an or- ganic food supply and sustained a total loss of the chlorophyl- lian function. There is no doubt that the host plant or host- plants are also more or less affected by the symbiosis. The a relative morpho-physiological changes are approximately in proportion to the size (volume) and biological activity of the ‘organisms. Above all it is desirable to keep distinct the difference be- “3 3 tween mere associations and societies of organisms and sym- biosis proper. Unless this is done we shall further complicate — a subject which is already very complicated The former condi- tions are of great importance biologically, but the latter attract 1 the most attention at present because of their intimate relation- ship with the well-being of man himself. There is scarcely a problem of economic significance which is not directly con- 1 ws Ss a a * Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 927 nected with some form of symbiotic relationship of organisms. One needs but call to mind the recent discoveries in the treat- ment of disease, modern surgery, agriculture, dairy industries, etc. A mere mention of all the experimentation and discoveries in connection with symbiosis would fill volumes. The object of this paper is simply to define the various phenomena of sym- biosis according to the present status of our knowledge and to indicate some of the difficulties encountered in the treatment of the subject. Much careful research is yet necessary in order to clear up the uncertainties in regard to the biological signifi- cance of many of the symbioses. In order to impress this un- certainty more fully we shall mention a few symbiotic phen- omena which are either not recognized as such or improperly classified, usually as parasitism. UNCLASSIFIED SYMBIOTIC PHENOMENA. Under this heading will be briefly mentioned numerous and varied phenomena which are of undoubted symbiotic nature, but are not understood or have not been sufficiently studied to give them a definite position in the system of symbioses here proposed. Some of these phenomena are of a very compli- cated nature and indicate a long phylogenetic development. In many instances the morphological adaptation and relation- ship of the organisms is so remote as to awaken serious doubt as to its symbiotic nature. Under this category belong the mutual adaptation of plants (entomophilous and other flowers) and animals; also the various forms of mimicry, the association of various species of aphidae and ants upon certain plants, be- sides many other phenomena. The association of trees, such as the myrmocophilous Cecropias and representatives of other _ genera, with ants, is by many designated as true mutualistic _ symbiosis. In reality, however, the mutual morphological and functional adaptations are as remote as in some of the instances just cited. _ The relation of the male and female reproductive cells is of a truly symbiotic nature. It represents a most specialized individualism. The relationship existing between the imma- ture embryo and the food-supplying parent-stock is evidently a form of symbiosis. There are numerous instances in both the animal and vegatable kingdom in which the more or less imper- fect but complete second generation lives in a symbiotic rela- _ tionship with the first generation. The relationship existing between sporophytic and gametophytic generations can not be 928 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. considered as of a symbiotic nature since the two generations are parts of the same ontogeny. There is however no doubt that the two generations form a highly specialized symbiosis (individualism). There are many other phenomena of a complicated nature which are designated as true parasitism by some authors while others discuss them without referring them to any symbiotic category. Some of these will receive mention in order to in- dicate more clearly the complexity of the subject. Several species of crab belonging to the genus Slenorhynchus are usually covered by a growth of algae, sponges and other plants and animals. This is perhaps a case of accidental symbiosis. The habitat of the crab combined with its slow movement makes the chitinous skeleton a suitable substratum for the attachment of various aquatic organisms. The cover- ing may serve some protection but this is evidently of no sig- nificant importance. Species of the closely related genus Inachus are also covered by a similar growth but here the plants and animals serve as food for the crab. Brehm states that the crab even transplants hydroids, algae and other organisms upor its back, thus converting itself into a traveling zoologic and botanic garden. Another crab is totally hidden by sponges growing upon it which enables it to approach its prey unpercieved as well as to hide it from its enemies. Although some of these phenomena seem very complicated. there is no evidence of marked symbiotism. If more than mere 7 accidental symbiotism does exist, no experiments have been made to demonstrate whether it is antagonistic or mutualistic. The hermit crab is morphologically adapted to live in the empty shells of certain snails. The last pair of legs are much 4 shortened and serve the special function of holding the shell. The coleopter Necrophilus subterraneous attacks live snails, eats = the animal and then moves into the empty shell. The cray- 2 fish Phronima sedentaria eats species of Doliolum and Pyrosoma — x and utilizes the empty skeleton as a dwelling place, paddling — 3 it about by means of its claws. Although these phenomena are in part of a symbiotic nature, yet one must hesitate to 4 place them in this category, since the hunting, killing and eating process is not true parasitism (antagonistic symbiosis). 4 According to definition, symbiosis necessitates a prolonged ~ a contiguous relationship. This is not the case with the carniv- — orous animals and their prey. The apparently wonderful adaptations of the crab and other animals to the snail-shell and Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 929 the outer skeletons of animals is perhaps purely accidental unless it can be proven to the contrary that the structural conformations are the result of phylogenetic development. Climbing plants are interesting as they mark the beginnings of a highly complicated form of symbiosis. The plants form a close association with their supports, which in most cases are living plants; especially is this the case in the dense jungles of the tropics. Whether these plants cling to their support by means of twining stems, tendrils, suctorial organs or aerial roots, there is more or less absorption of soluble food-sub- stances from the living support and in so far it constitutes a symbiotic relationship. The morphological adaptations favor- ing climbing are however primarily for the purpose of bring- ing the assimilative tissues nearer the sunlight, and away from excessive moisture. The support is necessary in order to en- able them to enter into successful competition with other plants. In many instances the supporting plant plays the part of a host as in true parasitism (Cuscuta). There is little doubt that the members of the Dodder family were originally climbing plants which took almost their entire nourishment from the soil and air. The contact with the supporting plants gradually developed a wholly parasitic habit. In many of the climbing plants the supporting function predominates while the symbiotic relationship remains practically zero. This is especially true of the large thick-stemmed climbers of the tropics. f Highly interesting though little understood are the fre- quently occurring neoformations in animals, such as tumors _ (lipoma, asteoma, sarcoma, carcinoma, etc.,) and cysts of _ various kinds. Although the origin and true nature of the Structures is not well understood, yet they shall receive men- tion here since they partake of the nature of symbionts. It is generally believed that these growths are neoformations aris- ing from the development of dormant embryonic cells. They are foreign to the body in which they live as true parasites, greatly sapping vitality or even destroying life. Various theories have been advanced as to the nature of these growths but none have thus far proven tenable. It is however hoped | that the investigations of the near future will give more satis- factory results. Ik! conclusion we shall mention a few symbioid phenomena from the insect world and show how they are gradually con- verted into undoubted symbioses. Different species of wasps x 980 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. narcotize or paralyze spiders, crickets or caterpillars by sting- ing, thus rendering them motionless. In this condition they are sealed into the wasp’s nest containing the egg, in order to serve as food for the young wasp. This condition becomes more complicated by the intrusion of another wasp which un- observed lays its egg in the nest already supplied with the necessary food. The foreign egg develops first and the young wasp not only eats the food supplied by its foster mother, but also the egg. From these conditions to true parasitism is only a step. Some wasps. lay their eggs directly into the tissues of the caterpillar. The egg develops and the young larva feeds upon the less vital tissues of the host so as to prolong life as much as possible. Finally only the outer tegument of 1 the host remains which is utilized as a protective covering during the resting stage. We may also mention the phenomena induced by grafting. These are usually not designated as symbioses though they 4 evidently partake of that nature. It is true graft and stock do not form an association of two complete individuals, yet in their functional relationships they form a most perfect sym- a biosis (mutualism). Y 1 These examples will suffice to make clear how difficult it is a in many instances to recognize phenomena of undoubted sym- a biosis. 5 RECOGNIZED PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. ; The phenomena of symbiosis here defined have been more or - less discussed by scientists and have received recognition. Authors are. however, at variance as to their exact limitations which makes the definitions subjectively variable. The phen- 1 omena of symbiosis may be classified as follows: 1 I. Incipient Symbiosis (Indifferent Symbiosis). 1. Accidental Symbiosis. 2. Contingent Symbiosis (Raumparasitismus). II. Antagonistic Symbiosis. 3 1. Mutual Antagonistic Symbiosis (Mutual Parasitism). a 2. Antagonistic Symbiosis (Parasitism). ae a. Obligative Antagonistic Symbiosis. b. Facultative Antagonistic Symbiosis. 3. Saprophytism. a. Facultative Saprophytism. b. Obligative Saprophytism. Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 931 III. Mutualistic Symbiosis. 1. Nutricism (Semi-mutualistic Symbiosis). 2. Mutualism. 3. Individualism. a. Semi-individualism. b. Complete Individualism. IV. Compound Symbiosis. These phenomena are represented by the association of widely different organisms. Organisms similar to those which enter into an antagonistic symbiosis will occur in mutualistic symbiosis. This seems to indicate that the development of these associations depends largely upon opportunity (environ- ment). To some extent, however, the organisms control or modify the symbiotic relationship as indicated in the introduc- tion. A classification of the phenomena indicating their phylo- genetic relationship can therefore not be based upon the organ- isms which enter into their formation. One can only indicate the physiological relationship of the phenomena and their ap- _ proximate relative evolution. The accompanying figure and the brief discussions of the phenomena will doubtless suffice to make clear their relation- ships and limitations. The figure is intended to indicate the phylogenetic relationship of the symbioses without any refer- _ ence to the phylogeny of the organisms comprising them. Ac- _ cidental symbiosis is indicated as forming the basis from which the other forms developed. Parasitism should, perhaps, have been indicated as taking its origin below nutricism. Saprophy- tism proper is not symbiosis. It is introduced in the figure to sho its probable relationship to the symbiosis. The only compound symbiosis indicated is that of mutualism with para- _ Ssitism. Further investigations may reveal others. Accidental Contingent Symbiosis Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 933 I. Incipient Symbiosis (Indifferent Symbiosis ). Under incipient symbiosis are included the multitudinous phenomena of symbiotic relationships, which have not yet acquired evident antagonistic or mutualistic characters. In many instances there are marked morphological adaptations, but without any apparent corresponding functional activity. In far the greater number of cases there is simple contact re- sulting from over production. In view of this fact one may be criticised for recognizing such relationships as symbioses. From a priori reasoning one is, however, forced to conclude that the first symbiotic activities began with the first contact of organisms. Incipient symbiosis, therefore, forms the basis or common source of all symbiotic phenomena. From it grad- ually emerged highly complicated morphological and physi- logical adaptations of originally distinct organisms. There is also little doubt as our methods of investigation become more highly perfected many of the symbiotic phenomena now con- sidered as indifferent will be relegated to the realms of antag- onistic or mutualistic symbiosis. 1. Accidental Symbiosis.—This represents the least special- ized form of symbiosis, but is of wider occurrence than all the others combined Accidental symbiosis is represented by the mere coming in contact of two or more morphologically dis- tinct organisms; such contact being, however, sufficiently pro- longed to give it the semblance of a symbiosis. Mere momentary contact is not symbiosis as here understood. Accidental symbioses are particularly numerous where there is luxuriant growth, hence where competition is great, as in the tropics and in green-houses. The lower parts of plants in green-houses are covered with bacteria, hyphal fungi, algae and more rarely some of the lower protozoa. The epidermal cells of many plants contain more or less bacteria. Submerged plants are covered with mollusks, hydras, tubullarians, amoe- bas, vorticellas, etc. The ‘larger land and water organisms furnish hiding places and protection for hosts of smaller or- ganisms. In fact, ho organism is free from the accidental association with other organisms, omitting of course in all cases the coterie of recognized parasites. In all the instances mentioned there is no perceptible evi- dence of either antagonism or mutualism. Injurious results may occur, but they are due to mechanical causes. Slight K. morphological changes usually result, but such changes seem 934 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. to have no effect upon the life-history and development of the symbionts. There is no doubt that accidental symbioses forms the * whence gradually emerged all other forms of symbiosis. Per- haps few symbiotic associations were from the very first mark - edly antagonistic, and still less rarely markedly mutualistic for reasons already stated. To the category of accidental symbiosis also belong the as- sociation of climbing plants and their living supports. The symbiotic relationship was at first merely accidental resulting from the contact. It is a striking example illustrating how marked and highly specialized morphological adaptations fav- oring one function may initiate widely different morpho. physio- logical changes. In the case of climbing plants it is impossible to know when the symbiotic relationship begins to overbalance the function of mechanical support. It is just as difficult to determine when marked symbiotic phenomena begin to mani- fest themselves. It is safe to conclude, however, that the morphological changes favoring climbing and support pro- gressed considerably before any marked symbiotic relation- ships occurred. It is also evident that accidental symbiosis is a condition readily subject to change, since the permanency of symbioses is in direct proportion to the degree of mutualistic specializa- tion. Each plant and animal may enter into accidental sym- biotism with other plants and animals. In a given animal this association changes with a change of locality, in temperature, or of moisture; in fact, with every change in the environment. The absence of all permanency in morphological and func- tional relationship characterizes accidental symbiosis. It re- sembles a form of haphazard experimentation on the part of nature to determine whether or not a definite symbiotic rela- tionship can be established. 2. Contingent Symbiosis.—In this form of symbiosis the re- lationship of the organisms is already sufficiently marked to 1 give the semblance of an elective affinity, although the func- tional. interdependence is as yet not manifest. Itis of wide occurrence among widely different organisms. Many phenom- ena heretofore recognized or variously classified as parasitism, perhaps belong to this category. Most of the phenomena rec- ognized by the German scientists as Raumparasitismus also 4 3 belong here. The citation of a few examples will suffice to ex- 1 plain the nature of contingent symbiosis, and to distinguish it . q , 4 a 4 f f a Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 935 from mere accidental symbiosis as well as from the moré highly specialized forms of symbiosis. There is a difference between the bacterial flora of the digest- ive tract of man and that of the chicken or dog. Certain bac- teria, which have not yet become markedly antagonistic or mutualistic in their symbiotic associations, show a preference for one digestive tract which indicates that there must be some elective affinity. That the elective affinity is only slight is evident from the fact that the bacteria referred to will very readily grow and multiply upon artificial culture media, and may readily be induced to change hosts. Some algae show an elective affinity for certain living substrata. Sirosiphon pulvin- atus occurs quite constantly upon species of Umbilicaria and Gyrophora. Pleurococcus punctiformis occurs upon the young thallus of Cladonia and Baeomyces, Nleurococcus vulgaris, on the other hand, occurs upon the most varied substrata living and dead; hence this association is evidently only accidental, as the alga shows no preference for any particular host. It has, perhaps, a slight preference for some of the Polyporei. Some of the higher crustaceans select certain corals, among which they live, without forming any marked symbiotic rela- K tionship. In one locality (geographical area) Hydra viridis seems to prefer one vegetable substratum (Nuphar), while in another locality it prefers to live upon another plant, Lemna : _ polyrhiza. Some Rotifera show a preference for certain plants to which they attach themselves. Certain algae, as species of Dactylococcus and Euglena, show a decided tendency to locate upon such animals as Cyclops, snails and clams. Some mam- mals (sloth; ant-eater, and others), have algae living upon them. The symbiosis of snails with corals is perhaps con- _ tingent. Some sponges and hydroids show a preference for animals, others for plants. Marine life in particular presents many forms of contingent symbioses. The instances cited are _ sufficient to indicate the nature of contingentsymbiosis Many require further careful study before anything definite can be _ Stated as to their biological activity and relationship to other _ symbioses. If. Antagonistic Symbiosis. The phenomena included under this head are of wide occur- rence and were the first to receive the attention of scientists. The term as here used includes mutual antagonistic symbiosis and antagonistic symbiosis proper. The former is not gener- 936 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ally recognized by authors. The latter is more commonly known as parasitism. There are no objections to the use of the term parasitism, since it has become clearly defined and definitely restricted in its application. It is, however, recom- mended that the term antagonistic symbiosis be substituted for the sake of uniformity in terminology. From the nature of things the morpho-physiological special- izations and adaptations of antagonistic symbiosis are limited. Although one of the symbionts may be highly benefitted the other is always injuriously affected. This injurious effect may finally reach the stage where it will react upon the parasite, thus indirectly resulting in the mutual destruction of the sym- bionts. In far the greater number of instances the host is not destroyed, nor even seriously injured, although its morpho- logical changes tend in that direction; a condition which will of necessity react upon the parasite. From this it also be- comes evident that it is desirable for the parasite to locate upon a host whose vitality and biological activities are many times greater than its own. This we find to be the case, the host is quite generally a large plant, while its parasites are comparatively small. Strictly speaking, antagonistic symbiosis is therefore a de- structive association. The morphological and physiological changes tend toward dissolution rather than evolution. Itis a change from the higher to the lower, hence a katabolic change. There is, however, no doubt that symbioses which were origin- ally antagonistic may be subsequently converted into mutualistic symbiosis. Reinke expresses the opinion that the lichen proto- type was the result of the parasitic association of a fungus and an alga (Nostoc). This transition from antagonism to mutual- ism, however, takes place early in the phylogeny of the sym- biosis. As has already been indicated, the majority of symbioses were perhaps originally more or less antagonistic, although actual experiments are wanting to prove this. Incipient an- tagonistic symbioses are, however, in existence, represented by some Chlorophyceae and Cyanophyceae, in and upon higher plants. In time these algae will no doubt lose their chloro- phyllian function and depend entirely upon the organic food supply of the host. The yeast-plant was no doubt originally a green alga. Whether the majority of the bacteria are also de- rived from algae is still is dispute. S r Seti € Schneider: THE PHENOMENA OF SYMBIOSIS. 937 1. Mutual Antagonistic Symbiosis (Mutual Parasitism).— Mutual parasitism as such has heretofore received little or no recognition. It is a phenomenon characterized by the mutual antagonism of the symbionts and is therefore essentially differ- ent from antagonistic symbiosis proper or parasitism. It is a relationship which can not readily occur. If, for example, two or more symbiants nearly equal in size and in vitality, enter into a relationship of mutual antagonism two things may occur. Owing to the antagonism a prolonged symbiosis is impossible, and the symbionts will adhere to the original substrata or they will mutually destroy each other. It is, however, highly prob- able that an association of organisms, which was at first more or less mutually antagonistic, later developed into antagon- istic symbiosis proper or even into mutualistic symbiosis. Complete and simultaneous mutual antagonism of the symbi- onts is certainly of rare occurrence. Further careful study may reveal phenomena of this nature. Various forms of mutual antagonism do, however, occur. It exists, for example, between normal cells of plants and animals and certain disease- producing germs (bacteria, etc.) The ability of the cells to resist the attacks of certain germs is spoken of as ‘‘physiolog- ical resistance” or ‘‘natural resistance.” In fact, the recent investigations and discoveries in regard to immunity, toxine and anti-toxine, are based upon this mutual antagonism be- tween host and parasite. This antagonism varies greatly be- tween different organisms. Phagocytosis is another example of mutual antagonism. Under ordinary circumstances the phagocytes destroy all of the germs with which they came in contact; thus preventing the occurrence of diseases or other disturbances. Under certain conditions the germs, however, gain the upper hand and destroy the phagocytes. It must be admitted that the subject is as yet not well understood. The above are the most typical examples of mutual antag- onistic symbiosis and their brief mention will suffice to indicate the true nature of this phenomenon. 2. Antagonistic Symbiosis (Parasitism). — Antagonistic symbiosis in some of its forms is familiar to all, and for that | reason it will not be necessary to dwell upon its nature. We shall, however, briefly mention some of the important relation- Ships of host and parasite, and refer to some of the less-known forms of parasitism. 938 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. In many instances the host is destroyed without any prelim- inary morphological changes. The parasite simply enters the cells and destroys them by assimilating the plasmic contents. This form of symbiosis Tubeuf designates as Perniciasm. In other instances, also belonging to perniciasm, there are slight secondary changes before death takes place; resulting in rudi- mentary galls or mere swellings. In other instances death is the result of ferments and ptom- aines generated by the parasite, as in various diseases of ani- mals as well as of plants Some parasites dissolve the cell- wells of the host, while others simply lie in contact with the cells and absorb the contents by osmotic action. In a great number of instances hypertrophies and abnormalities in growth are induced (galls, hypertrophied fruits and leaves; enlarge- ments in animal tissues). Again, atrophy, or a total check in development, may occur as the result of parasitism. With some parasites the host adaptation has become highly specialized. In the phenomena known as heteroecism the suc- cessive generations of the parasite develop upon different host- plants. For example, Puccinia graminis develops its aecidio- spores upon Berberis vulgaris, while its teleutospores are devel- oped upon some of the grasses, as wheat or oats. Most para- sites do, however, not have successive autogenetic genera- tions. Many are limited to one host-species, or even to definite tissues or organs. One organism may enter into different forms of e For example, the bacillus of typhoid fever may enter into an accidental (perhaps contingent) symbiosis with the oyster, while with man it forms an antagonistic symbiosis. The bac- illus of “Asiatic cholera, likewise, may live in and upon various animals without any injurious effects, but as soon as it finds its way to the intestinal canal of man it acts as a true parasite. The distinction into facultative and obligative parasitism de- x pends upon the ability that some organisms havé of living as parasites and saprophytes, while others are alsolutely depen- 1 dent for their existence upon association with the host. The most common parasites are the fungi. The Schizomy- cetes form antagonistic symbioses, preferably with animals. The higher fungi predominate upon vegetable tissue. Many diseases of animals are also due to the higher fungi. Algae 3 occur parasitically in and upon plants and animals. Many of the Chlorophyceae and Cyanophyceae occur as parasites upon higher plants. Many of the marine algae are parasitic upon 7 — 7 i af — r ea ea ee TN eo are, III. Classification of shores with reference to moisture. 4. Moister shores. 1. Shores crossed by gullies or streams, debouching upon them conveying moisture or retaining it in pools. 2. Shores favorably exposed to rains, dews or drifting snows. 3 3. Shores situated where surf or spray is thrown landward, either ow- ing to the direct impingement of prevailing winds, or by reason of the broad expanse of water off-shore. 4. Shores upon which ice-floes are deposited in early spring, owing t their outline, slope, or exposure to the prevailing winds. spray, snow, ice or running water. MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 959 B. Drier shores. 1. Shores not easily wet by water or capable of rapid drainage. 2. Shores unfavorably exposed to dews, rains and drifting snow. 3. Shores protected against the deposition of surf and spray. 4. Shores of which the outline, slope or exposure is unfavorable to the deposit of ice floes in early spring. 5. Shores from which the evaporation of moisture is promoted by ex- posure to sunshine and atmospheric currents. 6. Shores of which the texture favors the evaporation of rain, dew, surf, spray, snow, ice or running water. IV. Classification of shores with reference to nutritive value. A. Nutritive shores. 1. Shores, the components of which are rich in nutritive substances. 2. Shores upon which waters, rich in nutritive substances, debouch from streams or collect from waves. B. Sterile shores. 1. Shores, the components of which are poor in nutritive substances. 2. Shores upon which waters debouch or waves collect which are poor in nutritive substances. V. Classification of shores with reference to atmospheric currents. A. Wind-swept shores. 1, Shores exposed toward the quarter from which come the prevailing winds. 2. High or promontory-like shores. 3. Shores facing wide expanses of water over which the wind has greater sweep. 4. Shores devoid of surface irregularities or growths of vegetation _ sufficient to break the force of the wind. B. Sheltered shores. 1. Shores exposed toward quarters from which prevailing winds do not blow. | 2. Low or protected shores. 3. Shores facing narrow expanses of water over which the wind has not free sweep. _ 4. Shores provided with irregularities of surface or growths of vegeta- tion by which the force of the wind is broken. N VI. Classification of shores with reference to mechanical 4 effect of surf. A. Surf-beaten shores. 1. Shores exposed to wide expanses of water resulting in more contin- uous surf. 2. Shores of which the slope affords greater impact-force to the surf. 3. Shores exposed toward the quarter from which prevailing winds are _ accustomed to blow. 960 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. : 4. Shores, the contour of which permits the surf to affect a broader area. 5. Shores facing water of which the depth and character of the bottom favors surf formation. Such shores are subjected to heavy surf. 6. Shores provided with moveable bodies which, carried in the surf, increase its impact-force. Among such bodies are flat pebbles and drift- wood, a 7. Shores devoid of surf-barriers such as outlying bars or formationsof surf-plants. a B. Shores protected against surf. 1. Shores exposed to narrow expanses of water upon, which the surf is intermittent. 2. Shores of which the slope diminishes the impact-force of the surf. 3. Shores exposed toward quarters from which the prevailing winds 8905 unaccustomed to blow. 4. Shores of which the contour limits surf action to a narrow area. ia 5. Shores facing water of which the depth and character of the bottom tends to inhibit surf-formation. Such shores are exposed to light surf. 6. Shores destitute of moveable bodies which carried in the surf w 1 increase its Iimpact- force. 7. Shores provided with surf-barriers. VII. Classification of shores with reference to mechanical effect ot ice. A. Ice-modified shores. 1. Shores of which the exposure, slope, shadiness, coldness and seclusion — from winds permit long continued ice-pressure extending into the late spring. 2. Shores of which the contour and slope favor ice-pressure. 3. Shores of a texture readily modified by ice-action. B. Ice un-modified shores. 1. Shores of which the exposure, slope, sunniness, warmth and accessi- 4 bility to winds prevents long-continued ice-pressure extending into the q late spring. , 2. Shores of which the contour and slope minimize the ice-pressure. 3. Shores of a texture not easily modified by ice-action. VIII, Classification of shores with reference to currents “4 a water. a A. Current-modified shores. 1. Shores bordering upon strong currents. 2. Shores of a texture easily modified by currents. B, Current-unmodified shores. Shores bordering upon weak currents. Shores of a texture not easily modified by currents. de a MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 961 : IX. Classification of shores with reference to soil currents. A. Orumbling shores. 1. Precipitous shores upon which the force of gravity acts strongly. 2. Shores of a texture readily broken. 3. Shores exposed to strong weathering influences. B. Firm shores. ; Low or rounded shores upon which the components are disposed in “see equilibrium. ; 2. Shores of a firm and resistant texture. 8. Shores protected from strong weathering influences. j X. Movable shores. A. Shores moved by the wind: e. g. Sand dunes. B. Shores moved by wind and water: e. g. Floating bogs. C. Shores moved by water: e.g. Beaches facing currents or eddies. The ten groups of shore-types given above scarcely exhaust the possibilities of instructive classification but the more im- portant groups have been included in.the scheme. It becomes evident that the consideration of a given shore must include a wide variety of judgments and observations and in any given example of shore a large number of factors must be taken into account before a reasonably complete comprehension of it as a station for plant individuals or plant formations can be formed in the mind. Its exposure, contour, slope, texture, color, chem- ical composition, physical structure, temperature, moisture, nutriment content, illumination must all be given due consider- ation. The influence upon it of rains, dew, snow, ice, surf, 7 spray. wind, currents of water or of soil and the force of grav- ity must be regarded, and since not one condition alone but permutations of all of the conditions in varying degree are in every case to be distinguished, it would seem that a reasonable explanation of the endless diversity of landscape might very well lie in the diverse qualities of the substratum upon which vegetation disposes itself. But when to all this is added the endless complexity of biological factors—the symbioses, the Struggles between individuals and formations, the ecological _ adaptations and distribution devices, the hybridizings and all _ the historical, developmental and evolutional phenomena—the Student may well hesitate, so interminable is the coil. Yet if the theoretical possibility of complete explanation under con- _ ditions of complete comprehension of the data be taken into 1 5 the mind much has been accomplished. The position of a given 7 962 ‘MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. the earth, no longer seems a matter of chance but rather the definite result of definite, although endlessly complicated causes. Advantages offered by a fresh-water archipelago in the study of ecologic distribution.—It has long impressed the writer that a lake with numerous islands offered one of the best fields for research in ecologic distribution and with this belief in mind, Lake of the Woods was selected as a peculiarly excel- lent body of water for study. The advantages are many. Portions of land of convenient size for careful and exhaustive examination are, in such an archipelago, isolated one from another by areas of water. Lake of the Woods offers a wide variety of shore-lines varying from the mud-flats of the mouth of Rainy river and Muskeg bay to the sand-dunes of the Isle aux Sables, the extended beaches of Oak point and the North- west Angle, the drift mantled shores of Garden island, the rounded rocks and talus heaps of the smaller American islands and the cliffs and crags of the Crow rock and Shoal lake islands. Almost every kind of shore-line from floating bog to precipice may be observed, and, from the exceptional shape of the lake, exposures to narrow, secluded channels, through which the frail canoe of the Indian or the voyageur creeps with difficulty, may be considered at one point, while at another one may stand before a roaring surf without even a distant haze of land visible at the horizon’s edge. But for the monotony of its silicious soils such a lake with its thousands of islands, its cliffs and morasses its winding bays and its Grand Traverse would be an ideal spot for the solution of most of the intimate problems of ecologic distribution. 4 DERIVATION OF THE PLANT POPULATION. General considerations.—It may be laid down as a law of plant distribution that the kinds of plants in a region depend upon general causes originating at a distance and of long dura- tion, while the position, number and strength of plants depend q upon local causes of shorter duration. Thus the presence of the white pine, P. strobus, in the Lake of the Woods region rather than P. taeda of more southern and eastern range results from a long evolutional history, to comprehend which thor- oughly would require an extended survey of vegetation condi- tions both of to day and of the past, over a great portion of the continent of North America. But the position of plants of F. MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 963 strobus on the richer soil of crevices or on clayey loams rather than upon barren rocks or sand or in marshes or swamps is largely a matter of topography. Before proceeding, then, to an analysis of the different plant formations established along shore at Lake of the Woods, it will be well to observe in a gen- eral way what species of plants have taken possession of the region. It is not by any means my intention to furnish here a long list of species and varieties; all that will be necessary to exhibit is a list of dominant plants on a few selected shores. Four such shores have been chosen. Of these Oak point is near the mouth of the Rainy river and faces the surf of the Grand Traverse towards the N. W. while toward the S. E. it is washed by the waters of a quiet bay. Sandy beach is opposite Garden Island, on the Northwest Angle and the back country is almost entirely composed of impassable spruce and tamarack _ swamps or muskeg. Isle aux Sables is the name given to what is really a chain of sand dunes lying near the S. E. shore of the lake and north of the mouth of the Rainy river. Big island Point is the N. W. point of this island about due E. of Garden Island. It is a high rocky promontory clothed with mosses ; and lichens but with many crevice plants of higher types. 964 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. List of dominant plants 3 on four selected Shores. 2 4 N., of Northern Range. 8. 1 Southern Range. ; — a : C., of Continenta bee, eg (ke) As OF MMOs ic covesissveccondcndesapes dacsocsansh 2m thelypte 112 . es ee ee aver biustivecto 4 vul gat dus bees ic e ee ee SE . Equisetum a „ . N. hiemale K ebe eee eee sda eee eee N. Janne , ⅛;T. 90 0 N. — Salas alli. eie ane: ee eee tele ant ce ~ N. {ices ssasians ill.) r %% % 6 ee N. Pinus divemionth (Ait.) Sn phe ee oduct all e N. — —— . Gat ask 8 nn 1 0 * iene en eeeeee oT) eee 2 * * > N. Taxus = a Alt... ) . „es e aes F N Cc. Ty PS eee 6b $6035 e shen N. mogeton foliosus Raf.. a+ ee e ‚— ??; „„ * N. — D e Ge N. perfo lintus var. D 1 ͤ QA avkcsuadiael oe Cc. — 9 — oo c r . oo kigida Furs wee . . N. pope. ay, bk lh W. «le N. Agrostis alba ons becouse ape e E. ie ee eee e eee sondededsdl aaneaee Cc. F.. niculatus L.. . 0 N. Calamag 8 canadensis (ichs) Beauv.. outs dais eee Cc, Kiymus’ canadensis L..... 2 r dkeenae. tl an N 8 oneness jubatum L........ en e 7 a rene 1 melicoideum (Michx.) B ‘Beauv... . ° 8. Faulges rgia mexicana (I..) „ S. Panicum dichotomum II see eeeee 0 N. Carex canescens L. ... N. formis L...... el ele Cc. paria W. Curtis........ 5 Cc. —— scoparia Schkr............. el aie N. „ ( piaseiakacial * 8. Cyperus .. daub cabs ardadabvescametenuieaa — N. —— n . sevdbusedeuabses aueeeau Ps 2 „ c Sékdeks i cuenta S. Bleocharie oe aan ð . ockékc aienue oe * Q. ann ne. 0 N. Scirpus 9 * Kunth...... 8 «le Cc. lacustris [.....--.-.sse> « e f Lemna * — — Juncus articulatus L a 3 5 s a elataa ee senbeds els g D N G „SSC A > tenuis W — C * Polygonatum commutatum R. & 80 CC 4 „„ FFF * DD N. Unifolium canadense (Desv.) C e s N. Vagnera la mt LH ²˙ AAA ĩð eis S. Iris versicolor L 5 oS a C. Habenaria ia psycodes T. @) A. Gray. ei s N. Populus balsamife 8 * | O. — , deltoidea — e „555Fß0õͤ ĩ² *. 0 N. tremuloides 3 / bibiidaks ities „ «| „m1 « C. Salix discolor Muhl.. 2 bes hae bce es Gs Has aon ended s N. „ s N. c d dae oe * N. d q .....]ꝙũc snc npneededbaus copeouane * N. — petiolaris a S. SW .. 8 2 N. petiolaris var. gracilis Anders. .... .. MES A — -| « N. Betula glandulosa ange Te de, s << ber ea macrocarpa Michx. : 46 S. Celtis occidentalis L.. 2 5 rh N. Comandra umbellata (L.) Watton 3 ois ] ĩͤ v foetuses 4 E r / TTT suse neeepaeeeeey * S. erectum L . W000 Lae Ros be aan same aieies a S. emersum (Michx.) ri ceva eck canoes eae «| * Cc. hartwrightii A. Gray UUUUU———— + coer ceeees * 5 Cheno . e SSC AA * 5 eptophyllum (Noꝗ . nas cane 5 N. Corispermum hyssopifolium L. ey * S. Allionia nyctaginea 1 85 8 * * N. Arenaria stricta Michx.. * N. Cerastium arvense L.......... * S. Silene antirhina L.. 9292 8 S. Castalia odorata (Dryand. >. Woodv. & WOOmꝛ * MacMillan : : SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 965 List of dominant plants established on four selected shores. 5 N., of Northern R of Southern Ran 5 C. 5 0 ue 2 Oak point. E N. 8 —1— 8 CCCCCCCCVVVV CC : one canadensis III. Lathes 8 eee —— aan E aa — r :cisssanas 052 j 3. Ca apno ranthum (Engelm. Vii N. 6 & G. att pn Se ee 1 els Sco ä 2 BPB 414 * Burss bursa- 255 L.) Weber . 5 e ; Lepidium apetalum Git „ 0 . Roripa palust ris (L.) pe ss. ö — 2 eee ute ee Cee eee Te) eee rere) * . hoides L.. 8 * N. ela ier canadensis (L. MOdIC. . . > — . nica I, J „eee 1 ser * 666 „% ê ́ „„ > * ee eo uta Pursh. . sereereeres SRR EERE Re RRR Ree eee — — * * nus SSCS SH % „% „ „ CHEESES „„ „„ „% „„ „„ „„ „„ „„ „ „ ee Rosa — e e „„ e 8 8 9 > * * Rubus strigosus M 5 3 li Sand 8) Re. C pores s'maritimus B ate c +4 OL ol & he rus ma me 3 Bigei.. BAR ES De a ee ee Oxalis attic L. eee eee e eee bh fs „„ „% CT „% „%„% „% „% „% „% „%„% eee ee „ „ ee ee eee „ — ** >= * 5 L. 2 ͤ K ee e Celastrus — Le ss puri dal Wate Lik nt amet 2 Acer negundo L. JJV Impatiens aurea Mu ee e (i) Piech. i en itis vulpina L.. C Hypericum elli FF — 8 3 5 majus o t. 1 Chamaenirion angustifolium (L.) Scop... ARE OPERA RI pe 5 Epilobium adenocaulon Haussk kat boas ey Senter fee lineare Mahi ++... 22225 ol ae Ona biennis (L.) Scop.. ISK //%%% ͤ ecb éunsuce eae ths 7 need = Spoons I... JVC us 1 Coult. & Evans.. %%% „ —— Se eee ee ere te ee ee „„ „„ >= * 3 ee (LS) reng.. ee eee L malta tacepettin LSB 197 3 o . aumburghia thyrsiflora (L. ) Duby. r aCed bERE Oa et cess ehe xinus ame a L. econ 1 „ 4 „ Menyanthes trifoliata 2 sie ESE ‘ Apocynum cannabinum L.. nak eaiechs Lap Ac amUaT TE Uaia Kec sd sanaseccook 10 Senvoivulus o ʒ—f.... haxts<4 1 erbena hastata L. 7 aSe ene Renee tenes anh alles 08 om us sinuatus Ell... T r eee TJ. Eire a ĩð Ä ð ß ĩͤ tei nite 3 Scutellaria galericulata Michx 89 ae ‚·) 3 · eee Stachys aspera INE ons av ci'cs dots ate WEEE GAR a tacack, <6 vvan eas 3 i -Vieckia anethiodora (Nutt. Greene. 8 5 meg 3 * . —.——.—.—.———.—.—.—.— ‚(jͤ—ʃͤ7ULꝛ—— E * · ] a = eee ee es 6 * panula aparinoides var "gradididra Hoisting oes 4 aes. rotund Os ROSS HOw was F445 65 OH Odes CHOLES SEES AS seR ees eee nese weee * * * * * * * * * * * > * * * = * = . Ait... juncea „„ Lactuca canadensis L. ee le PFF . * 966 7 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, The above list by no means includes all of the important littoral plants of the Lake of the Woods region and longer exploration especially on the Isles aux Sables would bring to light numerous other species. Yet since equal areas were covered at the different localities and the collections made with equal care in all cases, it may be fairly maintained that the list represents properly the varieties of dominant plants es- tablished upon the four kinds of shore in question. Such a list, however, gives no exact idea of the vegetation of the shores it purports to cover, for the relative abundance of in- dividuals is not taken into account, nor the groupings in for- mations, nor robustness of growth. For example, Populus — tremuloides listed for Sandy beach and Isle aux Sables consti- tutes an entirely different formation at the one shore as com- pared with the other. Upon the dunes it appears as a loose, open, scattered formation of low shrubs while at the beach it forms a zone of tall trees at the back strand where the wind, the waves and the ice have thrown up aridge of sand and gravel. Such a list is of interest principally because it gives the student of distribution an idea what general influences have acted in the population of the territory in question, and because it may serve as a foundation for some of the special ecological lists yet to be offered. Relationships of the group.—In the above list of 156 species, 78 or 50 per cent. are of distinctively northern range, 36 or 22 per cent. are of distinctively southern range, while 42 or 28 per cent. are of continental range and might properly be counted with either group. Evidently this list of dominant species indicates a generally northern character in the Lake of the Woods population. But it must be remembered that but very few of the plants are distinctive of high northern latitudes. Excluding such forms as Juniperus sabina, Betula glandulosa, Salix myrtilloides, Ribes oxycanthoides, Sorbus sam- bucifolia and Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, the remainder are in 3 large part characteristic plants of the prairies and woods of Minnesota, Iowa and the Dakotas. Indeed when such a list is compared with those which have been made by Arthur, Bailey and Holways for the Vermilion lake and Hunter’s island region of Lake Superior drainage, and by the writer for the valley of the Minnesota“ it is at once recognized that the 187 Arthur. Bailey and Holway. Bull. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Sur. Minn. No. 3. = 6. MacMillan. Metaspermae of the Minnesota valley. Rep. Bot, Sur. Minn. I. 1892, MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 967 affinities of the Lake of the Woods population are rather with the general group of plants distributed throughout the Red river valley and in southern Minnesota than with the series lying in the same latitude but to the eastward of the Rainy lake region. Bailey’s list of plants collected on Hunter's island is especially instructive in this comparison. In this list of 80 species such varieties as Carex lenticularis, Aster _ macrophyllus, Spiranthes gracilis, Alnus viridis, Geum nivale, _ Habenaria orbiculata, Alnus incana, Gaultheria procumbens, _ Myrica gale, Corylus rostrata, Anaphalis margaritacea, Thuya occidentalis and others serve to indicate the strong northern _ character of the plant population of this district. And upon _ the shores of Lake Superior where such genera as Pinguicula, | Ribes, Drosera, Diervilla, Antennaria and Pyrola are strongly _ developed in number cf individuals a quite different cast is given to the general flora. This is to be explained without doubt as in part a result, as has been indicated above, of the recession of the waters of the glacial lake Agassiz from south _ to north, thus opening up the ancient bed to infiltration of southern forms. Thus there may be observed the very inter- _ esting occurrence of Celtis occidentalis for example on the _ dunes at Lake of the Woods where it grows in company with Sorbus sambucifolia and Juniperus sabina. Similarly inter- esting is the appearance of Ambrosia psilostachya as a dwarfed bdut characteristic denizen of talus and boulder drift shores on _. Big island point, and the abundance of southern species of Sagittaria in strand pools, surrounded by Iris, Polygonatum and Allionia. DESCRIPTION OF PLANT FORMATIONS. Classification of formations .—In entering upon a discussion of the variety of formations that may be observed upon shore areas at Lake of the Woods, I shall make use of the division proposed in a recent paper upon the distribution of tamarack and spruce in bogs’. Formations may be broadly grouped as _ ZONAL, where the topographic feature presents a well-marked radial symmetry, and AzONAL. where the topographic fea- ture presents no well-marked radial symmetry. A further 7. MacMillan. On the formation of circular muskeg in tamarack swamps. Bull Torr. Bot. Club. 23: 500. Pl. 279-281, 1896. 968 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. E. classification of shore formations under this plan is forthwith ig presented: I. Zonal formations. A. Beach or strand. 1. Front strand. 2. Mid-strand. 3. Back strand. 4. Strand pools. B. Dunes. 1. Dune slopes. 2. Dune summits. 3. Dune pools. O. Morasses. 1. Attached morass. a a. Wet morass. 1 * b. Dry morass. N 2. Detached morass. a. Floating bog. b. Anchored bog. D. Surf-barriers. 1. Barriers in strong surf. 2. Barriers in light surf. E. Rock shores, 1. Flat rocks. 2. Rounded rocks. F. Soil shores. x 1. Flat shores. K. 2. Rounded shores. 5 II. Azonal formations. A. Talus shores. 1. Coarse talus shores. 3 2. Fine talus shores. 4 B. Boulder shores. : 1. Coarse boulder shores. 2. Fine boulder shores. C. Rock shores. a 1. Irregular surfaced rock shores. 1 2. Creviced shores. 3. Precipitous shores. D. Humus shores. A discussion of the particular plant formations, whidis chat - acterize these different ecologic areas will now be bes MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 969 STRAND. Front strand.—The zone of vegetation denominated front strand, is that group of plants established nearest the water's edge. Between the mid-strand group and the water of the lake is a narrower or wider strip upon which vegetation is unable to establish itself, except in the case of the lower plants such as Aphanizomenon jlos-aquae,for example. The width ofthe barren strip depends upon the force of the surf. In this area small strand pools, tenanted by algae in some cases, will form be- tween successive seasons cf surf-impact. The transitory pools can furnish an area for the development only of very simple and short-lived organisms. Various species of algae may com- _ plete their reproductive processes in such pools of the front strand and the region of the beach closest to the water’s edge must be regarded as occupied by an interrupted zone of algal forms. In some cases after a heavy wind such pools will be crowded with Cyanophyceae to such an extent as to make the zone exceedingly conspicuous, but after a few days of sunshine and surflessness the pools will evaporate, and the spores alone of the algae will retain their vitality. Some of these spores will be washed out into the lake with the next season of surf, while the majority will be buried in the sand. The pools of the front strand are therefore characterized by a special vege- table formation, transitory as is its habitat and of lowly types. In high surf these algae contribute to the nitrogenous content i of the mid-strand. 9 Mid-strand.—Extending from the front strand near the wat- er's edge back to the higher beach upon which the surf never _ dashes, is commonly a shelving area bearing a very character- istic group of plants. Its breadth varies with its inclination, its texture, the strength of the surf and the character of the bottom off-shore. This area is at long intervals subjected to Strong spray or even light surf and to occasional inundation. Such an exposure may not arise for several seasons and, when it comes, depends upon unusual height of water and continuous _ winds. Hence a group of plants, very many of which are an- _ nual, although some are perennial, establish themselves upon the strip. This band of occasionally inundated beach may be _ known as mid-strand. It is characterized by relatively scanty and dwarfed development of trees or shrubs except in the case of such as bear with ease submersion for a season—as for ex- ample, Salix, Cornus, Prunus pumila, Populus tremuloides. Ir aay Lees . r ET 970 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Shrubs like Sorbus, Rosa, Vitis, and others that do not endure well an occasional submersion are altogether absent from the mid strand. A list of mid-strand vegetation at Oak point is presented here. Mid-strand group at Oak Point. Equisetum arvense, Chenopodium leptophyllam. Equisetum hiematle, Arenaria stricta. Agropyron tenerum, Capnoides micranthum. Agrostis alba, Arabis hirsuta, Elymus canadensis. Bursa bursa-pastoris, Hordeum jubatam. Lepidiam apetalum, Panicum dichotomum. Prunus pumila. Carex filiformis, Potentilia argata, Juncus articulatuas. Spiraea sa icifolia, Juncus balticus. Lathyrus maritimas. Populus tremulolides, EpUobium adenocaalon, Salix fluviatilis. Artemisia canadensis, Salix lucida. Artemisia caudata. Salix petiolaris var. gracilis, Erigeron canadensis, Chenopodium aibum. Solidago juncea, For comparison there is also given the mid-strand population observed across the lake at Sandy beach on the Northwest Angle. Mid-strand group at Sandy Beach, Agropyron tenerum, Prunus pumila, Agrostis alba, Spiraea salicifolia. Agrostis hiemalis. Hypericum ellipticum, Elymus capadeasis. a Chamaenirion angustifollum. Carex filiformis, E pilobium lineare. Carex scoparia, Ovagra biennis, Carex siccata, Cornus baileyi. Juneus balticus. Cornus sericea. Populus tremuloides. Convolvulus sepium, Betula glandulosa. Campanula aparinoides Polygonum hartwrightii. var. grandiflora. * Corispermum hyssopifolium. Artemisia canadensis. Cerastium arvense, Artemisia caudata. Potentilla arguta. Solidago juncea, These two lists do not give a proper idea of the difference ‘ between the two beaches, for it lies less in kinds of plants than in the types which are abundantly developed. It will be ob- served that such characteristic sand plants as Agropyrum tene- rum, Elymus canadensis, Artemisia caudata and Artemisia cana- densis, are present in each case. As a matter of fact, the Oak q point mid-strand is characterized by the strong development of Prunus pumila, Lathyrus maritimus and Populus scrub with — Juncus and Salix abundant as secondary plants. But the Sandy beach mid-strand is characterized by the prevalence of Cornus baileyi and Cornus sericea with Convolvulus, Onagra and Cha- 4 maenirion. These larger leaved plants indicate a reaction in the plant population to the quieter, less wind swept character a MacMillan: SHORES’ AT LAKE OF THE woops. 971 of the Northwest Angle shore. Without question Oak point is one of the most wind-swept points on the whole lake, and the _~ dwarfed types of plants which are established upon the mid- Strand would seem to be a reaction to such an exposed situa- tion. Two types of mid-strand may therefore be defined, with reference to adaptation to prevailing winds. I. Prunus mid-strand. Prunus pumila, the dominant and characteristic plant. Example, the Oak point midstrand. ( Plate LX XI.) II. Cornus mid-strand. Cornus sericea and Cornus baileyi, the dominant and characteristic plants. Larger Salix shrubs and special twining and shade-loving plants are also estab- _ lished upon such a mid-strand. Example, the Sandy beach _ midstrand. Plate LX XII, in the background, shows this type of mid strand as developed on the sheltered side of Isle aux Sables. A third type should be added, according to my observations on mid-strand in quieter bays. For example, on the north side of Garden island, shielded from the winds and waves of the Grand Traverse, and enclosed from most of the surf and white caps of the Little Traverse, is a bay with finely developed mid- Strand upon which Salix fluviatilis is the dominant plant. This is a very level and gently sloping beach, and at the back other Species of Salix, S. discolor, S. nigra and S. amygdaloides, form aan abundant growth. The beach is exposed to rather frequent inundations, but to slight wind action or surf-impact. The _. peculiar prevalence of the Salix fluviatilis formation may be regarded as a response to this group of conditions. | II. Salix mid-strand. Salix fluviatilis, the dominant and characteristic plant; but few other species, e. g. Capnoides mioranthum, Chenopodium album, Polygonum ramosissimum, es- _ tablished. Example, the northeast bay of Garden island (Plate The three types of mid-strand appear to be practically the only types that can be isolated over all the beach area that I have studied at Lake of the Woods. That there should be three types, 1, a group of numerous, low, small leaved forms, the Prunus mid-strand; 2, a group of numerous, higher, many of them large leaved forms, the Cornus mid-strand; and, 3, a group of homogeneous low plants, long leaved, deep rooted, the Salix mid-strand, is connected, I believe, with three different groups of conditions. Thus it would appear that strong wird, occa- _ sional light surf and almost continuous spray favors the devel- 972 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. opment of Type I, the Prunus mid-strand. Generally light winds, light surf, and less continuous spray favor the devel- opment of Type II, the Cornus mid-strand. Light winds, light surf, and frequent inundation favor the development of Type III, the Salia mid-strand. It is interesting to notice that when strand formations of this character are developed on both sides of a narrow spit as at several different localities at Lake of the Woods, the side exposed to the strong prevailing winds is more abundantly provided with plants of Prunus pumila while it is upon the less exposed side that one must look for the Cornus bushes in greater number. And this difference between the two sides of a sand spit will vary about with the inclination of the spit towards a direction perpendicular to the prevailing winds. A number of conditions may modify the mid-strand forma tions; the important ones are exertion of ice pressure and formation of surf barriers off shore. By the former it not infrequently happens that a ridge is piled up at the waters edge in early spring and surf then forms mid-strand pools a which may be permanent for a series of years. The establish- ment of such pools brings about a rearrangement of vegetation which will be discussed more particularly under the head of strand pools. And from this original exertion of ice pressure various secondary changes in the mid-strand may be initiated, so that the whole aspect of the plant population is changed. For example, if the mid-strand is wide, such a formation of strand pools may eventually result in the appearance of dunes, sand-fixing plants gaining a particularly favorable opportunity for work at the borders of the pool. And if surf barriers, which continue in place for a number of years, are developed, the mid strand may take much the aspect of back strand, plants creeping down upon it which are unable to maintain them- selves through seasons of surf or inundations to which the mid-strand was generally exposed before the barrier had ap- peared. Such surf barriers may be in the nature of sterile impermanent bars or they may become the habitation of surf plants and they may eventually, as in the case of the Isle aux Sables, develop into a conspicuous and permanent dune: a The light color of the mid-strand, owing to the slightdevelop- - ment of humus, contributes to the dwarfed habit of the plants : 4 growing upon it by reducing the temperature of the sub: stratum. Such areas become cold soon after sundown while the back strand still remains warm. By midnight the tempera MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 973 ture of the mid-strand will have fallen several degrees below that of the back strand, as observations made in 1894 very clearly indicated. The occasional inundations, surf. winds and spray all combine both directly and indirectly to lower the temperature of the mid-strand substratum so that plants requiring a somewhat higher root temperature like Polygona- tum, Viola, Anemone, Vagnera, do not in this region venture down upon the light cold sands, but remain where intermixture ol humus, shelter from winds and evaporation, and darker color of the soil, all cooperate in preserving more nearly an optimum temperature. In general the mid-strand area studied at different points on Lake of the Woods appears to afford an excellent example of the sensitiveness of plant formations to varying environmental conditions. The character and aspect, the abundance or pau- city of certain forms, the arrangement of the different forms With reference to one another all seem definitely conditioned upon the variations in exposure, slope, temperature, moisture, wind- currents and surf-impact, or upon combinations or modi- fications of these. So the constant variety of the beach as one Walks along it is connected with the multitude of variations in the soil below, the air above and the water off shore. The mid- strand, too, is modified by the back strand which abuts upon it. By the population of the back strand its own is changed, and by the struggle that goes on in the back strand the mid-strand may in time be affected, as when rows of trees grow to a great height on the back strand thus shading a portion of the mid- strand. And by the physical texture and contour of the back a strand, the mid-strand may be affected very sharply—as when the rain is carried through gullies in the back strand down up- on or across the area nearer the water’s edge. Curious inter- rupted patches of Carices and Epilobiums that occur in the mid- Strand are often to be referred to declivities or gullies of the = back strand, directing the moisture to some spots rather than a6 to others. Thus both the physical and biological conditions of _ the zone farther inland affect the beach flora quite as dis- tinctly as do the conditions shoreward. Back strand.—The back strand is commonly marked by a considerable rise in elevation and must generally be regarded as developed principally by the activity of the wind rather than by the surf or ice. Such ridges behind the mid-strand are usual, and in some cases no doubt are of more ancient develop- 8 A —— 2 ———— — 974 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. ment and indicate a former higher level of the lake, Back strand may be defined as elevated beach formation rising at the rear of the mid-strand. It is always characterized by a much higher per cent. of humus in the soil, consequently by soilofa — darker color, although in many cases the difference is slight. 1 Yet even back strand composed apparently of pure sand will | upon comparison with the mid-strand or front strand appear dis-. tinctly darker in color. Consequently it becomes the abode of those plants which have more of a thermophytic or nitrophytie character. Yet if the sand be still the principal constituent of © the soil as is ordinarily the case a peculiar grouping of plants, sometimes reminding one directly of the sand dune formations, arises. A list of plants of the back strand is here appended, — taken from observations on Oak point. Back strand Group at Oak Point. Dryopteris spioulosa, Cerasus virginiana, Equisetum arvense. Rosa woodsili, Juniperus communis, ¥ Rubus strigosus, Picea mariana, Rhus giabra Pinus divaricata. Rhus radicans. strobus Celastrus scandens —— resinosa. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Taxus minor Vitis vulpina. Agrostis alba, Cornus baileyi. Alopecurus geniculatus, Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, ' Calamagrostis canadensis. Fraxinus americana. Polygonatum commutatum, Apocynum cannabinum. Smilax herbacea, Lycopus sinuatus. Vagnera stellata. Mentha canadensis. Populus balsamifera, Scutellaria galericlata. Populus deltoidea. ——— lateriflora. Populus tremuloides. Stachys palustris, Comandra umbellata. Galium trifidam. Polygonum erectum. Campanula rotundifolia. Silene antirhina. Erigeron ramosus, Ranunculus p ylvanicus, Hieracium scabrum. Arabis brachycarpa, i Solidago juncea, Another example of back strand, quite clearly distinguished a from the country behind it, was examined at Sandy beach, and a the list of its dominant plants is appended. a MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 975 Back strand group at Sandy beach. Taxus minor, Rosa blanda. Agrostis alba, Rosa woodsii, Calamagrostis canadensis, Rubus strigosus. Graphephorum melicoideum, Sorbus sambucifolia Carex riparia, Rhus radicans, Carex slecata. Acer negundo. Cyperus inflexus Impatiens aurea, —— schweinitzii, Parthenoeissus quinguefolia. Unifolium canadensis. Hypericum ellipticum, Vagnera stellata, —— majus. Habenaria psycodes. Epilobium lineare Populus trem uloides, terrestris, Salix discolor, Naumburghia thyrsifiora, Beluta glandulosa, Fraxinus americana. macrocarpa. Convolvulus sepiam, Polygonum cilinode, Seutellaria galericulata Cerastium arvense, Stachys aspera Ranunculus pennsylvanicus. — Arabis Galiam trifidam Ribes oxycanthoides. Erigeron ramosus. Cerasus pennsylvanica, Solidago juncea, q Back strand formations at Lake of the Woods may be 1 struetively classified into three general groups: 7 IJ. Herbaceous back strand. II. Shrubby back strand. III. Arboreal back strand. Fach of these main types may be subdivided as one or another variety of plant gives the characteristic appearance to the formation as a whole. Yet there are not so many principal types as one would suppose. The following synopsis brings x what I think are the principal and most important sub- ; 2 0 ups. ps I. Herbaceous back strand. a. Gramineous back strand. : b. Mixed herbaceous back strand. II. Shrubby back strand. Coniferous back strand. Populus back strand. Salix back strand. Cerasus and Rosa back strand. Mixed shrubby back strand. III. esl back strand. Coniferous back strand. Populus back strand. Salix back strand. Quereus back strand. Mixed arborea! back strand. gerne PP SP 976 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES be The conditions which determine the character of the back strand group of vegetation are more complex than those which q determine the mid strand character, but for clearness they max be considered under three heads. 1. Conditions which orig- inate in the back strand itself. 2. Conditions which arise lake- 4 ward. 3. Conditions which arise landward. Of the first group of conditions, those that originate in the back strand itself, a division into chemical, physical and biological, may be made with value, and these may be reviewed in order. The most important chemical difference between back strand and mid- strand lies in the greater percentage of nitrogenous material which is mingled with the sand. This serves to make back strand more nutritive, as a substratum, than the areas nearer — the water's edge. Hence plants of more nitrophytic habit can become established upon it, as, for example, Vagnera and mi. lax. In typical back strand I do not find that this increment of soil nitrates and nitrites becomes so considerable that true humus plants may gain a foot-hold, and therefore Corallorhiza — or Pyrola are absent from this formation, but the freedom from surf activity tending to wash out organic substances formed in the interstices of the sand and the less rapid drain- age off of soil water derived from rains, both contribute to a degree of nitrogen-content that is favorable to special spe- cies and groups of species. The larger leaved and more ro- bust habit of the back strand vegetation by diminishing wind activity has also an effect favorable to the retaining of dead leaves upon the surface, which, in course of their decay, add to the nitrogen-content. Ng Of physical differences the rise in soil temperature, owing to the changes in its texture and color, are doubtless of comm siderable importance, while the decrease in illumination, owing to the shade-affording bodies which are developed, and the re- ducing of the general reflection-value of mounds and hummocks must not be ignored. Thus the retention of moisture is pre 0. moted, and this is still further accentuated by the withdraw: of the whole area from surf-activity, and the substitution ¢ of wind-activity, which tends to develop a more irregular surfe e with consequent greater tendency to accumulate soil- water. As a whole, the back strand is of higher temperature, less i Iu- mination and greater superficial saturation than the mid-strand, and this in a broad way is true, notwithstanding the peric lic inundations of the mid-strand. At a considerable depth below the surface, however, the saturation of the mid strand is g than that of the back strand. MacMillan SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 977 r Of biological conditions, which seem to modify the back strand when compared with the mid-strand, the more important are those which originate landward, but there are some which - originate in the back strand formation. The influence of shade increases most rapidly in proximity to the areas of great- est moisture, and a competition for light which is somewhat more vigorous than over the drier areas arises among plants established in the favorable areas for robust growth. Hence a _ segregation of plants into groups may take place, and the struggle between these groups becomes an important factor in 2 the final distributiou over the whole formation. Therefore in + the back strand, rather than in the mid-strand, one finds such 5 partially dependent plants as Celastrus, Parthenocissus, Poly- gonum cilinode and Convolvulus sepium supporting their weak stems upon the stronger shoots of other plants. Considering next the second group of general conditions un- der which the back strand is modified, one may note those con- ditions which arise lakeward. Of this group the chemical _ modifications are not so important as the physical and biolog- ical. The physical conditions are of two sorts, those physical _ modifying conditions originating in the mid-strand, and those originating outside the mid-strand zone. The biological condi- tions, however, originate primarily in the mid-strand. An important physical modification arising primarily in the mid strand but affecting the back strand is deposition of sand blown landward by the winds or moved landward by the surf 1 or ice until it becomes a portion of the back strand area. Such encroachment of sand has a tendency to reduce the back- strand group of plants to a level with the mid-strand group. And since this sand is more readily carried along certain paths than others, owing to less resistance of established vegetation or because of favorable surface contour of the back strand, there is a clearly marked isolation of back strand masses of vegeta- tion between successive mid strand strips which have pushed _ landward. Evidently the breadth of the mid-strand area will de an important factor in this process. If the mid-strand is narrow the process will not be undertaken upon a large scale ut with a wide mid-strand belt these infiltrating arms or rib- bons, perpendicular to the general mid strand formation are by no means unusual or inconspicuous. The edge of the back strand next the mid-strand is affected also in other ways by the lake formation; for example the reflected glare of the sunshine and the impact force of fine sand-particles upon plants ial A . — fa nC ai a Aa a 978 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Fe * which are exposed to their flight, must have a certain influence in determining the character of the line between mid-strand and back strand. And, again, the chilling of the air at night by the rapid mid-strand cooling has doubtless its effect, slight though it may be. Other physical conditions affecting the back strand, and arising lakeward may scarcely be regarded as having their origin in the mid-strand. An example of such conditions would q be the cold wind striking the higher back strand formation owing to its exposure to a large area of water, while in another part of the Jake such a wind would be less cold, having passed over a smaller portion of the lake. As the back strand increases * in height this influence will become more important. A portion at least of the differences which have arisen between back strand at Oak point, with its stunted Populus and Pinus divaricata — trees, its Rosa, Fraxinus and Cerasus shrubs and back strand at Sandy beach with its tall Populus trees and abundant shrub of Taxus, Amelanchier and Rhus may be attributed to the exposure of the Oak point back strand to continuous colder winds than those that strike against Sandy beach. The height above the lake level of the two back strand formations is approximately — the same, in the regions studied. Yet the difference in the temperature of the winds received by the two areas during a season must be considerable, amounting without doubt to sev- eral degrees. And even a few degrees more or less in annual temperature is of great importance in the effect upon plant development and plant distribution, as may be learned from the numerous phaenological observations. Among other con- ditions tending to modify the back strand, and falling within this category may be noted spray-action. This affects the back strand especially whenever there is a heavy surf formed under ordinary stress of wind. So at Oak point, where the surf is unusually strong, even upon the back strand during a storm or soon after the storm has passed one may feel the fine spray drifting inland. If this surf-spray is frequently carried across the mid-strand—the region of its greatest influence— alterations in the vegetable formations of.the back strand will result. The lowering of the temperature, the increase of the moisture in the air and in the soil, and the slight diminution of the sunlight must all have their effect. — Passing in due course, to the biological conditions origin ing lakeward and capable of modifying the back strand, certain general suggestions may be worth bringing forward. The line MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 979 between back strand and mid-strand is what has previously been _ termed by the writer a tension line—that is, a line between two general groups of plants striving to move in opposite direc- tions. At such a tension line a reciprocal stress is developed, and the plants of the mid-strand strive to enter the back strand while those of the later area in turn attempt to work out upon the former. Wherever a mid-strand bar is sent up into the back strand, there particularly the mid-strand plants insinuate themselves, but even where no favorable physical conditions have arisen to assist, there is a tendency on the part of the _ lakeward established group to creep in between the meshes of the landward formation. Thus, from this reciprocal biological Strain of one formation against the other an irregular boundary gone is developed, and nowhere is the exact line of demarca- tion altogether clear and distinct. Thus characteristic back strand plants such as Convolvulus sepium frequently work out into the extreme mid-strand and with equal adroitness such plants as Elymus canadensis, Artemisia caudata and Prunus pu- mila creep up upon even the most shaded heights of the back strand. 14 peculiar biological influence that modifies back strand, at _ certain isolated points on Lake of the Woods not connected with 3 the mainland, is the nesting of the gulls and terns with which the lake abounds. By their deposition of guano, and probably too, by their carrying in of seeds, these birds have at various points on island back strand established conditions favorable to the development of vegetation islands that may mark the approximate spot of the rookery long after the birds have de- _ serted it. The contribution of nitrogen to the soil makes it more suitable as a substration for nitrophytes and at such spots an overplus of plants demanding considerable nitrogenous food may be found. _ While by no means all the conditions arising lakeward and tending to modify the back strand have been touched upon, 3 enough have been, mentioned to show the character of the a problems and the discussion may pass on to the conditions arising landward, by which back strand formations may be modified. As in the case of the conditions arising lake ward these may be grouped as physical and biological. The physi- 4 cal conditions are somewhat numerous and depend upon the exposure, contour, and general character of the back country. Back strand upon which there isa drainage from the inland regions behind, differs markedly from that limiting the border e er S ae * eee eee 980 _ MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. of a uniformly lower area towards which whatever drainage , currents there may be will flow. At Sandy beach, although — the back strand is a relatively low ridge, yet as one stands up- on it he sees landward an apparently interminable low swamp 1 with spruce and larch and intervening reed-bogs and sphag- num bogs. Nowhere near does a continuous rise take place from the back strand to the general country-level. Conse- 1 quently at the Northwest Angle the back strand forms a levee like ridge, and frequently this ridge is less than fifty yards in diameter. On the one side is the lake and on the other swamps — a and low lands extending for miles. Such a condition does not favor the constant diversion of moisture to the back strand 9 higher land behind, and under such conditions the back strand ‘ does not form strand pools so abundantly as on such an area as Oak point. Here higher land lies behind the strand, — at the end of the point, and thus a drainage current sets 0 wards the edge of the lake and in the back strand this accu- mulates in the strand-pools. Again, the greater breadth of the back strand at Oak point as compared with Sandy beach. permits the wind to execute more of an irregular dune: like con- tour of the surface and this contributes to the formation of — The character of the back country has further effect in pro- ducing physical conditions tending to modify the back strand : by its alteration of the direction, intensity or humidity of atmospheric currents and by the nature of substances washed down from it in drainage-water—if such exists A dank. illiniitable swamp affects the back strand atmosphere differ- ¥ ently by its proximity from a succession of pine-clad hills or ridges of rock covered by crevice plants and mosses and ‘i lichens. The first named condition actually prevails at ca 2 beach while the second is observed at Oak point. “3 In general, modifications of the substratum and of the atmousll > pheric conditions, as well, may originate in the region ven the back strand and the temperature, illumination, humidity o the affected region may be correspondingly changed. 5 a Of biological conditions originating landward and tending to modify the back strand, a great deal might be written, for the : group is a complex one. In the first place it must be observed that another minor tension line runs at the rear of the — strand similar to the one which runs along its outer edge r 5 to the mid-strand. And just as in the former case, — | influences are set in motion between the adjacent formations so that one falls back or advances while the other moves in the MacMillan; SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 981 opposite direction. When the back strand is not cut off from the general back country population by ditches and marshes, there is a marked development of back country types of plants along ridges in the back strand so that just as mid-strand bars are inserted into the back strand from the lakeward side these masses of back country plants are thrust in from the landward side. Hence, a back strand bordered landward by coniferous formations will itself partake of the coniferous character while one bordered by dicotyledonous trees will have rather the deciduous plants as its characteristic inhabitants. Yet even to this apparently universal generalization there are notable ex- ceptions as when a Quercus or Populus formation maintains itself on the back strand without admixture of Pinus divaricata although the general back country formation is consistently Pinus, Picea and Abies forest. | Upon larger islands and upon the main land this back- country influence is especially strong. Upon smaller islands —omitting naturally those which are too small for the full development of strand zones—there is less to be made out in its study. A constant and vigorous struggle for supremacy is maintained by the various plants of the general population and many of these will fight their way down to the back strand, accepting there unusual and unfavorable conditions. Upon the back strand, then, itis common to find stray plants maintaining themselves feebly upon the dark sand and evidently wanderers from the region behind. Thus upon the Oak point back strand one finds small, dwarfed trees of Pinus strobus and Pinus resinosa and even of the. swamp-loving Picea mariana, estab- lished upon the sand. With these come Arctostaphylos and Comandra. It follows, too, as a matter of course that back strand, limiting a region of monotonous plant population, will itself receive influences less complex than where it faces a region of diversified population. ‘Since the influence of aquatic birds was grouped among con- ditions arising lakeward, it would be appropriate to consider under this topic the influence of land animals. At Lake of the Woods this can hardly be a very important biological influ- ence, but the advent of bears, deer, moose or caribou and especially their habitual visit to certain pools of the back strand must have its influence upon the vegetation. Thus at one pool on the Oak point back strand, frequented, I was told, by deer, stray plants of Ledum, Eriophorum and Beckmannia were noted, probably brought in by the roving animals from some distant swamp. * 982 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. In concluding this discussion of influences tending to modi- 4 fy the back strand population, it may be said that the sue cessive zones of beach formation—front strand, mid-strand and back strand, show an interesting progression in complexity. The first named is by far the simplest, the last by far the most j complex. In the case of front strand, impact of surf places a rigid limit on the types of plants that can develop. For * mid strand the spray, wind, surf and occasional mundo place a limit, but not so definite a one as for the front straud. For the back strand a limit is placed by the texture and chem- ical nature of the soil and by the mid- strand border. Otherwise it is free to be tenanted by whatever back country plants max attempt to push in. Thus back strand, of the three zones, is the most complex in its plant population. Since more, and more complex, modifying conditions affect it than affect the mid-strand, or the front strand, it is correspondingly a more diversified area and a larger number of types of back strand need to be examined. The ecological reasons for such a gen- eralization have already been given; it remains to note in order the principal types of back strand formations that have been studied at Lake of the Woods. I. Gramineous back strand may appear in two principal 4 forms—as meadow-like slopes with strong development of 4 Agrostis and Alopecurus or as dune: like slopes with Elymus and Calamagrostis as the characteristic plants, with often a q considerable mixture of Hordeum and even of Agropyron. The representative of the latter genus -A. fenerum—according to 1 my observations, less commonly exists upon back strand than 4 do the others. The first variety of the formation indicates a greater percentage of nitrogenous matter mixed with the sandy substratum than does the second. Therefore under the general conditions that form gramineous back strand, the one variety or the other may be regarded as an indication of the l humus- content and the differences between two areas of gras back strand, in this respect, are controlled by the conditions regulating different percentages of nitrogenous material- for example, slow drainage, low elevation giving less sweep to the wind, shade from neighboring objects or contour of surface making accumulation of organic debris more probable. — Gramineous back strand often develops just lakeward of a2 dense tree growth classified as belonging to the back country. but in some cases at Lake of the Woods the grass covered slopes are bare and open. In such cases the ridge is low, a 2 MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 983 broad, rounded and with slight depressions. Broadly stated gramineous back strand indicates a particular exposure, contour and texture of the substratum, favorable to slow drain- age and protected by its gentle elevation and by sheltering vegetation, in some cases, from the strong action of the wind. II. Mixed herbaceous back strand, is a name which may be applied to the growth of Artemisia, Potentilla, Elymus, Epilo- bium, Onagra, Polygonum, Ranunculus and other herbaceous genera that often characterizes openings in the shrub and Sometimes is developed in characteristic form over considera- ble areas to the exclusion of other kinds of plants. As in the case of gramineous back strand two varieties may be distin- guished, an Artemisia-Elymus type in which humus-content of the soil is relatively less and a-Ranunculus—Onagra type in which the humus-content is relatively greater. In general, when extended over more than very limited areas this type of back strand indicates a considerable degree of moisture in the soil and the more varied the species of herbaceous plants that inhabit it, the more certainly will the soil be found of such texture, contour and exposure that a higher degree of moisture can be maintained near the surface than in the case of many of the wooded back strand tracts. III. Coniferous, shrubby back strand. Of the five types of shrubby back strand to be described, this one in particular is characterized by the predominance of either Juniperus com- munis or Taxus minor in the formation. Both back strands commonly indicates a response to biological influences from the inland vegetation. Thus upon back strand with heavy rock _ ledges rising shoreward a development of Juniperus may be expected, while upon back strand bounded shoreward by dense | Pinus or Betula woods with strong development of humus it is often to be observed that Taxus will creep out upon the sand formation. Such coniferous shrubby back strands are generally _ Sheltered from strong wind currents and indicate sterility of soil and infrequent inundations of surf. IV. Populus shrubby back strand. This very common type indicates the prevalence of strong wind currents and charac- derizes some of the most exposed points and bars on the lake. 5 It is developed usually on low lying sand spits and indicates also a sterility of the soil with often, I am inclined to believe, relatively strong spray saturation of the atmosphere. All the Common northern species of Populus, P. deltoidea. P. tremuloides and P. balsamifera,contribute to the formation, but the two lat- minus with small, dwarfed individuals of Ulmus are not uncom- 984 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, ter are the more abundant. Yet dwarfed Y. delloidea shrubs — are characteristicof much of the back strand along ine southern shore of the Grand Traverse. It is not often inundated. V. Salix shrubby back strand. This type characterizes low, commonly inundated, rather strongly nitrogenous back strand, and is found in conjunction with Salix mid-strand. It does not indicate strong wind-currents and is commoner in sheltered bays or behind islands than upon the shores that face wide expanses of water. Various species of Salix are repre- sented of which doubtless Salix lucida and Salix discolor are the most abundant. 4 VI. Rosaceous shrubby back strand. For milesontheGrand _ Traverse shore this type of back strand is abundantly developed. The characteristic plants are-Rosa blanda and Rosa woodsii with Cerasus pennsylvanica, Cerasus virginiana and Amelanchier cana- densis. In no case do the plants attain a considerable size and often a shrubby formation no higher than one’s head is main- tained for hundreds of yards. The favorable conditions for this type seem to be high banks, exposure to strong winds, ab- sence of occasional inundations and a fairly high percentage * 4 nitrogenous substances in the soil. Yet sometimes a rosace ous formation is found growing upon what appears to be al- most pure sand, and similar formations are found upon the dunes. In general the establishment is more characteristic of slopes than of summits or hollows and indicates a sensitive- ness to drainage conditions and the movement of soil waters. At the season of blooming for the genus Rosa, such a back strand makes a bank of pink color behind the yellow Elymus — and Artemisia dotted mid-strand that is noticeable from the decks of steamers far from shore. VII. Mixed shrubby back strand. This type is in point ot E fact probably separable into minor varieties such as Vitis back strand, Rhus back strand and others, but nowhere on Lake of the Woods were characteristic groups developed strongly — enough, except from the shrubs before mentioned, to justify — such a nomenclature. The mixed shrubby back strand indi- cates either light or fertile soil, strong wind currents and an irregularity of surface contour with corresponding differences in percentage of soil water between adjacent very limited areas. In such a mixed shrubby back strand Quercuss crub and Fra- — mon. The complexity in number of species is directly con- nected with the surface contour. d f MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 985 VIII. Coniferous arboreal back strand. The principal plant of this formation is Pinus divaricata, the Jack pine of the Minnesota loggers. Yet it is only under certain favorable con- ditions that formations of this plant arise upon the sandy ridges of the Lake of the Woods back strand. It appears from my observations that these conditions are relatively deep ster- ility of the soil, slight exposure to winds, and a low, irregular surface on which, however, pools are not abundantly formed. The clear sand, which is so constantly seen about the roots of the pines, does not appear to become much richer in nitrogen- ous content even when one digs below the surface. A slight contrast therefore arises between this type and the Rosaceous, shrubby back strand, for, in the case of the latter, usually the superficial layers of soil are more sterile than those deeper down. IX. Populus arboreal back strand. Favorable areas for the development of this formation appear to be low, fairly nitro- - genous soil, with regular surface contour and infrequent inun- _ dations. Such back strands are sheltered from strong winds if they are to be perfectly developed, otherwise Populus shrub isformedinstead. From the more sheltered localities occupied by such back strand formations, and from the wind-breaking _ force of the trees it becomes possible for the sand to lie quietly and for dead leaves and other plant products to build up humus. Hence the greater fertility of the soil than where a Populus Shrub is established. In the differences which arise between _ Populus shrub and Populus tree formations I presume the rela- tive exposure to wind currents is of no slight importance. It will be observed that, once established, a tree formation acts as a wind-break, and thus accentuates the conditions under _ which it is supposed to develop most readily in the first place. X. Salix arboreal back strand. In this formation, which is _ developed upon certain special areas, there is an evident adap- tation to the following conditions: a low-lying, moist, some- times inundated, shore, considerable nitrogenous material, absence of surf or heavy winds, and the absence of coniferous _ formations in the back country reaching the back strand. A _ Salix back strand formation does not flourish at Lake of the Woods when backed by coniferous vegetation, for in such a case the tree-types of its locality are more probably tamarack or _ Spruce. But when backed by meadows, or by hardwood tim- ber such as Betula or Populus, the Salix arboreal back strand may maintain itself in great perfection. A fine example of it 986 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. is shown (Plate LX X), where the back country is shrub and meadow. In such Salix back strand S. nigra is a conspicuous species together with S amygdaloides, but the former is more abundant. ie XI. Quercus arboreal back strand. The prevalence of small trees of (Quercus macrocarpa is sometimes so considerable upon certain shores that one is justified in discussing the group as a distinct back strand formation, I find it at Lake of the 1 Woods characteristic of rather low, rounded and fertile shores. Wind exposure if not too great seems not an unfavorable con- dition. Sometimes an irregular contour of the shore may be maintained without prejudice to the Quercus formation, but in such cases the mixed arboreal type is more likely to be de- veloped. 4 XII. Mixed arboreal back strand. When the surface con- tour is irregular, the soil fairly fertile, the shore not too low. and the wind activity not too pronounced a mixed forest max develop. In all such cases it is difficult to delimit the back strand from the general back country vegetation and such 1 mixed arboreal back strand indicates slight topographie specialization of the back strand ridge. Upon low shores, sterile shores, regular shores, inundated shores, shores ex- posed to occasional surf and spray, this type to of formation seems not to develop readily. . This brief discussion of the different back strand formations 4 which are on the whole most easily distinguished as such, for purposes of description, at Lake of the Woods, may be ter- minated at this point with a recapitulation of the conditions q under which development seems aer eke to progress. 4 8 slight exposure to wind 4 2. Mixed herbaceous back strand: Soil with power of re- _ taining moisture near the surface. Considerable humus-con- a tent. a 3. Coniferous shrubby back strand: Absence of inunda- 3 tions, shelter from winds, sterile soil and coniferous back country neighboring formations. 4 4. Populus shrubby back strand: Low sterile soils, strong wind currents; spray, geri 18 2 inundations. 1 the 3011 MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 987 7. Mixed shrubby back strand: Irregularity of surface contour, strong wind currents, differences in soil fertility be- teen adjacent limited areas. 8. Coniferous arboreal back strand: Low, dry, irregular surface, deep sterility of soil, slight wind currents. 9. Populus arboreal back strand: Low, nitrogenous, not _ inundated, regular contoured, sheltered areas. ; 10. Salix arboreal back strand: Low, moist, nitrogenous, - inundated, sheltered shores without coniferous formations im- mediately behind. 11. Quercus arboreal back strand: Low, rounded, nitro- - genous, wind swept shores of regular contour. 12. Mixed arboreal back strand: Irregular fertile shores not sharply distinguished from the back country by definite _ topographical outlines. While the discussion of the back strand formations has been suggestive rather than exhaustive enough has been brought forward to indicate the strong dependence of the vegetation- groups upon the environmental conditions. Indeed a catalogue of the individual plants of a given area of definite size, with in- formation of the habit of the plant individuals, whether they were shrubs ‘or trees, would almost enable one to plat the - topography of the area, provided it was selected within some Such field of previous observation as in this instance, Lake of the Woods. _ _ Strand-pools. There are ‘dures types of strand pools at Lake of the Woods. They are: 1. Pools of the front strand. 2. Pools of the mid-strand. 3. Pools of the back strand. These are of different methods of formation, of different dur- ation and characterized by plant populations which are to some extent distinctive. I. Pools of the front strand have already been discussed under the general caption of Front strand. They are formed solely by the action of surf and are of short duration. Their plant population consists therefore, only of lowly algae _ that are brought into them by the accession of water from the lake and eventually each of these pools will evaporate and during the next heavy surf, new ones will be formed, to dis- appear in their turn. In such pools the principal inhabitants at Lake of the Woods are Cyanophyceae of the genera _ Aphanizomenon, Anabaena, Nostoc, Oscillatoria and Lyngbya. n 3 988 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. II. Pools of the mid-strand. These are formed by the waters of the lake thrown back in the heavy surf, or produced in the mid-strand area by the construction of bars off shore. Such pools may remain for several years, as long, indeed, as the bars which bound them are permitted to exist. By the slope of the beach such pools also receive accessions of water from the rains and drainage channels are formed which bring water to them from portions of the strand some distance away. Water falling upon the lakeward slope of the back strand is also brought into such pools. They are therefore formed by surf and by rains. Owing to their real impermanence they do not usually become tenanted by many species nor by those ot most robust growth. A list of the main plants in a md. strand pool at Oak point is appended. Mid-strand pool formation at Oak point. Sagittaria graminea, Eleocharis tenuis, — latifolia, Juncus articulatus. — rigida. Lemna minor. Eleocharis palustris, These plants were distributed about the shallow pool, andl towards the center the water was open. None of them were ot great age, as was determined by an examination of the rhiz- a omes, and the scanty development of species was clearly con- nected with the shallowness of the water and the short duration of the pool, as a feature in the topography. III. Pools of the back strand. These being for the moet part outside the region of surf influence are rather rain- water sink holes in the back strand, than surf fed or surf formed pools, like the two first mentioned. They are dependent upon the contour of the back strand for their depth and size, and are commonly permanent features of the topography. Conse- quently they are populated by a greater variety of species and by plants of more robust growth. A list of varieties found ing a back strand pool at Oak point is furnished. a Back strand pool formation at Oak point. Typha Jatifolia, N Scirpus eyperinus. Potamogeton foliosus. 8 7 — lacustris, Potamogeton heterophyllus. Lemna minor. —— perfoliatus var. richardsonii, Juncus articulatus, Sagittaria graminea. Iris versicolor. —— latifolia, Roripa palustris. — rigida. Spiraea salicifolia. 5 2 N Eleocharis palustris. Utricularia vulgaris. ee — tenuis, Such pools of the back strand are commonly surrounded by plants of hydrophytic aptitudes, such as Cyperus, Betula, i. a MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 989 patiens, Lysimachia, Naumburghia, Lycopus, Mentha, Scutellaria, Stachys, Vleckia, Plantago, and others, so that both by their aquatic population, and by the forms lining their shores they become a distinct feature. The limnetic formations may, upon a small scale, reproduce the zonal formations of the larger lake, but depend rather upon variety of humus than upon other con- ditions, In general the population of a strand pool depends upon its depth, its size, and its duration. In large strand pools Scirpus and Phragmites formations with Castalia, and even Chara, may appear. Such pools occupy centers of drainage, are of complex population within, and are surrounded by several zones of limnetic plants. DUNES. * Dunes are not abundantly developed at Lake of the Woods, but one very characteristic series has been formed near the mouth of the Rainy river. In low water these dunes are joined by spits and necks of sand, but in ordinary stages of the lake they are separated as a chain of sand-hill islands. Beach formations are abundantly developed, but more especially on the shoreward side, while the side exposed to the winds and surf of the Traverse shows narrower and scanty strand-areas. This chain of islands is known as the Jsle-aux Sables, or the Sand Hills, In this connection it will not be necessary to con- sider the strand plants but rather those peculiar distributions and groupings which characterize the dune as distinguished from the beach. A list of species observed on a limited area of the Isle aux Sables is here presented. Dune formation on Isle aux Sables. Juniperus communis, Castalia odorata. Juniperus sabina, Cerusus pennsylvanica. Pinus divaricata, ’ 1 Potentilla arguta. — resinosa, Prunus pumila. Agrostis hiemalis. Rubus strigosus. Cala magrostis canadensis. Sorbus sambucifolia, Elymus canadensis. Spiraea salicifolia. Carex filiformis, Lathyrus maritimus, —— scoparia, 0 Rhus radicaus. Eleocharis palustris. Hypericum ellipticum. — tenuis, Hudsonia tomentosa. Juncus canadensis, | Onagra biennis. — tenuis. : Cornus sericea. Populus tremuloides. Fraxinus americana, Salix discolor, ; Sambucus pubens. Betula glandulosa, Campanula rotundifolia, Quercus macroearpa, Artemisia canadensis. Celtis occidentalis. —— caudata, [a Allionia nyctaginea, Solidago juncea. 990 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. — * In many respects this is a remarkable group of plants. The presence of Juniperus sabina, Hudsonia tomentosa, Campanula — rotundifolia and the distribution also of some of the grasses sug- gest the aspect of rocky shores where, on high barren ledges, these plants are characteristic. The most important generali- zation that is to be derived from a study of these dunes asa whole, is that their population resembles that of rock shores _ rather than of beaches. The meaning of this appears to be that texture of the soil is less important here in determining the types of vegetation that shall become established, than are the other factors—e. g. sterility, elevation, exposure to wind. withdrawal from spray and diminution of moisture. Indeed. except for its texture, the dune is chemically and topograph- ically similar to the rounded quartzyte and gneissic masses with which the whole region abounds. I take it that the pre- valence upon dunes of Juniperus sabina, Hudsonia tomentosa, Campanula rotundifolia and the rest indicates an essential eco- logic similarity between dunes and rock masses, and the vege- tation of the dune which at first sight would naturally be con- nected with beach vegetation must really be regarded as of lithophytic rather than as of ordinary psammophytic, limnetie . types. 7 5 7151 is possible instructively to classify the dune formations as developed upon dune slopes, dune summits and in dune pools. These three areas may be noted briefly in their sequence. = Dune slopes. Owing to the shifting, loose, sterile condition of the substratum, only a small group of plants characterizes this area. Plate LXXIII gives a view of an altogether typical slope on Isle aux Sables. The vegetation of the foreground — shows Prunus pumila, Populus tremuloides and Juniperus commu- nis as the dominant species, while farther back Artemisia and Elymus may be discerned and to the right a dune summit bear- ing dwarfed trees of Celtis and Cerasus. Prunus pumila a pro- nounced psammophyte finds such slopes a congeuial home, and the species is developed in such areas quite as abundantly as 3 upon the strand. Juniperus communis, rather rare upon beach areas except where it enters the back strand from a coniferous formation inland, is abundant, upon the dune slopes, but not more so than its congener J. sabina, an omnipresent crevice plant over all the rocky islands of the region. It must be noted that the station of a shrub like Juniperus upon a dune produces around its roots somewhat of the conditions of a crevice. The prostrate habit enables it to hold organic substances, and the MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 991 sand around its base will contain more nitrogenous material than is ordinary on the general dune slope. By the shifting of the sand, propagation is rendered difficult, the number of species is cut down so that dune slopes come to be monotonous beds of Prunus, Juniperus, Elymus and Arte- misia, with occasional dwarfed shrubs of Populus, or even of Sambucus. By the constant shifting about of the sand, the soil is turned over and oxidized, and this process is unfavorable both for the storage of moisture near the surface, and for the development of a general nitrogenous richness that would favor the growth of herbs. It is only on the dune summits, and there sparingly, that such plants as need humus-content in more marked quantities, can very well establish themselves. The characters of the dune slope, then, are these: sterility, exposure to wind, low moisture-content, low temperature, con- stant oxidation of organic waste—in short much the same characters that one would discover in the study of a ledge of light colored quartzyte. The vegetation, by its types, its mon- otony, its dwarfed and prostrate habit, and its extreme loose- ness of aggregation responds to these conditions in much the same way that it does when establishing itself upon a rock surface. | Dune summits. The surface of the dunes is generally alto- _ gether irregular, a succession of slopes, hummocks and hol- _ lows. The tops of the hummocks are commonly tenanted by a _ distinctive group of small trees or shrubs with a limited inter- _ stitial vegetation somewhat like that of back strand areas along shore. Such a dune summit is shown in Plate LX XIV, and a somewhat zonal arrangement of plants may be observed - Surrounding the clump of shrubs that occupies the summit is a growth of Elymus, Artemisia and Agrostis with Jnniperus seen on the right. The common trees of these dune summits on Isle aux Sables are Quercus, Fraxinus, Celtis, Cerasus and Populus, together with numerous individuals of Sorbus sambucifolia. Mingled with the dwarfed trees are shrubs of Rubus, Rhus, . Spiraea—a plant with great catholicity of habitat—and Betula. Depending somewhat upon the size and age of the summit _ formation, there are added low herbs including Vagnera, Hy- | pericum, Potentilla, Onagra, and others, but the variety is always small, and dune summits, like dune slopes, show a great monotony of specific types. The conditions at the dune summit differ from those of the __ Slopes m one or two important ways. The formation is much 992 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, more closely aggregated, and hence gives shade, raising the temperature of the soil at night and assisting in the harboring of soil water. Thus the surface becomes moist enough, espe- cially near the base of the largest trees of the area, which act as drains for the rain drops, for the establishment of such plants as Vagnera and Onagra The soil is less oxidized, not being exposed to such frequent shiftings by the wind, and the humus-content rises. Directly or indirectly, all of these condi- tions co-operate for the development of a more stable sub- stratum, and one upon which a greater variety of plants can dispose themselves. Therefore, in number of species, the dune summits quite surpass the dune slopes or even the dune hollows. These latter, unless they become sinks for rain- water, do not show any characters particularly different from those of the dune slopes. a Dune pools. While the dune pool resembles the pools of the back strand previously described in being formed from rain water drained in from the slopes which surround it, itis rather more nearly related to the pools of the mid-strand in its scanty — vegetation and in its failure, in almost every case, to be sur- rounded by zones of plants developed upon moist or mixed humus, such as the Vleckia and Scutellaria formations described for the pools on the back strand of Oak point. The dune pools, — too, from the shifting of the sand that continually takes place are never deep and hence their vegetation is-limited by this condi- tion. In Plate LX XV a characteristic dune pool is shown on Isle aux Sables surrounded by Juniperus sabina, Hudsons tomentosa, Prunus pumila and Artemisia caudata. In the back 1 ground is seen a low dune summit with Celtis trees and one or two taller plants of Quercus macrocarpa. The vegetation of this dune pool consisted exclusively of Eleocharis and Juncus— — a very common grouping in such shallow sink holes on these dunes. In one deeper hole a plant of Castalia, doubtless sown — by birds, was found growing but such a plant is exceptional in these pools, and even Sagittaria so abundant in the region is 4 more often absent from the pools of the dunes. 1 The shifting of the sand is probably the principal occasion for such limited pool formations, because the pools when f formed under natural conditions of the drainage are quick) x 4 blown full of sand and can not maintain the depth necessary for the establishment of a more varied aquatic population. Thus the exposure to wind of the dune as a en indirectly ce : the flora of the dune pool. 4 U MacMillan; SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 993 The influence of vegetation in fixing the sand and gradually building up the dune need not receive particular treatment here. It is well known that by the establishment of a few grasses or Artemisias at some spot a hill may be gradually formed around them, their roots uniting the particles of sand and eventually binding the whole mass together in a mound. Over this the grasses continue to grow, the mound growing with them. When large dunes are formed every thing may be upon a large scale. For example, in the well known region about Lake Michigan, in northern Indiana, more extensive slopes, summits and pools are formed and here an entirely differ- ent series of problems in ecologic distribution must be consid- ered in so far as the sand encroaches upon areas previously covered with vegetation of another physiognomic group. The types of the large dune pools of Indiana with their character- istic limnetic zones of Solidago were not observed at Lake of the Woods. Such zones depend upon a greater general moisture less exposure to the wind, owing to surrounding trees of pre- dunal development, and a general higher temperature. Solidago juncea found sparingly on the Isle aux Sables seemed rather a plant of the summits than of the pool borders. At Lake of the Woods there is no evidence that the Isle aux Sables is tenanted by both dunal and pre dunal types of plants. On the contrary the shoreward side of the dunes seems rather to have become modified from its original type, permitting at present strand ' formations to develop. A very clear, sharp delimitation of back strand and mid-strand may be seen in a view of this shore- Ward aspect of the Isle aux Sables in Plate LX XII. The mid- Strand is of a mixed Salix and Cornus variety and the back Strand is of the shrubby Populus type. MORASSES. This form of shore vegetation has been classified as attached and detached, but really some of the apparently fixed morass Should be placed in the second group rather than in the first. This is true of what is here termed anchored bog. For in this formation a juxtaposition of plants may arise quite the reverse of that in the ordinary attached morass. Such is the case when a bog floating from one shore to another becomes at- _ tached to the bottom with its originally lakeward aspect now turned shoreward. Since the peculiarity of plant distribution in such cases is conditioned upon the formation having moved 994 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. from its original place of development, it seems more reason- able to include the anchored bogs under the second category. Morasses are generally either peaty in structure or formed of grasses and sedges. The peat morass, so far as my obser- vations go, is not developed at Lake of the Woods as an along shore formation though it occurs thus situated in some of the smaller ponds of the back country. I therefore judge that in all probability such peat marginal formations will be found in some of the secluded bays of the main lake. The peat shore population as I first showed in a paper published in 1894“ may under certain special conditions give rise to the singular for- mations named Sphagnum atolls.” None of these have been seen in the Lake of the Woods region, although they may pos- sibly occur, and have readily escaped observation. Where morass is found as a shore formation on this lake it is gener- ally of the gramineous or cyperaceous variety. Morass does not face exposed sheets of water, but is con- fined to the narrower bays and coves where surf can not easily — be formed, for there is little wind, and upon shelving banks rather than upon precipitous. As a consequence I have not found the formation facing either the Grand Traverse or the Little Traverse, but in such regions of the lake as the west shore of Flag island, the east shore of Oak point and the sinuo- sities of MacPherson’s bay it is a conspicuous shore-type, and may be classified generally into the two main groups of attached morass and detached morass as indicated above. Of attached morass two types are recognized, wet and dry. The former is loose and spongy and will not bear one's weight upon it, the second is firm and in its different varieties will always support one walking upon it. The different types may be examined seriatim. a Wet morass. An example of this in Echo bay, near Rat Portage, is shown in Plate LXXVI. Here it consists of two a well marked zones, an outer one of Scirpus and an inner one of Salix. But these are by no means always the characteristic — types. As varieties of wet morass the following may be named. I. Gramineous morass. The characteristic plants are 1 grasses and the basis of the formation originates from the interlocked, tangled rhizomes and roots of these plants. ie some cases Phragmites is the principal plant, in others Zizania, — in still others Panicularia, Of the three kinds that formed by — r — 8. MacMillan. On the occurrence of Sphagnum Atolls in Minnesota. Minn. Stud. 1: 2-13. 1894. MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 995 Phragmites is commonly the firmest, and that formed by Panicularia the loosest in texture. a II. Cyperaceous morass. Usually the dominant plants are members of the genus Scirpus and with these as basis a little group of plants is aggregated which may eventually give foot- hold to shrubby and even to arboreal species of other families. III. Sagittaria morass. Beds of Sagittaria are sometimes formed very abundantly and produce a kind of wet morass especially when such plants as Sagittaria cuneata, found in some of the bays are the dominant species. Sagittaria, though is perhaps as commonly a component of the dry morass form- ations. IV. Polygonum morass. Of this the dominant species is Polygonum emersum and off some rather deeper, rocky shores, such a type of attached bog is formed that one can attribute it altogether to the activity of growth of this plant. V. Salix morass. Here the dominant species is Salix myrtilloides usually developed not as an independent but as a subsidiary bog plant associated with Sphagnum formations. Yet at Lake of the Woods upon some shores, masses of this willow are developed to such an extent that finally a sufficient amount of humus is collected around their roots to afford a foothold for the little group of sedges and grasses that accom- pany the formation. VI. Menyanthes morass. At one or two points the morass is evidently built up and perpetuated largely through the growth of Menyanthes trifoliata. VII. Utricularia morass. This is a loose type and is not often developed. At a shore near Northwest Angle inlet, however, the plants of Utricularia vulgaris were so abundant that they had built up a morassic shore some seven feet in width near a ledge of rock, and in water six feet in depth. While there are other types besides these, in all probability, the ones named are the characteristic forms at this lake. There should be added, perhaps, an eighth group—mixed morass- to include those morassic shore formations in which the dominant plant would not be clearly distinguished in _ the group established. However, usually a little care will enable one to decide upon the plant most responsible for the formation. All of these morassic formations characterize quiet shores Most of them indicate a shelving gradually deepening lake- margin, but one or two may be developed off abrupt edges, as for — awed 996 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. example the Polygonum and Utricularia types. When any one of the types has become established the constant addition of decaying organic substance builds up what has been termed wet humus and gradually a spongy coherent substratum is elabor- ated and upon this numbers of plants of hydrophytic tendencies will find a home. Numerous small Carices and Ranunculi, Caryophyllaceae and Labiatae establish themselves, together with grasses, and the bog shows a transition to the dry type. It should be noted that the rhizomes and roots of the plants are the active agents in binding together the humus in some cases, while in others the floating areas of the plants, as in the Panicularia and Utricularia varieties, play an important part. Dry morass. This name may be applied to those morassic shores on which the accumulation of humus has reached a point where every year it remains for the most of the time fairly above the average lake level. In the piling up of the humus in this fashion a number of causes co-operate. Among the interesting influences under which wet morassic areas may become dry should be mentioned the following: 1. The influence of ice-floes. These, crowding against a wet morassic shore in the spring sometimes pile up the humus — in such fashion that it is condensed and elevated into a perma- nent ridge. In this condition its plant population changes. 2. The influence of outgrowing roots of shoreward estab- lished plants. By the pushing in of heavy roots from trees, usually willows, birches or tamaracks, and in some cases spruces, the wet morassic soil is lifted and gradually brought — up where it is for the most part out of reach of inundation. 1 3. The lifting force of gases of decomposition developed in the humus itself. By this means a general elevation of the humus mass is brought about in some instances and the whole substratum is, as it were, leavened and by the growth of root- q lets and further deposition of humus the spaces thus formed 5 become filled first with water, then with soil components. These are in addition to, and an accentuation of the steadily progressing increase in bulk of the wet morass due to the formation of generation after generation of leaves, roots and stems by its plant population. Thus, beginning in a variety of ways,—as a bed of Utricularia, a growth of reeds, a mat of 4 sedges or a tangle of willows—the wet humus may be gradu- a ally changed to dry and in this process its plant- population slowly but definitely changes. a MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 997 Dry morassic shores may be divided into herb-bearing, shrub- bearing and tree4bearing morass as the process of drying is continued. : I. Herb-bearing dry mosses. Of this a number of types should be defined if one wishes to cover the whole ground. At Lake of the Woods the following have been particularly observed: a. Cyperus dry morass. The dominant plants are various members of the genus Cyperus, Dulichium or Eleo- charis and sometimes of Carex. b. Veronica dry morass. The dominant plants are mem- bers of the genus Veronica. ¢. Labiate dry morass. The dominant plants are mints such as Scutellaria, Mentha, Vleckia and Lycopus. d. Plantago dry morass. The dominant plant is Plantago major or Plantago rugelii. e. Caltha dry morass. The dominant plant is Caltha palustris. Besides these a number of other sub-types might be de- scribed, but those given are certainly the most prominent and may serve as examples. Il. Shrub-bearing dry morass. Of this there are really but three clearly defined sub-types in the region, so far as my ob- servations have gone: a. Salix dry morass, The dominant plants are members of the genus Saljz. Among them Salix lucida and Salix myrtilloides are conspicuous. b. Cornus dry morass. The dominant species are Cornus baileyi and Cornus sericea. c. Spiraea dry morass. The dominant plant is Spiraea salicifolia. III. Tree-bearing dry morass. Here again three sharply marked sub-types may be observed. a. Larix dry morass. The dominant species is Larix laricina, the tamarack. b. Picea dry morass. The dominant species is Picea mariana, the spruce. ce. Betula dry morass. The dominant species is Betula papyrifera, the birch. As a matter of course none of these dry morass formations always exists in a pure state, but very often mixtures and _ transitions between one type and another or between dry mo- rass and wet morass types will be established over a given 998 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. shore area. Very beautiful exhibits of zonal distribution are often afforded upon shelving shores provided with morassic formations. Ten or twelve distinct zones of plants will be de- veloped as the moisture content of the soil diminishes from the edge of the water, inland. Plate LX XVI shows four of these zones; a Scirpus zone nearest the water edge, a Salix zone farther inland,a Betula zone behind this and finally a Lariz zone backed by trees of Pinus strobus, the latter not belonging, how- ever, in this case, to the true shore group. Floating bog. Coming next to the consideration of detached morass it should be observed that such does not develop under quite the same conditions as does the permanently attached morass. The following are favorable conditions for the forma- tion of detached morass. 1. A smooth surfaced bottom without the numerous crevices or irregularities that would assist roots to hold fast and thus keep the morass in place. | 2. More exposed situations, at the heads of broad or ex- tended bays, where higher winds can arise and hence more surf energy would be developed, tending to separate the morass from the shore behind. 3. A higher percentage of floating plants in the original morassic composition, as for example, Panicularias, Utricularias, Potamogetons, Lemnas and others in which a considerable sr tion of the plant body, if not the whole, is natant. 4. More precipitous shores where the detachment is shar- per and easier than if the bottom shelves gradually. 7 5. Weak places in the morassic texture where, owing to some zone of detachable plants, the whole lakeward mass can be removed from the shoreward portion. Such a line may be be called the scission line of the formation. Under a variety of conditions, especially when they co-oper- ate, morassic areas may be detached and carried into deeper waters. In some of the lakes of Minnesota these floating bogs are very prominent features and constitute the so-called ‘‘float- ing islands.“ At Lake of the Woods they do not seem to be abundant. The best specimens observed are in Northwest Angle bay, Moose bay and Four Mile bay behind Oak point. As developed, the floating bog comes to have some characters peculiarly its own, due to the moving about in the water and the removal from the particular point of attachment. The peculiarities of the floating bog are these: es a MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 999 1. A floating bog comes to have a redistribution of its com- ponent plants so that if it has been long separated from the shore where it was formed it no longer shows the longitudinal vegetation-striae of the old zonal morassic shore but develops a zonal grouping of its own. The peripheral areas are there- fore specialized from the central and a group of plants estab- lished at the water’s edge, able to bear the lapping of the waves and enjoying the higher illumination, may be distin- guished. At the center of the island shrubs or even small trees may become established and the whole bog, if it were not for the next condition to be observed would be character- ized by a series of zones very plainly marked, but not the old zones of the original shore. 2, A floating bog drifting about in a bay from one shore to the other, touching at different points and frequently exposed to the strong winds in the middle of the bay, while in transit from bank to bank, becomes a resting place for numerous varieties of light seeds. Furthermore, while temporarily situ- ated at one spot or another on the shore, it is, to some extent, colonized by the plants of that region and thus from both con- ditions its number of species of established plants tends to rise. Hence, floating bogs of long standing are scenes of very sharp struggle for existence among a considerable number of alien plants. This has a tendency to obscure both the original and the secondary zonal distribution and to a marked degree the floating bog will partake of an azonal character in consequence. 3. The undulating movement communicated to the bog when exposed to wave action Joosens somewhat its tangled network of roots and decayed organic substance so that the texture of the soil is modified from that of the general type of attached morass to which it originally belonged. This _ change in texture brings about a slight change in plant popu lation. Hence floating bogs are usually rich in Sparganiaceae, _ Typhaceae and Carices which develop under such conditions With considerable vigor. 464. The presence of the lake water underneath every part of the formation keeps it cool and moist beyond what is possible tor attached morass. This again has its modifying influence upon the plant population. These mechanical, biological and other conditions are quite sufficient to give to the floating bog a population distinctively its own. While belonging to the main subdivision of shores to which the name morass is given, it does not, especially if its 1000 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. floating habit has extended over several seasons, conform either in kinds of plants or in grouping altogether to the at- tached types. Anchored bog. It often happens that after floating for a season or two or even for a number of years, a bog is finally carried into some angle or cove from which it does not readily escape and after a time, if the bottom and shore are favorable, it may become anchored. This anchoring arises from the growth into the bottom soil, or into the shore, of roots and rhizomes from the bog group or by the growth into the bog of organs from the shore group or, more commonly, by both processes going on together. When thus anchored, the bog is now subjected to the influences of the new environment and its population becomes modified in consequence. The influ- ences which affect it are both physical and biological. If anchored in some area of strong illumination it develops dif- ferently from what it might if the resting place had been one of deep shadow. If anchored off a shore populated with Coniferae the bog population will change along different lines from those that might have been established had the shore vegetation been of deciduous trees or of herbs. If the shore upon which it has been carried is similar to that upon which the anchored bog originally developed, the line of changes will not be similar to those which would have taken place if the landing had been made upon a totally different type of shore. The combination and redistribution of plants which arises in an anchored bog may tend either to accentuate a zonal distribu- tion already established in the bog or to obliterate it. More commonly the latter happens and the floating bog, unless it has come to anchor in its original position upon ashore similar to its shore of origin, will very soon lose all traces of its old zonal aspect. It may happen that the shore is similar, but the lakeward side of the bog is now turned landward, while the originally landward side is turned lakeward. In such a case the original zonal distribution is rapidly converted into azonal and only much iater will a new zonal distribution arise. Again, if the bog comes to rest in a state that can be de- scribed only as azonal the influence of the anchorage may be favorable to the continuance of this azonal condition—and this is usually the case—or it may tend to convert it into zonal. — Even here, however, the question whether the new position of the bog restores or reverses its original position must come — MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 1001 into the enquiry. I have seen zonal anchored bogs caught in coves surrounded with Populus trees and by the juxtaposition the bog was quickly covered with Populus seedlings to the obliteration of its zonal character. Again other bogs, quite azonal from their Jong separation from the shore of origin, coming into a small bay with morassic shore within a couple of seasons showed the distribution in zonal lines already well begun. In general, concerning floating or anchored bogs, it might be supposed that they could belong to any one of the types of wet morass described above. But practically, so far as has been observed, they are always either gramineous or cyperaceous. Except in rare instances, the Panicularia type alone can not develop into floating bog for it is too loosely woven, and the waves soon break it up. The same is true of Utricularia mor- ass alone. Nor do the Polygonum, nor the Salix, nor the Spiraea morasses have the separability, the texture, the coher- ency and the pliability necessary for floating bog construction. In a word, then, these interesting formations begin as morasses of sedges or grasses, but contain also numerous other species of plants. On the whole, Sparganium seems to be one of the most characteristic genera of the floating bogs, although Hip- puris and Equisetum, with Typha, Carex, and Epilobium, are very constant components. In no case at Lake of the Woods have any Ericaceae been observed on these formations, although Ledum and Andromeda are not infrequent denizens of floating islands in central Minnesota. SURF-BARRIERS. The surf-barrier formations are such as can maintain them- _ selves off shore where the surf has play, therefore they must de able to withstand the occasional or perhaps frequent shock of ‘‘white-caps” breaking over or against them. Naturally Some shores are exposed to so strong surf that no cumaphyte oCan live under the impact. This is the case at Oak point, _ where the breakers from the Grand Traverse strike the shore fairly and come up over the shelving bottom with great vigor. But near less exposed beaches, and off many rocky shores, the Waves are not so heavy, and many of the surf-dwelling plants can find a foot hold. The general character of cumaphyteo are necessarily such that impact of the waves does not injure or displace them. They are all, therefore, rooted strongly at the bottom, in 1002 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. humus or drift, but frequently also in crevices submerged be- low the surface. Floating vegetation, such as Lemna or Riccia, does not form part of the surf-barriers, nor do plants with large leaves offering resistance to the waves, such as Castalia, Nymphaea or Potamogeton natans, although even these can maintain themselves in pretty rough water. Again vegetation with large floating areas and slender attachments to the soil. which may even ordinarily become disconnected, as in the Lentibulariaceae, do not form surf-barriers, for they are too easily uprooted and carried on the shore. The conditions of vegetation, then, result in the seiection of a few species of pe- culiar type for this special habitat. ; At Lake of the Woods, five genera of plants seem able to maintain themselves in regions exposed to long continued or intermittent surf. These are Scirpus, Phragmites, Polygonum, Spiraea, and Salix. Surf-barriers, also of Equisetum limosum doubtless exist in the region, having*been observed in the Rainy lake country and in central northern Minnesota. None were seen at Lake of the Woods. Of these surf-barrier plants some seem able to withstand strong and long continued surf while others select less exposed shores and are to be looked for rather on the windward side of islands or points and in coves and bays. Henee the classification that has been pro- posed seem justifiable and the five typés may be discussed briefly in their order. . Barriers in strong surf. Of 3 I find only two types ass follows: I. Scirpus barrier. The formation is composed of plants of Scirpus lacustris rooted in drift or humus soil and may exist in regions as exposed to surf as any that can afford a foothold for higher plants. Parenthetically, it may be noticed that lichen- formations on surf-washed ledges cannot be regarded as surf- barriers, although certainly they are a type of cumaphytie vegetation. The peculiar structure of Scirpus makes it a surf plant par excellence, and it is of cosmopolitan distribution in its favorite habitat. Yet at Lake of the Woods it is by no means so abundant as another plant of quite different appearance, by 1 no means so perfectly adapted, yet occupying many exposed shores together with or to the exclusion of the bulrushes. This is the type of a second form of barrier in strong surf. 1 II. Polygonum barrier. The species thus established is Polygonum emersum, and especially off rocky points or islands it seems to flourish. Unlike Scirpus which appears to need MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE woops. 1003 a bed of humus soil or at least highly nitrogenous sand for most favorable growth, Polygonum grows vigorously in crevices and may be described indeed as a crevice-plant, rooting under water. The stout stem, long pennant-like leaves, suggesting by their position in time of wind the well-known aspect of Phrag- mites, and strong attachment to the bottom make this plant an able cumaphyte although, it is true, it cannot structurally be regarded as the equal of Scirpus lacustris. Barriers in light surf. Of these three types are repre- sented at Lake of the Woods. I. Phragmites barrier. This, with Phragmites phragmites as the dominant plant,which is of cosmopolitan distribution in regions of light surf, is well developed on the shoreward face of Scirpus barriers, and very often exists without the Scirpus fringe, in coves and protected bays. It cannot, however, exist off a shore where the surf is heavy unless protected by a Scirpus zone. The formation is well developed near the mouth of Rainy river and in the Northwest Angle bays. II. Spiraea barrier. The plant is Spiraea salicifolia, a species as noted above, with wide range of habitat, and characteristic throughout the Lake of the Woods region as a crevice-plant on rocky shores. It commonly grows submerged -a few inches and occupies a zone inside of the Polygonum zone, thus bearing often the same relation to Polygonum that Phrag- mites does to Scirpus. With its stiff stems, slender long leaves and firm roots, it withstands a considerable washing of the waves and seems to flourish well although submerged for a considerable portion of the summer. In autumn or in mid- summer the water falls below its spring level and the foothold of the Spiraea becomes dry. The peculiarity of structure in the plant which enables it to grow partly submerged or in dry rock crevices fits it particularly for the extreme shores of rocky islands. and here, as for example on the southern points of Oak island it grows abundantly. III. Salix barriers. Like the Spiraea barrier this is connec - ted with fluctuations in the lake level. The components are members of the genus Salix, but one species in particular, Sa- di fteviatwsis most prevalent as a surf barrier. The habitat cChosenis off drift-shores, the plant seeming to prefer a region of Sand tooneof rock-crevices or submerged humus. Consequently Since rocky islands with drift dropped upon one shore and not upon the shore opposite are common in Lalte of the Woods, it often happens that a zone of Salix will be established at the 1004 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. water’s edge in the former case and a zone of Spiraea in the latter, upon the same island. Thus a distribution today of plants upon the island shows the line of adVance of the ancient glacier quite as clearly as striae would. Such a fact indicates well the long-standing nature of some of the causes regulating plant-populations. ° In general the Scirpus barriers backed with Phragmites or either of the two, developed separately, will indicate a rather flat nitrogenous type of bottom with the country rock well sil- ted over. The Polygonum or Spiraea barriers indicate a bare irregular rock bottom with humus laden crevices. Salix barri- ers are indicative of drift collection. When one of these barri- ers is fully established the area often becomes tenanted by Potamogetons, upon which the force of the waves.is modulated. But large leaved plants do not collect in the barrier zone unless it is broad enough completely to calm the white caps” that come in from the open water. Nor do small floating plants like Lemma find it easy to remain in the interstices of the barrier, so the subsidery vegetation is sometimes reduced to the vari- ous algae, Cladophoras, Gloeocapsas, Scytonemas, etc., that cling — to the stems of the dominant bulrushes or reed- grasses. ROCK SHORES. Shores of this type are almost invariably creviced, and when crevices are formed they interfere with the regular zonal dis. tribution of the plant population to such an extent that almost all rocky shores will be better considered under the general head of azonal formations. This is particularly true of talus — shores, for in the case of smooth rock in place there is usually — a well marked zonal distribution with reference to the water line. Below high water mark on such shores the lichen flora differs from that established above high water mark if the shore be steep, rounded or shelving, but if it be flat and a trifle — above the water line, as sometimes, there is not only zonal dis-. tribution of the ordinary type to be observed, but very often too that biological distribution from a common center that is perhaps best indicated in the ‘‘fairy-ring” mushrooms of mead- ows and fields. On such flat rocks circles are marked out by 7 the growth of rock-lichens, and these overlap and interlock — in an interesting fashion. A general view of lithophytic vege- tation may be postponed until the azonal shores are considered a and here only a few points regarding the ordinary zonal distri- bution need be remarked upon. — r 4 . Oe eS . MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE woops. 1005 Flat shores of rock. If crevices are absent the population consists of lichens and mosses. The action of surf regulates somewhat the distribution, and upon such shores algal pools like those previously described for front strand are common. The wet area nearest the lake may be termed the Endocarpon zone, from the prevalence of lichens of this genus; the zone next inland as the Biatora zone, and the one farther yet toward the country-line as the Cladonia zone. Rounded shores of rock. The same zones are established here except that they are not so broad. Generally a growth of Endo- carpon just at the water’s edge is succeeded within a few inches by the other two, so that Cladonias, which, with Stereocaulon paschale, grow in great profusion on all such shores, occur within a couple of feet of the high water mark. Yet the ex- posure of the shore, as regulating possible surf-activity, has much to do with the breadth of the zones and the interesting observation may be made that on sheltered islands with smooth rock shores the Cladonias grow much nearer the water’s edge than on exposed shores. Where the rock is particularly smooth there is greater difficulty in the establishment of the Cladonia zone, and its place is in many cases occupied by a zone of Umbilicarias Such an Umbilicaria formation is beautifully developed on the western end of the Isle de Massacre. In addi- tion to the lichen flora some small lithophytic mosses are es- - tablished upon smooth rock surfaces, but since the mosses are almost always crevice plants they may be better considered later. In the background of Plate LX XVIII a rather precipit- _ ous rocky shore is shown with few crevices near the lake, and here the zonal distribution of the lichens was apparent. In general, since the lower plants are not particularly a mat- ter of study in this paper, it may be said that flat or rounded smooth rocks offer so little foothold to plants that, although the conditions are favorable to zonal distribution, yet only lowly plants partake of it and the account need not be pro- longed. It is sufficiently apparent that differences of expos- ure, of contour, of color, degree of hardness, chemical com- position, illumination and irrigation must produce differences in the lichen population, but that a fundamental tendency to appear in zones is nevertheless discernible underneath the va- riety induced by the differences mentioned. 1006 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. SOIL SHORES. Of zonal shores of this character, not already discussed, really the only examples are the mud flats and mud banks, which are so rarely developed on Lake of the Woods. All other soil shores are largely azonal. For a soil shore can hardly be maintained, except as morass which has been con- sidered by itself, or as humus or drift, quite outside the sphere of wave-influence. Mud flats. Upon these shores the algal pools are promi- nent, and in them commonly Lemna is developed in small quan: ~~ tities, so they may properly be denominated Lemna pools. If the mud flat be not inundated too frequently, as is almost uni- formly the case, a few Carices may be established, but in Lake of the Woods, with its considerable variations of water stage, such areas are commonly barren, if they appear at all. Barren mud-flats differ from morasses principally because they are thus barren. Yet on such shores an outward zone of Lemna pools is often backed by an area of Cvrices, and the whole con- stitutes a temporary formation easily destroyed whenever the mud is rearranged by the action of the waves. Upon such shores, if they be in proximity to a bed of Nymphaea the pond lilies often creep, and during the summer the edge of the flat may be tenanted by these almost amphibious plants. Mud banks. These are always small in extent, and often ap- pear as the most temporary of formations. Sometimes deltas — of mud and silt are deposited upon strand or upon flat rock shores by small temporary streams, and thus a peculiar group of nitrophytic plants will be established upon the strand. In other cases the mud bank is developed from a mud flat, when the ridge is tenantéd by Carices, small Ranunculi, Feron- ‘ica, sometimes Scutellaria, and in brief is like the zones estab- lished around pools in the back strand, as previously described. Although nitrogenous, these mud shores are so impermanent 4 that no opportunity for plants of high rank to develop is of- fered. 1 Coming to a consideration of azonal shores, and the methods of distribution upon them, it is worth noting that very often little complexity of distribution, at first sight, characterizes these areas. The solid Populus or Betula formation extending to the water’s edge seems homogeneous, and unless it is studied in detail might be mistaken for a true zone. Let, often such 2 shore floras are quite azonal, and should be regarded rather as MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 1007 very complex than as very simple formations. Thus it hap- pens that in the case of shore formations one is not always able to speak with exactness unless an examination of the formation, and of its development as well, is made in great detail. Azonal distribution has been described as characteristic of topographic features devoid of radial symmetry. Hence talus heaps, boulder ledges and irregular rock masses are favorable regions for the development of an azonal formation. Often, too, the azonal formation appears as a preliminary stage in zonal distribution. This is particularly well exhibited on burnt shores. When the vegetation has been removed by fire, the new vegetation springs up quite in the azonal manner. So that a burnt shore which might have had well marked zonal population will perhaps be covered with a solid formation of light seeded plants such as Populus and Epilobium, these hav- ing easily reached the shore by the agency of the wind. And it the soil itself was déstroyed by the fire, then an azonal . formation of lichens and mosses will gradually establish itself and only after the lapse of years will the delicate influences that regulate the zonal grouping of plants make themselves felt over this area. In addition to the more permanent azonal _ formations, there should, then, be noted these temporary azonal groups on burnt areas. In such cases the azonal dis- tribution may be established and may maintain itself for some time upon tracts which are not devoid of radial symmetry. But this need not be confusing, for commonly such a new formation can easily be distinguished. For example, a uni- form Populus growth along some shore with all the trees of an age may be classified as azonal, perhaps, while another growth with a regular increase in age of the trees from one side of the Strip toward the other, may be classified as zonal. The various areas of azonal distribution may receive brief consideration in their order. | TALUS. Naturally the character of the talus depends upon the ledge from which it fell. The chemical.composition of the rock, its cleavage, bedding and tilt, its mass, slope and height, the Slant of the lake bottom and numerous other considerations regulate the coarseness, the extent, the inclination and the _ habitability of the talus. In most cases, however, talus compo- sed of large blocks with slight admixture of humus may be re- 1008 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. garded as relatively new, while that in which the blocks are smaller and the humus content greater, may be considered as of greater age. This is not always the case. It happens sometimes that talus falling from granite or other ledges of re- sistant rock, lies along the shore in such a position that the water laps among the fragments, carrying away much of the organic material which might temporarily accumulate, and thus for a very long time the blocks remain with the look of new talus except for the development of lichens in luxuriance on the fragmented faces of the rock. The different types of talus that have been observed may be noted in their order. ; Coarse talus. This is of twoclasses, new talus, and old talus. The coarse new talus is known by the scanty development of lichens on the rock surfaces of fragmentation, the coarse old talus by the disappearance of distinction between block-surfa- i ces originally exposed and surfaces exposed by the fracture. A number of types of plant societies may be observed upon such areas. If the blocks are very large and creviced the dis- tribution is the same as that yet to be described under the head of rock shores. Disregarding such a condition one may indi- cate the following special formations. 7 I. Thallophytic talus formations. The blocks are not strongly creviced and the only plants able to gain a foothold are the lichens and algae. Such formations are the first to appear on new talus blocks, unless conditions of drainage and silt-deposi- tion complicate the matter. They may also characterize old talus-block surfaces when the shape of the fragment is unfay- — orable for soil accumulation. The character of the plants and their relative abundance vary with the exposure of the surface, one being lighter, warmer, more sheltered from the wind than another. 4 II. Archegoniate talus formations. The characteristic plants are mosses and ferns. The blocks that show this type of plant population are generally along quieter shores where hig! winds and surf are not troublesome. If the block be not too large it may become covered down to high water mark with — luxuriant?growths.of Hypnaceae and Polypodium, to the almost complete exclusion of other plants. If, however, the block be of sufficient size and proper inclination and surface contour to permit the‘accumulation of a soil, it may harbor many small N lithophytic flowering plants, and as the block grows older per- haps even shrubby or arboreal vegetation may be established upon its slowly gathered superficial coating of soil. c= MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 1009 III. Herbaceous talus formations. The characteristic plants are various grasses, Campanula, Heuchera and Houstonia. Such grouping arises even on small talus blocks of relatively new formation if the surface condition is such as to retain the soil that is formed, or to hold soil or silt of drainage. IV. Shrubby talus formations. These may be coniferous, with the Junipers as the dominant plants, or metaspermic, with such plants as Populus. Much depends upon the vegetation of the back country in the establishment of shrubby talus groups, yet light seeded plants like Populus have an evident advantage. On large talus blocks it is not uncommon to see small shrubs of Populus tremuloides rooting themselves, to- gether with diminutive plants of Pinus divaricata or the Junipers. V. Arboreal talus formations. On talus blocks it is not com- mon to find large trees established, unless the block itself is so large that it might well be considered under the general class of rock-shore. Yet sometimes a talus block with a pocket-like depression may collect soil in this depression and give foothold for a tree. The tree in such a case is almost al- ways coniferous, the hardwoods preferring crevices. All of these types are pure talus types and no consideration to the intermixture of sand or soil that begins as soon as a talus slope is established, has been given. In each of the five groups a trace of zonal distribution is to be discovered, occas- ioned by the difference in exposure of the perpendicular sur- faces, those toward the lake being differently affected from the ones facing in other directions. Yet, since the blocks may be close together, they shade each other to such an extent that 4 the whole slope can hardly be regarded as a symmetrical area of plant establishment, and the distribution is characteristic- y ally azonal. Of the pure talus-block type of distribution there are a great ' . many varieties owing to differences in exposure, slope, temper- ature, illumination, moisture and biological conditions. On the | whole, such formations are less abundant than the mixed talus. Ooarse talus may be filled in either by sand from the lake or by Soil derived from one of three sources—from the off-shore vege- tation, from the talus-block vegetation or from inland areas | _ whence it drains down upon the talus slope. However, it may happen, very commonly the spaces between talus-blocks come do be filled with soil or with sand. In the first instance there develops in a coarse talus-bed about the same conditions that 1010 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. characterize creviced rock and a distribution of plants like that of creviced rock comes to exist where originally there was a pure talus type of distribution. VI. Talus and soil formations. Upon the humus masses of the interstices a group of plants become established such as habitually occupy rock crevices. The characteristic species are Spiraea salicifolia, Houstonia purpurea,Heuchera americana, Campanula rotundifolia and Ambrosia artemisiaefolia. But if the accumulation of soil has progressed to such an extent that larger plants can gain a foothold, one finds upon the talus slope abundant forests of pine and hardwood timber. One of the favorite habitats of Pinus divaricata throughout the Lake of the Woods region seems to be the talus slopes with soil admix- ture, and they grow almost as vigorously when established as crevice plants on the rock shore, where Pinus strobus is also abundant, : VII. Talus and sand formations. Where they occur these are most clearly a mixed type of distribution. I have seen on Shoal lake masses of talus-blocks, three or four feet cube covered with Hypnum and Polypodium, lying imbedded, as it were, in asandy beach tract bearing Hlymus and Prunus pumila. No doubt the only proper explanation of such a remarkable juxtaposition of plants is the assumption that the low talus slope was first established and that afterwards the sand was washed in by the waves. Thus a composite formation was developed. Extremely old talus with small, weathered blocks and sand infiltration can not ecologically be distinguished from boulder drift shore. J A view of talus with formation of Populus tremuloides, com- ing under Group V of the classification is shown in Plate LXXVIII, to the right in the background. This is a charac- teristic azonal talus population on an area with considerable soil substances infiltrated by drainage from the higher back country. 4 A variety of mixed talus types with coarse talus as the foun- dation might be discussed with protit—for example, the buried talus-blocks of some of the northern islands, where a general coating of soil covers the talus masses but lies deeper over the interstices than over the rock fragments, or the talus-blocks — imbedded in morassic shores and the influence of their pres- ence upon the formation of Scirpus or Salix belts—but the problems are of such endless complexity that they can hardly l be entered upon in this preliminary sketch. 4 r MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 1011 Fine talus, This name is applied to those talus slopes upon which the process of weathering has progressed to such an extent that the talus-blocks are all broken up into smal! frag- ments. Together with this process there is always a deposition of soil in the interstices, part of this soil being derived from original talus vegetation, and part of it from drainage of silt upon the slope. Such slopes do not become established rapidly in the Lake of the Woods region and a slope covered with fine talus and soil is evidence of a long history and many rearrange- ments among the plants which tenant it. A number of forma- tions might be described upon such slopes, but it should first be noted that as the slope becomes more even and regular, owing to the weathering and infiltrating processes, a tendency towards zonal distributions arises and many fine-talus slopes have well marked zones of plants established upon them. One or two formations on fine-talus are, however, of special inter- est. The following have been observed at Lake of the Woods: I. Fine-talus lichen formation. The species are mostly Cla- donias and Stereocaulons. The soil-dwelling Cladonias e. g. Cladonia pyxidata are abundant, mixed with crevice-dwelling and lithophytic forms, such as Cladonia rangiferina and Stereo- caulon paschale. Upon such a talus slope there are abundant mosses, Barbulas, Bryums and Polytrichums, and an admixture of small grasses and herbs. The lichens, however, give the character to the formation. II. Fine-talus fern formation. Upon slopes of fine talus it is not uncommon to find a formation consisting almost exclusively of Dryopteris and Polypodium. Such slopes are generally in- clined at an angle of about 45° to the plane of the lake level. They seem to develop well in rather open, unsheltered places, Such a slope is well developed on Trim-tree island in the Little Traverse. III. Gramineous talus turf. Here the dominant plants are members of the genus Agrostis, and over the slope a pretty even turf of Agrostis hiemalis is often formed. The loosening of the soil by the small stones imbedded in it seems to favor the growth of this grass, and such slopes have been observed at several different points on the islands of the lake. IV. Sambucus talus slopes. The characteristic plant is Sam- bucus pubens, the elder-bush. This, with bushes of the red raspberry (Rubus) forms a rather characteristic shrub on cer- tain talus slopes, especially toward the periphery of small islands, not too elevated nor with strongly precipitous shores, 2 a. = pin aa 1012 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. It is also found at Lake of the Woods as the typical inner shrub” on dome-shaped islands, as described by me elsewhere,“ and can not be regarded as a pure talus-type of plant forma- tion. V. Betula talus-slopes. Growths of Betula papyrifera sometimes occur on fine-talus, although usually the soil- content is so considerable that the shores are better described as humus shores. Yet Betula woods upon some of the islands mark the fine-talus as sharply as Populus or Pinus divaricata woods mark the coarse talus. VI. Pinus resinosa talus slopes. This species of Pine, the ‘‘Norway pine” of Minnesota loggers, does not commonly grow upon shores at Lake of the Woods, but is rather a back country — plant. Isolated individuals occur in various localities, in crevices, on the strand, on dunes and on coarse talus. Special colonies have been noted in three instances on fine talus slopes, The exposure was slight, the slope gentle and the admixture of soil considerable. Without extending the examination of coarse and ane talus farther it may be observed that while coarse talus gives slight opportunity for zonal distribution, fine talus, after the sufficient ‘lapse of time offers an area suitable for zonal distribution. This is especially the case if the slant of the bed is gradual and the admixture of soil such as to bury the talus-fragments in a homogeneous massof humus. A large number of transi- tion types, mixed types, compound and irregular groupings, ~ may develop upon talus areas. The age, coarseness, slope, extent, exposure, drainage, off-shore conditions of the bottom, chemical composition of the talus blocks, juxtaposition of the blocks, percentage of interstitial deposits and their character, and back country biological conditions all influence and deten mine the nature of the talus population. nnn, a eS a eee, BOULDER SHORES. ‘Ecologically coarse boulder shores do not differ strongly in themselves from coarse talus, nor fine boulder shores from fine talus. But the conditions of their development are sufficiently different to expose them, when formed, to a different set of influences. While talus shores may occur in quiet secluded — regions of the lake, the boulder drift is found principally on very open shores where there is strong wind and surf activity. (9) MacMillan, Distrib. of Plants, etc. Bot. Gaz. 22 :218. 1896. MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE woops. 1013 Thus the boulder shore is developed excellently on the side of Big island facing Garden island, quite open to the winds and waves of the Grand Traverse. This difference in exposure gives to a boulder shore more the character of strand, but, because of the irregular surface, strand zonal distribution does not readily arise. although there is commonly formed a group of plants back on the shore somewhat analogous to back-strand. According to contour two types of boulder shore may be dis- tinguished, the flat or boulder strand, and the rounded or boulder slope. If the boulders are large the conditions are not the same as if they were small. Coarse boulder shores. Such a name may be applied to those shores where boulders a foot or more in diameter are bedded in sand or soil. That they should be bedded in soil is possible only in sheltered coves or behind surf barriers. Ord- inarily they are bedded in sand. I. Boulder strand. This name may be applied to low-lying beaches which are covered with half-buried boulders of large size. The boulders themselves support a lichen population with occasional growths of moss or evenof ferns, but the latter ‘condition is rare. The intermixed sand bears ordinary psam- mophytic plants and the combination presents much the aspect of talus and sand as described above. A difference, however, lies in the greater exposure of such a shore, so that the lichens are scanty, dwarfed and not of the Cladonia types, but rather Endocarpons. Amid these lichen-groups an algal flora may flourish in boulder-strand-pools, the boulders them- _ selves, by their interference with the regular wash of surf, _ favoring the development of strand pools. And neighboring _ closely upon the pool-flora and the lichens will be the Ambrosia, _ Epilobium, Onagra and Elymus vegetation of typical beach. The boulders offer shade and shelter, to some extent, so the _ strand herbs become distributed with reference to them rather than to the general shore line, as in ordinary strand. Coarse boulder strand is, then, to be regarded as an azonal modifica- tion of ordinary strand. II. Boulder slopes. Like talus slopes, these may have a greater or a less percentage of enclosed humus and the char- - acter of the vegetation varies with the percentage. Usually, _ however, unless recent denudation has been in progress, the 7 Shores are strongly nitrogenous and separate into two areas, ia 4 upon analysis. The region nearer the water’s edge differs from that farther back and maintains a plant population of a 1014 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. distinct type. Thus, to this extent, there is zonal distribution but the irregularity of surface is so considerable that the pre- ponderance of characters are azonal. Where the water in its fluctuations of level exerts an influence it is commonly to wash out the organic debris from among the boulders and thus to decrease the nitrogenous per cent. This is not entirely a one- sided interchange, for where aquatic algae, as for example, Aphanizomenon are developed in enormous quantities they ares often delivered by the waves among such boulder-shore inter- stices to an extent that can only be appreciated when one has seen the great drifts of decaying algae that sometimes occur in mid-summer, upon such banks as are able to retain them through irregularity of surface. The region next the waters edge does not usually maintain large trees, although occasion- — ally willows or poplars may stand on the extreme outer border of the shore, while behind are shrubs and herbs. More ordinarily the edge of such boulder slopes is occupied by plants of Spiraea, Amelanchier, Salix, Campanula, Alnus, Heuchera and a general mixture of psammophytes, lithopbytes, nitrophytes and hydrophytes that indicate by their irregular — juxtaposition the complexity of the substratum as an ecologic — area. Farther back forest growths of Populus, Betula, Pinus, Quercus, Fraxinus or Acer may be met with and the general slope maintains a greater variety of plants than is often found on areas of similar size, in the region of description. In Hate LXXVII, a typical boulder-slope is shown with a front slope group of azonally distributed shrubs and herbs, and a back- — slope formation of mingled Betula and Populus. This view is taken in MacPherson’s bay and shows also an Indian village with the birch-bark canoes of the aborigines drawn up upon the shore. * Boulder slopes having been established in the Glacial period 4 are not at all comparable to new talus, but only to the oldest. Upon the boulders themselves, lithophytic lichens and mosses — are commonly abundant and shores consisting of boulders — buried in humus or the sand have their distinctive characters of plant population as was described for the shores of buried a talus. | Fine boulder shores. As in the case of talus shores a dis- tinction arises when the rock fragments are small. In such instances they are easily buried by humus or by sand and pe 4 characteristic lithophytic vegetation does not appear. This type of shore occurs either as strand or as slope. The fine * MacMillan : SHORES AT LAKE OF THE woops. 1015 boulder strand may be termed gravel-beach for this is the form it usually takes. I. Gravel-beach. Upon beaches that are composed alto- gether of a coarse gravel the pebbles are so readily moved about by the surf that vegetation finds great difficulty in estab- lishing itself. Consequently the area of a gravelly beach nearest the water’s edge is commonly quite sterile. Not even do pools of algae find it easy to become established. Farther back, however, scattered herbs and shrubs can gain a foot- hold. The segregation of pebbles that-goes on under the lap- ping of the waves, or under surf impact, is such that the smaller are often thrown well inland while the larger are left upon the extreme front of the shore. Consequently a strip of small grasses and herbs usually occupies the shoreward por- tion of the strand, and these plants, that are thus established, are strongly lithophytic in character. Hence upon such _ gravelly beaches one finds Campanula and Heuchera in great _ profusion, together with Agrostis, Ambrosia and Onagra,.a very different population in its appearance from that of sandy beach. Still farther back a group of psammophytes often comes in so that there is strong semblance of zonal distribution. Indeed so far as the plant distribution is affected by the action of the waves in segregating the pebbles, it is truly zonal. It is classed under the general azonal type because of its _ habitat and strongly azonal method of development. Upon a new gravelly shore the distribution is quite azonal. The gravel beach may properly be regarded as an intermediate type of formation. II. Gravel slopes. Such rounded slopes, covered with Epilo- _ bium, Onagra and Rhus, are seen on Garden Island. The sub- soil seems to be of sand and clay, and the humus sheet is thin. Let a group of shrubs, developed in quite irregular and azonal fashion, are able to establish themselves and persist. - Much of the organic matter is drained out of the soil through the sub- Soil, and the slopes are, as a whole, where studied, not highly _ nitrogenous. The number of plant species is therefore limited and consists chiefly of low shrubs. I have seen no lichen or | Moss-covered gravel slopes, such as are developed from talus. Probably the rounded shape of the pebbles favors more ready drainage-off of organic substances than the irregular, angular shape of the talus fragments. If this be true it is an interesting fact to notice. Evidently the paucity of species, 3 4 mine by rapid drainage and consequent low nitrogen- 1016 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. content of the soil, must be referred eventually, as one studies : the phenomenon, to the rounding, polishing action of ice in the Glacial period. Perhaps no better illustration than the differ- ence in plant population between fine talus slopes and gravel-— slopes could be given to illustrate theantiquity and multiplicity — of causes that determine the plant-physiognomy of any given region. . ROOK SHORES. While many rocky shores show true zonal distribution of © their plant population, this is not usually the case. When the surface of the rock is irregular, the whole split by a network of crevices, and covered here and there with little pieces of talus, a lack of symmetry arises which finds response in azonal — distribution of the plants which tenant the area. aq Irregular surfaced rock shore. Very often the irregularity — of the surface arises from wave action, very often from weath- — ering, recent or preglacial, and in some cases it is the direct result of glacial abrasion, as may be seen at the Northwest Angle. However developed, the result is much the same so far as concerns the distribution of plants. In the hollows and crannies soil will collect, either by drainage-in or by adjacent formation through the activity of lichens, mosses and ferns, — and these soil pockets, irregularly distributed, of varying depth and extent, give rise to a considerable variety of plants. A list of rock plants on the extreme northwestern point of Big Island is given here to indicate what are the dominant species Rock group on Big Island point. Dryopteris thelypteris. Potentilla arguta. Polypodium vulgare. Rosa blanda, Juniperus sabina. Spiraea salicifolia. communis, Oxalis stricta. Taxus minor. Hypericum ellipticum. Agropyron tenerum. Chamaenirion augustifolium. 1 Agrostis alba Onagra biennis. — —— hiemalis. Aralia racemosa. 7 Elymus canadensis. Verbena hastata. 4 Muhlenbergia mexicana, Mentha sativa. 43 Panicum dichotomum. Stachys aspera. 2 Cyperus strigosus. Plantago major. ae Juncus tenuis, Galium boreale. 25 Unifolium canadense. Lonicera dioica. = ia Quercus macrocarpa, Campanula rotundifolia. we Actaea alba, Ambrosia artemisiaefolia. = Anemone canadensis. —— psilostachya. = Ranunculus macounii, Eupatorium perfoliatum. — Capnoides mieranthum. Euthramia graminifolia. He Arabis hirsuta, Hieracium canadense. Pi Heuchera americana, Lactuca canadensis. sal 5 Cerasus virginiana, - MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE woops. 1017 _ Apparently the character of plants established upon an _ irregular rock surface is conditioned upon a great variety of causes. The size of the soil pockets, their depth, their oppor- tunity of accumulating moisture, their temperature and illumin- ation, their proximity to or remoteness from the waves, their exposure to winds, and, in short, all the ecologic factors enter into the problem and the prediction of definite species in soil Pockets of known size and depth would be impossible, so much influence would the surrounding and secondary causes exert. Vet one could name a number of plants not to be found in such _ pockets and could limit the prediction within bounds. Even this would sometimes expose a novice to difficulties for very unexpected plants occupy these little pockets on an irregular rock shore. For example on Windigo island, near Flag island, the pockets, two or three square feet in extent and two and a half inches in depth, in granitic rock were occupied over a con- _ siderable area almost exclusively by Sphagnun cymbifolium, a most unexpected locality. The plants apparently drew upon adjacent trees of Pinus divaricata established in crevices, for shade and for sluicing the rain water into their little hollows. These miniature peat bogs upon high, wind swept rocks, I have not happened to encounter elsewhere. In one of them several individuals of Moneses and in another a plant of Kalmia had become established. Whether the pocket vegetation shall be lichens, mosses, ’ herbs, shrubs or trees, depends much upon the depth of the Pocket, its drainage supply and the environmental factors. In these soil pockets the incalculable factors of distribution, such as the dropping of seeds by birds, or by the wind or by roam- ing animals, are so important that the vegetation aspect of the region is quite unpredictable in its details. In the foreground of Plate LXXX, the Sacred Rock of the Lake of the Woods Indians is shown. One observes the irregular surface. The depressions are very shallow; thus small amounts of soil develop and only small plants—grasses, mosses and lichens— are shown. In the background a coarse talus slope, with _ Populus vegetation, appears. In Plate LXXIX, on the other hand, _ deep pockets have been formed over the rock surface and on them a forest of Pinus strobus is established. Mingled with _ this species are crevice trees of Pinus divaricata. The two Plates give a good idea of the influence of surface-contour of the rock substratum upon the plant physiognomy of the region. The difference between the two shores is essentially one of er Surface contour. Other factors are slight as compared with it. eet ; 1018 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Creviced rocks. Crevice-formation is indeed only a variety of irregular surface contour, but from the cleavage of the rock in straight lines intersecting each other, vegetation rows are often established. The crevices, if of long standing, have com- monly been filled with soil and are occupied by their character- istic plants. A large list of crevice dwelling plants might be prepared from the general catalogue of Lake of the Woods vegetation, Scarcely a plant of the region, except the true aquatics, like Utricularia or Potamogeton is altogether unable to maintain itself in a crevice. Yet, notwithstanding this fact, there is a limited group of omnipresent crevice plants which ap- pears on almost every shore. These may be divided as follows: I. Crevice thallophytes. Here are included a number of lich- ens, especially Cladonias, with which the region abounds, — mosses and ferns. Polypodium and Dryopteris are the 2 abundant crevice-fern genera. Of ten a creviced shore is n ted off with intersecting lines of green and white, the green — ing crevices filled with Polypodium, the white, crevices tenanted ” by Cladonia. II. Crevice herbs. The dominant crevice-herbs are doubéledii Campanula rotundifolia, Houstonia purpurea, Heuchera ameri- 5 f cana, Agrostis hiemalis, Arenaria stricta, Achillea millefolium, Am- brosia psilostachya, Apocynum androsaemifolium and Vleckia ane- 1 thiodora. As has been indicated above, many others may be 1 encountered, but these are universal. ¥ III. Crevice-shrubs. The dominant crevice-shrubs are Juni · ; perus sabina, Juniperus communis, Spiraea salicifolia, Rosa wood- 1 sii, Symphoricarpos, Rhus, Corylus, Diervilla and Cornus. Cre vice shrubs need no wider crevices than do the herbs, but What is lost in width must be made up in length or depth. ia IV. Crevice trees. An interesting feature of the plant popu- lation is the ready adaptability of certain trees to live in nar- row crevices. The forms most commonly found in such re- stricted quarters are Pinus strobus, Pinus divaricata, Quercus macrocarpa, Fraxinus americana and Populus tremuloides. It is remarkable to observe the ease with which pine trees six ¢ a eight inches in diameter maintain themselves in a crevice less than a foot wide, where the entire root system must dispose itself in the cramped space afforded it, and yet the pines espe- 3 cially thrive wonderfully under such conditions. Some islands, : creviced sparingly, maintain what at a distance seems to be a: fairly solid and homogenous forest of pine, yet upon close ex, amination this forest will be discovered to consist entirely of ; MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 1019 crevice plants, while between the crevices the rock is bare or maintains at best a few lichens and mosses. Upon high wind- swept rock shores at Lake of the Woods an occasional odd eco- logic adaptation of the white pine is to be observed. Instead of growing in the ordinary way the plants lie flat like a Juni- per and cover sometimes circles thirty yards in circumference with a dense low network of prostrate branches. One would scarcely recognize the plant as being Pinus strobus at all, ex- cept upon close investigation. The crevice-tree formations are leew prettily in Plate LXXVIII in the background, on the left, where a steep smooth rock shore bears a vigorous crevice flora of Pinus strobus of the ordinary form and Pinus divaricata. Among the innumerable islands of the lower lake this type of shore is exceedingly common. It is well developed also in Shoal lake and in White- fish bay. Of the shores of the upper lake fewer are of this type, but some of the Northwest Angle inlet and Moose bay shores are perfect examples. When a crevice-tree formation arises in a crevice running parallel with the shore-line the drainage often brings about the building of a concentric soil ridge, the trees serving as barriers to the general downward drainage from the back 1 country, and thus a considerable zonal distribution may come into existence. When, however, the crevices run perpendicu- lar to the shore-line such a condition does not arise. This origin of forest zones by drainage on dome-shaped islands, I have considered fully elsewhere! °. Perpendieular rock shores. The distribution of plants upon _. precipitous cliffs such as those of Crow Rock island is not necessarily azonal. It has already been shown how an Endo- cCarpon lichen zone may originate within the space of wave activity while above, other lichens, Biatoras and Cladonias, may become established. Yet upon the bold smooth face of a cliff for the greater portion of its surface only azonal or biologically zonal distribution of lichens, mosses, ferns and small crevice plants is ordinarily to be observed. In some cases large crev- ice trees may establish themselves upon these precipitous faces. The most abundant plants, however, upon the precipi- tous cliffs, in all this region, are lichens of the genus Thelo- _schistes. One may with propriety consider this as a typical formation. 10 MacMillan: Distribution of plants, ete. L. e. i i 9 3 1020 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. I. Theloschistes formation. Enormous patches of these bright orange or red lichens may be seen upon the cliffs of the 4 Lake of the Woods district. They are best developed on Shoa! lake, on Crow Rock island, in Whitefish bay and upon the high — rocks of Yellow-girl bay. Such cliffs acquire a highly colored appearance and seem to offer conditions more favorable for the development of Theloschistes lychneus and the others than do rocks lying at a smaller angle with the horizon. 4 II. Umbilicaria formation. Upon some precipitous cliffs q vast numbers of Umbilicaria lichen-thalli are prominent. Such seem more copiously developed upon the irruptive rocks than upon the quartzytes and gneisses of the region. 4 III. Polypodium formation. Precipitous cliffs green with Polypodium are not uncommon. In this case there are small crevices, or at least an irregular surface to the rock. 3 IV. Campanula formation. When the surface of the cliff is seamed with small crevices Campanula gains a foot-hold, and often develops almost to the exclusion of other plants. q V. Juniperus formation. Upon some vertical cliffs with — numerous larger crevices an almost solid formation of Juni- perus communis has been observed. a In general it is apparently a characteristic of the precipitous — cliff that its plant population is homogeneous. Where upon a flat rock surface of the same area a dozen or more 4 would be established, upon the precipitous cliff only half as many may be found. This fact illustrates the influence of rapid drainage, constant unilateral illumination, or general shade, and reflection or radiation of heat upon the plant inhabitants. q A smaller number are able to endure the conditions of the ei * pendicular rock than can flourish upon the flat rock. HUMUS SHORES. which a distinct zonal distribution is readily established. Ad a flats may also be regarded as humus. Both of these, however, q . have been redistributed, to some extent, by the action of the water. It remains to note the occurrence of ordinary humus ~ in place, along some sheltered: shores. Conditions favorable for its development are as follows: the bank must be gently — sloping, secluded from the wind, heavily wooded and thus shaded from the direct rays of the sun, undisturbed by running water, and of such general even contour that the soil-water 4 MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE Woops. 1021 collects in no special sink-holes. Under such topographic con- ditions and adjustments of the environment, humus-banks, in some cases, develop almost down to the water’s edge. Any violent wave action would destroy them, but they may bear a gradual rise and fall of level in the lake without becoming dis- integrated. Upon such areas the true humus plants develop abundantly. Certain special formations have been observed. I. Onoclea formation. Upou low humus banks the ostrich fern is sometimes established as the dominant plant. This happens on the shore of some small irregular islands in Moose bay. As a back country formation, Onoclea beds are conspic- uous on Garden island and elsewhere. The Onoclea beds on humus shores have been observed covering areas of about 1500 square meters to the exclusion of other species. II. Pyrola formation. The little pipsewissa plants are the dominant species but with them occur commonly Unifolium, Gaultheria, Corallorhiza, Moneses, Goodyera, Gyrostachys and many other small nitrophytes. III. Alnus formation. The alder sometimes occurs as a dominant plant upon such humus banks. When thus established its root-tubercles are very copiously developed. IV. Taxus formation. Upon humus shores of Garden island, this conifer is a dominant plant upon certain stretches. It occurs when the general back-country formation is conifer- ous. V. Abies formation. The balsam marks a low humus shore and by its prevalence indicates rather the drier typical humus _ than the redistributed morassic humus such as Picea and Lariv seems to favor as a habitat. VI. Betula formation. Birch woods develop upon humus stretches and in such cases maintain a vigorous growth with an under-vegetation quite different from that formed when the Betula establishes itself upon talus. In the latter case Epilob- ' tum, Apocynums, Asters and other herbs not strongly nitro- _ phytic are the subsidiary plants. In the humus formation _ Lycopodium, Botrychium, Monotropa, Pyrola, Circaea and nitro- phytic lichens, fungi, and grasses of the genus Poa or Homalo- cenchrus are abundant. Other formations no doubt arise in the Lake of the Woods district, characterized by the dominance of,other plants, but those that have been defined will serve as indices of the eco- logic conditions of humus shores. Such shores are quite azonal in their distribution of plants, but the question of illumination 1022 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. becomes important as the lake is approached. A grouping of F the humus plants into those which can endure the strong illu- mination near the edge of the Betula wood, for example, and those of 4 which must have the deeper shade is effected, giving rise to a rudimentary zonal arrangement even here. Moneses is so essenti- ally a shade-loving plant (ombrophile) that it does not approach the edge of the wood, but remains in the deep shadows, Cor- allorhiza, on the other hand, prefers a station nearer the edge. Comparative tests of the different humus plants with reference to their degree of ombrophilic instinct would be useful, and could be made in such a region. CONCLUSION. The principal formations as studied at Lake of the Woods, have now been passed in review and their characters noted and commented upon. No extended summing up is necessary for 4 it must be apparent that the purpose of the paper has been but 4 a single one to point out the dependence over such an area as the shores of the lake, of plant formations upon topographie and environmental conditions. It has been shown how each formation may be explained briefly as connected with a certain melange of outward conditions, and an effort has been made to analyze these conditions both by themselves and as connected with the growth of vegetation. Such an account, the first of its kind published in America, may be of service in stimulat- ing ecologic study of plants, and if it be so fortunate its author will be well satisfied and repaid for some months of arduous ~ work in the field. There is no question that the study of plant distribution over limited areas must be pursued more labori- ously than ever, if the large problems of distribution are to re- ceive accurate and authentic solution. Ecological distribution / as a field of botanical research needs many students.. 7 4 MacMillan: SHORES AT LAKE OF THE WOODS. 1023 ; DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. PLATE LXX. Strand vegetation on Garden island. Salix front strand forma- tion, with Salix mid-strand in background. PLATE LXXI. Strand vegetation on Oak point. Prunus and Elymus mid-strand in foreground, Prunus and Rosa back strand to the left. PLATE LXXII. Strand vegetation on Isle aux Sables. Cornus and Salix mid- strand in background. Populus and Quercus back strand in foreground. PLATE LXXIII. Dune vegetation on Isle aux Sables. Populus, Prunus, Juniperus and Elymus. PLATE LXXIV. Dune vegetation; Isle aux Sables. Populus, Artemisia and Elymus in foreground. Cerasus and Celtis in background. PLATE LXXV. Dune pool, Isle aux Sables. Nleocharis formation surrounded by Prunus pumila, Juniperus sabina and Houstonia. Cerasus and _ Celtis formation in background. PLATE LXXVI. Morassic shore, Echo bay. Zones of Seirpus, Salix, Cornus, Populus and Pinus. PLATE LXXVII. Azonal boulder slope on 1 bay. Showing Betula forma- tion in background, with Epilobium, Spiraea and Calamagrostis formation at water’s edge. PLATE LXXVIII. Creviced rock and talus formations, near Rat Portage. Campanula, Heuchera and Juniperus formation at water's edge. Pinus and Pop- 4 ulus formations in background. _ Puate LXXIX. Irregular surfaced rock formation, near Keewatin. Showing Pinus : formation. PAT LXXX. “a Rock and talus formations on Flag Island point. Showing Populus formation on drift and trees. Aristida and moss formations in crevices of rocks in the foreground. Pare LXXXI. Map of Lake of the Woods. After the map of the Canadian Geolog- ical Survey, with some modifications, especially in American waters. 1024 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. LI. THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. I. GEORGE B. FRANKFORTER. HISTORICAL. The genus Veratrum is represented in Minnesota by Veratrum viride Ait., a plant reported from Stearns county by Garrison, and probably distributed over the northern portion of the state. While not apparently abundant, it could doubtless be made to grow under cultivation throughout Minnesota, for its general range in North America is a broad one. The popular name of the plant is Hellebore. The substance commonly known in pharmacy as veratrine, varies widely in its composition, chemical, physical and phys- iological properties. Until recently it has been exceedingly difficult to obtain different samples with the same general properties. The introduction of the so-called ‘‘ Merck verat- rine” has changed matters somewhat, although samples of the Merck alkaloid have been found to vary considerably in their general properties. One of the chief causes of this exceptional variation is the extreme difficulty with which the alkaloid crystallizes, thus almost excluding one of the most important means of purifica- tion. Another, and perhaps the most important reason for this wide variation, lies in the fact that almost every one of the early investigators of the ‘‘veratria” has given the name toa different alkaloid or to a mixture of alkaloids. In 1819 Pelletier and Caventou! obtained from Veratrum sabadilla an amorphous base, which was afterwards shown to be a mixture of several alkaloids. For some time this was sold as a medicine under the name veratria.“ : Later Couerbe? in an examination of the sabadilla, obtained three distinct alkaloidal substances. One of these, the most abundant, was amorphous but formed acrystallizable sulphate (1) Annal. de Chim. et de Physique [IT] 14: 69. (2) Annal. de Chim et de Physique [III 52:352, Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1025 and chloride. He called the substance veratrine. The method which he used for the extraction is briefly as follows: The triturated seed was treated with 90 per cent alcohol allowed to stand for some hours and filtered. The alcohol was evaporated off when a dark colored varnish-like substance remained. The brown substance was then purified by treating the aqueous solution with dilute nitric acid, and the alkaloids reprecipita- ted by potassium hydroxide. The precipitate formed was filtered off, washed with cold water and taken up in 95 per cent alcohol. On evaporating off the alcohol, a yellow waxy mass remained which contained, besides veratrine, all the alkaloids present in the plant. Toseparate the sabadilleine, the second substance, from the veratrine, the whole mass was digested with hot water. Sabadilleine and the waxy substance dissolved. The residue was then treated with ether and that which remained on evaporating the ether was veratrine. This white varnish-like substance was repurified and analyzed. Two analyses gave the following: (1) C=70.78. H- 7.63; (2) C= 70.48. H= 7.67, which corresponds to the formula ; Cas H No OS . The aqueous solution upon examination was found to contain besides the crystallized sabadilleine, an amorphous substance which was like sabadilleine soluble in both water and alcohol. It contained similar properties to sabadilleine wax called saba- dilleine hydrate. . Castner® in a repetition of Couerbe’s work concluded that the crystals obtained by him were directly or indirectly due to the presence of calcium phosphate in small quantities. Ed. Simon‘ in an examination of Veratrum album, isolated two new alkaloids. One he called barytine and the other he named veratrine. The former after carefully examining, he changed to jervine (from jerva, a Spanish name for the deadly poison of the Helleb. alb.). The latter he identified as the veratrine of Couerbe. He obtained the alkaloids by treating the material with dilute hydrochloric acid, precipitating with sodium car- bonate, extracting with alcohol and evaporating off the alcohol. They were purified by redissolving in alcohol, treating with animal charcoal, filtering and evaporating off the alcohol. The separation was made by dissolving in alcohol and adding dilute sulphuric acid. The sulphate of jervine is insoluble and can "readily be removed by filtration. (3) Arch. 88. (4) Pogg. Ann, 41:569. > 1026 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Wiegand’ used a similar method for the extraction of the different alkaloids, but used a different method of separat- ing them. He treated the whole of the crystalline mass with very dilute acetic acid, purified by animal charcoal and separ- ated by dilute sulphuric acid and ammonia. Merck.“ in an examination of the base, described and ana- lyzed by Pelletier, Couerbe and Dumas, found that when the amorphous substance was dissolved in exceedingly dilute alcohol and allowed to evaporate spontaneously, a fine white efflores- cent crystalline mass was obtained which was insoluble in wa- ter. Analyses gave numbers for the formula Coy Hye No O16. The sulphate, the chloride and the gold double salt were pre- pared and analyzed, analyses corresponding well with the above formula. Weigelin,’? in an examination of Veratrum album, isolated three alkaloids, veratrine, sabadilleine, to which he gave the formula 8 C. Hes No O. and sabatrine of the formula C Heg Na O47. The method of extraction was similar to that employed by Couerbe. The pounded seed was boiled with very dilute sul- phuric acid and the extract treated with 80 per cent alcohol to remove the resinous matter. The alcohol was removed by evaporation and the boiling solution treated with ammonia. A resinous precipitate was formed which contained the veratrine. The latter was purified by dissolving in ether, evaporating, redissolving in alcohol and precipitating with water. The ammoniacal filtrate was agitated with amyl alcohol and allowed to evaporate spontaneously. The residue was then redissolved — in common alcohol purified by animal charcoal. Finally, the concentrated solution of the veratrine was precipitated by am- monia. This residue was then extracted with ether. That which remained, upon evaporating the ether extract, was a bright red substance which was called sabatrine. An analysis gave numbers for the formula Cv Hsp Na Orr. The sabadilleine was insoluble in ether and was repurified by 5 reprecipitating from hot water. (5) Jahrs. f. prak. Pharm. 1841: 330. (6) Ann. d. Chem. and Pharm. 95: 200. (7) Chem. Centralbl. 1872 :229. nnn Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1027 The veratrine itself was obtained in two isomeric forms, one soluble in water, and the other insoluble. Analysis gave num- bers which correspond best for the formula Cs2 Hes Na O18. Mitchell* in an analysis of both Veratrum viride and Veratrum album found that the amount of alkaloids and resin varied in different lots of the root, due probably to different time of gathering. His quantitative determination of the alkaloids is interesting as compared with similar determinations made by Bullock®, Peugnet and Salzberger. Veratrum viride grains per lb. Mitchell. Bullock. Peugnet. Samples * I. I. L Veratroidine, 183 245 28.6 46.0 43.0 Veridine, 14.3 Jervine, b 16.0 18.2 20.5 7.6." Resin, 115.0 110.0 192.0 Oily matter, 10.0 25.0 50.0 Veratroidine is described as a white powder, uncrystallizable, of a bitter taste, producing a tingling sensation, and occasion- ing a violent irritation of the mucous membrane. It melts at 265° C. and forms salts with acids which are uncrystallizable. Alkalies reprecipitate the free base as a semi-crystallizable substance, The remarkable similarity of this base to cevadine makes it appear necessary that the viride should be re-ex- amined. ° Of equal interest is the quantitative determination of the alkaloids by Mitchell" and Salzberger"! in Veratrum album. Veratrum album, grains per lb. Mitchell. Salzberger. Jervine, 10.0 3 fi Alkaloids soluble in ether, 35.0 Resin, 220.0 Oily matter, 124.5 Protoveritridine, 0.25 Protoveratrine, 0.3 Rubijervine, Quantity undetermined. Pseudojervine, 2 35 Schmidt and Köppen obtained from the crude substance by dissolving in alcohol and allowing to evaporate spontaneously, well crystallized veratrine which corresponds well with the : (8) Pharm. J. Trans. [IIT]. 5: 768, 785, 847, 886. (9) Am. Jour Pharm. 47: 449. (10) Pharm. J. Trans. [III]. 5: 768, 785. (Ul) Inaug. Dis. Erlangen. 1890. (12) Ann. 185: 224. 1028 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. crystals obtained by Merck. Seven analyses of the pure crys- tals gave numbers for the formula Cm Hy NO, Although this formula seems to differ widely from that given by Merck and also by Weigelin, nevertheless when analyses are compared the difference in carbon and hydrogen is only small. Merck", Weigelin™”. Schmidt and Köppen. Analyses I. , OE IV. , ae oe O. 64.73 64.51 64.99 65.00 64.42 64.85 64.39 64.27 64.59 H. 8.84 8.55 8.76 8.7 8.70 8.56 8.81 8.58 8.68 N. 5.5 2.92 2.95 2.82 2 61 1.56 It seems evident from the nitrogen determinations that the substance which Merck had in hand was not identical with that of both Schmidt and Képpen and Weigelin. This is also verified by the salts formed, the salts obtained by Merck being the only ones which were obtained in crystalline form. Schmidt and Köppen stated that when their veratrine was dissolved in acetic acid and treated with ammonia a part was precipitated while a part remained in solution. From this, they concluded with Weigelin that the alkaloid was capable of existing in two isomeric forms. They showed that the soluble form was capable of being changed back to the insoluble form by treating again with acetic acid and carefully neutralizing with dilute ammonia. Finally the identity of the two forms was estab- ished by comparison and analysis of the chlorides ‘and the platinum double salts. The amorphous form melts at 150° to 155° C., while the crystallized form melts at 205° C. Couerbe gave the melting point at 115° C., while Pelletier and Caventou found a melting point of 50° C. Wright and Luff in a series of brilliant experiments on the alkaloids of the Veratra have thrown much light on what was hitherto regarded as a mass of contradictions. A sharp distinction was made between the several different bases which were up to this time known as veratrine. They showed that the substance described by Merck as veratrine is not identical with the veratrine of Couerbe, and that with a single nitrogen determination the analyses correspond, as has already been shown, with the base which Schmidt and Köppen had in hand and to which they ascribed the formula Cs Hyg NOg “ (13) Ann. 95: 200. (14) Chem. Centralbl. 1872: 229. (15) Jour. Chem, Soc. London. 33: 338. Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1029 Ot the three bases which have already been referred to, each has been known as veratrine. That of Couerbe was amorphous, but gave crystalline salts. That of Merck was crystallizable, but the salts noncrystalline save the gold double salt. The third is perhaps an isomeric form of the second. These bases were given the following names for the logical reason which follows: (a) Veratrine, because,the prior right to the name rests with this base and because it forms veratric acid by saponi- fication. (b) Cevadine, because it forms cevadic acid and because it is not identical with the true veratrine. (c) Cevadalline, because it appears to form cevadic acid and because in insolubility in ether it corresponds with the ‘‘sabadilleine” of Weigelin and Dragendorff, which was not ob- served by them. The fact that other experimenters found that the greater part of the alkaloid was crystallizable, was satisfac- torily explained by the fact that a trace of a noncrystalline ~ substance interfered with the crystallizing powers of the base. The method of extraction as given by Wright and Luff,. differed widely from those which had hitherto been used. The omission of alkalies owing to the great danger of saponi- _ fication was of the most importance as partial saponification and therefore considerable loss must have occurred in all of the previous methods, even in the use of ammonia. The method was briefly as follows: The coarsely powdered material was extracted with alcohol acidulated with tartaric acid (1 part of acid to 100 parts of the material) evaporated to a small bulk and the resin removed by the addition of water. The alkaloids were then extracted by repeatedly shaking with ether, the ether being treated with tartaric acid. The tartaric acid was then neutralized with sodium carbonate and shaken with a large quantity of ether. On evaporating the ethereal solution, a substance remained which refused to crystallize. By treating with benzoline a viscid, honey-like mass remained. A part, how- ever, dissolved and appeared as imperfect crystals on evapora- tion. The crystals were removed and purified by redissolving in hot alcohol. The pure crystals melted at 205 C. and were un- doubtedly identical with Merck’s, and Schmidt and Köppen's veratrine. On account of its properties it was called cevadine. It forms cevadic acid by saponification. In order to isolate the second base present as ii as possi- ble of the cevadine was removed and the insoluble portion 1030 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. purified by treating with tartaric acid and sodium carbonate, extracting with ether and finally treating with benzoline. A substance was thus obtained which corresponded with Couerbe’s veratrine. Analyses gave numbers for the formula, Cm H N On. On a saponification with alcoholic sodium hydroxide the base breaks up into veratric acid (dimethylprotocatechuic acid) Co Hy O,, and a base resembling closely cevine, Cog Hy N O. Cz; Hu N Ou + He O = Cy Hy O. + C Hy N Og. In their examination of crystallized veratrine Wright & Luff showed that it was a distinct alkaloid, that it probably did not exist in an isomeric form; that it yielded cevadic acid and a new base which they named cevine, by treating with alcoholic pot- assium hydroxide or heating in a closed tube at 200°C. By a series of analyses they arrived at the formula C Hy N Og and represented the saponification by the following reaction: C Hy N Op + H O = Cs Hg O: + Cx; Hyg N O. Although the base cevine was not studied, yet the derivatives. of cevadine itself were made and analyzed, which leaves no chance for doubt as to the correct conclusion. It therefore appears that the veratrineof Merck and Schmidt and Köppen was not veratrine at all but cevadine which upon saponification yields cevine and cevadic acid. A comparison of analyses will serve to show their identity. Calculated for Merck. Schmidt & Köppen. Wright & Luff. ‘Cx Hyg N Og C—64.97 64.81 64.63 64.72 He 8.29 8.71 8.62 8.57 NN 2.87 5.50 2.66 2.31 Gol d in goldsalt 21.08 21.01 21.09 21.04 The above numbers are the mean of several analyses with the exception of the nitrogen determination by Merck which is undoubtedly the result of an error. ‘er. The structure of cevadine is still a mystery. It is known, however, that there is one hydroxyl group present, and from the succeeding experiments one methoxyl group. Later Wright! made a careful estimation of all the alkaloids present in both Veratrum album and Veratrum viride. The re- sults showed that the total amount of alkaloidal matter in FJ. viride was only about one-fifth of that present in V. album. (16) Journ. Chem. Soc. 35: 421. ee — P Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1031 The following gives the number of grams per kilogram of roots: Alkaloid. Veratrum album 1 viride. Jervine, 1.3 gr. 0.2 Pseudojervine, 0.4 0.15 a as ag 0.25 0.2 eratralbine, 2.2 trace Veratrine, 0.05 trace Cevadine — 43 Bossetti"’, in a Aa of veratrine, found that it existed in two isomeric forms—a crystalline and anon-crystalline. The crystalline he showed to be identical with cevadine, while the soluble form was regarded as veratridine. By treating these ‘two forms with alcoholic barium hydroxide, the crystallized ‘form broke down into angelic acid and cevidine, OC Hyg NO + 2H, O = Cs Hs O: + Cx H NO while the amorphous broke down into veratric acid and vera- troine, 2 Cm Hyg NOD + 2H2O = Cy Hy Os + Cys Hoo No Oye. Ahrens, in an examination of cevadine or crystallized vera- trine, obtained both cevadic or tiglic acid and angelic acid by treating the alkaloid with alkalies. With alcoholic potassium hydroxide tiglic acid was formed, but with alcoholic barium hydroxide angelic acid was liberated. Tiglic acid was also ob- tained by treatirg with concentrated hydrochloric acid. Both cevine and cevidine were examined as well as the isomeric forms” of the base itself. Two bromine compounds were prepared. The tetra-com- pound was made by treating with excess of bromine water. Analysis gave numbers for the formula 3 CHa NO, Bry, while the second, the dibromide, was obtained by treating the tetrabromide with very dilute potassium hydroxide. Analysis gave the formula CHN O Bry . Various oxidizing reagents were tried upon the base without satisfactory results. Acetaldehyde and carbon monoxide were obtained with chromic acid and acetic acid with potassium per- 4 manganate. (17) Arch. Pharm. 1883: 82. (18s) Ber. 23: 2700. (19) Ann. 185: 224. - 1082 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Of special interest is the result of adry distillation of the alkaloid. At 197-200 C. a colorless acid was obtained which was identified as tiglic acid. At the same time a base was obtained which was identified as B picoline by comparing with the same base obtained from strychnine. The formation of a pyridine derivative by destructive istil- lation undoubtedly indicates the presence of that base in the natural alkaloid, and helps materially toward 0 determina- tion of the structural formula. Salzberger,“ in an exhaustive examination of Veratrum - album, made use of two methods of extraction, one he called the ‘‘barium method,” and the other the metaphosphorie method.” The phosphoric acid method proved best, the use of barium hydroxide undoubtedly producing a partial saponifica- tion of the alkaloid. From the crude material he isolated the following bases: Protoveratrine, Cze Hs; NOy Protoveratridine, Ces Hy, NO; Pseudojervine, Os Hy NO; Jervine, Cog Hg; NO; Rubijervine, Cos, Hyg NO: + H: O. There is a remarkable resemblance between protoveratrine and cevadine and protoveratridine and cevidine. A brief com- parison will show that these might easily be taken for one another: Cevadine, ‘Czo Hyg NO, Protoveratrine, Cg. Hs; NOy Cevidine, Cog Hy; NOs Protoveratridine, Co; Hy NO. From the above formulas, and from a remarkable resemblance in general properties, it seems necessary that these’ bases should be again studied and compared. A careful comparison of cevadine with the veratrine of Merck and Schmidt and Köppen has shown that they are the same substance. While historically, and for reasons already given, cevadine should take precedence, nevertheless, from the fact that the cevadine is the common veratrine alkaloid used at present in pharmacy, it seems best to retain the name which associates the alkaloid with the genus of plants from which it is obtained. The name veratrine has therefore been retained in the following experiments. (20) Inaug. Dis. Erlangen 1890: Arch. Pharm. 238: 230. Pe a ee Be ee ee es ea aa nenne mkforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1033 EXPERIMENTAL PART. 1 5 The veratine on which the following experiments have been made is of a light gray color and appears, when highly magnified, as imperfect granular crystals. It is slightly sol- uble in water, very soluble in methyl, ethyl and amy] alcohols, in ether, acetone, chloroform and carbon disulphide. It appears, upon the ant of any of these solutions, as a light-brown varnish. On stirring this varnish like mass ‘with water, it changes fo a granular semi-erystalline mass. It refused to crystallize from alcohol. The powdered form has a peculiar bitter, rasping taste, producing a certain numbness of the e if taken in very small quantities. This peculiarity readily distinguishes it from any of the other alkaloids. It is a violent'sternutatory, producing intense irritation of the nasal mucous membrane. It retards the action of the heart even when taken in small quantities. It givesa slightly alkaline reaction, which is intensified when the alkaloid is dissolved in alcohol. It gives with dilute nitric acid a pale yellow solution; with con- centrated nitric acid a brown color and a strong odor of acetic acid. With concentrated sulphuric acid it produces an orange red color, which, on standing for some time, becomes fluores- » . cent; with a great excess of acid, it becomes intensely red in transmitted light. With concentrated hydrochloric acid, it produces a blood red color immediately which seems to be per- manent. It changes, however, to a dark brown color on heat- ing. If the red solution from the hydrochloric acid is rendered slightly alkaline with ammonia, the color changes to a dirty green even when the alkaloid is present in very small quanti- ties. The melting point after repurifying was 146-148° C. Tn order to determine, whether or not the substance in hand was identical with that described by Merck and Ahrens anal- yses of the free base were made together with the es double- Salt. No reference was made by the above named investigators to the water of crystallization. Three determinations were made, the mean of which corresponded for one molecule of Water. I. 2101 grm. of alkaloid dried at 100102 lost. 0. 0081 H. 0 . 3108 . * ae ‘ “ a te 1 . 0.0103 „ III. 512 “ec ee „* ao | se “ec a ae ....0.0164 1 * Calculated for Found C32 Ho NO, He O. I. II. III. H O= 3.00. 3.33 3.31 3.2 1084 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES, * > y Combustions of the dried substance gave the following: ¢ I. 0.1983 grms. dried sub. gave. . 0. 472 CO, and 0.1441 Hy 0.5 II. 0. 2000 e 0.4874 and 0.1513 Calculated for Found x Cie Hyp NOD I. IL * oy C= 64.96 64.8 64.53 H= 8.29 8.4 8.16 ö . The purity of the substances was further proved by ' properties and the melting point ci the gold double-salt which melts according to Merck and Ahrens at 178°—180°. T crystallized double salt was found to have a melting Point (uncorr.) of 178 182. The melting point of the base i not given by the above mentioned investigators. A gold * termination gave the following results: ; = 2462 gr. dried salt gave 0.05171 Au. f Calculated for Found O22 Hy NO, HCl: Au Cl, - Au= 21.08 21.00 . METHOXYL DETERMINATION. Wright and Luff"! in their work on the alkaloids of the £3 sabadilla stated that cevadine (which is undoubtedly iden- 4a tical with the Merck veratrine) contained one hydroxyl group. They verified the assumption by the introduction of a benzoyl group, forming a monobenzoyl veratrine C His (Cr Hs O) NO The presence of tigic acid. B methylpropionic acid. was also indicated by its formation when the base was heated with water at 200°. They therefore ascribed to the base the fol- lowing crude formula * aa 1 2 OH On His NOs O00 (CH; )—CH—CH;. It would appear from this formula that the alkaloid contains no methoxyl group, although no record of such a determination has been given. In order to determine definitely the presence or absence of the methoxyl group, several analyses were made by the Zeizel method with the following results: I. .2461 grams of dried sub. gave 0.0698 Ag I. II. .2021 grams of dried sub. gave 0.0636 Ag! *— ˙ . 2 Calculated for Found C31 Hy, NOs (OCH; ), 8 8 II. OCH; 4. 19 Us! Se "yp Shep (21) Journal of the Chem. Society. 33: 338. Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1035 THE IODIDES OF VERATRINE. As stated by Ahrens veratrine absorbs bromine readily, forming a tetrabromide Ci Hyg NO Bry It was prepared by triturating veratrine with strong bromine water, when a yellow powder was formed which was purified by filtering and washing with warm water. It proved to be insoluble in water but readily soluble in alcohol, ether, chloro- form and acetone. On treating the tetrabromide with dilute potassium hydroxide, two bromine atoms were readily removed forming a light yellow dibromide Ci Hyg NO) Bro. Reference is also made to an iodide of veratrine® which was prepared by the action of iodine on a salt of veratrine. The formula given was Cm Hs, No O; HI Veratrine letraiodide, Cs. Hig NOs I. + 3H. O. A careful examination showed that iodine also combined readily with veratrine forming a series of compounds which in many respects resembled the bromides. By triturating vera- trine witha strong alcoholic solution of iodine, a reddish brown substance was formed which upon examination appeared to be a mixture of several substances. This was also indicated by the varying melting point. A great excess of iodine was then added and the ‘substance allowed to stand for several days when a beautiful light red crystalline substance was formed with a melting point of 129°-130°. It is very soluble in methyl and ethyl alcohol forming upon evaporation a dark brown waxy mass. It is soluble in acetone, forming a wax which upon standing becomes a dark red powder. It is insol- uble in ether, benzole and water. By treating with sulphurous acid, the red color disappeared and a light yellow powder is formed which was afterward identified as the monoiodide. With dilute ammonia the same substance is formed but, with concentrated ammonia, a white, gelatinous substance is formed with some of the properties of the free base. An examination showed it to be different from the free alkaloid, although all of the iodine had been removed. Great difficulty was experienced in the determination of water of crystallization. It was found after several determinations, (23) Ber. 23: 2700. (22) Arch. Pharm [III], 5: 289. 1036 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. that four hours drying at 100°-102° was necessary to remove the three molecules of water present. It was also found that by drying at 104°-106° some of the iodine was driven off. This explained the difficulty in obtaining satisfactory results in the early analysis. A careful determination of moisture was made raising the temperature gradually to 114°, with the following results: 2. 862 grm. substance dried at 100° for 2 hours, lost....0.082 ** 100-102° for 2 hours lost 0.118 “sé ae sé sé oe 105-110 se 4 sé sé se sé es “é 105-110 constant “é 4 sé +6 sé sé ae 110-112 te 3 * ‘sé se ae se se sé 112-112 12 2 3 ae oe se ‘e se se 112 4114 2 wet * 6 The substance showed decided indications of decomposition at 112-114°, and at 120° began to frit, changing to an almost black waxy mass. As will be seen from the ‘above numbers, the substance dried to constant weight at 100° loses three moe cules of water. 2.362 dried at 100° lost 0.118 water 6 90 se i 0 se 100-102 4 * 0.119 6 90 sé sé ** 100-104 +e se se 0.152 4s a 0 * * 100-104 +s se é 0.179 “6 a se sé + 100-105 sé sé + 0.190 4s se * 0 0 100-105 sé +e sé 0.224 sé se se te sé 100-105 sé sé ae 0.224 “sé ss ; se sé se 102-106 oe se sé 0.240 * * * sé +s 102-106 sé * sé 0.247 “6 1 sé sé ‘ se 104-107 te * 0 0.276 a sé ss 4 0 104-107 sé 2 se 0.299 sé ‘6 0 0 sé 105-108 * oe. se 0.327 sé sé se ie sé 105-109 se sé se 0.341 0.382 0.382 0.389 0.402 0. 5 > Calculated for f Cze Hy NOD I 3H: O Found , 3 H2 O—4.68 4.99 4 It was found, on examination, that the loss which occurred by heating above 102° was due to iodine, and that by drying at 110° to constant weight one-fourth - the iodine could be driven off. ; 2.362 grm. substance dried to constant weight at 110° lost 0.382 I+ H20. . Calculated for r Os ts Eee eeeM Found I+3H,0=15.7 16.17 An attempt to remove another atom of iodine was unsuccess- ful, as is indicated by the above experiment, although the loss _Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1037 which occurred between 110-114° was due to the liberation of iodine. An analysis of the substance dried at 100° to constant weight was made with the following results: 2231 grms. of dried iodide gave .2834 grms. CO: and .0912 H, O Calculated for CyeoHygNOy I. Found 6834.94 24.64 H 4.45 4.9 Veratrine triiodide Cs, Hy NOg Iz. The red iodide dried at 110° to constant weight became a dark brown amorphous powder which showed no signs of crystallization on treating with water, It is insoluble in ether and much less soluble in methyl and ethyl alcohol than the tetraiodide. It melts at 1365138“. Analyses gave the following results: I. .2084 grams of sub. gave . 2938 grms. CO, and .1152 H:. O. II. .1945 grams of sub. gave, .1405 grms. Ag I. Calculated for Found Ca Hyg NO I3 I. II. O = 39.5 39.37 H= 6.36 6.28 ge 1239.2 38.6 While it was evident that more than one-fourth of the iodine could be driven off by drying, repeated attempts to obtain the diiodide were unsuccessful. Veratrine monoiodide Cz: Hy NOy I. By treating the tetra- iodide with dilute ammonia and allowing to stand for several hours in a warm place, the bright red color disappeared and a light yellow granular substance was formed. It proved to be insoluble in water, ether and chloroform, but very soluble in methyl and ethyl alcohols. A bright yellow powder is formed on evaporating off the alcohol. It does not form the waxy mass which characterizes the tetraiodide. It was obtained from a dilute alcoholic solution as a fine crystalline powder with a melting point of 212°-214°. It contains two molecules of water which were removed by drying at 100°. 3782 grm. of substance dried at 100° lost 0.018. H: O. Calculated for Found Cie Hy NO, IT 2Hz O. : 2H, O=4.77 4.76 1088 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. An analysis gave the following: 0.1763 grms of the dried sub. gave 0.0588 Ag J. Calculated for Found CI Hyg NO I. 117.68 17.87 On digesting with strong ammonia for a short time the iodide was completely removed, and a white insoluble gelatinous sub- stance was formed which at first was regarded as the free alka- loid. An examination showed that it differed from veratrine in general appearance and solubility. It melted at 189°. OTHER COMPOUNDS. 0 ( Oye Hy NO, 5 Chloralhydroveratrine 0 Ol, OH G (G. Hf 70 As stated by Wright and Luff veratrine heated at 100° with twice its weight of benzoic anhydride, is converted into a monobenzoylveratrine Cx Hyg (Or Hs O) NOD The formation of this compound proved the presence of one hydroxyl group. The writer repeated the experiment in order to determine whether or not more than one hydroxyl group ex- isted in the alkaloid. Theimpossibility of making more than the mono derivative was sufficient evidence that but one group ex- isted. It was found, however, that this group was so loosely held that it could be replaced by treating with almost any anhy- dride. Chloral was found to react vigorously on the alkaloid, producing a sort of effervescence. With excess of chloral the al- kaloid dissolves. With a smaller quantity a waxy mass is formed which readily changes to a creamy white granular powder. This powder was washed thoroughly with ether to remove the free chloral. The substance in the pure state was almost white and crystalline. A determination showed the reaction to be quantitative. Five grams of the veratrine gave6.1 grams of the pure chloral compound. It is insoluble in ether and chloro- form, but very soluble in water and alcohol. It melts at 220°. — In its physiological properties it resembles veratrine. It is a most powerful sternutatory, producing the most violent irrita- tion of the nasal mucous membrane. In the most minute quan- tities it effects the eyes, causing intense pain and contracting the pupil. It is a remarkable local irritant. Applied to the moistened skin and rubbed it produces blisters. It is readily — decomposed by alkalies. Ammonia decomposes it forming chloral hydrate and veratrine. It is hygroscopic, taking on two — (24) Journ. Chem. Soe. 32: 351. . 8 Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1039 molecules of water if exposed to the air for some time. The water can readily be removed by drying at 100 Analysis gave the following numbers: I. .2394 grms. of dried substance gave .5280 CO, and. 1530 H: O. Il. 1692 5 10 0502 Ag Cl. ' . Calculated for Found Ol CH (OCg2 Hyg NOs )2 I II C= 60.38 60.2 H= 7.38 7 7.1 Cl= 8.2 7.35 The alkaloid formed by the action of ammonia upon the sub- stance was carefully examined in the hope of finding the isomeric base of Schmidt and Köppen. Although the base seemed to have a few different properties from the original veratrine, the gold double salt had exactly the same properties and melting point of the original gold salt. Veratrine methyliodide, Cx Hy NOs: CHI. From the re- semblance of veratrine to the alkaloids narcotine and narceine, it was believed that it would form a compound with methyl iodide. It was found, on treating the base with excess of methyl iodide, that the substance readily dissolved with the exception of a very small quantity of gelatinous substance, which was found to be ah impurity. In allowing the filtered solution to stand for some hours, or by heating on a water bath with a reflux condenser, the whole of the base precipitated out as a solid, yellow, crystalline mass. The reaction was com- plete at the end of an hour on the water bath, but it required several days at the. ordinary temperature to completely con- vert it into the iodide. Excess of the methyl iodide was then evaporated off and the veratrine compound treated with ether to remove any trace of the unchanged alkaloid. The iodide thus obtained was a light yellow crystalline powder, insoluble in ether and chloroform, and soluble in methyl and ethyl alco- hols. It is soluble in hot water, from which it can be obtained as an almost white crystalline powder. It melts at 210°-212° with apparent decomposition. It contains 1.5 molecules of water of crystallization which can be removed by drying at 100°. I. 0.38547 grms. dried to constant weight at 100° lost .0132 | a ew Ss Blair 3 sb W : Calculated for Found C3s Hao NO a" CH; I+15 He O. ix II. 13 Hz O— 3.55 3.72 3.85 1040 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Analysis gave the following numbers: 1, .2181 grms. of dried racers gave .4243 CO, and .1440 H, O. c „0638 Ag I. Calculated for Found Ca Hyg NOD CH; I. * II. O = 54.03 54.28 1 H 7.1 7.35 117.32 16.94 Veratrine methylhydroxide, Cn Hy NO. OCH, OH. It was found that the iodine in the veratrine methyliodide could be removed by treating with sodium or potassium hydroxide. The iodide was dissolved in water and dilute sodium hydroxide cautiously added. The solution soon began to turn brown and after several hours a complete decomposition had taken place. Examination showed that two distinct substances had been formed, one, a waxy substance which refused to crystallize and acrystalline substance which was sparingly soluble in water. The reaction seemed deep seated but is probably closely asso- ciated with that given by Wright in the preparation of cevine by saponification. A solution of the methyliodide was again treated with freshly precipitated silver oxide and warmed. It was found that above 45° the solution again turned brown, indicating de- composition. The experiment was repeated without warming the solution. Five grams of the methyliodide were placed in a shaking flask with 200 cc of water, an excess of silver oxide added and shaken for 12 hours at the ordinary temperature. At the end of that time a reaction seemed to be complete. The silver iodide and excess of silver oxide were removed by filtra- tion. An attempt to concentrate a part of the clear solution by evaporating on a water bath proved unsuccessful, for between 40° and 65° decomposition began and in a half hour the whole solution became almost black. A second portion of the clear solution was evaporated at the ordinary temperature. At the end of three days, a residue was obtained as a white granular powder. The substance proved to be exceedingly unstable, turning gray and finally brown on gently warming. It is soluble in water, methyl and ethyl alco- hols and in acetone; slightly soluble in ether and chloroform. — It differs materially from veratrine. It is a non-sternutatory — and appears to be physiologically inactive, It changes to a brown mass between 80° and 90° but does not finally melt until the temperature is raised to 188-190°. It contains water of — 8 = i. Frankforter : THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1041 crystallization which was removed by heating in an air bath at 60° for two hours. More satisfactory results however were obtained by drying over sulphuric acid in vacuo. .8958 grms. dried to constant weight lost 0.0320, Calculated for Found C32 Hy NOCH OH+2H, O. 3H2 O=8.2 8.09 2022 grms. of the dried substance gave 4828 CO; and 1557 H, O Calculated for Found O2 Hs NO, rn CH; . C=65.45 65.13 H= 8.43 8.01 The apparent change which took place in the substance on drying is evidently deep seated. The white granular substance on drying, became a fine light gray amorphous powder which is only slightly soluble in water. These changes, together with the comparative ease with which the substance decom- poses would indicate that a part of the water exists as water of constitution. This supposition is admirably borne out by the analyses. Veratrine methylhydroxyhydrochloride, Cz Hy NOs CH; OH H Cl. Veratrine methylhydroxide is very soluble in acids and readily decomposed by strong acids. Sulphuric acid decom- poses it changing first to a bright red color, and finally, with decomposition to a black, tar-like mass. Hydrochloric acid gives a red color if the acid is strong. Very dilute acid dis- solves it, leaving a perfectly clear solution. If this clear solu- tion is allowed to evaporate spontaneously, a light gray gran- ular powder is formed. It is soluble in water, and ean be obtained by spontaneous evaporation. It is soluble in methyl and ethyl alcohols. It forms a light, amber-colored varnish on evaporating off the alcohol. Itis very unstable, decomposing below 100°. It seemed to change upon standing over sulphuric acid for some time. .2065 grams of substance dried over sulphuric acid gave .4444 CO, and .1311 Hy O Calculated for C32 Hy NOD; CH; OH H Cl Found C—60.00 58.67 . H= 8.24 6.6 It is evident that the water of constitution is held more firm- ly here than in the free base. s 7 = 1042 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Gold double salt (Cy Hy N CH; OH’ HCl) Au Cl. Anat- tempt to make the gold double salt from the hydrochloride did not prove suécessful. A decomposition took place on adding the gold chloride, apparently caused By excess of acid. A better method was found by treating the methyl hydroxide with gold chloride which had been rendered slightly acid with hydrochloric acid. A beautiful lemon yellow crystalline pow- der was formed. It was filtered off, washed with hot water and dried on an unglazed porcelain plate. The substance thus purified melted at 149°. It is soluble in alcohol but sparingly soluble in water, ether and chloroform. It is comparatively stable, remaining unchanged at 110°. A determination of water of crystallization was not made. A gold determination gave the following: 1716 grams of the dried salt gave 0.0362, Au. Calculated for (Oi Ayo wre CH; OH’ HCl) Au Cl, Found Au=21. 41 21.09 Veratrine ethylbromide O Hy VOD H Br. Veratrine dis- solves readily in ethyl bromide, and combines slowly to form the veratine bromide. It was found that heating on a water bath with reflux condenser for six hours was necessary to con- vert it all into the ethyl compound. At the end of the reaction the excess of ethyl bromide was evaporated off, leaving the veratrine ethyliodide as a light yellow amorphous mass. By treating with water and stirring for some time, the substance was obtained in crystalline form. It is sparingly soluble in water, but readily soluble in methyl and ethyl alcohols. It de- composes readily. It shows signs of decomposition at 60°, and at 100° it seems completely changed. It does not finally melt, however, until a temperature of 160° is reached. The sub- stance purified by boiling water was dried and analyzed. The result showed that a decomposition had taken place and that a tetrabromide of veratrine was formed. The ethylene odor was noticed in the boiling. Analysis of the substance thus treated with water gave the following numbers: I .2270 grms. of dried substance gave .4591 CO, and 1603 Hz O II .2228 x 0200 Ag Br. Calculated for Found C32 Hyg NOg Bry L C= 42.15 42.55 H— 5.38 7.84 Br= 35.06 38.73 e mme mm Frankforter: THE ALKALOIDS OF VERATRUM. 1043 Veratrine allyliodide Cπ Hig NOs: C; Hs I. By digesting vera- trine with allyliodide on a water bath for several hours, a solid but slightly waxy looking substance was formed. The excess of allyliodide was removed and the veratrine compound washed thoroughly with ether. The substance thus purified appeared partially crystalline but changed on standing in the air toa semi-waxy mass. Exposed for some time to the air or by treating with a small quantity of water and stirring, the sub- stance again becomes granular. The substance was finally purified by dissolving in a small quantity of alcohol and pre- cipitating with ether. The pure iodide is an almost white . crystalline powder. It is soluble in ethyl and methyl alcohols and acetone. It melts at 235°-236°. It contains one molecule of water which can be removed by drying at 100°. I. .1990 grms of the dried sub. gave 0.4000 CO, and .1202 H O II. 80323 15 % e 0.0084 Ag I. Calculated for Found O Hyg NOg * C3 Hs I I II O 556.29 54.81 H 7.1 6.71 116.73 17.01 An attempt to obtain the free base by shaking with silver oxide was unsuccessful. The solution turned brown at the ordinary temperature giving off the order of allylalcohol. The structural formula for veratrine is still a mystery. From the odor of picoline by a destructive distillation and isolation of B picoline by Ahrens* it is evident that veratrine is a pyri- dine derivative,resembling in many respects nicotine. Whether both cevadic and tiglic acids are present remains for future experiments to determine. The work of Schmidt and Köppen indicates the presence of both acids while the careful researches of Wright and Luff would indicate that these isomeric acids were converted into each other by special reagents. Assuming that but one acid is present the following formula may be as- signed to veratrine: OH Ces Hay Os (agen en CH; N Hz Ca Experiments are being conducted at present along this line with the hope of throwing more light on the structure of this important compound. (25) Ber. 23: 2700. bu. be aia ehihetly the dn Za del wa 1 A rose es fini © resin 6571. (on N 408850 77 7 5 Ulle gs ein Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE XL. PLATE XLI. — = 8 all — —. „ Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE XTM. ACROSTICHUM HELLERI UNDERW. 75 ae 2 „ Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE MLM. GYMNOGRAMMA SADLERIOIDES UNDERW. PLATE XLIV. SYNTHERISMA HELLERI NASH. Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE XLV. ASTELIA MENZIESIANA SM. PLATE XLVI PIPTURUS KAUAIENSIS HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE XLVI. PIPTURUS RUBER HELLER. Bulletin No 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May., 1897 TL III x © 8 8 PLATE XLVII. PELEA CRUCIATA HELLER. Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. RON adel. PLATE XL. PELEA MICROCARPA HELLER. 7 5 935 5 Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. t+ J * ö \ Sh Ye = ) Y/Y DNS PLATE L. EUPHORBIA ATROCOCCA HELLER. Ay r : Pa . Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LI. EUPHORBIA RIVULARIS HELLER. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. 7 PLATE LI. EUPHORBIA SPARSIFLORA HELLER. ; Bulletin No. 9. Bulletin No. 9g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE Lilt, Hisiscus WAIMEAE HELLER. PLATE LIV. ISODENDRION SUBSESSILIFOLIUM HELLER. PLATE LY. NANI(A) PUMILA HELLER. ome fy, Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LVI. NANI(A) TREMULOIDES HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LVU. LYSIMACHIOPSIS DAPHNOIDES (A. GRAY) HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LVill. LYSIMACHIOPSIS HILLEBRANDII (HOOK.) HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LIX. © a. nN in CYRTANDRA GAYANA HELLER. 25 oe KEK del PLATE LX. GOULDIA ELONGATA HELLER. Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LXI. GOULDIA SAMBUCINA HELLER. 3 . Bulle tin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. BGM adel. EG KAA PLATE LXill. STRAUSSIA PSYCHOTRIOIDES HELLER. Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897 8 — Day PLATE LXIV. CYANEA CORIACEA (A. GRAY) HILLEBR. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. SON ay PLATE LXV. CYANEA SPATHULATA (HILLEBR.) HELLER. Bulletin No 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. ECH. del. PLATE LXVI. CYANEA SYLVESTRIS HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. — — — — — os ws f= N NAY N SIMA, — eae PLATE LXVI. LOBELIA TORTUOSA HELLER. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. HAWAII} 3 PLATE LXVII. Map of the Hawaiian Islands, showing the relative position of the different inhabited islands. 5 . . 9 * 1 50 J Lew 2 8 * 1 — a Qi 7 —＋ N — Wine a aS W x AY Se ue * . = ~~ ae os ye — — ** ea = *. — — N 2 — — * = 2 * 8 whe : — — <4 a he + ¢ * ot < Sy — OAHU. o — Map of the islands of Oahu and Kauai. The dotted lines show PLATE LXIX. the places explored. TU BOTANICAL S MINNESOTA Bulletin No. 9. PLATE LXX. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL PLATE LXX * 6 8 1 x ' : * + j i — * * N . ‘ * * ~ 4 Pes * i, a 7 2 > 7 5 5 2 n Ces . 3 9. Bulletin No Bulletin No 9. PLATE LXX Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LXXIV. Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES PLATE LXXV. 1597. ES. May, STUD! ' — MINNESOTA BOTANICA Bulletin No. 9. PLATE LXXVI. /. 2» +: one at COE ae 1 — N ft N 7 May, 189 Bulletin No.9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. PLATE LXXVII. 4 VAL BOTANI( MINNESOTA Bulletin No. 9. E LXXV PLAT Bulletin No. g. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. May, 1897. PLATE LXXIX Bulletin No. 9. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUD PLATE LXXX 1 — 7 22 „„ SW * : govisod |ivy - > * 4g ‘Aew ‘“S3IGNLS IVOINVLOS VLOSINNIW "6 ‘ON ugeſng Ii NOSM I SGOOM AH. HO AVN A JOILDOT O UDIPRUDD FY) | fo sptogay ap ur 7 ah AO AAvII Saen a: a, wie aweor aes 0 1 1 * U 2SNUAA YAL. . 8 Fei eee. = ONVYD Kaepuneg [eveirusdpuy Ava @1Vv4A4inia : A * ‘ #2. oe oe — b INDEX OF PLANT NAMES. Accepted names are in Roman. Synonyms are ia italics. A er 5 S ‘Gi . 08, ä —— eet meee W d e a . 7 . „„ „ „ „„ „ —— 32 3 Water e ES — ret e — ** ——spicatum Lax. „ * 9 — tes viridiflora (RAr.) Eaton millefoliam . 57, DRC ans os monophy la 5 ichs) Na —— — ~ 5 3 Lenden aekeias (Nort) Woop... 5 i (Aen.) bol. —— te eee ee ee. settee 2 * Acorus calamus I . . . Bal. ae . ä W mee eee — 2 ee 2 A 1 REV... crostalagmus CORDA..... PTR Re ee eee ee —U— —2ã * —reticul 8 : crathectum Puevss.. = 8 —— ́ↄ eee —ͤ—ͤ—̃ 2 — 2 ů— — 2 G— œä—ͥꝓ—ä! 2 eee eee re ]] — — ——cony zoides ee ‘jn glauca (Ponsit) Canan * teria Auer. ae 8 & G.) Burr. a ew —— — Agropyrou AERT ——caninum Linn.) BEAuy ..... 106, —caninum ( LINN.) Beage forma violacescens —caninum (L) —— K Bonucr Var. unilaterale Si ap +E ISN. & S. var. o ——dasystachyum (Hook Sens. ——dasytachyum VASEY ..... —glaucum (Desr.) R. and S. var 8 As and! 105, ——repens AUCT. Plun repens(L.) BEAUV............ 109, —repens L.] Beauv. forme arls- 1 as * ——repens ) Beauv. var. glau- cum (Desr ) SCRIB............. ——tenerum VASEY..105, 108, 100, 964, 970, 982, —unilaterale Beavv. ........ —violaceum 1 — ‘Lanae... ——violaceum (HORNeM.) LANGE, forma caninoides Rax. 17. ——violaceum (Homann. ) — 2 „ . 92, 991, A 970, 974, 975, forte it B. S. P —hiemalis (WALT) B. S. P. 070. . 489. 1011, 1016, ——perennans (Ware) * FN — L. 5 : — ä —˖ä 2 ä — 2 Alectoris. = —jubata 10 Teck. v var. “chalybei- formis ACH „ Aloerites oa... —moluceana (L.) WILLD Alisma plantago-aquatica L. Alismaceae Allionia . a =eiragte. PURSE... + scccdsseaccs -—nyctaginea MIcax. 539, 964, Allium reticulum Dom: —stellatum KER. —tricoceum Lt ——tricoceum SOLAND pt; |) peepee 8 —incana 2 5 ‘WILLD —rugosa (ERHRAR.) Koca.. 3 viridis (CHAIX.) sande Be ae SE 537, Alopecurus.. „„ ——geniculatus L. —-geniculatus L. var. fulvus (J. E. SMITH) SCRIB G —y—ͤ— 2 G—— U —— eee see eee SSE & eect 8 2 ss _ 25 5 . & » PU PRESEN E, —fluviatile Scn.. 202, —irriguum (Hoox. & ‘Wittn) Lesa. & JAMES............. Seana var. spinifolium.. . —kochii Sen —ͤ— 2 7* —minutissimum LESO. & JAMEs.. ——noterophilum ce & LRS. 208. —-orthocladon L. and J.. —riparium Sao... —serpens SCH............. 293, 582, —-varium LINDE... Ambrosia 1013. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL SAU DIES. . Sage L. i. 25 —_ 1016 —-psilostachya DO. 571, 965, 967, 1016, A . eset 978. — canadensis (L. 3 ee Amerosporium ese ak Ammania coccinea ROTTB............. Amo he canescens POnaa.. 8 ro. cacaes — ye L. forma albiflora Amphispo tum versicolor FRIES......... übe —circinalis RABENH..... n One, 5 Anacardiaceae... oust hase wash woe Anacharis......... S A as oi diese ccesdecwevaes 3 arvensis ....... 6 Anaphalis margaritacea.. . Andreaea petrophila = ee Ss 739, Niro. Ä 5, —-polifolia L.. n e oe 8 1 RETZ........-.. contortus L.. ite Lp en var. avenaceus (Micnx.) 3 i —-scoparius MICHX................. Anemone . —canadensis L............ aw — cylindrica A. G — hirsutissima Fe 7 — ) Bach —quinquefolia L 33, —-virginiana sek Aneura palmata.. Set eee A um sinuosum GRE. ö DD Anoectochilus sandwicensia Lid. Anogra pallida — Anomodon attenuat os HAT... — obtusifollus ——— ſ́MV̈⁰ 2 “* -—rostratus e . Antenne ria. — itacea 11 — e ) a Anthoceros,............ « bes —— randie.. „„ „„ — aevis 3 — 9＋5⁊2uia, „„ Anthosachne — ousieube 5 Antidesma L.... eee ee —plutyphyllum Main. Aphanizomenon. do cdg badawedauns — aquae RALFS....... (fas. Sas pak lobe (Noun) — repens Hann eee 3 Aphandpappus zee es e ELLE. — nuttalltt WALP....... Aplocystis — NA Apionema ODOCAA, 6.6006 „ ese. ee Nee 329 eee — suleata,. , 22 apios (I. l. Apium petroselinum I. een ewer „„ ARO... —— ee ä 23 2 ä 22 *** post as ae eee ween FRE eee Aquilegia canadensis L...... 188 2 (Torr —slabra (0) nn — hirsuta (L.) Scor .--. ‘644, 956, 970. —lyrata L ů— P Ee eee ee Arachnoidiscus — ‘ehrenbergil and * . Aralia bispida 'V —nud —— wenn ä — icaulis 2 D 1 556, 965, — 3 e e (L.) Spreng..558, 965, 966, F — ee — e ů—ͤ P! — MASS 8 —— —decipiens BER. —jͤ— —ͤ—ͤ— wwe —ͤ— —1ů —-inearnata PERS.............. och gl —inermis K GAP ee insign KALCHB. 8 —-intricata Ros 2 —irregularig Rac i 2 —lateritia DRB arr. —raciborskii B ä— — sep! 33: — 1 . e 1 C 8 4477 0 — a N | =. sae 1 ¥ : , We 4 Arethusa bulbosa L.. 535 Argemone mexicana. . 766 e ith 1 pace bs 1 Ariettnum americanum BECK. 5 150 436 —triphyiium (L Tore........ 531, 749 . pest en INGELM.......-.- — 7 et iis 916. 083, 984, 990,991, 993 eee e dee Sig py pk pea — Cn ensis Deaudata Mionx..57, 15 9. 9, —dracunculoides Ponsa. nb Spt Regs —frigida WILL ůůùh ... ——glauca Pl —gnaphalodes Nur n . eR —lecideella 83 n - —radiata (PERS.) Tu. Fr. Arthrobotrys COuhp A... Arthrobotrytae CORDA................ robotryum On 8 —compositum (ELL.) P. und C.... ee ingens boxe} P. and O..... pubescens (O. and E.) P. and C. Arthrodesmus incus (BIEB.) HASS Arthrosporium SACC. ....... . * ot RP r . 2 L. . N. exalta —.— th a = i r Tops. 9 94, 98, ae N A Gey 3 — seausesens 283 333888 8888888888888 INDEX. 1888888288883 2223223 f Aspid 1 817 5 Asplenium E. r Poca WOR * SPREN is, tis 2. 257 Q asp — PRENG. —cicutarium ....... . 776 3 6 773 —cuneatu Sa 3 —deparioides BRACK.....- . 73, 778 Dashartolces BRAOK var = —erectum BOuBr ... .. 13 8 * — var. sub-bipin- 2 (L.) BERNE —-furcatum THUNB. —horridum Kaul. —-horridum KAULx. var... ——luciaum Foks r —monanthemum ones, ——monanthes L. —nidus L )). normale Dos. —ç ᷣ— eee we enee ——resectum Su. 9 —rhizophyllum KUNZ 3 —scandic ng (Winn Pic r —-sphenotomum HILLEBR.. ——vexans UNDERW. MB Asprella Hoer.. 8 422 la SCHREB.. ee Asprella WALD ifolia ꝙũ½2nddr, „„ Astelia ret & SoL. H ELLER... Bs GRA: _ —preuseli A. Gray var. laxispien- thie tus SHELD.. a — A. Gray var. sulcatus — 15 Jones n 8 . —prioglei Wars. 2 8 127 Ist 145 144 —quinquefiorus Wars. —-racemosus PURSH........... .-.- —rasus SBE. 8 —rattani A Gar. ie oF. —recurvus GSW... . —-refiexus T. and G. —reptans WII .. —reventus A.GRAY .... ...--.-.-- —reverchoni A. GRAY. ......-..... —richardsoni SHELD............... —-robbinsii (Oakes) A. Gar —robbinsii (Oakes) A. GRAY. var. jesupi Edd eston and SHEL DA ee ee ee —robbinsii (Oakes) A. GRAY, var. 6 A —L— — ——— 2 D ee ee 8 ao" a 8 ween ewer eee — a —rothrockii SHELD. W..... 4, BUD. Dr. . WP Re ee ae INDEX. 1051 _ Astragalus sabulosus 2 Harker eek 126 Astraoalus Norr.. votes shee — 2 138 —trichocalyx * —salinus HOWELL.. —sclerocarpus A. 1235 — Wa ue Jamo... 24, 131 ccopulorum PORTER aud Cour 2 bay Sore ä 150 —-semibilocularis DC.............. 165 ——serenoi 13 SHELD.. 180 ——sericeus e PEPER Ee RES sericoleucus A. GRAY............ 117 3 us * . io —-sesquiflorus WAs. —-shortianus Nur. .. . 148 —shortianus Nurr. var. (ij minor A. Gray... „ e —shortianus War.. 148 ——sileranus JONES ——simplicifolius (NUrr.) A. Grar. 75 —solandri Lowe. ...... 119 —sonorae A. Gar. . 128 —sonore TORR. 8 102 — ides Jom ns. 172 ——spaldingii A. Gray........ 28 e 5. RAY..... 35 or A. GRAN. 154 r . Gray, var. ma- jusculus A. — 00's e 154 S spatulatus SHELD... eee _——speirocarpus A. . 12⁵ peirocarpus A. GRAY var. cur- vicarpus SHELD,................ 135 A. GRAY Var. falei- Formis Gear er Nu „ e 1 T. e. . 126 —strigosus Cots. & Vs SHELD. 1 3h —strigulosus H Bo K... U.. 174 —strobitty = erus LINDL .... 140 —Strobiliferus RoYLe.... . 140 ——subcinereus . ree 5 „ 130 Ac BAS 1 158 —-~suceulenius Rica. nn —succumbens Douat. . ——suksdorfii HOWELL............... ——suleatus LINN..... . ——supervacaneus GREENE.. 9 aadse —supervisus (OK) n ae ae — —suturalis — b —suturalis SHELD . —-sylvaticus WATS —sylvaticus WILD. ——syriacus 2 eee — ——tabrisianus SHELD.. ——tegetarius WTS. — tarius WATS. var. implexus C tenellus BUNGE... 242 —tenellus PUnsn. 3 tener A. Gaar . . 160 . A. GAT „8. 171 ESF. e 121 —tenuifolius LINN ... 4 seks —tenuifolius LINN..... See ee ee ee ee —vͤ—ͤ̃— 2 te minalis Wats... ——tetrapterus A Gnar texanus a nae Gier nianus BENTH........... 146 ——thurberi A. Gray.. bees 228 132 ——toanus JONES. 130 ——tolucanus Ros. and SA rr 174 -——tricarinatus A. GRAY ........... 160 Avena striata. Mien Bacillarieae Berean. sa mond pi VAN Baptista leucantha Toni * Gunar Barbula. 280. Batrachospermeae SIROD. hocar — „. 1 — tricho us (Nurr.) . 133 ——tridactylicus > „ |: : —trifi wes (OS * . 140 A. e uetrus A. “Guar. . 146 Parr. 1 UU G 2 ties cicbaste 21, 117 Nurr. in T. aud G. 160 — lodytus WATS..... Fe RN aa 129 ——tweedyi Cann 124 —umbraticus SHELD............ 160 ——ursinus A. Gray aA —utahbensis (Tokk.) T. and G ——vaccarum A. Gaar ——vaginatus PALL . Sine —vaginatus RICHARDSON. ........- —vaseyi Wars —ventorum A. Gar. ——vexillifiexus SHELD....... 21, 121, — vexillilongus SHELD.......... UELDENST........ 23, 151, — . mon... . ——Vvirgatus PAL... —virgineus Sun —-virgultulus SHELD........ ce BUNGE. das —viridis (Nurr.) ‘SHELD.. viridis (Norr. SHELD. var. im- „„ ——watsonianus OK. SAL. 143. 144, 174 ——wardi A. Gn akk. 136 ——webberi A. A 146 —wetherilli Jongs.. ee —-whitneyi A. b —wingatanus Wars ra ——wootoni SHELD...... —wrightii A Gray.. ——yaquinus Wass... : —-zonarius SHELD. ——angustatum B. &8......... si —undulatum BEAUV..........---.- Aulacomniam polustre bea ey see's 18 jum KUNZE... 552 862 „ 1011 —fallax Habw. —tragilis Buben & SCHIMP. . : 501, 740 enn. n & SCHIMe.. „ e 592. 7 —mülleri B. 8 inane 740 —ruralis HEpw 285. 581 —tortuosa W. & M. var. dicrauoide- Funda. 8 285 —unguiculata HDW. 592 227 287 592 670 822 822 Bartonia virginica (LINN. 3) B. S. P HW. Bartramia oederi Schw —pomiformis ee 3 287 581. Basiaiomycetes, . „ C ᷣ T. hgh anne anes they Batis P. BROWNE.. ö —maritima L. Batrachium n (SCHRANK. 1 WI Aux. 542 —trichophyllum (Onarx. ) Bosscu 9 1052 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Ratsnchcopermam vagum(Rorn).Aa en poe 3 — lon Urr. — longifora Pounsu.. Baumea GAU 4 — moyen Kbwrn Bazzanla . kmannia.. 5 Berberidaceae.. Berberis vulgaris... , Berteroa incana (Linn 50.5 Betula. . 725, 083, O86, 1012, 1014, 1021, 006, —glanduiosa Micux ... 587, 064 “ 5 DO ties -a —nigra IJ PPR eT ——pupyrifera MARSH,....... 537, 007, pase sae: PRE eee M R cove cv idinttesbritetch ss Biatory, e 704. 1 — »tropurpurea (MAN ‘Herr . — fusco-rubella (Horr. ) Tuck.. . (Ennn.) 8 ypuophila (Tun.) Tuck —iInundata FK. —muscorum (Sw.) TUCK........-. —rubelia (Enun.) Ramen. ~ Tol, ——umbrina Ach.) Tuck. A D e —beckil Tonunn —beckii Torr. ‘forma “sclssa Wenne ‘ „ e —connata Mon. —connata MUL. var. pinnate . | => 35s» . . — 1 LI NSN. anne 1 War —mutica NUTT..... 0.26 . —pilosa II. „ —-sandwicensis Less. a e (Wicht) Unirr. Bispora 9 . Bisulcatus Na Caudadssadsa T A ochopeccawens cba c ˙ [ 0 0000 erhenettges’s — pusilla Haren abb. ba ve —.— —— souleytiana GAUD.. A ey nt ae GAUD. S Blindia acuta B. S. Blodgettia Wrigar. C ˙⁴!!!— tasn'vemabase Bobea GAUD........ eis. — brevipes A. GRAY .. oO” eats —mannii ri ai Dee Boehmeria JAcgQ... 5 —albida H. and A. —grandis (H. and A.) HEULER.. — grandis (H. and A.) HELLER. var. gamma HiILLEBRAND.. 5 ——stipularis Won. Sen r aes keke sens asd s..... oh keane „ at et ec Cea atuaaeneburs Boraginaceae ................ 561. . aera pw oe eek at Bostrichonema CES eee ee Bothriospermum N —tenellum F. and ..... pect Botrychium.. 8 —Junaria ti ) Swartz........ .... —ternatum (THUNB.) SWARTZ. var. nustrale GRAY. s.. he 6 ase noes — virginianum (L.) SWARTZ... ... Botrydium m ales —granulatum (Liyn.) ‘Guev. 2 Botryosporium CoRDA......... — Botryosporium SR W. . „„ Schw.. . Botryteae.. oa A ie Beth Sate Rede Botryteae aloe Pooxp and ENTRAR . ORO * „ Botryt 83 Botrytis Pens. ..... — jonesti B & Be. „eee Boutelous hirsata Lao ....... en ~~ hirsuta (Micux.) Tou n.. Brachyciadium....... ‘ Brachyelytrum erectam ‘(Scunen) ——laetam Ruben & Scump..... ——rivulare Keecn & SCHIMP ,.. —rutabulam — r 1 e Braconotia Goon. . errr —elymoides GoDR | Brasenila urpures (MIoHx: IA. Brassica juncea (Luxx) . 4% A BO ee Brefeldia ROG. come —Inquinans 1 8. 5608 —marima Rr. 99 00 Bromus cillatus L.. : r L. var. pargan- My A. 1 —kalmil A. Gwar. ——racemosus L. Broussalsia GAU —argenteum II. —bimum ScHKes. oan cede ccdévacsees — cae-piticium ... 20. ~— Capliiare ly | n — cirrhatum H. KM — intermedium B. 88. —onturiense Kinps........... 288, — pallescens SCHLEICH ...... joe, ee — pendulum Sen ice 286, —pseudotriquetrum SCHWAEGR. —torquescens B. 8......ccccrscsevose 7 „ Buellla —W we J MUDD. .... 22. — myriocarpa (DC.) n var. Bb og Peg maa, Bursa bursa-pastoris (L.) 1 WEBER. Byronia ENDL — —anomala (H. KA HELLER. - —-sandwicensis ENvL...... .. 5 Exp.. var. t — polyandra CLEVx. 0 va tl | 25 N . * 2 1 Wee embeidina ane Cc Caealia atriplicifolia IL... — St —suaveolens LINN.............. 18 —tuberosa Nur r... = Jae . coc ee —bhondue (L.) Roxs........... | — (I.) — 3 831 Oaesalpinlac ea 831 Calamazrostis ADANS............ 794, 982 —canadensis (Micux.) BEAuv. 2 723. 964. 974,975, 980 523 794 523 33 81 531 16 736 — 22 —confinis (Witt. 1 —-forsteri (R. and 2 S run. Calamovilfa longifolia (Hook.) HAcR Calecotus n 423. Bale ss.) Calla palustris . eee ye Callitriche autumnalis Lixx. 3 o vk eee pices a. ae 8 4 8 . 54 INDEX 1053 baue petans PALL, . . 220, 5% Carex L. norvegica WII .. 224 lus ee sae iO, OOF — 2 .. ga 1 ——ͤ = Sen ate Taree tess 238 melina —oli (CHE .... 22-20: .- 52 3 H .. 12. 1000, 1014, 1015, ia — bee MUM b, 884 0 PursH “4 —pennsylvanica 529 5 er 4 PuxsH. var. grand. 970 ——peoadocy parus Es Eins, var. amer- i ‘ flora OOHST rotundifolia 1.567, 005,974. 980, 1 ——redowskcvana O. A. Mawnit. . $29 a . 990, —.— on 10s —retrorsa SCHWEIN. ......+--- 555 ’ "he eh . var. lan 567 riparia Curtis ......-...-530, 064, 975 3 : 806, 676 —sartwellii DEWweY..... 528 ——7 5 658 —scoparia SCHKUBR.. n 964, 970, 989 3 posporium S —siccata Dew . 964, 970, 975 mi mpsotrichum means? Jam ——sterilis WILLD... e SgLamptotherlum nitens Son. * —stipata Mca. ... 530 11 2 LK 64⁴⁸ * e 916 * We» var. festuca- pa | ~—cosmoides e Mita . 916 r * 530 ae — Hin — 5 „ ——mutica ( — 916, 917 — per Lam. var. @ ‘decora e a 1 DTeund wiess Lass.) Hincene.. 917 —sychnorephala Canty.. 7 500 Canavalla ApNss — ——tenelln SCHKUGR........... . O80 = ——Baleata GAU 51 ——tenuifiora Wahl. 5 1 „ Eann nn ee aenatcanneniane 90 / gee . 5³⁰ ꝙꝙZ— ae en e rec ooen-ee 308 ae 640 —tribuloides Wan... 530 3 ee oa 8 0 1016 ——tribuloides Want. var. L reduete 5 i —— 1 * AILEY _.. ; a. Cappa — neg „ „„ „% „„ ges 828 * rma DEWEY.. 2 1 Sa ee e —umbellata . 1. 58s fre 1 Caprio 2 ä * aS As 7 ta Orr. a hai ee 3 i KUN ER — varie M unt. . 541. 585 a Capsioum L, ...... ccc. senses seer seeees — —vulpinoidea, Mienx 77 3 ——frutescens Ii. eee e * Mara. 9 ee . Fa 2 * n * INDEX. 1055 ta copspiticia (Pans) Fr....7.10, 733 Otathrogyatio eseamincns Linares. ts 10710 Ta —adnatum (Barscn.) Sia HELD ..... e Wh — ——-suraniticum RAUNK.) SHELD. .. egenerans 3 . oe Seas. — 1 phe — . P. ve var. tubefor- vai Re poke (MARR) ARE ene 0 ecip SK., unh achte | (Hups.) Fr. var. eris- at den —— 1 n b pata FI. . . e rr gg. Be — SHE E: 2 ucba.) FR. ‘Var. bun- * — fees N= — ELD e ——ferrugineum (SAUTER) SHELD... —fuscum (Fries) SHELD... gel L.) NYL... ae * . ¥ var. elongata —hariotii (Nass. SHEUD........ ——inerme (Rach) SHELD. ...... 72 699 722 700 or aracta (L.) Nyx. var. verticel- —irreguiare (Racts.) SHELD. ph ggvace 530s ——nutans (GMELIN) SHELD........-- rie n Hore. 1. 2 III ) SHELD... tees teeseeses * —racibor BR *. * —pyxidata 12 Fr 8 81. Oe a sn pm pai (LiIx N.) SHELD... .... —ruangiferina (Linn.) Ho on 100 ab SHELD.. N —umbripvum HUM.) SHELD...... —rangiferina(L,) Hore. var, alpe- ——vermiculare (SCHUM. — 2 . 8 —rangifer! na (L. ) Hovrm. var. syl- 2 —— ats.) . 28 888888888888388 788888888888885 * —unelalis (1) Pre. F 3 {FRING} SuELD.. ——vVerticillata FL... —p— BATSON...... +<:e lndophora n 7 — ——denudatus LIN... 1 3 n N e — pertusus . oops ont * * —Sanicularis (Roa) Fee dias BOUT... .. 000 -+ 022+ otee ones ‘ pedatus Su.. 471 . — crispata (Roru) Kar. 26 — peduneulatus ii ATG —erlspata (Rora) Ka. var. brach- „ ene Lide . 408 a 3 b Ka. Var. ren a -—turbinatus poe. 3 5 a} ‘ ABENH.. es Clavaria nigrita bs cewese « Sonegeeds —declinata K 231 — — 1 ee . —declinata Ka. "Wak, bande an Clavaria n. «neey'=}) 50 N Br —aeelinata ‘Ka. var. “pumila r 132 * ea (BALL, ) Ken . . . .. . . zat Claytonia — — Micu . 539 : fracta (Diuuw.) KG .........-.- 230 . — F 8 ; oe A . Ba. var. gen- 230 —latifolia “(SOLANDER) SHELD.. 15 5 —fracta (Ds.)! Ka. var. "patens 25 ä . ufa 8. a —tfracta (Diuuw.) Ka. var. rigi- 5 — e eee a ss dula (Ka) Ranzen. 231 leome n. sp onveonseneteesenenny BE ix —tfracta (Drutw.) KG. var. Seti⸗ pentaphylia —ꝓ—ͤ—ͤ— 2 4 formis (Kd.) TLD 231 — serrulata PURSH.. od. < abe danse ean 544 1 9 —glomerata (Linn. . 26 Clermontia GaUD.....-: N 761, 906 oa — ——clermontioides (GAUD,) HELLER. B06 4 8 a 3 KG. var. ela- oa 1 eee 906 „ ata Behe she IE. hel 2s — e _ —-glomerata Linn.) Kd. var. fas- ane Mere... 7 2 906. = 221 t 4 2¹ ——macroph ria Nurr. 907 3 3 (lan) Ka. var. riv- in —Sblongifolia Gun * 907 BS ollace leds Eg. er. A —persicaefolla Gad. 907 ’ ——oligpolone K@..ver: ROOWiARe K 220 desde h 0d e wind. Hamman og 8. 8 * Olados om ium E Bier * = Climacium americanum Bate, . 582 : 4 . 659 ——dendroides W. and er : 201 . laoxylon A, „ a Clintonia borealis (Att.) 13 533 2 D- sandwicense var. tomentosum Hit aS * 2 ea io . ann r sa ae eye (Hint EBR.) H- 808 ——kuetsingil ens 2 Clasterosporinin ‘SCHW.......-.--.660, 682 . Bame (7 2 5 = augen d end E... — —strigosum BREB............ „ — capsularum Saco 2 n 66 1 Clusia sessiiis H. ORO Bs A 838 __elavulatum S000. 641 Cocconeis pediculus EHRB .......-- 2 237 D elaeod E eer aaa Coelustrum 3 mane. -« 288 f i — oo 8 — Coffea L .. 2 Mig”) 661 —arabica L. . sot * 662 —kaduana C. and . 903 * 661 —marinianaCU.andS ....... --..-- 904 661 —odorata Foam. ee 902 K. 656 8 Jobi L 2 3 — ——popult A0 | RR S400 . 2 Qoleochaetacese 6.) Friss. (35 1056 OColeochaete pulvinata A, Br,.... e Oollema. ..... e 704, ——erlspum Bora........... „ene ——flnecidum An. 480 ——pulposum ( en N Vi —tennx (Sw.) A Colletotrichum......... adeas . eren * n (I. Ben. 061, Oomarum palustre L. 8 Comatricha PSU . 6 nequalls Prox eee —pulchella (Ban) Rosr.. sake ——stemonitis (Score. ) SHELD cy ——stemonitis . var. pumila (CORDA) e „eee eee seen ~—typhina ROST. OCommelinaceae es cee scsesesecees Oompositae. .... ...... 567, 676, 763, 764, Comptonta peregrina (L. ) ae mean 2 r 0 e ͤKͤV KK —sand ajoensia (A. Gray) HeELLen.. o ce demlaenemun Lee oe te ——bombycina (Ad.) 1% uu. var, elongata RABENd.. e cs ics cons hb usepbenay „aa. 510, Oonlocy be... E Fam Coniosporium Rice ec nask acae ——fulvum (B. and GC.) P. and ©, ——lateritium (Cke. and HAKKN.) and O. —pactolinum (Gn. ‘and Hankx. 1 (Se and } Eri.) NN saw dees Coniothecium CORDA e (BLL. & ANDER. ) —k̃ 3b a OConocephalum conicum Dun Conocephalus ............+.+.44, 48, 40. ——conicus DUMORT rt 48, Conomitrium julianum Mos Convallariaceae ............. . Convolvulaceae, . eee Convolvulus arvensis “LINN... W —— pes-caprae e —Seplum L.. 500. 985, 970, 975. 977, —spithamaeus LL... 8 ipy mk Sosa 3 9 . —foliosa. . —kauensis (A. Gray) HELLER... ——longifolia A. GRAY var. kauensis A. Gray. wae -_rhynchocarpa., e ——Waimeae WAWRA.. Sewellcsenesangs Coptis trifolia (L.) Serien . Corallorhiza. a. 1021, —corallorhiza (L. ) "KARST....-..... Wenn x Cordula RAIN. E oraler ᷣů!v.. eeo le e Leted 647, Coremium LK . oe bee eae —berkeleyi (Mont. 3 ö bicolor ( WES.) oo —monilioides CA. £6) 2. 40.:.:. Coreopsis cosmoides A. GRAY... „ macrocarpa "A. —pulmata ROW is ce oe —trichosperma MICHX... ... ..... Corisanthes SRP . Corispermum hyssopitollam i. .- 964, Cornaceae....... Wernns. 225 23S 969, 971, 972, 993, —-baileyi oa 1 Evans. .965, 970, 971, at -—canadensis LL... —candidissima MARSH.. —-circinata L’HER.. — sericea LINN. . . 965, 970 0. 971, 980. —stolonifera MICHX.. ............. Coronopus GAERTN.. 5 —didymus (L.) J. E. Smira ..).2.. MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. . 8 22855 e 0 * Corsinia eee eer ree eee ee eee Oorticuum m Cue. & li. Oorylus reetene Car etneeeenenee ——americana WALT .....-..... * : ——P «ira ~—wulvinatas.. —raul eee. 70 n 5 — ür —Wrightii var. brevis h. var How. Cosmarium ansatam (Eunrenn.) Ka. ——breblason! MENBOM, .... 0... 6-000 —lneve RABENH. ... ——suberenatum nien. „ * . P Coatta LX. — . — L.. Crassulaceae.. .. rataegus coccinea 1 eee eee 3 ĩ⅛— ä ——223257* 3 een een „„ —punctata . e — Lomentosa eee eee eee eee ee 98 Senu nn 2 Orepis ' 10 0 Bi Ales — . ru. onsen oo Cress EE ——— — — —truxillensis H. R. K. apr Cribraria Scukap : 463. —cernua PERS. 3 . (Sonn) Sat.. Critesion Rar .... 8 —— meee Critesiam n RAP. ere ee wwe a E. e erde ORT ont wedovessasence @ Orotaleria 1 ee ele —assamica Besta. e — —fulva Roxs.. nd ah ne de —ineana L 83. iongirostrata H. and a: n —saltiana ANDR . nnd —sericea REeTZ . Roru... —-striata ͤ— * — 2 e Gr ⁵¾ ò;1 / K Cryosanthes b Cry ptocarya R. Br.. er ee * -—maonnii HILLesR.. Cucurbita....... 51. 275. ü 5, maple ed, hey . tea (PK ) rene: alien „ 409, . Sacc.. „ —marcida (MULL.) Sac. ... 8 5 Pye 3 1 ifera Gurry.. 3 5 balsamona G. and 8.—. . a — 8 K — —— Sarl ]?ĩ?7yL'?rꝛv¾bE! e w' / h oben Cuscuta. 6 —coryli —————— —-gronovii WILLD.. ů— — — ——indecora CHOISY. Cuviera Koů—5z . Cyanea Gaup —-coriacea (A. eae ee —coriacea(A.GRAY) var. —hirtella age ey! HILLEB R. —leptostegia A.GRAY ......... — longifolia . oc cctse —recta (WAWRA) HILLEBR ....... —- spathulata (HILLEBR. ) HELLER. 888888 „„ LABIA SEE te LE gn 338 ranea sylvestris u. sp. HELLER.. ceae avophycene ............ 986, . 009, bb bb —imbricata STSCHEGLE iia he 1 aad STscuH. var. r strato” —tameiameine ‘OuAM... —T.!.!.. „„ revoluta.. Zane Oylinariam BOW —septa D indrocephalum Bůo 8. Si rocladium Mon oa... L ndrocolla ROW. rocallene. .. 647, ylin mum limnicola Ka...... 4 — 0 ladorbizans Sen ä — *** „* —-seductrix SULLIV Cymstopleura solea (BREB.) W. Sm... * —— ae oti ee (Kd.) net oystapleura zi gibba un) De- Toni. Cynodontium.. —polycarpum' B. S. var. strum!- ferum B. 8. virens var. wahlenbergii . 5. —wahlenbergii (B. 8.) R. and O. Cynosiossum virginianum Li —-virginicum camprestris (LINN.) MacM. var, multiflora nd! MacM.. yperace ae 2 8 rus L 9 Rorrs.. —diandrus Torr . ä sii. de —filiculmis VAHL. ........ —hawaiiensis MANN. —— fee — hy sohlorus HILLEBR........ 1. — in us MURL...... . . E . — pennatus CCC . e Rorr gg —rotundus L......... .. 8 —schweinitzii Torr. aes vee. 526, 964, 1 VAMP „ —strigos 3 SL.. 8 —uinbellatus (L.) Bextra. ; Cyphina.. — — Wasen ‘penne ee ee eee 2 R. BR. 424, es - — arietinum R. BK:... —calceolus Ill. 433. —cealeeolus L. 425. 427, 428, —ealceolus var. 0. Lis. Cate cin hs . r cee eet a ee e de 1 . 7 ‘Muni, 432, 355 “435, —caudatum Linn. 1 —fasciculatum Wars. 433. 434, —faxcieulatum * pusillum —guttatum Sw. F r Bree Se or —humile SA S —irapeanum LA 8 . 433. 434, c —montanum Dora... 433. —occidentale Wars 388252 BE 8882 2888888275 882 8 * 24885 427282825 288383 1 1057 munen parviflorum Salis. 24. 431, 433, 485, 436, 443, 444, 450, 534 . SALIiss... 9 ——passerinum Rien. — enone 48 444 ——pubescens WILLD. ......... 34. 26, 450 Ri ae 425, 442 rege, yh ae 425. 429, 433, 434, 435, 436. 437, 438, yea 449, 441, 443, 334 renne WA A he 448 ——rothsehildianum e, 430 —spectabile sea 33, B4, 35, 36, 450 — D 425. 48 —pusilum ROLPE,... . ........ 433, 434 ——villosum LINDL. ................- 426 Cyrtandra Fons wevat ceases G88 —arborescens BLUM aa. * — corditolia Gaup.. a Sol ——degenerans (WAWRA) ‘HeLLer.. 887 ——fayana n sp. — A 887 ——grandifiora GAUD... wee ee ee 88 WAWRA..... FAS 891 —kalichii Wawra... . ARS —~—kauaieusis WAWRA... RAS. ——keuliae WAWRA. a „ 838 ——latebrusa HILLSE a.. 887 ——lessoniana GauD . — ——lessoniana pachyphyllaHILLEBR 889 ——longifolia WWA HILLEBR.. 887, 889, 800 ——longifolia (Wawra) HILLEBR. var. ens WAWRA soul pate ae ——longifolia, var. deyenerans ©. B. „ = ——oenobarba Ma ——oenobarba herbacei (Wawnta) ——paludosa GAUD. _. Ser. ——paludosa GauD. var. alnifolia fare Pe —paradorca . —peltata WAWRA. .... „ ——pickeringii A. Gray., . 889. ——svabrella CLARKE... ; ——tristis HILLEBR.. pandas —wahbiawae HELLen....... ...... ——wawrae HILLEBR. . —wawrai C. B. CLARKE... D Dactylaria Sacc.. . Dactylella GROVE. —-ellipsos Dactylium Dacty — — Balea dalea ) MacM. . en PURSH — ñ ͥ́ũTp ne — (PREuss.) GROVE.. ee ee ere 2 spicata (L.) Beauy Datura stramonium....... ..... Davallia SMI... —-speluncae (L.) BAKER —strigosa SWaR rz —strigosa SWARTZ. var —-tenuifolia Wenn Delissea GAuUD.. eee — —— —rhytidosperma MANN... subcordata —undulata A 3 Dematium PRS. ·(— 2 eee ee Dematlaceae.. 18 288182725 2535 22 \ 1058 Domations “4 (Fn.) Pounp ea oft if, 1 eee 6405 5 23 ——nodulosum Deparia H. and G.. prolifera (KAULF.) Hoon riangularis U Sonner Deringa canadensis (L.) Kuntze... Dermodium tnquinans L Deschampsla caespitosa (L.) BEAUY. Descurainia plunata (WAL?.) Buirr. Desmajodon nen bee and BOWIMPY «vice ccx0a idee’ ner 2 Desmidiaceae (Kd. De By. Desnm idium batleyl aes De By.. —— SB WAPtZll a —triforum DC.. N — 50. 8 . Diachaea Pains. e n tense ng e e eee — leueo a (BuLL.) Rost......... Diandrae-Oy pripedinae............ Marella LAM, ..ssenciciscasves Dianella nemorosa LAMARK. ——sandwicensis H. and A Dichothrix orsiniana Co) “BORNET Dicksonia 8 . ° Dicoccum CORD Dicranella — . * D Dicranidion P Dicranophora SCHROETER... ....87, 91, ——fulva SCHRORT.. Ss ppucatadeeas Dicranum albicans 1 9 —bbergeri BLAND............ 283, 580, —congestum Bio —drummondii C. MUELL.. —fiagellare HEDW.......... —fuscescens TURN......... ap —montanum HED... . 283, —palustre DELA PYL.......... 579, —sc ——scopariforme 8 scoparium HDW. 2 SOHLEICH.. Se eae —undulatum EarRa.. —viride B Dict: Dictydium SCHRAD —cancellatum (GMELIN) Suki D. —cernuum 1 125 trick ioides — e ‚—k——ů em.: 33***²¹k iety ebene Dictyosporeae .. 8 Dictyosporium GoRDA.....- 1 Diderma 8 affine er. ) Sur. . —albescens PHIL.. 3 —angulatum (PERS. ) —vcealcareum (LINK) —cearmichaelianum B —chalybeum WEINM. ...... —rconcinnum B. and ab —ceontortum FUCKEL.. —contortum HOFEM... —crassi — — MM —fallax (Rost —friesianum (Rost.) SHBLD....... 2 2 8883 SERRRULUEUUNREERUNSECREHEIE | 2885 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 85 282832222823 853 2888 Bak 32 Diderma gonsterotdes Patt... —23jꝛ⁵²? ——globosa > Pus OREM ER Oe nee —— WD Piss —— — RIES... * ——liceoides FIE. eee —Hceoldes Pres —— * owe —— lucidum , and Bu...... noes —mullert Gloss.) — et — — 9 * Dre mee CORD. ee . ——niveum (Rost.) SHELD,.......... ——ocbraceum * Sun —paltidum i. and © j ie — pezizoideum BERK. HELD ——ů—.— {bo de eng ——TAMUBUMN Puns SHELD.. ——— — —simulans ( 8 ¥ ite, —sphacroidalis (BULL) SHELD.... E 2 —astablil 12 ) 12 —atellare Peas —— —— enee Seat e (hutt, C —subdletyospermum (ROST. SHELD.. ... 3 —sublateritiom B. and Ba. ——testaceum (SCHRAD.) zus — icatum kus. eee 3 e Dur. and Hor —— ——— site. coun Didymaria Corpa . ene —didyma (Usaer.) Po. ——unyert CORDA — sedges deeb Didymium — . * ——candidum SCHRAD.. ORE OO 23 ‚—— H ͤ — G—ͤjͤ— — —hemispherirum —— —hemisphericum FUCKEL..........- —“tridis Fries „ Ban — 8 nd sphaerocephalum (BAaTSCH.) ‚Jy0 M b FRIES......... inane en (RETz.) SHELD —— —zranthopus FRIES. 8 Sacc.. Didymobotryum pubescens (G. and E.) Sacc.. 5 a owe ee ae Didymodon cylindrieus ‘Bru ScHIMP. eee 0 Diy: —— S aeme aatacaeiggoae ymos D C 25.52 * bata — „5 9 . — ee F N 1 5 * * e * ervilla diervilla (L.) MAM... Dinemaspor um 2 dapiockaws heakaa Te N el —. Ä son's A ene Dioseo 3 Dipanax SEEM....... —dipyrena ( 1 255 HELLER.. pnd ha pay ocarpa (HILLEBR.) HELLER. n ) HELLER...... Diphylla <<) Spee wy % S Bon.. 8 2 MEISSNER. ——bicornuta N.) HELLER... —pbuxifolia * crn) ELLER... —elongata (A. GRAY) HELLER. .859, ——elongata var. recurva HILLEBR. 1 recurva 1 — HEL . avi Hirt. - —oahuensis(A. GAT HELLER 860, Todi rant (A. Gray) HEL- rene {EISNER.) HELLER —sandwicensis( 4 HELLER..... —uva-ursi (A. — villosa Disphinetiun notabile (Bann? Distichium.. e aceum B.S Sree aceum (Sw. ) Bry... kes capillaceum (Sw.) BRY. var. brevifolium Bry..... Distichlis gyrate (1 n — onaen N iscosa L,.... viflorum Norr.. ia glomerata reg, —plumosa (Vaven. ) 8 9 W han ea se cas ok Sead: Geese _——op ta Ac. 38 intermedia HAYNE............... 8888888 62824288855 SSE A INDEX. 3888228235 225 ——— —rotundifolia . . roseraceae Pm PUIBAPID WILLD) x. ssivive ds wecsassces (O06 —-cordata (L.) A Dryopteris ADANS 778, 1011, ——caryotidea (WALL.) UNDERW.... — -cicutaria (SWARTZ) KUNTZE..... PE pe Sporn (WALL) UNDERW . = arenes es 3 KUNTZE... ——decora BRACK......... cae chook 3 N — filix-mas var. 3 Aa. — — A rey om N Ela ns (BRACK.) Konrze.. , ——nuda UNDERW 455 n ‘Kunrze. tins same age RETzZz.) toe 25 —squam migera (H. and 1 A.) KUNtzE. ——thelypteris (L.) A. GRA. 964, —truncata (GAUD.) — —unita (L.) KUNTZE................ Dubautia GaupD.... .... . 764, —knudsenii Hruuesr..... 3 — laevigata A. GRAY ett —laxa H.andA....... ............- 1059 Dubautia plantaginea Gaup..... 917, 918 Dubruetlia — r 81¹ Dulichium 5 waves: One —arundinaceum L.) Barrr.. 526 E Eatonia pennsylvanica(DC.) A -Guar, 524 Echinops sphaerocephalus „„ Echium vulgare LIN. 0 . pta 5 —alba (L.) HASSK. . . 918 21 r PS oe ET mony any eee 850 — us K. aa 17. 850 — ——. „ ine americana (Purse) Aux. 225 2 SCHKUBR.......... Va Eleocharis R. BR. 801. 992, 907 —acicularis (L. R. and 8 3 ——obiuaa SCHULTES ess 801 -—ovate (Roras) R. and S. 527, 801 lustris(L ) R. and 8.527, 964,988, 989 enuis 88 SCHULTES. 064, . 088, 989 Ellisiella Sacc . e —americanus V As. “and , —arenarws Mr 2 —canadensis — 105, » Lid. Gee, 526, 964, 25 —canadensis LINN. 2 5 5 res- cendus os Sau 2 nais LINN. var. “glaucifolius — 2 — 42 var. glauctfolius T. an aa C.. r eens LINN. var. ‘glaucus (BockL.) Ram... 4 Ee —-sitanion tit. and 8.) Mar.. 1 111 — striatus WIIIDp. 112, 113 —striatus WILLD. var. “villous ae GRAY... 5 aise 112 ne aie —-virginicus LI ......... 114. 526 e ee W nen jejunus “ ĩ˙.˙² ckaunseoee Ge El C ĩð!?u ee bicolor WEB ed 729 —lacteus Horr —lacteus Jace 473 Emilia Cass. . 6 dealt Oans.. „„ . — 5 Hepw.. „ ae ee . 4 W.. 1 1013 1019 ndocarpon.......... 3 * -—fluviatile DC. Tee —hepaticum ACH.. e —-miniatum 1 75 Scnen 3 724 —miniatum (L.) SCH2R var. com- plicatum SCHER................ —pusiilum Hepw................... — gl ee var. e os ae ES AE 630 —plumosa (Rerz.) LIS —variabilis 3 1 —— prunastri ( ‘Lins. ) Acn... 82, 00 f 712, 1060 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. Epichloe. .... sevreeesigace gece . Euphorbia clustactolia ll. 4 A. .... 1 eee Fr. D e 731, 74 ——cordata M@YEN...... 6 S pleoccum LX. „ 734 —corollata Lins, — gecctees ae | Epicradacene. . EAS eT — let, ospermaF ison. aod Maven E e Fu. nn — rae ae —— occeecel, bonne non repens F 558 ——heteropbylla L. 2. suden 1 Epil Oblum. 974, 083, 1001. 1007, 1018, 1015, 1021 ——hexagona Nurr ... 7 ä — D 065, 970 —marginata PoRsH. subs ot bevodbale = - udengdenuſon 1 var. 8 ——multiformis —— „ene an ploxans en 551 — palustris eee 8 —coloratum Mons. e ——pilulifera . é 3 Mun... 84. 965, * 975 -—rivularis Hein e —bpalustre L.. 5⁵⁴ ——serpylilfolla Pens . „ese Epithemia Turgida (Ea) Ka at — sparsifiora HELLER. e Faulseta cen. 518 Euphorblucese... . — . 861, Maisetum eee ee e eg sss NGOs Euprasia officinalis, L. r. —-arvense LI... 064, 970, 74 rbynchium hlans L. and J.. ——hiemale ea „ —strigosum 8m —limosum.. „ —sullivantil Ls. & An 0 . ²˙² Ä 518 Eurya Tuuns.. „n —scirpoides Micux . Ete Dion dase ee — sandwicensis A. GRAY..... ...... —sylvaticum Ls. ln —-sessilifolia.. — sopele —variegatum SCHLEICH. en .. 518 Eustichia norvegicaC, MUBLL.........- Eragrostis BEAuhrrk,k 70 Euthamia graminifolla nn — —campestris TRI... S A ¾ ç,,, Manes Mhaneeeen —hawalien-sis HILLEBR . e — —ͤ—ę— dee ee —-hypnoides (La.) B. 8. pera 524 erpa. oo ere ey —major Host...¢.. .. --624, 705 Bvorbartia nd & H * —pectinacea (MICRX.) ‘STEUD...... 524 Evernia.. Pea 5 N 159 106 106 Eremiticus .. . — — La yee 2 remopyrum LREDUb o „..... . eee EKrleacae ++ 558. 1 d lee —albidum K. Gun. annuus (L.) PER. — bonarlensis L.. —cunadense 8 —canadensis L. 70, 019, 065, —philadeipbicus | ——ramosus (Warr.) B. S. P. 57d, PP Mee 974, Eriocaulaceae.. i, Eriocaulon sepiangulare ‘Witn.. 00. Eriophorum. . pee 5. 51. —alpinum L. sth cane „ —gracile Koen A* —polystachion LUNN............. — — bolystachyon III.... uf —vaginatum LINN............... 4. —virginicum LIS. 224. Ervum multiſtorum PURSH.. 21, él, 122, Erysimum cheiranthoides N —inconspicuum wt = ) ene —ͤ— — —orientale Mirz. aie —syrticolum SHELD es Erysiphe ae aha Erythraea NECK.. —sabaeoides (GRISEB. ) A. Gray.. Erythrina L...... 5 — monosperma . "67, Erythronium er Ep ge in ae rp ae —propulians A. GRay.. 3 aer K . ce dn nr Gece saa pee tea gene Eugenia L.. 3 ele g be Kise hw ed be —malaccensis II.. 790, Seay ee eee A. RAY . Eugeoglossum Euglena viviaia (SctitasK:) EHRENB. Euleptoglossum.. c Eumierogloss um Eumorchella SCHROET.. 3 Eu mucor SCHROETER .. ee ee Eumucoreae. . . .88, 89, 91, Eupatorium ageratoides es —perfoliatum L ... Ses 965, 975, —purpureum L......... 2 Euphorbia L. . —atrococca HELLER...-..-...-----. —celastroides Boiss .. ........844, ont 28 seasveeenaguse 888.8. 888225 2855285 Excipulaceae . Ee 2 Exobasidlacene .. 1 Exocarpus 2E > ——brachystac n * —casuarindé BAILA........ —sandwicensis BAILL ...- Exosporlum LK... oe F F 85 Fabronia octoblepbaris Sn. 200, er Famelicis — bier 2 Festuca nutans MOENCH.......-.-.+ «++ —nutans WILD . -—octoflora Wu ——ovina L . eaten dra Scnnl5. „ Filicales.. . ices.. ꝶ＋4ꝙ647 : Fimbristylis 8 e 2 . ft — polymorpha Borcke | De as 5 . gunmelaie ——umbellato-capitata — Fissidens decipiens DENOT eee SULL.. SI AA Fontinalis . 20, —dichely moides LINDB.........--. —hypnoides HaRTM............. —lescurii SULL, var. gracil ULL = —macmillani CARD. Fragaria vesca L. baa —virginiana DUCHESNE var. iilin- oensis (Prince) A. GRA T... Fragilaria capucina DESMAZ........31, —virescens eae: var. prod N Laar r... eee 1 Ne Lad * _ Fraxinus.. 078, 984, 991, 1614 —americana 1.— . 559.965, 974, 975. Frullania.. ieee see iach ae —aeolitis NS. FE pots oe. —dilatata NEES...............46, 47 —boracensis GOTTSCHE. 5 Patigo H 35 —ceandida Pens. Hara PERS... ..... FR se ee 3 SCHUM. 5 ont Dow ous N FF 4 c eet _ = ä Soo F ea te Ral a tl — > 5 v r nean ! U Ne ee oe a —triflorum Micax (Geipinsis be harewegit (Bz “Barrr- 3 N 1. 683. Gaultheria.. 7233 —procumbe bens L. . P ˙ ˙ô—»r oged Veh ees pweenwAs'oowe —̃ 2 —crinita FROEL..... e —-puberula Mien —serrata GuxNxERR Gentianace age 8 Geovalyx graveolens N — omece® 8 Geoglossum PER. 484, — album Jou xs 1 —ramericanum (COOKE) Sacc. 484, —difforme PR. .............- 484. —tfarinaceum SCHW........... . —farlowi Cooke ...............484 rum Pn. 401. — hirsutum PERS . 00 —hirsutum var. a — ee tt ee eee eee 25 ste teen P icrusporum | OKe. and PK. —ni etry gad gy 8 L. ec. isi, peck! anum COOKE.... —pistilare B. and An 8 9 Ate — simile P 88 er PS.. .. * - veluti —viri 9 pel Settee ween ee — viscosum i sings — vitellinum Buns8s. ran et tte tees HLL : 505 ; eerie ala oa —earolinianum ae —maculatum L.. Gerardia purpurea 1 a 4 — -skinneriana Woop.. 3 —tenuifolia VAR... Gesnerlaceaae Geum canadense JAG. 8 —ciliatum PURSH................--. a a hes Witt... — 33 —nivale. . „ . —strictum Arr. ee eS eS eS. .. 3 ichotoma (WILLD.) HooK.. —longissima BLUME —sambucina HELLER. |... ——sandwicensis var. cordata WAWRA —sandwicensis var. c. la Wawra . aE (>. picensis, var. suffruticosa r er e var. terminalis A. Ar 8 — u. * * ) 111605 5% 896, Gramineae .. Granularia Rors..... U n Sacc.. R 5 Graphidei NYL. 4 Graphiothecium FUCKEL . ee en Ser — E Fer ta (L.) AcH.. 705. —seri ree (Lama. Aci. var. recta (Hums.) N —substriatula * S Graphium, CORDA.. berkeleyi Moxt ... — monniera L. 2 Grimmaldia barbifrons BISCH......... Grimmia... en —ambigua F —-apocarpa Hepw.......... Ber 286, —cualyptrata AOR. roses ——commutata HUB.. scetbeiahes —convferta FPUNCK.. skas woes —pennsyivanica Scuw.. woe —unicolor GREV . G— —— Grindelia squarrosa (PursH) DUNAL. Gueldenstaedtia une D. OC. . . 21, Guiera ... Guilandina bondue L. — bo — ie Guttiferae.. ey ae Gyalecta - N triesii KOERB.. ames —— lutea (DICKs.) Tuck. 7 — Gymnoascaceeaeaee Gymnogramma. DEsv.. ——javanica BLUME......... 5 pilosum Back —-sadlerioides UNDER W. — — . Sat a yy 2 * * INDEX. 1061 Fuligo U 472 Gleichenia owhyhensis gon 2 789 5 . 5 q .. . . 481 Gleicheniaceae.. „ —rufa PERS.. 3 —— LK. 669 —septica (Linn) Gaetan... e — 1 „ —vapr PRG. . 481 Gloeotrichia incrastata Woop........ 236 —varians So mr eee ——natans RABENH. .... ..... 236 : Pamngo Pens. ; did v0 = — .,. lepidota P Fons. Bae 8 = / ²•7%§?ivð x naphalium . % Ci" os scabs bsg wobec ce ohcs 649 —luteo-album L ............ . 919 dunaria ia hygromecrica Hevw... 287, 592 4 L. r — —!ÄT . . 647, 737 wicensium GAU dusarlum LK. 605, 731, 737, 738 Gomphonema constrictum EHRENB... Pusicladwum BON. . 655 ——olivaceum (LYNGB ) KG 2a, 650 — — 1 3 Bs „ tal 1 2 g 5 787 Gonatobotrxum Saceé........... 1 G Gonatorrbodiclis Taxa. 3 Gony trichum Nuns . Gaertneria scanthicarpa nen. . Ge C Ar. ee gous on „ —..,, cccaan - 9 ,\sangeseds one 802 Gorponiceps turbinata.. 5 —sahniactorinis (Gaup.) HELLER. 802 Gomes jum tomentosum............... ichaudii 8 pat OES ee 802 r 763, aust Giese. C —-uarborescens (WAWRA) HELLER Galega. ATT Ua ste Rh ahve wena 833 g Galegiformis.............. e 158 —coriacea (H. & A) Hann . 896, Galeprrdon ep idendron WIG. . 469 ——elongata HELLER... .... N Galium as . enn SN 565 —— lanceolata Wa wa) HELLER... —boreale - olia . 3 am ETINGUm .. 1665, paygod ) A. Gray.. 635. 964, Hadotr — Ke f Halorrhagidaceae ....... Hapalosiphon fuscescens Kd. . — o 4 One ee ewe Sac Haplographium Ba and Br. Bavitere ium B. and ieee 8 tent ty nh Ate PK. n —atro-brunneum Sac an ——griseum ELL. and Las. iS amicus PERDIGARMOINOS | 5550500 .. HBaplotrich taut Cae 2. .n. e —acremonium (CorDA.) P. and —-griseum (B. and C.) P. and C. —mucorinum . and O. P. and O. e e e and 0. )P. e 11 Haynaldia Scau . Hedeoma hispida Ponsa. 5 Hedera gaudichaudii A. Gray. ylla A. GRAY....... Hedwigia ciliata — 85 Keenan ae —uncinatum JA 3 Helenium autumnale L. Helianthemum canadense(L. ) MICHx. Helianthus L.. —annuus L.. —-giganteus * —grosse-serratus ‘ManTEss.. —-hirsutus Rar.. —maximiliani SCHRAD.. —occidentalis RIDDELL.. 5, . wee ew meee ee eee —petiolaris Nur. —rigidus DESP...... 8 ons Sinneed ce cxks — tracheliifolius ee Bo ee 5 So Helicocephalum . per RES Helicoma CORDA. 9 — curtisii BunK —fasciculatum B. ‘and C we: —muelleri CoRDA.. deeb ob. Oa Helicomyces LK . —brunneolus (B. and C.] P. aud C. —curtisii (BERK.) P. and C........ — diplosporus (E. and E.) P. and C. —-fasciculatus (B. and C) P. beg O. —leptosporus (Sacc.) P. and —microscopicus (ELL.) P. and * —muelleri (COR DA.) P. and OC. S528 38 8682820820 887888 88e kzs s böse MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. 1062 Gymnostichum maus Hern n Oe Gymnostomum — Nii and HOuNsH.. .... pea RS —curvirostram Hepw.. 500 —curvirostrum Hepw. var scab- rum (Lisbon) HOLZ ......... 281 e on Sonn, . 500 aur n 82 Gy nopogon F 877 Lecce ‘AUD. y HecLen... 877 Gypsophila muralis LIN N... 586 Gyromitra Fr , 222 480, 486, 401 — brungea Uu W.. 401 —-caroliniana (Bosc.) Fr . 5 401 —costate Pan,) Sd. — 401 esculenta: 83 r ——esculenta (Pers.) FR. n — gas (KROMBA,) COOKE.. 401. 402 nfula eee) UEL......491, 402 e eee e ACC 0, 492 ' Gyrophora.... „eee des eee See 88 „ cwdiied hee on bee on, ae Gyrostachys.........+.«.+- . 1021 —cernua 5 LC —— gracilis ( BIGEL.) KUNTZE. 535 — romaozowlana (CHAM, ) MacM.. 6 11 Habenaria bracteata (WIL p.) R. Br. . (MicHx.) SPRENG..... —dilatata (PURSA#) a 1 —hookeriana A. GRAY —hyperborea (L.) R. 1 —0 eee — ne ea ate (F pean) © ORR,. . 535, 88338 3838 659 872 658 2283 Helicomyces vegetus (Nees.) P. and R E e J P. and G. 67. 222 e B. and G. 12° —- curtion 8 Nen * — — 4/6555 . ͤ— — ee ee — — —— — -vegetum NEB ...... 5 Hellcosty lum ( — aie bess See Helio 1 — Ds.. e. ae Heliotropium L . „ —ceurassavicum IL. * Helminthosporiacet CORDA..... ... ‘ pe ed ee nee pty fc P * Helminthosporium ix: eee — attenuatum — eee we serene —eanadense K.. P, & Oxsteas 22 0 F. ac... DR 1 ˙ . —cealifornica Fart... P Ene —crispa (SCOP.) RK... —elast ane ——ephippium ——— N —eaculenta PERS rr bee dain ali —— ——lacunosa Val ie te —lacunosa minor Herner vet abet —monachella (Soor.) Fa. Fu. 185. 400, —palustris e ee —ĩ —pusiita B. * Helvellaceae... Hel vellales... eee 2 Hemiarcyria_ — e -—clavata Rost.. nee teen — tu Scam.) Fi pedata ( —serpula (Scor. ) Rosr. ........ 463, —vesparia (BaTscH.) SHELD....... e (BArTScH.) var. sessilis SHELD. sub asad eee Hepatica sents (PursH) N Hep ate Heppia H. apleurum (Pierotropia) 1 —— — Herpestis GAERTN. ee —wmonniera H. B. Ke. Herpocladium SCHROETER.......... 92, —-circinans SCHROET.. 8 Herposteiron confervicolum N AEG. Hesper oma “ Heterunthelium Hocasr. Heteropogon 8 —contortus Heterosporium 5 BAGO? 5. dane, = pdt aa ae f ae 9 2 „ * * e . — * L ⁵ ˙rmx.. er se tans Rr Homalocenchrus Nr rr mult iſtorus To —-orthocarpus N —tenuifolius NUrr. ei Pou... eum LLNx brevisubulatum —cartilagineum Mok ——jubatum Linn, 7 150 ie 826, 904, 970 —maritimum Rorr,.. 110 er eee — murinum var. B. Lix xxx 110 — 8 F nodosum LINN........-...... 110, 583 — patulwm Mou x...... 1 —pratense HUDSON. eee —pratense LINN. var. —pusillum Nurr. —— SCHREB.. LINK t Hormiscia flaccida (Ke) var. nitens (MENEGH.) HANSG. 229 —-subtilis (Ka.) DeTont var. sub- tilissima RABENH........... 597 —zonata (WEB. on Monn.) An- e rern ere Brit. & Lese. eats 666 Hormodochium Sacc..... „ ormogoneae THURET................. 234 oustonia. „ — longifolia ‘GAERTN.. ¥ $65 _——purp 1018 edsonix 9 Norr.. 222 200 CORDA e e -— griseus B. & C. Shien 2293238 ien Sac. 3 Hydrocharitaceae 521 bia pee hme ech (Lixx. 8 7 RI. Hydrogastraceae (ENDL) Nandi we Hydrogera Wi@Gers. ...! 100 e na WIGGERS.. . —-obliqua OK. 101 —obliqua (SCOPOLT) O. Kuxrzk. . 101 eee eee 2 . 101. 670 —oedipus OK abba eee —rorida (BOLTON) n 101 ee 101 ’ TODE 92 oy — ee pata — . Hxdrophyllacea \ -...561, 879 la n p ee 561 INDEX. 1063 oer cesses se 1009, 1014, 1015 Byicoomiam rugosum Dane, . 204, 1 1 66 1010, 1016, 1018 —splendens Sg.... 1 „ ene carte —triquetrum . 2904, 582, — D . — P „ 133, Hibiscus L............ 103, 850, 853 Hymenobactron........ 25 —abelmoschus L.. N n se ena ——arnottianus A. Gray. 851, 82 Hymenophyllum SMITH...... —— 10. HILLEBRAND.....:........ —lancedlatum H. and .. —— „ ——obtusum H. and Aa.... _-—waimese HELUER.. . ——recurvum GAUD......... Fee —~youngianus GAub... 82. H SAC 3 Hiertzelum canadense Micux 574, 965, 1016 b eee ERAN 3 Nee Hypericaceae......... . 3 S sscabrum c. 6, 965, 974 Hypericum. 8 e % nesadsesed MOOL —ascyron L. ——vulgaris eases — Hook. 553, 6038. 970, ‘olosteum - 975, 989, malobus ——majus (A. Gway) Birr. a en —-virginicum L.. „ Hyphomyceteae eee — campestria NUTT Yphomycetes..... 87, G44, 645, 646, 730, —canescens NuTt.. * „ — decumbens A, 91 8 ypnum. e ca adeeaael —aduneum HEpw. i — n Bui... 8 ifolium How. snd —crista-castrensis E. a“ ——cupressiforme L ............. 2 D —— oy nnn * — fertile * 5 —filicinum L. -—fluitans L. anteum danianum A -—hamifolium Sch. ictus ——hispidulum BrRip.......... —h tt... ARM ERE Ge Ip ssbeuaadesuaess Hypoccaeris L —rad Hypocrea rufa.... Hypocreaceae .. H REICaB Hy 1 Hypolepis Ber idee 12 ) n 4 as Hypo „ 2 — hirsuta a Cov. i eh Ceara Hypoxylon.. n Hystrix Moenca...... „ —hystrix (Lana, ) MacM.......... 115 —hystrix (L.) ä 105, 526 ——patula MOENCH.. 53 1 Ner anomala H. & All.... 847 . „n 847 Iliosporium Marr.. n 00 2.988, 989 —aurea Mun... . . 552, 965, 975 — biflora arr.. 552 Indigofera L.. —anil ——tinctoria % x... a0 05 cs — —ä6jEàHͤ—— te ee eee —palmata Fog K 2 (L.) SW. * Biume —-tuberculata var. trichosperma.. 1 FFF 1064 Isachne RB. e lens Hir unn Isant us brachiatus ( LINN.) B. 8. P. Isaria Pers.. ae e ——monilioides A. 6. n —stemonitis PERS.. pe abanakes Isarlene BROGN,.... e 080 ee Isariopsis Fres.. snare Tschaemum secundatum: War. 8 Isodendrion A. GRAN. 3 00 —longifollum., sadguupe —subsessilifoltum HIELLER........- TSOP TP UMes occ sive nshs seusuiga wet 1, 42, —-biternatum (Ra¥.) Torr. & GAT cone ll oe oe 40, —trifolilatam Iva xanthilfolla (Furszx. ) ‘Norr.. Lrophorus glaucus NAW . —verticillatus Na. J Jacobaschella O. KUNTZE.........++ : brevis (Pk.) P. and C0 Jacquemontia Cos —sandwicensis A. . Jatropha moluccana L JUNCACOAC...... cepeesccenersecees June ae o Jun 1 O. K. var confusum eee Cee eee ee ee meee —— — —areuatum ‘Wists 6: K. —campestre O. K. var. comosum O. K. ——campestre (L.) K —campestre (LIN. O. multiflorum (Ears. —campestre (LI xX) O. garis (J. GAUDIN.) BHELD.. —caricinum (E. Meyer) O. oc. ä — er weer —comosum gestum R ) SHELD —comosum (Wi MEYER.) var. sub- sessilis (WATS.) SHELD.. ..... —divaricatum ( WATS.) SHELD..... -—giganteum (Drsv.) SHELD....... — 7 — er (Hor) SHELD...... rborea (R. BR.) var. major OOK.) SHELD.. e R. BR.) ‘var. ‘minor — 8 (R BR. SHELD.. 9 (EHRH.) SHELD...... —parvifiorum (Ene) var. mel- anocarpum (MiIcHx.) SHELD.. —parviflorum (EHRH.) var. sub- congestum Coase) PRLS. —pilosum (LIN RN.) O ** ——racemosum (DESV. 0. K sees — R R r * —ͤ— ——— (——U)PAHKZLm * —areuatus en. Lee —articulatus L.. ...<. 964, 970, —balticus........ — balticus Darn ant var. littoralis —con : oo OM USNS Bi hoses ea'sneiesedenesenss 3, erectus PERS ........ 2.22 ee eee eens —fillformis sce esecessesncsss labratus HOPPE.. —-greenii OAKES and TUCKERM.... —-—intermedivis Hoss z ——intermedius THUILL. —luzuia KRACK .. oo —ͤ— — 22885 ee 322 8882 2 2882 8 cei 2 ares a ag 82225 888 8 8 882 On eee ee ² Ä ee „„ 8 25 Eur — 2 —peloca —1 K. . MEYER. rene wee pings Lass. var cm Vana -—tenuls WILLD.. Vest... wes ce bi, + seer * Jungermannia barbata 2 9 —bieuspid ata. eee „ ——OxCl6n DICKS. ....000 „ „ 6. —incisa SCHKAD.. „eee —multifida 22 FD 401. —aschraderi MARrrT...... Dicks 2 —-ventricosa Dicks „„ Juniperus 0%, —communis 1. 16. 9 9935154 064, 5.807. 960, 1 ä 2 ** sabina I. —virginiana * Haile —suffruticosa L...... —vulosa LAM 555644 ä — ** een en 3„„ a semen 3 ä — nee Kadua C. and 8. eee —acuminata G, and 8. 1 — cordata C. and 2 —elatior (MANN) HELLER.. 1 ae H. and oo shaphawen nudseni!l HILLEBR......-. „rl N zl. e E — Wawna.. eben “6 144 —-glauca Arr.. i * Kania n e 8. F. f G — ta montina Nur. Kneiffia — — (Lixx.) 1 ‚j— — ee ̃ —— —— — GAT. ä — * ——ũä—̈— 2 — r ů— ddU m *᷑́ ARd eee —linearis (MicHx.) SPACH. 50 —-linifolia (NuTT.) Sprach. „ — purpurea (L.) Pounp and CLEM. Knyarieae POUND . * z 8 731, 732, Koeleria cristata (I. et Koellia virginiana . Mach. ite weal Kuhnia L. pe —eupatorioides es L. eS Kuhnistera candida WI": Lp KUNTZE ee — : vies Kvllinga ROrT ggg... oe „ . awe yoo 3 A8 455 8 beat Kyllingia umbellata E. . bee, U 1. ae Labiatae ..........562, 763, 764, 882, 3 Labordea GA eee a —— pallida WARM... .ccrcs-sseenee ae a —tnifolia AGRA ler K Lac niaria pun a J — scariosa (L.) —_ 5 — ( . HIL. forma 0 3 —scariosa (LIN N.) HILL. var co- rymbulosa n. v. — F A = ccisn~ teen -965, —scariola . 574. —spieata LI. Lamproderma Rost — arcyrioides (SOMME.) ROST FMR EOS tet tee Ne) ho she Psa Ge ee * 125 N wax INDEX. 1065 ‘ ‘Tantana 1, 7 PBR n 141 Leotiatruncorum A. and s 409 C 8 880 eos .... 60 ’ PO RTAR UE Liss irn pct scedveasesckee 766, 880 Lepachys columnaris (PuRsH) TORR. * ‘Laportea canadensis (Linw.)Gaupica 33 and Gn. 571 ‘ Lappuls 4 . )GARCKE, var. —pinnata (VENTI TorR. aud Gr 571 8 Mack. es pechinia spicata WILLD..........-.. 882 —rappula ti) ee r ** 827 —texana ( 2 e — 501 — apetalum WILLD.......... 586, 965, 970 Free en: state — mum L. ae FP 008, 1021 —intermedium "A. GRAY.......-.-.. 543 1 ee um A. GEAR rast: «+> 586 latifrons BRACK... 780 =—owasiblense d 8. 1 a yrus maritimus BIGEL -s-- 965 ——serra Maxx. 0 . 87 J ——maritimus (L.) Bidet... ..550, 970, 989 -—--virginicum Aber. 586 o hroleucus Ho... 550 Leptan * 11 ) Nore. ...-.- 566 , —-palustris L...... 4 50 Leptobryum pyriforme Sen.. . . . 287, 502 ‘ ——venosus Mun... 550 TLeptodon trichomitrion Mohr. . .. 290 * uraceae ..... esse 826 „ 704, 705 CC „ 479 ——lacerum (Sw.) P Kg.... 719 —carmichaeiianum( Hen kb. 4 Leptoglossum Sacc......... .. 484, 496 5 —floriforme (Bull.) Link ........ 479 luteum (PK.) Sac. A4. 495, 400 2 —geas 1 (PHIL. ) Sanizb 72 479 —microsporum (CRE & PR.) Sacc, pa 1 —-lucidum (6. and Br.) SHELD.... —tremeilosum (Gxe.) SAC. An 497 —lyallii 9 ELD.. Leptogramme... aa 782 —oerstedtii ( Leptorehis Du Perir Tuouars.. ..... 807 —radiatum LIS. ) SHELD... x ——hawailiensis (Maxx ) Kunrze..... 807 INK „ —loeselit (L.) n N „ . —trevelyana GRrev.. —«aspergillus Scop. .. - 8 n, r ol. “BERL. and ET . — r —caninus P rns. 3 —capitato-ramosus SCHWEINITZ.... A nl ——ciliatus Bon.. hag (Furs) Bert. and De ‚H—H—UMũbdi „66666 —-clavatus Lk. —~eucurbitarum B. u —curtus Br: — Curms.. — dimiaei -CHULZER.. mye APY —echinophila SCHWEINITZ......... r — florae ( Coe ) 8 ‘and De TONI. —fragiformis SCHFF — fu = (CDA.) "ious and DE ꝰ?ꝗ——ü— ꝶ „ eee eee . bei RE Ty Oe Re Ea — griseus B — e eee schn. —inzqualis PRCK. ats nne cca pk abae ek ook e — microcephalus WALLR.. —-mintatus Jaca —mucedo LINN......... tine 28 98. 99, —mucilago — 3 ——-murinus PERS,. „ — obliquus Scoop. * —paruadoxus B. and G. 3 — pomiformis LEERS. . —pygmaeus LK... —pyrijormis LRERS. —-pyrtformis SCOP..... ——racemosus inex IUS; TONI. sa ae 8 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES 23232 „ — 8888288 5888583 888572888888 2 25833885 . te eS 2 5 Me he | Pe et eee Mucor rhombosporua Enn ——roridus BOE occcccevecaceceoeean ten . j * 2*«õö 4% ——— 3525355560 9 eee eee we ee itis BOOP . — eee = LA... 5959572 0 (Coxpa.) Bert. and De — — Bund lun f — tenerrimus ——— —truncorum Lx. Mucoracene — ... kak coe Mucorine Muhlenberg ‘diffusa Scnnes, ....... -~—mexicana (L.) Trin .... 522, 064, — racemosa (Mionx.) B 8. P....... ARES Gs 98 Myceto zoon n Mycogone Lx. 92255533333 Ah 3 —— 2 a he il — ͤj• eee eee eee +O 59733 — weee hyltum a ambtguam “Norr —humile 15 ) r) Morons. 2 * 4 ——svicatum L. „„ Myrothecium ä b Myroxylon Fonsr. re ——hawallense — KUNTZE.....— Myrsinaceae........... Myrsine L. : ——gaudichaodil A. DO. —kauaiensis HtLLeEBR......... 3 ~— lanceolata * HELLER. ji . . cpnccdoaeee J Myrtaceae 8 „ —̃̃ D— r ee — erectum E. & E 22 ˙ abeenian — m a 00. „ „ —-orbiculare C. & E........ „ —turbinatum CK k. & HARKN.. .... | Myurella careyana SULLIV.........--— 8 4 . 1 — ᷣ WW bas tees tee Naſas marina LN NW.... Nama L — nd Nani(a) Ans. a" —-glabrifolia HELLER. .......... 863, —lutea (A. Gray) HELTER...-. 863, —macropus(H. & A.) Kuntze.863, polymorpha (GAUD.) HELLER. 75 ELLER.. .. 1 —pumila HELLER... —-rugosa (A. GRAY) Kuntze —tremuloides HELLER. Napicladium THUEM.. Nardia crenulata LIx DR. ah ' Nasturtium amphibium (Linn. R. BR. 15 —obtusum Nurr. 226 Eh) wee eee wre eee Ze ween ee ** Naumbur ghia „ „ (L) Drsy..... 559, 965. Navicula cuspidata K nt oe 8 a. 1 N ——— , REEN 6 Feine rr * Oldium LK albipes —-melastomaefolia ver. kauaiensis aR m —ovata GAUD..... — sericea GAD var. és Nertera BANKS & SOL... —depressa BANKS & SOL.. 901 Wie 1. . 746, 747, 751. — gia ca R. GRAU Nitzse ge vitrea NORM, Var. recta (HANTZSCH. ) . . Nostoc. cease. 986, 941, —caeruleum LYNGB - teeter teen — — —latifoliam A. Gua... Nototrichium HiLLesre...... ........ — sandwicense(A, Guay) HILLEBR. —viride HILLEE .. — ²˙ Sis elon aude e Min 3 . . 630. 1 mphaea... .... E —advena SoLA Nx obo 5 n ˙²˙* e! Sashes hee 0 ung mutabile W. Su. Oedemium LK... = God ocephalum PREUSS.. 70 Oedogoniaceae (DE By.) Witrr.. 25, Oedogonium braunii Ka —tfranklinianum WIr a. grande K. „„ „ eos... —obtruneatum WITTR. var. obia- ——— — 0 tum — — princeps (LARS ‘Wirrnr.......... Oenothera. „ 676, frust e ee sid —gauroides.. 5 —humifusa Ade —longiflora 3 3 eee 1 N vue wnte ean ese cies —parviflora . ROR BAS 2 Ea ko Pre rpom metal Narr. 555, 682, 685. —ripari * —-sellow eee LIN N. ‚·— —— 080, 681, 685, 686, G— 5 7 — —compactum G. and E. — m BERK...... aA, — F mon 5 — mo 5 2 2 4 288883888303332222 3220 sesh 828 —pulvinatum BY, and d. RI HRS ee ee TTT ‘an Olea L ö and wicensis A. Gudr. S Oleaceae, . — a2 Oipitrichum Avartson Pc 710 n 983. 991. 1013 1015 en (PursH) BRrrr 1 2 555 INDEX. 1069 Onagra biennis K Scop. =. 674, 676, 680,682, 684, 685, 686, 687, 965, 970, 1016 Quagraceac.f64, 074, 675, 626, 677, 678, 679, 69 Onagreae.. 2 I Onoclea. ERI, EEN A | — L.. 518 —struthiopteris (Lj Morra. 519 Onosmodium carolinianum (LAu.) A Ovspora........ 3 650 n das 650 ——euboidea Saco. and EL. 3 PK 650 49 fasciculata Sacc. aud Vodi —fulva mace. and Vous e —hyaltnula Bacc . „ —tulipiterae E. and . pha c —— (Pers.) En F Ophiocytium ? capltatum ‘Woute.. 27 8531 . 8 . pity —pendulum L. ese Oplismenus a.. 77 —compositus var. sylvaticus 2 7 —oahuensis NEEs and MEYEN.. 707 Opulaster opulifolias (L.) KUNTZE... 546 0 760 534 re . 429, 534, Orchis otundifolia’ Pune eus..... ib ae ö 61. 122 — l oltus NuTT AGS A Orthostachys Exnra. 1 111 Orthotiricchu mm 280, 741, 758 affine SCHRAD.. e ——anomalum P 256 ——braunii Scw........ e 286 —kinglanwumenennnmnn 741 —laevigatum Zerr.. RE —lescurii AUSTIN.. e —obtusifolium SCHRAD...........-- 581 — Sr me 502 —speclosum NEES.. ——. 2 ngulatum ( BEAUY. ) Hotz. nut 286 Oryzopis asperifolia MICHX.. „ ——juncea (Mienx.) B. L B. 522 Oscillatoria.... ...... , 605, 606, 612, 987 — unguina 6 235 —antiiaria — „ — brevis Kd. r —limosa AG... W —numidica Gomonr.. e —princeps VAUCcH.. „ —tenuis Ad. 235 ae AG. var. natans (Ka) 60 1 claytoni ay Ree 0 B. S. P. Osmunda 3 „ . cc . ae sevanennieee ae Osteomeles LI. 829 2 ‘(Smura) LIDL... 829 Ovularia Sacc.. 654 —monosporia (Wrst) P. ‘avd G. 653 —obliqua OwvD... . re 653 eee cnac ss snhacaaneenbee 551, r aieeenea 836 — -acetosella III. 3551 —corniculata III.... 837 —ecorymbosa DOC. —martiana Zucc.... —stricta LL... Oxycoccus.. EP? ——oxycoceus (Lan. ) iii 4 Oxytropis caespitosa PERS......... 21, 118 —caespitosa WILLD..............22, 119 glabra 152 —-grandiflora DO. 24, 144 — nigrescens DC...... N ——polaris SEEMAN.. NN ./. 173 —sylvatica Doo... 23. 160 —triphylla DC,.................. 21, 117 1070 Paederia L. P. 9 —uvaeformis Kk G. n aum (DECNB.) Nano. em. De Panax? 3 ‘and A;.... 15 —ovatum Hooker and AnHORE. . a” Y Serer —trifolium 2 elan eR A ee Panicularin............+ 6. 004, 908, 1001 ——americana (Torr.) Mac * —aquatica (L.) Kuntze n 12 — fluſtaus (Linx. O OR.. ae 9 ——nervata ( — KUNTZE. ..... Panicum L ... 3 — enpillare e e — o ſonum E . —erus-galli L ore pall var. 1a nba. ) . 83 ——depauperatum ‘Mom, — ——dichotomum L.. 51. 664. 970. —dichotomum L. var. | elatum %% . eit) Vas L. var, villosum = —.— m I. 0 n Gaup .... ——nitidum L —pruriens TRIn... — sanguinale I. —sco imrium * —verticillatum L.. —virgatum L. ey —xanthophysum Nn Pannarla BS —languinosa (Aeon e N ELOS —microphylla N ,, j 225555555 ne YL.. Parietaria pennsylvanica Münk. Fate iA. öde — tiliaceum (I. N — ia A — r 694, —orreri TURN... 83. 695, 717 —borreri TURN. var. “ hypomela PUCK, *.* 717 —borreri TURN.var.rudecta TUCK. 695 —caperata ( LINN.) ACH..... 3 717 —-conspersa (ERARR.) 1 „ 605, 717 —crinita ACH ae Faun (Lise, 7 Ach. —-—tiliacea ( —tiliacea (HOFEM. } FLOERK....... 717 Parmolie!l NYi «cus. chactacoaty. dacdeuss 82 arnassia caroliniana MICHX......... 545 — palustris l))))J . 545 Parsonsia P. Br — 862 —- pinto (Vaxb.) HELLER........... 862 Parthenocissus. oes: ee — quinquefolia L.) Fraser, 553. a Pas ee OPE et Paspalum ay 797 —con jugatum “BERG 797 —-orbiculare ue 797 Passalora FRIES.. 655 Passiflora L. r ke ee ß Aaa | 3 r meet os 858 Patellina. . ap Maa em ke aay ae teh ae ooo eh ee 130 alen Ge cake 628 —boryanum (TURPIN) MENEGH... 27 Podicalaris canadensis L.............. 564 — lanceolata MICHX................ MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. a Perrottetia H. Pelea A. Cnet, Serene ᷓꝛ ae vee 108, B17, ——anisat MANN. ee ee a — A. Gar — A Al ——cruclata ——kaualensis tee eereeeenee — 1 vanes ——oblong i fi 1 A, GRAY.... eee ret A. Gua ves — stolen 8s, „„ 06666300 —25õ7—u T... vr 7. ere ee onee „% „ „6„%%.iꝙZ —san —na ——walaleaiae Was eee eee eene llaca atro urea ( 12 . „be e . 5 45, 706, 709, ' —apht inn.) Horem 8 1 orem, . Of, ton, Oot, —eunina (Li Horr. var Oe eene ee wenn — ( {Ly ‘lores. Var. en —polydactyia Nen) ) Hora —bulverulenta TAL.) NYL...... — rufescens (NECK ) HOFFM,....... | —j— —— Peicig ee N- A Fele 2 . vonlan, Interruptum — um : nthoru .. m sedoides — eile MOTE. oss en 2 e Wit Har . „ n Peperomia Ru . and Pay... —— hy poleuca var. Bonen yen — mon ka eee ee —tatifolia Mie PR eR —}atifolis M9 andA..... i —macraeana C. tere * —macraeana nervosa HI —macraeana C. DC. var. —membranaceae H —membran oer a Tat... nsis... N —5 ‘L.) SALiss é Periconia Tope. ‘ ) ericonmieae.. e 6 ½, Perisporiaceae ORR Oe ˙*ß eee ee pertusarla . 2 . Petasites palmat Fox Sik a KS, „ sand wicensis A. Guar communis f. —pustulata (Ack. NIL —velata (TURN.) NYL.. tasites palmata ( nf GA ? coriacea H an 1 — hirtella „ termi Ur wore —densifolia T — denstfolia TORR.............--- Phlox Fdivaricate L.. 3 1 8 ambiguum Gomont ..... Phragmites .. 1e 11 994, 995, 1002. 1003, * Phragmosporeae. ie - Phaca douglastt T. and C.... .. ..... var. americana Hook. —tfrigida L. var.samericanus Hook —7 la L. vat a Hook... — 9 ee ee teen fesse, Onna radi ear Nea Ee —! Hook. and A oR | i AT > a ee —1 e NUTR. e n 10 2 SSERREEERERERES cen rear! var. - utahensts neglecta si G. —— — eee eee eee eee eee re — villosa hacelia franklinit (R. Bey A Gray. 561 alaris arundinacea * „ 522 Sante MI 492 —BBw... kde 40 ices 3 . 49: —elatus J 493 —monachella „e —-semierectus Baers aeons’ —truxillensis ......... gate f i iW dr. ris ber hillebrandi 1 — —honolulensis toon. HELLER.. TON 783 e ti (L. e * 518 — polycarpa ILLEBR.... —polyearpa v HIL —2* *** Rene ee eee eee LEBR —Punctata ira) Hu —favosum (Bory) Gomont.. . — incrustatum (NAEG.) GOMONT.. —retzii (AS) GomonT. 5 (L.) KARST. . . . 5, 524, — — ů— — eee bhragmites 5 8 FS cy 25 Sees 3 8 382882 ngllachora re 5 — tri . —[—“ ̃ ᷓ. 2 eee . EX. FS * R 9 rae 8 8 + te 10 are rs Bi RN Payiianthus L.. 3 847 ——sandwicensia MUELL.. Phyllostegia BENTH... . ..... ~- 164, 882, 883 ——glabra HILLEBRAND. „ —-grandifiora (GauD.) Basen. ae 882 ——Wwuimeae WAWRA.............882, 883 Phymatotrichum BON...... 8 671 — alta... r Re eee BAS ndifiora Hook. ——lanceolata Mien. — peruviana I. . r 5 ö : „„ — albipes F cee em ham 2 — SCHUM....... S ——album 81 Py PS NRE AS — Pers casa 8 ——bulbiformis ScauM dad N capitatum “NK „ —— cinerascens SCHUM.,. 752 —cinereum (Barscu.) PERS... Clavus Lu.... — sinuosum — Physcia. Dein Her d Ni. 883, 718 —cwsia (HOrrM.) NYL.. * 608, 718 —granulifera (Acc.) TUCK........ 718 —hispida (ScHREB.) Tuck 696 ien TuCKERM.83, 718 ura (EnRH.)] NVL... .83, 696, 718 —pulverulenta AE 5 NL. G08, 718 —speciosa (WULF.).. ä Deen e Bi.. ; oe 717 — ste AN Fer eee 83, 605 —stellaris (L.) Tuck. 709, 718 Sy ae (L.) TUCK. Var. r aplola —tribacia Ach.) TUCK... Physcomitrella patens Sen Physcomitrium pone. He.. —immersum SLL. . —-pyriforme Bin. ee ) BRI D Drone ss sanekivecescs. veces cea . . . 6, 981, —nmariana (Mill.) B. . 6, 519, 964, 974, =, 997 Pilaira Van ‘TIEGHEM 00 —anomala (CESATI) SCHROETER . 190 —-cestii VAN 12 1 100 287 563 e ee sachs ttn se sose $22 1021 bo 4 2 3 1072 eee piliala Kr 605, 606, * sis, au 2 4 623, 625, 626, ... 027, 628, 640, 2 * Pllobolene. Pilobolus Tops — Piptocephaliduc Piptocephalis Del Bary...... 60, 92, Pipturus Wepp.. —albidus (H. and A.) A. Gray.8té, —meyeniana WEDDELL —ͤ—— — teen —gaudichaudianus W Bop. —kauaiensis HELLER... —ruber HELLE... ——taitensis WEDD...... 5 Pirella n ais Piricularia Sacc.. rhe ey nia I e —sandwicensis HILLEBR........... —umbellifera (Forst.) SEEM...... Pithophora kewensis 8 „ Pittosporaceae .. . Pittosporum F San —acuminatam Aer: . DI ——kauaiense on es eine ce 9 Placodium,. 8 waned sices —aurantiacum * (Ligur:) * and Hepp. —cerinum (ibn. Naga. and HEPP.. .. 697, —cerinum “(HEDw.) Nad. and - Hepp. var. pyracea NYuL....... —cerinum (HEDW.) NAEG. ae Hepp. var. sideritis Tuck. —cinnaburinum (ACH.) ANZ....... —-citrinum 1 ) e e 4 elegans (LINK.) DC. eee A —microphyllinum TUCK... rote (EnRR.) Naga. and iiber (Eunk.) Naga. and P. var. aurellum ACH..697, Plagiothecium denticulatum Sc —-sylvaticum ae and SCHIMP. Plantaginaceae.. my Plantago L 88 —lanceolata L. major LIix N. 77. 565, 892, 965, 997, bprinceps C. and 8. brinceps var. acaulis Wav. —queleana GAUD... em iii s cheer ace Platyde-ma MANN? .S 255.7 pate ts —auriculaefolia HILLEBR. . xP —campanulata MANN..... .. —rostrata HILLEBR........... Plectonema wollei FARLOW ........... Plectranthus L'HRR 3 8 sentria R. Br. putes oe rviflorus WILLD. . Pisctronia 1 —odorata (Forst. ) HIILRERR. Pleiosmilax sandwichensis SEEM 2882288885858 „ 083, 1014 1013, 1017, 1018, 1010 981, 1 1012 Be host * L * — . * Err . i ? * 4 = a co = bee Plocepors.. vane obi e 3 —herbarum...... Renee Pleurole TUTTI TTT serene tereee jus Pleurococeus brach Mus corceenaall ——chlopodis...... 2 de er renner n Ape e ce ulgar is is HONOKDEN.. oon oe reeenti BOSORDES.. ee eene ee enee — ylum Bow * 24 * . UBK. — . Su wae sere spencer „ W. ou. Kkuetzingl! — N oaks Plonrotecaiam w wabeoule (Kunzen.) —alsodes A - —flava L........ 5 —nemoralis L. — b ‘var. ürmula Hs T. Poole L. ee eee rohen rpus eee 11 re E &E eee . Podosporium Senn e — crucigerae od O —humi 2 55 iw) Pend ——— —— — Aa 2S Romi. 280. 740. Pogon a. „* „„ lossoides (Lins) Ker... Pol eee RA. 2 olemoniaceae.. aaa Polemonium reptans L. 5 Polyactidene | (Conpa) ‘Pouxp a Polyactidei CORDA. at Polyactis LK „ — hystrix Nees ROO ee Pot sandwicense A. BG. Polygala cruciata LIxð 73. een rrr . ä —— eeee 8 9888822888223 8888.5 1 ; „ d 8 * 4 ter 5 9 1 3 = d rig Ne j ~ — ——irridescens L. ...... ...2-ss00000- — WALT. ort — vert nh. n —— 3 538. — amen 3 florum var ‘commutatam (K. and S.) MORONG.........-- * . (K. and 8.) Drerr. —glabrum WILLD........-.--. 5 A. GRAY........964, © —hydropi per L 33, —incarnatum _ „ — wee 974 1004 —cilinode L coc wrens . OB, 2 a —cilinode Mienx. .. . . 0, 53 Polypodiaceae Pol — — 784, 1008. 1010. 1511, 1018. 1020 3 B. C. Eaton. exaltatum L NN. ů— —— meee nee woe filix-mas —hawaiiense UNDERW. ů— — wee INDEX. 1073 r 1 ium 4 X . 1 Potentilla pennsylvanica L........... 547 “= Poly podium S „ nda etidedcet cat 71 i ; 2 eon Fn Woon: N N 782 —rigida WALL. 71 ve —hookeri BRA . 3 — LINN..... 16 a lineare THUNB .......+ + 735 na LINN. var. nicolletit Wars. 16 * 8 - 730 9 — dentata SOLAND.. 1 547 ah — pellucidum u 785 Prasium 22 GAU. i ae — um H. and K. . . 1843 Preis-ia hemispherica 68d... . — 461 * — pseudo-garmmitis GAuD . 785 Prenanthes alba L. 14 % — LJ ͤ Sam ——japonica L 7 Oa —samoense BAKER K . . 786 ——racemosa MicHx.. EF ~—sarmentosum BRACK . . 786 rimula farinosa L.. e —serrulatum (SWARTZ) M rr... 736 imulaceae e — trum Kaul r.... e Pag Hi. EA. r —— . — mnioides . 4 783 - sodas ones sh eetums 83) —tamariscinum KAULP........784, 786 —— — 75 Nen „ ee —unidentatum hax . 7*⁴ ——julifiora DO. e 0 „ us cinnamomeus Ra 233 —vulgare . ..¥64, 1016 ——infusionum (SCHRANK) KIRCHN. 233 Polypogon . 3 —-infusionum (ScHrank) KIRenx. ~~ titkoralls AN Or kod oda var. nc 233 Styne seer weneeneee reeves - viridis Ad. ——— 598 Pan . I Prunella vulgaris IL. , 568 oly thrincium — aud . 655° Prunus ee Polytrichum. FP tnecpieel Geen —americana MARSH........... Sonal mee ——commune L ............+5 289, 581, 593 —-pennsylvanica L........... 549 —-formosum HEpw. „ —pumila L..... d 969, 970, 971. — ee 972, 979, 989, 990, 992, 1010 ——juniperinum WILLD......289, 58! ——serotina Ennn.. . 466, 467, 468, 474 — pil jason SCHREB.............280, 741 Pseudoleskea rigescens Lixpe. sigh au 741 —strictum BANKS. .......- aie Psidium L... 4 s trictum MENZ......... us java Moss SOS eria cordata opezia BERK ...... ntederi rdata L.. Psilo ja B 500 ontederiaceae ~ See 487 ble. “i $3, 70 i 0 . & e —mirabilis B. CCC... 500 1 007, 1058. 1618 1014 —nummularis BER. shee eer OR 500 —balsamife 167 . 904, 974, 983 Psilotum SwaRTZ. 792 n e Maden, * 904. 974, 983, 984 —complanatum ‘Swartz... 792 —grandidentata MICHX...... .... 536 —nudum (L.) Guresn, „ 792 —tremuloides Micnx. . 964, -—triquetrum Sw 792 966, 969, 977, 974, Mn 990, Psoralea argophy! lia Ponsa 549 enn 1009. we, 1018 —esculenta RSH 549 Porella pinnate SouWARGR FA PES on Pots. S —platyphylla LINDB...:.. ... .... —parvifora Por 50 fo dae ed on n Ke. —tenuifiora Purss.. ulaca ** * —oleracea L W poruslacasener. b d 1018 mogeton . TUCKERM.. e 520 —fluitans KOTH............ 520 —foliosus RÄ 100. 064, 988 —gramineum . cse> 793 ——heterophyllusSCHREB........964, 988 ——heterophyllus SCHREB. forma myriophyllus (ROBB1INSs.) MoronG 8 * 66 5 MORONG............-.. 223 — major (FR.) Mondes. 8 66 ——natans E 1002 —pectinatus L.. 8 3 * E <: ae anomr 520 — perfoliatus var. ene BENN...... .. —pusillus L. D —robbinsii OAKES... akin . —rutilus WolrT oo... . 66 —-vaseyi ROBBINS.. ....... ........ 223 PE erga a +. 5S 520 Potentilla n N 983, 991 —argentes L... cans we scenes —arguta PURSH..... —fruticosa 8 — gracilis ovat. ‘var. nuttallii (Lynu.) SHELD.. FRE Ey S| — ilis DOUGL. var. “rigida Wars. 71 — millegrana os aa SPER eae 547 _—monspeliensis L... SS EEA —nieolletii (Wars.) 8 SHELD......... 16 1 ; palustris (Lins) . 3 ris —aquilina 1 —decipiens Hobx. ra (BRACK.) Hoo... —-excelsa GAUD.. = pal — irregularis KAULF. ... ——regularis E. BAILey.. pia HI LEER. renn —dipyrena HILLEBR. Nei —gymnocarpa HILLEBR. . ada kauaiensis HILLEBR.............-- Ptilidium ciliare NEES......... —— — Anne 1 Ptychoverpa Coup. i . 485 OS™ eR ee 1 2 on ARTH. ane HoLwW. . 426 —gram 3 shirsutissima (Punsn) 4 Pylaisia 8 Sen. 3 —polyantha B. S888. -—velutina SCH . Pyrenula.. —leucoplaca ‘(WALLR.) KR. ee Ac. „ veccestasdec —punctiformis (Ach) NAEG.. —thelena Ack. ere Tete eee eee eee) ; 725 Pyrola. ects ot, eee me, 1021 —chlorantha . 557 —-elliptica Nurt.. 557 nne... 57 —rotundifolia L.. 557 —-rotundifolia L. var. incarnata —rotundifolia var. pumila Hor- a WG Sas ˙ A A sacase 557 —secunda III 557 Di ere BE , ee ne ee 1074 RA ii Soin. r Pyrus yllid Maes dens Bahnen IJ ae eee vee Q Quercus, 51, * 84. i 474, 476, . 482, 075, O81, O84, O86. —macrocarpa odes ba. BA, 85, , 075, 986, 002, 1016, Quercus velutioa Lau. oi aan —~fascilcoulare Brip..., 285 F 43 —complanata Dum. 580 ——proteasa Losn 48 5 Loxn. var. irrectilo- * RaillardiaGaup........... e ——latifolla A. Guay. 700, O21 —xaillardliliass . «oe 106 rr „ —-calicaris (LI XR.) Fa * er — L.) Pr. var. farinacea ae —ealicaris 1. y Pa. var. fastiginte os enters Ly Fa. Var. fraxinea ne Ramalinel NVL.“ r dg 08 82 Ramularia Uxden. —concomitans EL and Horw. 651 — didyma UNGER............ —euonymi E. a K —ohovata F eee weer — — Rananculus L.. a 1 983, —abortivus L.. —acris L. 7 —vircinatus SIBTH.....-..... Sas deme . Ton HSS A . ie . e BIT... .. 7, 542, —mauiensis A. GRAY............... —micranthus NUTT................. 1 15 542 70 9³⁵ 826 541 —ovalis RAF . 542 ——penns lvanicus L. 542, 965, 974, 975 — purshii RICHARDS............-. 542 —recurvatus POIR.....-..---+--542, 826 —reptans LI... 5.542. 826 -—sceleratus L. ee rae “Sr” —septentrionalis. POR . 542 Raphanus raphanistrum LInNy.. 587 Raphidostegium jamesii L. and J.... 292 Raphoneis;?) archeri e er 5 | Rauwolfia L.......... . sandwicensis A. DPG. 878 Reflexus 164 Reinschielia 7 cuspidata (BatceY) ‘De sar NI 27 — ́ — - — — — —E—ä—äęk ß 2 — —.——— 478 —fusca . — SHH NM. 473 —contorta POoRN — ispherica Bull.... eee SOWERB.......... iis hen ——hortensis BULL. III. 481 ——lutea Bur-. Q . 481 —lycoperdon BULL.......... . 472 FR ay Paes, 8 —rosea Po —rufa a Wisc. édeseee —— —— ũ | — PB eee ee eee “eee ene errr ere eer ee ee B dee es esse u e e 25 is haphidiam | braunii NAA hinotricham Conb a —2«*õ—1/ ene 5535355 „ . Bhizina Fus — (foma 3 — p eee „„ Rhizinaceue. . roe cre 2 6, Rhizobium mutabile. .... Dees 8 hleroglyphleu Rh 5 A fine a Beau. and De Towt... 900 Ent een „„ „„ ab. 34, 35, 40, 501. 1048, yes PL REE cecal * N —radicans Lux. 3. 552, 965, 2 —toxicodend ron. Pree re reer eee 33, 3, ——typhina...... „ese bee Suet ——vernix Li Rhynchostegium Gomenntam Sen Pe oc cccssecese ä ä (J ERE OE Ee RE EH ee ee —— — ů— P 55 * ̃ Oe —ͤ—ͤ— d wen elatior GAUD...... C. Koch. Rollandia GauD. .......--- 81, —lanceolata GAUD...........--..+-- montana „ Roripa nasturtium L. ) ‘Ruspy. — palustris (L.) Bess...... 543, Rosa. 970. 975, —acicularis LIx D.. arkansana PoRrEK aaa... —blanda AIT..... 548. 965, 975, TS. engel 8 e avdeaenee humilis MARSH....... —lucida Enra.. . —woodsii LINDL.. “965, 974, 975. aceae 8 — ramosior (LIsn. ) Kone. Rubus. . americanus PERS. Brirr. . —canadensis LI. —-parviflorus NUTT................ Ze „ * . . . J . 38 — — . ae Be r 8 pee 2 24 *. 7 N . n * os hw 8 rane n 9 * N INDEX. 1075 Schaerocy beue 729 e 989 Schedonnardus paniculatus (Nore. } e W ada 583 rta L. : 571 Schenkia ee. . ee 571 Scheuchzeria palustris L. ....4, 520 156 Schiedia C. and 8s. een O04 819 — lychnoides lin nn. 1 819 ——spergulina A. GRAY, . 825 53 = Roellerivides mane . 8 837 Schizsea DUSTW... .scvccas Lctebecbe „ 802 ——robusta BAKER | 5 8⁰³ izaeaceae.. „„ 10 * 803 izocephalum PREUSS..... 666. 667, 726 4 #3 izocepbalum atro-brunneum CKE. 666 as A Wein a =—pivaricatam (ELL. and Lane...) SZadleria . „ FT rane 666 a . CC —griseum (But. & Idi. F. & C. 666 a. s tichoides(BRACK.)HELLER. 788 Schizomycetes.. . ene aa . oi tiana (GAUD.) HILLEBR.. 788 Sechtzophyllum „ . 915 1 —equarrosn.. re 782 ~——micranthum Nott 915 — 78 Schollera macrorarpe (Air.) Buirr. 558 ugittarla 905, ——oxyceocens (I. J Ror a... 558 2 ee arifolia Nutt. 964 Seirpus L. G89, 994, 995, 58. 1002, y —ecristata e ee es cdsen 1004. 1010 Aa 8 e 1.22, 905 — — | . Pay * — on Bons. 964, 988 ——caespitos 527 a ae 964, 988 —oy pinue tL.) Küvru 627, 22 988 Br é 964, 988 —debilis PU nan 803 1 ee c ——fluviatilis (Tonn Gray........ 8. 527 = 4 . 536 ——lacustris L..51, 527, 808, 964, 988, & 4 5 . 000, . 072, 078. O84, O85, 086, 987, . 1002, 1003 | ee 993, 994, 995, . 1001, 1002 1003, —lacusiris Lixx Var. tenuiculmis 1 . SHELD.. i me SN * . . O71, 986 —wmaritimus LINN.....- “24. 803 ae —-candida.. 8 8 —-maritimus L. var. ~ igynus S cordata MUBL... 3 £85 ILLEBRAND . 7.8% eee a — ata X candida. e ——nanus SPRENG..... 68 yw iscolor Muhl....964, ud WILLD... . S01 3 uviatilis Nutt... . Kant 1003 . 0s cnacdanbowdcatan 801 ag “—Juciaa Munk. 536. 964, 970, 984, 997 —pauciflora Licatr 584 3 ——myrtilloides L. ad, v64, 966, 995, 997 iol vasious LIx N. 68 * F 971, 986 * LIS. forma -copha- 5 —nigra Mansi, var.falcata TORR. 69 r „ ee petjolaris J. E. Suirn. 984 ——torreyi OLNBY.. .--68, 527 | —=petiolaris var. gracilis Anders DOIG co sersave « „ a — — „ ‘ose cu coccacqs ee Ta? ce. galsola kali L. var. ‘tragus L Mog: — SS err 652, 668 | Salvi eee „ 883 richam Kunze and Sen. 655 1 Wa, Lax. var. grandifiora * W.. arundinacea (LIII.) as es r Ss Oe i AOR. .. knee coast deues 1 —azurea Lax. var. pitcheri(Tonn.) Scoriomyces ELL. and Sacc.. . 734 i SHELD. sapewieenehenesicess 26 Beropnelaria merilandica ree : 563 1 —elongata KU xu. -. 76 Serophulariaceae.... 563, 886 » 5 —— elongata TORR.....isscensesraseces 76 Scutellari 8 + 989, 902. 997, = . — S earcakaaiasaess 0B —galericulata i it =~ occidentalis SW... . 883 lerieulata MicHx... ..965, 974, 975 f —p n.. e ratios ae —laterifiora LI. 562, 965, 974 Sambucus „ Saaehne be nGiia =: OOO —parvula Mic 563 ft 3 .. n an . r aaeeawene in E pudens Micax.. ytonema 3 ; wa ganghinaria cunndeisis’bee A —intertextum (KG.) Ran. . Sanguisorba officinalis LINN.......... 588 jum SCHUR.. . Sauicula gregaria BICXN ELI. . . 588 - Selaginella BEeavv.. 793 _ _— -marylandicaL...... 380 —arbuscula (KAULE. ) SPRING .. 793 ee IucSaee ia r 818 —flabellata (L.) SPAING............ 793 Santalum L. See oe Se —rupestris (L.) SPRING............. 517 2 . —ellipticum Cigna 818 Selaginellaceae. ... 517. 675 _ _——freycinctianum var. N 818 Leligerla 2 Buuen & ScHimp.284, 591 Sapindaceae non 828 a Saponaria vaccaria L.. 5389 Seneclo aureus L .... 3 Bay WAFFACENIA.......5.. ee ee San 6 <6 —palust is (L.) HooK............-- 5% as 1 Cin. 0 ——tomentosus a W Sarracen 5 54 Sepedonium LX. 3 eee ES Saxifraga * . 545 Septocylindrium BON. 651 4 _——virginiensis Min. 1 —areola (ATKINSON) P. and G.... 651 x ) Saxitragacene 3 545. 828 —bonordenii Sacco 651 ek Aaa ue bie Gaines ss 913 5 (E. and E) P. and G. 651 3 —chamissoniana G 913, 914 —concomitans (ELL. and HoLwW. 2 S glabra H. and A eT | HALSTED. 651 oenigii = Kees 761. 913 ——euonymi (i and K. ) P. aud ©... 651 e —lobelia L.. eo Se a a ——-ranunculi P 3 een 913, 914 —repens (E. aod E.] P. and G.. 651 —procera HILULEBR 914 —rufo-maculans (PR.) P. and ©... 651 _ Scenedesmus quadricauda (TURPIN) —scirpinum PE. 651 S Osc iaeeeie sos Acs aaicans oc 27 -—septatum (Bon.) POUND......... 651 1076 Septocyligdsiam spiraeae (PR.) P. —astoloniferum (E. & E.) P. & C. —subrufum (ELL & Houw) P. & C. Septonema 8 eee cseevtdbecsses s Septosporlum CORBA e Sericophylius.., seeed eee eee sene „ —glauca Beavv........... ese F ee BRAUY... eine . M IIa e —carpinif~olta LL... ——fal —meyenlana WAI. b. . L. —spinosa e Sigesbeckia L . ——orientalis L Si gehen THAXT.. Silene 1. —gallica L. seek 8 ulba MUBL........ U —antirbina LI... armeria LINN.......... se — — laciniauum L.. ——.—— DDO t „ Strost hon pulvlna tus Sisymbrium altissimum Lixy.. R Sisyrinchium bermudiana L. 8 gph sash — ö Oe eee ee 2 AM, ai 8 Sttospelos ADANS bee Sium 3 J. F. GU. Smilax L. —herbacea L. 8 ——sand wicensis Köü dri. Solanaceae.. re 78 “baa; O78, —nigrum L.. Ae —rostratum DUNAL......--- re —sandwicense H. & A Snes —sodomeum L..... — triflorum Norr. Solidago . —canadensis III. —-canadensis ae.’ var. e Art.) T. & G e —flexicaulls II. —-hispida MUAL.. C —incana T. & G.. a . 5558 055. 70, l. 2 — — mollis BARTL. —nemoralis Arr. —nemoralis Arr. var. incana GRAY. nemoralis Arr. var. mollis MACM.. —riddellii FR k.. / aera wd acne c 8 . —uliginosa NuTT........... Rar —ulmifolia MUHL.. eat guebs Sonchus arvensis D 8 D olersceus E...... VC soy cae wl Galedenaed eu kS americana MARSH —sambucifolia (CHAM. & Schr.) ROEM. r 975, 989, Spacelia LEV o Sparganiaceae... c Sparganium —androcladum(ENGELM.)MORONG. —eurycarpum ENGELM.. ...... simplex HuDSON Spartina e nosuroides (L. ) WILLb.. Spathularia PERS 2 —clavata ( SCHAEFF.) SA 5.5 ok crispata FR eee eee eee T sReRRSSSRRSSARERSEE MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES. as £52088850820828-8 7885 S8 4258388885 — 888888888885 . fats (Sen, 22 4 — velutipes © KE. ——— Spathyema 179 INN ) 13 . a de Ace 2 wnee ee ne neee —— Form BUI. ragilis Sow —— —— wwee —pyrlformis BULL... ——terrestris Sphaerocrea 8acc. & Evi N Sphacropies . Ad. 220. Spb — — (Ka.) ORs Sphaeropside ne Sphaerosoma 7 — ‘Souw.. copaguaseas, nen 5 Sphagnu 2.5, 6, 12, 45, 280, — Bann —cymbifolium Eunn 281, —cymbifolium Eur. var. glauces- cens Wang e. —cymbifollom Enn. var. glances- gens forma squarrosuiam WARNST........ 8.55 — * 25555 Toren we —— 2 ——— — ee 33 weer o teeeeers sees ä — IMPR. n (BRA iruw.) ; WA NST 22 a nae B. P. var. amblyphyi- —recurvum P. B var. parvifolium (Senpr.) WARNST............ teres ANGSTR. var. squarrosu- lum (Les.) ScHIMe a Sy. - 00 —warnstorfil Russ. var. viride — SS. —wulflanum mo Spicaria HARZ........... — Spiesia campestris OK. Spiesia e icans (PALL) OK. Spiesia nigrescens N Per piesiodes.. ... Spinellus VAN TIEGHE * 91. —/fusiger ( LK.) Vay Pinan, — aan „ NN ) 22 pirae —salicifolia 15 546. 1008 970, 988, 989, 007, 1003, 1010, 1016, —.— Spiranthes gracilis. —— Spirogyra bellis ( rr On 28. —calospora CL . se —crassa Ka. 4 —-gracilis ( —-grevilleana (HAss.) Ke... —jugalis (DLLW.) Ka. ior —-longata (VaucH.) Ka 5 —majuscula Kc . 28, —mirabilis (Hass.) Ke. „ ae —w des \saee ee Spirotaenia 3 BREB. 422 Spirulina . . — VU ... 36 3 ton Mame. Wee ere Fee — wen P Sporidesmium capsularum THUEM. ALPE. —larvatum C. and KK. Tavs. — —ü—ũↄ—ů 661 eee 662 662 100 5 NU TT. 0 523 1 1 (Torr ) K. Gbr. 52³ Be 5 A. n. ae — porocy R. 2 „„ 5 * * e cee tty ih "Bodin aS ee esm acene R. an 8 1 . 647, 663 1 SR SRI A Bey ue 2 647 iy pasrbrg ol (FR.) P. and O. — — . — 1 7 3% ͤöÜ˙öĩ EE BRA Sporodesmium . 602 bicolor b F 662 E peztza 1 e 4 Sithyopbile (COKE) P. And G... 662 ES . EIL. and ANDER, 662 it’ —toruloides E. and ... 662 * 8 POUND& OLEMENTS -” * is cb) Schüren * 9 , Sporoschisma 8, ‘and Br. |: = Sßbporoschismede 8 AGO... ROS b q Sporotrichum Lk. eee ee , eS, e e 475 F ee ch be 475 — mucilago PERS.......... eee 475 —— physaroides DUO... 478 1 „ Sache botrys Gc 8 907 rys Con. sak dt Stachybotryteae.. 8 647, 667 N E.. E Stachys L. 989 5 arvensis L. 1 884 QA aspera MICHX..... .......965, 975, 1016 ——p 8 L... 563, 965, 974. 975 Stachytarpheta Van... „ ichotoma (R. & P.) VA 881 Staurastrum dejectum BREB. var. convergens WOLLB.. 8 30 —furcatum (ERRENB.) Wa 30 —hirsutum (EAREN B.) BREB....... 30 —odontatum WOULE. n.. 30 —ravenelii WOOD, ....-.. 30 -—tohopecaligense WouLe.. Ea —tricornutum Won... „ 30 ae reel ee Sao 70 Steironema ciliatum (L.) Baupo..... 559 n WALT.) GRAY...74, 559 —-lanceolatum (WALTr.) GRAY var. f — (Mionx.) GRAY....... 74 Stemonitis GLED..... e 9 474 ——aequalis Mass.. A SS | alba GMELIN.. F —areyrioides Shai 473 Saryliacoae Ps ig CR Oe ee . 465 D cancellata a a. “GMELIN. 8 ——cinerea GM “ame he oa Mod News. satis —denudata GSS AA — dictyospora Ros rr 3 SC diqitata Scg www. 4667 & — TRENT, oss .. . „ „ 475 ae D Faseiculata F 474 —favoginea GMELIN. - 3 N ned EuRENB ry ·—— — U“mW««ů 3 — G —ͤ— ũůũ² * 2 * Stemonitis lilacina SCAR................ 466 ——lumbricalis GMELIN... ............ 471 maxima SchwW IS . 474 ——morgani PC.. 474 —nutans GuzL Im. 407 — . 473 Duma Cool.. 75 —pyriformis Gul... . 471 ri 470 1 470 471 468 466 47% 473 466 473 473 473 474 „ 43 471 —vesiculosa GMELIN 1 — GMELIN 472 SCHUM .. . 474 r e 5 . 657 — 2 — Wa wn. «oe. 883 ——macrantha M. and . 883 ——rotundifolia A.GRay ........... 883 is re ee ven montana A, GRAY.. ee enue e Stenotaphrum TRI. 708 —americanum Sennaxx 798 8 Wan 7 Kunrss.. 708 Stercaliaceae........ „ 855 Stereocaulon.. „eee tee ——paschale (L.) Fu. 608, 1005, 1011 Sterigmatobotrys OupEM.. . ity — “a .) Pound and CLEM- Stisnocioniun. 602, 607, 612, 613, 614, 615, 1 om 623, 629, 630, ——amoenum seh i ——fasciculare KG..................-. ——fastigiatum Ka... 23, —-flagelliferum. Kd. 230, 507, 622, 629, ——longipilus KG. .. . .............. —nanum (DLLw.) Ko... 206, —nudiusculum Ka. —protensum (Diuuw.) Kd. var. subspinosum (Ka. ? RABENH..,. ——pygmaeum HAnNsG.. —-radians KG —tenue(AG.) RABENH... — . — 4 B. and C 9 tev FN CNE. e een bb sdaewbatces ras 661, —atra ( Lx.) P. and 2 —-caespitulosa E. and E. JP. & G. —capsularum (Tavem. P. and C. 8 (CKE. and HARKN, ) * — — (G. and E. i P. and O. —liriodendri E. and E. — —ñ—ä— te tees ——maclurae (T woene, ) P. aud G. 2 —obelavata (CKe.) P. and C. —populi (E. and E. A P. and G 1 W 1 and o Stilbaceae FR. i . ..647, 726, 730, Stilbeae Fr. 726, 5 647. Stilbomyces E. and E. =i Stilbum Tope. —didymum 3 56 Stimegas RAFIN.. „ Stipa avenacea LINN. F. eae 1 1 Straussia A. GRaY ............. —kaduana (8. * 80 A. GRAY..903, — var. gamma HILLE- BRA PR = ve net (C. and 's) A. Gray. -— parviflora HEULER 3 —psychotrioides HELLER... 2885 82882888883 888 ssspnestees ssen 3 : 1078 MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES Straussia publfloraHELLER,...---- +++ 905 Streptopus roseus en... eee Streptothrix Conv a ee 6 nor Enis. r Strumella Fun.... N Strychnos . . . 8, 679 Stysanus Gon DA. ese 728 ee erkeley ( MONT.) SACC 4 — monttoides (A. and B.) COBDA,... 720 ——astemonitis (zus.) ech Der AN. Succumbens. . r 159 Susyotum m PETER Browne... e 863 Symphorioarpow n dee 1018 occidentalis Hook — Zauefforus (Ronniss) Burrr.. 8 idium.. 1 Symploca muscorum ‘Gomont.. By euscorum Gomont ven rial. aris (WOLLE.) TILD Syncephalastrum SCHROETER “02, Syncephelie tu 4 . * 17 Synedra diene (RALES.) KG. aces ——puichella (RAuxs minutissima (W. Su.) Guus, —ulna (NITZ8CH. ) * . 257 Syntherisma 3 8 — heller! eh rae —sanguinalis 715 Nasn Synthetospora —— case BT Syzygites Eunkx 91. ——aspergillus ee “Pounn.. m pus Eun n. pad eg e us quupmsbene bee Syzygium GAERTN....- le = Taraxac ~ 744, 745, 746, 747 tararacum (L) Kang. 3 — . . is, 45, 48, hypopbylla.. e Taxus.. 078. 0, minor Micux. y Brare 519, 964, ag ee 1 „ * tenella A. vGRaY... n Ternstroemiaceae...- . . .. „g Tetragonanthat defiexus (S. * SI e Tetramoloplim... oa 8 Tetraphi . W pellucida . Tetraplasandra A. GRA uu... —-waimeae WAW R..... 6 Tetraploa B. and BR.. . . „% Tetraplodon angustatus B. S.. Tetraspora . a wr Ror) — — extensa III p.. Thalictrum dioicum L. n MUBL.. D ——purpurascens L. . . 47 Thanmium alleghaniense r Thamnidieae.. 3 89, Thamnidium . 89, 91, * —amenum 3 5) SCHROET.. 3 8 11 rien and 1% ScH 2 um (Bonn POUND... oxum (B. and G. BERIL. and DE TONE MGR Eee eee Thaspium tritoliatam (L.)BRIT®. var. aureum (NUTT.) BRT... Thecospora HA RR. .... . ꝙ5 77 Thelia asprella SULLIV....-+. 3 Theloschistes . 704, — — Ssss322888 85 5 25 2888 751 * 1021 1016 1019 — poi carpin kann rüde, Thias pf ary ae Adee Th arvense L... SOR. « 2 — — —raclle 8 —tloutalum . De “Rides ei sous N 3 * — lychneus ates ‘Tockerm, * k , 1020 “eeee ee ee eee ee ee eeee caer * “* . — * —ͤ ——— — 2 — — — 2 ee oy ‘De Towt..... 1 1 2 ee Tilllace . teen „„ Tilmadoche N e — alba (pt,) SHELD. cernua 2 ak — * ene en ereeenee eee errr rnere 23252 Tofieldi wena) a * oss Toly pothrlx distorta (MUELL. e. 1 A Gia, KC —insularis Ta —— — oval ä — 9 ＋⁰ 225 + eee ewer rere ree ed Band Rav... ——— ee eee Trachylia tigillaris Fa. escantia virgin „ — —ampulloria OK .. PERE RE OK een wenn —— — serene ennnee ä 2 ** ‚j• eee ·j „„ eee nneee ä ‚ji ed mondi episcopa ee —ervodes OK 00 ——fendleri GKK... ʒ 8 OK. PPePerete tee ee 25 2 & 0 ö 647, . Pr „„ Af a We * * 9 — 1 6 . a aie sale A de . er n * 158 133 138 D. 125 12 T .. 156 e. —ʃ: 8 17 163 131 173 172 131 175 welt : $ ose REG on 8 3 ey Le ge „„ 133 E aa N ee, Selly > & a =. ee OK. eased ——affinis DB... — 2383828482888 2 — mollis OK. 1 7 5 Meee... .. sc acaheseesiss i — montana OK....cencceseeerees st? 118 —bombacina ( BATSCH.) SHELD..... a —mortoni OK.. + . "°°" 466 «= ——Dotrrytia Fans . . .... seers ; — S — parva OK F — bos. barvtſtora OK. 157 ——fallax PER. ver patiereont OF. eae Ha LORD —farinacea Pol. SRSARASARASATISESIO 5 ~- 22288888888888383885 — or i fragt Kats aloe 4 2 . F Dobben Vi . — . guidathankines Sen —graniformis HOFYM....-+-++ ++++++ breusti K. 535é = — aria (RETZ.) SEID... — ＋5＋ꝛ : Feet un 22 ee Rea 64 — MS Oꝶůãͤ „ 174 — ——robbinsti OK 155 or RIES ——aclerocarpa OK.... 125 —-pyriformis HOFFM —ascopulorum KK... 158 — . D erenot OK.... eens eeeeeeeeee + 130 —pyriformis (Scor.) SHELD....---- —pyriformis 8 er eee * Trichoderma Pens.. 3 NN Trichodermeae Fries... 647, 664, Feen ee Trichomanes L. . ——aplifoltum Paes... . —~humile Fonsr. . —meifollum Bory.......... axed ce —radicans War « -—rigidum 1 met aus psportum En. eee ebe Trichothecleae.. . Trichothectum LX. Trichurus CLEMENTS 4 Trientalis americana Pursa.. Trifolium hybridum L........ ——pratense L. Triglochin maritima L.. Trillium cernuum L —-erectum L... —grandifiorum. (Mioux.) SAvisB.: eee eee eee ee eee ee Trimmatostroma nae. - Hn ted 730, 731. —aMePiCANs,.. . .....eceeese 75 Trimmatostromeae . Snabaseddad Triosteum perfoliatum n Triphyllus.. ve Triplasandra OME, a. Chenoa: ——meiandra HILLEBR.. n AWRA.) Hrn. Triposporium CO po... Trisetum subspicatum BEAUV. var. molle (Micux.) A GRAY........ m 5 A ecaninum HUDS...... .....seeceees —caninum LIN N.. q — caninum nnn 9 r Mist wise ens L. var. . dasystachyum OOK wi —sepium Le. Cod con ackss20ede os — violaceum HORNEM.. 89 8 Triumfetta L 9 oem HARKN...... Trullula. 25 4 ses Tube 8 WIGG i Tuberculariaceae (EHRENB. Pouxp and CLEMENTS... . .- 647, 730, Tubercularieae.. «sees... 646, 647, reulariet EHRENB eae ete seer dete Tuberculina iy S 8 —solanicola E. & E < Tubifera J. G. GMELIN... 8 —brunnea ( PREUSS. ) SHEL . 1 —rylindricaGMEL ... Feat — flexuosa ( PERS.)} SHELD .. ...... —-gauranitica (SPEG.) SHELD Bates —lindheimeri (BERK.) SHELD...... — minima (FRIEs.) — 88 —-speciosa (SPEG.) SHELD.. —-spermoides (B. & C.) Sup. yak 3 „ (CkE. & Mass.) HE —stipitata ( Baik. & Ray.) SHELD Tubulina .... „ Tubulina PERS ... ..........- ay brunnen MIS... —cylindrica Rost. . stank ——flexuosa PorR.. 3 —gauranitica ee. . — lindheimert MASS......... ........ 7 792 ae e ¥. * * *. g * a MINNESOTA BOTANICAL STUDIES —— #pectosa SPEG eee eee ee ee ee ee —snpermoides Mass... dea Ox. & Mi reste e Air. 1 — 466 “eee —üU — eee —— eee 531 ————4 00 „„ „ „ 19, 964, „55 a, eee yoha ustifolia L. —iat folie rere 4,6.: Typhaceae....... U ele canadensis (Micux,) NUrr. 1 Ulmus ... ä 55* eee 1 Ulotrichincene (Ka) Bow bi em. ‚—ͤ—kDwu , OEE VNC‚ 2 e Umbelliter ae Umbilicaria...........604, 713, 995, —dillenil Tuck. 2c 3 —muhlen ati (Aon .) Teck 6% —pustulata (L.) HOPFM,........... —vellea (L. .. Oe eee eee Vaderncodts Fi Peck. e Urceolarla —scruposa (L.) NYL..... — a Uredin ¢ sees uscosenseens 5656525544464 Urera Gaup e — (M. * A. W 2 —sandwicensis — ede Urospora penicillitormis (Rorn) ARESCH "Fee COO Tee woe He Urtica gracilis 5 pas 1 . . ure is H. & Becks — —— — es Usnea... pA —angulata Acn pre 3 —barbata (L.) Pr. var. florida Fr. —barbata (L.) Fr. var. hirta re —barbata L.) Fr. var. hirta —barbata (L.) Pr. var. ‘plicata Fr —barbata (L.] FR. var. rub er ͤ—-—! ᷓ5ůI. “ee Teen eee 2 555 pe 1001, vulgaris Liny. . 3. 565, bannen 2 8 SMITH..... ——— POPTOURES. „„ -—possilifolia .. Vv Vacciniaceae.............-. Vaccinium L. n —canadense RI (Iii. —cespitosum . — penduliflorum GauD....... 6 . Lam. Vagnera........ 7 racemosa. (L. Monoxd . : — stellata (L.) —— 533, 964, 974. 95 —trifolia (L.] MORONF Valeriana — Nor Valerianace : Vallisneria ohne r o = oe Sonik wes . —dichotoma (Ltnn.) AG —dillwynii (WEB. and MonR AG —-veminata (Vauca.) DC nee „ — —ä—ä—ä—ę ͤ .̃ —— ——— —v— —— - geminata 8 DC. var. : racemosa WALZ ........... pats .—hamata apres ne. _—-ornithocephala Ad. 2 5 r oye ee 7 r — INDEX. > 1081 , Vaucherlassssllis Vaucs.) DO. 232 Viscum articulatum BuRM.. * 818 _—-terrestris 7 . 232 — art m var. beta HILLEBA.. 817 _ Vaucheriaceae nee 27. 232 —attenuatum 817 Veratrum... 1024. ——pendulum (WAWRA) HELLER... 817 —-album.. 1025, 1025 1027, 1030, 1031, 1032 —— salicornioides A. CUNN.. ee —sabadilla. 1 0%ö%ç „V4 552 viride Alt... 1024, i100, 1030. 1031 Vitex IL. e 881 eee eee 2 ——ovata THUNB... Rept | See, » 881 — CC 881 ——trifolia L. 5 Geo | Oe ——bracteosa Micnx sist. MOL aes. ie ie „ 970, 984 —dichotoma R and | ae eae 881 —cordifolia Miowx. taco... 552 —hastata L................- 561, 965, 1016 See 0: .issss. „ 965, 974 —strieta VENT. ee e e eee n. e — strictu X bustat a.. 562 ——elongata Swan 788 . . . ——zosteruefolia......... 3 78 „„ „„ , O80. Vieckia.... ......... seen ss . 0689, 902, 997 Verbesina alba „ ——anethiodora Nutr. GREENE, — connata Gavp.. . 920 x 565, 1016, 1018 Vernonia SCHREB.. N —toenicula (Purse) RAT. 17 —cinerea (L.) Les ‘ r 8 Rar. 562 — fasciculata Mienx. e Olutella Tope 736 3 . 997, 1006 Voi utellaria Sacco e 736 . Sen 15 —ͤ— 22 HY vol . — (Con Kkiacun * * 730, ™ peregrina 3 . e 564 Volvox globator (Lixx.] Ennax un 27 ; —scutellata L.. AL Senay